The 1988 Ubc

UNIFORM
BUILDING
CODE™
1988 Edition
Fifth Printing
Publication Date: May 1 , 1988
ISSN 0896-9655
COPYRIGHT © 1988
by
International Conference of Building Officials

5360 SOUTH WORKMAN MILL ROAD • WHITTIER, CALIFORNIA 90601
PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.

Preface
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE TM is dedicated to the development of
better building construction and greater safety to the public by uniformity in
building laws. The code is founded on broad-based performance principles that
make possible the use of new materials and new construction systems.
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE was first enacted by the International
Conference of Building Officials at the Sixth Annual Business Meeting held in
Phoenix, Arizona, October 18-21, 1927. Revised editions of this code have been
published since that time at approximate three-year intervals. New editions
incorporate changes approved since the last edition.
THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE is designed to be compatible with
related publications listed on the following pages to provide a complete set of
documents for regulatory use.
Anyone may propose amendments to this code. For more information, write to
the International Conference of Building Officials at the address on the copyright
page.
Changes to the code are processed each year and published in supplements in a
form permitting ready adoption by local communities. These changes are care-
fully reviewed in public hearings by professional experts in the field of building
construction and fire and life safety.
Solid vertical lines in the margins within the body of the code indicate a change
from the requirements of the 1985 edition except where the entire chapter was
revised, a new chapter was added or the change was minor. Where an entire
chapter is changed or new chapter was added, a notation appears at the beginning
of that chapter. Vertical lines in the table of contents indicate that a new chapter or
section was added. Vertical lines in the margins that are interrupted by the letter
"F" indicate that the provision is maintained under the code change procedures of
the Western Fire Chiefs Association. Deletion indicators( . .) are provided in the
margin where a paragraph or item listing has been deleted if the deletion resulted
in a change of requirements.
An analysis of changes between editions is published in pamphlet form by the
Conference.
Ill
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Known widely for its Uniform Building Code, the International Conference of Building
Officials publishes other related codes as well as textbooks to enable the user to improve his
knowledge of code enforcement and the administration of a building inspection program.
Publications are continually being added, so inquiries should be directed to Conference
headquarters for a list of those available. At the time of this publication, the following
publications were available:
Uniform Building Code. Covers the fire, life and structural safety aspects of all build-
ings and related structures.
Handbook to the Uniform Building Code-An illustrative commentary. A new
publication containing a description of the purpose and intent of individual code sections
appearing in the 1988 edition of the Building Code. Where appropriate, provides historical
background and references other documents for additional information. Also included are
numerous drawings and figures clarifying the application and intent of the 1988 code
provisions.
Uniform Building Code Standards. Presents in a compact and concise manner national
test, material and special design standards referred to in the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Mechanical Code. Contains requirements for the installation and maintenance
of heating, ventilating, cooling and refrigeration systems. This publication is sponsored
jointly by the the International Conference of Building Officials and the International
Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
Uniform Plumbing Code. Published by the International Association of Plumbing and
Mechanical Officials, the Uniform Plumbing Code covers all aspects of plumbing, includ-
ing requirements for plumbing materials, and IAPMO installation standards. It is endorsed
by the Conference as a companion document to ICBO's model codes and is available from
either organization.
Uniform Housing Code. Provides complete requirements affecting conservation and
rehabilitation of housing. Its regulations are compatible with the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Code for the Abatement of Dangerous Buildings. Sets forth orderly proce-
dures for remedying dangerous buildings. Follows due process provisions which reflect the
latest court decisions in such matters. This code covers all structures and may be used to
supplement the Uniform Housing Code and the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Sign Code. Dedicated to the development of better sign regulation. Its require-
ments pertain to all signs and sign construction attached to buildings.
Uniform Administrative Code. This code covers administration areas in connection
with adoption of the Uniform Building Code, Uniform Mechanical Code and related codes
by a jurisdiction. It contains provisions which relate to site preparation, construction,
alteration, moving, repair and use and occupancies of buildings or structures and building
service equipment including plumbing, electrical and mechanical. The code is compatible
with the administrative provisions of all codes published by the Conference.
Uniform Building Security Code. This code establishes minimum standards to make
dwelling units resistant to unlawful entry. It regulates swinging doors, sliding doors,
windows and hardware in connection with dwelling units of apartment houses or one- and
two-family dwellings. The code gives consideration to the concerns of police, fire and
building officials in establishing requirements for resistance to burglary which are compati-
ble with fire and life safety.
Uniform Code for Building Conservation. A building conservation guideline pre-
sented in code format which will provide a community with the means to preserve their
existing buildings while achieving appropriate levels of safety. It is formatted in the same
manner as the Uniform Building Code, compatible with other Uniform Codes, and may be
adopted as a code or used as a guideline.
lv
Dwelling Construction Under the Uniform Building Code. Designed to acquaint the
home builder with basic Building Code requirements relating to dwelling construction. A
useful text for apprentice training programs.
Uniform Fire Code. Sets out provisions necessary for fire prevention while achieving
uniformity in terms and requirements with other codes published by the Conference. This
code is sponsored jointly by the Western Fire Chiefs Association and the International
Conference of Building Officials.
Uniform Fire Code Standards. This publication is a companion to the Uniform Fire
Code. It contains standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials and of the
National Fire Protection Association referenced by the Uniform Fire Code.
U.B.C. Supplements. Between new editions of the codes, changes approved each year
are incorporated in the supplements.
Analysis of Revisions. Discusses the changes included in the latest codes published by
the Conference as compared to the prior editions.
Uniform Building Code-1927 Edition. A special 60th anniversary printing of the first
published Uniform Building Code.
CABO One and 1\vo Family Dwelling Code. This code is jointly sponsored by the
International Conference of Building Officials, Building Officials and Code Administrators
International, Inc., and Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. It eliminates
conflicts and duplications among the model codes to achieve national uniformity. Covers
mechanical and plumbing requirements as well as construction and occupancy.
Application and Commentary CABO One and 1\vo Family Dwelling Code. An
interpretive commentary on the CABO One and Two Family Dwelling Code intended to
enhance uniformity of interpretation and application of the code nationwide. Developed by
the three model code organizations under contract with the Department of Housing and
Urban Development (HUD) and in cooperation with the National Association of Home
Builders (NAHB).
CABO Model Energy Code. This code sets forth minimum requirements for effective
use of energy in the design of new buildings and structures and additions to existing
buildings. It is based on ASHRAE Standard 90A-1980 and was originally developed jointly
by ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI and the National Conference of States on Building Codes and
Standards (NCSBCS) under a contract funded by the U.S. Department of Energy. The code
is now maintained by the Council of American Building Officials (CABO) and is adopted by
reference in the Uniform Building Code.
Uniform Disaster Mitigation Plan. A plan developed to aid building departments in
coping with major disasters such as fires, floods and earthquakes. Defines standard operat-
ing procedures for initiating disaster assessment and mitigation and includes samples of
records, reports, entry signs, etc.
National Electrical Code. The National Electrical Code is the electrical code for the
majority of states, counties and cities in the United States. Researched and published every
three years by the National Fire Protection Association, it is an indispensable aid to every
electrician, electrical inspector, electrical equipment manufacturer, architect, builder, con-
sulting engineer, contractor, fire marshal, fire chief, building inspector and anyone who
must specify or certify electrical installations.
Building Department Administration. An excellent guide for improvement of skills in
departmental management and in the enforcement and application of the Building Code and
other regulations administered by a building inspection department. Recommended for both
undergraduate and advanced study.
Uniform Building Code Application/Interpretation Manual. A manual discussing
sections of the Uniform Building Code with a question/answer format, providing a compre-
hensive analysis of the intent of the code section. Most sections include illustrative exam-
v
pies. The manual is in loose-leaf form so that code interpretations published in Building
Standards may be inserted.
Plan Review Manual. Provides an understanding of the extent of Building Code provi-
sions and illustrates application to given situations. Covers nonstructural aspects as well as
providing an insight into the basic engineering considerations a plan examiner or checker
must utilize.
¥\e\d \nspection Manual. Designed to improve inspection skills and techniques. A
fundamental important text for courses of study at the community college and trade or
technical school level.
Building Official Management Manual. This manual addresses the unique nature of
code administration and the managerial duties of the building official. A supplementary
insert addresses the budgetary and financial aspects of a building department. It is also an
ideal resource for those preparing for the management module of the CABO Building
Official Certification Examination.
Legal Aspects of Code Administration. A manual developed by the three model code
organizations to inform the building official on the legal aspects of the profession. The text is
written in a logical sequence with explanation of legal terminology and is designed to serve
as a refresher to those preparing to take the legal module of the CABO Building Official
Certification Examination.
Illustrated Mechanical Manual. Contains a series of illustrations with explanatory text
covering requirements in the Uniform Mechanical Code which respond to graphic treat-
ment. It is highly useful for code application and for training purposes.
Concrete Manual. A publication on concrete to be used for reference or as a text on
concrete inspection. Of particular interest to inspectors, it is also useful to concrete techni-
cians and craftsmen who are more concerned with the physical and practical aspects of
concrete than the design.
You Can Build It! Sponsored by ICBO in cooperation with the Council of American
Building Officials (CABO), this booklet contains information and advice to aid "do-it-
yourselfers" with building projects. Provides guidance in necessary procedures such as
permit requirements, codes, plans, cost estimation, etc.
Guidelines for Manufactured Housing Installations. A guideline in code form imple-
menting the Uniform Building Code and its companion code documents to regulate the
permanent installation of a manufactured home on a privately owned nonrental site. A
commentary is included to explain specific provisions, and codes applying to each compo-
nent part are defined.
Thbulated Fire-Resistive Requirements by Occupancy. Related code requirements are
assembled for quick access. The tabulations assemble the limitations in Tables Nos. 5-A, 5-
B, 5-C, and 17-A and the provisions of the 0 I through 03 sections of the occupancy and type
of construction chapters in the Uniform Building Code.
Introduction to the Uniform Building Code Workbook. A student workbook contain-
ing a series of exercises designed to compliment the course "Introduction to the Uniform
Building Code, BIT-I 00." Assignments are arranged to provide an overview of the basics of
the Uniform Building Code.
Plan Reading and Nonstructural Plan Review Workbook. A series of exercises
intended to be a useful tool in understanding the concepts developed in "Plan Reading and
Nonstructural Plan Review, BIT-101." The student exercises include assignments on code
requirements and plan reading.
vi
OUTLINE OF CONTENTS BY PARTS,
CHAPTERS AND SECTIONS
Page
Effective Use of the Uniform Building Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Sample Ordinance for Adoption of the Uniform
Building Code and Uniform Building Code Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Part !-Administrative
CHAPTER 1. Title, Scope and General
SEC. 101. Title ........................................... . I
102. Purpose ........................................ . I
103. Scope .......................................... . I
104. Application to Existing Buildings and Structures ........ . I
105. Alternate Materials and Methods of Construction ........ . 3
106. Modifications .................................... . 3
107. Tests ........................................... . 3
CHAPTER 2. Organization and Enforcement

SEC. 20 I. Creation of Enforcement Agency .................... . 5
202. Powers and Duties of Building Official. ............... . 5
203. Unsafe Buildings or Structures ...................... . 6
204. Board of Appeals ................................. . 6
205. Violations ....................................... . 7
CHAPTER 3. Permits and Inspections

SEC. 30 I. Permits ......................................... . 8
302. Application for Permit ............................. . 8
303. Permits Issuance ................................. . 9
304. Fees ........................................... . II
305. Inspections ...................................... . 12
306. Special Inspections ............................... . 14
307. Certificate of Occupancy ........................... . 17
Part 11-Definitions and Abbreviations

CHAPTER 4. Definitions and Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Part Ill-Requirements Based on Occupancy

CHAPTER 5. Classification of All Buildings by Use or Occu-
pancy and General Requirements for All
Occupancies
SEC. 501. Occupancy Classified ............................. . 32
502. Change in Use ................................... . 32
503. Mixed Occupancy ................................ . 32
504. Location on Property .............................. . 34
505. Allowable Floor Areas ............................. . 35
506. Allowable Area Increases .......................... . 37
507. Maximum Height of Buildings and Increases ........ . 38
508. Fire-resistive Substitution .......................... . 39
vii
Page
509. Pedestrian Walkways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

510. ~~~-- ····························· ~
511. Access to Toilets and Other Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
512. Compressed Gases. ............................. 42
513. Premises Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CHAPTER 6. Requirements for Group A Occupancies

SEC. 601. Group A Occupancies Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
602. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
603. Location on Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
604. Exit Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
605. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
606. Shaft Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
607. Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
608. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. 52
609. Modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CHAPTER 7. Requirements for Group B Occupancies

SEC. 701. Group B Occupancies Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
703. Location on Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
704. Exit Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
708. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
709. Open Parking Garages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
710. Helistops ....................... 60
CHAPTER 8. Requirements for Group E Occupancies

SEC. 801. GroupE Occupancies Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
802. Construction, Height and Allowable Area . . . 62
803. Location on Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
804. Exit Facilities. ................ 63
805. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
807. Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems. . ................. 64
808. Special Hazards . . . . . . ....................... 64
809. Fire Alarms ......... 65
CHAPTER 9. Requirements for Group H Occupancies

SEC. 901. Group H Occupancies Defined . . . .......... 66
902. Construction. Height and Allowable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
903. Location on Property . . . . . . . ................. 71
904. Exit Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
905. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation. . . . . . . . . . 71
908. Special Hazards . ............. 73
909. Fire Alarms . ....................... 73
910. Explosion Venting . ......................... 73
911. Division 6 Occupancies. . . ............... 74
912. Heliports ............... 77
viii
Page
CHAPTER 10. Requirements tor Group I Occupancies

SEC. 1001. Group I Occupancies Defined ............ . 86
1002. Construction. Height and Allowable Area ............. . 86
1003. Location on Property . . ....... . 88
1004. Exit Facilities ............. . 88
1005. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation .... 88
1006. Shaft Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . 88
1007. Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems. . ......... . 88
1008. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . 88
1009. Fire Alarms .......... . 89
1010. Smoke Detectors .. 89
CHAPTER 11. Requirements tor Group M Occupancies

SEC. 1101. Group M Occupancies Defined . . ......... . 91
1102. Construction, Height and Allowable Area 91
1103. Location on Property . . . ....... . 91
1104. Special Hazards ...... . 91
1105. Garage Floor Surfaces . 92
1106. Agricultural Buildings .. 92
CHAPTER 12. Requirements tor Group R Occupancies

SEC. 1201. Group R Occupancies Defined ...................... . 93
1202. Construction. Height and Allowable Area 93
1203. Location on Property .. 93
1204. Exits and Emergency Escapes . 93
1205. Light, Ventilation and Sanitation. 94
1206. Yards and Courts 95
1207. Room Dimensions . 95
1208. Efficiency Dwelling Units. 96
1209. Shaft Enclosures 96
1210. Smoke Detectors and Sprinkler Systems . 97
1211. Fire Alarm Systems . . ................. . 97
1212. Heating ..... 98
1213. Special Hazards .... 98
1214. Access to Buildings and Facilities . 98
CHAPTERS 13-16 (No Requirements)
Part IV-Requirements Based on Types of Construction

CHAPTER 17. Classification of All Buildings by Types of
Construction and General Requirements
SEC. 1701. General. ............... . 100
1702. Structural Frame .. 100
1703. Usable Space Under Floors .. . 100
1704. Roofs ............................. . 101
1705. Exceptions to Table No. 17-A ..................... . 101
1706. Shaft Enclosures . . . . . . . . . ........ . 102
1707. Weather Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 103
1708. Members Carrying Masonry llr Concrete .............. . 104
1709. Parapets .... 104
1710. Projections . 105
ix
Page
171 I . Guardrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 05
1712. Foam Plasticlnsulation........................ 106
1713. Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 08
1714. Solar Energy Collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 09
1715. Atria............................................ 109
1716. Mezzanines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II I
CHAPTER 18. Type I Fire-resistive Buildings

SEC. 180 I. Definition ....................................... . 115
1802. Structural Framework ............................. . 115
1803. Exterior Walls and Openings ........................ . 115
1804. Floors .......................................... . 115
1805. Stairway Construction ............................. . 116
1806. Roofs .......................................... . 116
1807. Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office
Buildings and Group R, Division I Occupancies ........ . 117
CHAPTER 19. Type II Buildings

SEC. 190 I. Definition ....................................... . 122
1904. Floors .......................................... . 123
1906. Roofs .......................................... . 123
1907. Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office
Buildings and Group R, Division I Occupancies ........ . 124
CHAPTER 20. Type Ill Buildings

SEC. 2001. Definition ....................................... . 125
2003. Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions ............... . 125
2005. Roofs .......................................... . 126
CHAPTER 21. Type IV Buildings

SEC. 210 I. Definition ....................................... . 127
2103. Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions ............... . 127
2105. Roofs .......................................... . 128
2106. Heavy-timber Construction ......................... . 128
CHAPTER 22. Type V Buildings

SEC. 220 I. Definition ....................................... . 131
2205. Roofs .......................................... . 131
X
Page
Part V-Engineering Regulations-Quality and Design of the

Materials of Construction
CHAPTER 23. General Design Requirements
SEC. 2301. Scope .......................................... . 132
2302. Definitions ...................................... . 132
2303. Design Methods .................................. . 132
2304. Floor Design .................................... . 133
2305. Roof Design ..................................... . 134
2306. Reduction of Live Loads ........................... . \35
2307. Deflection ...................................... . 136
2308. Special Design ................................... . 136
2309. Walls and Structural Framing ....................... . 137
2310. Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls .............. . 137
2311. Wind Design .................................... . 137
2312. Earthquake Regulations ............................ . 140
CHAPTER 24. Masonry
SEC. 2401. General. ........................................ . 180
2402. Material Standards ................................ . 183
2403. Mortar and Grout ................................. . 185
2404. Construction .................................... . 186
2405. Quality Control .................................. . 190
2406. Allowable Stresses ................................ . 191
2407. Design, General Requirements ...................... . 196
2408. Design, Unreinforced Masonry ...................... . 204
2409. Design, Reinforced Masonry ........................ . 205
2410. Design, Composite Construction ..................... . 210
2411. Design, Reinforced Masonry Slender Wall ............. . 211
2412. Strength Design, Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall ....... . 215
CHAPTER 25. Wood

SEC. 2501. General............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2502. Definitions and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2503. Size of Structural Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2504. Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2505. Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
2506. Horizontal Member Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
2507. Column Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2508. Flexural and Axial Loading Combined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
2509. Compression at Angle to Grain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
2510. Timber Connectors and Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
2511. Structural Glued-laminated Timber Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
2512. Design of Glued Built-up Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
25 I 3. Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2514. Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
2515. Wood Combined with Masonry or Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
2516. General Construction Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
2517. Conventional Construction Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
CHAPTER 26. Concrete

SEC. 2601. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
2602. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
2603. Specifications for Tests and Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
2604. Construction Requirements--Concrete Quality . . . . . . . . . . 383
2605. Mixing and Placing Concrete.................... . . . . . 388
XI
Page
2606. Formwork, Embedded Pipes and Construction Joints... . . . 390

2607. Details of Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
2608. Analysis and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
2609. Strength and Serviceability Requirements..... . . . . . . . . . . 405
2610. Flexure and Axial Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
2611. Shear and Torsion.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
2612. Development and Splices of Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
2613. Slab Systems with Multiple Square or Rectangular Panels . . 451
2614. Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
2615. Footings......................................... 465
2616. Precast Concrete .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 469
2617. Composite Concrete Flexural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 70
2618. Prestressed Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
2619. Shells and Folded Plates .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 482
2620. Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
2621. Shotcrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
2622. Plain Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
2623. Minimum Slab Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
2624. Anchorage to Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
2625. Reinforced Concrete Structures Resisting Forces Induced
by Earthquake Motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
2626. Alternate Design Method................. . . . . . . . . . . . 505
2627. Reinforced Gypsum Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
CHAPTER 27. Steel

SEC. 2701. Material Standards and Symbols..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
2702. Allowable Unit Stresses............................. 526
2703. Combined Stresses................................. 533
2704. Stress Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
2705. Stability and Slenderness Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
2706. Width-Thickness Ratios.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
2707. Plate Girders and Rolled Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
2708. Composite Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
2709. Simple and Continuous Spans... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
2710. Deflections, Vibrations and Ponding................... 547
2711 . Gross and Net Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 7
2712. Connections...................................... 549
2713. Rivets and Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
2714. Welds........................................... 554
2715. Built-up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
2716. Camber.......................................... 558
2717. Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
2718. Column Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
2719. Anchor Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
2720. Fabrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
2721. Plastic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
2722. Steel Structures Resisting Forces Induced by Earthquake
Motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
2723. Load and Resistance Factor Design........... . . . . . . . . . 573
2724. Steel Storage Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
2725. Steel Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
CHAPTER 28. Aluminum

SEC. 2801. Material Standards and Symbols...................... 581
2802. Allowable Stresses for Members and Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . 584
2803. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
2804. Fabrication and Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
XII
Page
Part VI-Detailed Regulations

CHAPTER 29. Excavations, Foundations and Retaining Walls
SEC. 2901. Scope .......................................... . 593
2902. Quality and Design ............................... . 593
2903. Excavations and Fills .............................. . 593
2904. Soil Classification-Expansive Soil .................. . 594
2905. Foundation Investigation ........................... . 594
2906. Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressures ............ . 595
2907. Footings ........................................ . 595
2908. Piles--General Requirements ....................... . 598
2909. Specific Pile Requirements ......................... . 600
2910. Foundation Construction-Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 ... . 603
CHAPTER 30. Veneer

SEC. 3001. Scope.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
3002. Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
3003. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
3004. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
3005. Adhered Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
3006. Anchored Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
3007. Plastic Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 0
CHAPTER 31. (No Requirements)
CHAPTER 32. Roof Construction and Covering

SEC. 3201. General. .................................... . 612
3202. Definitions ...................................... . 612
3203. Roof Covering Requirements .....................· .. . 614
3204. Roof Covering Classification ....................... . 614
3205. Attics: Access, Draft Stops and Ventilation ............. . 615
3206. Smoke and Heat Venting ........................... . 615
3207. Roof Drainage ................................... . 617
3208. Roof Covering Materials and Application .............. . 617
CHAPTER 33. Exits

SEC. 3301. General.......................................... 634
3302. Occupant Load.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
3303. Exits Required.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
3304. Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
3305. Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
3306. Stairways.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
3307. Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
3308. Horizontal Exit..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
3309. Stairway, Ramp and Escalator Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
3310. Smokeproof Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
3311. Exit Courts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
3312. ExitPassageways .................................. 652
3313. Exit Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
3314. ExitSigns ........................................ 652
3315. Aisles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
3316. Seat Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
XIII
Page
3317. Group A, Division I Occupancies .................... . 654

3318. Group A, Divisions 2, 2.1, 3 and 4 Occupancies ........ . 655
3319. Group E Occupancies ............................. . 655
3320. Group H Occupancies ............................. . 657
3321. Group I Occupancies .............................. . 658
3322. Special Hazards .................................. . 659
3323. Reviewing Stands, Grandstands and Bleachers .......... . 659
3324. Folding and Telescoping Seating ..................... . 662
CHAPTER 34. Sloped Glazing and Skylights

SEC. 3401. Scope .......................................... . 667
3402. Allowable Glazing Materials ........................ . 667
3403. Screening ....................................... . 667
3404. Framing .............................. ···· .. ····· 668
3405. Design Loads .................................... . 668
3406. Floors and Sidewalks .............................. . 668
CHAPTER 35. Sound Transmission Control (See Appendix

Chapter35)
CHAPTER 36. Penthouses and Roof Structures

SEC. 3601. Penthouses and Roof Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
3602. Towers and Spires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
CHAPTER 37. Chimneys, Fireplaces and Barbecues

SEC. 3701. 670
3702. ~~~lniii~~~ : : :: : : : :: : : : :: : : : :: : : : :: : : :: : :: : : : :: : : : 670
3703. Chimneys, General ............................... . 671
3704. Masonry Chimneys ............................... . 671
3705. Factory-built Chimneys and Fireplaces ................ . 672
3706. Metal Chimneys .................................. . 673
3707. Masonry and Concrete Fireplaces and Barbecues ........ . 673
CHAPTER 38. Fire-extinguishing Systems

SEC. 3801. Scope .......................................... . 680
3802. Automatic Fire-extinguishing Systems ................ . 681
3803. Sprinkler System Supervision Alarms ................. . 683
3804. Permissible Sprinkler Omissions ..................... . 683
3805. Standpipes ...................................... . 684
3806. Buildings Under Construction ....................... . 685
3807. Basement Pipe Inlets .............................. . 685
CHAPTER 39. Stages and Platforms

SEC. 3901. Scope .......................................... . 687
3902. Platforms ....................................... . 688
3903. Stages .......................................... . 688
CHAPTER 40. Motion Picture Projection Rooms

SEC. 4001. General.......................................... 691
4002. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
4003. Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
xlv
Page
4004. Projection Ports and Openings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

4005. Ventilation........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
4006. Miscellaneous Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
4007. Sanitary Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
CHAPTER 41. (See Uniform Building Security Code'")
Part VII-Fire-resistive Standards for Fire Protection

CHAPTER 42. Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish
SEC. 4201. General. ........................................ . 694
4202. Testing and Classification of Materials ................ . 694•
4203. Application of Controlled Interior Finish .............. . 694
4204. Maximum Allowable Flame Spread .................. . 695
4205. Textile Wall Coverings ............................. . 695
CHAPTER 43. Fire-resistive Standards

SEC. 4301. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
4302. Fire-resistive Materials and Systems.................. . 697
4303. Protection of Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
4304. Walls and Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
4305. Floor-Ceilings or Roof-Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
4306. Fire-resistive Assemblies for Protection of Openings . . . . . . 70 I
4307. Roof Coverings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Part VIII-Regulations for Use of Public Streets and

Projections Over Public Property
CHAPTER 44. Protection of Pedestrians During Construction or
Demolition
SEC. 4401. General.......................................... 743
4402. Temporary Use of Streets and Alleys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
4403. Storage on Public Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
4404. Mixing Mortar on Public Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
4405. Protection of Utilities............................... 743
4406. Walkway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4407. Pedestrian Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
4408. Maintenance and Removal of Protective Devices......... 745
4409. Demolition....................................... 745
CHAPTER 45. Permanent Occupancy of Public Property

SEC. 4501. General. ........................................ . 747
4502. Projection into Alleys ............................. . 747
4503. Space Below Sidewalk ............................. . 747
4504. Balconies, Sun-control Devices and Appendages ........ . 747
4505. Marquees ....................................... . 748
4506. Awnings ........................................ . 748
4507. Doors .................................... . 749
CHAPTER 46. (No Requirements)
XV
Page
Part IX-Wall and Ceiling Coverings

CHAPTER 47. Installation of Wall and Ceiling Coverings
SEC. 4701. Scope .......................................... . 750
4702. Materials ....................................... . 751
4703. Vertical Assemblies ............................... . 751
4704. Horizontal Assemblies ............................. . 752
4705. Interior Lath ..................................... . 752
4706. Exterior Lath .................................... . 753
4707. Interior Plaster ................................... . 754
4708. Exterior Plaster .................................. . 755
4709. Exposed Aggregate Plaster ......................... . 756
4710. Pneumatically Placed Plaster (Gunite) ................. . 757
4711. Gypsum Wallboard ............................... . 757
4712. Use of Gypsum in Showers and Water Closets .......... . 758
4713. Softwood Plywood Paneling ........................ . 758
4714. Shear-resisting Construction with Wood Frame ......... . 759
Part X-Special Subjects

CHAPTER 48. Cellulose Nitrate
SEC. 4801. Cellulose Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
CHAPTER 49. (No Requirements) (See Page 861-Appendlx)
CHAPTER 50. Prefabricated Construction

SEC. 5001. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
5002. Tests of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
5003. Tests of Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
5004. Connections....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
5005. Pipes and Conduits.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
5006. Certificate and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
CHAPTER 51. Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving

Walks
SEC. 5101. Scope..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
5102. Elevator and Elevator Lobby Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
5103. Special Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
5104. Hoistway Venting.................................. 780
51 OS. Elevator Machine Room Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
5106. Additional Doors.................................. 780
CHAPTER 52. Light-transmitting Plastics

SEC. 5201. Scope........................................... 781
5202. Definitions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
5203. Design and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
5204. Glazing of Unprotected Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
5205. Light-transmitting Exterior Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
5206. Roof Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
5207. Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
5208. Light-diffusing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
5209. Diffusers in Electrical Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
5210. Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
XVI
Page
5211. Awnings and Patio Covers... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7R'i

5212. Greenhouses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7H5
5213. Canopies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
5214. Solar Collectors... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78."
C'r\"PTER 53. (See Appendix Chapter 53)
CHAPTER 54. Glass and Glazing

SEC. 5401. Scope ..................................... . 787
5402. Identification ............................... . 787
5403. Area Limitations .......................... . 787
5404. Glazing Support ......................... . 7HX
5405. Louvered Windows . . . . . . ........... . 7HR
5406. Safety Glazing ........................ . 7XH
5407. Hinged Shower Doors ......... . 7'10
5408. Racquetball and Squash Courts .. . 7'10
CHAPTER 55. (See Appendix Chapter 55)
CHAPTER 56. Covered Mall Buildings

SEC. 5601. General. ............................ . 794
5602. Types of Construction and Required Yards for Unlimited
Area ................................. . 794
5603. Special Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . 795
5604. Exits. . . . . . . . ....... . 7'17
5605. Occupancy ........................... . 7'19
CHAPTERS 57-59. (No Requirements)
Part Xi-Uniform Building Code Standards

CHAPTER 60. Uniform Building Code Standards
SEC. 6001. Scope ............................... . ROO
APPENDIX
CHAPTER 1. Division 1-Life-Safety Requirements for Existing

Buildings Other Than High-rise Buildings
SEC. 110. General. ................................ . 815
Ill. Exits ................................ . Rl'i
112. Enclosure of Vertical Shafts .............. . 817
113. Basement Access or Sprinkler Protection ......... . RIH
114. Standpipes ........................... . RIR
115. Smoke Detectors ...................... . KIR
116. Separation of Occupancies .............. . 818
xvii
Page
CHAPTER 1. Division 11-Life-Safety Requirements for Existing

High-rise Buildings
SEC. 120. Scope........................................... 819
121. General.......................................... 819
122. Compliance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
123. Authority of the Building Official........... . . . . . . . . . . 819
124. Appeals Board.................................... 820
125. Specific Provisions and Alternates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
CHAPTER 7. Aviation Control Towers

SEC. 711. General.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
713. Exit Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
714. Fire Alarms...................................... 828
715. Access for Handicapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
716. Standby Power and Emergency Generation Systems 829
CHAPTER 11. Agricultural Buildings

SEC. 1107. Scope........................................... 830
II 09. Occupancy Separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
1110. Exterior Walls and Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
1111. Exit Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
CHAPTER 12. Division !-Requirements for Group R, Division 3

Occupancies
SEC. 1221. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
1222. One and Two Family Dwelling Code Adopted . . . . . . . . . . . 833
CHAPTER 12. Division 11-Requlrements for Group R, Division 4

Occupancies
SEC. 1223. General..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
1225. Location on Property................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
1226. Exits and Emergency Escapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
1228. Yards and Courts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
1229. Room Dimensions.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
1230. No Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
1232. Fire-warning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
1233. Heating.......................................... 836
1234. Special Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
CHAPTER 23. Division 1-Snow Load Design

SEC. 2315. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7
2316. Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
2317. Ground Snow Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
2318. Roof Snow Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
2319. Unbalanced Snow Loads, Gable Roofs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
2320. Special Eave Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
2321. Drift Loads on Lower Roofs, Decks and Roof Projections . . 839
2322. Rain on Snow... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
xviii
Page
2323. Deflections....................................... 841

2324. Impact Loads..................................... 841
2325. Vertical Obstructions.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
CHAPTER 23. Division 11-Earthquake Recording

Instrumentation
SEC. 2326. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
2327. Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
2328. Maintenance...................................... 852
2329. Instrumentation of Existing Buildings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
CHAPTER 26. Protection of Residential Concrete

Exposed to Freezing and Thawing
SEC. 2628. General.......................................... 853
CHAPTER 32. Re-roofing

SEC. 3209. General.......................................... 855
3210. Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
3211. Built-up Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
3212. Shingles and Shakes................................ 856
3213. Tile.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
3214. Metal Roofing.................................... 857
3215. Other Roofings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
CHAPTER 35. Sound Transmission Control

SEC. 3501. Sound Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
3502. Sound Transmission Control Systems.................. 859
CHAPTER 38. Basement Pipe Inlets

SEC. 3807. Basement Pipe Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
CHAPTER 49. Patio Covers

SEC. 490 I. Patio Covers Defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
4902. Design Loads..................................... 861
4903. Light and Ventilation............................... 861
4904. Footings......................................... 861
CHAPTER 51. Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving

Walks
SEC. 5107. Purpose ........................................ . 862
862
~~~lniii~~~
5108.
5109. : : : :: : : : :: : : :: : : : :: : : : :: : : :: : : :: : : :: : : : 862
5110. Permits--Certificates oflnspection .................. . 862
5111. ANSI Code Adopted .............................. . 863
5112. Design ......................................... . 863
5113. Requirements for Operation and Maintenance .......... . 863
5114. Unsafe Conditions ................................ . 864
xlx
Page
CHAPTER 53. Energy Conservation in New Building

Construction
SEC. 530 I. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
CHAPTER 55. Membrane Structures

SEC. 550 I. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
5502. Type of Construction and General Requirements . . . . . . . . . 867
5503. Inflation Systems.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
5504. Sectwn Provtswns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
5505. Engineering Design...................... . . . . . . . . . . 868
CHAPTER 57. Regulations Governing Fallout Shelters

SEC. 5701. Purpose ........................................ . 869
t~~f~iii~~~: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
5702. 869
5703. 869
5704. Occupancy Requirements .......................... . 869
5705. Exits ............................ ················ 870
5706. Flame-spread Index of Interior Surfaces ............... . 870
5707. Minimum Design Loads ........................... . 870
5708. Samtallon ....................................... . 870
CHAPTER 70. Excavation and Grading

SEC. 7001. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
7002. Scope.......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
7003. Permits Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
7004. Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
7005. Definitions..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
7006. Grading Permit Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
7007. Grading Fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
7008. Bonds.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
7009. Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
7010. Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
70 II. Setbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
7012. Drainage and Terracing............................. 878
7013. Erosion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
7014. Grading Inspection..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
7015. Completion of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

INDEX............................................................ 886
XX
EFFECTIVE USE OF THE UNIFORM
BUILDING CODE
The following procedure may be helpful in using the Uniform Building Code:
I . Classify the building:
A. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: Compute the floor area and

occupant load of the building or portion thereof. See Sections 407,
3302 and Table No. 33-A. Determine the occupancy group which the
use of the building or portion thereof most nearly resembles. See the '0 I
sections of Chapters 5 through 12. See Section 503 for buildings with
mixed occupancies.
B. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: Determine the type of construction of

the building by the building materials used and the fire resistance of the
parts of the building. See Chapters 17 through 22.
C. LOCATION ON PROPERTY: Determine the location of the building
on the site and clearances to property lines and other buildings from the
plot plan. See Table No. 5-A and '03 sections of Chapters 18 through 22
for fire resistance of exterior walls and wall opening requirements based
on proximity to property lines. See Section 504.
D ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA: Determine the allowable floor area
of the building. See Table No. 5-C for basic allowable floor area based
on occupancy group and type of construction. See Section 506 for
allowable increases based on location on property and installation of an
approved automatic fire-sprinkler system. See Section 505 (b) for
allowable floor area of multistory buildings.
E. HEIGHT AND NUMBER OF STORIES: Compute the height of the
building, Section 409 and determine the number of stories, Section
420. See Table No. 5-D for the maximum height and number of stories
permitted based on occupancy group and type of construction. See
Section 507 for allowable story increase based on the installation of an
approved automatic fire-sprinkler system.
2. Review the building for conformity with the occupancy requirements in
Chapters 6 through 12.
3. Review the building for conformity with the type of construction require-
ments in Chapters 17 through 22.
4. Review the building for conformity with the exiting requirements in Chap-
ter 33.
5. Review the building for other detailed code regulations in Chapters 29
through 54, Chapter 56, and the Appendix.
6. Review the building for conformity with engineering regulations and
requirements for materials of construction. See Chapters 23 through 28.
xxl
SAMPLE ORDINANCE FOR ADOPTION OF THE
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AND
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARDS
ORDINANCE NO. _ _
An ordinance of the (Jurisdiction) adopting the 1988 edition of the

Uniform Building Code and the 1988 edition of the Uniform Building Code
Standards regulating the erection, construction, enlargement, alteration, repair,
moving, removal, demolition, conversion, occupancy, equipment, use, height,
area and maintenance of all buildings or structures in the (Jurisdiction)
providing for the issuance of permits and collection of fees therefor; providing for
penalties for the violation thereof, repealing Ordinance No. of the
(Jurisdiction) and all other ordinances and parts of the ordinances in
conflict therewith.
The _ ___,(=-go_v_er..;.;n_ln,._g_bod_...y)'--_of the _ ___,O,_u_rls_d_lc_tl-'on.L)__ does ordain as follows:
Section 1. That certain documents, three (3) copies of which are on file and are
open for inspection of the public in the office of the (Jurisdiction's keeper of
records) of the (Jurisdiction) , being marked and designated as:
Uniform Building Code, 1988 Edition, published by the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials, including the generic fire-resistive assemblies listed in
the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Eleventh Edition, dated October, 1984,
published by the Gypsum Association as referenced in Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B
and 43-C (also reference Appendix Chapter 35, if adopted) of the specified
Uniform Building Code, including Appendix Chapters . [Fill in the
applicable Appendix chapters (see Uniform Building Code Section 103, last
paragraph). If reference is made to Appendix Chapter 51, an additional reference
to ANSJIASME A I 7 .1, 1984, Sqfety Code for Elevators and Escalators, including
Supplements AJ7.la-1985, Al7.1b-1985, Al7.1c-1986, Al7.1d-1986 and
Al7.1e-1987, published by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
should be added and three (3) copies of this code should also be on file (see
Appendix Sections 5109 and 5 I 11 )] , and
Uniform Building Code Standards, 1988 Edition, published by the Interna-
tional Conference of Building Officials, including (i) Structural Welding Code-
Reinforcing Steel, AWS 01.4-79 (U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8); (ii) Structural
Welding Code-Steel, ANSI/AWS Dl.t-84 (U.B.C. Standard No. 27-6); and
(iii) Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel, ANSI/AWS 01.3-81 (U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 27-13) published by the American Welding Society, Inc., as modified or
amended in the Uniform Building Code Standards referenced herein:
be and the same are hereby adopted as the code of the (Jurisdiction) for
regulating the erection, construction, enlargement, alteration, repair, moving,
removal, demolition, conversion, occupancy, equipment, use, height, area and
maintenance of all buildings or structures in the (Jurisdiction) providing
for issuance of permits and collection of fees therefor; and each and all of the
regulations, provisions, conditions and terms of such Uniform Building Code,
XXII
1988 Edition. and Uniform Building Code Standards, 1988 Edition, published by
the International Conference of Building Officials, and the secondary publica-
tions referenced above, all of which are on file in the office of the (Jurisdiction)
are hereby referred to, adopted and made a part hereof as if fully set out in this
ordinance.
Section 2. (Incorporate penalties for violations. See Section 205).
Section 3. That Ordinance No. of (Jurisdiction) entitled (fill in
the title of building ordinance or ordinances in effect at the present time) and all
other ordinances or parts of ordinances in conflict herewith are hereby repealed.
Section 4. That if any section, subsection, sentence, clause or phrase of this
ordinance is, for any reason, held to be invalid or unconstitutional, such decision
shall not affect the validity or constitutionality of the remaining portions of this
ordinance. The (governing body) hereby declares that it would have passed
this ordinance, and each section, subsection, clause or phrase hereof, irrespective
of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections, sentences. clauses and
phrases be declared unconstitutional.
Section 5. That the (Jurisdiction's keeper of records) is hereby ordered and
directed to cause this ordinance to be published. (An additional provision may he
required to direct the number of times the ordinance is to be published and to
specify that it is to be in a newspaper in general circulation. Posting may also he
required.)
Section 6. That this ordinance and the rules, regulations, provisions, require-
ments. orders and matters established and adopted hereby shall take effect and be
in full force and effect (time period) from and after the date of its final
passage and adoption.
xxlll
1988 EDITION 101·104
Part/
ADMINISTRATIVE
Chapter 1
TITLE, SCOPE AND GENERAL
Title
Sec. 101. These regulations shall be known as the "Uniform Building Code,"
may be cited as such and will be referred to herein as "this code."
Purpose
Sec. 102. The purpose of this code is to provide minimum standards to
safeguard life or limb, health, property and public welfare by regulating and
controlling the design, construction, quality of materials, use and occupancy,
location and maintenance of all buildings and structures within this jurisdiction
and certain equipment specifically regulated herein.
The purpose of this code is not to create or otherwise establish or designate any 1.:·:
particular class or group of persons who will or should be especially protected or
benefited by the terms of this code.
Scope
Sec. 103. The provisions of this code shall apply to the construction, alteration,
moving, demolition, repair and use of any building or structure within this
jurisdiction, except work located primarily in a public way, public utility towers
and poles, mechanical equipment not specifically regulated in this code, and
hydraulic flood control structures.
Where, in any specific case, different sections of this code specify different
materials, methods of construction or other requirements, the most restrictive
shall govern. Where there is a conflict between a genera1 requirement and a
specific requirement, the specific requirement shall be applicable.
Wherever in this code reference is made to the appendix, the provisions in the
appendix shall not apply unless specifically adopted.
Application to Existing Buildings and Structures
Sec. 104. (a) General. Buildings and structures to which additions, alterations
or repairs arc made shall comply with all the requirements of this code for new
facilities except as specifically provided in this section. See Section 1210 for
provisions requiring installation of smoke detectors in existing Group R, Division
3 Occupancies.
(b) Additions, Alterations or Repairs. Additions, alterations or repairs may
be made to any building or structure without requiring the existing building or
structure to comply with all the requirements of this code, provided the addition,
alteration or repair conforms to that required for a new building or structure.
Additions or alterations shall not be made to an existing building or structure
104 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
which will cause the existing building or structure to be in violation of any of the
provisions of this code nor shall such additions or alterations cause the existing
building or structure to become unsafe. An unsafe condition shall be deemed to
have been created if an addition or alteration will cause the existing building or
structure to become structurally unsafe or overloaded; will not provide adc~IW.'&
egress in compliance with the provisions of this code or will obstruct existing
exits; will create a fire hazard; will reduce required fire resistance or will other-
wise create conditions dangerous to human life. Any building so altered, which
involves a change in use or occupancy, shall not exceed the height, number of
stories and area permitted for new buildings. Any building plus new additions
shall not exceed the height, number of stories and area specified for new build-
ings. Additions or alterations shall not be made to an existing building or structure
when such existing building or structure is not in full compliance with the
provisions of this code except when such addition or alteration will result in the
existing building or structure being no more hazardous based on life safety, fire
safety and sanitation, than before such additions or alterations are undertaken.
[See also Section 911 (c) for Group H, Division 6 Occupancies.]
Alterations or repairs to an existing building or structure which are nonstruc-
tural and do not adversely affect any structural member or any part of the building
or structure having required fire resistance may be made with the same materials
of which the building or structure is constructed. The installation or replacement
of glass shall be as required for new installations.
(c) Existing Installations. Buildings in existence at the time of the adoption of
this code may have their existing use or occupancy continued, if such use or
occupancy was legal at the time of the adoption of this code, provided such
continued use is not dangerous to life.
Any change in the use or occupancy of any existing building or structure shall
comply with the provisions of Sections 307 and 502 of this code.
For existing buildings, see Appendix Chapter I.
(d) Maintenance. All buildings and structures, both existing and new, and all
parts thereof, shall be maintained in a safe and sanitary condition. All devices or
safeguards which are required by this code shall be maintained in conformance
with the code edition under which installed. The owner or his designated agent
shall be responsible for the maintenance ofbuildings and structures. To determine
compliance with this subsection, the building official may cause any structure to
be reinspected.
(e) Moved Buildings and Temporary Buildings. Buildings or structures
moved into or within the jurisdiction shall comply with the provisions of this code
for new buildings or structures.
Temporary structures such as reviewing stands and other miscellaneous struc-
tures, sheds, canopies or fences used for the protection of the public around and in
conjunction with construction work may be erected by special permit from the
building official for a limited period of time. Such buildings or structures need not
comply with the type of construction or fire-resistive time periods required by this
2
1988 EDITION 104-107
code. Temporary buildings or structures shall be completely removed upon the

expiration of the time limit stated in the permit.
(f) Historic Buildings. Repairs, alterations and additions necessary for the
preservation, restoration, rehabilitation or continued use of a building or structm~:.
may be made without conformance to all the requirements of this code when
authorized by the building official, provided:
I . The building or structure has been designated by official action of the
legally constituted authority of this jurisdiction as having special historical
or architectural significance.
2. Any unsafe conditions as described in this code are corrected.
3. The restored building or structure will be no more hazardous based on life
safety, fire safety and sanitation than the existing building.
Alternate Materials and Methods of Construction
Sec. 105. The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the usc of any
material or method of construction not specifically prescribed by this code,
provided any alternate has been approved and its use authorized by the building
official.
The building official may approve any such alternate, provided he finds that the
proposed design is satisfactory and complies with the provisions of this code and
that the material, method or work offered is, for the purpose intended, at least the
equivalent of that prescribed in this code in suitability, strength, effectiveness,
fire resistance, durability, safety and sanitation.
The building official shall require that sufficient evidence or proof be submit-
ted to substantiate any claims that may be made regarding its usc. The details of
any action granting approval of an alternate shall be recorded and entered in the
files of the code enforcement agency.
Modifications
Sec. 106. Whenever there are practical difficulties involved in carrying out the
provisions of this code, the building official may grant modifications for individ-
ual cases, provided he shall first find that a special individual reason makes the
strict letter of this code impractical and that the modification is in conformity with
the intent and purpose of this code and that such modification does not lessen any
fire-protection requirements or any degree of structural integrity. The details of
any action granting modifications shall be recorded and entered in the files of the
code enforcement agency.
Tests
Sec. 107. Whenever there is insufficient evidence of compliance with any of
the provisions of this code or evidence that any material or construction docs not
conform to the requirements of this code, the building official may require tests as
proof of compliance to be made at no expense to this jurisdiction.
Test methods shall be as specified by this code or by other recognized test
standards. If there are no recognized and accepted test methods for the proposed
alternate, the building official shall determine test procedures.
3
All tests shall be made by an approved agency. Reports of such tests shall be
retained by the building official for the period required for the retention of public
records.
4
1988 EDITION 201-202
Chapter 2
ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT
Creation of Enforcement Agency

Sec. 201. There is hereby established in this jurisdiction a code enforcement
agency which shall be under the administrative and operational control of the
building official.
Powers and Duties of Building Official
Sec. 202. (a) General. The building official is hereby authorized and directed
to enforce all the provisions of this code. For such purposes, he shall have the
powers of a law enforcement officer.
The building official shall have the power to render interpretations of this code f
and to adopt and enforce rules and regulations supplemental to this code as he may !!~
~~~~ i~~~;::;Iti~n~~~~~:~ ~~~r;~~~:t~~Iischa~:~~e0fnt~~~;~r:~~n~~~ tt~i: i~~~~; r.'~· i_,:.
and purpose of this code.
(b) Deputies. In accordance with prescribed procedures and with the approval
of the appointing authority, the building official may appoint such number of
technical officers and inspectors and other employees as shall be authorized from
time to time. He may deputize such inspectors or employees as may be necessary
to carry out the functions of the code enforcement agency.
(c) Right of Entry. Whenever necessary to make an inspection to enforce any
of the provisions of this code, or whenever the building official or his authorized
representative has reasonable cause to believe that there exists in any building or
upon any premises any condition or code violation which makes such building or
premises unsafe, dangerous or hazardous, the building official or his authorized
representative may enter such building or premises at all reasonable times to
inspect the same or to perform any duty imposed upon the building official by this
code, provided that if such building or premises be occupied, he shall first present
proper credentials and request entry; and if such building or premises be unoccu-
pied, he shall first make a reasonable effort to locate the owner or other persons
having charge or control of the building or premises and request entry. If such
entry is refused, the building official or his authorized representative shall have
recourse to every remedy provided by law to secure entry.
(d) Stop Orders. Whenever any work is being done contrary to the provisions
of this code, the building official may order the work stopped by notice in writing
served on any persons engaged in the doing or causing such work to be done, and
any such persons shall forthwith stop such work until authorized by the building
official to proceed with the work.
(e) Occupancy Violations. Whenever any building or structure or equipment
therein regulated by this code is being used contrary to the provisions of this code,
the building official may order such use discontinued and the structure, or portion
thereof, vacated by notice served on any person causing such use to be continued.
Such person shall discontinue the use within the time prescribed by the building
5
202-204 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
official after receipt of such notice to make the structure, or portion thereof,
comply with the requirements of this code.
(f) Liability. The building official, or his authorized representative charged
with the enforcement of this code, acting in good faith and without malice in the
discharge of his duties, shall not thereby render himself personally liable for any
damage that may accrue to persons or property as a result of any act or by reason of
any act or omission in the discharge of his duties. Any suit brought against the
building official or employee because of such act or omission performed by him
I
in the enforcement of any provision of such codes or other pertinent laws or
orddinancties implemented thrhou gbh thde ;ntidorcdebmenht. o~ t~isd~o~e or e~tiof~ced by t~e
.
co e en orcement agency s a 11 e e1en e y t 1s Juns !Chon untl ma termi- 1 1
nation of such proceedings, and any judgment resulting therefrom shall be
assumed by this jurisdiction.
This code shall not be construed to relieve from or lessen the responsibility of
any person owning, operating or controlling any building or structure for any
damages to persons or property caused by defects, nor shall the code enforcement
agency or its parent jurisdiction be held as assuming any such liability by reason of
~ the inspections authorized by this code or any permits or certificates issued under
this code.
(g) Cooperation of Other Officials and Officers. The building official may
request, and shall receive so far as is required in the discharge of his duties, the
assistance and cooperation of other officials of this jurisdiction.
Unsafe Buildings or Structures

Sec. 203. All buildings or structures regulated by this code which are structur-
ally unsafe ornot provided with adequate egress, or which constitute a fire hazard,
or are otherwise dangerous to human life are, for the purpose of this section,
unsafe. Any use of buildings or structures constituting a hazard to safety, health or
public welfare by reason of inadequate maintenance, dilapidation, obsolescence,
fire hazard, disaster, damage or abandonment is, for the purpose of this section, an
unsafe use. Parapet walls, cornices, spires, towers, tanks, statuary and other
appendages or structural members which are supported by, attached to, or a part of
a building and which are in deteriorated condition or otherwise unable to sustain
the design loads which are specified in this code are hereby designated as unsafe
building appendages.
All such unsafe buildings, structures or appendages are hereby declared to be
public nuisances and shall be abated by repair, rehabilitation, demolition or
removal in accordance with the procedures set forth in the Dangerous Buildings
Code or such alternate procedures, as may have been or as may be adopted by this
jurisdiction. As an alternative, the building official, or other employee or official
of this jurisdiction as designated by the governing body, may institute any other
appropriate action to prevent, restrain, correct or abate the violation.
Board of Appeals
Sec. 204. (a) General. In order to hear and decide appeals of orders, decisions
or determinations made by the building official relative to the application and
6
1988 EDITION 204-205
interpretation of this code, there shall be and is hereby created a Board of Appeals
consisting of members who are qualified by experience and training to pass upon
matters pertaining to building construction and who are not employees of the
jurisdiction. The building official shall be an ex officio member of and shall act as
secretary to said board but shall have no vote upon any matter before the board.
The Board of Appeals shall be appointed by the governing body and shall hold
office at its pleasure. The board shall adopt rules of procedure for conducting its
business and shall render all decisions and findings in writing to the appellant with
a duplicate copy to the building official.
(b) Limitations of Authority. The Board of Appeals shall have no authority
relative to interpretation of the administrative provisions of this code nor shall the
Board be empowered to waive requirements of this code.
Violations
Sec. 205. It shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to erect,
construct, enlarge, alter, repair, move, improve. remove, convert or demolish,
equip, use, occupy or maintain any building or structure or cause or permit the
same to be done in violation of this code.
7
Chapter3
PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
Permits
Sec. 301. (a) Permits Required. Except as specified in Subsection (b) of this
'l:cCion, no building or structure regulated by this code shall be erected, con-
structed, enlarged, altered, repaired, moved, improved, removed, converted or
demolished unless a separate permit for each building or structure has first been
obtained from the building official.
(b) Exempted Work. A building permit shall not be required for the following:
I. One-story detached accessory buildings used as tool and storage sheds,
playhouses and similar uses, provided the projected roof area does not
exceed 120 square feet.
2. Fences not over 6 feet high.
3. Oil derricks.
4. Movable cases, counters and partitions not over 5 feet 9 inches high.
5. Retaining walls which are not over 4 feet in height measured from the
bottom of the footing to the top of the wall, unless supporting a surcharge
or impounding Class I, II or III-A liquids.
6. Watl:r tanks supported directly upon grade if the capacity does not exceed
5000 gallons and the ratio of height to diameter or width does not exceed
two to one.
7. Platforms, walks and driveways not more than 30 inches above grade and
not over any basement or story below.
8. Painting, papering and similar finish work.
':.1. Temporary motion picture, television and theater stage sets and scenery.
10. Window awnings supported by an exterior wall of Group R, Division 3,
and Group M Occupancies when projecting not more than 54 inches.
II. Prefabricated swimming pools accessory to a Group R, Division 3 Occu-
pancy in which the pool walls are entirely above the adjacent grade and if
the capacity docs not exceed 5000 gallons.
Unless otherwise exempted, separate plumbing, electrical and mechanical
pl:rmits will be required for the above exempted items.
Exemption from the permit requirements of this code shall not be deemed to
grant authorization for any work to be done in any manner in violation of the
provisions of this code or any other laws or ordinances of this jurisdiction.
Application for Permit
Sec. 302. (a) Application. To obtain a permit, the applicant shall first file an
apf!licatiun therefor in writing on a form furnished by the code enforcement
agency tor that purpm.c. Every such application shall:
I. Identify and describe the work to be covered by the permit for which
application is made.
8
1988 EDITION 302-303
2. Describe the land on which the proposed work is to be done by legal

description, street address or similar description that will readily identify and
definitely locate the proposed building or work.
3. Indicate the use or occupancy for which the proposed work is intended.
4. Be accompanied by plans, diagrams, computations and specifications and
other data as required in Subsection (b) of this section.
5. State the valuation of any new building or structure or any addition, remod-
eling or alteration to an existing building.
6. Be signed by the permittee, or his authorized agent.
7. Give such other data and information as may be required by the building
official.
(b) Plans and Specifications. Plans, engineering calculations, diagrams and
other data shall be submitted in one or more sets with each application for a
permit. The building official may require plans, computations and specifications
to be prepared and designed by an engineer or architect licensed by the state to
practice as such. Submittals shall include construction inspection requirements as
defined in Section 302 (c).
EXCEPTION: The building official may waive the submission of plans, calcu-
lations, construction inspection requirements, etc., if he finds that the nature of the
work applied for is such that reviewing of plans is not necessary to obtain compliance
with this code.
(c) Construction Inspection. The engineer or architect in responsible charge

of the structural design work shall include in the construction documents the
following:
I. Special inspections required by Section 306.
2. Other structural inspections required by the engineer or architect in respon-
sible charge of the structural design work.
(d) Information on Plans and Specifications. Plans and specifications shall
be drawn to scale upon substantial paper or cloth and shall be of sufficient clarity
to indicate the location, nature and extent of the work proposed and show in detail
that it will conform to the provisions of this code and all relevant laws, ordi-
nances, rules and regulations.
Plans for buildings more than two stories in height of other than Groups R,
Division 3 and M Occupancies shall indicate how required structural and fire-
resistive integrity will be maintained where a penetration will be made for
electrical, mechanical, plumbing and communication conduits, pipes and similar
systems.
Permits Issuance
Sec. 303. (a) Issuance. The application, plans, specifications, computations
and other data filed by an applicant for permit shall be reviewed by the building
official. Such plans may be reviewed by other departments of this jurisdiction to
verify compliance with any applicable laws under their jurisdiction. If the build-
ing official finds that the work described in an application for a permit and the
9
plans, specifications and other data filed therewith conform to the requirements of
this code and other pertinent laws and ordinances, and that the fees specified in
Section 304 have been paid, he shall issue a permit therefor to the applicant.
When the building official issues the permit where plans are required, he shall
endorse in writing or stamp the plans and specifications "APPROVED." Such
approved plans and specifications shall not be changed, modified or altered
without authorizations from the building official, and all work regulated by this
code shall be done in accordance with the approved plans.
The building official may issue a permit for the construction of part of a
building or structure before the entire plans and specifications for the whole
building or structure have been submitted or approved, provided adequate infor-
mation and detailed statements have been filed complying with all pertinent
requirements of this code. The holder of such permit shall proceed at his own risk
without assurance that the permit for the entire building or structure will be
granted.
(b) Retention of Plans. One set of approved plans, specifications and compu-
tations shall be retained by the building official for a period of not less than 90
days from date of completion of the work covered therein; and one set of approved
plans and specifications shall be returned to the applicant, and said set shall be
kept on the site of the building or work at all times during which the work
authorized thereby is in progress.
(c) Validity of Permit. The issuance or granting of a permit or approval of
plans, specifications and computations shall not be construed to be a permit for, or
an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of this code or of any other
ordinance of the jurisdiction. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or
cancel the provisions of this code or other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not
be valid.
The issuance of a permit based upon plans, specifications and other data shall
not prevent the building official from thereafter requiring the correction of errors
in said plans, specifications and other data, or from preventing building opera-
tions being carried on thereunder when in violation of this code or of any other
ordinances of this jurisdiction.
(d) Expiration. Every permit issued by the building official under the provi-
sions of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the
building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days
from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit
is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of
180 days. Before such work can be recommenced, a new permit shall be first
obtained to do so, and the fee therefor shall be one half the amount required for a
new permit for such work, provided no changes have been made or will be made in
the original plans and specifications for such work; and provided further that such
suspension or abandonment has not exceeded one year. In order to renew action on
a permit after expiration, the permittee shall pay a new full permit fee.
Any permittee holding an unexpired permit may apply for an extension of the
time within which he may commence work under that permit when he is unable to
10
1988 EDITION 303-304
commence work within the time required by this section for good and satisfactory
reaso.ns. The building official may extend the time for action by the permittee for
a pen.od not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the permittee showing
that Circumstances beyond the control of the permittee have prevented action from
being taken. No permit shall be extended more than once.
(e) Suspension or Revocation. The building official may, in writing, suspend
or revoke a permit issued under the provisions of this code whenever the permit is
issued in error or on the basis of incorrect information supplied, or in violation of
any ordinance or regulation or any of the provisions of this code.
Fees
Sec. 304. (a) General. Fees shall be assessed in accordance with the provisions
of this section or shall be as set forth in the fee schedule adopted by the jurisdic-
tion.
(b) Permit Fees. The fee for each permit shall be as set forth in Table No. 3-A.
The determination of value or valuation under any of the provisions of this code
shall be made by the building official. The value to be used in computing the
building permit and building plan review fees shall be the total value of all
construction work for which the permit is issued as well as all finish work,
painting, roofing, electrical, plumbing, heating, air conditioning, elevators, fire-
extinguishing systems and any other permanent equipment.
(c) Plan Review Fees. When a plan orotherdataare required to be submitted by
Subsection (b) of Section 302, a plan review fee shall be paid at the time of
submitting plans and specifications for review. Said plan review fee shall be 65
percent of the building permit fee as shown in Table No. 3-A.
The plan review fees specified in this subsection are separate fees from the
permit fees specified in Section 304 (a) and are in addition to the permit fees.
Where plans are incomplete or changed so as to require additional plan review,
an additional plan review fee shall be charged at the rate shown in Table No. 3-A.
(d) Expiration of Plan Review. Applications for which no permit is issued
within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation, and
plans and other data submitted for review may thereafter be returned to the
applicant or destroyed by the building official. The building official may extend
the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon
request by the applicant showing that circumstances beyond the control of the
applicant have prevented action from being taken. No application shall be ex-
tended more than once. In order to renew action on an application after expiration,
the applicant shall resubmit plans and pay a new plan review fee.
(e) Investigation Fees: Work Without a Permit. I. Investigation. Whenever
any work for which a permit is required by this code has been commenced without
first obtaining said permit, a special investigation shall be made before a permit
may be issued for such work.
2. Fee. An investigation fee, in addition to the permit fee, shall be collected
whether or not a permit is then or subsequently issued. The investigation fee shall
be equal to the amount of the permit fee required by this code. The minimum
11
investigation fee shall be the same as the minimum fee set forth in Table No. 3-A.
The payment of such investigation fee shall not exempt any person from compli-
ance with all other provisions of this code nor from any penalty prescribed by law.
(f) Fee Refunds. l. The building official may authorize the refunding of any
fcc paid hereunder which was erroneously paid or collected.
2. The building official may authorize the refunding of not more than 80
perc-err( of the permit fee paid when no work has been done under a permit issued
in accordance with this code.
3. The building official may authorize the refunding of not more than 80
percent of the plan review fee paid when an application for a permit for which a
plan review fee has been paid is withdrawn or canceled before any plan reviewing
is done.
The building official shall not authorize the refunding of any fee paid except
upon written application filed by the original permittee not later than 180 days
after the date of fee payment.
Inspections
Sec. 305. (a) General. All construction or work for which a permit is required
shall be subject to inspection by the building official and all such construction or
work shall remain accessible and exposed for inspection purposes until approved
by the building official. In addition, certain types of construction shall have
continuous inspection as specified in Section 306.
Approval as a result of an inspection shall not be construed to be an approval of
a violation of the provisions of this code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction.
Inspections presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this
code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not be valid.
It shall be the duty of the permit applicant to cause the work to remain
accessible and exposed for inspection purposes. Neither the building official nor
:·:: the jurisdiction shall be liable for expense entailed in the removal or replacement
I
of any material required to allow inspection.
A survey of the lot may be required by the building official to verify that the
structure is located in accordance with the approved plans.
(b) Inspection Record Card. Work requiring a permit shall not be commenced
until the permit holder or his agent shall have posted or otherwise made available
an inspection record card such as to allow the building official conveniently to
make the required entries thereon regarding inspection of the work. This card
shall be maintained available by the permit holder until final approval has been
Ill granted by the building official.
(c) Inspection Requests. It shall be the duty of the person doing the work
authorized by a permit to notify the building official that such work is ready for
inspection. The building official may require that every request for inspection be
filed at least one working day before such inspection is desired. Such request may
be in writing or by telephone at the option of the building official.
It shall be the duty of the person requesting any inspections required by this
code to provide access to and means for inspection of such work.
12
1988 EDITION 305
(d) Approval Required. Work shall not be done beyond the point indicated in
each successive inspection without first obtaining the approval of the building
official. The building official, upon notification, shall make the requested in-
spections and shall either indicate that portion of the construction is satisfactory as
completed or shall notify the permit holder or his agent wherein the same fails to
comply with this code. Any portions which do not comply shall be corrected and
such portion shall not be covered or concealed until authorized by the building
official.
There shall be a final inspection and approval of all buildings and structures
when completed and ready for occupancy and use.
(e) Required Inspections. Reinforcing steel or structural framework of any
part of any building or structure shall not be covered or concealed without first
obtaining the approval of the building official.
The building official, upon notification, shall make the following inspections:
I. FOUNDATION INSPECTION: To be made after excavations for footings

arc complete and any required reinforcing steel is in place. For concrete founda-
tions, any required forms shall be in place prior to inspection. All materials for the
foundation shall be on the job, except where concrete is ready mixed in accord-
ance with U .B.C. Standard No. 26-13, the concrete need not be on the job. Where
the foundation is to be constructed of approved treated wood, additional inspec-
tions may be required by the building official.
2. CONCRETE SLAB OR UNDER-FLOOR INSPECTION: To be made
after all in-slab or under-floor building service equipment, conduit, piping acces-
sories and other ancillary equipment items arc in place but before any concrete is
placed or floor sheathing installed, including the subfloor.
3. FRAME INSPECTION: To be made after the roof, all framing. fire
blocking and bracing are in place and all pipes, chimneys and vents are complete
and the rough electrical, plumbing, and heating wires, pipes and ducts arc
approved.
4. LATH AND/OR GYPSUM BOARD INSPECTION: To be made after all
lathing and gypsum board, interior and exterior, is in place but before any
plastering is applied or before gypsum board joints and fasteners arc taped and
finished.
5. FINAL INSPECTION: To be made after finish grading and the building is
completed and ready for occupancy.
(f) Other Inspections. In addition to the called inspections specified above, the
building official may make or require other inspections of any construction work
to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this code and other laws which are
enforced by the code enforcement agency.
(g) Reinspections. A reinspection fee may be assessed for each inspection or
13
reinspection when such portion of work for which inspection is called is not
complete or when corrections called for are not made.
This subsection is not to be interpreted as requiring reinspection fees the first
time ajob is rejected for failure to comply with the requirements of this code, but
as controlling the practice of calling for inspections before the job is ready for such
inspection or reinspection.
Reinspect ion fees may be assessed when the permit card is not properly posted
on the work site, the approved plans are not readily available to the inspector, for
failure to provide access on the date for which inspection is requested, or for
deviating from plans requiring the approval of the building official.
To obtain a reinspection, the applicant shall file an application therefor in
writing upon a form furnished for that purpose and pay the reinspection fee in
accordance with Table No. 3-A or as set forth in the fee schedule adopted by the
jurisdiction.
In instances where reinspection fees have been assessed, no additional inspec-
tion of the work will be performed until the required fees have been paid.
Special Inspections
Sec. 306. (a) General. In addition to the inspections required by Section 305,
the owner or the engineer or architect of record acting as the owner's agent shall
employ one or more special inspectors who shall provide inspections during
construction on the following types of work:
I. CONCRETE: During the taking of test specimens and placing of rein-
forced concrete.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Concrete for foundations conforming to minimum require-
ments of Table No. 29-A or for Group R, Division 3 or Group M, Division I
Occupancies, provided the building official finds that a special hazard does not
exist.
2. For foundation concrete when the structural design is based on af'c no greater
than 2500 psi.
3. Nonstructural slabs on grade, including prestressed slabs on grade when
effective prestress in concrete is less than 150 pounds per square inch.
. 4. Site work concrete fully supported on earth and concrete where no special
hazard exists.
I
2. BOLTS INSTALLED IN CONCRETE: During installation of bolts and
': placing of concrete around such bolts when stress increases permitted by Footnote
·, No.5 of Table No. 26-F are utilized.
3. DUCTILE MOMENT-RESISTING CONCRETE FRAME: As re-
quired by Section 2625 U) of this code.
4. REINFORCING STEEL AND PRESTRESSING STEEL: A. During
all stressing and grouting of prestressed concrete.
B. During placing of reinforcing steel, placing of tendons and prestressing steel
for all concrete required to have special inspection by Item No. I.
EXCEPTION: The special inspector need not be present during entire reinforc-
ing steel- and prestressing steel-placing operations, provided he has inspected for
14
1988 EDITION 306
conformance with the approved plans, prior to the closing of forms or the delivery of
concrete to the jobsite.
5. WELDING: A. Ductile moment-resisting steel frames. As required by

Section 2722 U) of this code.
B. All structural welding, including welding ofreinforcing steel.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When welding is done in an approved fabricator's shop.
2. When approved by the building official, single-pass fillet welds when stressed
to less than 50 percent of allowable stresses and floor and roof deck welding and
welded studs when used for structural diaphragm or composite systems may have
periodic inspections in accordance with Section 306 (e) of this code. For periodic
inspection, the inspector shall check qualifications of welders at the start of work and
then make final inspection of all welds for compliance prior to completion of
welding.
6. HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTING: During all bolt installations and tighten-

ing operations.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The special inspector need not be present during the entire
installation and tightening operation, provided he has:
(i) Inspected the surfaces and bolt type for conformance to plans and specifica-
tions prior to start of bolting,
(ii) And will, upon completion of all bolting, verify the minimum specified bolt
tension for I 0 percent of the bolts for each connection with a minimum of two bolts
per connection.
2. In bearing-type connections when threads are not required by design to be
excluded from the shear plane, inspection prior to or during installation will not be
required.
7. STRUCTURAL MASONRY: During preparation of masonry wall

prisms, sampling and placing of all masonry units, placement of reinforcement,
inspection of grout space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during
all grouting operations.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Special inspection need not be provided when design
stresses have been adjusted to permit noncontinuous inspection.
2. For hollow-unit masonry where thef'm is no more than 1500 psi for concrete ~f··
units or 2600 psi for clay units, special inspection for placing of units may be
performed on a periodic basis in accordance with Section 306 (e).
8. REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE: When cast-in-place Class B

gypsum concrete is being mixed and placed.
9. INSULATING CONCRETE FILL: During the application of insulating
concrete fill when used as part of a structural system.
EXCEPTION: The special inspections may be limited to an initial inspection to
check the deck surface and placement of reinforcing. The special inspector shall
supervise the preparation of compression test specimens during this initial inspec-
tion.
10. SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING: As required by U .B.C. Standard

No. 43-8.
15
II. PILING, DRILLED PIERS AND CAISSONS: During driving and

testing of piles and construction of cast-in-place drilled piles or caissons. See
Items Nos. I and 4 for concrete and reinforcing steel inspection .
,_:L
,___,__:,.':_'. sh(!t~-re~e~~J~~~~~~d~~~:c:~en ~~~~gU~fa~~~:r.ecimens and placing of all
:
EXCEPTION: Shotcrete work fully supported on earth, minor repairs and
..
when, in opinion of the building official, no special hazard exists.
13. SPECIAL GRADING, EXCAVATION AND FILLING: During earth-

work excavations, grading and filling operations inspection to satisfy require-
ments of Chapter 29 and Chapter 70 (Appendix) of this code.
14. SPECIAL CASES: Work which, in the opinion of the building official,
involves unusual hazards or conditions.
(b) Special Inspector. The special inspector shall be a qualified person who
shall demonstrate his competence, to the satisfaction of the building official, for
inspection of the particular type of construction or operation requiring special
inspection.
(c) Duties and Responsibilities of the Special Inspector. I. The special
inspector shall observe the work assigned for conformance with the approved
design drawings and specifications.
2. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the building offi-
cial. the engineer or architect of record, and other designated persons. All
discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for
correction, then, if uncorrected, to the proper design authority and to the building
official.
3. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the
work requiring special inspection was, to the best of his knowledge, in conform-
ance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship
provision of this code.
(d) Waiver of Special Inspection. The building official may waive the require-
ment for the employment of a special inspector if he finds that the construction is
of minor nature.
(c) Periodic Special Inspection. Some inspections may be made on a periodic
basis and satisfy the requirements of continuous inspection, provided this peri-
odic scheduled inspection is performed as outlined in the project plans and
specifications and approved by the building official.
(f) Structural Observation. During the construction of a structure located in
Seismic Zone No. 3 or No. 4 in which construction inspection, as defined in
Section 302 (c), Item 2, is required, the owner shall employ the engineer or
architect responsible for the structural design or his designated engineer or
architect to make visits to the site to observe general compliance with the ap-
proved structural plans, specifications and change orders. The engineer or archi-
tect shall submit a statement in writing to the building official stating the site visits
have been made and that any deficiencies noted have been corrected.
16
1988 EDITION 306-307
(g) Approved Fabricators. Special inspections required by this section and

elsewhere in this code shall not be required where the work is done on the premises
of a fabricator registered and approved by the building official to perform such
work without special inspection. The certificate of registration shall be subject to
revocation by the building official if it is found that any work done pursuant to the
approval is in violation of this code. The approved fabricator shall submit a
Certificate of Compliance that the work was performed in accordance with the
approved plans and specifications to the building official and to the engineer or
architect of record. The approved fabricator's qualifications shall be contingent
on compliance with the following:
I . The fabricator has developed and submitted a detailed fabrication proce-
dural manual reflecting key quality control procedures which will provide a basis
for inspection control of workmanship and the fabricator plant.
2. Verification of the fabricator's quality control capabilities, plant and per-
sonnel as outlined in the fabrication procedural manual shall be by an approved
inspection or quality control agency.
3. Periodic plant inspections shall be conducted by an approved inspection or
quality control agency to monitor the effectiveness of the quality control pro-
gram.
4. It shall be the responsibility of the inspection or quality control agency to
notify the approving authority in writing of any change to the procedural manual.
Any fabricator approval may be revoked for just cause. Reapproval of the fabrica-
tor shall be contingent on compliance with quality control procedures during the
past year.
Certificate of Occupancy
Sec. 307. (a) Use and Occupancy. No building or structure shall be used or
occupied, and no change in the existing occupancy classification of a building or
structure or portion thereof shall be made until the building official has issued a
Certificate of Occupancy therefor as provided herein.
EXCEPTION: Group R, Division 3, and M Occupancies.
Issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy shall not be construed as an approval of
a violation of the provisions of this code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction.
Certificates presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this
code or of other ordinances of the jurisdiction shall not be valid.
(b) Change in Use. Changes in the character or use of a building shall not be
made except as specified in Section 502 of this code.
(c) Certificate Issued. After the building official inspects the building or
structure and finds no violations of the provisions of this code or other laws which
are enforced by the code enforcement agency, the building official shall issue a
Certificate of Occupancy which shall contain the following:
I . The building permit number.
2. The address of the building.
3. The name and address of the owner.
17
4. A description of that portion of the building for which the certificate is

issued.
5. A statement that the described portion of the building has been inspected (Qr
compliance with the requirements of this code for the group and division of
occupancy and the use for which the proposed occupancy is classified.
6. The name of the building official.
(d) Thmporary Certificate. If the building official finds that no substantial
hazard will result from occupancy of any building or portion thereof before the
same is completed, he may issue a temporary Certificate of Occupancy for the use
of a portion or portions of a building or structure prior to the completion of the
entire building or structure.
(e) Posting. The Certificate of Occupancy shall be posted in a conspicuous
place on the premises and shall not be removed except by the building official.
(f) Revocation. The building official may, in writing, suspend or revoke a
Certificate of Occupancy issued under the provisions of this code whenever the
certificate is issued in error, or on the basis of incorrect information supplied, or
when it is determined that the building or structure or portion thereof is in
violation of any ordinance or regulation or any of the provisions of this code.
18
1988 EDITION 3-A
TABLE NO. 3-A-BUILDING PERMIT FEES

TOTAL VALUATION FEE
$1.00 to $500.00 $15.00
$501.00 to $2,000.00 $15.00 for the first $500.00 plus $2.00 for each additional
$100.00 or fraction thereof, to and including $2.000.00
$2,001.00 to $25,000.00 $45.00 for the first $2,000.00 plus $9.00 for each addi-
tional $1 ,000.00 or fraction thereof. to and including
$25,000.00
$25,001.00 to $50,000.00 $252.00 for the first $25.000.00 plus $6.50 for each addi-
tional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof. to and including
$50,000.00
$50,001.00 to $100,000.00 $414.50 for the first $50.000.00 plus $4.50 for each addi-
tional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof. to and including
$100,000.00
$100,001.00 to $500,000.00 $639.50 for the first $100.000.00 plus $3.50 for each
additional $1.000.00 or fraction thereof
$500,001.00 to $2039.50 for the first $500.000.00 plus $3.00 for each
$1,000,000.00 additional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof. to and including
$1,000.000.00.
$1,000,001.00 and up $3539.50 for the first $1.000.000.00 plus $2.00 for each
additional $1,000.00 or fraction thereof
Other Inspections and Fees:
I. Inspections outside of normal business hours .................. $30.00 per hour*
(minimum charge-two hours)
2. Reinspection fees assessed under provisions of
Section 305 (g) .......................................... $30.00 per hour*
3. Inspections for which no fee is specifically
indicated ............................................... $30.00 per hour*
(minimum charge--one-half hour)
4. Additional plan review required by changes. additions
or revisions to approved plans .............................. $30.00 per hour*
(minimum charge--one-half hour)
*Or the total hourly cost to the jurisdiction. whichever is the greatest. Th1s cost shallmclude
supervision, overhead. equipment. hourly wages and fringe benefits of the employees
involved.
19
Part II
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Chapter4
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Definitions
Sec. 401. General. For the purpose of this code, certain terms, phrases, words
and their derivatives shall be construed as specified in this chapter. Words used in
the singular include the plural and the plural the singular. Words used in the
masculine gender include the feminine and the feminine the masculine.
Where terms are not defined, they shall have their ordinary accepted meanings
within the context with which they are used. Webster's Third New International
Dictionary of the English Language, Unabridged, copyright 1981, shall be
considered as providing ordinarily accepted meanings.
A
Sec. 402. ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM is an assembly consisting of panels
mounted on pedestals to provide an under-floor space for the installations of
mechanical, electrical, communication or similar systems or to serve as an air-
supply or return-air plenum.
ADDITION is an extension or increase in floor area or height of a building or
structure.
AGRICULTURAL BUILDING is a structure designed and constructed to
house farm implements, hay, grain, poultry, livestock or other horticultural
products. This structure shall not be a place of human habitation or a place of
employment where agricultural products are processed, treated or packaged; nor
shall it be a place used by the public.
ALLEY is any public way or thoroughfare less than 16 feet but not less than 10
feet in width which has been dedicated or deeded to the public for public use.
ALTER or ALTERATION is any change, addition or modification in con-
struction or occupancy.
APARTMENT HOUSE is any building or portion thereof which contains
three or more dwelling units and, for the purpose of this code, includes residential
condominiums.
APPROVED, as to materials and types of construction, refers to approval by
the building official as the result of investigation and tests conducted by him, or
by reason of accepted principles or tests by recognized authorities, technical or
scientific organizations.
APPROVED AGENCY is an established and recognized agency regularly
20
1988 EDITION 402-403
engaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, when such agency

has been approved by the building official.
APPROVED FABRICATOR is an established and qualified person, firm or
corporation approved by the building official pursuant to Section 306 (g) of this
code.
AREA. (See "Floor Area.")
ASSEMBLY BUILDING is a building or portion of a building used for the
gathering together of 50 or more persons for such purposes as deliberation,
education, instruction, worship, entertainment, amusement, drinking or dining
or awaiting transportation.
ATRIUM is an opening through two or more floor levels other than enclosed
stairways, elevators, hoistways, escalators, plumbing, electrical, air-
conditioning or other equipment, which is closed at the top and not defined as a
mall. Floor levels, as used in this definition, do not include balconies within ~@
assembly occupancies nor mezzanines which comply with Section 1716. Il
AUTOMATIC, as applied to fire protection devices, is a device or system
providing an emergency function without the necessity of human intervention and
activated as a result of a predetermined temperature rise, rate of rise of tempera-
ture or increase in the level of combustion products such as is incorporated in an
automatic sprinkler system, automatic fire door, etc.
B
Sec. 403. BALCONY is that portion of the seating space of an assembly room,
the lowest part of which is raised 4 feet or more above the level of the main floor
and shall include the area providing access to the seating area or serving only as a ~l
foyer. ~t
BALCONY, EXTERIOR EXIT. See Section 3301 (b).
BASEMENT is any floor level below the first story in a building, except that a
floor level in a building having only one floor level shall be classified as a
basement unless such floor level qualifies as a first story as defined herein.
BOILER, HIGH PRESSURE, is a boiler furnishing steam at pressures in ex-
cess of 15 pounds per square inch or hot water at temperatures in excess of250°F.,
or at pressures in excess of 160 pounds per square inch.
BOILER, LOW-PRESSURE HOT WATER AND LOW-PRESSURE
STEAM, is a boiler furnishing hot water at pressures not exceeding 160 pounds
per square inch and at temperatures not more than 250°F., or steam at pressures not
more than 15 pounds per square inch.
BOILER ROOM is any room containing a steam or hot-water boiler.
BUILDING is any structure used or intended for supporting or sheltering any
usc or occupancy.
BUILDING, EXISTING, is a building erected prior to the adoption of this
code, or one for which a legal building permit has been issued.
BUILDING OFFICIAL is the officer or other designated authority charged
21
with the administration and enforcement of this code, or his duly authorized
representative.
c
Sec. 404. CAST STONE is a precast building stone manufactured from
portland cement concrete and used as a trim, veneer or facing on or in buildings or
structures.
CENTRAL HEATING PLANT is environmental heating equipment which
I directly utilizes fuel to generate heat in a medium for distribution by means of

ducts or pipes to areas other than the room or space in which the equipment is
located.
CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT is the head of the fire department or
his regularly authorized deputy.
COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID. See Fire Code.
CONDOMINIUM, RESIDENTIAL. See "Apartment House."
CONTROL AREA is a space bounded by not Jess than a one-hour fire-
resistive occupancy separation within which the exempted amounts of hazardous
materials may be stored, dispensed, handled or used.
CORROSIVE is a chemical that causes visible destruction of, or irreversible
alterations in, Jiving tissue by chemical action at the site of contact. A chemical is
considered to be corrosive if, when tested on the intact skin of albino rabbits by the
method described in the U.S. Department of Transportation in Appendix A to
CFR 49 Part 173, it destroys or changes irreversibly the structure of the tissue at
the site of contact following an exposure period of four hours. This term shall not
refer to action on inanimate surfaces.
COURT is a space, open and unobstructed to the sky, located at or above grade
level on a lot and bounded on three or more sides by walls of a building.
D
Sec. 405. DANGEROUS BUILDINGS CODE is the Uniform Code for the
Abatement of Dangerous Buildings promulgated by the International Conference
of Building Officials, as adopted by this jurisdiction.
DISPENSING is the pouring or transferring of any material from a container,
tank or similar vessel, whereby vapors, dusts, fumes, mists or gases may be
liberated to the atmosphere.
DISPERSAL AREA, SAFE. See Section 3323 (b).
DORMITORY is a room occupied by more than two guests.
DWELLING is any building or portion thereof which contains not more than
two dwelling units.
DWELLING UNIT is any building or portion thereof which contains living
facilities, including provisions for sleeping, eating, cooking and sanitation, as
required by this code, for not more than one family.
22
1988 EDITION 406-407
E
Sec. 406. EFFICIENCY DWELLING UNIT is a dwelling unit containing
only one habitable room.
ELECTRICAL CODE is the National Electrical Code promulgated by the
National Fire Protection Association, as adopted by this jurisdiction.
ELEVATOR CODE is the safety code for elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators
and moving walks as adopted by this jurisdiction (see Appendix Chapter 51).
.,.,I
EMERGENCY CONTROL STATION is an approved location on the prem- t F
ises of a Group H, Division 6 Occupancy where signals from emergency equip-
ment are received and which is continually staffed by trained personnel.
EXISTING BUILDINGS. (See "Building, Existing.")
I·!·~
EXIT. See Section 3301 (b).
EXIT COURT. See Section 3301 (b).
EXIT PASSAGEWAY. See Section 3301 (b).
F
Sec. 407. FABRICATION AREA (fab area) is an area within a Group H,
Division 6 Occupancy in which there are processes involving hazardous produc-
tion materials and may include ancillary rooms or areas such as dressing rooms
and offices that are directly related to the fab area processes.
FAMILY is an individual or two or more persons related by blood or marriage
or a group of not more than five persons (excluding servants) who need not be
related by blood or marriage living together in a dwelling unit.
FIRE ASSEMBLY. See Section 4306 (b).
FIRE CODE is the Uniform Fire Code promulgated jointly by the Western Fire
Chiefs Association and the International Conference of Building Officials, as
adopted by this jurisdiction.
FIRE RESISTANCE or FIRE-RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION is con-
struction to resist the spread of fire, details of which are specified in this code.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD is any wood product impregnated
with chemicals by a pressure process or other means during manufacture, and
which, when tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 42-1 for a period of
30 minutes, shall have a flame spread of not over 25 and show no evidence of
progressive combustion. In addition, the flame front shall not progress more than
I0 Ifz feet beyond the center line of the burner at any time during the test. Materials
which may be exposed to the weather shall pass the accelerated weathering test
and be identified as Exterior type, in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-
28. Where material is not directly exposed to rainfall but exposed to high humidity II
I
conditions, it shall be subjected to the hygroscopic test and identified as Interior
Type A in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-28.
All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating
thereof. Such identifications shall be issued by an approved agency having a
service for inspection of materials at the factory. t
23
FLAMMABLE LIQUID. See Fire Code.

FLOOR AREA is the area included within the surrounding exterior walls of a
building or portion thereof, exclusive of vent shafts and courts. The floor area of a
building, or portion thereof, not provided with surrounding exterior walls shall be
the usable area under the horizontal projection of the roof or floor above.
FOAM PLASTIC INSULATION is a plastic which is intentionally expanded
by the use of a foaming agent to produce a reduced density plastic containing
voids consisting of hollow spheres or interconnected cells distributed throughout
the plastic for thermal insulating purposes and which has a density less than 20
pounds per cubic foot.
FOOTING is that portion of the foundation of a structure which spreads and
transmits loads directly to the soil or the piles.
FRONT OF LOT is the front boundary line of a lot bordering on the street and,
in the case of a corner lot, may be either frontage.
G
Sec. 408. GARAGE is a building or portion thereof in which a motor vehicle
containing flammable or combustible liquids or gas in its tank is stored, repaired
or kept.
GARAGE, PRIVATE, is a building or a portion of a building, not more than
I000 square feet in area, in which only motor vehicles used by the tenants of the
building or buildings on the premises are stored or kept. (See Section I 101.)
GARAGE, PUBLIC, is any garage other than a private garage.
GRADE (Adjacent Ground Elevation) is the lowest point of elevation of the
finished surface of the ground, paving or sidewalk within the area between the
building and the property line or, when the property line is more than 5 feet from
the building, between the building and a line 5 feet from the building.
GRADE (Lumber) is the classification of lumber in regard to strength and
utility.
GUARDRAIL is a system of building components located near the open sides
of elevated walking surfaces for the purpose of minimizing the possibility of an
accidental fall from the walking surface to the lower level.
GUEST is any person hiring or occupying a room for living or sleeping
purposes.
GUEST ROOM is any room or rooms used or intended to be used by a guest for
sleeping purposes. Every 100 square feet of superficial floor area in a dormitory
shall be considered to be a guest room.
H
Sec. 409. HABITABLE SPACE (ROOM) is space in a structure for living,
sleeping, eating or cooking. Bathrooms, toilet compartments, closets, halls,
storage or utility space, and similar areas, are not considered habitable space.
24
1988 EDITION 409
HANDLING is the deliberate transport of materials by any means to a point of

storage or use.
HAZARDOUS PRODUCTION MATERIAL (HPM) is a solid, liquid or gas
!ha1 has a degree of hazard rating in health, flammability or reactivity of 3 or 4 as
ranked by U .F. C. Standard No. 79-3 and which is used directly in research,
laboratory or production processes which have, as their end product, materials
which are not hazardous.
HEALTH HAZARD is a classification of a chemical for which there is
statistically significant evidence based on at least one study conducted in accord-
ance with established scientific principles that acute or chronic health effects may
occur in exposed persons. The term "health hazard" includes chemicals which
are carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic agents, reproductive toxins, irritants,
corrosives, sensitizers, hepatotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents which
act on the hematopoietic system, and agents which damage the lungs, skin, eyes
or mucous membranes.
HEIGHT OF BUILDING is the vertical distance above a reference datum
measured to the highest point of the coping of a flat roof or to the deck line of a
mansard roof or to the average height of the highest gable of a pitched or hipped
roof. The reference datum shall be selected by either of the following, whichever
yields a greater height of building:
I. The elevation of the highest adjoining sidewalk or ground surface within a
5-foot horizontal distance of the exterior wall of the building when such
sidewalk or ground surface is not more than I 0 feet above lowest grade.
2. An elevation 10 feet higher than the lowest grade when the sidewalk or
ground surface described in Item I above is more than I 0 feet above lowest
grade.
The height of a stepped or terraced building is the maximum height of any
segment of the building.
HELIPORT is an area of land or water or a structural surface which is used, or
intended for use, for the landing and takeoff of helicopters, and any appurtenant
areas which are used, or intended for use, for heliport buildings and other heliport
facilities.
HELISTOP is the same as a heliport, except that no refueling, maintenance,
repairs or storage of helicopters is permitted.
HIGHLY TOXIC MATERIAL is a material which produces a lethal dose or a
lethal concentration falls within any of the following categories:
I . A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD 50 ) of 50 milligrams or less per
kilogram of body weight when administered orally to albino rats weighing be-
tween 200 and 300 grams each.
2. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD 50 ) of 200 milligrams or less
per kilogram of body weight when administered by continuous contact for 24
hours (or less if death occurs within 24 hours) with the bare skin of albino rabbits
weighing between 2 and 3 kilograms each.
25
3. A chemical that has a median lethal concentration (LC 50 ) in air of200 parts
per million by volume or less of gas or vapor, or 2 milligrams per liter or less of
mist, fume or dust, when administered by continuous inhalation for one hour (or
fess if death occurs within one hour) to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300
grams each.
Mixtures of these materials with ordinary materials, such as water, may not
warrant a classification of highly toxic. While this system is basically simple in
application, any hazard evaluation which is required for the precise categorization
of this type of material shall be performed by experienced, technically competent
persons.
HORIZONTAL EXIT. See Section 3301 (b).
HOTEL is any building containing six or more guest rooms intended or
designed to be used, or which are used, rented or hired out to be occupied, or
which are occupied for sleeping purposes by guests.
HOT-WATER SUPPLY BOILER is a boiler having volume exceeding 120
gallons, or a heat input exceeding 200,000 Btu/h, or an operating temperature
exceeding 21 0°F. that provides hot water to be used externally to itself.
HPM STORAGE ROOM is a room used for the storage or dispensing of
hazardous production material (HPM) and which is classified as Group H,
Divisions 2, 3 or 7 Occupancies.
Sec. 410. IRRITANT is a chemical which is not corrosive but which causes a
reversible inflammatory effect on living tissue by chemical action at the site of
contact. A chemical is a skin irritant if, when tested on the intact skin of albino
rabbits by the methods of 16 CFR 1500.41 for four hours' exposure or by other
appropriate techniques, it results in an empirical score of 5 or more. A chemical is
an eye irritant if so determined under the procedure listed in 16 CFR 1500.42 or
other appropriate techniques.
J
Sec. 411. JURISDICTION, as used in this code, is any political subdivision
which adopts this code for administrative regulations within its sphere of author-
ity.
K
Sec. 412. No definitions.
L
Sec. 413. LINTEL is a structural member placed over an opening or a recess in
a wall and supporting construction above.
LIQUID is any material which has a fluidity greater than that of 300 penetra-
tion asphalt when tested in accordance with the Uniform Fire Code Standards.
26
1988 EDITION 413-415
When not otherwise identified, the term "liquid" is both flammable and combus-
tible liquids.
LIQUID STORAGE ROOM is a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy in which ))i
\'nc quantities of flammable or combustible liquids do not exceed the limits set
torth in the Fire Code.
LIQUID STORAGE WAREHOUSE is a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy jj
used for the storage of flammable or combustible liquids in an unopened condition
only in unlimited quantities.
LISTED and LISTING are terms referring to equipment and materials which
are shown in a list published by an approved testing agency, qualified and
equipped for experimental testing and maintaining an adequate periodic inspec-
tion of current productions and whose listing states that the equipment complies
with recognized safety standards.
LOADS. See Chapter 23.
LODGING HOUSE is any building or portion thereof containing not more
than five guest rooms where rent is paid in money, goods, labor or otherwise.
M
Sec. 414. MARQUEE is a permanent roofed structure attached to and sup-
ported by the building and projecting over public property. Marquees are regu-
lated in Chapter 45.
MASONRY is that form of construction composed of stone, brick, concrete,
gypsum, hollow clay tile, concrete block or tile or other similar building units or
materials or combination of these materials laid up unit by unit and set in mortar.
MASONRY, SOLID, is masonry of solid units built without hollow spaces.
MECHANICAL CODE is the Uniform Mechanical Code promulgated
jointly by the International Conference of Building Officials and the International
Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, as adopted by this jurisdic-
tion.
MEZZANINE or MEZZANINE FLOOR is an intermediate floor placed
within a room.
MOTEL shall mean hotel as defined in this code.
N
Sec. 415. NONCOMBUSTIBLE as applied to building construction material
means a material which, in the form in which it is used, is either one of the
following:
1. Material of which no part will ignite and burn when subjected to fire. Any
material conforming to U .B.C. Standard No. 4-1 shall be considered non-
combustible within the meaning of this section.
2. Material having a structural base of noncombustible material as defined in
Item No. 1 above, with a surfacing material not over lfs inch thick which has
a flame-spread rating of 50 or less.
27
"Noncombustible" does not apply to surface finish materials. Material re-

quired to be noncombustible for reduced clearances to flues, heating appliances or
other sources of high temperature shall refer to material conforming to Item No. \.
No material shall be classed as noncombustible which is subject to increase in
combustibility or flame-spread rating, beyond the limits herein established,
through the effects of age, moisture or other atmospheric condition.
Flame-spread rating as used herein refers to rating obtained according to tests
conducted as specified in U. B. C. Standard No. 42-1 .
0
Sec. 416. OCCUPANCY is the purpose for which a building, or part thereof, is
used or intended to be used.
ORIEL WINDOW is a window which projects from the main line of an
enclosing wall of a building and is carried on brackets or corbels.
OWNER is any person, agent, firm or corporation having a legal or equitable
interest in the property.
p
Sec. 417. PANIC HARDWARE. See Section 3301 (b).
PEDESTRIAN WALKWAY is a walkway used exclusively as a pedestrian
trafficway.
PERMIT is an official document or certificate issued by the building official
authorizing performance of a specified activity.
PERSON is a natural person, his heirs, executors, administrators or assigns,
and also includes a firm, partnership or corporation, its or their successors or
assigns, or the agent of any of the aforesaid.
PLASTIC MATERIALS, APPROVED, other than foam plastics regulated
under Sections 1705 (e) and 1712, are those having a self-ignition temperature
650°F. or greater when tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 52-3 and a
smoke-density rating not greater than 450 when tested in accordance with U. B.C.
Standard No. 42-1 , in the way intended for use, or a smoke-density rating no
greater than 75 when tested in the thickness intended for use by U .B.C. Standard
No. 52-2. Approved plastics shall be classified as either CCI or CC2, in accord-
ance with U.B.C. Standard No. 52-4.
PLATFORM. See Chapter 39.
PLUMBING CODE is the Uniform Plumbing Code promulgated by the
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials as adopted by
this jurisdiction.
PUBLIC WAY. See Section 3301 (b).
Q
28
1988 EDITION 419-422
R
Sec. 419. REPAIR is the reconstruction or renewal of any part of an existing
building for the purpose of its maintenance.
s
Sec. 420. SENSITIZER is a chemical that causes a substantial proportion of =~i
exposed people or animals to develop an allergic reaction in normal tissue after ,f.!.!.!
repeated exposure to the chemical. .

SERVICE CORRIDOR is a fully enclosed passage used for transporting
HPM and for purposes other than required exiting.
SHAFT is a vertical opening through a building for elevators, dumbwaiters,
mechanical equipment or similar purposes.
SHALL, as used in this code, is mandatory.
SMOKE DETECTOR is an approved device that senses visible or invisible
particles of combustion. The detector shall bear a label or other identification
issued by an approved testing agency having a service for inspection of materials
and workmanship at the factory during fabrication and assembly.
STAGE See Chapter 39.
STORY is that portion of a building included between the upper surface of any
floor and the upper surface of the floor next above, except that the topmost story
shall be that portion of a building included between the upper surface of the
topmost floor and the ceiling or roof above. If the finished floor level directly
above a usable or unused under-floor space is more than 6 feet above grade as
defined herein for more than 50 percent of the total perimeter or is more than 12
feet above grade as defined herein at any point, such usable or unused under-floor
space shall be considered as a story.
STORY, FIRST, is the lowest story in a building which qualifies as a story, as
defined herein, except that a floor level in a building having only one floor level
shall be classified as a first story, provided such floor level is not more than 4 feet
below grade, as defined herein, for more than 50 percent of the total perimeter, or
not more than 8 feet below grade, as defined herein, at any point.
STREET is any thoroughfare or public way not less than 16 feet in width which
has been dedicated or deeded to the public for public use.
STRUCTURE is that which is built or constructed, an edifice or building of
any kind, or any piece of work artificially built up or composed of parts joined
together in some definite manner.
T
u
Sec. 422. U.B.C. STANDARDS is the Uniform Building Code Standards
29
promulgated by the International Conference of Building Officials, as adopted by

this jurisdiction. (See Chapter 60.)
~
=~·. USE with reference to flammable or combustible liquids is the placing in.
action or service flammable or combustible liquids whereby flammable vapors
may be liberated to the atmosphere.
VSE w-ith reference to hazardous materials other than flammable or
combustible liquids is the placing in action or making available for service by
opening or connecting any container utilized for confinement of material whether
a solid, liquid or gas.
v
Sec. 423. VALUE or VALUATION of a building shall be the estimated cost to
replace the building and structure in kind, based on current replacement costs, as
determined in Section 304 (a).
VENEER. See Section 3002.
w
Sec. 424. WALLS shall be defined as follows:
Bearing Wall is any wall meeting either of the following classifications:
I . Any metal or wood stud wall which supports more than I 00 pounds per
lineal foot of superimposed load.
2. Any masonry or concrete wall which supports more than 200 pounds per
lineal foot superimposed load, or any such wall supporting its own weight
for more than one story.
Exterior Wall is any wall or element of a wall, or any member or group of
members, which defines the exterior boundaries or courts of a building and which
has a slope of 60 degrees or greater with the horizontal plane.
Faced Wall is a wall in which the masonry facing and backing are so bonded as
to exert a common action under load.
Non bearing Wall is any wall that is not a bearing wall.
Parapet Wall is that part of any wall entirely above the roof line.
Retaining Wall is a wall designed to resist the lateral displacement of soil or
other materials.
WATER HEATER is an appliance designed primarily to supply hot water and
is equipped with automatic controls limiting water temperature to a maximum of
2J0°F.
WEATHER-EXPOSED SURFACES are all surfaces of walls, ceilings,
floors, roofs, soffits and similar surfaces exposed to the weather, excepting the
following:
I. Ceilings and roof soffits enclosed by walls or by beams which extend a
minimum of 12 inches below such ceiling or roof soffits.
2. Walls or portions of walls within an unenclosed roof area, when located a
30
1988 EDITION 424-427
horizontal distance from an exterior opening equal to twice the height of the
opening.
3. Ceiling and roof soffits beyond a horizontal distance of 10 feet from the
outer edge of the ceiling or roof soffits.
X
y
Sec. 426. YARD is an open, unoccupied space, other than a court, unob-
structed from the ground to the sky, except where specifically provided by this
code, on the lot on which a building is situated.
z
31
Part III
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON OCCUPANCY
Chapter 5
CLASSIFICATION OF ALL BUILDINGS
BY USE OR OCCUPANCY AND GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL OCCUPANCIES
Occupancy Classified
Sec. 501. Every building, whether existing or hereafter erected, shall be
classified by the building official, according to its use or the character of its
occupancy, as a building of Group A, B, E, H, I, M orR as defined in Chapters 6,
7, 8, 9, 10, II and 12. (See Table No. 5-A.)
Any occupancy not mentioned specifically or about which there is any question
shall be classified by the building official and included in the group which its use
most nearly resembles, based on the existing or proposed life and fire hazard.
Change In Use
Sec. 502. No change shall be made in the character of occupancies or use of any
building which would place the building in a different division of the same group
of occupancy or in a different group of occupancies, unless such building is made
to comply with the requirements of this code for such division or group of
occupancy.
EXCEPTION: The character of the occupancy of existing buildings may be
changed subject to the approval of the building official, and the building may be
occupied for purposes in other groups without conforming to all the requirements of
this code for those groups, provided the new or proposed use is less hazardous, based
on life and fire risk, than the existing use.
No change in the character of occupancy of a building shall be made without a
Certificate of Occupancy, as required in Section 307 of this code. The building
official may issue a Certificate of Occupancy pursuant to the intent of the above
exception without certifying that the building complies with all provisions of this
code.
Mixed Occupancy
Sec. 503. (a) General. When a building is used for more than one occupancy
purpose, each part of the building comprising a distinct "Occupancy," as de-
scribed in Chapters 5 through 12, shall be separated from any other occupancy as
specified in Section 503 (d).
EXCEPTIONS: I. Where an approved spray booth constructed in accordance
with the Fire Code is installed, such booth need not be separated from other Group H
Occupancies or from Group B Occupancies.
32
1988 EDITION 503
2. The following occupancies need not be separated from the uses to which they
are accessory:
A. Assembly rooms having a floor area of not over 750 square feet.
B. Administrative and clerical offices and similar rooms which do not exceed 25
percent of the floor area of the major use when not related to Group H,
Division 2 and Group H, Division 3 Occupancies.
C. Gift shops, administrative offices and similar rooms in Group R, Division l
Occupancies not exceeding 10 percent of the floor area of the major use.
D. The kitchen serving the dining area of which it is a part.
3. An occupancy separation need not be provided between a Group R, Division 3
Occupancy and a carport having no enclosed uses above, provided the carport is
entirely open on two or more sides.
4. A Group B, Division I Occupancy used exclusively for the parking or storage
of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles need not be separated from a Group B,
Division 3 Occupancy open parking garage as defined in Section 709.
When a building houses more than one occupancy, each portion of the building
shall conform to the requirements for the occupancy housed therein. The area of
the building shall be such that the sum of the ratios of the actual area for each
separate occupancy divided by the total allowable area for each separate occu-
pancy shall not exceed one.
Where minor accessory uses do not occupy more than I0 percent of the area of
any floor of a building, nor more than the basic area permitted in the occupancy by
Table No. 5-C for such minor use, for the purpose of determining allowable area
the major use of the building shall determine the occupancy classification,
provided the uses are separated as specified in Section 503 (d).
An occupancy shall not be located above the story or height set forth in Table
No. 5-D, except as provided in Section 507. When a mixed occupancy building
contains a Group H, Division 6 Occupancy, the portion containing the Group H,
Division 6 Occupancy shall not exceed three stories nor 55 feet in height.
(b) Forms of Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall be verti-
cal or horizontal or both or, when necessary, of such other form as may be required
to afford a complete separation between the various occupancy divisions in the
building.
Where the occupancy separation is horizontal, structural members supporting
the separation shall be protected by equivalent fire-resistive construction.
(c) JYpes of Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall be classed
as "four-hour fire-resistive," "three-hour fire-resistive," "two-hour fire-
resistive," and "one-hour fire-resistive." (See U .B.C. Standard No. 43-7 for fire
dampers in air ducts piercing occupancy separations.)
I. A "four-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation" shall have no openings
therein and shall be of not less than four-hour fire-resistive construction.
2. A "three-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation" shall be of not less than
three-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings in walls forming such separa-
tion shall be protected by a fire assembly having a three-hour fire-protection
rating. The total width of all openings in any three-hour fire-resistive occupancy
separation wall in any one story shall not exceed 25 percent of the length of the
33
wall in that story and no single opening shall have an area greater than 120 square
feet.
All openings in floors forming a "three-hour fire-resistive occupancy separa-
tion" shall be protected by vertical enclosures extending above and below sue\'\
openings. The walls of such vertical enclosures shall be of not less than two-hour
fire-resistive construction and all openings therein shall be protected by a fire
assembly having a one and one-half-hour fire-protection rating.
3. A "two-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation" shall be of not less than
two-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings in such separation shall be
protected by a fire assembly having a one and one-half-hour fire-protection
rating.
4. A "one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation" shall be of not less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings in such separation shall be
protected by a fire assembly having a one-hour fire-protection rating.
(d) Fire Ratings for Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall be
provided between the various groups and divisions of occupancies as set forth in
Table No. 5-B.
EXCEPTIONS: I. A three-hour occupancy separation may be used between a
Group A, Division I or a Group I Occupancy and a Group B, Division I Occupancy
used exclusively for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles
and provided no repair or fueling is done. A two-hour occupancy separation may be
used between a Group A, Division 2, 2.1, 3 or 4 orE Occupancy and a Group B,
Division I Occupancy that is used exclusively for the parking or storage of private or
pleasure-type motor vehicles and provided no repair or fueling is done.
2. Unless required by Section 702 (a), the three-hour occupancy separation
between a Group R, Division I Occupancy and a Group B, Division I Occupancy
used only for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles with
no repair or fueling may be reduced to two hours. Such occupancy separation may be
further reduced to one hour where the area of such Group B, Division I Occupancy
does not exceed 3000 square feet.
3. In the one-hour occupancy separation between a Group R, Division 3 and M
Occupancy, the separation may be limited to the installation of materials approved
for one-hour fire-resistive construction on the garage side and a self-closing, tight-
fitting solid wood door J3fs inches in thickness will be permitted in lieu of a one-hour
fire assembly. Fire dampers need not be installed in air ducts passing through the
wall, floor or ceiling separating a Group R, Division 3 Occupancy from a Group M
Occupancy, provided such ducts within the Group M Occupancy are constructed of
steel having a thickness not less than 0.019 inch (No. 26 galvanized sheet gauge) and
have no openings into the Group M Occupancy.
Location on Property
Sec. 504. (a) General. Buildings shall adjoin or have access to a public way or
yard on not less than one side. Required yards shall be permanently maintained.
For the purpose of this section, the center line of an adjoining public way shall
be considered an adjacent property line.
Eaves over required windows shall be not less than 30 inches from the side and
rear property lines. For eaves, see Section 1710.
34
1988 EDITION 504-505
(b) Fire Resistance of Walls. Exterior walls shall have fire resistance and
opening protection as set forth in Table No. 5-A, Part III, and in accordance with
such additional provisions as are set forth in Part IV and Part VII. Distance shall
be measured at right angles from the property line. The above provisions shall not
a"Q"Q\)' to walls at right angles to the property line.
Projections beyond the exterior wall shall not extend beyond:
I. A point one-third the distance to the property line from an exterior wall; or
2. A point one-third the distance to the property line from an assumed vertical l
plane located where fire-resistive protection of openings is first required
due to location on property;
whichever is the least restrictive.
When openings in exterior walls are required to be protected due to distance
from property line, the sum of the area of such openings shall not exceed 50
percent of the total area of the wall in each story.
(c) Buildings on Same Property and Buildings Containing Courts. For the
purposes of determining the required wall and opening protection and roof-
covering requirements, buildings on the same property and court walls of build-
ings over one story in height shall be assumed to have a property line between
them.
EXCEPTION: In court walls where opening protection is required such protec-
tion may be omitted, provided (I) not more than two levels open into the court, (2)
the aggregate area of the building including the court is within the allowable area and
(3) the building is not classified as a Group I Occupancy.
When a new building is to be erected on the same property as an existing
building, the location of the assumed property line with relation to the existing
building shall be such that the exterior wall and opening protection of the existing
building meet the criteria as set forth in Table No. 5-A and Part IV.
EXCEPTION: Two or more buildings on the same property may be considered
as portions of one building if the aggregate area of such buildings is within the limits
specified in Section 505 for a single building.
When the buildings so considered house different occupancies or are of different
types of construction, the area shall be that allowed for the most restricted occupancy
or construction.
Allowable Floor Areas

Sec. 505. (a) One-story Areas. The area of a one-story building shall not
exceed the limits set forth in Table No. 5-C except as provided in Section 506. For
mixed occupancies, see Section 503 (a).
(b) Areas of Buildings Over One Story. The total combined floor area for
multistory buildings may be twice that permitted by Table No. 5-C for one-story
buildings, and the floor area of any single story shall not exceed that permitted for
a one-story building. For mixed occupancies, see Section 503 (a).
(c) Mezzanines. Unless considered as a separate story, the floor area of all
mezzanines shall be included in calculating the allowable floor area of the stories
in which the mezzanines are located.
35
(d) Basements. A basement need not be included in the total allowable area,
provided such basement does not exceed the area permitted for a one-story
building.
(e) Area Separation Walls. Each portion of a building separated by one or
more area separation walls may be considered a separate building, provided the
area separation walls meet the following requirements:
I. Area separation walls shall be not less than four-hour fire-resistive -.:m-.-
struction in TYpes I, 11-F.R., III and IV buildings and two-hour fire-resistive
construction in TYpes II One-hour, 11-N or V buildings. The total width of all
openings in such walls shall not exceed 25 percent of the length of the wall in each
story. All openings shall be protected by a fire assembly having a three-hour fire-
protection rating in four-hour fire-resistive walls and one and one-half-hour fire-
protection rating in two-hour fire-resistive walls.
2. Area separation walls shall extend to the outer edges of horizontal project-
ing elements such as balconies, roof overhangs, canopies, marquees or architec-
tural projections.
EXCEPTION: When horizontal projecting elements do not contain concealed
spaces, the area separation wall may terminate at the exterior wall.
When the horizontal projecting elements contain concealed spaces, the area
separation wall need only extend through the concealed space to the outer edges of
the projecting elements.
The exterior walls and the projecting elements above shall be of not less than one-
hour fire-resistive construction for a distance not less than the depth of the projecting
elements on both sides of the area separation wall. Openings within such widths shall
be protected by fire assemblies having a fire-protection rating of not less than three-
fourths hour.
3. Area separation walls shall extend from the foundation to a point at least 30
inches above the roof.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Area separation walls may terminate at the underside of the
roof sheathing, deck or slab, provided the roof-ceiling assembly is of at least two-
hour fire-resistive construction.
2. Two-hour area separation walls may terminate at the underside of the roof
sheathing, deck or slab, provided:
A. Where the roof-ceiling framing elements are parallel to the walls, such
framing and elements supporting such framing shall be of not less than one-
hour fire-resistive construction for a width of not less than 5 feet on each side
of the wall.
B. Where roof-ceiling framing elements are perpendicular to the wall, the entire
span of such framing and elements supporting such framing shall be of not less
than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
C. Openings in the roof shall not be located within 5 feet of the area separation
wall.
D. The entire building shall be provided with not less than a Class B roof covering
as specified in Table No. 32-A or a special purpose roof complying with
II Section 3204 (e).
3. Two-hour area separation walls may terminate at roofs of entirely noncombus-
tible construction.
36
1988 EDITION 505-506
4. Parapets of area separation walls shall have noncombustible faces for the
uppermost 18 inches, including counterflashing and coping materials.
5. Where an area separation wall separates portions of a building having
different heights, such wall may terminate at a point 30 inches above the lower
roof level, provided the exterior wall for a height of 10 feet above the lower roof is
of one-hour fire-resistive construction with openings protected by assemblies
having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
EXCEPTION: The area separation wall may terminate at the underside of the
roof sheathing, deck or slab of the lower roof, provided:
A. Where the roof-ceiling framing elements are parallel to the wall, such framing
and elements supporting such framing shall be of not less than one-hour fire-
resistive construction for a width of I 0 feet along the wall at the lower roof.
B. Where the lower roof-ceiling framing elements are perpendicular to the wall,
the entire span of such framing and elements supporting such framing shall be
of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
C. Openings in the lower roof shall not be located within 10 feet of the area
separation wall.
See Chapters 6 to 12 inclusive for special occupancy provisions.
Allowable Area Increases

Sec. 506. (a) General. The floor areas specified in Section 505 may be
increased by one of the following:
I . Separation on two sides. Where public ways or yards more than 20 feet in
width extend along and adjoin two sides of the building, floor areas may be
increased at a rate of Jl/4 percent for each foot by which the minimum width
exceeds 20 feet, but the increase shall not exceed 50 percent.
2. Separation on three sides. Where public ways or yards more than 20 feet in
width extend along and adjoin three sides of the building, floor areas may be
increased at a rate of 21/z percent for each foot by which the minimum width
exceeds 20 feet, but the increase shall not exceed 100 percent.
3. Separation on all sides. Where public ways or yards more than 20 feet in
width extend on all sides of a building and adjoin the entire perimeter, floor areas
may be increased at a rate of 5 percent for each foot by which the minimum
exceeds 20 feet. Such increases shall not exceed 100 percent, except that greater
increases shall be permitted for the following occupancies:
A. Group B, Division 3 aircraft storage hangars not exceeding one story in
height.
B. Group B, Division 4 Occupancies not exceeding two stories in height.
C. Group H, Division 5 aircraft repair hangars not exceeding one story in
height. Area increases shall not exceed 500 percent for aircraft repair
hangars except as provided in Section 506 (b).
(b) Unlimited Area. The area of any one- or two-story building of Group B and
Group H, Division 5 Occupancies shall not be limited, if the building is provided
with an approved automatic sprinkler system throughout, as specified in Chapter
37
38, and entirely surrounded and adjoined by public ways or yards not less than 60
feet in width.
The area of a Group B, Division 4 Occupancy in a one-story TYpe II, Type III
One-hour or TYpe IV building shall not be limited if the building is entirely
surrounded and adjoined by public ways or yards not less than 60 feet in width.
(c) Automatic Sprinkler Systems. The areas specified in Table No. 5-C and
Section 505 (b) may be tripled in one-story buildings and doubled in buildings of
more than one story if the building is provided with an approved automatic
sprinkler system throughout. The area increases permitted in this subsection may
be compounded with that specified in paragraphs I, 2 or 3 of Subsection (a) of this
section. The increases permitted in this subsection shall not apply when automatic
sprinkler systems are installed under the following provisions:
I. Section 507 for an increase in allowable number of stories.
::;;
i 2. Section 3802 (f) for Group H, Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies.
3. Substitution for one-hour fire-resistive construction pursuant to Section
508.
4. Section 1715, Atria.
Maximum Height of Buildings and Increases

Sec. 507. The maximum height and number of stories of every building shall be
dependent upon the character of the occupancy and the type of construction and
shall not exceed the limits set forth in Table No. 5-D, except as provided in this
section and as specified in Section 503 (a) for mixed occupancy buildings.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Towers, spires and steeples erected as a part of a building and
not used for habitation or storage are limited as to height only by structural design if
completely of noncombustible materials, or may extend not to exceed 20 feet above
the height limit in Table No. 5-D if of combustible materials.
2. The height of one-story aircraft hangars shall not be limited if the building is
provided with automatic sprinkler systems throughout as specified in Chapter 38 and
is entirely surrounded by public ways or yards not less in width than one and one-half
times the height of the building.
The story limits set forth in Table No. 5-D may be increased by one story if the
building is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system throughout.
The increase in the number of stories for automatic sprinkler systems shall not
apply when the automatic sprinkler systems throughout are installed under the
following provisions:
[ I. Section 3802 (f) for Group H, Divisions I, 2, 3, 6 and 7 Occupancies.
2. Section 506, for an increase in allowable area.
3. Substitution for one-hour fire-resistive construction pursuant to Section
508.
4. Section 1715, Atria.
:[~ 5. Section 3802 (g) for Group I, Division I Occupancies used for hospitals or
38
1988 EDITION 507-509
nursing homes in Type II One-hour; Type III One-hour; Type IV or Type V One-
hour construction.
See Chapters 6 to 12 inclusive for special occupancy provisions.
Fire-resistive Substitution
Sec. 508. Where one-hour fire-resistive construction throughout is required by
this code, an approved automatic sprinkler system, as specified in Chapter 38,
may be substituted, provided such system is not otherwise required throughout
the building.
EXCEPTION: Such substitution shall not waive nor reduce required fire-
resistive construction for:
I. Occupancy separations [Section 503 (c)].
2. Exterior wall protection due to proximity of property lines [Section 504 (b)].
3. Area separations [Section 505 (e)].
4. Dwelling Unit Separations [Section 1202 (b)]. !,!,!
5. Shaft enclosures (Section 1706).
6. Corridors [Section 3305 (g) and (h)].
7. Stair enclosures (Section 3309).
8. Exit passageways [Section 3312 (a)].
9. Type of construction separation (Section 1701 ).
10. Atria constructed in accordance with Section 1715.
Pedestrian walkways
Sec. 509. (a) General. A pedestrian walkway shall be considered a building
when determining the roof covering permitted by Table No. 32-A. Pedestrian
walkways connecting separate buildings need not be considered as buildings and
need not be considered in the determination of the allowable floor area of the
connected buildings when the pedestrian walkway complies with the provisions
of this section.
(b) Construction. Pedestrian walkways shall be constructed of noncombusti-
ble materials.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Pedestrian walkways connecting buildings ofType III, IV or
V construction may be constructed of one-hour fire-resistive construction or of
heavy timber construction in accordance with Section 2106.
2. Pedestrian walkways located on grade having both sides open by at least 50
percent and connecting buildings of Type III, IV or V construction may be con-
structed with any materials allowed by this code.
(c) Openings Between Pedestrian Walkways and Buildings. Openings from
buildings to pedestrian walkways shall conform to the requirements of Table No.
5-A and Sections 1803 (b), 1903 (b), 2003 (b), 2103 (b) and 504 (c). In addition
pedestrian walkways connecting buildings shall be either provided with opening
protection at connections to buildings in accordance with Section 3305 (h) or
constructed with both sides of the pedestrian walkway at least 50 percent open
with the open area distributed so as to prevent the accumulation of smoke and toxic
gases.
39
(d) Width. The unobstructed width of pedestrian walkways shall be not less
than 44 inches. The total width of a pedestrian walkway shall not exceed 30 feet.
(e) Maximum Length. The length of a pedestrian walkway shall not exceed
300 feet.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Pedestrian walkways that are fully sprinklered may be 400
feet in length.
2. Unenclosed walkways at grade.
(f) Multiple Pedestrian Walkways. The distance between any two pedestrian
walkways on the same horizontal plane shall be not less than 40 feet.
(g) Required Exits. Pedestrian walkways at other than grade shall not be used
as required exits. Pedestrian walkways at grade level used as required exits shall
provide an unobstructed means of egress to a public way and shall have a
minimum width in accordance with Section 3303 (b).
EXCEPTION: Pedestrian walkways conforming to the requirements of a hori-
zontal exit may be used as a required exit.
(h) Pedestrian Walkways Over Public Streets. Pedestrian walkways over
public streets shall be subject to the approval of local jurisdictions.
Sanitation
Sec. 510. (a) Water Closet Room Separation. A room in which a water closet
is located shall be separated from food preparation or storage rooms by a tight-
fitting door.
(b) Floors and Walls in Water Closet Compartment and Showers. In other
than dwelling units, toilet room floors shall have a smooth, hard, nonabsorbent
surface such as portland cement, concrete, ceramic tile or other approved material
which extends upward onto the walls at least 5 inches. Walls within water closet
compartments and walls within 2 feet of the front and sides of urinals shall be
similarly finished to a height of 4 feet and, except for structural elements, the
materials used in such walls shall be of a type which is not adversely affected by
moisture. See Section 4712 for other limitations.
In all occupancies, accessories such as grab bars, towel bars, paper dispensers
and soap dishes, etc., provided on or within walls, shall be installed and sealed to
protect structural elements from moisture.
Showers in all occupancies shall be finished as specified above to a height of
not less than 70 inches above the drain inlet. Materials other than structural
elements used in such walls shall be of a type which is not adversely affected by
moisture. See Section 4 712 for other limitations.
Access to Toilets and Other Facilities

Sec. 511. (a) Access to Water Closets. Each water closet stool shall be located
in a clear space not less than 30 inches in width and have a clear space in front of
the water closet stool of not less than 24 inches.
Where toilet facilities are provided on any floor where access by the physically
handicapped is required by Table No. 33-A, at least one such facility for each sex
40
1988 EDITION 511
or a separate facility usable by either sex shall comply with the requirement of this
section. Except in dwelling units and guest rooms, such facilities must be availa-
ble to all occupants and both sexes. All doorways leading to such toilet rooms
shall have a clear and unobstructed width of not less than 32 inches. Each such
toilet room shall have the following:
I. A clear space of not less than 44 inches on each side of doors providing
access to toilet rooms. This distance shall be measured at right angles to the
face of the door when in the closed position. Not more than one door may
encroach into the 44-inch space.
2. Except in dwelling units and guest rooms, a clear space within the toilet
room of sufficient size to inscribe a circle with a diameter not less than 60
inches. Doors in any position may encroach into this space by not more than
12 inches.
3. A clear space not less than 42 inches wide and 48 inches long in front of at
least one water closet stool for the use of the handicapped. When such water
closet stool is within a compartment, entry to the compartment shall have a
clear width of 32 inches when located at the end and a clear width of 34
inches when located at the side. A door, if provided, shall not encroach into
the required space in front of the water closet. Except for door swing, a clear
unobstructed access not less than 48 inches in width shall be provided to
toilet compartments designed for use by the handicapped.
4. The heightofwaterclosets shall be 17 to 19 inches measured to the topofthe
seat. Seats shall not be sprung to return to a lifted position.
5. Grab bars near each side or one side and the back of the toilet stool securely
attached at a height to the top of bar of 33 inches to 36 inches above and
parallel to the floor. Grab bars at the side shall be 42 inches long with the
front end positioned 24 inches in front of the water closet stool. Grab bars at
the back shall be not less than 24 inches long for room installations and 36
inches long where the water closet is installed in a stall. Grab bars shall have
an outside diameter of not less than Jl/4 inch nor more than 1112 inches and
shall provide a clearance of ]1/2 inches between the grab bar and adjacent
surface. Grab bars need not be provided in Group R, Division I apartment
houses.
6. When it can be established that the facilities are usable by a person in a
wheelchair, dimensions other than those above shall be acceptable.
(b) Access to Lavatories, Mirrors and Towel Fixtures. In other than Group
R, Division 3; Group M; Group R, Division I apartment houses and Group B,
Divisions 2 and 4 storage occupancies, toilet room facilities shall be as follows:
I. Except for the projection of bowls and waste piping, a clear unobstructed
space 30 inches in width, 29 inches in height and 17 inches in depth shall be
provided under at least one lavatory.
2. Where mirrors are provided, at least one shall be installed so that the bottom
of the mirror is within 40 inches of the floor.
3. Where towel and disposal fixtures are provided, they shall be accessible to
41
the physically handicapped and at least one shall be within 40 inches of the
floor.
(c) Water Fountains. Where water fountains are provided, at least one shall
have a spout within 33 inches of the floor and shall have up-front, hand-operated
controls. When fountains are located in an alcove, the alcove shall be not less than
32 inches in width.
f.tJ) Thkphones. Where public telephones are provided, at least one shall be
installed so that the handset, dial and coin receiver are within 54 inches of the
floor. Unobstructed access within 12 inches of the telephone shall be provided.
Such access shall be not less than 30 inches in width.
Compressed Gases
Sec. 512. The storage and handling of compressed gases shall comply with the
Fire Code.
Premises Identification
Sec. 513. Approved numbers or addresses shall be provided for all new
buildings in such a position as to be plainly visible and legible from the street or
road fronting the property.
42
TABLE NO. 5-A-WALL AND OPENING PROTECTION OF OCCUPANCIES BASED ON LOCATION ON PROPERTY
TYPES II ONE-HOUR, 11-N AND V CONSTRUCTION: For exterior wall and opening protection of Types II One-hour, 11-N and V
bulldlng_s, see table below and Sections 504, 709, 1903 and 2203.
This table does not apply to 1\'pes I 11-F R., Ill and IV construction see Sections 1803 1903 2003 and 2103
' ' '
FIRE RESISTANCE OF ' OPENINGS IN
GROUP DESCRIPTION OF OCCUPANCY EXTERIOR WALLS EXTERIOR WALLS
!-Any assembly building or portion of a building with a legitimate stage and an
occupant load of l 000 or more. Not applicable (See Sections 602 and 603)
2-Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with an
A occupant load of less than 1000 and a legitimate stage 2 hours less than 10 Not permitted less than
2.1-Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with an feet, I hour less than 5 feet
See also occupant load of 300 or more without a legitimate stage, including such 40 feet Protected less than
Section buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a GroupE !Ofeet
602 or Group B, Division 2 Occupancy
3----Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room with an
occupant load of less than 300 without a legitimate stage, including such 2 hours less than 5 Not permitted less than
buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a GroupE or feet, I hour less than 5 feet
Group B, Division 2 Occupancy 40 feet Protected less than 10 feet
4-Stadiums, reviewing stands and amusement park structures not included
within other Group A Occupancies I hour less than 10 feet Protected less than 10 feet
I -Gasoline service stations, garages where no repair work is done except
exchange of parts and maintenance requiring no open flame, welding, or use
of Class I, II or Ill-A liquids
B
2-Drinking and dining establishments having an occupant load of less than 50, Not permitted less than 5
See also wholesale and retail stores, office buildings, printing plants, municipal police I hour less than 20 feet feet
Section and fire stations, factories and workshops using material not highly flamma- Protected less than 10 feet
702 ble or combustible, storage and sales rooms for combustible goods, paint
stores without bulk handling
Buildings or portions of buildings having rooms used for educational pur-
poses, beyond the 12th grade, with less than 50 occupants in any room
(Continued)
...
TABLE NO. 5-A-Contlnued
TYPES II ONE-HOUR, 11-N AND V ONLY
FIRE RESISTANCE OF OPENINGS IN
GROUP DESCRIPTION OF OCCUPANCY EXTERIOR WALLS EXTERIOR WALLS
B 3---Aircraft hangars where no repair work is done except exchange of parts and 1 hour less than 20 feet Not permitted less than
maintenance requiring no open flame, welding, or the use of Class I or Il 5 feet
(Cont.)
liquids Protected less than 20 feet
Open parking garages (For requirements, See Section 709.)
Helistops
4-lce plants, power plants, pumping plants, cold storage and creameries
Factories and workshops using noncombustible and nonexplosive materials 1 hour less than 5 feet Not permitted less than
Storage and sales rooms of noncombustible and nonexplosive materials that 5 feet
are not packaged or crated in or supported by combustible material
E 1-Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade by 50 or
more persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one day 2 hours less than 5 Not permitted less than
See also feet, 1 hour less than
Section 2-Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade by less 5 feet
than 50 persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one day 10 feet' Protected less than 10 c:
802
feet 1 1!:
3-Any building used for day-care purposes for more than six children "'II
0
::0
H See Chapter 9 ;:
...
1Group E, DIVISions ttl
2 and 3 Occupancies havmg an occupant load of not more than 20 may have extenor wall and opemng protectiOn as reqmred for 5
Group R, Division 3 Occupancies. r-
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
-
!m
I !-Nurseries for the full-time care of children under the age of six (each accom- 2 hours Jess than 5 c
modating more than five persons) feet, I hour elsewhere
See also
Hospitals, sanitariums, nursing homes with nonambulatory patients and
3
Section
1002 similar buildings (each accommodating more than five persons) Not permitted less than 5 ~
feet
2-Nursing homes for ambulatory patients, homes for children six years of age or I hour
Protected less than 10 feet
over (each accommodating more than five persons)
3-M ental hospitals, mental sanitariums, jails, prisons, reformatories and 2 hours less than 5 Not permitted less than
buildings where personal liberties of inmates are similarly restrained feet, I hour elsewhere 5 feet, protected less than
10 feet
M' !-Private garages, carports, sheds and agricultural buildings I hour less than 3 feet Not permitted less than
(See also Section llOI, Division L) (or may be protected 3 feet
on the exterior with
materials approved for
1-hour fire-resistive
construction)
2-Fences over 6 feet high, tanks and towers Not regulated for fire resistance
R !-Hotels and apartment houses 1 hour less than 5 feet Not permitted less than
See also Convents and monasteries (each accommodating more than 10 persons) 5 feet
Section 3---Dwellings and lodging houses 1 hour less than 3 feet Not permitted less than
1202 3 feet
'for agricultural buildings, see Appendix Chapter II.
NOfES: (I) See Section 504 for types of walls affected and requirements covering percentage of openings permitted in exterior walls.
(2) For additional restrictions, see chapters under Occupancy and Types of Construction.
(3) For walls facing yards and public ways, see Part IV.
(4) Openings shall be protected by a fire assembly having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
TABLE NO. 5-8-REQUIRED SEPARATION IN BUILDINGS OF MIXED OCCUPANCY
(In Hours)
A·1 A·2 A-2.1 A-3 A-4 B·1 B-2 B-3 B-4 E H-1 H-2 H-3 H-4·5 H-6-7 1 I M• R·1 R·3
A-1 N N N N 4 3 3 3 N 4 4 4 4 3 I I I
A·2 N N N N 3 I I I N 4 4 4 4 3 1 1 I
A-2.1 N N N N 3 1 1 1 N z 4 4 4 4 3 1 1 1 :;·,
!a
A·3 N N N N 3 N 1 N N ;p 4 4 4 3 3 I 1 1
A-4
B-1
N
4
N
3
N
3
N
3 3
3 1
1
1
1
1
1
N
3
4
2
4
I
~·
4
I
4
I
3
4
1
I
1
3'
1
I
Co.
1 I I I I :;· I I I 2 I I I
8-2 3 I N I 2
3:::
B-3 3 1 I I I I 1 I I ;;· 2 1 1 I 4 I I I
B-4 3 1 1 N I I 1 1 I "Co. 2 I 1 I 4 N I I
0r.
E N N N N N 3 I 1 1 r. 4 4 4 3 I I 1 I
~
.,
H-1 Not Permitted in Mixed Occupancies. See Chapter 9. ~
~
r.
H-2 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 ~· 1 1 2 4 I 4 4
~
H-3 4 4 4 4 4 I I 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 I 3 3
H-4-5 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 4 ""'
":T
n I I 1 4 1 3 3
c:
H-6-7' 4 4 4 3 4 1 1 1 1 3 ~
2 1 1 4 3 4 4 z
1 3 3 3 3 3 4 2 4 4 1 ~ 4 4 4 4 I I I 2i
M• I I I I I I I I N I "' I I I 3 I I I
:JJ
!!:
33 til
R-1 I I I I I I I I I 4 3 3 4 I I N c:
R-3 I I I I I I I I I I 4 3 3 4 I I N
~z
Note: For detailed requirements and exceptions. see Section 503. Cl
0
tfor special provisions on highly toxic materials, see Fire Code. 0
'For agricultural buildings, see also Appendix Chapter II. c
m
3for reduction in fire-resistive rating, see Section 503 (d).
~
TABLE NO. 5-C-BASIC ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA FOR BUILDINGS ONE STORY IN HEIGHT'
(In Square Feet)
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
...:gm
c
I II I Ill I IV I v 3
OCCUPANCY F.R. F.R. OHE·HOUR j_ N l ONE·HOUR j N I H.T. I ONE-HOUR I N 0
A· I Unlimited 29.900 Not Pcrmilled
z
A) 2-2.1 Unlimited 29.900 13.500 Not 13,500 Not 13,500 10,500 Not
Permitted Permitted Permitted
A) 3-42 Unlimited 29,900 13.500 9,100 13,500 9,100 13,500 10.500 6,000
B) 1-2-3' Unlimited 39,900 18,000 12.000 18,000 12,000 18,000 14,000 8,000
B-4 Unlimited 59,900 27,000 18,000 27,000 18,000 27,000 21,000 12,000
E Unlimited 45,200 20,200 13.500 20,200 13,500 20,200 15.700 9,100
H-1 15,000 12,400 5,600 3, 700 Not Permitted
H-2' 15,000 12,400 5,600 3. 700 5,600 3,700 5,600 4,400 2,500
H-3-4-5' Unlimited 24,800 11,200 7.500 11,200 7,500 11,200 8,800 5,100
H-6-7 Unlimited 39,900 18,000 12,000 18,000 12,000 18,000 I 4,000 8,000
I) 1-2 Unlimited 15.100 6,800 Not 6.800 Not 6,800 5,200 Not
PermittedR Permitted Permitted
1-3 Unlimited 15,100 Not Permitted 5
w See Chapter I I
R-1 Unlimited \29,900\ 13,500 9.100 7 13,500 9,1007 \13,500 10,500 6,0007
R-3 Unlimited
lformulttstory bulidmgs. see Sect1on 505 (b).
Zfor limitations and exceptions, see Section 602 (a).
3For open parking garages, see Section 709. N-No requirements for fire resistance
4See Section 903. F.R.-Fire Resistive
5See Section I002 (b) H.T.-Heav)' Timber
f>For agricultural buildings, see also Appendix Chapter 11. U1
~ Tfor limitations and exceptions, see Section 1202 (b) 0
&Jn hospitals and nursing homes. see Section 1002 (a) for exception.
'f'
c
TABLE NO 5-0-MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF BUILDINGS
I II I Ill IV J y
OCCUPANCY F.R. F.R. ONE-HOUR N I ONE-HOUR I N H.T. I ONE-HOUR N
MAXIMUM HEIGHT IN FEET
Unlimited 160 65 55 I 65 55 65 50 40
MAXIMUM HEIGHT IN STORIES
A-1 Unlimited 4 Not Permitted
A) 2-2.1 Unlimited 4 2 Not 2 Not 2 2 Not
A) 3-4 1 Unlimited 12 2 I 2 I 2 2 I
B) 1-2-3 2 Unlimited 12 4 2 4 2 4 3 2
B-4 Unlimited 12 4 2 4 2 4 3 2
E' Unlimited 4 2 I 2 I 2 2 I
H-1 4
H-2'
I
Unlimited
I
2
I
I
I
I I I
Not Permitted
I 1 I I
II
H-3-4-5 4 Unlimited 5 2 l 2 I 2 2 I
H-6-7 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 I
1-1' Unlimited 3 I Not I Not I I Not
1-2 Unlimited 3 2 Not 2 Not 2 2 Not c:
~
1-3 Unlimited 2 Not Permitted6 z
C)
M' See Chapter II
0
R-1 Unlimited 12 4 2' I 4 I 2' 4 3 2' g
R-3 Unlimited 3 3 3 I 3 I 3 3 I 3 3 m
!for limitations and exceptions, see Section 602 (a). N-No requirements for fire resistance
2for open parking garages, see Section 709. F.R.-Fire Resistive
3See Section 802 (c). H.T.-Heavy Timber
4See Section 902.
5See Section 1002 (a) for exception to the number of stories in hospitals and nursing homes.
6See Section 1002 (b).
'For agricultural buildings, see also Appendix Chapter 11.
SFor limitations and exceptions, see Section 1202 (b).
...
CQ
'I'
c
601·602 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
ChapterS
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP A OCCUPANCIES
Group A Occupancies Defined
Sec. 6tH. Group A Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Any assembly building or portion of a building with a legitimate
stage and an occupant load of 1000 or more.
Division 2. Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room
with an occupant load of less than 1000 and a legitimate stage.
Division 2.1. Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room
with an occupant load of 300 or more without a legitimate stage, including such
buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a Group Eor Group B,
Division 2 Occupancy.
Division 3. Any building or portion of a building having an assembly room
with an occupant load of less than 300 without a legitimate stage, including such
buildings used for educational purposes and not classed as a GroupE or Group B,
Division 2 Occupancy.
Division 4. Stadiums, reviewing stands and amusement park structures not
included within other Group A Occupancies. Specific and general requirements
for grandstands, bleachers and reviewing stands are to be found in Chapter 33.
For occupancy separations, see Table No. 5-B.
Construction, Height and Allowable Area

Sec. 602. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group A
because of the usc or character of the occupancy shall be limited to the types of
construction set forth in Tables No. 5-C and No. 5-D and shall not exceed, in area
or height, the limits specified in Sections 505. 506 and 507.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Grandstands, bleachers or reviewing stands ofType Ill One-
hour, Type IV or Type V One-hour construction shall not exceed 40 feet to the
highest level of seat hoards; 20 feet in cases where construction is Type 111-N or Type
V-N: and 12 feet in cases where construction is with combustible members in the
structural frame and located indoors.
2. Division4 srructures other than Type 111-N and Type V-N grandstands, bleach-
ers and reviewing stands of open skeleton-frame type without roof, cover or enclosed
usable space shall not be limited in area or height.
3. A fire-resistive ceiling for the roof-ceiling assembly in one-story portions of
buildings of Type II One-hour, Type Ill One-hour or Type V One-hour construction
may be omitted, provided the roof framing system is open to the room and does not
contain concealed spaces.
(b) Special Provisions. Stages and platforms shall be constructed in accord-
ance with the provisions of Chapter 39.
The slope of the main floor of the assembly room shall not exceed the slopes
permitted by Section 3307.
Division 2.1 Occupancies with an occupant load of 1000 or more shall be of
50
1988 EDITION 602-604
Type I, Type II-P.R., Type II One-hour, Type III One-hour or Type IV construc-
tion, except that the roof framing system for one-story portions of buildings of
Type II One-hour or Type III One-hour construction may be of unprotected
construction when such roof framing system is open to the room and does not
contain concealed spaces.
Division 3 Occupancies located in a basement or above the first story shall be of
not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
Group A assembly rooms having an occupant load of 1000 or more shall not be
located in the basement.
EXCEPTION: Basements of buildings of Type I or II-F.R. construction.
Division 3 Occupancies with an occupant load of 50 or more which are located
over usable space shall be separated from such space by not less than one-hour
fire-resistive construction.
For attic space partitions and draft stops, see Section 2516 (f).
(c) Division 4 Provisions. Erection and structural maintenance shall conform
to these special requirements as well as with other applicable provisions of this
code.
When the space under a Division 4 Occupancy is used for any purpose,
including exits, it shall be separated from all parts of such Division 4 Occupancy,
including exits, by walls, floor and ceiling of not less than one-hour fire-resistive
construction.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Exits under temporary grandstands need not be separated.
2. The underside of continuous steel deck grandstands when erected outdoors
need not be fire protected when occupied for public toilets.
The building official may cause Division 4 structures to be reinspected at least
once every six months.
Grandstands or bleachers may have seat boards, toeboards, bearing or base
pads and footboards of combustible materials regardless of construction type.
Seating and exiting requirements for reviewing stands, grandstands and
bleachers are provided under Section 3323. Requirements for folding and tele-
scoping seating are provided under Section 3324.
Sec. 603. Buildings housing Group A Occupancies shall front directly upon or
have access to a public street not less than 20 feet in width. The access to the public
street shall be a minimum 20-foot-wide right-of-way, unobstructed and main-
tained only as access to the public street. The main entrance to the building shall
be located on a public street or on the access way. The main assembly floor of
Division I Occupancies shall be located at or ncar the adjacent ground level.
For fire-resistive protection of exterior walls and openings, as determined by
location on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 604. (a) General. Stairs, exits and smokeproof enclosures shall be pro-
vided as specified in Chapter 33. (See also Sections 3317 and 3318.)
51
(b) Amusement Structures. Exits and exit signs for Division 4, Amusement
Structures, shall be approved by the building official and, where practicable, shall
comply with the requirements specified in Chapter 33.
Light, Ventilation and Sanitation

Sec. 605. All enclosed portions of Group A Occupancies customarily used by
human beings and all dressing rooms shall be provided with natural light by means
of exterior glazed openings with an area not less than one tenth of the total floor
area, and natural ventilation by means of open able exterior openings with an area
of not less than one twentieth of the total floor area, or shall be provided with
artificial light and a mechanically operated ventilating system. The mechanically
operated ventilating system shall be capable of supplying a minimum of 5 cubic
feet per minute of outside air per occupant with a total circulated of not Jess than 15
cubic feet per minute per occupant in all portions of the building during such time
as the building is occupied. If the velocity of the air at the register exceeds I 0 feet
per second, the register shall be placed more than 8 feet above the floor directly
beneath.
Toilet rooms shall be provided with a fully openable exterior window at least 3
square feet in area; or a vertical duct not less than I 00 square inches in area for the
first toilet facility, with 50 additional square inches for each additional facility; or
a mechanically operated exhaust system capable of providing a complete change
of air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be connected directly to the outside,
and the point of discharge shall be at least 5 feet from any openable window.
There shall be provided in an approved location at least one lavatory for each
two water closets for each sex, and at least one drinking fountain for each floor
level.
EXCEPTION: A drinking fountain need not be provided in a drinking or dining
establi~hment.
For other requirements on water closets, see Sections 5 10 and 511 .

Shaft and Exit Enclosures
Sec. 606. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33.
Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed and
the enclosure shall be as specified in Section 1706.
Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems

Sec. 607. When required by other provisions of this code, automatic sprinkler
systems and standpipes shall be installed as specified in Chapter 38.
Special Hazards
Sec. 608. Stages shall be equipped with automatic ventilators as required in
Section 3903 (c).
Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements of Chapter
37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the requirements of Chapter
40.
52
1988 EDITION 808-809
Proscenium curtains shall conform to the requirements set forth in U.B.C.

Standard No. 6-1.
Class I, II or III-A liquids shall not be placed or stored in any Group A
Occupancy.
All exterior openings in a boiler room or room containing central heating
equipment if located below openings in another story or if Jess than I 0 feet from
other doors or windows of the same building shall be protected by a fire assembly
having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assemblies shall be
fixed, automatic or self-closing. Every room containing a boiler, central heating
plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated from the rest of the building by
not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Boilers, central heating plants or hot-water supply boilers where
the largest piece of fuel equipment does not exceed 400,000 Btu per hour input.
Modifications
Sec. 609. Gymnasiums and similar occupancies may have running tracks
constructed of wood or unprotected steel or iron.
In gymnasiums or in multipurpose schoolrooms having an area not greater than
3200 square feet, l-inch nominal tight tongue-and-grooved or 3 1•-inch plywood
wall covering may be used on the inner side in lieu of fire-resistive plaster.
53
Chapter7
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP B OCCUPANCIES
Group B Occupancies Defined

Sec. 701. Group B Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Gasoline service stations, garages where no repair work is done
except exchange of parts and maintenance requiring no open flame, welding or
use of Class I, II or Ill-A liquids.
Division 2. Drinking and dining establishments having an occupant load of less
than 50, wholesale and retail stores, office buildings, printing plants, municipal
police and fire stations, factories and workshops using materials not highly
flammable or combustible, storage and sales rooms for combustible goods, paint
stores without bulk handling. (See Section 402 for definition of assembly build-
ings.)
Buildings or portions of buildings having rooms used for educational purposes
beyond the 12th grade with less than 50 occupants in any room.
Division 3. Aircraft hangars where no repair work is done except exchange of
parts and maintenance requiring no open flame, welding or the use of Class I or II
liquids.
Open parking garages.
Helistops.
Division 4. Ice plants, power plants, pumping plants, cold storage and cream-
eries.
Factories and workshops using noncombustible and nonexplosive materials.
Storage and sales rooms containing only noncombustible and nonexplosive
materials that are not packaged or crated in or supported by combustible material.

Sec. 702. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group B
Occupancy because of the use or character of the occupancy shall be limited to the
types of construction set forth in Tables No. 5-C and No. 5-D and shall not exceed,
in area or height, the limits specified in Sections 505. 506 and 507.
Other provisions of this code notwithstanding, a Group B, Division 1 Occu-
pancy located in the basement or first story of a building housing a Group B,
Division 2 or a Group R, Division I Occupancy may be classed as a separate and
distinct building for the purpose of area limitation, limitation of number of stories
and type of construction, when all of the following conditions are met:
I. The Group B, Division I Occupancy is of Type I construction.
2. There is a three-hour occupancy separation between the Group B, Division
I Occupancy and all portions of the Group B, Division 2 or Group R,
Division I Occupancy.
54
1988 EDITION 702
3. The basement or first story is restricted to the storage of passenger vehicles

(having a capacity of not more than nine persons per vehicle), but may
contain entry lobbies, laundry rooms and mechanical equipment rooms
incidental to the operation of the building.
4. The maximum building height in feet shall not exceed the limits set forth in
Table No. 5- D for the least type of construction involved.
Other provisions of this code notwithstanding, a Group B, Division 1 Occu- ~l
pancy, located in the basement or first story below a Group B, Division 3 open ~·t:!·,:
parking garage, as defined in Section 709, may be classified as a separate and "'
distinct building for the purpose of determining the type of construction when all ~
of the following conditions are met: &
I . The allowable area of the structure shall be such that the sum of the ratios of ~
the actual area divided by the allowable area for each separate occupancy ·.·:.\
shall not exceed I. ..
2. The Group B, Division I Occupancy is of lYre I or II construction and is at
I
least equal to the fire resistance of the Group B, Division 3 Occupancy.
3. The height and the number of the tiers above the basement shall be limited as
specified in Table No. 7-A or Section 709 (e).
4. The t1oor-ceiling assembly separating the Group B, Division 1 and Group
B, Division 3 Occupancies shall be protected as required for the floor-
ceiling assembly of the Group B, Division 1 Occupancy. Openings between
the Group B, Division 1 and Group B, Division 3 Occupancies, except exit
In
openings, need not be protected.
5. The Group B, Division I Occupancy is used exclusively for the parking or
g
storage for private or pleasure-type motor vehicles but may contain (a) ~!:1
~~;
mechanical equipment rooms incidental to the operation of the building and
(b) an office, waiting and toilet rooms having a total area of not more than
:11
1,000 square feet.
(b) Special Provisions. 1. Group B, Divisions I and 3. Marine or motor
vehicle service stations including canopies and supports over pumps shall be of
noncombustible, fire-retardant-treated wood or of one-hour fire-resistive con-
struction.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Roofs of one-story service stations may be of heavy-timber
construction.
2. Canopies conforming to Section 5213 may be erected over pumps.
In areas where motor vehicles, boats or aircraft are stored, and in gasoline
service stations, floor surfaces shall be of noncombustible, nonabsorbent materi-
als. Floors shall drain to an approved oil separator or trap discharging to sewers in
accordance with the Plumbing Code.
EXCEPTION: Floors may be surfaced or waterproofed with asphaltic paving
materials in areas where motor vehicles or airplanes are stored or operated.
2. Group B, Division 2, storage areas. Storage areas in connection with )I
wholesale or retail sales in Division 2 Occupancies shall he separated from the !i
public area by a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation. :'~·
55
EXCEPTION: Occupancy separation need not be provided when any one of the
following conditions exists:
l. The storage area does not exceed I000 square feet, or
2. The storage area is :-.prinklered and does not exceed 3000 square feet, or
3. The building is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system
throughout_ Area increases as specified in Section 506 (c) are permitted.
3. Laboratories and vocational shops. Laboratories and vocational shops in
buildings used for educational purposes and similar areas containing hazardous
materials shall be separated from each other and other portions of the building by
not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation. When the quantities
of hazardous materials in such uses does not exceed those listed in Table No. 9-A
or No. 9-B. the requirements of Sections 905 and 908 shall apply. When the
quantities of hazardous materials in such uses exceed those allowed by Table No.
9-A or No. 9-B, the usc shall be classified as the appropriate Group H Occupancy.
Occupants in laboratories having an area in excess of 200 square feet shall have
access to at least two exits from the room and all portions of the room shall be
within 75 feet of an exit.
4. Medical gas systems. Medical gas systems shall be installed and main-
tained in accordance with the Fire Code. When nonflammable supply cylinders
for such systems arc located inside buildings they shall be in a separate room or
enclosure separated from the rest of the building by not less than one-hour fire-
resistive construction. Doors to the room or enclosure shall be self-closing
smoke- and draft-control assemblies having a fire-protection rating of not less
than one hour. Rooms shall have at least one exterior wall in which there are not
less than two vents of not less than 36 square inches in area. One vent shall be
within 6 inches of the floor and one shall be within 6 inches of the ceiling.
EXCEPTION: When an exterior wall cannot be provided for the room. auto-
matic sprinklers shall be installed within the room and the room shall be vented to the
exterior through ducting contained within a one-hour-rated shaft enclosure. Ap-
proved mechanical ventilation shall provide six air changes per hour for the room.
5. Parking garage headroom. Parking garages shall have an unobstructed
headroom clearance of not less than 7 feet above the finish tloor to any ceiling,
beam. pipe or similar construction, except for wall-mounted shelves, storage
surfaces, racks or cabinets.
6. Group B, Division 4 roof framing. In Division 4 Occupancies, fire
protection of the underside of roof framing may be omitted in all types of
construction.
Sec. 703. For fire-resistive protection of exterior walls and openings, as
determined by location on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 704. Stairs, exits and smokcproof enclosures shall be provided as speci-
fied in Chapter 33. See also Section 702 (b) for exits frnmlaboralorics.
56
1988 EDITION 705

Sec. 705. In Group B Occupancy buildings. all enclosed portions customarily
occupied by human beings, other than rooms and areas for which requirements are
specified elsewhere in this section, shall be provided with natural light by means
of exterior glazed openings with an area equal to one tenth of the total floor area of
such portions, and natural ventilation by means of exterior openings with an
openable area not less than one twentieth of the total floor area of such portions, or
shall be provided with artificial light and a mechanically operated ventilating
system. The mechanically operated ventilation system shall be capable of supply-
ing a minimum of 5 cubic feet per minute of coutside air per occupant with a total
circulated of not less than 15 cubic feet per minute per occupant in all occupied
portions of the building.
In all buildings or portions thereof where Class I. II or 111-A liquids arc used,
exhaust ventilation shall be provided sufficient to produce six air changes per H
hour. Such exhaust ventilation shall be taken from a point at or near the floor level.
In all parking garages, other than open parking garages as defined in Section
709 (b). used for storing or handling of automobiles operating under their own
power and on all loading platforms in bus terminals. ventilation shall be provided
capable of exhausting a minimum of 1.5 cfm per square foot of gross floor area.
The building official may approve an alternate ventilation system designed to
exhaust a minimum of 14,000 cfm for each operating vehicle. Such system shall
be based upon the anticipated instantaneous movement rate of vehicles but not
less than 2.5 percent (or one vehicle) of the garage capacity. Automatic CO
sensing devices may be employed to modulate the ventilation system to maintain a
maximum average concentration of CO of 50 ppm during any eight-hour period,
with a maximum concentration not greater than 200 ppm for a period not exceed-
ing one hour. Connecting offices, waiting rooms, ticket booths. etc .. shall be
supplied with conditioned air under positive pressure.
EXCEPTION: In gasoline service :;tations without lubrication pits. slOragc
garages and aircraft hangars the building official may authorize the omis:-.ion of such
ventilating equipment where. in his opinion, the building is supplied with unob-
structed openings to the outer air which are sufficient to provide the m:ccssary
ventilation.
Every building or portion thereof where persons are employed shall be pro-
vided with at least one water closet. Separate facilities shall be provided for each
sex when the number of employees exceeds four and both sexes arc employed.
Such toilet facilities shall be located either in such building or conveniently in a
building adjacent thereto on the same property.
Such water closet rooms in connection with food establishments where food is
prepared, stored or served shall have a nonabsorbent interior finish as specified in
Section 510(b), shall have hand-washing facilities therein or adjacent thereto, and
shall be separated from food preparation or storage rooms as specified in Section
510(a).
Toilet rooms shall be provided with a fully opcnable exterior window at least 3
square feet in area; or a vertical duct not less than 100 square inches in area for tht..:
57
first toilet facility, with 50 additional square inches for each additional facility; or
a mechanically operated exhaust system capable of providing a complete change
of air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be connected directly to the outside.
and the point of discharge shall be at least 5 feet from any openable window.
For other requirements on water closets, sec Section 510.

Elevator shafts, vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed, and
EXCEPTION: In Group B. Division 4 Occupancies, exits shall be enclosed as
specified in Chapter .'B, but other vertical openings need not be enclosed.

Special Hazards
Sec. 708. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
Storage of Class I liquids shall not be allowed in Group B, Divisions I, 2 and 3
Occupancies and the handling and use of gasoline, fuel oil and other Class I, II, or
Ill-A liquids shall not be permitted in any Group B Occupancy unless such use
and handling comply with the Fire Code.
Devices generating a glow or flame capable of igniting gasoline vapor shall not
be installed or used within 18 inches of the floor in any room in which Class I
tlammable liquids or gas are used or stored.
Every room containing a boiler, central heating plant or hot-water supply boiler
a
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less than one-hour fire-
resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Boilers, central heating plants or hot-water supply boilers where
the largest piece offuel equipment does not exceed 400,000 Btu per hour input.
Buildings erected or converted to house high-piled combustible stock shall
comply with the Fire Code.
Open Parking Garages

Sec. 709. (a) Scope. Except where specific provisions arc made in the follow-
ing subsections, other requirements of this code shall apply.
(b) Definitions. I. General. For the purpose of this section, certain terms are
defined as follows;
OPEN PARKING GARAGE is a structure of lYpe I or Type II construction
with the openings as described in Subsection 2 on two or more sides and which is
used exclusively for the parking or storage of private or pleasure-type motor
vehicles.
58
1988 EDITION 709
EXCEPTION: The grade-level tier may contain an office, waiting and toilet
rooms having a total area of not more than 1000 square feet, and such area need not
be separated from the open parking garage.
MECHANICAL-ACCESS OPEN PARKING GARAGES are open parking
garages employing parking machines, lifts, elevators or other mechanical devices
for vehicles moving from and to street level and in which public occupancy is
prohibited above the street level.
RAMP-ACCESS OPEN PARKING GARAGES are open parking garages
employing a series of continuously rising floors or a series of interconnecting
ramps between floors permitting the movement of vehicles under their own power
from and to the street level.
2. Openness. For natural ventilation purposes, the exterior side of the structure
shall have uniformly distributed openings on two or more sides. The area of such
openings in exterior walls on a tier must be at least 20 percent of the total perimeter
wall area of each tier. The aggregate length of the openings considered to be
providing natural ventilation shall constitute a minimum of 40 percent of the
perimeter of the tier. Interior wall lines and column lines shall be at least 20 percent
open with uniformly distributed openings.
(c) Construction. Construction shall be of noncombustible materials. Open
parking garages shall meet the design requirements of Chapter 23. Adequate
curbs and guardrails shall be provided at every opening.
(d) Area and Height. Area and height of open parking garages shall be limited
as set forth in Table No. 7-A except for increases allowed by Subsection (e).
In structures having a spiral or sloping floor, the horizontal projection of the
structure at any cross section shall not exceed the allowable area per parking tier.
In the case of a structure having a continuous spiral floor, each 9 feet 6 inches of
height or portion thereof shall be considered as a tier.
The clear height of a parking tier shall be not less than 7 feet, except that a lesser
clear height may be permitted in mechanical-access open parking garages when
approved by the building official.
(e) Area and Height Increases. The area and height of structures with cross
ventilation throughout may be increased in accordance with provisions of this
subsection. Structures with sides open on three fourths of the building perimeter
may be increased by 25 percent in area and one tier in height. Structures with sides
open around the entire building perimeter may be increased 50 percent in area and
one tier in height. For a side to be considered open under the above provisions, the
total area of openings along the side shall be not less than 50 percent of the interior
area of the side at each tier, and such openings shall be equally distributed along
the length of the tier.
Open parking garages constructed to heights less than the maximums estab-
lished by Table No. 7-A may have individual tier areas exceeding those otherwise
permitted, provided the gross tier area of the structure does not exceed that
permitted forthe higher structure. At least three sides of each such larger tier shall
have continuous horizontal openings not less than 30 inches in clear height
extending for at least ~U percent of the length of the sides, and no part of such
59
larger tier shall be more than 200 feet horizontally from such an opening. In
addition, each such opening shall face a street or yard accessible to a street with a
width of at least 30 feet for the full length of the opening, and standpipes shall be
provided in each such tier.
Structures of1)1pc 11-FR.; Type II One-hourorType 11-N construction, with all
sides open, may be unlimited in area when the height does not exceed 75 feet. For
a side to be considered open, the total area of openings along the side shall be not
less than 50 percent of the exterior area of the side at each tier, and such openings
shall be equally distributed along the length of the tier. All portions of tiers shall be
within 200 feet horizontally from such openings.
(f) Location on Property. Exterior walls and openings in exterior walls shall
comply with Table No. 7-B. The distance to adjacent property line shall be
li determined in accordance with Section 504.
(g) Stairs and Exits. Where persons other than parking attendants are permit-
ted, stairs and exits shall meet the requirements of Chapter 33, based on an
occupant load of 200 square feet per occupant. Where no persons other than
parking attendants are permitted there shall be not less than two stairs 3 feet wide.
Lifts may be installed for use of employees only, provided they are completely
enclosed by noncombustible materials.
(h) Standpipes. Standpipes shall be installed when required by the provisions
of Chapter 38.
(i) Sprinkler Systems. When required by other provisions of this code, auto-
matic sprinkler systems and standpipes shall he installed in accordance with the
provisions of Chapter 38.
(j) Enclosure of Vertical Openings. Enclosure shall not be required for
vertical openings except as specified in Subsection (g) for lifts.
(k) Ventilation. Ventilation, other than the percentage of openings specified in
Subsection (b), shall nut be required.
(I) Prohibitions. The following uses and alterations are not permitted:
1. Automobile repair work.
2. Parking of busses, trucks and similar vehicles.
3. Partial or complete closing of required openings in exterior walls by tarpau-
lins or any other means.
Helistops
Sec. 710. (a) General. Helistops may be erected on buildings oruthcrlocations
if they are constructed in accordance with this section.
(b) Size. The touchdown or landing area for helicopters of less than 3500
pounds shall be a minimum of 20 feet by 20 feet in size. The touchdown area shall
be surrounded on all sides by a clear area having a minimum average width at roof
level of 15 feet but with no width less than 5 feet.
(c) Design. Helicopter landing areas and supports therefor on the roof of a
building shall be of noncombustible construction. Landing areas shall be de-
signed to confine any Class I, II or III-A liquid spillage to the landing area itself
60
1988 EDITION 710, 7-A, 7-B
and provision shall be made to drain such spillage away from any exit or stairway
seiVing the helicopter landing area or from a structure housing such exit or
stairway.
(d) Exits and Stairways. Exits and stairways from helistops shall comply with
the provisions of Chapter 33 of this code, except that all landing areas located on
buildings or structures shall have two or more exits. For landing platforms or roof
areas less than 60 feet in length, or less than 2000 square feet in area, the second
exit may be a fire escape or ladder leading to the flour below.
(e) Federal Aviation Approval. Before operating helicopters from helistops,
approval must be obtained from the Federal Aviation Administration.
TABLE NO 7-A-OPEN PARKING GARAGES AREA AND HEIGHT

HEIGHT
MECHANICAL-ACCESS
Automatic
Fire-extinguishing
System
TYPE OF AREA PER TIER
CONSTRUCTION (Square Feet) RAMP-ACCESS No Yes
I Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
11-F.R. 125,000 12 Tiers 12 Tiers 18 Tiers
II-I-hour 50,000 IOTiers 10 Tiers 15 Tiers
11-N 30,000 8 tiers 8 Tiers 12 Tiers
TABLE NO. 7-B-OPEN PARKING GARAGES-EXTERIOR WALLS'

FIRE RESISTANCE OF EXTERIOR WALLS OPENINGS IN EXTERIOR WALLS
One hour less than 10 feet Not permitted less than 5 feel,
protected less than 10 feet
1 See Secllon 709 (f).
61
ChapterS
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUPE OCCUPANCIES
Group E Occupancies Defined

Sec. 801. GroupE Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade
by 50 or more persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one
day.
Division 2. Any building used for educational purposes through the 12th grade
by less than 50 persons for more than 12 hours per week or four hours in any one
day.
Division 3. Any building used for day-care purposes for more than six children.

Sec. 802. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group E
because of the use or character of the occupancy shall be limited to the types of
or height, the limits specified in Sections 505,506 and 507, except that the area
may be increased by 50 percent when the maximum travel distance specified in
Section 3303 (d) is reduced by 50 percent.
I (b) Atmospheric Separation Requirements. I . Definitions. For the purpose

of this chapter and Section 3319, the following definitions are applicable:
COMMON ATMOSPHERE. A common atmosphere exists between rooms,
spaces or areas within a building which are not separated by an approved smoke
and draft-stop barrier.
SEPARATE ATMOSPHERE. A separate atmosphere exists between rooms,
spaces or areas that are separated by an approved smoke and draft-stop barrier.
SMOKE AND DRAFT BARRIER. A smoke and draft barrier consists of
walls, partitions, floors and openings therein of such construction as will prevent
the transmission of smoke or gases through the construction.
2. General provisions. The provisions of this subsection apply when a sepa-
rate exit system is required in accordance with Section 3319.
Walls, partitions and floors forming all of, or part of, an atmospheric separa·
lion shall be of materials consistent with the requirements for the type of construc-
tion, but of construction not less effective than a smoke- or draft-stop barrier.
Glass lights of approved wired glass set in steel frames may be installed in such
walls or partitions.
Every door opening therein shall be protected with a fire assembly as required
elsewhere in the code, but not less than a self-closing or automatic-closing, tight-
fitting smoke barrier and fire assembly having a fire-protection rating of not less
than 20 minutes when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 43-2.
62
1988 EDITION 802-804
Ducts penetrating atmospheric separation walls, partitions or floors shall be

equipped with an approved automatic-closing smoke damper when having open-
ings into more than one atmosphere.
All automatic-closing fire assemblies installed in the atmospheric separation
shall be activated by approved smoke detectors.
The specific requirements of this section are not intended to prevent the design
or usc of other systems, equipment or techniques which will effectively prevent
the products of combustion from breaching the atmospheric separation.
(c) Special Provisions. Rooms in Divisions I and 2 Occupancies used for
kindergarten, first or second grade pupils and Division 3 Occupancies shall not be
located above or below the first story, except for basements that have required
exits at grade level.
EXCEPTION: In buildings equipped with an automatic sprinkler system
throughout, rooms used for kindergarten, first- and second-grade children or for
day-care purposes may be located on the second story, provided there are at least two
exits directly to the exterior for the exclusive use of such occupants.
Storage and janitor closets shall be of one-hour fire-resistive construction.
Stages and platforms shall be constructed in accordance with Chapter 39. For attic
space partitions and draft stops, see Section 2516 (f).
(d) Special Hazards. Laboratories, vocational shops and similar areas contain-
ing hazardous materials shall be separated from each other and from other
portions of the building by not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy
separation. When the quantities of hazardous materials in such uses do not exceed
those listed in Table No. 9-A or No. 9-B, the requirements of Sections 905 and 908
shall apply. When the quantities of hazardous materials in such uses exceed those
allowed by Table No. 9-Aor No. 9-B, the use shall be classified as the appropriate
Group H Occupancy.
Occupants in laboratories having an area in excess of 200 square feet shall have
access to at least two exits from the room and all portions of the room shall be
within 75 feet of an exit.
Equipment in rooms or groups of rooms sharing a common atmosphere where
flammable liquids, combustible dust or hazardous materials are used, stored,
developed or handled shall conform to the requirements of the Fire Code.
Sec. 803. All buildings housing GroupE Occupancies shall front directly upon
or have access to a public street not less than 20 feet in width. The access to the
public street shall be a minimum 20-foot-wide right-of-way, unobstructed and
maintained only as access to the public street. At least one required exit shall be
located on the public street or on the access way.
For fire-resistive protection of exterior walls and openings, as determined by
location on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 804. Stairs, exits and smokeproof enclosures shall be provided as speci-
fied in Chapter 33. (See also Section 3319.)
63

Sec. 805. All portions of GroupE Occupancies shall be provided with light and
ventilation. either natural or artificial. as specified in Section 605.
Water closets shall be provided on the basis of the following ratio of water
closets to the number of students:
Boys Girls
Elementary Schools. . . . ...... . 1:100 1:35
Secondary Schools .......................... . 1:100 1:45
In addition. urinals shall be provided for boys on the basis of I :.10 in elementary
and secondary schools.
There shall be provided at least one lavatory for each two water closets or
urinals. and at least one drinking fountain on each flour for elementary and
secondary schools.
For other requirements on water closets. see Section 510.
Sec. 806. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33. Elevator shafts.
vent shafts and other vertical openings shall be enclosed. and the enclosure shall
be as specified in Chapter 17.

Sec. 807. Where required. automatic sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be
installed as specified in Chapter 38.
Special Hazards
Motion picture machine rooms shall conform to the requirements of Chapter
40.
All exterior openings in a boiler room or rooms containing central heating
equipment. if located below openings in another story or if less than 10 feet from
other doors or windows of the same building. shall be protected by a fire assembly
having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assemblies shall be
fixed. automatic- or self-closing. Every room containing a boiler. central heating
plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated from the rest of the building by
not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: Boilers. central heating plants or hot-water supply boilers where
the largest piece of fuel equipment does not exceed 400.000 Btu per hour input.
When the opening for a heater or equipment room is protected by a pair of fire
doors. the inactive leaf shall be normally secured in the closed position and shall
be openable only by the use of a tool. An as tragal shall be provided and the active
leaf shall be self-closing.
Class I. II or lil-A liquids shall not be placed. stored or used in any GroupE
Occupancies. except in approved quantities as necessary in laboratories and
64
1988 EDITION 808-809
approved utility rooms, and such liquids shall be kept in tight or sealed containers
when not in actual use and shall be stored within a storage cabinet for Class I, II or
Ill-A liquid approved by the fire department.
F
RreAiarms I
Sec. 809. Approved fire alarms shall be provided for all GroupE Occupancies F
with an occupant load of more than 50 persons. In every Group E Occupancy I
provided with an automatic sprinkler or detection system, the operation of such F
system shall automatically activate the school fire alarm system, which shall I
F
include an alarm mounted on the exterior of the building.
I
85
Chapter9
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP H OCCUPANCIES
Group H Occupancies Defined

Sec. 901. (a) General. For definitions, identification and control of hazardous
materials, see the Fire Code. For application and use of control areas, see Footnote
I of Tables Nos. 9-A and 9-B. The primary use of a building shall be considered as
a Group H, Division I, 2 or 3 Occupancy when its primary use is for storage. and
the aggregate quantity of hazardous materials in the building is in excess of Table
No. 9-A. Group H Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Occupancies with a quantity of material in the building in excess of
those listed in Table No. 9-A which present a high explosion hazard, including but
not limited to:
I. Explosives, blasting agents, fireworks and black powder.
EXCEPTION: Storage and the use of pyrotechnic special effect materials in
motion picture, television, theatrical and group entertainment production when
under permit as required in the Fire Code. The time period for storage shall not
exceed 90 days.
2. Unclassified detonatable organic peroxides.
3. Class 4 oxidizers.
4. Class 4 or Class 3 detonatable unstable (reactive) materials.
those listed in Thble No. 9-A which present a moderate explosion hazard or a
hazard from accelerated burning, including but not limited to:
I . Class I organic peroxides.
2. Class 3 nondetonatable unstable (reactive) materials.
3. Pyrophoric gases.
4. Flammable or oxidizing gases.
5. Class I, II or III-A flammable or combustible liquids which are used in
normally open containers or systems or in closed containers pressurized at
more than 15-pounds-per-square-inch gauge.
6. Combustible dusts in suspension or capable of being put into suspension in
the atmosphere of the room or area.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Rooms or areas used for woodworking that do not exceed
500 square feet in area may be classified as Group B, Division 2 Occupancies,
provided dust-producing machines are equipped with approved dust collectors and
there are not more than two such machines.
2. Lumberyards and similar retail stores utilizing only [XJWcr saws may be
classified as Group B, Division 2 Occupancies.
The building official may revoke the use of these exceptions for due cause.
7. Class 3 oxidizers.
66
1988 EDITION 901
those listed in Table No. 9-A which present a high fire or physical hazard,
including but not limited to:
l. Class II, III or IV organic peroxides.
2. Class l or 2 oxidizers.
3. Class I, II or III-A flammable liquids or combustible liquids which are
utilized or stored in normally closed containers or systems and containers
pressurized at 15-pounds-per-square-inch gauge or Jess.
4. Class III-B combustible liquids.
5. Pyrophoric liquids or solids.
6. Water reactives.
7. Flammable solids, including combustible fibers or dusts, except for dusts
included in Division 2.
8. Flammable or oxidizing cryogenic fluids (other than inert).
9. Class I or 2 unstable (reactive) materials.
Division 4. Repair garages not classified as Group B, Division I .
Division 5. Aircraft repair hangars and heliports not classified as Group B, ill
~~3. I
Division 6. Semiconductor fabrication facilities and comparable research and
development areas when the facilities in which hazardous production materials
(HPM) are used and the aggregate quantity of materials are in excess of those 1.··.
listed in Table No. 9-A or 9-B. Such facilities and areas shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with Section 911 .
4tl
Division 7. Occupancies having quantities of materials in excess of those listed ~
in Table No. 9-B that are health hazards, including but not limited to:
I. Corrosives.
2. Highly toxic materials.
3. Irritants.
4. Sensitizers.
5. Other health hazards.
(b) Multiple Hazards- When a hazardous material has multiple hazards, all
hazards shall be addressed and controlled in accordance with the provisions of this
chapter.
(c) Liquid Use, Dispensing and Mixing Rooms. Rooms in which Class I,
Class II and Class III-A flammable or combustible liquids are used, dispensed or
mixed in open containers shall be constructed in accordance with the require-
ments for a Group H, Division 2 Occupancy and the following:
I. Rooms in excess of 500 square feet shall have at least one exterior door
approved for fire department access.
2. Rooms shall not exceed 1000 square feet in area.
3. Rooms shall be separated from other areas by an occupancy separation
having a fire·rcsistive rating of not less than one hour for rooms up to 1SO
67
square feet in area and not less than two hours where the room is more than .
150 square feet in area. Separations from other occupancies shall not be less
than required by Chapter 5, Table No. 5-B.
4. Shelving, racks and wainscoting in such areas shall be of noncombustible
construction or wood not less than l-inch nominal thickness.
5. Liquid use, dispensing and mixing rooms shall not be located in basements.
(d) Liquid Storage Rooms. Rooms in which Class I, Class II and Class III-A
flammable or combustible liquids are stored in closed containers shall be con-
structed in accordance with the requirements for a Group H, Division 3 Occu-
pancy and to the following:
l. Rooms in excess of 500 square feet shall have at least one exterior door
approved for fire department access.
2. Rooms shall not exceed 1000 square feet in area.
3. Rooms shall be separated from other areas by an occupancy separation
having a fire-resistive rating of not less than one hour for rooms up to 150
square feet in area and not less than two hours where the room is more than
150 square feet in area. Separations from other occupancies shall not be less
than required by Chapter 5, Table No. 5-B.
4. Shelving, racks and wainscoting in such areas shall be of noncombustible
construction or wood of not less than l-inch nominal thickness.
5. Rooms used for the storage of Class I flammable liquids shall not be located
in a basement.
(e) Flammable or Combustible Liquid Storage Warehouses. Liquid storage
warehouses in which Class I, Class II and Class III-A flammable or combustible
liquids are stored in closed containers shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements for a Group H, Division 3 Occupancy and the following:
l. Liquid storage warehouses shall be separated from all other uses by a four-
hour area separation wall.
2. Shelving, racks and wainscoting in such warehouses shall be of noncom-
bustible construction or wood not less than l-inch nominal thickness.
3. Rooms used for the storage of Class I flammable liquids shall not be located
in a basement.
(f) Requirement for Report. The building official may require a technical
opinion and report to identify and develop methods of protection from the hazards
presented by the hazardous material. The opinion and report shall be prepared by a
qualified person, firm or corporation approved by the building official and shall
be provided without charge to the enforcing agency.
The opinion and report may include, but is not limited to, the preparation of a
hazardous material management plan (HMMP); chemical analysis; recommenda-
tions for methods of isolation, separation, containment or protection of hazardous
I
materials or processes, including appropriate engineering controls to be applied;
the extent of changes in the hazardous behavior to be anticipated under conditions
of exposure to fire or from hazard control procedures; and the limitations or
conditions of usc necessary to achieve and maintain control of the hazardous
68
1988 EDITION 901-902
materials or operations. The report shall be entered into the files of the code
enforcement agencies. Proprietary and trade secret information shall be protected I
[;
under the laws of the state or jurisdiction having authority. ~

Sec. 902. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group H
or height, the limits specified in Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Floors. Except for surfacing, floors in areas containing hazardous materials
and in areas where motor vehicles, boats, helicopters or airplanes are stored,
repaired or operated shall be of noncombustible, liquid-tight construction.
EXCEPTION: In Group H, Division 4 and 5 Occupancies, floors may be
surfaced or waterproofed with asphaltic paving materials in that portion of the
facility where no repair work is done.
(c) Spill Control. When required by the Fire Code, floors shall be recessed a
minimum of 4 inches or shall be provided with a liquid-tight raised sill with a
minimum height of 4 inches so as to prevent the flow ofliquids to adjoining areas.
When liquid-tight sills are provided, they may be omitted at door openings by the
installation of an open-grate trench which connects to the room drainage system.
(d) Drainage. When required by the Fire Code, the room, building or area shall
be provided with a drainage system to direct the flow of liquids to an approved
location or, the room, building or area shall be designed to provide secondary
containment for the hazardous materials and fire-protection water.
Drains from the area shall be sized to carry the sprinkler system design flow rate
over the sprinkler system design area. The slope of drains shall not be less than I
percent. Materials of construction for the drainage system shall be compatible
with the stored materials.
Incompatible materials shall he separated from each other in the drain systems.
They may be combined when they have been rendered acceptable for discharge by
on approved means into the public sewer. Drainage of spillage and fire-protection
water directed to a neutralizer or treatment system shall comply with the follow-
ing:
I. The system shall be designed to handle the maximum worst-case spill from
the single largest container plus the volume of fire-protection water from the
system over the minimum design area for a period of 20 minutes.
2. Overflow from the neutralizer or treatment system shall be provided to
direct liquid leakage and fire-protection water to a safe location away from
the building, any material or fire protection control valve, means of egress,
adjoining property, or fire department access roadway.
(e) Containment. When required by fhe Fire Code, drains shall be directed to a
containment system or other location designed as secondary containment for the
hazardous material liquids and fire-protection water, or the building, room or area
shall be designed to provide secondary containment of hazardous material liquids
69
and fire-protection water through the use of recessed floors or liquid-tight raised
sills.
Secondary containment shall be designed to retain the spill from the largest
single container plus the design flow rate of the sprinkler system for the area of the
room or area in which the storage is located or the sprinkler system design area,
whichever is smaller. The containment capacity shall be capable of containing the
flow for a period of 20 minutes.
Overflow from the secondary containment system shall be provided to direct
liquid leakage and fire-protection water to a safe location away from the building,
any material or fire protection control valve, means of egress, fire access roadway,
adjoining property or storm drains.
If the storage area is open to rainfall, the secondary containment shall be
designed to accommodate the volume of a 24-hour rainfall as determined by a 25-
year storm.
When secondary containment is required, a monitoring method capable of
detecting hazardous material leakage from the primary containment into the
secondary containment shall be provided. When visual inspection of the primary
containment is not practical, other approved means of monitoring may be pro-
vided. When secondary containment may be subject to the intrusion of water, a
monitoring method for such water shall be provided. Whenever monitoring
devices are provided, they shall be connected to distinct visual or audible alarms.
(f) Smoke and Heat Vents. Smoke and heat venting shall be provided in areas
containing hazardous materials as set forth in the Fire Code in addition to the
provisions of this code.
(g) Standby Power. Standby power shall be provided in Group H, Divisions I
and 2 Occupancies and in Group H, Division 3 Occupancies in which Class I, II or
III organic peroxides are stored. The standby power system shall be designed and
installed in accordance with the Electrical Code to automatically supply power to
all electrical equipment required by the Fire Code when the normal electrical
supply system is interrupted.
(h) Emergency Power. An emergency power system shall be provided in
Group H, Division 6 and Division 7 Occupancies. The emergency power system
shall be designed and installed in accordance with the Electrical Code to automati-
cally supply power to the exhaust ventilation system when the normal electrical
supply system is interrupted.
The exhaust system may be designed to operate at not less than one-half the
normal fan speed on the emergency power system when it is demonstrated that the
level of exhaust will maintain a safe atmosphere.
(i) Special Provisions for Group H, Division 1. Group H, Division I Occu-
pancies shall be in buildings used for no other purpose, without basements, crawl
spaces or other under-floor spaces. Roofs shall be of lightweight construction
with suitable thermal insulation to prevent sensitive material from reaching its
decomposition temperature.
(j) Speciai Provisions for Group H, Divisions 2 and 3. Group H, Division 2
and Division 3 Occupancies containing quantities of hazardous materials in
70
1988 EDITION 902-905
excess of those set forth in Table No. 9-E shall be in buildings used for no other
purpose, shall not exceed one story in height and shall be without basements,
crawl spaces or other under-floor spaces.
Group H, Division 3 Occupancies containing water-reactive materials shall be
resistant to water penetration. Piping for conveying liquids shall not be over or
through areas containing water reactives, unless isolated by approved liquid-tight
construction.
EXCEPTION: Fire-protection piping may be installed over reactives without
isolation.
(k) Special Provisions for Group H, Division 4 and Division 5. A Division 4
Occupancy having a floor area not exceeding 2,500 square feet may have exterior
walls of not less than two-hour fire-resistive construction when less than 5 feet
from a property line and not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction when
more than 5 feet but less than 20 feet from a property line.
Group H, Division 5 Occupancies shall have exterior walls of not less than one-
hour fire-resistive construction or shall be surrounded by public ways or yards not
less than 60 feet in width.
EXCEPTION: Exterior walls of a nonrated building fronting on public ways or
yards having a width of at least 40 feet may be of unprotected construction.
The area increases allowed by Section 506 (a) shall not exceed 500 percent for
aircraft repair hangars, except as permitted in Section 506 (b).
(I) Special Provisions for Group H, Division 6. See Section 911.
Sec. 903. Group H Occupancies shall be located on property in accordance
with Section 504 and this chapter. In Group H, Division 2 or Division 3 Occupan-
cies, not less than 25 percent of the perimeter wall of the occupancy shall be an
exterior wall.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Liquid use, dispensing and mixing rooms having a floor area
of not more than 500 square feet need not be located on the outer perimeter of the
building when they are in accordance with Section 901 (c).
2. Liquid storage rooms having a floor area of not more than 1000 square feet
need not be located on the outer perimeter when they are in accordance with Section
901 (d).
3. Spray paint booths which comply with the Fire Code need not be located on the
outer perimeter.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 904. Stairs, exits and smokeproof enclosures shall be provided as speci-
fied in Chapter 33. (See also Section 3320.)

Sec. 905. (a) General Ventilation. In Group H Occupancy buildings, all
enclosed portions customarily occupied by human beings, other than rooms and
areas for which requirements are specified elsewhere in this section, shall be
provided with natural light by means of exterior glazed openings with an area
71
equal to one-tenth of the total floor area of such portions, and natural ventilation
by means of exterior openings with an openablc area not less than one twentieth of
the total floor area of such portions, or shall be provided with artificial light and a
mechanically operated ventilation system. The mechanically operated ventilation
system shall be capable of supplying a minimum of 5 cubic feet per minute of
outside air per occupant. with a total circulated of not less than 15 cubic feet per
minute per occupant in all occupied portions of the building. When recirculation
of air is not permitted. the ventilation system shall be capable of providing not less
than 15 cubic feet per minute of outside air per occupant.
(b) Ventilation in Rooms Containing Hazardous Material. Rooms in which
explosive, corrosive. combustible, flammable or highly toxic dusts, mists,
fumes, vapors or gases are or may be emitted due to the processing. use, handling
or storage of materials shall be mechanically ventilated as required by the Fire
Code and the Mechanical Code.
Emissions generated at work stations shall be confined to the area in which they
arc generated as specified in the Fire and Mechanical Codes.
The location of supply and exhaust opening shall be in accordance with the
Mechanical Code. Exhaust air contaminated by highly toxic material shall be
treated in accordance with the Fire Code.
A manual shutoff control for ventilation equipment required by this subsection
shall be provided outside the room adjacent to the principal access door to the
room. The switch shall he of the break-glass type and shall be labeled "Ventilation
System Emergency Shutoff."
(c) Ventilation in Group H, Division 4. In all buildings used for the repair or
hand! ing of motor vehicles operating under their own power, mechanical ventila-
tion shall be provided capable of exhausting a minimum of I cubic foot per minute
per square foot of floor area. Each engine repair stall shall be equipped with an
exhaust pipe extension duct, extending to the outside of the building, which, if
over 10 feet in length, shall mechanically exhaust 300 cubic feet per minute.
Connecting offices and waiting rooms shall be supplied with conditioned air
under positive pressure.
EXCEPTION: In repair garages, enclosed heliports and aircraft hangars, the
building official may authorize the omission of such ventilating equipment when, in
his opinion, the building is supplied with unobstructed openings to the outer air
which are well distributed and sufficient in size to provide the necessary ventilation.
(d) Sanitation. Every building or portion thereof where persons are employed
shall be provided with at least one water closet. Separate facilities shall be
provided for each sex when the number of employees exceeds four and both sexes
are employed. Such toilet facilities shall be located in such building or conven-
iently in a building adjacent thereto on the same property.
Toilet rooms shall be provided with a fully openablc exterior window at least 3
square feet in area; or a vertical duct not less than I 00 square inches in area for the
first water closet, with 50 additional square inches for each additional fixture; or a
mechanically operated exhaust system capable of providing a complete change of
72
1988 EDITION 905-910
air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be connected directly to the outside, and
the point of discharge shall be at least 5 feet from any openable window.
For other requirements on water closets, see Sections 510 and 511.
Shaft Enclosures
Doors which are a part of an automobile ramp enclosure shall be equipped with
automatic closing devices.
Sec. 907. When required by other provisions of this code, automatic fire-
extinguishing systems and standpipes shall be designed and installed as specified
in Chapter 38.
Special Hazards
Every boiler, central heating plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated
from the rest of the building by not less than a two-hour fire-resistive occupancy
separation. In Divisions I, 2 and 3, there shall be no openings in such occupancy [
separations except for necessary ducts and piping.
In Division 4 Occupancies, devices which generate a spark, flame or glow
capable of igniting gasoline vapors shall nol be installed or used within 18 inches
of the floor. •
Equipment or machinery which generates or emits combustible or explosive
dust or fibers shall be provided with an adequate dust-collecting and exhaust
system installed in conformance with the Mechanical Code. Equipment or sys-
tems that are used to collect, process or convey combustible dusts or fibers shall
be provided with an approved explosion venting or containment system.
Combustible fiber storage rooms or vaults having a capacity of more than I()()
cubic feet shall be separated from the remainder of the building by a two-hour fire-
resistive occupancy separation.
Cellulose nitrate film storage and handling shall be in accordance with Chapter
4R.
Fire Alarms F
Sec. 909. An approved fire alarm system shall be installed in Group H

I
F
Occupancies used for the manufacturing of organic coatings as specified in the I
Fire Code. F
Explosion Venting
Sec. 910. Explosion venting shall be provided to vent the gases resulting from .:!.,:.:.
det1agrations of dusts, gases or mists in rooms, buildings or other enclosures as ..

required by the Fire Code so as to minimize structural or mechanical damage. If ;)
73
910.911 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
detonation rather than deflagration is considered likely, protective devices or

systems such as fully contained barricades shall be provided, except that explo-
sion venting to minimize damage from less than 2.0 grams of TNT (equivalence)
is permitted. Walls, floors and roofs separating a usc from an explosion exposure
shall be designed to resist a minimum internal pressure of 100 pounds per square
foot in addition to the loads required by Chapter 23.
Explosion venting shall be provided in exterior walls or roof only. The venting
shall be designed to prevent serious structural damage and production of lethal
projectiles. The aggregate clear vent relief area shall be regulated by the pressure
resistance of the nonrelieving portions of the building and be designed by persons
competent in such design. The design shall recognize the nature of the material
and its behavior in an explosion. Vents shall consist of any one or any combination
of the following to relieve at a maximum internal pressure of 20 pounds per square
foot. but not less than the loads required by Chapter 23.
I. Walls of lightweight material.
2. Lightly fastened hatch covers.
3. Lightly fastened, outward-opening swinging doors in exterior walls.
4. Lightly fastened walls or roof.
Venting devices shall discharge vertically or directly to an unoccupied yard not
less than 50 feet in width on the same lot. Releasing devices shall be so located that
the discharge end shall be not less than 10 feet vertically and 20 feet horizontally
from window openings or exits in the same or adjoining buildings or structures.
The exhaust shall always be in the direction of least exposure and never into the
interior of the building unless a suitably designed shaft is provided which dis-
charges to the exterior. See Footnote 7 of Table No. 9-A.
Division 6 Occupancies
Sec. 911. (a) General. In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in
this code, Group H, Division 6 Occupancies ;hall comply with the provisions of
this section and the Fire Code.
(b) Fabrication Area. I. Separation. Fabrication areas, whose size is limited
by the quantity of HPM permitted by the Fire Code, shall be separated from each
other, from exit corridors, and from other parts of the building by not less than
one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separations.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Doors within such occupancy separation, including doors to
corridors shall be only self-closing fire assemblies having a fire-protection rating of
1
not less than three-fourths hour.

2. Windows between fabrication areas and exit corridors may be in accordance
with Section 3305 (h) 2.
2. Floors. Except for surfacing, floors within fabrication areas shall be of
noncombustible construction. Openings through tloors of fabrication areas may
be unprotected when the interconnected levels arc used solely for mechanical
equipment directly related to such fab area. See also Section 1706 (a), Exception
8. When forming a part of an occupancy separation, Ooors shall be liquid tight.
74
1988 EDITION 911
3. Ventilation, Mechanical ventilation, which may include recirculated air,

shall be provided throughout the fabrication area at the rate of not less than l cubic
foot per minute per square foot of floor area. The exhaust air duct system of one
fabrication area shall not connect to another duct system outside that fabrication
area within the building.
Ventilation systems shall comply with the Mechanical Code except that the
automatic shutoffs need not be installed on air-moving equipment. However,
smoke detccto~ shall be installed in the circulating airstream and shall initiate a
signal at the emergency control station.
Except for exhaust systems, at least one manually operated remote control
switch that will shut down the fab area ventilation system shall be installed at an
approved location outside the fab area.
4. li"ansporting hazardous production materials. Hazardous production

materials shall be transported to fabrication areas through enclosed piping or
tubing systems that comply with Section 911 (f), through service corridors or in
exit corridors as permitted in the exception to Section 911 (c). The handling or
transporting of hazardous production materials within service corridors shall
comply with the Fire Code.
5. Electrical. Electrical equipment and devices within the fabrication area

shall comply with the Electrical Code. The requirements for hazardous locations
need not be applied when the average air change is at least four times that set forth
in Section 911 (b) 3 and when the number of air changes at any location is not less
than three times that required by Section 911 (b) 3 and the Fire Code.
(c) Exit Corridors. Exit corridors shall comply with Section 3305 and shall be
separated from fabrication areas as specified in Section 911 (b) I . Exit corridors
shall not be used for transporting hazardous production materials except as
provided in Section 911 (f) 2.
EXCEPTION: ln existing Group H, Division 6 Occupancies when there are
alterations or modifications to existing fabrication areas, the building official may
permit the transportation of hazardous production materials in exit corridors subject
to the requirements of the Fire Code and as follows:
1. Corridors adjacent to the fabrication area where the alteration work is to be done
shall comply with Section 3305 for a length determined as follows:
A. The length of the common wall ofthe corridor and the fabrication area, and
B. For the distance along the exit corridor to the point of entry of HPM into the
exit corridor serving that fabrication area.
2. There shall be an emergency telephone system or a local alarm manual pull
station or approved signal device within exit corridors at not more than 15Q.foot
intervals or fraction thereof and at each exit stair doorway. The signal shall be
relayed to the emergency control station and a local signaling device shall be
provided.
3. Sprinkler protection shall be designed in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No.
38-1 for Ordinary Hazard Group 3, exceptthat when one row of sprinklers is used
in the corridor protection, the maximum number of sprinklers that need be
calculated is 13.
75
(d) Service Corridors. Service corridors shall be classified as Group H,

Division 6 Occupancies. Service corridors shall be separated from exit corridors
as required by Section 911 (b) I.
Service corridors shall be mechanically ventilated as required by Section 9 I I
(b) 3 or at not less than six air changes per hour, whichever is greater.
The maximum distance of travel from any point in a service corridor to an
exterior exit door, horizontal exit, exit passageway, enclosed stairway or door into
a fabrication area shall not exceed 75 feet. Dead ends shall not exceed 4 feet in
length. There shall he not less than two exits, and not more than one half of the
required exits shall be into the fabrication area. Doors from service corridors shall
swing in the direction of exit travel and shall be self-closing.
(e) Storage of Hazardous Production Material. I. Construction. The stor-
age of hazardous production materials in quantities greater than those listed in
Table No. 9-A or 9-B shall be in inside rooms complying with Section 901 (d) or
shall be in HPM storage rooms not exceeding 6000 square feet in area. Such HPM
storage rooms shall be separated from all other areas by not less than a two-hour
fire-resistive occupancy separation when the area is 300 square feet or more and
not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction when the area is less than 300
square feet. The provisions of Section 503 (a) shall apply.
When an HPM storage room is also used for dispensing of Class I or II
flammable liquids or flammable gases, the area of the room shall not exceed 1000
square feet. Except for surfacing, floors of storage rooms shall be of noncombus-
tible liquid-tight construction. Raised grating over floors shall be ofnoncomhus-
tible materials. See Section 902 (c) for sill requirements for liquid storage rooms.
2. Location within building. When HPM storage rooms are provided, they
shall have at least one exterior wall and such wall shall be not less than 30 feet from
property lines, including property lines adjacent to public ways. Explosion
venting shall be provided when required by Section 910.
3. Exits. When two exits are required from HPM storage rooms, one shall be
directly to the outside of the building. See Section 911 (b) I, Exception I.
4. Ventilation. Mechanical exhaust ventilation shall be provided in storage

rooms at the rate of not less than I cubic foot per minute per square foot of floor
area or six air changes per hour, whichever is greater, for all categories of material.
5. Emergency alarm. An alarm pull station or approved signal device shall be
F installed outside of each interior exit door from HPM storage rooms. Operation of
I such alarm or signal device shall provide a local alarm and relay a signal to the
F
I emergency control station.
6. Electrical. HPM storage rooms containing flammable liquids or gases shall
be classified as Class I, Division I hazardous locations. Electrical wiring and
equipment within such rooms shall comply with the Electrical Code for such
location.
(f) Piping and Tubing. I. General. HPM piping and tubing shall comply with
this subsection and shall be installed in accordance with nationally recognized
standards. Piping and tubing systems shall be metallic unless the material being
76
1988 EDITION 911-912
transported is incompatible with such system. Systems supplying gaseous HPM

shall be welded throughout, except for connections, valves and fittings, to the
systems which are within a ventilated enclosure. HPM supply piping or tubing in
service corridors shall be exposed to view.
2. Installations in exit corridors and above other occupancies. Hazardous
production materials shall not be located within exit corridors or above areas not
classified as Group H, Division 6 Occupancies except as permitted by this
subsection.
Hazardous production material piping and tubing may be installed within the
space defined by the walls of exit corridors and the floor or roof above or in
concealed spaces above other occupancies under the following conditions:
A. Automatic sprinklers shall be installed within the space unless the space is
less than 6 inches in least dimension.
B. Ventilation at not less than six air changes per hour shall be provided. The
space shall not be used to convey air from any other area.
C. When the piping or tubing is used to transport HPM liquids, a receptor shall
be installed below such piping or tubing. The receptor shall be designed to
collect any discharge or leakage and drain it to an approved location. The
one-hour enclosure shall not be used as part of the receptor.
D. All HPM supply piping and tubing and HPM nonmetallic waste lines shall
be separated from the exit corridor and from any occupancy other than
Group H, Division 6 by construction as required for walls or partitions that
have a fire-protection rating of not less than one hour. When gypsum
wallboard is used, joints on the piping side of the enclosure need not be
taped, provided the joints occur over framing members. Access openings
into the enclosure shall be protected by approved fire assemblies.
E. Readily accessible manual or automatic remotely activated fail-safe emer-
gency shutoff valves shall be installed on piping and tubing other than
waste lines at the following locations:
(i) At branch connections into the fabrication area.
(ii) At entries into exit corridors.
Excess flow valves shall be installed as required by the Fire Code.
F. Electrical wiring and equipment located in the piping space shall be
approved for Class I. Division 2 Hazardous Locations.
EXCEPTION: Occasional transverse crossings of the corridors by supply pip·
ing which is enclosed within a ferrous pipe or tube for the width of the corridor need
not comply with Items A through F.
3. Identification. Piping, tubing and HPM waste lines shall be identified in
accordance with nationally recognized standards to indicate the material being
transported.
Heliports
Sec. 912. Heliports may be erected on buildings or other locations if they arc
constructed in accordance with this chapter and with Section 710.
77
TABLE NO. 9-A-EXEMPT AMOUNTS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, LIQUIDS :*
~
....CD AND CHEMICALS PRESENTING A PHYSICAL HAZARD cp
BASIC QUANTITIES PER CONTROL AREA 1
Jj )>
When two units are given, values within parentheses are in cubic feet (Cu. Ft.) or pounds (Lbs.) :8
u
CONOmON STORAGE>
USE>- CLOSED
SYSTEMS
USE>-OPEN
SYSTEMS
1
::!:·
:;t
Solid Uquld Solid Uquld Solid Liquid K
:::::
Lbs. Gallons Gas Lbs. Gallons Gas Lbs. Gallons Gas
MATERIAL CLASS (Cu. Ft.) (Lbs.) Cu. Ft. ICu.Ft.) (Lbs.) Cu. Ft. (Cu. Ft.) (Lbs.) Cu. Ft. li
1 .I Combustible liquid' II
III-A
-
-
I 20' .I
330' 5
-
-
-
-
120'
330'
-
-
-
-
30'
80'
-
-
~
ll:
111-B - 13,2005 ' - - 13,200' - - 3 ,3()()6 - :t:=:=:
1.2 Combustible dust H
;:~
lbs./1000 cu. fl. ]7 - - ]7 - - ]7 - -
1.
1.3 Combustible fiber @
(loose) (100) - - (100) - - (20) - -
I
(baled) (I ,000) - - (l ,000) - - (200) - -
I .4 Cryogenic, flammable or
oxidizing 45 - - 45 - - 10 -
,.
2.1 Explosives J5R'ol (I)' ' ' - lJ48 ('i•J" - lf411 (1/4)8 -
3. 1 Flammable solid 1254 ' - - 254 - - 25 4 - - c

3. 2 Flammable gas i z
'ii
(gaseous)
(liquefied)
3.3 Flammable liquid 3 1-A
-
-
-
-
154
30' '
5
750' '
-
-
-
-
-
-
15 45
30'
750'
-
5 -
-
-
-
-
10'
-
-
-
i
~
j
0
::u
;;:
~:x ;=
-
aJ
1-B - 60' 5 - - 60' - - 154 - c
1-C - 90' 5 - 90' - - 20'
~ z
-
-
c
Combination 1-A, 1-B, 1-C - 120' 5 10 - - 120' '" - - 30' 10 - ::~ t::)
0
0
c
m
4. I Organic peroxide.
unclassified detonatable I' 8 (I)' 8 - lf48 ('1•)8 - l/4ll ( 'I•)' -
-
im
4. 2 Organic peroxide I 54 5 (5)' 5 - (I)' (I)' - 1' 1' -
. c
II 5()4 5 (50) 4 ' - 5()4 (50) 4 - 1()4 (10)' ::::j
III 125 4 5 (125) 4 5 - 125 4 (125) 4 - 25 4 (25) 4 - 6z
N 500 (500) - 50()4 (500) - 100 (100) -
v N.L. N.L. - N.L. N.L. - N.L. N.L. -
4.3 Oxidizer 4 ps (1)'' - 1/4~ (lf4)8 - lJ48 ('1•)8 -
3 I ()4 5 (10) 4 5 - 2' (2)' - 2' (2)' -
2 25()4 5 (250)' 5 - 25()4 (250) 4 - 5()4 (50) 4 -
I 1.()()()4 5 (I ,000)' 5 - I ,OOQ4 (I ,000) 4 - 20()4 (200) 4 -

4.4 Oxidizer--Gas
(gaseous) - - I ,500" 5 - - I ,50()4 5
- - -
•·
(liquefied) - 15 45 - - 15 45 - - - -
5.I Pyrophoric 4'' (4)5 ' 505 8 I' (1)8 105 8 0 0 0
6.1 Unstable (reactive) 4 ps (1 )5 8 1058 lf48 ('14)' 2' 8 1 /4~
('/•)' 0
3 5' ' (5)' 5 5()4 ' I' (1)' 1()4 5 1' (1)' 0
2 5()4 5 (50) 4 5 25()4 5 5()4 (50) 4 25()4 5 1()4 (10)' 0
I 125 4 5 (125) 4 5 75()4 ' 1254 (125) 4 75()4 5 25 4 (25) 4 0
7.1 Water (reactive) 3 5" (5)' 5 - s• (5)' - 1' (I)' -
2 5()4 5 (50) 4 5 - 5()4 (50)4 - [()4 (10)' -
l 125 5 6 (125) 5 6
- 125 6 (125)' 6 - 25 6 (25) 6 -
N.L. = Not limited.

!Control area is a space bounded by not less than a one-hour fire~resistive occupancy separation within which the exempted amounts of hazardous
materials may be stored dispensed, handled or used. The number of control areas within a building used for retail and wholesale stores shall not
exceed two. The number of control areas m butldmgs with other uses shall not exceed four. ~
2The aggregate quantity in use and storage shall not exceed the quantity listed for storage. ij
3Tbe quantities of alcoholk beverages in retail sales uses are unlimited provided the liquids are packaged in individual containers not exceeding four ~
I~ I
The quantities of medicines, foodstuffs and cosmetics containing not more than 50 percent of volume of water-miscible liquids and with the @: t
(Continued)
(Continued) i:
remainder of the solutions not being flammable in retail sales or storage occupancies are unlimited when packaged in individual containers not
exceeding four liters. ~
I
"Quantities may be increased 100 percent in sprinklcred buildings. When Footnote 5 also applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied. 1·
SQuantities may be increased l 00 percent when stored in approved storage cabinets or safety cans as specified in the Fire Code. When Footnote 4 also
applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied. :,
'The quantities permitted in a sprink:lered building are not limited. .1····
7
A dust explosion potential is considered to exist if 1 JX>Und or more of combustible dust per l ,000 cubic feet of volume is normally in suspension or
could be put into suspension in all or a portion of an enclosure or inside pieces of equipment. This also includes combustible dust which accumulates ~.'.·.
on horizontal surfaces inside buildings or equipment and which could be put into suspension by an accident, sudden force or small explosion. ~
8Permitted in sprink:lered buildings only. None is allowed in unsprinklered buildings. [
'One pound of black sporting powder and 20 pounds of smokeless powder are permitted in sprinklered or unsprinklered buildings. ill.~.·.
1°Containing not more than the exempt amounts of Class I-A, Class I-B or Class 1-C flammable liquids. J
c:
z
=n
0
:u
s:
Ill
c:
;=
!2
z
c;)
0
0
c
m
TABLE NO. 9·8-EXEMPT AMOUNTS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, LIQUIDS
-
!m
AND CHEMICALS PRESENTING A HEALTH HAZARD !i!
MAXIMUM QUANTITIES PER CONTROL AREA1 ' ::!
0
When two units are given, values within parentheses are In pounds (Lbs.) z
USE:I--CLOSED USEa-QPEN
STORAGE> SYSTEMS SYSTEMS
Liquid Liquid Liquid
Solid Gallons5 6 Gas Solid GallonsS Gas Solid Gallons! Gaa
MATERIAL' Lbs.s s (L.bs.) Cu. Ft.s Lbs.s (L.ba.) Cu. Ft. Lbs.5 (l.bs.) Cu. ft.
1. Corrosives 5,000 500 65()<> 5,000 500 650' 1.000 100 -

2. Highly Toxics 8
3. Irritants
4. Sensitizers
5. Other Health Hazards
I
5,000
5,000
5,000
(I)
500
500
500
207
65()<>
65()<>
65()<>
1
5,000
5,000
5,000
( 1)
500
500
500
20 7
650'
650 5
650'
1/4
1,000
1,000
1,000
( 1/4)
100
100
100
-
-
-
-
!Control area is a space bounded by not less than one· hour fire-resistive occupancy separation within which the exempted amounts of hazardous
I
I
materials may be stored, dispensed, handled or used. The number of control areas within retail and wholesale stores shall not exceed two and the
number of control areas in other uses shall not exceed four.
l'fh.e quantities of medicines, foodstuffs and cosmetics, containing not more than 50 percent by volume of water-miscible liquids and with the
remainder of the solutions not being flammable, in retail sales uses are unlimited when packaged in individual containers not exceeding 4liters.
3The aggregate quantity in use and storage shall not exceed the quantity listed for storage.
4For carcinogenic and radioactive materials, see the Fire Code.
'Quantities may be increased 100 percent in sprinklered buildings. When Footnote 6 also applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied.
5Quantities may be increased 100 percent when stored in approved storage cabinets or safety cans as specified in the fire code. When Footnote 5 also
applies, the increase for both footnotes may be applied.
7Permitted only when stored in approved exhausted gas cabinets, exhausted enclosures or fume hoods.
-..
sfor special provisions, see the Fire Code .
I
TABLE NO. 9-c-DISTANCE FROM PROPERTY LINES, WALL AND OPENING PROTECTION
BASED ON LOCATION ON PROPERTY
OCCUPANCY MINIMUM DISTANCE ARE RESISTANCE OPENINGS IN
GROUP FROM PROPERTY UNE1 OF EXTERIOR WALLS EXTERIOR WALLS2
H-1 Detached 75 feet No requirement based No requirement based lli

building required See Table No. 9-D on location on location
H-2-3 Not in 30 feet when the 4 hours less than 5 feet, Not permitted less than
a detached building area exceeds I ,500 sq. ft.' 2 hours less than I 0 feet. 5 feet. protected less
I hour less than 20 feel than 20 feet
H-2-3 When detached 50 feet No requirement based No requirement based
building is required' See Table No. 9-D on location on location
4 hours less than 5 feet. Not permitted less than
H-4 5---{i-7 No requirement 2 hours less than 5 feet, protected less
10ft., I hour less than 20 feel than 20 feet
H-5 No requirement I hour less than 60 feet Protected less than 60 feet
c:
I Thedistance specified is the distance from the walls enclosing the occupancy to all property lines including those on a public way. z
ZWhen protected openings are specified. the protection shall be by a fire assembly having a fire-protection rating of not less than three-fourths hour. ~
:D
'Walls or portions of walls used for explosion venting shall be located not less than 50 feet from any property line including those on a public way.
i:
•Detached buildings are required for storage of quantities of materials which exceed the amounts specified in Table No. 9-E. til
5A Group H. Division 4 Occupancy having a floor area not exceeding 2,500 square feet may have exterior walls of not less than two-hour fire-resistive c:
;=
construction when less than 5 feet from a property line and of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction when more than 5 feet but less than 20 c
feet from a property line.
"' ~
0
8
m
1988 EDITION 9-D
TABLE NO. 9-D-MINIMUM DISTANCES FOR STORAGE OF

EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS
QUANTITY OF EXPLOSIVE
MATERIAL1 MINIMUM DISTANCE (Feel)
Pounds Pounds Property llnea2 3 separation of
Over Not Over and Inhabited gulldlnga4 Mllgazlnea3 4 5
2 5 140 12
5 10 180 16
10 20 220 20
20 30 250 22
30 40 280 24
40 50 300 28
50 75 340 30
75 100 380 32
100 125 400 36
125 150 430 38
150 200 470 42
200 250 510 46
250 300 540 48
300 400 590 54
400 500 640 58
500 600 680 62
600 700 710 64
700 800 750 66
800 900 780 70
900 1,000 800 72
1,000 1,200 850 78
1,200 1,400 900 82
1,400 1,600 940 86
1,600 1,800 980 88
1,800 2,000 1,010 90
2,000 2,500 1,090 98
2,500 3,000 1,160 104
3,000 4,000 1,270 116
4,000 5,000 1,370 122
5,000 6,000 1,460 130
6,000 7,000 1,540 136
7,000 8,000 1,600 144
8,000 9,000 1,670 150
9,000 10,000 1,730 156
10,000 12,000 1,750 164
12,000 14,000 1,770 174
14,000 16,000 1,800 180
16,000 18,000 1,880 188
18,000 20,000 1,950 196
20,000 25,000 2,000 210
25,000 30,000 2,000 224
30,000 35,000 2,000 238
35,000 40,000 2,000 248
40,000 45,000 2,000 258
45,000 50,000 2,000 270
!Continued)
83
9-D UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 9-0-MINIMUM DISTANCES FOR STORAGE OF

i
~l
EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL$-(Contlnued)
,!_·
I
QUANTITY OF EXPLOSIVE
MATERIALt MINIMUM DISTANCE (Feet)
Pounds Pounde Property II nea2 3 Separation of
Over Not Over and lnhabHad Bulldlngs4 Magazlnee3 4 5
50,000 55,000 2,000 280
55,000 60,000 2,000 290
60,000 65,000 2,000 300
65,000 70,000 2,000 310
·:·
70,000 75,000 2,000 320
1- 75,000 80,000 2,000 330
80,000 85.000 2,000 340
85,000 90,000 2,000 350
90,000 95,000 2,000 360
95,000 I 00,000 2,000 370
I 00,000 110,000 2,000 390
110,000 120,000 2,000 410
120,000 130,000 2,000 430
130,000 140,000 2,000 450
140,000 150,000 2,000 470
150,000 160,000 2,000 490
160,000 170,000 2,000 510
170,000 180,000 2,000 530
180,000 190,000 2,010 550
190,000 200,000 2,030 570
200,000 210,000 2,055 590
210,000 230,000 2,100 630
230,000 250,000 2,155 670
250,000 275,000 2,215 720
275,000 300,000 2,275 770
1The number of pounds of explosives listed is the number of pounds of trinitrotoluene (TNT)
or the equivalent pounds of other explosive.
'The distance listed is the distance to property line including property lines at public ways.
'The distance listed may be reduced by 50 percent when approved natural or artificial
':-:I' barriers are provided. Barriers shall effectively screen the building containing explosives
from other buildings, public ways or magazines. When mounds or rivetted walls of earth
are used for barriers, they shall not be less than 3 feet in thickness. A straight line from the
top of any sidewall of the building containing explosive materials to the eave line of any
other building, magazine or a point 12 feet above the centerline of a public way shall pass
I
through the barrier.
'Inhabited building is any building on the same property which is regularly occupied by
human beings. When two or more buildings containing explosives or magazines are
located on the same property, each building or magazine shall comply with the minimum
distances specified from inhabited buildings, and, in addition, they should be separated
from each other by not less than the distances shown for "Separation of Magazines,"
I
except that the quantity of explosive materials contained in detonator buildings or
magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing of said detonator buildings or magazines
from buildings or magazines cnntaining other explosive materials. If any two or more
buildings or magazines are separated from each other by less than the specified "Separa-
tion of Magazines'' distances, then such two or more buildings or magazines, as a group
shall be considered as one building or magazine, and the total quantity of explosive
f materials stored in such group shall be treated as ifthe explosive was in a single building or
" (Continued)
84
1988 EDITION 9-D, 9-E
magazine located on the site of any building or magazine of the group, and shall comply
with Ihe minimum of distances specified from other magazines or inhabited building:-..
5Magazine is a building or structure approved for storage of explosive material. In addition
to the requirements of this code, magazines shall comply with the Fire Code.
TABLE NO. 9·E-REQUIRED DETACHED STORAGE

DETACHED STORAGE IS REQUIRED WHEN THE QUANTITY DF
MATERIAL EXCEEDS THAT LISTED
Solids and Gaaas
Material Uqulds (Tons)1 2 (Cubic Feet)' 2
I. Explosives, bla._lljting agents, Overexempl Over exempt
black powder. fireworks, amounts amounts
detonatable organic peroxides,
2. Class 4 oxidizers,
3. Class 4 or Class 3
detonatable unstable (reactives)
4. Oxidizers,liquids and solids Class 3 25 -
Class 2 50 -
5. Organic peroxides Class I Over exempt

amounts -
Class II 25 -
··~
Class Ill 50 -
--
6. Unslable (reactives) Class 4 ill ,000 20

Class 3 I 2,000
Class 2 25 IO,tXJO
7. Water reactives Class 3 I 2,000
Class 2 25 10.000
8. Pyrophoric gases - 2,000
'Distance lo other buildings or properly lines shall be as specified in Table No. 9-D based on
TNT equivalence of lhe material.
20ver exempt amounts mean over the quantities listed in Table No. 9-A. :.:=:
85
Chapter 10
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP I OCCUPANCIES
Group I Occupancies Defined

Sec. 1001. Group I Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Nurseries for the full-time care of children under the age of six
(each accommodating more than five persons).
Hospitals, sanitariums, nursing homes with nonambulatory patients and simi-
lar buildings (each accommodating more than five persons).
Division 2. Nursing homes for ambulatory patients, homes for children six
years of age or over (each accommodating more than five persons).
Division 3. Mental hospitals, mental sanitariums, jails, prisons, reformatories
and buildings where personal liberties of inmates are similarly restrained.
EXCEPTION: Group I Occupancies shall not include buildings used only for
private residential purposes for a family group.

Sec. 1002. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group I
EXCEPTIONS: l. Hospitals and nursing homes classified as Group I, Division
1Occupancies that are equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout shall
not exceed one story in height when in l)lpe III One-hour, l)lpe IV or l)lpe V One-
hour construction.
2. Hospitals and nursing homes classified as Group I, Division I Occupancies
that are equipped with automatic sprinkler systems throughout may be five stories
when of l)lpe 11-F.R. construction and three stories when of Type II One-hour
construction. The allowable area increase specified in Section 506 (c) applies only
when the number of stories in the building is one less than set forth above.
3. Hospitals and nursing homes classified as Group I, Division l Occupancies
that are equipped with automatic sprinkler systems throughout may be housed within
one-story buildings of l)lpe li-N construction. The area of such building shall not
exceed 13,500 square feet plus the allowable area increase for separation by public
space or yards as set forth in Section 506 (a).
(b) Special Provisions. Division 3 Occupancies shall be housed in buildings of
Type I or TYpe ll-F.R. construction.
EXCEPTION: One-story buildings ofl)lpe II One-hour, l)lpe Ill One-hour, or V
One-hour construction may be permitted, provided the floor area does not exceed
3900 square feet between separation walls of two-hour fire-resistive construction
with openings protected by fire assemblies having one and one-half-hour fire-
protection rating.
Floor levels of Group I, Division I Occupancies used by inpatients for sleeping
or treatment, or having an occupant load of 50 or more, shall be divided into at
86
1988 EDITION 1002
least two compartments by smoke barriers. The area within a smoke compartment
shall not exceed 22,500 square feet nor shall its width or length exceed 150 feet.
The area of a smoke compartment shall not be less than that required to accommo-
date the occupants of the compartment plus the occupants from the adjoining
compartments, assuming not less than 30 square feet net clear floor area for bed
and litter patients and 6 square feet for other occupants.
Smoke barriers shall have a fire-resistance rating of not less than one hour. Such
barriers shall form an effective membrane continuous from outside wall to outside
wall, from a smoke barrier to a smoke barrier, from floor to floor or roof above, or
a combination thereof, including continuity through all concealed spaces, such as
above suspended ceilings, interstitial structural and mechanical spaces. Transfer
grilles, louvers and similar openings shall not be used in these partitions.
Doors in smoke barriers shall be tight-fitting smoke- and draft-control assem-
blies having a fire-protection rating of not less than 20 minutes and shall comply
with Section 3321 (b). When doors are installed across corridors a pair of opposite
swinging doors without a center mullion shall be installed. Smoke barrier doors
shall:
I . When installed across corridors, have vision panels of not less than 1/4-inch-
thick approved wired glass in steel frames. The area of the vision panels
shall not exceed that tested.
2. Be close fitting with only the clearance necessary for proper operation and
shall be without undercuts, louvers or grilles.
3. Doors shall have stops at the head and jambs. Opposite swinging corridor
doors shall have rabbets or astra gals at the meeting edges.
4. Have positive latching devices except on doors installed across corridors.
5. Be self-closing or automatic closing. An approved sign shall be on or
adjacent to self-closing doors specifying that they are to be maintained in a
closed position. Doors installed across corridors shall comply with Section
4306 (f) I, Item C. and doors on the floor or in the affected zone shall
automatically close if the fire alarm or sprinkler system is activated.
An approved damper designed to resist the passage of smoke shall be provided
at each point a duct penetrates a smoke barrier. The damper shall close upon
detection of smoke by an approved smoke detector located within the duct.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In lieu of an approved smoke detector located within the
duct, ducts which penetrate smoke barriers above required smoke-barrier doors are
permitted to have the approved damper arranged to close upon detection of smoke by
the local device designed to detect smoke on either side of the smoke-barrier door
opening.
2. Dampers are not required where the openings in ducts are limited to a single
smoke compartment and the ducts are of steel construction.
At least two exits shall be provided from each smoke compartment. Exits may
be through adjacent compartments, provided at least one exit does not return
through the compartment from which exiting originated.
Rooms occupied by inmates or patients whose personal liberties arc restrained
shall have noncombustible t1oor surfaces.
87
Medical gas systems shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the
fire Code. When nonflammable supply cylinders for such systems are located
inside buildings they shall be in a separate room or enclosure separated from the
rest of the building hy not less than one~ hour fire-resistive construction. Doors to
the room or enclosure shall he self~closing smoke~ and draft-control assemblies
having a fire~protection rating of not less than one~hour. Rooms shall have at least
one exterior wall in which there are not less than two vents of not less than 36
square inches in area. One vent shall be within 6 inches of the floor and one shall
be within 6 inches of the ceiling.
EXCEPTION: When an exterior wall cannot be provided, the room shall be
vented to the exterior through ducting contained within a one-hnur-ratcd shaft
enclosure. Approved mechanical ventilation shall provide ~ix air changes per hour
for the room.
determined by location on property, see Section 504 and PartlY.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 1004. Stairs, exits and smokeproof enclosures shall be provided as
specified in Chapter 33. (See also Section 3321.)

Sec. 1005. All portions of Group I Occupancies customarily used by human
beings shall be provided with natural light by means of exterior glazed openings
with an area equal to one tenth of the total floor area, and natural ventilation by
means of exterior openings with an area not less than one twentieth of the total
floor area, or shall be provided with artificial light and a mechanically operated
ventilating system as specified in Section 605.
For other requirements on water closets. see Section 510.


Special Hazards
Sec. 10011. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the requirements
of Chapter 37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
Motion picture projection rooms shall conform to the requirements of Chapter
40.
88
1988 EDITION 1008-1010
Specific use areas shall be separated from Group I, Division I Occupancies

used for hospitals or nursing homes in accordance with Table No. 10-A. Doors
shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic-closing by actuation of a
smoke detector.
Storage and the handling of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in
accordance with the Fire Code.
All exterior openings in a boiler room or room containing central heating
equipment if located below openings in another story, or if less than l 0 feet from
the other doors or windows of the same building, shall be protected by a fire
assembly having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assemblies
shall be fixed, automatic- or self-closing. Every room containing a boiler, central
heating plant or hot-water supply boiler shall be separated from the rest of the
building by not less than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation,
Fire Alarms I
F
.
Sec. 1009. An approved fire alarm system shall be provided for all Group I
Occupancies, Audible alarm devices shall be used in all nonpatient areas, Visible
I
F
alarm devices may be used in lieu of audible devices in patient-occupied areas. I
Smoke Detectors
Sec. 1010. Smoke detectors which receive their primary power from the
building wiring shall be installed in patient sleeping rooms of hospital and nursing
homes, Actuation of such detectors shall cause a visual display on the corridor
side of the room in which the detector is located and shall cause an audible and
visual alarm at the respective nurses' station, If such detectors and related devices
are combined with the nursing call system, the total system need not be electri-
I
cally supervised,
EXCEPTION: In rooms equipped with automatic door closers having integral
smoke detectors on the room side, the integral detector may substitute for the room
smoke detector, provided it performs the required alerting functions.
89
10-A UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 10-A-REQUIRED SEPARATION OF

SPECIFIC USE AREAS
DESCRIPTION OCCUPANCY SEPARATION
l. Employee locker rooms none
:·: 2. Gift/retail shops none
3. Handicraft shops none
4. Kitchens none
5. Laboratories which employ
hazardous materials in quantities
less than that which would cause
classification as a Group H
Occupancy One hour
6. Laundries greater than 100 sq. ft. One hour
7. Paint shops employing hazardous
substances and materials in
quantities less than that which
would cause classification as a
Group H Occupancy One hour
8. Physical plant maintenance shop One hour
9. Soiled linen room One hour
10. Storage rooms 100 sq. ft. orlcss in
area storing combustible material none
ll. Storage rooms more than 100 sq.
ft. storing combustible material One hour
12. Trash-collection rooms One hour
90
1988 EDITION 1101-1104
Chapter 11
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP M OCCUPANCIES
Group M Occupancies Defined
Sec. 1101. Group M Occupancies shall be:
Division I. Private garages, carports. sheds and agricultural buildings.
EXCEPTION: Where applicable (see Section 103) for agricultural buildings,
see Appendix Chapter II.
Division 2. Fences over 6 feet high. tanks and towers.

Sec. 1102. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed as Group M,
Division I Occupancies because of the use or character of the occupancy shall not
exceed 1000 square feet in area or one story in height except as provided in
Subsection (b). Any building or portion thereof that exceeds the limitations
specified in this chapter shall be classed in the occupancy group other than Group
M, Division I that it most nearly resembles.
(b) Special Area Provisions. The total area of a private garage used only
as a parking garage for private or pleasure-type motor vehicles where no repair
work is done nor fuel dispensed may be 3000 square feet, provided the provisions
set forth in Items 1 or 2 below are satisfied. More than one 3000-square-foot
Group M, Division 1 Occupancy may be within the same building, provided each
3000-square-foot area is separated by area separation walls complying with
Section 505 (e).
1. For a mixed-occupancy building, the exterior wall and opening protection
for the Group M, Division 1 portion of the building shall be as required for
the major occupancy of the building. For such mixed-occupancy building,
the allowable floor area of the building shall be as permitted for the major
occupancy contained therein.
2. For a building containing only a Group M, Division 1 Occupancy, the
exterior wall and opening protection shall be as required for a building
classified as a Group R. Division l Occupancy.
(c) Headroom Clearance. Garages in connection with Group R, Division 1
Occupancies shall have an unobstructed headroom clearance of not less than 7
feet above the finish floor to any ceiling. beam, pipe or similar construction
except for wall-mounted shelves, storage surfaces. racks or cabinets.
determined by location on property, see Section 504 and Part IV.
Special Hazards
of Chapter 37 and the Mechanical Code.
91
Under no circumstances shall a private garage have any opening into a room
used for sleeping purposes.
Class I, II or III-A liquids shall not be stored, handled or used in Group M
Occupancies unless such storage or handling shall comply with the Fire Code.
Garage Floor Surfaces
Sec. 1105. In areas where motor vehicles are stored or operated, floor surfaces
shall he of noncombustible materials or asphaltic paving materials.
Agricultural Buildings
Sec. 1106. Where applicable (see Section 103) for agricultural buildings, see
Appendix Chapter II.
92
1988 EDITION 1201-1204
Chapter 12
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP R OCCUPANCIES
Group R Occupancies Defined
Sec. 1201. Group R Occupancies shall be:
Division 1. Hotels and apartment houses.
Convents and monasteries (each accommodating more than 10 persons).
Division 2. Not used.
Division 3. Dwellings and lodging houses.
For occupancy separations. see Table No. 5-B.
A complete code for construction of detached one- and two-family dwellings is
in Appendix Chapter 12 of this code. When adopted, as set forth in Section 103, it
will take precedence over the requirements set forth in Parts I through X and
Chapter 60 of this code.
ConstruC11on, Height and Allowable Area
Sec. 1202. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group R
(b) Special Provisions. Walls and floors separating dwelling units in the same B
.
building shall be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction. l!i
Group R, Division I Occupancies more than two stories in height or having
more than 3000 square feet of floor area above the first story shall be of not less
than one-hour fire-resistive construction throughout except as provided in Sec-
tion 1705 (b) 2.
Storage or laundry rooms that arc within Group R, Division I Occupancies that
are used in common by tenants shall be separated from the rest of the building by
not less than one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
For Group R, Division I Occupancies with a Group B. Division I parking
garage in the basement or first floor, see Section 702 (a).
For attic space partitions and draft stops, see Section 2516 (f).
determined by location on property, sec Section 504 and Part IV.
I
Exits and Emergency Escapes
Sec. 1204. Stairs, exits and smokeproof enclosures shall be as specified in
Chapter33.
Basements in dwelling units and every sleeping room below the fourth story
shall have at least one operable window or door approved for emergency escape or
rescue which shall open directly into a public street, public alley, yard or exit
court. The units shall be operable from the inside to provide a full clear opening
without the usc of separate tools. .
93
All escape or rescue windows shall have a minimum net clear openable area of
I
S. 7 square feet. The minimum net clear openable height dimension shall be 24
inches. The minimum net clear openable width dimension shall be 20 inches.
When windows are provided as a means of escape or rescue they shall have a
finished sill height not more than 44 inches above the floor.
Bars, grilles, grates or similar devices may be installed on an emergency escape
or rescue windows or doors, provided:
I . Such devices are equipped with approved release mechanisms which are
openable from the inside without the use of a key or special knowledge or
effort; and
2. The building is equipped with smoke detectors installed in accordance with
Section 1210.
Sec. 1205. (a) General. For the purpose of determining the light or ventilation
required by this section, any room may be considered as a portion of an adjoining
room when one half of the area of the common wall is open and unobstructed and
provides an opening of not less than one tenth of the floor area of the interior room
or 25 square feet, whichever is greater.
Exterior openings for natural light or ventilation required by this section shall
open directly onto a public way or a yard or court located on the same lot as the
building.
EXCEPTION: Required windows may open into a roofed porch where the
porch:
I. Abuts a public way. yard or court; and
2. Has a ceiling height of not less than 7 feet; and
3. Has the longer side at least 65 percent open and unobstructed.
(b) Light. All guest rooms, dormitories and habitable rooms within a dwelling
unit shall be provided with natural light by means of exterior glazed openings with
an area not less than one tenth of the floor area of such rooms with a minimum of
10 square feet.
(c) Ventilation. All guest rooms, dormitories and habitable rooms within a
dwelling unit shall be provided with natural ventilation by means of openable
exterior openings with an area of not less than one twentieth of the floor area of
such rooms with a minimum of 5 square feet.
In lieu of required exterior openings for natural ventilation, a mechanical
ventilating system may be provided. Such system shall be capable of providing
two air changes per hour in all guest rooms, dormitories, habitable rooms and in
public corridors. One fifth of the air supply shall be taken from the outside.
All bathrooms, water closet compartments, laundry rooms and similar rooms
shall be provided with natural ventilation by means of openable exterior openings
with an area not less than one twentieth of the floor area of such rooms with a
minimum of 1112 square feet.
In lieu of required exterior openings for natural ventilation in bathrooms
containing a bathtub or shower or combination thereof, laundry rooms. and
94
1988 EDITION 1205-1207
similar rooms, a mechanical ventilation system connected directly to the outside

capable of providing five air changes per hour shall be provided. The point of
discharge of exhaust air shall be at least 5 feet from any mechanical ventilating
intake. Bathrooms which contain only a water closet or lavatory or combination
thereof, and similar rooms may be ventilated with an approved mechanical
recirculating fan or similar device designed to remove odors from the air.
(d) Sanitation. Every building shall be provided with at least one water closet.
Every hotel or subdivision thereof where both sexes are accommodated shall
contain at least two separate toilet facilities which are conspicuously identified for
male or female use, each of which contains at least one water closet.
EXCEPTION: Hotel guest rooms may have one unidentified toilet facility.
Additional water closets shall be provided on each floor for each sex at the rate
of one for every additional 10 guests, or fractional part thereof, in excess of 10.
Every dwelling unit shall be provided with a kitchen equipped with a kitchen
sink. Every dwelling unit and every lodging house shall be provided with a
bathroom equipped with facilities consisting of a water closet, lavatory and either
a bathtub or shower. Each sink, lavatory and either a bathtub or shower shall be
equipped with hot and cold running water necessary for its normal operation.
For other requirements on water closets, see Section 511.
Yards and Courts

Sec. 1206. (a) Scope. This section shall apply to yards and courts having
required windows opening therein.
(b) Yards. Every yard shall be not less than 3 feet in width for one-story and
two-story buildings. For buildings more than two stories in height, the minimum
width of the yard shall be increased at the rate of I foot for each additional story.
For buildings exceeding 14 stories in height, the required width of yard shall be
computed on the basis of 14 stories.
(c) Courts. Every court shall be not less than 3 feet in width. Courts having
windows opening on opposite sides shall be not less than 6 feet in width. Courts
bounded on three or more sides by the walls of the building shall be not less than 10
feet in length unless bounded on one end by a public way or yard. For buildings
more than two stories in height, the court shall be increased I foot in width and 2
feet in length for each additional story. For buildings exceeding 14 stories in
height, the required dimensions shall be computed on the basis of 14 stories.
Adequate access shall be provided to the bottom of all courts for cleaning
purposes. Every court more than two stories in height shall be provided with a
horizontal air intake at the bottom not less than I 0 square feet in area and leading
to the exterior of the building unless abutting a yard or public way. The construc-
tion of the air intake shall be as required for the court walls of the building, but in
no case shall be less than one-hour fire resistive.
Room Dimensions
Sec. 1207. (a) Ceiling Heights. Habitable space shall have a ceiling height of
not less than 7 feet 6 inches except as otherwise permitted in this section.
95
Kitchens, halls, bathrooms and toilet compartments may have a ceiling height of
not less than 7 feet measured to the lowest projection from the ceiling. Where
exposed beam ceiling members are spaced at less than 4M inches on center, ceiling
height shall be measured to the bottom of these members. Where exposed beam
ceiling members are spaced at 4X inches or more on center, ceiling height shall be
measured to the bottom of the deck supported by these members. provided that the
bottom of the members is not less than 7 feet above the floor.
If any room in a building has a sloping ceiling. the prescribed ceiling height for
the room is required in only one-half the area thereof. No portion of the room
measuring less than 5 feet from the finished floor to the finished ceiling shall be
included in any computation of the minimum area thereof.
If any room has a furred ceiling, the prescribed ceiling height is required in two
thirds the area thereof. but in no case shall the height of the furred ceiling be less
than 7 feet.
(b) Floor Area. Every dwelling unit shall have at least one room which shall
have not less than 120 square feet of floor area. Other habitable rooms except
kitchens shall have an area of not less than 70 square feet. Efficiency dwelling
units shall comply with the requirements of Section 1208.
(c) Width. Habitable rooms other than a kitchen shall be not less than 7 feet in
any dimension.
Efficiency Dwelling Units

Sec. 1208. An efficiency dwelling unit shall conform to the requirements of the
code except as herein provided:
I. The unit shall have a living room of not less than 220 square feet of
superficial floor area. An additional I00 square feet of superficial floor area shall
be provided for each occupant of such unit in exec" of two.
2. The unit shall be provided with a separate closet.
3. The unit shall be provided with a kitchen sink, cooking appliance and
refrigeration facilities. each having a clear working space of not less than 30
inches in front. Light and ventilation conforming to this code shall be provided.
4. The unit shall be provided with a separate bathroom containing a water
closet. lavatory and bathtub or shower.

Elevator shafts, vent shafts. dumbwaiter shafts, clothes chutes and other verti-
cal openings shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall be as specified in Section
1706.
In nonsprinklered Group R, Division I Occupancies, corridors serving an
occupant load of I 0 or more shall be separated from corridors and other areas on
adjacent floors by not less than approved fixed wired glass set in steel frames or by
20-minutc smoke- and draft-control assemblies which are automatic-closing by
smoke detection.
96
1988 EDITION 1210-1211
Smoke Detectors and Sprinkler Systems

Sec. 1210. (a) Smoke Detectors. I. General. Dwelling units and hotel or
lodging house guest rooms that are used for sleeping purposes shall be provided
with smoke detectors. Detectors shall be installed in accordance with the ap-
proved manufacturer's instructions.
2. Additions, alterations or repairs to Group R Occupancies. When the
valuation of an addition, alteration or repair to a Group R Occupancy exceeds
$1000.00 and a permit is required, or when one or more sleeping rooms are added
or created in existing Group R Occupancies, smoke detectors shall be installed in
accordance with Subsections 3, 4 and 5 of this section.
3. Power source. In new construction, required smoke detectors shall receive
their primary power from the building wiring when such wiring is served from a
commercial source. Wiring shall be permanent and without a disconnecting
switch other than those required for overcurrcnt protection. Smoke detectors may
be battery operated when installed in existing buildings, or in buildings without
commercial power, or in buildings which undergo alterations, repairs or additions
regulated by Subsection 2 of this section.
4. Location within dwelling units. In dwelling units, detectors shall be
mounted on the ceiling or wall at a point centrally located in the corridor or area
giving access to each separate sleeping area. When the dwelling unit has more
than one story and in dwellings with basements, a detector shall be installed on
each story and in the basement. In dwelling units where a story or basement is split
into two or more levels, the smoke detector shall be installed on the upper level,
except that when the lower level contains a sleeping area, a detector shall be
installed on each level. When sleeping rooms are on an upper level, the detector
shall be placed at the ceiling of the upper level in close proximity to the stairway. In
dwelling units where the ceiling height of a room open to the hallway serving the
bedrooms exceeds that of the hallway by 24 inches or more, smoke detectors shall
be installed in the hallway and in the adjacent room. Detectors shall sound an
alarm audible in all sleeping areas of the dwelling unit in which they arc located.
5. Location in efficiency dweUing units and hotels. In efficiency dwelling
units, hotel suites and in hotel sleeping rooms, detectors shall be located on the
ceiling or wall of the main room ur hotel sleeping room. When sleeping rooms
within an efficiency dwelling unit or hotel suite are on an upper level, the detector
shall be placed at the ceiling of the upper level in close proximity to the stairway.
When actuated, the detector shall sound an alarm audible within the sleeping area
of the dwelling unit, hotel suite or sleeping room in which it is located.
(b) Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems. When required by other provisions of
this code, automatic sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be installed as spcci·
fied in Chapter 38.
Fire Alarm Systems

Sec. 1211. A manual and automatic approved fire alarm system shall be
installed in apartment houses that arc three or more stories in height or contain
97
more than 15 dwelling units and in hotels three or more stories in height or
con!.aining 20 or more guest rooms, in accordance with the Fire Code.
EXCEPTIONS: I. A fire alarm system need not be installed in buildings not
over two stories in height when all individual dwelling units and contiguous attic and
crawl spaces are separated from each other and from public or common areas by at
least onc-huur fire-resistive occupancy separations and each individual dwelling
unit or guest room has an exit direct to a puhlic way, exit court or yard, exterior
stairway or exterior exit balcony.
2. A separate fire alarm system need not be installed in buildings which are
F :;~: protected throughout by an approved supervised fire sprinkler system installed in
:~· accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1 and having a local alarm to notify all
I
F
I
F
I
j
:~
occupants.
For the purposes of this section, area separation walls shall not define separate
buildings.
Heating
Sec. 1212. Every dwelling unit and guest room shall be provided with heating
facilities capable of maintaining a room temperature of 70°F. at a point 3 feet
above the floor in all habitable rooms.
Special Hazards
of Chapter 37 and the Mechanical Code.
The storage and handling of gasoline, fuel oil or other flammable liquids in
Division l Occupancies shall be in accordance with the Fire Code.
In Division l Occupancies, doors leading into rooms in which Class I flamma-
ble liquids are stored or used shall be protected by a fire assembly having a one-
hour fire-protection rating. Such fire assembly shall be self-closing and shall be
posted with a sign on each side of the door in l-inch block letters stating: FIRE
DOOR-KEEP CLOSED.
Every room containing a boiler, central heating plant or hut-water supply boiler
in Division I Occupancies shall be separated from the rest of the building by not
Jess than a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
EXCEPTION: A separation shall not be required for such rooms with equipment
serving only one dwelling unit.
Access to Buildings and Facilities

Sec. 1214. Buildings containing more than 20 dwelling units or20 guest rooms
shall be accessible to the physically handicapped by a level entry, ramp or elevator.
The number of dwelling units or guest rooms accessible to the physically handi-
capped shall be not less than the following:
21 through 99 - one unit

I 00 and over - one, plus one for each additional I 00
units or fraction thereof
98
1988 EDITION 1214
To determine the total number of accessible units, more than one structure on a
building site shall be considered as one building. Habitable rooms, bathrooms,
toifet compartments, halls and utility rooms in units that are required to be
accessible to the physically handicapped shall be accessible by level floors, ramps
or elevators, and doorways to such rooms shall have a clear unobstructed width of
not less than 32 inches.
Toilet facilities in accessible units shall comply with Section 511.
Chapters 13-16
NO REQUIREMENTS
99
Part IV
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON TYPES
OF CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 17
CLASSIFICATION OF ALL BUILDINGS BY TYPES OF
CONSTRUCTION AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General
Sec. 1701. The requirements of Part IV are for the various types of construction
and represent varying degrees of public safety and resistance to fire. Every
building shall be classified by the building official into one of the types of
construction set forth in Table No. 17-A. Any building which does not entirely
conform to a type of construction set forth in Table No. 17-A shall be classified by
the building official into a type having an equal or lesser degree of fire resistance.
A building or portion thereof shall not be required to conform to the details of a
type of construction higher than that type which meets the minimum requirements
based on occupancy (Part III) even though certain features of such building
actually conform to a higher type of construction.
Where specific materials, types of construction or fire-resistive protection arc
required, such requirements shall be the minimum requirements, and any materi-
als, types of construction or fire-resistive protection which will afford equal or
greater public safety or resistance to fire, as specified in this code, may be used.
Portions of buildings separated as specified in Section 505 (c) may be consid-
ered a separate building for classification of types of construction. When there is
no such separation, the area of the entire building shall not exceed the least area
permitted for the types of construction involved.
Structural Frame
Sec. 1702. The structural frame shall be considered to be the columns and the
girders, beams, trusses and spandrels having direct connections to the columns
and all other members which arc essential to the stability of the building as a
whole. The members of floor or roof panels which have no connection to the
columns shall be considered secondary members and not a part of the structural
frame.
Usable Space Under Floors

Sec. 1703. Usable space under the first story shall be enclosed except in Groups
R, Division 3 and M Occupancies, and such enclosure when constructed of metal
or wood shall be protected on the side of the usable space as required for one-hour
fire-resistive construction. Doors shall be self-closing, of noncombustible con-
struction or solid wood core, not less than J3/4 inches in thickness.
100
1988 EDITION 1704-1705
Roofs
Sec. 1704. Roof coverings shall be as specified in Table No. 32-A.
Exceptions to Table No. 17-A

Sec. 1705. (a) General. The provisions of this section are exceptions to the
construction requirements of Table No. 17-A, Chapters 5 through 12 and 18
through 22.
(b) Fixed Partitions. I . Stores and offices. Interior nonload-bearing parti-
tions dividing portions of stores, offices or similar places occupied by one tenant
only and which do not establish a corridor serving an occupant load that would re-
quire it to be of fire-resistive construction under the provisions of Section 3305 (g)
may be constructed of:
A. Noncombustible materials.
B. Fire-retardant treated wood.
C. One-hour fire-resistive construction.
D. Wood panels or similar light construction up to three fourths the height of
the room in which placed; when more than three fourths the height of the
room, such partitions shall have not less than the upper one fourth of the
partition constructed of glass.
2. Hotels and apartments. Interior nonload-bearing partitions within individ-
ual dwelling units in apartment houses and guest rooms or suites in hotels when
such dwelling units, guest rooms or suites are separated from each other and from
corridors by not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction may be constructed
of:
A. Noncombustible materials or fire-retardant-treated wood in buildings of
any type of construction; or
B. Combustible framing with noncombustible materials applied to the fram-
ing in buildings of'JYpe lli or V construction.
Openings to such corridors shall be equipped with doors conforming to Section
3305 (h) regardless of the occupant load served.
For use of plastics in partitions, see Section 5210.
(c) Folding, Portable or Movable Partitions. Approved folding, portable or
movable partitions need not have a fire-resistive rating, provided:
I. They do not block required exits (without providing alternative conforming
exits) and they do not establish an exit corridor.
2. Their location is restricted by means of permanent tracks, guides or other
approved methods.
3. Flammability shall be limited to materials having a flame-spread classifica-
tion as set forth in Table No. 42-B for rooms or areas.
(d) Walls Fronting on Streets or Yards. Regardless of fire-resistive require-
ments for exterior walls, certain elements of the walls fronting on streets or yards
having a width of 40 feet may be constructed as follows:
I. Bulkheads below show windows, show-window frames, aprons and show-
101
cases may be of combustible materials, provided the height of such con-

struction does not exceed 15 feet above grade.
2. Wood veneer of boards not less than l-inch nominal thickness or exterior-
type panels not less than 3/s-inch nominal thickness may be applied to walls,
provided the veneer does not exceed 15 feet above grade, and further
provided such veneer shall be placed either directly against noncombustible
surfaces or furred out from such surfaces not to exceed JS/s inches with all
concealed spaces fire-stopped as provided in Section 2516 (f). Where
boards, panels and furring as described above comply with Section 407 as
fire-retardant treated wood suitable for exterior exposure, the height above
grade may be increased to 35 feet.
(e) Trim. Trim, picture molds, chair rails, baseboard, handrails and show-
window backing may be of wood. Unprotected wood doors and windows may be
used except where openings are required to be fire protected.
Foam plastic trim covering not more than I 0 percent of the wall or ceiling area
may be used, provided such trim (I) has a density of no less than 20 pounds per
cubic foot, (2) has a maximum thickness of l/2 inch and a maximum width of 4
inches and (3) has a flame-spread rating no greater than 75.
Materials used for interior finish of walls and ceilings, including wainscoting,
shall be as specified in Chapter 42.
(f) Loading Platforms. Exterior loading platforms may be of noncombustible
construction or heavy timber construction with wood floors not less than 2-inch
nominal thickness. Such wood construction shall not be carried through the
exterior walls.
(g) Insulating Boards. Combustible insulating boards may be used under
finished flooring.
Shaft Enclosures
Sec. 1706. (a) General. Openings extending vertically through floors shall be
enclosed in a shaft of fire-resistive construction having the time period set forth in
Table No. 17-A for "Shaft Enclosures." Protection for stairways shall be as
specified in Sections 3309 and 3310. See Section 706 for exception in Group B,
Division 4 Occupancies and Section 709 (j) for open parking garages.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In other than Group I Occupancies, an enclosure will not be
required for openings which serve only one adjacent floor and are not connected with
openings serving other floors and which are not concealed within the building
construction.
2. In buildings housing Group B Occupancies equipped with automatic sprinkler
systems throughout, enclosures shall not be required for escalators where the top of
the escalator opening at each story is provided with a draft curtain and automatic fire
sprinklers are installed around the perimeter of the opening within 2 feet of the draft
curtain. The draft curtain shall enclose the perimeter of the unenclosed opening and
extend from the ceiling downward at least 12 inches on all sides. The spacing
between sprinklers shall not exceed 6 feet.
3. In Type V buildings, chutes and dumbwaiter shafts with a cross-sectional area
of not more than 9 square feet may be unenclosed if lined on the inside with lath and
102
1988 EDITION 1706-1707
plaster or gypsum wallboard, with such lining covered with not less than No. 26
galvanized sheet metal gauge with all joints in such sheet metal locklapped. All
openings into any such enclosure shall be protected by metal or metal-clad doors
with either metal or metal-clad jambs, casings or frames.
4. Exit enclosures shall conform to the applicable provisions of Sections 3309
and 3310.
5. In one- and two-story buildings of other than Group I Occupancies, shafts for
§1
gas vents, factory-built chimneys or piping which extend through not more than two
floors need not comply with Table No. I7-A. In Group R, Division 3 Occupancies
less than three stories in height, shafts for gas vents and for ducts and piping which
extend through not more than two floors need not comply with Table No. 17-A.
6. Gas vents and noncombustible piping installed in walls of buildings passing
through three floors or less need not comply with Table No. 17-A. Such shafts shall
I
be effectively draft-stopped at each floor or ceiling.
7. Noncombustible pipe and conduit may be installed and maintained within the
cavity of fire-resistive walls, provided both the floor and wall penetrations are tightly
sealed with a noncombustible material impervious to the passage of smoke.
8. In buildings with Group H, Division 6 Occupancies, a fabrication area may
have mechanical, duct and piping penetrations which extend through not more than
two floors within that fabrication area. Penetrations for tubing, piping, conduit or
duct shall be effectively draft-stopped at the floor level. The fabrication area,
including the areas through which the ductwork and piping extend, shall be consid-
ered a single conditioned environment.
(b) Protection of Openings. Every opening into a shaft enclosure shall be
protected by a self-closing fire assembly conforming to Section 4306 and having a
fire-protection rating of one hour for openings through one-hour walls and one
and one-half hours for openings through two-hour walls.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Openings to the exterior may be unprotected when so permit-
ted by Table No. 5-A.
2. Openings produced by air ducts piercing shaft enclosure walls may be pro-
tected by fire dampers conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-7.
(c) Rubbish and Linen Chutes. In other than Group R, Division 3 Occupan-
cies, rubbish and linen chutes shall terminate in rooms separated from the
remainder of the building by a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
Openings into the chutes and termination rooms shall not be located in exit
corridors or stairways.
Vlleather Protection
Sec. 1707. (a) Weather-resistive Barriers. All weather-exposed surfaces
shall have a weather-resistive barrier to protect the interior wall covering. Such
barrier shall be equal to that provided for in U .B.C. Standard No. 17-1 for kraft
waterproof building paper or U. B.C. Standard No. 32-1 for asphalt-saturated rag
felt. Building paper and felt shall be free from holes and breaks other than those
created by fasteners and construction system due to attaching of the building
paper, and shall be applied over studs or sheathing of all exterior walls. Such felt or
paper shall be applied weatherboard fashion, lapped not less than 2 inches at
horizontal joints and not less than 6 inches at vertical joints.
103
Weather-protected barrier may be omitted in the following cases:

I . When exterior covering is of approved weatherproof panels.
2. In back-plastered construction.
3. When there is no human occupancy.
4. Over water-repellent panel sheathing.
5. Under approved paperbackcd metal or wire fabric lath.
6. Behind lath and portland cement plaster applied to the underside of roof and
cave projections.
(b) Flashing and Counterflashing. Exterior openings exposed to the weather
shall be flashed in such a manner as to make them weatherproof.
All parapets shall be provided with coping of approved materials. All flashing,
countcrflashing and coping. when of metal. shall be of not less than No. 26 U.S.
gauge corrosion-resistant metal.
(c) Waterproofing Weather-exposed Areas. Balconies, landings, exterior
stairways and similar surfaces exposed to the weather and scaled underneath shall
be waterproofed.
(d) Dampproofing Foundation Walls. Unless otherwise approved by the
building official, foundation walls enclosing a basement below finished grade
shall be dampproofed outside by approved methods and materials.
Members Carrying Masonry or Concrete

Sec. 1708. All members carrying masonry or concrete walls in buildings over
one story in height shall be fire protected with one-hour fire protection or the fire-
resistive requirement of the wall, whichever is greater.
EXCEPTION: Fire protection may be omitted from the bottom flange of lintels
spanning not over 6 feet, shelf angles. or plates that arc not a part of the structural
frame.
Parapets
Sec. 1709. (a) General. Parapets shall be provided on all exterior walls of
buildings.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Walls which arc not required to be of fire-resistive construc-
tion.
2. Walls which terminate at roofs of not less than two-hour fire-resistive con-
struction or roofs constructed entirely of noncombustible materials.
3. Walls where, due to location on property, unprotected openings are permitted.
4. Walls on all buildings having a floor area of not more than 1000 square feet per
floor.
(b) Construction. Parapets shall have the same degree of fire resistance
required for the wall upon which they arc erected and on any side adjacent to a roof
surface shall have noncombustible faces for the uppermost 18 inches, including
countcrflashing and coping materials. The height of the parapet shall be not less
than 30 inches above the point where the roof surface and the wall intersect.
Where the roof slopes toward a parapet at slopes greater than 2:12, the parapet
104
1988 EDITION 1709-1711
shall extend to the same height as any portion of the roof that is within the distance
where protection of wall openings would be required, but in no case shall the
height be less than 30 inches.
Projections
Sec. 1710. Cornices, eave overhangs, exterior balconies and similar architec-
tural appendages extending beyond the floor area as defined in Section 407 shall
conform to the requirements of this section. (See Sections 3305 and 3306 for
additional requirements applicable to exterior exit balconies and stairways.)
Projections from walls of Type I or II construction shall be of noncombusti blc
materials.
Projections from walls of Type III, IV or V construction may be of noncombus-
tible or combustible materials.
Combustible projections located where openings are not permitted or where
protection of openings is required shall be of one-hour fire-resistive or heavy-
timber construction conforming to Section 2106.
Projections shall not extend more than 12 inches into the areas where openings
are prohibited.
For projections extending over public property, see Chapter 45.
For combustible ornamentation, see Section 1705 (d).
Guardrails
Sec. 1711. All unenclosed floor and roof openings, open and glazed sides of
stairways, landings and ramps, balconies or porches, which are more than 30
inches above grade or floor below, and roofs used for other than service of the
building shall be protected by a guardrail.
EXCEPTION: Guardrails need not be provided at the following locations:
I. On the loading side of loading docks.
2. On the auditorium side of a stage or enclosed platform.
The top of guardrails shall be not less than 42 inches in height.

EXCEPTIONS: I. The top of guardrails for Group R, Division 3 and Group M,
Division I Occupancies and interior guardrails within individual dwelling units and
guest rooms of Group R, Division I Occupancies may be 36 inches in height.
2. The top of guardrails on a balcony immediately in front of the first row of fixed
scats and which are not at the end of an aisle may be 26 inches in height.
3. The top of guardrails for stairways, exclusive of their landings, may have a
height as specified in Section 3306 (j) for handrails.
Open guardrails shall have intermediate rails or an ornamental pattern such that
a sphere 6 inches in diameter cannot pass through.
EXCEPTION: The open space between the intermediate rails or ornamental
pattern of guardrails in areas of commercial and industrial-type occupancies which
are not accessible to the public may be such that a sphere 12 inches in diameter cannot
pass through.
105
Foam Plastic Insulation

Sec. 1712. (a) General. The provisions of this section shall govern the require-
ments and uses of foam plastic insulation in buildings and structures. For trim, sec
Section 1705 (e).
Except where otherwise noted in this section, all foam plastic insulation used in
building construction shall have a flame-spread rating of not more than 75 and
shall have a smoke-developed rating of not more than 450 when tested in the
maximum thickness intended for use in accordance with U. 8. C. Standard No. 42-
l. All packages and containers of foam plastic insulation and foam plastic
insulation ingredients shall bear the label of an approved agency showing either
the flame-spread rating and smoke-developed rating of the product at the thick-
ness tested or the use for which the product has been listed. The interior of the
t building shall be separated from the foam plastic insulation by an approved
thermal barrier having an index of 15 when tested in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 17-3. The thermal barrier shall be installed in such a manner that it
will remain in place for the time of its index classification based upon approved
diversified tests.
(b) Specific Requirements. Unless otherwise specifically approved as pro-
vided by Section 1712 (c) or by other sections of this code, foam plastic insulation
may be used as follows:
I . Masonry or concrete construction. Foam plastic insulation may be used
without the thermal barrier described above, regardless of the type of construc-
tion, when the foam plastic insulation is covered by a minimum of l-inch
thickness of masonry or concrete in a wall, floor or roof system.
2. Attics and crawl spaces. Within an attic or crawl space where entry is
made only for service of utilities, foam plastic insulation shall be protected against
ignition by 1112-inch-thick mineral fiber insulation, 1/4-inch-thick plywood, hard-
board or gypsum wallboard, corrosion-resistant sheet metal having a base metal
thickness not less than 0.0160 inch at any point, or other approved material
installed in such a manner that the foam plastic is not exposed.
3. Cold storage construction. Foam plastic insulation installed and meeting
the requirements of (a) above when tested in a thickness of 4 inches may be used in
a greater thickness in cold storage buildings, ice plants, food-processing rooms
and similar areas. For rooms within a building, the foam plastic insulation shall be
protected by a thermal barrier on both sides having an index of 15.
Foam plastic insulation may be used in freestanding cooler and freezer walls
without the thermal barrier when the foam plastic insulation has a flame-spread
rating of 25 or Jess when tested in a 4-inch thickness, has a minimum allowable
flash and self-ignition temperatures of 600°F. and 800°F., respectively, when
tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 52-3, is covered by not less than
0. 032 inch of aluminum or corrosion-resistant steel having a base metal thickness
not less than 0.0160 inch at any point and is protected by an automatic sprinkler
system. When such a cooler or freezer is within a building, both the cooler or
freezer and that part of the building in which the room is located shall be
sprinklcrcd.
106
1988 EDITION 1712
EXCEPTION: Freestanding walk-in coolers and freezer units having an aggre-

gate floor area less than 400 square feet need meet only the flame-spread and smoke
requirements of Section I 7 I 2 (a) above, when tested at the thickness intended for
use.
4. Noncombustible exterior walls. Except as provided in Items Nos. I and 3,
assemblies employing foam plastic insulation in or on exterior walls in buildings
requiring noncombustible exterior walls shall comply with the following:
A. One-story buildings. When the building is protected with automatic
sprinklers throughout, foam plastic insulation having a flame spread of 25
or less and a maximum smoke-developed value of 450 may be used without
thermal barriers in or on walls in a thickness of not more than 4 inches when
the foam plastic insulation is covered by a thickness of not less than 0.032-
inch aluminum or corrosion-resistive sheet steel having a base metal
thickness of 0.0160 inch, and when the wall is required to have a fire-
resistive rating, data, based on tests conducted in accordance with U .B.C.
Standard No. 43-1, shall be provided to substantiate that the fire-resistive
rating is maintained.
B. Buildings of any height.
(i) When the wall is required to have a fire-resistive rating, data, based on
tests conducted in accordance with U. B.C. Standard No. 43-1, shall
be provided to substantiate that the fire resistive rating is maintained.
(ii) The foam plastic insulation shall be separated from the interior of the
building by a thermal barrier having an index of 15 unless a specific
approval is obtained on the basis of the criteria of Section 1712 (c).
(iii) The amount of foam plastic insulation in any portion of the wall or
panel shall not exceed 6000 Btu per square foot of wall area as
determined by tests conducted in accordance with U.B.C. Standard
No. 17-2.
(iv) Foam plastic insulation tested in the maximum thickness intended for
use and exterior coatings and facings each, when tested separately,
shall have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke-developed
rating of 450 or less as determined by tests conducted in accordance
with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
(v) The wall assembly shall be tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard
No. 17-6 and shall comply with the conditions of acceptance contained
therein.
(vi) Foam plastic insulation shall be listed and the edge or face of each
piece shall be labeled giving the following information:
a. Inspection agency name.
b. Product for which the insulation is listed.
c. Identification of insulation manufacturer.
d. Flame-spread and smoke-development rating.
5. Roofmg. Foam plastic insulation meeting the requirements of Section 1712 (a)
may be used as part of a roof covering assembly, provided the assembly with the
foam plastic insulation is a Class A, B or C roof covering when tested in I
107
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-7. Foam plastic insulation which is a
part of a Class A, B or C roof covering assembly need not meet the requirements of
Section 1712 (a), provided the assembly with the foam plastic insulation also
meets the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 17-4.
Any roof covering installed in accordance with this code and the manufactur-
er's instructions may be applied over foam plastic insulation when the foam is
separated from the interior of the building by plywood sheathing not less than 112
inch in thickness bonded with exterior glue, with edges supported by blocking,
tongue-and-groove joints or other approved type of edge support, or an equivalent
material. The thermal barrier requirement is waived.
For all roof applications, the smoke-developed rating shall not be limited.
6. Doors. Where doors are permitted without a fire-resistive rating, foam
plastic insulation having a flame-spread rating of 75 or less may be used as a core
material when the door facing is metal having a minimum thickness of0.032-inch
aluminum or steel having a base metal thickness not less than 0.0160 inch at any
point. The thermal barrier requirement is waived.
7. Siding backer board. Foam plastic insulation of not more than 2000 Btu
per square foot as determined by U .B.C. Standard No. 17-2 may be used as siding
backer board with a maximum thickness of I/2 inch, provided it is separated from
the interior of the building by not less than 2 inches of mineral fiber insulation or
equivalent in lieu of the thermal barrier, or when it is applied as residing over
existing wall construction.
(c) Specific Approval. Plastic foam or assemblies using foam plastic insula-
tion may be specifically approved based on approved tests such as, but not limited
to, tunnel tests conducted in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 42-1, fire tests
related to actual end use such as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 17-5 and an
ignition temperature test establishing a minimum self-ignition temperature of
650°F. under U.B.C. Standard No. 52-3. The specific approval may be based on
the end use, quantity, location and similar considerations where such tests would
not be applicable or practical.
Insulation
Sec. 1713. (a) General. Thermal and acoustical insulation located on or within
floor-ceiling and roof-ceiling assemblies, crawl spaces, walls, partitions and
insulation on pipes and tubing shall comply with this section. Duct insulation and
insulation in plenums shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform Mechani-
cal Code.
EXCEPTION: Roof insulation shall comply with Section 3208 (d).
(b) Insulation and Covering on Pipe and Tubing. Insulation and covering on
pipe and tubing shall have a flame-spread rating not to exceed 25 and a smoke
density not to exceed 450 when tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No.
42-l.
EXCEPTION: Foam plastic insulation shall comply with Section 1712.
(c) Insulation. All insulation materials including facings, such as vapor barri-
ers or breather papers installed within floor-ceiling assemblies, roof-ceiling
108
1988 EDITION 1713-1715
assemblies. walls. crawl spaces or attics. shall have a flame-spread rating not to
exceed 25 and a smoke density not to exceed 450 when tested in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Foam plastic insulation shall comply with Section 1712.
2. When such materials arc installed in concealed spaces of Types Ill. IV and V
construction. the flame-spread and smoke-developed limitations do not apply to
facings. provided that the facing is installed in substantial contact with the unex-
posed surface of the ceiling. floor or wall finish.
Solar Energy Collectors

Sec. 1714. Collectors which function as building components shall comply
with the applicable provisions of the code.
Collectors located above or upon a roof and not functioning as building
components shall not reduce the required fire resistance nor fire-retardancy
classification of the roof covering materials.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Collectors installed on one- and two-family dwellings.
2. Noncombustible collectors located on buildings not over three stories in height
or 9000 square feet in total floor area.
3. Collectors that comply with the provisions of Section 5214.
Atria
Sec. 1715. (a) General. Buildings, of other than Group H Occupancy, with
automatic sprinkler protection throughout may have atria complying with the
provisions of this section. Such atria shall have a minimum opening area and
dimension as set forth in Table No. 17-B.
(b) Smoke-control System. A mechanically operated air-handling system
shall be installed that will exhaust smoke either entering or developed within the
atrium. Exhaust openings shall be located in the ceiling or in a smoke trap area
immediately adjacent to the ceiling of the atrium. The lowest level of the exhaust
openings shall be located above the top of the highest portion of door openings
into the atrium. Supply openings sized to provide a minimum of 50 percent of the
exhaust volume shall be located at the lowest level of the atrium.
When the height ofthe atrium is 55 feet or less, supply air may be introduced by
gravity. provided smoke control is accomplished. When the height of the atrium is
more than 55 feet, supply air shall be introduced mechanically from the floor of
the atrium and be directed vertically toward the exhaust outlets. In atria over six
stories in height or where tenant spaces above the second story are open to the
atrium, supplemental supply air may be introduced at upper levels. The smoke-
control system for the atrium shall operate automatically upon the actuation of the
automatic sprinkler system within the atrium or areas open to the atrium. The
smoke-control system for the atrium shall also operate automatically upon the
activation of two or more smoke detectors required by this section. Actuation of
the smoke control system shall follow immediately after the actuation of the
second smoke detector. The smoke-control system shall also be manually opera-
ble by controls designed for fire department use. The smoke-control system may
109
be separate or integrated with other air-handling systems. When the smoke-

control mode is actuated, air-handling systems which would interfere with the
smoke-control system shall be automatically shut down.
j
Ii in::~~~d::~ :~a~=i~~j~~~~ ~~ )b~~:~p=;~~:~~: t~~t~tr:~:~~e~ca~~t~~~g~;!~
tern complying with the requirements of a sprinklered building in Section 1807 (g).
The atrium smoke-control system shall exhaust not less than the following
quantities of air:
I. For atria having a volume of not more than 600,000 cubic feet, including the
volume of any levels not physically separated from the atrium, not less than
six air changes per hour nor less than 40,000 cfm. A lesser cfm is acceptable
if it can be shown by test that smoke will not migrate beyond the perimeter of
the atrium.
2. For atria having a volume of more than 600,000 cubic feet, including the
volume of any levels not physically separated from the atrium, not less than
four air changes per hour.
Smoke detectors which will automatically operate the atrium smoke-control
system shall be installed in the following locations:
I. At the atrium ceiling, spaced in accordance with their listing.
2. On the underside of projections into the atrium, spaced in accordance with
their listing.
3. Around the perimeter of the atrium opening on all floors open to the atrium.
These detectors shall be spaced no more than 30 feet on center and be
located within 15 feet of the atrium opening.
(c) Enclosure of Atria. Atria shall be separated from adjacent spaces by not
less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The separation between atria and tenant spaces that are not
guest rooms or dwelling units may be omitted at three floor levels.
2. Open exit balconies are permitted within the atrium.
Openings in the atrium enclosure other than fixed glazing shall be protected by
smoke- and draft-control assemblies conforming to Section 3305 (h).
EXCEPTION: Other tight-fitting doors which are maintained automatic-
closing, in accordance with Section 4306 (b), by actuation of a smoke detector, or
self-closing may be used when protected as required for glazed openings in Excep-
tion 2 below.
Fixed glazed openings in the atrium enclosure shall be equipped with fire
windows having a fire-resistive rating of not less than three-fourths hour, and the
total area of such openings shall not exceed 25 percent of the area of the common
wall between the atrium and the room into which the opening is provided.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group R, Division I Occupancies, openings may be
unprotected when the floor area of each guest room or dwelling unit does not exceed
I 000 square feet and each room or unit has an approved exit not entering the atrium.
2. Guest rooms, dwelling units and tenant spaces may be separated from the
110
1988 EDITION 1715-1716
atrium by approved fixed wired glass set in steel frames. In lieu thereof, tempered or
laminated glass may be used, subject to the following:
A. The glass shall be protected by a sprinkler system equipped with listed quick-
response sprinklers. The sprinkler system shall completely wet the entire
surface of the glass wall when actuated. Where there are walking surfaces on
both sides of the glass, both sides of the glass shall be so protected.
B. The glass shall be in a gasketed frame so installed that the glazing system may
deflect without breaking (loading) the glass before the sprinkler system
operates.
C. Obstructions such as curtain rods, drapery traverse rods, curtains, drapes or
similar materials, shall not be installed between the sprinkler and the glass.
(d) Travel Distance. When a required exit enters the atrium space, the travel
distance from the doorway of the tenant space to an enclosed stairway, horizontal
exit, exterior door or exit passageway shall not exceed 100 feet.
(e) Group I Occupancy Exits. In Group I Occupancies, other than jails,
prisons and reformatories, sleeping rooms shall not be permitted to have required
exits through the atrium.
(f) Occupancy Separation Exceptions. The vertical portion of the occupancy
separation which is adjacent to the atrium may be omitted between a Group B,
Division 2 Occupancy office or sales area or Group A, Division 3 Occupancy and
Group R, Division 1 apartment or guest room located on another level.
(g) Standby Power. The smoke-control system for the atrium and the smoke-
control system for the tenant space are to be provided with standby power as
required in Section 1807 (i).
(h) Interior Finish. The interior finish of walls and ceilings of the atrium and
all unseparated tenant spaces allowed under Exception I of the first paragraph of
Subsection (c) above shall be Class 1 with no reduction in class for sprinkler
protection.
(i) Acceptance ofthe Smoke-control System. Before the Certificate of Occu-
pancy is issued, the smoke-control systems shall be tested in an approved manner
and shall show compliance with the requirements of this section.
(j) Combustible Furnishings in Atria. The quantity of combustible furnish-
ings in atria shall not exceed that specified in the Fire Code.
Mezzanines
Sec. 1716. Rooms may contain mezzanine floors when constructed in accord-
ance with the following:
I . The construction of a mezzanine shall be consistent with the requirements
for the type of construction in which the mezzanine is located, but the fire-
resistive time period need not exceed one hour for unenclosed mezzanines con-
structed in accordance with Item No. 4 below. The clear height above and below
the mezzanine floor construction shall be not less than 7 feet.
2. There shall be not more than two levels of mezzanines in a room. However,
there is no limitation on the number of mezzanines within a room.
3. The aggregate area of mezzanines within a room shall not exceed one third
111
the area of the room in which they are located. Intermediate floor levels that are 6
or more feet above grade shall be considered a story when the area of such level
exceeds one third the area of the room in which it is located.
4. All portions of a mezzanine shall be open to the room in which it is located.
The side of the mezzanine which is open to the room shall be unobstructed except
for columns and posts and protective walls or railings not more than 42 inches in
height.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Partitioning may be installed, provided the aggregate floor
area of the enclosed space does not exceed 10 percent of the area of the mezzanine or
an occupant load not exceeding 10, whichever is greater.
2. Mezzanines having two or more exits need not open into the story in which
they are located, provided at least one of the exits gives direct access to a protected
exit corridor, an exit court, enclosed exit stairway, exterior exit, exterior exit balcony
or exit passageway.
3. In industry facilities, mezzanines used for control equipment may be glazed
on all sides.
5. Two exits shall be provided from a mezzanine when two exits are required
by Table No. 33-A or when the area of the mezzanine exceeds 2000 square feet,
whichever is the more restrictive.
6. The occupant load of the mezzanine shall be added to the occupant load of
the story or room into which it exits.
112
TABLE NO. 17-A-TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION-FIRE-RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS ....
(In Hours) :§:
Ill
For details see chapters under Occupancy and Types of Construction and for exceptions see Section 1705. m
TYPEI I TYPE II TYPE Ill I TYPEIV I TYPEV c
NONCOMBUSTIBLE COMBUSTIBLE 3
0
BUILDING ELEMENT
Are-
resistive
Are- z
resistive 1·Hr. N 1-Hr. N H.T. 1-Hr. N
4
Exterior Bearing Walls Sec. 4 4 4 4
1803 (a) 1903 (a) I N 2003 (a) 2003 (a) 2103 (a) I N
Interior Bearing Walls 3 2 I N I N I I N
4
Exterior Nonbearing Sec. 4 I 4 4 4
Walls 1803 (a) 1903 (a) 1903 (a) N 2003 (a) 2003 (a) 2103 (a) I N
I or
Structural Frame I 3 2 I N I N H.T. I N
I or
Partitions--Permanent 12 12 !2 N I N H.T. I N
I I
Shaft Enclosures 2 2 I I I I I 1706 1706
Aoors-Ceilings/Floors 2 2 I N I N H.T. I N
2 I I
Roofs-Ceilings/Roofs Sec. 1806 1906 1906 N I N H.T. I N
Exterior Doors and Sec.
Windows 1803 (b) 1903 (b) 1903 (b) 1903 (b) 2003 (b) 2003 (b) 2103 (b) 2203 2203
N-No general requirements for fire resistance. H. T.-Heavy Timber.
I Structural frame elements in the exterior wall shall be protected against external fire exposure as required for exterior bearing walls or the structural
frame. whichever is greater.
....
w 2Fire-retardant treated wood (see Section 407) may be used in the assembly. provided fire-resistance requirements are maintained. See Sections 180 I
and 1901. respectively.
17-B UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 17-B-ATRIUM OPENING AND AREA
MINIMUM
HEIGHT IN STORIES CLEAR OPENING 1 (Ft.) MINIMUM AREA (Sq. Ft.)
3-4 20 400
5-7 30 900
8ormore 40 1600
I The
specified dimensions are the diameters of inscribed circles whose centers fall on a
common axis for the full height of the atrium.
114
1988 EDITION 1801-1804
Chapter 18
TYPE I FIRE-RESISTIVE BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 1801. The structural elements in 'JYpe I fire-resistive buildings shall be of
steel, iron, concrete or masonry.
Walls and permanent partitions shall be of noncombustible fire-resistive con-
struction except that permanent nonbearing partitions of one-hour or two-hour
fire-resistive construction, which are not part of a shaft enclosure, may have fire-
retardant treated wood (see Section 407) within the assembly.
Materials of construction and fire-resistive requirements shall be as specified
in Chapter 17.
Structural Framework
Sec. 1802. Structural framework shall be of structural steel or iron as specified
in Chapter 27, reinforced concrete as in Chapter 26, or reinforced masonry as in
Chapter 24.
For additional requirements for Group H Occupancies, see Section 902.
Exterior Walls and Openings
Sec. 1803. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls and all structural members shall
comply with the requirements specified in Section 504 and the fire-resistive
provisions set forth in Table No. 17-A. For Group H Occupancies, see also
Chapter9.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be of unprotected noncombustible construction.
2. In Groups R, Division I, and B Occupancies, exterior bearing walls may be of
two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where openings are permitted.
3. In other than Group H Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls may be of one-
hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where unprotected openings are
permitted and two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where fire pro-
tection of openings is required.
(b) Openings in Walls. All openings in exterior walls shall conform to the
requirements of Section 504 (b) and shall be protected by a fire assembly having a
three-fourths-hour fire-protectiun rating when they are less than 20 feet from an
adjacent property line or the center line of a public way.
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Groups A, E, I and B, I
Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the property line, and no
openings in Groups B, Division 4, Rand M Occupancies less than 3 feet from the
property line.
For Group H Occupancies, see Chapter 9. ~
Floors
Sec. 1804. Where wood sleepers are used for laying wood flooring on masonry
or concrete fire-resistive floors, the space between the floor slab and the under-
115
side of the wood flooring shall be filled with noncombustible material or fire-
stopped in such a manner that there will be no open spaces under the flooring
which will exceed 100 square feet in area and such space shall be filled solidly
under all permanent partitions so that there is no communication under the
flooring between adjoining rooms.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Firestopping need not be provided in such floors when at or
below grade level in gymnasiums.
2. Firestopping need be provided only at the juncture of each alternate lane and at
the ends of each lane in a bowling facility.
Stairway Construction
Sec. 1805. Stairways shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, iron or steel
with treads and risers of concrete, iron or steel. Brick, marble, tile or other hard
noncombustible materials may be used for the finish of such treads and risers.
Stairways shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 33.
Roofs
Sec. 1806. Roofs and their members other than the structural frame more than
25 feet above any floor, balcony or gallery may be of unprotected noncombustible
materials. Heavy-timber members in accordance with Section 2106 may be used
for such unprotected members in one-story buildings.
When every part of the structural framework of the roof of a Group A or E
Occupancy or of an atrium is not less than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or
gallery, fire protection of all members of the roof construction including those of
the structural frame may be omitted. Heavy-timber members in accordance with
Section 2106 may be used for such unprotected members in one-story buildings.
Roofs of unprotected noncombustible or heavy timber construction conform-
ing to Section 2106 (b) may be less than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or gallery
of a Group A, Division 2. I Occupancy having an occupant load of 10,000 or more
when all of the following conditions are met:
I. The building is not more than one story in height, except for multilevel areas
located under the roof and used for locker rooms, exiting, concession
stands, mechanical rooms and others accessory to the assembly room.
2. The area in which the roof clearance is less than 25 feet does not exceed 35
percent of the area encompassed by the exterior walls.
3. An approved supervised automatic sprinkler system shall be installed
throughout.
Where every part of the structural steel framework of the roof of a Group A orE
Occupancy is more than 18 feet and less than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or
gallery, the roof construction shall be protected by a ceiling of not less than one-
hour fire-resistive construction.
Roof coverings shall be as specified in Chapter 32.
116
1988 EDITION 1807
Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office Buildings and

Group R, Division 1 Occupancies
Sec. 1807. (a) Scope. This section applies to all Group B, Division 2 office and
Group R, Division I Occupancies, each having floors used for human occupancy
located more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department access. Such
buildings shall be provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system in
accordance with Section 1807 (c).
(b) Certificate of Occupancy. All mechanical and electrical equipment and
other required life safety systems shall be approved and installed in accordance
with approved plans and specifications pursuant to this section and shall be tested
and proved to be in proper working condition to the satisfaction of the building
official before issuance of the Certificate of Occupancy. Such system shall be
maintained in accordance with the Fire Code.
(c) Automatic Sprinkler System. I. System Design. The automatic sprinkler
system shall be provided throughout the building. The sprinkler system shall be
designed using the parameters set forth in U. B. C. Standard No. 38-1 and the
following:
A. Shutoff valves and a water-flow device shall be provided for each floor.
The sprinkler riser may be combined with the standpipe riser.
B. In Seismic Zones No. 2, No. 3 and No.4, in addition to the main water
Ill!
supply, a secondary on-site supply of water equal to the hydraulically
calculated sprinkler design demand plus I 00 gallons per minute additional
for the total standpipe system shall be provided. This supply shall be
automatically available if the principal supply fails and shall have a dura-
tion of 30 minutes.
2. Modifications. The following modifications of code requirements are
permitted:
A. The fire-resistive time periods set forth in Table No. 17-A may be reduced
by one hour for interior bearing walls, exterior bearing and nonbearing
walls, roofs and the beams supporting roofs, provided they do not frame
into columns. Vertical shafts other than stairway enclosures and elevator
shafts may be reduced to one hour when sprinklers are installed within the
shafts at alternate floors. The fire-resistive time period reduction as speci-
fied herein shall not apply to exterior bearing and nonbearing walls whose
fire-resistive rating has already been reduced under the exceptions con-
tained within Section 1803 (a) or 1903 (a).
B. Except for corridors in Group B, Division 2 and Group R, Division I
Occupancies and partitions separating dwelling units or guest rooms, all
interior nonbearing partitions required to be one-hour fire-resistive con-
struction by Table No. 17-A may be of noncombustible construction
without a fire-resistive time period.
C. Fixed tempered glass may be used in lieu of openable panels for smoke-
control purposes.
D. Travel distance from the most remote point in the floor area to a horizontal
exit or to an enclosed stairway may be 300 feet.
117
E. Fire dampers, other than those needed to protect floor-ceiling assemblies to
I maintain the fire resistance of the assembly, are not required.

F. Emergency windows required by Section 1204 are not required.
(d) Smoke Detection Systems. At least one approved smoke detector suitable
for the intended use shall be installed:
I. In every mechanical equipment, electrical, transformer, telephone equip-
ment, elevator machine or similar room.
2. In the main return and exhaust air plenum of each air-conditioning system
and located in a serviceable area downstream of the last duct inlet.
3. At each connection to a vertical duct or riser serving two or more stories
from a return-air duct or plenum of an air-conditioning system. In Group R,
Division 1 Occupancies, an approved smoke detector may be used in each
return-air riser carrying not more than 5000 cfm and serving not more than
10 air inlet openings.
The actuation of any detector required by this section shall operate the voice
alarm system and shall place into operation all equipment necessary to prevent the
recirculation of smoke.
(e) Alarm and Communication Systems. The alarm and communication
systems shall be designed and installed so that damage to any terminal unit or
speaker will not render more than one zone of the system inoperative.
The voice alarm and public address system may be a combined system. When
approved the fire department communications system may be combined with the
voice alarm system and the public address system.
Three communication systems which may be combined as set forth above shall
be provided as follows:
I. Voice alarm system. The operation of any smoke detector, sprinkler, water
flow device or manual fire alarm station shall automatically sound an alert signal
to the desired areas followed by voice instructions giving appropriate information
and direction to the occupants.
The central control station shall contain controls for the voice alarm system so
that a selective or general voice alarm may be manually initiated.
The system shall be supervised to cause the activation of an audible trouble
signal in the central control station upon interruption or failure of the audiopath
including amplifiers, speaker wiring, switches and electrical contacts and shall
detect opens, shorts and grounds which might impair the function of the system.
The alarm shall be designed to be heard clearly by all occupants within the
building or designated portions thereof as is required for the public address
system.
2. Public address system. A public address communication system designed
to be clearly heard by all occupants of the building shall operate from the central
control station. It shall be established on a selective or general basis to the
following terminal areas:
A. Elevators.
118
B. Elevator lobbies.
C. Corridors.
D. Exit stairways.
E. Rooms and tenant spaces exceeding 1000 square feet in area.
F. Dwelling units in apartment houses.
G. Hotel guest rooms or suites.
3. Fire department communication system. A two-way fire department
communication system shall be provided for fire department usc. It shall operate
between the central control station and every elevator, elevator lobby and entry to
every enclosed exit stairway.
(f) Central Control Station. A central control station for fire department
operations shall be provided in a location approved by the fire department. It shall
contain:
I. The voice alarm and public address system panels.
2. The fire department communications panel.
3. Fire detection and alarm system annunciator panels.
4. Annunciator visually indicating the location of the elevators and whether
they arc operational.
5. Status indicators and controls for air-handling systems.
6. Controls for unlocking all stairway doors simultaneously.
7. Sprinkler valve and water-flow detector display panels.
8. Standby power controls and status indicators.
9. A telephone for fire department usc with controlled access to the public
telephone system.
(g) Smoke Control. Natural or mechanical ventilation for the removal of

products of combustion shall be provided in every story and shall consist of one of
the following:
I. Easily identifiable windows or panels which arc manually openable or
approved fixed tempered glass shall be provided in the exterior walls. They shall 1!1
~:::
be distributed around the perimeter of the building at not more than 50-foot
intervals at the rate of 20 square feet per 50 lineal feet. ~~
EXCEPTION: In Group R, Division I Occupancies each guest room or suite ~~:
r·
having an exterior wall may be provided with a minimum of 2 square feet of venting II.
area.
2. When a complete and approved automatic sprinkler system is installed, the
mechanical air-handling equipment may be designed to accomplish smoke re-
moval. Under fire conditions, the return and exhaust air shall be moved directly to
the outside without recirculation to other sections of the building. The air-
handling system shall provide a minimum of one exhaust air change each I 0
minutes for the area involved.
3. Any other approved design which will produce equivalent results.
119
(h) Elevators. Elevators and elevator lobbies shall comply with the provisions
of Chapter 51 and the following:
NOTE: A bank of elevators is a group of elevators or a single elevator controlled
by a common operating system: that is. all those elevators which respond to a single
call button constitute a bank of elevators. There is no limit on the number of cars
which may be in a bank or group but there may be not more than four cars within a
common hoistway.
I . Elevators on all floors shall open into elevator lobbies which are separated
from the remainder of the building, including corridors and other exits, by walls
extending from the floor to the underside of the fire-resistive floor or roof above.
Such walls shall be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction. Openings
through such walls shall conform to Section 3305 (h).
EXCEPTIONS: I. The main entrance level elevator lobby in office buildings.
2. Elevator lobbies located within an atrium complying with the provisions of
Section 1715.
3. In fully-sprinklered office buildings, corridors may lead through enclosed
elevator lobbies if all areas of the building have access to at least one required exit
without passing through the elevator lobby.
2. Each elevator lobby shall be provided with an approved smoke detector
located on the lobby ceiling. When the detector is activated, elevator doors shall
not open and all cars serving that lobby are to return to the main floor and be under
manual control only. If the main floor detector or a transfer floor detector is
activated, all cars serving the main floor or transfer floor shall return to a location
approved by the fire department and building official and be under manual control
only. The smoke detector is to operate before the optical density reaches 0.03 per
foot. The detector may serve to close the lobby doors.
3. Elevator hoistways shall not be vented through an elevator machine room.
Cable slots entering the machine room shall be sleeved beneath the machine room
floor and extend to not less than 12 inches below the shaft vent to inhibit the
passage of smoke into the machine room.
(i) Standby Power, Light and Emergency Systems. I. Standby power.

Standby power generating system conforming to U .B.C. Standard No. 18-1 shall
be provided. The system shall be equipped with suitable means for automatically
starting the generator set upon failure of the normal electrical supply systems and
for automatic transfer of all functions required by this section at full power within
60 seconds of such normal service failure. Systems supervisions with manual start
and transfer features shall be provided at the central control station.
An on-premise fuel supply sufficient for not less than two hours full demand
operation of the system shall be provided.
The standby system shall have a capacity and rating that would supply all
equipment required to be operational at the same time. The generating capacity
need not be sized to operate all the connected electrical equipment simultane-
ously.
All power, lighting, signal and communication facilities specified in (d), (e),
(f). (g), (h), (i) and (j) as applicable; fire pumps required to maintain pressure,
120
1988 EDITION 1807
standby lighting and normal circuits supplying exit signs and exit illumination
shall be transferable to the standby source.
2. Standby lighting. Standby lighting shall be provided as follows:
A. Separate lighting circuits and fixtures sufficient to provide light with an
intensity of not less than one footcandle measured at floor level in all exit
corridors, stairways, smokeproof enclosures, elevator cars and lobbies and
other areas which are clearly a part of the escape route.
B. All circuits supply lighting for the central control station and mechanical
equipment room.
3. Emergency systems. The following are classified as emergency systems
and shall operate within I 0 seconds of failure of the normal power supply:
A. Exit sign and exit illumination is required by Sections 3313 and 3314.
B Elevator car lighting.
(j) Exits. Exits shall comply with other requirements of this code and the
following:
I. All stairway doors which are locked from the stairway side shall have the
capability of being unlocked simultaneously without unlatching upon a signal
from the central control station.
2. A telephone or other two-way communications system connected to an
approved emergency service which operates continuously shall be provided at not
less than every fifth floor in each required stairway where other provisions of this
code permit the doors to be locked.
(k) Seismic Considerations. In Seismic Zones No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4, the
anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment required for life safety sys-
tems. including fire pumps and elevator drive and suspension systems, shall be
designed in accordance with the requirements of Section 2312.
121
Chapter 19
TYPE II BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 1901. The structural elements in Type II fire-resistive buildings shall be of
steel, iron, concrete or masonry.
The structural elements of Type II One-hour or II-N buildings shall be of
noncombustible materials.
Walls and permanent partitions of Type ll-F.R. buildings shall be of noncom-
bustible fire-resistive construction, except that permanent nonbearing partitions
of one-hour or two-hour fire-resistive construction, which are not part of a shaft
enclosure may have fire-retardant treated wood (see Section 407) within the
assembly.
Type II One-hour buildings shall be of noncombustible construction and one-
hour fire resistive throughout except that permanent nonbearing partitions may
usc fire-retardant treated wood (see Section 407) within the assembly, provided
fire-resistive requirements are maintained.
Walls and permanent partitions of Type 11-N buildings shall be of noncombusti-
ble materials.
in Chapter 17.
For requirements due to occupancy, see Chapters 6 to 12, inclusive.
Sec. 1902. Structural framework shall be as specified in Chapter 27 for iron and
steel. Chapter 26 for concrete and Chapter 24 for masonry.

Sec. 1903. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls and all structural members shall
comply with the requirements specified in Section 504 and the fire-resistive
provisions set forth in Table No. 17-A. In Type 11-N and Type II One-hour
buildings, exterior walls shall comply with the fire-resistive requirements set
forth in Section 504 and Table No. 5-A and Table No. 9-C for Group H Occupan-
cies.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Nonbearing walls fronting on public ways or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be of unprotected noncombustible construction.
2. In Groups R, Division l, and B Occupancies, exterior bearing walls of Type 11-
F.R. buildings may be of two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where
openings are permitted.
3. In other than Group H Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls of Type 11-F.R.
buildings may be of one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction where
unprotected openings are permitted and two-hour fire-resistive noncombustible
construction where fire protection of openings is required.
4. In a Group B Occupancy a fire-resistive time period will not be required for an
exterior wall of a one-story TYpe 11-N building, provided the floor area of the
122
1988 EDITION 1903-1906
building does not exceed I 000 square feet and such wall is located not less than 5 feet
from a property line.
(b) Openings in Walls. All openings in exterior walls of Type 11-F.R. buildings
shall conform to the requirements of Section 504 (b) and shall be protected by a
fire assembly having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating when they are less
than 20 feet from an adjacent property line or the center line of a public way.
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Type 11-F.R. buildings
housing Groups A, E, I and B, Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet
from the property line, and no openings in Groups B, Division 4, R, and M
Occupancies less than 3 feet from the property line.
Openings in exterior walls located where protected openings are required by
Table No. 5-A shall be protected by fixed fire windows or automatic-closing fire
windows or self-closing doors having a fire protection rating of at least three-
fourths hour and shall comply with Section 504.
For Group H Occupancies, see Chapter 9.
Floors
Sec. 1904. Where wood sleepers are used for laying wood flooring on masonry
or concrete fire-resistive floors, the space between the floor slab and the under-
side of the wood flooring shall be filled with noncombustible material or fire-
stopped in such a manner that there will be no open spaces under the flooring
which will exceed 100 square feet in area and such space shall be filled solidly
under all permanent partitions so that there is no communication under the
flooring between adjoining rooms.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Fires topping need not be provided in such floors when at or
below grade level in gymnasiums.
2. Firestopping need be provided only at the juncture of each alternate lane and at
the ends of each lane in a bowling facility.
Floor construction of Type II One-hour and Type 11-N buildings shall be of
noncombustible material, provided, however, that a wood surface or finish may
be applied over such noncombustible material.
Sec. 1905. Stairways of Type 11-F.R. buildings shall be constructed of rein-
forced concrete, iron or steel with treads and risers of concrete, iron or steel.
Brick, marble, tile or other hard noncombustible materials may be used for the
finish of such treads and risers. Stairways of Type II One-hour and Type 11-N
buildings shall be of noncombustible construction.
Stairways shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 33.
Roofs
Sec. 1906. Roofs shall be of noncombustible construction, except that in Type
II-F. R. and Type II One-hour buildings, roofs may be as specified in Section 1806.
Roof coverings shall be not less than a Class Bas specified in Table No. 32-A. !~
123
Special Provisions for Group B, Division 2 Office Buildings and

Group R, Division 1 Occupancies
Sec. 1907. Group B, Division 2 office buildings and Group R, Division I
Occupancies of 'JYpe 11-F.R. construction, having floors used for human occu-
pancy located more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department vehicle
access, shall comply with the special provisions on high-rise buildings in Section
1807.
EXCEPTION: The reduction provisions for roofs in Section 1807 (c), Item No.
2A, are not permitted.
124
1988 EDITION 2001-2003
Chapter 20
TYPE Ill BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 2001. Structural elements in Type III buildings may be of any materials
permitted by this code.
Type Ill One-hour buildings shall be of one-hour fire-resistive construction
throughout.
Sec. 2002. Structural framework shall be of steel or iron as specified in Chapter
27, concrete as in Chapter 26, masonry as in Chapter 24, or wood as in Chapter 25
and this chapter.
Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions

Sec. 2003. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls shall be constructed of noncom-
bustible materials and shall comply with the fire-resistive requirements set forth
in Section 504 and Table No. 17 -A. For Group H Occupancies, see also Chapter 9.
EXCEPTIONS: l. Non bearing walls fronting on public ways, or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be unprotected when entirely of noncombustible
material.
2. In other than Groups Hand I Occupancies, exterior non bearing walls may be
noncombustible one-hour fire resistive where unprotected openings are permitted
and noncombustible two-hour fire resistive where protection of openings is re-
quired.
3. In Groups R, Division l, and B Occupancies exterior noncombustible bearing
walls may be two-hour fire resistive where openings are permitted.
4. Approved fire-retardant treated wood framing may be used within the assem-
bly of exterior walls as permitted by Exceptions l , 2 and 3, provided the required fire
resistance is maintained and the exposed outer and inner faces of such walls are
noncombustible.
5. Wood columns and arches conforming to heavy-timber sizes may be used
externally where exterior walls are permitted to be unprotected, noncombustible
construction or where one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible exterior walls are
permitted.
(b) Openings in Walls. Openings in exterior walls shall conform to the
three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating when they arc less than 20 feet from an
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Groups A, E, I and B.
Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the property line, and no
property line.
For Group H Occupancies, see also Chapter 9.
(c) Partitions. Bearing partitions, when constructed of wood. shall comply
with Section 2516 (d).
125
Sec. 2004. (a) General. Stairways shall comply with the requirements of
Chapter 33.
(b) Interior. Interior stairways serving buildings not exceeding three stories in
height may be constructed of any material permitted by this code.
In buildings more than three stories in height, interior stairways shall be
constructed as required for Type I buildings.
(c) Exterior. Exterior stairways shall be of noncombustible material except that
on buildings not exceeding two stories in height, they may be of wood not less
than 2 inches in nominal thickness.
Roofs
Sec. 2005. Roof coverings shall be as specified in Chapter 32.
126
1988 EDITION 2101-2103
Chapter 21
TYPE IV BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 2101. Structural elements of Type IV buildings may be of any materials
permitted by this code.
Type IV construction shall conform to Section 2106 except that permanent
partitions and members of the structural frame may be of other materials, pro-
vided they have a fire resistance of not less than one hour.
and this chapter.
Exterior Walls, Openings and Partitions

Sec. 2103. (a) Exterior Walls. Exterior walls shall be constructed of noncom-
bustible materials and shall comply with the fire-resistive requirements set forth
in Section 504 and Table No. 17 -A. For Group H Occupancies, see also Chapter 9.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Non bearing walls fronting on public ways, or yards having a
width of at least 40 feet may be unprotected when entirely of noncombustible
material.
2. In other than Groups Hand I Occupancies, exterior nonbearing walls may be
noncombustible one-hour fire resistive where unprotected openings are permitted
and noncombustible two-hour fire resistive where protection of openings is re-
quired.
3. In Groups R, Division I, and B Occupancies exterior noncombustible bearing
walls may be two-hour fire resistive where openings are permitted.
4. Approved fire-retardant treated wood framing may be used within the assem-
bly of exterior walls as permitted by Exceptions I, 2 and 3, provided the required fire
resistance is maintained and the exposed outer and inner faces of such walls are
noncombustible.
5. Wood columns and arches conforming to heavy-timber sizes may be used
externally where exterior walls are permitted to be unprotected, noncombustible
construction or where one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible exterior walls are
permitted.
(b) Openings in Walls. Openings in exterior walls shall conform to the
three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating when they are less than 20 feet from an
No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of Groups A, E, I and B,
Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies less than 5 feet from the property line and no
property line.
127
(C) Partitions. Bearing partitions, when constructed of wood. shall comply

with Section 2516 (d).
Sl•r. 2104. (a) General. Stairways shall comply with the requirements of
Chapter 3.\.
(b) Interior. Interior stairways serving buildings not exceeding three stories in
height may be constructed of wood or as required for Type I buildings. If
I
constructed of wood, treads and risers shall be not less than 2 inches in thickness,
except where built on laminated or plank inclines as required for floors. where
they may he of l-inch thickness. Wood stair stringers shall be a minimum of 3
inches in thickness and net less than 10 inches in depth.
In huildin[!s more than three stories in height, interior stairways shall be
constructed as required for Type I buildings. c •
II (c l Exterior. Exterior stairways shall be of noncombustible material except that

lHl buildin[!s not exceeding two stories in height. they may be of wood not less
than 2 inches in nominal thickness.
Roofs
Heavy-timber Construction
Sec. 21()6. (a) General. Details of heavy-timber construction shall be in
accordance with the provisions of this section. Unless otherwise specified. all
dimensions arc nominal as defined in Section 2502.
(b) Columns. Wood columns may be of sawn timber or structural glued-
laminated timber not less than X inches in any dimension when supporting roof or
floor load-, except as specified in Section 2106 (d).
Columns shall be continuous or superimposed and connected in an approved
manner.
(c) Floor Framing. Beams and girders may be of sawn timber or structural
glued-laminated timber and shall he not less than 6 inches in width and not less
than 10 inches in depth.
Framed sawn timber or structural glued-laminated timber arches. which spring
from the floor line and support floor loads. shall be not less than 8 inches in any
dimension.
Framed lumber or structural glued-laminated timber trusses supporting tloor
loads shall have members of not less than 8 inches in any dimension.
(d) Roof Framing. Framed sawn timber arches or structural glued-laminated
timber arches for roof construction. which spring from the floor line and do not
support floor loads, shall have members not less than 6 inches in width and not
less than X inches in depth for the lower half of the height and not less than 6 inches
in depth for the upper half.
Framed sawn timber or structural glued-laminated timber arches for roof
construction which spring from the top of walls or wall abutments. framed lumber
128
1988 EDITION 2106
or structural glued-laminated timber trusses, and other roof framing which docs
not support floor loads, shall have members not less than 4 inches in width and not
less than 6 inches in depth. Spaced members may be composed of two or more
pieces not less than 3 inches in thickness, when blocked solidly throughout their
intervening spaces, or when such spaces arc tightly closed by a continuous wood
cover plate of not less than 2 inches in thickness. secured to the underside of the
members. Splice plates shall be not less than 3 inches in thickness. When
protected by an approved automatic sprinkler system under the roof deck. framing
members shall be not less than 3 inches in thickness.
(c) Floors. Floors shall be without concealed spaces. Floors shall be of planks.
splincd or tongue and groove, of not less than 3 inches in thickness covered with l-
inch tongue-and-groove flooring laid crosswidc or diagonalJy. or 15fJ2-inch ply- M
wood, or of plank not less than 4 inches in width set on edge close together and
well spiked, and covered with l-inch flooring or 15/32-inch plywood. The lumber
shall be laid so that no continuous line of joints will occur except at points of
support. Floors shall not extend closer than l/2 inch to walls. Such l/2-inch space
shall be covered by a molding fastened to the wall and so arranged that it will not
obstruct the swelling or shrinkage movements of the floor. Corbeling of masonry
walls under floors may be used in place of such molding.
(f) Roof Decks. Roofs shall be without concealed spaces and roof decks shall
be of planks, splincd or tongue and groove. of not less than 2-inch thickness. or
J1/~-inch tongue-and-groove plywood with exterior glue, or of a double thickness
of l-inch boards with tongue-and-groove joints, or with staggered joints. of
lumber not less than 3 inches nominal in width. set on edge close together and laid
as required for floors.
(g) Construction Details. Approved wall plate boxes or hangers shall be
provided where wood beams, girders ortrusses rest on masonry or concrete walls.
Girders and beams shall be closely fitted around columns, and adjoining ends
shall be cross tied to each other, or interticd by caps or tics. to transfer horizontal
loads across the joints. Wood bolsters may be placed on top of columns which
support roof loads only.
Where intermediate beams arc used to support a floor, they shall rest on top of
the girders, or shall be supported by ledgers or blocks securely fastened to the
sides of the girders, or they may be supported by approved metal hangers into
which the ends of the beams shall be closely fitted.
In heavy-timber roof construction, every roof girder and at least every alternate
roof beam shall be anchored to its supporting member; roof decks. where sup-
ported by a wall, shall be anchored to such wall at intervals not exceeding 20 feet:
every monitor and every sawtooth construction shall be anchored to the main roof
construction. Such anchors shall consist of steel or iron bolts of sufficient strength
to resist vertical uplift of the roof.
(h) Mechanically Laminated Floors and Roof Decks. Mechanically lami-
nated floors and roof decks conforming to Section 2516 (I) may be used as heavy-
timber floors or roof decks, provided the minimum thickness and other applicable
requirements of the section arc followed.
129
(i) Partitions. Partitions shall be of solid wood construction formed by not less
. than two layers of l-inch matched boards or laminated construction of 4-inch

thickness, or of one-hour fire-resistive construction .
130
1988 EDITION 2201-2205
Chapter22
TYPE V BUILDINGS
Definition
Sec. 2201. 'fYpe V buildings may be of any materials allowed by this code.
'fYpe V One-hour buildings shall be of one-hour fire-resistive construction
throughout.
in Chapter I 7
For requirements due to occupancy, see Chapters 6 to 12 inclusive.
and this chapter.

Sec. 2203. Exterior walls shall comply with fire-resistive requirements set
forth in Section 504 and Table No. 5-A. Openings in exterior walls located where
protected openings are required by Table No. 5-A shall be protected by fixed fire
windows or automatic-closing fire windows or self-closing doors having a fire-
protection rating of at least three-fourths hour and shall comply with Section 504.
Sec. 2204. (a) General. Stairways shall comply with the requirements of
Chapter 33.
(b) Interior. Interior stairways may be constructed of any materials permitted
by this code.
(c) Exterior. Exterior stairways shall be constructed of wood not less than 2
inches in nominal thickness, or may be of noncombustible materials.
Roofs
131
PartV
ENGINEERING REGULATIONS-QUALITY
AND DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF
CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 23
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Scope
Sec. 2301. This chapter prescribes general design requirements applicable to
all structures regulated by this code.
Definitions
Sec. 2302. The following definitions give the meaning of certain terms used in
this chapter:
DEAD LOAD is the vertical load due to the weight of all permanent structural
and nonstructural components of a building, such as walls, floors, roofs and fixed
service equipment.
LIVE LOAD is the load superimposed by the use and occupancy of the
building not including the wind load, earthquake load or dead load.
LOAD DURATION is the period of continuous application of a given load, or
the aggregate of periods of intermittent application of the same load.
Design Methods
Sec. 2303. (a) General. All buildings and portions thereof shall be designed
and constructed to sustain, within the stress limitations specified in this code, all
dead loads and all other loads specified in this chapter or elsewhere in this code.
Impact loads shall be considered in the design of any structure where impact loads
occur.
EXCEPTION: Unless otherwise required by the building official, buildings or
portions thereof which are constructed in accordance with the conventional framing
requirements specified in Chapter 25 of this code shall be deemed to meet the
requirements of this section.
(b) Rationality. Any system or method of construction to be used shall be based
on a rational analysis in accordance with well-established principles of mechan-
ics. Such analysis shall result in a system which provides a complete load path
capable of transferring all loads and forces from their point of origin to the load-
resisting elements. The analysis shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
I. Distribution of horizontal shear. The total lateral force shall be distributed
to the various vertical elements of the lateral force-resisting system in proportion
to their rigidities considering the rigidity of the horizontal bracing system or
diaphragm. Rigid elements that are assumed not to be part of the lateral force-
resisting system may be incorporated into buildings, provided that their effect on
the action of the system is considered and provided for in the design.
132
1988 EDITION 2303-2304
2. Horizontal torsional moments. Provision shall be made for the increased

forces induced on resisting elements of the structural system resulting from
torsion due to eccentricity between the center of application of the lateral forces
and the center of rigidity of the lateral force-resisting system. Forces shall not be
decreased due to torsional effects. For accidental torsion requirements for seismic
design, see Section 2312 (e) 6.
3. Stability against overturning. Every building or structure shall be de-
signed to resist the overturning effects caused by the lateral forces specified in this
chapter. See Section 2311 (e) for wind and Section 2312 (f) for seismic.
4. Anchorage. Anchorage of the roof to walls and columns, and of walls and
columns to foundations, shall be provided to resist the uplift and sliding forces
which result from the application of the prescribed forces. For additional require-
ments for masonry or concrete walls, see Section 2310.
(c) Critical Distribution of Live Loads. Where structural members are ar-
ranged so as to create continuity, the loading conditions which would cause
maximum shear and bending moments along the member shall be investigated.
(d) Stress Increases. All allowable stresses and soil-bearing values specified
in this code for working stress design may be increased one-third when consider-
ing wind or earthquake forces either acting alone or when combined with vertical
loads. No increase will be allowed for vertical loads acting alone.
(e) Load Factors. Load factors for ultimate strength design of concrete and
plastic design of steel shall be as indicated in the appropriate chapters on the
materials.
(f) Load Combinations. Every building component shall be provided with
strength adequate to resist the most critical effect resulting from the following
combination of loads (floor live load shall not be included where its inclusion
results in lower stresses in the member under investigation): I
I. Dead plus floor live plus roof live (or snow). 2
2. Dead plus floor live plus wind2 (or seismic).
3. Dead plus floor live plus wind plus snow/2. 2
4. Dead plus floor live plus snow plus wind/2. 2
5. Dead plus floor live plus snow3 plus seismic.
Floor Design
Sec. 2304. (a) General. Floors shall be designed for the unit loads set forth in
Table No. 23-A. These loads shall be taken as the minimum live loads in pounds
per square foot of horizontal projection to be used in the design of buildings for the
I Lateralearth pressure shall be included in the design where it will result in a more critical
combination.
2Crane hook loads need not be combined with roof live load nor with more than three fourths
of the snow load or one-half wind load.
3Snow loads over 30 psf may be reduced 75 percent upon approval of the building official,
and snow loads 30 psf or less need not be combined with seismic.
133
occupancies listed, and loads at least equal shall be assumed for uses not listed in
this section but which create or accommodate similar loadings.
When it can be determined in designing floors that the actual live load will be
greater than the value shown in Table No. 23-A, the actual live load shall be used
in the design of such buildings or part thereof and special provisions shall be made
for machine or apparatus loads.
(b) Distribution of Uniform Floor Loads. Where uniform floor loads are
involved, consideration may be limited to full dead load on all spans in combina-
tion with full live load on adjacent spans and on alternate spans.
(c) Concentrated Loads. Provision shall be made in designing floors for a
concentrated load as set forth in Table No. 23-A placed upon any space 2112 feet
square, wherever this load upon an otherwise unloaded floor would produce
stresses greater than those caused by the uniform load required therefor.
Provision shall be made in areas where vehicles are used or stored for concen-
trated loads consisting of two or more loads spaced 5 feet nominally on center
without uniform live loads. Each load shall be 40 percent of the gross weight of
the maximum size vehicle to be accommodated. The condition of concentrated or
uniform live load producing the greater stresses shall govern. Parking garages for
the storage of private or pleasure-type motor vehicles with no repair or fueling
shall have a floor system designed for a concentrated wheel load of not less than
2000 pounds without uniform live loads. The condition of concentrated or
uniform live load producing the greater stresses shall govern.
Provision shall be made for special vertical and lateral loads as set forth in Table
No. 23-B.
(d) Partition Loads. Floors in office buildings and in other buildings where
partition locations are subject to change shall be designed to support, in addition
to all other loads, a uniformly distributed dead load equal to 20 pounds per square
foot. Access floor systems may be designed to support, in addition to all other
loads, a uniformly distributed dead load equal to 10 pounds per square foot.
(e) Live Loads Posted. The live loads for which each floor or part thereof of a
commercial or industrial building is or has been designed shall have such designed
live loads conspicuously posted by the owner in that part of each story in which
they apply, using durable metal signs, and it shall be unlawful to remove or deface
such notices. The occupant of the building shall be responsible for keeping the
actual load below the allowable limits.
Roof Design
Sec. 2305. (a) General. Roofs shall sustain, within the stress limitations ofthis
code, all "dead loads" plus unit "live loads" as set forth in Table No. 23-C. The
live loads shall be assumed to act vertically upon the area projected upon a
horizontal plane.
(b) Distribution of Loads. Where uniform roof loads are involved in the
design of structural members arranged so as to create continuity, consideration
may be limited to full dead loads on all spans in combination with full live loads on
adjacent spans and on alternate spans.
134
1988 EDITION 2305-2306
EXCEPTION: Alternate span loading need not be considered where the uni-
form roof live load is 20 pounds per square foot or more or the provisions of Section f
2305 (d) are met.
(c) Unbalanced Loading. Unbalanced loads shall be used where such loading
will result in larger members or connections. Trusses and arches shall be designed
to resist the stresses caused by unit live loads on one half of the span if such
loading results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the
stresses produced by the required unit live load upon the entire span. For roofs
whose structure is composed of a stressed shell, framed or solid, wherein stresses
caused by any point loading are distributed throughout the area of the shell, the
requirements for unbalanced unit live load design may be reduced 50 percent.
(d) Snow Loads. Snow loads full or unbalanced shall be considered in place of
loads set forth in Table No. 23-C, where such loading will result in larger
members or connections.
Potential accumulation of snow at valleys, parapets, roof structures and offsets
in roofs of uneven configuration shall be considered. Where snow loads occur, the
snow loads shall be determined by the building official.
Snow loads in excess of 20 pounds per square foot may be reduced for each
degree of pitch over 20 degrees by R s as determined by the following formula:
S I
Rs = 40- Z
WHERE:
R s = Snow load reduction in pounds per square foot per degree of pitch over
20 degrees.
S = Total snow load in pounds per square foot.
For alternate design procedure see Appendix Chapter 23, Division I.
(e) Special Roof Loadings. Roofs to be used for special purposes shall be
designed for appropriate loads as approved by the building official.
Greenhouse roof bars, purlins and rafters shall be designed to carry a 100-
pound-minimum concentrated load in addition to the live load.
(f) Water Accumulation. All roofs shall be designed with sufficient slope or
camber to assure adequate drainage after the long-time deflection from dead load
or shall be designed to support maximum loads, including possible ponding of
water from any source, including snow, due to deflection. See Section 2307 for
deflection criteria.
Reduction of Live Loads

Sec. 2306. The design live load determined using the unit live loads as set forth
in Table No. 23-A for floors and Table No. 23-C, Method 2, for roofs may be
reduced on any member supporting more than 150 square feet, including flat
slabs, except for floors in places of public assembly and for live loads greater than
100 pounds per square foot, in accordance with the following formula:
R = r (A -150) ..................... (6-1)
135
The reduction shall not exceed 40 percent for members receiving load from one
level only, 60 percent for other members, nor R as determined by the following
formula:
R 23.1 (1 + DIL) ................... (6-2)
WHERE:
R = Reduction in percent.
r = Rate of reduction equal to .08 percent for floors. See Table No. 23-C for
roofs.
A Area of floor or roof supported by the member.
D Dead load per square foot of area supported by the member.
L Unit live load per square foot of area supported by the member.
For storage live loads exceeding I 00 pounds per square foot, no reduction shall
be made, except that design live loads on columns may be reduced 20 percent.
The live load reduction shall not exceed 40 percent in garages for the storage of
private pleasure cars having a capacity of not more than nine passengers per
vehicle.
Deflection
Sec. 2307. The deflection of any structural members shall not exceed the
values set forth in Table No. 23-D, based upon the factors set forth in Table No.
23-E. The deflection criteria representing the most restrictive condition shall
apply. Deflection criteria for materials not specified shall be developed in a
manner consistent with the provisions of this section. See Section 2305 (f) for
camber requirements. Span tables for light wood frame construction as specified
in Sections 2517 (d) and 2517 (h) 2 shall conform to the design criteria contained
therein, except that where the dead load exceeds 50 percent of the live load, Table
No. 23-D shall govern. (For aluminum, see Section 2803.)
Special Design
Sec. 2308. (a) General. ln addition to the design loads specified in this chapter,
the design of all structures shall consider the special loads set forth in Table No.
23-B and in this section.
(b) Retaining Walls. Retaining walls shall be designed to resist the lateral
pressure of the retained material in accordance with accepted engineering prac-
tice. Walls retaining drained earth may be designed for pressure equivalent to that
exerted by a fluid weighing not less than 30 pounds per cubic foot and having a
depth equal to that of the retained earth. Any surcharge shall be in addition to the
equivalent fluid pressure.
Retaining walls shall be designed to resist sliding or overturning by at least I . 5
times the lateral force or overturning moment.
136
1988 EDITION 2308-2311
(c) Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas. In addition to other design require-
ments of this chapter, heliport and helistop landing or touchdown areas shall be
designed for the maximum stress induced by the following:
I. Dead load plus actual weight ofthe helicopter.
2. Dead load plus a single concentrated impact load covering I square foot of
0. 75 times the fully loaded weight of the helicopter if it is equipped with
hydraulic-type shock absorbers, or I. 5 times the fully loaded weight of the
helicopter if it is equipped with a rigid or skid-type landing gear.
3. The dead load plus a uniform live load of 100 pounds per square foot. The
required live load may be reduced in accordance with the formula in
Section 2306.
(d) Hydrostatic Uplift. All foundations, slabs and other footings subject to
water pressure shall be designed to resist a uniformly distributed uplift equal to the
full hydrostatic pressure.
Walls and Structural Framing

Sec. 2309. (a) General. Walls and structural framing shall be erected true and
plumb in accordance with the design.
(b) Interior Walls. Interior walls, permanent partitions and temporary parti-
tions which exceed 6 feet in height shall be designed to resist all loads to which
they are subjected but not less than a force of 5 pounds per square foot applied
perpendicular to the walls. The deflection of such walls under a load of 5 pounds
per square foot shall not exceed 1/240 of the span for walls with brittle finishes and
l/120 of the span for walls with flexible finishes. See Table No. 23-P for earthquake
design requirements where such requirements are more restrictive.
EXCEPTION: Flexible, folding or portable partitions are not required to meet
the load and deflection criteria but must be anchored to the supporting structure to
meet the provisions of this code.
Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls

Sec. 2310. Concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors and roofs
which provide lateral support for the wall. Such anchorage shall provide a positive
direct connection capable of resisting the horizontal forces specified in this
chapter or a minimum force of 200 pounds per lineal foot of wall, whichever is
greater. Walls shall be designed to resist bending between anchors where the
anchor spacing exceeds 4 feet. Required anchors in masonry walls of hollow units
or cavity walls shall be embedded in a reinforced grouted structural element of the
wall. See Sections 2312 (g), 2312 (h) 2 H and 2312 (h) 2 I. i i!
Wind Design
Sec. 2311. (a) General. Every building or structure and every portion thereof
shall be designed and constructed to resist the wind effects determined in accord-
ance with the requirements of this section. Wind shall be assumed to come from
137
any horizontal direction. No reduction in wind pressure shall be taken for the
shielding effect of adjacent structures.
Structures sensitive to dynamic effects, such as buildings with a height-width
ratio greater than five, structures sensitive to wind-excited oscillations, such as
vortex shedding or icing, and buildings over 400 feet in height, shall be, and any
structure may be, designed in accordance with approved national standards.
(b) Basic Wind Speed. The minimum basic wind speed for determining design
wind pressure shall be taken from Figure No. I . Where terrain features and local
records indicate that 50-year wind speeds at standard height are higher than those
shown in Figure No. I, these higher values shall be the minimum basic wind
speeds.
(c) Exposure. An exposure shall be assigned at each site for which a building or
structure is to be designed. Exposure C represents the most severe exposure and
:;:;:
has terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
''' the site in any full quadrant. Exposure B has terrain which has buildings, forest or
surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height covering at least 20 percent of the
area extending one mile or more from the site.
(d) Design Wind Pressures. Design wind pressures for structures or elements
of structures shall be determined for any height in accordance with the following
formula:
p=C,CqqJ ....................... (11-1)
WHERE:
p Design wind pressure.
Combined height, exposure and gust factor coefficient as given in Table
No. 23-G.
Pressure coefficient for the structure or portion of structure under
consideration as given in Table No. 23-H.
Wind stagnation pressure at the standard height of 30 feet as set forth in
Table No. 23-F.
I = Importance factor as set forth in Section 2311 (i).
(e) Primary Frames and Systems. The primary frames or load-resisting

system of every structure shall be designed for the pressures calculated using
Formula ( 11-1) and the pressure coefficients, C'f of either Method I or Method 2.
In addition, design of the overall structure and Its primary load-resisting system
shall conform to Section 2303.
The base overturning moment for the entire structure, or for any one of its
individual primary lateral resisting elements, shall not exceed two thirds of the
dead-load-resisting moment. For an entire structure with a height-to-width ratio
of 0.5 or less in the wind direction and a maximum height of 60 feet, the
il combination of the effects of uplift and overturning may be reduced by one-third.
The weight of earth superimposed over footings may be used to calculate the
dead-load-resisting moment.
138
1988 EDITION 2311
l. Method 1 (Normal Force Method). Method 1 shall be used for the design
of gabled rigid frames and may be used for any structure. In the Normal Force
Method, the wind pressures shall be assumed to act simultaneously normal to all
exterior surfaces. For pressures on roofs and leeward walls, C, shall be evaluated
at the mean roof height.
2. Method 2 (Projected Area Method). Method 2 may be used for any
structure less than 200 feet in height except those using gabled rigid frames. This
method may be used in stability determinations for any structure less than 200 feet
high. In the Projected Area Method, horizontal pressures shall be assumed to act
upon the full vertical projected area of the structure, and the vertical pressures
shall be assumed to act simultaneously upon the full horizontal projected area.
(f) Elements and Components of Structures. Design wind pressures for each
element or component of a structure shall be determined from Formula (Il-l) and
Cq values from Table No. 23-H, and shall be applied perpendicular to the surface.
For outward acting forces the value of C, shall be obtained from Table No. 23-G
based on the mean roof height and applied for the entire height of the structure.
Each element or component shall be designed for the more severe of the following
loadings:
I. The pressures determined using Cq values for elements and components
acting over the entire tributary area of the element.
2. The pressures determined using Cq values for local areas at discontinuities
such as corners, ridges and eaves. These local pressures shall be applied over a
distance from a discontinuity of 10 feet or 0.1 times the least width of the
structure, whichever is less.
The wind pressures from Subsections (e) and (f) need not be combined.
(g) Open-frame Towers. Radio towers and other towers of trussed construe- ~-
tion shall be designed and constructed to withstand wind pressures specified in
this section, multiplied by the shape factors set forth in Table No. 23-H. ··
(h) Miscellaneous Structures. Greenhouses, lath houses, agricultural build-
ings or fences 12 feet or less in height shall be designed in accordance with Section
2311. However, three fourths of qs, but not less than 10 pounds per square foot,
may be substituted for qsin Formula (Il-l). Pressures on local areas at discontinu-
ities need not be considered.
(i) Importance Factor. A factor of 1.15 shall be used for essential facilities
which must be safe and usable for emergency purposes after a windstorm in order
to preserve the health and safety of the general public. Such facilities shall
include:
1. Hospitals and other medical facilities having surgery or emergency treat-
ment areas.
2. Fire and police stations.
3. Municipal government disaster operation and communication centers
deemed to be vital in emergencies.
4. Buildings where the primary occupancy is for assembly use for more than
300 people.
A factor of 1.0 shall be used for all other buildings.
139
(j) Open Buildings, Structure or Story. A building structure or story shall be

considered open when 15 percent or more of the area of the exterior wall on any
one side is open. All windows and doors or other openings in exterior walls shall
be considered as openings unless specifically detailed and designed to resist the
loads of elements and components in accordance with the provisions of this
section.
Earthquake Regulations
Sec. 2312 (a) General. I. Minimum seismic design. Structures and portions
thereof shall, as a minimum, be designed and constructed to resist the effects of
seismic ground motions as provided in this section.
I;:: 2. Seismic and wind. When the code-prescribed wind design produces
'' greater effects, the wind design shall govern, but detailing requirements and
\:.1 limitations prescribed in this and referenced sections shall be followed.
(b) Definitions. For the purposes of this section certain terms are defined as
:r'!'\!' follows:
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motions are considered to be
i< imparted to the structure or the level at which the structure as a dynamic vibrator is
~~~~ supported.
::~;~
;.:\ str~~~r~. SHEAR, V, is the total design lateral force or shear at the base of a
!:~ B EAdRING.WALL SYf STEMS issa str.uctu raI sy(sdt)e m without a complete verti-
''' ca11oa -carrymg space rame. ee ectwn 23 12 68.
BOUNDARY ELEMENT is an element at edges of openings or at perimeters
:W:~ of shear walls or diaphragms.
t~
=<·: BRACED FRAME is an essentially vertical truss system of the concentric or
!): eccentric type which is provided to resist lateral forces.
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM is an essentially complete space frame which
·,.1'\,;·'··:'·'.:··
., provides support for gravity loads. See Section 2312 (d) 6 C.

~! COLLECTOR is a member or element provided to transfer lateral forces from
~\!! a portion of a structure to vertical elements of the lateral force-resisting system.
{ CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME is a braced frame in which the
<i; members are subjected primarily to axial forces.
~ DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system acting to transmit
'~.t.l./ lateral forces to the vertical resisting elements. The term "diaphragm" includes
. horizontal bracing systems.
t DIAPHRAGM CHORD is the boundary element of a diaphragm or shear wall
~i: which is assumed to take axial stresses analogous to the flanges of a beam.
'~ DIAPHRAGM STRUT (drag strut, tie, collector) is the element of a dia-
~l phragm parallel to the applied load which collects and transfers diaphragm shear
·· to vertical resisting elements or distributes loads within the diaphragm. Such
'J members may take axial tension or compression.
@ DRIFT sec STORY DRIFT.
140
1988 EDITION 2312
DUAL SYSTEM is a combination of a special or intermediate moment-
II.
resisting space frame and shear walls or braced frames designed in accordance
with the criteria of Section 2312 (d) 6 E.
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a steel-braced frame de-
signed in conformance with Section 2722 (h).
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are those structures which are necessary for
emergency postearthquake operations. .
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT or system is one whose deformation under lateral
load is significantly larger than adjoining parts of the system. Limiting ratios for
I
defining specific flexible elements are set forth in Sections 2312 (e) 3 B (ii), 2312
(e) 6 or 2312 (g) 2.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM is a horizontal truss system that serves
the same function as a diaphragm.
LATERAL FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is that part of the structural
[1.
system assigned to resist lateral forces.
ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the effects on structural elements common
to the resisting systems along two orthogonal axes due to earthquake forces acting
in a direction other than those axes.
P-DELTA EFFECT is the secondary effect on shears, axial forces and mo-
ments of frame members induced by the vertical loads acting on the laterally
displaced building frame.
I
~::
i:
~
SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of
the wall (sometimes referred to as a vertical diaphragm). I
SOFT STORY is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 percent of the
stiffness of the story above. See Table No. 23-M.
SPACE FRAME is a three-dimensional structural system, without bearing
walls, composed of members interconnected so as to function as a complete self-
contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal diaphragms or floor-bracing
systems.
!
I
I
Intermediate moment-resisting space frame (IMRSF) is a concrete space .
frame designed in conformance with Section 2625 (k).
Moment-resisting space frame is a space frame in which the members and
joints are capable of resisting forces primarily by flexure.
Ordinary moment-resisting space frame (OMRSF) is a moment-resisting
space frame not meeting special detailing requirements for ductile behavior.
Special moment-resisting space frame (SMRSF) is a moment-resisting
space frame specially detailed to provide ductile behavior and comply with the
requirements given in Chapter 26 or 27. I
Vertical load-carrying space frame is a space frame designed to carry all
vertical gravity loads.
STORY is the space between levels. Story xis the story below Level x.
STORY DRIFT is the displacement of one level relative to the level above or
II
below. %
141
STORY DRIFT RATIO is the story drift divided by the story height.
STORY SHEAR, Vx, is the summation of design lateral forces above the story
under consideration.
STRENGTH is the useable capacity of a structure or its members to resist load
within the deformation limits prescribed in this section and referenced sections.
STRUCTURE is an assemblage of framing members designed to support
gravity loads and resist lateral forces. Structures may be categorized as building
structures or nonbuilding structures.
WEAK STORY is one in which the story strength is less than 80 percent of that
of the story above. See Table No. 23-M.
(c) Symbols and Notations. The following symbols and notations apply to the
provisions of this section:
Ac = The combined effective area, in square feet, of the shear walls in
the first story of the structure.
A, = The minimum cross-sectional shear area in any horizontal plane in
the first story, in square feet, of a shear wall.
Ax = The torsional amplification factor at Level x.
C = Numerical coefficient specified in Section 2312 (e) 2 A.
CP = Numerical coefficient specified in Section 2312 (g) and given in
Table No. 23-P.
C, = Numerical coefficient given in Section 2312 (e) 2 B.
De = The length, in feet, of a shear wall in the first story in the direction
parallel to the applied forces.
8i = Horizontal displacement at Level i relative to the base due to
applied lateral forces,J, for use in Formula (12-5).
/; = Lateral force at Level i for use in Formula ( 12-5).
Fi, Fn• Fx = Lateral force applied to Level i, n, or x, respectively.
FP = Lateral forces on a part ofthe structure.
F, = That portion of the base shear, V. considered concentrated at the top
of the structure in addition to F n·
ij g = Acceleration due to gravity.
I
~
hi• hn• hx = Height in feet above the base to Level i, n, or x, respectively.
I = Importance factor given in Table No. 23-L.
I
@.
Level i = Level of the structure referred to by the subscript i. "i = I"
designates the first level above the base.
I
Level n = That level which is uppermost in the main portion of the structure.
Level x = That level which is under design consideration. "x = I" desig-
nates the first level above the base.
Rw = Numerical coefficient given in Tables Nos. 23-0 and 23-Q.
i. S = Site coefficient for soil characteristics given in Table No. 23-J.
142
1988 EDITION 2312
T= Fundamental period of vibration, in seconds, of the structure in the

direction under consideration.
v The total design lateral force or shear at the base.
vx The design story shear in Story x.
w The total seismic dead load defined in Section 2312 (e) I .
Wi, Wx That portion of W which is located at or is assigned to Level i or x,
respectively.
The weight of the diaphragm and the elements tributary thereto at
Level x, including applicable portions of other loads defined in
Section 2312 (e) l.
WP The weight of an element or component.
Z Seismic zone factor given in Table No. 23-1.
(d) Criteria Selection. 1. Basis for design. The procedures and limitations for
the design of structures shall be determined considering zoning, site characteris-
tics, occupancy, configuration, structural system and height in accordance with
this section. The minimum design seismic forces shall be those determined in
accordance with the static lateral force procedure of Section 2312 (e) except as
modified by 2312 (f) 5 C. One- and two-family dwellings in Seismic Zone I need
not conform to the provisions of this section.
2. Seismic zones. Each site shall be assigned to a seismic zone in accordance
with Figure No.2. Each structure shall be assigned a zone factor, Z, in accordance
with Table No. 23-1.
3. Site geology and soil characteristics. Soil profile type and site coefficient,
S, shall be established in accordance with Table No. 23-J.
4. Occupancy categories. For purposes of earthquake-resistant design, each
structure shall be placed in one of the occupancy categories listed in Table No. 23-
K. Table No. 23-L lists importance factors, /, and review requirements for each
category.
5. Configuration requirements. A. General. Each structure shall be desig-
nated as being structurally regular or irregular.
B. Regular structures. Regular structures have no significant physical dis-
continuities in plan or vertical configuration or in their lateral force-resisting
systems such as the irregular features described below.
C. Irregular structures.
(i) Irregular structures have significant physical discontinuities in configura-
tion or in their lateral force-resisting systems. Irregular features include,
but are not limited to, those described in Tables Nos. 23-M and 23-N.
Structures in Seismic Zone No. I and in Occupancy Category IV in
Seismic Zone No. 2 need be evaluated only for vertical irregularities of
Type E (Table No. 23-M) and horizontal irregularities of Type A (Table
No. 23-N).
(ii) Structures having one or more of the features listed in Table No. 23-M
shall be designated as of having a vertical irregularity.
143
EXCEPTION: Where no story drift ratio under design lateral load is greater than
I . 3 times the story drift ratio of the story above the structure may be deemed to not
have the structural irregularities of Types A orB in Table No. 23-M. The drift ratio
relationship for the top two stories need not be considered. The story drifts for this
determination may be calculated neglecting torsional effects.
(iii) Structures having one or more of the features listed in Table No. 23-N
shall be designated as having a plan irregularity.
6. Structural systems. A. General. Structural systems shall be classified as
one of the types listed in Table No. 23-0 and defined in this subsection.
B. Bearing wall system. A structural system without a complete vertical
load-carrying space frame. Bearing walls or bracing systems provide support for
all or most gravity loads. Resistance to lateral load is provided by shear walls or
braced frames.
C. Building frame system. A structural system with an essentially complete
space frame providing support for gravity loads. Resistance to lateral load is
provided by shear walls or braced frames.
D. Moment-resisting frame system. A structural system with an essentially
complete space frame provides support for gravity loads. Moment-resisting space
frames provide resistance to lateral load primarily by flexural action of members.
E. Dual system. A structural system with the following features:
(i) An essentially complete space frame which provides support for gravity
loads.
(ii) Resistance to lateral load is provided by a specially detailed moment-
resisting space frame (concrete or steel) which is capable of resisting at
least 25 percent of the base shear and shear walls or braced frames.
(iii) The two systems shall be designed to resist the total lateral load in
proportion to their relative rigidities.
F. Undefined structural system. A structural system not listed in Table No.
23-0.
G. Nonbuilding structural system. A structural system conforming to Sec-
tion 23 I 2 (i).
7. Height limits. Height limits for the various structural systems in Seismic
Zones 3 and 4 are given in Table No. 23-0.
EXCEPTION: Regular structures may exceed these limits by not more than 50
percent for unoccupied structures which are not accessible to the general public.
8. Selection of lateral force procedure. A. General. Any structure may be,
and certain structures defined below shall be, designed using the dynamic lateral
force procedures of Section 2312 (f).
8. Static. The static lateral force procedure of Section 2312 (e) may be used
for the following structures:
(i) All structures, regular or irregular, in Seismic Zone No. I and in Occu-
I 144
pancy Category IV in Seismic Zone No.2.
(ii) Regular structures under 240 feet in height with lateral force resistance
provided by systems listed in Table No. 23-0.
1988 EDITION 2312
(iii) Irregular structures not more than five stories nor 65 feet in height.
(i'l) Structures having a flexible upper portion supported on a rigid lower
portion where both portions of the structure considered separately can be
classified as being regular, the average story stiffness of the lower portion
is at least ten times the average story stiffness of the upper portion and the
period of the entire structure is not greater than I . I times the period of the
upper portion considered as a separate structured fixed at the base.
C. Dynamic. The dynamic lateral force procedure of Section 2312 (f) shall be
used for all other structures, including the following:
(i) Structures 240 feet or more in height except as permitted by Section 2312
(d) 8, Item B (i).
(ii) Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric vertical irregularity of
Type A, B orCas defined in Table No. 23-M or structures having irregular
features not described in Table No. 23-M or 23-N except as permitted by
Section 2312 (e) 3 B.
(iii) Structures over five stories or 65 feet in height in Seismic Zones Nos. 3
and 4 not having the same structural system throughout their height except
as permitted by Section 2312 (e) 3 B.
9. System limitations. A. Discontinuity. Structures with a discontinuity in
capacity, vertical irregularity Type E as defined in Table No. 23-M, shall not be
over two stories or 30 feet in height where the weak story has a calculated strength
of less than 65 percent of the story above.
EXCEPTION: Where the weak story is capable of resisting a total lateral
seismic force of 3 (R"/8) times the design force prescribed in Section 2312 (e).
B. Undefined structural systems. Undefined structural systems shall be
shown by technical and test data which establish the dynamic characteristics and
demonstrate the lateral force resistance and energy absorption capacity to be
equivalent to systems listed in Table No. 23-0 for equivalent Rw values.
C. Irregular features. All structures having irregular features described in
Table No. 23-M or 23-N shall be designed to meet the additional requirements of
those sections referenced in the tables.
10. Alternative procedures. Alternative lateral force procedures using ra-
tional analyses based on well established principles of mechanics may be used in
lieu of those prescrihed in these provisions.
(e) Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related Effects. I. General.

Structures shall be designed for seismic forces coming from any horizontal
direction.
The design seismic forces may be assumed to act noncurrently in the direction
of each principal axis of the structure, except as required by Section 2312 (h) I.
Seismic dead load, W. is the total dead load and applicable portions of other
loads listed below.
A. In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum of 25 percent of the
floor live load shall be applicable.
145
~~ B. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a load of not less than I 0
psf shall be included.
1~ C. Where the snow load is greater than 30 psf, the snow load shall be included.
Where considerations of siting, configuration and load duration warrant, the
snow load may be reduced up to 75 percent when approved by the building
official.
D. Total weight of permanent equipment shall be included.
2. Static force procedure. A. Design base shear. The total design base shear
in a given direction shall be determined from the following formula:
v = Z I C W (12-1)
\I Rw
I 1.25 s
I
c = (12-2)
T213
Tho"'"' of C noOO not oxcred 2. 75 .nd m•y bo "'00

fm .ny "'"""" witho"t
[ regard to soil type or structure period.
:,i,· Except for those provisions where code prescribed forces are scaled up by 3
~ (Rw/8) the minimum value of the ratio C!Rw shall be 0.075.
i B. Structure period. The value of T shall be determined from one of the

]: following methods:
~-
1. (i) ~~::.~~0~:.~~1 b;l:n:~l::,~:'"' T moy b< nppnnimn~ f~~:::

WHERE:
ct = 0.035 for steel moment-resisting frames.
1~.:.,i: C1 = 0.030 for reinforced concrete moment-resisting frames and eccentri-
cally braced frames.
. ct = 0.020 for all other buildings.
~~~~
Alternatively, the value of C1 for structures with concrete or masonry shear
iJ walls may be taken as O.llv'A;:.
~~ The value of Ac shall be determined from the following formula:
~ Ac = LAe[0.2 + (De/hn) 2 ] . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . (12-4)
I The value of D,lhn used in formula (12-4) shall not exceed 0.9.
I
~~~
(ii) METHOD 8: The fundamental period T may be calculated using the
structural properties and deformational characteristics of the resisting
~· elements in a properly substantiated analysis. This requirement may be
satisfied by using the following formula:
.......... (12-5)
146
1988 EDITION 2312
The values off; represent any lateral force distributed approximately in accord-
ance with the principles of Formulas (12-6), (12-7) and (12-8) or any other
rational distribution. The elastic deflections, &;, shall be calculated using the
applied lateral forces,!;. The value of C shall be not less than 80 percent of the
I
~
value obtained by using T from Method A.
3. Combinations of structural systems. A. General. Where combinations
I.
of structural systems are incorporated into the same structure, the requirements of
this subsection shall be satisfied.
B. Vertical combinations. The value of Rw used in the design of any story
1
f
i
.
shall be less than or equal to the value of Rw used in the given direction for the story
above.
I
EXCEPTION: This requirement need not be applied to a story where the dead
weight above that story is less than I 0 percent of the total dead weight of the
structure.
Structures may be designed using the procedures of this section under the
following conditions:
(i) The entire structure is designed using the lowest Rw of the lateral force- I~
resisting systems used.
(ii) The following two-stage static analysis procedures may be used for struc- it
tures conforming to Section 2312 (d) 8, Item B (iv).
(a) The flexible upper portion shall be designed as a separate structure, I
supported laterally by the rigid lower portion, using the appropriate
value of Rw- Ii
(b) The rigid lower portion shall be designed as a separate structure using
the appropriate value of R w· The reactions from the upper portion shall
be those determined from the analysis of the upper portion amplified
by the ratio of the Rw of the upper portion over the Rw of the lower
portion.
I
C. Combinations along different axes. In Seismic Zones 3 and 4 where a !!
structure has a bearing wall system in only one direction the value of Rw used for
design in the orthagonal direction shall not be greater than that used for the bearing
wall system.
Any combination of building frame systems, dual systems or moment-resisting
frame systems may be used to resist seismic forces in structures less than 160 feet
I
in height. Only combinations of dual systems and special moment-resisting space
frames shall be used to resist seismic forces in structures exceeding 160 feet in
height in Seismic Zones 3 and 4.
4. Vertical distribution of force. The total force shall be distributed over the
height of the structure in conformance with Formulas (12-6), (12-7) and (12-8) in
the absence of a more rigorous procedure.
V = F1 + i.
i=l
F; ........................... (12-6)
147
The concentrated force F 1, at the top, which is in addition to F," shall be

determined from the formula:
F 1 = 0.07TV (12-7)
The value ofT used for the purpose of calculating F 1 may be the period that
corresponds with the design base shear as computed using Formula (12-1 ). F1
need not exceed 0.25Vand may be considered as zero (0) where Tis 0. 7 seconds or
less. The remaining portion of the base shear shall be distributed over the height of
the structure, including Level n, according to the following formula:
F = (V- F 1) wxhx
X
................... (12-8)
At each level designated as x, the force Fx shall be applied over the area of the
building in accordance with the mass distribution at that level. Stresses in each
structural element shall be calculated as the effect of forces Fx and F1 applied at the
appropriate levels above the base.
5. Horizontal distribution of shear. The design story shear, Vx, in any story is
the sum of the forces F1 and Fx above that story. Vx shall be distributed to the
various clements of the vertical lateral force-resisting system in proportion to their
rigidities, considering the rigidity of the diaphragm. See Section 2312 (h) 2 D for
rigid elements that are not intended to be part of the lateral force-resisting
systems.
To account for the uncertainties in locations of loads, the mass at each level
shall be assumed to be displaced from the calculated center of mass in each
direction a distance equal to five percent of the building dimension at that level
perpendicular to the direction of the force under consideration. The effect of this
displacement on the story shear distribution shall be considered.
6. Horizontal torsional moments. Provision shall be made for the increased
I
shears resulting from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not flexible.
Diaphragms shall be considered flexible for purposes of this paragraph when the
maximum lateral deformation of the diaphragm is more than two times the
average story drift of the associated story. This may be determined by comparing
the computed midpoint in-plane deflection of the diaphragm under lateral load
with the story drift of adjoining vertical resisting elements under equivalent
tributary lateral load.
The torsional design moment at a given story shall be the moment resulting
from eccentricities between applied design lateral forces at levels above that story
and the vertical resisting elements in that story plus an accidental torsion.
The accidental torsional moment shall be determined by assuming the mass is
displaced as required by Section 2312 (e) 5.
Where torsional irregularity exists, as defined in Table No. 23-N, the effects
148
1988 EDITION 2312
shall be accounted for by increasing the accidental torsion at each level by an

amplification factor, Ax, determined from the following formula: I
WHERE:
omax
A = [ omax
x 1.28avg
The maximum displacement at Level x.

]2
(12-9)
I
~~
oavg The average of the displacements at the extreme points of the
structure at Level x.
The value of Ax need not exceed 3.0
The more severe loading for each element shall be considered for design.
I
7. Overturning. A. Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning
effects caused by earthquake forces specified in Section 2312 (e) 4. At any level,
the overturning moments to be resisted shall be determined using those seismic
forces (F1 and FJ which act on levels above the level under consideration. At any
level, the incremental changes of the design overturning moment shall be distrib-
uted to the various resisting elements in the manner prescribed in Section 2312 (e)
5. Overturning effects on every element shall be carried down to the foundation.
See Section 2312 (h) for combining gravity and seismic forces.
B. In Seismic Zones 3 and 4, where a lateral load-resisting element is discon-
tinuous, such as for vertical irregularity Type D in Table No. 23-M or plan
irregularity Type D in Table No. 23-N, columns supporting such elements shall
have the strength to resist the axial force resulting from the following load
combinations, in addition to all other applicable load combinations:
1.0 DL + 0.8 U + 3 (Rw/8)£
0.85 DL + 3 (Rw/8)£
(i) The axial forces in such columns need not exceed the capacity of other
elements of the structure to transfer such loads to the column.
(ii) Such columns shall be capable of carrying the above-described axial
forces without exceeding the axial load strength of the column. For
designs using working stress methods this capacity may be determined
using an allowable stress increase of I . 7.
(iii) Such columns shall meet the following detailing or member limitations:
Chapter 26, Section 2625 (e), for concrete, and Chapter 27, Section 2722 (d),
for steel in structures in Seismic Zones 3 and 4.
Chapter 26, Section 2625 (k), for concrete, and Chapter 27, Section 2721 (e),
for steel in structures in Seismic Zone 2.
C. See Section 2910 (d) for overturning moments to be resisted at the founda-
tion soil interface.
8. Story drift limitation. Story drift is the displacement of one level relative
to the level above or below due to the design lateral forces. Calculated drift shall
include translational and torsional deflections.
149
Calculated story drift shall not exceed 0.04/ Rw nor 0.005 times the story height
for buildings less than 65 feet in height. For buildings greater in height, the
calculated story drift shall not exceed 0. 03/ R w nor 0. 004 times the story height.
These drift limits may be exceeded when it is demonstrated that greater drift can
be tolerated by both structural elements and nonstructural elements that could
affect life safety.
The design lateral forces used to determine the calculated drift may be derived
from a value of C based on the period determined from Formula ( 12-5) neglecting
the lower bound ratio for C!Rwof0.075 of Section 2312 (e) 2 A and the 80 percent
limitation of Section 2312 (e) 2 B (ii).
9. P-delta effects. The resulting member forces and moments and the story
drifts induced by P-delta effects shall be considered in the evaluation of overall
structural frame stability. P-delta need not be considered when the ratio of
secondary moment to primary moment does not exceed 0. 10; the ratio may be
evaluated for any story as the product of the total dead and live load above the
story times the seismic drift in that story divided by the product of the seismic
shear in that story times the height of that story. In Zones 3 and 4, designs
conforming to the drift limitations in Section 2312 (e) 8 may be deemed to satisfy
this requirement.
10. Vertical component ofseismic forces. The following requirements apply
in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 only.
I
Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed for a net upward force of
0.2 wp.
In addition to all other applicable load combinations horizontal prestressed
components shall be designed using not more than 50 percent of the dead load for
the gravity load, alone or in combination with the lateral force effects.
(f) Dynamic lateral force procedure. I. General. Dynamic analyses proce-

dures, when used, shall conform to the criteria established in this section. The
analysis shall be based on an appropriate ground motion representation and shall
be performed using accepted principles of dynamics. Structures which are de-
signed in accordance with this section shall comply with all other applicable
requirements of these provisions.
2. Ground motion. The ground motion representation may be one of the
following:
(i) The response spectra given in Figure No. 3.
(ii) Elastic design response spectra developed for the specific site. The
ground motion represented by the spectra shall be based on the geologic,
tectonic, seismic recurrence information and foundation material proper-
ties associated with the specific site. The spectra shall be representative of
motions which can be generated by all known faults which can affect this
site.
(iii) Ground motion time histories developed for the specific site shall be
representative of actual earthquake motions. Response spectra from time
150
1988 EDITION 2312
histories, either individually or in combination, shall approximate the site

design spectrum conforming to Section 2312 (f) 2 (ii).
(iv) The vertical component of ground motion may be defined by scaling
corresponding horizontal accelerations by a factor of two thirds. Alter-
nate factors may be used when substantiated by site specific data.
3. Mathematical model. A mathematical model of the physical structure
shall represent the spatial distribution of the mass stiffness of the structure to an
extent which is adequate for the calculation of the significant features of its
dynamic response. A three-dimensional model shall be used for the dynamic
analysis of structures with highly irregular plan configurations such as those
having a plan irregularity defined in Table No. 23-N and having a rigid or
semirigid diaphragm.
4. Description of analysis procedures. A. Response spectrum analysis. An
elastic dynamic analysis of a structure utilizing the peak dynamic response of all
modes having a significant contribution to total structural response. Peak modal
responses are calculated using the ordinates of the appropriate response spectrum
curve which correspond to the modal periods. Maximum modal contributions are
combined in a statistical manner to obtain an approximate total structural re-
sponse.
8. Time history analysis. An analysis of the dynamic response of a structure
at each increment of time when the base is subjected to a specific ground motion
time history.
5. Response spectrum analysis. A. Number of modes. The requirement of l~
Section 2312 (f) 4 A that all significant modes be included may be satisfied by
demonstrating that for the modes considered at least 90 percent of the participat-
ing mass of the structure is included in the calculation of response for each
principal horizontal direction.
8. Combining modes. The peak member forces, displacements, story forces,
story shears and base reactions for each mode shall be combined by recognized
methods. When three-dimensional models are used for analysis, modal interac-
tion effects shall be considered when combining modal maxima.
C. Scaling of results. The base shear for a given direction determined using
these procedures, when less than the values below, shall be scaled up to these
values.
(i) The base shear shall be increased to the following percentage of the values
determined from the procedures of Section 2312 (e):
(a) 100 percent for irregular buildings.
(b) 90 percent for regular buildings, except that the base shear shall not be
less than 80 percent of that determined from Section 2312 (e) using the
period, T, calculated from Method A.
All corresponding response parameters, including deflections, member forces
and moments, shall be increased proportionately.
(ii) The base shear for a given direction determined using these procedures
151
need not exceed that required by paragraph (i) above. All corresponding
response parameters may be adjusted proportionately.
D. Directional effects. Directional effects for horizontal ground motion shall
conform to the requirements of Section 2312 (e) I. The effects of vertical ground
motions on horizontal cantilevers and prestressed elements shall be considered in
accordance with Section 2312 (e) 10. Alternately, vertical seismic response may
be determined by dynamic response methods; in no case shall the response used
for design be less than that obtained by the static method.
E. Torsion. The analysis shall account for torsional effects, including acci-
dental torsional effects as prescribed in Section 2312 (e) 6. Where three-
dimensional models are used for analysis, effects of accidental torsion shall be
accounted for by appropriate adjustments in the model such as adjustment of mass
locations, or by equivalent static procedures such as provided in Section 2312 (e) 6.
F. Dual systems. Where the lateral force-resisting system consists of a dual
system as defined in Section 2312 (d) 6 E, the combined system shall be capable
of resisting the base shear determined in accordance with this section. The backup
special moment-resisting space frame shall be capable of resisting 25 percent of
the base shear used for the design of the total system. This 25 percent of the total
base shear may be applied to the backup space frame using either the procedures of
Section 2312 (e) 4 or those of Section 2312 (f) 5.
6. Time history analysis. Time history analyses shall meet the requirements
ofSection2312(d) 10.
(g) Lateral Force on Elements of Structures and Nonstructural Compo-

nents Supported by Structures. 1. General. Parts and portions of structures,
permanent nonstructural components, the attachments for them and the attach-
ments for equipment supported by a structure shall be designed to resist seismic
forces prescribed in Section 2312 (g).
Attachments shall include anchorages and required bracing. Friction shall not
be considered to provide resistance to seismic forces.
EXCEPTION: Friction may be utilized to resist shear when the normal forces at
the support interface are due to the effects of lateral forces and the effects of gravity
forces are neglected.
Nonrigid equipment which is needed for Occupancy Category I, emergency
operations or for life-safety systems, or whose failure would cause a life hazard,
shall be designed for seismic forces.
EXCEPTION: Equipment weighing less than 400 pounds, furniture, or tempo-
rary or movable equipment.
2. Design for total lateral force. Each element or component and its connec-
tions to the structure shall be designed to resist a total lateral seismic force, FP,
given by the following formula:
FP = ZICP WP (12-10)
The values of Z and I shall be the values used for the building.
152
1988 EDITION 2312
EXCEPTIONS: I. For anchorage of machinery and equipment required for '-'

life-safety systems, the value of I shall be taken as 1.5. ~~
2. For the design of tanks and vessels containing sufficient quantities of highly &i
toxic or explosive substances to be hazardous to the safety of the general public if r
released, the value of I shall be taken as 1.5. m
3. The value of I for panel connectors shall be I .0 for the entire connector.
The coefficient, Cl!, is for rigid elements and components. Rigid elements are
defined as those havmg a fixed base period less than or equal to 0.06 second.
Nonrigid elements are defined as those having a fixed base period greater than
0. 06 second.
The values of CP for nonrigid items or nonrigid or flexibly supported items shall
be determined considering both the dynamic properties of the element or compo-
I
nent and those of the structure which supports it, but the value shall not be Jess
than that listed in Table No. 23-P. A nonrigid or flexibly supported item is one for
which the period ofthe system, including the item, is greater than 0.06 second. In
the absence of a detailed analysis, the value of CP for a nonrigid or flexibly
supported item on a structure above grade shall be taken as twice the value listed in
I
Table No. 23-P, but need not exceed 2.0.
The value of CP for elements or components supported at or below ground level
may be two thirds of the value set forth in Table No. 23-P. However, the design
lateral forces for an element or component shall not be Jess than would be obtained
by treating the item as an independent structure and using the provisions of
I
Section 2312 (i).
The design lateral forces determined using Formula ( 12-1 0) shall be distributed
in proportion to the mass distribution of the element or component.
Forces determined using Formula (12-10) shall be used to design elements or :;:;:
~
components and their connections and anchorage to the structure, and to design
members and connections which transfer the forces to the seismic-resisting
systems.
I
For applicable forces in diaphragms and connectors for exterior panels, refer to
Sections 2312 (h) 2 D and 2312 (h) 2 I.
Forces shall be applied in the horizontal directions which result in the most
critical loadings for design.
3. Specifying lateral forces. Design specifications for equipment shall either
II
specify the design lateral forces prescribed herein or reference these provisions.
4. Essential or hazardous facilities and life-safety systems. For equipment
in facilities assigned to Occupancy Categories I and II and for life-safety systems,
the design and detailing of equipment which needs to be functional following a
major earthquake shall consider the effect of drift.
5. Alternative designs. Where an approved national standard or approved
physical test data provide a basis for the earthquake-resistant design of a particular
type of equipment or other nonstructural component, such a standard or data may
be accepted as a basis for design of the items with the following limitations:
(i) These provisions shall provide minimum values for the design of the
153
I
anchorage and the members and connections which transfer the forces to
the seismic-resisting system.
(ii) The force, FP' and the overturning moment used in the design of the
nonstructural component shall not be less than 80 percent of the values that
-~
would be obtained using these provisions.
\\ (h) Detailed Systems Design Requirements. I. General. All structural

!'; framing systems shall comply with the requirements of Section 2312 (d). Only the
;~.~ elements of the designated seismic-force-resisting system shall be used to resist
, design forces. The individual components shall be designed to resist the pre-
;1 scribed design seismic forces acting on them. The components shall also comply
ij;
illl:
~~~hl~h~~~~~~~~ ~~~~i~~~~f~~ f~;s~~~~~~~i~l0:;~~:~ i~h~l~a~~:~ 1~4 ~~~~~~
detailed system design requirements contained in Section 2312 (h).
All building components in Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4 shall be designed to resist
the effects of the seismic forces prescribed herein and the effects of gravity
loadings from dead, floor, live and snow loads.
Consideration shall be given to design for uplift effects caused by seismic
loads. For materials which use working stress procedures, dead loads shall be
multiplied by 0.85 when used to reduce uplift.
In Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4, provision shall be made for the effects of
earthquake forces acting in a direction other than the principal axes in each of the
following circumstances:
The structure has plan irregularity Type E as given in Table No. 23-N.
The structure has plan irregularity Type A as given in Table No. 23-N for both
major axes.
A column of a structure forms part of two or more intersecting lateral force-
resisting systems.
EXCEPTION: If the axial load in the column due to seismic forces acting in
either direction is less than 20 percent of the column allowable axial load.
The requirement that orthogonal effects be considered may be satisfied by

designing such elements for 100 percent of the prescribed seismic forces in one
direction plus 30 percent of the prescribed forces in the perpendicular direction.
The combination requiring the greater component strength shall be used for
design. Alternatively, the effects of the two orthogonal directions may be com-
bined on a square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) basis. When the SRSS
method of combining directional effects is used, each term computed shall be
assigned the sign that will result in the most conservative result.
2. Structural framing systems. A. General. Four types of general building
framing systems defined in Section 2312 (d) 6 are recognized in these provisions
and shown in Table No. 23-0. Each type is subdivided by the types of vertical
elements used to resist lateral seismic forces. Special framing requirements are
given in this section and in Chapters 24 through 27.
B. Detailing requirements for combinations of systems. For components
154
1988 EDITION 2312
common to different structural systems, the more restrictive detailing require-

ments shall be used.
C. Connections. Connections which resist seismic forces shall he designed
and detailed on the drawings.
I
,•!§
..
D. Deformation compatibility.
(i) All framing clements not required by design to be part of the lateral force-
resisting system shall be investigated and shown to be adequate for
vertical load-carrying capacity when displaced 3(RjX) times the dis-
placements resulting from the required lateral forces. P-dclta effects on
1 <
such elements shall be accounted for. For designs using working stress
methods, this capacity may be determined using an allowable stress
increase of I. 7. The rigidity of other clements shall also be considered.
(ii) Moment-resistant space frames may be enclosed by or adjoined by more
rigid elements which would tend to prevent the space frame from resisting
lateral forces where it can be shown that the action or failure of the more
rigid elements will not impair the vertical and lateral load resisting ability
of the space frame.
(iii) Exterior nonbearing, nonshear wall panels or clements which arc attached
to or enclose the exterior shall be designed to resist the forces per Formula
( 12-1 0) and shall accommodate movements of the structure resulting
from lateral forces or temperature changes. Such elements shall be sup-
ported by means of cast-in-place concrete or by mechanical connections
I
and fasteners in accordance with the following provisions:
Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative movement be-
tween stories of not less than two times story drift caused by wind. 3(R.j8)
times the calculated clastic story drift caused by design seismic forces, or
1/2 inch, whichever is greater.
Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for story drift
shall be sliding connections using slotted or oversize holes, connections
which permit movement by bending of steel, or other connections provid-
ing equivalent sliding and ductility capacity.
Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility and rotation capac-
ity so as to preclude fracture of the concrete or brittle failures at or near
welds.
The body of the connection shall be designed for one and one-third times
the force determined by Formula ( 12-1 0). ~
All elements of the connecting system such as holts. inserts. welds, ,~.
dowels. etc., shall be designed for four times the forces determined by
Formula ( 12-1 0).
Fasteners embedded in concrete shall be attached to, or hooked around,
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transfer forces
to the reinforcing steel.
The value of the coefficient I shall be I .0 for the entire connection.
E. Ties and continuity. All parts of a structure shall be interconnected and the
connections shall be capable of transmitting the seismic force, induced by the
155
parts being connected. As a minimum, any smaller portion ofthe building shall be
tied to the remainder of the building with elements having at least a strength to
resist Z times the weight of the smaller portion.
3
A positive connection for resisting a horizontal force acting parallel to the
member shall be provided for each beam, girder or truss. This force shall be
not less than.!:..._ times the dead plus live load.
5
F. Collector elements. Collector elements shall be provided which are capa-
ble of transferring the seismic forces originating in other portions of the building
to the element providing the resistance to those forces.
G. Concrete frames. Concrete space frames required by design to be part of
the lateral force-resisting system shall conform to the following:
(i) In Seismic Zones 3 and 4 they shall be special moment-resisting space
frames.
(ii) In Seismic Zone 2 they shall, as a minimum, be intermediate moment-
resisting space frames.
H. Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls. Concrete or masonry walls
shall be anchored to all floors and roofs which provide lateral support for the wall.
The anchorage shall provide a positive direct connection between the wall and
floor or roof construction capable of resisting the horizontal forces specified in
Section 2312 (g) or Section 2310. Requirements for developing anchorage forces
in diaphragms are given in Section 2312 (h) 2 I below. Diaphragm deformation
shall be considered in the design of the supported walls.
I. Diaphragms.
(i) The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not exceed the permissi-
ble deflection of the attached elements. Permissible deflection shall be that
deflection which will permit the attached element to maintain its structural
integrity under the individual loading and continue to support the pre-
scribed loads.
(ii) Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist the forces determined
in accordance with the following formula:
F,, " ( f~ ~w,F, ) w, ............. (12-11)
t=x
The force Fpx determined from Formula (12-11) need not exceed 0. 75 Z
I wpx• but shall not be less than 0.35 Z I wpx·
When the diaphragm is required to transfer lateral forces from the
vertical resisting elements above the diaphragm to other vertical resisting
elements below the diaphragm due to offset in the placement of the
elements or to changes in stiffness in the vertical elements, these forces
shall be added to those determined from Formula (12-11).
156
1988 EDITION 2312
(iii) Diaphragms supporting concrete or masonry walls shall have continuous

iE
ties or struts between diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces
specified in Section 2312 (h) 2 H. Added chords may be used to form
subdiaphragms to transmit the anchorage forces to the main crossties.
(iv) Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support concrete or masonry
walls, the anchorage shall conform to Section 2312 (h) 2 H above. In
Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 anchorage shall not be accomplished by usc of
I
Ill
toe nails or nails subject to withdrawal, nor shall wood ledgers or framing
be used in cross-grain bending or cross-grain tension, and the continuous
tics required by paragraph (iii) above shall be in addition to the diaphragm
sheathing.
(v) Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elements and to collectors and
connections of collectors to the vertical elements in structures in Seismic
Zones 3 and 4, having a plan irregularity of Type A, B, CorD in Table No.
23-N, shall be designed without considering one-third increase usually
permitted in allowable stresses for elements resisting earthquake forces.
(vi) In structures in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 having a plan irregularity of Type B
in Table No. 23-N, diaphragm chords and drag members shall be designed
considering independent movement of the projecting wings of the struc-
ture. Each of these diaphragm elements shall be designed for the more
severe of the following two assumptions:
Motion of the projecting wings in the same direction.
Motion of the projecting wings in opposing directions.
EXCEPTION: This requirement may be deemed satisfied if the procedures of
Section 2312 (f) in conjunction with a three-dimensional model have been used to
determine the lateral seismic forces for design.
J. Framing below the base. The strength and stiffness of the framing between
the base and the foundation shall not be less than that of the superstructure. The
special detailing requirements of Chapters 26 and 27, as appropriate, shall apply
to columns supporting discontinuous lateral force-resisting elements and to
SMRSF, IMRSF and EBF system elements below the base which are required to
transmit the forces resulting from lateral loads to the foundation.
K. Building separations. All structures shall be separated from adjoining
structures. Separations shall allow for 3 (R"/8) times the displacement due to
seismic forces.
Iii
(i) Nonbuilding Structures. I. General. A. Nonbuilding structures include m~
all self-supporting structures other than buildings which carry gravity loads and
resist the effects of earthquake. Nonbuilding structures shall be designed to resist
the minimum lateral forces specified in this section. Design shall conform to the I!!
applicable provisions of other sections as modified by the provisions contained in
Section 2312 (i).
B. The minimum design lateral forces prescribed in this section are at a service
level (rather than yield or ultimate level). The design of nonbuilding structures
shall provide sufficient strength and ductility, consistent with the provisions
157
specified herein for buildings, to resist the effects of seismic ground motions as
represented by these design forces.
When applicable, allowable stresses and other detailed design criteria shall be
obtained from other sections or their referenced standards.
When applicable design stresses and other design criteria are not contained in or
referenced by this code or the U .B.C. Standards, such criteria shall be obtained
from approved national standards.
C. The weight W for nonbuilding structures shall include all dead load as
defined for buildings in Section 2312 (e) I . For purposes of calculating design
seismic forces in non building structures, W shall also include all normal operating
contents for items such as tanks, vessels, bins and piping.
D. The fundamental period of the structure shall be determined by rational
methods such as by using Method Bin Section 2312 (e) 2.
E. The drift limitations of Section 2312 (e) 8 need not apply to nonbuilding
structures. Drift limitations shall be established for structural or nonstructural
clements whose failure would cause life hazards. P-delta effects shall be consid-
ered for structures whose calculated drifts exceed the values in Section 2312 (e) 8.
F. In Seismic Zones 3 and 4, structures which support flexible nonstructural
clements whose combined weight exceeds 25 percent of the weight of the struc-
ture shall be designed considering interaction effects between the structure and
the supported elements.
2. Lateral force. Lateral force procedures for nonbuilding structures with
structural systems similar to buildings [those with structural systems which are
listed in Table No. 23 (0).] shall be selected in accordance with the provisions of
Section 2312 (d).
EXCEPTION: Intermediate moment-resisting space frames (IMRSF) may be
used in Zones Nos. 3 and 4 for nonbuilding structures in Occupancy Categories III
and IV if(!) the structure is less than 50 feet in height and (2) anRw = 4.0 is used for
design.
Rigid structures (those with period T less than 0.06 second), including their
anchorages, shall be designed for the lateral force obtained from Formula ( 12-12).
V = 0.5ZIW ..................... (12-12)
The force V shall be distributed according to the distribution of mass and shall
be assumed to act in any horizontal direction.
ill! 3. Thnks with supported bottoms. Flat bottom tanks or other tanks with
ti supported bottoms, founded at or below grade, shall be designed to resist the
seismic forces calculated using the procedures in Section 2312 (i) for rigid
structures considering the entire weight of the tank and its contents. Alternatively,
such tanks may be designed using one of the two procedures described below.
A response spectrum analysis, which includes consideration of the actual
ground motion anticipated at the site and the inertial effects of the contained fluid.
A design basis prescribed for the particular type of tank by an approved national
standard, provided that the seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in
158
1988 EDITION 2312
conformance with the provisions of Sections 2312 (d) 2 and 2312 (d) 4, respec-
tively.
4. Other non building structures. Non building structures which are not cov-
ered by Section 2312 (i) 2 and 3 shall be designed to resist minimum seismic
lateral forces not Jess than those determined in accordance with the provisions in
Section 2312 (e) with the following additions and exceptions:
(i) The factor Rw shall be as given in Table No. 23-Q. The ratio C!Rw used for
design shall be not Jess than 0.5.
(ii) The vertical distribution ofthe lateral seismic forces in structures covered
by this section may be determined by using the provisions of Section 2312
(e) 4 or by using the procedures of Section 2312 (f).
EXCEPTION: For irregular structures assigned to Occupancy Categories I and
II which cannot be modeled as a single mass the procedures of Section 2312 (f) shall
be used.
(iii) Where an approved national standard provides a basis for the earthquake-
resistant design of a particular type of non building structure covered by
this Section 2312 (i) 4, such a standard may be used, subject to the
limitations in this subsection:
The seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in conformance with the
provisions of Sections 2312 (d) 5 and 2312 (d) 4, respectively.
The values for total lateral force and total base overturning moment used in
design shall not be less than 80 percent of the values that would be obtained using
these provisions.
(j) Earthquake-recording Instrumentations. For earthquake-recording in-

strumentations see Appendix Chapter 23, Division II.
159
TABLE NO. 23-A-UNIFORM AND CONCENTRATED LOADS

USE OR OCCUPANCY CONCEN·
UNIFORM
LOAD1 TRATED
CATEGORY DESCRIPTION LOAD
I. Access floor systems Office use 50 2000 2
Computer use 100 20002
2. Armories !50 0
3. Assembly areas' and Fixed seating areas 50 0
auditoriums and Movable seating and
balconies therewith other areas 100 0
Stage areas and
enclosed platforms 125 0
4. Cornices, marquees and
residential balconies 60 0
5. Exit facilities• 100 05
6. Garages General storage and/or repair 100 6
Private or pleasure-type
motor vehicle storage 50 6
7. Hospitals Wards and rooms 40 10002

8. Libraries Reading rooms 60 10002
Stack rooms 125 15002
9. Manufacturing Light 75 2000 2
Heavy 125 3000 2
10. Offices 50 2000 2
II. Printing plants Press rooms 150 2500 2
Composing and linotype rooms 100 20002
12. Residential' 40 os
13. Rest rooms'
14. Reviewing stands,
grandstands and
bleachers 100 0
15. Roof deck Same as area served or for the
type of occupancy
accommodated
16. Schools Classrooms 40 10002
17. Sidewalks and
driveways Public access 250 6
18. Storage Light 125

Heavy 250
19. Stores Retail 75 2000 2
Wholesale 100 3000 2
(Continued)
160
1988 EDITION 23-A
I See Section 2306 for live load reductions.

2See Section 2304 (c), first paragraph, for area of load application.
3Assembly areas include such occupancies as dance halls, drill rooms, gymnasiums, playgrounds,
plazas, terraces and similar occupancies which are generally accessible to the public.
4 Exit facilities shall include such uses as corridors serving an occupant load of 10 or more persons,
exterior exit balconies, stairways, fire escapes and similar uses.

llndividual stair treads shall be designed to support a 300-pound concentrated load placed in a position
which would cause maximum stress. Stair stringers may be designed for the uniform load set forth in
the table.
6See Section 2304(c), second paragraph, for concentrated loads.
?Residential occupancies include private dwellings, apartments and hotel guest rooms.
<Rest room loads shall be not less than the load for the occupancy with which they are associated, but need
not exceed 50 pounds per square foot.
161
TABLE NO. 23·8-SPECIAL LOADS1

VERTICAL LATERAL
USE
LOAD LOAD
CATEGORY (Pounds per Square Foot

DESCRIPTION
Unless Otherwise Noted)
I. Construction, public Walkway, see Sec. 4406 !50

access at site (live load) Canopy, see Sec. 4407 !50
2. Grandstands, review- Seats and See
ing stands and footboards 1202 Footnote
bleachers (live load) 3
3. Stage accessories Gridirons and
(live load) fly galleries 75
Loft block wells 4 250 250
Head block wells
and sheave beams• 250 250
4. Ceiling framing Over stages 20
(live load) All uses except
over stages 105
5. Partitions and
interior walls, see
Sec. 2309 (live load) 5
6. Elevators and
dumbwaiters (dead 2 x Total
and live load) loads 6
7. Mechanical and
electrical equip-
ment (dead load) Total loads
8. Cranes (dead Total load including 1.25 x Total 0.10 X Total
and live load) impact increase load 7 load 8
9. Balcony railings, Exit facilities serving
guard rails and an occupant load
handrails greater than 50 509
Other 209
10. Storage racks Over 8 feet high Total loads 1o See Table
No. 23-P
II. Fire sprinkler 250 pounds
structural support plus weight
of water- See Table
filled pipe No. 23-P
IThe tabulated loads are minimum loads. Where other vertical loads required by this code or
required by the design would cause greater stresses they shall be used.
2 Pounds per lineal foot.
'Lateral sway bracing loads of24 pounds per foot parallel and 10 pounds per foot perpendic-
ular to seat and footboards.
• All loads are in pounds per lineal foot. Head block wells and sheave beams shall be designed
162
1988 EDITION 23-B
for all loft block well loads tributary thereto. Sheave blocks shall be designed with a factor
of safety of five.
sooes not apply to ceilings which have sufficient total access from below, such that access is
not required within the space above the ceiling. Does not apply to ceilings if the attic areas
above the ceiling are not provided with access. This live load need not be considered
acting simultaneously with other live loads imposed upon the ceiling framing or its
supporting structure.
6Where Appendix Chapter 51 has been adopted, see reference standard cited therein for
additional design requirements.
?The impact factors included are for cranes with steel wheels riding on steel rails. They may
be modified if substantiating technical data acceptable to the building official is submit-
ted. Live loads on crane support girders and their connections shall be taken as the
maximum crane wheel loads. For pendant-operated traveling crane support girders and
their connections, the impact factors shall be I. 10.
SThis applies in the direction parallel to the runway rails (longitudinal). The factor for forces
perpendicular to the rail is 0.20 x the transverse traveling loads (trolley, cab, hooks and
lifted loads). Forces shall be applied at top of rail and may be distributed among rails of
multiple rail cranes and shall be distributed with due regard for lateral stiffness of the
structures supporting these rails.
•A load per lineal foot to be applied horizontally at right angles to the top rail.
wvertical members of storage racks shall be protected from impact forces of operating
equipment or racks shall be designed so that failure of one vertical member will not cause
collapse of more than the bay or bays directly supported by that member.
163
23-C UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-C-MINIMUM ROOF LIVE LOADS1

METHOD1 METHOD2
TRIBUTARY LOADED AREA IN
RATE OF MAXIMUM
SQUARE FEET FOR ANY REDUC-
REDUC·
STRUCTURAL MEMBER UNIFORM TIONr TIONR
ROOF SLOPE Oto200 201 to600 Over600 LOAD2 (Percent) (Percent)
I. Flat or rise less

than 4 inches per
foot. Arch or 20 16 12 20 .08 40
dome with rise
less than one
eighth of span
2. Rise 4 inches per
foot to less than
12 inches per 16 14 12 16 .06 25
foot. Arch or
dome with rise
one eighth of span
to less than three
eighths of span
3. Rise 12 inches per
foot and greater.
Arch or dome 12 12 12 12
with rise three
eighths of span or
greater
4. Awnings except 5 5 5 5 No Reductions
doth covered·' Permitted
5. Greenhouses, lath
houses and 10 10 10 10
agricultural
buildings 4
'Where snow loads occur, the roof structure shall be designed for such loads as determined by
the building official. See Section 2305 (d). For special purpose roofs, see Section 2305 (e).
2See Section 2306 for live load reductions. The rate of reduction r in Section 2306 Formula
(6-1) shall be as indicated in the table. The maximum reduction R shall not exceed the
value indicated in the table.
'As defined in Section 4506.
4 See Section 2305 (e) for concentrated load requirements for greenhouse roof members.
164
1988 EDITION 23-D, 23-E, 23-F, 23-G
TABLE NO. 23-D-MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION

FOR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS1
MEMBER LOADED WITH
MEMBER LOADED WITH LIVE LOAD PLUS
LIVE LOAD ONLY DEAD LOAD
TYPE OF MEMBER (L.L.} (L.L. + K.D.L.)
Roof Member Supporting
Plaster or Floor Member L/360 L/240
1Sufficient slope or camber shall be povided for flat roofs in accordance with Section 2305 (f).
L.L. = Live load
D .L. = Dead load
K = Factor as determined by Table No. 23-E
L = Length of member in same units as deflection
TABLE NO. 23-E-VALUE OF "K"

WOOD
Unseasoned Seasoned1 REINFORCED CONCRETE2 STEEL
1Seasoned
1.0
J 0.5 [2- 1.2 (A ',!A.)}:;; 0.6
lumber is lumber having a moisture content of less than 16 percent at time of

0
installation and used under dry conditions of use such as in covered structures.
2See also Section 2609.
A ', = Area of compression reinforcement.
A, = Area of non prestressed tension reinforcement.
TABLE NO. 23-F-WIND STAGNATION PRESSURE (q,) AT

STANDARD HEIGHT OF 30 FEET
Basic wind speed (mph) I
Pressure q, (psf)
1Wind speed from Section 2311 (b).
TABLE NO. 23-G-COMBINED HEIGHT, EXPOSURE AND GUST

FACTOR COEFFICIENT (C.)
HEIGHT ABOVE AVERAGE
LEVEL OF ADJOINING
GROUND, IN FEET EXPOSUREC EXPOSUREB
0- 20 1.2 0.7
20- 40 1.3 0.8
40- 60 1.5 1.0
60-100 1.6 1.1
100-150 1.8 1.3
150-200 1.9 1.4
200-300 2.1 1.6
300-400 2.2 1.8
165
23-H UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-H-PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (C)

q
STRUCTURE OR
PART THEREOF DESCRIPTION CqFACTOR
I. Primary frames and Method 1 (Normal force method)

systems Walls:
Windward wall 0.8 inward
Leeward wall 0.5 outward
Roofs!:
Wind perpendicular to ridge
Leeward roof or flat roof 0.7 outward
Windward roof
less than 2:12 0.7 outward
Slope 2: 12 to less than
9:12 0.9outward
or
0.3 inward
Slope 9:12 to 12:12 0.4 inward
Slope> 12:12 0.7 inward
Wind parallel to ridge and
flat roofs 0.7 outward
Method 2 (Projected area method)
On vertical projected area
Structures 40 feet or less I. 3 horizontal any
in height direction
Structures over 40 feet 1.4 horizontal any
in height direction
On horizontal projected area 1 0.7 upward
2. Elements and Wall elements
components All structures 1.2 inward
Enclosed structures 1.1 outward
Open structures 1.6outward
Parapets 1.3 inward or
outward
Roof elements
Enclosed structures
Slope<9:12 1.1 outward
Slope9:12to 12:12 I . I outward or
0.8 inward
Slope>12:12 1.1 outward or
inward
Open structures
Slope<9:12 1.6 outward
Slope 9:12 to 12:12 1.6 outward or
0.8 inward
Slope>l2:12 1.6 outward or
1.1 inward
(Continued)
166
1988 EDITION 23-H
STRUCTURE OR
PART THEREOF DESCRIPTION CqFACTOR
3. Local areas at Wall comers 2.0outward

discontinuities 2 Canopies or overhangs at eaves
or rakes 2.8 upward
Roof ridges at ends of buildings
or eaves and roof edges at
building corners 3.0 upward
Eaves or rakes without overhangs
away from building corners
and ridges away from ends
of building 2.0upward
Cladding connections
Add 0. 5 to outward or upward
C• for appropriate location
4. Chimneys, tanks Square or rectangular 1.4 any direction
and solid towers Hexagonal or octagonal I .I any direction
Round or elliptical 0. 8 any direction
5. Open-frame towers' 4 Square and rectangular
Diagonal 4.0
Normal 3.6
Triangular 3.2
6. Tower Accessories Cylindrical members
(such as ladders, 2 inches or less in diameter 1.0
conduit, lights and Over 2 inches in diameter 0.8
elevators) Flat or angular members 1.3
7. Signs, flagpoles,
lightpoles, minor
structures• 1.4 any direction
1For one story or the top story of multistory open structures an additional outward C • factor ='-l
of0.5 shall be used. The most critical combination shall be used for design. For definition iJ
of open structure see Section 2311 UJ. :;~
2 Local pressures shall apply over a distance from the discontinuity of 10 feet orO.! times the
least width of the structure, whichever is smaller.
'Wind pressures shall be applied to the total normal projected area of all the elements of one .,i,_:,r_:
face. The forces shall be assumed to act parallel to wind direction.

4 Factors for cylindrical elements are two thirds of those for flat or angular elements. ~~\
167
23-1, 23-J UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
'" TABLE NO. 23·1

tl SEISMIC ZONE FACTOR Z
I I I I
Ir ~====z====~==o=·=o7=5===~===o=~;=5===:===o=;=o===~===o=·=Jo===~===o=·=4=o==~
2
i ZONE 3 4
®
The zone shall be determined from the seismic zone map in Figure No.2.
TABLE NO. 23-J

SITE COEFFICIENTS1
TYPE DESCRIPTION SFACTOR
s, A soil profile with either: 1.0

(a) A rock-like material characterized by a
shear-wave velocity greater than 2,500 feet per
second or by other suitable means of classification,
or
(b) Stiff or dense soil condition where the soil depth
is less than 200 feet.
s, A soil profile with dense or stiff soil conditions, 1.2
where the soil depth exceeds 200 feet.
s, A soil profile 40 feet or more in depth and 1.5
containing more than 20 feet of soft to medium stiff
clay but not more than 40 feet of soft clay.
s. A soil profile containing more than 40 feet of soft 2.0
clay.
The site factor shall be established from properly substantiated geotechnical data. In
1
locations where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the soil
profile type soil profile S 3 shall be used. Soil profile S4 need not be assumed unless the
building official determines that soil profile S4 may be present at the site, or in the event
that soil profile S4 is established by geotechnical data.
168
1988 EDITION 23-K
TABLE NO. 23-K

OCCUPANCY CATEGORIES
OCCUPANCY CATEGORIES OCCUPANCY TYPE OR FUNCTIONS OF STRUCTURE
I. Essential Facilities Hospitals and other medical facilities having surgery and
emergency treatment areas.
Fire and police stations.
Tanks or other structures containing, housing or
supporting water or other fire-suppression materials or
equipment required for the protection of essential or
hazardous facilities, or special occupancy structures.
Emergency vehicle shelters and garages.
Structures and equipment in emergency-preparedness
centers.
Stand-by power generating equipment for essential
facilities.
Structures and equipment in government communication
centers and other facilities required for emergency
response.
II. Hazardous Facilities Structures housing, supporting or containing sufficient
quantities of toxic or explosive substances to be
dangerous to the safety of the general public if released.
III. Special Occupancy Covered structures whose primary occupancy is public
Structure assembly--capacity> 300 persons.
Buildings for schools through secondary or day-care
centers--capacity > 250 students.
Buildings for colleges or adult education
schools--capacity> 500 students.
Medical facilities with 50 or more resident incapacitated
patients, but not included above.
Jails and detention facilities.
All structures with occupancy> 5000 persons.
Structures and equipment in power generating stations
and other public utility facilities not included above, and
required for continued operation.
IV. Standard Occupancy All structures having occupancies or functions not listed
Structure above.
169
23-L, 23-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 23-L

OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
IMPORTANCE FACTOR2
OCCUPANCY CATEGORY1 I
I. Essential facilities 1.25

II. Hazardous facilities 1.25
III. Special occupancy structures 1.0
IV. Standard occupancy structures 1.0
'Occupancy types or functions of structures within each category are listed in Table No. 23-K.
Review and inspection requirements are given in Sections 305 and 306.
2For life-safety-related equipment, see Section 2312 (g) I.
TABLE NO. 23-M

VERTICAL STRUCTURAL IRREGULARITIES
REFERENCE
IRREGULARITY TYPE AND DEFINITION SECTION
A. Stiffness Irregularity-Soft Story

A soft story is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70 2312 (d) 8 c (ii)
percent of that in the story above or less than 80 percent of the
average stiffness of the three stories above.
B. Weight (mass) Irregularity
Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist where the 2312 (d) 8 c (ii)
effective mass of any story is more than 150 percent of the
effective mass of an adjacent story. A roof which is lighter than
the floor below need not be considered.
C. Vertical Geometric Irregularity
Vertical geometric irregularity shall be considered to exist 2312 (d) 8 c (ii)
where the horizontal dimension of the lateral force-resisting
system in any story is more than 130 percent of that in an
adjacent story. One-story penthouses need not be considered.
D. In-plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral Force-resisting
Element
An in-plane offset of the lateral load-resisting elements greater 2312(e)7
than the length of those elements.
E. Discontinuity in Capacity-Weak Story
A weak story is one in which the story strength is less than 80 2312 (d) 9 A
percent of that in the story above. The story strength is the total
strength of all seismic resisting elements sharing the story shear
for the direction under consideration.
170
1988 EDITION 23-N
TABLE NO. 23-N

PLAN STRUCTURAL IRREGULARITIES
REFERENCE
IRREGULARITY TYPE AND DEFINITION SECTION
A. Torsional Irregularity-to be considered when diaphragms

are not flexible.
Torsional irregularity shall be considered to exist when the 2312 (h) 21 (v)
maximum story drift, computed including accidental torsion, at
one end of the structure transverse to an axis is more than 1.2
times the average of the story drifts of the two ends of the
structure.
B. Reentrant Corners
Plan configurations of a structure and its lateral force-resisting 2312 (h) 2 I (v)
system contain reentrant corners, where both projections of the 2312 (h) 2 I (vi)
structure beyond a reentrant corner are greater than 15 percent
of the plan dimension of the structure in the given direction.
C. Diaphragm Discontinuity
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in 2312 (h) 2 I (v)
stiffness, including those having cutout or open areas greater
than 50 percent of the gross enclosed area of the diaphragm, or
changes in effective diaphragm stiffness of more than 50
percent from one story to the next.
D. Out-of-plane Offsets
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, such as out-of-plane 2312 (e) 7,
offsets of the vertical elements. 2312 (h) 2 I (v)
E. Nonparallel Systems
The vertical lateral load-resisting elements are not parallel to 2312 (h) l
nor symmetric about the major orthogonal axes of the lateral
force-resisting system.
171
.....
.....
N ~
0
TABLE NO. 23-0
STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
BASIC STRUCTURAL SYSTEM1 LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEM-DESCRIPTION R.,2 H3
A. Bearing Wall System I. Light-framed walls with shear panels
a. Plywood walls for structures three-stories or less 8 65
b. All other light framed walls 6 65
2. Shear Walls
a. Concrete 6 160
b. Masonry 6 160
3. Light steel-framed bearing walls with
tension-only bracing
4. Braced frames where bracing carries gravity loads
4
6
65
160
I
I
a. Steel
b. Concrete• 4 -
c. Heavy timber 4 65
B. Building Frame System I. Steel eccentrically braced frame (EBF) 10 240
2. Light-framed walls with shear panels ~:
a. Plywood walls for structures three-stories or less 9 65 ·:0:
b. All other light-framed walls 7 65 ~~ c

z
3. Shear walls
a. Concrete 8 240 II ~:II
b. Masonry
4. Concentrically braced frames
a. Steel
8
8
160
160
l s::
m
c
;=
b. Concrete4
c. Heavy timber
8
8
-
65
I
::::
c
z
G)
0
0
c
m
.....
ID
CD
CD
m
c
::::::j
5
II
C. Moment-resisting I. Special moment-resisting space frames (SMRSF) z
Frame System a. Steel 12 N.L.
b. Concrete 12 N.L.
2. Concrete intermediate moment-resisting space frames (IMRSf)6 7 -
~~l
3. Ordinary moment-resisting space frames (OMRSF)
a. Steel 6 160
b. Concrete' 5 - [
D. Dual System I. Shear walls ~
a. Concrete with SMRSF
b. Concrete with Concrete IMRSF
c. Masonry with SMRSF
12
9
8
N.L.
160
160
i
t~
d. Masonry with concrete IMRSf4
2. Steel EBF with steel SMRSF
3. Concentrically braced frames
7
12
-
N.L. l
I
a. Steel with steel SMRSF 10 N.L.
b. Concrete with concrete SMRSf4 9 -
c. Concrete with concrete IMRSf4 6 -
E. Undefined Systems See Sections 2312 (d) 8 C and 2312 (d) 9 B - -
Basic structural systems are defined in Section 2312 (d) 6.

1 ll
2See
Section 2312 (e) 3 for combination of structural system.
'H-Height limit applicable to Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. See Section 2312 (d) 7 for exception.
I
•Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. ~
5N.L.-NoLimit. =*
6Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, except as permitted in Section 2312 (i) 2.
..... 'Prohibited in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4.
I N
Co)
......
w 6
TABLE NO. 23-P
HORIZONTAL FORCE FACTOR CP
Applicable to Rigid ltems1
VALUE OF
ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURES AND NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS c,s NOTE
I. Part of Portion of Structure

I. Walls, including the following:
a. Unbraced (cantilevered) parapets. 2.0
b. Other exterior walls above the ground floor. 0.75
c. All interior bearing and non bearing walls and partitions. 0.75 2
d. Masonry or concrete fences over 6 feet high. 0.75

2. Penthouse (except where framed by an extension of the building frame). 0.75
3. Connections for prefabricated structural elements other than walls, with force applied at center of
gravity. 0.75 3
;
4. Diaphragms. - 4
II. Nonstructural Components

I. Exterior and interior ornamentations and appendages. 2.0
2. Chimneys, stacks, trussed towers, and tanks on legs.
a. Supported on or projecting as an unbraced cantilever above the roof more than one-half its total
height. 2.0
~
=~::
I
b. All others, including those supported below the roof with unbraced projection above the roof less c:
than one-half its height, or braced or guyed to the structural frame at or above its center of mass. 0.75 z
:;;
3. Signs and billboards. 2.0 0
:D
4. Mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment and machinery and associated piping. 0.75 5
3:::
5. Tanks and vessels (plus contents), including support systems and anchorage. 0.75 Ill
c:
6. Storage racks (include contents). 0.75 ;=
c
7. Anchorage for perman~nt floor-supported cabinets and bookstacks more than 5 feet in height (includes
contents). 0.75
z
C)
0
8. Anchorage for suspended ceilings and light fixtures-see also Section 4701 (e). 0.75 3.6 and8
0
9. Access floor systems. 0.75 3 and 7 c
m
....
tSee Section 2312 (g) 2 for the definition of "rigid." iCD
zsee Section 2312 (h) 2 D.
m
3Applies to Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4 only. 0
4 See Section 2312 (h) 2 I.
0
3
5Equipment and machinery shall include but not be limited to such items as boilers, heat exchangers, chillers, pumps, motors, air-handling units,
z
cooling towers, transformers, switch gear, control panels and life-safety equipment. It shall include sprinkler systems, other major piping and the
dueling, serving such equipment and machinery.
6 Ceiling weight shall include all light fixtures and other equipment or partitions which are laterally supported by the ceiling. For purposes of
determining the lateral seismic force, a ceiling weight of not less than four pounds per square foot shall be used. .;
7WP for access floor systems shall be the dead load of the access floor system plus 25 percent of the floor live load plus a 10 psf partition load allowance. J
8Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum board screw or nail attached to suspended members that support a ceiling at one level extending j
from wall to wall need not be analyzed, provided the walls are not over 50 feet apart. ~
9See Section 2312 (g) 2 for items supported at or below grade. ;t
TABLE NO. 23·0

R,. FACTORS FOR NON BUILDING STRUCTURES
STRUCTURE TYPE R,.
I. Tanks, vessels or pressurized spheres on braced or unbraced legs. 3
2. Cast-in-place concrete silos and chimneys having walls continuous
to the foundation. 5
3. Distributed mass cantilever structures such as: stacks, chimneys, silos and
skirt-supported vertical vessels. 4
4. Trussed towers (freestanding or guyed), guyed stacks and chimneys. 4
5. Inverted pendulum-type structures. 3
6. Cooling towers. 5
7. Bins and hoppers on braced or unbraced legs. 4
8. Storage racks. 5
9. Signs and billboards. 5
:::::
10. Amusement structures and monuments. 3
II II. All other self-supporting structures not otherwise covered. 4
176
......
CD
i
m
c
, :::::j
15 0
c: z
:a
m
z
p
......
,.I
Ul
Ul
0
:e
z
c
Ul
"tl
m
m
c
Ul
z
:=
r=
m
Ul
"tl
m
:a
:::1:
0
c:
:a
V L ~
'1
0 ~
_,~ 11 \co110 \ \
~ BaSIC wtnd speed 70 mph ~~ Spectal w1nd regton

......
.....
..... Values are fastest mile speeds at 33 feet above ground tor Exposure Category C and are assoc1ated with an annual
probabn•ty of 0.02.
2. Linear Interpolation between wind speed contours 1s acceptable
3 Caution in use of wind speed contours in mounta1nous regions of Alaska IS advtsed
Wind speed tor Hawaii IS 80 and Puerto RICO is 95.
Where local records or terrain indtcate higher 50-year wind speeds, they shall be used
Wind speed may be assumed to be constant between the coastline and the nearest inland contour.
c:
z
:;;
0
::D
3::::
Ill
c:
r=
c
z
C)
0
FIGURE NO. 2-SEISMIC ZONE MAP OF THE UNITED STATES 0
c
m
For areas outside of the United States, see Appendix Chapter 23
z
4
I I .... ,... - I
..LL
I I
r
~~:
:X·
....
CD
CD
CD
m
c
/t
; . ( SOFT TO MEDIUM CLAYS AND
0
~
a:
SANDS (SOIL TYPE 3) ..L-
I :::j
0
z
I
w 3
z ....1
Q w DEEP CDHESIDNLESS DR STIFF
(.)
!;( CLAY SOILS (SOIL TYPE 2)
I
(.)
a: <(
w Cl
....1
w z
(.) :::> ROCK AND STIFF SOILS
0 ~
~ (!)
a: 2 (SOIL TYPE 1)
y .... r.
~J
....1
<( ~
,
a: <(
0w w
a.. ~~
a.. w ~:
en ~
1- J
(.)
w
u..
u.. f;
w
~~~
0 ~
r.~
:~;
'k
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3
m
PERIOD, T ::~:
(Seconds) :l
~
.... :~ N
...... ~
CD FIGURE NO. 3-NORMALIZED RESPONSE SPECTRA SHAPES -:::: w
Chapter 24
MASONRY
General
Sec. 2401. (a) Scope. The materials, design, construction and quality control
of masonry shall be in accordance with this chapter.
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as
follows:
AREAS:
Bedded area is the area of the surface of a masonry unit which is in contact with
mortar in the plane of the joint.
Effective area of reinforcement (As) is the cross-sectional area of reinforce-
ment multiplied by the cosine of the angle between the reinforcement and the
direction for which effective area is to be determined.
Gross area is the total cross-sectional area of a specified section.
Net area is the gross cross-sectional area minus the area of ungrouted cores,
notches, cells and unbedded areas. Net area is the actual surface area of a cross
section of masonry.
Transformed area is the equivalent area of one material to a second based on
the ratio of moduli of elasticity of the first material to the second.
BOND:
Adhesion bond is the adhesion between masonry units and mortar or grout.
Reinforcing bond is the adhesion between steel reinforcement and mortar or
grout.
CELL is a void space having a gross cross-sectional area greater than 1'12
square inches.
CLEAN OUT is an opening to the bottom of a grout space of sufficient size and
spacing to allow the removal of debris.
COLUMN is a vertical structural member whose horizontal dimension mea-
sured at right angles to the thickness does not exceed three times the thickness.
DIMENSIONS:
Actual dimensions are the measured dimensions of a designated item; for
example, a designated masonry unit or wall, as used in the structure. The actual
dimension shall not vary from the specified dimension by more than the amount
allowed in the appropriate standard of quality in Section 2402 of this chapter.
Nominal dimensions of masonry units are equal to its specified dimensions
plus the thickness of the joint with which the unit is laid.
Specified dimensions arc the dimensions specified for the manufacture or
construction of masonry, masonry units, joints or any other component of a
structure. Unless otherwise stated, all calculations shall be made using or based
on specified dimensions.
180
1988 EDITION 2401
GROUT LIFT is an increment of grout height within the total pour; a pour may
consist of one or more grout lifts.
GROUT POUR is the total height of masonry wall to be poured prior to the
erection of additional masonry. A grout pour will consist of one or more grout
lifts.
GROUTED MASONRY:
Grouted hollow-unit masonry is that form of grouted masonry construction
in which certain designated cells of hollow units are continuously filled with
grout.
Grouted multiwythe masonry is that form of grouted masonry construction
in which the space between the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with grout.
JOINTS:
Bed joint is the mortar joint that is horizontal at the time the masonry units are
placed.
Collar joint is the vertical, longitudinal, mortar or grouted joint.
Head joint is the mortar joint having a vertical transverse plane.
MASONRY UNIT is brick, tile, stone, glass block or concrete block conform-
ing to the requirements specified in Section 2402.
Hollow-masonry unit is a masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in
every plane parallel to the bearing surface is less than 75 percent of the gross
cross-sectional area in the same plane.
Solid-masonry unit is a masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in every
plane parallel to the bearing surface is 75 percent or more of the gross cross-
sectional area in the same plane.
PRISM is an assemblage of masonry units and mortar with or without grout
used as a test specimen for determining properties of the masonry.
REINFORCED MASONRY is that form of masonry construction in which
reinforcement acting in conjunction with the masonry is used to resist forces and
is designed in accordance with Section 2409.
SHELL is the outer portion of a hollow masonry unit as placed in masonry.
WALL TIE is a mechanical fastener which connects wythes of masonry to each
other or to other materials.
WALLS:
Bonded wall is a masonry wall in which two or more wythes are bonded to act
as a structural unit.
Cavity wall is a wall containing continuous air space with a minimum width of
2 inches and a maximum width of 4'12 inches between wythes which are tied with
metal ties.
WEB is an interior solid portion of a hollow masonry unit as placed in masonry.
WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit in thickness. A
collar joint is not considered a wythe.
181
(c) Notation.
a= height of wall or segment for cantilevered condition, or one-half height of
wall or segment for fixed conditions top and bottom.
cross-sectional area of anchor bolt, square inch.
effective area of masonry.
area of tension (pullout) cone of an embedded anchor bolt projected onto
the surface of masonry, square inch.
effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in a column or flexural
member.
area of steel required for shear reinforcement perpendicular to the longi-
tudinal reinforcement.
A's effective cross-sectional area of compression reinforcement in a flexural
member.
b effective width of rectangular member or width of flange for T and I
sections.
b, computed tension force on anchor bolts, pounds.
bv computed shear force on anchor bolts, pounds.
b' width of web in T and I member.
B, = allowable tension force on anchor bolts, pounds.
Bv = allowable shear force on anchor bolts, pounds.
c = distance from the neutral axis to extreme fiber.
d = distance from the compression face of a flexural member to the centroid
of longitudinal tensile reinforcement.
d' distance from the compression face of a flexural member to the centroid
of longitudinal compression reinforcement.
db diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Em modulus of elasticity of masonry.
E, modulus of elasticity of steel, 29,000,000 psi.
fa computed axial compressive stress due to design axial load.
fb computed flexural stress in the extreme fiber due to design bending loads
only.
fmd computed compressive stress in masonry due to dead load only.
fs computed stress in reinforcement due to design loads.
!y tensile yield stress of reinforcement.
fv computed shear stress due to design load.
f' m specified compressive strength of masonry at the age of 28 days.
Fa allowable average axial compressive stress for centroidally applied axial
load only.
Fb = allowable flexural compressive stress if members were carrying bending
load only.
Fbr allowable bearing stress.
182
1988 EDITION 2401-2402
F, allowable stress in reinforcement.

F,c allowable compressive stress in column reinforcement.
F, allowable flexural tensile stress in masonry.
F.- allowable shear stress in masonry.
G shear modulus of masonry.
h actual height of a prism.
h' effective height of a wall or column.
I moment of inertia about the neutral axis of the cross-sectional area.
j ratio or distance between centroid of flexural compressive forces and
centroid of tensile forces to depth, d.
k the ratio of depth of the compressive stress in a flexural member to the
depth, d.
lh embedment depth of anchor bolts, inch.
!he anchor bolt edge distance, the least length measured from the edge of
masonry to the surface of the anchor bolt, inch.
ld required development length of reinforcement.
L length of a wall or segment.
M design moment.
Me moment capacity of compression steel in a flexural member about the
centroid of the tensile force.
Mm the moment of the compressive force in the masonry about the centroid of
the tensile force in the reinforcement.
M, the moment of the tensile force in the reinforcement about the centroid of
the compressive force in the masonry.
n - modular ratio = E,!Em.
p ratio of the area of flexural tensile reinforcement, A 5 , to the area (bd).
P design axial load.
Pa allowable centroidal axial load for reinforced masonry columns.
rh ratio of the area of bars cut off to the total area of bars at the section.
s = spacing of stirrups or of bent bars in a direction parallel to that of the main
reinforcment.
effective thickness of a wythe, wall or column.
u - bond stress per unit of surface area of bar.
V total design shear force.
La sum of the perimeters of all the longitudinal reinforcement.
Material Standards
Sec. 2402. (a) Quality. Materials used in masonry shall conform to the
requirements stated herein. If no requirements are specified in this section for a
material, quality shall be based upon generally accepted good practice, subject to
the approval of the building official.
183
(b) Standards of Quality.

I . Aggregates:
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-21, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-23, Aggregate for Masonry Grout.
2. Cement:
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-16, Masonry Cement.
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-1, Portland Cement.
C. Plastic Cement: Plastic cement shall meet the requirements for portland
cement as set forth in U. B. C. Standard No. 26-1 except in respect to
limitations on insoluble residue, air entrainment, and additions subse-
quent to calcination. Approved types of plasticizing agents shall be
added to portland cement Type I or II in the manufacturing process, but
not in excess of 12 percent of the total volume.
3. Lime:
A. U .B.C. Standard No. 24-17, Quick Lime for Structural Purposes.
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-18, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
4. Masonry units--clay or shale:
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-8, Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall Tile.
B. U. B. C. Standard No. 24-9, Structural Clay Nonload-bearing Tile.
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-1, Section 24.101, Building Brick (Solid
Units).
D. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-25, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing
Tile, Facing Brick and Solid Masonry Units.
(i) Load-bearing glazed brick shall conform to the weathering and
structural requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 24-1, Section
24.104, Facing Brick.
E. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-8, Structural Clay Facing Tile.
F. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-1, Section 24.104, Facing Brick (Solid
Units).
G. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-1, Section 24.105, Hollow Brick.
5. Masonry units--concrete:
....
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-3, Concrete Building Brick.
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-4, Hollow and Solid Load-bearing Concrete
Masonry Units .
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-6, Nonload-bearing Concrete Masonry Units .
6. Masonry units--other:
A. Calcium silicate:
(i) U.B.C. Standard No. 24-2, Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-
Lime Brick).
B. Glass block:
(i) Glass block may be solid or hollow and contain inserts.
184
1988 EDITION 2402-2403
(ii) All mortar contact surfaces shall be treated to ensure adhesion

between mortar and glass.
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-14, Unburned Clay Masonry Units.
D. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-13, Cast Stone.
E. Reclaimed units:
(i) Reclaimed or previously used masonry units shall meet the applica-
ble requirements as for new masonry units of the same material for
their intended use.
7. Metal ties and anchors:
A. Metal ties and anchors shall be made of a material having a minimum
tensile yield stress of 30,000 psi.
B. All such items not fully embedded in mortar or grout shall be coated
with copper, cadmium, zinc or a metal having at least equivalent
corrosion-resistant properties.
8. Mortar:
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-20, Mortar for Unit Masonry.
9. Grout:
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-29, Grout for Masonry and Section 2403 (d).
10. Reinforcement:
A. U.B.C. Standard No. 24-15, Part I, Joint Reinforcement for Masonry,
and Part II Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-4, Deformed and Plain Billet-steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
C. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-4, Rail-steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
D. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-4, Axle-steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
E. U.B.C. Standard No. 26-4, Deformed Low-alloy Bars.
II . Water. Water used in mortar or grout shall be clean and free of deleterious
amounts of acid, alkalies or organic material or other harmful substances.
Mortar and Grout

Sec. 2403. (a) General. Mortar and grout shall comply with the provisions of
this section. Special mortars, grouts or bonding systems may be used, subject to
satisfactory evidence oftheir capabilities when approved by the building official.
(b) Materials. Materials used as ingredients in mortar and grout shall conform
to the applicable requirements given in Section 2402. Cementitious materials
shall be lime, masonry cement or portland cement.
(c) Mortar. I. General. Mortar shall consist of a mixture of cementitious
material and aggregate to which sufficient water and approved additives, if any,
have been added to achieve a workable, plastic consistency.
2. Selecting proportions. Proportions of ingredients and any additives shall be
185
based on laboratory or field experience with the mortar ingredients and the
masonry units to be used. The mortar shall be specified by the proportions of its
constituents in terms of parts by volume. Water content shall be adjusted to
provide proper workability under existing field conditions. When the proportion
of ingredients is not specified, the proportions by mortar type shall be used as
given in Table No. 24-A.
(d) Grout. I. General. Grout shall consist of a mixture of cementitious
materials and aggregate to which water has been added such that the mixture will
flow without segregation of the constituents.
2. Selecting proportions. Proportions of ingredients and any additives shall be
based on laboratory or field experience with the grout ingredients and the ma-
sonry units to be used. The grout shall be specified by the proportion of its
constituents in terms of parts by volume. Water content shall be adjusted to
provide proper workability and to enable proper placement under existing field
conditions, without segregation. When the proportion of ingredients is not speci-
fied, the proportions by grout type shall be used as given in Table No. 24-8 or a
minimum compressive strength shall be specified of at least 2000 psi.
(c) Additives and Admixtures. I. General. Additives and admixtures to
mortar or grout shall not be used unless approved by the building official.
2. Antifreeze compounds. Antifreeze liquids, chloride salts or other such
substances shall not be used in mortar or grout.
3. Air entrainment. Air-entraining substances shall not be used in mortar or
grout unless tests are conducted to determine compliance with the requirements of
this code.
4. Colors. Only pure mineral oxide, carbon black or synthetic colors may be
used. Carbon black shall be limited to a maximum of3 percent of the weight of the
cement.
Construction
Sec. 2404. (a) General. Masonry shall be constructed according to the provi-
sions of this section.
(b) Materials--Handling, Storage and Preparation. All materials shall
comply with applicable requirements of Section 2402. Storage, handling and
preparation at the site shall conform also to the following:
I . Masonry materials shall be stored so that at the time of use the materials are
clean and structurally suitable for the intended use.
2. All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and other coatings that
would inhibit reinforcing bond.
3. At the time of laying, burned clay units and sand lime units shall have a rate
of absorption not exceeding .025 ounce per square inch during a period of one
minute. In the absorption test the surface of the unit shall be held 1/8 inch below the
surface of the water.
4. Concrete masonry units shall not be wetted unless otherwise approved.
186
1988 EDITION 2404
5. Materials shall be stored in a manner such that deterioration or intrusion of

foreign materials is prevented and that the material will be capable of meeting
applicable requirements at the time of mixing.
6. The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that
proportions of the materials can be controlled.
7. Mortar or grout mixed at the jobsite shall be mixed for a period of time not
less than 3 minutes nor more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the
amount of water required to provide the desired workability. Hand mixing of small
amounts of mortar is permitted. Mortar may be retempered. Mortar or grout
which has hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement shall not be used,
but under no case shall mortar be used two and one-half hours, nor grout used one
and one-half hours, after the initial mixing water has been added to the dry
ingredients at the jobsite.
(c) Cold Weather Construction. I. General. All materials shall be delivered
in a usable condition and stored to prevent wetting by capillary action, rain and
snow.
The tops of all walls not enclosed or sheltered shall be covered with a strong
weather-resistive material at the end of each day or shutdown.
Partially completed walls shall be covered at all times when work is not in
progress. Covers shall be draped over the wall and extend a minimum of 2 feet
down both sides and shall be securely held in place, except when additional
protection is required in Section 2404 (c) 4.
2. Execution-Preparation. If ice or snow has inadvertently formed on
masonry bed, it shall be thawed by application of heat carefully applied until top
surface of the masonry is dry to the touch.
A section of masonry deemed frozen and damaged shall be removed before
continuing construction of that section.
3. Construction. Masonry units shall be dry. Wet or frozen masonry units shall
not be laid.
Air temperature 40°F: to 32°F.: Sand or mixing water shall be heated to produce
mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F.
Air temperature 32°F. to 25°F.: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to
produce mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F. Maintain temperatures of
mortar on boards above freezing.
Air temperature 25°F. to 20°F.: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to
produce mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F. Maintain mortar tempera-
tures on boards above freezing. Salamanders or other sources of heat shall be used
on both sides of walls under construction. Windbreaks shall be employed when
wind is in excess of 15 mph.
Air temperature 20°F. and below: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to
provide mortar temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F. Enclosure and auxiliary
heat shall be provided to maintain air temperature above 32°F. Temperature of
units when laid shall be not less than 20°F.
4. Protection. When the mean daily air temperature is 40°F. to 32oF., masonry
187
shall be protected from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-
resistive membrane.
When the mean daily air temperature is 32°F. to 25°F., masonry shall be
completely covered with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours.
When the mean daily air temperature is 25°F. to 20°F., masonry shall be
completely covered with insulating blankets or equally protected for 24 hours.
When the mean daily air temperature is 20°F. and below, masonry temperature
shall be maintained above 32°F. for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary
heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps or other approved methods.
5. Placing grout and protection of grouted masonry. When air temperatures
fall below 40°F., grout mixing water and aggregate shall be heated to produce
grout temperatures between 40°F. and 120°F.
Masonry to be grouted shall be maintained above freezing during grout place-
ment and for at least 24 hours after placement.
Where atmospheric temperatures fall below 20°F., enclosures shall be provided
around the masonry during grout placement and for at least 24 hours after
placement.
(d) Placing Masonry Units. I. Mortar. The mortar shall be sufficiently

plastic and units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to extrude mortar from
the joint and produce a tight joint. Deep furrowing which produces voids shall not
be used.
The initial bed joint thickness shall be not less than 1/4 inch nor more than I
inch; subsequent bed joints shall be not less than l/4 inch nor more than 5/s inch in
thickness.
2. Surfaces. Surfaces to be in contact with mortar or grout shall be clean and
free of deleterious materials.
3. Solid masonry units. Solid masonry units shall have full head and bed
joints.
4. Hollow-masonry units. All head and bed joints shall be filled solidly with
mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit not less than the thickness of the
shell.
Head joints of open-end units with beveled ends need not be mortared. The
beveled ends shall form a grout key which permits grout within 5fg inch of the face
of the unit. The units shall be tightly butted to prevent leakage of grout.
(c) Reinforcement Placing. Reinforcing details shall conform to the require-
ments of Section 2409 (e). Metal reinforcement shall be located in accordance
with the plans and specifications. Reinforcement shall be secured against dis-
placement prior to grouting by wire positioners or other suitable devices at
intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters nor 10 feet.
Tolerances for the placement of steel in walls and flexural elements shall be plus
or minus 112 inch ford equal to 8 inches or less, plus or minus one inch ford equal
to 24 inches or less but greater than 8 inches, and plus or minus I l/4 inch for d
greater than 24 inches.
188
1988 EDITION 2404
Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcement shall be plus or minus 2

inches.
(I) Grouted Masonry. I. General conditions. Grouted masonry shall be
constructed in such a manner that all clements of the masonry act together as a
structural element.
Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean so that all spaces to be filled
with grout do not contain mortar projections greater than 112 inch, mortar drop-
pings or other foreign material. Grout shall be placed so that all spaces designated
to be grouted shall be filled with grout and the grout shall be confined to those
specific spaces.
Grout materials and water content shall be controlled to provide adequate
fluidity for placement, without segregation of the constituents and shall be mixed
thoroughly.
I
The grouting of any section of wall shall be completed in one day with no
interruptions greater than one hour.
Between grout pours, a horizontal construction joint shall be formed by stop-
ping all wythes at the same elevation and with the grout stopping a minimum of
1112 inches below a mortar joint, except at top of wall. Where bond beams occur,
stop grout pour a minimum of 112 inch below the top of the masonry.
Size and height limitations of the grout space or cell shall not be less than shown
in Table No. 24-G. Higher grout pours or smaller cavity widths or cell size than
shown in Table No. 24-G may be used when approved, if it is demonstrated that
grout spaces are properly filled.
When required by Table No. 24-G, clean outs shall be provided in the bottom
course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more than 32 inches on center
for solidly grouted masonry. When cleanouts are required, they shall be scaled
after inspection and before grouting.
Units may be laid to the full height of the grout pour and grout shall be placed in
a continuous pour in grout lifts not exceeding 6 feet.
All cells and spaces containing reinforcing bars shall be filled with grout.
2. Construction requirements. Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grout-
ing. Bolts shall be accurately set with templates or by approved equivalent means
and held in place to prevent movement.
Segregation of the grout materials and damage to the masonry shall be avoided
during the grouting process.
Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration during placing he fore loss
of plasticity in a manner to fill the grout space. Grout pours greater than 12 inches
••••
shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to minimize voids due to water
loss. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be mechanically vtbrated, or
puddled.
In one-story buildings having wood-frame exterior walls, foundations not over
24 inches high measured from the top of the footing may be constructed of hollow
masonry units laid in running bond without mortared head joints. Any standard
shape unit may be used, provided the masonry units permit horizontal flow of
189
grout to adjacent units. Grout shall be solidly poured to the full height in one lift
and shall be puddled or mechanically vibrated.
In nonstructural elements, including fireplaces and residential chimneys,
which do not exceed 8 feet in height above the highest point of lateral support,
mortar of pouring consistency may be substituted for grout when the masonry is
constructed and grouted in pours of 12 inches or less.
In multiwythe grouted masonry, vertical barriers of masonry shall be built
across the grout space. The grouting of any section of wall between barriers shall
be completed in one day with no interruption longer than one hour.
(g) Aluminum Equipment. Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utilizing
.. aluminum equipment unless it can be demonstrated with the materials and equip-
ment to be used that there will be no deleterious effect on the strength of the grout .
(h) Joint Steel. Wire joint reinforcement used in the design as principal
reinforcing in hollow unit construction shall be continuous between supports
unless splices are made by lapping:
I. Fifty-four wire diameters in a grouted cell, or
2. Seventy-five wire diameters in the mortared bed joint, or
3. In alternate bed joints of running bond masonry a distance not less than 54
diameters plus twice the spacing of the bed joints, or
4. As required by calculation and specific location in areas of minimum stress,
such as points of inflection.
Side wires shall be deformed and shall conform to U .B.C. Standard No. 24-15,
Part I, Joint Reinforcement for Masonry.
Quality Control
Sec. 2405. (a) General. Quality control shall ensure that materials, construc-
tion and workmanship are in compliance with the plans and specifications, and
the applicable requirements of this chapter. When required, inspection records
shall be maintained and made available to the building official.
(b) Scope. Quality control shall include, but is not limited to, assurance that:
I. Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other mate-
rials meet the requirements of the applicable standards of quality and that they are
properly stored and prepared for use.
2. Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified proportions of ingredi-
ents. The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that
proportions of materials arc controlled.
3. Construction details, procedures and workmanship are in accordance with
the plans and specifications.
4. Placement, splices and bar diameters are in accordance with the provisions
of this chapter and the plans and specifications.
(c) Quality Control Testing. I . Sampling and testing of masonry units. The
sampling and testing of clay or shale masonry units [Section 2402 (b) 4) shall be in
accordance with the provisions of U .B.C. Standard No. 24-24.
190
1988 EDITION 2405-2406
The sampling and testing of concrete masonry units [Section 2402 (b) 5] shall
be in accordance with the provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 24-7.
The sampling and testing of unburned clay masonry units [Section 2402 (b) 6
C] shall be in accordance with the provisions of U. B.C. Standard No. 24-14.
Cast stone [Section 2402 (b) 6 D] shall be tested in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 24-13.
2. Masonry prism testing. When the compressive strength of masonry is
specified to be verified by masonry prism tests, the following requirements shall
be met:
A. A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in accordance with
U .B.C. Standard No. 24-26 prior to the start of construction.
B. During construction, a set of three masonry prisms shall be built and tested
in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 24-26 for each 5,000 square feet of wall
area, but not less than one set of three masonry prisms for the project.
C. The compressive strength of masonry determined in accordance with
U. B.C. Standard No. 24-26 for each set of prisms shall equal or exceed f'm·
3. Mortar testing. When required by the building official, mortar shall be
tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 24-22.
Allowable Stresses
Sec. 2406. (a) General. Stresses in clay or concrete masonry under service
loads shall not exceed the values given in this section.
(b) Specified Compressive Strength ofMasonry,f'm· The allowable stresses
for the design of masonry shall be based on an f'm value selected in accordance
with one of the following provisions except as modified in Section 2407 (h) 4:
I . When the compressive strength of masonry is specified in the contract
documents to be verified by masonry prism testing in accordance with Section
2405 (c) 2, the specified compressive strength of masonry, f'm shall be selected
based on an appropriate compressive strength of masonry which can be obtained
with the materials and construction practices specified for the project; or
2. When there is a masonry prism test record, approved by the building
official, of at least 30 masonry prism tests conducted in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 24-26 and representative of the corresponding construction, the
specified compressive strength of masonry, f'm may be selected on the basis of
this record, but shall not exceed 75 percent of the average value of the prism test
record; or
3. When neither of the above provisions are met, the specified compressive
strength of masonry, f'm shall be selected from Table No. 24-C.
(c) Allowable Stresses in Masonry. I. General. When the quality control
provisions do not include the requirements for special inspection as prescribed in
Sections 306 and 2405, the allowable design masonry stresses in this section shall
be reduced by one half. Whenever special inspection is required for masonry
construction, prism testing prior to and during construction as prescribed in
Section 2405 (c) is also required.
191
2. Compressive stress, axial. A. Unreinforced masonry walls.
Fa= 0.20f'm [1- (

4~( )3]· .................. (6-1)
B. Unreinforced masonry columns.
Fa= 0.20J'm [I- (:;( )3] ................... (6-2)
C. Reinforced masonry walls.
l
Fa= 0.20J ' m [I - ( h' ( )3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6-3)
42
D. Reinforced masonry columns.
Fa = PjA,. ......................... (6-5)
3. Compressive stress, flexural.

Fh = 0.33 f' rn• 2000 psi maximum ................ (6-6)
4. Tensile stress, walls in flexure. The allowable tensile stress for walls in
flexure of masonry elements or members without tensile reinforcement using
portland cement and hydrated lime Type M or S mortar shall not exceed the values
which follow. For Type M and S masonry cement mortars, the values shall be
reduced by 50 percent for clay units and 25 percent for concrete units. For Type N
mortar, values shall be reduced by 25 percent.
Values for tension normal to head joints are for running bond; no tension is
allowed across head joints in stack bond masonry. These values shall not be used
for horizontal flexural members such as beams, girders or lintels.
Tension normal to bed joints (F 1, psi).
Clay Units Concrete Units
Solid Units 36 40
Hollow Units 22 25
Tension normal to head joints (F 1, psi).
Clay Units Concrete Units
Solid Units 72 80
Hollow Units 45 50
5. Reinforcing bond stress (u, psi).
Plain Bars 60
Deformed Bars 140
192
1988 EDITION 2406
6. Shear stress, flexural members (F vl·

A. No shear reinforcement,
F,. = 1.0 (j' m)l12, 50 psi maximum ............... (6-7)
EXCEPTION: For a distance of one-sixteenth the clear span beyond the point of
inflection the maximum stress shall be 20 psi.
B. Shear reinforcement designed to take entire shear force,
Fv = 3.0lf'm)l12, 150psimaximum ............... (6-8)
7. Shear stress, shear walls (F vl·

A. Unreinforced masonry,
Clay Units Fv = .3 (J' m)l12, 80 psi maximum ........... (6-9)

MorSMortar N Mortar
Concrete Units 34 psi 23 psi
The allowable shear stress in unreinforced masonry may be increased by 0.2

fmJ• wheref~J is the compressive stress in the masonry due to dead load only.
B. With in-plane flexural reinforcement present, masonry taking all shear, ):!!
M/Vd <I, Fv = l/3 (4- ~) lf'm)ll2, (80-45 ~)psi maximum .... (6-10)
M!Vd ~ I, Fv = 1.0 (j' m)ll2, 35 psi maximum .......... (6-11)
C. Shear reinforcement designed to take all the shear,
M!Vd <I, Fv = l/2 (4- ~) (f'm)ll2, (120-45 ~)psi maximum ... (6-12)
M!Vd~ l,Fv = 1.5lf'm)l12, 75psimaximum .......... (6-13)
8. Bearing stress. A. On full area,
F hr = 0.26J'm ....................... (6-14)
B. On one-third area or less,
Fbr = 0.38J'm ....................... (6-15)
This increase applies only when the least distance between the edges of the
loaded and unloaded areas is a minimum of one fourth of the parallel side
dimension of the loaded area. The allowable bearing stresses on a reasonably
193
concentric area greater than one third but less than the full area shall be interpo-
lated between the values of Formulas (6-14) and (6-15).
(d) Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement (psi). I. Tensile stress.

A. Deformed bars,
F, = 0.5f,., 24,000psimaximum ............... (6-16)
B. Wire reinforcement,
F, = 0.5 J;., 30,000 psi maximum ......................... (6-17)
C. Ties, anchors and smooth bars,
F, = 0.4fy, 20,000 psi maximum ......................... (6-18)
2. Compressive stress. A. Deformed bars in columns,
F," = 0.4fy, 24,000psimaximum ......................... (6-19)

B. Deformed bars in flexural members,
F, = 0.5 f,, 24,000 psi maximum ......................... (6-20)
(e) Combined Compressive Stresses. I. Unity formula. Members subject to

combined axial and flexural stresses shall be designed in accordance with ac-
cepted principles of mechanics or in accordance with the following formula:
_!:,__+!!?.__~I ...................... (6-21)

Fa Fb
(f) Modulus of Elasticity of Materials. 1. Modulus of elasticity of masonry.

The moduli for masonry may be estimated as provided below. Actual values, if
I
required, shall be established by test. The modulus of elasticity of masonry shall
be determined by the secant method in which the slope of the line for the modulus
of elasticity is taken from 0.05 f'm to a point on the curve at 0.33f'm· These values
are not reduced by one half per Section 2406 (c) I .
A. Modulus of elasticity--clay/shale unit masonry.
Em= 750J'm· .............................. . (6-22)
B. Modulus of elasticity--concrete unit masonry.
Em= 750f'm· ............................... (6-23)
194
1988 EDITION 2406
2. Modulus of elasticity-steel.
£ 5 = 29,000,000 psi .......................... (6-24)
(g) Shear Modulus of Masonry.
G = 0.4 Em ................................. (6-25)
(h) Shear and Tension on Embedded Anchor Bolts. I. General. A. Allowa-

ble loads and placement requirements for plate anchor bolts, headed anchor bolts
and bent bar anchor bolts shall be determined in accordance with this section. The
bent bar anchor bolt shall have a hook with a 90-degree bend with an inside
diameter of three bolt diameters, plus an extension of I l/2 bolt diameters at the free
end.
8. The effective embedment length lb for plate or headed anchor bolts shall be
the length of embedment measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry
to the bearing surface of the plate or head of the anchorage, and lb for bent bar
anchors shall be the length of embedment measured perpendicular from the
surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the bent end minus one anchor
bolt diameter. All bolts shall be grouted in place with at least I inch of grout
between the bolt and the masonry.
2. Tension. Allowable loads in tension shall be the lesser value selected from
Tables Nos. 24-D-1 and 24-D-2 or shall be determined from the lesser of Formula
(6-26) or Formula (6-27).
8 1
0.5 AP Vj';;; ........................................ (6-26)
81 0.2 Abfy ........................................... (6-27)
The area AP shall be the lesser of Formula (6-28) or Formula (6-29) and where
the projected areas of adjacent anchor bolts overlap, AP of each anchor bolt shall
be reduced by one half of the overlapping area.
AP 7rlb2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6-28)
Ap 7rlbe2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6-29)
3. Shear. Allowable loads in shear shall be the value selected from Table No.
24-E-1 or shall be determined from the lesser of Formula (6-30) or Formula (6-
31 ).
4
Bv 350 Yf'm Ah ...................................... (6-30)
Bv O.i2Abfy .......................................... (6-31)
Where the anchor bolt edge distance lbe is less than 12 bolt diameters, the value
of Bv shall be reduced by linear interpolation to zero at an the distance of 11/2
inches.
195
1, 4. Combined shear and tension. Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear

'l and tension shall be designed in accordance with Formula (6-32).
]
::~:
=·:::
+ .................... (6-32)
Bv
5. Minimum edge distance. The minimum value of /he measured from the
edge of the masonry parallel with the anchor bolt to the surface of the anchor bolt
shall be ll/2 inches.
6. Minimum embedment depth. The minimum embedment depth shall be
four bolt diameters.
(i) Load Tests. When a load test is required, the member or portion of the
structure under consideration shall be subject to a superimposed load equal to
twice the design live load plus one half of the dead load. This load shall be left in
position for a period of 24 hours before removal. If, during the test or upon
removal of the load, the member or portion of the structure shows evidence of
failure, such changes or modifications as arc necessary to make the structure
adequate for the rated capacity shall be made; or where lawful, a lower rating shall
be established. A flexural member shall be considered to have passed the test if the
maximum deflection D at the end of the 24-hour period neither exceeds
D = __.!::__norD = -----.!2. · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ...... (6-33)

200 4000t
and the beams and slabs show a recovery of at least 75 percent of the observed
deflection within 24 hours after removal of the load.
Ul Reuse of Masonry Units. Masonry units may be reused when clean, whole
and conforming to the other requirements of this section. All structural properties
of masonry of reclaimed units, especially adhesion bond, shall be determined by
approved test. The allowable working stresses shall not exceed 50 percent of that
permitted for new masonry units of the same properties.
Design, General Requirements

Sec. 2407. (a) General. The design of masonry structures shall comply with
the provisions of this section. Plans submitted for approval shall describe the
required design strengths of masonry materials and inspection requirements for
which all parts of the structure were designed and any load test requirements.
(b) Design Assumptions. l. Working stress analysis. The procedure pre-
sented is based on working stresses and linear stress-strain distribution assump-
tions with all stresses in the elastic range as follows:
(i) Plane sections before bending remain plane after bending.
(ii) Stress is proportional to strain.
(iii) Masonry elements combine to form a homogeneous member.
2. Stack bond. In bearing and nonbearing walls, except veneer walls, if less
than 75 percent of the units in any transverse vertical plane lap the ends of the units
196
1988 EDITION 2407
below a distance less than one half the height of the unit, or less than one fourth the
length of the unit, the wall should be considered laid in stack bond.
3. Effective thickness. A. Single-wythe walls. The effective thickness of
single-wythe walls of either solid or hollow units is the specified thickness of the
wall.
B. Multiwythe walls. The effective thickness of multiwythe walls is the
specified thickness of the wall if the space between wythes is filled with mortar or
grout. For walls with an open space between wythes, the effective thickness shall
be determined as for cavity walls.
C. Cavity walls. If both wythes of a cavity wall are axially loaded, each wythe
shall be considered to act independently and the effective thickness of each wythe
is defined in Section 2407 (b) 3 A. If one wythe is axially loaded, the effective
thickness of the cavity wall is taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of
the specified thicknesses of the wythes.
If a cavity wall is composed of a single wythe and a multiwythe, and both sides
are axially loaded, each side of the cavity wall shall be considered to act indepen-
dently and the effective thickness of each side is as defined in Sections 2407 (b)
3 A and 2407 (b) 3 B. If one side is axially loaded, the effective thickness of the
cavity wall is the square root of the sum of the squares of the specified thicknesses
of the sides.
D. Columns. The effective thickness for rectangular columns in the direction
considered is the specified thickness. The effective thickness for nonrectangular
columns is the thickness of the square column with the same moment of inertia
about its axis as that about the axis considered in the actual column.
4. Effective height. The effective height of columns and walls is at least the
clear height of members laterally supported at the top and bottom in a direction
normal to the member axis considered. For members not supported at the top
normal to the axis considered, the effective height is twice the height of the
member above the support. Effective height less than clear height may be used if
justified.
5. Effective area. The effective cross-sectional area shall be based on the
minimum bedded area of hollow units, or the gross area of solid units plus any
grouted area. If hollow units are used with cells perpendicular to the direction of
stress, the effective area shall be the lesser of the minimum bedded area or the
minimum cross-sectional area. If bed joints arc raked, the effective area shall be
correspondingly reduced. Effective areas for cavity walls shall be that of the
loaded wythes.
6. Flexural resistance of cavity walls. For computing the flexural resistance,
lateral loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be distributed to the
wythes according to their respective flexural rigidities.
7. Effective width of intersecting walls. Where a shear wall is anchored to an
intersecting wall or walls, the width of the overhanging flange formed by the
intersected wall on either side of the shear wall, which may be assumed working
with the shear wall for purposes of flexural stiffness calculations, shall not exceed
six times the thickness of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective flange may
197
be waived if justified. Only the effective area of the wall parallel to the shear
forces may be assumed to carry horizontal shear.
(c) Design Loads. I. General. See Chapter 23 for design loads.

A. Distribution of concentrated vertical loads in walls. The length of wall,
laid up in running bond, which may be considered capable of working at the
maximum allowable compressive stress to resist vertical concentrated loads, shall
not exceed the center-to-center distance between such loads, nor the width of
bearing area plus four times the wall thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall
not be assumed distributed across continuous vertical mortar or control joints
unless clements designed to distribute the concentrated vertical loads are em-
ployed.
2. Loads on non bearing walls. Masonry walls used as interior partitions or as
exterior surfaces of a building which do not carry vertical loads imposed by other
elements of the building shall be designed to carry their own weight plus any
superimposed finish and lateral forces. Bonding or anchorage of non bearing walls
shall be adequate to support the walls and to transfer lateral forces to the support-
ing structures.
(d) Support of Masonry. I. Vertical support. Structural members providing

vertical support of masonry shall provide a bearing surface on which the initial
bed joint shall not be less than l/4 inch nor more than I inch and shall be of
noncombustible material, except where masonry is a nonstructural decorative
feature or wearing surface.
2. Vertical deflection. Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that
their vertical deflection will not exceed 1/600 of the clear span under total loads.
Lintels shall bear on supporting masonry on each end such that allowable stresses
in the supporting masonry are not exceeded. The minimum bearing length is 4
inches.
3. Lateral support. Lateral support of masonry may be provided by cross-
walls, columns, pilasters, countcrforts or buttresses when spanning horizontally
or by floors, beams, girts or roofs when spanning vertically.
(c) Structural Continuity. I. General. Intersecting structural elements in-

tended to act as a unit shall be anchored together to resist the design forces.
2. Wall intersecting with floors or roofs. Walls shall be anchored to all floors,
roofs or other elements which provide lateral support for the wall. Where floors or
roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the anchorage to the wall
shall be designed to resist the horizontal force.
3. Masonry elements. A. Multiwythe walls. All wythes shall be bonded by
grout or tied together by corrosion-resistant metal ties or joint reinforcement
conforming to the requirements of Section 2402 and as follows.
(i) Metal ties in cavity wall construction. Metal ties shall be of sufficient
length to engage all wythes. The portion of the tie within the wythe shall be
completely embedded in mortar or grout. The ends of the ties shall be bent to 90-
dcgree angles with an extension not less than 2 inches long. Ties not completely
198
1988 EDITION 2407
embedded in mortar or grout between wythes shall be a single piece of metal with
each end engaged in each wythe.
There shall be at least one 3(16-inch-diamcter metal tic for each 41/2 square feet
of wall area. For cavity walls in which the width of the cavity is greater than 3
inches but not more than 4112 inches, at least one 3/16-inch-diameter tie for each 3
square feet of wall area shall be provided.
Tics in alternate courses shall be staggered; the maximum vertical distance
between tics shall not exceed 24 inches; the maximum horizontal distance be-
tween tics shall not exceed 36 inches.
Additional ties spaced not more than 36 inches apart shall be provided around
and within 12 inches of the opening.
Metal ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent
strength between wythes.
(ii) Metal ties for grouted multi wythe construction. The two wythes shall be
bonded together with at least one 3(16-inch-diameter metal wall tie for each 2
square feet of area. Metal ties of different size and spacing may be used if they
provide equivalent strength between wythes.
(iii) Joint reinforcement. Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry walls
shall have at least one cross wire of at least No. 9 gauge for each 2 square feet of
wall area. The vertical spacing of the joint reinforcement shall not exceed 16
inches. The longitudinal wires shall be thoroughly embedded in the bed joint
mortar. The joint reinforcement shall engage all wythes.
Where the space between metal tied wythes is solidly filled with grout or mortar
the allowable stresses and other provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply.
Where the space is not filled, metal tied walls shall conform to the allowable
stress, lateral support. thickness (excluding cavity), height and metal tie require-
ments for cavity walls.
B. Stack bond. Where masonry units are laid in stack bond, each wythe shall
have longitudinal reinforcement consisting of at least two continuous corrosion-
resistant wires with a minimum cross-sectional area of0.017 square inch each in
the horizontal bed joints spaced not more than 16 inches on center vertically. The
wires shall be located near the opposite faces of the wythes.
(f) Protection of Ties, Bolts and Joint Reinforcement. A minimum of 5/s-

inch mortar cover shall be provided between ties or joint reinforcement and any
exposed face. The thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units and joint
reinforcement or bolts shall be not less than l/4 inch, except that l/4 inch or smaller
diameter reinforcement or bolts may be placed in bed joints which are at least
twice the thickness of the reinforcement.
(g) Pipes and Conduits Embedded in Masonry. Pipe or conduit shall not be
embedded in any masonry so as to reduce the capacity to less than that necessary
for required stability or required fire protection.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Rigid electric conduits may be embedded in structural ma-
sonry when their location has been detailed on the approved plan.
199
2. Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally through any masonry
by means of a sleeve at least large enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipe line.
Such sleeves shall be placed not closer than three diameters, center to center, nor
shall they unduly impair the strength of construction.
3. Placement of pipes or conduits in unfilled cores of hollow unit masonry shall
not be considered as embedment.
(h) Special Provisions in Areas of Seismic Risk. l. General. Masonry

structures constructed in the seismic zones shown in Figure No. 2 of Chapter 23
shall be designed in accordance with the design requirements of this chapter and
the special provisions for each seismic zone given in this section.
2. Special provisions for Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and 1. There are no special
design and construction provisions in this section for structures built in Seismic
Zones Nos. 0 and I.
3. Special provisions for Seismic Zone No.2. Masonry structures in Seismic
Zone No. 2 shall comply with the following special provisions.
A. Materials. The following materials shall not be used as part of the structural
frame: 'TYpe 0 mortar, masonry cement, plastic cement, nonload-bearing ma-
sonry units and glass block.
B. Wall reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement of at least 0.20 square inch in
cross-sectional area shall be provided continuously from support to support at
each corner, at each side of each opening, at the ends of walls and at a maximum
spacing of 4 feet apart, horizontally throughout the wall.
Horizontal reinforcement not less than 0.2 square inch in cross-sectional area
shall be provided: ( l) at the bottom and top of wall openings and shall extend not
less than 24 inches nor less than 40 bar diameters past the opening, (2) continu-
ously at structurally connected roof and floor levels and at the top of walls, (3) at
the bottom of the wall or in the top of the foundations when dowelled to the wall,
(4) at maximum spacing of 10 feet unless uniformly distributed joint reinforce-
ment is provided. Reinforcement at the top and bottom of openings when continu-
ous in the wall may be used in determining the maximum spacing specified in Item
No. (l) above.
C. Stack bond. Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforce-
ment ratio shall be .0007bt. This ratio shall be satisfied by uniformly distributed
joint reinforcement or by horizontal reinforcement spaced not over 4 feet and fully
embedded in grout or mortar.
4. Special provisions for Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. All masonry structures
built in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with requirements for Seismic Zone No. 2 and with the following
additional requirements and limitations.
EXCEPTION: One- and two-story structures of Group R, Division 3 and Group
M Occupancies in Seismic Zone No.3 with h' It not greater than 27 and using running
bond construction may be constructed in accordance with the requirements of
Seismic Zone No. 2.
~ The f'm from Table No. 24-C shall be limited to a maximum of 1500 psi for
200
1988 EDITION 2407
concrete masonry and 2600 psi for clay masonry unless I'm is verified by prism
tests as required in Section 2405 (c) 2.
Reinforced hollow-unit stacked bond construction which is part of the seismic
resisting system shall use open-end units so that all head joints are made solid,
shall use bond-beam units to facilitate the flow of grout and shall be grouted solid.
A. Materials. The following materials shall not be used as part of the structural
frame: 'JYpe N mortar.
8. Wall reinforcement. All walls shall be reinforced with both vertical and
horizontal reinforcement. The sum of the areas of horizontal and vertical rein-
forcement shall be at least 0.002 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall,
and the minimum area of reinforcement in either direction shall not be less than
0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall. The spacing of reinforce-
ment shall not exceed 4 feet. The diameter of reinforcement shall not be less than
3/s inch except that joint reinforcement may be considered as part or all of the
requirement for minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be continuous
around wall corners and through intersections. Only horizontal reinforcement
which is continuous in the wall or element shall be considered in computing the
minimum area of reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforming to
Section 2409 (e) 6 shall be considered as continuous reinforcement.
C. Column reinforcement. The spacing of column ties shall not be more than:
8 inches the full height for columns stressed by tensile or compressive axial
overturning forces due to the seismic loads of Section 2312; 8 inches for the tops
and bottoms of all other columns for a distance of one sixth of the clear column
height, but not less than 18 inches nor the maximum column dimension. Tic
spacing for the remaining column height shall be not more than 16 bar diameters,
48 tie diameters or the least column dimension, but not more than 18 inches.
D. Stack bond. Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforce-
ment ratio shall be .0015bt. If open-end units are used and grouted solid, then the
minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be .0007 bt.
E. Minimum dimension. (i) Bearing walls. The nominal thickness of rein-
forced masonry bearing walls shall not be less than 6 inches except that nominal4-
inch-thick load-bearing reinforced hollow-clay unit masonry walls may be used,
provided net area unit strength exceeds 8000 psi, units arc laid in running bond,
bar sizes do not exceed l/2 inch with no more than two bars or one splice in a cell,
and joints are flush cut, concave or a protruding V section. Minimum bar
coverage where exposed to weather may be 1112 inches.
(ii) Columns. The least nominal dimension of a reinforced masonry column
shall be 12 inches except that if the allowable stresses are reduced to one half the
values given in Section 2406, the minimum nominal dimension shall be 8 inches.
F. Shear walls. (i) Design loads. When calculating shear or diagonal tension
stresses, shear walls which resist seismic forces shall be designed to resist 1.5
times the forces required by Section 2312 (d).
(ii) Reinforcement. The portion of the reinforcement required to resist shear
shall be uniformly distributed and shall be joint reinforcing, deformed bars, or a
combination thereof. The maximum spacing of reinforcement in each direction
201
shall be not less than the smaller of one-half the length or height of the element nor
more than 48 inches.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in the determination
of the shear strength of the member shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance
Reinforcement required to resist in-plane shear shall be terminated with a
standard hook or with an extension of proper embedment length beyond the
reinforcing at the end of the wall section. The hook or extension may be turned up,
down or horizontally. Provisions shall be made not to obstruct grout placement.
Wall reinforcement terminating in columns or beams shall be fully anchored into
these elements.
(iii) Multiwythe grouted masonry shear walls shall be designed with consider-
ation of the adhesion bond strength between the grout and masonry units. When
bond strengths are not known from previous tests, the bond strength shall be
determined by test.
G. Hooks. The term "hook" or "standard hook" as used herein for tie
anchorage in Seismic Zones No. 3 and No. 4 shall mean a minimum turn of 135
degrees plus an extension of at least six bar diameters, but not less than 4 inches at
the free end of the bar.
[ EXCEPTION: Where the ties are placed in the horizontal bed joints, the hook
shall consist of a 90-degree bend having a radius of not less than four tie diameters
plus an extension of 32 tie diameters.
H. Mortar joints between masonry and concrete. Concrete abutting struc-

tural masonry such as at starter courses or at wall intersections not designed as true
separation joints shall be roughened to a full amplitude of '116 inch and shall be
bonded to the masonry per the requirements of this chapter as if it were masonry.
Unless keys or proper reinforcement are provided, vertical joints as per Section
2407 (b) 2 shall be considered to be stack bond and the reinforcement as required
for stack bond shall extend through the joint and be anchored into the concrete.
(i) Empirical Requirements. I. General. These empirical procedures may be
used when approved by the building official.
2. Ratio of height or length to thickness. The ratio of unsupported height to
thickness or the ratio of unsupported length to thickness (one or the other but not
both) for solid masonry walls or bearing partitions shall not exceed 20, and shall
not exceed 18 for walls of hollow masonry or cavity walls. In computing the ratio
for cavity walls, the value of thickness shall be the sum ofthe nominal thicknesses
of the inner and outer widths of the masonry. In walls composed of different kinds
or classes of units or mortars, the ratio of height or length to thickness shall not
exceed that allowed for the weakest of the combination of units and mortars of
which the member is composed.
~ 3. Minimum thickness. The minimum thickness of bearing walls of unrein-
J forced masonry shall be 12 inches for the uppermost 35 feet of their height, and
shall be increased 4 inches in thickness for each successive 35 feet or fraction
thereof measured downward from the top of the wall.
202
EXCEPTIONS: I. The thickness of unreinforced grouted brick masonry walls
may be 2 inches less than required by this subsection, but in no case less than 6
inches.
2. In buildings not more than three stories or 35 feet in height, masonry walls may
be of 8-inch nominal thickness. Solid masonry walls in one-story buildings may be
of 6-inch nominal thickness when not over 9 feet in height, provided that when gable
construction is used an additional6 feet are permitted to the peak of the gable.
When a change in thickness due to minimum thickness requirements occurs
between floor levels, the greater thickness shall be carried to the higher floor
level.
4. Stresses. The stress in unreinforced bearing walls, or portions thereof, shall
not exceed the values set forth in Table No. 24-H. Bolt values shall not exceed
those set forth in Table No. 24-J.
5. Glass masonry. A. General. Masonry of glass blocks may be used in
nonload-bearing exterior or interior walls and in openings which might otherwise
be filled with windows, either isolated or in continuous bands, provided the glass
block panels have a minimum thickness of 3 inches at the mortar joint and the
mortared surfaces of the blocks are treated for mortar bonding.
B. Mortar joints. Glass block shall be laid in TYpe N mortar. Both vertical and
horizontal mortar joints shall be at least If4 inch and not more than 3fs inch thick
and shall be completely filled.
C. Horizontal forces. The panels shall be restrained laterally to resist the
horizontal forces specified in Chapter 23 for bearing walls.
D. Reinforcing. Glass block panels shall have reinforcement in the horizontal
mortar joint, extending from end to end of mortar joints, but not across expansion
joints, with joints spliced by lapping the reinforcement not less than 6 inches. The
reinforcement shall be placed in the joint immediately below and above any
openings within a panel. The reinforcement shall consist of not less than two
parallel longitudinal, galvanized steel wires, No. 9 gauge or larger, spaced 2
inches apart, and having welded thereto No. 9 or heavier gauge cross wires at
intervals not exceeding 8 inches.
E. Size of panels. Glass block panels for exterior walls shall not exceed 144
square feet of unsupported wall surface nor 15 feet in any dimension. For interior
walls, glass block panels shall not exceed 250 square feet of unsupported area nor
25 feet in any dimension.
F. Expansion joints. Exterior glass block shall be provided with 112-inch
expansion joints at the sides and top. Expansion joints shall be entirely free of
mortar and shall be filled with resilient material.
6. Unburned clay masonry. A. General. Masonry of stabilized unburned
clay units shall not be used in any building more than one story in height. The
unsupported height of every wall of unburned clay units shall be not more than ten
times the thickness of such walls. Bearing walls shall in no case be less than 16
inches. All footing walls which support masonry of unburned clay units shall
extend to an elevation not less than 6 inches above the adjacent ground at all
points.
203
B. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No. 24-1.
7. Stone masonry. A. General. Stone masonry is that form of construction
made with natural or cast stone in which the units are laid and set in mortar with all
joints filled.
B. Construction. In ashlar masonry, bond stones uniformly distributed shall
be provided to the extent of not less than I0 percent of the area of exposed facets.
Rubble stone masonry 24 inches or less in thickness shall have bond stones with a
maximum spacing of 3 feet vertically and 3 feet horizontally and, if the masonry is
of greater thickness than 24 inches, shall have one bond stone for each 6 square
feet of wall surface on both sides.
C. Minimum thickness. The thickness of stone masonry bearing walls shall
not be less than 16 inches.
Design, Unreinforced Masonry

Sec. 2408. (a) General. The requirements of this section are in addition to the
requirements of Section 2407 and govern masonry in which reinforcement is not
used to resist design forces.
(b) Compression in Walls and Columns. I. Axial loads in walls. Stresses due
to compressive forces applied at the centroid of a wall may be computed assuming
uniform distribution over the effective area .
.t;, =PIA" ................................. .(8-1)

2. Axial loads in columns. Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the
centroid may be computed assuming uniform distribution over the effective area,
Formula (8-1).
3. Bending or combined bending and axial loads. A. Compressive stresses.
Compressive stresses due to combined bending and axial load shall satisfy the
requirements of Section 2406 (c).
B. Tensile stresses. Resultant teilsilc stress due to combined bending and axial
load shall not exceed the allowable flexural tensile stress, F,.
(c) Flexural Design. Stresses due to flexure shall not exceed the values given in
Section 2406 (c), where:
.fh =Mel/ ................................. . (8-2)
(d) Shear in Flexural Members and Shear Walls. I. Shear. The following
formula shall be the basis of shear calculations:
f., = VIAe ............ ...................... (8-3)
(e) Corbels. The slope of corbelling (angle measured from the horizontal to the
face of the corbelled surface) of unreinforced masonry shall not be less than 60
degrees.
204
1988 EDITION 2408-2409
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the plane of the wall
shall be such that allowable stresses are not exceeded.
Design, Reinforced Masonry
Sec. 2409. (a) General. I. Scope. The requirements of this section arc in
addition to the requirements of Section 2407 and govern masonry in which
reinforcement is used to resist forces. The use of plain bars larger than '14 inch in
diameter is not permitted.
2. Design assumption. The following assumptions are in addition to those
stated in Section 2407 (b) I:
A. Masonry carries no tensile stress.
B. Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to masonry mate-
rial so that they work together as a homogenous material within the range of
working stresses.
(b) Compression in Walls and Columns. I. Walls, axial loads. Stresses due
to compressive forces applied at the centroid of the member may be computed
assuming uniform distribution over the effective area.
j~ = PIAe ......................... (9-1)
2. Walls, bending or combined bending and axial loads. Stresses due to

combined bending and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2406
(c) where fa is given by Formula (9-1). Walls subjected to bending with or without
axial loads shall meet all applicable requirements for flexural design.
The design of walls with an h 'It ratio larger than 30 shall be based on forces and
moments determined from analysis of the structure. Such analysis shall take into
account influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member
stiffness and fixed-end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces and
the effects of duration of loads.
3. Columns, axial loads. Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the
centroid of the member may be computed assuming uniform distribution over the
effective area.
A. The allowable actual load Pa shall be given by Formula (6-4).
B. The allowable axial stress is given by:
Fa=~ ......................... (9-2)

Ae
4. Columns, bending or combined bending and axial loads. Stresses due to

combined bending and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2406
(c) where f) F" is replaced by PIP a· Columns subjected to bending shall meet all
applicable requirements for flexural design.
5. Reinforcement for columns. A. Vertical reinforcement. The area of
vertical reinforcement shall be not less than .005 Ae and not more than 0.04 A ... At
least four No. 3 bars shall be provided.
205
B. Lateral ties. All longitudinal bars for columns shall be enclosed by lateral
ties. Lateral support shall be provided to the longitudinal bars by the corner of a
complete tie having an included angle of not more than 135 degrees or by a hook at
the end of a tie. The corner bars shall have such support provided by a complete tie
enclosing the longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal bars shall have such lateral
support provided by ties and no bar shall be farther than 6 inches from such
laterally supported bar.
Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shall be placed not less than ll/2 inches and
not more than 5 inches from the surface of the column. Lateral ties may be against
the longitudinal bars or placed in the horizontal bed joints if the requirements of
Section 2407 (f) are met. Spacing of ties shall be not more than 161ongitudinal bar
diameters, 48 tie diameters or the least dimension of the column but not more than
18 inches.
Ties shall be at least l/4 inch in diameter for No. 7 or smaller longitudinal bars
and No. 3 for larger longitudinal bars. Ties less than 3/s inch in diameter may be
used for longitudinal bars larger than No. 7, provided the total cross-sectional area
of such smaller ties crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger ties at
their required spacing.
C. Anchor bolt ties. Additional ties shall be provided around anchor bolts
which are set in the top of the column. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or,
alternately, at least four vertical column bars or a combination of bolts and bars
totaling four in number. Such ties shall be located within the top 5 inches of the
column and shall provide a total of 0.4 square inch or more in cross-sectional area.
The uppermost tie shall be within 2 inches of the top of the column.
(c) Flexural Design. I. Rectangular flexural elements. Rectangular flexural

elements shall be designed in accordance with the following equations or other
methods based on the assumptions given in Sections 2407 (b) and 2409 (a).
A. Compressive stress in the masonry:
fb = b~ ( j~ ) ..................... (9-3)
B. Tensile stress in the longitudinal reinforcement:

M
fs = AJd · · · · · · · · · · · · · ... · ........ (9-4)
C. Design coefficients:
112
k = [(np)2 + 2np] - np .................. (9-5)
or,
k = ----=----,--- ....................... (9-6)
l + fs
nfb
206
1988 EDITION 2409
j=l-~ ......................... (9-7)
2. Nonrectangular flexural elements. Flexural elements of nonrectangular

cross section shall be designed in accordance with the assumptions given in
Sections 2407 (b) and 2409 (a).
3. Lateral support. The clear distance between lateral support of a beam shall
not exceed 32 times the least width of the compression area.
4. Effective width (b) of compression area. In computing flexural stresses in
walls where reinforcement occurs, the effective width assumed for running bond
masonry shall not exceed six times the nominal wall thickness nor the center-to-
center distance between reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective
width shall not exceed three times the nominal wall thickness nor the center-to-
center distance between reinforcement or the length of one unit, unless grouted
solid using open ended joints.
5. Bond of flexural reinforcement. In flexural members in which tensile
reinforcement is parallel to the compressive face, the bond stress shall be com-
puted by the formula:
u -- 'iojd
v ......................... (9- 8)
(d) Shear in Flexural Members and Shear Walls. I. The shear stress in
flexural members and shear walls shall be computed by:
fv -
- v
bjd · · · • · · · · ................. (9-9)
For members ofT or I section, b' shall be substituted for b. Where fv as

computed by Formula (9-9) exceeds the allowable shear stress in masonry, F,..
web reinforcement shall be provided and designed to carry the total shear force.
Both vertical and horizontal shear stresses shall be considered.
2. The area required for shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to the
longitudinal reinforcement shall be computed by:
Av = ;~ ......................... (9-10)
Where web reinforcement is required, it shall be so spaced that every 45-degree

line (representing a potential diagonal crack) extending from a point at d/2 of the
beam to the longitudinal tension bars shall be crossed by at least one line of web
reinforcement.
(e) Reinforcing Requirements and Details. I. Maximum reinforcing size.
The maximum size of reinforcing shall be No. II. Maximum steel area in cells
shall be 6 percent of the cell area without splices and 12 percent of the cell area
with splices.
207
2. Spacing of longitudinal reinforcement. The clear distance between paral-

lel bars, except in columns, shall be not less than the nominal diameter of the bars
nor I inch, except that bars in a splice may be in contact. This clear distance
requirement applies to the clear distance between a contact splice and adjacent
splices or bars. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars in columns
shall be two and one-half times the bar diameter.
The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry
unit shall be not less than l/4 inch for fine grout and l/2 inch for coarse grout. Cross
webs of hollow units may be used as support for horizontal reinforcement.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in
mortar or grout and have a minimum cover, including the masonry unit, of at least
3/4 inch, 1112 inches of cover when exposed to weather and 2 inches of cover when
exposed to soil.
3. Anchorage of flexural reinforcement. A. The tension or compression in

any bar at any section must be developed on each side of that section by the
required development length. The development length of the bar may be achieved
by a combination of an embedment length, anchorage or, for tension only, hooks.
The required development length for deformed bars or deformed wire shall be
calculated by:
ld = 0.002 dbf, for bars in tension ............... (9-11)
ld = 0.0015dJ:,forbarsincompression ............. (9-12)
Development length for smooth bars shall be 2.0 times the length by Formula
(9-11 ).
B. Except at supports or at the free end of cantilevers, every reinforcing bar
shall be extended beyond the point at which it is no longer needed to resist tensile
stress for a distance equal to 12 bar diameters or the depth of the beam, whichever
is greater. No flexural bar shall be terminated in a tensile zone unless one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
(i) The shear is not over one-half that permitted, including allowance for
shear reinforcement, if any.
(ii) Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that required is provided each
way from the cutoff a distance equal to the depth of the beam. The shear
reinforcement spacing shall not exceed d!8rb, where rb is the ratio of the
area of bars cut off to the total area of bars at the section.
(iii) The continuing bars provide double the area required for flexure at that
point or double the perimeter required for reinforcing bond.
C. At least one third of the total reinforcement provided for negative moment at
the support shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflec-
tion a distance sufficient to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar, not less
than one sixteenth of the clear span, nor the depth d of the member, whichever is
greater.
208
1988 EDITION 2409
D. Tensile reinforcement for negative moment in any span of a continuous

restrained or cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid frame, shall be
adequately anchored by reinforcing bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or
through the supporting member.
E. At least one third of the required positive moment reinforcement in simple
beams or at the freely supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the
same face of the beam into the support at least 6 inches. At least one fourth of the
required positive moment reinforcement at the continuous end of continuous
beams shall extend along the same face of the beam into the support at least 6
inches.
F. Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be anchored by ties or
stirrups not less than 1/4 inch in diameter, spaced not farther apart than 16 bar
diameters or 48 tie diameters. Such ties or stirrups shall be used throughout the
distance where compression steel is required.
G. In regions of moment where the design tensile stresses in the steel are greater
than 80 percent of the allowable steel tensile stress (Fs), the lap length of splices
shall be increased not less than 50 percent of the minimum required length. Other
equivalent means of stress transfer to accomplish the same 50 percent increase
may be used.
4. Anchorage of shear reinforcement. A. Single separate bars used as shear

reinforcement shall be anchored at each end by one of the following methods:
(i) Hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement through 180 de-
grees.
(ii) Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam on the compres-
sion side a distance sufficient to develop the stress in the bar for plain or
deformed bars.
(iii) By a standard hook [see Section 2409 (e) 5] considered as developing
7500 psi, plus embedment sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress
to which the bar is subjected. The effective embedded length shall not be
assumed to exceed the distance between the mid-depth of the beam and the
tangent of the hook.
B. The ends of bars forming a single U or multiple U stirrup shall be anchored
by one of the methods of Section 2409 (e) 4 A or shall be bent through an angle of
at least 90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not less m
diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project beyond the bend at least 12
diameters of the stirrup.
C. The loops or closed ends of simple U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored
by bending around the longitudinal reinforcement through an angle of at least 90
degrees and project beyond the end of the bend at least 12 diameters of the stirrup
bar.
5. Hooks. A. The term "standard hook" shall mean one of the following:
(i) A 180-degree turn plus extension of at least 4 bar diameters but not less
than 2112 inches at free end of bar.
209
(ii) A 90-degree turn plus extension of at least 12 bar diameters at free end of
bar.
(iii) For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90-degree or a 135-degree turn,
plus an extension of at least 6 bar diameters, but not less than 2112 inches at
the free end of the bar.
B. The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, other than for
stirrups and ties, shall be not less than values specified in Table No. 24-F. Except
for Grade 40 bars in sizes No. 3 through No. II, inclusive, the minimum diameter
of bend shall be not less than 5 bar diameters.
C. Inside diameter of bend for No. 4 or smaller stirrups and ties shall be not less
than 4 bar diameters. Inside diameter of bend for No. 5 or larger stirrups and ties
shall be not less than given in Table No. 24-F.
D. Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of any beam, except at
the ends of simple or cantilever beams or at the freely supported end of continuous
or restrained beams.
E. Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which would produce a tensile
stress in the bar greater than 7500 psi.
F. Hooks shall not be considered effective in adding to the compressive
resistance of bars.
G. Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength of the bar without
damage to the masonry may be used in lieu of a hook. Data must be presented to
show the adequacy of such devices.
6. Splices. The amount of lap of lapped splices shall be sufficient to transfer the
allowable stress of the reinforcement as in Section 2409 (e) 3. In no case shall the
length of the lapped splice be less than 30 bar diameters for compression and 40
bar diameters for tension.
Welded or mechanical connections shall develop 125 percent of the specified
yield strength of the bar in tension.
EXCEPTION: For compression bars in columns that are not part of the seismic
system and are not subject to flexure, the compressive strength only need be
developed.
When adjacent splices in grouted masonry are from 0 to 3 inches apart, the lap
length shall be increased by 1.3 times.
Design, Composite Construction

Sec. 2410. (a) General. I. The requirements of this section are in addition to
the requirements of Section 2407, 2408 or 2409 and govern masonry in which at
least one wythe has strength or composition characteristics different from the
other wythe or wythes and are adequately bonded to act as a single structural
element.
2. The following assumptions are in addition to those stated in Section 2407 (b):
A. Analysis shall be based on elastic transformed section of the net area.
B. The maximum computed stress in any portion of composite masonry shall
not exceed the allowable stress for the material of that portion.
210
1988 EDITION 2410-2411
(b) Determination of Moduli of Elasticity. The modulus of elasticity of each

type of masonry in composite construction shall be measured by test if the
modular ratio exceeds 2 to I as determined by Section 2406. When tests are
required, the secant method with a 5 percent offset shall be used.
(c) Structural Continuity. I. Bonding of wythes. All wythes of composite
masonry elements shall be tied together as in Section 2407 (e) 3 A as a minimum
requirement. Additional ties or the combination of grout and metal ties shall be
used to transfer the calculated stress.
2. Material properties. A. The effect of dimensional changes of the various
materials and different boundary conditions of various wythes shall be included in
the design.
(d) Design Procedure. One material is chosen as the reference material, and
the other materials are transformed to an equivalent area of the reference material
by multiplying the area of the second material by the ratio of the modulus of
elasticity of the second material to that of the reference material.
Thickness of the transformed area and its distance perpendicular to a given
bending axis remain unchanged.
Effective height or length of the element remains unchanged.
Design, Reinforced Masonry Slender Wall

Sec. 2411. (a) General. In lieu ofthe procedure prescribed in Section 2409, the
procedures set forth in this section, which considers the slenderness of walls by
representing effects of axial forces and deflection in calculation of moments, may
be used when the vertical load stress at the location of maximum moment does not
exceed 0.04f mas computed by the following formula:
Pw+Po,;;0.04J'm ..................... (11-1)

Ag
WHERE:
P0 load from tributary floor or roof area.
P w = weight of the wall tributary to section under consideration.
f' m = specified compressive masonry stress as determined by Section 2406 (b).
The value off' m shall not exceed 6000 psi.
A8 = gross area of wall.
(b) Slender Wall Design Procedure. I . Maximum and minimum reinforce-

ment. The reinforcement shall not exceed the following ratios, p 8 , ofreinforce-
ment area to gross masonry area:
=
!y 40 ksi =
!y 60ksi
Concrete Block Masonry 0.0048 0.0032
Hollow Brick Masonry and
Two-wythe Brick Masonry 0.0060 0.0040
Minimum reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Section 2407 (h)
4 B for all seismic areas when using this method of analysis.
211
2. Moment and deflection calculations. All moment and deflection calcula-

tions in Section 2411 (b) are based on simple support conditions top and bottom.
Other support and fixity conditions, moments and deflections shall be calculated
using established principles of mechanics.
3. Strength design. A. Load factors. Factored loads shall be based on:
U = 1.4D + 1.7L. or .................................. (11-2)
U = 0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.87 £),or ..................... ( 11-3)
U = 0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7W), or ...................... (11-4)
U = 0.9D + 1.43£, or .................................. (11-5)
U = 0.9D + 1.3W ..................................... (11-6)
WHERE:
D = dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
E = load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces.
L = live loads, or related internal moments and forces.
U = required strength to resist factored loads, or related internal moments and
forces.
W = wind load, or related internal moments and forces.
B. Required moment. Required moment and axial force shall be determined

at the midheight of the wall and shall be used for design. The moment strength,
M,. shall be at least equal to:
Mu = -
w,h2
- + Pou-
e
+ (P wu + •
pou) l..l.u • · · · · · · · · · · · ·
(II 7)
-
8 2
WHERE:
wu factored distributed lateral load.
h height of the wall between points of support.
P wu factored weight of the wall tributary to the section under consideration.
,l, horizontal deflection at midheight under factored load; P,l effects shall
be included in deflection calculation.
P0 , factored load from tributary floor or roof loads.
e = eccentricity of Pou·
Pu axial load at midheight of wall, including tributary wall weight.
pu = pwu + pou· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11-8)
C. Design strength. Design strength provided by the reinforced masonry wall

cross section in terms of axial force and moment shall be computed as the nominal
strength (see Section 2602, Definitions) multiplied by a strength reduction factor,
cf>, as set forth in Formula ( 11-9).
Mu""" ¢Mn- ....................... . (11-9)
212
WHERE:
M 11 = nominal moment strength found for cross sections subjected to com-
bined flexure and given axial load.
M 11 = A,.Jv (d - a/2)
II
+ pu , effective area of steel.
I
Ase A,.fv
f~
a - pu + A,.f~ , depth of stress block due to factored loads.
0.8~l'm b
The strength reduction factor for flexure, ¢, shall be as follows:

Special Inspection
Yes No
Concrete Block and Hollow Brick
(Designated 6-inch thickness or greater)
and two-wythe brick masonry 0.8 0.5
Hollow Brick Masonry
(Designated 5-inch or less thickness) 0.6* 0.4*
*EXCEPTION:</> = 0.8 for special inspection and <P = 0.5 for noncontinuous
inspection when vertical reinforcing bars are held in position at the top, bottom and
at intervals not farther apart than 200 bar diameters. )!!~
D. Design assumptions for nominal strength, Nominal strength of singly

reinforced masonry wall cross sections to combined flexure and axial load shall be
based on applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains. Strain
in reinforcement and masonry walls shall be assumed directly proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis.
Maximum usable strain at extreme masonry compression fiber shall be as-
sumed equal to 0.003.
Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strengthfv for grade ofreinforce-
ment used shall be taken as E, times steel strain. For strains greater than that
corresponding to~·· stress in reinforcement shall be considered independent of
strain and equal to fv.
Tensile strength of masonry walls shall be neglected in flexural calculations of
strength, except when computing requirements for deflection.
Relationship between masonry compressive stress and masonry strain may be
assumed to be rectangular as defined by the following:
(i) Masonry stress of0.85f' 111 shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a
straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = 0.85 c
from the fiber of maximum compressive strain.
(ii) Distance c from fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be
measured in a direction perpendicular to that axis.
213
4. Deflection design. The midheight deflection, .ls, under service lateral and
vertical loads (without load factors) shall be limited by the relation
.ls = 0.007h ........................ (11-10)

EXCEPTION: For hoJiow brick masonry designated 5 inches or Jess in thick-
ness where vertical reinforcement bars are not held in position at the top, bottom and
at intervals not farther apart than 200 bar diameters, use
.ls = 0.005h ....................... (11-11)
The midheight deflection shall be computed with the following formula:
2
5 Msh (forMs< Mer) ................... (11-12)
48E,j8
WHERE:
.. /
h height ofthe wall.
Ms = service moment at the midheight of the panel, including P.l effects .
,/cr = gross, cracked moment of inertia of the wall cross section.
8
Ma cracking moment strength of the masonry wall.
M n = nominal moment strength of the masonry wall.
The cracking moment strength of the wall shall be determined from the
formula:
Mer = Sfr .... ..................... (11-14)
WHERE:
S = section modulus.
fr = modulus of rupture shall be assumed as follows for calculating deflec-
tion:
fr psi
Concrete Masonry Units 2.5VJ':: psi
Hollow Brick Units 2.5VJ':: psi
Two-wythe Brick Walls z.ovr:; psi
214
1988 EDITION 2412
Strength Design, Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall

Sec. 2412. (a) Notations.
A11 net cross-sectional area perpendicular to axial load, square inches.
Am•· net area of masonry section bounded by wall thickness and length of
section in the direction of shear force considered, square inches.
A, area of tension reinforcement, square inches.
a, length of compressive stress block, inches.
h effective width of wall, inches.
C" masonry shear strength coefficient as obtained from Table No. 24-L.
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension reinforce-
ment, inches.
D dead loads or related internal moments and forces.
E load effects of earthquake or related internal moments and forces.
E, modulus of elasticity of steel, 29,000,000 psi.
maximum useable compressive strain of masonry.
F loads due to weight and pressure of fluids or related moments and forces.
F, allowable stress in reinforcement, psi.
.f, computed stress in reinforcement, psi .
f', specified compressive strength of masonry at the age of 28 days, psi .
.t; specified yield strength of reinforcement, psi.
H loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in soil or related internal
moments and forces.
L live loads or related internal moments and forces.
length of wall.
nominal balanced design axial strength.
nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
nominal axial strength without bending loads.
P, required axial strength.
T = time dependent factor for sustained load.
U = required strength to resist factored loads, or related internal moments and
forces.
V 11nominal shear strength.
V, nominal shear strength provided by masonry.
V, nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement.
W = wind load or related internal moments and forces.
p11 ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to plane
of Amv·
cfJ strength reduction factor.
215
(b) General. The procedures set forth in this section, based on strength design
may be used as an alternative to the procedure prescribed in Section 2409 for the
design of reinforced hollow-unit concrete and clay masonry shear walls.
(c) Quality Control Provisions. Special inspection during construction of the
shear wall shall be provided as set forth in Section 306.
I'm shall be verified in accordance with Section 2406 (b) 2 or 3.
(d) Shear Wall Design Procedure. I. Required strength. The required
strength shall be determined as follows:
A. For earthquake loading, the load factors shall be:
U 1.4(D+L+E) .................... (12-1)
u 0.9D ± 1.4£ .................... (12-2)
B. Required strength U to resist dead load D and live load L shall be at least
equal to:
U = lAD + i.7L .................... (12-3)
C. If resistance to structural effects of a specified wind load W arc included in
design. the following combinations of D, Land W shall be investigated to
determine the greatest required strength U.
U = 0.75(1.4D + i.7L + 1.7W) ............. (12-4)
where load combinations shall include both full value and zero value of L to
determine the more severe condition, and
U = 0.9D + 1.3W .................... (12-5)
but for any combination of D, Land W. required strength U shall be not less
than Formula ( 12-3).
D. If resistance to earth pressure His included in design, required strength U

shall be at least equal to
U = lAD + 1.7L + i.7H ................ ( 12-6)
except that where D or L reduces the effect of H, 0. 9D shall be substituted

for I .4D and zero value of L shall be used to determine the greatest required
strength U. For any combination of D. Land H, required strength U shall be
not less than Formula ( 12-3).
E. If resistance to loadings due to weight and pressure of fluids with well-
defined densities and controllable maximum heights F is included in
design. such loading shall have a load factor of 1.4 and be added to all
loading combinations that include live load.
F. lfresistance to impact effects is taken into account in design, such effects
shall be included with live load. L.
G. Where structural effects T of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage or
216
1988 EDITION 2412
temperature change may be significant in design, required strength U shall

be at least equal to
U = 0.75 (1.4D + l.4T + 1.7L) .............. (12-7)
but required strength U shall be not less than
u = 1.4 <D + n ..................... o2-s)
2. Design strength. Design strength provided by the shear wall cross section
in terms of axial force, shear and moment shall be computed as the nominal
strength multiplied by the strength reduction factor Q>.
Shear walls shall be proportioned such that the design strength exceeds the
required strength.
Strength reduction factor <I> shall be as follows:
A. Axial load and axial load with flexure fjJ = 0.65
For members in which fy does not exceed 60,000 psi, with symmetrical
reinforcement, fjJ may be increased linearly to 0.85 as f/JP n decreases from
O.!Of'mAn or 0.25 Pb to zero.
For solid grouted walls Pb may be calculated by Formula ( 12-9)
Pb = 0.85f'mbab ..................... (12-9)
where
ab = 0.85 [emuf(emu+J;!Es)]d ................ (12-10)
B. Shear fjJ = 0.60
The shear-strength reduction factor may be 0. 80 for any shear wall when its
nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to development of
its nominal flexural strength for the factored-load combination.
3. Design assumptions for nominal strength. Nominal strength of shear wall
cross sections shall be based on assumptions prescribed in Section 2411 (b) 3D.
The maximum usable strain, emu• at the extreme masonry compression fiber
shall not exceed 0.003.
f'm shall not be less than I ,500 psi nor greater than 4,000 psi.
4. Reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following:
A. Minimum reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Section
2407 (h) 4 B for all seismic areas using this method of analysis.
B. When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the nominal flexural
strength of the shear wall shall be at least three times the cracking moment
strength of the wall from Formula ( 11-14).
C. All continuous reinforcement shall be anchored or spliced in accordance
with Sections 2409 (e) I, 2, 3 A (with/, = O.~fy), 3 B, 3D, 3 F and 3 G
(with F, = fy).
D. The minimum amount of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than one-
half the horizontal reinforcement.
217
E. Maximum spacing of horizontal reinforcement within the region defined in

Section 2412 (d) 6 C (i) shall not exceed three times nominal wall thickness
or 24 inches, whichever is less.
5. Axial strength. The nominal axial strength of the shear wall supporting
axial loads only shall be calculated by Formula (12-11).
P 0 = 0.85f'm(A 11 - A 5 ) + .f,.A 5 ............. (12-11)

Axial design strength provided by the shear wall cross section shall satisfy
Formula ( 12-12).
I
Pu ~ 4J (0.80) P0 ..................... (12-12)
6. Shear strength. Shear strength shall be as follows:
A. The nominal shear strength shall be determined using either Section 2412
~
(d) 6 B or C. Table No. 24-K gives the maximum nominal shear strength
values.
B. The nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be determined from
Formula ( 12-13). except as provided in Section 2412 (d) 6 C.
VII = vm + v, ..................... (12-13)
where
CdAmv if'm)l/2 .................... (12-14)
and
V, = Amv p,J,. ...................... (12-15)
C. For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corres-
ponding to development of its nominal flexural strength two shear regions
exist.
(i) For all cross sections within the region defined by the base of the shear
wall and a plane at a distance Lw above the base of the shear wall the
nominal shear strength shall be determined from Formula (12-16).
VII = AmvPJ~ ...................... (12-16)
The required shear strength for this region shall be calculated at a

distance Lj2 above the base of the shear wall but not to exceed one-
I half story height.

(ii) For the other region the nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall
be determined from Formula (12-13).
7. Boundary member. Boundary members shall be as follows:
I
A. The need for boundary members at boundaries of the shear wall shall be
determined using either Section 2412 (d) 7 B or C.
B. Boundary members shall be provided when the failure mode is flexure and
when the maximum extreme fiber stress, corresponding to factored forces,
1 exceeds 0.2 f'm· The boundary member may be discontinued where the
218
1988 EDITION 2412, 24-A
calculated compressive stress is less than 0.15 f'm· Stresses may be calcu-
lated for the factored forces using a linearly elastic model and gross-section
properties.
C. Boundary members shall be provided to confine all vertical reinforcement
whose corresponding masonry compressive stress, corresponding to fac-
tored forces, exceeds 0.4 f'm when the failure mode is flexure.
D. The minimum length of the boundary member shall be three times the
thickness of the wall.
E. Boundary members shall be confined with a minimum of No. 3 bars at a
maximum of 8-inch spacing or equivalent within the grouted core and
within the region defined by the base of the shear wall and a plane at a
distance Lw above the base of the shear wall.
TABLE NO. 24-A-MORTAR PROPORTIONS FOR UNIT MASONRY

PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME
(CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS)
AGGREGATE
PORTLAND HYDRATED MEASURED
CEMENT OR LIME OR INA DAMP,
MASONRY CEMENT2 LOOSE
BLENDED LIME
MORTAR TYPE CEMENT1 M s N PUTTY1 CONDITION
Cement-lime M I - - - 'I•
s I - - - over 'I• to 1l2
N I - - - over 12 to 1'1• Not less than
1
0 I - - - over 111• to 211• and not

2 112 more than 3
times the sum
Masonry
of the
cement M I - - I -
separate
M - I - - -
volumes of
s '12 - - I -
cementitious
s - - 1 - -
materials.
N - - - 1 -
0 - - - I -
'When plastic cement is used in lieu of portland cement, hydrated lime or putty may be
added, but not in excess of one tenth of the volume of cement.
2Masonry cement conforming to the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 24-16.
219
24-B, 24-C UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24-B-GROUT PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME 1

PARTS BY
VOLUME PARTS BY
OF PORT· VOLUME
LAND OF
CEMENT HYDRATED
OR LIME OR
BLENDED LIME AGGREGATE MEASURED IN A DAMP, LOOSE CONDITION
TYPE CEMENT PUTTY Fine Coarse
Fine 1 0 to lfw 2 1/4 to 3 times the sum of
grout the volumes of the
cementitious materials
Coarse 1 0 to lfw 2 1/4 to 3 times the sum of 1 to 2 times the sum of
grout the volumes of the the volumes of the
cementitious materials cementitious materials
Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 2,000 psi. The building
1
official may require a compressive field strength test of grout made in accordance with the
..
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-22 .
TABLE NO. 24-C-SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY, f',

(psl)2 BASED ON SPECIFYING THE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF
MASONRY UNITS
Compressive Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, f 'm
Strength of Clay TypeM orS TypeN
Masonry Unital Mortar3 Mortara
(psi) (pal) (psi)
14,000 or more 5,300 4,400

12,000 4,700 3,800
10,000 4,000 3,300
8,000 3,350 2,700
6,000 2,700 2,200
4,000 2,000 1,600
Compressive Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, f'm
Strength of Concrete TypeMorS TypeN
Masonry Unlta4 Mortar3 Mortar3
(pal) (psi) (psi)
4,800 or more 3,000 2,800

3,750 2,500 2,350
2,800 2,000 1,850
1,900 1,500 I ,350
1,250 1,000 950
Compressive strength of solid clay masonry units is based on gross area. Compressive
1
strength of hollow clay masonry units is based on minimum net area. Values may be
interpolated.
(Continued)
220
1988 EDITION 24-C,24-D-1,24-D-2
2Assumed assemblage. The specified compressive strength of masonry/'.., is based on gross

area strength when using solid units or solid grouted masonry and net area strength when
using ungrouted hollow units.
'Mortar for unit masonry, proportion specification, as specified in Table No. 24-A. These
values apply to portland cement-lime mortars without added air-entraining materials.
4 Nct area compressive strength of concrete masonry units is determined in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-7. Values may be interpolated. In grouted concrete masonry the
compressive strength of grout shall be equal to or greater than the compressive strength of
the concrete masonry units.
TABLE NO. 24-D-1-ALLOWABLE TENSION, B,, ON BENT BAR ANCHOR

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds1 2 3
EMBEDMENT LENGTH, lb, or EDGE DISTANCE, lbe, inches

f'm
(psi) 2 3 4 5 6 8 10
1500 240 550 970 1520 2190 3X90 6080

1800 270 600 1070 1670 2400 4260 6660
2000 280 630 1120 1760 2520 4500 7020
2500 310 710 1260 1960 2H30 5030 7H50
3000 340 770 1380 2150 3100 5510 X600
4000 400 890 1590 2480 3580 6360 9930
5000 440 1000 17HO 2780 4000 7110 11,100
6000 480 1090 1950 3040 4380 7790 12,200
1The allowable tension values in Table No. 24-D-1 are based on compressive strength of
masonry assemblages. Where yield strength of anchor bolt steel governs, the allowable
tension in pounds is given in Table No. 24-D-2.
'Values arc for bolts of at least A 307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Section 2406
(h) I A.
'Values shown arc for work with or without special inspection.
TABLE NO. 24-D-2-ALLOWABLE TENSION, B,, ON BENT BAR ANCHOR

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds 1 2
BENT BAR ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER, inches

3/s
I 1/2
I 5/8 I 3/4
I 7/8
I 1
I 11/8
790 I 1410 I 2210 I 3180 I 4330 I 5650 I 7160

'Values are for bolts of at least A 307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Section 2406
(h) I A
'Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
221
24-E, 24-F UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24-E-ALLOWABLE SHEAR, s., ON BENT BAR ANCHOR BOLTS

FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds 1 2
BENT BAR ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER, Inches
f'm
(pal) 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 11/8
1500 480 850 1330 1780 1920 2050 2170

1800 480 850 1330 1860 2010 2150 2280
2000 480 850 1330 1900 2060 2200 2340
2500 480 850 1330 1900 2180 2330 2470
3000 480 850 1330 1900 2280 2440 2590
4000 480 850 1330 1900 2450 2620 2780
5000 480 850 1330 1900 2590 2770 2940
6000 480 850 1330 1900 2600 2900 3080
lit Values are for bolts of at least A 307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Section 2406
1
(h) I A.
~: 2Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
TABLE NO. 24-F--MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND

BAR SIZE MINIMUM DIAMETER
No. 3 through No. 8 6 bar diameters
No. 9 through No. II 8 bar diameters
222
1988 EDITION 24-G
TABLE NO. 24-G-GROUTING LIMITATIONS

GROUTPOUR2 LEAST CLEAR DIMENSIONS1
MAXIMUM Width of Grout Cell
HEIGHT Spaces Dimensions& CLEANOUTS
GROUT TYPE (Feet) (ln.)3 (ln. x ln.) REQUIRED4
Fine I '14 Jll2 X 2 No

Fine 5 Jll2 l 1/2 X 2 No
Fine 8 Jll2 Jll2 X 3 Yes
Fine 12 1112 Pi• X 3 Yes
Fine 24 2 3 X 3 Yes
Coarse I 1 112 11/o X 3 No
Coarse 5 2 2 112 X 3 No
Coarse 8 2 3 X 3 Yes
Coarse 12 2 112 3 X 3 Yes
Coarse 24 3 3 X 4 Yes
'The clear dimension is the cell or grout space width less mortar projection;.
2For grout pours over 5 feet high, see Section 2404 (f) I.
'Grout space width shall be increased by the horizontal projection of the diameters of the
horizontal bars within the cross section of the grout space.
4Cleanouts may be omitted if approved provisions are made to keep the grout space clean
prior to grouting.
'For grout spaces in grouted multi wythe masonry.
•For grout cells in grouted hollow unit masonry.
223
24-H UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24-H-ALLOWABLE WORKING STRESSES IN

UNREINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
TYPE TYPE TYPEMOR
M s TYPES MORTAR TYPEN
Com- Com- Shear or Com- Shear or
pres- pres- Tension In Tension In pres- Tension In
MATERIAL slon1 slon1 Flexure23 Flexure4 slon1 Flexure23
I. Special
inspection No No Yes No Yes No No Yes No
required
2. Solid brick
masonry
4500 plus psi 250 225 20 10 40 20 200 IS 7.5
2500-4500 psi 175 160 20 10 40 20 140 IS 7.5
1500-2500 psi 125 115 20 10 40 20 100 IS 7.5
3. Solid concrete
unit masonry
GradeN 175 160 12 6 24 12 140 12 6
GradeS 125 liS 12 6 24 12 100 12 6
4. Grouted masonry
4500 plus psi 350 275 25 12.5 50 25
2500-4500 psi 275 215 25 12.5 50 25
1500-2500 psi 225 175 25 12.5 50 25
5. Hollow unit
masonry 5 170 150 12 6 24 12 140 10 5
6. Cavity wall
masonry solid
units 5
GradeN or
2500 psi plus 140 130 12 6 30 15 110 10 5
GradeS or
1500-2500 psi 100 90 12 6 30 15 80 10 5
Hollow units5 70 60 12 6 30 15 50 10 5
7. Stone masonry
Cast stone 400 360 8 4 ·- - 320 8 4
Natural stone 140 120 8 4 - - 100 8 4
8. Unburned clay
masonry 30 30 8 4 - - - - -
1Allowable axial or flexural compressive stresses in pounds per square inch gross cross-
sectional area (except as noted). The allowable working stresses in bearing directly under
concentrated loads may be 50 percent greater than these values.
2This value of tension is based on tension across a bed joint, i.e., vertically in the normal
masonry work.
'No tension allowed in stack bond across head joints.
4 Thc values shown here are for tension in masonry in the direction of running bond, i.e.,
horizontally between supports.

'Net area in contact with mortar or net cross-sectional area.
224
1988 EDITION 24-1, 24-J, 24-K
TABLE NO. 24-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS FOR

MASONRY OF UNBURNED CLAY UNITS
DIAMETER OF BOLTS EMBEDMENTS SHEAR
(Inches) (Inches) (Pounds)
'12 - -
'I• 12 200
314 15 300
71• 18 400
I 21 500
I' I• 24 600
TABLE NO. 24-J-ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS

FOR EMPIRICALLY DESIGNED MASONRY
EXCEPT UNBURNED CLAY UNITS
DIAMETER SOLID GROUTED
BOLT EMBEDMENT1 MASONRY MASONRY
(lnchss) (Inches) (Shear In Pounds) (Shear In Pounds)
'12 4 350 550

'I• 4 500 750
314 5 750 1100
71• 6 1000 1500
I 7 1250 18502
l'lx 8 1500 2250 2
1An additional2 inches of embedment shall be provided for anchor bolts located in the top of
columns for buildings located in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4.
'Permitted only with not less than 2500 pounds per square inch units.
TABLE NO. 24-K

MAXIMUM NOMINAL SHEAR STRENGTH VALUES
MNdl
,;0.25 6.0
;.J.OO 4.0
M is the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load Vat the
1
section under consideration. Interpolation may be by straight line for MIVd values
between 0. 25 and I. 00.
225
24-L UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24-L

NOMINAL SHEAR STRENGTH COEFFICIENT
M!Vdt
""0.25 2.4
~1.00 1.2
1Mis the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load Vat the
section under consideration. Interpolation may be by straight line for M!Vd values
between 0.25 and 1.00.
226
1988 EDITION 2501-2502
Chapter 25
WOOD
General
Sec. 2501. (a) Quality and Design. The quality and design of wood members
and their fastenings shall conform to the provisions of this chapter and to the
applicable standards listed in Chapter 60.
(b) Workmanship. All members shall be framed, anchored, tied and braced so
as to develop the strength and rigidity necessary for the purposes for which they
are used.
(c) Fabrication. Preparation, fabrication and installation of wood members
and their fastenings shall conform to accepted engineering practices and to the
requirements of this code.
(d) Rejection. The building official may deny permission for the use of a wood
member where permissible grade characteristics or defects are present in such a
combination that they affect the serviceability of the member.
(e) Minimum Quality. Minimum capacity of structural framing members may
be established by performance tests. When tests are not made, capacity shall be
based upon allowable stresses and design criteria specified in this code.
Studs, joists, rafters, foundation plates or sills, planking 2 inches or more in
depth, beams, stringers, posts, structural sheathing and similar load-bearing
members shall be of at least the minimum grades set forth in Table No. 25-A-1 or
No. 25-A-2. Approved end-jointed lumber may be used interchangeably with
solid-sawn members of the same species and grade. Such use shall include, but not
be limited to, light framing joists, planks and decking.
Plywood shall be of species Group I, 2, 3 or 4 and shall be one of the grades
specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9.
Particleboard shall conform to U .B.C. Standard No. 25-25.
Approved fire-retardant-treated wood shall be dried, following treatment, to a
maximum moisture content as follows: solid-sawn lumber 2 inches in thickness or
less to 19 percent, and plywood to 15 percent.
(f) Shrinkage. Consideration shall be given in the design to the possible effect
of cross-grain dimensional changes considered vertically which may occur in
lumber fabricated in a green condition.
Definitions and Symbols

Sec. 2502. (a) Definitions. The following terms used in this chapter shall have
the meanings indicated in this section:
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGM is a diaphragm in which all sheathing edges not
occurring on framing members are supported on and connected to blocking. II
DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system acting to transmit
lateral forces to the vertical resisting elements. When the term "diaphragm" is
used, it includes horizontal bracing systems.
227
I
FIBERBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel made from lignocellu-

losic fibers (usually wood or cane) and having a density of less than 31 pounds per
cubic foot but more than I 0 pounds per cubic foot, conforming to U. B. C.
Standard No. 25-24.
GLUED BUILT-UP MEMBERS arc structural clements, the sections of
which arc composed of built-up lumber, plywood or plywood in combination with
lumber, all parts bonded together with adhesives.
GRADE (Lumber), the classification of lumber in regard to strength and
utility in accordance with the grading rules of an approved lumber grading agency.
HARDBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel made from ligno-
cellulosic fibers consolidated under heat and pressure in a hot press to a density
not less than 31 pounds per cubic foot conforming to U .B.C. Standard No. 25-26.
NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber), the commercial size designation of width and
depth, in standard sawn lumber and glued-laminated lumber grades; somewhat
larger than the standard net size of dressed lumber, in accordance with U .B.C.
Standard No. 25-1 for sawn lumber and U .B.C. Standard No. 25-10 for structural
glued-laminated timber.
NORMAL LOADING, a design load that stresses a member or fastening to
the full allowable stress tabulated in this chapter. This loading may be applied for
approximately 10 years, either continuously or cumulatively, and 90 percent of
this load may be applied for the remainder of the life of the member or fastening.
PARTICLEBOARD is a mat-formed panel consisting of particles of wood or
combinations of wood particles and wood fibers bonded together with synthetic
resins or other suitable bonding system by a bonding process in accordance with
PLYWOOD, a built-up panel of laminated veneers conforming to U.B.C.
Standard No. 25-9.
[:l ROTATION is the torsional movement of a diaphragm about a vertical axis.
STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER, any member compris-
ing an assembly of laminations of lumber in which the grain of all laminations is
approximately parallel longitudinally, in which the laminations are bonded with
adhesives, and which is fabricated in accordance with U.B.C. Standards No. 25-
10 and No. 25-1 I .
~m~ SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a larger diaphragm designed to anchor and
transfer local forces to primary diaphragm struts and the main diaphragm.
TREATED WOOD, wood treated with an approved preservative under the
treating and quality control requirements specified in U.B.C. Standard No.
25-12.
WOOD OF NATURAL RESISTANCE TO DECAY, the heartwood of bald
cypress, black locust, black walnut, the cedars and redwood.
(b) Symbols. The symbols used in this chapter have the following definitions:
A area of cross section.
h = breadth (width) of rectangular member.
228
1988 EDITION 2502
coefficient, constant or factor.

curvature factor.
size effect factor.
form factor.
slenderness factor.
c = distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber.
D diameter.
d depth of rectangular member, or least dimension of compression mem-
ber.
E modulus of elasticity.
e = eccentricity.
Fb allowable unit stress for extreme fiber in bending.
F 'b allowable unit stress for extreme fiber in bending, adjusted for slender-
ness.
fb actual unit stress for extreme fiber in bending.
F,. allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain.
F',. allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain adjusted for leld
ratio where dis the least dimension.
J;. actual unit stress in compression parallel to grain.
Fc1_ allowable unit stress in compression perpendicular to grain.
F 'c
j_ critical compression-perpendicular-to-grain value.
J;., actual unit stress in compression perpendicular to grain.
Fn allowable unit stress acting perpendicular to the inclined surface, psi
(Hankinson's Formula).
Fr allowable unit radial stress.
j~ actual unit radial stress.
Frc allowable unit radial stress in compression.
frc actual unit radial stress in compression.
Frt allowable unit radial stress in tension.
frt actual unit radial stress in tension.
F1 allowable unit stress in tension parallel to grain.
J; actual unit stress in tension parallel to grain.
Fv allowable unit horizontal shear stress.
fv actual unit horizontal shear stress.
h rise.
I moment of inertia.
L span length of beam, or unsupported length of column, feet.
l span length of beam, or unsupported length of column, inch.
le effective span length of bending member or effective length of com-
pression member, inches.
229
M = bending moment.
m = unit bending moment.
N = acting perpendicular to the inclined surface "lb" (Hankinson's For-
mula).
P total concentrated load, or axial compression load.
PIA induced axial load per unit of cross-sectional area.
Q statical moment of an area about the neutral axis.
R radius of curvature.
R 11 = horizontal reaction.
R v = vertical reaction.
r = radius of gyration.
S = section modulus.
T = total axial tension load.
t = thickness.
V = shear force.
W = total uniform load.
w = uniform load per unit of length .
.:lA = allowable deformation or deflection .
.:la = actual deformation or deflection.
0 = angle between the direction of load and the direction of grain, degrees
(Hankinson's Formula).
Size of Structural Members

Sec. 2503. Sizes of lumber and structural glued-laminated timber referred to in
this code are nominal sizes. Computations to determine the required sizes of
members shall be based on the net dimensions (actual sizes) and not the nominal
sizes.
Stresses
Sec. 2504. (a) General. Except as hereinafter provided, stresses shall not
exceed the allowable unit stresses for the respective species and grades or fabri-
cated products as set forth in Tables No. 25-A-1 and No. 25-A-2 for lumber, and
Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D for structural glued-laminated timber.
The values for Fb and Fe tabulated in Table No. 25-A-1 for visually stress-rated
lumber and in Table No. 25-A-2 for machine, stress-rated lumber are for the
design of structures when the strength of an individual member is premised on the
assumption that each individual piece carries its design load.
The repetitive member design values for F b tabulated in Table No. 25-A-1 and
Table No. 25-A-2 may be used for the design of an assembly of repetitive framing
such as joists, rafters and studs not over 4 inches in thickness spaced not more than
24 inches, not less than three in number and joined by transverse load-distributing
elements adequate to support the design load.
230
1988 EDITION 2504
Values for species and grades not tabulated shall be approved by the building
official.
Values for plywood shall be in accordance with Table No. 25-B. All plywood
when designed to be exposed in outdoor applications shall be of the exterior type,
except as provided in Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 7.
(b) Wood Poles or Piles. The values tabulated in Table No. 25-E shall be used
for the design of round timber poles and piles.
Poles and piles shall conform to the requirements set forth in U. B.C. Standards
No. 25-13 and No. 25-14.
(c) Adjustment of Stresses. I. General. The allowable unit stresses specified
in this chapter shall be subject to the adjustments set forth in the footnotes to the
appropriate stress tables and to the requirements of this subsection.
2. Preservative treatment. The values for wood pressure impregnated with
an approved process and preservative need no adjustment for treatment but are
subject to other adjustments.
3. Fire-retardant treatment. The values of lumber pressure impregnated
with approved fire-retardant chemicals shall be reduced to 90 percent for horizon-
tal shear, compression perpendicular to grain, compression parallel to grain and
modulus of elasticity; 85 percent for extreme fiber in bending; and 80 percent for
tension parallel to grain. The values for plywood so treated shall be reduced to 84
percent except for modulus of elasticity, which shall be reduced to 90 percent.
Other adjustments are applicable except that the impact load duration factor shall
not apply.
The values for fasteners specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 shall be
reduced to 90 percent, except that values for light metal plate connectors shall be
recommended by each truss plate manufacturer and approved by the building
official.
Values for glue-laminated timber, including fastener designer loads, shall be
recommended by the treater and approved by the building official.
In addition to the requirements specified in Section 407, fire-retardant lumber
having structural applications shall be tested and identified by an approved
inspection agency in accordance with U. B. C. Standard No. 25-29.
4. Duration of load. Values for wood and mechanical fastenings (when the
wood determines the load capacity) are subject to the following adjustments for
the various durations of loading:
(i) Where a member is fully stressed to the maximum allowable stress, either
continuously or cumulatively, for more than 10 years under the conditions of
maximum design load, the values shall not exceed 90 percent of those in the
tables.
(ii) When the duration of the full maximum load during the life of the member
does not exceed the period indicated below, the values may be increased in the
tables as follows:
15 percent for two months' duration, as for snow
25 percent for seven days· duration, as for roof loads
231
33'13 percent for wind or earthquake

100 percent for impact
The foregoing increases are not cumulative. For combined duration of loadings
the resultant structural members shall not be smaller than required for the longer
duration of loading.
The duration of load factors in this item shall not apply to compression-
perpendicular-to-grain design values based on a deformation limit, or to modulus
of elasticity.
(iii) Values for normal loading conditions may be used without regard to impact
if the stress induced by impact does not exceed the values for normal loading.
5. Size factor adjustment. When the depth of a rectangular sawn bending

member exceeds 12 inches, the allowable unit stress in bending Fb shall be
multiplied by the size factor CF as determined by the formula:
CF = (12/d)l/9
WHERE:
CF = size factor.
d = depth of beam in inches.
For beams of circular cross section that have a diameter greater than 13.5
inches, or 12-inch or larger square beams loaded in the plane of the diagonal. the
size factor CF may be determined on the basis of an equivalent conventionally
loaded square beam of the same cross-sectional area.
Size factor adjustments are cumulative with form factor adjustments specified
in Section 2504 (c) 7, except for lumber I beams and box beams, but are not
cumulative with slenderness factor adjustments specified in Section 2504 (c) 6.
Size factor adjustments for glued-laminated members shall be in accordance with
Section 2511 (d) 5. The size factor adjustment shall not apply to visually graded
lumber 2 inches to 4 inches thick or to machine-stress-rated lumber.
6. Slenderness factor adjustments for beams. When the depth of a beam
exceeds its breadth, lateral support may be required and the slenderness factor Cs
shall be calculated by the following formula:
i(Ted
cs = VTz--
in which
Cs = slenderness factor.
le = effective length of beam, inches, from the following table.
d = depth of beam, inches.
b = breadth of beam, inches.
232
1988 EDITION 2504
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF BEAMS

VALUE OF
EFFECTIVE
TYPE OF BEAM SPAN AND NATURE OF LOAD LENGTH,/e
Single-span beam, load concentrated at center 1.611.

Single-span beam, uniformly distributed load I. 921.
Single-span beam, equal end moments 1.841.
Cantilever beam, load concentrated at unsupported end 1.691.
Cantilever beam, uniformly distributed load 1.061.
Cantilever beam, uniformly distributed load with concentrated load at
cantilvever end 1.691.
Single-span or cantilever beam, any other load I. 921.
1. = unsupported length of beam, inches.
The effective lengths, le, in the table are based on an luld ratio of 17. For other
luld ratios, these effective lengths may be multiplied by a factor equal to 0.85 +
2.55/(luld) except that this factor shall not apply to a single-span beam with equal
end moments (le = I . 84 U or to a single span or cantilever beam with any load (le
= 1.92 u.
When the slenderness factor C5 does not exceed 10, the full allowable unit
stress in bending Fb may be used.
When the slenderness factor C5 is greater than 10 but does not exceed Ck, the
allowable unit stress in bending F 1 b shall be determined from the following
formula:
in which
ck .8II VE/Fb
E = modulus of elasticity.
When the slenderness factor Cs is greater than Ck but less than 50, the allowable
1
unit stress in bending F b shall be determined by the following formula:
0.438£
Fib=
(Cs)2
In no case shall C 5 exceed 50.

The design values for extreme fiber in bending, F b• and modulus of elasticity,
E, used in the formulas for F 1 b shall be modified to account for moisture service
condition, duration of loading, temperature and type of treatment in accordance
with Section 2504 (c) except that the modification for size factor shown in Section
2504 (c) 5 shall not be taken. Design values for extreme fiber in bending adjusted
for slenderness factor, F 1 b• are not subject to further modifications for moisture
service condition, duration of loading, temperature, type of treatment or size.
233
The design value for extreme fiber in bending, F 'b• shall not exceed the full
design value for extreme fiber in bending, F b• modified as allowed in this section,
including the size factor adjustment.
When the compression edge of a beam is supported throughout its length to
prevent its lateral displacement, and the ends at points of bearing have lateral
support to prevent rotation, the unsupported length lu may be taken as zero.
When lateral support is provided to prevent rotation at the points of end bearing
but no other lateral support is provided throughout the length of the beam, the
unsupported length lu is the distance between such points of end bearing, or the
length of cantilever.
When a beam is provided with lateral support to prevent rotational and lateral
displacement at intermediate points as well as at the ends, the unsupported length
/" is the distance between such points of intermediate lateral support.
7. Form factor adjustments. The allowable unit stress in bending for non-
prismatic members shall not exceed the value established by multiplying such
stress by the form factor C1 determined as follows:
Beam Section Form Factor (C1)

Circular 1.180
Square (with
diagonal vertical) 1.414
Lumber I Beams
and Box Beams 0.81 [' + ( d2 + 143 -
d2 + 88
')ex]
WHERE:
cf = form factor.
CK support factor = p2 (6- 8p + 3p2)(1 - q) + q.
p ratio of depth of compression flange to full depth of beam.
q ratio of thickness of web or webs to the full width of beam.
The form factor adjustment shall be cumulative with the size factor adjustment,
except for lumber I beams and box beams.
8. Modulus of elasticity adjustment. The use of average modulus of elastic-

ity E values are appropriate for the design of normal wood structural members and
assemblies. In special applications where deflections are critical to the stability of
structures or structural components, and where exposed to varying temperature
and relative humidity under sustained loading conditions, the average values of
the modulus of elasticity E listed in Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2, 25-C-1, 25-C-2,
25-D and 25-E shall be reduced to account for variability. Coefficients of variation
Cv in the modulus of elasticity E for lumber and glued-laminated timber are as
follows:
234
1988 EDITION 2504-2506
Visually graded sawn lumber 0.25

Machine stress-rated sawn lumber 0.11
Glued-laminated timber 0.10*
• Applies to six or more laminations.
The average modulus of elasticity E values listed in the tables shall be multi-
plied by 1 - Cv or I - 1.65 Cv to obtain a modulus of elasticity E value exceeded
by 84 percent or 95 percent individual pieces, respectively.
The duration-of-load adjustments specified in Item No. 4 do not apply to
modulus of elasticity values.
9. Thmperature. The allowable unit stresses specified in this chapter and as
modified in this section apply to uses within the range of climatic temperature
ordinarily encountered in buildings. When manufacturing or equipment proc-
esses subject members to prolonged temperatures above this range, but not
exceeding 150°F., the allowable design stresses shall be decreased by the appro-
priate reduction factors specified in U. B.C. Standard No. 25-27. Wood members
shall not be used in areas subject to temperatures above 150°F. unless the exposure
is infrequent and any permanent loss in strength is accounted for in the design.
10. Moisture service conditions. Where sawn lumber and fastenings are
exposed to service conditions causing the wood to possess more than 19 percent
moisture content, the tabulated design values shall be reduced as specified in
Table No. 25-A-1, Footnotes 6 and 7. Where glued-laminated timber exceeds 16
percent moisture content, the tabulated design values shall be reduced as specified
in Table No. 25-C-1, Footnote 2.
11. Bolted joints. Adjustments for bolt values used in conjunction with metal
side plates shall be in accordance with U. B.C. Standard No. 25-17 and Section
25.1715 (d).
Identification
Sec. 2505. All lumber, plywood, particleboard, structural glued-laminated
timber, end-jointed lumber, fiberboard sheathing (when used structurally), hard-
board siding (when used structurally), piles and poles regulated by this chapter
shall conform to the applicable standards or grading rules specified in this code
and shall be so identified by the grade mark or a Certificate of Inspection issued by
an approved agency.
All preservatively treated wood required to be treated under Section 2516 (c)
shall be identified by the quality mark of an approved inspection agency in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-12, Division II.
Horizontal Member Design

Sec. 2506. (a) Beam Span. For simple beams, the span shall be taken as the
distance from face to face of supports, plus one half the required length of bearing
at each end; for continuous beams, the span is the distance between centers of
bearings on supports over which the beam is continuous.
235
(b) Flexure. I . Circular cross section. A beam of circular cross section may
be assumed to have the same strength in flexure as a square beam having the same
cross-sectional area. If a circular beam is tapered, it shall be considered a beam of
variable cross section.
2. Notching. If possible, notching of beams should be avoided. Notches in
sawn lumber bending members shall not exceed one sixth the depth of the member
and shall not be located in the middle third of the span. Where members arc
notched at the ends, the notch depth shall not exceed one fourth the beam depth.
The tension side of sawn lumber bending members of 4 inches or greater nominal
thickness shall not be notched except at ends of members. Cantilevered portions
of beams less than 4 inches in nominal thickness shall not be notched unless the
reduced section properties and lumber defects are considered in the design. For
effects of notch on shear strength, see Section 2506 (d).
3. Lateral moment distribution. Lateral moment distribution of a concen-
trated load from a critically loaded beam to adjacent parallel beams shall be
calculated.
(c) Horizontal Shear. The maximum horizontal shear stress in a solid-sawn or

glued-laminated wood beam shall not exceed that calculated by means of the
formula:
3V
fv = 2bd
The actual unit shear stress J;, shall not exceed the allowable for the species and
grade as given in Table No. 25-A for solid-sawn lumber and in Tables No. 25-C
and No. 25-D for glued-laminated lumber, adjusted for duration of loading, as
provided in Section 2504 (c) 4.
When calculating the shear force, V, distribution of load to adjacent parallel
beams by flooring or other members may be considered, and all loads within a
distance from either support equal to the depth of the beam may be neglected for
beams supported by full bearing on one surface and loads applied to the opposite
surface.
(d) Horizontal Shear in Notched Beams. Where girders, beams or joists are
notched at points of support on the tension side, they shall meet the design
requirements of that section in bending and in shear. The shear at such point shall
not exceed the value calculated by the following formula:
v=(
2bd' F,.
3
)( ):
WHERE:
d' actual depth of beam at the notch.
d total depth of beam.
236
Where girders, beams or joists are notched at points of support on the compres-
sion side, they shall meet design requirements for that net section in bending and
in shear. The shear at such point shall not exceed the value calculated by the
following formula:
2
v F,b
3
WHERE:
d' actual depth of beam at notch.
d total depth of beam.
e - distance the notch extends inside the inner edge of support.
The shear for the notch on the compression side shall be further limited to the
value determined for a beam of depth d' if e exceeds d.
(e) Design of Joints in Shear. Eccentric connector and bolted joints and beams
supported by connectors or bolts shall be designed so that f.. in the following
formula does not exceed the allowable unit stresses in horizontal shear.
f = 3V
I' 2bd,.
WHERE:
d,. (with connectors the depth of the member less the distance from the
unloaded edge of member to the nearest edge of the nearest connector.
d,. (with bolts only) = the depth of the member less the distance from the
unloaded edge of the member to the center of the nearest bolt.
Allowable unit stresses in shear for joints involving bolts or connectors loaded
perpendicular to grain may be 50 percent greater than the horizontal shear values
as set forth in Tables Nos. 25-A, 25-C and 25-D, provided that the joint occurs at
least five times the depth of the member from its end. Where joints occur within
five times the depth of the member from its end, the strength of the joint shall be
evaluated not only for the bolt or connector load but also as a notched beam,
considering the notch to extend from the unloaded edge of the member to the
center of the nearest bolt or the nearest edge of the nearest connector.
(f) Compression Perpendicular to Grain. In applications where deformation

is critical, the following equation shall be used to calculate the compression-
perpendicular-to-grain design values:
WHERE:
Fe,' Critical compression-perpendicular-to-grain value.
Fe 1 = Compression-perpendicular-to-grain values from Table No. 25-A-1.
237
The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not
apply to compression-perpendicular-to-grain values for sawn lumber.
The allowable unit stresses for compression perpendicular to grain in Tables
No. 25-A, No. 25-C and No. 25-D apply to bearings of any length at the ends of
the beam and to all bearings 6 inches or more in length at any other location.
For bearings of Jess than 6 inches in length and not nearer than 3 inches to the
end of a member, the maximum allowable load per square inch may be obtained by
multiplying the allowable unit stresses in compression perpendicular to grain by
the following factor:
in which lb is the length of bearing in inches measured along the grain of the wood.
The multiplying factors for indicated lengths of bearing on such small areas as
plates and washers may be:
LENGTH OF
BEARING 60R
(In Inches) 1/2 1 1112 2 3 4 MORE
Factor 1.75 1.38 1.25 1.19 1.13 1.10 1.00
In using the preceding formula and table for round washers or bearing areas,
use a length equal to the diameter.
In joists supported on a ribbon or ledger board and spiked to the studding, the
allowable stress in compression perpendicular to grain may be increased 50
percent.
(g) Tension Perpendicular to Grain. Where designs that induce tension
stresses perpendicular to grain cannot be avoided, mechanical reinforcement
sufficient to resist such forces shall be specified.
(h) Lateral Support. Solid-sawn rectangular lumber beams, rafters and joists
shall be supported laterally to prevent rotation or lateral displacement in accord-
ance with the following:
If the ratio of depth to thickness, based on nominal dimensions, is:
I. 1\vo to I, no lateral support is required.
2. Three to I or 4 to I, the ends shall be held in position, as by full-depth solid
blocking, bridging, nailing or bolting to other framing members, approved
hangers or other acceptable means.
3. Five to I, one edge shall be held in line for its entire length.
4. Six to I, bridging, full-depth solid blocking or cross bracing shall be
installed at intervals not exceeding 8 feet unless both edges are held in line.
5. Seven to I, both edges shall be held in line for their entire length.
If a beam is subject to both flexure and compression parallel to grain, the ratio
may be as much as 5 to l if one edge is held firmly in line. If under any
238
1988 EDITION 2506-2507
combination of load the unbraced edge of the member is in tension, the ratio may
be 6 to I.
In lieu of providing lateral support by the methods specified in Items Nos. 2
through 5 above, the allowable stresses shall be reduced by the slenderness factor
set forth in Section 2504 (c) 6.
(i) Lateral Support of Arches, Compression Chords of Trusses and Studs.

Where roof joists or purlins are used between arches or compression chords, the
largest value of le/d, calculated using the depth of the arch or compression chord
or calculated using the breadth (least dimension) of the arch or compression chord
between points of intermittent lateral support, shall be used. The roof joists or
purlins shall be placed to account for shrinkage (for example, by placing the upper
edges of unseasoned joists approximately 5 percent of the joist depth above the
tops of the arch or chord) but also placed low enough to provide adequate lateral
support.
Where roof joists or purlins are placed on top of an arch or compression chord
and are securely fastened to the arch or compression chord, the largest value of
leld, calculated using the depth of the arch or compression chord or calculated
using the breadth (least dimension) of the arch or compression chord between
points of intermittent lateral support, shall be used.
Where planks are placed on top of an arch or compression chord and securely
fastened to the arch or compression chord, or when sheathing is nailed properly to
the top chord of trussed rafters, the depth rather than the breadth of the arch,
compression chord or trussed rafter may be used as the least dimension in
determining le!d. Where stud walls in light frame construction are adequately
sheathed on at least one side, the depth rather than breadth of the stud, may be
taken as the least dimension in calculating the le!d ratio. The sheathing shall be
shown by experience to provide lateral support and shall be fastened in accord-
ance with Table No. 25-Q.
Column Design
Sec. 2507. (a) Column Classifications. I. Simple solid wood columns.
Simple columns consist of a single piece or of pieces properly glued together to
form a single member.
2. Spaced columns, connector joined. Spaced columns are formed of two or
more individual members with their longitudinal axes parallel, separated at the
ends and middle points of their length by blocking and joined at the ends by timber
connectors capable of developing the required shear resistance. See U.B.C.
StandardNo. 25-15fordesign.
3. Built-up columns. Built-up columns, other than connector-joined spaced
columns and glued-laminated columns, shall not be designed as solid columns.
(b) Limitation on lid Ratios. For simple solid columns, le!d shall not exceed
50.
For individual members of a spaced column, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-15.
239
(c) Simple Solid-column Design. The effective column length, le, shall be
used in design formulas given in this section. The effective column length, le,
shall be determined in accordance with good engineering practice. Actual column
lengths, /, may be multiplied by the factors given in the following table to
determine effective column length, le.
I
Ill
'
~·,.
I
I
I
.•. I
/
'
I
I
~,.
\
I
I
I I
I
I
I
p .~J.I
I
I
Buckling modes I
I I 1 I I
I I
I I I I
'I I
I
I
I I
'I ' I
I I
I
'
1,• \ . ;,r.
~.·
I
1,•
I
~.-
Design buckling lactor, K.
When ideal condrtions 0.65 0.80 1.2 1.0 2.10 2.4
approximated.
~ Rotation fixed, translation fixed
'
End condition code Rotation free, translation fixed
• ?
Rotation fixed, translation free
Rotation free, translation free
Allowable unit stresses in pounds per square inch of cross-sectional area of

square or rectangular simple solid columns shall be determined by the following
formulas, but such unit stresses shall not exceed values for compression, parallel
to grain Fe in Tables Nos. 25-A, 25-C, 25-D and 25-E adjusted in accordance with
provisions of Section 2504.
Short columns (le!d of II or less):

F'c =Fe
Intermediate columns (le!d greater than 11 but less thanK):
K = 0.671 -~IE
v~
240
1988 EDITION 2507-2508
Long columns (leld of K or greater):

F' = 0.30£
e (leld)2
Where machine stress-unit lumber is used as provided for in Table No. 25-A-2,
stresses may be determined in accordance with the following formula:
Intermediate columns:
K = 0.792 v'Eifi;
Long columns:
F' = 0.418£
e (lefd)2
Adjustments to allowable unit stresses, as provided in Section 2504 or else-

where, shall be applied to values of Fe and E used in these formulas and shall not
be applied to the value ofF' c obtained from the formulas.
The coefficients in the long column design formulas include a I -1.65 C,.
reduction for variability as defined in Section 2504 (c) 8.
Duration of load adjustment from Section 2504 (c) 4 is applied to Fe but not
toE.
(d) Tapered Columns. In determining the d for tapered column design, the
diameter of a round column or the least dimension of a column of rectangular
section, tapered at one or both ends, shall be taken as the sum of the minimum
diameter or least dimension and one-third the difference between the minimum
and maximum diameters or Jesser dimensions.
Flexural and Axial Loading Combined

Sec. 2508. (a) Flexure and Axial Tension. Members subjected to both flexure
and axial tension shall be so proportioned that
.f_ + jj_ does not exceed ONE

F, Fb
and fb - fr does not exceed ONE

F'b
(b) Flexure and Axial Compression. Members subjected to both flexure and
axial compression shall be so proportioned that
J;. + -=-=- does not exceed ONE

-=-=-.:...j,::...b
F'c F'b-Jfc
241
The value of J shall be derived as:

J = le/d- II
K- II
except that J shall not be less than zero nor greater than one (0 .;; J .;; I). The value
of K shall be as specified for intermediate columns in Section 2507 (c).
F'c and K shall be determined in accordance with the provisions in Section
2507 (c), except (I) when checking the design in the plane of bending the
slenderness ratio, leld, in the plane of bending shall be used to calculate F' c andJ,
and (2) when checking the design perpendicular to the plane of bending the
slenderness ratio, le!d, perpendicular to the plane of bending shall be used to
calculate F 'c and J shall be set equal to zero.
(c) Spaced Columns. In the case of spaced columns, this combined stress
formula may be applied only if the bending is in a direction parallel to the greater d
of the individual member.
(d) Truss Compression Chords. Effects of buckling of a 2 by 4 or smaller truss
compression chord having effective buckling lengths of96 inches or less and with
3/M-inch or thicker plywood sheathing nailed to the narrow face of the chord in
accordance with Table No. 25-Q shall be determined from the formula:
Cr = 1 + 2300/e
Eo.os
WHERE:
Cr = buckling stiffness factor.
le effective buckling length used in design of chord for compression
loading.
Eo.os 0.589£ for visually graded lumber.
0.819£ for machine-stress-rated lumber.
E = Modulus of elasticity from tables of allowable unit stresses, psi.
The values of Cr determined from this formula are for wood seasoned to a
moisture content of 19 percent or less at the time the plywood is nailed to the
chord. For wood that is unseasoned or partially seasoned at the time of plywood
attachment, Cr shall be determined from the formula:
Cr = 1 + 1200/e
Eo.os
For chords with an effective buckling length greater than 96 inches, Cr shall be
taken as the value for a chord having an effective length of 96 inches.
The buckling stiffness factor does not apply to short columns or to trusses used
under wet conditions. The allowable unit compressive stress shall be modified by
the buckling stiffness factor when a truss chord is subjected to combined flexure
and compression and the bending moment is in the direction that induces com-
pression stresses in the chord face to which the plywood is attached.
242
1988 EDITION 2508-2510
The buckling stiffness factor CT shall be applied as follows:

Short columns (le!d of 11 or less):
Intermediate columns (leld greater than 11 but less thanK):
K = 0.671 YCT(EIFJ
Long columns (leld of K or greater):

F' = 0.30ECT
r (lefd)2
Compression at Angle to Grain

Sec. 2509. The allowable unit stress in compression at an angle of load to grain
between 0° and 90° shall be computed from the Hankinson Formula as follows:
Timber Connectors and Fasteners

Sec. 2510. (a) General. Timber connectors and fasteners may be used to
transmit forces between wood members and between wood and metal members.
The allowable loads and installation of timber connectors and fasteners shall be in
accordance with the provisions set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. For
connectors and fasteners where the wood is wet at time of fabrication or wet in
service, the allowable loads shall be modified in accordance with U .B.C. Stan-
dard No. 25-17.
Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors and fasteners not
mentioned or fully covered in U. B.C. Standard No. 25-17 may be determined in a
manner approved by the building official.
(b) Bolts. Safe loads in pounds for bolts in shear in seasoned lumber of Douglas
fir-larch and southern pine shall not exceed the values set forth in Table No. 25-F.
(For other species and wet conditions, see U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17 .)
Allowable shear values used to connect a wood member to concrete or masonry
are permitted to be determined as one half the tabulated double shear values for a
wood member twice the thickness of the member attached to the concrete or
masonry. 441
(c) Nails and Spikes. I. Safe lateral strength. A common wire nail driven
perpendicular to grain of the wood, when used to fasten wood members together,
243
shall not be subjected to a greater load causing shear and bending than the safe
lateral strength of the wire nail or spike as set forth in Table No. 25-G.
A wire nail driven parallel to the grain of the wood shall not be subjected to
more than two thirds of the lateral load allowed when driven perpendicular to the
grain. Toenails shall not be subjected to more than five sixths of the lateral load
allowed for nails driven perpendicular to the grain.
2. Safe resistance to withdrawal. A wire nail driven perpendicular to grain of
the wood shall not be subjected to a greater load, tending to cause withdrawal,
than the safe resistance of the nail to withdrawal, as set forth in Table No. 25-H.
Nails driven parallel to grain of the wood shall not be allowed for resisting
withdrawal forces.
3. Spacing and penetration. Common wire nails shall have penetration into
the piece receiving the point as set forth in Table No. 25-G. Nails or spikes for
which the wire gauges or lengths are not set forth in Table No. 25-G shall have a
required penetration of not less than II diameters, and allowable loads may be
interpolated. Design values shall not be increased when the penetration of nails
into the member holding the point is larger than required by this item.
For wood-to-wood joints, the spacing center to center of nails in the direction of
stress shall be not less than the required penetration. Edge or end distances in the
direction of stress shall be not less than one half of the required penetration. All
spacing and edge and end distances shall be such as to avoid splitting of the wood.
Holes for nails, where necessary to prevent splitting, shall be bored of a
diameter smaller than that of the nails.
(d) Drift Bolts or Pins, Wood Screws and Lag Screws. Connections involv-
ing the use of drift bolts or pins, wood screws and lag screws shall be designed in
accordance with the provisions set forth in U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
(c) Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors. Connections depending upon joist
hangers or framing anchors, ties, and other mechanical fastenings not otherwise
covered may be used where approved.
(f) Metal Plate Connectors. The material and workmanship during fabrication
and the design of metal plate connectors employed as joint connectors for light
wood trusses shall conform with the requirements ofU. B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
Each truss manufacturer shall retain an approved agency having no financial
interest in the plant being inspected to make nonscheduled inspections of truss
fabrication and delivery and operations. The inspection shall cover all phases of
truss operation, including lumber storage, handling, cutting, fixtures, presses or
rollers, fabrication, bundling and banding, handling and delivery.
Structural Glued-laminated Timber Design

Sec. 2511. (a) General Provisions. I. Design requirements. Except as
otherwise provided in this section, structural glued-laminated timber members
shall be designed in accordance with the applicable engineering formulas used for
sawn members.
244
1988 EDITION 2511
2. Fastenings. The pertinent provisions and allowable loads for fastenings

given in this chapter shall apply to structural glued-laminated timber members.
3. Allowable unit stresses. The allowable unit stresses for structural glued-
laminated timber shall be in accordance with Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D and
as modified by this section.
(b) Standard Sizes. Standard finished widths of laminated members shall be
as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-10.
Depth of straight and curved members, length of all members and net dimen-
sions shall be specified on the plans.
(c) Specifications. For structural glued-laminated timber, the following shall
be specified on the plans:
Whether for dry or wet conditions of usc.
Species and applicable standard.
Stress requirements.
If the temperature of the timber exceeds 150°F. in service.
(d) Design Stresses. I. Dry conditions of use. Allowable stress values for dry
conditions of use shall be applicable for normal loading when the moisture
content in service is less than 16 percent, as in most covered structures.
2. Wet conditions of use. Allowable stress values for wet conditions of use
shall be applicable for normal loading when the moisture content in service is 16
percent or more, as may occur in exterior and submerged construction.
3. Curvature factor. For the curved portion of members, the allowable unit
stress in bending shall be modified by multiplication by the following curvature
factor:
cc = ,- 20oo(fr
in which
t thickness of lamination in inches.
R = radius of curvature of inside face of lamination in inches, and t!R shall
not exceed 1/Joo for hardwoods and southern pine, or I!J25 for other
softwoods.
No curvature factor shall be applied to stress in the straight portion of an assembly,
regardless of curvature elsewhere.
4. Radial tension or compression. The maximum radial stress induced in a
curved member of constant rectangular cross section by a bending moment is:
. 3M
t = 2Rbd
· r
WHERE:
j~ radial stress in pounds per square inch.
M = bending moment in inch pounds.
245
R = radius of curvature at center line of member in inches.

b = width of cross section in inches.
d = depth of cross section in inches.
For curved bending members having a varying cross section, the maximum radial
stress induced,J,, is given by:
WHERE:
M = bending moment at midspan in inch-pounds.
b = width of cross section, inches.
d = depth of cross section at the apex in inches.
K, = radial stress factor determined from the following relationship:
+ c(...!L)
2
K' =A + B(...!L)
Rm Rm
WHERE:
Rm radius of curvature at the center line of the member at midspan in
inches.
A, Band C = constants as follow:
{3 A 8 c
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(0.0) (0.0) (0.2500) (0.0)
2.5 0.0079 0.1747 0.1284
5.0 0.0174 0.1251 0.1939
7.5 0.0279 0.0937 0.2162
10.0 0.0391 0.0754 0.2119
15.0 0.0629 0.0619 0.1722
20.0 0.0893 0.0608 0.1393
25.0 0.1214 0.0605 0.1238
30.0 0.1649 0.0603 0.1115
and 13 = angle between the upper edge of the member and the horizontal in
degrees.
Values of K, for intermediate values of 13 may be interpolated linearly.
When M is in the direction tending to decrease the curvature (increase the
radius), the stress in tension across the grain <Frrl is limited to:
A. One third the allowable unit stress in horizontal shear of all species for wind
and earthquake loads.
B. Fifteen psi for Douglas fir, larch, hem-fir, western woods and other
softwoods for other types of loading.
246
1988 EDITION 2511
C. One third the allowable unit stress in horizontal shear for southern pine,
redwood and hardwoods for all types of loading.
These values are subject to modification for duration of load. Ifthese values are
exceeded, mechanical reinforcing sufficient to resist all radial tension stresses is
required, but in no case shall the calculated radial tension stress exceed one-third
the allowable unit stress in horizontal shear. When mechanical reinforcing is used,
the maximum moisture content of the laminations at time of manufacture shall not
exceed 12 percent for dry conditions of use.
When M is in the direction tending to increase curvature (decrease the radius),
the radial stress is in compression and shall be limited to the allowable stress in
compression perpendicular to the grain.
When the beam is loaded with a uniform load, Kr may be modified by
multiplying by the reduction factor cr as calculated by the following formula:
de ) 2 ( de ) ( L )
+ E( Rm +F Rm "L;
WHERE:
cr = reduction factor
L = span of beam
L, = length of beam between tangent points.
A,B, ... H
= constants for a given {3 as follows:
{3 A B c D E F G H
2.3° -.142 .418 -2.358 -.053 - - .002 -
9.7° .143 .376 - .541 -.060 - - .003 -
14.9° .406 .293 - .927 -.041 - - .002 -
20.0° .423 .364 -1.022 -.067 - .146 - -
25.2° .540 .360 -1.061 -.070 - .156 - -
29.8° .502 .372 - -.076 -3.712 .138 .004 4.336
and {3 = angle between the upper edge of the member and the horizontal in
degrees. Values of Cr for intermediate values may be interpolated linearly.
247
L
Lr
PITCHED AND TAPERED CURVED BEAM
5. Size factor for beams. When the depth of a rectangular glued-laminated

beam is 12 inches or greater, the allowable unit stress in bending F b shall be
multiplied by the size factor as determined by the formula:
CF = (12/d)l/9
WHERE:
C F = size factor.
d = depth of beam in inches.
The values obtained from this formula are based on a uniformly loaded beam
simply supported with an lid ratio of 21. Tabular values for three conditions of
loading are given as follows:
DEPTH SIZE FACTOR CF

Uniformly Single
Distributed Concentrated Third Point
(d) Load Load Loading
12 1.00 1.08 .97

19 .95 1.02 .92
31 .90 .97 .87
52 .85 .92 .82
90 .80 .86 .77
For intermediate depths, straight line interpolation may be used. For continu-
ous beams or beams cantilevered over a support, determine the size factor
assuming the members to be equivalent to simply supported members with a
248
1988 EDITION 2511·2513
uniformly distributed load, the length of the equivalent span being the actual
distance between supports.
Values as determined above will be sufficiently accurate for most design
situations. For lid ratios other than 21 and other conditions of loading where
greater accuracy may be desired, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-11.
6. Ponding. Roof framing members shall be designed for the deflection
criteria and ponding requirements specified in Sections 2305 (f) and 2307. In no
case shall the roof slope provide a positive vertical displacement less than that
equivalent to I/4 inch per foot of horizontal distance between the level of the drain
and the high point of the roof for drainage. Such slope shall be in addition to the
camber in glued-laminated timbers of one and one-half times the calculated dead
load deflection. The calculation of the required slope shall not include any
vertical displacement created by short taper cuts.
Roofs having insufficient slope for drainage shall be investigated by a rational
analysis to assure stability under ponding conditions, but in no case shall the
deflection of such glued-laminated timbers exceed 112 inch for a 5-pound-per-
square-foot uniform load.
(e) Tapered Faces. Sawn tapered cuts shall not be permitted on the tension
face of any beam. Pitched or curved beams shall be so fabricated that the
laminations are parallel to the tension face. Straight, pitched or curved beams may
have sawn tapered cuts on the compression face.
For other members subject to bending, the slope of tapered faces, measured
from the tangent to the lamination of the section under consideration, shall be not
steeper than I :24 on the tension side.
EXCEPTIONS: I. This requirement shall not apply to arches.
2. Taper may be steeper at sections increased in size beyond design requirements
for architectural projections.
(f) Manufacture and Fabrication. The manufacture and fabrication of struc-
tural glued-laminated timber shall be in accordance with U .B.C. Standard
No. 25-10. All work shall be under the supervision of qualified personnel.
(g) Exposed Structural Glued-laminated Timber. Those portions of glued-
laminated timbers which form the structural supports of a building or other
structure and are exposed to weather and not properly protected by a roof. eave
overhangs or similar covering shall be pressure treated with an approved preserva-
tive or be manufactured from wood of natural resistance to decay.
Design of Glued Built-up Members

Sec. 2512. Plywood components shall be designed, fabricated and identified in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-18.
Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms

Sec. 2513. (a) General. Lumber, plywood and particleboard diaphragms may
be used to resist horizontal forces in horizontal and vertical distributing or
resisting elements, provided the deflection in the plane of the diaphragm, as
determined by calculations, tests or analogies drawn therefrom, does not exceed
249
the permissible deflection of attached distributing or resisting elements. See

U. B.C. Standard No. 25-9 for a method of calculating the deflection of a blocked
plywood diaphragm.
Permissible deflection shall be that deflection up to which the diaphragm and
any attached distributing or resisting element will maintain its structural integrity
under assumed load conditions, i.e., continue to support assumed loads without
danger to occupants of the structure.
Connections and anchorages capable of resisting the design forces shall be
provided between the diaphragms and the resisting elements. Openings in dia-
phragms which materially affect their strength shall be fully detailed on the plans
and shall have their edges adequately reinforced to transfer all shearing stresses.
Size and shape of diaphragms shall be limited as set forth in Table No. 25-l.
In buildings of wood frame construction where rotation is provided for, the
depth of the diaphragm normal to the open side shall not exceed 25 feet nor two-
thirds the diaphragm width, whichever is the smaller depth. Straight sheathing
shall not be permitted to resist shears in diaphragms acting in rotation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. One-story, wood-framed structures with the depth normal to
the open side not greater than 25 feet may have a depth equal to the width.
2. Where calculations show that diaphragm deflections can be tolerated, the
depth normal to the open end may be increased to a depth-to-width ratio not greater
than 11/2: I for diagonal sheathing or 2: I for special diagonal sheathed or plywood or
particleboard diaphragms.
In masonry or concrete buildings, lumber, plywood and particleboard dia-
phragms shall not be considered as transmitting lateral forces by rotation.
Diaphragm sheathing nails or other approved sheathing connectors shall be
driven flush but shall not fracture the surface of the sheathing.
(b) Diagonally Sheathed Diaphragms. I. Conventional construction. Such
lumber diaphragms shall be made up of l-inch nominal sheathing boards laid at an
angle of approximately 45 degrees to supports. Sheathing boards shall be directly
nailed to each intermediate bearing member with not less than two 8d nails for l-
inch by 6-inch nominal boards and three 8d nails for boards 8 inches or wider; and,
in addition, three 8d nails and four 8d nails shall be used for 6-inch and 8-inch
boards, respectively, at the diaphragm boundaries. End joints in adjacent boards
shall be separated by at least one joist or stud space, and there shall be at least two
boards between joints on the same support. Boundary members at edges of
diaphragms shall be designed to resist direct tensile or compressive chord stresses
and shall be adequately tied together at corners.
Conventional lumber diaphragms of Douglas fir-larch or southern pine may be
used to resist shear due to wind or seismic forces not exceeding 300 pounds per
lineal foot of width. The allowable strength shall be adjusted by the factors 0.82
and 0.65 where nails are used with sheathing and framing of Group Ill or IV wood
species as listed in Table No. 25-17-J of U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
2. Special construction. Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall con-
form to conventional construction and, in addition, shall have all clements
designed in conformance with the provisions of this code.
250
1988 EDITION 2513
Each chord or portion thereof may be considered as a beam loaded with a

uniform load per foot equal to 50 percent of the unit shear due to diaphragm
action. The load shall be assumed as acting normal to the chord, in the plane ofthe
diaphragm and either toward or away from the diaphragm. The span of the chord.
or portion thereof, shall be the distance between structural members of the
diaphragm, such as the joists, studs and blocking, which serve to transfer the
assumed load to the sheathing.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall include conventional dia-
phragms sheathed with two layers of diagonal sheathing at 90 degrees to each
other and on the same face of the supporting members.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms of Douglas fir-larch or southern pine
may be used to resist shears due to wind or seismic loads, provided such shears do
not stress the nails beyond their allowable safe lateral strength and do not exceed
600 pounds per lineal foot of width. The allowable strength shall be adjusted by
the factors 0.82 and 0.65 where nails are used with sheathing and framing of
Group III or IV wood species as listed in Table No. 25-17-J of U .B.C. Standard
No. 25-17.
(c) Plywood Diaphragms. Horizontal and vertical diaphragms sheathed with
plywood may be used to resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set forth in
Table No. 25-J-1 for horizontal diaphragms and Table No. 25-K-1 for vertical
diaphragms, or may be calculated by principles of mechanics without limitation
by using values of nail strength and plywood shear values as specified elsewhere
in this code. Plywood for horizontal diaphragms shall be as set forth in Table
No. 25-S-1 and No. 25-S-2 for corresponding joist spacing and loads. Plywood in
shear walls shall be at least 5!J6 inch thick for studs spaced 16 inches on center and
3Jg inch thick where studs are spaced 24 inches on center.
Maximum spans for plywood subfloor underlayment shall be as set forth in
Table No. 25-T-1. Plywood used for horizontal and vertical diaphragms shall
conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9.
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced where necessary to
transmit direct stresses. Framing members shall be at least 2-inch nominal in the
dimension to which the plywood is attached. In general, panel edges shall bear on
the framing members and butt along their center lines. Nails shall be placed not
less than 3Jg inch in from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than 6 inches on
center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly driven into the framing
members. No unblocked panels less than 12 inches wide shall be used.
Where plywood is applied on both faces of a shear wall in accordance with
Table No. 25-K-1, allowable shear for the wall may be taken as twice the tabulated
shear for one side, except that where the shear capacities are not equal, the
allowable shear shall be either the shear for the side with the higher capacity or
twice the shear for the side with the lower capacity, whichever is greater.
(d) Particleboard Diaphragms. Horizontal and vertical diaphragms sheathed
with particleboard may be used to resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set
forth in Table No. 25-J-2 for horizontal diaphragms and Table No. 25-K-2 for
vertical diaphragms.
251
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced where necessary to

transmit direct stresses. Framing members shall be at least 2-inch nominal in the
dimension to which the particleboard is attached. In general, panel edges shall
bear on the framing members and butt along their center lines. Nails shall be
placed not less than 3fg inch in from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than 6
inches on center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly driven into the
framing members. No unblocked panels less than 12 inches wide shall be used.
(e) Requirements for Wood Design-Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. I. Wood
shear walls and diaphragms. A. General. Design and construction of wood
shear walls and diaphragms in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 shall conform to the
B. Framing. Collector members shall be provided to transmit tension and
compression forces. Perimeter members at openings shall be provided and shall
be detailed to distribute the shearing stresses. Diaphragm sheathing shall not be
used to splice these members.
Diaphragm chords and ties shall be placed in, or tangent to, the plane of the
diaphragm framing unless it can be demonstrated that the moments, shears and
deflections and deformations resulting from other arrangements can be tolerated.
C. Plywood. Plywood shall be manufactured using exterior glue.
Ill Plywood diaphragms and shear walls shall be constructed with plywood sheets
not less than 4 feet by 8 feet, except at boundaries and changes in framing where
minimum sheet dimension shall be 24 inches unless all edges of the undersized
sheets are supported by framing members or blocking.
Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the edges of all sheets in
shear walls.
Plywood sheathing may be used for splicing members, other than those noted in
Section 2513 (e) I B, where the additional nailing required to develop the transfer
of forces will not cause cross-grain bending or cross-grain tension in the nailed
member.
D. Heavy wood panels. Diagonally sheathed panels utilizing 2-inch nominal
boards may be used to resist the same permissible shears as l-inch nominal
lumber, except that l6d nails shall be used instead of 8d.
Panels utilizing straight decking overlaid with plywood may be used to resist
shear forces using the same shear values as permitted for the plywood alone.
Plywood joints parallel to the decking shall be located at least I inch offset from
any parallel decking joint.
Heavy decking panels utilizing dowel pins, or vertically laminated panels
connected by nailing units to one another, resist shear forces based on the
permissible shear values of their connectors.
Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms
Sec. 2514. Wood stud walls sheathed with fiberboard sheathing complying
with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-24 may be used to resist horizontal forces not
exceeding those set forth in Table No. 25-P. The fiberboard sheathing, 4 feet by 8
feet, shall be applied vertically to wood studs not less than 2-inch nominal in
252
1988 EDITION 2514-2515
thickness spaced 16 inches on center. Nailing shown in Table No. 25-P shall be
provided at the perimeter of the sheathing board and at intermediate studs.
Blocking not less than 2-inch nominal in thickness shall be provided at horizontal
joints when wall height exceeds length of sheathing panel, and sheathing shall be
fastened to the blocking with nails sized as shown in Table No. 25-P spaced 3
inches on centers each side of joint. Nails shall be spaced not less than 1/x inch
from edges and ends of sheathing. Marginal studs of shear walls or shear-resisting
clements shall be adequately anchored at top and bottom and designed to resist all
forces. The maximum height-width ratio shall be 1112: I.
Wood Combined with Masonry or Concrete

Sec. 2515. (a) Dead Load. Wood members shall not be used to permanently
support the dead load of any masonry or concrete.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Masonry or concrete nonstructural floor or roof surfacing
not more than 4 inches thick may be supported by wood members.
2. Any structure may rest upon wood piles constructed in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 29.
3. Masonry or concrete fireplace with a factory-built chimney conforming to
Chapter 37 may be supported by wood framing.
4. Veneer of brick, concrete or stone applied as specified in Section 3006 (b) may
be supported by approved treated wood foundations when the maximum height of
veneer does not exceed 25 feet above the foundation. Such veneer used as an interior
wall finish may also be supported on wood floors which are designed to support the
additional load, and be designed to limit the deflection and shrinkage to 1/:;oo of the
span of the supporting members.
(b) Horizontal Force. Wood members shall not be used to resist horizontal
forces contributed by masonry or concrete construction in buildings over one
story in height.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Wood floor and roof members may be used in horizontal
trusses and diaphragms to resist horizontal forces imposed by wind, earthquake or
earth pressure, provided such forces arc not resisted by rotation of the truss or
diaphragm.
2. Vertical plywood-sheathed shear walls may be used to provide resistance to
wind or earthquake forces in two-story buildings of masonry or concrete construc-
tion, provided the following requirements are met:
A. Story-to-story wall heights shall not exceed 12 feet.
B. Horizontal diaphragms shall not be considered to transmit lateral forces by
rotation or cantilever action.
C. Deflections of horizontal and vertical diaphragms shall not permit per-story
deflections of supported masonry or concrete walls to exceed .005 times each
story height.
D. Plywood sheathing in horizontal diaphragms shall have all unsupported edges
blocked. Plywood sheathing for both stories of vertical diaphragms shall have
all unsupported edges blocked and for the lower story walls shall have a
minimum thickness of 15/32 inch.
E. There shall be no out-of-plane horizontal offsets between the first and second
stories of plywood shear walls.
253
General Construction Requirements

Sec. 2516. (a) General. The requirements in this section apply to all wood
frame construction.
(b) Preparation of Building Site. All stumps and roots shall be removed from
the soil to a depth of at least 12 inches below the surface of the ground in the area to
be occupied by the building.
All wood forms which have been used in placing concrete, if within the ground
or between foundation sills and the ground, shall be removed before a building is
occupied or used for any purpose. Before completion, loose or casual wood shall
be removed from direct contact with the ground under the building.
(c) Protection Against Decay and Termites. I. Wood support embedded in
ground. Wood embedded in the ground or in direct contact with the earth and used
for the support of permanent structures shall be treated wood unless continuously
below the groundwater line or continuously submerged in fresh water. Round or
rectangular posts, poles and sawn timber columns supporting permanent struc-
tures which are embedded in concrete or masonry in direct contact with earth or
embedded in concrete or masonry exposed to the weather shall be treated wood.
Treatment shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 25-12, Tables Nos. 25-12-B
through 25-12-F, for ground contact.
2. Under-floor clearance. When wood joists or the bottom of wood structural
floors without joists are located closer than 18 inches or wood girders are located
closer than 12 inches to exposed ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas
located within the periphery of the building foundation, the floor assembly
including posts, girders, joists and subfloor, shall be approved wood of natural
resistance to decay as listed in Section 2516 (c) 3 or treated wood.
Accessible under-floor areas shall be provided with a minimum 18-inch by 24-
inch access opening unobstructed by pipes, ducts and similar construction. All
under-floor access openings shall be effectively screened or covered. Pipes, ducts
and other construction shall not interfere with the accessibility to or within under-
floor areas.
3. Plates, sills and sleepers. All foundation plates or sills and sleepers on a
concrete or masonry slab, which is in direct contact with earth, and sills which rest
on concrete or masonry foundations, shall be treated wood or Foundation red-
wood, all marked or branded by an approved agency. Foundation cedar or No. 2
Foundation redwood marked or branded by an approved agency may be used for
sills in territories subject to moderate hazard, where termite damage is not
frequent and when specifically approved by the building official. In territories
where hazard of termite damage is slight, any species of wood permitted by this
code may be used for sills when specifically approved by the building official.
4. Columns and posts. Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry
floors or decks exposed to the weather or to water splash or in basements and
which support permanent structures shall be supported by concrete piers or metal
pedestals projecting above floors unless approved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood is used. The pedestals shall project at least 6 inches above
exposed earth and at least I inch above such floors.
254
1988 EDITION 2516
Individual concrete or masonry piers shall project at least 8 inches above

exposed ground unless the columns or posts which they support are of approved
wood of natural resistance to decay or treated wood is used.
5. Girders entering masonry or concrete walls. Ends of wood girders
entering masonry or concrete walls shall be provided with a 112-inch air space on
tops, sides and ends unless approved wood of natural resistance to decay or treated
wood is used.
6. Foundation ventilation. Under-floor areas shall be ventilated by an ap-
proved mechanical means or by openings in exterior foundation walls. Such
openings shall have a net area of not less than I square foot for each I 50 square feet
of under-floor area. Openings shall be located as close to corners as practical and
shall provide cross ventilation. The required area of such openings shall be
approximately equally distributed along the length of at least two opposite sides.
They shall be covered with corrosion-resistant wire mesh with mesh openings of
l/4 inch in dimension. Where moisture due to climate and groundwater conditions
is not considered excessive, the building official may allow operable louvers and
may allow the required net area of vent opening to be reduced to I 0 percent of the
above, provided the under-floor ground surface area is covered with an approved
vapor barrier.
7. Wood and earth separation. Protection of wood against deterioration as
set forth in the previous paragraphs for specified applications is required. In
addition, wood used in construction of permanent structures and located nearer
than 6 inches to earth shall be treated wood or wood of natural resistance to decay,
as defined in Section 2502 (a). Where located on concrete slabs placed on earth,
wood shall be treated wood or wood of natural resistance to decay. Where not
subject to water splash or to exterior moisture and located on concrete having a
minimum thickness of 3 inches with an impervious membrane installed between
concrete and earth, the wood may be untreated and of any species.
Where planter boxes are installed adjacent to wood frame walls a 2-inch-wide
air space shall be provided between the planter and the wall. Flashings shall be
installed when the air space is less than 6 inches in width. Where flashing is used
provisions shall be made to permit circulation of air in the air space. The wood
frame wall shall be provided with an exterior wall covering conforming to the
provisions of Subsection (g) of this section.
8. Wood supporting roofs and floors. Wood structural members supporting
moisture permeable floors or roofs which are exposed to the weather such as
concrete or masonry slabs shall be approved wood of natural resistance to decay or
treated wood unless separated from such floors or roofs by an impervious mois-
ture barrier.
9. Moisture content of treated wood. When wood pressure treated with a
water-borne preservative is used in enclosed locations where drying in service
cannot readily occur, such wood shall be at a moisture content of 19 percent or less
before being covered with insulation, interior wall finish, floor covering or other
material.
255
10. Retaining walls. Wood used in retaining or crib walls shall be treated
wood.
II . Weather exposure. In geographical areas where experience has demon-
strated a specific need, approved wood of natural resistance to decay or treated
wood shall be used for those portions of wood members which form the structural
supports of buildings, balconies, porches or similar permanent building appurte-
nances when such members are exposed to the weather without adequate protec-
tion from a roof, eave, overhang or other covering to prevent moisture or water
accumulation on the surface or at joints between members. Depending on local
experience, such members may include: horizontal members such as girders,
joists and decking; or vertical members such as posts, poles and columns; or both
horizontal and vertical members.
(d) Wall Framing. The framing of exterior and interior walls shall be in
accordance with provisions specified in Section 2517 unless a specific design is
furnished.
Wood stud walls and bearing partitions shall not support more than two floors
and a roof unless an analysis satisfactory to the building official shows that
shrinkage of the wood framing will not hav~ adverse effects upon the structure nor
any plumbing, electrical, mechanical systems nor other equipment installed
therein due to excessive shrinkage or differential movements caused by shrink-
age. The analysis shall also show that the roof drainage system and the foregoing
systems or equipment will not be adversely affected or, as an alternate, such
systems shall be designed to accommodate the differential shrinkage or move-
ments.
(e) Floor Framing. Wood-joisted floors shall be framed and constructed and
anchored to supporting wood stud or masonry walls as specified in Chapter 23.
(f) Fire and Draft Stops. I. General. In combustible construction, firestop-
ping and draftstopping shall be installed to cut off all concealed draft openings
(both vertical and horizontal) and shall form an effective barrier between floors,
between a top story and a roof or attic space, and shall subdivide attic spaces,
concealed roof spaces and floor-ceiling assemblies. The integrity of all fire and
draft stops shall be maintained.
2. Fire stops, where required. Firestopping shall be provided in the follow-
ing locations:
A. In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at
the ceiling and floor levels and at 10-foot intervals along the length of the wall.
EXCEPTION: Fire stops may be omitted at floor and ceiling levels when
approved smoke-actuated fire dampers are installed at these levels.
B. At all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces
such as occur at soffits, drop ceilings and cove ceilings;
C. In concealed spaces between stair stringers at the top and bottom of the run
and between studs along and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the
stairs are unfinished;
D. In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar
256
1988 EDITION 2516
openings which afford a passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncom-
bustible materials.
3. Fire stop construction. Except as provided in Item D above, firestopping
shall consist of 2 inches nominal lumber or two thicknesses of l-inch nominal
lumber with broken lap joints or one thickness of 23/32-inch plywood with joints
backed by 23/32-inch plywood or one thickness of 3/4-inch Type 2-M particleboard
with joints backed by 3/4-inch Type 2-M particleboard.
Fire stops may also be of gypsum board, cement asbestos board, mineral fiber,
glass fiber or other approved materials securely fastened in place.
Walls having parallel or staggered studs for sound-transmission control shall
have fire stops of mineral fiber or glass fiber or other approved nonrigid materials.
4. Draft stops, where required. Draftstopping shall be provided in the
following locations:
A. Floor-ceiling assemblies. (i) Single-family dwellings. When there is
usable space above and below the concealed space of a floor-ceiling assembly in a
single-family dwelling, draft stops shall be installed so that the area of the
concealed space does not exceed I ,000 square feet. Draftstopping shall divide the
concealed space into approximately equal areas.
(ii) Two or more dwelling units and hotels. Draft stops shall be installed in
floor-ceiling assemblies of buildings having more than one dwelling unit and in
hotels. Such draft stops shall be in line with walls separating tenants from each
other and separating tenants from other areas.
(iii) Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in floor-ceiling assemblies of
buildings or portions of buildings used for other than dwelling or hotel occupan-
cies so that the area of the concealed space does not exceed l ,000 square feet and
so that the horizontal dimension between stops does not exceed 60 feet.
EXCEPTION: Where approved automatic sprinklers are installed within the
concealed space, the area between draft stops may be 3,000 square feet and the
horizontal dimension may be 100 feet.
B. Attics. (i) Single-family dwellings. None required.
(ii) Two or more dwelling units and hotels. Draft stops shall be installed in the
attics, mansards, overhangs, false fronts set out from walls and similar concealed
spaces of buildings containing more than one dwelling unit and in hotels. Such
draft stops shall be above and in line with the walls separating tenant spaces from
each other and from other uses.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Draft stops may be omitted along one of the corridor walls,
provided draft stops at tenant separation walls extend to the remaining corridor draft
stop.
2. Where approved sprinklers arc installed, draftstopping may be as specified in
the exception to Item (iii) below.
(iii) Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in attics, mansards, overhangs,
false fronts set out from walls and similar concealed spaces of buildings having
uses other than dwellings or hotels so that the area between draft stops does not
exceed 3,000 square feet and the greatest horizontal dimension does not exceed 60
feet.
257
EXCEPTION: Where approved automatic sprinklers are installed the area be-
tween draft stops may be 9,000 square feet and the greatest horizontal dimension
may be 100 feet.
5. Draft stop construction. Drafts topping materials shall be not less than lf2-
inch gypsum board, 3/s-inch plywood, 3fs-inch Type 2-M particleboard or other
approved materials adequately supported.
Openings in the partitions shall be protected by self-closing doors with auto-
matic latches constructed as required for the partitions.
Ventilation of concealed roof spaces shall be maintained in accordance with
Section 3205.
6. Draft or fire stops in other locations. Fires topping of veneer on noncom-
bustible walls shall be in accordance with Item No. 2 A above.
For firestopping of wood floors on masonry or concrete floors, see Sections
1804 and 1904.
For firestopping ceilings applied against noncombustible construction, see
Section 4203, Item No. I.
For fires topping penetrations in walls required to have protected openings. see
Section 4304 (e).
For firestopping penetrations through floors, see Section 4305 (a).
(g) Exterior Wall Coverings. I. General. Exterior wood stud walls shall be
covered on the outside with the materials and in the manner specified in this
section or elsewhere in this code. Studs or sheathing shall be covered on the
outside face with a weather-resistive barrier when required by Section 1707 (a).
Exterior wall coverings of the minimum thickness specified in this section are
based upon a maximum stud spacing of 16 inches unless otherwise specified.
!): 2. Siding. Solid wood siding shall have an average thickness of 3fs inch unless
,,, placed over sheathing permitted by this code.
Siding patterns known as rustic, drop siding or shiplap shall have an average
thickness in place of not less than 19/32 inch and shall have a minimum thickness of
not less than 3fs inch. Bevel siding shall have a minimum thickness measured at
the butt section of not less than 7(16 inch and a tip thickness of not less than 3/16
inch. Siding of lesser dimensions may be used, provided such wall covering is
placed over sheathing which conforms to the provisions specified elsewhere in
this code.
All weatherboarding or siding shall be securely nailed to each stud with not less
than one nail, or to solid l-inch nominal wood sheathing or 15/32-inch plywood
sheathing or 112-inch particleboard sheathing with not less than one line of nails
spaced not more than 24 inches on center in each piece of the weatherboarding or
siding.
Wood board sidings applied horizontally, diagonally or vertically shall be
nailed to studs, nailing strips or blocking set maximum 24 inches on center. Nails
shall penetrate 1112 inches into studs, studs and wood sheathing combined, or
blocking.
3. Plywood. Where plywood is used for covering the exterior of outside walls,
258
1988 EDITION 2516
it shall be of the Exterior type not Jess than 3fs inch thick. Plywood panel siding
shall be installed in accordance with Table No. 25-M-1. Unless applied over l-
inch wood sheathing or 15/32-inch plywood sheathing or 112-inch particleboard
sheathing, joints shall occur over framing members and shall be protected with a
continuous wood batten, approved caulking, flashing, vertical or horizontal
shiplaps; or joints shall be lapped horizontally or otherwise made waterproof.
4. Shingles or shakes. Wood shingles or shakes and asbestos cement shingles
may be used for exterior wall covering, provided the frame of the structure is
covered with building paper as specified in Section 1707 (a). All shingles or
shakes attached to sheathing other than wood sheathing shall be secured with
approved corrosion-resistant fasteners or on furring strips attached to the studs.
Wood shingles or shakes may be applied over fiberboard shingle backer and
sheathing with annular grooved nails. The thickness of wood shingles or shakes
between wood nailing boards shall be not less than 3fs inch. Wood shingles or
shakes and asbestos shingles or siding may be nailed directly to approved fiber-
board nailbase sheathing not less than l/2-inch nominal thickness with annular
grooved nails. Fiberboard nailbase sheathing and shingle backer shall comply
The weather exposure of wood shingle or shake siding used on exterior walls
shall not exceed maximums set forth in Table No. 25-L.
5. Particleboard. Where particleboard is used for covering the exterior of
outside walls it shall be of the Exterior Type 2-M grades conforming to U. B.C.
Standard No. 25-25. Particleboard panel siding shall be installed in accordance
with Table No. 25-M-2 and Table No. 25-Q. Panels shall be gapped lfs inch and
nails shall be spaced not less than 3fs inch from edges and ends of sheathing.
Unless applied over 5/s-inch net wood sheathing or 112-inch plywood sheathing or
l/2-inch particleboard sheathing, joints shall occur over framing members and
shall be covered with a continuous wood batt; or joints shall be lapped horizon-
tally or otherwise made waterproof to the satisfaction of the building official.
Particleboard shall be sealed and protected with exterior quality finishes.
6. Hardboard. Where hardboard siding is used for covering the outside of
exterior walls, it shall conform to U .B.C. Standard No. 25-26 and Table No. 25-
0. Lap siding shall be installed horizontally and applied to sheathed or unsheathed
walls. Corner bracing shall be installed in conformance with Section 2517 (g) 3. A
weather-resistive barrier shall be installed under the lap siding as required by
Section 1707 (a).
Square-edged nongrooved panels and shiplap grooved or nongrooved siding
shall be applied vertically to sheathed or unsheathed walls. Siding that is grooved
shall be not less than l/4 inch thick in the groove.
Nail size and spacing shall follow Table No. 25-0 and shall penetrate framing
Jl/2 inches. Lap siding shall overlap I inch minimum and be nailed through both
courses and into framing members with nails located 112 inch from bottom of the
overlapped course. Square-edged nongrooved panels shall be nailed 3/s inch from
the perimeter of the panel and intermediately into studs. Shiplap edge panel siding
with 3f8-inch shiplap shall be nailed 3JR inch from the edges on both sides of the
259
shiplap. The 314-inch shiplap shall be nailed 31s inch from the edge and penetrate
through both the overlap and underlap. Top and bottom edges of the panel shall be
nailed 31s inch from the edge.
Shiplap and lap siding shall not be force fit. Square-edged panels shall maintain
a 11In-inch gap at joints. All joints and edges of siding shall be over framing
members and shall be made resistant to weather penetration with battens, horizon-
tal overlaps or ship laps to the satisfaction of the building official. A 'Is-inch gap
shall be provided around all openings.
7. Nailing. All fasteners used for the attachment of siding shall be of a
corrosion-resistant type.
(h) Structural Floor Sheathing. Structural floor sheathing shall be designed

in accordance with the general provisions of this code and the special provisions in
this subsection.
Sheathing used as subflooring shall be designed to support all loads specified in
this code and shall be capable of supporting concentrated loads of not less than
300 pounds without failure. The concentrated load shall be applied by a loaded
disc, 3 inches or smaller in diameter.
Flooring, including the finish floor, underlayment and subfloor, where used,
shall meet the following requirements:
Deflection under uniform design load limited to 11360 of the span be-
tween supporting joists or beams.
Deflection of flooring relative to joists under a l-inch-diameter concen-
trated load of200 pounds limited to0.125 inch or Jess when loaded midway
between supporting joists or beams not over 24 inches on center and '1360 of
the span for spans over 24 inches.
Floor sheathing conforming to the provisions of Table No. 25-R-1, No. 25-R-2,
No. 25-S-1, No. 25-T-1 or No. 25-T-2 shall be deemed to meet the requirements of
this subsection.
(i) Structural Roof Sheathing. Structural roof sheathing shall be designed in

accordance with the general provisions of this code and the special provisions in
this subsection. Structural roof sheathing shall be designed to support all loads
specified in this code and shall be capable of supporting concentrated loads of not
less than 300 pounds without failure. The concentrated load shall be applied by a
loaded disc, 3 inches or smaller in diameter. Structural roof sheathing shall meet
the following requirement:
Deflection under uniform design live and dead load limited to 'II so ofthe
span between supporting rafters or beams and '1240 under Jive load only.
Roof sheathing conforming to the provisions of Tables No. 25-R-1 and No. 25-
R-2 or No. 25-S-1 and No. 25-S-2 or Table No. 25-S-3 shall be deemed to meet the
requirements of this subsection.
Plywood roof sheathing shall be bonded by intermediate or exterior glue.
Plywood roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be bonded with exterior
glue.
260
1988 EDITION 2516-2517
U) Fastenings. I. Nailing requirements. The number and size of nails con-

necting wood members shall be not less than that set forth in Table No. 25-Q.
Other connections shall be fastened so as to provide equivalent strength. End and
edge distances and nail penetrations shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions of Section 2510. Fasteners required to be corrosion resistant shall be
either zinc-coated fasteners conforming to U. B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Section
25. 1717 (a), aluminum alloy wire fasteners conforming to U. B.C. Standard No.
25-17, Section 25. 1716 (e), or stainless steel fasteners conforming to U. B. C.
Standard No. 25-17, Section 25. 1716 (h).
2. Joist hangers and framing anchors. Connections depending upon joist
hangers or framing anchors, ties and other mechanical fastenings not otherwise
covered may be used where approved.
(k) Water Splash. Where wood frame walls and partitions are covered on the
interior with plaster, tile or similar materials and are subject to water splash, the
framing shall be protected with approved waterproof paper conforming to Section
1707 (a).
(I) Mechanically Laminated Floors and Decks. A laminated lumber floor or
deck built up of wood members set on edge, when meeting the following require-
ments, may be designed as a solid floor or roof deck of the same thickness, and
continuous spans may be designed on the basis of the full cross section using the
simple span moment coefficient.
Nail length shall be not less than two and one half times the net thickness of each
lamination. When deck supports are 4 feet on center or less, side nails shall be
spaced not more than 30 inches on center and staggered one third of the spacing in
adjacent laminations. When supports are spaced more than 4 feet on center, side
nails shall be spaced not more than 18 inches on center alternately near top and
bottom edges, and also staggered one third of the spacing in adjacent laminations.
1\vo side nails shall be used at each end of butt-jointed pieces.
Laminations shall be toenailed to supports with 20d or larger common nails.
When the supports are 4 feet on center or less, alternate laminations shall be
toenailed to alternate supports; when supports are spaced more than 4 feet on
center, alternate laminations shall be toenailed to every support.
A single-span deck shall have all laminations full length.
A continuous deck of two spans shall have not more than every fourth lamina-
tion spliced within quarter points adjoining supports.
Joints shall be closely butted over supports or staggered across the deck but
within the adjoining quarter spans.
No lamination shall be spliced more than twice in any span.
(m) Post-beam Connections. Where post and beam or girder construction is
used, the design shall be in accordance with the provisions of this code. Positive
connection shall be provided to ensure against uplift and lateral displacement.
Conventional Construction Provisions
Sec. 2517. (a) General. The requirements contained in this section are in-
tended for conventional, light-frame construction. Light-frame construction of
261
unusual shape, size or split levels shall, when located within Seismic Zones No. 2,
No. 3 and No. 4, be designed to resist lateral forces in accordance with other
provisions of this code. Other methods may be used, provided a satisfactory
design is submitted showing compliance with other provisions of this code.
(b) Foundation Plates or Sills. Foundations and footings shall be as specified
in Chapter 29. Foundation plates or sills resting on concrete or masonry founda-
tions shall be bolted as required by Section 2907 (f).
(c) Girders. Girders shall be designed to support the loads specified in this
code. Girder end joints shall occur over supports. When a girder is spliced over a
support, an adequate tie shall be provided. The end of beams or girders supported
on masonry or concrete shall have not less than 3 inches of bearing.
(d) Floor Joists. I. General. Spans for joists shall be in accordance with Table
No. 25-U-J-1.
2. Bearing. Except where supported on a l-inch by 4-inch ribbon strip and
nailed to the adjoining stud, the ends of each joist shall have not less than JI/z
inches of bearing on wood or metal, nor less than 3 inches on masonry.
3. Framing details. Joists shall be supported laterally at the ends and at each
support by solid blocking except where the ends of joists are nailed to a header,
band or rim joist or to an adjoining stud or by other approved means. Solid
blocking shall be not less than 2 inches in thickness and the full depth of joist.
Notches on the ends of joists shall not exceed one fourth the joist depth. Holes
bored in joists shall not be within 2 inches of the top or bottom of the joist, and the
diameter of any such hole shall not exceed one third the depth of the joist. Notches
in the top or bottom of joists shall not exceed one sixth the depth and shall not be
located in the middle third of the span.
Joist framing from opposite sides of a beam, girder or partition shall be lapped
at least 3 inches or the opposing joists shall be tied together in an approved
manner.
Joists framing into the side of a wood girder shall be supported by framing
anchors or on ledger strips not less than 2 inches by 2 inches.
4. Framing around openings. Trimmer and header joists shall be doubled, or
of lumber of equivalent cross section, when the span of the header exceeds 4 feet.
The ends of header joists more than 6 feet long shall be supported by framing
anchors or joist hangers unless bearing on a beam, partition or wall. Tail joists
over 12 feet long shall be supported at header by framing anchors or on ledger
strips not less than 2 inches by 2 inches.
5. Supporting bearing partitions. Bearing partitions perpendicular to joists
shall not be offset from supporting girders, walls or partitions more than the joist
depth.
Joists under and parallel to bearing partitions shall be doubled.
6. Blocking. Floor joists shall be blocked when required by the provisions of
Sections 2506 (h) and 2517 (d) 3.
(e) Subflooring. I. Lumber subfloor. Sheathing used as a structural subfloor
shall conform to the limitations set forth in Tables No. 25-R-1 and No. 25-R-2.
262
1988 EDITION 2517
Joints in subflooring shall occur over supports unless end-matched lumber is

used, in which case each piece shall bear on at least two joists.
Subflooring may be omitted when joist spacing does not exceed 16 inches and
l-inch nominal tongue-and-grooved wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular
to the joists.
2. Plywood. Where used as structural subflooring, plywood shall be as set
forth in Tables No. 25-S-1 and No. 25-S-2. Plywood combination subfloor-
underlayment shall have maximum spans as set forth in Table No. 25-T-1.
When plywood floors are glued to joists with an adhesive conforming to
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-19, in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's
directions, fasteners may be spaced a maximum of 12 inches on center at all
supports.
3. Plank flooring. Plank flooring shall be designed in accordance with the
general provisions of this code.
In lieu of such design, 2-inch tongue-and-groove planking may be used in
accordance with Table No. 25-U. Joints in such planking may be randomly
spaced, provided the system is applied to not less than three continuous spans,
planks arc center-matched and end-matched or splined, each plank bears on at
least one support and joints are separated by at least 24 inches in adjacent pieces.
One-inch nominal strip square-edged flooring, 1/z-inch tongue-and-groove floor-
ing, 3/s-inch plywood or 3/s-inch TYpe 2-M particleboard shall be applied over ,~i
random-length decking used as a floor. The "strip" and tongue-and-groove
flooring shall be applied at right angles to the span of the planks. The 3/s-inch
plywood shall be applied with the face grain at right angles to the span of the
planks.
4. Particleboard. Where used as structural subflooring or as combined sub-
floor underlayment, particleboard shall be as set forth in Table No. 25-T-2.
(f) Particleboard Underlayment. Particleboard floor underlayment shall con-
form to TYpe 1-M or to sanded TYpe 2-M-W grades of U.B.C. Standard No. 25- i!~
25. Underlayment shall be not less than l/4 inch in thickness and shall be identified
by the grademark of an approved inspection agency. Underlayment shall be
installed in accordance with this code and as recommended by the manufacturer.
(g) Wall Framing. I . Size, height and spacing. The size, height and spacing
of studs shall be in accordance with Table No. 25-R-3 except that Utility grade
studs shall not be spaced more than 16 inches on center, nor support more than a
roof and ceiling, nor exceed 8 feet in height for exterior walls and load-bearing
walls or 10 feet for interior nonload-bearing walls.
2. Framing details. Studs shall be placed with their wide dimension perpen-
dicular to the wall. Not less than three studs shall be installed at each corner of an
exterior wall.
EXCEPTION: At corners a third stud may be omitted through the use of wood
spacers or backup cleats of3/s-inch-thick plywood, 3/s-inch 'JYpe 2-M particleboard, ~j
l-inch-thick lumber or other approved devices which will serve as an adequate
backing for the attachment offacing materials. Where fire-resistance ratings or shear l
263
ffi values are involved, wood spacers, backup cleats or other devices shall not be used
'*' unless specifically approved for such use.
Bearing and exterior wall studs shall be capped with double top plates installed
to provide overlapping at corners and at intersections with other partitions. End
joints in double top plates shall be offset at least 48 inches.
EXCEPTION: A single top plate may be used, provided the plate is adequately
tied at joints, corners and intersecting walls by at least the equivalent of 3-inch by 6-
inch by 0.036-inch-thick galvanized steel that is nailed to each wall or segment of
wall by six 8d nails or equivalent, provided the rafters, joists or trusses are centered
over the studs with a tolerance of no more than I inch.
When bearing studs are spaced at 24-inch intervals and top plates are less than
two 2 by 6 or two 3 by 4 members and when the floor joists, floor trusses or roof
trusses which they support are spaced at more than 16-inch intervals, such joists or
trusses shall bear within 5 inches of the studs beneath or a third plate shall be
installed.
Interior nonbearing partitions may be capped with a single top plate installed to
provide overlapping at corners and at intersections with other walls and partitions.
The plate shall be continuously tied at joints by solid blocking at least 16 inches in
length and equal in size to the plate or by 1/s-inch by 11/z-inch metal ties with
spliced sections fastened with two 16d nails on each side of the joint.
Studs shall have full bearing on a plate or sill not less than 2 inches in thickness
having a width not less than that of the wall studs.
3. Bracing. All exterior walls and main cross-stud partitions shall be effec-
tively and thoroughly braced to resist wind and seismic forces by one of the
following methods:
A. Nominal l-inch by 4-inch continuous diagonal braces let into top and
bottom plates and intervening studs, placed at an angle not more than 60
degrees nor less than 45 degrees from the horizontal, and attached to the
framing in conformance with Table No. 25-Q.
B. Wood boards of 5/s-inch net minimum thickness applied diagonally on
studs spaced not over 24 inches on center.
C. Plywood sheathing with a thickness not less than 5!J6 inch for 16-inch stud
spacing and not less than 3/s inch for 24-inch stud spacing in accordance
with Tables No. 25-M-1 and No. 25-N-1.
D. Fiberboard sheathing 4-foot by 8-foot panels not less than lfz inch thick
applied vertically on studs spaced not over 16 inches on center when
installed in accordance with Section 2514 and Table No. 25-P.
E. Gypsum board (sheathing lfz inch thick by 4 feet wide, wallboard or veneer
base) on studs spaced not over 24 inches on center and nailed at 7 inches on
center with nails as required by Table No. 47-1.
F. Particleboard wall sheathing panels shall be in accordance with Table No.
25-N-2.
G. Portland cement plaster on studs spaced 16 inches on center installed in
accordance with Table No. 47-1.
264
1988 EDITION 2517
H. Hardboard panel siding when installed in accordance with Section 2516 (g)
6 and Table No. 25-0.
For methods 8, C, D, E. F, G and H the braced panel must be at least48 inches
in width, covering three stud spaces where studs arc spaced 16 inches apart and
covering two stud spaces where studs are spaced 24 inches apart.
All vertical joints of panel sheathing shall occur over studs. Horizontal joints
shall occur over blocking equal in size to the studding except where waived by the
installation requirements for the specific sheathing materials.
The location, type and amount of bracing shall comply with Table No. 25-V.
4. Cripple walls. Foundation cripple walls shall be framed of studs not less in
size than the studding above with a minimum length of 14 inches, or shall be
framed of solid blocking. When exceeding 4 feet in height, such walls shall be
framed of studs having the size required for an additional story.
Such walls having a stud height exceeding 14 inches shall be considered to be
first-story walls for the purpose of determining the bracing required by Section
2517 (g) 3. Solid blocking or plywood sheathing may be used to brace cripple :;::
walls having a stud height of 14 inches or less.
5. Headers. Headers and lintels shall conform to the requirements set forth in
this paragraph and together with their supporting systems shall be designed to
support the loads specified in this code. All openings 4 feet wide or less in bearing
walls shall be provided with headers consisting of either two pieces of 2-inch
framing lumber placed on edge and securely fastened together or 4-inch lumber of
equivalent cross section. All openings more than 4 feet wide shall be provided
with headers or lintels. Each end of a lintel or header shall have a length of bearing
of not less than ll/2 inches for the full width of the lintel.
6. Pipes in walls. Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating, or other pipes
shall be so framed and the joists underneath so spaced as to give proper clearance
for the piping. Where a partition containing such piping runs parallel to the floor
joists, the joists underneath such partitions shall be doubled and spaced to permit
the passage of such pipes and shall be bridged. Where plumbing, heating or other
pipes arc placed in or partly in a partition, necessitating the cutting of the soles or
plates, a metal tic not less than lfs inch thick and ll/2 inches wide shall be fastened
to the plate across and to each side of the opening with not less than four 16d nails.
7. Bridging. Unless covered by interior or exterior wall coverings or sheath-
ing meeting the minimum requirements of this code, all stud partitions or walls
with studs having a height-to-least-thickness ratio exceeding 50 shall have bridg-
ing not less than 2 inches in thickness and of the same width as the studs fitted
snugly and nailed thereto to provide adequate lateral support.
8. Cutting and notching. In exterior walls and bearing partitions, any wood
stud may be cut or notched to a depth not exceeding 25 percent of its width.
Cutting or notching of studs to a depth not greater than 40 percent of the width of
the stud is permitted in nonbearing partitions supporting no loads other than the
weight of the partition.
9. Bored holes. A hole not greater in diameter than 40 percent of the stud
265
width may be bored in any wood stud. Bored holes not greater than 60 percent of
the width of the stud are permitted in non bearing partitions or in any wall where
each bored stud is doubled, provided not more than two such successive doubled
studs are so bored.
In no case shall the edge of the bored hole be nearer than 5/s inch to the edge of
the stud. Bored holes shall not be located at the same section of stud as a cut or
notch.
(h) Roof and Ceiling Framing. I. General. The framing details required in
this subsection apply to roofs having a minimum slope of 3:12 or greater. When
the roof slope is less than 3:12. members supporting rafters and ceiling joists such
as ridge board, hips and valleys shall be designed as beams.
2. Spans. Allowable spans for ceiling joists shall be in accordance with Table
No. 25-U-J-6. Allowable spans for rafters shall be in accordance with Tables No.
25-U-R-1 through No. 25-U-R-14, where applicable.
3. Framing. Rafters shall be framed directly opposite each other at the ridge.
There shall be a ridge board at least l-inch nominal thickness at all ridges and not
less in depth than the cut end of the rafter. At all valleys and hips there shall be a
single valley or hip rafter not less than 2-inch nominal thickness and not less in
depth than the cut end of the rafter.
4. Rafter ties. Rafters shall be nailed to adjacent ceiling joists to form a
continuous tie between exterior walls when such joists are parallel to the rafters.
Where not parallel, rafters shall be tied to l-inch by 4-inch (nominal) minimum-
size cross ties. Rafter ties shall be spaced not more than 4 feet on center.
5. Purlins. Purl ins to support roof loads may be installed to reduce the span of
rafters within allowable limits and shall be supported by struts to bearing walls.
The maximum span of2-inch by 4-inch purl ins shall be 4 feet. The maximum span
of the 2-inch by 6-inch purlin shall be 6 feet but in no case shall the purl in be
smaller than the supported rafter. Struts shall be not smaller than 2-inch by 4-inch
members. The unbraced length of struts shall not exceed 8 feet and the minimum
slope of the struts shall be not less than 45 degrees from the horizontal.
6. Blocking. Roof rafters and ceiling joists shall be supported laterally to
prevent rotation and lateral displacement when required by Section 2506 (h).
Roof trusses shall be supported laterally at points of bearing by solid blocking to
prevent rotation and lateral displacement.
7. Roof sheathing. Roof sheathing shall be in accordance with Table No. 25-
S-1 and No. 25-S-2 for plywood, No. 25-R-1 and 25-R-2 for lumber or No. 25-S-3
for particleboard.
Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over supports unless approved end-
matched lumber is used, in which case each piece shall bear on at least two
supports.
Plywood used for roof sheathing shall be bonded by intermediate or exterior
glue. Plywood roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be bonded with
exterior glue.
266
1988 EDITION 2517
8. Roof planking. Planking shall be designed in accordance with the general

provisions of this code.
In lieu of such design, 2-inch tongue-and-groove planking may be used in
accordance with Table No. 25-U. Joints in such planking may be randomly
spaced, provided the system is applied to not less than three continuous spans,
planks are center-matched and end-matched or splined, each plank bears on at
least one support, and joints are separated by at least 24 inches in adjacent pieces.
267
N
Q)
OD
TABLE NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER

Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504)
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Compres-
Tension sion per- sion MODULUS U.B.C. STDS.
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendicular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv FcJ. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
ASPEN (BIGTOOTH-QUAKING) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
Select Structural 1300 1500 775 60 265 850 1,100,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1300 650 60 265 675 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 525 60 265 550 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 500 575 300 60 265 325 900,000
Appearance wide 1100 1300 650 60 265 825 1,100,000 25-4
Stud 500 575 300 60 265 325 900,000 25-5
and 25-8
Construction 2" to 4" 650 750 400 60 265 625 900,000 (See footnotes
Standard thick 375 425 225 60 265 500 900,000 2 through 8,
200 60 265 325 900,000 c:
Utility 4" wide 175 100 13, 15 and 16) z
750 60 265 750 1,100,000 :;;
Select Structural 1150 1300 0
No.I 2" to 4" 950 1100 650 60 265 675 1,100,000 :0
No.2 thick 775 900 425 60 265 575 1,000,000 3:
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 450 525 250 60 265 375 900,000 m
Appearance wider 950 1100 650 60 265 825 1,100,000 c:
;=
0
z
C)
0
0
0
m
...
10
C»
C»
m
c
=i
BALSAM FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.) 0
Select Structural 2" to 4" 1750 2000 1000 70 305 1350 1,500,000 z
No.1 thick 1450 1700 850 70 305 1050 1,500,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1200 1400 700 70 305 850 1,300,000
No.3 wide 675 775 400 70 305 525 1,200,000
Appearance 1450 1700 850 70 305 1250 1,500,000 25-5
Stud 675 775 400 70 305 525 1,200,000 25-8
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4" 875 1000 525 70 305 950 1,200,000 I through 9)
Standard thick 500 575 275 70 305 775 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 225 275 125 70 305 525 1,200,000
Select Structural 2" to 4" 1500 1700 1000 70 305 1200 1,500,000
No.1 thick 1250 1450 850 70 305 1050 1,500,000
No.2 5" and 1050 1200 550 70 305 900 1,300,000
No.3 wider 600 700 325 70 305 575 1,200,000
Appearance 1250 1450 850 70 305 1250 1,500,000
Stud 600 700 325 70 305 575 1,200,000
Select Structural Beams and 1350 - 900 65 305 950 1,400,000
No.1 Stringers 1100 - 750 65 305 800 1,400,000
Select Structural Posts and 1250 - 825 65 305 1000 1,400,000
No.1 Timbers 1000 - 675 65 305 875 1,400,000
Select Decking - 1650 - - - - 1,500,000 25-8
Commercial - 1400 - - - - 1,300,000 (See footnotes
I through 9)
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25·A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Com pres·
Tension slonper- slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetlllv• Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F, Fc-L 21 F. E 21 GRADED
BLACK COTTONWOOD (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 875 1000 500 50 180 575 1,200,000
No.2 thick 725 825 425 50 180 450 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 400 450 225 50 180 275 900,000
Appearance wide 875 1000 500 50 180 700 1,200,000
Stud 400 450 225 50 180 275 900,000
25-2
Utility 4" wide 150 150 75 50 180 275 900,000 11, 13,
15and 16)
No.I 2" to4" 750 875 500 50 180 575 1,200,000
No.2 thick 625 700 325 50 180 475 1,100,000 c:
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 350 425 175 50 180 300 900,000 z
Appearance wider 750 875 500 50 180 700 1,200,000 ~
::D
3:
CALIFORNIA REDWOOD (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.) Ill
4" & less c:
Clear Heart Structural thick, any 2300 2650 1500 145 650 2150 1,400,000 j=
Clear Structural width 2100 2650 1500 145 650 2150 1,400,000 25-7 c
2" to 4 •
(See footnotes
2 through 7
z
C)
Select Structural thick 2050 2350 1200 80 650 1750 1,400,000 9, 13, 15 0
Select Structural, Open 2" to 4 • 1600 1850 950 80 425 1300 1,100,000 and 16) 0
grain wide c
m
....
:i
C»
m
c
::::j
No.I
No. I, Open grain
1700 1950 975 80 650 1400 1,400,000 0z
1350 1550 775 80 425 1050 1,100,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1400 1600 800 80 650 1100 1,250,000
No. 2, Open grain thick 1100 1250 625 80 425 825 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 800 900 475 80 650 675 1,100,000
No. 3, Open grain wide 625 725 375 80 425 500 900,000
Stud 625 725 375 80 425 500 900,000
Construction 2" to 4" 825 950 475 80 425 925 900,000
Standard thick 450 525 250 80 425 775 900,000
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 80 425 500 900,000
Select Structural 1750 2000 1150 80 650 1550 1,400,000 25-7
Select Structural, Open 1400 1600 925 80 425 1150 1,100,000 (See footnotes
grain 2 through 7, 9,
No. I 2" to 4" 1500 1700 975 80 650 1400 1,400,000 13, 15 and 16)
No. I, Open grain thick 1150 1350 775 80 425 1050 1,100,000
No.2 5" and 1200 1400 650 80 650 1200 1,250,000
No. 2, Open grain wider 950 1100 500 80 425 875 1,000,000
No.3 700 800 375 80 650 725 1,100,000
No.3, Open grain 550 650 350 80 425 525 900,000
Clear Heart Structural 1850 - 1250 135 650 1650 1,300,000

Clear Structural
5" by 5.
1850 - 1250 135 650 1650 1,300,000
Select Structural
and larger 1400 - 950 95 650 1200 1,300,000
No.I 1200 - 800 95 650 1050 1,300,000
No.2 975 - 650 95 650 900 1,100,000
No.3 550 - 375 95 650 550 1,000,000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
N Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
...... (Normal loading. See also Section 2504)
N
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Compres· Compres-
Tension slon per- slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grein ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
Select Decking, close grar Decking 1850 2150 - - - - 1,400,000 25-7

Select Decking 2" thick 1450 1700 - - - - 1,100,000 (See footnotes
Commercial Decking 6" & wider 1200 1350 - - - - 1,000,000 2, 5 and6)
COAST SITKA SPRUCE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4 • 1250 1450 750 65 455 875 1,700,000
No.2 thick 1050 1200 625 65 455 700 1,500,000
No.3 2" to 4" 575 675 350 65 455 425 1,300,000
Appearance wide 1250 1450 725 65 455 1050 1,700,000
Stud 600 675 350 65 455 425 1,300,000
Construction 2" to 4" 750 875 450 65 455 800 1,300,000 25-2
Standard thick 425 500 250 65 455 650 1,300,000 (See footnotes
Utility 4" wide 200 225 125 65 455 425 1,300,000 2 through 9, II,
13, 15 and 16)
Select Structural 1300 1500 850 65 455 975 1,700,000 c
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1250 65 455 875 1,700,000 z
No.2 thick 900 1050
725
475 65 455 750 1,500,000
:;;
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 525 575 65 455 475 1,300,000 0
275 :::IJ
Appearance wider 1100 1250 725 65 455 1050 1,700,000 s::
m
Select Structural Beams and 1150 - 675 60 455 775 1,500,000 c
No.I Stringers 950 - 475 60 455 650 1,500,000 r=c
Select Structural
No. I
Posts and
Timbers
1100
875
-
-
725
575
60
60
455
455
825
725
1,500,000
1,500,000
z
C>
0
Select Decking 1250 1450 - - 455 - 1,700,000 0
Commercial 1050 1200 - - 455 - 1,500,000 c
m
...
CD
I I I C»
C»
COAST SPECIES (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.) m
Select Structural 1500 1700 850 65 370 1100 1,500,000 c
No.I 2" to 4" 1250 1450 750 65 370 875 1,500,000 :::::j
No.2 thick 1050 1200 625 65 370 700 1,400,000 0
No.3 2" to 4" 575 675 350 65 370 425 1,200,000 z
Appearance wide 1250 1450 725 65 370 1050 1,500,000
Stud 575 675 350 65 370 425 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 750 875 450 65 370 800 1,200,000

Standard thick 425 500 250 65 370 650 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 200 225 125 65 370 425 1,200,000 25-2
(See footnotes
Select Structural 1300 1500 g?5 65 370 975 1,500,000 2 through9,
No.I 2" to4" 1100 1250 725 65 370 875 1,500,000 II, 13,
No.2 thick 900 1050 475 65 370 750 1,400,000 15 and 16)
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 525 600 275 65 370 475 1,200,000
Appearance wider 1100 1250 725 65 370 1050 1,500,000
Select Decking 1250 1450 - - 370 - 1,500,000

Commercial 1050 1200 - - 370 - 1,400,000
COTTONWOOD (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
2" to 3"
thick
2" to 4" 25-5
Stud wide 525 600 300 65 320 350 1.000.000 (See footnotes
I through 9)
Construction 2" to 4" 675 775 400 65 320 650 1.000,000
Standard thick 375 425 225 65 320 525 1.000.000
Utility 4"wide 175 200 100 65 320 350 1,000.000
(Continued)
N
Ul
Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING :f.....
ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN POUN OS PER SQUARE INCH
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Compras-
Tension slon per- slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Songle- Repetltlv• Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. Fcl. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
DOUGLAS FIR- LARCH {Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
DOUGLAS FIR -LARCH {North)
Dense Select Structural 2450 21100 1400 95 730 1850 1,900,000
Dense No. I 2050 2400 1200 95 730 1450 1,900,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1750 2050 1050 95 625 1250 1,800,000
Dense No.2 thick 1700 1950 1000 95 730 ll50 1,700,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1450 1650 850 95 625 1000 1,700,000
No.3 wide 800 925 475 95 625 600 1,500,000 25-2
Appearance 1750 2050 1050 95 625 1500 1,800,000 25-3
Stud 800 925 475 95 625 600 1,500,000 and
25-4
Construction {See footnotes c
2" to 4" 1050 1200 625 95 625 1150 1,500,000
2 through9, z
Standard thick 600 675 350 95 625 925 1,500,000
11, 13, :;;
Utility 4" wide 275 325 175 95 625 600 1,500,000 0
15and 16) :IJ
Dense Select Structural 2100 2400 1400 95 730 1650 1,900,000 3:
Select Structural 1800 2050 1200 95 625 1400 1,800,000 ID
Dense No. I 2" to4" 1800 2050 1200 95 730 1450 1,900,000 ~
No.I thick 1500 1750 1000 95 625 1250 1,800,000 r
Dense No.2 5" and 1450 1700 775 95 730 1250 1,700,000 c
No.2 wider 1250 1450 650 95 625 1050 1,700,000 z
C)
No. 3 and Stud 725 850 375 95 625 675 1,500,000
Appearance 1500 1750 1000 95 625 1500 1,800,000 0
0
c
m
...::g
co
m
Dense Select Structural
Select Structural Beams and
1900
1600
-- 1100
9SO
85
85
730
625
1300
1100
1,700,000
1,600,000
c
:::j
Dense No.I Stringers 12 15SO - 775 85 730 1100 1,700,000
No.I 1300 - 675 85 625 925 1,600,000 0
25-3 z
Dense Select Structural 17SO - II SO 85 730 13SO 1,700,000 (See footnotes
Select Structural
Dense No. I
Posts and
Timbersi2
1500 - 1000 85 625 II SO 1,600,000 2 through 9)
1400 - 9SO 85 730 1200 1,700,000
No.I 1200 - 825 85 625 1000 1,600,000
SelectDex Decking 17SO 2000 - - 625 - 1,&00,000
Commercial Dex 14SO 16SO - - 625 - 1,700,000
Dense Select Structural 1850 - 1100 85 730 1300 1,700,000

Select Structural 1600 - 950 85 625 1100 1,600,000
Dense No. I Beams and 1550 - 775 85 730 llOO 1,700,000
No. I Stringers 12 - 925 1,600,000
1350 675 85 625
Dense No.2 1000 - 500 85 730 700 1,400,000
No.2 875 - 425 85 625 600 1,300,000
25-4
Dense Select Structural 1750 - 1150 85 730 1350 1,700,000 (See footnotes
Select Structural 1500 - 1000 85 625 1150 1,600,000 2 through I 0)
Dense No. I Posts and 1400 - 950 85 730 1200 1,700,000
No. I Timbers 12 1200 - 825 85 625 1000 1,600,000
Dense No.2 800 - 550 85 730 550 1,400,000
No.2 700 - 475 85 625 475 1,300,000
Selected Decking Decking - 2000 - - - - 1,800,000

Commercial Decking - 1650 - - - - 1.700.000
Selected Decking Decking - 21SO (Surfaced at IS'Io max. m.c. and 1,900,000
Commercial Decking - 1&00 \Bed at I S'lo max. m.c.) 1,700,000
(Continued)
I\)
-..I
Ul
N
TABLE NO. 2S.A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
.....
Q)

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Comp<e• Comp<el·
Tension olonper- alon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single- Repetlll•• Parallel Horizontal pendlculor Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member to Grain Sheor to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses u... F, Fv Fc.L 21 Fe E 21 GRADED

No. I Stringers 1300 - 675 85 625 925 I ,600.000
25-2
Select Structural Posts and 1500 - 1000 85 625 1150 1,600,000 (See footnotes
No.1 Timbers 1200 - 825 85 625 1000 1,600,000 2 through 9
and 11)
Select Decking 1750 2000 - - 625 - 1,800,000
Commercial 1450 1650 - - 625 - 1,700,000
DOUGLAS FIR SOUTH (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
No. I & Appearance thick 1700 1950 975 90 520 1150 1,400,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 90 520 900 1,300,000
No.3 775 875 450 90 1,100,000
c:
wide 520 550 z
Stud 775 875 450 90 520 550 1,100,000 ;;
25-4 0
Construction 2" to 4" 1000 1150 600 90 520 1000 1,100,000 (See footnotes JJ
Standard thick 550 650 325 90 520 850 1,100,000 2 through 10, s::
Utility 4" wide 275 300 150 90 520 550 1,100,000 13, 15 and 16) m
s;;
Select Structural 2" to4" 1700 1950 1150 90 520 1250 1,400,000 r
No. I & Appearance
No.2
thick
5" and
1450
1200
1650
1350
975
625
90
90
520
520
1150
950
1,400,000
1,300,000 z0
C)
No. 3 and Stud wider 700 800 350 90 520 600 1,100,000
0
0
0
m
...
CD
No.1 1300 - 625 85 520 850 1,200,000 CXI
Stringers CXI
No.2 825 -
425 85 520 525 1,000,000 m
0
Select Structural 1400 - 950 85 520 1050 1,200,000 25-4 ::j
Posts and
No.1
Timbers
1150 - 775 85 520 925 1,200,000 (See footnotes 0
No.2 650 - 400 85 520 425 1,000,000 2 through I 0, z
13, 15 and 16)
Commercial Decking - 1600 - - - - 1,300,000
Selected Decking
Commercial Decking
Decking -- 2050 (Stresses for Decking apply at 1,500,000
1750 15"7o moisture content) 1,300,000
EASTERN HEMLOCK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
Select Structrual 1750 2050 1050 85 550 1350 1,200,000
No.1 2" to 4" 1500 1750 875 85 550 1050 1,200,000
No.2 thick 1250 1450 725 85 550 850 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 675 800 400 85 550 525 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1500 1750 875 85 550 1250 1,200,000
Stud 675 800 400 85 550 525 1,000,000
Construction 2" to4" 900 1050 525 85 550 950 1,000,000
Standard thick 500 575 300 85 550 800 1,000,000 25-8
Utility 4" wide 250 275 150 85 550 525 1,000,000 (See footnotes
Select Structural 2" to 4" 1550 1750 1000 85 550 1200 1,200,000 1 through 9)
No.1 thick 1300 1500 875 85 550 1050 1,200,000
No.2 5" and 1050 1250 550 85 550 900 1,100,000
No.3 wider 625 700 325 85 550 575 1,000,000
Appearance 1300 1500 875 85 550 1250 1,200,000
Stud 625 700 325 85 550 575 1,000,000
Select Structural Beams and 1350 - 925 80 550
550
950 1,200,000
No.1 Stringers 1150 - 775 80 800 1,200,000
No.1 T1mbers 1050 - 700 80 550 875 1,200.000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 2S.A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Contlnued)
Allowable Unit Stresses lor Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
AllOWABLE UNIT STRESSES IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING F0
c-•·
aionper-
c_..
olon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· R-ttllwe·
T-
Pl.. lie I HO<Izonlll pendlcullr p.,....
l OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member toG,.In Sh- loG,.In loG,.In ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Us•• UHI F, F. Fc.l.21 Fe E21 GRADED
EASTERN HEMLOCK-TAMARACK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
EASTERN HEMLOCK-TAMARACK (NOliTH)
1800 2050 1050 85 555 1350 1,300,000
Select Structural
No.I 1500 1750 900 85 555 1050 1,300,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1250 1450 725 85 555 850 1,100,000
No.3 thick 700 800 400 85 555 525 1,000,000
Appearance 2" to 4" 1300 1500 875 85 555 1300 1,300,000 25·2
Stud wide 700 800 400 85 555 525 1,000,000 25·5
and
Construction 2" to 4" 900 1050 525 85 555 975 1,000,000 25-8
Standard thick 500 575 300 85 555 800 1,000,000 (See footnotes
Utility 4" wide 250 275 150 85 555 525 1,000,000 2 through 9,
1050 555 1,300,000 II, 13,
Select Structural 1550 1750 85 1200
No.I 2" to4" 1300 1500 875 85 555 1050 1,300,000 IS and 16)
No.2 thick 1050 1200 S7S 85 555 900 1,100,000
No. 3 and Stud s· and 625 725 325 85 555 575
1300
1,000,000
1,300,000 c
Appearance wider 1300 1500 87S 85 555 z
:;;
Select Structural Beams and 1400 -- 925 80 555 950 1,200,000 0
:tl
No. I Stringers 1150 -- 775 80 555 800 1,200,000 iii:
25-2 ID
Select Structural Posts and 1300 -- 875 80 555 1000 1,200,000
(See footnotes
c
No. I Timbers 1050 -- 700 80 555 875 1,200,000 ;=
I through 9 c
Select Decking 1500 1700 -- -- -- -- 1,300,000
and II)
z
G)
Commercial 1250 1450 -- -- -- -- 1,100,000 0
0
c
m
Select Structural Beams and 1400 - 925 80 555 950 1,200,000 25-5
...
CQ
- 775 80 555 800 1,200,000 25-8 CD
No. I Stringers 1150 CD
(See footnotes m
- 555 1000 1,200,000 2 through 9)
Select Structural Posts and 1300
-
875
700
80
80 555 875 1,200,000 c
No.I Timbers 1050 =4
25-8 0z
Select Decking 1500 1700 - - - - 1,300,000 (See footnotes
Commercial 1250 1450 - - - - 1,100,000 2 through 9)

No.I Stringers 1200 - 600 85 555 800 1,300,000
25-2
Select Structural Posts and 1300 - 875 Ill 555 1000 1,200,000 (See footnote
No.I Timbers 1050 - 700 Ill 555 875 1,200,000 2 through
and II)
9
Select Decking 1500 1700 - - 555 - 1,300,000

Commercial 1250 1450 - - 555 - 1,100,000
EASTERN SOFTWOODS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green, Used at 19% max. m.c.)
25-5
Select Structural 2"to4" 1350 1550 800 70 335 1050 1,200,000 (See footnotes
No.1 thick 1150 1350 675 70 335 825 1,200,000
No.2 2" to4" 950 1100 550 70 335 650 1,100,000 1 through 9)
No.3 wide 525 600 300 70 335 400 1,000,000
Stud 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 335 400 1,000,000 25-5
thick 25-8
2" to 4" (See footnotes
wide 1 through 8)
Construction 2" to4" 700 800 400 70 335 750 1,000,000
Standard thick 375 450 225 70 335 625 1,000,000
Utility 4"wide 175 200 100 70 335 400 1,000,000 25-5
Select Structural 2"to4" 1150 1350 775 70 335 925 1,200,000 (See footnote~
No.1 thick 1000 1150 675 70 335 825 1,200,000 1 through 9)
No.2 5" and 825 950 425 70 335 700 1,100,000
No.3 wider 475 550 250 70 335 450 1,000,000
Appearance 1000 1150 675 70 335 1000 1,200,000
Stud 2" to 4" 475 550 250 70 335 450 1,000,000 25-5
thick 25-8 N
5" and (See footnotes U1
N
.....
CQ
wider
(Continued)
1 through 9)
...:i>
"'
CD
0
Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber- VISUAL GRADING
Extreme fiber in
Size bending Fb Tension Horizontal Compression Compression Modulus U.B.C.STDS
Species and commercial grade UNDER
classification parallel shear perpendicular parallel of WHICH
Single· Repetitive· to grain Fv to grain to grain elasticity GRADED
member member F, Fc.L 21 Fe E 21
uses uses
EASTERN SPRUCE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
No.1 thick 1200 1350 700 70 390 825 1,500,000
No.2 2" to4" 975 1100 575 70 390 650 1,400.000
No.3 wide 550 625 325 70 390 400 1,200,000
Appearance 1200 1350 700 70 390 1000 1,500,000
Stud 550 625 325 70 390 400 1,200,000 25-5
25-8
Construction 2" to 4" 700 800 400 70 390 750 1,200,000
thick 400 1,200,000
(See footnotes
Standard 450 225 70 390 625
4"wide 390 1 through 9)
Utility 175 225 100 70 400 1,200,000
Select Structural 2" to 4" 1200 1350 BOO 70 390 925 1,500,000
No.I thick 1000 1150 675 70 390 825 1,500,000
No.2 5" and B25 950 425 70 390 700 1,400,000 c:
No.3 wider 475 550 250 70 390 450 1,200,000 z
Appearance 1000 1150 675 70 390 1000 1,500,000 ::;;
Stud 475 550 250 70 390 450 1,200,000 0
:u
Select Structural
No.I
Beams and
Stringers
1050
900 -
- 725
600
65
65
390
390
750
625
I ,400,000
1,400,000
~
I:D
Select Structural Posts and 1000 - 675 65 390 775 1,400,000 c:
No.I Timbers BOO - 550 65 390 675 I ,400,000 r=c
Select Decking - 1300 - -- - - 1,500,000 25-8
z
Commercial - 1100 - - - I ,400,000 (See footno~1s
1 throuoh 9 t::')
0
0
c
m
....
CD
i
m
0
3
EASTERN WHITE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.) 0
EASTERN WHITE PINE (NORTH) z
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1350 675 65 350 850 1,200,000 and 25-8
No.2 thick 950 1100 550 65 350 675 1,100,000 (See footnotes
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 65 350 400 1,000,000 2 through 9,
Appearance wide 1150 1350 675 65 350 1000 1,200,000 12 and 14)
Stud 2" to 4" thick 525 600 300 65 350 400 1,000,000 25-2,25-5
2" to4" wide and 25-8
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4" 700 800 400 65 350 750 1,000,000 2 through 9,11
Standard thick 375 450 225 65 350 625 1,000,000 12, 13 and 14)
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 65 350 400 1,000,000

No.I 2" to 4" 1000 1150 675 65 350 850 1,200,000 and 25-8
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 65 350 450 1,000,000 2 through 9,
Appearance wider 1000 1150 675 65 350 1000 1,200,000 II, 12 and 14)
No.I Stringers 875 - 600 65 350 575 1,100,000 (See footnotes
2 through 9)
No.I Timbers 800 - 525 65 350 625 1,100,000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued) N
Ul
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504) !
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING F•
Compres- Comprea-
Tension slon par· slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pancllcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc.L 21 F, E 21 GRADED
25-2
Select and 25-8
Decking 900 1050 - - - - 1,200,000 (See footnotes
Commercial 775 875 -- - - - 1,100,000 2 through 9,
II and 12)
EASTERN WOODS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1300 650 60 270 675 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 525 60 270 550 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 500 575 300 60 270 325 900,000 2S-S
Stud wide 500 575 300 60 270 325 900,000 and 25-8
(See footnotes c:
Construction 2" to 4" 650 750 400 60 270 625 900,000 2 through 9 z
~:JJ
Standard thick 375 425 225 60 270 500 900,000 13, IS and 16)
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 60 270 325 900,000
Appearance 2" to 4" thick 1100 1300 650 60 270 825 1,100,000 s::
2• to 4" wide Ill
c:
Select Structural 1150 1300 750 60 270 750 1,100,000 r=0
No.I
No.2
2" to 4"
thick
950
775
1100
900
650
425
60
60
270
270
675
575
1,100,000
1,000,000
2S-5
(See footnotes
z
C)
No. 3 and Stud s· and 450 525 2SO 60 270 375 900,000 2 through 9, 0
Appearance wider 950 1100 650 60 270 825 1,100,000 15andl6) 0
0
m
...
CD
ENGELMANN SPRUCE-ALPINE FIR (ENGELMANN SPRUCE-LODGEPOLE PINE) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
g:
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1350 675 70 320 750 1,300,000 m
No.2 thick 950 1100 550 70 320 600 1,100,000 c
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 320 375 1,000,000 3
Appearance wide 1150 1350 675 70 320 900 1,300,000 0
Stud 525 600 300 70 320 375 1,000,000 z
Construction 2" to 4" 700 800 400 70 320 675 1,000,000
Standard thick 375 450 225 70 320 550 1,000,000
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 70 320 375 1,000,000

No.I 2" to4" 1000 1150 675 70 320 750 1,300,000 (See footnotes
No.2 thick 825 950 425 70 320 625 1,100,000 2 through 10,
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 70 320 400 1,000,000 13, 15 and 16)
Beams and -
No. I Stringers 875 450 65 320 550 1,100,000
No.2 575 - 275 65 320 350 900,000
Posts and
No. I 800 - 525 65 320 625 1,100,000
Timbers
No.2 450 - 300 65 320 275 900,000

Selected Decking Decking - 1400 (Surfaced at 150Jo max. m.c. and 1,300,000
Commercial Decking - 1200 used at 150Jo max. m.c.) 1,200,000
(Continued)

EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Compnts·
Tension sion per· sion MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parella I Horizontal pendicular Parella I OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member to Grain Shear to Grein to Grein ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
HEM-FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)

No.I 2" 10 4" 1400 1600 825 75 405 1050 1,500,000
No.2 thick 1150 1350 675 75 405 825 1,400,000
No.3 2" to 4" 650 725 375 75 405 500 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1400 1600 825 75 405 1250 1,500,000
Stud 650 725 375 75 405 500 1,200,000 25-3 and 25-4
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4" 825 975 500 75 405 925 1,200,000 2 through 9,
Standard thick 475 550 275 75 405 775 1,200,000 II, 12, 13
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 75 405 500 1,200,000 15 and 16)

No.I 2" to 4" 1200 1400 Ill() 75 405 1050 1,500,000 c
No.2 thick 1000 1150 525 75 405 875 1,400,000 z
No. 3 and Stud
Appearance
S"and
wider
575
1200
675
1400
300
Ill()
75
75
405
405
550
1250
1,200,000
1,500,000 ~:a
3:
IJI
No.I Stringers 1050 - 525 70 405 750 1,300,000 c
;::::
Select Structural Posts and 1200 - 800 70 405 975 1,300,000 25-3 c
No.I Timbers 975 - 650 70 405 850 1,300,000 (See footnotes
2 through 9,
zC)
Select Dex Decking 1400 1600 - - 405 - 1,500,000 IS and 16) 0
Commercial Dex 1150 1350 - - 405 - 1,400,000 0
c
m
.....
IQ
Oil
Oil
m
c
::::j
0
z

No. I Stringers 1050 - 525 70 405 775 1,300,000 25-4
No.2 675 - 325 70 405 475 1,100,000 (See footnotes
2 through 9.
Select Structural 15 and 16)
1200 - 800 70 405 975 1.300.000
No. I Posts and
Timbers 950 - 650 70 405 850 1,300.000
No.2 525 - 350 70 405 375 1.100,000

No.I Stringers 12 1050 - 725 70 405 775 1,300,000 25-2
(See footnotes
Select Structural Posts and 1200 - 800 70 405 975 1,300,000 2 through 121
No.I Timbers 950 - 650 70 405 850 1,300,000

25-2
Selected Decking Decking - 1700 (Surfaced at 15"7o max. m.c. and 1,600,000 and 25-4
Commercial Decking - 1450 used at 15% max. m.c.) 1,400,000 (See footnotes
2 through 12)
Select Decking 1350 1550 - - 405 - 1,500,000
Commercial 1150 1300 - - 405 - 1,400,000
!Continued)
Extreme fiber in
bending Fb Tension Compression Compression Modulus U.B.C.STOS
Species and Size Horizontal
parallel perpendicular parallel of UNDER
commercial grade classification Single· Repetitive· to grain
shear
to grain to gra1n elasticity WHICH
member member F,
Fv Fc-L E 21 GRADED
21 Fe
uses uses
HEM-FIR (NORTH) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
No.1 thick 1350 1550 800 75 370 1050 1,500,000
No.2 2" to 4" 1100 1300 650 75 370 800 1,400,000
No.3 wide 625 700 350 75 370 500 1,200,000
Appearance 1350 1550 800 75 370 1250 1,500,000
Stud 625 700 350 75 370 500 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 800 925 475 75 370 925 1,200,000
Standard thick 450 525 275 75 370 775 1,200,000
25-2
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 75 370 500 1,200,000
(See footnotes
Select Structural 2" to4" 1350 1550 900 75 370 1150 1,500,000 1 through 9 c
No.1 thick 1150 1350 775 75 370 1050 1,500,000 and 11) z
~
No.2 5" end 950 1100 500 75 370 850 1,400,000
No.3 wider 550 650 300 75 370 550 1,200,000
Appearance 1150 1350 775 75 370 1250 1,500,000 ::tl
Stud 550 650 300 75 370 550 1,200,000 s::
Select Structural Beams and 1250 - 725 70 370 900 1,300,000 til
1000 - 500 370 750 1,300,000 c
No.1 Stringers 70 ;=
Select Structural Posts and 1150 - 775 70 370 950 1,300,000 c
No.1 T1mbers 925 - 625 70 370 850 1,300,000 z
C)
Select Decking 1350 1500 - - 370 - 1,500,000
Commercial 1100 1300 - - 370 - 1,400,000 0
0
~
...
CD
CD
CD
m
IDAHO WHITE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.)
c
::::j
Select structural 1350 1550 775 70 315 1100 1,400,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 650 70 315 875 1,400,000 0z
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 70 315 675 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 315 425 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1150 1300 650 70 315 1050 1,400,000
Stud 525 600 300 70 315 425 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 675 775 400 70 315 775 1,200,000

Standard thick 375 425 225 70 315 650 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 70 315 425 1,200,000
Select Structural 1150 1300 n5 70 315 950 1,400,000 25-4

No.I 2" to 4" 975 1100 650 70 315 875 1,400,000 {See footnotes
No.2 thick 800 925 425 70 315 725 1,300,000 2 through 10
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 70 315 450 1,200,000 13, 15 and 16)

Beams and
No. I 850 - 425 65 315 650 1.300,000
Stringers
No.2 550 - 275 65 315 400 1,100,000
Posts and
No. I Timbers 775 - 525 65 315 700 I ,300,000
No.2 450 - 300 65 315 325 1,100.000
Sdecled Dec~ing Decking - 1300 - - - - 1,400,000

Selected Decking Decking - 1400 (Surfaced at 15"1o max. m.c. and 1,500,000
Commercial Decking - 1150 used at 15"1o max. m.c.) 1,400,000
(Continued)
1\)
CD
CD Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber- VISUAL GRADING
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Com pres-
Tension slonper- slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single- Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlc:ular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI- member member to Grein Shear to Grein to Grein ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv F.,J- 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
LODGEPOLE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"lo max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1300 1500 750 70 400 900 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1050 1200 625 70 400 700 1,200,000
No.3 2" to 4" 600 675 350 70 400 425 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1300 1500 750 70 400 1050 1,300,000
Stud 600 675 350 70 400 425 1,000,000
Construction 2" to 4" 775 875 450 70 400 800 1,000,000

Standard thick 425 500 250 70 400 675 1,000,000
Utility 4" wide 200 225 125 70 400 425 1,000,000

No.I 2" to4" 1100 1300 750 70 400 900 1,300,000 (See footnotes c
No.2 thick 925 1050 475 70 400 750 1,200,000 2 through I 0, z
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 625 TIS 400 475 1,000,000
~
525 70 13, 15 and 16)
:D
Select Structural Beams and 1150 - 700 65 400 800 1,100,000 3:
No. I Stringers 975 - 500 65 400 675 1,100,000 Ill
No.2 625 - 325 65 400 425 900,000 c
r
c
Select Structural
No. I
Posts and
Timbers
1100
875
-
-
725
600
65
65
400
400
850
725
1,100,000
1,100,000 zC)
No.2 500 - 350 65 400 350 900.000
0
0
c
m
...
co
Ill
Ill
m
0
2S-4
=4
(See footnotes 0
2 through 10,
z
Selected Decking Decking - 1550 (Surfaced at 150Jo max. m.c. and 1,400,000 13, IS and 16)
Commercial Decking - 1300 used at 150Jo max. m.c.) 1,200,000
MOUNTAIN HEMLOCK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
Select Structural 17SO 2000 1000 95 570 1250 1,300,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1450 1700 850 95 570 1000 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1200 1400 700 95 570 775 1,100,000
No.3 2" to 4" 675 775 400 95 570 475 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1450 1700 850 95 570 1200 1,300,000
Stud 675 775 400 95 570 475 1,000,000 2S-3
and 2S-4
Construction 2" to 4" 875 1000 525 95 570 900 1,000,000 (See footnotes
Standard thick 500 575 275 95 570 725 1,000,000 2 through 9,
Utility 4" wide 225 275 125 95 570 475 1,000,000 13, IS and 16)

No.I 2" to 4" 1250 1450 8SO 95 570 1000 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1050 1200 sso 95 570 825 1,100,000
No.3 and Stud s· and 625 700 32S 95 570 525 1,000,000
Appearance wider 1250 1450 8SO 95 570 1200 1,300,000
No.I Stringers 1100 - 550 90 570 725 1,100,000
2S-3
Select Structural Posts and 1250 - 825 90 570 925 I ,100,000
(See footnotes
No.I Timbers 1000 - 675 90 570 800 I, 100,000 2 through 9)
Select Dex Decking 1450 1650 - - 570 - 1,300,000
Commercial Dex 1200 1400 - - 570 - 1,100,000
1\)
Ill
co (Continued)
N Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
CD
0 (Normal loading. See also Section 2504)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Compres· Compres-
Tension sion per· sion MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendicular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses Fr Fv Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
Select Structural 1350 ~
775 90 570 875 1,000.000

Beams and
No.I 1100 ~
550 90 570 750 1,100,000

Stringers
No.2 725 ~
375 90 570 475 900 000

Select Structural 1250 ~
825 90 570 925 1,100,000

Posts and
No. l 1000 ~
675 90 570 800 l, 100,000 25-4

Timbers 900,000
No.2 575 ~
375 90 570 375 (See footnotes

Selected Decking Decking - 1650 - - - - 1,300,000 2 through I 0)
Selected Decking Decking - 1800 (Surfaced at l5"7o max. m.c. and 1,300,000
Commercial Decking - 1500 used at l5"lo max. m.c.) 1,200,000
MOUNTAIN HEMLOCK-HEM-FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"lo max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 75 405 1000 1,300,000
No.2 thick 1150 1350 675 75 405 775 1,100,000 c:
No.3 2" to 4" 650 725 375 75 405 475 1,000,000 z
Appearance wide 1400 1600 825 75 405 1200 1,300,000
1,000,000
=n
Stud 650 725 375 75 405 475 0
:::0
Construction 2" to 4" 825 975 500 75 405 900 1,000,000 s:::
Standard thick 475 550 275 75 405 725 1,000,000 25-4 ID
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 75 405 475 1,000,000 (See footnotes !;;;
2 through 10, r
c
Select Structural
No.I
2" to4"
thick
1400
1200
1650
1400
950
lro
75
75
405
405
llOO
1000
1,300,000
1,300,000
13, 15 and 16)
z
G")
No.2 1000 1150 525 75 405 825 1,100,000
5" and 575 675 300 75 405 525 1,000,000 0
No. 3 and Stud
Appearance
wider
1200 1400 lro 75 405 1200 1,300,000 0
c
m
...
Select Structural Beams and 1250 - 725 70 405 875 1,100,000 ~
No. I Stringers 1050 - 525 70 405 750 1,100,000 CXI
No.2 675 - 325 70 405 475 900,000 m
- 1,100,000
c
Select Structural 1200 800 70 405 925
No. I
Posts and
950 - 650 70 405 800 1,100,000
25-4
(See footnotes
3
Timbers 0
No.2 525 - 350 70 405 375 900,000 2 through 10, z
13, 15 and 16)
Selected Decking Decking - 1700 (Surfaced at 15"To max. m.c. and 1,300,000
Commercial Decking - 1450 used at 15"To max. m.c.) 1,200,000
NORTHERN ASPEN (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"To max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1250 650 60 320 675 1,400,000
No.2 thick 900 1050 525 60 320 525 1,200,000
No.3 2" to 4" 500 575 275 60 320 325 1,100,000
Appearance wide 1100 1250 650 60 320 800 1,400,000
Stud 500 575 275 60 320 325 1,100,000 25-2
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4" 650 750 375 60 320 600 !,100,000 2 through 9
Standard thick 350 425 200 60 320 500 1,100,000 II, 13
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 60 320 325 1,100,000 15 and 16)
Select Structural 1100 1250 750 60 320 750 I ,400,000

No.I 2" to 4" 950 1100 625 60 320 675 1,400,000
No.2 thick 775 900 .()() 60 320 575 1,200,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 450 525 250 60 320 350 1,100,000
(Continued)
N
co
N TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres· Compres·
Tension sion per· slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetitive· Parallel Horizontal pendicular Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIH member member to Grain Shear to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc_L 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
NORTHERN PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
No. I 2" to 4" 1400 1600 825 70 435 975 1,400,000
No.2 thick 1150 1300 675 70 435 775 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 625 725 375 70 435 475 1,100,000
Appearance wide 1200 1400 800 70 435 1150 1,400,000
Stud 625 725 375 70 435 475 1,100,000
Construction 2" to 4" 825 950 475 70 435 875 1,100,000 25-5
Standard thick 450 525 275 70 435 725 1,100,000 and 25-8
Utility 4" wide 225 250 125 70 435 475 1,100,000 (See footnotes
2 through 9,
c:
Select Structural 2" to4" 1400 1600 950 70 435
435
1100 1,400,000 13, 15 and 16) z
No.I 1200 1400 !00 1,400,000
~
thick 70 975
No.2 5" and 950 1100 525 70 435 825 1,300,000
No. 3 and Stud wider 575 650 300 70 435 525 1,100,000 ::0
Appearance 1200 1400 !00 70 435 1150 1,400,000 3:
til
Select Structural Beams and 1250 - 850 65 435 850 1,300,000 c:
No.I Stringers 1050 - 700 65 435 725 1,300,000 r=c
Select Structural Posts and 1150 - 800 65 435 900 1,300,000 zC'l
No.I Timbers 950 - 650 65 435 800 1,300,000
0
Select Decking 1350 1550 - - - - 1,400,000 25-8 0
Commercial ll50 1300 - - - - 1,300,000 (See footnotes c
m
2 through 9)
....
8lm
c
=i
0z
NORTHERN SPECIES (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 3" 1150 1300 675 65 350 825 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 65 350 650 1,000,000
No.3 2"to4" 525 600 300 65 350 400 900,000
Appearance wide 1150 1300 675 65 350 975 1,100,000
Stud 525 600 300 65 350 400 900,000
25-2
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 65 350 400 900,000 II, 13,
IS and 16)
No.I 2" to 4" 975 1150 650 65 350 825 1,100,000
No.2 thick goo 925 425 65 350 675 1,000,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 65 350 425 900,000
Select Decking 900 1050 - - 350 - 1,100,000

Commercial 775 875 - - 350 - 1,000,000
(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Compres· Compres·
Tension sion per· slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetitive· Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
NORTHERN WHITE CEDAR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
Select Structural 1150 1350 700 65 370 875 800,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1000 1150 600 65 370 675 800,000
No.2 thick 825 950 500 65 370 550 700,000
No.3 2" to 4" 450 525 275 65 370 325 600,000
Appearance wide 850 1000 575 65 370 825 800,000
Stud 450 525 275 65 370 325 600,000
Construction 2" to 4" 600 675 350 65 370 625 600,000

Standard thick 325 375 200 65 370 500 600,000
Utility 4" wide 150 175 100 65 370 325 600,000 25-8
(See footnotes
Select Structural 1000 1150 675 65 370 775 800,000 2 through 9, c:
No.I 2" to 4" 850 1000 575 65 370 675 800,000 13, 15 and 16) z
No.2
No. 3 and Stud
thick
5" and
700
425
825
475
375
225
65
65
370
370
575
375
700,000
600,000
~
:D
Appearance wider 850 1000 575 65 370 825 800,000 ~
Ill
Select Structural Beams and 900 - 600 60 370 600 700,000 c:
No.I Stringers 750 - 500 60 370 500 700,000 j=
c
Select Structural Posts and 850 - 575 60 370 650 700,000 z
C)
No.I Timbers 675 - 450 60 370 550 700,000
0
Select Decking 975 1100 - - - - 800,000 0
Commercial 825 950 - - - - 700,000
~
....
co
I»
I»
m
PONDEROSA PINE-SUGAR PINE (PONDEROSA PINE-LODGEPOLE PINE)(Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at I 9"1o max. m.c.) c
Select Structural 1400 1650 825 70 375 1050 1,200,000 :::j
No.I 2" to 4" 1200 1400 700 70 375 850 1,200,000 0
No.2 thick 1000 1150 575 70 375 675 1,100,000 z
No.3 2" to 4" 550 625 325 70 375 400 1,000,000
Appearance wide 1200 1400 700 70 375 1000 1,200,000 25-2
Stud 550 625 325 70 375 400 1,000,000 and25-4
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to 4" 725 825 425 70 375 775 1,000,000 2 through 13,
Standard thick 400 450 225 70 375 625 1,000,000 15 and 16)
Utility 4" wide 200 225 100 70 375 400 1,000,000

No.I 2" to4" 1050 1200 700 70 375 850 1,200,000
No.2 thick 850 975 450 70 375 700 1,100,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 500 575 250 70 375 450 1,000,000

No. I Stringers 925 - 450 65 375 625 1,100,000
No.2 600 - 300 65 375 400 900,000
No. I Timbers 825 - 550 65 375 700 1,100,000
No.2 475 - 325 65 375 325 900,000 25-2
and 25-4
Selected Decking Decking - 1350 - - - - 1,200,000 (See footnotes
Commercial Decking - 1150 - - - - 1,100,000 2 through 13)
Selected Decking Decking - 1450 (Surfaced at 15"1o max. m.c. and 1,300,000
Commercial Decking - 1250 used at 15"1o max. m.c.) 1,100,000
Select Decking 12002{) 1450 - - 375 - 1,300,000
Commercial 100020 1250 - - 375 - 1,100,000
(Continued)
Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber- VISUAL GRADING
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres· Compres·
Tension slon per· slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single· Repetitive· Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. Fc.l. 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
RED PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.)
No.I 1200 1350 700 70 440 825 1,300,000
2" to 3" 1,200,000
No.2 975 1100 575 70 440 650
thick 1,000,000
No.3 525 625 325 70 440 400
2" to 4" 1,300,000
Appearance 1200 1350 700 70 440 975
wide 1,000,000
Stud 525 625 325 70 440 400
Construction 2" to 4" 700 800 400 70 440 750 1,000,000

Standard thick 400 450 225 70 440 600 1,000,000
25-2
Utility 4" wide 175 225 100 70 440 400 1,000,000
(See footnotes
2 through 9, c
Select Structural 2" to4" 1200 1350 775 70 440 900 1,300,000
11, 13, 15 z
No.I thick 1000 1150 675 70 440 825 1,300,000
and 16) =n
No.2 5" and 825 950 425 70 440 675 1,200,000 0
No. 3 and Stud wider 500 550 250 70 440 425 1,000,000 :II
Appearance 1000 1150 675 70 440 975 1,300,000 s::
lXI
Select Structural Beams and 1050 - 625 65 440 725 1,100,000 !:
No.I Stringers 875 - 450 65 440 600 1,100,000 r
c
Select Structural Posts and 1000 - 675 65 440 775 1,100,000 z
G")
No.I Timbers 800 - 550 65 440 675 1,100,000
0
Select Decking 1150 1350 - - 440 - 1,300,000 0
Commercial 975 1100 - - 440 - 1,200,000 ~
...
im
0
3
0
z
SITKA SPRUCE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1350 1550 775 75 435 925 1,500,000
No.2 thick 1100 1250 650 75 435 725 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 600 700 350 75 435 450 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1350 1500 750 75 435 1100 1,500,000
Stud 600 700 350 75 435 450 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 800 925 475 75 435 825 1,200,000

Standard thick 450 500 250 75 435 675 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 200 250 125 75 435 450 1,200,000 25-3
(See footnotes
Select Structural 1350 1550 'X)() 75 435 1000 1,500,000 2 through 9,
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 715 75 435 925 1,500,000 13, 15 and 16)
No.2 thick 925 1050 500 75 435 775 1,300,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 525 600 275 75 435 500 1,200,000

No.I Stringers 1000 - 500 70 435 675. 1,300,000

No.I Timbers 925 - 600 70 435 750 1,300,000

Commercial Dex 1100 1250 - - 435 - 1,300,000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 2S.A·1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Contlnued)

EXTREME ABER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Compres-
Tension slonper· slon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single- R-tlllv• Parallel Horizontal pencllcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. F~21 Fe E 21 GRADED
SOUTHERN PINE (Surfaced at 150Jt moisture content, K.D. Used at 150Jo max. m.c.)
No.I 1850 2100 1050 105 565 1450 1,800,000
No. I Dense 2" to 4" 2150 2450 1250 105 660 1700 1,900,000
No.2 thick 1550 1750 900 95 565 1150 1,600,000
No.2 Dense 2" to 4" 1800 2050 1050 95 660 1350 I ,700,000
No.3 wide 850 975 500 95 565 675 1,500,000
No.3 Dense 1000 1150 575 95 660 800 1,500,000
Stud 850 975 500 95 565 675 1,500.000
25-6
(See footnotes
Construction 2" to4" 1100 1250 650 105 565 1300 1,500,000 3, 4, 9,13,
Standard thick 625 725 375 95 565 1050 1,500,000 15, 16, c:
Utility 4" wide 275 300 175 95 565 675 1,500,000 18and 19) z
Select Structural 1850 2150 1200 95 565 1600 1,800,000 ~
:rJ
565
3:::
No. I 1600 1850 1050 95 1450 1,800,000
No. I Dense Ill
2" to4" 1850 2150 1250 95 660 1700 1,900,000 c:
No.2 thick 1300 1500 675 95 565 1200 1,600,000 ;=
No.2 Dense 5" and 1550 1750 800 95 660 1400 1,700,000 0
No.3
No.3 Dense
wider 750
875
875
1000
400
450
95
95
565
660
725
850
1,500,000
1,500,000
z
Q
Stud 800 900 400 95 565 725 1,500,000 0
0
!il
Dense Standard Decking 2"to4" 2150 2450 1250 105 660 1700 1,900,000
...
CD
Select Decking thick 1550 1750 900 95 565 1150 1,600,000 g:
Dense Select Decking 2" and wider 1800 2050 1050 95 660 1350 1,700,000 m
Commercial Decking
Dense Commercial
Decking 1550 1750 900 95 565 1150 1,600,000 25-6 (See
footnotes 4
c
Decking 1800 2050 1050 95 660 1350 1,700,000 9, 15, 16, 3
0
Dense Structural 86 2"to4" 2800 3250 1900 165 660 2300 1,900,000
18andl9) z
Dense Structural 72 thick 2400 2750 1600 135 660 1950 1,900,000
Dense Structural 65 2150 2450 1450 125 660 1750 1,900,000
I
KD-15orMC-15
Industrial 86 KD 2400 2750 1600 160 415 1950 1,800,000
Dense Ind. 86 KD 2800 3250 1900 160 475 2300 1,900,000
Industrial 72 KD I" to 4" thick 2050 2350 1350 135 415 1650 1,800,000
Dense Ind. 72 KD 2400 2750 1600 135 475 1950 1,900,000
Industrial 65 KD 1850 2100 1200 125 415 1500 1,800,000
Dense Ind. 65 KD 2150 2450 1400 125 475 1750 1,900,000
SOUTHERN PINE (Surfaced dry. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
No. I 2"to4" 1700 1950 1000 100 565 1250 1,700,000
No. I Dense thick 2000 2300 1150 100 660 1450 1,800,000
No.2 2" to4" 1400 1650 825 90 565 975 1,600,000
No.2 Dense wide 1650 1900 975 90 660 1150 1,600,000
No.3 775 900 450 90 565 575 1,400,000 25-6
No.3 Dense 925 1050 525 90 660 675 1,500,000 (See foot-
Stud 775 900 450 90 565 575 1,400,000 notes 2
4, 9, 13,
Construction 2"to4" 1000 1150 600 100 565 1100 1,400,000 15, 16,
Standard thick 575 675 350 90 565 900 1,400,000 18and 19)
Utility 4"wide 275 300 150 90 565 575 1,400,000
No.I 2"to4" 1450 1700 975 90 565 1250 1,700,000
No. I Dense thick 1700 2000 1150 90 660 1450 1,800,000
No.2 5" and 1200 1400 625 90 565 1000 1,600,000
No.2 Dense wider 1400 1650 725 90 660 1200 1,600,000
No.3 700 800 350 90 565 625 I ,400,000
No.3 Dense 825 925 425 90 660 725 1,500,000
Stud 725 850 350 90 565 625 1.400,000
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSE5-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-( Continued)
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504.)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDINGFb
U.B.C. STDS.
Tension Compression Compression MODULUS OF UNDER
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASSI· Single- Repetitive- Parallel to Horizontal Parpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION member Uses member Uses GralnF1 Shear Fv to Grain Fc.:..21 Grain Fe E21 GRADED
Dense Standard Decking 2"to4" 2000 2300 1150 100 660 1450 1,800,000
Select Decking thick 1400 1650 825 90 565 975 1,600,000
Dense Select Decking 2" and wider 1650 1900 975 90 660 1150 1,600,000
Commercial Decking Decking 1400 1650 825 90 565 975 1,600,000
Dense Commercial 25-6
Decking Decking 1650 1900 975 90 660 1150 1,600,000 (See foot-
notes 3,
Dense Structural 86 2"to4" 2600 3000 1750 155 660 2000 1,800,000 4, 9, 13,
Dense Structural 72 thick 2200 2550 1450 130 660 1650 1,800,000 15, 16, 17,
Dense Structural 65 2000 2800 1300 115 660 1500 1,800,000 18andl9)
KD-19 or S-Dry
Industrial 86 2250 2600 1500 155 415 1700 1,700,000 *
Dense Ind. 86 2600 3000 1750 155 475 2000 I ,800,000
lndustrial72 I" to 4" thick 1900 2200 1250 130 415 1400 1,700,000
Dense Ind. 72 2200 2550 1450 130 475 1650 I ,800,000 ':l:
~
Industrial 65 1700 1950 1100 115 415 1250 1,700,000

~
c:
Dense Ind. 65 2000 2300 1300 115 475 1500 1.800,000
·.• z
SOUTHERN PINE (Surfaced green. Used any condition.)
:;;
0
Select Strucrural 1600 1850 925 95 375 1050 1.500,000 :c
Dense Select Structural 1850 2150 1100 95 440 1200 1,600,000 iii:
No.1 21i2''to4" 1350 1550 800 95 375 825 1,500,000 m
No. I Dense thick 1600 1800 925 95 440 950 1,600,000 c:
No.2 2Ii2''to4" 1150 1300 675 85 375 650 1,400,000 ;=
0
No.2 Dense
No.3
wide 1350
625
1500
725
775
375
85
85
440
375
750
400
I ,400,000
1,200,000 z
G')
No.3 Dense 725 850 425 85 440 450 I ,300,000
Srud 625 725 375 85 375 400 1,200,000 0
0
Construction 2112" to 4" 825 925 475 95 375 725 1.200,000 0
Standard thick 475 525 275 85 375 600 1.200.000 m
Utility 4"wide 200 259 125 85 375 400 1,200.000
...
ID
CXI
CXI
m
c
:::::j
0
z
No.I 1200 1350 775 85 375 825 1,500,000
No. I Dense 21/2''to4" 1400 1600 925 85 440 950 1,600,000
No.2 thick 975 1100 500 85 375 675 I ,400,000
No.2 Dense 5" and 1150 1300 600 85 440 800 I ,400,000
No.3 wider 550 650 300 85 375 425 1,200,000
No.3 Dense 650 750 350 85 440 475 1,300,000
Stud 575 675 300 85 375 425 1,200,000
Dense Standard Decking 21i2''to4 1600 1800 925 95 440 950 1,600,000 25-6
Select Decking thick 1150 1300 675 85 375 650 1,400,000 (See foot-
Dense Select Decking 2" and wider 1350 1500 775 85 440 750 I ,400,000 notes 3,
Commercial Decking Decking 1150 1300 675 85 375 650 1,400,000 4, 9, 13,
Dense Commercial 15, 16, 17,
Decking 1350 1500 775 85 440 750 1,400,000 18 and 19)
No. I SR 1350 - 875 110 375 775 1,500,000
No. I Dense SR 5" and 1550 - 1050 110 440 925 1,600,000
No.2 SR thicker 1100 - 725 95 375 625 1,400,000
No. 2 Dense SR 1250 - 850 95 440 725 I ,400,000
Dense Structural 86 2112" and 2100 2400 1400 145 440 1300 1,600,000
Dense Structural 72 thicker 1750 2050 1200 120 440 1100 1,600,000
Dense Structural 65 1600 1800 1050 110 440 1000 1.600,000 ..
MC over 19o/c
Industrial 86 1800 2050 1200 140 270 1150 1.500,000
Dense Ind. 86 2100 2400 1400 140 315 1300 1.600,000
Industrial 72 2112" and 1500 1750 1000 120 270 950 1,500.000
Dense Ind.72 thicker 1750 2050 1200 120 315 1100 1.600.000
Industrial 65 1350 1500 900 110 270 850 1.500.000
Dense lnd. 65 1600 1800 1050 110 315 1000 1.600.000 ~
(Continued)
w
0
N
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com prea- Compre•
Tension alon per- alon MODULUS U.B.C.STDS
SIZE Single- Repetlllv• Parallel Horizontal pendlculer Parallel OF UNDER
SPECIES AND CLASSIFI· member member to Grain Sheer to Grain to Grain ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uaes Uaes F, F. Fc-1- 21 Fe E21 GRADED
SPRUCE-PINE-FIR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"1o max. m.c.)

Select Structural 1450 1650 850 70 425 llOO 1,500,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1200 1400 725 70 425 875 1,500,000
No.2 thick 1000 1150 600 70 425 675 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 550 650 325 70 425 425 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1200 1400 700 70 425 1050 1,500,000
Stud 550 650 325 70 425 425 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 725 850 425 70 425 775 1,200,000
Standard thick 400 475 225 70 425 650 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 175 225 100 70 425 425 1,200,000 25-2
(See footnotes
Selec1 Strue1ural 1250 1450 825 70 425 975 1,500,000 2 through 9, c
No.I 2" to4" 1050 1200 700 70 425 875 1,500,000 11, 13, z
No.2
No. 3 and Stud
thick
s· and
875
500
1000
575
450
"1:15
70
70
425
425
725
450
1,300,000
1,200,000
!Sand 16)
~:u
Appearance wider 1050 1200 700 70 425 1050 1,500,000 31:
Ill
Select Structural Beams and 1100 - 650 65 425 775 1,300,000 c
No.I Stringers 900 - 450 65 425 625 1,300,000 i=
c
Select Structural
No.I
Posts and
Timbers
1050
850 -
- 700
550
65
65
425
425
800
700
1,300,000
1,300,000
zC)
0
Select Decking 1200 1400 - - 425 - 1,500,000 0
Commercial 1000 1150 - - 425 - 1,300,000 ~
....
CD
I
m
WESTERN CEDARS (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"lo max. m.c.) 0
::::j
WESTERN CEDARS (NORTH)
Select Structural 1500 1750 875 75 425 1200 1,100,000 0z
No.I 2" to 3" 1300 1500 750 75 425 950 1,100,000
No.2 thick 1050 1200 625 75 425 750 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 600 675 350 75 425 450 900,000
Appearance wide 1300 1500 750 75 425 1100 1,100,000
Stud 600 675 350 75 425 450 900,000 25-2,25-3
and 25-4
Utility 4" wide 200 225 125 75 425 450 900,000 II, 12 and 13)

No.I 2" to 4" 1100 1300 750 75 425 950 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 475 75 425 800 1,000,000
No. 3 and Stud 5" and S2S 625 275 75 425 500 900,000
No.I Stringers 925 - 475 70 425 725 1,000,000 and 25-3
(See footnotes
Select Structural Posts and 1050 - 700 70 425 900 1,000,000 2 through 9,
No.I Timbers 850 - 575 70 425 800 1,000,000 II and 12)
25-3
Select Dex Decking 1200 1400 - - 425 - 1,100,000 (See footnotes
Commercial Dex 1050 1200 - - 425 - 1,000,000 2 through 9)
25-2
Select 1200 1400 - - 425 - 1,100,000 (See footnotes
Commercial Decking 1050 1200 - - 425 - 1,000,000 2 through 9
and II
(Continued) N
Ul
w
0
w !
TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSEs-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-(Continued)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres· Compres-
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, F. F.,_L 21 Fe E 21 GRADED

No. I Stringers 975 - 475 70 425 725 1,000,000
No.2 625 - 325 70 425 475 800,000

No. I Posts and - 800 1,000,000
875 600 70 425 25-4
No.2 Timbers - 425 375 8M,OOO (See footnotes
500 350 70
2 through I 0)
Selected Decking Decking - 1550 (Surfaced at 150Jo max. m.c. and 1,100,000
Commercial Decking - 1300 used at 15"7o max. m.c.) 1,000,000 c:
WESTERN HEMLOCK (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 1~% max. m.c.) z
WESTERN HEMLOCK (NOIITH)
25-2
~:tl
2" to 4" 1550 1800 900 90 410 1150 1,600,000
No.I
No.2 thick 1300 1450 750 90 410 900 1,400,000 (See s::
2" to 4" 410 1,300,000 footnote Ill Ill
No.3 700 800 425 90 550
wide 1550 1800 900 90 410 1350 1,600,000 25-3 c:
Appearance j=
Stud 700 800 425 90 410 550 1,300,000 and 25-4
0
Construction 2" to 4" 925 1050 550 90 410 1050 1,300,000
(See footnotes
2 through 9. z
C)
Standard thick 525 600 300 90 410 850 1,300,000 13, 15 and 16)
Utility 4" wide 250 275 150 90 410 550 1,300,000 0
0
0
m
.....
CD
co
co
m
c
:::j
Select Structural 1550 1800 1050 90 410 1300 1,600,000 -25-3 0z
No.I 2" to4" 1350 1550 900 90 410 1150 1,600,000 and 25-4
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 650 750 325 90 410 625 1,300,000 2 through9,
Appearance wider 1350 1550 900 90 410 1350 1,600,000 13,15andl6)

No.I Stringers 1150 - 575 85 410 850 1,400,000
Select Structural Posts and 1300 - 875 85 410 1100 1,400,000 25-3
No.I Timbers 1050 - 700 85 410 950 1,400,000 (See footnotes
2through9)
Commercial Dex 1300 1450 - - 410 - 1,400,000

No. I Stringers 1150 - 575 85 410 850 1,400,000
No.2 750 - 375 85 410 550 1,100,000

No. I Timbers 1050 - 700 85 410 950 I ,400,000
No.2 600 - 400 85 410 425 1,100,000 25-4
(See footnotes
Selected Decking Decking 1750 1,600,000 2 through 10)
Commercial Decking 1450 1,400,000
Selected Decking Decking 1900 (Surfaced at 15% max. m.c. 1,700,000

Commercial Decking 1600 and used at 15% max. m.c.) 1,500,000
(Continued)
N
Cl1
!
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDING Fb
Com pres- Com pres-
SIZE Single· Repetitive- Parallel Horizontal pendlcular Parallel OF UNDER
COMMERCIAL GRADE CATION Uses Uses F, Fv Fc-L 21 Fe E 21 GRADED
WESTERN WHITE PINE (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 190Jo max. m.c.)
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 675 65 375 875 1,400,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 65 375 675 1,300,000
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 65 375 425 1,200,000
Appearance wide 1150 1300 650 65 375 1050 1,400,000
Stud 525 600 300 65 375 425 1,200,000
Construction 2" to 4" 675 775 400 65 375 775 1,200,000

Standard thick 375 425 225 65 375 650 1,200,000
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 65 375 425 1,200,000
25-2
Select Structural 1150 1300 n5 65 375 975 1,400,000 (See footnotes c:
No.I 2" to4" 975 1150 650 65 375 875 1,400,000 2 through 9,
II, 13,
z
No.2
No. 3 and Stud
thick
5" and
800
475
925
550
425
250
65
65
375
375
725
450
1,300,000
1,200,000 15 and 16) ~
:a
3:
Ill
Select Structural Beams and 1050 - 600 60 375 775 1,300,000 c:
No.I Stringers 850 - 425 60 375 625 1,300,000 ;=
c
Select Structural
No.I
Posts and
Timbers
975
775
-
-
650
525
60
60
375
375
800
700
1,300,000
1,300,000
z
G)
0
Select Decking 1100 1300 - - 375 - 1,400,000 0
Commercial 925 1050 - - 375 - 1,300,000
Jil
....
im
c
WHITE WOODS (WESTERN WOODS) (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19"7o max. m.c.) :::::j
(MIXED SPECIES) (WEST COAST WOODS)
Select Structural 315
5z
1350 1550 775 70 950 1,100,000
No.I 2" to 4" 1150 1300 650 70 315 750 1,100,000
No.2 thick 925 1050 550 70 315 600 1,000,000
No.3 2" to 4" 525 600 300 70 315 375 900,000
Appearance wide 1150 1300 650 70 315 900 1,100,000
Stud 525 600 300 70 315 375 900,000
Construction 2" to 4" 675 775 400 70 315 675 900,000

Standard thick 375 425 225 70 315 550 900,000
Utility 4" wide 175 200 100 70 315 375 900,000

No.I 2" to4" 975 1100 650 70 315 750 1,100,000 25-4
No. 3 and Stud 5" and 475 550 250 70 315 400 900,000 2 through 10,
Appearance wider 975 1100 650 70 315 900 1,100,000 13, 15 and 16)
No. I 850 - 425 65 315 550 1,000,000
Stringers
No.2 550 - 275 65 315 350 800,000
No. I Timbers 775 - 525 65 315 625 1,000,000
No.2 450 - 300 65 315 275 800,000

Selected Decking Decking - 1400 (Surfaced at 15% max. m.c. and 1,100,000
Commercial Decking - 1150 used at 15% max. m.c.) 1,000,000
(Continued)
w TABLE NO. 25-A-1-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSEs-STRUCTURAL LUMBER-( Continued)
0
01)
Allowable Unit Stresses tor Structural Lumber-VISUAL GRADING
(Normal loading. See also Section 2504.)
EXTREME FIBER IN
BENDINGFb
U.B.C. STDS.
Tension Compression Compression MODULUS OF UNDER
SPECIES AND SIZE CLASS I- Single- Repetitive- Parallel to Horizontal Perpendicular Parallel to ELASTICITY WHICH
COMMERCIAL GRADE FICATION member Uses member Uses Grain F1 Shear Fv to Grain F0 .c.21 Grain F0 E21 GRADED
YELLOW-POPLAR (Surfaced dry or surfaced green. Used at 19% max. m.c.)
No. I thick 1250 1450 750 80 420 825 1,500,000
No.2 2"to4" 1050 1200 625 75 420 650 I ,300,000
No.3 wide 575 675 350 75 420 400 I ,200,000
Stud 575 675 350 75 420 400 I ,200,000
Construction 2"to4" 750 875 450 80 420 750 1,200,000 25-5
Standard thick 425 500 250 75 420 625 1,200,000 (See foot-
Utility 4"wide 200 225 125 75 420 400 1,200,000 notes I
through 9
Select Structural 2"to4" 1300 1500 850 75 420 925 I ,500,000
No. I thick 1100 1250 725 75 420 825 I ,500,000
No.2 5" and 900 1050 475 75 420 700 I ,300,000 c
No.3 wider 525 600 275 75 420 425 1,200,000 z
Appearance 1100 725 420 1000 1,500,000
:;;
1250 75 0
Stud 525 600 275 75 420 425 I ,200,000 J:J
s:::
1Where m
eastern spruce and balsam fir are shipped in a combination, the tabulated values for balsam fir shall apply. s;;
'The design values shown in Table No. 25-A-1 are applicable to lumber that will be used under dry conditions such as in most covered structures. For 2- r
c
inch- to 4-inch-thick lumber the DRY surfaced size shall be used. In calculating design values, the natural gain in strength and stiffness that occurs z
as lumber dries has been taken into consideration as well as the reduction in size that occurs when unseasoned lumber shrinks. The gain in load-
carrying capacity due to increased strength and stiffness resulting from drying more than offsets the design effect of size reductions due to "0
0
shrinkage. For 5-inch and thicker lumber, the surfaced sizes also may be used because design values have been adjusted to compensate for any loss in c
size by shrinkage which may occur. m
3 Values for Fb, F, and F, for the grades of Construction, Standard and Utility apply only to 4-inch widths. ...
co
'The values in Table No. 25-A-1 for dimension 2 inches to 4 inches are based on edgewise use. Where such lumber is used flatwise, the recommended 8:
design values for extreme fiber stress in bending may be multiplied by the following factors: m
c
::::j
WIDTH THICKNESS 0
2" 3" 4" z
2 inches to 4 inches 1.10 1.04 1.00
5 inches and wider 1.22 1.16 1.11
Values for decking may be increased by 10 percent for 2-inch decking and 4 percent for 3-inch decking.
5
When 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick lumber is manufactured at a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and used in a condition where the moisture content
does not exceed 15 percent, the design values shown in Table No. 25-A-1 for surfaced dry and surfaced green may be multiplied by the following
factors:
TENSION HORIZONTAL COMPRESSION COMPRESSION

EXTREME FIBER IN PARALLEL SHEAR PERPENDICULAR PARALLEL TO MODULUS OF
BENDINGFb TOGRAINF1 Fv TO GRAIN Fcl_ GRAIN Fe ELASTICITY E
1.08 1.08 1.05 1.00 1.17* 1.05*
*For redwood use 1.15 for F, and 1.04 for E.

6
When 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick lumber is designed for use where the moisture content will exceed 19 percent for an extended period of time, the values
shown in Table No. 25-A-1 shall be multiplied by the following factors:

BENDINGFb TOGRAINF1 Fv TO GRAIN Fe.:._ GRAIN Fe ELASTICITY E
0.86 0.84 0.97 0.67 0.70 0.97

w
0
co
!Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-A-1
~ 7When lumber 5 inches and thicker is designed for use where the moisture content will exceed 19 percent for an extended period of time, the values
o shown in Table No. 25-A-1 shall be multiplied by the following factors:

BENDINGF11 TOGRAINF1 Fv TOGRAINF0 _l_ GRAINF0 ELASTICITYE
1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 0.91 1.00

8Specific horizontal shear values may be established by using the following tables when the length of split or check is known:
MULTIPLY TABULATED
FvVALUEBY:
(NOMINAL 2-INCH)
WHEN LENGTH OF SPUT ON WIDE FACE IS: LUMBER)
No split. ............................................. . 2.00

112 x wide face ........................................ . 1.67
3
/4 x wide face .................. · · .... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1.50
I x wide face ......................................... . 1.33
1 112 x wide face or more ................................. . 1.00
c
MULTIPLY TABULATED z
F. VALUE BY: :::n
(3-INCH AND 0
WHEN LENGTH OF SPUT ON WIDE FACE IS: THICKER LUMBER) ::D
31:
~~··············································· 2.00 CD
112 x narrow face ....................................... . 1.67 c
I x narrow face ....................................... . 1.33
r0
1 112 x narrow face or more ............................... . 1.00 z
C)
0
9 Stress-rated
boards of nominal l-inch, 1'14-inch and 1'12-inch thickness, 2 inches and wider, are permitted the recommended design values shown for 0
0
Select Structural, No. I, No. 2, No. 3, Construction, Standard, Utility, Appearance, Clear Heart Structural and Clear Structural grades as shown in m
the 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick categories herein, where graded in accordance with the stress-rated board provisions in the applicable grading rules.
IDWhen decking is used where the moisture content will exceed 15 percent for an extended period of time, the tabulated design values shall be ....
CD
multiplied by the following factors: Extreme Fiber in Bending F 6 - 0. 79; Modulus of Elasticity E - 0. 92.
g:
"Where lumber is graded under U.B.C. Standard No. 25-2 values shown for Select Structural, No. l, No.2, No.3, and Stud grades are not applicable m
to 3-inch x 4-inch and 4-inch x 4-inch sizes. 0
12 Lumber in the beam and stringer or post and timber size classification may be assigned different working stresses for the same grade name and ::::j
species based upon the grading rules of the specific agency involved. It is therefore necessary that the grading rule agency be identified to properly 0
z
correlate permitted design stresses with the grade mark.
13 Utility grades of all species may be used only under conditions specifically approved by the building official.
14 A horizontal shear F, of70 may be used for eastern white pine graded under U .B.C. Standards No. 25-5 and No. 25-8 (grading rules of Northern
Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers, Inc. and Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc.).
15 Tabulated tension parallel to grain values for species 5 inches and wider, 2 inches to 4 inches thick (and 2 112 inches to 4 inches thick) size
classifications apply to 5-inch and 6-inch widths only, for grades of Select Structural, No. l, No.2, No.3, Appearance and Stud (including dense
grades). For lumber wider than 6 inches in these grades, the tabulated F, values shall be multiplied by the following factors:
GRADE
(21nches to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider) Multiply tabulated F1 values by
(21121nches to 41nches thick, 5 inches and wider)
(Includes "Dense" gradea) 5 inches and 6 Inches wide 8 inches wide 10 inches and wider
Select Structural 1.00 0.90 0.80
No. I, No.2, No.3 and Appearance 1.00 0.80 0.60
Stud 1.00
16
Design values for all species of Stud grade in 5-inch and wider size classifications apply to 5-inch and 6-inch widths only.
17
Repetitive member design values for extreme fiber in bending for southern pine grades of Dense Structural 86, 72 and 65 apply to 2-inch to 4-inch
thicknesses only.
'"When 2:inch- to 4-inch-thick southern pine lumber is surfaced dry or at 15 percent maximum moisture content (KD) and is designed for use where
the mmsture content will exceed 19 percent for an extended period of time, the design values in Table No. 25-A-1 for the corresponding grades of
2'12-inch- to 4-inch-thick surfaced green southern pine lumber shall be used. The net green size may be used in such designs.
19
When 2-inch- to 4-inch-thick southern pine lumber is surfaced dry or at 15 percent maximum moisture content (KD) and is designed for use under
w dry conditions, such as in most covered structures. the net DRY size shall be used in design. For other sizes and conditions of use, the net green size
.... may be used in design .
20 Values apply only to ponderosa pine graded under U.B.C. Standard No. 25-2.
21
The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply.
TABLE NO. 25-A-2-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR MACHINE STRESS RATED STRUCTURAL LUMBER
w
..... (Values listed are for normal loading conditions. 8 See also Section 2504.8) N
Ul
N
~
Design values In pounds square lnch9
Grading Rules Extreme fiber In bending Fb7 Tension Compression
N
U.B.C. Std. No. Single- Repetitive- parallel parallel Modulus

Grade (See footnotes Size member member to grain togrsln of
Deslgnetlon10 1,2,3,4) Classification uses uses F, Fe elasticity E
900f-l.OE 3,4 900 1050 350 725 1,000,000
1200f-1.2E I, 2, 3,4 1200 1400 600 950 1,200,000
1350f-1.3E 2,4 1350 1550 750 107511 1,300,000
1450f-1.3E I, 3, 4 1450 1650 800 II 50 1,300,000
1500f-1.3E 2 1500 1750 900 1200 1,300,000
1500f-1.4E I, 2, 3, 4 1500 1750 900 1200 1,400,000
1650f-1.4E 2 1650 1900 1020 1320 1,400,000
1650f·l.5E I, 2, 3,4 1650 1900 1020 1320 1,500,000
1800f-1.6E I, 2, 3, 4 Machine· 1800 2050 1175 1450 1,600,000
1950f·l.5E 2 rated 1950 2250 1375 1550 1,500,000
1950f-1.7E I, 2, 4 lumber 1950 2250 1375 1550 1,700,000
2100f·l.8E I, 2, 3, 4 2" thick 2100 2400 1575 1700 1,800,000
or less
2250f-1.6E 2 2250 2600 1750 1800 1,600,000
All widths
2250f-1.9E I, 2,4 2250 2600 1750 1800 1,900,000
2400f-1.7E 2 2400 2750 1925 1925 1,700,000
2400f-2.0E I, 2, 3, 4 2400 2750 1925 1925 2,000,000
2550f-2.IE I, 2, 4 2550 2950 2050 2050 2,100,000
2700f-2.2E I, 2, 3, 4 2700 3100 2150 2150 2,200,000
2850f-2.3E 2 2850 3300 2300 2300 2,300,000 c
3000f-2.4E I, 2 3000 3450 2400 2400 2,400,000 z
3150f-2.5E 2 3150 3600 2500 2500 2,500,000
;;
0
3300f-2.6E 2 3300 3800 2650 2650 2,600,000 :::0
3:
900f-I.OE I, 2, 3 900 1050 350 725 1,000,000
IJI
900f-1.2E I, 2, 3 See 900 1050 350 725 1,200,000 c
1200f-1.5E I, 2, 3 footnote 1200 1400 600 950 1,500,000 ;=
1350f-1.8E I, 2 5 1350 1550 750 1075 1,800,000 c
1500f-1.8E
1800f-2.IE
3
I, 2, 3
1500
1800
1750
2050
900
1175
1200
1450
1,800,000
2,100,000
z
C)
0
1U.B.C. Standard No. 25-2. 0
c
zu.B.C. Standard No. 25-6. m
3U.B.C. Standard No. 25-3. ....
4 U.B.C. Standard No. 25-4.
5Size classifications for these grades are: im
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-2-Machine Rated Lumber; 2" thick or less, all widths. 0
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-6--Machine Rated Lumber; 2" thick or less, all widths. 3
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-3--Machine Rated Joists; 2" thick or less, 6" and wider. 0
z
6Stresses apply for lumber used at 19 percent maximum moisture content. Where moisture content exceeds 19 percent, the tabulated design values j
shall be modified as specified in Section 2504 (c) 10. i
?"fabulated extreme fiber in bending values Fb are applicable to lumber loaded on edge. When loaded flatwise, these values may be increased by
multiplying by the following factors:
Nominal width (in.) 3" 4" 5" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14"
Factor 1.06 1.10 1.12 1.15 1.19 1.22 1.25 1.28
8Footnotes I, 2, 9, II and 19 to Thble No. 25-A-1 apply also to machine stress rated lumber.
9Design values for horizontal shear F, and compression perpendicular to grain Fcl_ for lumber used under dry conditions are as follows:
Lodgepols- WhiteWoods-
Douglas Douglas 'Mistern Englemann Southern Pine Mixed
Ponderoea-
Flr-Lan:h Flr·South Hem-Flr Hemlock Sugar Pine Spruce Cedar KD S.ORY Spec: !eat
Horizontal Shear F,
95 1 90 75 90 70 70 75 95 90 70
Compression Perpendicular to Grain Fcl_ *
625 I 52o I 405 I 410 375 320 425 565 565 315
tGraded in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-3 and No. 25-4.
*The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 c (4) shall not apply.
For other species, use values shown in Table No. 25-A-1 for visually graded lumber, No. 2 grade, for the appropriate species.
1
°For any given value of fiber stress in bending, Fb, the average modulus of elasticity, E, may vary depending upon species, timber source and
other variables. TheE values included in the f-E grade designations are those usually associated with each Fb level. Grade stamps may show
higher or lower £values (in increments of 100,000 psi) if machine rating indicates the assignment is appropriate. When an Evalue associated
....
Co)
Co)
with a designated Flevel is lower or higher than those listed, the tabulated Fb, F" and Fe values associated with the designated [value are
applicable. The E for design shall be that associated with the E value on the grade stamp.
11
When graded under U.B.C. Standard No. 25-3 grading rules, values shall be 1100 psi.
TABLE NO. 25-B-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR CONSTRUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD
(In Pounds per Square Inch-Normal Loading)
(To be used with section properties in Plywood-Design Specification-See U.B.C. Standard No. 25·9)
EXTERIOR A-8, B-8, 8-C,
C-C (PLUGGED)
STRUCTURAL I C·D
(Use Group 1 Stresses)
STRUCTURAL II C-D
(Use Group 3 Stresses)
C-D SHEATHING
EXTERIOR A-A, A-C, C-C (Exterior Glue)

ALL OTHER GRADES OF
SPECIES' STRUCTURAL I A-C, C-C ALL INTERIOR GRADES WITH INTERIOR INCLUDING
STRESS GROUP OF (Use Group I Stresses) EXTERIOR GLUE C-D SHEATHING
FACE PLY
Wet• Dry3 Wet• Dry• Dry•
I. Extreme fiber stress

in bending (Fb) I 1430 2000 1190 1650 1650
Tension in plane of plies (F1) 2,3 980 1400 820 1200 1200
Face grain parallel or
perpendicular to span 4 940 1330 780 1110 1110
(at 45° to face grain use 116F1)
2. Compression in plane of c:
plies <Fe> I 970 1640 900 1540 1540 z
Parallel or perpendicular to
face grain
2
3
730
610
1200
1060
680
580
1100
990
1100
990
~:D
(at 45° to face grain use 1/3 £,_.) 4 610 1000 580 950 950 ~
IJI
3. Shear in plane perpendicular to I 155 190 155 190 160 c:
pliesF,' ;=
Parallel or perpendicular to face grain 2,3 120 c
(at 45o to face grain use 2 Fv) 4
120
110
140
130 110
140
130
120
115
zC)
0
0
lfi
4. Shear, rolling, in the Marine and ....
CD
plane of plies Srrucrurall 63 75 63 75 Ql)
Ql)
Parallel or perpendicular to
face grain m
Srructural II 49 56 49 56 c
(at 45 • to face grain use I \13 FJ All0ther5 44 53 44 53 48 3
5. Bearing (on face) I 210 340 210 340 340 0
Perpendicular to plane 2, 3
z
135 210 135 210 210
of plies 4 105 160 105 160 160
6. Modulus of elasticity I 1,500,000 1,800,000 1,500,000 1,800,000 1,800,000
In bending in plane of plies 2 1,300,000 1,500,000 1,300,000 1,500,000 1,500,000
Face grain parallel or 3 1,100,000 1,200,000 1,100,000 1,200,000 1,200,000
perpendicular to span 4 900,000 1,000,000 900,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
SPAN RATING
C-CandC-0 Underlayment and C-C Plugged
THICKNESS
(I-) 1210 1610 2010 2410 32116 40120 41124 16oc 20oc 24oc 46oc
¥16 4 3 I
:y, 4b I
1¥32·. lh 4b I ~
Io/32, 5AJ 4• I 4b I
21132, v. 4b I 4b I
'AI Jc 3<
I \OJ I
a. Thickness not applicable to Underlayment and C-C Plugged.

b. Use Group 3 stresses for Structural II.
c. Use Group 4 stresses for Underlayment and C-C Plugged 24 o.c.
I See U.B.C. Standard No. 25.9 for plywood species groups. For C-C, C-D Underlayment, and CC Plugged, the combination of Span Rating and panel thickness
determines the species group and therefore the stress permitted, as in the above table.
Co) 2Wet condition of use corresponds to a moisture content of 16 percent or more.
~ 3Dry condition of use corresponds to a moisture content of less than 16 percent.
4 See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9, Section 25.921, for provisions under which F,. stresses may be increased.
5Reduce stresses 25 percent for three-layer (four-ply) panels over 5/s inch thick.
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 3
Members stressed principally In bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BENDING ABOUT X·X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y·Y AXIS
~Pirpond- to _ _ .,
~-lof
·I'
to-Focoool
L.omtnotlono Llmlnotlono
COIIIIIfiA.
TIOH
SYIIBOI.11
SP£CIES
OUTER
I..AJIINA.
TIONSI
CORE
I..AJIINA.
TIOHS4
Extromo Rbor In Bonding
Fbn
~ion Porpondlcular
toGrolnFc~_..21
y
'" I
Horizontal
Sheer
Fvyyo
AXIALLY LOADED
-
pol
(For....,.
borlwlth
Tonolon
Zone eonr:.:- Hori1.0n1al Modulus of Rborln
Compreulon
Perpendicular Horizontal
mulllplo-
ploco
ilminltions Modulus of
Tension
Porollof
Compreulon
Porollof
Modulus
of
Tonolon Foce Co"C"""
Stnooedln Stnooedln Sheer Elaotlclty llondlng517 to Groin Shoot whlclln Eluticlty toGr1ln to Groin Elootlclty
1 2
Tenlion522
pol
3
Tension&
pol
4
pol
5
pol
6
F""
pol
7
f_..21
x11Jt1pol
8
Fbyy
pol
9
F.~ ....,
pol
10
Fvyy
pol
11
:-~
12
f,.,..1
x106pol
13
Fr
pol
14
Fe
pol
15
f21
x11Jt1poi
16
I
Visually Graded Western Species c
z
16F-VI DFIWW 560" 560'' 140Ul23 !.3 950 255 130 65 1.1 675 975 1.1 =n
16F-V2 m 70 875 1300 1.3
0
HFIHF 5009 375' 155 1.4 1250 135 1.3 :u
1600 800 31:
16F-V3 DFIDF 560'' 560 165 1.5 1450 560 145 75 1.5 950 1550 1.5
IJI
16F-V8 DFS/DFS 650 500 165 1.2 1200 500 145 75 I. I 825 1350 1.1 c
The following two combinations are Intended lor straight or ollghtly combored mernbore lor dry uoo and Industrial _...,nce.1D r=c
16F-V4 DFIN3WW
1600 800
650 560' 9()918 1.524 900 255 IJO 65 lJ24 650 600 !.3
z
16F-V5 DFIM3DF 650 560' 9012 1.6 1000 470 135 70 1.5 750 875 1.5
"0
0
c
m
....CD
i
I
The following two combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
equal capacity in both positive and negative bending. m
16F-V6 DF,DF 5607' 5607 165 1.5 1450 560 145 75 1.4 950 1550 1.5
c
:::j
1600 1600
16F-V7 Hf,HF 3759 3759 155 1.4 1200 375 135 70 1.3 850 1350 1.3 0
20F-VI DFI\'iW 650 5607 ]4Ql8 23 ].424 1000 255 130 65 1.2~~ 750 1000 1.2
z
20F-V2 Hf,HF 5009 3759 155 1.5 1200 375 135 70 1.4 950 1350 1.4
20F-V3 DFIDF 650 5607 165 1.6 1450 560 145 75 1.5 1000 1550 1.5
2000 1000
20F-V4 DFIDF 5907 8 5607 165 1.6 1450 560 145 75 1.6 1000 1550 1.6
20F-VIO
20F-VII
DFIHF
DFS:DFS
650
650
560
500
155
165
1.5
1.3
1300
1400
375
500
135
145
70
75
1.4
1.1
950
900
1500
1400
1.4
1.1 I
20F-V12 AC'AC 560 560
5607
190 1.5 1200 470 165 80 1.4
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and Industrial appearance.1o
900 1500
725
1.4
1.3
I
I
20F-V5 DF:NJWW 650 9()11 18 1.6 1000 255 135 70 1.3 750
2000 1000
20F-V6 Df'M3DF 650 5607 9()12 1.6 1000 470 135 70 1.5 775 900 1.5
The following three combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide ~~
20F-V7 DEDF 650

equal capacity in both positive and negative bending.
650 165 1.6 1450 560 145 75 I6 1000 1600 1.6 I
~
20F-V8 DFDF 2000 2000 5907 ~ 5907 8 165 1.7 1450 560 145 75 1.6 1000 1600 1.6 1
if
20F-V9 HF,HF 5009 5009 155 1.5 1400 375 135 70 1.4 975 1400 1.4 i
22F-VI DFiWW 650 560 7 !4QlS 1.6" 1050 255 130 65 ]J24 850 1100 1.3 ~
22F-V2 HFIHF 5009 500'1 ISS I5 1250 375 \35 70 1.4 950 1350 1.4 i*i
2200 1100 ;;
22F-V3 DF,DF 56()9 145 1500 1.6
22F-V4 DEDF
650
590 7 ' 560"
165
165
1.7
1.7
1450
1450
560
560 145
75
75
1.6
1.6
1050
1000 1550 1.6 I
22F-VIO DFDFS 650 560i 165 1.6 1600 500 145 75 1.3 1000 1400 1.3 i"'
The following two combinations are intended for stratght or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.1o ~
l.
22F-\'5 DF~JWW 650 5607 tX}IllR \.6:..1 I 100 255 \35 75 1.4~.-l. 800 725 1.4
22F-V6 DF'M3DF
2200 1100
650 560" 9()1~ 1.7 1250 470 135 75 1.6 900 925 1.6
I
!Continued;
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 '-(Continued)
Members stressed principally in bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BENDING ABOUT X-X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y· YAXIS
Loaded Perpendicular Loaded Parallel
·'-' ·i'
toWideFec:eoof toWideFec:eoof
Umlnationa Laminations
AXIALLY LOAOEO
SPECIES
OUTER
COMBINA· LAMINA· y
TION l
TIONS
SYMBOL19 CORE Extreme Aber In Bending Compression Alrpondlcuiar
LAMINA· Foxx to Groin Fc-'-xx"
TIONS4
Horilonlll
Shoor
Fvyyo
psi
(For mom-
bon with
multiple- Compreuion Modulus
Tension ComJ:::'ion Extreme Compression piece Tension
Zone Horizontal Modulus of Rberln Alrpondlcullf Horizontal laminations Modulus of Parallel Porollel of
Stressed in Stressed in Shoor Elasticity Boncllng517 to Grain Shear whk:hare Elasticity to Grain to Grain Elasticity
c:ornc'ion f21
Tenatons 22 Tension& Tenalonfoce fxx'' Foyy Fc-'-rr'' Fvyy frr'' Fr Fe
:.-d~
F""'
psi psi pal psi psi x106pal psi psi psi x106psi psi psi x106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16
Visually Graded Western Species-( Continued)
The following three combinations are balanced and are Intended foe members continuous or canttkt'lefed over supPOrts and provtde
equal capacity In both pos~lve and negative bending. c:
22F-V7 DFIDF 650 650 16S 1.8 14SO S60 14S 7S 1.6 1100 1650 I6 z
:;;
22F-V8 DFIDF 2200 2200 S907 8 S907 8 16S 1.7 14SO S60 14S 7S 1.6 1050 1650 1.6 0
::tl
22F-V9 HFIHF 500' 5()()9 ISS l.5 \250 375 135 70 1.4 975 1400 1.4 3:
24F-Vi DFiWW 650 650 J4Ql3 1.724 12SO 2SS 130 70 1.424 i<XXJ 1300 14 Ill
c:
24F-V2 HFIHF 500' SOO'J ISS 1.5 12SO 37S 13S 70 1.4 950 1300 1.4 ;:::
c
24F-V3 DFIDF 2400 1200 6SO S60 7 16S 1.8 ISOO S60 14S 7S 1.6 1100 1600 1.6
z
24F-V4
24F-VS
DFIDF
Df,HF
6SO
650
650
650
16S
ISS
1.8
1.7
ISOO
1350
S60
37S
14S
140
7S
70
1.6
1.5
1150
1100
16SO
1450
1.6
1.5 "
0
0
c
24F-VII DFIDFS 6SO S60 7 16S 1.7 1600 500 14S 7S 1.4 I ISO 1700 14
ie m
....
!m
24F-V6 DF/N3WW/
2400
Thelol-ngtwocombl..-no.,.lntendedlorotroighlor ollghlly- momberslordry uoe-lndullrla!~.1D
650 5607 9()11 18 ZJ 1.724 1200 255 140 70 1.524 950 800 1.5 3
0
24F-V7 DF/M3DF I 1200
650 56()7 9012 1.7 1250 470 135 70 1.6 900 950 1.6 z
Thelol-nglh _ _ . , . - _.,.lntendedtor mombers contlnuouaorcantl- o - supports end provide
....,..-"Y lnbolhpoamw-._u..bendlng.
24F-V8 DF/DF 650 650 165 1.8 1450 560 145 75 1.6 1100 1650 1.6
24F-V9 IIFIHF 2400 2400 50()9 50()9 !55 1.5 1500 375 135 70 1.4 1000 1450 1.4
24F-VIO DF!HF 650 650 !55 1.8 1400 375 140 70 1.6 1150 1600 1.6
Wet-use factors' 0.8 0.8 0.667 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.667 0.875 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.73 0.833
E-Rated Western Species
!6F-El WW!WW 25513 25513 1401823 1.324 1050 255 125 65 1.224 725 925 1.2
!6F-E2" IIFIHF 1600 800 50014 50014 !55 1.4 1250 375 135 70 1.3 825 1200 1.3
16F·E3 DF/DF 650 650 165 1.6
cam-
The lol-ng two combl..-no ere Intended lor otrelghl or slightly
1450 560 145 75 1.5
mombers tor dry u.. -lndullrial _.nee.••
975 1600 1.5
are-
16F·E4 DF/N3WW 650 650 9()111823 1.624 900 255 130 65 JJ24 675 675 1.)
1600 800
!6F-E5 DF!M3DF 650 650 9012 1.6 1050 470 135 70 1.5 700 900 1.5
The lol-ng two combl..-no end ere Intended lor members continuous or cent!-~ supports end provide
oquai-"Yinbolhpoamw- ._u..bendlng.
16F·E6 DFIDF 650 650 165 1.6 1500 560 145 75 1.5 1000 1600 1.5
1600 1600
!6F·E7" IIF!HF 50014 50014 !55 1.4 1250 375 135 70 l.l 850 1150 1.)
20F-E! WW!WW 25513 255" 1401823 1.624 1100 255 125 65 JJ24 800 1050 l.J
20F·E2" IIFIHF 50014 50014 !55 1.6 1400 375 135 70 1.4 925 1550 1.4
2000 1000
20F-E3 DFIDF 650 650 165 1.7 1550 560 145 75 1.6 1050 1650 1.6
20F-E8 ES!FS 450 450 145 1.5 1400 300 125 65 1.4 800 1000 1.4
(Continued)
w
....
ID
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 3 -(Continued)
Members stressed principally in bending with load applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
BENDING ABOIIT X·X AXIS BENDING ABOIIT y.y AXIS
Loaded Pwpondlcullr LoadodPorallol
·I' ·i'
loWidtFiceool toWidoFiceool
Lamlnallona Lamlnationl
SPECIES AXIALLY LOADED

DIITER
COIIBINA- L.AJIINA. y
T10N l
T10NSI
SYIIBOL19 CORE Extreme Abor In Bending Compreulon Pwpondlcullr
LAIIINA- toGr11inFc.l~1
T10NS4 Fou
Horizontal
Shear
Fvyyo
pol
(For'"""'"
bora with
multiple-
Ton lion eonr;:1on Extreme Comp<eulon piece Tension Compreulon Modulus
Zone
Stnluedln Stnluedln Compn~~~lon
Horizontal
Shear
Modulus of Flbetln
Elasticity Bendlng517
Pwpondlcullt' Horizontal
toG111in Shear
laminations
which ere
Modulus of
Eialtlcity
E,.,..,
Porallol
to Grain
Porallol
toG111in "'
Elaltlcity
1 2
Tonllon522
pol
3
TonllonS
pol
4
TenllonFoco
pol
5
f1lco
pol
6
F.,.,
pol
7
fu'1
x106pol
8
Fbyy
pol
g
F•• ,..,
pol
10
Fvyy
pol
11
:..= 12
x106pol
13
Fr
psi
14
Fe
pol
15
f21
x106pol
16
E-Rated Western Specles-{Contlnued) c:
The following two combinations are Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and lndustrlalappearance.10 z
20F-E4 DFIN3WW 650 650 91)11 18 23 1.624 1100 255 !30 65 1.424 800 700 !.4 =n
2000 1000 0
20F-E5 DF/N3DF 650 650 9012 1.7 1300 470 135 70 1.6 825 975 1.6 ::D
The following two combinations are balanced and are Intended for members continuous or cantUevered over supports and provide
31:
oquolcapacHy In both positive ond negative bending. ID
c:
20F-E6 DFIDF
2000 2000
650 650 165 1.7 1600 560 145 75 1.6 1150 1650 1.6 rc
20f-E71S
22F-EI
HF/HF
DFIDF
50014
650
50014
650
!55
165
1.6
1.7
!500
1550
375
560
135
145
70
75
1.4
1.6
!050
1050
!550
1600
1.4
1.6
z
C>
2200 1100 0
22f-E2" HFIHF 50014 50014 155 1.6 1400 375 135 70 14 950 1400 1.4
0
c
m
The following two combinations are intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.11
22F-E3 DF•N3WW 650 650 9()11 1~ 2' 1.7:'4 1250 255 135 70 J...r::4 825 750 1.4
2200 1100
22F-E4 DFN3DF 650 650 9()1:' 18 1350 470 135 70 1.6 950 950 1.6
The following two combinations are balanced and are intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
22F-ES DEDF 650 650 165 1.7 1650 560 145 75 1.6 1100 1650 1.6
2200 2200
22F-E6t.5 HF'HF 50014 50(}14 ISS 1.7 1550 375 135 70 1.5 1050 1500 1.5
24F-EI DFDF 650 650 165 1.8 1550 560 145 75 1.6 1100 1600 1.6
24F-E215 HF,HF 50014 5()()14 155 1.7 1300 375 135 70 1.5 850 1400 1.5
'
24F-E3 DFHF 650 5(}()14 155 1.8 1500 375 135 70 1.5 1050 1550 1.5
2400 1200
24F-E4 DFDF 650 650 165 1.8 1650 560 145 75 1.7 1100 1700 1.7
24F-E5 Df,DF 650 650 165 1.8 1650 560 145 75 1.6 !lOO 1550 1.6
24F-E6" HF·WW 50014 50014 140111 :'3 1.824 1100 ~55 130 65 1.424 750 1250 1.4
The following three combinations are intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance. 1o
24F-E14 DFDF 650 650 165 18 1450 560 145 75 1.6 950 1600 1.6
24F-E15 HFHF 50014 5()()14 155 1.8 1300 375 135 70 1.5 950 1200 1.5
24F-E7 DF-N3WW 2400 1200 650 650 9()11 Ill:.' 1.924 1400 255 135 70 1.624 975 875 1.6
24F-E8 DF,NJDF 650 650 9()12 1.9 1400 470 Ill 70 1.7 1000 1050 1.7
24F-E9" HFNJHF 5()()1.J 5()()14 9()11 1.8 1350 375 135 70 1.6 950 825 1.6
The following four combinations are balanced and are intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provide
24F-El0 DF,DF 650 650 165 1.9 1850 560 145 75 1.7 1300 1750 l.l
24F-EJI15 HFHF 5()()14 5()()1.J 155 18 1600 315 135 70 1.5 I ISO IS SO 1.5
24F-E12 OF HF 650 650 155 1.9 1750 375 135 70 1.6 1200 1600 1.6
24F-El3 DFDF 650 650 165 1.8 1950 560 HS 75 1.7 1250 1700 l.l
2400 2400
24F-EI6 HFHF 5()()14 5()()14 155 1.7 1300 375 IJ5 70 1.5 850 1400 1.5
24F-E17 HF\\W 50014 5()()14 ) ..j.QI/!::3 18=4 1100 255 1301~ 651~ J..j.:4 750 1250 14
24F-E18 DFDF 650 650 165 18 1450 560 1.1.5 "15 I6 950 1600 1.6
24F-EI9 HF HF 50014 50014 155 18 1300 r5 135 70 u 950 1200 1.5
W~t-u<-ef<:~..:tors= 0.8 0.8 0 667 0.667 0 ~7~ 0 bl' 0.8 0 66-: u )(-5 o.s-:-5 O.R3.~ 08 () --~ 0 833
rContinued)
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 •-(Continued)
IIENiliiG AIIOtiT X-X AXIS 11END11G ABOUT Y-Y AXIS
to
~ _ l'lfponclicUir
_ ., to _ _ .,
~-
·I' ~·
·I'
Uoninollono
SPECIES AXIALLY LOADED

01/TER
COIIIIINir ~ y
T10N l
TIONSI
--
SYIIIIOL19 CORE
~
E.-Fiborlnlloncllng ~~
F,.., to Groin F0 J.~
T10IIS4
F vrr
pol
-- -.. - -
= - --
(For mom-
.......
-In -In
borlwlth
em- ~
~
T- ploce T-
Zane lllodulul ol RMrin -lusol Pnllol ol
~
toGrtln Shoor to Groin to Groin Eloltlclty
T-22 r.-.o T-Foco eonr:""' F.,.
Eloltlc:lty Bending517
E~ F... F0 J.yy>1 Fvyy Fr Fe E21
pol pol pol pol pol 110ipol pol pol pol :-~ x101pol pol pol x101pol
c:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 z
16F-VI SP/SP 5()(178 5()(17
Visually Graded Southern Pine
200 1.4 1450 5W 175 90 1.3 950 1450 1.3
~
:D
16F-V2
iii:
SP/SP 1600 800 50078 5007 200 1.4 1600 5W 175 90 1.4 IOOJ 1550 1.4
Ill
16F-V3 SP/SP 650 650 200 1.4 1450 5W 175 90 1.3 975 1450 1.3 c:
The lol-'ng comblnotlon lsi _ _ lor ll1r.tglrt or allgh11y cambenld members lor dry usa and lncluatrtal--•• r=0
16F-V4 SPtSP 1600 800 5()(178 5()(17 9016 1.3 975 470 150 75 1.2 650 950 1.2 z
c;)
0
0
0
m
The following combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or cantilevered ovEH' supports and provides equal capacity
In both pos~lve end negative bending.
16F·Yl SP/SP 1600 1600 5607 8 5607 8 200 1.4 1600 560 175 85 1.4 1000 1550 1.4
20f.VI SPISP 650 5607 200 1.5 1450 560 175 85 1.4 1000 1450 1.4
20F·Y2 SPISP 2000 1000 650 5607 200 1.6 1450 560 175 85 1.4 1050 1550 1.4
20F·Y3 SP/SP 5607 8 5607 200 1.4 1600 560 175 85 1.4 1000 1500 1.4
The following combination is intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and industrial appearance.10
2Qf.V4 SPISP 2000 1000 650 5607 9()16 1.5 1100 470 150 75 1.3 725 950 1.3
The following combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
In both pos~lve and negative bending.
20F·V5 SP/SP 2000 2000 650 560 200 1.6 1450 650 175 85 1.4 1050 1550 1.4
22F·YI SPtSP 650 650 200 1.6 1600 560 175 85 1.5 1050 1650 1.5
22F-V2 SPISP 2200 1100 5607 8 5607 200 1.4 1600 560 175 85 1.4 1000 1500 1.4
22F-V3 SP/SP 650 5607 200 1.6 1500 560 175 85 1.4 1050 1500 1.4
The following combination Is intended for straight c; slightly cambered members for dry use and lndustrlalappearance.10
22F-V4 SPISP 2200 1100 650 5607 9()16 1.6 1250 470 Ill 75 1.4 825 1000 1.4
The following combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
In both pos~lve and negative bending.
22F-V5 SP/SP 2200 2200 650 650 200 1.6 1600 560 175 85 1.5 1050 1600 1.5
24F-Vl SPISP 650 5607 200 1.7 1500 560 175 85 1.5 1100 1350 1.5
24F-V2 SPISP 650 650 200 1.7 1600 560 175 85 1.5 1100 1600 1.5
2400 1200
24F-V3 SP/SP 650 650 200 1.8 1600 560 175 85 1.6 1150 1700 1.6
24F-V6 SPtSP 650 650 200 1.7 1500 560 175 90 1.5 1150 1750 1.5
The f~lowing combination Is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and lndustrlalappearance.10
24F-V4 SPSP 2400 1200 650 5607 9()16 1.7 1250 470 155 75 1.4 850 1050 1.4
!Continued)
TABLE NO. 25.C-1 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
BENDING ABOUT X·X AXIS BENDING ABOUT Y·Y AXIS
Loaded I'Orpondlcular Loaded Porallol
·I' ·I'
toWidefocesof toWidefocesof
Laminations Lamination.
AXIALlY LOADED
SPECIES
OUTER
COIIBINA- LAliiHA- y
T10H X
SYIIBOL19
T10NSI
CORE Extreme Fiber In Bending Compression POrpondlcular
LAIIIINA- to Grain F~,u21
T10NS4 fou
Horizontal
Shear
Fvyyo
psi
(Formern-
borlwijh
multiple-
Tension Co"l::'lon Extreme Compreoolon Tension Compression Modulus
~ of
Zone Horizontal Modulus of Fiber In I'Orpondlcular Horizontal laminations Modulus of Porallol Porallol
Stmaedln Stmaedln Co"C'Ion Shear Elasticity Bendlng517 to Grain Shear which are Eluticijy to Grain to Grain Eluticijy
TensionS 22 Tension& Tension Face F,., E..'' FOyy Fc-r/ 1 Er/' Fr Fe E21
rued~
fvyy
psi psi psi psi psi l106psl psi psi psi x106pai psi psi l106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Visually Graded Southern Plne--{Contlnued)
The following combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capactty
In both positive and ._tlve bending.
24F-V5 SPISP 2400 2400 650 650 200 1.7 1600 560 175 90 1.5 1150 1700 1.5
Wet-use factors2 0.8 0.8 0.667 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.667 0.875 0.875 0.833 0.8 0 73 0.833
E-Rated Southern Pine
16F-EI SPISP 1600 800 650 650 200 1.6 1550 560 175 90 1.5 1050 1600 1.5
The following combination Is Intended for straight or slightly cambered members for dry use and Industrial appearance.1o
16F-E2 SPISP 1600 800 650 650 9016 1.6 950 470 145 75 1.3 700 1050 1.3
'
....
CD
g:
m
0
3
0
The folkJwlng combination Is balanced and Intended for members contlnuoua or cantilevered over supports and provldea equal capactty
In both poolttve and negative bonding. z
16F·E3 SP/SP 1600 1600 650 650 200 1.6 1700 560 175 90 1.5 1100 1650 1.5
20F·El SP/SP 2000 1000 650 650 200 1.7 1600 560 175 90 1.5 1050 1600 1.5
The fol-lng comblnotlon Is lntondad for straight or allghUy cam- membera for dry uoo and Industrial appearance. tO
20F·E2 SP/SP 2000 1000 650 650 9016 1.6 1100 470 150 75 1.4 750 1000 1.4
The foUowtng combination Is balanced and Intended tor members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
In both poontve and negative bending.
20F·E3 SPISP 2000 2000 650 650 200 1.7 1800 560 175 90 1.5 1150 1700 1.5
22F·EI SPISP 2200 1100 650 650 200 1.7 1600 560 175 90 1.5 1050 1650 1.5
The tolkJwing combination Ia Intended tor straight or slightly cambered members tor dry use and Industrial appearance.10
22F·E2 SPISP 2200 1100 650 650 9016 1.6 1250 470 155 80 1.4 850 1050 1.4
The following combination Ia balanced and Intended tor members continuous or cantilevered over supports and provides equal capacity
In both poontve and negative bending.
22F·E3 SP/SP 2200 2200 650 650 200 1.7 1750 560 175 <)() 1.5 1150 1650 1.5
24f·El SPISP 650 650 200 1.8 1600 560 175 90 1.6 1100 1750 1.6
2400 1200
24F·E2 SPISP 650 650 200 1.9 1700 560 175 90 1.6 1150 1700 16
The following combination Ia lntondad for straight or slightly - members for dry uoo and lndustrlalappeoronce.tD
24F·E3 SP/SP 2400 1200 650 650 9016 1.8 1300 470 155 80 1.5 950 1100 I5
The foUowtng combination Is balanced and Intended for members continuous or Cblntnevered over supports and provides equal capactty
In both poontve and negative bonding.
24F·E4 SP/SP 2400 2400 650 650 200 1.8 2000 560 175 90 1.6 1250 1750 I6
Wet·use factors2 0.8 0.8 0.53 0.53 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.53 0.875 0875 0.833 0.8 0.73 0.833
(Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART A
I Thecombinations in this table are applicable to members consisting of four or more laminations and are intended primarily for members stressed in
bending due to loads applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations. Design values are tabulated, however, for loading both
perpendicular and parallel to the wide faces of the laminations. For combinations and design values applicable to members loaded primarily axially
or parallel to the wide faces of the laminations, see Table No. 25-C-1, Part B. For members of two or three laminations, see Table No. 25-C-1, Part
B.
2The tabulated design values are for dry conditions of use. To obtain wet-use design values, multiply the tabulated values by the factors shown at the
end of the table.
3The tabulated design values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading, see Section 2504 (c) 4.
4The symbols used for species are AC = Alaska cedar, DF = Douglas fir-larch, DFS = Douglas fir south, HF = hem-fir, WW = softwood species,
SP = southern pine andES = eastern spruce. (N3 refers to No. 3 structural joists and planks or structural light framing grade.) Softwood species ·.
I
(WW) and eastern spruce are included in the general category of western species although eastern spruce and some softwood species are produced
in other areas. i.
5The tabulated design values in bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth, the
requirements of Section 2511 (d) 5 apply.
6Design values in this column are for extreme fiber stress in bending when the member is loaded such that the compression zone laminations are
subjected to tensile stresses. The values in this column may be increased 200 psi where end joint spacing restrictions are applied to the compression
zone when stressed in tension.
7Where specified, this value may be increased to 650 psi by providing in the bearing area at least one dense 2-inch nominal thickness lamination of
Douglas fir -larch for western species combinations, or southern pine for southern pine combinations. These dense laminations must be backed by a
medium-grain lamination of the same species. ~
SFor bending members greater than 15 inches in depth, the design value for compression stress perpendicular to grain is 650 psi on the tension face. :;;
9Where specified, this value may be increased by providing at least two 2-inch nominal thickness Douglas fir-larch laminations in the bearing area. g
The compression-perpendicular-to-grain design values for Douglas fir-larch are 560 psi for medium grain and 650 psi for dense. 3:
10'Jbese combinations are for dry conditions of use only because they may contain wane. They are recommended for industrial appearance grade and ~
for straight or slightly cambered members only. If wane is omitted these restrictions do not apply. r
11 This value maybe increased to 140psi for softwood species (WW) and to 155 psi for hem-fir when the member does not contain wane on both sides; i ~
to 115 psi for softwood species (WW) and to 130 psi for hem-fir when the member does not contain wane on one side. i C>
12This value may be increased to II 0 psi when the member does not contain coarse-grain material; to 140 psi when the member does not contain wane 0
on both sides or the member does not contain coarse-grain material and wane on one side; to 165 psi when the member does not contain coarse-grain g
material and wane Of\ both sides. m
13 The compression-perpendicular-to-grain design value of255 psi is based on the lowest strength species of the western woods group. If at least one 2- ....
inch nominal thickness lamination ofE-rated hem-fir with the same E value, orE-rated Douglas fir-larch 200,000 psi higher in modulus of elasticity ilXI
(E) than that specified is used in the bearing area on the face of the member subjected to the compression-perpendicular-to-grain stress, F, J... may be
increased to 375 psi. If at least two 2-inch nominal thickness laminations of E-rated hem-fir with the same E value, orE-rated Douglas fir-larch
m
c
200,000 psi higher in modulus of elasticity than that specified are used in the bearing area on the face of the member subjected to the compression- :::::j
perpendicular-to-grain stress, F,.l.. may be increased to 500 psi. 5
14
z
Where specified, this value may be increased to 650 psi by providing in the bearing area at least one 2-inch nominal thickness lamination of Douglas
fir-larch for western species combinations, or one 2-inch nominal thickness lamination of southern pine for southern pine combinations having a
modulus of elasticity (E) value 200,000 psi higher than the E value specified.
15 E-rated Douglas fir-larch 200,000 psi higher in modulus of elasticity may be substituted for the specified E-rated hem-fir.
16This value may be increased to 140 psi when the member does not contain coarse-grain material or when the member does not contain wane on both
sides; to 165 psi when members do not contain coarse-grain material or wane on one side; or to 200 psi when the member does not contain both
coarse-grain material and wane on both sides of the member.
I 7footnote 5 to Table No. 25-C-1, Part B, also applies.
18 When Douglas fir south is used in place of all of the western wood laminations required in western species combinations 16F-V 1, 16F-V 4, 20F-VI,
20F-V5, 22F-VI, 22F-V5, 24F-VI, 24F-V6, 16F-EI, 16F-E4, 20F-EI, 20F-E4, 22F-E3, 24F-E6 and 24F-E7, the design value for horizontal
shear is the same as for combinations using all Douglas fir-larch (F,.u = 165 psi andF,.,. = 145 psi forL3; and Fe== 90 psi andF,.n = 135 psi for
N3). .
1"The combination symbols relate to a specific combination of grades and species in U .B.C. Standard No. 25-11 that will provide the design values
shown forthe combinations. The first two numbers in the combination symbol correspond to the design value in bending shown in column 3. The
letter in the combination symbol (either a "V" or an" E") indicates whetherthe combination is made from visually graded (V) orE-rated (E) lumber
in the outer zones.
21llbese values for horizontal shear, Fm apply to members manufactured using multiple-piece laminations with unbonded edge joints. For members
manufactured using single-piece laminations or using multiple-piece laminations with bonded edge joints, the horizontal shear values in column II
apply.
21 The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply.
22 The design values in bending about the x-x axis (Fbxl in this column for bending members shall be multiplied by 0.75 when the member is r
manufactured without the required special tension laminations. "13

23 The following species may be used for softwood species (WW), provided the design values in horizontal shear in column 7 (F,.J and in Column II .
w (F ,) are reduced by 10 psi and the design values in horizontal shear in Column 12 (F,,.) are reduced by 5 psi: Coast sitka spruce, coast species. , ·, ~
l'lo) eastern white pine (north) and western white pine. ~
24
""' 111efoMowing species may be used for softwood species (WW), provided the design values in modulus of elasticity (E, and£,) in Columns 8 and 13
are re<hk:ed by 100,000 psi: Western cedars, western cedars (north). white woods (western woods) and California redwood--open grain. j
w
N
CD TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART B--ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 3
Members stressed principally in axial tension or compression or in bending with load applied parallel
to the wide faces of the laminations
-to ·I'
BENDING ABOUT Y·Y AXIS BENDING ABOUT X·X AXIS
to--
~-lei ~
l'lrpon-
AXIALLY LOADED
oiLMI/nallono
·t'
.
Wide
Faces of
L.oml....
tionl y
-to
Tension
Grain
F,
Compression
l'llrallel
to Grain
Fe Exlntme Fiber in Bending& Fbyy Horizontal Shear7 F""'
Exlntme Fiber
In Bending& Fb.u
-
4or Mono
COIII'RES-
IIODULUS
SION PER-
PEJIDIC.
-.
l.8mt (Fo< Horizon.
tal Shear
Fvu
OF ULARTO multiple- 2Lams
COIIIIIN.tr L.ASTICITY GRAIN 2orllon! 4 or More 4or Mono piece 4 or More to15in. 4orllon! 2orlllcn
T10N f14 l.8mt l.ama 2or3Lams l.8mt 2Lams l.8mt 3Lams 2Lams l.8mJ10 Lams
SYIIBOI.
f
SPECIES4
2
GRADE5
3
x106psi
4
Fe-';-
poi
5
psi
6
poi
7
poi
8
poi
9
3Lama
psi
10
psi
If
lamina-
tionl.)13
12
poi
13
poi
14
psi
15
0::
16
poi
17
poi
18
Visually Graded Western Species
I~
I L3 1.5 56011 900 1550 1200 1450 1250 1000 75 145 135 125 1250 1500 165
~ L2 1.7 56()11 1250 1900 1600 1800 1600 1300 75 145 135 125 1700 2000 165
!----
3 L2D 1.8 650 1450 2300 1850 2100 1850 1550 75 145 135 125 2000 2300 165
!----
4 L!CL 1.9 59011 1400 2100 1900 2200 2000 1650 75 145 135 125 1900 2200 165
I;
I
!----
5 DF Ll 2.0 650 1600 2400 2100 2400 2100 1800 75 145 135 125 2200 2400 165
1--
6 N3C 1.4 470 350 875 550 550 550 550 60 120 115 105 450 - 140
1--
7 N3M 15 560 900 1550 700 1450 1250 1000 75 145 135 125 1000 - 165
r---g N2 1.6 56()11 1000 1550 1150 1600 1550 1300 75 145 135 125 1350 1600 165
z
C)
~ N2D 1.8 650 1150 1800 1350 1850 1800 1500 75 145 135 125 1600 1850 165 i 0
- 10 Nl 1.8 56()11 1300 1950 1450 1950 1750 1500 75 145 135 125 1750 2100 165 ~ g
m
II N!D 2.0 650 1500 2300 1700 2300 2100 1750 75 145 135 125 2100 2400 165
....CD
t---
12 DF ss 1.8 56011 1400 1950 1650 2100 1950 1650 75 145 135 125 1900 2200 165 g:
- m
13 SSD 2.0 650 1600 2300 1950 2400 2300 1950 75 145 135 125 2200 2400 165 c
14 L3 1.3 37511 800 1100 975 1200 1050 850 70 135 130 115 1100 IJOO !55
::::j
----;;- 0
-
L2 1.4 37511 1050 IJ50 IJOO 1500 1350 1100 70 135 130 115 1450 1700 !55 z
16 Ll 1.6 37511 1200 1500 1450 1750 1550 IJOO 70 135 130 115 1600 1900 !55
-
17 LID 1.7 500 1400 1750 1700 2000 1850 1550 70 135 130 115 1900 2200 !55
- HF
18 N3 1.3 375 425 900 575 700 700 700 70 135 130 115 575 - !55
- 19 N2 1.4 37511 850 1300 975 1350 IJOO 1100 70 135 130 115 1150 1350 !55
-
20 Nl 1.6 37511 975 1450 1250 1550 1500 1250 70 135 130 115 1350 1550 !55
21 ss 1.6 37511 1100 1450 1350 1750 1650 1400 70 135 130 115 1500 1750 !55
22 L3 1.0" 255 525 850 675 800 700 550 6016 12016 11516 10516 725 850 14016
-
23 N3 1.015 255 275 625 450 450 450 450 6016 12016 11516 10516 400 - 14016
- 24 ww N2 J.Jl5 255 550 900 700 900 875 725 6016 12016 11516 10516 775 900 14016
-
25 N! 1.215 255 650 1000 875 1050 1000 850 6016 12016 11516 10516 875 1050 J4()16
- 26 ss 1.2" 255 750 1000 1000 1150 1100 925 6016 12016 1!516 10516 1000 1150 14016
59 L3 1.1 500 800 1400 1050 1200 1050 850 75 145 135 125 1050 1250 165
~ DFS L2 1.3 500 1050 1750 1400 1750 1550 1150 75 145 135 125 1450 1700 165
-
61 Ll 1.5 650 1350 2200 1850 2000 1800 1500 75 145 135 125 1850 2200 165
64 D 1.3 300 575 925 850 950 925 875 65 125 120 110 800 950 145
t---
65 D4 1.5 450 825 1050 1050 1350 1350 1350 65 125 120 110 1150 IJ50 145
t---
66 ES (4 1.5 450 975 1550 1200 1750 1750 1700 65 125 120 110 1400 1650 145
r--
67 C6 1.7 450 1100 1850 1450 1950 1950 1900 65 125 120 110 1550 1800 145
r-
6S
- B 17 450 1350 1850 1800 2250 2200 2150 65 125 120 110 1900 2250 145
69 L3 1.3 470 700 1150 1150 1000 875 700 80 165 160 140 1000 1150 190
7
-
0 AC
L2 1.4 470 1000 1450 1550 1250 1100 925 80 165 160 140 1.150 1550 190
w 71 LID 1.7 560 1250 1900 2050 1650 1500 1250 80 165 160 140 1700 2000 190
N
CD
-
72 LIS 17 560 1250 1900 2050 1650 1500 1250 80 165 160 140 1700 2000 190
!Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART 8--ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION' 2 "---(Continued)
Members stressed principally In axial tension or compression or In bending with load applied parallel
- .,
BENDING ABOUT Y·Y AXIS BENDING ABOUT X·X AXIS
~-~~~
t o-- .....,.,.
~
·I'
olllmlnatlonl
AXIAL.l.Y LOADED to-
'"-"'
r..-
-lotto
Compmalon
Pnllol
. Llmlna-
tlons y
Gnlin to Gnlin Em-Abo<

Em- Aber in Bonding& Ftwv Hottzontoi-7F., lnBondlngiiF-
-
F, Fe
4orllote
COIIPRES. l.omi(For Horizon.
SIOHf'EII. IIIISI!w
IIOOULUS PEllliC- with F..,
OF UL.ARlO mump. 2Lams
COIIBINA- LAST1CITY GRAIN 2orllonl 4orllonl 4 or Mote piece 4orllonl to151n. 4orllonl 20tllort
TIOH f14 loms10
~
Lams Lams 2or3Lima LMnl 3Loms 2Loms lami~ LMnl 3Lims 2Lams Doop9 LMnl
SYIIBOL SPECIES4 GRADES a100psi psi psi psi psi psi psi tions.)13 psi psi psi psi psi psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E-Rated Western Species
I
c:
27 I/2-I8E 1.8 650 900 1750 1200 1450 1250 1000 75 145 135 125 1250 1500 165
- 112-2.0E 1750 165 z
r---
28 2.0 650 1100 2000 1400 1450 1250 1000 75 145 135 115 1500 ::r;
29 I12-2.2E 145 125 1700 2000 165 0
- JO 1i6-I.8E
22
18
650
650
1250
1550
2300
2100
1550
1700
1650
2400
1400
2400
1150
2100
75
75 145
135
135 125 1800 2100 165
::u
3:
- 31
DF
"o-20E 2.0 650 75 145 135 125 2100 2400 165 Ill
1800 2400 1900 2400 2400 2400
- 32 "'·22E 2.2 650 1800 2400 2100 2400 2400 2400 75 145 135 125 2300 2400 165
c:
;:::
~
c
r---
63
lr;:-2.1E
1"tt-2.JE
2.1
21
650
650
1150
1800
2200
2400
1500
2000
1550
2400
1350
2400
1100
2400
75
75
145
145
135
135
125
125
1biXI
2200
1900
2400
165
165
zCl
0
0
c
m
...
Im
c
33 112-1.5E 70 115 1100 1300 155 ~
1.5 500 800 1050 950 1200 1050 !50 135 130
- 34 112-I.8E 1.8 500 900 1300 1200 1450 1250 1000 70 135 130 115 1250 1500 155
0
z
- 35 112-l.OE 2.0 500 1100 1550 1400 1450 1250 1000 70 135 130 115 1500 1750 155
- 36
HF
lf4-1.5E 1.5 500 1200 1450 1300 2100 1900 1700 70 135 130 115 1400 1650 155
~ lfo-1.8E 1.8 500 1550 1950 1700 2400 2400 2100 70 135 130 115 1800 2100 155
t----;s lfo-l.OE 2.0 500 1800 2400 1900 2400 2400 2400 70 135 130 115 2100 2400 155
39 112-1.5E 1.5 255 800 1200 950 1200 1050 850 60" 12016 11516 10516 1100 1300 14016
r--
40 112-I.8E 1.8 255 900 1500 1200 1450 1250 1000 6016 120" 11516 10516 1250 1500 14016
1---
II
41 112-l.OE 2.0 255 1100 1750 1400 1450 1250 1000 6016 12016 11516 10516 1500 1750 14016
I---
42
ww lf•-1.5E 6016 12016 11516 10516 1400 1650
1.5 255 1200 1550 1300 2100 1900 1700 )4016
~ 11o-1.8E 1.8 255 1550 1950 1700 2400 2400 2100 6016 12016 11516 10516 1800 2100 14016
r----;- 1/o-l.OE 2.0 255 1!00 2200 1900 2400 2400 2400 6016 12016 11516 10516 2100 2400 14016
Visually Graded Southern Pine

45 N3C 1.1 470 325 850 550 550 550 550 60 120 115 105 450 - 140
I---
I
46 N3M 1.3 560 900 1500 675 1450 1250 1000 90 175 165 150 1000 - 200
- 47 N2M12 1.4 56()11 1200 1900 1150 1750 1550 1300 90 175 165 150 1400 1600 200
- 48 N2DI2 1.7 650 1400 2200 1350 2000 1800 1500 90 175 165 150 1600 1900 200
- SP )!.
49 NIM12 1.7 56()11 1350 2100 1450 1950 1750 1500 90 175 165 150 1800 2100 200
f.
50
I
NID12 1.9 650 1550 2300 1700 2300 2100 1750 90 175 165 150 2100 2400 200
-------sJ SSM 1.7 56()11 1300 1900 1600 2100 1950 1650 90 175 165 150 1750 2100 200
- 52 SSD 1.9 650 1500 2200 1850 2400 2300 1950 90 175 165 150 2100 2400 200
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 25-C-1 PART 8--ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
Members stressed principally In axial tension or compression or In bending with load applied parallel
BENDING ABOUT Y-Y AXIS BENDING ABOUT X-X AXIS
Loaded Pl<allol Loaded
loWideFac:oo I'O<pon-
·I' ·I'
of Laminations dlcular
AXIALLY LOADED to Wide
Fac:ooof
Lam in&-
tiona y
I
Tenllon Compression
Pl<allollo Parallel
Grain to Grain Extreme Fiber
Fr Fe Ext,.,. Rber In Bending& Fm Horizontal Shear7 Fvvv in Bending& Fbu
-
4orMont
COM PRES- Lams(For Horizon-
SIONPEA- members tal Shear
MOOULUS PENDIC- Fvu
OF ULAATO multiph~ 2Lams
COMB INA- LASTlCITY GRAIN 2orMont 4orMont 4or Mont place 4orMore to151n. 4or More 2orllonl
T10N f14 lam in&- 2Lams L.ams10
~
Lams Lams 2or3Lams Lams 3Lams 2Lams Lams 3Lams 06ep9 Lams
SYMBOL SPECIES4 GRADES x106psl psi psi psi psi psi psi tions.)13 psi psi psi psi psi psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E-Rated Southern Pine
-
53
54
1.12-1.8£
'12-2.0E
1.8
2.0
650
650
900
1100
1900
2300
1200
1400
1450
1450
1250
1250
1000
1000
90
90
175
175
165
165
150
150
1250
1600
1500
1750
200
200
I c
z
::;;
~ 1/2-2.2£ 2.2 650 1250 2400 1550 1650 1400 1150 90 175 165 ISO 1700 2000 200 0
- SP
56 1/6-1.8£ 1.8 650 1550 1850 1700 2400 2400 2100 90 175 165 ISO 1800 2100 200 ::D
t--- s::
57 1/6-2.0£ 2.0 650 1800 2400 1900 2400 2400 2400 90 175 165 ISO 2100 2400 200 al
t--- c
58 '16-2.2E 2.2 650 1800 2400 2100 2400 2400 2400 90 175 165 150 ~300 2400 200
r=c
-
Wet-use factorsl 0.833 0.53 0.8 0.73 0 73 0.8 0.8 0.8 0 875 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.8 0.875 0.875
' z
"c
(")
0
m
1The combinations in this table are intended primarily for members loaded either axially or in bending with the loads acting parallel to the wide faces of ...
IQ
the laminations. Design values for bending due to loading applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations are also included: however, the Ql
Ql
combinations in Table No. 25-C-1. Part A, are usually better suited for this condition of loading. The design values for bending about the x-x axis
m
(Fbu) shown in Column 16 are for members from two laminations to 15 inches deep without tension laminations. Design values approximately IS c
percent higher for members with four or more laminations are shown in Column 17. These higher design values, however. require special tension =i
laminations which may not be readily available. 0
z
end of the table.
3The tabulated design values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading, see Section 2504 (c) 4.
4
The symbols used for species are AC = Alaska cedar, DF = Douglas fir-larch, DFS = Douglas fir south. ES = eastern spruce, HF = hem-fir, WW i
= softwood species, and SP = southern pine. ~
5Grade designations are as follows: Softwood species (WW) and eastern spruce are included in general category of western species although eastern [
spruce and some softwood species are produced in other areas. ~

Visually Graded Western Species
Ll is Lllaminating grade (dense for Douglas fir-larch and Douglas fir south).
Ll D is Ll dense laminating grade for hem-fir.
LIS is a special grade of Alaska cedar, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-11, Section 25.1110 (h).
Ll CL is Ll close grain laminating grade.
L2D is L2laminating grade (dense).
L2 is L2laminating grade (medium grain).
L3 is L3 laminating grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir south and hem-fir).
SSD is dense select structural. structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (dense).
SS is select structural, structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch).
NID is dense No. I structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (dense).
Nl is No. I structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch).
N2D is dense No.2 structural joists and planks or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch dense).
N2 is No.2 structural joists and planks or structural light framing grade (medium grain for Douglas fir-larch).
N3M is No.3 structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade (medium grain).
w N3C is No. 3 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (coarse grain).
w
w N3 is No. 3 structural joists and planks. or structural light framing grade.
!Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1--(Contlnued)
VIsually Graded Soutl'lern Pine

SSD is dense select structural, structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (dense).
SSM is select structural, structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade (medium grain).
NID is No. I dense structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. I boards graded as dense.
NIM is No. I structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. I boards all with a medium grain rate of growth.
N2D is No.2 dense structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No.2 boards graded as dense.
N2M is No. 2 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. 2 boards all with a medium grain rate of growth.
N3M is No.3 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No.3 boards all with a medium grain rate of growth.
N3C is No. 3 structural joists and planks, or structural light framing grade or No. 3 boards all with coarse grain rate of growth.
E-Rated Grades-All Species

1/6-2.2E has 1/6 edge characteristic with 2.2E.

1/•-I.5E has 1/• edge characteristic with 1.5E.

1/2-2.2E, 1h-2.1E, 'h-2.0E, 1h-1.8E are E-rated grades with edge characteristics occupying up to one half of cross section.
c:
6The values ofFbn were calculated based on members 12 inches in depth (bending about Y-Y axis). When the depth is less than 12 inches, the values of z
~
F JA, can be increased by multiplying by the following factors: 0
:u
s:::
DEPTH, INCHES MULTIPLYING FACTOR
I:D
10.75 1.01
c:
F
8.75 1.04 c
6.75 1.07 z
C)
5.125 1.10 0
3.125 1.16 0
cm
...
CD
c:D
c:D
m
c
~
5
z
'The design values in horizontal shear contained in this table are based on members without wane.
8The tabulated design values in bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth, the
requirements of Section 2511 (d) 5 apply.
"The design values in Column 16 are for members of from two laminations to 15 inches in depth without tension laminations.
10'fhe design values in Column 17 are for members of four or more laminations in depth and require special tension laminations. When these values are
used in design and the member is specified by combination symbol, the designer should also specify the required design value in bending.
11 When tension laminations are used to obtain the design value for Fb.u shown in Column 16, the compression perpendicular to grain value, F,l_, for
the tension face may be increased to 650 psi for Douglas fir-larch and southern pine, and to 500 psi for hem-fir because the tension laminations are
required to be dense.
12Combinations 47, 48, 49 and 50 have more restrictive slope of grain requirements than the basic slope of grain of the grades of lumber used in order to
obtain higher tension-parallel-to-grain values and design values in bending when loaded perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations. The
slopes of grain used to calculate the design values in Table No. 25-C-1, Part B, were: Combination 47, 1:14: Combination 48, 1:14: Combination
49, I: 16; and Combination 50, I: 14. When design stresses are lower than the design values shown. or when a less restrictive slope of grain provides
the same design value, a less restrictive slope of grain may be used. The following table gives the design values of these combinations for various
(Continued)
N
Ul
w
w
Ul ~
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-1--(Contlnued)
slopes of grain: Values ofFbxx in column 5 are for members of two laminations to 15 inches in depth without tension laminations, and values in
Column 6 are for members of four or more laminations with tension laminations.
COMP. BENDING ABOUT THE

TENSION COMP. BENDING ABOUT THE Y-Y AXIS F11yy
PARALLEL PARALLEL PARALLEL X-X AXIS F111cx
SLOPE OF COMB. TO GRAIN (F1) TO GRAIN (F.,) TOGRAIN(F.,)
GRAIN NO. 20RMORE 20R3 40RMORE 2Lams 4orMore 4orMore
LAMS LAMS LAMS totS ln. Lams 2Lams 3Lama Lams
pal pal pal pal pal pal pal pal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
47 1200 1150 1900 1400 1600 1300 1550 1750
48 1400 1350 2200 1600 1900 1500 1800 2000
1.12
49 1300 1450 1900 1750 2100 1500 1750 1950
50 1550 1700 2200 2100 2400 1750 2100 2300
47 1150 1150 1700 1400 1600 1300 1550 1750
48 1350 1350 2000 1600 1900 1500 1800 2000
1.10
49 1150 1450 1700 1550 1850 1500 1750 1850 c:
z
50 1350 1700 2000 1800 2100 1750 2100 2100 ;;
0
::D
47 1000 1150 1500 1350 1600 1300 1550 1600 3:
48 1150 1350 1750 1600 1850 1500 1800 1850 ID
1.8 c:
49 - - - - - - - - ;=
c
50 - - - - - - - - z
G)
0
0
c
m
...
CD
i
m
c
BThese values for horizontal shear, F,"' apply to members manufactured using multiple-piece laminations with unbonded edge joints. For members 3
using single-piece laminations or using multiple-piece laminations with bonded edge joints, the horizontal shear values tabulated in Columns 13, 14 0
z
and IS apply.
14The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2S04 (c) 4 shall not apply.
1SThe following species may be used for softwood species (WW), provided the modulus of elasticity, E, is reduced by 100,000 psi: Western cedars,
western cedars (north), white woods (western woods) and California redwood-open grain.
16The following species may be used for softwood species (WW) provided the design values in horizontal shear in Column 12 (F") are reduced by S psi
and the design values in horizontal shear in Columns 13, 14 and IS (F,.,.) and in Column 18 <F~xl are reduced by 10 psi: Coast sitka spruce, coast
species, western white pine and eastern white pine. ·
17When special tension laminations are not used, the design values in bending about the x-x axis (Fbxl shall be multiplied by 0. 7S for bending members
over l S inches deep. For bending members IS inches and less in depth, use the design values in Column 16.
w TABLE NO. 25-C-2 PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED
w
CD CALIFORNIA REDWOOD VISUALLY GRADED1 2 a
Members stressed principally in axial tension or compression or in bending with load applied perpendicular
Bending Abou1 X·X Axis Bending About Y·Y Axis

Loaded Parallel to Wide Faces of the Laminations Loaded Perpendicular to Wide Faces of Laminations Axially Loaded
Extreme Fiber In Bending Compression Perpen· Compres-
Tension Compression dicularto Grain Extreme Compression Tension sion
Species Zona Zona Modulus Fiber Perpendicular Modulus Parallel Parallel Modulus
Outer Stressed Stressed Tension Compres- Horizontal of in to Grain Horizontal of to to of
Combi· Laminations/ inTensionS In Tensions Face sion Face Shear Elasticity7 jlendlng5 Side Faces Shear Elasticity7 Grain Grain Elasticity7
nation Core Fbxx FbJUC Fcl_xx Fcl.:xx F.,x FJUC Fbyy Fcj__yy Fvyy Eyy Fr Fe E
Symbol Laminations4 psi psi psi psi psi x 106 psi psi psi psi x 106 psi psi psi x 106psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B-16F
VI CR!CR 1600 800 315 315 125 1.1 1400 270 110 1.1 900 1400 1.1
Wet-use factors' 0.8 0.8 0.667 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.667 0.875 0.833 0.8 0.73 0.833
1The combinations in this table are intended primarily for members stressed in bending due to loads applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the
laminations for members with four or more laminations. Stresses are tabulated, however, for loading both perpendicular and parallel to the wide
faces of the laminations. For combinations and stresses applicable to members loaded primarily axially or parallel to the wide faces of the
laminations, see Table No. 25-C-2, Part B. For members of two or three laminations, see Table No. 25-C-2, Part B.
2The tabulated design values are for dry conditions of use. To obtain wet-use design values, multiply the tabulated values by the factors shown at the c:
z
end of the table. :;;
3The tabulated design values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading, see Section 2504 (c) 4. 0
:u
"CR = California redwood. 3::
5The tabulated design values in bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth, the CD
requirements of Section 2511 (d) 5 apply. c:
;::
6Design values in this column are for extreme fiber stress in bending when the member is loaded such that the compression zone laminations are c
subjected to tensile ~tresses. The values in this column may be increased to 1200 psi when end-joint spacing restrictions are applied to the
compression zone WQen stressed in tension.
z
C>
7The duration of load modification factor given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply. 0
0
cm
TABLE NO. 25-C-2 PART B-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED ....
CALIFORNIA REDWOOD VISUALLY GRADED1 2 J 7 a li
QO
Members stressed principally in axial tension, axial compression or in bending with load applied parallel m
to the wide faces of the laminations c
Axially Loaded Bending AbOirtX·XAxis
3
Bendi~AboutY·Y Axis Loaded Perpendicular to Wlda 0
Loadad Parallel to de Faces of Laminations Faces of Laminations z
Tension Compression
Compres- Parallel Parallel Extreme Rber Horizontal
slon To Grain To Grain Extreme Rber In Bending& Horizontal Shear in Bending Shear
Combl- Modulus Psrpen
nation of dlcular 2orMore 4or More 2or3 4orMore 3 2 4or More 3 2 2Lams 2or Mora
Symbol Specles4 Grade5 lastlclty9 to Grain Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams Lams to 15 in. deep Lams
E
XIO&psl Fel_ F, Fe Fe Fbyy Fbyy Fbyy Fvyy Fvyy Fvyy Fbu Fvxx
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B-1 CR L5 1.0 315 875 1350 1350 1450 1300 1100 110 105 95 1200 125
I
B-2 CR L4 1.0 315 875 1350 1350 1450 1300 1100 110 105 95 1200 125
B-3 CR L3 1.2 315 1000 1550 1550 1450 1300 1100 110 105 95 1350 125
B-4 CR L2 1.2 315 1000 1600 1600 1500 1350 1150 110 105 95 1350 125
B-5 CR Ll 1.2 315 1000 1600 1600 1600 1500 1250 110 105 95 1350 125
Wet-use factors' 0.833 0.667 0.8 0.73 0.73 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.875 0.875 0.875 0.8 0.875
'The tabulated combinations in this table are intended primarily for members loaded either axially or in bending with the loads acting parallel to the
wide faces ojthe laminations. Design values for bending due to loading applied perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations are also included;
however, the combination in Table No. 25-C-2, Part A, is usually better suited for this condition of loading for members with four or more
laminations.
end of the table.
lThe tabulated values are for normal duration of loading. For other durations of loading, see Section 2504 (c) 4.
"CR = California red\Vood. N
Cf'
w 0
w N
co (Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 25-C-2-(Continued)
5Grade designations are as follows:
Visually Graded--California redwood
Ll is Lllaminating grade (close grain).
L2 is L2 laminating grade (close grain).
L3 is L3 laminating grade (close grain).
L4 is L4laminating grade (close grain).
L5 is L5laminating grade (close grain).
6Thevalues ofFbn were calculated based on members 12 inches in depth (bending about Y- Y axis). When the depth is less than 12 inches, the values of
Fb, can be increased by multiplying by the following factors:
DEPTH, INCHES MULTIPLYING FACTOR
10.75 1.01
8.75 1.04
6.75 1.07
5.125 1.10
3.125 1.16
c
7The tabulated design values for bending are applicable to members 12 inches or less in depth. For members greater than 12 inches in depth the z
requirements of Section 2511 (d) 5 apply. ::;;
8The combinations in this table are not intended for deep bending members when loaded perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations. However,
0
JJ
if members over 15 inches in depth are necessary, AITC 302-24 tension laminations are required and the designer must specify that the member is for :!!:
use in bending about the x-x axis, in which case. the design value F 6 u is 1400 psi for combinations B-1 and B-2 and 1600 psi for B-3, B-4 and B-5. Ill
9The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply. c
r=
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
....
TABLE NO. 25-D-PART A-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR HARDWOOD GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER 1 CD
Ql
FOR NORMAL LOADING DURATION-DRY CONDITIONS OF USE 2 Ql
m
c
::::j
MULTIPLY THE APPROPRIATE STRESS
MODULE IN PART B BY THE FACTORS 0
BELOW TO DETERMINE ALLOWABLE ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESS z
STRESS FOR: (Pounds per Square Inch)
SPECIES
Extreme Fiber
in Bendin?, (Fb)
or Tens on Compression Modulus of Compression
Parallel to Parallel to Elasticity Horizontal Pe~ndicuiar
Grain (F1) Grain (F0 ) (E)6 Shear (F.) to rain (Fe_)
I. Hickory, true and pecan 3.85 3.05 1.80 260 730
2. Beech, American 3.05 2.45 1.70 230 610
3. Birch, sweet and yellow 3.05 2.45 1.90 230 610
4. Elm, rock 3.05 2.45 1.40 230 610
5. Maple, black and sugar (hard maple) 3.05 2.45 1.70 230 610
6. Ash, commercial white 2.80 2.20 1.70 230 610
7. Oak, commercial red and white 2.80 2.05 1.60 230 610
8. Elm, American and slippery (white or soft elm) 2.20 1.60 1.40 190 310
9. Sweet gum (red or sap gum) 2.20 1.60 1.40 190 370
10. Tupelo, black (black gum) 2.20 1.60 1.20 190 370
II. Tupelo, water 2.20 1.60 1.30 190 370
12. Ash, black 2.00 1.30 1.30 170 370
13. Poplar, yellow 2.00 1.45 1.50 150 270
14. Cottonwood. eastern 1.55 1.20 1.20 110 180
!Footnotes on following page.)

TABLE NO. 25·0-PART B-VALUES FOR USE IN COMPUTING WORKING STRESSES WITH FACTORS OF
PART A TOGETHER WITH LIMITATIONS REQUIRED TO PERMIT THE USE OF SUCH STRESSES 3
RATIO OF SIZE MODULUS OF

OF MAXIMUM EXTREME FIBER IN BENDING TENSION PARALLEL TO GRAIN COMPRESSION PARALLEL
TO GRAIN ELASTICITY
COMB INA· PERMITTED (E)6
TION KNOT TO NUMBER OF
5
SYMBOL FINISHED LAMINATIONS
WIDTH OF Stress Steepest Stress Steepest stress Steepest Stress
LAMINATION4 Module Grain Slope Module Grain Slope Module Grain Slope Module
4 to 14 800 1:16 500 1:16 970 1:15

A 0.1 15 or more 1:16 1,000,000
800 500 1:16 970 1:15
B .2 4 to 14 770 1:16 500 1:16 920 1:15 1,000,000

15 or more 800 1:16 500 1:16 930 1:15
4 to 14 600 1:12 450 1:15 860 1:14
c .3 15 or more 660 1:12 450 1:16 870 1:14
900,000
4 to 14 450 1:8 350 1:10 780 1:12

D .4 800,000
15 or more 520 1:8 350 1:12 810 1:12
4 to 14 300 1:8 300 1:8 690 1:10
E .5 800,000
15 or more 380 1:8 300 1:8 730 1:10
1The allowable unit stresses in bending obtained from Table No. 25-D apply when the wide faces of the laminations are normal to the direction of the
load.
c:
2
Allowable stresses for dry conditions of use shall be applicable when the moisture content in service is 16 percent or less as in most covered structures. z
For wet conditions of use the following maximum percentage of the dry-use stresses shall be permitted:
Fb (bending) and F, (tension) 80 percent F, (horizontal shear 88 percent)
~::D
Fe (compression parallel to grain) 70 percent Fcl_ (compression perpendicular to grain) 67 percent 31:
IJI
E (modulus of elasticity) 83 percent c:
3for modification of allowable unit stresses for structural glued-laminated lumber, see Section 2504. j=
c
4 Factors for knot sizes of 0 .I and 0. 2 are identical in case of extreme fiber in bending and in tension parallel to grain because slope of grain of I: 16 is a
greater limitation than knot size. The smaller knot size may be specified for reasons other than strength.
zC)
5When laminations of different thicknesses are used, divide the depth of the member by the thickest lamination used and then assume the quotient to be 0
0
the number of laminations in the member for use in determining the allowable stress. c
m
6
The duration of load modification factors given in Section 2504 (c) 4 shall not apply.
1988 EDITION 25-E
TABLE NO. 25-E-ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES FOR TREATED

ROUND TIMBER POLES AND PILES&
(Values for normal load duration and wet conditions of use,
pounds per square Inch)
Compression Extreme Compression Modulus
Parallel to Fiber In Horizontal Perpendicular of
Graln7 Bendlng7 Shear to Grain Elasticity
Species Fe Fb Fv Fcl_ E
I. Pacific
Coast
Douglas
Fir' 2 1250 2450 115 230 1,500,000
2. Southern
Pine' 1 1200 2400 110 250 1,500,000
3. Red Oak4 1100 2450 135 350 I ,250,000
4. Red Pine' 900 1900 85 !55 1,280,000
1 Design values in compression parallel to the grain for Pacific Coast Douglas fir and
southern pine may be increased 0.20 percent for each foot of length from the tip of the pile
to the critical section. The increase shall not exceed 10 percent for any single pile;
however, the increase is cumulative with the increase in section properties due to taper
from the pile tip to the critical section.
'Pacific Coast Douglas fir includes Douglas fir from west of the crest of the Cascade
Mountains in Oregon, Washington and Northern California and west of the crest of the
Sierra Nevada Mountains in the rest of California. For fastener design, use Douglas fir-
larch design values.
'Southern pine values apply to longleaf, slash, loblolly and shortleaf pines.
'Red oak values apply to northern and southern red oak.
'Red pine values apply to red pine grown in the United States. For fastener design, use
northern pine design values.
6 The form factor of Section 2504 (c) 7 for bending members of circular cross section is
incorporated in the allowable unit stresses for extreme fiber in bending as listed within the
table.
7The allowable values listed in Table No. 25-E for compression parallel to grain and extreme
fiber in bending are based on load-sharing principles such as occur in a pile cluster. For
piles which support their own specific load, an additional safety factor of 1.25 shall be
used with compression parallel to grain values and an additional safety factor of 1.30 shall
be used with extreme fiber in bending values.
343
t TABLE NO. 25-F-HOLDING POWER OF BOLTS1 24 FOR DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH, CALIFORNIA REDWOOD (CLOSE GRAIN)
AND SOUTHERN PINE
(See U.B.C. Standard No. 25·17 where members are not of equal size and for values In other species.)
p = Safe loads parallel to grain in pounds

q = Safe loads perpendicular to grain in pounds
Length of Bolt In
Main Wood Member" DIAMETER OF BOLT (IN INCHES)
7,11 1 11AI 1V4 1~
(In Inches)
Singlep
"'
325
~
470
~
590
'1'4
710 830 945
Shearq 185 215 245 270 300 325
1~
Doublep 650 940 1180 1420 1660 1890
Shear q 370 430 490 540 600 650
Singlep 630 910 1155 1370 1575
Shear q 360 405 450 495 540
2~
Doublep 710 1260 1820 2310 2740 3150
Shear q 620 720 810 900 990 1080
Singlep 990 1400 1790 2135 2455 2740 3305 c
Shear q 565 630 695 760 825 895 1020 z
3~
Doublep 710 1270 1980 2800 3580 4270 4910 5480 6610 ~::11
Shear q 640 980 1130 1260 1390 1520 1650 1780 2040 3:
Sing1ep aJ
1950 2535 3190 3820 4975 c
Shear q 1090 1190 1300 1395 1605 r=c
5V2
Doublep 1270 1990 2860 3900 5070 6380 7640 9950 z
C)
Shear q 930 1410 1880 2180 2380 2600 2790 3210 0
0
~
....
p = Safe loads parallel to grain in pounds CD
Q)
q = Safe loads perpendicular to grain in pounds Q)

m
Length ot Bolt In
DIAMETER OF BOLT (IN INCHES)
c
Main Wood Membef3
(In IncheS) '111 Vz ~ :v. 7,11 1 1\'4 1V• 1Vz
3
0
Singlep 3975 5680
z
Shear q 1900 2185
7Y2
Doublep 1990 2860 3890 5080 6440 7950 11,360
Shear q 1260 1820 2430 3030 3500 3800 4370
Singlep 5730
Shear q 2765
9Y2
Doublep 2860 3900 5080 6440 7950 11,460
Shear q 1640 2270 2960 3710 4450 5530
Singlep
Shear q
11~
Doublep 3900 5080 6440 7950 11,450
Shear q 2050 2770 3540 4360 6150
Singlep
Shear q
IJY2
Doublep 5100 6440 7960 11,450
Shear q 2530 3310 4160 6040
1Tabulated values are on a normal load-duration basis and apply to joints made of seasoned lumber used in dry locations. See U.B.C. Standard No.
25-17 for other service conditions.
2Double shear values are for joints consisting of three wood members in which the side members are one half the thickness of the main member. Single
shear values are for joints consisting of two wood members having a minimum thickness not less than that specified.
3 The length specified is the length of the bolt in the main member of double shear joints or the length of the bolt in the thinner member of single shear
~ joints.
c.n 4 See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 for wood-to-metal bolted joints.
25-G UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-G-SAFE LATERAL STRENGTH AND REQUIRED

PENETRATION OF BOX AND COMMON WIRE NAILS DRIVEN
PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN OF WOOD
LOADS (Pounds)1 2 3
PENETRA- Douglas Fir
SIZE STANDARD TION Larch or
OF LENGTH WIRE REQUIRED Southern Other
NAIL (Inches) GAUGE (Inches) Pine Species
BOX NAILS
6d 2 12\12 !Ys 51
8d 2Yz IIYz IV. 63
IOd 3 IOY2 I y, 76 See
U.B.C.
12d 3V. IOYz I Yz 76
Standard
16d 3Yz 10 IYz 82 No.
25-17
20d 4 9 P/s 94
30d 4Yz 9 P/s 94
40d 5 8 1% 108
COMMON NAILS
6d 2 II Yz IV. 63
8d 2Yz 10\14 IY2 78
IOd 3 9 1% 94 See
U.B.C.
12d 3\14 9 P/s 94
Standard
16d 3Y2 8 1% 108 No.
25-17
20d 4 6 2Ys 139
30d 4Y2 5 2\14 155
40d 5 4 2Y2 176
SOd sv, 3 2% 199
60d 6 2 2Vs 223
1The safe lateral strength values may be increased 25 percent where metal side
plates are used.
2 For wood diaphragm calculations these values may be increased 30 percent.
(See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.)
'Tabulated values are on a normal load-duration basis and apply to joints made of
seasoned lumber used in dry locations. See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17 for
other service conditions.
346
1988 EDITION 25-H, 25-1
TABLE NO. 25-H-SAFE RESISTANCE TO WITHDRAWAL OF

COMMON WIRE NAILS
Inserted Perpendicular to Grain of the Wood, In Pounds per Linear
Inch of Penetration Into the Main Member
SIZE OF NAIL
KINO OF WOOD 6d 6d 10d 12d 16<1 20d 30d 40d SOd 60d
I. Douglas Fir, Larch 29 34 38 38 42 49 53 58 63 67
2. Southern Pine 35 41 46 46 50 59 64 70 76 81
3. Other Species See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17
TABLE NO. 25-1-MAXIMUM DIAPHRAGM DIMENSION RATIOS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
DIAPHRAGMS DIAPHRAGMS
MATERIAL Maximum Maximum
Span-Width Height·Width
Ratios Ratios
I. Diagonal sheathing, conventional 3:1 2:1
2. Diagonal sheathing, special 4:1 3112:1
3. Plywood and particleboard, nailed all 4:1 3 12:1
1
edges
4. Plywood and particleboard, blocking 4:1 2:1
omitted at intermediate joints
347
TABLE NO. 25-J-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR HORIZONTAL PLYWOOD DIAPHRAGMS N
WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE 1
~
....
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGMS
UNBLOCKED DIAPHRAGM
Nail spacing at diaphragm
bollndsrles (all cases), at con- Nails spaced&" max. at
supported end
Minimum tinuousc\:nel edges parallel
Minimum Minimum Nominal to load ( ses 3 and 4) and at Load perpen-
Nominal Nominal Width of all panel edges (Cases 5 and 6) dlcular to un-
Penetration In Framing 6 4 21122 l 22 blocked edges Other
PLYWOOD GRADE
Common
Nail Size
Framing
(In Inches)
r':.C
(In Inches)
Member
(In Inches) Nail spacing at other
and continuous configurations
panel joints (Cases2,
plywood panel edges (Csss1) 3 and 4)
6 6 4 I 3
6d 1\4 '116 2 185 250 375 420 165 125
3 210 280 420 475 185 140
STRUCTURAL I 8d 1% % 2 270 360 530 600 240 180

3 300 400 600 675 265 200
J0d3 1 ~R 15f32 2 320 425 640 730 285 215
3 360 480 720 820 320 240
';,. 2 170 225 335 380 150 110
3 190 250 380 430 170 125
6d 1'4
% 2 185 250 375 420 165 125 c:
3 210 280 420 475 185 140 z
C-D, C-C, STRUCTURAL II
% 2
3
240 320 480 545
270 360 540 610
215
240
160
180
~:0
and other grades covered 8d 1 ~,2 s:
in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9 l5f32 2 270 360 530 600 240 180 ID
3 300 400 600 675 265 200 c:
290 385 575 190
r=
c
2 655 255
JOd3 l ~~
15f32
3 325 430 650 735 290 215 z
C)
19/32 2 320 425 640 730 285 215 0
3 360 480 720 820 320 240 0
I c
m
'These values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. Space nails 10 inches on center for .....
(Q
floors and 12 inches on center for roofs along intermediate framing members. co
co
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17 -J of U. B.C. Standards shall be calculated for all m
grades by multiplying the values for nails in STRCCTURAL I by the following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. c
::::j
~Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches or 2 1/2 inches on center. f 0
3Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where !Od nails having penetration into framing of 't z
more than J5/s inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center. ~
LOAD
Case 5 Case 6
oad Framing
~~ ±-- Blocking
Vv-
Continuous Panel Joints .f-
Note: Framing may be located in either direction for blocked diaphragms.

Co)
en
0 TABLE NO. 2s.J-2-ALLOWABLE SHEAR IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR HORIZONTAL PARTICLEBOARD DIAPHRAGMS
WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE1
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGMS UNBLOCKED DIAPHRAGMS

Nail Spacing (ln.) at diaphragm Nails Spaced 6" max. at
boundaries (all cases~ at contin- Supported Edges
uou:lanel :::1es parallel to
lo (Cases & 4~ and at
all panel edges (Casee 5 & 6)
MINIMUM Case 1 (No
MINIMUM MINIMUM NOMINAL 6 I 4 I 211z2 I 22 unblocked
All other
NAIL NOMINAL WIDTH OF ednes or
PENETRATION PANEL FRAMING Nail Spacin~ (ln.) at other panel contnuous configurations
edges( ases 1, 2, 3 &4) joints parallel (Cases2, 3
COMMON IN FRAMING THICKNESS MEMBER
PANEL GRADE NAIL SIZE (Inches) (Inch) (Inches) 6 6 4 3 to load) 4, 5 &6)
5f!6
2 170 225 335 380 !50 110
3 190 250 380 430 170 125
6d IV•
:Ys
2 185 250 375 420 165 125
3 210 280 420 475 185 140
3jg 2 240 320 480 545 215 160
3 270 360 540 610 240 180
2-M-W I y, 2 255 340 505 575 230 170
8d 7/16
3 285 380 570 645 255 190 c:
2 270 360 530 600 240 180
z
y,
3 300 400 600 675 265 200 ~::D
y, 2 290 385 575 655 255 190 3C
JOdl !'Is
3 325 430 650 735 290 215 ID
2 320 425 640 730 285 215 5
5fs r
3 360 480 720 820 320 240 c
2 320 425 640 730 285 215
z
C)
2-M-3 JOdl 1% :v. 3 360 480 720 820 320 240 0
0
c
m
1These
......
values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. Space nails lO inches on center for :g
floors and 12 inches on center for roofs along intermediate framing members. co
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17 -J of C. B.C. Standards shall be calculated for all m
c
grades by multiplying the values for nails by the following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. :::::j
2Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches or 2 1/2 inches on center. 0
3Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where l Od nails having penetration into framing
z
more than 15/s inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center.
LOAD
DIAPHRAGM BOUNDARY
Case 5 Case 6
oad+ + Framing oad Framing
~ -1- -l~
~~ .I
: I
Blocking
~
'r
~
"·..::,
Blocking
Continuous Panel Joints

//
,;;/
~
I'll
U1
w Note: Framing may be located in either direction for blocked diaphragms. L
(II
...... ,:,
w
U1
N
TABLE NO. 25-K-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR
PLYWOOD SHEAR WALLS WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE1 4
PLYWOOD APPLIED OVER 112-INCH
MINIMUM MINIMUM PLYWOOD APPLIED DIRECT TO FRAMING GYPSUM SHEATHING
NOMINAL NAIL NAIL SIZE NAIL SIZE
Nail Spacing at Plywood Panel Edges Nail Spacing at Plywood Panel Edges
PLYWOOD PENETRA- (Common (Common
THICK- liON IN or or
NESS FRAMING Galvanized Galvanized
PLYWOOD GRADE (Inches) (Inches) Box) 6 4 3 22 Box) 6 4 3 22
5h6 Jl/4 6d 200 300 390 510 8d 200 300 390 510
3/s I 1/2 8d 2303 360 3 4603 6103 10d5 280 430 550 730 2
STRUCTURAL!
15!J2 1112 8d 280 430 550 730 10d5 280 430 550 730
15/32 J5/s 10d5 340 510 665 870 - - - - -
C-D.C-C 51J6 11/4 6d 180 270 350 450 8d 180 270 350 450
STRUCTURAL
'Is 1114 6d 200 300 390 510 8d 200 300 390 510
II. plywood panel
siding and other 3/g 11/2 8d 220' 3203 410 3 5303 10d5 260 380 490 640
grades covered in 15(32 1112 8d 260 380 490 640 J0d5 260 380 490 640
U.B.C. Standard
No. 25-9. 15f32 J5/s 10d5 310 460 600 770 - - - - - c:
z
19/32 J5/s JOd5 340 510 665 870 - - - - - :;;
0
NAIL SIZE NAIL SIZE :D
(Galvanized (Galvanized s:::
Cesing) Casing) Ill
c:
Plywood panel
siding in grades
5(16 !l/4 6d 140 210 275 360 8d 140 210 275 360 r=c
covered in U.B.C. z
C)
Standard No. 25-9 3(8 1112 8d 1303 200 3 260 3 3403 10d5 160 240 310 410
0
0
c
m
....
CD
I Allpanel edges backed with 2-inch nominal or wider framing. Plywood installed either horizontally or vertically. Space nails at 6 inches on center
g
along intermediate framing members for 3/s-inch plywood installed with face grain parallel to studs spaced 24 inches on center and 12 inches on m
c
center for other conditions and plywood thicknesses. These values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 ::j
percent for normal loading. 0z
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17 -J of U .B.C. Standards shall be calculated for all
grades by multiplying the values for common and galvanized box nails in STRUCTURAL I and galvanized casing nails in other grades by the
following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65.
2Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches on center. i
3The values for 3/s-inch-thick plywood applied direct to framing may be increased 20 percent, provided studs are spaced a maximum of 16 inches on
center or plywood is applied with face grain across studs.

4
Where plywood is applied on both faces of a wall and nail spacing is less than 6 inches on center on either side. panel joints shall be offset to fall on
different framing members or framing shall be 3-inch nominal or thicker and nails on each side shall be staggered.
5Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where IOd nails having penetration into framing of J.
more than 15/s inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center. 1
N
U1
...~
TABLE NO. 25-K-2-ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR
PARTICLEBOARD SHEAR WALLS WITH FRAMING OF DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH OR SOUTHERN PINE 1 4
PANELS APPLIED DIRECT TO FRAMING PANELS APPLIED OVER 1/2" GYPSUM SHEATHING
MINIMUM MINIMUM NAIL
NOMINAL PANEL PENETRATION Nail Size Nail Spacing at Panel Edges (ln.) Nail Size Nail Spacing at Panel Edges (ln.)
THICKNESS IN FRAMING (Common or (Common or
PANEL GRADE (ln.) (ln.) galvanized box) 6 4 3 22 galvanized box) 6 4 3 22
51!6 180 270 350 450 180 270 350 450

1'14 6d 8d
31s 200 300 390 510 200 300 390 510
31s 2203 320 3 410 3 530 3
2-M-W 7!J6 1'12 8d 240 3 350 3 450 3 585 3 10d5 260 380 490 640
'12 260 380 490 640
'12 J51s 10d5
310 460 600 770 - - - - -
51s 340 510 665 870 - - - - -
1All panel edges backed with 2-inch nominal or wider framing. Panels installed either horizontally or vertically. Space nails at 6 inches on center along
intermediate framing members for 31s-inch panel installed with the long dimension parallel to studs spaced 24 inches on center and 12 inches on
center for other conditions and panel thicknesses. These values are for short-time loads due to wind or earthquake and must be reduced 25 percent
for normal loading.
Allowable shear values for nails in framing members of other species set forth in Table No. 25-17-J ofU.B.C. Standards shall be calculated for all c
grades by multiplying the values for common and galvanized box nails by the following factors: Group III, 0.82 and Group IV, 0.65. z
:;;
2Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches on center. :M 0
3The allowable shear values may be increased to the values shown for '12-inch-thick sheathing with the same nailing, provided: :::tl
(a) The studs are spaced a maximum of 16 inches on center, or
s::
Ill
(b) The panels are applied with the long dimension perpendicular to studs. c
•Where particleboard is applied on both faces of a wall and nail spacing is less than 6 inches on center on either side, panel joints shall be offset to fall on
r=0
different framing members, or framing shall be 3-inch nominal or thicker and nails on each side shall be staggered.
5Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails shall be staggered where IOd nails having penetration into framing of .:.:.:
z
G')
0
more than 151s inches are spaced 3 inches or less on center. 0
0
m
1988 EDITION 25-L, 25-M-1, 25-M-2
TABLE NO. 25-L-WOOD SHINGLE AND

SHAKE SIDEWALL EXPOSURES
SHINGLE OR SHAKE MAXIMUM WEATHER EXPOSURES
Single-Coursing Double-Coursing
Len1th and Type No. 1 No.2 No. 1 NO.2
I. 16-inch Shingles 7%" 7%" 12" 10"

2. 18-inch Shingles 8%" 8%" 14" 11"
3. 24-inch Shingles 11 %" 11%" 16" 14"
4. 18-inch Resawn Shakes 8%" - 14" -
S. 18-inch Straight-Split
Shakes 8%" - 16" -
6. 24-inch Resawn Shakes 11 %" - 20" -
TABLE NO. 25-M-1-EXPOSED PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING
STUD SPACING (INCHES)

MINIMUM MINIMUM PLYWOOD SIDING APPLIED DIRECT
THICKNESS' NO. OF PLIES TO STUDS OR OVER SHEATHING
I.%" 3 16 2
2. Yl'' 4 24
'Thickness of grooved panels 1s measured at bottom of grooves.

2 May be 24 inches if plywood siding applied with face grain perpendicular to studs or over
one of the following: (a) l-inch board sheathing, (b) \12-inch plywood sheathing, (c)%-
inch plywood sheathing with face grain of sheathing perpendicular to studs.
TABLE NO. 25-M-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR EXPOSED PARTICLEBOARD

PANEL SIDING
MINIMUM THICKNESS (Inches)
Exterior Ceilings
STUD Siding and Soffits
SPACING
GRADE (Inches) Direct to Studs Continuous Support Direct to Supports
31s 5 116 5ft6
2-M-W 16
and
2-M-F 24 'h 5lt6 'Is
2-M-1 16 'Is 'Is
2-M-2
3 1s
2-M-3 24 'I•
355
25-N-1, 25-N-2 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-N-1-PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING,

(Not Exposed to the Weather, Face Grain Parallel or
Perpendicular to Studs)
STUD SPACING (Inches)
Siding
MINIMUM THICKNESS PANEL SPAN RATING Nailed to Sheathing Under Coverings
AND CONSTRUCTION Studs Specified In Section 2517 (g) 3
Sheathing Sheathln~
Parallel Perpendlcu ar
to Studs to Studs
I. Y16' 12/0, 16/0, 20/0 16 - 16
2. 1 /x", 15/.n", 1
12"-3
16/0, 20/0, 24/0, 32/16 24 16 24
ply
1
3. 'h2', 12"--4 and 5
1
24/0, 32/16 24 24 24
ply
1In ..
reference to Section 2517 (g) 3, blockmg of honzontal JOints IS not reqmred.
TABLE NO. 25-N-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PARTICLEBOARD

WALL SHEATHING,
(Not exposed to the weather, long dimension of the panel parallel
or perpendicular to studs)
STUD SPACING (Inches)
SheathlnH Under Coverings
S~c fled In Sactlon
THICKNESS Sldln~Nallad 517 (g/3 Parallel
GRADE (Inches) to tuds or Perpend cular to Studs
51Jo 16 -
2-M-W
2-M-F 'I•
71Jo
24
24
16
24
2-M-1
2-M-2
'I• 16 -
2-M-3 1(2 16 16
1In reference to Section 2517 (g) 3, blocking of horizontal joints is not required.
356
1988 EDITION 25-0
TABLE NO. 25-0-HARDBOARD SIDING
FRAMING NAIL SPACING

MINIMUM ~x4")
NOMINAL M IMUM NAIL BRACING
SIDING THICKNESS SPACING SIZE 1 GENERAL PANELS•
I. LAP SIDING
Direct to studs 3jg" 16" o.c. 8d 1 16" o.c. Not

applicable
Over sheathing :Ys" 16" o.c. 10d 1 16" o.c. Not

applicable
2. SQUARE EDGE
PANEL SIDING
Direct to studs 3jg" 24" o.c. 6d 2 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
intermed. intermed.
supports supports
Over sheathing 3/s" 24" o.c. 8d 2 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
intermed. in termed.
supports supports
3. SHIPLAP EDGE
PANEL SIDING
Direct to studs 3jg" 16" o.c. 6d 2 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
in termed. intermed.
supports supports
Over sheathing 3/s" 16" o.c. 8d 2 6" o.c. 4" o.c.

edges; edges;
12" o.c. at 8" o.c.
in termed. intermed.
supports supports
1Siding nail.
2Corrosion-resistant box nail.

3When used to comply with Section 2517 (g) 3.
357
25-P, 25-Q UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-P-ALLOWABLE SHEARS FOR WIND OR SEISMIC LOADING

ON VERTICAL DIAPHRAGMS OF FIBERBOARD SHEATHING BOARD
CONSTRUCTION FOR TYPE V CONSTRUCTION ONLY1
SHEAR VALUE 3-INCH
NAIL SPACING AROUND
SIZE AND PERIMETER AND 6-INCH
APPLICATION NAIL SIZE AT INTERMEDIATE POINTS
I. V,'' 4' 8' No. II gauge galvanized

X X
roofing nail llh'' long, V16" head 125 2
2. 25/12" X 4' 8' No. II gauge galvanized

X
roofing nail 13!4" long, 7/,6" head 175
'Fiberboard sheathing diaphragms shall not be used to brace concrete or masonry walls.
2
The shear value may be 175 for 'lz-inch x 4-foot x 8-foot fiberboard nail-base sheathing.
TABLE NO. 25-Q--NAILING SCHEDULE
CONNECTION NAILING'
I. Joist to sill or girder, toenail 3-8d
2. Bridging to joist, toenail each end 2-8d
3. I" x 6" subfloor or less to each joist, face nail 2-8d
4. Wider than I" x 6" subfloor to each joist, face nail 3-8d
5. 2" subfloor to joist or girder, blind and face nail 2-16d
6. Sole plate to joist or blocking, face nail 16d at 16" o.c.
7. Top plate to stud, end nail 2-16d
8. Stud to sole plate 4-8, toenail or
2-16d, end nail
9. Double studs, face nail 16d at 24" o.c.
10. Doubled top plates, face nail 16d at 16" o.c.
II. Top plates, laps and intersections, face nail 2-16d
12. Continuous header, two pieces 16d at 16" o.c.
along each edge
13. Ceiling joists to plate, toenail 3-8d
14. Continuous header to stud, toenail 4-8d
IS. Ceiling joists, laps over partitions, face nail 3-16d
16. Ceiling joists to parallel rafters, face nail 3-16d
17. Rafter to plate, toenail 3-8d
18. I" brace to each stud and plate, face nail 2-8d
19. I" x 8" sheathing or less to each bearing, face nail 2-8d
20. Widerthan I" x 8" sheathing to each bearing, face nail 3-8d
21. Built-up comer studs 16d at 24" o.c.
22. Built-up girder and beams 20d at 32" o.c. at top
and bottom and staggered
2-20d at ends and at
each splice
(Continued)
358
1988 EDITION 25-Q
CONNECTION NAILING1
23. 2" planks 2-16d at each bearing
24. Plywood and particleboard:5
Subfloor, roof and wall sheathing (to framing):
Cf2'' and less 6d2
19/32" -3/4" 8d3 or 6d4
7/8"-1" 8d2
11/8"-11/4" 10d3 or 8d4
Combination Subfloor-underlayment (to framing):
3/4" and less 6d4
7/8"-l" 8d4
11/8"-11/4" 10d3 or 8d4
25. Panel Siding (to framing):
l/2'' or less 6d6
5/8" 8d6
26. Fiberboard Sheathing:7
1/2" No. II ga.s
6d3
No. 16 ga.9
25/32" No. II ga.s
8d3
No. 16 ga.9
I Common or box nails may be used except where otherwise stated.

2Common or deformed shank .
.1Common.
4Deformed shank.
SNails spaced at 6 inches on center at edges, 12 inches at intermediate supports (I 0 inches at
intermediate supports for floors), except 6 inches at all supports where spans are 48 inches
or more. For nailing of plywood and particleboard diaphragms and shear walls, refer to
Section 2513 (c). Nails for wall sheathing may be common, box or casing.
6Corrosion-resistant siding or casing nails conforming to the requirements of Section 2516
Ult.
7Fasteners spaced 3 inches on center at exterior edges and 6 inches on center at intermediate
supports.
8Corrosion-resistant roofing nails with 7/16-inch-diameter head and 1112-inch length for 1/2-
inch sheathing and 1314-inch length for 25/32-inch sheathing conforming to the require-
ments of Section 2516 Ul I.
9Corrosion-resistant staples with nominal 7/16-inch crown and 11/8-inch length for l/2-inch
sheathing and 1112-inch length for 25/32-inch sheathing conforming to the requirements of
Section 2516 Ul I .
359
25-R-1,25-R-2,25-R-3 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-R-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LUMBER

FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHING, 3
MINIMUM NET THICKNESS (Inches)

OF LUMBER PLACED
SPAN PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS DIAGONALLY TO SUPPORTS
(Inches)
Surfaced Dry2
I Surfaced
Unseasoned
FLOORS
Surfaced Dry2
I Surfaced
Unseasoned
I. 24
2. 16
'I•
51H
1 251J2
11 116
ROOFS
'I•
5 1s
I
25f3 2
11 /io
3. 24 5 1s
I 11 116
'I• I 251.12
'Installation details shall conform to Sections 2517 (e) I and 2517 (h) 7 for
floor and roof sheathing, respectively.
2Maximum 19 percent moisture content.
'Floor or roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet
the design criteria of Section 2516.
TABLE NO. 25-R-2-SHEATHING LUMBER SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING

MINIMUM GRADE REQUIREMENTS: BOARD GRADE
SOLID FLOOR OR SPACED ROOF U.B.C. STANDARD
ROOF SHEATHING SHEATHING NUMBER
I. Utility Standard 25-2, 25-3 or 25-4
2. 4 Common or 25-2, 25-3, 25-4
3 Common or Standard
Utility 25-5 or 25-8
3. No.3 No.2 25-6
4. Merchantable Construction Common 25-7
TABLE NO. 25-R-3-SIZE, HEIGHT AND SPACING OF WOOD STUDS 1

NONBEARING
BEARING WALLS WALLS
SUPPORTING SUPPORTING SUPPORTING
LATERALLY LATERALLY
ROOF AND ONE FLOOR, TWO FLOORS, UNSUPPORTED
UNSUPPORTED
CEILING ROOF AND ROOF AND
STUD STUD STUD
ONLY CEILING CEILING HEIGHTJ SPACING
SIZE HEIGHTJ
(Inches) (Feet) SPACING (Inches) (Feet) (Inches)
I. 2 X 3' ~
~
-- ~
10 16
2. 2x4 10 24 16 ~
14 24
.'\. 3x4 10 24 24 16 14 24
4. 2x5 10 24 24 ~
16 24
5. 2x6 10 24 24 16 20 24
(Continued)
360
1988 EDITION 25-R-3, 25-S-1
'Utility grade studs shall not be spaced more than 16 inches on center, nor support more than
a roof and ceiling, nor exceed 8 feet in height for exterior walls and load bearing or 10 feet
for interior nonload-bearing walls.
2Shall not be used in exterior walls.
3Listed heights are distances between points of lateral support placed perpendicular to the
plane of the wall. Increases in supported height are permitted where justified by an
analysis.
TABLE NO. 25-S-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR AND

ROOF SHEATHING CONTINUOUS OVER TWO OR MORE SPANS AND FACE
GRAIN PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS, s
ROOF2
Maximum Span Load (In Pounds
(In Inches) per Square Foot) FLOOR
PANEL PLYWOOD MAXIMUM
SPAN THICKNESS Edges Edges Total Live SPAN4
RATING3 (Inch) Blocked Unblocked Load Load (In Inches)
I. 12/0 'ho 12 135 130 0
2. 16/0 5/16, 3fx 16 80 65 0
3. 20/0 'flo, ·3/x 20 70 55 0
4. 24/0 3/x 24 16 60 45 0
5. 24/0 15/n, 112 24 24 60 45 ()
6. 32!16 15f.u, 112, 19!_n,

5/x 32 28 55 35 1 16"
7. 40/20 1qh2, 5/x, DfJ2,
3/4, 7/x 40 32 40' 35' 20" 7
8. 48/24 2.3!J2, 3f4, 7/x 48 36 40' 35' 24
1Thcse values apply for C-C, C-D, Structural I and II grades only. Spans shall be limited to
values shown because of possible effect of concentrated loads.
2Uniform load deflection limitations 11!Ko of the span under live load plus dead load. 1/24o
under live load only. Edges may be blocked with lumber or other approved type of edge
support.
'Span rating appears on all panels in the construction grades listed in Footnote No. I.
4Piywood edges shall have approved tongue-and-groove joints or shall be supported with
blocking unless 1/4-inch minimum thickness underlaymcnt. or 1'/2 inches of approved
cellular or lightweight concrete is placed over the subfloor, or finish floor is 2-'/.12-inch
wood strip. Allowable uniform load based on deflection of 113"'' of span is 165 pounds per
square foot.
'For roof live load of 40 pounds per square foot or total load of 55 pounds per square foot.
decrease spans by 13 percent or usc panel with next greater span rating.
6 May be 24 inches if 2 'h2-inch wood strip flooring is installed at right angles to joists.
7 May be 24 inches where a minimum of 1'12 inches of approved cellular or lightweight
concrete is placed over the subfloor and the plywood sheathing is manufactured with
exterior glue.
'Floor or roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design
criteria of Section 2516.
361
25-S-2, 25-S-3 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-S-2-ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR PLYWOOD ROOF

SHEATHING CONTINUOUS OVER TWO OR MORE SPANS AND
FACE GRAIN PARALLEL TO SUPPORTS1 2
NO. OF TOTAL LIVE
THICKNESS PLIES SPAN LOAD LOAD
15h2
4 24 30 20
'i.f"T,IWCTVRAL I 5 24 45 35
4 24 35 25
'h
5 24 55 40
Other grades ''l.n 5 24 25 20
covered in U. B. C.
Standard No. 25-9 '12 5 24 30 25
19f32
4 24 35 25
5 24 50 40
s;, 4 24 40 30
5 24 55 45
1Uniform load deflection limitations: 1iJ ""of span under live load plus dead load. 1/24<> under
live load only. Edges shall be blocked with lumber or other approved type of edge
supports.
'Roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
TABLE NO. 25-S-3-ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR PARTICLEBOARD

ROOF SHEATHING1 2 4
MAXIMUM ON-CENTER
SPACING OF LIVE LOAD TOTAL LOAD
THICKNESS SUPPORTS {Pounds Per {Pounds Per
GRADE {Inches) {Inches) Square Foot) Square Foot)
2-M-W 3/H 3 16 45 65
and 7/16 16 105 105
2-M-F 7iJ6 3 24 30 40
'12 16 110 !50
'12 24 40 55
'Panels are continuous over two or more spans.
'Uniform load deflection limitation: 1i1Ho of the span under live load plus dead load and '124o
of the span under live load only.
'Edges shall be tongue-and-groove or supported with blocking or edge clips.
4 Roof sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
362
1988 EDITION 25-T-1 , 25-T-2
TABLE NO. 25-T-1-ALLOWABLE SPAN FOR PLYWOOD
I
COMBINATION SUBFLOOR-UNDERLAYMENT1 2
Plywood Continuous over Two or More Spans and Face
Grain Perpendicular to Supports
SPACING OF JOISTS (Inches)
IDENTIFICATION 16 20 24 48
Species Group' Thickness in inches
I
I 1/2 5/x J/4 -
2,3 5 /x 3 /4 7/x -
4 '14 7 /x I --
Span Rating• 16 o.c. 20 o.c. 24 o.c. 48 o.c.

'Spans limited to value shown because of possible effect of concentrated loads. Allowable
uniform load based on deflection of 1/Joo of span is 125 pounds per square foot, except
allowable total uniform load for 11/x-inch plywood over joists spaced 48 inches on center
is 65 pounds per square foot. Plywood edges shall have approved tongue-and-groove
l
joints or shall be supported with blocking, unless 'I•- inch minimum thickness underlay-
men! is installed, or finish floor is 25/.n-inch wood strip.
If wood strips arc perpendicular to supports, thicknesses shown for 16-inch and 20-inch
spans may be used on 24-inch span.
'Floor panels conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
'Applicable to all grades of sanded exterior-type plywood. See U.B.C. Standard No. 25-9
for plywood species groups.
•Applicable to underlayment grade and C-C (plugged).
TABLE NO. 25-T-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PARTICLEBOARD

SUBFLOOR AND COMBINED SUBFLOOR-UNDERLAYMENT1 5
MAXIMUM SPACING OF SUPPORTS2
THICKNESS Combined
GRADE (inches) Subfloor Subfloor-Underlayment3 4
1/2 16 -
2-M-W 5/x 20 16
-'/4 24 24
2-M-F -'/4 20 20
2-M-3 -'/4 20 20
'All panels are continuous over two or more spans.

'Uniform deflection limitation: '!J"o of the span under I 00 psf minimum load.
'Edges shall have tongue-and-groove joints or shall be supported with blocking. The
tongue-and-groove panels are installed with the long dimension perpendicular to sup-
ports.
4 A finish wearing surface is to be applied to the top of the panel.
'Floor sheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of
Section 2516.
363
25-U UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-U-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR 2-INCH

TONGUE-AND-GROOVE DECKING
SPAN 1 LIVE DEFLECTION f E

(In Feet) LOAD LIMIT (psi) (psi)
ROOFS
l/240 1()0 170,000
20
1/.3GO 25G,OOO
l/NO 25G,OOO
4 :10 210 .'3S4,000
l/.3GO
1/240 .'340,000
40 270 :112,000
1/'3GO
1/240 242.000
20 1/'3(i0 200 )05,000
1/240 :1Wl,OOO
4.5 :10 270
1/:3()0 -Hl.'l,OOO
l/240 4S4.000
40 :3.50
1/:3GO 7:2.5.000
20 1/240 .'332,000
l/:3GO 250
500,000
5.0 .10 1/240 495,000
.'310
1/.3GO 742,000
1/240 G60,000
40 420 1,000,000
l/360
l/240 442,000
20 300
l/360 660,000
:30 1/240 6G2,000
5.5 400
l/360 998,000
1/240 884,000
40 500
l/360 1,330,000
l/240 575,000
20 360
l/360 R62,000
l/240 862,000
6.0 :30 480
l/.360 1,295,000
l/240 1,150,000
40 GOO
l/.'360 I
I
1,730,000
1/240 595,000
20 420 I
892,000
l/3GO
1/240 .S60 892,000
6 ..'5 :30
1/.360 1,.340,000
l/240 1,190,000
40 700
l/:3GO 1,7.'30,000
(Continued)
364
1988 EDITION 25-U
SPAN 1 LIVE DEFLECTION f E

(In Feet) LOAD LIMIT (psi) (psi)
l/240 910,000
20 490
l/:3GO 1,360,000
l/240 1,370,000
7.0 30 ()!)0
2,000,000
l/360
40 I l/240 HIO
1,820,000
l/360 2,725,000
l/240 5()0 1,125,000
20 1,GH5,000
l/360
l/240 1,685,000
7 ..'5 30 750
l/.'3()0 2,5.'30,000
l/240 2,250,000
40 ~no
1/.'360 :3,380,000
1/240 1,3GO,OOO
20 ()4()
2,040,000
1/360
8.0 2,040,000
l/240
30 l/.'3GO 850 3,060,000
FLOORS
4 840 1,000,000
4.5 40 l/.'3GO 950 1,300,000
5.0 1060 1,GOO,OOO
I Spans are based on simple beam action with I 0 pounds per square foot dead
load and provisions for a 300-pound concentrated load on a 12-inch width of
t1oor decking. Random lay-up permitted in accordance with the provisions
of Section 2517 (e) 3 or 2517 (h) 8. Lumber thickness assumed at I v,
inches, net.
365
TABLE NO. 25-U-J-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR FLOOR JOIST5-40 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD
DESIGN CRITERIA: Deflection-For 40 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 360. Strength-Live load of 40 lbs.
per sq. ft. plus dead load of 10 lbs. per sq. ft. determines the required fiber stress value.
JOIST Modulus of Elasticity, E, In 1,000,000 psi
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 !.8 1.9 2.0 2.2
8-6 8-10 9-2 9-6 9-9 10-0 10-3 10-6 10-9 10-11 11-2 11-4 ll-7 11-ll
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 ll40 1190 1230 1280 1320 1410
7-9 8-0 8-4 8-7 8-10 9-1 9-4 9-6 9-9 9-11 10-2 10-4 10-6 10-10
2x6 16.0 790 860 920 980 1040 1090 ll50 1200 1250 1.310 1360 1410 1460 1550
6-9 7-0 7-3 7-6 7-9 1-ll 8-2 8-4 8-6 8-8 8-10 9-0 9-2 9-6
24.0 900 980 1050 ll20 1190 1250 1310 1380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780
11-3 ll-8 12-1 12-6 12-10 13-2 13-6 13-10 14-2 14-5 14-8 15-0 15-3 15-9
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 ll40 1190 1230 1280 . 1320 1410
10-2 10-7 11-0 11-4 11-8 12-0 12-3 12-7 12-10 13-1 1.3-4 13-7 13-10 14-3
2x8 16.0 790 850 920 980 1040 1090 1150 1200 1250 1.310 1360 1410 1460 1550
8-ll 9-3 9-7 9-11 10-2 10-6 10-9 11-0 11-3 ll-5 11-8 11-11 12-1 12-6
24.0 900 980 1050 1120 ll90 1250 1.310 1380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780
14-4 14-11 15-5 15-11 16-5 16-10 17-3 17-8 18-0 18-5 18-9 19-1 19-5 20-1
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 1140 1190 1230 1280 1320 1410
1.3-0 13-6 14-0 14-6 14-11 15-3 15-8 16-0 16-5 16-9 17-0 17-4 17-8 18-3
2x10 16.0 790 850 920 980 1040 1090 1150 1200 1250 1.310 1360 1410 1460 1550
11-4 11-10 12-3 12-8 1.3-0 13-4 13-8 14-0 14-4 14-7 14-11 15-2 15-5 15-11
24.0 900 980 1050 1120 1190 1250 1.310 1380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780
17-5 18-1 18-9 19-4 19-11 20-6 21-0 21-6 21-11 22-5 22-10 23-3 23-7 24-5 c:
12.0 720 780 830 890 940 990 1040 1090 1140 1190 12.30 1280 1320 1410 z
::;;
15-10 16-5 17-0 17-7 18-1 18-7 19-1 19-6 19-11 20-4 20-9 21-1 21-6 22-2 0
2x12 16.0 790 860 920 980 1040 10'l0 1150 1200 1250 1.310 1360 1410 1460 1550 ::tJ
1.3-10 14-4 14-11 15-4 15-10 16-.3 16-8 17-0 17-5 17-9 18-1 18-5 18-9 19-4
s:
24.0 aJ
900 980 1050 1120 WIO 1250 1310 1380 1440 1500 1550 1610 1670 1780 c:
NOTES: ;=
0
(!)The required extreme fiber stress in bending IFh) in pounds per square inch is shown below each span.
(2)Use single or repetitive rrember bending stress values iFh) and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables ~os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2.
z
C)
13 )For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values IF") and modulus of elasticit) values (£1. other spacing of members and 0
other conditions of loading. see C.B.C. Standard No. 25-2\. 0
(4JThe spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent. 0
m
TABLE NO. 25-U-J-6--ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR CEILING JOIST~10 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD
(Drywall Ceiling)
...
co
00
DESIGN CRITERIA: Deflection-For 10 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. Strength-Live load of 10 00
lbs. per sq. ft. plus dead load of 5 lbs. per sq. ft. determines the required fiber stress value. m
c
JOIST Modulus of Elasticity, E, in 1,000,000 psi :::::j
SIZE SPACING 0
(IN) (IN) 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2 z
9-10 10-3 10-7 10-11 11-3 11-7 11-10 12-2 12-5 12.8 12-11 13-2 13-4 13-9
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400
8-11 9-4 9-8 9-11 10-3 10-6 10-9 11-0 11-3 11-6 11-9 ll-11 12-2 12-6
2x4 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
7-10 8-1 8-5 8-8 8-11 9-2 9-5 9-8 9-10 10-0 10-3 10-5 10-7 10-11
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
15-6 16-1 16-8 17-2 17-8 18-2 18-8 19-1 19-6 19-11 20-3 20-8 21-0 21-8
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400
14-1 14-7 15-2 15-7 16-1 16-6 16-11 17-4 17-8 18-1 18-5 18-9 19-1 19-8
2x6 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
12-3 12-9 13-3 13-8 14-1 14-5 14-9 15-2 15-6 15-9 16-1 16-4 16-8 17-2
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
20-5 21-2 21-1 22-8 23-4 24-0 24-7 25-2 25-8 26-2 26-9 27-2 27-8 28-7
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 ' 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400
18-6 19-3 19-1 20-7 21-2 21-9 22-4 22-10 23-4 23-10 24-3 24-8 25-2 25-11
2x8 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
16-2 16-IC 17-5 18-0 18-6 19-0 19-6 19-11 20-5 20-10 21-2 21-7 21-11 22-8
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
26-0 27-1 28-0 28-11 29-9 30-7 31-4 32-1 32-9 33-5 34-1 34-8 35-4 36-5
12.0 710 770 830 880 930 980 1030 1080 1130 1180 1220 1270 1310 1400
23-8 24-7 25-5 26-3 27-1 27-9 28-6 29-2 29-9 30-5 31-0 31-6 32-1 33-1
2x10 16.0 780 850 910 970 1030 1080 1140 1190 1240 1290 1340 1390 1440 1540
20-8 21-6 22-3 22-11 23-8 24-3 24-10 25-5 26-0 26-6 27-1 27-6 28-0 28-11
24.0 900 970 1040 1110 1170 1240 1300 1360 1420 1480 1540 1600 1650 1760
NOTES:
N
(I )The required extreme fiber stress in bending (Fh) in pounds per square inch is shown below each span. U1
(2)Use single or repetitive member bending stre;s values (Fh) and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables :\'os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. C::
(3)For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values (Fh) and modulus of elasticity values(£). other spacing of members and L
other conditions of loading. see C.B.C. Standard No. 25-21. a,
(4)The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered strucrures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent.
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-1-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW- OR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Supporting Drywall Ceiling)
DESIGN CRITERIA: Strength-15 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress.
Deflection-For 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the N
U1
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. C::
RAFTER
SIZE SPACING Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi). .....
(IN) (IN)
8-6
500 600
9-4
700 800
10-0 10-9 11-5 11-0
900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400
12-7 1.3-2 1.3-8 14-Z 14-8
1500 1600 1700 1800
15-2 15-8 16-1 16-7
1900
*'
12.0 0.26 0 ..'3.50.4-1 0.5-1 0.6-1 0.75 1..37
- - - - -- -------
0.86
---
0.98
--
1.11 1.24 1.51 1.66
~ 1.96
lO-ll 11-5 11:1o 12-4 "12-=9
~-
~--
8~1- 8-8
~--
7-4 9.4 ~- 10-.5 1.3-2 13T 1.3-11 144

Zx6 16.0 0.2.3 0 ..30 0 ..38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.97 1.07 1.19 1..31 1.44 1.56 1.70
---
6~ 6-7 ------ 7-=-1 7-7
24.0 0.19 0.25 0 ..31 0.38 0.45 0.5:3
8-1
--
8-6 8-11 9-4-- 9-:s- 10-0- l.0-5
0.61 0.70 0.78 0.88 0.97
10.9 11-1 11-5 ll-8
1.07 l.l7 1.28 1..39
11-2 12-3 13-3 14-2 15-0 l.S-10 16.7 17--1 18-0 18-9 19-5 20-0 20-8 21-3 21-10
12.0 0.26 0 ..35 0.44 0.54 0.64 0.75 0.86 0.98 l.ll 1.24 1..'37 1.51 1.66 1.81 - 1.96
--
14:4 ~:o 15-7 16-.3 16-9 17-T -I7-TO 18-5 18-11
~---
9-8 10-7 1T6 12-3-- l3-0 1.3-8

2x8 16.0 0.2.3 0 ..30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.8.5 0.96 1.07 l.l9 1..31 1.44 1.56 1.70
-~
---·-~ --;c-- 1-;c--;- - .. -,- --~-
f-y]:g 12-.3 12-9 13-3 J.'3-8

7-11 8-8 9-4 10:0 10-7 11-2 14-2 14-7 15-0 15-5
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.31 0 ..38 0.45 0.53 0.61 0.70 0.78 0.88 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.28 1..39
1-1-3 15-8 16-11 18-1 19-2 20-2 21-2 22-1 2.3-0 23-11 24-9 2.5-6 26-4 27-1 27-10
12.0 0.26 0-..-35 0.44 0.54 0.64 0.75 0.86 0.98 1.11 1.24 1.'37 1.51 1.66 1.81 - 1.96
---
--- - . :·- --
12:4 1.'3.6 14-8 15-8 16-7 17-6 18-4 19-2 f-yg_ll 20-8 21-.5 22-1 22-10 2.3-5 24-1
2xl0 16.0 - .0.2.3 0 ..'30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.6.5 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.07 1.19 1..'31 1.44 1.56 1.70
-
15-0 15~8- ~:3- w:u 17-6
---- --
10-1 liT "IT:ll 12.9 13-6 14-3 18-1 18-7 19--2 19-8
24.0 0.19 0.25 0 ..'31 0.38 0.45 0.5:3 0.61 0.70 0.78 0.88 0.97 1.07 1.17 1.28 1..39
17-4 19-0 20-6 21-11 23-.3 24-7 25-9 26-11 28-0 29-1 10-1 31-1 32-0 .32-11 33-10
c
z
12.0 0.26 0.35 0.44 0.5-1 0.64
-·-
0.75 0.86 0.98 1.11 1.24 1..'37 1.51 1.66 1.81 1.96
~--~-
:;;
22.4 2.3-3 24-3 25-2- '2if(j-
c-o-~-----
15-0 HJ~6- r-T"l-"9 19-0 20-2 21-3 26-il 27T 28-6 29-4 0
2xl2 16.0 0.23 0.'30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.97 1.07 1.19 1..31 1.44 1.56 1.70 ::0
12-.3 13-5 14-6 15-6 16-6 1-17-4 uc2_ --yg:-0 19-10 20-6 21-3 21-11 22-8 23.3 23-11
s::
tD
24.0 0.19 0.25 0 ..11 0 ..38 0.45 0.53 0.61 0.70 0.78 0.88 097 1.07 1.17 1.28 1.39 c
N<YfES: ;=
c
(])The required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span.
(2)Use single or repetitive member bending stress values (Fb) and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables :'>os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load
z
G)
stress increases, see Section 2504 (c I 4. 0
(3)For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values (Fb) and modulus of elasticity values(£). other spacing of members and 0
other conditions of loading. see l'.B.C. Standard ~o. 25-21. c
(4 )The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent. m
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-2-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW- OR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Supporting Drywall Ceiling)
...
(I)
CID
CID
Deflection-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the m
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal prolection.
c
::::j
RAFTER
SIZE SPACING Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending F b (psi). 0
(IN) (IN) 600
z
500 700 800 900 1000 llOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
7-6 8-2
8-10 9-6 10-0 10-7 11-l 11-7 12-l 12-6 1.3-0 13-5 13-10 14-2 14-7
~ 0.27 0 ..36
0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.01 1.14 1.28 1.41 1.56 1.71 1.86 2.02
2x6
6-6 r.w-
7-8
·--c_-
8-2 8-8 9-2
16.0 0.24 0.31 0 ..39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88
9-7 10-0 i0-5
0.99
10-10
1.10
ll-.3
1.22
11-7
1.3.5
11.11 12-4 12-8
1.48 1.61 1.75
--- !--;;-~
5-4 5-10 6-3 6-8 7-1 7-6 i:TD 8='2 8-6 8-10 9-2 9-6 9.9 10-0 10-4
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.54 0.6.3 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.21 1..'31 1.43
9-10 10-10 ll-8 12.6 13-.3 13-11 14-8 15-3 15-11 16-6 17-l 17-8 18-2 18-9 19-3
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.01 1.14 1.28 1.41 1.56 1.71 1.86 2.02
8-7 9-4 10-l 10-10 11-6 ·12T u:8 13-3 1.3-9 14-4 14-10 15-3 15.9 16-3 16-8
2x8 16.0 0.24 0 ..31 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.35 1.48 1.61 1.75
7-0 7.8 8-.3 8-10 9-4 9-10 10-4 10.10 11-3 11-8 12-1 12-6 12-10 1.3-3 13-7
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0 ..54 0.6.1 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.21 1..31 1.43
12-7 1.3-9 14-11 15-ll 16-ll 17-10 18-8 19-6 20-4 21-l 21-10 22-6 2.3 . .3 23-ll 24-6
12.0
- - - 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.01 !.14 1.28 1.41 1.56 1.71 1.86 2.02
10-11 11-11 12.1 i 13~9 14-8- 1-15-.5 16-2 16.11 17-7 18-3 111-11 19-6 20-l- To:-8 CZT:3
2x10 16.0 0.24 0.31 0 ..39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.3.5 1.48 1.61 1.75
-
8-11 9-9 w:6 u::-1-- ~-
11-11 l2-7 13-2 1:1-9 14-4 14-11 1.5-.5 1.5-11 16-5 16-ll 17-4
,.
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.54 0.61 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.21 1.31 1.43
15-4 16-9 18-l 19-4 20-6 21-8 22-8 23.9 24-8 25-7 26-6 27-5 28 . .3 29-1 29-10
12.0 0.27 0 ..36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.01 1.14 1.28 1.41 1.56 1.71 - 1.86 202
-- -:---
1.3-3 14-6 15-8 16.9 17-9 - '"- ~~9 19-8 20-6- 2-r=5 22-2 2.3-0 23-9 24-5 25-2 25-10
2xl2 16.0 0.2-t 0 ..31 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.35 1.48 1.61 1.75
10-10 11-10 12-10 1.3-8 14T 1---15-4 16-1 16.9 17-5 18-l 18-9 19--1 20.0 20-6 21-1
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0 ..54 O.G3 0.72 0.81 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.21 1.31 1.43
N
NOTES: (!)The reqmred modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000,000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span. U1
(2)Use single or repetitive member bending stress values (Fh) and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables Nos. 25-A-l and 25-A-2. For duration of load C::
stress increases. see Section 2504 (c) 4. ::D
(3)For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values (F h) and modulus of elasticity values(£), other spacing of members and ~
other conditions of loading. see C.B.C. Standard :--.<o. 25-21.
(4)The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent.
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-7-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW-SLOPE RAFTERS, SLOPE 31N 12 OR LESS
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (No Ceiling Load)
Deflection-For 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection.
RAFTER Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending F b (psi).
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
9-2 10-0 ll-7 12-4 13-0 1.3-7 14-2 14-9 15-4 1.5-ll Hi-5 16-ll 17-5 17-10
10-10
12.0 0.3.3 0.44 0.55
0.67 0.80 0.94 1.09 1.24 1.40 -1.56 1.71 - 1.91 2.09 2.28 2.47
- - - --
-.--· -----
7-ll 8-8 10-0 10-8 ll-.3 -ll-9- "!2T T2-1o 1.3-.3 1.'3-9 14-2 14-8 IST 15-6-
9-5
2x6 16.0 0.29 0 ..38 0.58 0.70 0.82 0.94 1.07 1.21 1..35 1..50 1.6.5 1.81 1.97 2.14
0.48
6-6 7-l7-:s- '8:2- -:c:-"'-
8-8 9-2 9-7 10-=c.l J.o:-5- fo-10 -ll-'3- 'Tix
ll-11 "12-4 12-=s-
24.0 0.24 0 ..39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1..3.5 1.48 1.61 1.75
0.31
12-l 14-4 15-3 16-3 17-l 17-11 18.9 19-6 20-.3 20-ll 21-7 22-.3 22-11 23-7
1.3-3
12.0 0.3.3 0.55 0.67 0.80 0.9-t 1.09 1.24 1.40 1.56 1.73 1.91 2.09 2.28 2.47
0.44
- .-
10-6 12-5 1.3-3 14-0 l-1~10 1.5=-6 16-3 16-fo ~6-
ll-6 fJs:.-2
lil-9- 19-4 19-10 2o:5
2x8 16.0 0.29 0.48 0.58 0.70 0.82 0.94 1.07 1.21 1.35 1..50 1.6.5 1.81 1.97 2.14
0 ..38
10-1 10-10 11-6 12-1 12-8 1.3.3 1'3~9 14T 14.-(o 1.5.3 1sT "!6~- 16-8 -
-~
8-7 9-4
24.0 0.24 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 O.il8 0.99 1.10 1.22 1..35 1.48 1.61 1.75
0.31
15-5 18-3 19-6 20-8 21-10 22-10 23-11 24-10 25-10 26-f\ 27-7 28-5 29-.'3 30-l
16-11
12.0 0.3.3 0.55 0.67 0.80 0.94- - 1.09 1.24 1.40 1.56 1.7) -
0.44 1.91 2.09 2.28 2.47
---
nT ~- 15-io 16-ll 17-11 Iil-II 19-10 20-8 21-6 22-T 21~2- 23-ll 24T 25.4 26-0
--- ~-----
2xl0 16.0 0.29 0.18 0.48 0.58 0.70 0.82 0.94 1.07 -1.21
f--.---
1..35 uo l.G.5 1.81 1.97 2.14
r,.----
10-ll ll-11 12-ll 1.3-9 14-8 15-.5 16-2 "!6.:-u 17-7 18-3 lil-ll 19-6 20-1 -20-8- 21-3
-----
24.0 0.24 0..31 0 ..39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 l.IO 1.22 1..3.5 148 1.61 1.75 c
18-9 20-6 22-2 23-9 25-2 26-6 27-10 29.1 10-3 31-4 .12-6 .')1.6 .14-7 35-7 36-7 ~
'11
12.0 0.33 0.44 0 ..55 0.67 0.80 0.9-1 1.09 1.24 1.40 1.56 1.73 1.91 -2.09 2.28 2.47 0
1--=--c-,-
16-1 17-9 -19-3 20-6 21-9 r-21-0- 24-1" 25-2 26-2 '27-2 ·zilT 29-1 29-11 3o:fo if-8-
---
::tl
2xl2 16.0 0.29 0 ..38 0.48 0.58 0.70 O.f\2 0.94 1.07 1.21 1..35 1.50 1.6.5 1.81 1.97 2.14 3:
,--
1.3-3 14-6 !.5.8 16-9 17:.-9 78~9- 19-8 20.6 '2!75- 22-2 2.3-0 23-9 24-5- 25.2 25-10
-----.- - . - -----
Ill
c
24.0 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.35 1.48 1.61 1.75 i=
)The reqmred modulus of elasticity (£)in I ,000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span. c
NOTES: (I
(2)l,;se single'" repetitive member bending stress values <Fb) and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables :--.'os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load z
C)
stress increa.ses. see Section 2504 (c) 4.
U)For more cc,mprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values ( F h) and modulus of elasticity values IE). other spacing of members and
0
0
other conditions of loading. see U .B.C. Standard No. 25-21 c
(4 )The 'pans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent. m
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-8-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LOW-SLOPE, RAFTERS SLOPE 3JN 12 OR LESS ....
(Q
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (No Ceiling Load) go
go
DESIGN CRITERIA: Strength-10 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress. m
Deflection-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 240. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the c
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. ::::j
RAFTER 0
SIZE SPACING Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending F 0 (psi). z
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 llOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
7-11 8-8 9-5 10-0 10-8 11-3 11-9 12-4 12-10 13-3 13-9 14-2 14-8 15-1 15-6
12.0 0.32 0.43 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 1.36 !.52 1.69 1.86 2.04 2.22 2.41
6-11 7-6 8-2 8-8 9-3 9-9 10-2 10-8 11-1 11-6 11-11 12-4 12-8 13-1 13-5
2x6 16.0 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.57 0.68 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.18 1.32 1.46 1.61 1.76 1.92 2.08
5-7 6-2 6-8 7-1 7-6 7-11 8-4 8-8 9-1 9-5 9-9 10-0 10-4 10-8 10-11
24.0 0.23 0.30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.19 1..31 1.44 1.57 1.70
10-6 11-6 12-5 13-3 14-0 14-10 15-6 16-3 16-10 17-6 18-2 18-9 19-4 19-10 20-5
12.0 0.32 0.43 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 ]..36 1.52 1.69 1.86 2.04 2.22 2.41
9-1 9-11 10-9 11-6 12-2 12-10 13-5 14-0 14-7 15-2 15-8 16-3 16-9 17-2 17-8
2x8 16.0 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.57 0.68 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.18 1.32 1.46 1.61 1.76 1.92 2.08
7-5 8-1 8-9 9-4 9-11 10-6 11-0 11-6 11-11 12-5 12-10 13-3 13-8 14-0 14-5
24.0 0.23 0.30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.19 1..31 1.44 1.57 1.70
1.3-4 1-l-8 15-10 16-11 17-11 18-11 19-10 20-8 21-6 22-4 23-2 2.3-11 24-7 25-4 26-0
12.0 0.32 0.43 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 1.36 !.52 1.69 1.86 2.04 2.22 2.41
11-7 12-8 13-8 1-l-8 15-6 16-4 17-2 17-11 18-8 19-4 20-0 20-8 21-4 21-11 22-6
2xl0 16.0 0.28 0 ..37 0.47 0.57 0.68 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.18 1..32 1.46 1.61 1.76 1.92 2.08
9-5 10-4 11-2 11-11 12-8 13-4 14-0 14-8 15--1 15-10 16-4 16-11 17-5 17-11 18-5
24.0 0.23 0 ..30 0 ..38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.!9 1.11 1.44 1.57 1.70
16-.3 17-9 19-3 20-6 21-9 2.3-0 2-l-1 25-2 26-2 27-2 28-2 29-1 29-11 30-10 31-8
12.0 0.32 0.43 0.54 0.66 0.78 0.92 1.06 1.21 ]..36 1.52 1.69 1.86 2.04 2.22 2.41
14-1 ].5-5 16-8 17-9 18-10 19-11 20-10 21-9 22:·8 2.3-6 24-4 25-2 25-11 26-8 27-5
2xl2 16.0 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.57 0.68 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.18 1.32 1.46 1.61 1.76 1.92 2.08
11-6 12-7 13-7 14-6 15-5 16-3 17-0 17-9 18-6 19-.3 19-11 20-6 21-2 21:9 22-5
24.0 0.23 0.30 0 ..38 0.46 0.55 0.6.5 0.75 0.85 0.96 1.08 1.19 1..31 1.44 !.57 1.70 N
U'l
NarES: (!)The required modulus of elasticit] 1£) in 1,000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span.
(2)Use single or repetitive member bending stress values (Fbl and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables ~os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load
C:::
w stress increases. see Section 2504 (cJ 4. :D
....
......
(3lFor more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values IF nl and modulus of elasticity values 1£). other spacing of members and clo
other conditions of loading. see C. B.C. Standard ;-.;o. 25-21
14)The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent.
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-10-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS, SLOPE OVER 31N 12
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Heavy Roof Covering)
DESIGN CRITERIA: Strength-15 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress. flo)
Deflection-For 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. "'
C:
RAFTER
SIZE SPACING Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi). ~
0
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800900 1000 IIOO !ZOO 1300 1500 1700 1800 1900
1400 1600
5-5 5-11 6-5 6-10 7-3 7-8 8-0 8-4 8-8 9-0 9-4 9-8 9-11 10-3 10-6
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.03 1.14 1.24 1.36 1.47
4-8 5-1 5-6 5-11 6-3 6-7 6-11 7-3 7-6 7-10 8-1 8-4 8-7 8-10 9-1
2x4 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.17 1.27
3-10 4-2 4-6 4-10 5-1 5-5 5-8 5-11 6-2 6-5 6-7 6-10 7-0 7-3 7-5
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04
8-6 9-4 10-0 10-9 11-5 12-0 12-7 13-2 13-8 14-2 14-8 15-2 15-8 16-1 16-7
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.03 1.14 1.24 1.36 1.47
7-4 8-1 8-8 9-4 9-10 10-5 10-11 11-5 11-10 12-4 12-9 1.3-2 13-7 13-11 14-4
2x6 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.17 1.27
6-0 6-7 7-1 7-i 8-1 8-6 8-11 9-4 9-8 10-0 10-5 10-9 11-1 11-5 11-8
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.2.3 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04
11-2 12-3 13-3 14-2 15-0 15-10 16-7 17-4 18-0 18-9 19-5 20-0 20-8 21-3 21-10
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.03 1.14 1.24 1.36 1.47
9-8 10-7 11-6 12-3 13-0 13-8 14-4 15-0 15-7 16-3 16-9 17-4 17-10 18-5 18-11
2x8 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.17 1.27
7-11 8-8 9-4 10-0 10-7 11-2 11-9 12-3 12-9 13-3 13-8 14-2 14-7 15-0 15-5
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04 c:
14-3 15-8 16-11 18-1 19-2 20-2 21-2 22-1 23-0 23-11 24-9 25-6 26-4 27-1 27-10 z
12.0 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.40 0.48 0.56 0.65 0.74 0.83 0.93 1.03 1.14 1.24 1.36 1.47 =n
0
12-4 13-6 14-8 15-8 16-7 17-6 18-4 19-2 19-11 20-8 21-5 22-1 22-10 23-5 24-1 :Il
2x10 16.0 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.35 0.41 0.49 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.17 1.27 :!:
10-1 11-1 11-11 12-9 13-6 14-3 15-0 15-8 16-3 16-11 17-6 18-1 18-7 19-2 19-8 Ill
24.0 0.14 0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 0.66 0.73 0.80 0.88 0 96 1.04 s:r
N(ITES: (1 )The required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span. !2
(2)Use single or repetitive member bending stress values (F b) and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables :-;os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load zG)
stress increases. see Section 2504 Ic) 4.
(')
(3)For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values IF b) and modulus of elasticity values(£), other spacing of members and 0
other conditions of loading. see {j .B.C. Standard No. 25-21. c
(4 )The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent. m
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Heavy Roof Covering)
...
CQ
DESIGN CRITERIA: Strength-15 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress. 00
00
Deflection-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the m
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. c
RAFTER
Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi).
=i
SIZE SPACING 0
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 BOD 900 1000 llOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 z
4-9 5-3 5-8 6-0 6-5 6-9 7-1 7-5 7-8 8-0 8-3 8-6 8-9 9-0 9-3
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.39 1.51
4-1 4-6 4-11 5-3 5-6 5-10 6-1 6-5 6-8 6-11 7-2 7-5 7-7 ! 7-10 8-0
2x4 16.0 0.18 0.23 0.29 0.36 0.43 0.50 0.58 0.66 0.74 0.83 0.92 1.01 11.1 1.21 1.31
24.0
3-4
0.14
3-8
0.19
4-0
0.24
4-3
0.29
4-6
0.35
4-9
0.41
5-0
0.47
5-3 5-5
0.54 0.61
5-8 i 5 -I9
0.68 0.1<> 0.83
6-0 6-3 6-5
0.90 0.99
6-7
1.07
7-6 8-2 8-10 9-6 10-0 10-7 11-1 11-7 12-1 12-6 13-0 13-5 13-10 14-2 14-7
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.39 1.51
6-6 7-1 7-8 8-2 9 -I~-- --~~
ioTo 11-3 11-7 ll-11 12-4 12-8

8-8 9-2 10-0 "Io-5
2x6 16.0 0.18 0.23 0.29 0.36 0.43 0.50 0 ..58 0.66 0.74 0.83 0.92 1.01 l.ll 1.21 1.31
5-4 5-10 6-3 6-8 7-1 7-6 7-10 8-2 8-6 8-10 9-2 9-6 9-9 10-0 10-4
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0.54 0.61 0.68 0.75 0.83 0.90 0.99 1.07
9-10 10-10 11-8 12-6 13-3 13-ll 14-8 15-3 15-11 16-6 17-1 17-8 18-2 18-9 19-3
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1.39 1.51
8-7 9-4 10-1 10-10 11-6 12-1 12-8 1.3-.3 13-9 14-4 14-10 15-3 15-9 16-3 16-8
2x8 16.0 0.18 0.23 0.29 0.36 0.43 0.50 0.58 0.66 0.74 0.83 0.92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.31
7-0 7-8 8-.3 8-10 9-4 9:10 10-4 10-10 11-'3 11-8 12-1 12-6 12-10 13-3 1.3-7
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0 ..35 0.41 0.47 0.54 0.61 0.68 0.75 0.83 0.90 0.99 1.07
12-7 1.3-9 14-11 15-11 16-11 17-10 18-8 19-6 20-4 21-1 21-10 22-6 23-3 2.3-11 24-6
12.0 0.20 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0 58 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.06 1.17 1.28 1..39 1.51
lO-ll 11-11 12-11 1.3-9 14-8 15-5 16-2 16-11 17-7 f8-.3- t-rS-iT ~6 20-1 20-8 21-3
2x10 16.0 0.18 0.2.3 0.29 0.36 0.4.3 0.50 0.58 0.66 0.74 0.8'3 0.92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.31
8-11 9-9 10-6 11-.3 ll-11 12-7 13-2 13-9 14-4 14"11 IJ"5-5 15-11 16-5 16-11 17-4
24.0 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0.54 0.61 0.68 0.75 0.8.3 0.90 0.99 1.07
~OTES: (I )The required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown belo" each span.
r2)Cse single or repetitive member bending stre" values !F, 1 and modulus of elasticity values(£) from Tables :\os. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load
stress increases, see Section 2504 (c) 4.
(3)For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values (F ,) and modulus of elasticity values I£). other spacing of members and
other conditions of loading. see L'. B.C. Standard t-.'o. 25-21
I4 )The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent.
20 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (light Roof Covering)
DE$1Gl\4 CRITERIA: Strength-7 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress.
Deflection-·For 20 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection.
srzM.F$rNG
Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending F b (psi).
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 llOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900
6-2 6-9 7-3 7-9 8-3 8-8 9-1 9-6 9-11 10-3 10-8 ll-0 ll-4 11-8 12-0
12.0 0.29 0.:38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.83 0.96 1.09 1.23 1.37 1.52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17
5-4 5-10 6-4 6-9 7-2 7-6 7-ll 8-3 8-7 8-11 9-3 9-6 9-10 10-1 10-5
2x4 16.0 0.25 0.33 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 0.83 0.94 1.06 1.19 1..32 1.45 1.59 !.73 1.88
4-4 4-9 5-2 5-6 5-10 6-2 6-5 6-9 7-0 7-3 7-6 7-9 8-0 8-3 8-6
24.0 0.21 0.27 0 ..34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0.68 0.77 0.87 0.97 1.08 1.19 1..30 1.41 1.53
9-8 10-7 11-5 12-3 13-0 1.3-8 14-4 15-0 15-7 16-2 16-9 17-.3 17-10 18-4 18-10
12.0 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.83 0.96 1.09 1.23 1.37 !.52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17
8-4 9-2 9-11 10-7 ll-3 11-10 12-5 13-0 13-6 14-0 14-6 15-0 15-5 15-11 16-4
2x6 16.0 0.25 0.33 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 0.83 0.94 1.06 1.19 1.32 1.45 !.59 1.73 1.88
-·
6-10 7-6 8-1 8-8 9-2 9-8 10-2 1o:7 · ll-0 ll-5 11-10 12-3 12-7 13-0 13-4
24.0 0.21 0.27 0.34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0.68 0.77 0.87 0.97 1.08 1.19 1.30 1.41 1.53
12-9 13-ll 15-1 16-1 17-1 18-0 18-11 19-9 20-6 21-4 22-1 22-9 23-6 24-2 24-10
12.0 0.29 0 ..38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.83 0.96 1.09 1.23 1..37 1.52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17
ll-0 12-1 13-1 13-11 14-10 15-7 16-4 17-1 17-9 18-5 19-1 19-9 20-4 20-11 21-6
2x8 16.0 0.25 0.33 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 0.83 0.94 1.06 1.19 1..32 1.45 !.59 1.73 1.88
9-0 9-10 10-8 11-5 12-1 12-9 13-4 1.3-11 14-6 15-1 15-7 16-1 16-7 17-1 1~
24.0 0.21 0.27 0 ..34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0.68 0.77 0.87 0.97 108 1.19 1..30 1.41 1.53 c
16-3 17-10 19-3 20-7 21-10 23-0 24-1 25-2 26-2 27-2 28-2 29-1 30-0 .30-10 31-8 z
12.0 0.29 0.38 0.49 0.59 0.71 0.8.3 0.96 1.09 1.2.3 1..37 1..52 1.68 1.84 2.00 2.17 :;;
14-1 15-5 16-8 17-10 18-ll 19-11 20-10 21-10 22-8 23-7 tz:r=s 25-2 25-ll 26-8 27-5 0
J:J
2x10 16.0 0.25 0 ..3.3 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 0.83 0.94 1.06 1.19 1..32 1.45 1.59 1.73 1.88 s::
11-6 12-7 1.3-7 14-6 15-5 16-3 17-1 17-10 18-6 19-.3 19-ll 20.7 21-2 21-10 22-5 aJ
24.0 0.21 0.27 0 ..34 0.42 0.50 0.59 0.68 0.77 0.87 0.97 1.08 1.19 1..30 1.41 1.-53 c
NOTES: (I )The required modulus of elasticity (E) in 1.000.000 pounds per square inch is shown below each span.
r=c
12)Use single or repetitive member bending stress values IFh) and modulus of elasticity values 1£) from Tables Nos. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load
stress increases. see Section 2504 (c) 4.
z
C)
13)For more CIJmprehensive tables covering a broaderrange of bending stress values (F b) and modulus of elasticity values (E). other spacing of members and 0
other conditions of loading, see U .B.C. Standard !'io. 25-21. 0
(4)The 1pans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent.
c
m
TABLE NO. 25-U-R-14-ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR HIGH-SLOPE RAFTERS, SLOPE OVER 31N 12 ....
CD
30 LBS. PER SQ. FT. LIVE LOAD (Light Roof Covering) ~
DESIGN CRITERIA: Strength-7 lbs. per sq. ft. dead load plus 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load determines required fiber stress. m
Deflection-For 30 lbs. per sq. ft. live load. Limited to span in inches divided by 180. RAFTERS: Spans are measured along the c
horizontal projection and loads are considered as applied on the horizontal projection. :::j
RAFTER
Allowable Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending Fb (psi).
0z
SIZE SPACING
(IN) (IN) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 llOO 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 ~00
5-3 5-9 6-3 6-8 7-1 7-5 7-9 8-2 8-6 8-9 9-1 9-5 9-8 10-0 10-3
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.02 1.15 1.28 1.42 1..57 1.72 1.87 2.03
--t--:-4---=7,--+5=---"-o'----~--'5c--5=-+=5_:9
6-1 6-S-~~9 7-1 7-4 7-7 7-11 8-2 8-5 8-8 IWO
2x4 16.0 0.24 0.:31 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.88 0.99 1.11 1.23 1.36 1.49 1.62 1.76
--t-;;3:-:-9~+.4~-1;c:._E4~-5~+4-c-~8~5-o- s:1 5-6 5-9 6-o 6·:15:5-- ~ e~wr.r:.Y-- ~
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.47 0.55 0.63 0.72 0.81 0.91 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.32 1.43
8-3 9-1 9-9 10-5 11-1 11-H 12-.'3 12-9 1.3-4 13-10 14-4 14-9 15-3 15-8 16-1
.o---+""'0.--=2c-7_tco;:;-.3--:-6oc-+---ooc-c.4=-5----+o-=---.55 o.66 o.77 0890 _~o2 1.15 1.28
_1_2__ 1.42 1.57 ~~r-~-P 2.03
7-2 7-10 8-5 9-T 9-7 10-1 10--.:7 11T 11-6 12-o 12-.5 12-9 13-2 1:f1 13-11
2x6 16.0 0.24 0.31 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.81> 0.99 1.11 1.2.'3 1..36 1.49 1.62 1.76
--~5c-c-1~o----+-:c6---=5c--i--c6o--:c:llc-+-"-7J)- 1-1o'8~1 H~ 9-1 9-5 tw=s-
9-9 'io-1- 10-9 11:1 11-5
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0 ..'39 0.47 0 ..5.5 0.6.'3 0.72 0.81 0.91 l.(Jl 1.11 1.21 1.32 1.43
10-11 11-11 12-10 13-9 14-7 15-5 16-2 16-10 17-7 18-2 18-10 19-6 20-1 20-8 21-3
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.02 1.1.5 1.28 1.42 1.57 1 72 1 87 2.03
~--t--;9,"'-5~+.1--o;O=-c4o--+""1'-71:C:-2c-+~1i:tlt-12:s 11--4 74-0 14-7 15-:--2- 1-5--.:9- 16-4- 16:1cf 1'7T1r--11f-lt-4
2x8 16.0 0.24 0 ..31 0 ..39 0.41> 0.57 0.67 0.77 0.81> 0.99 1.11 1.2.'3 1.36 1.49 1.62 1.76
~--t-;;7;---8;:---+8;-----5~+-9~;-_1=-- -g::g-t-ioX~6-il i1--s 11-u "12-=-5~10~-11-4 n-9 14~2 14--.:r-rys::-o
24.0 0.19 0.25 0.32 0 ..'39 0.47 0 .5.5 0.63 0.72 0.81 0.91 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.32 1.43
13-11 15-2 16-5 17-7 18-7 19-H 20-7 21-6 22-5 2.3--3 24-1 24-10 25-7 26-4 27-1
12.0 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.55 0.66 0.77 0.89 1.02 1.15 1.28 1.42 !.57 1.72 1.87 2.03
12-o 1.1-2 14-> 1s-2- 16-:--2 !7~o 17-io'TS-7 19-:--5 io-1 2o-10 21--.:fi z2-2 22:1o ~--.:s-
2x1o 16.0 0.26 0.34 0.43 0.53 0.63 0.74 0.85 0.97 !.09 1.22 1.1.5 1.49 1.63 1.78 1.93
---+-9"'-c:1""'0-+--:1c0""--"-9-+1'--=1--'-7~-1=c2-5- iT-2 t---r:f-TI r-fr:7 15--=2-"ls--.:w 16::-s i7--=0 17-7 18-1 18-'7-t-"jg--.:2'
24.0 0.19 0.25 0 ..32 0 ..39 0.47 0..5.5 0.6.'3 0.72 0.81 0.91 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.-32 1.43
NOTES: 11 )The required modulus of elasticity(£) in 1.000,000 pounds per square mch IS shown below each span.
12)Cse single or repetitive member bending stress values (Fh) and modulus of elasticity values i£) from Tables Nos. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2. For duration of load
stress increases. see Section 2504 (c) 4.
(3 )For more comprehensive tables covering a broader range of bending stress values (Fb) and modulus of elasticity values(£), other spacing of members and
other conditions of loading. see U .B.C. Standard Ko. 25-2!.
I41The spans in these tables are intended for use in covered structures or where moisture content in use does not exceed 19 percent.
25-V UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-V-WALL BRACING

SEISMIC TYPE OF BRACE1 AMOUNT OF
ZONE CONDITION A B c D E F G H BRACING2
One Story X X X X X X X X
Top of Two
or Three
Story
0, First Story X X X X X X X X Each end
I of Two and each
and Story or 25' of wall.
2 Second
Story of
Three
Story
First Story X X X X' X X X
of Three
Story
One Story X X X X X X X X Each end
Top of Two and each
or Three 25' of wall.
Story
3 First Story X X X X' X X X Each end.
and of Two 25%of
4 Story or wall length
Second to be
Story of sheathed.
Three
Story
First Story X X X X' X X X Each end.
of Three 40%of
Story wall length
to be
sheathed.
'See Section 2517 (g) 3 for full description.
2Bracing at ends shall be near thereto as possible. Braces shall be installed so that there is no
unbraced section along the wall exceeding 25 feet.
lGypsum wallboard applied to supports at 16 inches on center.
376
1988 EDITION 2601-2602
Chapter 26
CONCRETE
Copyright © by the American Concrete Institute and reproduced
with their consent. All rights reserved.
The contents of this chapter are patterned after and in general conformity with,
the provisions of ACI Standard 318 for reinforced concrete design. For additional
background information and research data used in developing the similar design
requirements, reference to the ACI Code Commentary (ACI 318R) published by
the American Concrete Institute is suggested.
In order to make reference to the ACI commentary easier for users of the code,
the ACI chapter and section designations are shown in brackets. To clearly
distinguish where the Uniform Building Code differs from ACI Standard 318-83
(Revised 1986), those portions of the code are shown in italics.
Scope
Sec. 2601. The design of structures in concrete of cast-in-place or precast
construction, plain, reinforced or prestressed, shall conform to the rules and
principles specified in this chapter.
Definitions [Chapter 2]
Sec. 2602. [2. l] The following terms are defined for general use in this code.
Specialized definitions appear in individual sections.
ADMIXTURE is material other than water, aggregate, or hydraulic cement
used as an ingredient of concrete and added to concrete before or during its mixing
to modify its properties.
AGGREGATE is granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone and
iron blast-furnace slag, and when used with a cementing medium forms a hydrau-
lic cement concrete or mortar.
AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT, is aggregate with a dry, loose weight of
70 pounds per cubic foot or less.
AIR-DRY WEIGHT is the unit weight of a lightweight concrete specimen
cured for seven days with neither loss nor gain of moisture at 60° to 80°F. and
dried j(Jr 21 days in 50 ± 7 percent relative humidity at 73.4 ± 2°F.
ANCHORAGE in posttensioning is a device used to anchor tendons to con-
crete member; in pretensioning, a device used to anchor tendons during hardening
of concrete.
BONDED TENDON is a prestressing tendon that is bonded to concrete either
directly or through grouting.
COLUMN is a member with a ratio of height-to-least-lateral dimension of 3 or
greater used primarily to support axial compressive load.
COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS are concrete flex-
ural members of precast and cast-in-place concrete elements or both constructed
in separate placements but so interconnected that all elements respond to loads as
a unit. See Section 2617.
377
CONCRETE is a mixture of portland cement or any other hydraulic cement.

fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water, with or without admixtures.
CONCRETE, SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH 01<' (f' cl· is the
compressive strength of concrete used in design and evaluated in accordance with
'i'rovisions of Section 2604, expressed in pounds per square inch (psi). Whenever
the quantity f'c is under a radical sign, square root of numerical value only is
,)T(errded, and result has units of pounds per square inch (psi).
CONCRETE, STRUCTURAL LIGHTWEIGHT, is concrete containing
lightweight aggregate which conforms to Section 2603 (d) and having an air-dry
unit weight as determined by definition above, not exceeding 115 pcf. In this
code, a lightweight concrete without natural sand is termed "all-lightweight
concrete" and lightweight concrete in which all fine aggregate consists of normal
weight sand is termed "sand-lightweight concrete."
CURVATURE FRICTION is friction resulting from bends or curves in the
specified prestressing tendon profile.
DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT is deformed reinforcing bars, bar and
rod mats, deformed wire, welded smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire
fabric conforming to Section 2603 (t) 2.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH is the length of embedded reinforcement re-
quired to develop the design strength of reinforcement at a critical section. Sec
Section 2609 (d), last paragraph.
EJ<'FECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION (d) is the distance measured from
extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension reinforcement.
EFFECTIVE PRESTRESS is the stress remaining in prestressing tendons
after all losses have occurred, excluding effects of dead load and superimposed
load.
EMBEDMENT LENGTH is the length of embedded reinforcement provided
beyond a critical section.
JACKING FORCE is the temporary force exerted by device that introduces
tension into prestressing tendons in prestressed concrete.
LOAD, DEAD, is the dead weight supported by a member, as defined by
Section 2302 (without load factors).
LOAD, FACTORED, is the load, multiplied by appropriate load factors, used
to proportion members by the strength design method of this code. See Sections
2608 (b) and 2609 (c).
LOAD, LIVE, is the live load specified by Section 2302 (without load factors).
LOAD, SERVICE, is the live and dead loads (without load factors).
MODULUS 01<' ELASTICITY is the ratio of normal stress to corresponding
strain for tensile or compressive stresses below proportional limit of material. Sec
Section 2608 (t).
PEDESTAL is an upright compression member with a ratio of unsupported
height to average least lateral dimension of 3 or less.
378
1988 EDITION 2602
PLAIN CONCRETE is concrete that docs not conform to definition of

reinforced concrete.
PLAIN REINFORCEMENT is reinforcement that docs not conform to defi-
nition of deformed reinforcement. Sec Section 2603 (f) 3.
POSTTENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which tendons arc ten-
sioned after concrete has hardened.
PRECAST CONCRETE is plain or reinforced concrete clement cast in other
than its final position in the structure.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE is reinforced concrete in which internal
stresses have been introduced to reduce potential tensile stresses in concrete
resulting from loads.
PRETENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which tendons arc ten-
sioned before concrete is placed.
REINFORCED CONCRETE is concrete containing adequate reinfiwce-
ment. prestressed or non prestressed, and designed on the assumption that the two
materials act together in resisting forces.
REINFORCEMENT is material that conforms to Section 2603 (f), excluding
prestressing tendons unless specifically included.
SPAN LENGTH. Sec Section 2608 (h).
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is continuously wound reinforcement in the
form of a cylindrical helix.
SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH(!;,) is the tensile strength of concrete
determined in accordance with U.B .C. Standard No. 26-3. Sec Section 2604 (b),
last paragraph.
STIRRUP is reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion stresses in a
structural member; typically bars, wires, or welded wire fabric (smooth or
deformed) bent into L, U or rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to or at
an angle to longitudinal reinforcement. (The term "stirrups" is usually applied to
lateral reinforcement in flexural members and the term "tics" to those in com-
pression members.) Sec TIE.
STRENGTH, DESIGN, is the nominal strength multiplied by a strength
reduction factor$. See Section 2609 (d).
STRENGTH, NOMINAL, is the strength of a member or cross section
calculated in accordance with provisions and assumptions of the strength design
method of this code before application of any strength reduction factors. Sec
Section 2609 (d), first paragraph.
STRENGTH, REQUIRED, is the strength of a member or cross section
required to resist factored loads or related internal moments and forces in such
combinations as arc stipulated in this code. See Section 2609 (b).
STRESS is the intensity of force per unit area.
TENDON is a steel element such as wire, cable, bar, rod or strand, or a bundle
of such clements, used to impart prestress to concrete.
379
TIE is a loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing longitudinal reinforcement.

Sec STIRRUP.
TRANSFER is the act of transferring stress in prestressing tendons from jacks
or prctcnsioning bed to concrete member.
WALL is a member, usually vertical, used to enclose or separate spaces.
WOBBLE FRICTION in prestressed concrete, is friction caused by unin-
tended deviation of prestressing sheath or duct from its specified profile.
YIELD STRENGTH is the specified minimum yield strength or yield point of
reinforcement in pounds per square inch. Yield strength or yield point shall be
determined in tension according to applicable U.B.C. Standards as modified by
Section 2603 (I).
Specifications for Tests and Materials [Chapter 3]

Sec. 2603. (a) Notations. [3.0]
dh nominal diameter of bar, inches.
J; = specified yield strength ofnonprcstrcsscd reinforcement, psi.
(b) Tests of Materials. [3.1] The building official may require the testing of
any materials used in concrete construction to determine if materials are of quality
specified.
Tests of materials and of concrete shall be made by an approved axency and at
no expense to the jurisdiction. Such tests shall be made in accordance with the
standards listed in Section2603 (i).
A complete record of tests of materials and of concrete shall be available for
inspection during progress of work and for two years after completion of the
project. and shall be preserved by inspecting engineer or architect for that pur-
pose.
(c) Cements. [3.2] Cement shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-1 and
shall correspond to that on which the selection of concrete proportions was based
[see Section 2604 (c) f.
(d) Aggregates. [3.3] Concrete aggregates shall conform to U.B .C. Standard
No. 26-2 or U.B.C. Standard No. 26-3, except that aggregates failing to meet
these specifications but which have been shown by special test or actual service to
produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used where autho-
rized by the building official.
The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be not larger than:
I. One fifth the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, nor
2. One third the depth of slabs, nor
3. Three fourths the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing
bars or wires, bundles of bars, or prestressing tendons or ducts.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the building official,
workability and methods of consolidation arc such that concrete can be placed
without honeycomb or voids.
380
1988 EDITION 2603
(e) Water. 13.41 Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from
injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials or other sub-
stances that may be deleterious to concrete or reinforcement.
In addition, mixing water for prestressed concrete or for concrete that will
contain aluminum embedments, including that portion of mixing water contrib-
uted in the form of free moisture on aggregates, shall not contain deleterious
amounts of chloride ions. Sec Section 2604 (f).
Nonpotable water shall not be used in concrete unless the following arc
satisfied:
I. Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes using
water from the same source.
2. Mortar test cubes made with non potable mixing water shall have 7 -day and
28-day strengths equal to at least 90 percent of strengths of similar specimens
made with potable water. Strength test comparison shall be made on mortars,
identical except for the mixing water, prepared and tested in accordance with
approved standards.
( t) Metal Reinforcement. 13.51 I . General. Reinforcement shall be deformed
reinforcement, except that plain reinforcement may be used for spirals or tendons,
and reinforcement consisting of structural steel, steel pipe or steel tubing may be
used as specified in this chapter.
Reinforcement to be welded shall be indicated on the drawings and welding
procedure to be used shall be specified. Steel specifications, except for A 706,
shall be supplemented to require a report of material properties necessary to
conform to welding procedures specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8.
2. Deformed reinforcement. Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to
Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strength./;. exceeding 60,000
psi may be used, provided./;. shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of0.35
percent and the bars otherwise conform to U.B .C. Standard No. 26-4. Sec Section
2609 (c).
Bar and rod mats for concrete reinforcement shall conform to U .B.C. Standard
No. 26-5. Reinforcement used in bar and rod mats shall conform to U.B .C.
Standard No. 26-4.
Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement shall conform to U .B.C. Standard
No. 26-6, except that wire shall be not smaller than size D4, and for wire with a
specified yield strength[,. exceeding 60,000 psi,.f;. shall be the stress correspond-
ing to a strain of0.35 percent. ·
Welded smooth wire fabric fc·r concrete reinforcement shall conform to U .B.C.
Standard No. 26-6, except that for wire with a specified yield strength/;. exceed-
ing 60,000 psi, .1;. shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent.
Welded intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 12 inches in direction
of calculated stress, except for wire fabric used as stirrups in accordance with
Section 2612 (o).
Welded deformed wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to
381
U.B .C. Standard No. 26-6, except that for wire with a specified yield strengthfv
exceeding 60,000 psi, .1; shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35
percent. Welded intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 16 inches in
direction of calculated stress, except for wire fabric used as stirrups in accordance
with Section 2612 (o).
Deformed reinforcement may be galvanized or epoxy coated. Zinc or cpoxy-
.coatcil reinforcement shall conform to U .B.C. Standard No. 26-4.
3. Plain reinforcement. Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall conform to
the spccificationj(Jr A615. A616 and A617 contained in U.B .C. Standard No. 26-
4.
Smooth wire for spiral reinforcement shall conform to U .8 .C. Standard No. 24-
15 except that for wire with a specified yield strength fv exceeding 60,000 psi, .1;.
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of0.35 percent. ·
4. Prestressing tendons. Wire, strands and bars ./{1r tendons in prestressed
concrete shall conform to U.B .C. Standard No. 26-7.
Wire, strands and bars not specifically listed in U.B.C. Standard No. 26-7 may
be used, provided they conform to minimum requirements of these specifications
and do not have properties that make them less satisfactory than those listed.
5. Structural steel, steel pipe or tubing. Structural steel used with reinforc-
ing bars in composite compression members meeting requirements of Section
2610 (o) 7 or 2610 (o) 8 shall conform to U.B .C. Standard No. 27-1, Grades A36,
A242, A441, A572 andA588.
Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression members composed of a steel-
encased concrete core meeting requirements of Section 2610 (o) 6 shall conform
to U.B.C. Standard No. 27-1, Grades A53, A500 and A501.
(g) Admixtures. [3.61 Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to

prior approval by the building official.
An admixture shall be shown capable of maintaining essentially the same
C<lmposition and performance throughout the work as the product used in estab-
lishing concrete proportions in accordance with Section 2604 (c).
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride from other than impurities
from admixture ingredients shall not be used in prestressed concrete, in concrete
containing embedded aluminum, or in concrete cast against stay-in-place galva-
nized metal forms. Sec Section 2604 (f).
Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-9.
Water-reducing admixtures. retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures,
water-n:ducing and retarding admixtures, and water-reducing and accelerating
admixtures shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-9.
Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to U.B.C. Stan-
dard No. 26-9.
(h) Storage of Materials. [3.71 Cement and aggregate shall be stored in such
manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Any material
that has deteriorated or has been contaminated shall not be used for concrete.
382
1988 EDITION 2603-2604
(i) Material and Test Standards. [3.8[ The quality, testing and design of
concrete used structurally in buildings or structures shall CO!jj(Jrm to the require-
ment.\· specified in this chapter and the applicable standards listed in Chapter 60.
The welding of rei!jf(Jrcing steel, metal inserts and connections in reinj(mn/
concrete construction shall conj(Jrm to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-8.
Construction Requirements-Concrete Quality [Chapter 4]

f' c specified compressive strength of concrete, psi .
.1; 1 average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
f'cr required average compressive strength of concrete used as the basis for
selection of concrete portions, psi.
s = standard deviation, psi.
(b) General. [4.1] Concrete shall be proportioned to provide an average
compressive strength as prescribed in Section 2604 (d) 2. Concrete shall be
produced to minimize frequency of strengths below f'c as prescribed in Section
2604 (h) 2 c.
Requirements for f'c shall be based on tests of cylinders made and tested as
prescribed in Section 2604 (h) 2.
Unless otherwise specified. f'c shall be based on 28-day tests. If other than 28
days. test age for(' c shall be as indicated in design drawings or specifications.
Design drawings shall show specified compressive strength of concrete f'cfor
which each part of structure is designed.
Where design criteria in Sections 2609 (f) 2 C, 2611 (c) and 2612 (c) provide for
usc of a splitting tensile strength value of concrete. laboratory tests shall be made
in accordance with U.B .C. Standard No. 26-3 to establish value of/;.1 correspond-
ing to specified values off' c· Splitting tensile strength tests shall not be used as a
basis for field acceptance of concrete.
(c) Selection of Concrete Proportions. [4.2] Proportions of materials for
concrete shall be established to provide:
I. Workability and consistency to permit concrete to be worked readily into
forms and around reinforcement under conditions of placement to be em-
ployed without segregation or excessive bleeding.
2. Resistance to special exposures as required by Section 2604 (f).
3. Conformance with strength test requirements of Section 2604 (h).
Where different materials are to be used for different portions of proposed
work, each combination shall be evaluated.
Concrete proportions, including water-cement ratio, shall be established on the
basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures with materials to be employed,
except as permitted in Section 2604 (e) or required by Section 2604 (f).
(d) Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and Trial Mixtures.
[4.3[1. Standard deviation. A. With test records. Where a concrete production
383
facility has test records, a standard deviation shall be established. Test records
from which a standard deviation is calculated:
(i) Must represent materials, quality control procedures and conditions simi-
lar to those expected and changes in materials and proportions within the
test records shall not have been more restricted than those for proposed
work.
(ii) Must represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or strengths
f'c within 1000 psi of that specified for proposed work.
(iii) Must consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two groups of consecutive
tests totaling at least 30 tests as defined in Section 2604 (h) D, except as
provided in Section 2604 (d) I B.
B. Without test records. Where a concrete production facility docs not have
test records meeting requirements of Section 2604 (d) I A, but does have a record
based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation may be established as the
product of the calculated standard deviation and the modification factor of Table
No. 26-A-1. To be acceptable, the test record must meet the requirements of Items
(i) :md (ii) of Section 2604 (d) I A and represent only a single record of consccu-
ti vc tests that span a period of not less than 45 calendar days.
2. Required average strength. Required average compressive strength f'cr
used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the larger of
Formula (4-1) or (4-2) using a standard deviation calculated in accordance with
Section 2604 (d) I A or Section 2604 (d) I B.
f'cr = f'c + 1.34s ................... (4-1)

or
f'cr =f'c + 2.33s-500 .................. (4-2)
When a concrete production facility docs not have field strength test records for
calculation of standard deviation meeting requirements of Section 2604 (d) A or
B, required average strengthf'cr shall be determined from Table No. 26-A-2 and
documentation of average strength shall be in accordance with requirements of
Section 2604 (d) 3.
3. Documentation of average strength. Documentation that proposed con-
crete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater
than required average compressive strength may consist of a field strength test
record, several strength test records, or trial mixtures as follows:
A. When test records are used to demonstrate that proposed concrete propor-
tions will produce the required average strength f' cr• such records shall
represent materials and conditions similar to those expected. Changes in
materials, conditions and proportions within the test records shall not
have been more restricted than those for proposed work. For the purpose
of documenting average strength potential, test records consisting of less
than 30 but not less than ten consecutive tests may be used, provided test
records encompass a period of time not less than 45 days. Required
384
1988 EDITION 2604
concrete proportions may be established by interpolation between the

strengths and proportions of two or more test records each of which meets
other requirements of this section.
B. When an acceptable record of field test results is not available, concrete
proportions may be established based on trial mixtures meeting the fol-
lowing restrictions:
(i) Combination of materials shall be those for proposed work.
(ii) Trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies required
for proposed work shall be made using at least three different
water-cement ratios or cement contents that will produce a
range of strengths encompassing the required average strength
f'cr·
(iii) Trial mixture shall be designed to produce a slump within ±
0. 75 inch of maximum permitted, and for air-entrained con-
crete, within ± 0.5 percent of maximum allowable air content.
(iv) For each water-cement ratio or cement content, at least three
test cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 26-10. Cylinders shall
be tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of
f'c·
(v) From results of cylinder tests, a curve shall be plotted showing
relationship between water-cement ratio or cement content and
compressive strength at designated test age.
(vi) Maximum water-cement ratio or minimum cement content for
concrete to be used in proposed work shall be that shown by the
curve to produce the average strength required by Section 2604
(d) 2, unless a lower water-cement ratio or higher strength is
required by Section 2604 (f).
(c) Proportioning by Water-Cement Ratio. [4.4] If data required by Section

2604 (d) arc not available, permission may be granted to base concrete propor-
tions on water-cement ratio limits in Table No. 26-A-3.
Table No. 26-A-3 shall be used only for concrete to be made with cements
meeting strength requirements for Types I, 1-A, II, 11-A, III, III-A or V; or Types
IS, IS-A, IS(MS), IS-A(MS), I(SM), I(SM)-A, IP, IP-A, !(PM), I(PM)-A.
IP(MS), IP-A(MS). or Pof U.B.C. Standard No. 26-1, and shall not be applied to
concrete containing lightweight aggregates or admixtures other than those for
entraining air.
Concrete proportioned by water-cement ratio limits prescribed in Table No. 26-
A-3 shall also conform to special exposure requirements of Section 2604 (f) and to
compressive strength test criteria of Section 2604 (h).
(f) Special Exposure Requirements. [4.5] Normal-weight and lightweight

concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or de-icer chemicals shall be air
entrained with air content indicated in Table No. 26-A-4. Tolerance on air content
385
as delivered shall be ± 1.5 percent. For specified compressive strengthfc greater

than 5000 psi, air content indicated in Table No. 26-A-4 may be reduced I percent.
Concrete that is intended to be watertight or concrete that will be subject to
freezing and thawing in a moist condition shall conform to requirements of Table
No. 26 i\-5.
Concrete to be exposed to sulfate-containing solutions shall conform to re-
quirements of Table No. 26-A-6 or be made with a cement that provides sulfate
resistance and used in concrete with maximum water-cement ratio or minimum
compressive strength from Table No. 26-A-6.
Calcium chloride as an admixture shall not be used in concrete to be exposed to
severe or very severe sulfate-containing solutions as defined in Table No. 26-A-6.
For corrosion protection, maximum water-soluble chloride ion concentrations
in hardened concrete at an age of 28 days contributed from the ingredients
including water, aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures shall not
exceed limits of Table No. 26-A-7.
When reinforced concrete will be exposed to de-icing salts, brackish water,
seawater or spray from these sources, requirements of Table No. 26-A-5 for water-
cement ratio or concrete strength and minimum concrete cover requirements of
Section 2607 (h) shall be satisfied.
(g) Average Strength Reduction. [4.61 As data become available during
construction, amount by which value of f'cr must exceed specified value off'c
may be reduced, provided:
I. Thirty or more test results arc available and average of test results exceeds
that required by Section 2604 (d) 2 A, using a standard deviation calculated
in accordance with Section 2604 (d) I A, or
2. Fifteen to 29 test results are available and average of test results exceeds that
required by Section 2604 (d) 2 A, using a standard deviation calculated in
accordance with Section 2604 (d) I B. and
3. Special exposure requirements of Section 2604 (f) are met.
(h) Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete. [4. 7] I. Frequency of testing.
Thefreqr~ency of' testing shall he in accordance with thefollowing:
A. Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be
taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 150 cubic yards of
concrete, nor less than once for each 5000 square feet of surface area for
slabs or walls.
B. On a given project. if total volume of concrete is such that frequency of
testing required by Item A above would provide less than five strength tests
for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches arc used.
C. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cubic yards,
strength tests may be waived by the building official if, in his judgment,
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
D. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two cylinders made
386
1988 EDITION 2604
from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age
designated for determination off',.
2. Laboratory-cured specimens. Laboratory-cured specimens shall comply
with thej(JI/owing:
A. Samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with U.B.C. Stan-
dan/ No. 26-10.
B. Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded, laboratory cured and tested in
C. Strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satis-
factory if both the following requirements are met:
(i) Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed
f',.
(ii) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls bclowf', by
more than 500 psi.
D. If either of the requirements of Section 2604 (h) 2 C arc not met, steps shall
be taken to increase the average of subsequent strength test results. Re-
quirements of Section 2604 (h) 4 shall be observed if requirement of
Section 2604 (h) 2 C (ii) is not met.
3. Field-cured specimens. Field-cured specimens shall comply with thej(JI-
lowing:
A. The building official may require strength tests of cylinders cured under
field conditions to check adequacy of curing and protection of concrete in
the structure.
B. Field-cured cylinders shall be cured under field conditions in accordance
C. Field-cured test cylinders shall be molded at the same time and from the
same samples as laboratory-cured test cylinders.
D. Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when
strength of field-cured cylinders at test age designated for determination of
f', is less than 85 percent of that of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
The 85 percent may be waived if field-cured strength exceeds f' c by more
than 500 psi.
4. Investigation of low-strength test results. Investigation o( low-strength
test results shall be in accordance with the following:
A. If any strength test of laboratory-cured cylinders falls below specified
value off' c by more than 500 psi or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate
deficiencies in protection and curing, steps shall be taken to assure that
load-carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized.
B. If the likelihood of low-strength concrete is confirmed and computations
indicate that load-carrying capacity may have been significantly reduced,
tests of cores drilled from the area in question may be required in accord-
ance with U.B.C. Standard No. 26-/0. In such case, three cores shall be
taken for each strength test more than 500 psi below specified value of(,.
387
C. If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall
be air dried (temperatures 60° to 80°F., relative humidity less than 60
percent) for seven days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the
structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditiom.
cores shall be immersed in water for at least 40 hours and be tested wet.
D. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structur-
ally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of
f'c and if no single core is less than 75 percent off',.. To check testing
accuracy, locations represented by erratic core strengths may be retested.
E. If criteria of Section 2604 (h) 4 Dare not met, and if structural adequacy
remains in doubt, the responsible authority may order load tests as outlined
in Section 2620 for the questionable portion of the structure, or take other
appropriate action.
Mixing and Placing Concrete [Chapter 5]
Sec. 2605. (a) Preparation of Equipment and Place of Deposit. ]5.1] Prepa-
ration before concrete placement shall include the following:
1. All equipment for mixing and transporting concrete shall be clean.
2. All debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete.
3. Forms shall be properly coated.
4. Masonry filler units that will be in contact with concrete shall be well
drenched.
5. Reinforcement shall be thoroughly clean of ice or other deleterious coat-
ings.
6. Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed
unless a tremie is to be used or unless otherwise permitted by the building official.
7. Alllaitance and other unsound material shall be removed before additional
concrete is placed against hardened concrete.
(b) Mixing. [5.2] All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribu-
tion of materials and shall be discharged completely before mixer is recharged.
Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with require-
ments of U.B.C. Standard No. 26-/3 or 26-14.
Job-mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the following:
I. Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of an approved type.
2. Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Mixing shall be continued for at least JI/2 minutes after all materials arc in
the drum, unless a shorter time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing
uniformity tests of U.B.C. Standard No. 26-13.
4. Materials handling, batching and mixing shall conform to applicable provi-
sions of U.B. C. Standard No. 26-13.
5. A detailed record shall be kept to identify:
(i) Number of batches produced;
(ii) Proportions of materials used;
388
1988 EDITION 2605
(iii) Approximate location of final deposit in structure;

(iv) Time and date of mixing and placing.
(c) Conveying. [5. 31 Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final
deposit by methods that will prevent separation or loss of materials.
Conveying equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete at site
of placement without separation of ingredients and without interruptions suffi-
cient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments.
(d) Depositing. [5.4] Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its
final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic
and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement.
Concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials
shall not be deposited in the structure.
Rctcmpcred concrete or concrete that has been remixed a tier initial set shall not
be used unless approved by the buildinf? official.
After concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until
placing of a panel or section, as defined by its boundaries or predetermined joints,
is completed, except as permitted or prohibited by Section 2606 (d).
Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be generally level.
When construction joints are required, joints shall be made in accordance with
Section 2606 (d).
All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during place-
ment and shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fix-
tures and into corners of forms.
(c) Curing. [5.51 I. General. Concrete (other than high-early-strength) shall
be maintained above 50°F. and in a moist condition for at least the first 7 days atier
placement, except when cured in accordance with Section 2605 (c) 3.
2. High-early-strength. High-early-strength concrete shall be maintained
above 50°F. and in a moist condition for at least the first 3 days, except when cured
in accordance with Section 2605 (c) 3.
3. Accelerated curing. Curing by high-pressure steam, steam at atmospheric
pressure, heat and moisture or other accepted processes, may be employed to
accelerate strength gain and reduce time of curing. Accelerated curing shall
provide a compressive strength of the concrete at the load stage considered at least
equal to required design strength at that load stage.
Curing process shall be such as to produce concrete with a durability at least
equivalent to the curing method of Section 2605 (e) I or 2605 (e) 2.
Supplementary strength tests in accordance with Section 2604 (h) 3 may be
required to assure that curing is satisfactory.
(t) Cold Weather Requirements. [5 .61 Adequate equipment shall be provided
for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or ncar-
freezing weather. All concrete materials and all reinforcement, forms, fillers and
389
ground with which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost. Frozen
materials or materials containing ice shall not be used.
(g) Hot Weather Requirements. [5.7] During hot weather, proper attention
shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection
and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation that
may impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
Formwork, Embedded Pipes and Construction Joints [Chapter 6]

Sec. 2606. (a) Design of Formwork. [6. I] Forms shall result in a final
structure that conforms to shapes, lines and dimensions of the members as
re4uired by the design drawings and specifications.
Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape.
Forms and their supports shall be designed so as not to damage previously placed
structure.
Design of form work shall include consideration of the following factors:
I. Rate and method of placing concrete.
2. Construction loads, including vertical, horizontal and impact loads.
3. Special form requirements for construction of shells, folded plates, domes.
architectural concrete or similar types of elements.
Forms for prestressed concrete members shall be designed and constructed to
permit movement of the member without damage during application of prestress-
ing force.
(b) Removal of Forms and Shores. [6.2] Construction loads shall not be
supported on. nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under
construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with
remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to support safely its
weight and loads placed thereon.
Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering
proposed loads. strength of forming and shoring system and concrete strength
data. Concrete strength data may be based on tests of field-cured cylinders or.
when approved by the building official, on other procedures to evaluate concrete
strength. Structural analysis and concrete strength test data shall be furnished to
the building official when so required.
Construction loads exceeding the combination of superimposed dead load plus
specified live load shall not be supported on any unshored portion of the structure
under construction, unless analysis indicates adequate strength to support such
additional loads.
Forms shall be removed in such manner as not to impair safety and serviceabil-
ity of the structure. All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have
sufficient strength not to be damaged thereby.
Form supports for prestressed concrete members may be removed when suffi-
cient prestressing has been applied to enable prestressed members to carry their
dead load and anticipated construction loads.
390
1988 EDITION 2606
(c) Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete. [6.3] I. Conduits, pipes and
sleeves of any material not harmful to concrete and within limitations of this
subsection may be embedded in concrete with approval of the building official,
provided they are not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete.
2. Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall not be embedded in structural con-
crete unless effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction
or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.
3. Conduits, pipes and sleeves passing through a slab, wall or beam shall not
impair significantly the strength of the construction.
4. Conduits and pipes, with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not
displace more than 4 percent of the area of cross section on which strength is
calculated or which is required for fire protection.
5. Except when plans for conduits and pipes are approved by the building
of]lcial, conduits and pipes embedded within a slab, wall or beam (other than
those merely passing through) shall satisfy the following:
A. They shall be not larger in outside dimension than one third the overall
thickness of slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded.
8. They shall be spaced not closer than three diameters or widths on center.
C. They shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction.
6. Conduits, pipes and sleeves may be considered as replacing structurally in
compression the displaced concrete, provided:
A. They are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration,
8. They arc of uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard
Schedule 40 steel pipe, and
C. They have a nominal inside diameter not over 2 inches and arc spaced not
less than three diameters on centers.
7. In addition to other requirements of this subsection, pipes that will contain
liquid, gas or vapor may be embedded in structural concrete under the following
conditions:
A. Pipes and fittings shall be designed to resist effects of the material, pressure
and temperature to which they will be subjected.
B. Temperature of liquid. gas or vapor shall not exceed 150°F.
C. Maximum pressure to which any piping or fittings shall be subjected shall
not exceed 200 psi above atmospheric pressure.
D. All piping and fittings, except as provided in Subsection E, shall be tested as
a unit for leaks before concrete placement. Testing pressure above atmospheric
pressure shall be 50 percent in excess of pressure to which piping and fittings may
be subjected, but minimum testing pressure shall not be less than 150 psi above
atmospheric pressure. Pressure test shall be held for four hours with no drop in
pressure except that which may be caused by air temperature.
E. Drain pipes and other piping designed for pressures of not more than I psi
above atmospheric pressure need not be tested as required in the preceding
Subsection D.
391
F. Pipes carrying liquid, gas or vapor that is explosive or injurious to health

shall again be tested as specified in Subsection Dafter concrete has hardened.
G. Liquid, gas or vapor, except water not exceeding 90°F. nor 50 psi pressure,
shall not be placed in the pipes until the concrete has attained its design strength.
H. Piping in solid slabs, unless used for radiant heating or snow melting, shall
be placed between top and bottom reinforcement.
l. Concrete cover for pipes and fittings shall be not less than 1112 inches for
concrete exposed to earth or weather, nor 3/4 inch for concrete not exposed to
weather or in contact with ground.
J. Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.002 times the area of concrete
section shall be provided normal to the piping.
K. Piping and fittings shall be assembled by welding, brazing, solder-sweating
or other equally satisfactory method. Screw connections shall not be permitted.
Piping shall be so fabricated and installed that cutting, bending or displacement of
reinforcement from its proper location will not be required.
(d) Construction Joints. [6.4] I. General. Surface of concrete construction
joints shall be cleaned and laitance removed. Immediately before new concrete is
placed, all construction joints shall be wetted and standing water removed.
Construction joints shall be so made and located as not to impair the strength of the
structure. Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces through
construction joints. See Section 2611 (h) 9.
2. In floors. Construction joints in floors shall be located within the middle
third of spans of slabs, beams and girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a
minimum distance of two times the width of intersecting beams.
3. In beams, girders or slabs. Beams, girders or slabs supported by columns
or walls shall not be cast or erected until concrete in the vertical support members
is no longer plastic.
Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals shall be placed monolithi-
cally as part of a slab system, unless otherwise shown in design drawings or
specifications.
Details of Reinforcement [Chapter 7]

Sec. 2607. (a) Notations.[7.0]
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-
forcement, inches
dh nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing strand, inches
fv specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi
ld development length, inches. See Section 2612.
(b) Standard Hooks. [7. I] "Standard hook" as used in this code is one of the
following:
I. One-hundred-eighty-degree bend plus 4db extension, but not less than 2112
inches at free end of bar.
2. Ninety-degree bend plus 12db extension at free end of bar.
392
1988 EDITION 2607
3. For stirrup and tic hooks:

(i) No. 5 bar and smaller, 90-degree bend plus 6db extension at free end of
bar, or
(ii) No. 6, No. 7 and No. 8 bar, 90-degree bend, plus I2db extension at free
end of bar, or
(iii) No.8 bar and smaller, 135-degree bend plus 6db extension at free end
of bar.
(iv) For stirrup and tie hooks in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, refer to the
hoop and crosstie provisions of Section 2625 (b).
(c) Minimum Bend Diameters. [7. 2] Diameter of bend measured on the inside
I
of the bar, other than for stirrups and ties in sizes No. 3 through No. 5, shall not be
less than the values in Table No. 26-C.
Inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall be not less than 4db for No.5
bar and smaller. For bars larger than No. 5, diameter of bend shall be in accordance
with Table No. 26-C.
Inside diameter of bends in welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) for
stirrups and ties shall be not less than4db for deformed wire larger than 06 and 2db
for all other wires. Bends with inside diameter of less than 8dh shall be not less
than 4dh from nearest welded intersection.
(d) Bending. [7. 3] All reinforcement shall be bent cold, unless otherwise
permitted by the building official. Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete
shall not be field bent, except as shown on the design drawings or permitted by the
building official.
(e) Surface Conditions of Reinforcement. [7.4] When concrete is placed,
metal reinforcement shall be free from mud, oil or other nonmetallic coatings that
adversely affect bonding capacity.
Metal reinforcement, except prestressing tendons, with rust, mill scale or a
combination of both, shall be considered satisfactory, provided the minimum
dimensions (including height of deformations) and weight of a hand-wire-
brushed test specimen are not less than applicable specification requirements.
Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free of oil, dirt, scale, pitting and
excessive rust. A light oxide is permissible.
(f) Placing Reinforcement. [7 .5] Reinforcement, prestressing tendons and
ducts shall be accurately placed and adequately supported before concrete is
placed, and shall be secured against displacement within tolerances of this
section.
Unless otherwise approved by the building official, reinforcement, prestress-
ing tendons and prestressing ducts shall be placed within the following tolerances:
I. Tolerance for depth d, and minimum concrete cover in flexural members,
walls and compression members shall be as follows:
TOLERANCE ON TOLERANCE ON MINIMUM
d CONCRETE COVER
d,;;S in. ± 3/s in. _3/s in.

d>S in. ± 1/zin. - 1/2 in.
393
except that tolerance for the clear distance to formed soffits shall be minus I/4 inch
and tolerance for cover shall not exceed minus one third the minimum concrete
cover required by the approved plans or specifications.
2. Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement shall
be +: 2 inches except at discontinuous ends of members where tolerance shall be
:':: '12 inch.
3. Welded wire fabric (with wire size not greater than W5 or 05) used in slabs
not exceeding 10 feet in span may be curved from a point near the top of slab over
the support to a point near the bottom of slab at midspan, provided such reinforce-
ment is either continuous over, or securely anchored at, support.
Welding of crossing bars shall be not permitted for assembly of reinforcement.
EXCEPTIONS: /.Reinforcing steel not required by design.
2. When specifically approved by the building official. welding (){crossing bars
for assembly purposes in Seismic Zones Nos. 0, I and 2 may be permitted, provided
that data are submitted to the building official to show that there is no detrimental
effect upon the action of the structural member as a result of welding of the crossing
bars.
(g) Spacing Limits for Reinforcement. [7 .6) I. General. Clear distance
between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than db nor I inch. See also the
second paragraph of Section 2603 (d).
Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper
layers shall be placed directly above bars in the bottom layer with clear distance
between layers not less than I inch.
In spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression members, clear distance
between longitudinal bars shall be not Jess than 1.5d, nor I '12 inches. See also the
second paragraph of Section 2603 (d).
Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply also to the clear distance
between a contact lap splice and adjacent splices or bars.
In walls and slabs other than concrete joist construction, primary flexural
reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the wall or slab
thickness, nor 18 inches.
2. Bundled bars. Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled in contact to act
as a unit shall be limited to 4 bars in one bundle. Bundled bars shall be enclosed
within stirrups or ties. Bars larger than No. I I shall not be bundled in beams.
Individual bars within a bundle terminated within the span of flexural members
shall terminate at different points with at least 40db stagger.
Where spacing limitations and minimum concrete cover are based on bar
diameter db, a unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter
derived from the equivalent total area.
3. Prestressing tendons and ducts. Clear distance between pretensioning
tendons at each end of a member shall be not less than 4db for wire, nor 3db for
strands. See also the second paragraph of Section 2603 (d). Closer vertical
spacing and bundling of strands may be permitted in the middle portion of a span.
Posttensioning ducts may be bundled if it is shown that concrete can be
394
1988 EDITION 2607
satisfactorily placed and if provision is made to prevent the tendons, when

tensioned, from breaking through the duct.
(h) Concrete Protection for Reinforcement. [7. 7] I. Cast-in-place concrete
(nonprestressed). The following minimum concrete cover shall be provided for
reinforcement:
MINIMUM COVER, INCHES
A.Concrete cast against and
permanently exposed to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
No. 6 through No. 18 bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and smaller 11.12
C. Concrete not exposed to weather or in
contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jl/2
No. II bar and smaller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement, ties, stirrups, spirals 1112
Shells, folded plate members:
No. 6 bar and larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and smaller . . . 112
2. Precast concrete (manufactured under plant control conditions). The

following minimum concrete cover shall be provided for reinforcement:
A. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
Wall panels:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar.................. Jl/2
Other members:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar.................. 2
No. 6 through No. II bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jl/2
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and smaller JI/4
B. Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact
with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 and No. 18 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JI/4
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement .................. db but not less than 5/s
and need not exceed JI/2
Ties, stirrups, spirals .................. . 3/8
Shells, folded plate members:
No. 6 bar and larger ................... . 5/8
No. 5 bar, W31 or 031 wire, and smaller .. . 3fs
395
3. Prestressed concrete. A. The following minimum concrete cover shall be

provided for prestressed and nonprcstrcsscd reinforcement, ducts and end fit-
tings, except as provided in Section 2607 (h) 3 B and C:
(i) Concrete cast against and permanently
exposed to earth .......................... . 3
(ii) Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
Wall panels, slabs, joists ................. .
Other members ........................ . 11/2
(iii) Concrete not exposed to weather
or in contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists ...................... .
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement ................. . 11/2
Tics, stirrups, spirals .................. . I
Shells. folded plate members:
No. 5 bars. W31 or D31 wire, and smaller .. .lfs
Other reinforcement .................... . d, but not
less than 3/4
B. For prestressed concrete members exposed to earth. weather or corrosive
environments, and in which permissible tensile stress of Section 261 R (c) 2 B is
exceeded. minimum cover shall be increased 50 percent.
C. For prestressed concrete members manufactured under plant control condi-
tions. minimum concrete cover for nonprcstrcsscd reinforcement shall be as
required in Section 2607 (h) 2.
4. For bundled bars. minimum concrete cover shall be equal to the equivalent
diameter of the bundle, hut need not be greater than 2 inches; except for concrete
cast against and permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall be 3 inches.
5. In corrosive environments or other severe exposure conditions, amount of
concrete protection shall be suitably increased, and denseness and nonporosity of
protecting concrete shall he considered, or other protection shall be provided.
6. Exposed reinforcement. inserts and plates intended for bonding with future
extensions shall be protected from corrosion.
7. When a thickness of cover for fire protection greater than the minimum
concrete cover specified in Section 2607 (h) is required, such greater thickness
shall be used.
( i) Special Reinforcing Details for Columns. 17. RI l. Offset bars. Offset
bent longitudinal bars shall conform to the following:
A. Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with axis of column shall not
exceed l in 6.
B. Portions of bar above and below an offset shall be parallel to axis of column.
C. Horizontal support at offset bends shall be provided by lateral tics, spirals or
parts of the floor construction. Horizontal support provided shall be designed to
396
1988 EDITION 2607
resist one and one-half times the horizontal component of the computed force in
the inclined portion of an offset bar. Lateral tics or spirals, if used. shall be placed
not more than 6 inches from points of bend.
D. Offset bars shall be bent before placement in the forms. See Section 2607 (d).
E. Where a column face is offset 3 inches or greater, longitudinal bars shall not
be offset bent. Separate dowels, lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to
the offset column faces, shall be provided. Lap splices shall conform to Section
2612 (r).
2. Steel cores. Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite compres-
sion members shall be provided by the following:
A. Ends of structural steel cores shall be accurately finished to bear at end
bearing splices, with positive provision for alignment of one core above the other
in concentric contact.
13. At end bearing splices, bearing shall be considered effective to transfer not
more than 50 percent of the total compressive stress in the steel core.
C. Transfer of stress between column base and footing shall be designed in
accordance with Section 2615 (i).
D. Base of structural steel section shall be designed to transfer the total load
from the entire composite member to the footing; or, the base may be designed to
transfer the load from the steel core only, provided ample concrete section is
available for transfer of the portion of the total load carried by the reinforced
concrete section to the footing by compression in the concrete and by reinforce-
ment.
Ul Connections. ]7.9] At connections of principal framing clements (such as
beams and columns). enclosure shall be provided for splices of continuing
reinforcement and for end anchorage of reinforcement terminating in such con-
nections.
Enclosure at connections may consist of external concrete or internal closed
tics, spirals or stirrups.
(k) Lateral Reinforcement for Compression Members. ]7.10] I. General.
Lateral reinforcement for compression members shall conform to the provisions
of Subsections 2607 (k) 2 and 2607 (k) 3 and, where shear or torsion reinforce-
ment is required, shall also conform to provisions of Section 2611.
Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite compression members shall
conform to Section 2610 (o). Lateral reinforcement requirements for prestressing
tendons shall conform to Section 2618 (I).
Lateral reinforcement requirements of Sections 2607 (k), 2610 (o) and 2618 (I)
may be waived where tests and structural analysis show adequate strength and
feasibility of construction.
2. Spirals. Spiral reinforcement for compression members shall conform to
Section 2610 Ul 3 and to the following:
A. Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous bar or wire of such size and
so assembled to permit handling and placing without distortion from designed
dimensions.
397
B. For cast-in-place construction, size of spirals shall be not less than .lis-inch-
diameter.
C. Clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed 3 inches nor be less than I
jnch. See also Section 2603 (d).
D. Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be provided by one and one-half
extra turns of spiral bar or wire at each end of a spiral unit.
E. Splices in spiral reinforcement shall be lap splices of 48dh, but not less than
12 inches or welded.
E Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab in any story to level of lowest
horizontal reinforcement in members supported above.
G. Where beams or brackets do not frame into all sides of a column, tics shall
extend above termination of spiral to bottom of slab or drop panel.
H. In columns with capitals, spirals shall extend to a level at which the diameter
or width of capital is two times that of the column.
I. Spirals shall be held firmly in place and true to line by vertical spacers.
1. For spiral bar or wire smaller than Sis-inch-diameter, a minimum of two
spacers shall be used for spirals less than 20 inches in diameter, three spacers for
spirals 20 to 30 inches in diameter and four spacers for spirals greater than 30
inches in diameter.
K. For spiral bar or wire Sis-inch-diameter or larger, a minimum of three
spacers shall be used for spirals 24 inches or less in diameter, and four spacers for
spirals greater than 24 inches in diameter.
3. Ties. Tie reinforcement for compression members shall conform to the
following:
A. All non prestressed bars shall be enclosed by lateral ties, at least No.3 in size
for longitudinal bars No. 10 or smaller, and at least No. 4 in size for No. II, No.
14, No. 18 and bundled longitudinal bars. Deformed wire or welded wire fabric of
equivalent area may be used.
B. In Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and 1, vertical spacing of ties shall not exceed 16
longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar or wire diameters, or least dimension l~f'the
compression member. in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4, lateral ties shall be
placed at top and bottom of the column for a distance of one sixth of the clear
column height, or the maximum column dimension, whichever is greater, hut not
less than 18 inches. The tie spacing shall be not greater than 8 bar diameters, 24
tie diameter.\· or one half the least column dimension. Ties for the remaining
column height may he spaced as required in Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and 1.
EXCEPTION: In regions of columns confined by special transverse reinjim·e-
ment conforming to the provisions of Section 2625 (e) 4, supplementary crossties
engaging the hoops only may be considered as meeting this requirement.
C. Ties shall be arranged such that every corner and alternate longitudinal bar
shall have lateral support provided by the corner of a tie with an included angle of
not more than 135 degrees and a bar shall be not farther than 6 inches clear on each
side along the tic from such a laterally supported bar. Where longitudinal bars arc
398
1988 EDITION 2607
located around the perimeter of a circle, a complete circular tie may be used.
D. In Seismic Zones Nos. 0, 1 and2, column lateral ties shall be as specified in if
Section 2607 (b) 3 (iii). In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, lateral ties shall have a ~
135-degree minimum turn plus an extension of at least six bar diameters, but not
less than 4 inches at the free end.
Additional ties which engage at least four vertical column bars shall he
provided around anchor holts which are set in the top of a column for buildings
located in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4. Such ties shall he within 5 inches of the
top of the column and shall consist of two No.4 or three No.3 bars.
E. Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie spacing above the top
of footing or slab in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein to not more
than half a tie spacing below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in members
supported above.
F. Where beams or brackets frame from four directions into a column, tics may
be terminated not more than 3 inches below lowest reinforcement in shallowest of
such beams or brackets.
(I) Lateral Reinforcement for Flexural Members. [7. II] Compression rein-
forcement in beams shall be enclosed by ties or stirrups satisfying the size and
spacing limitations in Section 2607 (k) 3 or by welded wire fabric of equivalent
area. Such ties or stirrups shall be provided throughout the distance where
compression reinforcement is required.
Lateral reinforcement for flexural framing members subject to stress reversals
or to torsion at supports shall consist of closed ties, closed stirrups, or spirals
extending around the flexural reinforcement.
Closed ties or stirrups may be formed in one piece by overlapping standard
stirrup or tic end hooks around a longitudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces
lap spliced with a Class C splice (lap of I. 7/d), or anchored in accordance with
Section 2612 (o).
(m) Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement. [7 .12] I. In structural

slabs. Reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses normal to flexural
reinforcement shall be provided in structural slabs where the flexural reinforce-
ment extends in one direction only. Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with either Subsection 2 or 3 below.
2. Deformed reinforcement. Deformed reinforcement conforming to Sec-
tion 2603 (f) 2 used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be pro-
vided in accordance with the following:
A. Area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall provide at least the
following ratios of reinforcement area to gross concrete area, but not less
than 0.0014:
(i) Slabs where Grade 40 or 50 deformed bars arc used 0.0020
(ii) Slabs where Grade 60 deformed bars or welded wire
fabric (smooth or deformed) are used 0.0018
399
(iii) Slabs where reinforcement with yield stress exceed-

ing 60,000 psi measured at a yield strain of 0.35
percent is used 0. 00 18 x 60,000
.t;.
B. Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart
than five times the slab thickness, nor 18 inches.
C. At all sections where required, reinforcement for shrinkage and tempera-
ture stresses shall develop the specified yield strength !y in tension in
accordance with Section 2612 (b) or 2612 (p).
3. Prestressing tendons. Prestressing tendons conforming to Section 2603 (t)
4 used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be proportioned to
provide a minimum average compressive stress of 100 psi on gross concrete area
using effective prestress, after losses, in accordance with Section 2618 (g).
Spacing of prestressed tendons used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
shall not exceed 6 feet. When the spacing of prestressed tendons used for shrink-
age and temperature reinforcement exceeds 54 inches, additional bonded shrink-
age and temperature reinforcement conforming with Section 2607 (m) 2 shall be
provided between the tendons at slab edges extending from the slab edge for a
distance equal to the tendon spacing.
Analysis and Design [Chapter 8]

A, area of non prestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A's = area of compression reinforcement, square inches.
b width of compression face of member, inches.
ment, inches.
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. See Section 2608 (t).
E, modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, psi. See Section 2608 (t).
f'c specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
fv specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi.
/
11
clear span for positive moment or shear and average of adjacent clear
spans for negative moment.
Vc nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
wu factored load per unit length of beam or per unit area of slab.
we unit weight of concrete, pounds per cubic foot.
{3 1 factor defined in Section 2610 (c) 7.
p ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
= AJbd.
p' ratio of non prestressed compression reinforcement.
= A'_,.!bd.
400
1988 EDITION 2608
Pb = reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions. See Section

2610(d)2.
¢> = strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Design Methods. 18. I] In design of reinforced concrete structures, mem-
bers shall be proportioned for adequate strength in accordance with provisions of
this code, using load factors and strength reduction factors ¢> specified in Section
2609.
Alternatively, nonprcstressed reinforced concrete members may be designed
using service loads and permissible service load stresses in accordance with
provisions of Section 2626, Alternate Design Method.
(c) Loading. [8. 21 Design provisions of this code are based on the assumption
that structures shall be designed to resist all applicable loads.
Service loads shall be in accordance with Chapter 23 with appropriate live load
reductions as permitted therein.
In design for wind and earthquake loads, integral structural parts shall be
designed to resist the total lateral loads.
Consideration shall be given to effects of forces due to prestressing, crane
loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage, temperature changes, creep and unequal
settlement of supports.
(d) Methods of Analysis. 18. 3] All members of frames or continuous construc-
tion shall be designed for the maximum effects of factored loads as determined by
the theory of clastic analysis, except as modified by this section. Simplifying
assumptions of Section 2608 (g) through Section 2608 (j) may be used.
Except for prestressed concrete, approximate methods of frame analysis may
be used for buildings of usual types of construction, spans and story heights.
In lieu of a more accurate method of frame analysis, the following approximate
moments and shears may be used in design of continuous beams and one-way
slabs (slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction). provided:
I. There arc two or more spans,
2. Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans not
greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent,
3. Loads are uniformly distributed, and
4. Unit live load does not exceed three times unit dead load.
Positive moment:
End spans
Discontinuous end unrestrained ........................ . wJn 2/II
Discontinuous end integral with support .................. . w)n 2114
Interior spans ........................................ wJn2!16
Negative moment at exterior face of first interior support
Two spans .............................................. w Jn 219
More than two spans .................................... W 11 l,.Z11 0
401
Negative moment at other faces of interior supports .............. w ) 11 2/ I I

Negative moment at face of all supports for:
Slabs with spans not exceeding 10 feet, and beams where
ratio of sum of column stiffnesses to beam stiffness
exceeds eight at each end of the span ........................ w,) 11 2/ 12
Negative moment at interior face of exterior support for
members built integrally with supports:
Where support is a spandrel beam ......................... . w,)11 2/24
Where support is a column ................................ w ) 11 2/ I 6
Shear in end members at face of first interior support ........... I . 15 w _t,,/2
Shear at face of all other supports .............................. w) 11 !2
(c) Redistribution of Negative Moments in Continuous Nonprestressed
Flexural Members. [8.4] Except where approximate values for moments are
used, negative moments calculated by clastic theory at supports of continuous
flexural members for any assumed loading arrangement may each be increased or
decreased by not more than
p- p' )
20 (I - ---
Pb
percent
The modified negative moments shall be used for calculating moments at

sections within the spans.
Redistribution of negative moments shall be made only when the section, at
which moment is reduced, is so designed that por p-p' is not greater than 0.50 ph,
where
0.85 f3d', 87,000 ................ (8-1)

fv 87,000 + fv
For criteria on moment redistribution for prestressed concrete members, see

Section 2618.
(f) Modulus of Elasticity. [8.5] Modulus of elasticity E, for concrete may be
taken as w 1 5,33VJ':. (in psi) for values of we between 90 and !55 EQUnds per cubic
foot. For normal-weight concrete, E, may be taken as 57 ,OOOV.f'c
Modulus of elasticity E, for nonprestressed reinforcement may be taken as
29,000,000 psi. Modulus of elasticity Es for prestressing tendons shall be deter-
mined by tests or supplied by the manufacturer.
(g) Stiffness. [8.6] Any reasonable assumptions may be adopted for computing
relative flexural and torsional stiffnesses of columns, walls, floors and roof
systems. Assumptions shall be consistent throughout analysis.
Effect of haunches shall be considered both in determining moments and in
design of members.
402
1988 EDITION 2608
(h) Span Length. [8.7] Span length of members not built integrally with
supports shall be considered the clear span plus depth of member but need not
exceed distance between centers of supports.
In analysis of frames or continuous construction for determination of moments,
'pan length shall be taken as the distance center-to-center of supports. For beams
_hllib jntegrally with supports, moments at faces of support may be used for
design.
Solid or ribbed slabs built integrally with supports, with clear spans not more
than I0 feet, may be analyzed as continuous slabs on knife edge supports with
spans equal to the clear spans of the slab and width of beams otherwise neglected.
(i) Columns. [8.8] Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces from
factored loads on all floors or roof and the maximum moment from factored loads
on a single adjacent span of the floor or roof under consideration. Loading
condition giving the maximum ratio of moment to axial load shall also be
considered.
In frames or continuous construction, consideration shall be given to the effect
of unbalanced floor or roof loads on both exterior and interior columns and of
eccentric loading due to other causes.
In computing moments in columns due to gravity loading, far ends of columns
built integrally with the structure may be considered fixed.
Resistance to moments at any floor or roof level shall be provided by distribut-
ing the moment between columns immediately above and below the given floor in
proportion to the relative column stiffnesses and conditions of restraint.
(j) Arrangement of Live Load. [8.9] Live load may be considered to be
applied only to the floor or roof under consideration, and far ends of columns built
integrally with the structure may be considered fixed.
Arrangement of live load may be limited to combinations of:
I. Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored live load on two adjacent
spans, and
2. Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored live load on alternate
spans.
(k) T-beam Construction. [8. I0] I. In T-beam construction, the flange and
web shall be built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
2. Width of slab effective as aT-beam flange shall not exceed one fourth the
span length of the beam, and the effective overhanging slab width on each side of
the web shall not exceed:
A. Eight times the slab thickness, nor
B. One half the clear distance to the next web.
3. For beams with a slab on one side only, the effective overhanging flange
width shall not exceed:
A. One twelfth the span length of the beam,
B. Six times the slab thickness, nor
C. One half the clear distance to the next web.
403
4. Isolated beams, in which the l~shape is used to provide a flange for

additional compression area, shall have a flange thickness not less than one half
the width of web and an effective flange width not more than four times the width
of web.
5. Where primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that is considered as aT-
bcam flange (excluding joist construction) is parallel to the beam, reinforcement
perpendicular to the beam shall be provided in the top of the slab in accordance
with the following:
A. Transverse reinforcement shall be designed to carry the factored load on the
overhanging slab width assumed to act as a cantilever. For isolated beams, the full
width of overhanging flange shall be considered. For other T-bcams, only the
effective overhanging slab width need he considered.
B. Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart than five times
the slab thickness nor 18 inches.
(I) Joist Construction. [8.11 [ I. Joist construction consists of a monolithic

combination of regularly spaced ribs and a top slab arranged to span in one
direction or two orthogonal directions.
Ribs shall be not less than 4 inches in width and shall have a depth of not more
than three and one-half times the minimum width of rib. Clear spacing between
ribs shall not exceed 30 inches.
Joist construction not meeting the limitations of the preceding two paragraphs
shall he designed as slabs and beams.
2. When permanent burned clay or concrete tile fillers of material having a
unit compressive strength at least equal to that of the specified strength of concrete
in the joists arc used:
A. Vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs may be included in strength
computations for shear and negative moment. Other portions of fillers shall not be
included in strength computations.
B. Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall he not less than one twelfth the
clear distance between ribs nor less than one and one-half inches.
C. In one-way joists, reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be provided in the
slab as required by Section 2607 (m).
3. When removable forms or fillers not complying with Section 2608 (I) 2 arc
used.
A. Slab thickness shall not be less than one twelfth the clear distance between
ribs, nor less than 2 inches.
13. Reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be provided in the slab as required for
flexure. considering load concentrations, if any, but not less than required by
Section 2607 (m).
4. Where conduits or pipes as permitted by Section 2603 (c) arc embedded
within the slab, slab thickness shall be at least I inch greater than the total overall
depth of the conduits or pipes at any point. Conduits or pipes shall not impair
significantly the strength ofthc construction.
404
1988 EDITION 2608-2609
5. Shear strength provided by concrete Vc for the ribs may be taken as 10

percent greater than provided in Section 2611. Shear strength may be increased by
usc of shear reinforcement or by widening the ends of the ribs.
(m) Separate Floor Finish. 18.121 A floor finish shall not be included as part
of a structural member unless placed monolithically with the floor slab or de-
signed in accordance with requirements of Section 2617. All concrete floor
finishes may he considered as part of required cover or total thickness for
nonstructural considerations.
Strength and Serviceability Requirements [Chapter 9]

Sec. 2609. (a) Notations. 19.01
A~ gross area of section, square inches.
A, area of nonprestrcsscd tension reinforcement, square inches.
A'., area of compression reinforcement, square inches.
d' distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression
reinforcement, inches.
distance from extreme tension fiber to centroid of tension reinforce-
ment, inches.
[) dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
E load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces.
~~·c modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. Sec Section 2608 (f).
f'c specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
vT: square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
t;, average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
t; modulus of rupture of concrete, psi.
t; specified yield strength of nonprcstrcsscd reinforcement, psi.
F loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with well-defined densities
and controllable maximum heights, or related internal moments and
forces.
h overall thickness of member, inches.
H loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in soil, or other materi-
als, or related internal moments and forces.
moment of inertia of cracked section transformed to concrete.
effective moment of inertia for computation of deflection.
moment of inertia of gross concrete section about ccntroidal axis.
neglecting reinforcement.
span length of beam or one-way slab, as defined in Section 2608 (h);
clear projection of cantilever. inches.
1,. length of clear span in long direction of two-way construction, mea-
sured face-to-face of supports in slabs without beams and face-to-face
of beams or other supports in other cases.
405
L live loads, or related internal moments and forces.

Ma maximum moment in member at stage deflection is computed.
Mer cracking moment. See Formula (9-8).
P 1, = nominal axial load strength at balanced strain conditions. See Section
2610 (d) 2.
Pn = nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
Pu = factored axial load at given eccentricity ~¢Pw
T = time dependent factor for sustained load. See Section 2609 (f) 2 E.
U required strength to resist factored loads or related internal moments
and forces.
we = weight of concrete, pounds per cubic foot.
W = wind load, or related internal moments and forces.
y, distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforce-
ment, to extreme fiber in tension.
a ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width
of slab bounded laterally by center line of adjacent panel (if any) on each
side of beam. See Section 2613.
am average value of a for all beams on edges of a panel.
f3 ratio of clear spans in long-to-short direction of two-way slabs.
{3, ratio of length of continuous edges to total perimeter of a slab panel.
¢ strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
A. multiplier for additional long-time deflection as defined in Section
2609 (f) 2 E.
p' = reinforcement ratio for nonprestressed compression reinforcement,
A'/bd.
(b) General. [9. I] Structures and structural members shall be designed to have
design strengths at all sections at least equal to the required strengths calculated
for the factored loads and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in this
code.
Members also shall meet all other requirements of this code to ensure adequate
performance at service load levels.
(c) Required Strength. [9. 2] I . Required strength U to resist dead load D and
live load L shall be at least equal to
U = 1.4D + 1.7L .................... (9-1)
2. If resistance to structural effects of a specified wind load Ware included in

design, the following combinations of D, L and W shall be investigated to
determine the greatest required strength U
U = 0.75 (1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7W) .............. (9-2)
406
1988 EDITION 2609
where load combinations shall include both full value and zero value of L to
determine the more severe condition, and
U = 0.9D + 1.3W .................... (9-3)
but for any combination of D. Land W, required strength U shall be not less than
Formula (9-1 ).
3. If resistance to specified earthquake loads or forces E arc included in
design. load combinations of Section 2609 (c) 2 shall apply, except that I . IE shall
be substituted for W. Load factors contained in Sections 2625 and 2627 shall be
used where applicable.
4. If resistance to earth pressure His included in design, required strength U
shall be at least equal to
U = 1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7H ................. (9-4)

except that where D or L reduces the effect of H, 0.9D shall be substituted for
1.4D and zero value of L shall be used to determine the greatest required strength
U. For any combination of D, Land H, required strength U shall be not less than
Formula (9-1).
5. If resistance to loadings due to weight and pressure of fluids with well-
defined densities and controllable maximum heights F is included in design, such
loading shall have a load factor of I .4 and be added to all loading combinations
that include live load.
6. If resistance to impact effects is taken into account in design, such effects
shall be included with live load L.
7. Where structural effects T of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage or
temperature change may be significant in design, required strength U shall be at
least equal to
U = 0.75 (l.4D + l.4T + 1.7L) .............. (9-5)

but required strength U shall be not less than
U = 1.4 (D + T) . .................... (9-6)
Estimations of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage or temperature change

shall be based on a realistic assessment of such effects occurring in service.
(d) Design Strength. [9.3] Design strength provided by a member or cross

section in terms of load, moment, shear or stress shall be taken as the nominal
strength calculated in accordance with requirements and assumptions of this code,
multiplied by a strength reduction factor cf>.
Strength reduction factor cf; shall be as follows:
I. Flexure, without axial load .................................. 0.90
407
2. Axial load and axial load with flexure. (For axial load with flexure, both
axial load and moment nominal strength shall be multiplied by appropriate
single value of¢.)
Axial tension and axial tension with flexure ..................... 0. 90
Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to
Section 2610 (j) 3 ......................................... 0.75
Other reinforced members .................................. 0. 70
except that for low values of axial load, 4> may be increased in accordance with the
following:
For members in which fv does not exceed 60,000 psi, with symmetric
reinforcement, and with (h- d' - d,)lh not less than 0. 70, 4> may be increased
linearly to 0.90 as 4>Pn decreases from O.IOf'c A!.' to zero.
For other reinforced members, 4> may be increased linearly to 0.90 as ¢Pn
decreases from O.IQf'c A 8 or ¢Pb, whichever is smaller, to zero.
3. Shear and torsion {See also Section 2625 (c) 3 A for shear walls
in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4] .......... ..................... 0.85
4. Bearing on concrete [See also Section 2618 (n)] ................. 0.70
5. Flexure in plain concrete .................................... 0.65
Development lengths specified in Section 2612 do not require a 4> factor.
(e) Design Strength for Reinforcement. [9 .4] Designs shall not be based on a
yield strength of reinforcement.!;. in excess of 80.000 psi, except for prestressing
tendons. ·
(f) Control of Deflections. [9.5] I. General. Reinforced concrete members

subject to flexure shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections
or any deformations that may adversely affect strength or serviceability of a
structure at service loads. (See Section 2307 for deflection limits.)
2. One-way construction (nonprestressed). A. Minimum thickness stipu-
lated in Table No. 26-D shall apply for one-way construction not supporting or
attached to partitions or other construction likely to be damaged by large deflec-
tions, unless computation of deflection indicates a lesser thickness may be used
without adverse effects.
B. Where deflections are to be computed, deflections that occur immediately
on application of load shall be computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic
deflections, considering effects of cracking and reinforcement on member stiff-
ness.
C. Unless stiffness values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis,
immediate deflection shall be computed with the modulus of elasticity Ec for
concrete as specified in Section 2608 (f) (normal weight or lightweight concrete)
and with the effective moment of inertia as follows, but not greater than l~.
408
1988 EDITION 2609
WHERE:
Mer J,f~ ........ ................. (9-8)

y,
and for normal-weight concrete
fr 7 .5v'jz. . ....................... (9-9)
When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, one of the following modifications

shall apply:
(i) When fct is specified and concrete is proportioned in accordance with
Section 2604 (c),fr shall be modified EY. substitutingfj6. 7 for Vf':., but
the value offj6. 7 shall not exceed Vf'c-
(ii) When fct is not specified, fr shall be multiplied by 0.75 for "all-
lightweight" concrete, and 0.85 for "sand-lightweight" concrete. Linear
interpolation may be used when partial sand replacement is used.
D. For continuous members, effective moment of inertia may be taken as the
average of values obtained from Formula (9-7) for the critical positive and
negative moment sections. For prismatic members, effective moment of inertia
may be taken as the value obtained from Formula (9-7) at midspan for simple and
continuous spans, and at support for cantilevers.
E. Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, additional
longtime deflection resulting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members
(normal-weight or lightweight concrete) shall be determined by multiplying the
immediate deflection caused by the sustained load considered, by the factor
T
A = __
+.:...5_0_p,-' ....................... (9-10)
where p' shall be the value at midspan for simple and continuous spans, and at
support for cantilevers. Time-dependent factor T for sustained loads may be taken
equal to
5 years or more 2. 0
12 months I .4
6mom~ 1.2
3 months 1.0
F. Deflection computed in accordance with this section shall not exceed limits
stipulated in Section 2307.
3. 1Wo-way construction (nonprestressed). Minimum thickness of slabs of
other two-way construction designed in accordance with provisions of Section
2613 and having a ratio of long to short span not exceeding 2 shall be governed by
Formulas (9-11), (9-12) and (9-13) and the other provisions of this section.
409
h = _ _ _ ___!!ln_:,(8:....:0...:._0_+_0:....:·.::...00::_::5J::'..l:.:. _)- - - -
36,000 + 5000{3 [am - 0.5 (I - {3)( I + t)] .........(9 -ll)
but not less than

In (800 + 0.005!,.)
h = ............ (9-12)
36,000 + 5000{3)1 + {3,)
and need not be more than
/n (800 + 0.005j~.)
h ................ (9-13)
36,000
However, the thickness shall be not less than the following values:
For slabs without beams or drop panels ...................... 5 inches
For slabs without beams, but with drop
panels conforming to the following paragraph ............. .4 inches
For slabs with beams on all four edges
with a value of am
at least equal to 2.0 .................. .31/z inches
For slabs without beams, but with drop panels extending in each direction from
center line of support, a distance not less than one sixth the span length in that
direction measured center-to-center of supports, and a projection below the slab at
least one fourth the slab thickness beyond the drop, thickness required by Formula
(9-11 ). (9-12) or (9-13) may be reduced by 10 percent.
At discontinuous edges, an edge beam shall be provided with a stiffness ratio a
not less than 0.80; or the minimum thickness required by Formula (9-11 ), (9-12),
(9-13) or the previous paragraph, shall be increased by at least I 0 percent in the
panel with a discontinuous edge.
Slab thickness less than the minimum thickness required by this section may be
used if shown by computation that deflection will not adversely affect strength or
serviceability of a structure at service loads. Deflections shall be computed
taking into account size and shape of panel, conditions of support, and nature of
restraints at panel edges. For deflection computations, modulus of elasticity Ec
for concrete shall be as specified in Section 2608 (f). Effective moment of inertia
shall be that given by Formula (9-7); other values may be used if computed
deflection is in reasonable agreement with results of comprehensive tests. Addi-
tionallongtime deflection shall be computed in accordance with Section 2609 (f)
2F.
4. Prestressed concrete construction. For flexural members designed in
accordance with provisions of Section 2618, immediate deflection shall be com-
puted by usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, and the moment of
inertia of the gross concrete section may be used for uncracked sections.
Additional long-time deflection of prestressed concrete members shall be
410
1988 EDITION 2609-2610
computed taking into account stresses in concrete and steel under sustained load
and including effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete and relaxation of steel.
Deflection shall not exceed limits stipulated in Section2307.
5. Composite construction. A. Shored construction. If composite flexural
members arc supported during construction so that, after removal of temporary
supports, dead load is resisted by the full composite section, the composite
member may be considered equivalent to a monolithically cast member for
computation of deflection. For non prestressed members, the portion of the mem-
ber in compression shall determine whether values in Table No. 26-D for normal-
weight or lightweight concrete shall apply. If deflection is computed, account
should be taken of curvatures resulting from differential shrinkage of precast and
cast-in-place components, and of axial creep effects in a prestressed concrete
member.
Deflection shall not exceed limits stipulated in Section2307.
B. Unshored construction. If the thickness of a non prestressed precast flex-
ural member meets the requirements of Table No. 26-D, deflection need not be
computed. If the thickness of a nonprestressed composite member meets the
requirements of Table No. 26-D, deflection occurring after the member becomes
composite need not be computed, but the long-time deflection of the precast
member should be investigated for magnitude and duration of load prior to
beginning of effective composite action.
Deflection shall not exceed limits stipulated in Section 2307.
Flexure and Axial Loads [Chapter 10]
Sec. 2610. (a) Notations. [I 0.0]
a - depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Section 2610 (c)
7.
A effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension rein-
forcement and having the same centroid as that reinforcement, divided by
the number of bars or wires, square inches. When the flexural reinforce-
ment consists of different bar or wire sizes, the number of bars or wires
shall be computed as the total area of reinforcement divided by the area of
the largest bar or wire used.
Ac area of core of spirally reinforced compression member measured to
outside diameter of spiral, square inches.
A, area of nonprestrcssed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A,1 total area of longitudinal reinforcement (bars or steel shapes), square
inches.
A 1 = area of structural steel shape, pipe or tubing in a composite section,
square inches.
A1 loaded area.
the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or
tapered wedge contained wholly within the support and having for its
411
:::: upper base the loaded area, and having side slopes of I vertical to 2
i;~:
:::: horizontal.
h width of compression face of member, inches.
c -- distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis, inches.
clll a factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform mo-
ment diagram.
ment. inches.
!(. thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme tension fiber to
center of bar or wire located closest thereto, inches.
E,. modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. See Section 2608 (f).
[:·., modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, psi. Sec Section 2608 (f).
El flexural stiffness of compression member. See Formula ( 10-9).
I'<'
•
specified compressive strength of concrete, psi .
./~ calculated stress in reinforcement at service loads, ksi .
J; specified yield strength ofnonprestrcsscd reinforcement, psi.
l~ moment of inertia of gross concrete section about ccntroidal axis, ne-
glecting reinforcement.
l,,. moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member
cross section.
I, moment of inertia of structural steel shape, pipe or tubing about ccntroi-
dal axis of composite member cross section.
k effective length factor for compression members.
unsupported length of compression member.
M,. '" factored moment to be used for design of compression member.
Ml value of' smaller factored end momellt 011 compression member calcu-
lated hy conventional elasticframe analysis, positive (l member is hen/ in
sin!(le curvature. ne!(ative il hent in double curvature.
Mlh value of smaller factored end moment on a braced compression member,
calculated by conventional clastic frame analysis; positive if member is
bent in single curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
M2 valui' of' larger j{Jc/ored end moment on compression member calculated
hv conventional elasticframe analysis. always positive.
M21> value of larger factored end moment on compression members due to
loads which result in no appreciable sidcsway, calculated by conventional
clastic frame analysis.
M2, value of larger factored end moment on compression member due to
loads which result in appreciable sidcsway, calculated by conventional
clastic frame analysis.
P1, nominal axial load strength at balanced strain conditions. Sec Section
2610 (d) 2.
412
1988 EDITION 2610
Pc critical load. Sec Formula ( 10-9).

P 11 nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
P" nominal axial load strength at zero eccentricity.
P11 factored axial load at given eccentricity ~</>P11 •
r radius of gyration of cross section of a compression member.
z quantity limiting distribution of flexural reinforcement. Sec Section
2610 (g).
{3 1 factor defined in Section 26!0 (c).
{3d ratio of maximum factored dead load moment to maximum factored total
load moment, always positive.
81> moment magnification factor for frames braced against sidcsway to
reflect effects of member curvature between ends of compression mem-
bers.
8,. moment magnification factor for frames not braced against sides way to
reflect lateral drift resulting from lateral and gravity loads.
p ratio of nonprcstrcsscd tension reinforcement.
AJhd.
Ph reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions. Sec Section
2610 (d) 2.
p, ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core (out-to-out
of spirals) of a spirally reinforced compression member.
4> = strength reduction factor. Sec Section 2609 (d).
(b) Scope. [ l 0.1] Provisions of Section 2610 shall apply for design of members
subject to flexure or axial loads or to combined flexure and axial loads.
(c) Design Assumptions. [ 10.2] l. Strength design of members for flexure

and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in Section 2610 (c) 2 through
7, and on satisfaction of applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of
strains.
2. Strain in reinforcement and concrete shall be assumed directly proportional
to the distance from the neutral axis, except, for deep flexural members with
overall depth to clear span ratios greater than two fifths for continuous spans and
four fifths for simple spans, a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be considered.
Sec Section 2610 (g).
3. Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fiber shall he
assumed equal to 0.003.
4. Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength f. for grade of rein-
forcement used shall he taken as E, times steel strain. For strains greater than that
corresponding to .1;.. stress in reinforcement shall be considered independent of
strain and equal to/;.
5. Tensile strength of concrete shall he neglected in flexural calculations of
reinforced concrete, except when meeting requirements of Section 2618 (c l.
413
6. Relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete

strain may be assumed to be rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape
that results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of
comprehensive tests.
7. Requirements of Section 2610 (c) 6 may be considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution defined by the following:
A. Concrete stress of 0.85f'c shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight
line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = {3 1c from the fiber of
maximum compressive strain.
B. Distance c from fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be
measured in a direction perpendicular to the axis.
C. Factor {3 1 shall be taken as 0. 85 for concrete strengths.f'c up to and including
4000 psi. For strengths above 4000 psi, {3 1 shall be reduced continuously at a rate
of0.05 for each 1000 psi of strength in excess of 4000 psi, but {3 1shall not be taken
less than 0.65.
(d) General Principles and Requirements. I. Design of cross section subject
to flexure or axial loads or to combined flexure and axial loads shall be based on
stress and strain compatibility using assumptions in Section 2610 (c).
2. Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross section when tension reinforce-
ment reaches the strain corresponding to its specified yield strength .1; just as
concrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate strain of0.003.
3. For flexural members, and for members subject to combined flexure and
compressive axial load when the design axial load strength c/JPn is less than the
smaller of O.!Of;. A~ or c/JP,, the ratio of reinforcement p provided shall not
exceed 0. 75 of the ratio Ph that would produce balanced strain conditions for the
section under flexure without axial load. For members with compression rein-
forcement, the portion of Ph equalized by compression reinforcement need not be
reduced by the 0. 75 factor.
4. Compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tension rein-
forcement may be used to increase the strength of flexural members.
5. Design axial load strength c/JPn of compression members shall not be taken
greater than the following:
A. For nonprestresscd members with spiral reinforcement conforming to Sec-
tion 2607 (k) 2 or composite members conforming to Section 2610 (o):
B. For nonprestrcsscd members with tie reinforcement conforming to Section

2607 (k) 3:
c/JPn(ma\) = 0.80c/Ji0.85f"c (Ax~A,1 ) + .f;A,1] .•.•.••••.• (10-2)
C. For prestressed members, design axial load strength cjJP n shall not be taken
414
1988 EDITION 2610
greater than 0.85 (for members with spiral reinforcement) or 0.80 (for members
with tie reinforcement) of the design axial load strength at zero eccentricity cpP 0 •
6. Members subject to compressive axial load shall be designed for the maxi-
mum moment that can accompany the axial load. The factored axial load P at
given eccentricity shall not exceed that given in Section 2610 (d) 5. The maxim~m
factored moment M u shall be magnified for slenderness effects in accordance with
Section 2610 (k).
(e) Distance Between Lateral Supports of Flexural Members. [ 10.4] Spac-
ing of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width b of
compression flange or face.
Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining
spacing of lateral supports.
(f) Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members. [ 10.5] I. At any section
of a flexural member, except as provided in Sections 2610 (f) 2 and 2610 (f) 3
where positive reinforcement is required by analysis, the ratio p provided shall be
not less than that given by:
p min. 200 ....................... (10-3)

fv
In T-beams and joists where the web is in tension, the ratio p shall be computed
for this purpose using width of web.
2. Alternatively, area of reinforcement provided at every section, positive or
negative, shall be at least one-third greater than that required by analysis.
3. For structural slabs of uniform thickness, minimum area and maximum
spacing of reinforcement in the direction of the span shall be as required for
shrinkage and temperature according to Section 2607 (m).
(g) Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in Beams and One-way Slabs.
[ 10.6[ I. This section prescribes rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement
to control flexural cracking in beams and in one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to
resist flexural stresses in only one direction).
2. Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way slabs shall be as required
by Section 2613 (e).
3. Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within maximum
flexural tension zones of a member cross section as required by Section
2610 (g) 4.
4. When design yield strength];. for tension reinforcement exceeds 40,000 psi,
cross sections of maximum positive and negative moment shall be so propor-
tioned that the quantity z given by
3
z = f, YJ;A ....................... (I 0-4)
does not exceed 175 kips per inch for interior exposure and 145 kips per inch for
exterior exposure. Calculated stress in reinforcement at service load .f, (kips per
square inch) shall be computed as the moment divided by the product of steel area
415
and internal moment arm. In lieu of such computations, J, may be taken as 60

percent of specified yield strengthfv.
5. Provisions of Section 2610 (g) 4 may not be sufficient for structures subject
to very aggressive exposure or designed to be watertight. For such structures,
special investigations and precautions are required.
6. Where flanges of T-bcam construction arc in tension, part of the flexural
tension reinforcement shall be distributed over an effective flange width as
defined in Section 2608 (k), or a width equal to one tenth the span, whichever is
smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds one tenth the span, some longitudi-
nal reinforcement shall be provided in the outer portions of the flange.
7. If the depth of the web exceeds 3 feet longitudinal reinforcement having a
total area equal to at least I 0 percent of the area of the flexural tension, reinforce-
ment shall be placed ncar the side faces of the web and distributed in the zone of
flexural tension with a spacing not more than the web width nor 12 inches. Such
reinforcement may be included in strength computations only if a strain compati-
bility analysis is made to determine stresses in the individual bars or wires.
(h) Deep Flexural Members. [ 10.7[ I. Flexural members with overall depth
to clear span ratios greater than two fifths for continuous spans, or four fifths for
simple spans. shall be designed as deep flexural members, taking into account
nonlinear distribution of strain and lateral buckling.
2. Design of deep flexural members for shear effects shall be in accordance
with Section 2611 (i).
3. Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall conform to Section 2610 (f).
4. Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the side faces of deep
flexural members shall be the greater of the requirements of Section 2611 (i) 7 and
8 or Section 2614 (d).
(i) Design Dimensions for Compression Members. [ 10.8] I. Isolated com-
pression member with multiple spirals. Outer limits of the effective cross
section of a compression member with two or more interlocking spirals shall be
taken at a distance outside the extreme limits of the spirals equal to the minimum
concrete cover required by Section 2607 (h).
2. Compression member built monolithically with wall. Outer limits of the
effective cross section of a spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression
member built monolithically with a concrete wall or pier shall be taken not greater
than 1112 inches outside the spiral or tie reinforcement.
:l. Equivalent circular compression member. In lieu of using full gross area
for design, a compression member with a square, octagonal or other shaped cross
section may be considered as a circular section with a diameter equal to the least
lateral dimension of the actual shape. Cross area considered, required percentage
of reinforcement. and design strength shall be based on that circular section.
4. Limits of section. For a compression member with a larger cross section
than required by considerations of loading, a reduced effective area Ag not less
than one half the total area may be used to determine minimum reinforcement and
design strength.
416
1988 EDITION 2610
(j) Limits for Reinforcement of Compression Members. 110.91 I. Area of

longitudinal reinforcement for noncomposite compression members shall be not
less than 0.01 nor more than 0.08 times gross area A,,. of section.
2. Minimum number of longitudinal bars in compression members shall be
four for bars within rectangular or circular tics. three for bars within triangular
tics, and six for bars enclosed by spirals conforming to Section 2610 (j) 3.
3. Ratio of spiral reinforcement p, shall be not less than the value given by
-0 .45 (~
p,- A -I -
c
)f'1,. ...................
)'
(10-5)
whcrcf,. is the specified yield strength of spiral reinforcement but not more than
60,000 psi.
(k) Slenderness Effects in Compression Members. 110.101 I. Design of
compression members shall be based on forces and moments determined from
analysis of the structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial
loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed-end mo-
ments, effect of deflections on moments and forces and the effects of duration of
loads.
2. In lieu of the procedure prescribed in Section 2610 (k) I, slenderness effects
in compression members may be evaluated in accordance with the approximate
procedure presented in Section 2610 (1).
3. The detailed requirements of Section 2610 (I) need not be applied if slender-
ness effects in compression members are evaluated in accordance with Section
2610(k) I.
(I) Approximate Evaluation of Slenderness Effects. [ 10.11] I. Unsup-
ported length of compression members. A. Unsupported length 1, of a com-
pression member shall be taken as the clear distance between floor slabs, beams or
other members capable of providing lateral support for that compression member.
B. Where column capitals or haunches are present, unsupported length shall be
measured to the lower extremity of capital or haunch in the plan considered.
2. Effective length of compression members. A. For compres~ion members
braced against sidesway, effective length factor k shall be taken as 1.0, unless
analysis shows that a lower value may be used.
B. For compression members not braced against sidesway, effective length
factor k shall be determined with due consideration of cracking and reinforcement
on relative stiffness, and shall be greater than I .0.
3. Radius of gyration. Radius of gyration r may be taken equal to 0. 30 times
the overall dimension in the direction stability is being considered for rectangular
compression members and 0.25 times the diameter for circular compression
members. For other shapes, r may be computed for the gross concrete section.
4. Consideration of slenderness effects. A. For compression members
braced against sides way, effects of slenderness may be neglected when kl)r is less
than 34- 12M ib!Mzb·
417
B. For compression members not braced against sidesway. effects of slender-

ness may be neglected when klulr is less than 22.
C. For all compression members with kl)r greater than 100, an analysis as
defined in Section 2610 (k) I shall be made.
5. Moment magnification. A. Braced compression members shall be de-

signed using the factored axial load Pu from a conventional frame analysis and a
magnified factored moment Me defined by:
WHERE: 'Dtf12, + B__M2s .................... (10-6)
_
em
___:_!!}__ ~ I .0
pu .................. (10-7)
cf>Pc
--~--~ 1.0
"'£pu ................... ( 10-8)
cf>"'i.P,
AND
'IT2EJ
(kty ...................... (10-9)
'i.P, and 'i.Pc are the summations for all columns in a story. For frames not braced
against sidesway, both s, and S, shall be computed. For frames braced against
sidesways, S, shall be taken as 1.0. In calculation of Pc, k shall be computed
according to Section 2610 (I) 2 A for Bb and according to Section 2610 (I) 2 B
for Br
B. In lieu of a more accurate calculation, El in Formula (10-9) may be taken
either as
El = (EJg!S) + EJse .................. (10-10)

I + f3c~
or conservatively
El = EJ/ 2 · 5 ...................... (10-11)

I + {3d
418
1988 EDITION 2610
C. In Formula ( 10-7), for members braced against sides way and without
transverse loads between supports, em may be taken as
M,,
em= 0.6 + 0.4 ~-
2h
................. (10-12)
but not less than 0.4. For all other cases, em shall be taken as 1.0.
D. If computations show that there is no moment at both ends of a braced
compression member or that computed end eccentricities are less than (0.6 +
0.03h) inches, M 2, in Formula (I 0-6) shall be based on a minimum eccentricity of
(0.6 + 0.03h) inches about each principal axis separately. Ratio M 11,!M 2, in
Formula (I 0-12) shall be determined by either of the following:
(i) When computed end eccentricities arc less than (0.6 + 0.03h) inches,
computed end moments may be used to evaluate M 1,!M 2, in Formula
(10-12).
( ii) If computations show that there is essentially no moment at both ends of a
braced compression member, the ratio M 1,1M 2, shall be taken equal to one.
E. If computations show that there is no moment at both ends of a compression
member not braced against sides way or that computed end eccentricities arc less
than (0.6 + 0.03h) inch, M 2, in Formula (10-6) shall be based on a minimum
eccentricity of (0.6 + 0.03h) inch, about each principal axis separately.
6. Moment magnification for flexural members. In frames not braced
against sidcsway, flexural members shall be designed for the total magnified end
moments of the compression members at the joint.
7. Moment magnifier {j for biaxial bending. For compression members
subject to bending about both principal axes, moment about each axis shall be
magnified by S, computed from corresponding conditions of restraint about that
axis.
(m) Axially Loaded Members Supporting Slab System. 110.!2] Axially
loaded members supporting slab system included within the scope of Section
26!3 (b) shall be designed as provided in Section 2610 and in accordance with the
additional requirements of Section 26!3.
(n) Transmission of Column Loads Through Floor System. II 0. 131 When
the specified compressive strength of concrete in a column is greater than I .4
times that specified for a floor system, transmission of load through the floor
system shall be provided by one of the following:
I. Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at
the column location. Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 2 feet into
the slab from face of larger column. Column concrete shall be well integrated with
floor concrete, and shall be placed in accordance with Section 2606 (d) 3.
2. Strength of a column through a floor system shall be based on the lower
value of concrete strength with vertical dowels and spirals as required.
3. For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of approximately
equal depth or by slabs, strength of the column may be based on an assumed
419
concrete strength in the column joint equal to 7S percent of column concrete

strength plus 3S percent of floor concrete strength.
(o) Composite Compression Members. [ 10.14] l. Composite compression

members shall include all such members reinforced longitudinally with structural
steel shapes, pipe or tubing with or without longitudinal bars.
2. Strength of a composite member shall be computed for the same limiting
conditions applicable to ordinary reinforced concrete members.
3. Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be
transferred to the concrete by members or brackets in direct bearing on the
composite member concrete.
4. All axial load strength not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall
be developed by direct connection to the structural steel shape, pipe or tube.
5. For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of gyration of a composite
section shall be not greater than the value given by:
r -
(EJ ,IS) + EJ,
(E,A~/5) + E,A, ............... (10-13)
fi1r computing Pc in Formula ( 10-8), El (~f'the composite section shall he not

greater than
El = E,l ,IS
1 + {3 + EJ, ................ (10-14)
d
6. Structural steel encased concrete core. A. For a composite member with

concrete core encased by structural steel, thickness of the steel encasement shall
be not less than
h Y*, for each face of width b
nor
h ~, for circular sections of diameter h

B. Longitudinal bars located within the encased concrete core may be consid-
ered in computing A, and / 1 .
7. Spiral reinforcement around structural steel core. A composite member
with spirally reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to
the following:
A. Specified compressive strength of concrete f'c shall be not less than 2SOO
pst.
420
1988 EDITION 2610-2611
B. Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum
yield strength for grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 50,000 psi.
C. Spiral reinforcement shall conform to Section 2610 U) 3.
D. Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall be not less than().() I nor
more than 0.08 times net area of concrete section.
E. Longitudinal bars located within the spiral may be considered in computing
A1 and/ 1 .
8. Tie reinforcement around structural steel core. A composite member
with laterally tied concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to the
following:
A. Specified compressive strength of concrete(,. shall be not less than 2500 psi.
B. Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum
yield strength for grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 50,000 psi.
C. Lateral ties shall extend completely around the structural steel core.
D. Lateral tics shall have a diameter not less than Ifso times the greatest side
dimension of composite member. except that tics shall not be smaller than No. 3
and need not be larger than No.5. Welded wire fabric of equivalent area may be
used.
E. Vertical spacing of lateral tics shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diame-
ters. 48 tie bar diameters. or one half times the least side dimension of the
composite member.
F. Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall be not less than 0.0 I nor more
than 0.08 times net area of concrete section.
G. A longitudinal bar shall be located at every corner of a rectangular cross
section, with other longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than one-half the
least side dimension of the composite member.
H. Longitudinal bars located within the ties may be considered in computing A 1
for strength but not in computing / 1 for evaluation of slenderness effects.
(p) Bearing Strength. 110.15] Design bearing strength on concrete shall not
exceed <P (0.85{',.A 1). except when the supporting surface is wider on all sides
than the loaded area, design bearing strength on the loaded area may be multiplied
by VA;;A 1• but not more than 2.
This section docs not apply to posttcnsioning anchorages.
Shear and Torsion [Chapter 11]

Sec. 2611. (a) Notations. 111.01
a - shear span, distance between concentrated load and face of supports.
A,. area of concrete section resisting shear transfer, square inches.
AI area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting factored moment
IV" a + N 11 ,. (h-d)]. square inches.
gross area of section. square inches.
421
area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement,

square inches.
total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, square inches.
A" area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting tensile force Nun•
square inches.
Aps = area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone, square inches.
A, area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A1 area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distance s,
square inches.
area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, or area of shear rein-
forcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement within a
distances for deep flexural members, square inches.
A,:! area of shear-friction reinforcement, square inches.
A,., area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement
within a distance s 2 , square inches.
h width of compression face of member, inches.
ho perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings, inches.
b., web width, or diameter of circular section, inches.
~m b, total width of the critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) I B
:;::
measured in the direction of the span for which moments are deter-
~f i mined, inches.
~1:::: b2 total width of the critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) I B
measured in the direction perpendicular to h 1• inches.
c, size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket
measured in the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined, inches.
C1 factor relating shear and torsional stress properties.
~
Lx2y
ddistance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal
tension reinforcement, but need not be less than 0.80h for prestressed
members, inches. (For circular sections. d need not be less than the
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-
forcement in opposite half of member.)
f', = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
Vf: = square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
J;.1 average splitting tensile strength oflightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
J;1 stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber of section where
tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads, psi.
compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress losses)
at centroid of cross section resisting externally applied loads or at
junction of web and flange when the centroid lies within the flange. psi.
422
1988 EDITION 2611
(In a composite member.fpc is resultant compressive stress at centroid

of composite section. or at JUnction of web and flange when the centroid
lies within the flange. due to both prestress and moments resisted by
precast member acting alone.)
.1;". compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only
(after allowance for all prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section
where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads, psi .
.1;"' = specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons, psi .
.1;. = specified yield strength of non prestressed reinforcement, psi.

h,. total depth of shearhead cross section, inches.
h,.. total height of wall from base to top, inches.
moment of inertia of section resisting externally applied factored loads.
In clear span measured face-to- face of supports.
1,. length of shearhead arm from centroid of concentrated load or reaction,
inches.
/,.. horizontal length of wall, inches.
Mer moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied
loads. See Section 2611 (e) 2 A.
Mm modified moment.
Mmax maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads.
MP required plastic moment strength of shearhead cross section.
M" factored moment at section.
M,. moment resistance contributed by shearhead reinforcement.
N 11 factored axial load normal to cross section occurring simultaneously
with V11 ; to be taken as positive for compression, negative for tension,
and to include effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage.
N uc factored tensile force applied at top of bracket or corbel acting simulta-
neously with Vus to be taken as positive for tension.
s = spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longi-
tudinal reinforcement, inches.
s1 spacing of vertical reinforcement in wall, inches.
s2 spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction perpendicular to
longitudinal reinforcement--or spacing of horizontal reinforcement in
wall, inches.
Tc nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete.
T, nominal torsional moment strength.
T, nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement.
See Section 2611 (g) 9 A.
T 11 factored torsional moment at section.
Vc nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
423
Vci nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking

results from combined shear and moment.
Vcw = nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking
results from excessive principal tensile stress in web.
Vd = shear force at section due to unfactored dead load.
V; factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring
simultaneously with MmaX'
vn nominal shear strength.
VP vertical component of effective prestress force at section.
V,. nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement.
Vu factored shear force at section.
vc permissible shear stress carried by concrete, psi. See Section 2611 (m)
20.
x - shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
torsional section properties. See Sections 2611 (g) I A and 2611 (g) I 8.
shorter center-to-center dimension of closed rectangular stirrup.
longer center-to-center dimension of closed rectangular stirrup.
distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforce-
ment, to extreme fiber in tension.
a= angle between included stirrups and longitudinal axis of member.
angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane.

coefficient y 11x 1• See Section 2611 (g) 9 A.
ratio of stiffness of shearhead arm to surrounding composite slab
section. See Section 2611 (I) 4 E.
ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
coefficient of friction. See Section 2611 (h) 6.
correction factor related to unit weight of concrete.
fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column
connection. See Section 2613 (d) 4.
'Yv = fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by eccentricity of shear at
slab-column connections. See Section 2611 (m) 2 C.
I- 'Yt·
p = ratio of non prestressed tension reinforcement.
= A,fbd.
Ph ratio of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of
vertical section.
Pn ratio of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of
horizontal section.
Pw = A,fb..J.
424
1988 EDITION 2611
¢ strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).

T/ number of identical arms of shearhead.
(b) Shear Strength. Ill . I] I . Design of cross sections subject to shear shall be
based on
Vu~cf>Vn ......................... (11-1)
where Vu is factored shear force at section considered and V11 is nominal shear
strength computed by
vn = vc + v, ...................... .(11-2)
where Vc is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in accordance with
Section 2611 (d) or Section 2611 (e), and Vs is nominal shear strength provided by
shear reinforcement in accordance with Section 2611 (f) 6. When determining V11
the effect of openings shall be taken into consideration.
2. In determining shear strength Vc, whenever applicable, effects of axial
tension due to creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered and
effects of inclined flexural compression in variable-depth members may be
included.
3. Maximum factored shear force Vu at supports may be computed in accord-
ance with Section 2611 (b) 4 or 2611 (b) 5 when both of the following conditions
arc satisfied:
A. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression
into the end regions of member, and
B. No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of
critical section defined in Sections 2611 (b) 4 and 2611 (b) 5.
4. For nonprestresscd members, sections located less than a distance d from
face of support may be designed for the same shear Vu as that computed at a
distance d.
5. For prestressed members, sections located less than a distance h/2 from face
of support may be designed for the same shear V u as that computed at a distance hi
2.
6. For deep flexural members, brackets and corbels, walls and slabs and
footings, the special provisions of Section 2611 (i) through (I) shall apply.
(c) Lightweight Concrete. [ 11.2] I. Provisions for shear strength Vc and

torsional moment strength Tc apply to normal-weight concrete. When lightweight
aggregate concrete is used, one of the following modifications shall apply:
A. When fer is specified and concrete is proportioned in accordance with
Section 2604 (c), provisions for Vc and Tc shall be modified by substitutingj;.,/6. 7
forVJ:, but the value of J;.1 /6. 7 shall not exceed Vf:..
B. When fer is not specified, all values of VJ':affecting Vc, Tc and Ma shall be
425
multiplied by 0. 75 for "all-lightweight" concrete and 0.85 for "sand-

lightweight" concrete. Linear interpolation may be used when partial sand re-
placement is used.
(d) Shear Strength Provided by Concrete for Nonprestressed Members.
]I I . 3] I . Shear strength Vc shall be computed by provisions of Section 261 1 (d) I
A through D unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with
Section 2611 (d) 2.
A. For members subject to shear and flexure only,
Vc = 2VJ':.bwd ..................... . (11-3)
B. For members subject to axial compression,
Vc = 2 (1 + 2~Ag )Wcbwd .......... .(11-4)
Quantity Nu!A 8 shall be expressed in psi.

C. For members subject to significant axial tension, shear reinforcement shall
be designed to carry total shear.
D. At sections where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds¢ (0.5Vf':.Lx2y),
2 V7':bwd
.............. ( 11-5)
2. Shear strength Vc may be computed by the more detailed calculation of

Section 2611 (d) 2 A through C.
A. For members subject to shear and flexure only,
Vc =( 1.9 V?; + 2500pw ~~) bwd ........ .(11-6)

but not greaterthan 3.5Vf':.bwd. Quantity Vud!Mu shall not be taken greater than
I. 0 in computing Vc by Formula ( 11-6), where M u is factored moment occurring
simultaneously with Vu at section considered.
B. For members subject to axial compression, Formula (11-6) may be used to
compute Vc withMm substituted for Mu and Vud/Mu not then limited to 1.0, where
Mm = M u -Nu (4h;-d) ................ (11-7)
426
1988 EDITION 2611
However, Vc shall not be taken greater than
Quantity N)Ag shall be expressed in psi. When Mm as computed by Formula ( 11-

7) is negative, Vc shall be computed by Formula ( 11-8).
C. For members subject to significant axial tension,
Vc = 2 (1 + ___&__)
500A, "'V~/'
J b w . . . . . . . . . . . . (11-9)
cl
where Nu is negative for tension. Quantity N)Ag shall be expressed in psi.
(e) Shear Strength Provided by Concrete for Prestressed Members. [II .4]
I. For members with effective prestress force not less than 40 percent of the
tensile strength of flexural reinforcement, unless a more detailed calculation is
made in accordance with Section 2611 (e) 2.
Vc = (o.6 y7';+ 700 ~~) bwd ......... (11-10)
but V,. need not be taken Jess than 2Vf:.bwd nor shall V,. be taken greater than
svJ:b.,.d nor the value given in Section 2611 (e) 2 D. The quantity Vud!Mu shall
not be taken greater than I .0, where M u is factored moment occurring simultane-
ously with Vu at section considered. When applying Formula (11-10), din the
term Vu d! M u shall be the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
prestressed reinforcement.
2. Shear strength Vc may be computed in accordance with Section 2611 (e) 2 A
and 8. where Vc shall be the Jesser of Vci or Vcw.
A. Shear strength V,i shall be computed by
Vci = 0.6Vf:.bwd + Vd + ViMcr .............. . (II-II)

Mmax
but Vci need not be taken less than I. 7Vf:.bwd, where
and values of M mat and Vi shall be computed from the load combination causing
maximum moment to occur at the section.
427
B. Shear strength Vcw shall be computed by
vcw = (3.5Vf: + 0.3f~c) hwd + vp .............. (11-13)
Alternatively, Vcw may be computed as the shear force corr~onding to dead load
plus live load that results in a principal tensile stress of 4 Vf'c at centroidal axis of
member, or at intersection of flange and web when centroidal axis is in the flange.
In composite members, principal tensile stress shall be computed using the cross
section that resists live load.
C. In Formulas (11-11) and (11-13), d shall be the distance from extreme
compression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement or 0.8h, whichever is
greater.
D. In a pretensioncd member in which the section at a distance h/2 from face of
support is closer to end of member than the transfer length of the prestressing
tendons, the reduced prestress shall be considered when computing Vcw· This
value of Vcw shall also be taken as the maximum limit for Formula (Il-l 0).
Prestress force may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at end of tendon to a
maximum at a distance from end of tendon equal to the transfer length, assumed to
be 50 diameters for strand and 100 diameters for single wire.
E. In a prctensioned member where bonding of some tendons does not extend to
end of member, a reduced prestress shall be considered when computing V,. in
accordance with Section 2611 (e) I or 261 I (e) 2. Value of V,w calculated using the
reduced prestress shall also be taken as the maximum limit for Formula (I I -1 0).
Prestress force due to tendons for which bonding does not extend to end of
member may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the point at which bonding
commences to a maximum at a distance from this point equal to the transfer
length, assumed to be 50 diameters for strand and 100 diameters for single wire.
(f) Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement. [I I .5] I. Types of

shear reinforcement. A. Shear reinforcement may consist of:
(i) Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member.
(ii) Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular to axis of member.
B. For nonprcstressed members, shear reinforcement may also consist of:
(i) Stirrups making an angle of 45 degrees or more with longitudinal tension
reinforcement.
(ii) Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30
degrees or more with the longitudinal tension reinforcement.
(iii) Combination of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.
(iv) Spirals.
2. Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
3. Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a
distance d from extreme compression fiber and shall be anchored at both ends
according to Section 2612 (n) to develop the design yield strength of reinforce-
ment.
428
1988 EDITION 2611
4. Spacing limits for shear reinforcement. A. Spacing of shear reinforce-

ment placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2 in nonpre-
stressed members and (3/4)h in prestressed members nor 24 inches.
B. Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be so spaced that
every 45-degree line. extending toward the reaction from middepth of member d/2
to longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of shear
reinforcement.
C. When V, exceeds 4 Vf:bwd, maximum spacings given in Section 261 I (f) 4
A and B shall be reduced by one half.
5. Minimum shear reinforcement. A. A minimum area of shear reinforce-
ment shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members (prestressed
and nonprestressed) where factored shear force Vu exceeds one half the shear
strength provided by concrete cp~ .• except:
(i) Slabs and footings.
(ii) Concrete joist construction defined by Section 2608 (I).
(iii) Beams with total depth not greater than 10 inches, two and one halftimes
thickness of flange or one-half the width of web, whichever is greater.
B. Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of Section 2611 (f) 5 A may be
waived if shown by test that required nominal flexural and shear strengths can be
developed when shear reinforcement is omitted. Such tests shall simulate effects
of differential settlement, creep. shrinkage and temperature change, based on a
realistic assessment of such effects occurring in service.
C. Where shear reinforcement is required by Section 2611 (f) 5 A or
by analy§.iS. and where factored torsional moment T,, does not exceed
<f>(O. 5 V f'c'L.x2y), minimum area of shear reinforcement for prestressed [except as
provided in Section 2611 (f) 5 D] and nonprestressed members shall be computed
by
A.,= 50bws .... .................... (11-14)
fv
where bw and s are in inches.
D. For prestressed members with effective prestress force not less than 40
percent of the tensile strength of flexural reinforcement, the area of shear rein-
forcement shall be not less than the smaller Av, computed by Formula ( 11-14) or !?
( 11-15).
A=~~~ fd
v so /y d Vb.. ............. (11-15)
E. Where factored torsional moment T, exceeds cp(0.5Vf:::Ex2y), and where
web reinforcement is required by Section 2611 (f) 5 A or by analysis, minimum
area of closed stirrups shall be computed by
A.,+ 2A, = 50bws .................... . (11-16)

f..
429
6. Design of shear reinforcement. A. Where factored shear force V, exceeds

shear strength ¢~., shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Formulas
(Il-l) and (11-2), where shear strength V, shall be computed in accordance with
Section 2611 (f) 6 B through H.
B. When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
V, = AJ,. d ........................ ( II- 17)

s
where Avis the area of shear reinforcement within a distances.

C. When inclined stirrups arc used as shear reinforcement,
V, = Avfv (sin a+ cos a)d .................. (11-18)

s
D. When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of

parallel bars, all bent up at the same distance from the support,
V,. = Avfv sin a . ...................... ( 11-19)
but not greater than 3Vf:.bwd.
E. When shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent-up bars or

groups of parallel bent-up bars at different distances from the support, shear
strength V, shall be computed by Formula (11-18).
F. Only the center three fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent
bar shall be considered effective for shear reinforcement.
G. Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the
same portion of a member, shear strength V, shall be computed as the sum of the V,
values computed for the various types.
H. Shear strength Vs shall not be taken greater than 8Vf:.b.,.,d.
(g) Combined Shear and Torsion Strength for Nonprestressed Members
with Rectangular or Flanged Sections. [ 11.6) I. Torsion effects shall be in-
cluded with shear and flexure where factored torsional moment Tu exceeds
cp(0.5Vf:.1.x2y). Otherwise, torsion effects may be neglected.
A. For members with rectangular or flanged sections, the sum L:x2y shall be
taken for the component rectangles of the section, but the overhanging flange
width used in design shall not exceed three times the flange thickness.
B. A rectangular box section may be taken as a solid section, provided wall
thickness h is at least x/4. A box section with wall thickness less than x/4 but
greater than x/10 may also be taken as a solid section, except that 1-x2y shall be
multiplied by 4hlx. When his less than x/10, stiffness of wall shall be considered.
Fillets shall be provided at interior corners of all box sections.
430
1988 EDITION 2611
2. lf the factored torsional moment Tu in a member is required to maintain

equilibrium, the member shall be designed to carry that torsional moment in
accordance with Section 2611 (g) 4 through 10.
3. ln a statically indeterminate structure where reduction of torsional moment
in a member can occur due to redistribution of internal forces, maximum factored
torsional moment T. may be reduced to ¢(4Vf::Ex2y!3).
A. ln such a case the correspondingly adjusted moments and shears in adjoin-
ing members shall be used in design.
B. ln lieu of more exact analysis, torsional loading from a slab shall be taken as
uniformly distributed along the member.
4. Sections located less than a distanced from face of support may be designed
for the same torsional moment Tu as that computed at a distance d.
5. Torsional moment strength. Design of cross sections subject to torsion
shall be based on
Tu""c/JT, ........................ (11-20)
Where Tu is factored torsional moment at section considered and Tn is nominal
torsional moment strength computed by
T, = ~- + T., ....................... (11-21)

where ~- is nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete in accord-
ance with Section 2611 (g) 6 and T., is nominal torsional moment strength provided
by torsion reinforcement in accordance with Section 2611 (g) 9.
6. Torsional moment strength provided by concrete. A. Torsional moment
strength ~- shall be computed by
0.8~x'y
T _
c- Jl + (0.4Vu
C,Tu )' .. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '(11-22)
B. For members subject to significant axial tension, torsion reinforcement shall

be designed to carry the total torsional moment. unless a more detailed calculation
is made in which ~-is given by Formula ( 11-22) and V: given by Formula ( 11-5)
shall be multiplied by (I + N jSOOA g), where Nu is negative for tension.
7. Torsion reinforcement requirements. A. Torsion reinforcement, where
required, shall be provided in addition to reinforcement required to resist shear.
flexure and axial forces.
B. Reinforcement required for torsion may be combined with that required for
other forces, provided the area furnished is the sum of individually required areas
and the most restrictive requirements for spacing and placement are met.
C. Torsion reinforcement shall consist of closed stirrups, closed tics or spirals,
combined with longitudinal bars.
431
D. Design yield strength of torsion reinforcement shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
E. Stirrups and other bars and wires used as torsion reinforcement shall extend
to a distanced from extreme compression fiber and shall be anchored according to
Section 2612 (n) to develop the design yield strength of reinforcement.
F. Torsion reinforcement shall be provided at least a distance (d + b) beyond the
point theoretically required.
8. Spacing limits for torsion reinforcement. A. Spacing of closed stirrups
shall not exceed the smaller of (x 1 + y 1)14 or 12 inches.
B. Spacing of longitudinal bars, not less than No. 3, distributed around the
perimeter of the closed stirrups, shall not exceed 12 inches. At least one longitudi-
nal bar shall be placed in each corner of the closed stirrups.
9. Design of torsion reinforcement. A. Where factored torsional moment 1;,
exceeds torsional moment strength ¢7;., torsion reinforcement shall be provided
to satisfy Formulas ( 11-20) and ( 11-21 ), where torsional moment strength T,; shall
be computed by
T,; = A,a,x,ytfy ...................... (11-23)

s
where A1 is the area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within a distance
s, and a 1 = [0.66 + 0.33 (y 1/x 1)] but not more than 1.50. Longitudinal bars
distributed around the perimeter of the closed stirrups A 1 shall be provided in
accordance with Section 2611 (g) 9 C.
B. A minimum area of closed stirrups shall be provided in accordance with
Section 2611 (f) 5 E.
C. Required area of longitudinal bars A 1distributed around the perimeter of the
closed stirrups A 1 shall be computed by
A1 = 2A 1 (x Yl) ................ .
1 ; (11-24)
or by
A _ [
[-
400xs (
/y Tu +
~ ;;;t \-2A
J J(xJ + Y!) 1
\ S .... (11-25)
whichever is greater. Value of A 1 computed by Formula ( 11-25) need not exceed

that obtained by substituting
50 bws for 2A
1
.f:
432
1988 EDITION 2611
D. Torsional moment strength T, shall not exceed 4Tc.
(h) Shear Friction. [II. 7] I. Provisions of Section 2611 (h) shall be applied
where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a given plane, such as an
existing or potential crack, an interface between dissimilar materials, or an
interface between two concretes cast at different times.
2. Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer as described in Section
261 I (h) I shall be based on Formula (Il-l) where V,, is calculated in accordance
with provisions of Section 2611 (h) 3 or 2611 (h) 4.
3. A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered.
Required area of shear-friction reinforcement Avf across the shear plane may be
designed using either Section 2611 (h) 4 or any other shear transfer design
methods that result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results
of comprehensive tests. Provisions of Sections 2611 (h) 5 through 2611 (h) 10
shall apply for all calculations of shear transfer strength.
4. Shear-friction design methods shall comply with the following:
A. When shear-friction reinforcement is perpendicular to shear plane, shear
strength V,, shall be computed by
V,. = Avff; fJ. · ..................... (11-26)
where p. is coefficient of friction in accordance with Section 2611 (h) 4 C.

B. When shear-friction reinforcement is inclined to shear plane such that the
shear force produces tension in shear-friction reinforcement, shear strength V,,
shall be computed by
where a 1 is angle between shear-friction reinforcement and shear plane.

C. Coefficient of friction p. in Formula (11-26) and Formula (11-27) shall be
Concrete placed monolithically I .4>..
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface
intentionally roughened as specified in Section 2611 (h) 9 l.OA.
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not
intentionally roughened 0.6>..
Concrete anchored to as-rolled structural steel
by headed studs or by reinforcing bars
Isec Section 2611 (h) 10] 0. 7>..
where A= 1.0 for normal-weight concrete, 0.85 for "sand-lightweight" concrete
and 0. 75 for "all-lightweight" concrete. Linear interpolation may be applied
when partial sand replacement is used.
433
5. Shear strength V,, shall not be taken greater than 0.2f~Ac nor 800 Ac in
pounds, where Ac is area of concrete section resisting shear transfer.
6. Design yield strength of shear-friction reinforcement shall not exceed
60,000 psi.
7 . Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by additional reinforcement.
Permanent net compression across shear plane may be taken as additive to the
force in the shear-friction reinforcement Avffy when calculating required Avf·
8. Shear-friction reinforcement shall be appropriately placed along the shear
plane and shall be anchored to develop the specified yield strength on both sides
by embedment, hooks or welding to special devices.
9. For the purpose of Section 2611 (h), when concrete is placed against
previously hardened concrete, the interface for shear transfer shall be clean and
free of laitance. If 1-L is assumed equal to !.OX., interface shall be roughened to a
full amplitude of approximately !(4 inch.
10. When shear is transferred between as-rolled steel and concrete using
headed studs or welded reinforcing bars, steel shall be clean and free of paint.
(i) Special Provisions for Deep Flexural Members. [11.8) Provisions of this
section shall apply for members with lnld less than 5 that are loaded on one face
and supported on the opposite face so that the compression struts can develop
between the loads and the supports. See also Section 2612 (k) 6.
I. The design of simple supported deep flexural members for shear shall be
based on Formulas (11-1) and (11-2), where shear strength V, shall be in accord-
ance with Section 2611 (i) 5 or 2611 (i) 6, and shear strength V:, shall be in
accordance with Section 2611 (i) 7.
2. The design of continuous deep flexural members for shear shall be based on
Section 2611 (b) through 2611 (f), or on methods satisfying equilibrium and
strength requirements. In either case the design shall also satisfy Section 2611 (i)
3, 2611 (i) 8 and 2611 (i) 9.
3. Shear strength V,, for deep flexural members shall not be taken greater than
8vf':b ... d when ln!d is less than 2. When lnld is between 2 and 5,
vn = +( 10 + ; ) v:r::-bwd .......... .(11-28)
4. Critical section for shear measured from face of support shall be taken at a
distance 0.15ln for uniformly loaded beams and 0.50a for beams with concen-
trated loads, but not greater than d.
5. Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section
2611 (i) 6,
V,. = 2v'f':.bwd ..................... (11-29)
434
1988 EDITION 2611
6. Shear strength \.-;.may be computed by
_
V,- (3.5 - 2.5 Vud
Mu ) ( 1.9 ,vfc
1r1
+ 2500pw Vud)
Mu bwd .. ... (11-30)
except that the term
shall not exceed 2.5, and V,. shall not be taken greater than 6VF;bwd. Mu is
factored moment occurring simultaneously with Vu at the critical section defined
in Section 2611 (i) 4.
7. Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear strength <PV,, shear reinforce-
ment shall be provided to satisfy Formulas (11-1) and ( 11-2), where shear strength
V, shall be computed by
Vs = [
Av
S
(1 +
12
4T ) + Avh (
S2
ll- 4T )]
12
/yd
..... ( 11-31)
where A,. is area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to flexural tension rein-

forcement within a distance s, and Avh is area of shear reinforcement parallel to
flexural reinforcement within a distance s 2 •
8. Area of shear reinforcement Av shall be not less than 0.0015 bws, and s shall
not exceed d/5 nor 18 inches.
9. Area of horizontal shear reinforcement Avh shall be not less than 0.0025 ~~
b .... s 2 , and s 2 shall not exceed d/3 nor 18 inches. ~
I0. Shear reinforcement required at the critical section defined in Section 2611
(i) 4 shall be used throughout the span.
(j) Special Provisions for Brackets and Corbels. [ 11.9] Provisions of Section
2611 (j) shall apply to brackets and corbels with a shear span-to-depth ratio aid not
greater than unity, and subject to a horizontal tensile force N uc not larger than Vu.
Distance d shall be measured at face of support.
2. Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be less than 0.5d.
3. Section at face of support shall be designed to resist simultaneously a shear
Vu, a moment [Vua + Nuc (h-d)], and a horizontal tensile force Nuc·
A. In all design calculations in accordance with Section 2611 (j), strength
reduction factor<!> shall be taken equal to 0.85.
B. Design of shear-friction reinforcement Avf to resist shear Vu shall be in
accordance with Section 2611 (h).
435
For normal-weight concrete, shear strength V" shall not be taken greater than
0.2f',hwd nor 800 bwd in pounds. For "all lightweight" or "sand-lightweight"
concrete, shear strength V,, shall not be taken greater than (0.2 = 0.07 ald)f;.hwd
nor (800- 280 a/d) hwd in pounds.
C. Reinforcement Ar to resist moment [V11 a + N uc (h-d)] shall be computed in
accordance with Sections 2610 (c) and 2610 (d).
D. Reinforcement All to resist tensile force Nuc shall be determined from
Nuc~¢A,J,.. Tensile force Nuc shall not be taken less than 0.2 V,, unless special
provisions are made to avoid tensile forces. Tensile force N uc shall be regarded as a
live load even when tension results from creep, shrinkage or temperature change.
E. Area of primary tension reinforcement A, shall be made equal to the greater
of (A1 +A,) or (2A,:r13 +All).
4. Closed stirrups or ties parallel to A,. with a total area All not less than 0.5
(A,-Ail), shall be uniformly distributed within two thirds of the effective depth
adjacent to A,.
5. Ratio p = AJbd shall not be less than 0.04 (f'c./f,.).
6. At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension reinforcement A, shall be
anchored by one of the following: (I) by a structural weld to a transverse bar of at
least equal size; weld to be designed to develop specified yield strength f.. of A,
bars; (2) by bending primary tension bars A, back to form a horizontal loop; or (3)
by some other means of positive anchorage.
7. Bearing area of load on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight
portion of primary tension bar A,, nor project beyond interior face of transverse
anchor bar (if one is provided).
(k) Special Provisions for Walls. [ 11.10] I. Design for shear forces perpen-
dicular to face of wall shall be in accordance with provisions for slabs in Section
2611 (1). Design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall shall be in accordance
with Section 2611 (k) 2 through 8.
2. Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall be based on
Formulas (Il-l) and ( 11-2), where shear strength V, shall be in accordance with
Section 2611 (k) 5 or 2611 (k) 6 and shear strength V, shall be in accordance with
Section 2611 (k) 9.
3. Shear strength V,, at any horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall not
be taken greater than 10Vf:hd.
4. For design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall, d shall be taken equal
to0.8/"'. A larger value of d, equal to the distance from extreme compression fiber
to center of force of all reinforcement in tension may be used when determined by
a strain compatibility analysis.
5. Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section 2611
(k) 6, shear strength V,. shall not be taken greater than 2Vf:hd for walls subject to
N 11 in compression, or V,. shall not be taken greater than the value given in Section
2611 (d) 2 C for walls subject to N 11 in tension.
6. Shear strength V,. may be computed by Formulas ( 11-32) and ( 11-33), where
V,. shall be the Jesser of Formula (I I -32) or (I 1-33).
436
1988 EDITION 2611
Vc = 3.3\/f':hd + ':id ............... (11-32)

w
or
Vc= 0.6~+
lw (1.2syFc+
M I
0.2-fh-)~ hd .... . (11-33)
~- .:.JIC
[ Vu 2
where N" is negative for tension. When (M "IV" -1.,.12) is negative, Formula ( 11-
33) shall not apply.
7. Sections located closer to wall base than a distance lw/2 or one half the wall
height, whichever is less, may be designed for the same Vc as that computed at a
distance 1,.12 or one half the height.
8. When factored shear force V" is less than c/JV,J2, reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 9 or in accordance with Section
2614. When V,, exceeds c/JV,./2, wall reinforcement for resisting shear shall be
provided in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 9.
9. Design of shear reinforcement for walls. A. Where factored shear force V.,
exceeds shear strength c/JV,., horizontal shear reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Formulas ( 11-1) and ( 11-2), where shear strength V, shall be computed by
V, = Avf;.d ........................ (11-34)

s2
where A v is area of horizontal shear reinforcement within a distance s 2 and

distanced is in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 4. Vertical shear reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with Section 2611 (k) 9 D.
8. Ratio Ph of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of
vertical section shall be not less than 0.0025.
C. Spacing of horizontal shear reinforcement s 2 shall not exceed lw 15, 3h nor 18
inches.
D. Ratio Pn of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of
horizontal section shall be not less than
p, = 0.0025 + 0.5 (
2.5- t::
hw )
(p,-0.0025) .......... (11-35)
nor 0.0025, but need not be greater than the required horizontal shear reinforce-
ment.
E. Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement s 1 shall not exceed lw/3, 3h nor 18
inches.
437
(I) Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings. [II . II] I . Shear strength of
slabs and footings in the vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by
the more severe of two conditions:
A. Beam action for slab or footing, with a critical section extending in a plane
across the entire width and located at a distanced from face of concentrated load or
reaction area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in accord-
ance with Section 2611 (b) through (f).
B. Two-way action for slab or footing, with a critical section perpendicular to
plane of slab and located so that its perimeter b0 is a minimum, but need not
approach closer than d/2 to perimeter of concentrated load or reaction area. For
this condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with Section
2611 (I) 2 through 4.
2. Design of slab or footing for two-way action shall be based on Formula
(Il-l), where shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than shear strength ~.,
computed in accordance with Sections 2611 (I) 2 A or 2611 (I) 2 B unless shear
reinforcement is provided in accordance with Section 2611 (I) 3 or 4.
A. For nonprestressed slabs and footings:
~· = (2 + ~) Vf':.b 0
d ................... (IJ-36)
f3c
but not greater than 4 Vf':.b 0 d. f3c is the ratio of long side to short side of
concentrated load or reaction area and b0 is perimeter of critical section defined in
Section 2611 (I) 2.
B. At columns of two-way prestressed slabs and footings that meet require-
ments of Section 2618 (j) 3:
~· = (3.5 Vf':. + 0.3fpc)b 0 d + \j, ............... (11-37)

where b0 is perimeter of critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) I B, fpc is
average value of fpc for the two directions, and \j, is vertical component of all
effective prestress forces crossing the critical section. If shear strength is com-
puted by Formula (11-37), the following shall be satisfied; otherwise, Formula
(11-36) shall apply:
(i) No portion of column cross section shall be closer to a discontinuous edge
than 4 times the slab thickness, and
(ii) J:. in Formula ( 11-37) shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi, and
(iii) fpc in each direction shall not be less than 125 psi nor be taken greater than
)00 psi.
3. Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires may be used in slabs and
footings in accordance with the following provisions:
A. Shear strength V,. shall be computed by Formula (11-2), where shear
strength~· shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (I) 3D, and shear strength V,
shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (I) 3 E.
438
1988 EDITION 2611
B. Shear strength V, shall not be taken greater than 6Wcb 0 d, where b0 is

perimeter of critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) 3 C.
C. Shear strength shall be investigated at the critical section defined in Section
2611 (I) I Band at successive sections more distance from the support.
D. Shear strength ~· at any section shall not be taken greater than
2Wcb 0 d, where b0 is perimeter of critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) 3 C.
E. Where factored shear force V" exceeds shear strength ct>Vc as given in Section
2611 (I) 3D, required areaAv and shear strength V, of shear reinforcement shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 2611 (f) and anchored in accordance with
Section 2612 (n).
4. Shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or channel-shaped sections
(shearheads) may be used in slabs. Provisions of Sections 2611 (I) 4 A through
2611 (I) 4 J shall apply where shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior
column supports. Where moment is transferred to columns, Section 2611 (m) 2 E
shall apply.
A. Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes fabricated by welding with a full
penetration weld into identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be
interrupted within the column sections.
B. Shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 times the web thickness of the steel
shape.
C. Ends of each shearhead arm may be cut at angles not less than 30 degrees
with the horizontal, provided the plastic moment strength of the remaining
tapered section is adequate to resist the shear force attributed to that arm of the
shcarhead.
D. All compression flanges of steel shapes shall be located with 0.3d of
compression surface of slab.
E. Ratio av between the stiffness for each shearhead arm and that for surround-
ing composite cracked slab section of width (c 2 + d) shall be not less than 0.15.
F. Plastic moment strength M P required for each arm of the shearhead shall be
computed by
where 4> is strength reduction factor for flexure, 1J is number of arms, and tv is
minimum length of each shearhead arm required to comply with requirements of
Sections 2611 (I) 4 G and 2611 (I) 4 H.
G. Critical slab section for shear shall be perpendicular to plane of slab and shall
cross each shearhead arm three fourths the distance [tv- (c 1/2)] from column face
to end of shearhead arm. Critical section shall be located so that its perimeter b0 is
a minimum, but need not approach closer than d/2 to perimeter of column section.
H. Shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than 4 Vf:.b 0 d, on the critical
section defined in Section 2611 (I) 4 G. When shearhead reinforcement is
439
provided, shear strength vn shall not be taken greater than 7 Yl'c

bad on the critical
section defined in Section 2611 (I) I B.
I. A shearhead may be assumed to contribute a moment resistance M v to each
slab column strip computed by
Mr = c/J~:u ( fv- ~) ................. (11-39)
where ¢is the strength reduction factor for flexure, Tl is the number of arms and lv
is the length of each shearhead arm actually provided. However, M v shall not be
taken larger than the smaller of:
(i) Thirty percent of total factored moment required for each slab column
strip.
(ii) Change in column strip moment over length lv.
(iii) Value of MP computed by Formula (11-38).
1. When unbalanced moments are considered, shearhead must have adequate
anchorage to transmit MP to column.
5. Openings in slabs. When openings in slabs are located at a distance less than
10 times the slab thil:kness from a concentrated load or reaction area, or when
openings in flat slabs arc located within column strips as defined in Section 2613,
the critical slab section for shear defined in Sections 2611 (I) I Band 2611 (I) 4 G
shall be modified as follows:
A. For slabs without shearheads, that part of the perimeter of the critical section
that is enclosed by straight lines, projecting from the centroid of the load or
reaction area and tangent to the boundaries of the openings, shall be considered
ineffective.
B. For slabs with shearheads, the ineffective portion of the perimeter shall be
one half of that defined in A.
(m) Transfer of Moments to Columns. [ 11.12] I. General. A. When gravity
load, wind, earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment at connec-
tions of framing elements to columns, shear resulting from moment transfer shall
be considered in design of lateral reinforcement in columns.
B. Lateral reinforcement not less than that required by Formula ( 11-14) shall be
provided within connections of framing elements to columns, except for connec-
tions not part of a primary seismic load-resisting system that are restrained on four
sides by beams or slabs of approximately equal depth.
2. Special provisions for slabs. A. When gravity load, wind, earthquake or
other lateral forces cause transfer of moment between slab and column, a fraction
of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by eccentricity of shear in accord-
ance with Section 2611 (m) 2 C and D.
B. Fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by eccentricity of shear shall
be transferred by flexure in accordance with Section 2613 (d) 4.
C. A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by 'YvMu shall be considered to
440
1988 EDITION 2611-2612
be transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical section

defined by 2611 (I) I 8 where Mu is the moment to be transferred and
-y,, = I - -----=== ............ (11-40)

I +2/3~
D. Shear stresses resulting from moment transfer by eccentricity of shear shall

be assumed to vary linearly about centroid of critical section defined in Section
2611 (m) 2 C. Maximum shear stress due to factored shear forces and moments
shall not exceed~· computed in accordance with Formulas ( 11-41) or ( 11-42).
(i) For nonprestressed slabs:
vc = <!>(2 + ~) ~ ................... (11-41)

~c
but not greater than ¢4 ~.

(ii) At columns of two-way prestressed slabs that meet requirements of Section
2618 (j)J:
Vc = c/>(3.5~ + 0.3fpc + vplb 0 d) .............. (11-42)
b, is perimeter of critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) I 8 and V,, is vertical
component of all effective prestress forces crossing the critical section. If permis-
sible shear stress is computed by Formula (11-42), the following shall be satis-
fied; otherwise, Formula ( 11-41) shall apply:
(I) f'c in Formula ( 11-42) shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi, and
(2) fpc in each direction shall not be Jess than 125 psi, nor be taken greater than
~00 psi.
E. When shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or channel-shaped sections
(shearheads) is provided, the sum of shear stresses due to vertical load acting on
the critical section defined by Section 2611 (I) 4 G and moment transferred by
eccentricity of shear about centroid of the critical section defined in Section 2611
(I) I 8 shall not exceed ¢4~.
Development and Splices of Reinforcement [Chapter 12]

Sec. 2612. (a) Notations. [ 12.0)
a = depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in Section 2610
(c) 7.
Ab area of an individual bar, square inches.
A, = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
Av = area of shear reinforcement within a distances, square inches.
Aw = area of an individual wire to be developed or spliced, square inches.
bw = web width, or diameter of circular section, inches.
441
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-

forcement, inches.
db = nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing strand, inches.
f'c = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
Vf: = square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
f, = average splitting tensile strength of lightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
J;,s stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength, ksi.
effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all
prestress losses), ksi .
.t; specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi.
Ia additional embedment length at support or at point of inflection,
inches.
ld development length, inches.
ldh X applicable modification factors.
/dh basic development length, inches.
/dh development length of standard hook in tension, measured from critical
section to outside end of hook [straight embedment length between
critical section and start of hook (point of tangency) plus radius of bend
and one bar diameter], inches.
lhb x applicable modification factors.
lhh basic development length of standard hook in tension, inches.
Mn nominal moment strength at section, inch-pounds.
Asfv(d-a/2).
s = spacing of stirrups or ties, inches.
sw spacing of wire to be developed or spliced, inches.
{3b ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area of tension reinforce-
ment at section.
(b) Development of Reinforcement-General. [12.1] Calculated tension or

compression in reinforcement at each section of reinforced concrete members
shall be developed on each side of that section by embedment length, hook or
mechanical device, or a combination thereof. Hooks may be used in developing
bars in tension only.
(c) Development of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wire in Tension. [ 12. 2]

Development length ld, in inches, for deformed bars and deformed wire in tension
shall be computed as the product of the basic development length and the applica-
ble modification factor or factors as defined in this section, but ld shall be not less
than /2 inches except in computation of lap splices by Section 2612 (p) and
development of web reinforcement by Section 2612 (n).
442
1988 EDITION 2612
Basic development length shall be:

No. II bar and smaller ............................. 0.04A,j,j~*
but not less than ................................... 0.0004d,.f~.t
No. 14 bar ....................................... . 0.085((~:t

No. 18 bar ......................................... O.Il.AJ~t-
Deformed wire .................................... .0.03dh.~l~
*Constant carries the unit of I/ inch.
tConstant carries the unit of inch2/pound.
:!:Constant carries the unit of inch.
Basic development length shall be multiplied by applicable factor or factors for:

Top reinforcement§ ......................................... I .4
60 000
Reinforcement with.t; greater than 60,000 psi ............... 2 _ •
J,:
Lightweight aggregate concrete.
When,t, is specified and concrete is proportioned
in accordance with Section 2604 (c) ..................... 6. 7~(!;,
but not less
than 1.0
When,t, is not specified
"all-lightweight" concrete ................................... 1.33
"sand-lightweight" concrete ................................. I. 18
Linear interpolation may be applied when partial sand replacement is used.
Basic development length, modified by appropriate factors for lightweight
aggregate concrete noted above, may be multiplied by applicable factor or factors
for:
Reinforcement being developed in length under consideration
and spaced laterally at least 6 inches on center with at least 3
inches clear from face of member to edge bar, measured
in direction of spacing ....................................... 0.8
Reinforcement in a flexural member
in excess of that required by analysis ........ .(A, required)/(A,. provided)
Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement
not less than 1/4-inch diameter and not more
than 4-inch pitch .......................................... 0. 75
(d) Development of Deformed Bars in Compression. 112.3] Development
length ld, in inches, for deformed bars in compression shall be computed as the
product of the basic development length and applicable modification factors as
defined in this section, but ( 1 shall be not less than 8 inches.
§Top reinforcement is horizontal reinforcement so placed that more than 12 inches of

concrete is cast in the member below the reinforcement.
443
Basic development length shall be ..................... .0.02dh~.IVJ;

but not less than .................................... .O.Oo03dJ;i·
Basic development length may be multiplied by applicable factors for: .
Reinforcement in excess of that required
by analysis ............................ .(A, required)/(A, provided)
Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not less
than 1/4-inch diameter and not more than 4-inch pitch .............. 0. 75
(c) Development of Bundled Bars. [12.4] Development length of individual
bars within a bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that for the individual
bar, increased 20 percent for 3-bar bundle, and 33 percent for 4-bar bundle.
(f) Development of Standard Hooks in Tension. [12.5] I. Development
length ldh in inches for deformed bars in tension terminating in a standard hook
shall be computed as the product of the basic development length lhb of Section
2612 (f) 2 and the applicable modification factor or factors of Section 2612 (f) 3,
but ldh shall not be less than 8db nor less than 6 inches.
2. Basic development length 111 h for a hooked bar with!y equal to 60,000 psi shall
be ................................................... 1200 db!Vf:
3. Basic development length lhb shall be multiplied by applicable factor or
factors for:
A. Bar yield strength. Bars with!y other than 60,000 psi. ........ J;.!60,000
B. Concrete cover. For No. II bar and smaller, side cover (normal to plane of
hook) but not less than 21/z inches; for 90-degree hook, cover on bar
extension beyond hook not less than 2 inches for No. 6 bar and larger and
Jl/2 inches cover j(Jr No.5 bar and smaller . ..................... 0. 7
C. Ties or stirrups. For No. II bar and smaller, hook enclosed vertically or
horizontally within tics or stirrup ties spaced along the full development
length ldh not greater than 3dh, where db is diameter of hooked bar ... 0.8
D. Excessive reinforcement. Where anchorage or development for J, is
not specifically required, reinforcement in excess of that required by
analysis .............................. (A 5 required)/(A, provided)
E. Lightweight aggregate concrete .............................. 1.3
4. For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of
members with side cover and top (or bottom) cover over hook less than 2112
inches, hooked bar shall be enclosed within tics or stirrups spaced along the full
development length ldh not greater than 3db, where db is diameter of hooked bar.
For this case, factor of Section 2612 (f) shall not apply.
5. Hooks shall not be considered effective in developing bars in compression.
(g) Mechanical Anchorage. [12.6] Any mechanical device capable of devel-
oping the strength of reinforcement without damage to concrete may be used as
anchorage.
Test results showing adequacy of such mechanical devices shall be presented to
the building official.
444
1988 EDITION 2612
Development of reinforcement may consist of a combination of mechanical

anchorage plus additional embedment length of reinforcement between the point
of maximum bar stress and the mechanical anchorage.
(h) Development of Welded Deformed Wire Fabric in Tension. [12.7]
Development length /d, in inches, of welded deformed wire fabric measured from
point of critical section to end of wire shall be computed as the product of either of
the basic development lengths noted in this section and applicable modification
factor or factors of Section 2612 (c), but ld shall be not less than 8 inches except in
computation of lap splices by Section 26 I 2 (s) and development of web reinforce-
ment by Section 2612 (n).
Basic development length of welded deformed wire fabric, with at least one
cross wire within the development length not Jess than 2 inches from point of
critical section, shall be
0.03dhCJ;- 20,000)/~ *
*The 20,000 has units of psi.
but not less than

0.20 Aw ____f_
s" Vf:.
Basic development length of welded deformed wire fabric, with no cross wires
within the development length, shall be determined as for deformed wire.
(i) Development of Welded Smooth Wire Fabric in Tension. [12.8] Yield
strength of welded smooth wire fabric shall be considered developed by embed-
ment of two cross wires with the closer cross wire not less than 2 inches from point
of critical section. However, development length ld measured from point of
critical section to outermost cross wire shall be not less than
0.27 Aw ____f_
sw vr;
modified by (A, required)/(As provided) for reinforcement in excess of that
required by analysis and by factor of Section 2612 (c) for lightweight aggregate
concrete, but ld shall be not less than 6 inches except in computation of lap splices
by Section 2612 (t).
Ul Development of Prestressing Strand. [I 2.9[ Three- or seven-wire preten-
sioning strand shall be bonded beyond the critical section for a development
length, in inches, not less than
j·Exprcssion in parenthesis used as a constant without units.
where db is strand diameter in inches, and f~s and .fse are expressed in kips per
square inch.
445
Investigation may be limited to cross sections nearest each end of the member
that are required to develop full design strength under specified factored loads.
Where bonding of a strand does not extend to end of member, and design
includes tension at service load in precompressed tensile zone as permitted by
Section 2618 (e) 2, development length specified above shall be doubled.
(k) Oe~·elopment of Flexural Reinforcement-General. [12. I 0] I. Tension

reinforcement may be developed by bending across the web to be anchored or
made continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face of member.
2. Critical sections for development of reinforcement in flexural members are
at points of maximum stress and at points within the span where adjacent rein-
forcement terminates or is bent. Provisions of Section 2612 (I) 3 must be satisfied.
3. Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer
required to resist flexure for a distance equal to the effective depth of member or
12dh, whichever is greater, except at supports of simple spans and at free end of
cantilevers.
4. Continuing reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than the
development length ld beyond the point where bent or terminated tension rein-
forcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
5. Flexural reinforcement shall not be terminated in a tension zone unless one
of the following conditions is satisfied:
A. Shear at the cutoff point docs not exceed two thirds that permitted, including
shear strength of shear reinforcement provided.
B. Stirrup area in excess of that required for shear and torsion is provided along
each terminated bar or wire over a distance from the termination point equal to
three fourths the effective depth of member. Excess stirrup area Av shall be not
less than 60h"'s!fv. Spacings shall not exceed d/8{3b where {3b is the ratio of area of
reinforcement cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at the section.
C. For No. II bar and smaller, continuing reinforcement provides double the
area required for flexure at the cutoff point and shear does not exceed three fourths
that permitted.
6. Adequate end anchorage shall be provided for tension reinforcement in
flexural members where reinforcement stress is not directly proportional to
moment, such as: sloped, stepped or tapered footings; brackets; deep flexural
members: or members in which tension reinforcement is not parallel to compres-
sion face.
(I) Development of Positive Moment Reinforcement. [ 12. II] I . At least one

third the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and one fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in continuous members shall extend along the
same face of member into the support. In beams, such reinforcement shall extend
into the support at least 6 inches.
2. When a flexural member is part of a primary lateral load-resisting system,
positive moment reinforcement required to be extended into the support by
446
1988 EDITION 2612
Section 2612 (I) I shall be anchored to develop the specified yield strength .t;. in
tension at the face of support.
3. At simple supports and at points of inflection, positive moment tension
reinforcement shall be limited to a diameter such that ldcomputed forfv by Section
2612 (c) satisfies Formula ( 12-1), except Formula ( 12-1) need not be satisfied for
reinforcement terminating beyond center line of simple supports by a standard
hook or a mechanical anchorage at least equivalent to a standard hook.
Mn
{d,; V + la .................... (12-1)
u
WHERE:
Mn is nominal strength assuming all reinforcement at the section to be
stressed to the specified yield strength.f;,.
V" is factored shear force at the section.
Ia at a support shall be the embedment length beyond center of support.
la at a point of inflection shall be limited to the effective depth or member of
12dh, whichever is greater.
Value of M n IV" may be increased 30 percent when the ends of reinforcement are
confined by a compressive reaction.
(m) Development of Negative Moment Reinforcement. [12.12] Negative

moment reinforcement in a continuous, restrained or cantilever member, or in any
member of a rigid frame, shall be anchored in or through the supporting member
by embedment length, hooks or mechanical anchorage.
Negative moment reinforcement shall have an embedment length into the span
as required by Section 2612 (b) and 2612 (k) 3.
At least one third the total tension reinforcement provided for negative moment
at a support shall have an embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less
than effective depth of member, 12 db, or 1/16 the clear span, whichever is greater.
(n) Development of Web Reinforcement. [ 12. 13] Web reinforcement shall be

carried as close to compression and tension surfaces of member as cover require-
ments and proximity of other reinforcement will permit.
Ends of single leg, simple U- or multiple U-stirrups shall be anchored by one of
the following means:
I. A standard hook plus an embedment of 0.5ld. The 0.5ld embedment of a
stirrup leg shall be taken as the distance between middepth of member d/2 and
start of hook (point of tangency).
2. Embedment d/2 above or below middepth on the compression side of the
447
member for a full development length ld but not less than 24dh; or for deformed
bars or deformed wire, 12 inches.
3. For No. 5 bar and 031 wire, and smaller, bending around longitudinal
reinforcement through at least 135 degrees and, in addition, for stirrups with
design stress exceeding 40,000 psi, an embedment of 0.33/d shall be provided.
The 0.33/d embedment of a stirrup leg shall be taken as the distance between
middcpth of member d/2 and start of hook (point of tangency).
4. For each leg of welded smooth wire fabric forming simple U-stirrups.
either:
A. Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 2-inch spacing along the member at the
top of the U.
B. One longitudinal wire located not more than d/4 from the compression face
and a second wire closer to the compression face and spaced not less than 2 inches
from the first wire. The second wire may be located on the stirrup leg beyond a
bend, or on a bend with an inside diameter of bend not less than Sdh.
Between anchored ends, each bend in the continuous portion of a simple U-
stirrup or multiple U-stirrups shall enclose a longitudinal bar.
Longitudinal bars bent to act as shear reinforcement, if extended into a region
of tension, shall be continuous with longitudinal reinforcement and, if extended
into a region of compression, shall be anchored beyond middepth d/2 as specified
for development length in Section 2612 (c) for that part of fv required to satisfy
Formula ( 11-19). ·
Pairs of U-stirrups or tics so placed as to form a closed unit shall be considered
properly spliced when lengths of laps are I. 7/d. In members at least 18 inches
deep, such splices with Ab.t;. not more than 9000 pounds per leg may be considered
adequate if stirrup legs extend the full available depth of member.
5. For each end of a single-leg stirrup of welded smooth or deformed wire
fabric. two longitudinal wires at a minimum spacing of2 inches and with the inner
wire at least the greater of d/4 or 2 inches from middepth of member d/2. Outer
longitudinal wire at tension face shall not be farther from the face than the portion
of primary flexural reinforcement closest to the face.
(o) Splices of Reinforcement. [12.14] I. General. Splices of reinforcement

shall be made only as required or permitted on approved plans or specifications,
or as authorized by the building official.
2. Lap splices. A. Laps splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. II,
except as provided in Sections 2612 (q) I and 2615 (i) 2 D.
B. Lap splices of bundled bars shall be based on the lap splice length required
for individual bars within a bundle, increased 20 percent for a 3-bar bundle and 33
percent for a 4-bar bundle. Individual bar splices within a bundle shall not
overlap.
C. Bars spliced by noncontact lap splices in flexural members shall not be
spaced transversely farther apart than one fifth the required lap splice length, nor
6 inches.
448
1988 EDITION 2612
3. Welded splices and mechanical connections. A. Welded splices and other

mechanical connections may be used.
B. Except as provided in this code, all welding shall conform to U .B.C.
Standard No. 26-8.
C. A full welded splice shall have bars butted and welded to develop in tension
at least 125 percent of specified yield strength f... of the bar.
D. A full mechanical connection shall develop in tension or compression, as
required, at least 125 percent of specified yield strcngth!y of the bar.
E. Welded splices and mechanical connections not meeting requirements of
Section 2612 (o) 3 CorD may be used in accordance with Section 2612 (p) 4.
(p) Splices of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wire in Tension. [12.151 I.

Minimum length of lap for tension lap splices shall be as required for Class A, B or
C splice, but not less than 12 inches. where:
Class A splice ........................................ 1.0/"
ClassBsplicc ........................................ 1.3/"
Class C splice ........................................ I . 7 ld
where ld is the tensile development length for the specified yield strength J;. in
accordance with Section 2612 (c). ·
2. Lap splices of deformed bars and deformed wire in tension shall conform to
Table No. 26-G.
3. Welded splices or mechanical connections used where area of reinforce-
ment provided is less than twice that required by analysis shall meet requirements
of Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D.
4. Welded splices or mechanical connections used where area of reinforce-
ment provided is at least twice that required by analysis shall meet the following:
A. Splices shall be staggered at least 24 inches and in such manner as to develop
at every section at least twice the calculated tensile force at that section but not less
than 20,000 psi for total area of reinforcement provided.
B. In computing tensile force developed at each section, spliced reinforcement
may be rated at the specified splice strength. Unspliccd reinforcement shall be
rated at that fraction of J;. defined by the ratio of the shorter actual development
length to/" required to develop the specified yield strcngthfv·
C. Splices in "tension tic members" shall be made with a full welded splice or
full mechanical connection in accordance with Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D and
splices in adjacent bar shall be staggered at least 30 inches.
(q) Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression. [12.16] I. Lap Splice.

Minimum length of lap for compression lap splices shall be the development
length in compression computed in accordance with Section 2612 (d) but not less
than 0.0005 fA,. nor (0.0009}~- 24) db for fv greater than 60,000 psi, nor 12
inches. For.f';.less than 3000 psi, length of lap shall be increased by one third.
Where bars of different size arc lap spliced in compression, splice length shall
449
be the larger of: development length of larger bar, or splice length of smaller bar.
Bar sizes No. 14 and 18 may be lap spliced to No. II and smaller bars.
In tied reinforced compression members, where ties throughout the lap splice
length have an effective area not less than O.OOI5hs, lap splice length may be
multiplied by 0.83, but lap length shall be not less than 12 inches. Tie legs
perpendicular to dimension h shall be used in determining effective area.
fn spirally reinforced compression members, lap splice length of bars within a
spiral may be multiplied by 0. 75, but lap length shall be not less than 12 inches.
2. End bearing splices. In bars required for compression only, compressive
stress may be transmitted by bearing of square cut ends held in concentric contact
by a suitable device.
Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within JI/2 degrees of a right angle to
the axis of the bars and shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full bearing after
assembly.
End bearing splices shall be used only in members containing closed ties,
closed stirrups or spirals.
3. Welded splices. Welded splices or mechanical connections used in com-
pression shall meet requirements of Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D.
(r) Special Splice Requirements for Columns. [12.17] I. Where factored

load stress in longitudinal bars in a column, calculated for various loading
combinations, varies fromfv in compression to one-half fv or less in tension, lap
splices, butt welded splices, mechanical connections or end bearing splices may
be used. Total tensile strength provided in each face of the column by splices alone
or by splices in combinations with continuing unspliced bars at specified yield
strcngthfv shall be at least twice the calculated tension in that face of the column
but not less than required by Section 2612 (r) 3.
2. Where factored load stress in longitudinal bars in a column, calculated for
any loading combination, exceeds one-half !yin tension, lap splices designed to
develop the specified yield strength !y in tension, or full-welded splices or full
mechanical connections in accordance with Section 2612 (o) 3 C and D.
3. At horizontal cross sections of columns where splices are located, a mini-
mum tensile strength in each face of the column equal to one fourth the area of
vertical reinforcement in that face multiplied by J,. shall be provided.
(s) Splices of Welded Deformed Wire Fabric in Tension. [ 12.18] Minimum

length of lap for lap splices of welded deformed wire fabric measured between the
ends of each fabric sheet shall be not less than I, 7ld nor 8 inches, and the overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet shall be not less than
2 inches, ld shall be the development length for the specified yield strength j~ in
accordance with Section 2612 (h). ·
Lap splices of welded deformed wire fabric, with no cross wires within the lap
splice length, shall be determined as for deformed wire.
(t) Splices of Welded Smooth Wire Fabric in Tension. [12.19] Minimum
450
1988 EDITION 2612-2613
length of lap for lap splices of welded smooth wire fabric shall be in accordance
with the following:
I. When area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that required by
analysis at splice location, length of overlap measured between outermost cross
wires of each fabric sheet shall be not less than one spacing of cross wires plus 2
inches, nor less than 1.5 /d, nor6 inches, ld shall be the development length for the
specified yield strength/,. in accordance with Section 2612 (i).
2. When area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by
analysis at splice location, length of overlap measured between outermost cross
wires of each fabric sheet shall be not less than I . 5 !d. nor 2 inches, ld shall be the
development length for the specified yield strength.!,. in accordance with Section
2612 (i). .
Slab Systems with Multiple Square or Rectangular Panels

[Chapter 13]
c 2 = size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or bracket
measured transverse to the direction of the span for which moments arc
being determined, inches.
C cross-sectional constant to define torsional properties. Sec Formula
( 13-7).
ment, inches.
Ech modulus of elasticity of beam concrete.
Ecc modulus of elasticity of column concrete.
Ecs modulus of elasticity of slab concrete.
lh moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross section of beam as
defined in Section 2613 (c) 4.
(. moment of inertia of gross section of column.
I, moment of inertia about centro ida! axis of gross section of slab.
Jz3f 12 times width of slab defined in notations a and {3,.
Kh flexural stiffness of beam; moment per unit rotation.
Kc flexural stiffness of column; moment per unit rotation.
K,c = flexural stiffness of equivalent column; moment per unit rotation. See
Formula (13 -6).
K, flexural stiffness of slab; moment per unit rotation.
K, torsional stiffness of torsional member; moment per unit rotation.
In length of clear span in direction that moments are being determined,
measured face-to-face of supports.
/1 length of span in direction that moments arc being determined, measured
center-to-center of supports.
451
/2 length of span transverse to / 1, measured center-to-center of supports.

See also Section 2613 (h) 2 C and D.
M, total factored static moment.
w, factored load per unit area.
wti factored dead load per unit area.
w1 factored live load per unit area.
x shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
y longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section.
a ~ ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width
of slab bounded laterally by center lines of adjacent panels (if any) on
each side of the beam.
E,.bft,
E,..J,
cr,. ratio of flexural stiffness of columns above and below the slab to com-
bined flexural stiffness of the slabs and beams at a joint taken in the
direction of the span for which moments are being determined.
2:(K, + K")
n,;, minimum cr,. to satisfy Section 2613 (h) 10 A.
a1 a in direction of / 1.
a2 a in direction of /2 .
f3a ratio of dead load per unit area to live load per unit area (in each case
without load factors).
{3, ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to flexural stiffness of a
width of slab equal to span length of beam, center-to-center of supports.
E,."c
2Ec.J,.
0., factor defined by Formula ( 13-5). See Section 2613 (h) 10.
y, fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column
connections. Sec Section 2613 (d) 6.
(b) Scope.ll3.1] I. The provisions of this section shall apply for design of slab
systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction with or without beams
between supports.
2. A slab system may be supported on columns or walls. If supported by
columns, no portion of a column capital or bracket shall be considered for
structural purposes that lies outside the largest right circular cone, right pyramid,
or tapered wedge whose planes arc oriented no greater than 45 degrees to the
column.
3. Solid slabs and slabs with recesses or pockets made by permanent or
452
1988 EDITION 2613
removable fillers between ribs or joists in two directions are included within the
scope of this section.
4. Minimum thickness of slabs designed in accordance with this section shall
be as required by Section 2609 (f) 3.
(c) Definitions. [ 13.2] I. Column strip is a design strip with a width on each
side of a column center line equal to 0.2512 or 0.251 1 , whichever is less. Column
strip includes beams, if any.
2. Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two column strips.
3. A panel is bounded by column, beam or wall center lines on all sides.
4. For monolithic or fully composite construction, a beam includes that por-
tion of slab on each side of the beam extending a distance equal to the projection of
the beam above or below the slab, whichever is greater, but not greater than four
times the slab thickness.
(d) Design Procedures. [13.3] I. A slab system may be designed by any

procedure satisfying conditions of equilibrium and geometric compatibility if
shown that the design strength at every section is at least equal to the required
strength considering Sections 2609 (c) and 2609 (d) and that all serviceability
conditions, including specified limits on deflections, are met.
A. For gravity loads, a slab system, including the slab and beams (if any)
between supports and supporting columns or walls forming orthogonal frames,
may be designed by either the direct design method of Section 2613 (h) or the
equivalent frame method of Section 2613 (i).
B. For lateral loads, analysis of unbraced frames shall take into account effects
of cracking and reinforcement on stiffness of frame members.
C. Results of the gravity load analysis may be combined with results of the
lateral load analysis.
2. A slab system, including the slab and beams (if any) between supports, and
supporting columns or walls may be designed by either the direct design method
[Section 26/3 (h)/ or the equivalent frame method [Section 26/3 (i)j.
3. The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be proportioned for
factored moments prevailing at every section.
4. When gravity load, wind, earthquake or other lateral forces cause transfer
of moment between slab and column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall
be transferred by flexure in accordance with Section 2613 (b) 4.
The fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by flexure shall be transfer-
red by eccentricity of shear in accordance with Section 2611 (m) 2.
5. A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by 'Y1M u shall be considered to f
I
be transferred by flexure within an effective slab width between lines that are one .
and one-half slab or drop panel thickness (1.5h) outside opposite faces of the
column or capital, where M u is the moment to be transferred and .
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . (13-1)
'Yj =
1 + 2/3 \lb7bz ~
453
Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing or additional

reinforcement may be used to resist moment on the effective slab width.
6. Design for transfer of load from slab to supporting columns or walls through
shear and torsion shall be in accordance with Section 2611 .
(e) Slab Reinforcement. [ 13.4] I. Area of reinforcement in each direction for

twu-way slab systems shall be determined from moments at critical sections but
shall be not less than required by Section 2607 (m).
Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab
thickness, except for portions of slab area that may be of cellular or ribbed
construction. In the slab over cellular spaces, reinforcement shall be provided as
required by Section 2607 (m).
2. Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall
extend to the edge of slab and have embedment, straight or hooked, at least 6
inches in spandrel beams, columns or walls.
3. Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge
shall be bent, hooked or otherwise anchored, in spandrel beams, columns or
walls, to be developed at face of support according to provisions of Section 2612.
4. Where a slab is not supported by a spandrel beam or wall at a discontinuous
edge or where a slab cantilevers beyond the support, anchorage of reinforcement
may be within the slab.
5. In slabs with beams between supports with a value of a greater than 1.0,
special top and bottom slab reinforcement shall be provided at exterior corners in
accordance with the following:
A. The special reinforcement in both top and bottom of slab shall be sufficient
to resist a moment equal to the maximum positive moment (per foot of width) in
the slab.
B. Direction of moment shall be assumed parallel to the diagonal from the
corner in the top of the slab and perpendicular to the diagonal in the bottom of the
slab.
C. The special reinforcement shall be provided for a distance in each direction
from the corner equal to one fifth the longer span.
D. In either the top or bottom of the slab, the special reinforcement may be
placed in a single band in the direction of the moment or in two bands parallel to
the sides of the slab.
6. Where a drop panel is used to reduce amount of negative moment reinforce-
ment over the column of a flat slab, size of drop panel shall be in accordance with
the following:
A. Drop panel shall extend in each direction from center line of support a
distance not less than one sixth the span length measured from center-to-center of
supports in that direction.
B. Projection of drop panel below the slab shall be at least one fourth the slab
thickness beyond the drop.
C. In computing required slab reinforcement, thickness of drop panel below the
454
1988 EDITION 2613
slab shall not be assumed greater than one fourth the distance from edge of drop
panel to edge of column or column capital.
(f) Details of Reinforcement in Slabs Without Beams. In addition to the other
requirements of Section 2613 (e), reinforcement in slabs without beams shall have
minimum bend point locations and extensions for reinforcement as prescribed in
Figure No. 26-1.
Where adjacent spans are unequal, extension of negative reinforcement beyond
the face of support as prescribed in Figure No. 26-1 shall be based on requirements
of longer span. Bent bars may be used only when depth-span ratio permits use of
bends 45 degrees or less.
For slabs in frames not braced against sidesway and for slabs resisting lateral
loads, lengths of reinforcement shall be determined by analysis but shall be not
less than those prescribed in Figure No. 26-1.
(g) Openings in Slab Systems. [13.5] I. Openings of any size may be pro-
vided in slab systems if shown by analysis that the design strength is at least equal
to the required strength considering Section 2609 (c) and (d), and that all service-
ability conditions, including the specified limits on deflections, are met.
2. In lieu of special analysis as required by Section 2613 (g) I , openings may be
provided in slab systems without beams when in accordance with the following:
A. Openings of any size may be located in the area common to intersecting
middle strips, provided total amount of reinforcement required for the panel
without the opening is maintained.
B. In the area common to intersecting column strips, not more than one eighth
the width of column strip in either span shall be interrupted by openings. An
amount of reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be
added on the sides of the opening.
C. In the area common to one column strip and one middle strip, not more than
one fourth the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An
amount of reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be
added on the sides of the opening.
D. Shear requirements of Section 2611 (I) 5 shall be satisfied.
(h) Direct Design Method. [13 .6] I. Slab systems within the following limita-
tions may be designed by the direct design method:
A. There shall be a minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
B. Panels shall be rectangular with a ratio of longer to shorter span center-to-
center supports within a panel not greater than 2.
C. Successive span lengths center-to-center supports in each direction shall not
differ by more than one third the longer span.
D. Columns may be offset a maximum of 10 percent of the span (in direction of
offset) from either axis between center lines of successive columns.
E. All loads shall be due to gravity only and uniformly distributed over an entire
panel. Live load shall not exceed three times dead load.
455
F. For a panel with beams between supports on all sides, the relative stiffness of
beams in two perpendicular directions
all22
........................ (13-2)
shall be not less than 0. 2 nor greater than 5. 0.

G. Moment redistribution as permitted by Section 2608 (e) shall not be applied
for slab systems designed by the direct design method. See Section 2613 (h) 7.
H. Variations from the limitations of this section may be considered acceptable
if demonstrated by analysis that requirements of Section 2613 (d) I are satisfied.
2. Total factored static moment for a span. A. Total factored static moment
for a span shall be determined in a strip bounded laterally by center line of panel on
each side of center line of supports.
B. Absolute sum of positive and average negative factored moments in each
direction shall be not less than
wj2Jn2
M 0 = - - - ....................... (13-3)
8
C. Where the transverse span of panels on either side of the center line of
supports varies, 12 in Formula (13-3) shall be taken as the average of adjacent
transverse spans.
D. When the span adjacent and parallel to an edge is being considered, the
distance from edge to panel center line shall be substituted for 12 in Formula
(13-3).
E. Clear span In shall extend from face to face of columns, capitals, brackets or
walls. Value of In used in Formula (13-3) shall be not less than 0.651 1 • Circular or
regular polygon-shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the same
area.
3. Negative and positive factored moments. Negative factored moments

shall be located at face of rectangular supports. Circular or regular polygon-
shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
In an interior span, total static moment M 0 shall be distributed as follows:
Negative factored moment ................................... 0.65
Positive factored moment. ................................... 0.35
456
1988 EDITION 2613
In an end span, total factored static moment M 0 shall be distributed as

follows:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Slab Without Beams
Exterior Slab with Between Interior Supports
Edge Beams Without With Exterior Edge
Unre- Between All Edge Edge
strained Supports Beam Beam Re!'::~r,ed
Interior negative
factored moment 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
Positive factored
moment 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
Exterior negative
factored moment 0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
Negative moment sections shall be designed to resist the larger of the two
interior negative factored moments determined for spans framing into a common
support unless an analysis is made to distribute the unbalanced moment in
accordance with stiffness of adjoining elements.
Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned to resist in torsion their share
of exterior negative factored moments.
For moment transfer between slab and an edge column in accordance with
Section 2613 (d) 4, column strip nominal moment strength provided shall be used
as the transfer moment for gravity load.
4. Factored moments in column strips. Column strips shall be proportioned

to resist the following percentage of interior negative factored moments:
1211 0.5 1.0 2.0
(a 1/ 2/1 1 ) = 0 75 75 75
(a 1/ 2/1 1) ~ 1.0 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.

Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the following percentage of
exterior negative factored moments:
12111 0.5 1.0 2.0
/3, = 0 100 100 100

(a,/ 2/1 1) =0
/3, ~ 2.5 75 75 75
/3, = 0 100 100 100

(a 11// 1) ~ 1.0
/3, ~ 2.5 90 75 45
457
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.

Where supports consist of columns or walls extending for a distance equal to or
greater than three fourths the span length /2 used to compute M 0 , negative
moments shall be considered to be uniformly distributed across / 2 .
Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the following percentage of
positive factored moments:
/2/1 0.5 1.0 2.0
(a 1/ 2// 1) = 0 60 60 60
(a 1/ 2!/ 1) ~ 1.0 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown:

For slabs with beams between supports, the slab portion of column strips shall
be proportioned to resist that portion of column strip moments not resisted by
beams.
5. Factored moments in beams. Beams between supports shall be propor-
tioned to resist 85 percent of column strip moments if (a 11211 1) is equal to or greater
than 1.0. For values of (a 112/1 1) between 1.0 and zero, proportion of column strip
moments resisted by beams shall be obtained by linear interpolation between 85
and zero percent. In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads according
to Section 2613 (h) 2 B and this paragraph, beams shall be proportioned to resist
all moments caused by concentrated or linear loads applied directly to beams,
including weight of projecting beam stem above or below the slab.
6. Factored moments in middle strips. That portion of negative and positive
factored moments not resisted by column strips shall be proportionately assigned
to corresponding half middle strips. Each middle strip shall be proportioned to
resist the sum of the moments assigned to its two half middle strips. A middle strip
adjacent to and parallel with an edge supported by a wall shall be proportioned to
resist twice the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the first
row of interior supports.
7. Modification of factored moments. Negative and positive factored mo-
ments may be modified by I 0 percent, provided the total static moment for a panel
in the direction considered is not less than that required by Formula ( 13-3).
8. Factored shear in slab systems with beams. Beams with (a 1/ 2// 1) equal to
or greater than I. 0 shall be proportioned to resist shear caused by factored loads on
tributary areas bounded by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the panels
and the center lines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides.
Beams with (a 1/ 2/1 1) less than 1.0 may be proportioned to resist shear obtained
by linear interpolation, assuming beams carry no load at a = 0. In addition to
shears calculated according to this section, beams shall be proportioned to resist
shears caused by factored loads applied directly on beams.
Slab shear strength may be computed on the assumption that load is distributed
to supporting beams in accordance with the preceding paragraph. Resistance to
total shear occurring on a panel shall be provided.
458
1988 EDITION 2613
Shear strength shall satisfy requirements of Section 2611 .

9. Factored moments in columns and walls. Columns and walls built inte-
grally with a slab system shall resist moments caused by factored loads on the slab
system.
At an interior support, supporting elements above and below the slab shall
resist the moment specified by Formula ( 13-4) in direct proportion to their
stiffnesses unless a general analysis is made.
where w'd· 1'2 and l'n refer to shorter span.

I0. Provisions for effects of pattern loadings. Where ratio f3a of dead load to
live load is less than 2, one of the following conditions shall be satisfied:
A. Sum of flexural stiffnesses ofthe columns above and below the slab shall be
such that ac is not less than amin specified in Table No. 26-E.
B. If ac for the columns above and below the slab is less than a min specified in
Table No. 26-E, positive factored moments in panels supported by such columns
shall be multiplied by the coefficient o., determined from Formula ( 13-5).
2
D.,= I + -f3a { 1 - 2 ) .................. (13-5)
4+ f31 a min
where f3a is ratio of dead load to live load, per unit area (in each case without load
factors).
(i) Equivalent Frame Method. [ 13. 7] I. Design of slab systems by the
equivalent frame method shall be based on assumptions given in Section 2613 (i) 2
through 6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be proportioned
for moments and shears thus obtained.
Where metal column capitals are used, account may be taken of their contribu-
tions to stiffness and resistance to moment and to shear.
Change in length of columns and slabs due to direct stress, and deflections due
to shear, may be neglected.
2. Equivalent frame. The structure shall be considered to be made up of
equivalent frames on column lines taken longitudinally and transversely through
the building. Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or supports and slab-
beam strips, bounded laterally by the center line of panel on each side of the center
line of columns or supports. Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge shall be
bounded by that edge and the center line of adjacent panel.
Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached to slab-beam strips by
torsional members [Section 2613 (i) 5] transverse to the direction of the span for
which moments are being determined and extending to bounding lateral panel
center lines on each side of a column.
Each equivalent frame may be analyzed in its entirety, or for vertical loading,
each floor and the roof (slab-beams) may be analyzed separately with far ends of
459
columns considered fixed. Where slab-beams are analyzed separately, it may be

assumed in determining moment at a given support that the slab-beam is fixed at
any support two panels distant therefrom, provided the slab continues beyond that
point.
3. Slab-beams. Moment of inertia of slab-beams at any cross section outside
of joints or column capitals may be based on the gross area of concrete. Variation
in moment of inertia along axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account.
Moment of inertia of slab-beams from center of column to face of column,
bracket or capital shall be assumed equal to the moment of inertia of the slab-beam
at face of column, bracket or capital divided by the quantity (I- c 2// 2)2 where c 2
and / 2 arc measured transverse to the direction of the span for which moments arc
being determined.
4. Columns. Moment of inertia of columns at any cross section outside of
joints or column capitals may be based on the gross area of concrete. Variation in
moment of inertia along axis of columns shall be taken into account. Moment of
inertia of columns from top to bottom of the slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed
infinite.
5. Torsional members. Torsional members shall be assumed to have a con-
stant cross section throughout their length consisting of the larger of:
A. A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the column, bracket or
capital in the direction of the span for which moments are being determined.
B. For monolithic or fully composite construction, the portion of slab specified
in A above plus that part of the transverse beam above and below the slab.
C. Transverse beam as defined in Section 2613 (c) 4.
Stiffness K1 of an attached torsional member shall be calculated by the follow-
ing expression:
K
, '" (, _tr .................
= ~ 9E,.,C
(13-6)
where c2 and /2 relate to the transverse spans on each side of column. The constant
C in Formula ( 13-6) may be evaluated for the cross section by dividing it into
separate rectangular parts and carrying out the following summation:
c = L, ( 1-0.63 xy ) -x3y
- .................. (13-7)
3
Where beams frame into columns in the direction of the span for which
moments are being determined, value of K 1 as computed by Formula ( 13-6) shall
be multiplied by the ratio of moment of inertia of slab with such beam to moment
of inertia of slab without such beam.
6. Arrangement of live load. When loading pattern is known, the equivalent
frame shall be analyzed for that load.
460
When live load is variable but does not exceed three fourths the dead load, or
the nature of live load is such that all panels will be loaded simultaneously,
maximum factored moments may be assumed to occur at all sections with full
factored live load on entire slab system.
For loading conditions other than those defined in the preceding paragraph,
maximum positive factored moment near midspan of a panel may be assumed to
occur with three fourths the full factored live load on the panel and on alternate
panels: and maximum negative factored moment in the slab at a support may be
assumed to occur with three fourths the full live load on adjacent panels only.
Factored moments shall not be taken less than those occurring with full factored
live load on all panels.
7. Factored moments. At interior supports, critical section for negative fac-
tored moment (in both column and middle strips) shall be taken at face of
rectilinear supports, but not greater than 0.175/ 1 from center of a column.
At exterior supports provided with brackets or capitals, critical section for
negative factored moment in the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a
distance from face of supporting clement not greater than one half the projection
of bracket or capital beyond face of supporting clement.
Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports shall be treated as square supports
with the same area for location of critical section for negative design moment.
Slab systems within limitations of Section 2613 (h) I, when analyzed by the
equivalent frame method, may have resulting computed moments reduced in such
proportion that the absolute sum of the positive and average negative moments
used in design need not exceed the value obtained from Formula (13-3).
Moments at critical sections across the slab-beam strip of each frame may be
distributed to column strips, beams and middle strips as provided in Section 2613
(h) 4, 5 and 6 if the requirement of Section 2613 (h) I F is satisfied.
walls [Chapter 14]

Sec. 2614. (a) Notations. [ 14.0]
f', specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
k effective length factor.
1, vertical distance between supports, inches.
M 11 = .fclctored moment at section, inch-/h. See Section2614 (i) 2.
M, = nominal momellf strenKth at section, inch-/h.
M,r = cracking moment 5 Vf)Kiy,jor reKular concrete.
P,"' = nominal axial load strength of wall designed by Section 2614 (c).
P11 = .fclctored cnial load at midheight of' wall, including tributary wall
weight.
cf> strength reduction factor. Sec Section 2609 (d).
461
ratio ofnonprestressed tension reinforcement.

reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions. See For-
mula (8-1 ).
(b) Scope. [14.1] Provisions of Section 2614 shall apply for design of walls
subjected to axial load, with or without flexure.
Cantilever retaining walls are designed according to flexural design provisions
of Section 2610 with minimum horizontal reinforcement according to Section
2614 (d) 3.
(c) General. 114.2] Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral
or other loads to which they are subjected. Walls subject to axial loads shall be
designed in accordance with Sections 2614 (c), 2614 (d) and either 2614 (e) or (f).
Design for shear shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (k).
Unless demonstrated by a detailed analysis, horizontal length of wall to be
considered as effective for each concentrated load shall not exceed center-to-
center distance between loads, nor width of bearing plus four times the wall
thickness.
Compression members built integrally with walls shall conform to Section
2610 (i) 2.
Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements such as floors, roofs or to
columns, pilasters, buttresses, and intersecting walls and footings.
Quantity of reinforcement and limits of thickness required by Sections 2614 (d)
and (f) may be waived where structural analysis shows adequate strength and
stability.
(d) Minimum Reinforcement. [14.3] I. Minimum vertical and horizontal

reinforcement shall be in accordance with Sections 2614 (d) 2 and 3 unless a
greater amount is required for shear by Sections 2611 (k) 8 and 9.
2. Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall be:
A. 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 with a specified yield
strength not less than 60,000 psi, or
B. 0.0015 for other deformed bars, or
C. 0.0012 for welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) not larger than W31 or
031.
3. Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross concrete area shall
be:
A. 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 with a specified yield
strength not less than 60,000 psi, or
B. 0.0025 for other deformed bars, or
C. 0. 0020 for welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed) not larger than W31 or
031.
462
1988 EDITION 2614
4. Walls more than 10 inches thick, except basement walls, shall have rein-
forcement for each direction placed in two layers parallel with faces of wall in
A. One layer consisting of not less than one half and not more than two thirds
~f t~tal reinforcement required for each direction shall be placed not less
than 2 inches nor more than one-third the thickness of wall from exterior
surface.
B. The other layer, consisting of the balance of required reinforcement in that
direction, shall be placed not less than 3/4 inch nor more than one-third the
thickness of wall from interior surface.
5. Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than
three times the wall thickness, nor 18 inches.
6. Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lateral ties if vertical rein-
forcement area is not greater than 0. 0 I times gross concrete area, or where vertical
reinforcement is not required as compression reinforcement.
7. In addition to the minimum reinforcement required by Section 2614 (d) I
and 2, not less than two No.5 bars shall be provided around all window and door
openings. Such bars shall be extended to develop the bar beyond the corners of the
openings but not less than 24 inches.
8. The minimum requirements for horizontal and vertical steel of Section 2614
(d) 2 and 2614 (d) 3 may be interchanged for precast panels which are not
restrained along vertical edges to inhibit temperature expansion or contraction.
(e) Walls Designed as Compression Members. [14 .4] Except as provided in
Section 2614 (f), walls subject to axial load or combined flexure and axial load
shall be designed as compression members in accordance with provisions of
Section 2610 (c), (d), (k), (1), (m), (p) and Section 2614 (c) and (d).
(f) Empirical Design Method. [14.5] I. Walls of solid rectangular cross

section may be designed by the empirical provisions of Section 2614 (f) if
resultant of all factored loads is located within the middle third of the overall
thickness of wall and all limits of Section 2614 (c), (d) and (f) are satisfied.
2. Design axial load strength c/JP nw of a wall satisfying limitations of Section
2614 (f) I shall be computed by Formula (14-1) unless designed in accordance
with Section 2614 (e).
c/JPnw = 0.55 c/Jf'cAg [ I - ( 3k2/hc ) 2] ......... (14-1)
where cjJ = 0.70 and effective length factor k shall be:

For walls braced top and bottom against lateral translation and
A. Restrained against rotation at one or both ends (top and/or bottom) 0.8
B. Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0
For walls not braced against lateral translation 2.0
463
3. Minimum thickness of walls designed by empirical design method.

A. Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25 the unsupported height
or length, whichever is shorter, nor less than 4 inches.
B. Thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation walls shall not be less
than 7112 inches.
(g) Non bearing Walls. [ 14.6] Thickness of nonbearing walls shall not be less
than 4 inches, nor less than 1/Jo the least distance between members that provide
lateral support.
(h) Walls as Grade Beams. [ 14.7] I. Walls designed as grade beams shall have
top and bottom reinforcement as required for moment in accordance with provi-
sions of Section 2610 (c) through (h). Design for shear shall be in accordance with
provisions of Section 261 I .
2. Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade shall also meet require-
ments of Section 2614 (d).
(i) Alternate Design Slender Walls. When flexural tension controls design of
walls, the requirements of Section 2610 (k) I may be satisfied by complying with
the limitations and procedures set forth in this section.
I . Limitations.
A. Vertical service load stress at the location of maximum moment does not
exceed 0.04 f~.
B. The reinforcement ratio p does not exceed .6 Pb·
C. Sufficient reinforcement is provided so that the nominal moment capacity
times the ¢factor is greater that Mer·
D. Distribution of concentrated load does not exceed the width ofbearing plus
a width increasing at a slope of two vertical to one horizontal down to the
design flexural section.
2. Design strength. The required factored moment, Mu at the midheight cross
section for combined axial and lateral factored loads, including the P-ll mo-
ments, shall be as set forth in the Formula ( 14-2).
Mu-:;; c/JM, ..................................... .(14-2)
Unless a more comprehensive analysis is used, the P-ll moment shall be calcu-
lated using the maximum potential deflection, /l 11 , as defined in 2614 (i) 3.
3. Deflection design. The midheight deflection /l s• under service lateral and
vertical loads (without loadfactors), shall be limited by the relation
fls = _ 1_c_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (14-3)

150
Unless a more comprehensive analysis is used, the midheight deflection shall
be computed with thefollowingformula:
fls = flcr + ( Ms-Mcr ) (fl,.- flcr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (14-4)

M,.-Mcr
464
1988 EDITION 2614-2615
WHERE:
Acr =
----
A" 5MnV
48 Ec /cr
Ia nAs,(d-c)2 + bc3
3
M, = the maximum moment in the wall resulting from the application of the
unfactored load combinations.
A se = pu + AJ,.-
fv
Footings [Chapter 15]

Sec. 2615. (a) Notations. [ 15 .0]
Ax gross area of section, square inches.
d, diameter of pile at footing base.
VJ': square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
f3 ratio of long side to short side of footing.
cjJ strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Scope. [ 15 .I] Provisions of this section shall apply for design of isolated
footings and, where applicable, to combined footings and mats.
Additional requirements for design of combined footings and mats are given in
Section 2615 (k).
(c) Loads and Reactions. 115.2] Footings shall be proportioned to resist the
factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the appropriate design
requirements of this code and as provided in this section.
External forces and moments* applied to footings shall be tramferred to
supporting soil without exceeding permissible soil pressures.
For footings on piles, computations for moments and shears may be based on
the assumption that the reaction from any pile is concentrated at pile center.
Base area of footing or number and arrangement of piles shall be determined
from the external forces and moments* (transmitted by footing to soil or piles) and
permissible soil pressure or permissible pile capacity selected through principles
of soil mechanics.
*Externalforces and moments are those resulting from unfactored loads (D. L, Wand E)
specified in Chapter 23.
465
(d) Footings Supporting Circular or Regular Polygon-shaped Columns or

Pedestals. [ 15. 3] Circular or regular polygon-shaped concrete columns or pedes-
tals may be treated as square members with the same area for location of critical
sections for moment, shear and development of reinforcement in footings.
\C) Moment in Footings. [ 15.4] I. External moment on any section of a
footing shall be determined by passing a vertical plane through the footing and
computing the moment of the forces acting over entire area of footing on one side
of that vertical plane.
2. Maximum factored moment for an isolated footing shall be computed as
prescribed in Section 2615 (c) 1 at critical sections located as follows:
A. At face of column, pedestal or wall, for footings supporting a concrete
column, pedestal or wall.
B. Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings supporting a
masonry wall.
C. Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base, for footings
supporting a column with steel base plates.
3. In one-way footings, and two-way square footings, reinforcement shall be
distributed uniformly across entire width of footing.
4. In two-way rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be distributed as
follows:
A. Reinforcement in long direction shall be distributed uniformly across
entire width of footing.
B. For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement
given by Formula ( 15-1) shall be distributed uniformly over a band width
(centered on center line of column or pedestal) equal to the length of short
side of footing. Remainder of reinforcement required in short direction
shall be distributed uniformly outside center band width of footing.
Reinforcement in band width _2_, .......... (15-1)

Total reinforcement in short direction ({3 + I)
(f) Shear in Footings. [ 15.5] I. Computation of shear in footings shall be in

accordance with Section 2611 (1).
2. Location of critical section for shear in accordance with Section 2611 shall
be measured from face of column, pedestal or wall, for footings supporting a
column, pedestal or wall. For footings supporting a column or pedestal with steel
base plates, the critical section shall be measured from location defined in Section
2615 (e) 2 C.
3. Computation of shear on any section through a footing supported on piles
shall be in accordance with the following:
A. Entire reaction from any pile whose center is located d/2 or more outside
the section shall be considered as producing shear on that sectiOn.
466
1988 EDITION 2615
B. Reaction from any pile whose center is located d,l2 or more inside the
section shall be considered as producing no shear in that section.
C. For intermediate positions of pile center. the portion of the pile reaction to
he considered as producing shear on the section shall be based on straight-
line interpolation between full value at d,l2 outside the section and zero
value at d1,12 inside the section.
(g) Development of Reinforcement in Footings. ]15.6] I. Computation of

development of reinforcement in footings shall he in accordance with Section
2612.
2. Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement at each section shall he
developed on each side of that section by proper embedment length. end anchor-
age. hooks (tension only). or combinations thereof.
3. Critical sections for development of reinforcement shall he assumed at the
same locations as defined in Section 2615 (e) 2 for maximum factored moment.
and at all other vertical planes where changes of section or reinforcement occur.
Sec also Section 2612 (k) 6.
(h) Minimum Footing Depth. ]15.7] Depth of footing above bottom rein-
forcement shall be not less than 6 inches for footings on soil. nor less than 12
inches for footings on piles.
(i) Transfer of Force at Base of Column, Wall or Reinforced Pedestal.

]15. 8] I. Forces and moments at base of column. wall or pedestal shall be
transferred to supporting pedestal or footing by bearing on concrete and by
reinforcement, dowels and mechanical connectors.
A. Bearing on concrete at contact surface between supported and supporting
member shall not exceed concrete bearing strength for either surface as given by
Section 2610 (p).
B. Reinforcement, dowels or mechanical connectors between supported and
supporting members shall be adequate to transfer:
(i) All compressive force that exceeds concrete hearing strength of either
member.
(ii) Any computed tensile force across interface.
In addition. reinforcement. dowels or mechanical connectors shall satisfy
Section 2615 (i) 2 or 2615 (i) 3.
C. If calculated moments arc transferred to supporting pedestal or footing.
reinforcement, dowels or mechanical connectors shall be adequate to satisfy
Section 2612 (s).
D. Lateral forces shall be transferred to supporting pedestal or footing in
accordance with shear-friction provisions of Section 2611 (h) or by other appro-
priate means.
2. In cast-in-place construction. reinforcement required to satisfy Section
2615 ( i) I shall be provided either by extending longitudinal bars into supporting
pedestal or footing. or by dowels.
467
A. For cast-in-place columns and pedestals, area of reinforcement across

interface shall be not less than 0.005 times gross area of supported member.
B. For cast-in-place walls, area of reinforcement across interface shall be not
less than minimum vertical reinforcement given in Section 2614 (d) 2.
C. Diameter of dowels, if used, shall not exceed diameter of longitudinal bars
by more than 0.15 inch.
D. At footings, No. 14 and No. 18 longitudinal bars, in compression only, may
be lap spliced with dowels to provide reinforcement required to satisfy Section
2615 (i) I. Dowels shall not be larger than No. II bar and shall extend into
supported member a distance not less than the development length of No. 14 or
No. 18 bars or the splice length of the dowels, whichever is greater. and into the
footing a distance not less than the development length of the dowels.
E. If a pinned or rocker connection is provided in cast-in-place construction,
connection shall conform to Sections 2615 (i) I and 26 I 5 (i) 3.
3. In precast construction, reinforcement required to satisfy Section 2615 (i) I
may be provided by anchor bolts or suitable mechanical connectors.
A. Connection between precast columns or pedestals and supporting member
shall have a tensile strength not less than 200 Ax· in pounds, where A., is area of
supported member.
B. Connection between precast wall and supporting member shall have a
tensile strength not less than 50 Ax, in pounds, where Ax is cross-sectional area of
wall.
C. Anchor bolts and mechanical connectors shall be designed to reach their
design strength prior to anchorage failure or failure of surrounding concrete.
(j) Sloped or Stepped Footings. [15. 9] In sloped or stepped footings, angle of

slope or depth and location of steps shall be such that design requirements are
satisfied at every section.
Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall be constructed to assure
action as a unit.
(k) Combined Footings and Mats. [15.101 I. Footings supporting more than
one column, pedestal or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be proportioned to
resist the factored loads and induced reactions in accordance with appropriate
design requirements of this code.
2. The direct design method of Section 2613 shall not be used for design of
combined footings and mats.
3. Distribution of soil pressure under combined footings and mats shall be
consistent with properties of the soil and the structure and with established
principles of soil mechanics.
(I) Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings. 1. Stresses due tofactored loads in
plain concrete pedestals andj(JOtings on .wil shall be computed assuming a linear
stress distribution in the concrete.
2. For plain concrete pedestals and footings with concrete cast against soil,
468
1988 EDITION 2615-2616
effective thickness used in computing stresses shall he taken as overall thickness

minus 3 inches.
3. Stresses due to factored loads in plain concrete pedestals and footings on
soil shall not exceed thefollowing:
Flexure-extreme fiber stress in tension .. ...................... 5¢VJ';

Shear-Beam action ....................................... 2¢VJ';
-Two-way action . ................................... .4¢VJ';
4. Maximum compressive stress in plain concrete pedestals shall not exceed

concrete bearing strength as given in Section 26/0 (p). Where concrete hearing
strength is exceeded, reinf(Jrcement shall be provided and the pedestal designed
as a reinforced concrete member.
5. Plain concrete shall not he used for footings on piles.
6. Overall thickness of"plain concretefootings shall not he less than 8 inches.
Precast Concrete [Chapter 16]

Sec. 2616. (a) Scope. [ 16. I [ I. Provisions of this section shall apply only to
design of precast concrete members manuf"actured under plant-controlled condi-
tions.
2. All provisions (~l this code shall apply to precast concrete members, except
as specifically modified in this section.
(b) Design. [ 16.2 [ I. Design of precast members shall consider all loading and
restraint conditions from initial fabrication to completion of the structure. includ-
ing form removal, storage, transportation and erection.
2. In precast construction that does not behave monolithically, effects at all
interconnected and adjoining details shall be considered to assure proper perform-
ance of the structural system.
3. Effects of initial and long-time deflections shall be considered including
effects on interconnected elements.
4. Design of joints and bearings shall include effects of all forces to be
transmitted, including shrinkage, creep, temperature, elastic deformation, wind
and earthquake.
5. All details shall be designed to provide for manufacturing and erection
tolerances and temporary erection stresses.
(c) Precast Wall Panels. [ 16.3[ I. Precast bearing and nonbearing walls shall
be designed in accordance with provisions of Section 2614. Desif?n shall include
eflects ~{temperature and shrinkage.
2. Where precast panels arc designed to span horizontally to columns or
isolated footings, the ratio of height to thickness shall not be limited, provided the
effect of deep beam action, lateral buckling, vertical buckling (including p-1:::.
effects) and deflections are provided for in the design. Sec Section 2610 (h) and
2610 (k).
469
(d) Details. [ 16.4] I. All details of reinforcement, connections, bearing seats,

inserts, anchors, concrete cover, openings, lifting devices, fabrication and erec-
tion tolerances shall be shown on the shop drawings.
2. When approved by the building official, embedded items (such as dowels or
inserts) that either protrude from concrete or remain exposed for inspection may
be embedded while concrete is in a plastic state, provided:
A. Embedded items arc not required to be hooked or tied to reinforcement
within plastic concrete.
B. Embedded items are maintained in correct position while concrete remains
plastic, and
C. Embedded items arc properly anchored to develop required factored loads.
(e) Identification and Marking. [ 16 .5] Each precast member or element shall
be marked to indicate location in the structure, top surface and date of fabrication.
Identification marks shall correspond to the placing plans.
(f) Transportation, Storage and Erection. [ 16.6] During curing, form re-
moval, storage, transportation and erection, precast members shall not be over-
stressed. warped or otherwise damaged or have camber adversely affected.
Precast members shall be adequately braced and supported during erection to
ensure proper alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are
completed.
Composite Concrete Flexural Members [Chapter 17]

Sec. 2617. (a) Notations. [ 17 .0]
b,. width of cross section at contact surface being investigated for horizon-
tal shear.
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-
forcement for entire composite section, inches.
v,., nominal horizontal shear strength.
4> = strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
(b) Scope. [ 17. I] Provisions of this section shall apply for design of composite
concrete flexural members defined as precast or cast-in-place concrete elements
or both constructed in separate placements but so interconnected that all elements
respond to loads as a unit.
All provisions of this code shall apply to composite concrete flexural members,
except as specifically modified in this section.
(c) General.[17.2] I. An entire composite member or portions thereof may be
used in resisting shear and moment.
2. Individual elements shall be investigated for all critical stages of loading.
3. If the specified strength, unit weight or other properties of the various
elements are different, properties of the individual elements or the most critical
values, shall be used in design.
470
1988 EDITION 2617
4. In strength computations of composite members, no distinction shall be

made between shored and unshored members.
5. All clements shall be designed to support all loads introduced prior to full
development of design strength of composite members.
6. Reinforcement shall be provided as required to control cracking and to
prevent separation of individual elements of composite members.
7. Composite members shall meet requirements for control of deflections in
accordance with Section 2609 (f).
(d) Shoring. 117 .3] When used, shoring shall not be removed until supported
clements have developed design properties required to support all loads and limit
deflections and cracking at time of shoring removal.
(c) Vertical Shear Strength. 117.4] I. When an entire composite member is
assumed to resist vertical shear, design shall be in accordance with requirements
of Section 261 I as for a monolithically cast member of the same cross-sectional
shape.
2. Shear reinforcement shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in
accordance with Section 2612 (n).
3. Extended and anchored shear reinforcement may be included as tics for
horizontal shear.
(f) Horizontal Shear Strength. [ 17 .5] I. In a composite member, full transfer
of horizontal shear forces shall be assured at contact surfaces of interconnected
clements.
2. Full transfer of horizontal shear forces may be assumed when all (~f the
./(1llowinR are satisfied:
A. Contact surfaces are clean ,free 1iflaitance, and intentionally rouf?hened to
a full amplitude of approximately f/4 inch,
B. Minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section2617 (f?),
C. Web members are desif?ned to resist total vertical shear, and
D. All shear reinforcement is fully anchored into all interconnected elements.
3. /fall requirements ~~f Section 2617 (f) 2 are not sati!>fied, horizontal shear
shall be investiRated in accordance with Section 2617 (f) 4 or 5.
4. Unless calculated in accordance with Section 2617 (f) 5, design of cross
sections subject to horizontal shear shall be based on
V11 ~ c/>Vnh ........................ . (17-1)
where V11 is factored shear force at section considered and V,.h is nominal horizon-
tal shear strength in accordance with the following:
A. When contact surfaces are clear, free of laitance and intentionally rough-
ened, shear strength V,.h shall not be taken greater than than 80b,.d.
B. When minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section 2617 (g) and
contact surfaces are clean and free of laitance, but not intentionally rough-
ened, shear strength V,.h shall not be taken greater than 80b"d.
471
C. When minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section 2617 (g) and
contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, and intentionally roughened to a
full amplitude of approximately I/4 inch, shear strength Vnh shall not be
taken greater than 350bvd.
D. When factored shear force Vu at section considered exceeds cp(350bvd),
design for horizontal shear shall be in accordance with Section 2611 (h).
5. Horizontal shear may be investigated by computing the actual compressive
or tensile force in any segment, and provisions made to transfer that force as
horizontal shear to the supporting element. The factored horizontal shear force
shall not exceed horizontal shear strength c/JVnh as given in Section 2617 (f) 4 A
through D.
6. When tension exists across any contact surface between interconnected
clements, shear transfer by contact may be assumed only when minimum ties are
provided in accordance with Section 2617 (g).
(g) Ties for Horizontal Shear. [17.6] 1. When ties are provided to transfer
horizontal shear, tie area shall be not less than that required by Section 2611 (f) 5 C
and tic spacing shall not exceed four times the least dimension of supported
clement, nor 24 inches.
2. Ties for horizontal shear may consist of single bars or wire, multiple leg
stirrups or vertical legs of welded wire fabric (smooth or deformed).
3. All ties shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in accordance
with Section 2612 (n).
Prestressed Concrete [Chapter 18]
Sec. 2618. (a) Notations. [ 18.0]
A area of that part of cross section between flexural tension face and
center of gravity of gross section, square inches.
Ac area of concrete at cross section considered, square inches.
AP·' area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone, square inches.
A, area of non prestressed tension reinforcement, square inches.
A'.,. area of compression reinforcement, square inches.
b width of compression face of member, inches.
d= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of nonprestressed
tension reinforcement. inches.
d' distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement.
D dead loads or related internal moments and forces.
base of Napierian logarithms.
specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi; or square
root of compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestress, psi.
472
1988 EDITION 2618
f'ci compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestress, psi.

f,c average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force
only (after allowance for all prestress losses), psi.
f,,. stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength, psi.
f,11
specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons, psi.
f,v specified yield strength of prestressing tendons, psi.
!,. modulus of rupture of concrete, psi.
f.., effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after allowance for all
prestress losses), psi.
.fv specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi.
K wobble friction coefficient per foot of prestressing tendon.
I length of prestressing tendon element from jacking end to any point x,
feet. See Formulas ( 18-1) and (18-2); or length of span of two-way flat
plates in direction parallel to that of the reinforcement being deter-
mined, inches. See Formula (18-8).
L live loads or related internal moments and forces.
Nc tensile force in concrete due to unfactored dead load plus live load
(D + L).
P, prestressing tendon force at jacking end.
P, prestressing tendon force at any point x.
a total angular change of prestressing tendon profile in radians from
tendon jacking end to any point x.
I) 1 factor defined in Section 2610 (c) 7.
factor for type of prestressing tendon.
0.55 forf,y/fpu not less than 0.80.
0.40 for f,/f," not less than 0. 85.
0.28 forf,Y!fP" not less than 0.90.
JL curvature friction coefficient.
p = ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
AJbd.
p' ratio of compression reinforcement.
= A,lbd.
p' ratio of compression reinforcement.
= A'.Jbd.
p, = ratio of prestressed reinforcement.
= A,,,bd,.
cf> strength reduction factor. See Section 2609 (d).
W = Pf~lf'c·
w' = P 'J.~,If'c·
473
WW' WfHl'' W '

U.!
reinforcement indices for flanged sections computed as for w, wp• and

w' except that b shall be the web width, and reinforcement area shall be
that required to develop compressive strength of web only.
(b) Scope. [ 18. I] Provisions of this section shall apply to members prestressed
with wire, strands or bars conforming to provisions for prestressing tendons in
Section 2603 (f) 4.
All provisions of this code not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with
provisions of this section, shall apply to prestressed concrete.
The following provisions of this code shall not apply to prestressed concrete,
except as specifically noted: Sections 2607 (g) (last paragraph), 2608 (e), 2608
(k) 2 through 2608 (k) 4, 2608 (I); 2610 (d) 2 and 3, 2610 (f), 2610 (j) I, 2610 (j) 2;
2613 and 2614 (d), (f) and (g).
(c) General. [ 18.2] I. Prestressed members shall meet the strength require-
ments specified in this code.
2. Design of prestressed members shall be based on strength and on behavior at
service conditions at all load stages that may be critical during the life of the
structure from the time prestress is first applied.
3. Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be considered in design.
4. Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining construction of elastic and
plastic deformations, deflections, changes in length and rotations due to pre-
stressing. Effects of temperature and shrinkage shall also be included.
5. Possibility of buckling in a member between points where concrete and
prestressing tendons arc in contact and of buckling in thin webs and flanges shall
be considered.
6. In computing section properties prior to bonding of prestressing tendons,
effect of loss of area due to open ducts shall be considered.
(d) Design Assumptions. [ 18.3] I. Strength design of prestressed members
for flexure and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in Section 2610
(c). except Section 2610 (c) 4 shall apply only to reinforcement conforming to
Section 2603 (f) 2.
2. For investigation of stresses at transfer of prestress, at service loads and at
cracking loads, straight-line theory may be used with the following assumptions:
A. Strains vary linearly with depth through entire load range.
B. At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
(c) Permissible Stresses in Concrete-Flexural Members. [ 18.4] I.
Stresses in concrete immediately after prestress transfer (before time-dependent
prestress losses) shall not exceed the following:
A. Extreme fiber stress in compression ........................ 0.6Qf',i
B. Extreme fiber stress in tension except
as permitted in ........................................ . 3v'f':i
474
1988 EDITION 2618
C. Extreme fiber stress in tension at ends of

simply supported members ............................... 6VJ'.i
Where computed tensile stresses exceed these values, bonded auxiliary reinforce-
ment (nonprestressed or prestressed) shall be provided in the tensile zone to resist
the total tensile force in concrete computed with the assumption of an uncracked
section.
2. Stresses in concrete at service loads (after allowance for all prestress losses)
shall not exceed the following:
A. Extreme fiber stress in compression ........................ 0. 45f',
B. Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed
tensile zone ............................................ 6vf'.
C. Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed tensile zone
of members (except two-way slab systems) where analysis
based on transformed cracked sections and on bilinear
moment-deflection relationships show that immediate and
long-time deflections comply with requirements of Section
2609 (f) 4, and where cover requirements comply with
Section 2607 (h) 3 B .................................. 12VJ'.
3. Permissible stresses in concrete of Section 2618 (e) 1 and 2 may be ex-
ceeded if shown by test or analysis that performance will not be impaired.
(f) Permissible Stress in Prestressing Tendons. 118.5] Tensile stress in pre-

stressing tendons shall not exceed the following:
l. Due to tendon jacking force ............................... 0. 94J;,v
but not greater than the lesser ofO. 801;'" and the maximum value recommended by
manufacturer of prestressing tendons or anchorages.
2. Immediately after prestress transfer ......................... 0.82;(,".
but not greater than 0.74};111 • ·
3. Posttensioning tendons, at anchorages and couplers, immediately after

tendon anchorage ............................................ 0. 70/;'"
(g) Loss of Prestress. 118.61 1. To determine effective prestressf,e· allowance
for the following sources of loss of prestress shall be considered:
A. Anchorage seating loss.
B. Elastic shortening of concrete.
C. Creep of concrete.
D. Shrinkage of concrete.
E. Relaxation of tendon stress.
F. Friction loss due to intended or unintended curvature in posttensioning
tendons.
2. Friction loss in posttensioning tendons. A. Effect of friction loss in
posttensioning tendons shall be computed by
P, = P,e!Kl + f.'"'l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( 18-1)
475
When (K/ = J.LCI.) is not greater than 0.3, effect of friction loss may be computed
by
P, = P, (I + Kl + J.La.) .................. (18-2)
B. Friction loss shall be based on experimentally determined wobble K and

curvature J.L friction coefficients and shall be verified during tendon stressing
operations.
C. Values of wobble and curvature coefficients used in design, and acceptable
ranges of tendon jacking forces and tendon elongations shall be shown on design
drawings.
D. Where loss of prestress in member may occur due to connection of member
to adjoining construction, such loss of prestress shall be allowed for in design.
(h) Flexural Strength. ]18. 7] !. Design moment strength of flexural members
shall be computed by the strength design methods of this code. For prestressing
tendons,/;,, shall be substituted for!y in strength computations.
2. In lieu of a more accurate determination off,, based on strain compatibility,
the following approximate values off,, shall be used iff,_ is not less than 0.5f,'".
A. For members with bonded prestressing tendons:
r"' -_ ·t."" ( I - -"Y,- [ P, .f,'"

1
{3,
, + -d (w - w)
f c d,
l) ..... ( 18-3)
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account when calculating .t;,.,. by

Formula ( 18-3), the term
[ P,
.f,JU d
, +- (w- w)
l
f c d,
shall be taken not less than 0. 17 and d' shall be no greater than 0. 15 d,.
B. For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and with a span-to-depth
ratio of 35 or less:
./;,, = fe + 10,000 + _L:_ ............. (18-4)

lOOp,
butt;,, in Formula (18-4) shall not be taken greater than.f,,, nor if..e + 60,000).
C. For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and with a span-to-depth
ratio greater than 35:
./;,., = f;e + 10,000 + _L:_ ............. (18-5)

300p,
butt;,, in Formula ( !8-5) shall not be taken greater than.fPY' nor if..e + 30,000).
3. Nonprestressed reinforcement conforming to Section 2603 (f) 2, if used
with prestressing tendons, may be considered to contribute to the tensile force and
may be included in moment strength computations at a stress equal to the specified
476
1988 EDITION 2618
yield strength./;.. Other nonprestressed reinforcement may be included in strength

computations only if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine stresses
in such reinforcement.
(i) Limits for Reinforcement of Flexural Members. [18.8[ I. Ratio of

prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement used for computation of moment
strength of a member, except as provided in Section 2618 (i) 2, shall be such that
w1, [ w, + dld1, ( w - w') [.or [w1"'. + did, ( w"'- w' "')I is not greater than 0.36 {3 1.
2. When a reinforcement ratio in excess of that specified in Section 2618 ( i) I
is provided, design moment strength shall not exceed the moment strength based
on the compression portion of the moment couple.
3. Total amount of prestressed and nonprestresscd reinforcement shall he
adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the cracking load computed
on the basis of the modulus of rupture!,. specified in Section 2609 (f) 2 C, except
for flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice that required
by Section 2609 (c).
(j) Minimum Bonded Reinforcement. [ 18. 9] I. A minimum area of bonded

reinforcement shall be provided in all flexural members with unbonded prestress-
ing tendons as required by Section 2618 (j) 2 and 3.
2. Except as provided in Section 2618 Ul 3. minimum area of bonded rein-
forcement shall be computed by
A,= 0.004A ........................ (18-6)
A. Bonded reinforcement required by Formula (18-6) shall be uniformly
distributed over precompresscd tensile zone as close as practicable to
extreme tension fiber.
B. Bonded reinforcement shall be required regardless of service load stress
conditions.
One-way, unbonded, post tensioned slabs and beams shall be desif?ned
to carry the dead load of' the slab or beam plus 25 percent of the unreduced
superimposed live load by some method other than the primary unhanded
posttensioned rein.fi>rcement. Desif?n shall be based on the strenf?th
method oj'desif?n with a loadfactor and capacity reduction factor 1~j'one.
All reinforcement other than the primary unbonded reinfi>rcement pro-
vided to meet other requirements oj'thi.1· section may be used in the desif?n.
C. Maximum spacing limitations ofSections 2607 ( f?) I and 2608 (k).ltem No.
5 B, .fiJI' bonded roinforcement in slabs are not applicahle to spacinf? oj'
bonded reit(/i>rcement in members with unbonded tendons.
3. For two-way flat plates, defined as solid slabs of uniform thickness. mini-
mum area and distribution of bonded reinforcement shall be as follows:
A. Bonded reinforcement shall not be required in positive moment areas
where computed tensile stress in concrete at service load (after allowance
for prestress losses) does not exceed 2 'Ill';
B. In positive moment areas where computed tensile stress in concrete at
477
service load exceeds 2Vf:, minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall

be computed by
A,= .!!.s_ ......................... (18-7)

0.5/y
where design yield strengthfy shall not exceed 60,000 psi. Bonded rein-
forcement shall be uniformly distributed over precompressed tensile zone
as close as practicable to extreme tension fiber.
C. In negative moment areas at column supports, minimum area of bonded
reinforcement in each direction shall be computed by
A,= 0.00075hl ...................... .(18-8)
where l is length of span in direction parallel to that of the reinforcement

being determined. Bonded reinforcement required by Formula (18-8) shall
be distributed within a slab width between lines that are 1.5h outside
opposite faces of the column support. At least four bars or wires shall be
provided in each direction. Spacing of bonded reinforcement shall not
exceed 12 inches.
4. Minimum length of bonded reinforcement required by Section 2618 (j) 2
and 3 shall be as follows:
A. In positive moment areas, minimum length of bonded reinforcement shall
be one third the clear span length and centered in positive moment area.
B. In negative moment areas, bonded reinforcement shall extend one sixth the
clear span on each side of support.
C. Where bonded reinforcement is provided for design moment strength in
accordance with Section 2618 (h) 3, or for tensile stress conditions in
accordance with Section 2618 (j) 3, minimum length also shall conform to
provisions of Section 2612.
(k) Frames and Continuous Construction. [18.10] I. Frames and continu-
ous construction of prestressed concrete shall be designed for satisfactory per-
formance at service load conditions and for adequate strength.
2. Performance at service load conditions shall be determined by elastic
analysis, considering reactions, moments, shears, and axial forces produced by
prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation, restraint
of attached structural elements and foundation settlement.
3. Moments to be used to compute required strength shall be the sum of the

moments due to reactions induced by prestressing (with a load factor of 1.0) and
the moments due to factored loads including redistribution as permitted in Section
2618(k)4.
4. Redistribution of negative moments due to gravity loads in continuous
prestressed flexural members. A. Where bonded reinforcement is provided at
supports in accordance with Section 2618 (j) 2, negative moments calculated by
478
1988 EDITION 2618
elastic theory for any assumed loading arrangement may be increased or de-
creased by not more than
d
20[ 1- wp + dp(w -w} ]percent
0.36,81
B. The modified negative moments shall be used for calculating moments at
sections within spans for the same loading arrangement.
C. Redistribution of negative moments shall be made only when the section at
which moment is reduced is so designed that w , [wJ' + d!dp (w- w')], or
[wpw + dldP (ww- w'wll. whichever is applicable, IS not greater than 0.24
.Bl·
(l) Compression Members-Combined Flexure and Axial Loads. [18.11)
I. Prestressed concrete members subject to combined flexure and axial load, with
or without nonprestressed reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the strength
design methods of this code for members without prestressing. Effects of pre-
stress, creep, shrinkage and temperature change shall be included.
2. Limits for reinforcement of prestressed compression members. A.
Members with average prestress fpc less than 225 psi shall have minimum rein-
forcement in accordance with Sections 2607 (k) and 2609 (j) I and 2 for columns,
or Section 2614 (d) for walls.
B. Except for walls, members with average prestress fpc equal to or greater than
225 psi shall have all prestressing tendons enclosed by spirals or lateral ties in
(i) Spirals shall conform to Section 2607 (k) 2.
(ii) Lateral ties shall be at least No. 3 in size or welded wire fabric of
equivalent area, and spaced vertically not to exceed 48 tie bar or wire
diameters or least dimension of compression member.
(iii) Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie spacing above top
of footing or slab in any story, and shall be spaced as provided herein to not
more than half a tie spacing below lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above.
(iv) Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a column, ties may be
terminated not more than 3 inches below lowest reinforcement in such
beams or brackets.
C. For walls with average prestress fpc equal to or greater than 225 psi,
minimum reinforcement required by Section 2614 (d) may be waived where
structural analysis shows adequate strength and stability.
(m) Slab Systems. [18.12) I. Factored moments and shears in prestressed slab
systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction shall be determined in
accordance with provisions of Section 2613 (i), excluding Sections 2613 (i) 7 D
and E), or by more detailed design procedures.
479
2. Moment strength of prestressed slabs at every section shall be at least equal

to the required strength considering Sections 2609 (c), 2609 (d), 2618 (k) 3 and
2618 (k) 4. Shear strength of prestressed slabs at columns shall be at least equal to
the required strength considering Sections 2609 (c), 2609 (d), 2611 (b), 2611 (I) 2
and 2611 (m) 2 D.
3. At service load conditions, all serviceability limitations, including speci-
fied limits on deflections, shall be met, with appropriate consideration of the
factors listed in Section 2618 (k) 2.
4. For normal live loads and load uniformly distributed, spacing of prestress-
ing tendons or groups of tendons in one direction shall not exceed eight times the
slab thickness, nor 5 feet. Spacing of tendons also shall provide a minimum
average prestress, after allowance for all prestress losses, of 125 psi on the slab
section tributary to the tendon or tendon group. A minimum of two tendons shall
be provided in each direction through the critical shear section over columns.
Special consideration of tendon spacing shall be provided for slabs with concen-
trated loads.
5. In slabs with unbonded prestressing tendons, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with Sections 2618 G) 3 and 4.
(n) Tendon Anchorage Zones. [18.13] 1. Reinforcement shall be provided
where required in tendon anchorage zones to resist bursting, splitting and spalling
forces induced by tendon anchorages. Regions of abrupt change in section shall
be adequately reinforced.
2. End blocks shall be provided where required for support bearing or for
distribution of concentrated prestressing forces.
3. Posttensioning anchorages and supporting concrete shall be designed to
resist maximum jacking force for strength of concrete at time of prestressing.
4. Posttensioning anchorage zones shall be designed to develop the guaranteed
ultimate tensile strength of prestressing tendons using a strength reduction factor
</>of 0.90 for concrete.
(o) Corrosion Protection for Unbonded Prestressing Tendons. [18.14]
1. Unbonded tendons shall be completely coated with suitable material to ensure
corrosion protection.
2. Tendon wrapping shall be continuous over entire length to be unbonded,
and shall prevent intrusion of cement paste or loss of coating materials during
concrete placement.
(p) Posttensioning Ducts. [18.15) I. Ducts for grouted or unbonded tendons
shall be mortar-tight and nonreactive with concrete, tendons or filler materials.
2. Ducts for grouted single wire, strand or bar tendons shall have an inside
diameter at least IJ4 inch larger than tendon diameter.
3. Ducts for grouted multiple wire, strand or bar tendons shall have an inside
cross-sectional area at least two times net area of tendons.
4. Ducts shall be maintained free of water if members to be grouted are
exposed to temperatures below freezing prior to grouting.
480
1988 EDITION 2618
(q) Groutfor Bonded Prestressing Thndons. [ 18 .16] I. Grout shall consist of

portland cement and water; or portland cement, sand and water.
2. Materials for grout shall conform to the following:
A. Portland cement shall conform to Section 2603 (c).
B. Water shall conform to Section 2603 (e).
C. Sand, if used, shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 24-21 except that
gradation may be modified as necessary to obtain satisfactory workability.
D. Admixtures conforming to Section 2603 (g) and known to have no injuri-
ous effects on grout, steel or concrete may be used. Calcium chloride shall
not be used.
3. Selection of group proportions. A. Proportions of materials for grout shall
be based on either of the following:
(i) Results of tests on fresh and hardened grout prior to beginning grouting
operations, or
(ii) Prior documented experience with similar materials and equipment and
under comparable field conditions.
B. Cement used in the work shall correspond to that on which selection of grout
proportions was based.
C. Water content shall be minimum necessary for proper pumping of grout;
however, water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 by weight.
D. Water shall not be added to increase grout flowability that has been de-
creased by delayed use of grout.
4. Mixing and pumping grout. A. Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable
of continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that will produce uniform distri-
bution of materials, passed through screens, and pumped in a manner that will
completely fill tendon ducts.
B. Temperature of members at time of grouting shall be above 35"F and shall be
maintained above 35"F until field-cured 2-inch cubes of grout reach a minimum
compressive strength of 800 psi.
C. Grout temperatures shall not be above 90°F during mixing and pumping.
(r) Protection for Prestressing Thndons. [ 18 .17] Burning or welding opera-
tions in vicinity of prestressing tendons shall be carefully performed so that
tendons are not subject to excessive temperatures, welding sparks or ground
currents.
(s) Application and Measurement of Prestressing Force. [18.18] I. Pre-

stressing force shall be determined by both of the following methods:
A. Measurement of tendon elongation. Required elongation shall be deter-
mined from average load-elongation curves for prestressing tendons used.
B. Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gauge or load cell or by use of a
calibrated dynamometer.
Cause of any difference in force determination between A and B that exceeds 5
percent shall be ascertained and corrected.
481
2. Where transfer of force from bulkheads of pretensioning bed to concrete is

accomplished by flame cutting prestressing tendons, cutting points and cutting
sequence shall be predetermined to avoid undesired temporary stresses.
3. Long lengths of exposed pretensioned strand shall be cut near the member to
minimize shock to concrete.
4. Total loss of prestress due to unreplaced broken tendons shall not exceed 2
percent of total prestress.
(t) Posttensloning Anchorages and Couplers. [18.19]1. Anchorages and
couplers for bonded and unbonded prestressed tendons shall develop at least 95
percent of the specified breaking strength of the tendons, when tested in an
unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set.
For bonded tendons, anchorages and couplers shall be located so that I 00
percent of the specified breaking strength of the tendons shall be developed at
critical sections after tendons are bonded in the member.
2. Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by the building official and
enclosed in housing long enough to permit necessary movements.
3. In unbonded construction subject to repetitive loads, special attention shall
be given to the possibility of fatigue in anchorages and couplers.
4. Anchorages, couplers and end fittings shall be permanently protected
against corrosion.
Shells and Folded Plates [Chapter 19]

f'c ~ specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
v'J'; ~ square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
.{y ~ specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement, psi.
Ec ~ modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. See Section 2608 (f).
h ~ thickness of shell or folded plate, inches.
<I> ~ strength reduction factor.
(b) Scope and Definitions. [ 19 .I] Provisions of Section 2619 shall apply to
thin-shell and folded-plate concrete structures, including ribs and edge members.
All provisions of Chapter 26 not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with
provisions of Section 2619, shall apply to thin-shell structures.
THIN SHELLS are three-dimensional spatial structures made up of one or
more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses are small compared to their
other dimensions. Thin shells are characterized by their three-dimensional load-
carrying behavior which is determined by the geometry of their forms, by the
manner in which they are supported and by the nature of the applied load.
FOLDED PLATES are a special class of shell structures formed by joining
flat, thin slabs along their edges so as to create a three-dimensional spatial
structure.
RIBBED SHELLS are spatial structures with material placed primarily along
482
1988 EDITION 2619
certain preferred rib lines, with the area between the ribs filled with thin slabs or
left open.
AUXILIARY MEMBERS are ribs or edge beams which serve to strengthen,
stiffen and/or support the shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly with the
shell.
ELASTIC ANALYSIS is an analysis of deformations and internal forces
based on equilibrium, compatibility of strains and assumed elastic behavior and
representing to suitable approximation the three-dimensional action of the shell
together with its auxiliary members.
INELASTIC ANALYSIS is an analysis of deformations and internal forces
based on equilibrium, nonlinear stress-strain relations for concrete and reinforce-
ment, consideration of cracking and time-dependent effects and compatibility of
strains. The analysis shall represent to suitable approximation the three-
dimensional action of the shell together with its auxiliary members.
EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS is an analysis procedure based on the mea-
surement of deformations and!or strains of the structure or its model; experimen-
tal analysis may be based on either elastic or inelastic behavior.
(c) Analysis and Design. [19.2] I. Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis
for determining internal forces and displacements of thin shells. This behavior
may be established by computations based on an analysis of the uncracked
concrete structure in which the material is assumed linearly elastic, homogeneous
and isotropic. Poisson's ratio of concrete may be assumed equal to zero.
2. Inelastic analysis may be used where it can be shown that such methods
provide a safe basis for design.
3. Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and external loads shall be made
to ensure consistency of results.
4. Experimental or numerical analysis procedures may be used where it can be
shown that such procedures provide a safe basis for design.
5. Approximate methods of analysis not satisfying compatibility of strains
either within the shell or between the shell and auxiliary members may be used
where it can be shown that such methods provide a safe basis for design.
6. In prestressed shells, the analysis must also consider behavior under loads
induced during prestressing, at cracking load and at factored load. Where pre-
stressing tendons are draped within a shell, design shall take into account force
components on the shell resulting from tendon profile not lying in one plane.
7. The thickness h of a thin shell and its reinforcement shall be proportioned
for the required strength and serviceability. All elements shall be proportioned by
the same method, using either the strength design method of Section 2608 (b) or
the alternate design method of Section 2626.
8. Shell design shall investigate and preclude the possibility of general or local
instability.
9. Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions
of this code. The design method selected for shell elements under Section 2619 (c)
7 shall also be used for auxiliary members. A portion of the shell equal to the
483
flange width specified in Section 2608 (k) may be assumed to act with the
auxiliary member. In such portions of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular
to the auxiliary member shall be at least equal to that required for the flange of aT-
beam by Section 2608 (k) 5,
(d) Design Strength of Materials. [19, 3] L Specified compress ivc strength of

concrete f' c at 28 days shall be not less than 3000 psi.
2. Specified yield strength of non prestressed reinforcement,(y shall not exceed
60,000 psi.
(e) Shell Reinforcement. [19.4] I, Shell reinforcement shall be provided to

resist tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to resist bending and
twisting moments, to control shrinkage and temperature cracking and as special
reinforcement as shell boundaries, load attachments and shell openings.
2. Membrane reinforcement shall be provided in two or more directions in all
parts of the shelL
3, The area of shell reinforcement at any section as measured in two ortho-
gonal directions shall not be less than the slab shrinkage or temperature reinforce-
ment required by Section 2607 (m).
4. Reinforcement required to resist shell membrane forces shall be provided so
that the design strength in every direction shall be at least equal to the component
of the principal membrane forces in the same direction due to factored loads,
5. The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforce-
ment will yield before crushing of concrete in compression can take place.
6. In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement shall, if practical, be
placed in the general directions of the principal tensile membrane forces. Where
this is not practical, membrane reinforcement may be placed in two or more
component directions,
7, If the direction of reinforcement varies more than 10 degrees from the
direction of principal tensile membrane force, the amount of reinforcement may
have to be increased to limit the width of possible cracks at service load levels.
8. Where the magnitude of the principal tensile membrane stress within the
shell varies greatly over the area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the
total tension may be concentrated in the regions of largest tensile stress where it
can be shown that this provides a safe basis for design. However, the ratio of shell
reinforcement in any portion of the tensile zone shall be not less than 0. 0035 based
on the overall thickness of the shell,
9, Reinforcement required to resist shell bending moments shall be propor-
tioned with due regard to the simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the
same location. Where shell reinforcement is required in only one face to resist
bending moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both surfaces of the shell
even though a reversal of bending moments is not indicated by the analysis.
10. Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not be spaced farther apart than
18 inches, nor five times the shell thickness. Where the principal membrane
tensile stress on the gross concrete area due to factored loads exceeds 4 </> V]";,
484
1988EDinON 2619-2620
reinforcement shall not he spaced farther apart than three times the shell thick-
ness.
II. Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell and supporting members or
edge members shall be anchored in or extended through such members in accord-
ance with the requirements of Section 2612, except that the minimum develop-
ment length shall he 1.2 dbut not less than 18 inches.
12. Splice development lengths of shell reinforcement shall he governed by
the provisions of Section 2612, except that the minimum splice length of tension
bars shall be 1.2 times the value required by Section 2612 but not less than 18
inches. The number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall he kept to a
practical minimum. Where splices are necessary, they shall be staggered at least ld
with not more than one third of the reinforcement spliced at any section.
(f) Construction. [19.5] l. When removal offormwork is based on a specific
modulus of elasticity of concrete because of stability or deflection considerations,
the value of the modulus of elasticity Ec shall be determined from flexural tests of
field-cured beam specimens. The number of test specimens, the dimensions of
test beam specimens and test procedures shall he specified.
2. The tolerances for the shape of the shell shall be specified. If construction
results in deviations from the shape greater than the specified tolerances, an
analysis of the effect of the deviations shall be made and any required remedial
actions shall be taken to ensure safe behavior.
Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures (Chapter 20]

a = maximum deflection under test load of member relative to a line joining
the ends of the span, or of the free end of cantilever relative to its
support, inches.
D dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
1, = span of member under load test (shorter span of flat slabs and of slabs
supported on four sides). Span of member, except as provided in
Section 2620 (e) 9, is distance between centers of supports or clear
distance between supports plus depth of member, whichever is smaller,
inches.
L = live loads, or related internal moments and forces.
(b) Strength Evaluation-General. [20.1] If doubt develops concerning the

safety of a structure or member, the building official may order a structural
strength investigation by analyses or by means of load tests, or by a combination
of analyses and load tests.
(c) Analytical Investigations-General. [20.2] If strength evaluation is by
analysis, a thorough field investigation shall be made of dimensions and details of
members, properties of materials and other pertinent conditions of the structure as
actually built.
485
Analyses based on investigation required by this subsection shall satisfy the

building official that the load factors meet requirements and intent of this code.
See Section 2620 (g).
(d) Load Thsts-General. [20.3) If strength evaluation is by load tests, a

qualified engineer acceptable to the building official shall control such tests.
A load test shall not be made until that portion of the structure to be subject to
load is at least 56 days old. When the owner of the structure, the contractor and all
involved parties mutually agree, the test may be made at an earlier age.
When only a portion of the structure is to be load tested, the questionable
portion shall be load tested in such a manner as to adequately test the suspected
source of weakness.
Forty-eight hours prior to application of test load, a load to simulate effect of
that portion of the dead loads not already acting shall be applied and shall remain
in place until all testing has been completed.
(e) Load Tests of Flexural Members. [20.4] I. When flexural members,

including beams and slabs, are load tested, the additional provisions of this
subsection shall apply.
2. Base readings (datum for deflection measurements) shall be made immedi-
ately prior to application of test load.
3. That portion of the structure selected for loading shall be subject to a total
load, including dead loads already acting, equivalent to 0.85 (1.4D + 1.7L).
Determination of L shall include live load reductions as permitted by Section
2306.
4. Test load shall be applied in not less than four approximately equal incre-
ments without shock to the structure and in such a manner as to avoid arching of
loading materials.
5. After test load has been in position for 24 hours, initial deflection readings
shall be taken.
6. Test load shall be removed immediately afterinitial deflection readings, and
final deflection readings shall be taken 24 hours after removal of the test load.
7. If the portion of the structure tested shows visible evidence of failure, the
portion tested shall be considered to have failed the test and no retesting of the
previously tested portion shall be permitted.
8. If the portion of the structure tested shows no visible evidence of failure, the
following criteria shall be taken as indication of satisfactory behavior:
A. If measured maximum deflection a of a beam, floor or roof is less than 1,2/
20,000h.
B. If measured maximum deflection a of a beam, floor or roof exceeds 1,2/
20,000h, deflection recovery within 24 hours after removal of the test load
shall be at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection for nonprestressed
concrete, or 80 percent for prestressed concrete.
9. In Sections 2620 (e) 8 A and B, 11 for cantilevers shall be taken as two times
486
1988 EDITION 2620-2621
the distance from support to cantilever end, and deflection shall be adjusted for
any support movement.
10. Nonprestressed concrete construction failing to show 75 percent recovery
of deflection as required by Section 2620 (e) 8 B may be retested not earlier than
72 hours after removal of the first test load. The portion of the structure tested
shall be considered satisfactory if:
A. The portion of the structure tested shows no visible evidence of failure in
the retest, and
B. Deflection recovery caused by second test load is at least 80 percent of the
maximum deflection in the second test.
II. Prestressed concrete construction shall not be retested.
(f) Members Other Than Flexural Members. [20.5] Members other than
flexural members preferably shall be investigated by analysis.
(g) Provision for Lower Load Rating. [20.6] If structure under investigation
does not satisfy conditions or criteria of Section 2620 (c), (e) 8 or (e) 10, the
building official may approve a lower load rating for that structure based on
results of the load test or analysis.
(h) Safety. [20.7] Load tests shall be conducted in such a manner as to provide
for safety of life and structure during the test.
No safety measures shall interfere with load test procedures or affect results.
Shotcrete
Sec. 2621. (a) General. Shotcrete shall be defined as mortar or concrete
pneumatically projected at high velocity onto a surface. Except as specified in this
section, shotcrete shall conform to the regulations of this chapter for plain
concrete or reinforced concrete.
(b) Proportions and Materials. Shotcrete proportions shall be selected that
allow suitable placement procedures using the delivery equipment selected and
shall result in finished in-place hardened shotcrete meeting the strength require-
ments of this code.
(c) Aggregate. Coarse aggregate, if used, shall not exceed 3/4 inch.
(d) Reinforcement. The maximum size of reinforcement shall be No.5 bars
unless it can be demonstrated by preconstruction tests that adequate encasement
of larger bars can be achieved. When No.5 or smnller bars are used, there shall
be a minimum clearance between parallel reinforcement bars of 2112 inches.
When bars larger than No.5 are permitted, there shall be a minimum clearance
between parallel bars equal to six diameters of the bars used. When two curtains
of steel are provided, the curtain nearest the nozzle shall have a spacing equal to
12 bar diameters and the remaining curtain shall have a minimum spacing of six
bar diameters.
Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the noncontact lap splice method
with at least 2 inches clearance between bars. The building official may permit
the use of contact lap >plices when necessary for the support of the reinforcing
487
provided it can be demonstrated by means of preconstruction testing, that ade-

quate encasement of the bars at the splice can be achieved and provided that the
splices are placed so that a line through the center of the two spliced bars is
perpendicular to the surface of the shotcrete work.
Shotcrete shall not be applied to spirally tied columns.
(e) Preconstruction Tests. When required by the building official a test panel
shall be shot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested prior to commencement
of the project. The sample panel shall be representative of the project and
simulate job conditions as closely as possible. The panel thickness and reinforc-
ing shall reproduce the thickest and most congested area specified in the struc-
tural design.lt shall be shot at the same angle, using the same nozzleman and with
the same concrete mix design that will be used on the project.
(f) Rebound. Any rebound or accumulated loose aggregate shall be removed
from the surfaces to be covered prior to placing the initial or any succeeding
layers of shotcrete. Rebound shall not be reused as aggregate.
(g) Joints. Except where permitted herein, unfinished work shall not be
allowed to stand for more than 30 minutes unless all edges are sloped to a thin
edge. Before placing additional material adjacent to previously applied work,
sloping and square edges shall be cleaned and wetted.
(h) Damage. An in-place shotcrete which exhibits sags or sloughs, segrega-
tion, honeycombing, sand pockets or other obvious defects shall be removed and
~ replaced.
(i) Curing. During the curing periods specified herein, shotcrete shall be
maintained above 40°F. and in moist condition. In initial curing, shotcrete shall
be kept continuously moist for 24 hours after placement is complete. Final curing
shall continue for seven days after shotcreting, for three days if high-early-
strength cement is used, or until the specified strength is obtained. Final curing
shall consist of a fog spray or an approved moisture-retaining cover or mem-
brane.ln sections of a depth in excess of I2 inches,final curing shall be the same
as that for initial curing.
(j) Strength Test. Strength test for shotcrete shall be made in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 26-/0 by an approved agency on specimens which are
representative of work and which have been water soaked for at least 24 hours
prior to testing. When the maximum size aggregate is larger than 3fs inch,
specimens shall consist of not less than three 3-inch-diameter cores or 3 inch
cubes. When the maximum size aggregate is 3fs inch or smaller, specimens shall
consist of not less than three 2 -inch-diameter cores or 2 -inch cubes. Specimens
shall be taken in accordance with one of the following:
1. From the inplace work: taken at least once each shift nor less than one for
each 50 cubic yards of shotcrete; or
2. From test panels: made not less than once each shift nor less than one for
each 50 cubic yards of shotcrete placed. When the maximum size aggregate is
larger than 3f8 inch, the test panels shall have a minimum dimension of I 8 by I 8
inches. When the maximum size aggregate is 3Js inch or smaller, the test panels
488
1988 EDITION 2621-2622
shall have a minimum dimension of 12 by 12 inches. Panels shall be gunned in the

same position as the work. during the course of the work and by nozzlemen doing
the work. The condition under which the panels are cured shall be the same as the
work.
The average of three cores from a single panel shall be equal to or exceed 0.85
f~ with no single core less than 0. 75 f~. The average of three cubes taken from a
single panel must equal or exceed!~ with no individual cube less than 0.88 f~. To
check testing accuracy, locations represented by erratic core strengths may be
retested.
(k) Inspections. 1. During placement. When shotcrete is usedfor columns and
beams, a special inspector is required by Section 306 (a) 12. The special inspector
shall provide continuous inspection of the placement of the reinforcement and
shotcreting and shall submit a statement indicating compliance with the plans and
specifications.
2. Visual examination for structural soundness of in-place shotcrete. Com-
pleted shotcrete work shall be checked visually for reinforcing bar embedment,
voids, rock pockets, sand streaks and similar deficiencies by examining a mini-
mum of three 3 -inch cores taken from three areas chosen by the design engineer
which represent the worst congestion ofreinforcing bars occurring in the project.
Extra reinforcing bars may be added to noncongested areas and cores may be
taken from these areas. The cores shall be examined by the special inspector and a
report submitted to the building official prior to final approval of the shotcrete.
EXCEPTION: Slwtcrete work fully supported on earth, minor repairs and
when, in the opinion of the building official, no special hazard exists.
(I) Equipment. The equipment used in preconstruction testing shall be the
same equipment used in the work requiring such testing, unless substitute equip-
ment is approved by the building official.
Plain Concrete
Sec. 2622. (a) General. Plain concrete, other than fill, shall have a minimum
ultimate compressive strength at 28 days of 2000 pounds per square inch, and
material proportioning and placing shall conform to the requirements of this
chapter. Concrete made with lightweight aggregates may be used with strengths
less than 2000 pounds per square inch if it has been shown by tests or experience
to have sufficient strength and durability.
Provisions shall be made to care for temperature and shrinkage stresses either
by use of reinforcement or by means ofjoints.
Plain concrete construction shall conform to the detailed minimum require-
ments specified in this chapter.
Plain concrete shall not be used in Seismic Zone No.2, 3 or4. ~
EXCEPTION: Plain concrete may he used for footings of Group R, Division 3
Occupancies constructed in accordance with Section 2517.
(b) Wall Thickness. Except where justifying data are submitted, the thickness
ofplain concrete walls shall be not less than 6 inches and the ratio of unsupported
height or length (whichever is the lesser) to thickness shall be not greater than 22.
489
(c) Design. Plain concrete walls shall be designed to withstand all vertical and
horizontal loads as specified in Chapter 23.
(d) Stresses. The allowable working stresses in plain concrete walls shall not
exceed the following percentages of ultimate strength:
1. Compression-.25f'c
2. Tension-1.6v'fc
3. Shear-.02f'c
Minimum Slab Thickness

Sec. 2623. The minimum thickness of concrete floor slabs supported directly
on the ground shall be not less than 3112 inches.
Anchorage to Concrete
Sec. 2624. (a) Service Load Design. Bolts and headed stud anchors shall be
solidly cast in concrete and the service load shear and tension shall not exceed the
values set forth in Table No. 26-F.
For combined tension and shear:
(P,IPY'3 + (V,!V,)5t3"" 1
WHERE:
P, = Applied service tension load.
P, = Table No. 26-F service tension load.
V, = Applied service shear load.
V, = Table No. 26-F service shear load.
(b) Strength Design. The factored loads on embedded anchor bolts and headed
studs shall not exceed the design strengths determined by Subsection 2624 (c).
In addition to the loadfactors in Section 2609 (c), a multiplier of2 shall be used
if special inspection is not provided or of 1.3 if it is provided. When anchors are
embedded in the tension zone of a member, the load factors in Section 2609 (c)
shall have a multiplier of 3 if special inspection is not provided or of 2 if it is
provided.
(c) Strength ofAnchors. The strength of concrete anchors shall be taken as the
average often tests, approved by the building official, for each concrete strength
and anchor size or calculated as the minimum of P, or <f>Pc in tension and V,or </>
Vc in shear when:
P, = 0.9Aof',
<f>Pc = </>'A VJ'; (2.8A, + 4 A,), when edge distance is less than embedment
length, reduce proportionately. For multiple edge distances
less than the embedment length, use multiple reductions.
V, = .75AJ',
<f>Vc = <f> 800 Ab 'A VF; when loaded toward an edge greater than 10 diameters
away.
490
1988 EDITION 2624
cf>Vc = </>2 Tr d.Z"A v'f'c when loaded toward an edge less than 10 diameters
away.
For groups of anchors the concrete design shear strength shall be taken as the
smallest of·
1. The strength of the weakest stud times the number of.•tuds.
2. The strength ofthe row ofstuds nearest the free edge in the direction ofshear
times the number of rows.
3. The strength of the row farthest from the free edge in the direction of shear.
For shear loading toward an edge less than 10 diameters away, or tension or
shear not toward an edge less than 4 diameters away, reinforcing sufficient to
carry the load shall be provided to prevent failure of the concrete in tension.ln no
case shall the edge distance be less than one-third the above. The bearing area of
headed anchors shall be at least one and one-halftimes the shank area for anchors
of not over 120,000 psi yield strength.
When tension and shear act simultaneously both the following shall be met:
(llr/J) ((P"IP)2 + (Vu!VYJ.;; I
(PufP,)2 + (V"IV,)2,.;; 1
WHERE.-
Ab = Area (in square inches) of bolt or stud. Must be used with the corres-
ponding steel properties to determine the weakest part of the assembly
in tension. In shear the insert leg need not be checked.
A, = The sloping area (in square inches) of an assumed failure surface. The
surface to be that of a cone or truncated pyramid radiating at a 45
degree slope from the bearing edge ofthe anchor or anchor group to the
surface.
For thin sections with anchor groups the failure surface shall be as-
sumed to follow the extension ofthis slope through to the far side rather
than truncate as in A,.
A, = The area (in square inches) of the flat bottom of the truncated pyramid
of an assumed concrete failure surface. When anchors in a group are
closer together than twice their embedded length, the failure surface
pyramid is assumed to truncate at the anchor bearing edge rather than
form separate cones.
d, : Distance from the anchor axis to the free edge.
f'c : Concrete strength, 6000 psi limit for design.
f', : Ultimate tensile strength (in psi) of the bolt, stud or insert leg wires. For
A307 bolts or A108 studs may be assumed to be 60,000.
Pu Vu = Tensile, shear strength required due to factored loads (in pounds).
A = 1 for normal weight, 0.75 for "all lightweight" and 0.85 for "sand
lightweight" concrete.
cf> = Strength reduction factor = 0.65.
491
EXCEPTION: When the anchor is attached to or hooked around reinforcing

steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transfer forces to reinforcing steel
which is designed to distribute forces and avert sudden local failure 4> may be taken
as0.85.
Reinforced Concrete Structures Resisting Forces Induced by

Earthquake Motions [Appendix A]
Sec. 2625. (a) Notations. [A.O]
Ach = cross-sectional area of a structural member measured out-to-out of
transverse reinforcement, square inches.
Acp = area of concrete section, resisting shear, of an individual pier or hori-
zontal wall segment, square inches.
A" = net area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of
section in the direction of shear force considered, square inches.
Ag = gross area of section, square inches.
Aj = effective cross-sectional area within a joint {see Section 2625 (g) 3 A].
A,h = total cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement (including cross-
ties) within spacing, s, and perpendicular to dimension, he.
Av = total cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement within spacing, s, and
perpendicular to longitudinal axis of structural member, square inches.
b = effective compressive flange width of a structural member, inches.
d = effective depth of section.
db = bar diameter.
E = load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces.
f'c = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
fy = specified yield strength of reinforcement, psi.
fyh = specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement, psi.
h = overall thickness of structural member.
he = cross-sectional dimension of column core measured center-to-center of
confining reinforcement.
hw = height of entire wall (diaphragm) or of the segment of wall (diaphragm)
considered.
ld = development length for a straight bar.
ldh = development length for a bar with a standard hook as defined in
Formula (25-5).
10 = minimum length, measured from joint face along axis of structural
member, over which transverse reinforcement must be provided,
inches.
lw = length of entire wall (diaphragm) or of segment of wall (diaphragm)
considered in direction of shear force.
M,. = portion of slab moment balanced by support moment.
492
1988 EDITION 2625
s = spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the longitudinal

axis of the structural member, inches.
S0 maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement, inches.
V, = nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
V, = design shear force determined from Section 2625 (h) 1 A or 8.
v. = nominal shear strength.
v. factored shear force at section.
o:, coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to
wall strength.
p = ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement = A,!bd.
p, ratio of total reinforcement area to cross-sectional area of column.
Pn ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to
plane of A,.,.
p, = ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core volume confined by
the spiral reinforcement (measured out-to-out).
p, = A,,IA,v; where A, is the projection on A,, of area of distributed shear
reinforcement crossing the plane of A,v·
cJ> = strength reduction factor.
(b) Definitions. [A. I) For the purposes of this section, certain terms are
defined as follows:
BASE OF STRUCTURE. See Section2312 (b).
CONFINED CORE is the area within the core defined by h,.
CROSSTIE is a continuous bar having a 135-degree hook with at least a six·
diameter extension at one end and a 90-degree hook with at least a six-diameter
extension at the other end. The hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal bars.
DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS are combinations of factored loads and
forces specified in Sections 2609 (c) and 2625 (c) 4.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR WITH A STANDARD HOOK
is the shortest distance between the critical section (where the strength of the bar is
to be developed) and a tangent to the outer edge of the 90-degree hook.
FACTORED LOADS AND FORCES are the specified loads and forces
modified by the factors in Sections 2609 (c) and 2625 (c) 4.
HOOP is a closed tie or continuous wound tie, the ends of which have 135-
degree hooks with six-diameter extensions, that encloses the longitudinal rein-
forcement.
IMRFS is an intermediate moment-resisting space frame conforming to the it
provisions of Section 2625 (k). ~
LIGHTWEIGHT-AGGREGATE CONCRETE is "all-lightweight" or
"sanded-lightweight" aggregate concrete made with lightweight aggregates con-
forming to Section 2603 (d).
493
@ SEISMIC HOOK is a 135 -degree bend with a six-bar-diameter, but not less
I
.
.
than 3-inch, extension that engages the longitudinal reinforcement and projects
into the interior of the stirrup or hoop .
SHELL CONCRETE is concrete outside the transverse reinforcement con-
fining the concrete.
I SMRSF is a special moment-resisting space frame conforming to provisions of

Section 2625, as they apply to moment-resisting frames.
SPECIFIED LATERAL FORCES are lateral forces corresponding to the
appropriate distribution of the design base shear force prescribed by the governing
code for earthquake-resistant design.
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS are structural members, such as floor and
roof slabs, which transmit inertial forces to lateral-force resisting members.
STRUCTURAL TRUSSES are assemblages of reinforced concrete members
subjected primarily to axial forces.
STRUT is an element of a structural diaphragm used to provide continuity
around an opening in the diaphragm.
TIE ELEMENTS are elements which serve to transmit inertia forces and
prevent separation of such building components as footings and walls.
(c) General Requirements. [A.2] I. Scope. A. Section 2625 contains special

requirements for design and construction of reinforced concrete members of a
structure for which the design forces, related to earthquake motions, have been
determined on the basis of energy dissipation in the nonlinear range of response.
B. The provisions of Sections 260 I through 2617 shall apply except as modi-
fied by the provisions of Section 2625.
C. In Seismic Zones Nos. 0 and 1, the provisions of Section 2625 shall not
apply.
I
D. In Seismic Zone No. 2. reinforced concrete frames resisting forces induced
by earthquake motions shall be intermediate moment-resisting space frames
proportioned to satisfy only Section 2625 (k) in addition to the requirements of
Sections 2601 through2618.
E. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, all structural reinforced concrete members
shall satisfy Sections 2625 (c) through 2625 (i) in addition to the requirements of
Section 2601 through 2617.
F. A reinforced concrete structural system not satisfying the requirements of
this section may be used if it is demonstrated by experimental evidence and
analysis that the proposed system will have strength and toughness equal to or
exceeding those provided by a comparable monolithic reinforced concrete struc-
ture satisfying this section.
2. Analysis and proportioning of structural members. A. The interaction
of all structural and nonstructural members which materially affect the linear and
nonlinear response of the structure to earthquake motions shall be considered in
the analysis.
B. Rigid members assumed not to be a part of the lateral-force-resisting system
494
1988 EDITION 2625
may be used, provided their effect on the response ofthe system is considered and
accommodated in the structural design. Consequences of failure of structural and
nonstructural members which are not a part of the lateral-force-resisting system
shall also be considered.
C. Structural members below base of structure required to transmit to the
foundation forces resulting from earthquake effects shall also comply with the
requirements of Section 2625.
D. All structural members assumed not to be part of the lateral-force-resisting
I
system shall conform to Section 2625 (i).
3. Strength-reduction factors. Strength-reduction factors shall be as given in
Section 2609 (d), except for the following:
A. The shear strength reduction factor for walls, for topping slabs used as
diaphragms over precast concrete members and for structural members,
except joints, where their nominal shear strength is less than the shear
corresponding to development of their nominal flexural strength shall be ·
0.6. The shear strength reduction factor for joints shall be 0.85. •
B. The strength reduction factor for axial compression and flexure shall be 0.5
for all frame members with factored axial compressive forces exceeding
(A .f'!10) if the transverse reinforcement does not conform to Section
11
26:<5 (e) 4.
4. Load factors. For earthquake loading. the load factors given in Equations
(9-2) and (9-3) shall be modified to:
U = 1.4 (D + L + E)
U = 0.9D ± 1.4E
5. Concrete in members resisting earthquake-induced forces. A. Com-
pressive strengthf' c shall be not less than 3000 psi.
B. Compressive strength of lightweight-aggregate concrete used in design shall
not exceed 4000 psi. Lightweight-aggregate concrete with higher design com-
pressive strength may be used if demonstrated by experimental evidence that
structural members made with that lightweight-aggregate concrete provide
strength and toughness equal to or exceeding those of comparable members made
with normal-weighthag.~r~ghate c?nhcrete of the samd~ strdength. In nodcase sha!lthe
1
compressive strengt OJ zg twezg I concrete use m eszgn excee 6 000 psz.
~.
~
6. Reinforcement in members resisting earthquake-induced forces. Rein-
forcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in frame mem-
bers and in wall boundary members shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 26-4
for low alloy A 706. Billet steel A615 Grades 40 and 60 reinforcement may be used
in these members if (I) the actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed
the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi (retests shall not exceed this
value by more than an additional3000 psi), and (2) the ratio of the actual ultimate
tensile stress to the actual tensile yield strength is not less than I . 25. Reinforce-
ment required by design load combinations which include earthquake effect shall
notbeweldedexceptas specified in Sections 2625 (d) 2 0 and2625 (e) 3 B. When
495
reinforcing bars are to be welded, the bars shall comply with Uniform Building
Code Standard No. 26-4 for A 706 or A 615 bars. Welding shall comply with
Uniform Building Code Standard No. 26-8. Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts or
other similar elements to longitudinal reinforcing bars shall not be permitted.
(d) Flexural Members of Frames. [A.3] I. Scope. Requirements of Section
2625 (d) apply to frame members (I) resisting earthquake-induced forces, (2)
proportioned primarily to resist flexure, and (3) satisfying the following condi-
tions:
A. Factored axial compressive force on the member shall not exceed
(Agf'c/10).
B. Clear span for the members shall not be less than four times its effective
depth.
C. The width-to-depth ratio shall not be less than 0.3.
D. The width shall not be (I) less than 10 inches, and (2) more than the width
of the supporting member (measured on a plane perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the flexural member) plus distances on each side of the
supporting member not exceeding three fourths of the depth of the flexural
member.
2. Longitudinal reinforcement. A. At any section of a flexural member and
for the top as well as for bottom reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement shall
not be less than (200 b,.fl/fy). The reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed 0.025.
At least two bars shall be provided continuously both top and bottom.
B. Positive-moment strength at joint face shall be not less than one half of the
negative-moment strength provided at that face of the joint. Neither the negative
nor the positive-moment strength at any section along member length shall be less
than one-fourth the maximum moment strength provided at face of either joint.
C. Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be permitted only if hoop or
spiral reinforcement is provided over the lap length. Maximum spacing of the
transverse reinforcement enclosing the lapped bars shall not exceed d/4 or 4
inches. Lap splices shall not be used (I) within the joints, (2) within a distance of
twice the member depth from the face of joint, and (3) at locations where analysis
indicates flexural yielding caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
D. Welded splices and mechanical connections conforming to Sections 2612
(o) 3 A through D may be used for splicing, provided not more than alternate bars
in each layer of longitudinal reinforcement are spliced at a section and the center-
to-center distance between splices of adjacent bars is 24 inches or more measured
along the longitudinal axis of the frame member.
3. Transverse reinforcement. A. Hoops shall be provided in the following
regions of frame members:
(i) Over a length equal to twice the member depth measured from the face of
the supporting member toward midspan, at both ends of the flexural
members.
(ii) Over lengths equal to twice the member depth on both sides of a section
496
1988 EDITION 2625
where flexural yielding may occur in connection with inelastic lateral

displacements of the frame.
B. The first hoop shall be located not more than 2 inches from the face of a
supporting member. Maximum spacing of the hoops shall not exceed (I) d/4, (2)
eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bars, (3) 24 times the
diameter of the hoop bars, and (4) 12 inches.
C. Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars on the perimeter shall have
lateral support conforming to Section 2607 (k) 3 C.
D. Where hoops are not required, stirrups with 135-degree seismic hooks shall
be spaced at no more than d/2 throughout the length of the member.
E. Hoops in flexural members may be made up of two pieces of reinforcement:
a stirrup having 135-degree hooks with six-diameter extensions anchored in the
confined core and a crosstie to make a closed hoop. Consecutive crossties shall
have their 90-degree hooks at opposite sides of the flexural member. If the
longitudinal reinforcing bars secured by the crossties are confined by a slab only
on one side of the flexural frame member, the 90-degree hooks of the cross ties
shall all be placed on that side.
(e) Frame Members Subjected to Bending and Axial Load. [A.4] I. Scope.
The requirements of this section apply to all members of the system resisting ~
gravity loads lry axial compression and to frame members which resist earth-
quake forces and have a factored axial compressive force exceeding ( A,f' JlO).
Frame members shall satisfy the following conditions:
A. The shortest cross-sectional dimension, measured on a straight line pass-
ing through the geometric centroid, shall be not less than 12 inches.
B. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular
dimension shall be not less than 0.4.
2. Minimum flexural strength of columns. A. Flexural strength of any
column proportioned to resist a factored axial compressive force exceeding
(A,f' cliO) shall satisfy Section 2625 (e) 2 B or C.
Lateral strength and stiffness of columns not satisfying Section 2625 (e) 2 B
shall be ignored in determining the calculated strength and stiffness of the
structure but shall conform to Section 2625 (i).
B. The flexural strengths of the columns shall satisfy Formula (25-1).
IMc~(6fs)"iM, ...................... .(25-1)
WHERE:
"£Me= sum of moments, at the center of the joint, corresponding to the
design flexural strength of the columns framing into that joint.
Column flexural strength shall be calculated for the factored axial
force, consistent with the direction of the lateral forces considered,
resulting in the lowest flexural strength.
sum of moments, at the center of the joint, corresponding to the
design flexural strengths of the girders framing into that joint.
497
Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column moments oppose the
beam moments. Formula (25-l) shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in
both directions in the vertical plane of the frame considered.
C. If Section 2625 (e) 2 B is not satisfied at a joint, columns supporting
reactions from that joint shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as
specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 over their full height.
3. Longitudinal reinforcement, A. The reinforcement ratio p8 shall be not
less than 0.01 and shall not exceed 0.06.
B. Lap splices are permitted only within the center half of the member length.
They shall be proportioned as Class A tension splices in accordance with Section
2612 and shall have transverse reinforcement over the full lap splice length in
accordance with Section 2625 (e) 4. Welded splices and mechanical connections
conforming to Sections 2612 (o) 3 A through D may be used for splicing the
reinforcement at any section, provided not more than alternate longitudinal bars
are spliced at a section and the distance between splices is 24 inches or more along
the longitudinal axis of the reinforcement.
4. Transverse reinforcement. A. Transverse reinforcement as specified be-
low shall be provided unless a larger amount is required by Section 2625 (h).
(i) The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop reinforcement, p,, shall not
be less than that indicated by Formula (25-2).
p, = 0.12f',lfyh ...................... (25-2)
and shall be not less than that required by Formula (I 0-5).
(ii) The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement shall not
be less than that given by Formulas (25-3) and (25-4).
A,h = 0.3 (shcf' cifyh) [(AgfA,h) - 1] .............. (25-3)

A,h = 0.12 (shcf' cifyh) ......... · · ......... (25-4)
(iii) Transverse reinforcement may be provided hy single or overlapping

hoops. Crossties of the same bar size and spacing as the hoops may be
used. Each end of the crosstie shall engage a peripheral longitudinal
reinforcing bar and be secured to the peripheral hoop. Consecutive
crossties shall be alternated end for end along the longitudinal reinforce-
ment.
(iv) If the design strength of member core satisfies the requirement of the
specified loading combinations including earthquake effect, Formulas
(25-3) and (10-5) need not be satisfied.
II
(v) Any area of a column which, for architectural purposes, extends more
than4 inches beyond the cmifined core shall have minimum reinforcement
as required for nonseismic columns as specified in Section 2625 (i).
(vi) Where the calculated point of contraflexure is not within the middle halfof
498
1988 EDITION 2825
the member clear height, provide transverse reinforcement as specified in

Section 2625 (e) 4 A (i) through 2625 (e) 4 (iii) over the full height of the
I
member.
B. Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced at distances not exceeding 4
inches.
C. Crossties or legs of overlapping hoops shall not be spaced more than 14
inches on center in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
structural member.
D. Transverse reinforcement in amount specified in Sections 2625 (e) 4 A
through C shall be provided over a length 10 from each joint face and on both sides
of any section where flexural yielding may occur in connection with inelastic
lateral displacements of the frame. The length 10 shall not be less than ( 1) the depth
of the member at the joint face or at the section where flexural yielding may occur,
(2) one sixth of the clear span of the member, and (3) 18 inches.
E. Columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff members, such as
walls, shall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in Sections
2625 (e) 4 A through C over their full height beneath the level at which the
discontinuity occurs if the factored axial compressive force in these members,
including earthquake effect, exceeds (A,f' cliO). The special transverse rein-
forcement shall be placed above the discontinuity for at least the development
length of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the column in accordance with
Section 2625 (g) 4. Where the column is supported on a wall the special trans·
verse reinforcement shall be placed below the discontinuity for the same develop-
ment length. Where the column terminates on a footing or mat special transverse
reinforcement shall be placed below the top of the footing or mat for the same
development length or the lead length of a ,·tandard hook.
F. At any section where the nominal strength, rf>P n• of the column is less than
the sum of the shears V e computed in accordance with Section 2625 (h) I for all the
beams framing into the column above the level under consideration, transverse
reinforcement as specified in Section 2625 (e) 4 A through 2625 (e) 4 C shall be I
provided. For beams framing into opposite sides of the column, the moment
components may be assumed to be of opposite sign. For the determination of the
nominal strength, rf>P n• of the column, these moments may be assumed to result
from the deformation of the frame in any one principal axis.
(f) Shear Walls, Diaphragms and Trusses. [A.5]1. Scope. The requirements
of this section apply to shear walls and trusses serving as parts of the earthquake-
force-resisting systems as well as to diaphragms, struts, ties, chords and collector
members which transmit forces induced by earthquake.
2. Reinforcement. A. The reinforcement ratio, p,, for shear walls shall be not
less than 0.0025 along the longitudinal and transverse axes. Reinforcement
spacing each way shall not exceed 18 inches. Reinforcement provided for shear
strength shall be continuous and shall be distributed across the shear plane.
B. At least two curtains of reinforcement shall be used in a wall if the in-plane
factored shear force assigned to the wall exceeds 2Ac,'I/J":.·
499
C. Structural-truss members, struts, ties and collector members with compres-

sive stresses exceeding 0.2 f' c shall have special transverse reinforcement, as
specified in Section 2625 (e) 4, over the total length of the member. The special
transverse reinforcement may be discontinued at a section where the calculated
compressive stress is less than 0.15 f' c· Stresses shall be calculated for the
factored forces using a linearly elastic model and gross-section properties of the
members considered.
D. All continuous reinforcement in shear walls, diaphragms, trusses, struts,
ties, chords and collector members shall be anchored or spliced in accordance
with the provisions for reinforcement in tension as specified in Section 2625 (g) 4.
I Splices in horizontal reinforcement shall be staggered. Splices in two curtains

where used shall not occur in the same location.
3. Boundary members for shear walls and diaphragms. A. Boundary
members shall be provided at boundaries and edges around openings of shear
walls and diaphragms for which the maximum extreme fiber stress, correspond-
ing to factored forces, including earthquake effect, exceeds 0.2 f' c unless the
entire wall or diaphragm member is reinforced to satisfy Sections 2625 (e) 4 A
through C. The boundary member may be discontinued where the calculated
compressive stress is less than 0.15 f' c· Stresses may be calculated for the factored
forces using a linearly elastic model and gross-section properties.
B. Boundary members, where required. shall have transverse reinforcement as
specified in Sections 2625 (e) 4 A through C.
C. Boundary members of shear walls shall be proportioned to carry all factored
gravity loads on the wall, including tributary loads and self-weight, as well as the
vertical force required to resist overturning moment calculated from factored
forces related to earthquake effects.
D. Boundary members of structural diaphragms shall be proportioned to resist
the sum of the compressive force acting in the plane of the diaphragm and the force
obtained from dividing the factored moment at the section by the distance between
the edges of the diaphragm at that section.
E. Transverse reinforcement in walls with boundary members shall be an-
chored within the confined core of the boundary member to develop the yield
stress in tension of the transverse reinforcement.
Reiriforcement terminating at the edges of shear walls with a minimum edge
reinforcement shall have a standard hook enclosing the edge reinforcement or the
edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in "U" stirrups ofthe same size and spacing
as transverse reinforcement.
I
F. Structural steel members conforming to Chapter 27 and encased monolithi-
cally in the walls at the edges may be used for boundary members, provided
. . adequate shear transfer is provided between the steel and the concrete.
4. Construction joints. All construction joints in walls and diaphragms shall
conform to Section 2606 (d), and contact surfaces shall be roughened as specified
in Section 2611 (h) 9.
5. Coupling Beams. Horizontal members with clear span-to-effective-depth
500
1988 EDITION 2625
ratio ( f.ld) of less than four andfactored shear force v. exceeding 4 v'f'c
bwCf and
which interconnect shear walls shall be provided with special shear reinforce-
ment as follows:
A. Symmetrical diagonal shear reinforcement shall be provided to extend
diagonally across the full length of the member and located within the confined
concrete core as specified in Section 2625 (d) 3.
B. The required area of one leg of the diagonal reinforcement Avd shall be not
less than
A vd = _ _v..::__
2/y sina
WHERE:
v. = factored shear force.
!y = yield stress of diagonal reinforcement.
a = angle between diagonal reinforcement and longitudinal axis of the
member.
C. Flexural strength contribution by the diagonal reinforcement shall be
included in the flexural capacity calculation of the member.
6. Discontinuous walls. Columns supporting discontinuous wall elements
shall be reinforced in accordance with Section2625 (e) 4 E.
7. A cast-in-place topping on a precast floor system may serve as the dia-
phragm, provided the cast-in-place topping acting alone is proportioned and
detailed to resist the design forces.
8. Minimum thickness of diaphragms-Diaphragms used to resist prescribed
lateral forces shall not be less than 2 inches thick. Topping slabs placed over
precast floor and roof elements shall not be less than 2 112 inches thick.
(g)JointsofFrames. [A.6) I. General requirements. A. Forces in longitudi-
nal beam reinforcement at the joint face shall be determined by assuming that the
stress in the flexural tensile reinforcement is 1.25 fy·
B. Strength of joint shall be governed by the appropriate strength reduction
factors specified in Section 2609 (d).
C. Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a column shall be extended
I
to the far face of the confined column core and anchored in tension according to
Section 2625 (g) 4 and in compression according to Section 2612.
D. Where longitudinal beam reinforcing bars extend through a joint, the
column depth in the direction of loading shall not be less than 20 times the
diameter of the largest longitudinal bar.
2. 'Iransversereinforcement. A. Transverse hoop reinforcement as specified
in Section 2625 (e) 4 shall be provided within the joint, unless the joint is confined
by structural members as specified in Section 2625 (g) 2 B.
B. Within the depth of the shallowest framing member, transverse reinforce-
ment equal to at least one half the amount required by Section 2625 (e) 4 A shall be
501
provided where members frame into all four sides of the joint and where each
member width is at least three fourths the column width.
C. Transverse reinforcement as required by Section 2625 (e) 4 shall be provided
through the joint to provide confinement for longitudinal beam reinforcement
outside the column core if such confinement is not provided by a beam framing
into the joint.
3. Shear strength. A. The nominal shear strength of the joint shall be assumed
not to exceed the forces specified below for normal-weight aggregate concrete.
Forconfinedjoint 20VfcAj
For others 15 Vfc Aj
WHERE:
i.: Aj = Minimum cross-sectional area within a joint in a plane parallel to the
ID, plane of reinforcement generating shear in the joint. Where a beam
~ frames into a support of larger width, effective width of the joint shall
!! not exceed the smaller of:
J
1 (i) Beam width plus overall depth of the joint.
(iii Beam width plus that portion of the column concentric to the beam
and projecting each side beyond the beam.
A joint is considered to be confined if members frame into all vertical faces of
the joint and if at least three quarters of each face of the joint is covered by the
framing member.
B. For lightweight-aggregate concrete, the nominal shear strength of the joint
shall not exceed three quarters of the limits given in Section 2625 (g) 3 A.
4. Development length for reinforcement in tension. A. The development
length, ldh• for a bar with a standard 90-degree hook in normal-weight aggregate
concrete shall be not less than Sdb, 6 inches, and the length required by Formula
(25-5).
ldh = fydbi65VJ'; ................. (25-5)
for bar sizes No. 3 through No. 11.
For lightweight-aggregate concrete, the development length for a bar with a
standard 90-degree hook shall not be less than !Odb, 7.5 inches, and 1.25 times
that required by Formula (25-5).
The 90-degree hook shall be located within the confined core of a column or of
a boundary member.
B. For bar sizes No.3 through No. 11, the development length, ld, fora straight
bar shall not be less that (1) 2.5 times the length required by Section 2625 (g) 4 A if
the depth ofthe concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar does not exceed 12 inches,
and (2) 3.5 times the length required by Section 2625 (g) 4 A if the depth of the
concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar exceeds 12 inches.
C. Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass through the confined core of a
column or of a boundary member. Any portion of the straight embedment length
not within the confined core shall be increased by a factor of 1.6.
502
1988 EDITION 2625
(h) Shear-strength Requirements. [A. 7) I. Design forces. A. Frame mem-

bers subjected primarily to bending. The design shear force V, shall be deter·
mined from consideration of the statical forces on the portion of the member
between faces of the joints. It shall be assumed that moments of opposite sign
corresponding to probable strength act at the joint faces and that the member is
loaded with the tributary gravity load along its span. Probable strength is the
nominal strength computed using an assumed tensile reinforcement stress of 1 .25
I
. ·.
h·
B. Frame members subjected to combined bending and axial load. The
design shear force V, shall be determined from the consideration of the maximum
forces that can be developed at the faces of the joints with the nominal moment
strengths calculated for the factored axial compressive force resulting in the
largest moment acting at the joint faces without strength reduction factors and
assuming that the stress in tensile reinforcement is equal to at least 1.25fy· The
moment need not exceed the moments that can be resisted by the flexural members
framing into the joint calculated in accordance with Section 2625 (h) 1..
C. Shear walls, diaphragms and trusses. The design shear force v. shall be
obtained from the lateral load analysis in accordance with the factored loads and
combinations specified in Section 2609 (c).
2. Transverse reinforcement In frame members. A. For determining the
required transverse reinforcement in frame members the quantity V, shall be
assumed to be zero if the factored axial compressive force including earthquake
effects is less than (A,/' ,120).
B. Stirrups or ties required to resist shear shall be hoops over lengths of
members as specified in Sections 2625 (d) 3, 2625 (e) 4 and 2625 (g) 2.
3. Shear strength of shear walls and diaphragms. A. The nominal shear
strength, v•.for shear walls and diaphragms shall be determined in accordance
with Formula (25-6) or Formula (25-7).
Where the ratio of(hwllw) is 2 or greater:

v. = A,. (2 VJ'; + P.fy) ................. (25-6)
Where the ratio of(h.jlw) is less than 2:
v. = A,.(a., VJ'; + P.fy) ................. (25-7)
a, varies linearly from 3.0 for hwllw = 1.5 to 2.0 for hwllw = 2.0
B. In Section 2625 (h) 3 A, value of ratio (h.jlw) used for determining v. for
segments of a wall or diaphragm shall be the largest of the ratios for the entire wall
(diaphragm) and the segment of wall (diaphragm) considered.
C. Walls (diaphragms) shall have distributed shear reinforcement providing
resistance in two orthogonal directions in the plane of the wall (diaphragm). If the
ratio (hwll,) does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement ratio Pv shall not be less than
reinforcement ratio Pn.
Pv = reinforcement ratio on plane of Acv.
503
D. Nominal shear strength of all wall piers sharing a common lateral force shall
not be assumed to exceed 8Acv Yl'c where Acv is the total cross-sectional area and
the nominal shear strength of any one of the individual wall piers shall not be
assumed to exceed I OAcp Yl'c where Acp represents the cross-sectional area of the
pier considered.
E. Nominal shear strength of horizontal wall segments shall not be assumed to
(
exceed lOAcp
wall segment.
Yl'c where Acp represents the cross-sectional area of a horizontal
I
i) Frame Members Not Part of the Lateral Force-resisting System. {A .8] All
frame members assumed not to be part of the lateral force-resisting system shall
conform to the requirements ofSection 2312 (h) 2 D. Such members shall satisfy
. the minimum reinforcement requirements ofSections 2607, 2610, 2611, 2625 (d)
2 A and2625 (j) 2 A.
(j) Inspection. For moment frames resisting design seismic load in structures
within Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, a specially qualified inspector who will
provide reports to the person responsible for the structural design shall provide
continuous inspection of the placement of the reinforcement and concrete and
shall submit a certificate indicating compliance with the plans and specifications.
(k) Requirements for Frames in Seismic Zone No. 2. [A.9] I. In Seismic
Zone No. 2, structural frames proportioned to resist forces induced by earthquake
motions shall satisfy the requirements of Section 2625 (k) in addition to the those
of Sections 2601 through 2618.
2. Reinforcement details in a frame member shall satisfy Section 2625 (k) 4 if
the factored compressive axial load for the member does not exceed (A sf'/ 10). If
the factored compressive axial load is larger, frame reinforcement details shall
satisfy Section 2625 (k) 5 unless the member has spiral reinforcement according
to Formula (10-5). If a two-way slab system without beams is treated as part of a
frame-resisting earthquake effect, reinforcement details in any span resisting
moments caused by lateral force shall satisfy Section 2625 (k) 6.
3. Design shear strength of beams, columns and two-way slabs resisting
earthquake effect shall not be less than either (I) the sum ofthe shear associated
with development of nominal moment strengths of the member at each restrained
end of the clear span and the shear calculated for gravity loads, or (2) the
maximum shear obtained from design load combinations which include earth-
quake effectE withE assumed to be twice that prescribed in Section 2312.
4. Beams. A. The positive-moment strength at the face of the joint shall be not
less than one-third the negative-moment strength provided at that face of the joint.
Neither the negative- nor the positive-moment strength at any section along the
length of the member shall be Jess than one-fifth the maximum moment strength
provided at the face of either joint.
B. At both ends of the member, stirrups shall be provided over lengths equal to
twice the member depth roeasured from the face of the supporting member toward
mid-span. The first stirrup shall be located at not more than 2 inches from the face
of the supporting member. Maximum stirrup spacing shall not exceed (I) d/4, (2)
504
1988EDITION 2626
eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (3) 24 times the
diameter of the stirrup bar, and (4) 12 inches.
C. Stirrups shall be placed at not more than d/2 throughout the length of the
member.
5. Columns. A. Maximum tie spacing shall not exceed s0 over a length 10
measured from the joint face. Spacing s0 shall not exceed (I) eight times the
diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, (2) 24 times the diameter of the
tie bar, (3) one half of the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the frame member,
and (4) 12 inches. Length 10 shall not be less than (I) one sixth ofthe clear span of
the member, (2) maximum cross-sectional dimension of the member, and (3) 18
inches.
B. The first tie shall be located at not more than s0 12 from the joint face.
C. Joint reinforcement shall conform to Section 2611 (m) I B.
D. Tie spacing shall not exceed twice the spacings s0 •
6. 1\vo-way slabs without beams. A. Factored slab moment at support
related to earthquake effect shall be determined for load combinations defined by
Formula (9-2) and (9-3). All reinforcement provided to resist M,, the portion of
slab moment balanced by support moment, shall be placed within the column strip
defined in Section 2613 (c) 1.
B. The fraction, defined by Formula (13-1), of moment M, shall be resisted by
reinforcement placed within the effective width specified in Section 2613 (d) 5.
C. Not less than one half of the reinforcement in the column strip at support
shall be placed within the effective slab width specified in Section 2613 (d) 5.
D. Not less than one fourth of the top reinforcement at the support in the column
strip shall be continuous throughout the span.
E. Continuous bottom reinforcement in the column strip shall be not less than
one third of the top reinforcement at the support in the column strip.
F. Not less than one half of all bottom reinforcement at midspan shall be
continuous and shall develop its yield strength at face of support as defined in
Section 2613 (h) 2 E.
G. At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top and bottom reinforcement at
support shall be developed at the face of support as defined in Section 2613 (h) 2 E.
Alternate Design Method (Appendix B]

Sec. 2626. (a) Notation. [B.O] The following symbols and notations apply
only to the provisions of this section:
A 8 = gross area of section, square inches.
A 1 = loaded area.
A2 = maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometri-
cally similar to and concentric with the loaded area.
Av = area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, square inches.
b = width of compression face of member, inches.
b 0 = perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings, inches.
505

d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension rein-
forcement, inches.
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. See Section 2608 (f).
E, = modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, psi. See Section 2608 (f).
f' c = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi. See Section 2604.
v'.f; = square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
fer = average splitting tensile strength oflightweight aggregate concrete, psi.
See Section 2604 (b).
f. = permissible tensile stress in reinforcement, psi.
!y = specified yield strength of reinforcement, psi. See Section 2603 (f).
M = design moment.
n = modular ratio of elasticity.
= E,!Ec.
N = design axial load normal to cross section occurring simultaneously with
V; to be taken as positive for compression, negative for tension and to
include effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage.
s = spacing of shear reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudinal
v = design shear stress.
vc = permissible shear stress carried by concrete, psi.
vh = permissible horizontal shear stress, psi.
V = design shear force at section.
f3c = ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
a = angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis of member.
p = ratio of tension reinforcement.
= A,fbd.
cf> = strength reduction factor. See Section 2626 (c).
(b) Scope. [B. I] Nonprestressed reinforced concrete members may be de-

signed using service loads (without load factors) and permissible service load
stresses in accordance with provisions of this section. For design of members not
covered by this section, appropriate provisions of this code shall apply.
All applicable provisions of this code for nonprestressed concrete, except
Section 2608 (e), shall apply to members designed by the alternate design
method. Flexural members shall meet requirements for deflection control in
Section 2609 (t) and requirements of Sections 2610 (e) through (h) of this code.
(c) General. [B.2] Load factors and strength reduction factors cf> shall be taken
as unity for members designed by the alternate design method.
Members may be proportioned for 75 percent of capacities required by other
parts of the section when considering wind or earthquake forces combined with
506
1988 EDITION 2626
other loads, provided the resulting section is not less than that required for the
combination of dead and live load.
When dead load reduces effects of other loads, members shall be designed for
85 percent of dead load in combination with the other loads.
(d) Permissible Service Load Stresses. [B .3] I. Stresses in concrete shall not
exceed the following:
A. Flexure.
Extreme fiber stress in compression 0.45 !',
B. Shear. t
Beams and one-way slabs and footings:
Shear carried by concrete, vc I.lv.f;:
Maximum shear carried by
concrete plus shear reinforcement vc + 4.4 v.r;:
Joists.*
Shear carried by concrete, vc 1.2 v.r;:
'IWo-way slabs and footings:
Shear carried by concrete, v,:j: (l + 21 f3c!v.f;:
but not greater than 2v.f;:
C. Bearing on load area** 0.3f'c
tFor more detailed calculation of shear stress carried by concrete vc and shear values for
lightweight aggregate concrete, see Section 2626 (i).
•Designed in accordance with Section 2608 (I) of this code.
tlf shear reinforcement is provided, see Sections 2626 (I) 4 and 2626 (I) 5.
**When the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, permissible
bearing stress on the loaded area may be increased by vA;/A 1 but not more than 2. When
the supporting surface is sloped or stepped, A2 may be taken as the area of the lower base
of the largest frustum of a right pyramid or cone contained wholly within the support and
having for its upper base the loaded area and having side slopes of l vertical to 2
horizontal.
2. Tensile stress in reinforcement/, shall not exceed the following:

A. Grade 40 or Grade 50 reinforcement 20,000 psi
B. Grade 60 reinforcement or greater and welded wire fabric
(smoothed or deformed) 24,000 psi
C. For flexural reinforcement, 3/s inch or less in diameter,
in one-way slabs of not more than 12-foot span 0.50 fy
but not greater than 30,000 psi
(e) Development and Splices of Reinforcement. [B.4] Development and
splices of reinforcement shall be as required in Section 2612. In satisfying
requirements of Section 2612 (I), M. shall be taken as computed moment capacity
assuming all positive moment tension reinforcement at the section to be stressed
to the permissible tensile stress .f,, and Vu shall be taken as unfactored shear force
at the section.
507
(f) Flexure. [B.5] For investigation of stresses at service loads, straight-line

theory (for flexure) shall be used with the following assumptions:
I. Strains vary linearly as the distance from the neutral axis, except for deep
flexural members with overall depth-span ratios greater than 2/5 for continuous
spans and 4/5 for simple spans, a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be consid-
ered. [See Section 2610 (h).]
2. Stress-strain relationship of concrete is a straight line under service loads
within permissible service load stresses.
3. In reinforced concrete members, concrete resists no tension.
4. Modular ratio, n = E,!Ec, may be taken as the nearest whole number (but
not less than 6). Except in calculations for deflections, value of n for lightweight
concrete shall be assumed to be the same as for normal-weight concrete of the
same strength.
5. In doubly reinforced flexural members, an effective modular ratio of2 E,!
Ec shall be used to transform compression reinforcement for stress computations.
Compressive stress in such reinforcement shall not exceed permissible tensile
stress.
(g) Compression Members With or Without Flexure. [B.6] Combined

flexure and axial load capacity of compression members shall be taken as 40
percent of that computed in accordance with provisions in Section 2610.
Slenderness effects shall be included according to requirements of Section
2610 (k) and 2610 (1). In Formulas (10-7) and (10-8), the term Pu shall be replaced
by 2.5 times the design axial load, and</> shall be taken equal to 1.0.
Walls shall be designed in accordance with Section 2614 with flexure and axial
load capacities taken as 40 percent of that computed using Section 2614. In
Formula(l4-l), <f>shallbetakenequalto 1.0.
(h) Shear and Thrsion. [B. 7] Design shear stress v shall be computed by:
v ........................ (26-1)
where Vis design shear force at section considered.

When the reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into
the end regions of a member, sections located less than a distance d from face of
support may be designed for the same shear vas that computed at a distance d.
Whenever applicable, effects of torsion, in accordance with provisions of
Section 2611, shall be added. Shear and torsional moment strengths provided by
concrete and limiting maximum strengths for torsion shall be taken as 55 percent
of the values given in Section 2611 .
(i) Shear Stress Carried by Concrete. 1. For members subject to shear and
flexure only, shear stress carried by concrete vc shall not exceed 1.1 Vf; unless a
more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section 2626 (i) 4.
508
1988 EDITION 2626
2. For members subject to axial compression, shear stress carried by concrete

vc shall not exceed 1.1 Vf'cunless a more detailed calculation is made in accord-
ance with Section 2626 (i) 5.
3. For members subject to significant axial tension, shear reinforcement shall
be designed to carry total shear, unless a more detailed calculation is made using
vc = 1.1 (I + 0.004 z) \lfc .. .............. (26-2)
where N is negative for tension. Quantity N!Ag shall be expressed in psi.

4. For members subject to shear and flexure only, vc may be computed by
Vc =
Vf'.
Jc + M .................. (26-3)
1300 Pw Vd
but vc shall not exceed 1.9 \lfc. Quantity Vd!M shall not be taken greaterthan 1.0
where M is design moment occurring simultaneously with Vat section consid-
ered.
z)vr:: ...............
5. For members subject to axial compression, vc may be computed by
vc = 1.1 ( 1 + 0.0006 (26-4)
Quantity N!Ag shall be expressed in psi.

6. Shear stresses carried by concrete vc apply to normal-weight concrete.
When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, one ofthe following modifications
shall apply:
A. When fer is specified and concrete is proportioned in accordance with
Section 2604 (c), fcr/6. 7 shall be substituted for "\/fc, but the value of
fc,J6. 7 shall not exceed "\/fc.
B. When fer is not specified, the value of "\lfc shall be multiplied by 0. 75 for
"all-lightweight" concrete and by 0.85 for "sand-lightweight" concrete.
Linear interpolation may be applied when partial sand replacement is used.
7. In determining shear stress carried by concrete vc, whenever applicable,
effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in restrained members shall be
considered and effects of inclined flexural compression in variable depth mem-
bers may be included.
(j) Shear Stress Carried by Shear Reinforcement- I. Types of shear rein-
forcement- Shear reinforcement may consist of:
A. Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member.
B. Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular to axis of member
making an angle of 45 degrees or more with longitudinal tension reinforce-
ment.
C. Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30
degrees or more with longitudinal tension reinforcement.
509
D. Combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.

E. Spirals.
2. Maximum yield strength. Design yield strength of shear reinforcement
shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
3. Anchorage of shear reinforcement. Stirrups and other bars or wires used
as shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from extreme compression
fiber and shall be anchored at both ends according to Section 2612 (p) to develop
design yield strength of reinforcement.
4. Spacing limits for shear reinforcement. Spacing of shear reinforcement
placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2 nor 24 inches.
Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be so spaced that
every 45-degree line, extending toward the reaction from middepth of member
d/2 to longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of
shear reinforcement.
When (v-v,.) exceeds 2 v'f'c, maximum spacing given by this subsection shall
be reduced by one half.
5. Minimum shear reinforcement. A minimum area of shear reinforcement
shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members where design shear
stress v is greater than one half the permissible shear stress vc carried by concrete,
except:
A. Slab and footings.
B. Concrete joist construction defined by Section 2608 (I) of this code.
C. Beams with total depth not greater than 10 inches, two and one-half times
thickness of flange or one half the width of web, whichever is greater.
Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of this subsection may be waived
if shown by test that required ultimate flexural and shear strength can be devel-
oped when shear reinforcement is omitted.
Where shear reinforcement is required by this subsection or by analysis,
minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be computed by
....................... (26-5)
where bw and s are in inches.

6. Design of shear reinforcement. Where design shear stress v exceeds shear
stress carried by concrete vc, shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with this subsection.
When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
(v-vc) bws
A, = f, ..................... (26-6)
When inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement,

(v-vc) bw.<
A,. = ---'--.::.__.::..__ .................. (26-7)
f, (sin a + cos a)
510
1988 EDITION 2826
When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel

bars, all bent up at the same distance from the support,
(v-v 0 ) b,.d
Av = ..................... (26-8)
j, sin a
where (v-vc) shall not exceed 1.6Vf'c.
When shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent -up bars or groups
of parallel bent-up bars at different distances from the support, required area shall
be computed by Formula (26-7).
Only the center three fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar
shall be considered effective for shear reinforcement.
When more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the same
portion of a member, required area shall be computed as the sum of the various
types separately. In such computations, vc shall be included only once.
Value of(v-vc) shall not exceed 4.4 Vf'c.
(k) Shear Friction. Where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a
given plane such as an existing or potential crack, an interface between dissimilar
materials, or an interface between two concretes cast at different times, shear
friction provisions of Section 2611 (h) may be applied with limiting maximum
stress for shear taken as 55 percentofthatgiven in Section 2611 (h) 5. Permissible
stress in shear friction reinforcement shall be that given in Section 2626 (d) 2.
(1) Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings. I. Shear capacity of slabs and
footings in the vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by the more
severe of two conditions:
A. Beam action for slab or footing with a critical section extending in a plane
across the entire width and located at a distance d from face of concentrated load or
reaction area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in accord-
ance with Section 2626 (h) through (j).
B. 1\.vo-way action for slab or footing with a critical section perpendicular to
plane of slab and located so that its perimeter is a minimum but need not approach
closer than dJ2 to perimeter of concentrated load or reaction area. For this
condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with Sections 2626
(I) 2 and 2626 (I) 3.
2. Design shear stress v shall be computed by
v
v = - - ........................ (26-9)
b0 d
where V and b0 shall be taken at the critical section defined in Section 2626 (I) I B.
3. Design shear stress v shall not exceed V0 given by Formula (26-10) unless
shear reinforcement is provided.
Vc = (I + ~c ) VJ'c ..................(26-10)
but vc shall not exceed 2 Vf'c.
f3c is the ratio of long side to short side of
concentrated load or reaction area. When lightweight aggregate concrete is used,
the modifications of Section 2626 (i) 6 shall apply.
511
4. If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is provided in accordance

with Section 2611 (I) 3, vc shall not exceed Vf'c, and v shall not exceed 3 Vf'c.
5. If shear reinforcement consisting ofsteel I or channel shapes (shear heads) is
provided in accordance with Section 2611 (I) 4 of this code, v on the critical
section defined in Section 2626 (I) I B shall not exceed 3.5 Vf'c and von the
critical section defined in Section 2611 (I) 4 G shall not exceed 2 Vf'c. In
Formulas (11-38) and (11-39), design shear force V shall be multiplied by 2 and
substituted for Vu.
(m) Special Provisions for Other Members. For design of deep flexural
members, brackets and corbels and walls, the special provisions of Section 2611
shall be used with shear strengths provided by concrete and limiting maximum
strengths for shear taken as 55 percent of the values given in Section 2611. In
Section 2611 (k) 6, the design axial load shall be multiplied by 1.2 if compression
and 2.0 if tension and substituted for Nu.
(n) Composite Concrete Flexural Members. For design of composite con-
crete flexural members, permissible horizontal shear stress vh shall not exceed 55
percent of the horizontal shear strengths given in Section 2617 (f) 4.
Reinforced Gypsum Concrete

Sec. 2627. (a) General. Reinforced gypsum concrete shall conform to U.B .C.
Standard No. 26-15.
Reinforced gypsum concrete shall develop the minimum ultimate compressive
strength in pounds per square inch set forth in Table No. 26-H when dried to
constant weight, with tests made on cylinders 2 inches in diameter and 4 inches
long or on 2 -inch cubes.
Tests, when required, shall follow the procedure set forth in U .B.C. Standard
No. 47-17.
For special inspection, see Section 306.
(b) Design. The minimum thickness of reinforced gypsum concrete shall be 2
inches except the thickness may be reduced to 1112 inches, provided all of the
following conditions are satisfied:
I. The overall thickness including the formboard is not less than 2 inches.
2. The clear span of the gypsum concrete between supports doe., not exceed 2
feet 9 inches.
3. Diaphragm action is not required.
4. The design live load does not exceed 40 pounds per square foot.
(c) Stresses. The maximum allowable unit working stresses in reinforced
gyp.mm concrete shall not exceed the values set forth in Table No. 26-1 except as
specified in Chapter 23. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No.
26-J.
Allowable shear in poured-in-place reinforced gypsum concrete diaphragms
using standard hot-rolled bulb tee subpurlins shall be determined by U.B.C.
Standard No. 26-15. (See Table No. 26-15-A in the standard for values for
commonly used roof systems.)
512
1988 EDITION 26-1
a.. ~ U"J ~ MINIMUM

i% w i t- PERCENT-A:: WITHOUT DROP PANELS WITH DROP PANELS
t:; ~a:~ ~ AT SECTION
,..~ f---Cteors.pan-Jn---+~-4--clearspon-Jn i ~~c

I 4--- Face of support--...f I J.-----.- Face of s~o~pport -------1 I
f---center to center soon-/ • Center to ceMer scon-1 ~
£ Exterior support ! Interior support EKterior support'[
(No stab cont1nuity) (Continuity provided) (No slab continuity)
* Bent bars ot e~ter1or supports BAR LENGTH FROM FACE OF SUPPORT

ma1 be used if a ;enltfol
analysiS 1s mode MINIMUM LENGTH IMAXIMUM LENGTH
MARK 0 I b c d I • f
I '
LENGTH 0141 0 io.zo/0 lo22l0 io30l0 io.33L 0 I 020./0 io24L0
FIGURE NO. 26-1-MINIMUM BEND POINT LOCATIONS AND EXTENSIONS

FOR REINFORCEMENT IN SLABS WITHOUT BEAMS
(See Section 2612 (I) 1 for reinforcement extenelon Into supports.)
513
28-A-1, 28-A-2, 28-A-3 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 28-A-1-MODIFICAnON FACTOR FOR STANDARD

DEVIATION WHEN LESS THAN 30 TESTS ARE AVAILABLE
IIODFICAnoN FACTOR FOR
NUMBER OF TESTSI STANDARD DEVJ.t.nON2
less than 15 Use Thble No. 26-A-2
15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30ormore 1.00
1 Interpolate for intermediate numbers of tests.
2 Modified standard deviation to be used to determine required average strength f'" from
Section 2604 (d) 2, ftrst paragraph.
TABLE NO. 28-A-2-REQUIRED AVERAGE COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH WHEN DATA ARE NOT AVAILABLE TO ESTABLISH
A STANDARD DEVIATION
SPECIFIED REQUIRED AVERAGE
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
r.
PSI f',. PSI
Less than 3000 psi !', + 1000
3000to5000 f', + 1200
Over5000 f', + 1400
TABLE NO. 28-A-3-MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WATER-CEMENT

RATIOS FOR CONCRETE WHEN STRENGTH DATA FROM FIELD
EXPERIENCE OR TRIAL MIXTURES ARE NOT AVAILABLE
SPECIFIED ABSOLUTE WATE~EMENT RATIO BY WEIGHT
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH Nonalr-entrelned Air-entrained
f PSI1 Concrete Concrete
2500 0.67 0.54

3000 0.58 0.46
3500 0.51 0.40
4000 0.44 0.35
2
4500 0.38
5000 2
'
'Twenty-eight day strength. With most materials, water-cement rat1os shown w1ll prov1de
average strengths greater than indicated in Section 2604 (d) 2 as being required.
'For strengths above 4500 psi (nonair-entrained concrete) and 4000 psi (air-entrained
concrete), concrete proportions shall he established by methods of Section 2604 (d).
514
1988 EDITION 26-A-4, 26-A-5
TABLE NO. 26-A-4-TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR

FROST-RESISTANT CONCRETE
NOMINAL IIAJIIMUM AIR CONTENT, PERCENT

AGGREGATE Moderate
SIZE, IN. I ~:"ure Ex-pOsure
'Is 7 112 6
'lz 7 5 112
'I• 6 5
1 6 4 112
1'12 5 112 4 1/4
2' 5 4
32 4 112 3'/z
•See U.B.C. Standard No. 26-2 for tolerances on oversize for various nominal maximum
size designations.
2 These air contents apply to total mix, as for the preceding aggregate sizes. When testing this
concrete, however, aggregate larger than 1'12 inch is removed by hand picking or sieving,
and air content is determined on the minus 1'12-inch fraction.
TABLE NO. 26-A-5-REQUIREMENTS FOR

SPECIAL EXPOSURE CONDITIONS
MAXIMUM
WATER-
CEMENT
RATIO,
NORMAL. MINIMUMf'c
WEIGHT UGHTWEIGHT
AGGREGATE AGGREGATE
EXPOSURECONtmnON CONCRETE CONCRETE
Concrete intended to be watertight:
a. Concrete exposed to fresh water 0.50 3750
b. Concrete exposed to brackish or seawater 0.45 4250
Concrete exposed to freezing and thawing in a
moist condition
a. Curbs, gutters, guardrails or thin sections 0.45 4250
b. Other elements 0.50 3750
c. In presence of de-icing chemicals 0.45 4250
For corrosion protection for reinforced concrete
exposed to de-icing salts, brackish water, seawate
or spray from these sources 0.40 1 4750 1
'If minimum concrete cover required by Section 2607 (h) is increased by 0.5 inch, water-
cement ratio may be increased to 0.45 for normal~weight concrete, orf'c reduced to 4250
psi for lightweight concrete.
515
26-A-6, 26·A·7 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 26-A-&-REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE

EXPOSED TO SULFATE-CONTAINING SOLUTIONS
WAT£R NORMAL- UGHTWEIGHT·

SOLUBLE WEIGHT AGGREGATE
SULFATE AGGREGATE CONCRET£
(SO~IN SOIL, SULFATE Mu:lmum Minimum
SULFA'!£ P CENT (SO~ IN CEMENT w.te....C.ment eom"raulve
EXPOSURE BY WEIGHT WATE ,PPM TYPE Rodlo, by WOight1 Stren h, f'c pal1
Negligible 0.00-0.10 0-150 - - -

Moderate' 0.10-0.20 150-1500 II, IP(MS), 0.50 3750
IS(MS)
Severe 0.20-2.00 1500-10,000 v 0.45 4250
Very Over2.00 Over 10,000 Vplus 0.45 4250
Severe pozzolan3
'A lower water-cement ratio or higher strength may be required for watertightness or for
protection against corrosion of embedded items or freezing and !hawing (Table No.
26-A-5).
z Seawater.
'Pozzolan that has been delermined by test or service record to improve sulfate resistance
when used in concrete containing Type V cement.
TABLE NO. 26-A·7-MAXIMUM CHLORIDE ION CONTENT

FOR CORROSION PROTECTION
MAXIMUM WAT£R SOLUBLE CHLORIOE
ION (CL)*"efJI~C&~.::m:ENT BY
TYPE OF MEMBER
Prestressed concrete 0.06

Reinforced concrete exposed to
chloride in service 0.15
Reinforced concrete lhat will be dry
or protected from moisture in service 1.00
Other reinforced concrete
construction 0.30
516
1988 EDITION 26-B, 26-C, 26-D
TABLE NO. 26-B-CONCRETE AIR CONTENT FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF

COARSE AGGREGATE
NOMINAL MAXIMUM
SIZE OF COARSE TOTAL AIR CONTENT,
AGGREGATE, (lncheo) PERCENT BY VOLUME
3/M 6to 10
'12 5to9
3J4 4108
I 3.5106.5
3to6
"''2 2.5 10 5.5
3 1.5 to 4.5
TABLE NO. 26-C-MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND

BAA SIZE MINIMUM DIAMETER
Nos. 31hrough 8 6d,

Nos. 9, 10 and II Sd,
Nos. 14 and 18 IOd,
TABLE NO. 26-D-MINIMUM THICKNESS OF NONPRESTRESSED BEAMS

OR ONE-WAY SLABS UNLESS DEFLECTIONS ARE COMPUTED1
M..IMUM THICKNESS, h
SIMPLY ONE END BOTH ENDS CANTI·
SUPPORTED CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS LEVER
Memt.r. nat au=:;rtlne_or lttaehed to partiUon• or Olh•r
MEMBER con1tructlon II ly to d1maged by 119 deftectlona
Solid one-way slabs 1/20 1/24 l/28 1110

Beams or ribbed one-
way slabs 1/16 1/18.5 /121 l/8
'Span length I is in inches.

Values given shall be used directly for members with normal-weight concrete (w, = 145 pel)
and Grade 60 reinforcement. For other conditions, the values shall be modified as
follows:
(a) For structural lightweight concrete having unit weights in the range 90-120 pounds
per cubic foot, the value shall be multiplied by (1.65- 0.005w,) but not less than
1.09, where w, is the unit weight in pounds per cubic foot.
(b) Fort, other than 60,000 psi, the values shall be multiplied by (0.4 + [y/100,000).
517
26-E UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 26-E-VALUES OF a mn

,
RELATIVE BEAM STIFFNESS, a
ASPECT RATIO
13. I, II, 0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
2.0 0.5·2.0 0 0 0 0 0
1.0 0.5 0.6 0 0 0 0
0.8 0.7 0 0 0 0
1.0 0.7 0.1 0 0 0
1.25 0.8 0.4 0 0 0
2.0 1.2 0.5 0.2 0 0
0.5 0.5 1.3 0.3 0 0 0
0.8 1.5 0.5 0.2 0 0
1.0 1.6 0.6 0.2 0 0
1.25 1.9 1.0 0.5 0 0
2.0 4.9 1.6 0.8 0.3 0
0.33 0.5 1.8 0.5 0.1 0 0
0.8 2.0 0.9 0.3 0 0
1.0 2.3 0.9 0.4 0 0
1.25 2.8 1.5 0.8 0.2 0
2.0 13.0 2.6 1.2 0.5 0.3
518
1988 EDITION 26-F, 26-G
TABLE NO. 26-F-ALLOWABLE SERVICE LOAD ON EMBEDDED BOLTS

(In Pounds)' •
MINIMUM CONCRETE STRENGTH (In pol)
MINIMUM3
DIAMETER EMBEDMENT SHEAR< TENSION5
(In lnchn) (In lncheo) 2000 3000 200010 5000
.,. 2'12 500 500 200
,,, 3 II 00 II 00 500
4
,,,'"
2000 2000 950
4 2750 3000 1500
'I• 5 2940 3560 2250
,,, 6 3580 4150 3200
I 7 3580 4150 3200
1'/o 8 3580 4500 3200
11/4 9 3580 5300 3200
1Values are for natural
stone aggregate concrete and bolls of at least A307 qualtty. Bolts shall
have a standard boll head or an equal deformity in the embedded portion.
'Values are based upon a boll spacing of 12 diameters with a minimum edge distance of 6
diameters. Such spacing and edge distance may be reduced 50 percent with an equal
reduction in value. Use linear interpolation for intermediate spacings and edge margins.
3An additional2 inches of embedment shall be provided for anchor bolts located in the top of
columns for buildings located in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4.

Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.
4
5Values shown are for work without special inspection. Where special inspection is provided
values may be increased 100 percent.
TABLE NO. 26-G-TENSION LAP SPLICES

MAXIMUM PERCENT OF A•
Aa PROYIDED1 SPLICED WITHIN REQUIRED
AaRI:QUIAED LAP LENGTH
50 75 100
Equal to or
greater than 2 Class A Class A Class B
Less than 2 Class B ClassC Class C

'Ratio of area of reinforcement provided to area of reinforcement required by analysis at
splice location.
519
211-H, 211-1, 26-J UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 28-H-MINIMUM ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH AND MODULUS OF ELASTICITY AND OF
RIGIDITY OF REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE
COMPRESSIVE MODULUS OF
STRE~TH ELASTICITY &!Ell MOOULUSOF
CLASS PSI~ PSI lEI (n) RIGIDITY (G)
A 500 200,000 150 .36E
B 1000 600,000 50 .40E
TABLE NO. 28-~ALLOWABLE UNIT WORKING STRESS

REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE
CLASS A CLASSB
TYPE OF STRESS FACTOR (Pounda per Squ•relnch)
Flexural Compression ............... .25!, 125 250

Axial Compression or Bearing ......... .20!, 100 200
Bond for Plain Bars and Shear' . ....... .02f, 10 20
Bond for Deformed Bars and
Electrically Welded Wire Mesh' ....... .03!, 15 30
'Electrically welded w1re mesh reinforcement shall be considered as meeting the bond and
shear requirements of this section. In no case shall the area of principal reinforcement be
less than 0.26 square inch per foot of slab width.
TABLE NO. 26-J-SHEAR ON ANCHOR BOLTS AND

DOWELs-REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE,
BOLT OR DOWEL SIZE EMBEDMENT SHEAR2
[tnchllo) [Inc hoi) [Pcundo)
31s Bolt 4 325
1hBolt 5 450
'Is Bolt 5 650
31s Deformed Dowel 6 325
112 Deformed Dowel 6 450
'The bolts or dowels shall be spaced not closer than 6 inches on center.
'The tabulated values may be increased one third for bolts or dowels resisting wind or
seismic forces.
520
1988 EDITION 2701
Chapter 27
STEEL
Material Standards and Symbols

Sec. 2701. (a) General. The quality, testing and design of steel used structur-
ally in buildings or structures shall conform to the requirements specified in this
chapter and to the applicable standards listed in Chapter 60.
(b) Identification. Steel furnished for structural load-carrying purposes shall
be properly identified for conformity to the ordered grade as follows:
Structural steels shall be identified in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No.
27-2. Where structural steel is furnished to a specified minimum yield point
greater than 36,000 pounds per square inch, the ASTM or other specification
designation shall be marked thereon in accordance with the requirements of
Cold-formed carbon and low-alloy steel shall be identified by the fabricator in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 27-9. Where cold-formed steel structural
members are furnished to a specified minimum yield point greater than 33,000
pounds per square inch, the grade and the ASTM specification number or other
specification designation shall be indicated by painting, decal, tagging or other
suitable means on each lift or bundle of fabricated elements. In the case of
members having a yield point of, or in excess of, 33,000 pounds per square inch
obtained through additional treatment, the resulting minimum yield point shall be
indicated in addition to the specification designation.
Cold-formed stainless steel structural elements designed in accordance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 27-10 shall be identified as to grade through mill test
reports, and certification shall be furnished that the yield point of the material
supplied equals or exceeds that considered in the design. Identification shall be by
painting, decal, tagging or other suitable means on each lift or bundle of fabri-
cated elements.
Each lift or bundle of open web steel joists and similar fabricated light structural
load-carrying members shall be identified in accordance with U. B.C. Standard
No. 27-4 as to type, size and manufacturer by tagging or other suitable means at
the time of manufacture or fabrication, and such identification shall be maintained
continuously to the point of their installation in a structure.
The fabricator, in processing steel through his works, shall maintain identity of
the material and shall maintain suitable procedures and records attesting that the
specified grade has been furnished in conformity with the applicable U. B. C.
standard. Where structural steel is furnished to a specified minimum yield point
greater than 36,000 pounds per square inch, the ASTM or other specification
designation shall be included near the erection mark on each shipping assembly or
important construction component over any shop coat of paint prior to shipment
from the fabricator's plant. The fabricator's identification mark system shall be
established and on record prior to fabrication.
Steel which is not readily identifiable as to grade from marking and test records
521
shall be tested to determine conformity to such standard. The fabricator shall,

when requested, furnish an affidavit of compliance with such standard.
(c) Symbols and Notations. The symbols and notations used in these regula-
tions are defined as follows:
Ab = Normal body area of a fastener; the area of a rivet before driving or the
area of a bolt or threaded part based upon its major diameter.
Abc Planar area of web at beam-to-column connection.
Actual area of effective concrete flange in composite design as defined
in Section 2708 (a).
A,= Effective net area of an axially loaded tension member.
A!= Area of compression flange.
An Net area of an axially loaded tension member.
As= Area of steel beam in composite design.
Asr Area of reinforcing steel providing composite action at point of nega-
tive reinforcement within the boundaries specified in Section 2708 (a).
Cross-sectional area of stiffener or pair of stiffeners.
Area of girder web.
Bearing area of base plate.
Area of concrete.
Ratio of bolt tensile strength to tensile strength of connected part.
Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient; equal to
1.75 +~.os(~)+ o.3(Z~ r

c,. Column slenderness ratio separating elastic and inelastic buckling;
equal to
Coefficient for prismatic members applied to bending term in interac-

tion formula and dependent upon column curvature caused by applied
moments.
C' m Coefficient applied to bending term in interaction formula for tapered
members and dependent upon axial stress at the small end of the
member.
Stiffness factor for primary member in a flat roof.
Stiffness factor for secondary member in a flat roof.
Ratio of "critical" web stress, according to the linear buckling theory,
to the shear yield stress of web material.
Factor depending upon type of transverse stiffeners.
Modulus of elasticity of steel (29,000 kips per square inch).
Modulus of elasticity of concrete.
522
1988 EDITION 2701
F Load factor in plastic design.

Fa Axial compressive stress permitted in the absence of bending moment.
Pas Axial compressive stress permitted in the absence of bending moment
for bracing and other secondary members.
F b = Bending stress permitted in the absence of axial force .
..F'0 = AJJowable bending stress in compression flange of plate girders as
reduced for hybrid girders or because of large web depth-to-thickness
ratio.
F' e Euler stress divided by factor of safety; equal to
23(KUr,Y
Allowable bearing stress.
Allowable axial tensile stress.
Specified minimum tensile strength of the type of steel or fasteners
being used (kips per square inch).
Allowable shear stress.
Specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used (kips per
square inch). As used in the specification, "yield stress" denotes either
the specified minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield
point) or specified minimum yield strength (for those steels that do not
have a yield point).
Column yield stress (ksi).
Yield stress of reinforcing steel providing composite action at point of
negative moment.
Stiffener yield stress (ksi).
Length of a stud shear connector.
Moment of inertia of steel deck on a flat roof.
I,ff = Effective moment of inertia of composite sections for deflection com-
putations.
/P Moment of inertia of primary member.
Is Moment of inertia of secondary member in flat roof framing; moment
of inertia of steel beam in composite construction.
11, Moment of inertia of transformed composite section.
K Effective length factor.
L Span length, in feet.
LP Length of primary member in a flat roof (feet).
L, Length of secondary member in a flat roof (feet).
M Moment.
M1 Smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam-column.
M2 Larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam-column.
523
Moment produced by dead load.

Moment produced by live load.
Critical moment that can be resisted by a plastically designed member
in absence of axial load.
Plastic moment.
Flexural strength of member.
Length of bearing of applied load.
Number of shear connectors equal to Vhfq·
Number of shear connectors required where closer spacing is needed

adjacent to point of zero moment.
Applied load.
Factored beam flange or connection plate force in a restrained connec-
tion (kips).
1.70AF".
Axial dead load on member.
Axial load on member due to earthquake.
Pe 1rlEJ (kips)
[2
Axial live load on member.
Compressive axial strength of member.
Tensile axial strength of member.
Plastic axial load; equal to profile area times specified minimum yield
stress (kips).
Q" Ratio of effective profile area of an axially loaded member to its total
profile area.
Q, Axial stress reduction factor where width-thickness ratio of unstiffencd
elements exceeds limiting value given in section.
R Reaction or concentrated transverse load applied to beam or girder,
(kips).
S Spacing of secondary members in a flat roof (feet).
S, Section modulus of steel beam used in composite design, referred to the
bottom flange.
S,r = Section modulus of transformed composite cross section, referred to
the bottom flange, based upon maximum permitted effective width of
concrete flange, Section 2708 (a).
Th = Specified pretension of a high-strength bolt, in kips.
V = Statical shear on beam.
Vh = Total horizontal shear to be resisted by connectors under full composite
action.
524
1988 EDITION 2701
V ' 11 Total horizontal shear to be resisted by connectors in providing partial

composite action (kips). See Section 2708 (d).
V., = Shear strength of member.
Vu Statical shear produced by "ultimate" load in plastic design.
Y Ratio of yield point of web steel to yield point of stiffener steel.
z Plastic section modulus.
a = Clear distance between transverse stiffeners.
a' Distance required at ends of welded partial length cover plate to develop
stress.
b Effective width of concrete slab; actual width of stiffened compression
clement.
be = Effective width of stiffened compression element.
br = Flange width of rolled beam or plate girder.
c = Distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber of beam.
d Depth of beam or girder. Also diameter of roller or rocker bearings, or
major diameter of fastener.
de Column web depth clear of fillets.
e - Horizontal displacement, in the direction of the span, between top and
bottom of simply supported beam at its ends .
.f =Axial compression load on member divided by effective area (kips per
square inch).
fa Computed axial stress.
fh Computed bending stress.
f'c Specified compression strength of concrete .
.f~ Computed bearing stress.
J; Computed tensile stress.
j~ Computed shear stress.
fvs Shear between girder web and transverse stiffeners, in kips per linear
inch of single stiffener or pair of stiffeners.
g Transverse spacing between fastener gauge lines.
h Clear distance between flanges of a beam or girder.
k Coefficient relating linear buckling strength of a plate to its dimensions
and condition of edge support. Also, distance from outer face of flange
to web toe of fillet.
Actual unbraced length, in inches.
lh Actual unbraced length in plane of bending, in inches.
("' Critical unbraced length adjacent to plastic hinge. in inches.
n = Modular ratio; equal to EIE".
nr Number of studs in one rib not to exceed three in calculations.
q Allowable horizontal shear to be resisted by a shear connector.
525
r = Governing radius of gyration.

rh Radius of gyration about axis of concurrent bending.
r, Lesser radius of gyration.
Spacing (pitch) between successive holes in line of stress.
t = Girder, beam or column web thickness.
th = Beam flange thickness at rigid beam-to-column connection.
t1 Flange thickness.
t1 Thickness of thinner part joined by partial penetration groove weld.
v = Poisson's ratio, may be taken as 0.3 for steel.
w Length of channel shear connectors.
x - Subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending.
y Subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending.
o. Ratio of hybrid girder web yield stress to flange yield stress.
6. Displacement of the neutral axis of a loaded member from its position
when the member is not loaded.
f3 = Ratio SI/S, or sejf!S,.
Allowable Unit Stresses

Sec. 2702. (a) General. Except as provided in Sections 2703, 2704, 2707,
2708 and 2721, all components of the structure shall be so proportioned that the
stress in kips per square inch shall not exceed the values specified in this section.
Allowable stresses for web-tapered members may be governed by these provi-
sions or by other approved methods.
(b) Structural Steel. I. Tension. Except for pin-connected members, F 1 shall
not exceed 0.6FY on the gross area nor 0.5Fu on the effective net area.
For pin-connected members, F 1 = 0.45FY on the net area.
For tension on threaded parts, see Table No. 27-A.
2. Shear. On the gross section (for shear calculation, the gross section of rolled
and fabricated shapes may be taken as the product of the overall depth and the
thickness of the web).
Fv = 0.40Fy
At beam end connections where the top flange is coped, and similar situations
where failure might occur by shear along a plane through the fasteners or by a
combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners plus tension along a
perpendicular plane, on the area effective in resisting tearing failure:
WHERE:
The effective area is the minimum net surface, bounded by the bolt holes.
See Section 2707 for reduction required for thin webs.
3. Compression. On the gross section of axially loaded compression members
whose cross sections meet the provisions of Section 2706 when Kl!r, the largest
526
1988 EDITION 2702
effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment as defined in Section 2705, is

less than Cc.
F =
"
[1-WJFY ..................
F.S.
(2-l)
WHERE:
S = f.actor o f sawty
F .. r 5 3(Kl/r) (Kl!r)3
= 3 + BC,. - BCc 3
AND
On the gross section of axially loaded compression members when Kl!r

exceeds Cc.
F = 12rr2E
" 23(Kl/r)2 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · (2-2)
On the gross section of axially loaded bracing and secondary members, when
1/r exceeds 120 (for this case K is taken as unity).
F = Fa [by Formula (2-l) or (2-2)]
(IS I ............ (2-3)
1. 6 - 200r
On the gross area of plate girder stiffeners
Fa= 0.60FY
On the web of rolled shapes at the toe of the fillet for crippling
Fa= 0.75FY
Web stiffeners shall be provided as specified in Section 2707 (j) when the
compressive stress of the web toe exceeds the allowable stress specified in the
preceding paragraph.
4. Bending. Except for hybrid girders and members of A514 steel, tension
and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot-rolled or built-up members
symmetrical about, and loaded in, the plane of their minor axis and meeting the
requirements of this section shall not exceed:
Fb = 0.66FY
PROVIDED:
(i) The flange is continuously connected to the web or webs.
(ii) The width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the com-
pression flange as defined in Section 2706 does not exceed:
65
w;
527
(iii) The width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange

as defined in Section 2706 does not exceed:
190
~
(iv) The depth-thickness ratio of the web or webs does not exceed:
640(1-3.74 f-)
~n=---=:..JL_ when F-'
---.---=
b.
~ 0.16
.............. (2-4)
V F 11 Y
nor:
257 b.
, ~n when F > 0.16
vF., .v
(v) The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members

other than circular or box members shall not exceed the value 76.0b/v'fi;
nor
20,000
(diA,)F1
(vi) The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of a box-

shaped member of rectangular cross section whose depth is not more than
six times the width and whose flange thickness is not more than two times
the web thickness shall not exceed the value
1950 + 1200 M) .!!._

( Mz F1
except that it need not be less than 1200 (b!FY).

(vii) The diameter-thickness ratio of circular sections shall not exceed 3300/FY.
Except as specified in this paragraph, beams and girders, including members
designed for composite action, qualifying for F b = 0.66FY and which are continu-
ous over supports or are rigidly framed to columns by means of rivets, high-
strength bolts or welds, may be proportioned for nine tenths of the negative
moments produced by gravity loading which are maximum at points of support,
provided that, for such members, the maximum positive moment shall be in-
creased by one tenth of the average negative moments. This reduction shall not
apply to tapered girders or moments produced by loading on cantilevers or when
including the one-third allowable stress increase for wind or earthquake forces. If
the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly framed to the beam or girder,
the one-tenth reduction may be used in proportioning the column for the com-
bined axial and bending loading, provided that the unit stress fa due to any
concurrent axial load on the member does not exceed 0.15 Fa.
528
1988 EDITION 2702
Members qual!.f.ying for F b = 0.66 FY, except that b1 12trexceeds 65/W but is
less than 95.0/VFY may have an allowable bending stress of: Y
f/, = F,, [ .79-.002 (ft;) (VFJ J ........ (2-5)

Tension and compression on extreme fibers of doubly symmetrical 1- and H-
shape members with flanges continuously connected to web or webs, unstiffened
projecting elements of the compression flange not exceeding 65/W and bent
about their minor axis; solid round and square bars; and solid rectangular bars
bent about their weaker axis shall not exceed
This does not include I and H shapes of A514 steel.

Doubly symmetrical 1- and H-shape members bent about their minor axis
(except hybrid girders and members of A514 steel) with the flan~s continuously
connected to the web or webs, except where b/2t1 exceeds 65/VF but is less than
95.0t~, may be designed on the basis of an allowable bending stress of
Rectangular tubular sections bent about their minor axis and meeting the
requirements of subparagraphs (i), (iii) and (iv) above may be designed on the
basis of an allowable bending stress of
Fb = 0.66FY
Lateral torsional buckling need not be investigated for a box section whose
depth is less than six times its width. Lateral support requirements for box
sections of larger depth-to-width ratios must be determined by special analysis.
Tension on extreme fibers of flexural members not previously covered in this
subsection on bending shall not exceed F b = 0.60FY.
Compression on extreme fibers of flexural members included under the preced-
ing paragraph and meeting the requirements of Subsection 2706 (a), having an
axis of symmetry in and loaded in the plane of their web, and compression on
extreme fibers of channels bent about their major axis shall not exceed the larger
of Formulas (2-6a) or (2-6b) and (2-7), when applicable, but not more than
0.60FY.
Only Formula (2-7) is applicable to channels. See Section 2707 for further
limitations to plate girder flange stress.
529
WHEN:
~102 ( 10 3 ) C 1, < l! < ~510 ( 10 3 ) Cp

F = r, = F
.v y
F =
!J
[_g- Fu (l/r,)2 ] F
3 1530 (10 cb ".............
3) (2-6a)
WHEN:
Or when the compression flange is solid and approximately rectangular in cross

section and the area is not less than the tension flange:
_ 12 (10 3 )
Fb- ld!At
cb .................... (2-7)
WHERE:
I = distance between cross sections braced against twist or lateral displacement
of the compression flange. For cantilevers braced against twist at the
support only, "!" may conservatively be taken as the actual length.
r1 =Radius of gyrations of a section comprising the compression flange plus
one third of the compression web area, taken about an axis in the plane of
the web.
c/J = 1. 75 + I.05 (~) + o.3 (~Y ............. (2-8)
but not more than 2.3 (Cb may be conservatively taken as unity) where M 1 is the
smaller and M2 the larger bending moment at the ends of the unbraced length,
taken about the strong axis of the member, and where M/M2 , the ratio of end
moments, is positive when there is reverse curvature bending and negative when
there is single curvature bending. When the bending moment at any point within
an unbraced length is larger than that at both ends of this length, Cb shall be unity.
When computing F bx and F to be used in Formula (3-1 a), Cb may be computed
by the formula given above 7or frames subject to joint translation, and it shall be
taken as unity for frames braced against joint translation. Cb may be con-
servatively taken as 1.0 for cantilever beams.
530
1988 EDITION 2702
For hybrid plate girders, FY in Formulas (2-6a) and (2-6b) is the yield stress of
the compression flange. Formula (2-7) shall not apply to hybrid girders.
Compression on extreme fibers of flexural members not previously covered in
this subsection on bending and meeting the requirements of Section 2706 (a),
which do not qualify for Formulas (2-6a), (2-6b) and (2-7), and provided that
sections bent about their major axis are braced laterally in the region of compres-
sion stress at intervals not exceeding 76.0bJYF"; shall not exceed
5. Bearing (on contact area). Milled surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled or

bored holes and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners:
Expansion rollers and rockers, kips per linear inch

F - 13)
FP = ( 0.66d
20
where dis the diameter of roller or rocker in inches.
*When parts in contact have different yield points, FY shall be the smaller value.
6. Bearing (on concrete).

On the full area of concrete support ...................... .FP = 0. 35f',
On less than the full area
ofaconcretesupport ................... .FP = 0.35J',vA;/A;~0.7f',
(c) Rivets, Bolts and Threaded Parts. I. Allowable tension and shear stress
on rivets, bolts and threaded parts (kips per square inch of area of rivets before
driving or the area of threaded portion of bolts and threaded parts based on their
major diameter) shall not exceed the values set forth in Table No. 27-A.
2. High-strength bolts required to support applied loads by direct tension shall
have an average tensile stress, independent of any initial tightening force, not
exceeding the appropriate stress in Table No. 27-A. The applied load shall be the
sum of the external load and any tension resulting from prying action produced by
deformation of the connected parts.
3. The design for rivets, bolts and threaded parts subject to fatigue loading shall
be in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 27-3.
4. Maximum allowable bearing stress on the connected parts produced by
fasteners in shear:
FP = 1.5Fu
where F u is the minimum tensile strength of the connected parts. Also sec Section
2713 (d) and (e).
(d) Welds. Except as modified by Section 2704, weld stresses shall comply
with Table No. 27-B.
531
(c) Effective Areas of Weld Metal. The effective area of groove and fillet
welds shall be considered as the effective length of the weld times the effective
throat thickness.
The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be considered as the
nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
The effective area of fillet welds in holes and slots shall be computed as
specified above for fillet welds, using for effective length the length of center line
of the weld through the center of the plane through the throat. However, in the case
of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal cross-
sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
The effective length of a fillet weld shall be the overall length of full-size fillet
including returns.
The effective length of a groove weld shall be the width of the part joined.
The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance from
the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld. However, for fillet welds made by
the submerged arc process, the effective throat thickness shall be the leg size for
3Jg inch and smaller fillet welds and equal to the theoretical throat plus 0.11 inch
for fillet welds over 3/s inch.
The effective throat thickness of a complete penetration groove weld (i.e., a
groove weld conforming to the requirements of U. 8 .C. Standard No. 27 -6) shall
be the thickness of the thinner part joined.
The effective throat of a partial joint penetration groove weld shall be the depth
of chamfer, less 1/s inch for grooves having an included angle less than 60 degrees,
but not less than 45 degrees at the root of the groove, when deposited by shielded
metal arc or submerged arc welding, or when deposited in vertical or overhead
positions by gas metal arc or flux-cored welding.
The effective throat of a partial joint penetration groove weld shall be the depth
of chamfer for grooves:
(i) having an included angle of 60 degrees or greater at the root of the groove
when deposited by any of the following welding processes: shielded metal
arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, flux-cored arc or electrogas welding; or
(ii) having an included angle not less than 45 degrees at the root of the groove
when deposited in flat or horizontal positions by gas metal arc or flux-cored
arc welding.
The effective throat thickness for flare groove welds when flush to the surface
of the solid section of the bar shall be as shown in Table No. 27-F.
I. Random sections of production welds for each welding procedure, or such
test sections as may be required, shall be used to verify that the effective throat is
consistently obtained.
2. Where for a given set of procedural conditions it can be established that
consistently larger effective throats than those shown in Table No. 27-F can be
provided, such larger effective throats may be established by qualification.
3. Qualification required by Item No.2 shall consist of sectioning the radiused
member, normal to its axis, at midlength and terminal ends of the weld. Such
sectioning shall be made on a number of combinations of material sizes represent-
ativc of the range used in construction.
532
1988 EDITION 2702-2703
(f) Cast Steel and Steel Forgings. The allowable stress for cast steel and steel
forgings shall not exceed the values specified in Section 2702 (b), where applica-
ble.
Combined Stresses
Sec. 2703. (a) Axial Compression and Bending. Members subject to both
axial compression and bending stresses shall be proportioned to satisfy the
following requirements:
o% 1.0 ......... (3-la)
fa f~x f~v
0.60F +F + F""' 1.0 ................. (3-lb)
y hx by
WHEN:
fa /Fa""' 0.15, Formula (3-2) may be used in lieu of Formulas (3-la) and (3-l b):
fFa + JF~x + /;Fbv o% 1.0 ................... (3-2)

a hx by
em = A coefficient whose value shall be taken as follows:

l. For compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sides way)
em= 0.85.
2. For restrained compression members in frames braced against joint transla-
tion and not subject to transverse loading between their supports in the
plane of bending, em = 0.6- 0.4M 1/M 2 , but not less than 0.4, where M 1/
M2 is the ratio of the smaller to the larger moments at the ends of that
portion of the member, unbraced in the plane of bending, under consider-
ation. M 1/M 2 is positive when the member is bent in reverse curvature and
negative when bent in single curvature.
3. For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the
plane of loading and subjected to transverse loading between their sup-
ports, the value of em may be determined by rational analysis. However, in
lieu of such analysis, the following values may be used: (i) for members
whose ends are restrained, em = 0.85; (ii) for members whose ends arc
unrestrained, em = I.
(b) Axial Tension and Bending. Members subject to both axial tension and
bending stresses shall be proportioned at all points along their length to satisfy the
requirements of Formula (3-1 b) where fb is the computed bending tensile stress.
However, the computed compressive stress, taken alone, shall not exceed the
applicable value permitted by Section 2702 (b) 4.
533
(c) Shear and Tension. Rivets and bolts subject to combined shear and tension
shall be so proportioned that the tension stress, in kips per square inch, on the
nominal area Ab produced by forces applied to the connected parts shall not
For A502 Grade I rivets F1 = 30- !.3fv~23
For A502 Grade 2 rivets F 1 = 38 - I.3fv~29
For A307 bolts F 1 = 26 - J.Sfv~20
For A449 bolts over Jl/2-inch
diameter and threaded
parts, threads not excluded
For A449 bolts over JI/2-inch
diameter and threaded
parts, threads excluded
For A325 bearing bolts,
threads not excluded
threads excluded
threads not excluded
threads excluded
The shear stress f., produced by the same forces shall not exceed the allowable
value for shear specified in Section 2702 (c). When allowable stresses are
increased for wind or seismic loads in accordance with Section 2303 (d), the
constants in the above formulas may be increased one third, but the factor
coefficient applied tofv shall not be increased.
For bolts in friction-type joints, the shear stress allowed in Section 2702 (c)
shall be reduced so that:
For A325 bolts in standard
holes Fv~ 17.5 (1-frAwTb)
For A325 bolts in oversize
and short-slotted holes
For A325 bolts in long-
slotted holes
For A490 bolts in standard
holes
For A490 bolts in oversize
and short-slotted holes
For A490 bolts in long-
slotted holes
WHERE:
fr is the average tensile stress due to a direct load applied to all of the bolts in a
connection, and Tb is the specified pretension load of the bolt. When allowable
stresses are increased for wind or seismic loads in accordance with Section 2303
(d), the allowable shear stressfv may be increased one-third.
534
1988 EDITION 2704-2706
Stress Reversal
Sec. 2704. Members or connections which are subjected to a variation or
reversal of stress shall be designed as set forth in U. B.C. Standard No. 27-3.
Stability and Slenderness Ratios
Sec. 2705. (a) General. General stability shall be provided for the structure as a
whole and for each compression element. In determining the slenderness ratio of
an axially loaded compression member, except as provided by Formula (2-3) the
length l shall be taken as its effective length Kl and r the corresponding radius of
gyration.
(b) Sidesway Prevented. In frames where lateral stability is provided and in
trusses, the effective length factor K for the compression members shall be taken
as unity.
EXCEPTION: A K value of less than one may be used where substantiating data
justify such a reduction.
(c) Sidesway Not Prevented. In frames where lateral stability is dependent on
the bending stiffness of rigidly connected beams and columns, the effective
length Kl of compression members shall be determined by a rational method and
shall be not less than the actual unbraced length.
(d) Maximum Ratios. The slenderness ratio, Kl/r, of compression members
shall not exceed 200.
The slenderness ratio, 1/r, of tension members, other than rods, should not
exceed:
For main members .......................................... 240
For lateral bracing members and other secondary members .......... 300
Width-Thickness Ratios
Sec. 2706. (a) Unstiffened Elements Under Compression. Unstiffened (pro-
jecting) compression elements are those having one free edge parallel to the
direction of compression stress. The width of unstiffened plates shall be taken
from the free edge to the first row of fasteners or welds; the width of angle legs,
channel and zee flanges and stems of tees shall be taken as the full nominal
dimension; the flanges ofl -shaped members and tees shall be taken as one halfthe
full nominal width. The thickness of a sloping flange shall be measured halfway
between a free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
Unstiffened elements subject to axial compression or compression due to
bending shall be considered as fully effective when the ratio of width to thickness
is not greater than the following:
Single-angle struts; double-angle struts with separators ........... 76/Vfi;
Struts comprising double angles in contact; angles or plates
projecting from girders, columns or other
compression members; compression flanges
of beams; stiffeners on plate girders ......................... 95/V£
Stems of tees ............................................ 127 /V FY
When the actual width-to-thickness ratio exceeds these values, the design shall
be governed by other approved methods.
535
(b) Stiffened Elements Under Compression. Stiffened compression ele-

ments are those having lateral support along both edges which are parallel to the
direction of the compression stress. The width of such elements shall be the
distance between nearest lines of fasteners or welds, or between the roots of
flanges of rolled sections.
Stiffened elements subject to axial compression or to uniform compression due
to bending, such as the flange of a flexural member see Section 2707 (b) and (f),
shall be considered fully effective when the ratio of width to thickness does not
Flanges of square and rectangular box sections
of uniform thickness .................................... 238/~
Unsupported width of cover plates perforated
with a succession of access holes .......................... 317/~
(Assumes net area of plate at widest hole in computing compression
stress.)
All other uniformly compressed stiffened
elements ............................................ . 2531~
Except in the case of perforated cover plates, when the actual width-to-
thickness ratio exceeds these values the design shall be governed by other
approved methods.
(c) Circular Thbular Elements. Circular tubular elements subject to axial
compression shall be considered as fully effective when the ratio of diameter to
thickness is not greater than 3300/Fy-
Plate Girders and Rolled Beams

Sec. 2707. (a) Proportions. Riveted and welded plate girders, cover-plated
beams and rolled or welded beams shall be proportioned by the moment of inertia
of the gross section. No deduction shall be made for shop or field rivet or bolt
holes in either flange, except that in cases where the reduction of the area of either
flange by such holes, calculated in accordance with the provisions of Section
2711 (b), exceeds 15 percent of the gross flange area, the excess shall be
deducted.
Hybrid girders may be proportioned by the moment of inertia of their gross
section (web stresses produced by the bending moment are unlimited except as
regulated in Section 2704 and U.B.C. Standard No. 27-3), subject to the other
provisions of this section, provided they do not resist an axial force exceeding
0.15Fy times the gross section where FY is the yield stress of the flange material.
Hybrid girders must have flanges of equal areas at any section and have the same
grade of steel.
(b) Web. The clear distance between flanges in inches shall not exceed
14,000 (t)
536
1988 EDITION 2707
WHERE:
FY = Yield stress of the compression flanges. A limiting value of 2000 (t)l
v'ii; may be used, provided there are transverse stiffeners spaced not
more than 1.5 times the girder depth.
(c) Flanges. The thickness of outstanding parts of flanges shall conform to the
requirements of Section 2706 (a).
The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of riveted girders shall not exceed
70 percent of the total flange area. Provision shall be made for stresses resulting
from abrupt changes in flange direction and other conditions that introduce stress
concentration.
(d) Flange Development. Rivets, high-strength bolts or welds connecting
flange to web, or cover plate to flange, shall be proportioned to resist the total
horizontal shear resulting from the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal
distribution of these rivets, bolts or of intermittent welds shall be in proportion to
the intensity of the shear. But the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed the
maximum permitted, respectively, for compression or tension members in Sec-
tion 2715 (c) or (d). In addition, rivets or welds connecting flange to web shall be
proportioned to transmit to the web loads applied directly to the flange except
where provision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing.
Partial length cover plates shall be extended beyond the theoretical cutoff point
and the extended portion shall be attached to the beam or girder by rivets, high-
strength bolts or fillet welds adequate to develop the cover plate's portion of the
flexural stresses in the beam or girder at the theoretical cutoff point. In addition,
for welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to the
beam or girder in the length a', defined below, shall be adequate to develop the
cover plate's portion of the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at the distance a'
from the end of the cover plate. The length a', measured from the end of the cover
plate, shall be:
I. A distance equal to the width of the cover plate when there is a continuous
weld equal to or larger than three fourths of the plate thickness across the
end of the plate and continued welds along both edges of the cover plate in
the length a'.
2. A distance equal to one and one-half times the width of the cover plate
when there is a continuous weld smaller than three fourths of the plate
thickness across the end of the plate and continued welds along both edges
of the cover plate in the length a'.
3. A distance equal to two times the width of the cover plate when there is no
weld across the ePd of the plate but continuous welds along both edges of
the cover plate in the length a'.
(e) Stiffeners. Bearing stiffeners shall be placed in pairs at unframed ends on
the webs of plate girders and, where required [see Section 2707 U) for welded
plate girders], at points of concentrated loads. Such stiffeners shall have a close
bearing against the flange, or flanges, through which they receive their loads or
reactions and shall extend approximately to the edge of the flange plates or flange
angles. They shall be designed as columns subject to the provisions of Section
537
2702 (b) 3, assuming the column section to comprise the pair of stiffeners and a
centrally located strip of the web, whose width is equal to not more than 25 times
its thickness at interior stiffeners, or a width equal to not more than 12 times its
thickness when the stiffeners are located at the end of the web. The effective
length shall be taken as not less than three fourths of the length of the stiffeners in
computing the ratio 1/r. Only that portion of the stiffener outside of the flange
;mgle fillet or the flange-to-web welds shall be considered effective in bearing.
Except as provided in this section the average web shear fv in kips per square
inch, shall not exceed:
F=F"(C,.)
I'
04F
2.89 ~ • .IJ oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo (7-1)
WHERE:
C ,. Fu(h/t)2 w h en C ,. IS
= 45,000k . I
ess th an 0 ..
8
190#-
C,. =hit F when C,. 1s more than 0.8. 0
k = 4.00 + (~j;1~ 2 when a/h is less than 1.0.
k = 5.34 + (!i~(~ 2 when a/his more than 1.0.
Where intermediate stiffeners are provided at spacings complying with this

section and if Cv ~ 1.00, girders other than hybrid types may have an allowable
shear of:
f~. = F" [c,. + 1- c,. J~ 0.4Fu ......... (7-2)

2 .8 0,, 1.15 V1 + (a/h)2
(Recognizes the contribution of tension field action.)
Subject to the limitations of Section 2707 (b), intermediate stiffeners are not
required when the ratio hit is less than 260 and the maximum web shear stressfv is
less than that permitted by Formula (7-1).
The spacing of intermediate stiffeners, when stiffeners are required, shall be
such that the web shear stress will not exceed the value for F v given by Formula (7-
I) or (7-2), as applicable and the ratio alh shall not exceed:
2
260)
( h7t nor 3.0.
538
1988 EDITION 2707
For girders designed for tension field action, the spacing between stiffeners at
end panels and panels containing large holes and panels adjacent thereto shall be
such thatfv does not exceed the value given by Formula (7 -1).
The moment of inertia of a pair of intermediate stiffeners or a single intermedi-
ate stiffener about an axis in the web plane shall be not less than (h/50)4.
The gross area, in square inches, of intermediate stiffeners spaced in accord-
ance with Formula (7-2) shall be not less than that computed by Formula (7-3).
A,1 = l - C,. [!_II- (a/h)2 ] YDht .......... (7-3)

· 2· l Yl + (a/h)2
(Total area when stiffeners are furnished in pairs.)
WHERE:
Cv is as defined in Section 2707 (e).
Y = yield stress of web steel/yield stress of stiffener steel.
D 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs.
1.8 for single angle stiffeners.
2.4 for single plate stiffeners.
When the greatest shear stressfv in a panel is less than that permitted by Formula
(7-2), this gross area requirement may be reduced in like proportion.
Intermediate stiffeners required by the provisions of Formula (7-2) shall be
connected for a shear transfer in kips per linear inch of single or pairs of stiffeners
not less than
WHERE:
f,.., = h rr:)
'J ~340
:l
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .(7-4)
FY = yield stress of web steel.

This shear transfer may be reduced in the same proportion that the largest
computed shear stress fv in the adjacent panels is less than that permitted by
Formula (7-2). However, rivets and welds in intermediate stiffeners which are
required to transmit to the web an applied concentrated load or reaction shall be
proportioned for not less than the applied load or reaction.
Intermediate stiffeners may be stopped short of the tension flange, provided
bearing is not needed to transmit a concentrated load or reaction. The weld by
which intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall be terminated not
closer than four nor more than six times the web thickness from the toe of the web
to flange weld. When single stiffeners are used they shall be attached to the
compression flange, if it consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift
tendency due to torsion in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to a stiffener
or a pair of stiffeners these, in turn, shall be connected to the compression flange
to transmit I percent of the total flange stress, unless the flange is composed only
of angles.
539
Rivets connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more than 12
inches on center. If intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear distance between
welds shall be not more than 16 times the web thickness nor more than I 0 inches.
(f) Reduction in Flange Stress. When the web depth-to-thickness ratio ex-
ceeds 7601'1/F;,, the maximum stress in the compression flange shall not exceed:
F',, ;':; F,, [l.o- <l.0005 A.,.(!!-

A t
760)]
.~
vrb
0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 .(7 -5)
1
The maximum stress in either flange of a hybrid girder shall not exceed F', in
Formula (7-5) nor
F'" ;':; F,, [12 + (~) (.3a- a")]· .............. (7-6)

12+ 2 (A,./A1 )
WHERE:
a = ratio of web yield stress to flange yield stress.
(g) Combined Shear and Tension Stress. Plate girder webs shall be so
proportioned that the bending tensile stress due to moment in the plane of the
girder web shall not exceed:
0.6F,, nor (o.825- 0 ..375 k) F,, ............ (7-7)
The allowable shear stress in webs of girders having A514 flanges and webs
shall not exceed that determined by Formula (7 -I) if the flexural stress in the
flange exceeds 0.75Fh.
(h) Splices. Groove welded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the
full strength ofthe smaller spliced section. Other types of splices in cross sections
of plate girders and in beams shall develop the strength required by the stresses at
the point of splice.
(i) Horizontal Forces. The flanges of plate girders supporting cranes or other
moving loads shall be proportioned to resist the horizontal forces produced by
such loads.
The lateral force on crane runways shall be 20 percent ofthe sum of the weights
of the lifted load and of the crane trolley, applied at the top of rail, one half on each
side of the runway; and shall be considered as acting in either direction normal to
the runway rail.
The longitudinal force shall be I 0 percent of the maximum wheel loads of the
crane applied at the top ofrail.
(j) Web Crippling. Webs of beams and welded plate girders shall be so
540
1988 EDITION 2707-2708
proportioned that the compressive stress at the web toe of the fillets, resulting
from concentrated loads not supported by bearing stiffeners, does not exceed
0.75FY"
The compressive stress at the web top of the fillets shall be computed using the
following formulas:
For interior loads:
t(N ~ 2k) ~ 0.7.'5F., ................. (7-8)
For end reactions:

t(N ~ k) ~ 0.7.'5F" ................. (7-9)
WHERE:
N = length of bearing in inches (not less thank for end reactions).
Bearing stiffeners shall be provided where the compressive stress exceeds that
determined by Formulas (7-8) and (7-9).
Webs of welded plate girders also shall be so proportioned or stiffened that the
sum of the compression stresses resulting from concentrated and distributed loads
bearing directly on or through a flange plate, upon the compression edge of the
web plate and not supported directly by bearing stiffeners does not exceed the
following:
When the flange is restrained against rotation,
4 J 10,000
[ .'5 ..'5 + (a/h)2 (h/t)2 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · (7-IO)
When the flange is not restrained against rotation,

. 4 ] 10,000
[2 + (a/h) 2 (l1/t) 2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • .(7-11)
These stresses shall be computed as follows: concentrated loads shall be

divided by the product of the web thickness and the girder depth or the length of
panel in which the load is placed, whichever is the lesser panel dimension.
Distributed loads in kips per lineal inch of length shall be divided by the web
thickness.
(k) Rotational Restraint at Points of Support. Beams, girders and trusses
shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis at points of
support.
Composite Construction
Sec. 2708. (a) Definition. Composite construction shall consist of steel beams
or girders supporting a reinforced concrete slab, so interconnected that the beam
and slab act together to resist bending. When the slab extends on both sides of the
beam, the effective width of the concrete flange shall be taken as no more than one
fourth of the span of the beam, and its effective projection beyond the edge of the
beam shall not be taken as more than one half the clear distance to the adjacent
541
beam nor more than eight times the slab thickness. When the slab is present on
only one side of the beam, the effective projection of the concrete flange shall be
taken as not more than one twelfth of the beam span nor six times its thickness nor
one half the clear distance to the adjacent beam. Composite construction may also
he permitted using a metal deck with a structural concrete fill and designed by an
approved method of analysis.
Beams totally encased 2 inches or more on their sides and soffit in concrete cast
integrally with the slab may be assumed to be interconnected to the concrete by
natural bond, without additional anchorage, provided the top of the beam is not
less than !l/2 inches below the top and 2 inches above the bottom of the slab, and
provided that the encasement has adequate mesh or other reinforcing steel
throughout the depth and across the soffit of the beam. When shear connectors are
provided in accordance with Section 2708 (d), encasement of the beam to achieve
composite action is not required.
(b) Design Assumptions. Encased beams shall be proportioned to support

unassisted all dead loads applied prior to the hardening of the concrete except
where these loads are supported temporarily on shoring. The beams acting in
conjunction with the slab shall support all dead and live loads applied after
hardening of the concrete, without exceeding a computed bending stress of
0.66F", where Fv is the yield stress of the steel beam. The bending stress produced
by loads after tli.e concrete has hardened shall be computed on the basis of the
section properties of the composite section. Concrete tension stress shall be
neglected. Alternatively, the steel beam may be proportioned to resist unassisted
the positive moment produced by all loads, live and dead, using a bending stress
equal to 0. 76F", in which case temporary shoring is not required.
When shear connectors are used in accordance with Section 2708 (d) the
composite section shall be proportioned to support all of the loads without
exceeding the allowable stress prescribed in Section 2702 (b) 4. This includes
composite sections where the structural steel is not shored during construction.
When using shear transfer devices on a noncompositely designed beam, those
devices must be able to resist the combined effects produced by composite action
plus shear transfer loads. In calculations involving composite sections in positive
moment areas, the steel cross section is exempt from compactness requirements
of subparagraphs (ii), (iii) and (v) of Section 2702 (b) 4.
Reinforcement parallel to the beam within the effective width of the slab, when
anchored in conformance with Chapter 26, may be included in the properties of
composite sections, provided shear connectors comply with Section 2708 (d).
The section properties of the composite section shall be computed in accordance
with the elastic theory. Concrete tension stresses shall be neglected. For stress
computations the compression area of lightweight or normal-weight concrete
shall be treated as an equivalent area of steel by dividing it by the modularratio, n,
for normal-weight concrete of the strength specified when determining the sec-
tion properties. For deflection calculations only, the transformed section propet-
ties shall be based on the appropriate modular ratio, n, for the strength and weight
concrete specified.
542
1988 EDITION 2708
Where shear connectors in conformance with Section 2708 (d) are not pro-
vided, the effective section modulus used in stress calculations shall not exceed:
SQ/ = Ss +
;v;;:- (S,, -
vv:- Ss) .............. .(\!.-\)
For construction without temporary shoring, stress in the steel section may be
computed from the total dead plus live load moment and the actual tram;\l)!m~\\
section modulus S,, except that the numerical value of S1, so used shall not exceed
that of Formula (8-2). These stresses shall not exceed the appropriate value of
Section 2702. Section 2303 (d) shall not apply to stresses in the negative moment
area computed under the provisions of this paragraph.
S,, = ( 1.35 + 0.35 ~) S, ................. (8-2)
WHERE:
ML moment caused by loads applied after concrete has attained 75 percent
of its required strength.
Mv moment caused by loads applied prior to this time.
At sections subject to positive bending moment, the stress shall be computed

for the steel tension flange. At sections subject to negative bending moment, the
stress shall be computed for the steel tension and compression flanges. These
stresses shall not exceed the appropriate value of Section 2702.
The steel beam alone, supporting the loads before the concrete has hardened,
shall not be stressed to more than the applicable bending stress given in Section
2702 (b).
Provisions shall be made to prevent cracking of the slab spanning perpendicular
to the beam.
The actual section modulus of the transformed composite section shall be used
in calculating the concrete flexural compression stress and, for construction
without temporary shores, this stress shall be based upon loading applied after the
concrete has reached 75 percent of its required strength. The stress in the concrete
shall not exceed 0.45/' c·
(c) End Shear. The web and the end connections of the steel beam shall be
designed to carry the total reaction.
(d) Shear Connectors. The horizontal shear between the steel beam and
concrete slab shall be transferred by shear connectors welded to the beam and
embedded in the concrete except as specified in Section 2708 (a). For full
composite action with concrete subject to flexural compression, the total horizon-
543
tal shear between the point of maximum positive moment and points of zero
moment shall be the smaller of the following:
v,I
= 0.85f',.A,....................... (8-3)
2
AND
VII= A{y ........................ (8-4)

A'sFy)2 shall be added to the right hand side of Formula (8-3) if longitudinal
reinforcing steel with area A's located within the effective width of the concrete
flange is included in the properties of the composite section.
In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel is consid-
ered to act compositely with the steel beam in the negative moment regions, the
total horizontal shear resisted by shear connectors between an interior support and
each adjacent point of contraflexure shall be:
Vh = Asr2Fyr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8-5)
For full composite action, the number of connectors resisting the horizontal shear
obtained from Formula (8-3) or (8-4) shall be not less than that determined by the
following formula:
v"
N 1 = - .......................... (8-6)
q
Working values for flat soffit concrete slabs with aggregates not conforming
with U.B.C. Standards No. 26-2 and No. 26-3, and for connectors other than
shown in Table No. 27-C, must be established by an approved test program.
For partial composite action with concrete subject to flexural compression, V'h
in Formula (8-1) shall be q multiplied by the number of connectors furnished
between the point of maximum moment and the nearest point of zero moment.
The value of V'" shall be not less than one fourth the smaller value of Formula
(8-3), using the maximum permitted effective width of the concrete flange, and
Formula (8-4). The effective moment of inertia for deflection computations shall
be determined by:
I,.n =I.,+ ~ (l,r- I,) ................. (8-7)

'JV,:
WHERE:
l, = moment of inertia of the steel beam (inches4 )
I,r = moment of inertia of the transformed composite section (inches 4 )
544
1988 EDITION 2708
The connectors required on each side of the point of maximum moment in an

area of positive bending may be uniformly distributed between that joint and
adjacent points of zero moment except that N 2 , the number of shear connectors
required between any concentrated load in that area and the nearest point of zero
moment, shall be determined by the following formula:
Nt =
N r Mf3
'Mf3(~c~x)
-I J................. (8-8)
WHERE:
M = The moment (less than the maximum moment) at a concentrated load
point.
N 1 = Number of connectors required between point of maximum moment
and point of zero moment determined by the relationship Vhiq or V' hI q,
as applicable.
f3 -_ Sir .§..rn .
s., or S., , as applicable.
Connectors required in the region of negative bending on a continuous beam

may be uniformly distributed between the point of maximum moment and each
point of zero moment.
Except for connectors installed in the ribs of formed steel decks, shear con-
nectors shall have at least I inch of concrete cover in all directions. Unless located
directly over the web, the diameter of studs shall be not greater than 2.5 times the
thickness of the flange to which they are welded. The minimum center-to-center
spacing of stud connectors shall be six diameters along the longitudinal axis of the
supporting composite beam and four diameters transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the supporting composite beam. The maximum center-to-center spacing of
stud connectors shall not exceed eight times the total slab thickness.
(e) Composite Beams or Girders with Formed Steel Deck. Composite
construction of concrete slabs on formed steel deck connected to steel beams or
girders shall be designed by the applicable portions of Section 2708 (a) through
(d) with the following modifications:
I. Subsections (e), (f) and (g) are applicable to decks with nominal rib height
not more than 3 inches.
2. The average width of concrete rib, w,., shall be at least 2 inches, but w,. shall
not be taken in calculations as more than the minimum clear width near the
top of the steel deck.
3. Concrete shall be connected to the steel member with welded stud shear
connectors % inch or less in diameter. Studs may be welded through the
deck or directly to the steel member.
4. Shear connections as installed shall extend not less than 11/z inches above
the top of the steel deck.
545
5. Total slab thickness including ribs shall be used in determining the effec-
tive width of concrete flange.
6. The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be at least 2 inches.
(f) Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam or Girder.
l. Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be neglected when determin-
ing section properties and in calculating Ac for Formula (8-3).
2. The allowable shear load per stud connector determined from Table NQ.
27-C shall be multiplied by the reduction factor
o.8s)l~)/ H.
(yn; _ t.o\:5t.o
\ h, \ h, l
in which Hs equals length of stud connector after welding (inches) and n,
equals the number of studs in one rib not to exceed three. While more than
three studs may be installed in a rib, no more than three studs per rib shall
be considered in computing the shear capacity of the rib. For reduction
factor calculations, Hs shall be taken no more than h, plus 3 inches. The
value of h, shall be taken as the nominal rib height (inches).
3. The slab shall be anchored to the steel beam or girder to resist uplift by
welded studs or a combination of welded studs and arc spot (puddle) welds
or other devices specified by the engineer. Such anchor spacing shall not
exceed 16 inches. The stud spacing shall not exceed 32 inches.
(g) Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam or Girder.
l. Concrete below the top of the steel deck may be included when determin-
ing section properties and shall be included in calculating Ac for Formula
(8-3).
2. The steel deck may be split over the supporting member to form a haunch.
When deck is a nominal 1.5 inch or deeper, the average width, w,, of
haunch or rib over the supporting member shall be at least 2 inches for the
first stud in the transverse row plus four stud diameters for each additional
stud.
3. The allowable shear load per stud connector shall be determined from
Table No. 27-C. When w,lh, is less than 1.5, the allowable load shall be
multiplied by the reduction factor
0.6 (~:) ( z: - 1.0)~ 1.0
Simple and Continuous Spans

Sec. 2709. (a) Simple Spans. Beams, girders and trusses shall be designed on
the basis of simple spans whose effective length is equal to the distance between
the centers of gravity of the members to which they deliver their end reactions.
(b) Continuous Spans. Beams, girders and trusses designed on the assump-
tion of full or partial end restraint shall be designed to carry the shears and
546
1988 EDITION 2709-2711
moments caused by continuity without exceeding the unit stresses prescribed in

Section 2702 (b), except that some nonelastic but self-limiting deformation of a
part of the connection may be permitted when this is essential to the avoidance of
overstressing of fasteners.
Deflections, VIbrations and Ponding
Sec. 2710. (a) General. Horizontal framing members shall be designed for the
deflection criteria and ponding requirements specified in Sections 2307 and
2305 (f).
Beams and girders supporting large open floor areas free of partitions or other
sources of damping, where transient vibration due to pedestrian traffic might not
be acceptable, shall be designed with due regard for vibration.
(b) Ponding. Unless a roof surface is provided with sufficient slope toward
points of free drainage or adequate individual drains to prevent the accumulation
of water, the roof system shall be investigated by a rational analysis to assure
stability under ponding conditions. The roof system shall be considered stable
and no further investigation needed, provided the following formulas are
satisfied:
AND
WHERE:
C
= 32SL.,4
"' HF I.,
For trusses and joists [5 shall be decreased by 15 percent when used in the above
formulas. A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly
supported by the primary members.
Total bending stress due to dead loads, live loads and ponding shall not exceed
0.8F for primary and secondary members. Stresses due to wind or seismic forces
neelnot be included in the ponding analysis.
Gross and Net Areas
Sec. 2711. (a) General. The gross area of a member at any point shall be
determined by summing the products of the thickness and the gross width of each
element as measured normal to the axis of the member. The net area shall be
determined by substituting for the gross width the net width computed in accor-
dance with Subsections (b) through (e).
(b) Net Area and Effective Net Area. l. In the case of a chain of holes
extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the part
shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width the sum of the diameters of all
the holes in the chain, and adding, for each gauge space in the chain, the quantity
547
s'
4g
WHERE:
s = longitudinal spacing (pitch, in inches) of any two consecutive holes.
g = transverse spacing (gauge, in inches) of the same two holes.
The critical net area A 11 of the part is obtained from that chain which gives the
least net width.
In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall not be
considered as adding to the net area.
2. The effective net area, Ae• of axially loaded tension members, where the
I
load is transmitted by bolts or rivets through some but not all of the cross-sectional
elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula Ae = C1Aw
WHERE:
A 11 = net area of the member.
C 1 = a reduction coefficient.
Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests or other recognized criteria,
rl the following values of C1 shall be used in computations:
A. W, M or S shapes with flange widths not less than two-thirds the depth, and
Ill, structural tees cut from these shapes, provided the connection is to the flanges and
has no fewer than three fasteners per line in the direction of stress C 1 = 0. 90.
B. W, M or S shapes not meeting the conditions of subparagraph I, structural
tees cut from these shapes, and all other shapes, including built-up cross sections,
I
provided the connection has not less than three fasteners per line in the direction of
stressC1 = 0.85.
C. All members whose connections have only two fasteners per line in the
direction of stress C1 = 0. 75.
3. Riveted and bolted splice and gusset plates and other connection fittings
subject to tensile force shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 2702 (b) I, where the effective net area shall be taken as the actual net area
except that, for the purpose of design calculations, it shall be taken as not greater
than 85 percent of the gross area.
(c) Angles. The gross width of angles shall be the sum of the widths of the legs
less the thickness. The gauge for holes in opposite legs shall be the sum of the
gauges from back of angles less the thickness.
(d) Size of Holes. In computing net area the width of a rivet or bolt hole shall be
taken as l/16 inch greater than the nominal dimension of the hole normal to the
direction of applied stress.
(c) Pin-connected Members. Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness without
reinforcement at the pinholes. They shall have "circular" heads in which the
periphery of the head beyond the pinhole is concentric with the pinhole. The
radius of transition between the circular head and the body of the eyebar shall be
equal to or greater than the diameter of the head.
The width of the body of the eye bar shall not exceed eight times its thickness,
and the thickness shall be not less than l/2 inch. The net area of the head through
548
1988 EDITION 2711-2712
the pinhole, transverse to the axis of the eyebar, shall be not less than 1.33 nor
more than 1.50 times the cross-sectional area of the body of the eyebar. The
diameter of the pin shall be not less than seven eighths the width of the body of the
eye bar. The diameter of the pinhole shall be not more than 1/32 inch greater than the
diameter of the pin. For steels having a yield stress greater than 70 ksi, the
diameter of the pinhole shall not exceed five times the plate thickness.
In pin-connected plates other than eyebars, the tensile stress on the net area,
transverse to the axis of the member, shall not exceed the stress allowed in Section
2702 (b) 5, and the bearing stress on the projected area of the pin shall not exceed
the stress allowed in Section 2702 (b) 5. The net area beyond the pinhole, parallel
to the axis of the member, shall be not less than two thirds of the net area across the
pinhole.
The corners beyond the pinhole may be cut at 45 degrees to the axis of the
member, provided the net section beyond the pinhole on a plane perpendicular to
the cut is not less than that required beyond the pinhole parallel to the axis of the
member.
The distance transverse to the axis of a pin-connected plate or any individual
element of a built-up member, from the edge of the pinhole to the edge of the
member or element, shall not exceed four times the thickness at the pinhole. The
diameter of the pinhole shall be not less than 1.25 times the smaller of the
distances from the edge of the pin hole to the edge of a pin-connected plate or
separated element of a built-up member at the pinhole. For pin-connected mem-
bers in which the pin is expected to provide for relative movement between
connected parts while under full load, the diameter of the pinhole shall be not
more than l/32 inch greater than the diameter of the pin.
The corners beyond the pinhole may be cut at 45 degrees to the axis of the
member, provided the net area beyond the pinhole on a plane perpendicular to the
cut is not less than that required beyond the pinhole parallel to the axis of the
member.
Thickness limitations on both eye bars and pin-connected plates may be waived
whenever external nuts are provided so as to tighten pin plates and filler plates into
snug contact. When the plates are thus contained, the allowable stress in bearing
shall be no greater than as specified in Section 2702 (b) 5.
Connections
Sec. 2712. (a) Minimum Connections. Connections shall be designed for all
tributary forces and shall be capable of supporting not less than six kips.
EXCEPTION: Lacing, sag bars and girts may be designed only for tributary
forces.
(b) Eccentric Connections. Members and their connections shall be designed
for eccentricity where the gravity axes of the connected members do not meet at a
point.
(c) Placement of Rivets, Bolts and Welds. Except as hereinafter provided,
groups of rivets, bolts or welds at the ends of any member transmitting axial stress
into that member shall have their centers of gravity on the gravity axis of the
member unless provision is made for the effect of the resulting eccentricity.
549
Except in members subject to repeated variation in stress as defined in U. B. C.

Standard No. 27-3, disposition of fillet welds to balance the forces about the
neutral axis or axes for end connections of single angle, double angle and similar-
type members is not required. Eccentricity between the gravity axes of such
members and the gauge lines for their riveted or bolted end connections may be
neglected in statically loaded members and shall be considered in members
subject to fatigue loading.
(d) Unrestrained Members. Beam, girder or truss connections rna~ bJ!. >y~~
portioned for the reaction shears only where the connections are flexible.
Flexible beam connections shall accommodate end rotations of unrestrained
(simple) beams. To accomplish this, inelastic action in the connection is
permitted.
(e) Restrained Members. Fasteners or welds for end connections of beams,
girders and trusses shall be designed for the combined effect of forces resulting
from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the connections.
When flanges or moment connection plates for end connections of beams and
girders arc welded to the flange of an 1- or H-shape column, pairs of column-web
stiffeners having an area given by Formula ( 12-1) shall be provided whenever the
calculated value of A 51 is positive.
As, ~ Pbt- Fyct(lb + 5k) ............. (!2-1)

Fys,
WHERE:
A,, = area of pair of column-web stiffeners.
Ar = area of flange delivering concentrated force.
thickness of column web.
k = distance between outerface of column flange and web toe of its fillet, if
column is rolled shape, or equivalent distance if column is welded
shape.
thickness of flange or moment connection plate delivering concentrated
force.
thickness of column flange.
column-web depth clear of fillets.
the computed force delivered by the flange or moment connection plate
times Sf1 when the computed force is due to live and dead load only, or o/.1
when the computed force is due to live and dead load in conjunction
with wind or earthquake forces in Seismic Zones Nos. I and 2, except
that for ductile moment-resisting frames in Seismic Zone No. 2 and all
moment-resisting frames in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, Phf = ArF.vh.
beam yield stress.
F,, column yield stress.
F yst = stiffener yield stress.
In addition, stiffeners shall be provided opposite the compression flange when
550
1988 EDITION 2712
de> 4100t'\#'; .................... (12-2)

Pbf
and opposite the tension flange when
................... ( 12-3)
When required, the combined width of pair of stiffeners and the thickness of
the column web shall be not less than two thirds the width of the flange or moment
connection plate delivering the concentrated force. The thickness of stiffeners
shall be not less than tb/2. When the concentrated force delivered occurs on only
one column flange, the stiffener need not exceed one half the column depth. The
weld joining stiffeners to the column web shall be sized to carry the force in the
stiffener caused by unbalanced moments on opposite sides of the column.
(f) Fillers. When rivets or bolts carrying computed stress pass through fillers
thicker than Y4 inch, except in friction-type connections assembled with high-
strength bolts, the fillers shall be extended beyond the splice material, and the
filler extension shall be secured by enough rivets or bolts to distribute the total
stress in the member uniformly over the combined section of the member and the
filler, or an equivalent number of fasteners shall be included in the connection.
In welded construction, fillers Y4 inch or more in thickness shall extend beyond
the edges of the splice plate and shall be welded to the part on which it is fitted
with sufficient weld to transmit the splice plate stress applied at the surface of the
filler as an eccentric load. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be
sufficient to transmit the splice plate stress and shall be long enough to avoid
overstressing the filler along the toe of the weld. Fillers less than 1/4 inch thick
shall have edges flush with the edges of the splice plate, and the weld size shall be
the sum of the size necessary to carry the splice plate stress plus the thickness of
the filler plate.
(g) Connections of Thnsion and Compression Members in Trusses. The
connections at ends of tension or compression members in trusses shall develop
the force due to the design load, but not less than 50 percent of the effective
strength of the member based upon the kind of stress that governs the selection of
the member.
(h) Compression Members with Bearing Joints. Where columns bear on
bearing plates or are finished to bear at splices, there shall be sufficient rivets,
bolts or welds to hold all parts securely in place.
Where other compression members are finished to bear, the splice material and
its riveting, bolting or welding shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and shall
be proportioned for 50 percent of the computed stress.
Joints shall be proportioned to resist tension that would be developed by lateral
forces acting in conjunction with 75 percent of the calculated dead load stress and
no live load.
Gaps not exceeding 1/16 inch in a contact joint, such as bolted, riveted or partial
551
penetration-welded milled column splice, shall be acceptable with no additional

work required on the joint. If the gap exceeds Y16 inch but is not more than Y4 inch
then the gap shall be filled with nontapered steel shims. Such shims need not be
other than mild steel regardless of the column material.
(i) Combination of Welds. If two or more types of welds are combined in a
joint, the effective capacity of each type weld shall be computed with reference to
the axis of the group, in order to determine the allowable capacity of the
combination.
U) Rivets and Bolts in Combination with Welds. In new work, rivets, A307
bolts or high-strength bolts used in bearing-type connections shall not be consid-
ered as sharing the stress in combination with welds. Welds, if used, shall be
provided to carry the entire stress in the connection. High-strength bolts installed
in accordance with the provisions of Section 2713 (a) as a friction-type connec-
tion prior to welding may be considered as sharing common load with the welds,
provided the connections are not subject to fatigue loading or used in a ductile
moment-resisting frame.
In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and friction-type
high-strength bolt connection may be utilized for carrying stresses resulting from
existing dead loads, and the welding need be adequate only to carry all additional
load.
(k) High-strength Bolts (in Friction-type Joints) in Combination with
Rivets. High-strength bolts, installed in accordance with the provisions of Sec-
tion 2713 (a) as friction-type connections, may be considered as sharing the
stresses with rivets in a connection.
(I) Field Connections. Rivets, high-strength bolts or welds shall be used for
the following connections:
Column splices in all tier structures 200 feet or more in height.
Column splices in tier structures 100 feet to 200 feet in height, if the least
horizontal dimension is less than 40 percent of the height.
Column splices in tier structures less than 100 feet in height, if the least
horizontal dimension is less than 25 percent of the height.
Connections of all beams and girders to columns and of any other beams and
girders on which the bracing of columns is dependent, in structures over 125
feet in height.
Roof truss splices and connections of trusses to columns, column splices,
column bracing, knee braces and crane supports, in all structures carrying
cranes of over 5-ton capacity.
Connections for supports of running machinery or of other live loads which
produce impact or reversal of stress.
For the purpose of this section, the height of a tier structure shall be taken as the
vertical distance from the curb level to the highest point of the roof beams, in the
case of flat roofs, or to the mean height of the gable, in the case of roofs having a
rise of more than 2¥•: 12. Where the curb level has not been established, or where
the structure does not adjoin a street, the mean level of the adjoining land shall be
552
1988 EDITION 2712-2713
used instead of curb level. Penthouses may be excluded in computing the height of
structure.
Rivets and Bolts

Sec. 2713. (a) Rivets and High-strength Bolts. Structural rivet steel shall
conform to the provisions of U. B.C. Standard No. 27-5. High-strength bolts shall
conform to the provisions of U .B.C. Standard No. 27-7.
(b) Effective Bearing Area. The effective bearing area of rivets and bolts
shall be the diameter multiplied by the length in bearing, except that for counter-
sunk rivets and bolts half the depth ofthe countersink shall be deducted.
(c) Long Grips. Rivets and A307 bolts which carry calculated stress, and the
grip of which exceeds five diameters, shall have their number increased I percent
for each additional Y16 inch in the grip.
(d) Minimum Spacing. I. The distance between centers of standard, oversized
or slotted fastener holes shall be not less than 22fJd nor less than that required by
Subsection 2 below, if applicable.
WHERE:
d = the nominal diameter of the fastener, inches.
2. Along a line of transmitted force, the distance between centers of holes shall
be not less than the following:
A. Standard holes:
WHERE:
P force transmitted by one fastener to the critical connected part, kips.
F u = specified minimum tensile strength of the critical connected part, kips
per square inch.
t = thickness of the critical connected part, inches.
B. Oversized and slotted holes: The distance required for standard holes in
Item A above, plus the applicable increment C 1 in Table No. 27-D-2, but the clear
distance between holes shall be not less than one bolt diameter.
(e) Minimum Edge Distance. I. The distance from the center of a standard
hole to an edge of a connected part shall be not less than the applicable value in
Table No. 27-D-1 nor the value from Subsection 2 or 3 below, as applicable.
2. Along a line of transmitted force, in the direction of the force, the distance
from the center of a standard hole to the edge ofthe connected part shall be not less
than
3. At end connections bolted to the web of a beam and designed for beam shear
reaction only (without use of an analysis which accounts for the effects induced by
fastener eccentricity), the distance from the center of the nearest standard hole to
553
the end of the beam web shall be not less than
WHERE:
P R = beam reaction, in kips, divided by the number of bolts.
Afternatively, this requirement may be waived, provided the bearing stress
induced by the fastener is limited to not more than 0.90Fu.
4. The distance from the center of any oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a
connected part shall be not less than that required for a standard hole by Item No.
I, 2 or 3 above, as applicable, plus the applicable increment C2 in Table No. 27-
D-3.
(f) Maximum Edge Distance. The maximum distance from the center of any
rivet or bolt to the nearest edge of parts in contact with one another shall be 12
times the thickness of the plate, but shall not exceed 6 inches.
Welds
Sec. 2714. (a) General. Welder qualification requirements, welding proce-
dure and welding electrodes for other than sheet steel shall conform to U. B.C.
Standard No. 27-6. Welder qualification requirements, welding procedure and
welding electrodes for sheet steel shall conform to U .B.C. Standard No. 27-13.
(b) Maximum Effective Size of Fillet Welds. The maximum size fillet welds
that may be used along edges of connected parts shall be:
1. Along edges of material less than \14 inch thick, the maximum size may be
equal to the thickness of the material.
2. Along edges of material \14 inch or more in thickness, the maximum size
shall be \116 inch less than the thickness of the material, unless the weld is
especially designated on the drawings to be built out to obtain full throat
thickness.
(c) Minimum Size of Fillet Welds and Partial Penetration Welds. The
minimum size of fillet weld shall be as shown in Table No. 27-E-1. The minimum
effective throat of partial penetration groove weld shall be as shown in Table No.
27-E-2. Weld size is determined by the thicker of the two parts joined, except that
the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner part joined unless a
larger size is required by calculated stress. For this exception, particular care
should be taken to provide sufficient preheat for weld soundness.
(d) Length of Fillet Welds. The minimum effective length of a strength fillet
weld shall be not less than four times the nominal size, or else the size of the weld
shall be considered not to exceed one fourth of its effective length.
If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end connections of flat bar tension
members, the length of each fillet weld shall be not less than the perpendicular
distance between them. The transverse spacing of longitudinal fillet welds used in
end connections shall not exceed 8 inches, except where transverse bending is
provided for in the connection.
(e) Intermittent Fillet Welds. Intermittent fillet welds may be used to transfer
calculated stress across a joint or faying surfaces, when the strength required is
554
1988 EDITION 2714
less than that developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest permitted size,
and to join components of built-up members. The effective length of any segment
of intermittent fillet welding shall be not less than four times the weld size with a
minimum of I \12 inches.
(f) Lap Joints. The minimum amount of laps on lap joints shall be five times
the thickness of the thinner part joined and not less than I inch. Lap joints joining
plates or bars subjected to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the edge of both
lapped parts except where the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently
restrained to prevent opening of the joint under maximum loading.
(g) End Returns of Fillet Welds. Side or end fillet welds terminating at ends
or sides, respectively, of parts or members shall, wherever practicable, be
returned continuously around the comers for a distance not less than twice the
nominal size of the weld. This provision shall apply to side and top fillet welds
connecting brackets, beam seats and similar connections, on the plane about
which bending moments are computed.
(h) Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots. Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used
to transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped
parts and to join components of built-up members. Such fillet welds may overlap,
subject to the provisions of Section 2702 (e). Fillet welds in holes or slots shall not
be considered as plug or slot welds.
(i) Plug and Slot Welds. Plug or slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a
lap joint or to prevent buckling of lapped parts and to join component parts of
built-up members.
The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall be not less than the thickness of
the part containing it plus 5/16 inch, rounded to the next greater odd \116 inch, nor
greater than two and one-fourth times the thickness of the weld metal.
The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the
diameter of the hole.
The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed I 0 times the thickness of the
weld. The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part
containing it, plus Y16 inch, rounded to the next greater odd \116 inch, nor shall it be
greater than two and one-fourth times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the
slot shall be semicircular or shall have the comers rounded to a radius not less than
the thickness of the part containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge
of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their
length shall be four times the width of the slot. The minimum center-to-center
spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be two times the length of the
slot.
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 5fs inch or Jess in thickness shall
be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over 5fs inch in thickness, it
shall be at least one half the thickness of the material but not less than 5fs inch.
(j) Welding Sheet Steel. Arc welding of sheet steels or strip steels, or both,
including cold-formed members, 0.180 inch or less in thickness shall conform to
555
Built-up Members
j Sec. 2715. (a) Steel Joists, H, K, LH, and DLH Series, and Joist Girders.
;~ Steel joists and joist girders shall be designed as set forth in U. 8. C. Standard No.
27-4.
(b) Open Box-type Beams and Grillages. Where two or more rolled beams or
channels are used side by side to form a flexural member, they shall be connected
together at intervals of not more than 5 feet. Throughbolts and separators may be
used, provided that in beams having a depth of 12 inches or more, no fewer than
two bolts shall be used at each separator location. When concentrated loads are
carried from one beam to the other, or distributed between the beams, diaphragms
having sufficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be riveted, bolted or welded
between the beams. Where beams are exposed, they shall be sealed against
corrosion of interior surfaces, or spaced sufficiently far apart to permit cleaning
and painting.
(c) Compression Members. All parts of built-up compression members and

the transverse spacing of their lines of fasteners shall conform to the requirements
of Sections 2705 and 2706.
At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on base plates or milled
surfaces, all compone11ts in contact shall be connected by rivets or bolts spaced
longitudinally not more than four diameters apart for a distance equal to one and
one-half times the maximum width of the member or by continuous welds having
a length not less than the maximum width of the member.
The longitudinal spacing for intermediate rivets, bolts or intermittent welds in
built-up members shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of calculated stress.
The spacing of connectors for outside plates of built-up compression members
shall not exceed the values determined by the following formulas.
When rivets or bolts are provided on all gauge lines at each section, or when
intermittent welds are provided along the edges of the components
127t
VF,
but not more than 12 inches.
When rivets, bolts or welds are staggered
lt!Ot
\IF;
but not more than 18 inches on each gauge line.
WHERE:
t = thickness of thinner outside plate in inches.
The maximum longitudinal spacing of rivets, bolts or intermittent welds
connecting two rolled shapes in contact with one another shall not exceed 24
inches.
556
1988 EDITION 2715
Compression members composed of two or more rolled shapes separated by

intermittent fillers shall be connected at intervals such that the slenderness ratio 1/r
of either shape, between the fasteners, does not exceed the governing slenderness
ratio of the built-up member. The least radius of gyration r shall be used in
computing the slenderness ratio of each component part.
Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be
provided with lacing having tie plates at each end, and at intermediate points if the
lacing is interrupted. In main members carrying calculated stress, the end tie
plates shall have a length of not less than the distance between the lines of rivets,
bolts or welds connecting them to the components of the member. Intermediate tie
plates shall have a length not less than one half of this distance. The thickness of
tie plates shall be not less than one fiftieth of the distance between the lines of
rivets, bolts or welds connecting them to the segments of the members. In riveted
and bolted construction, the pitch in tie plates shall be not more than six diameters
and the tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at least three fasteners. In
welded construction, the welding on each line connecting a tie plate shall aggre-
gate not less than one third the length of the plate.
Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or other shapes employed as
lacing, shall be so spaced that the ratio 1/r of the flange included between their
connections shall not exceed the governing ratio for the member as a whole.
Lacing shall be proportioned to resist a shearing stress normal to the axis of the
member equal to 2 percent of the total compressive stress in the member. The ratio
1/r for lacing bars arranged in single systems shall not exceed 140. For double
lacing this ratio shall not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at their
intersections. Lacing bars in compression may be treated as secondary members,
with I being taken as the unsupported length of the lacing bar between rivets or
welds connecting it to the components of the built-up member for single lacing
and 70 percent of that distance for double lacing. The inclination of lacing bars to
the axis of the member shall be not less than 60 degrees for single lacing and 45
degrees for double lacing. When the distance between the lines of rivets or welds
in the flanges is more than 15 inches, the lacing shall be double or be made of
angles.
Tie plates and lacing bars are not required where the open sides of built-up
compression members are enclosed with cover plates perforated with access
holes. The net width of such plates across holes, as defined in Section 2706 (b), is
assumed to resist axial stress, provided that: the width-to-thickness ratio con-
forms to the requirements of Section 2706 (b); the ratio of length, in direction of
stress, to width of hole does not exceed two; the clear distance between holes in
the direction of stress is not less than the transverse distance between nearest lines
of connecting rivets, bolts or welds; and the periphery of the holes at all points has
a minimum radius of 1Y2 inches.
(d) Tension Members. The longitudinal spacing of rivets, bolts and intermit-
tent fillet welds connecting a plate and a rolled shape in a built-up tension member,
or two plate components, shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner
plate nor 12 inches. The longitudinal spacing of rivets, bolts and intermittent
welds connecting two or more shapes in a tension member shall not exceed 24
557
inches. Tension members composed of two or more shapes or plates separated by

intermittent fillers shall be connected at intervals such that the slenderness ratio of
either component between the fasteners does not exceed 240.
Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without lacing may be used on the
open ~ides of built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a length not less than
two thirds the distance between the lines of rivets, bolts or welds connecting them
to the components of the member. The thickness of such tie plates shall be not less
than one fiftieth of the distance between these lines. The longitudinal spacing of
rivets, bolts or intermittent welds at tie plates shall not exceed 6 inches. The
spacing of tie plates shall be such that the slenderness ratio of any component in
the length between tie plates will not exceed 240.
Camber
Sec. 2716. (a) General. Horizontal framing members shall be designed for
the deflection criteria and ponding requirements specified in Sections 2307 and
2305 (f).
(b) Trusses and Girders. Trusses of 80 feet or greater span shall be cambered
for the dead load deflection. Crane girders of 75 feet or greater span shall be
cambered for the dead plus half the live load deflection.
Expansion
Sec. 2717. Adequate provision shall be made for expansion and contraction
appropriate to the service conditions of the structure.
Column Bases
Sec. 2718. (a) Loads. Adequate provision shall be made to transfer the column
loads and moments, if any, to the footings and foundations.
(b) Alignment. Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with
full bearing on the masonry.
(c) Finishing. Column bases shall be finished in accordance with the follow-
ing requirements:
I . Rolled-steel bearing plates 2 inches or less in thickness may be used
without planing, provided a satisfactory contact bearing is obtained;
rolled-steel bearing plates over 2 inches but not over 4 inches in thickness
may be straightened by pressing; or, if presses are not available, by planing
for all bearing surfaces (except as noted under requirement 3 of this
section), to obtain a satisfactory contact bearing; rolled-steel bearing plates
over 4 inches in thickness shall be planed for all bearing surfaces (except as
noted under requirement 3 of this section).
2. Column bases other than rolled-steel bearing plates shall be planed for all
bearing surfaces (except as noted under requirement 3 of this section).
3. The bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases which are grouted
to ensure full bearing contact on foundations need not be planed.
Anchor Bolts
Sec. 2719. Anchor bolts shall be designed to provide resistance to all condi-
tions of tension and shear at the bases of columns, including the net tensile
558
1988 EDITION 2719·2721
components of any bending moments which may result from fixation or partial
fixation of columns. Provisions shall be made for oversize holes. See U .B.C.
Standard No. 27-2.
Fabrication
Sec. 2720. The fabrication, erection and painting of structural steel shall
conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 27-2.
Plastic Design
Sec. 2721. (a) Scope. Subject to the requirements specified in this section,
simple or continuous beams, braced and unbraced planar rigid frames, and similar
portions of structures rigidly constructed so as to be continuous over at least one
interior support may be proportioned on the basis of their maximum strength,
otherwise known as plastic design. This strength, as determined by rational
analysis, shall be not less than that required to support a factored load of I. 7 times
the live load and dead load or 1.3 times these loads acting in conjunction with 1.3
times wind or earthquake forces.
For one- or two-story frames, the maximum strength may be determined by a
plastic analysis procedure and the frame instability effect P ~ may be ignored. For
braced multistory frames, provisions should be made to include the frame
instability effect in the design of bracing system and frame members. For
unbraced multistory frames, the frame instability effect shall be included directly
in the calculations for maximum strength.
Plastically designed members of braced multistory steel frames shall not be
part of the required seismic force resisting system in Seismic Zone No.2, No.3 or
No.4.
Rigid frames shall be assumed to have beam-to-column connections of suffi-
cient rigidity to hold virtually unchanged the original angles between intersecting
members in the plane of the frame. Members between rigid frames may be
connected at ends of shear only and be free to rotate under loads.
Connections joining a portion of a structure designed on the basis of plastic
behavior with a portion not so designed need be no more rigid than seat-and-cap
angle or standard web connections.
Where plastic design is used as the basis for proportioning continuous beams
and structural frames, the provisions relating to allowable stress contained in the
other sections of this chapter are waived. The provisions of this chapter shall
apply except as modified by this section.
Crane runways shall not be designed continuous over interior vertical supports
on the basis of maximum strength. Rigid frame bents supporting crane runways
may be considered as coming within the scope of this section.
(b) Material. Structural steel shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 27-1.
(c) Stability of Braced Frames. The vertical bracing system for a plastically
designed braced multistory shall be adequate, as determined by a rational analy-
sis, to prevent buckling of the structure under factored gravity loads and to
maintain the lateral stability of the structure, including the overturning effects of
drift, under factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads.
559
The vertical bracing system may be considered to function together with in-
plane shear-resisting exterior and interior walls, floor slabs and roof decks, if they
are secured to the structural frames. The columns, girders, beams and diagonal
members, when used as the vertical bracing system, may be considered to
comprise a vertical-cantilever, simply-connected truss in the analyses for frame
buckling and lateral stability. Axial deformation of all members in the vertical
bracing system shall be included in the lateral stability analysis. The axial force in
these members caused by factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads shall not
exceed 0.85PY, where PY is the product of yield stress times area of the member.
Girders and beams included in the vertical bracing system of a braced multisto-
ry frame shall be proportioned for axial force and moment caused by the con-
current factored horizontal and gravity loads, in accordance with Formula (21-2),
with Per taken as the maximum axial strength of the beam, based on the actual
slenderness ratio between braced points in the plane of bending.
(d) Stability of Unbraced Frames. The strength of an unbraced multistory
frame shall be determined by a rational analysis which includes the effect of frame
instability and column axial deformation. Such a frame shall be designed to be
stable under ( l) factored gravity loads and (2) factored gravity plus factored
horizontal loads. The axial force in the columns at factored load levels shall not
exceed 0. 75 PY.
(e) Columns. In the plane of bending of columns, which would develop a
plastic hinge at ultimate loading, the slenderness ratio llr shall not exceed Cc, as
defined in Section 2701 (c).
The maximum strength of an axially loaded compression member shall be:
Per= 1.7AF0 .•••••••••.......•. (21-1)
WHERE:
A = gross area of the member
Fa = See Formula (2-1) in Section 2702 (b).
Members subject to combined axial load and bending moment shall satisfy the
X_+
p
'"'"
( p)
CwM
1--p Mm
-~ 1·() ................ (21-2)
('
.f_+___M__ -~ 1 .0·, M ~
- M " ................ (21 -3)
P.IJ 1• 18M1J .
For columns braced in the weak direction:
560
1988 EDITION 2721
For columns unbraced in the weak direction:
M =
m
[1 07- (l/ru)3160VF;;] M "= M " ........... (21-4)
'
<
(f) Shear. Unreinforced webs of columns, beams, and girders, including areas
within the boundaries of the connections, shall be so proportioned that:
Vu.;; 0.55Fid ................... (21-5)
(g) Web Crippling. Web stiffeners are required on a member at a point of load
application where a plastic hinge would form.
Web stiffeners are required at points where concentrated compression loads are
delivered by the flanges to the web as required by Section 2712 (e).
(h) Minimum Thickness (Width-thickness Ratios). The width-thickness
ratio for flanges of rolled "1,'' wide flange and similar built-up single-web shapes
that would be subjected to compressions involving hinge rotation under ultimate
loading shall not exceed the following values:
Fv bJ2tr
36 8.5
42 8.0
45 7.4
50 7.0
55 6.6
60 6.3
65 6.0
The thickness of sloping flanges may be taken as their average thickness.

The width-thickness ratio of similarly compressed flange plates in box sections
and cover-plates shall not exceed 190/~. For this purpose the width of a cover-
plate shall be the distance between longitudinal lines of connecting rivets, high-
strength bolts or welds.
The depth-thickness ratio of webs of members subjected to plastic bending
shall not exceed the following:
:;;;;; 0.27
!I
~=, ( 1 - 1.4 ;J ............... (21-6a)
WHERE: p
p > 0.27
!I
d 257 .................... (21-6b)

t= VF.. y
561
(i) Connections. All connections shall be capable of resisting the moments,

shears and axial loads to which they would be subjected by the full-factored
loading or any partial distribution thereof.
Haunch-type connections, tapered or curved for architectural reasons, shall be
so proportioned that the full plastic bending strength of the section adjacent to the
connection can be developed.
Stiffeners shall be used, as required, to preserve the flange continuity of
interrupted members at their junction with other members in a continuous frame.
Such stiffeners shall be placed in pairs on opposite sides of the web of the member
which extends continuously through the joint.
Rivets, welds and bolts shall be proportioned to resist the forces produced at
factored load using allowable stresses equal to 1. 7 times those permitted in other
sections of this chapter.
High-strength bolts may be used in joints having painted contact surfaces when
these joints are of such size that the slip required to produce bearing would not
interfere with the formation at factored loading of the plastic hinges assumed in
the design.
(j) Lateral Bracing. Members shall be adequately braced to resist lateral and
torsional displacements at the plastic hinge locations. The laterally unsupported
distance, lcr' shall not exceed:
M
+ 1.0 > Mp > - 0.5
WHERE:
M
- o.5 ~ Mp
>- 1.0
k,_l375 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oooo(21-7b)
'u- Fv
WHERE:
rY = the radius of gyration of the member about its weak axis.
M the lesser of the moments at the ends of the unbraced segment.
MIMP = the end moment ratio, is positive when the segment is bent in reverse
curvature and negative when bent in single curvature.
EXCEPTION: Laterally unsupported lengths greater than specified above may
be justified by an analysis based upon the amount of restraint present at the ends of
the segment in the plane of the computed bending moments.
The foregoing provisions need not apply in the region of the last hinge to form
nor in members oriented with their weak axis normal to the plane of bending.
However, in the region of the last hinge to form and in regions not adjacent to a
plastic hinge, the maximum distance between points of lateral support shall be
such as to satisfy the requirements of Formulas (2-6a), (2-6b ), (2-7), (3-1 a) and
562
1988 EDITION 2721-2722
(3-1 b) in this chapter. For this case the value of fa and fb shall be computed from
the moment and axial force at factored loading, divided by the applicable load
factor.
Members built into a masonry wall and having their web perpendicular to the
wall can be assumed to be laterally supported with respect to their weak axis of
bending.
(k) Fabrication. The provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 27-2 with respect to
workmanship shall govern the fabrication of structures, or portions of structures,
designed on the basis of maximum strength, subject to the following limitations:
The use of sheared edges shall be avoided in locations subject to plastic
hinge rotation of factored loading. If used they shall be finished smooth by
grinding, chipping or planing.
In locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at factored loading, holes for
rivets or bolts in the tension area shall be subpunched and reamed or drilled full
SIZe.
Steel Structures Resisting Forces Induced by Earthquake Motions

Sec. 2722. (a) General. Design and construction of steel framing in lateral
force-resisting systems in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4 shall conform to the
requirements of the code and to all the requirements of this section.
(b) Definitions.
ALLOWABLE STRESSES are prescribed in Section 2702 (b), (c) and (d).
CHEVRON BRACING is that form of bracing where a pair of braces located
either above or below a beam terminates at a single point within the clear beam
span.
CONNECTION is the group of elements that connect the member to the joint.
DIAGONAL BRACING is that form of bracing that diagonally connects
joints at different levels.
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is that form of braced frame
where at least one end of each brace intersects a beam at a point away from the
column girder joint.
GIRDER is the horizontal member in a seismic frame. The words beam and
girder may be used interchangeably.
JOINT is the entire assemblage at the intersections of the members.
K BRACING is that form of bracing where a pair of braces located on one side
of a column terminates at a single point within the clear column height.
LINK BEAM is that part of a beam in an eccentrically braced frame which is
designed to yield in shear and/or bending so that buckling of the bracing members
is prevented.
STRENGTH is the strength as prescribed in Section 2722 (c) 2.
V BRACING is that form of chevron bracing that intersects a beam from above
and inverted V bracing is that form of chevron bracing that intersects a beam from
below.
563
X BRACING is that form of bracing where a pair of diagonal braces cross near
mid length of the bracing members.
(c) Materials. l. Structural steel used in lateral force-resisting systems shall

conform to A 36, A 441, A 500, A 501, A 572 (Grades 42 and 50) and A 588.
Structural steel conforming to A 283 (Grade D) may be used for base plates and
anchor bolts.
EXCEPTION: Other steels permitted in this code may be used for the following:
I . Ordinary moment frames in Seismic Zone No. 2 in accordance with Section
2722 (h).
2. One-story buildings.
3. Light-framed wall systems in accordance with Section 2722 (i).
~::
2. Member strength. Where this section requires that the strength of the
I
member be developed, the following shall be used:
STRENGTH
Flexure = ZF
Shear = o.5s Fydr
'1:< Axial compression !.7 F 0 A
[j Axial tension FYA
~
Connectors
Full penetration welds FyA
I
Partial penetration welds I. 7 Allowable
Bolts and fillet welds I. 7 Allowable
W~ Members need not be compact unless otherwise required by this section.
i! (d) Column Requirements. I. Column strength. Columns shall satisfy the
[ load combinations required by Section 2303 (f) at allowable stress limits, with
":,,0:.'=,. stress increases allowed by Section 2303 (d). In addition, in Seismic Zones Nos. 3
!I and 4, columns in frames shall have the strength to resist the axial loads resulting
from the load combinations in Subsections A and B below.
A. Axial Compression
I:l l.OPDL + 0.7 Pu + 3(Rw/8)PE

B. Axial Tension
~~~ 0.85 PDL + 3(Rj8)PE
t
EXCEPTION: The axial load combination as outlined in Subsections A and B
above:
I. Need not exceed either the maximum force that can be transferred to the
column, by elements of the structure, or the limit as determined by the
overturning uplift which the foundation is capable of resisting.
2. Need not apply to columns in moment-resisting space frames complying with
Formula (22-3) wheref0 is equal to or less than 0.3 FY for all load combina-
tions.
The load combinations from Subsections A and B need be used only when
specifically referred to.
564
1988 EDITION 2722
2. Column splices. Column splices shall have sufficient strength to develop

the column forces determined from Section 2722 (d) I. Welded column splices
subject to net tensile forces shall comply with the more critical of the following:
A. Partial penetration welds shall be designed to resist !50 percent of the force
determined from Section 2722 (d) I B.
B. Welding shall develop not less than 50 percent of the flange area strength of
the smaller column.
Splices employing partial penetration welds shall be located at least three feet
from girder flanges.
3. Slenderness evaluation. This paragraph is applicable when the provisions
of Formula (3-1 a) and Section 2705 arc applied to the effective length determina-
tion of columns of moment frames resisting earthquake forces in Seismic Zones
Nos. 3 and 4. In the plane of the earthquake forces the factor K may be taken as
unity when all of the following conditions are met:
A. The column is either continuous or is fixed at each joint.
B. The maximum axial compressive stress, fa, does not exceed 0.4 Fv under
design loads. ·
C. The calculated story drift ratios are less than the values given in Section
2312 (e) 8.
(e) Ordinary Moment Frame Requirements. Girder-to-column connec-

tions of ordinary moment frames shall meet the requirements of Section 2722 (f) 2
unless it can be shown that they are capable of resisting the combination of gravity
loads and 3(Rj8) times the design seismic forces. Ordinary moment frames in
Seismic Zone No. I meeting these requirements may use a value of R.,. of 12.
(f) Special Moment-resisting Space Frame (SMRSF) Requirements. I.

Scope. The requirements of this section for SMRSF systems apply only in
Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. SMRSF systems in Seismic Zone No.2 need comply
only with paragraphs 2, 7, 8 and 10 below.
2. Girder to column connection. A. Required strength. The girder to
column connection shall be adequate to develop the lesser of the following:
(i) The strength of the girder in flexure.
(ii) The moment corresponding to development of the panel zone shear
strength as determined from Formula (22-1 ).
EXCEPTION: Where a connection is not designed to contribute flexural resis-
tance at the joint, it need not develop the required strength if it can be shown to meet
the deformation compatibility requirements of Section 2312 (h) 2 D.
B. Connection strength. The girder-to-column connection may be consid-
ered to be adequate to develop the flexural strength of the girder if it conforms to
the following:
(i) The flanges have full penetration butt welds to the columns.
(ii) The girder web to column connection shall be capable of resisting the
girder shear determined for the combination of gravity loads and the seismic shear
565
forces which result from compliance with Section 2722 (t) 2 A. This connection
strength need not exceed that required to develop gravity loads plus 3 (Rw/8) times
the girder shear resulting from the prescribed seismic forces.
Where the flexural strength of the girder flanges is greater than 70 percent of the
flexural strength of the entire section (i.e., bt (d-t1)FY >0. 7Z,F,.) the web conncc-
1
<km may be made by means of welding or htgh-strength bolting.
For girders not meeting the criteria in the paragraph above, the girder web-to-
column connection shall be made by means of welding the web directly or through
shear tabs to the column. That welding shall have a strength capable of developing
at least 20 percent of the flexural strength of the girder web. The girder shear shall
be resisted by means of additional welds or friction-type high-strength bolts or
both.
C. Alternate connection. Connection configurations utilizing welds or high-
strength bolts not conforming with paragraph B above may be used if they are
shown by test or calculation to meet the criteria in paragraph A above. Where
conformance is shown by calculation, 125 percent of the strengths of the connect-
ing clements may be used.
D. Flange detail limitations. For steel whose specified ultimate strength is
less than 1.5 times the specified yield strength, plastic hinges shall not form at
locations in which the beam flange area has been reduced, such as for bolt holes.
Bolted connectiOns of flange plates of beam-column joints shall have the oct-to-
gross area ratio A_!AR equal to or greater than 1.2 F/Fu.
3. Panel Zone. A. Strength. The panel zone of the joint shall be capable of
resisting the shear induced by beam bending moments due to gravity loads plus
1.85 times the prescribed seismic forces, but the shear strength need not exceed
that required to develop 0. 8~M, of the girders framing into the column flanges at
the joint. The joint panel zone shear strength may be obtained from the following
formula:
2
V = 0.55 F,.dct [ I + 3bctcf ] . . . . . . . . . . . (22-1)
. dhdct
WHERE:
t = the total thickness of the joint panel zone including doubler plates.
d, the depth of the beam.
l(. the column depth.
he is the width of the column flange.
t, 1 is the thickness of the column flange.
B. Thickness. The panel zone thickness, !1 , shall conform to the following
formula:
t, ? (d, + w,)/90 ..................... (22-2)
WHERE:
d. the panel zone depth between continuity plates.
w the panel zone width between column flanges.
566
1988 EDITION 2722
For this purpose, tz, shall not include any double plate thickness unless the
doubler plate is connected to the column web with plug welds adequate to prevent
local buckling of the plate.
C. Doubler plates. Doubler plates provided to reduce panel zone shear stress
or to reduce the web depth thickness ratio shall be placed not more than 'lt6 inch
from the column web and shall be welded across the plate width top and bottom
with at least a 3ft6-inch fillet weld. They shall be either butt or fillet welded to the
column flanges to develop the shear strength of the doubler plate. Weld strength
shall be as given in Section 2722 (c) 2.
4. Flange width-thickness ratio. Girders shall comply with Section 2702J.!?)
4, except that the flange width-thickness ratio, btf2t1 , shall not exceed 52/YFv.
5. Continuity plates. When determining the need for girder tension flange
continuity plates, the value of Phfin Formula ( 12-3) shall be taken as 1.8 (bt1)Fvb·
6. Strength ratio. At any moment frame joint, the following relationship shall
be satisfied:
"iZ,.(Fyc - fa)/'i,Z~yb > 1.0 .... · ............ (22-3)
where (fa ""' 0)
EXCEPTION: This requirement need not apply in any of the following cases,
provided the compactness limitations for beams given in Section 2722 (f) 4 shall
apply to columns as well:
I. For columns with fa Jess than 0.4F v for all load combinations, except for loads
specified in Section 2722 (d) I. ·
2. For columns in any story which has lateral shear strength 50 percent greater
than that of the story above.
3. For any column whose lateral shear strength is not included in the design to
resist code-required seismic shears.
7. Trusses in SMRSF. Trusses may be used as horizontal members in SMRSF
if the sum of the truss seismic force flexural strength exceeds the sum of the
column seismic force flexural strength immediately above and below the truss by
a factor of at least I . 25. For this determination the strengths of the members shall
be reduced by the gravity load effects. In buildings of more than one story, the
column axial stress shall not exceed 0.4FY and the ratio of the unbraced column
height to the least radius of gyration shall not exceed 60. The connection of the
truss chords to the column shall develop the lesser of the following:
A. The strength of the truss chord.
B. The chord force necessary to develop 125 percent of the flexural strength of
the column.
8. Girder-column joint restraint. A. Restrained joint. Where it can be
shown that the columns of SMRSF remain elastic, the flanges of the columns need
be laterally supported only at the level of the girder top flange.
Columns may be assumed to remain elastic if one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
(i) The ratio in Formula (22-3) is greater than 1.25.
567
II
(ii) The flexural strength of the column is at least 1.25 times the moment that
corresponds to the panel zone shear strength.
(iii) Girder flexural strength or panel zone strength will limit column stress
ifo + fbx + !by) to Fy of the column.
(iv) The column will remain elastic under gravity loads plus 3(R,/8) times the
prescribed seismic forces.
Where the column cannot be shown to remain elastic, the column flanges shall
be laterally supported at the levels of the girder top and bottom flanges. The
column flange lateral support shall be capable of resisting a force equal to one
percent of the girder flange capacity at allowable stresses and at a limiting
displacement perpendicular to the frame of 0.2 inch. Required bracing members
may brace the column flanges directly or indirectly through the column web or the
girder flanges.
B. Unrestrained joint. Columns without lateral support transverse to a joint
shall conform to the requirements of Section 2703. Formula (3-2), with the
column considered as pin ended and the length taken as the distance between
lateral supports conforming with A above. The column stress, fa• shall be deter-
mined from gravity loads plus the lesser of the following:
(i) 3(Rj8) times the prescribed seismic forces.
(ii) The forces corresponding to either 125 percent of the girder flexural
strength or the panel zone shear strength.
The stress/by• shall include the effects of the bracing force specified in Section
2722 (f) 8 A and P-delta.
l!r for such columns shall not exceed 60.
At truss frames the column shall be braced at each truss chord for a lateral force
equal to one percent of the compression yield strength of the chord.
9. Beam bracing. Both flanges of beams shall be braced directly or indirectly.
The beam bracing between column center lines shall not exceed 96ry. In addition,
braces shall be placed at concentrated loads where a hinge may forin.
10. Changes in beam flange area. Abrupt changes in beam flange area are
not permitted within possible plastic hinge regions of special moment-resistant
frames.
II . Moment frame drift calculations. Moment frame drift calculations shall
include bending and shear contributions from the clear girder and column spans,
column axial deformation and the rotation and distortion of the panel zone.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Drift calculations may be based on column and girder center
lines where either of the following conditions is met:
(i) It can be demonstrated that the drift so computed for frames of similar
configuration is typically within 15 percent of that determined above.
(ii) The column panel zone strength can develop 0.8 I M, of girders framing to
the column flanges at the joint.
2. Column axial deformations may be neglected if they contribute less than I 0
percent to the total drift.
568
1988 EDITION 2722
(g) Requirements for Braced Frames. I . General. The provisions of this ]

section apply to all braced frames except eccentrically braced frames (EBF) I._~.·
designed in accordance with Section 2722 (h). Those members which resist I
seismic forces totally or partially by shear or flexure shall be designed in accord- ~
ance with Section 2722 (f) except Subsection 3. ~
2. Bracing members. A. Slenderness. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 the l!r ·····
ratio for bracing members shall not exceed 720/VF; except as permitted in I
Su:~e~!;;s~ ~!::~ion. The allowable stress, Fas• for bracing members resisting ~.: '
seismic forces in compression shall be determined from the following formula: ,.
WHERE:
F.
Fas = {3F • ........................ (22-4)
the allowable axial compressive stress allowed in Section 2702 (b) 3 and
I:::~
'~
Section 2303 (d). \~

{3 the stress reduction factor determined from the following formula:
{3 = 1/[1 + ([Kl/r]/2Cc)l ................................... (22-5)
I
I
EXCEPTION: In Seismic Zone No.2 the value of {3 need not be less than 0.8.
C. Lateral force distribution. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, the seismic

lateral force along any line of bracing shall be distributed to the various members
so that neither the sum of the horizontal components of the forces in members
~ ·~
acting in tension nor the sum of the horizontal components of forces in members ,•:
acting in compression exceed 70 percent of the total force. :,: •.
EXCEPTION: Where compression bracing acting alone has the strength, ne- :·:
glecting the strength reduction factor {3, to resist 3(Rwf8) times the prescribed ~'
seismic force such distribution is not required.
A line of bracing is defined, for the purpose of this provision as a single line, or I
parallel lines within I 0 percent of the dimension of the structure perpendicular to
the line of bracing.
D. Built-up members. The l!rof individual parts ofbuilt-up bracing members
between stitches, when computed about a line perpendicular to the axis through
the parts, shall not be greater than 75 percent of the l!r of the member as a whole.
E. Compression elements in braces. The width-thickness ratio of stiffened ,,

and unstiffened compression elements used in braces shall be as shown in Section
2706.
3. Bracing connections. A. Forces. Bracing connections shall be designed
for the lesser of the following:
(i) The tensile strength of the bracing.
(ii) 3(Rj8) times the force in the brace due to the prescribed seismic forces.
(iii) The maximum force that can be transferred to the brace by the system.
Beam-to-column connections for beams that are part of the bracing system
shall have the capacity to transfer the force determined above.
569
B. Net area. In bolted brace connections, the ratio of effective net section area
to gross section area shall satisfy the formula:
1.2 cxF*
................... (22-6)
WHERE:
Ae = effective net area as defined in Section 2711 (b) 2.
F* = stress in brace as determined in Section 2722 (g) 3 A.
F 11 minimum tensile strength.
a fraction of the member force from Section 2722 (g) 2 A that is transferred
across a particular net section.
4. Bracing configuration. A. Chevron bracing. Chevron bracing shall con-
form with the following:
(i) Bracing members shall be designed for 1.5 times the otherwise prescribed
forces.
(ii) The beam intersected by chevron braces shall be continuous between
columns.
(iii) Where chevron braces intersect a beam from below, i.e., inverted V brace,
the beam shall be capable of supporting all tributary gravity loads presuming the
bracing not to exist.
EXCEPTION: This limitation need not apply to penthouses, one-story build-
ings or the top story of buildings.
B. K bracing. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4, K bracing is prohibited except
as permitted in Subsection 5 below. In Seismic Zone No. 2 the requirements of
paragraph A above shall be met.
I 5. One- and two-story buildings. Braced frames not meeting the require-
ments of Sections 2722 (g) 2 to 2722 (g) 4 may be used in buildings not over two
stories in height and in roof structures as defined in Chapter 36 if they are designed
for forces of 3(Rj8) times the code equivalent static forces at code allowable
il seismic stresses.
(h) Eccentrically Braced Frame (EBF) Requirements. EBFs shall be de-

signed in accordance with the following:
I . Link beam. There shall be a link beam provided at least at one end of each
brace. Beams in EBFs shall comply with the requirements of Section 2702 (b) 4
except that the flange width-thickness ratio, h1 12t1, shall not exceed 52/YJ;.
2. Link beam strength. A. Link beam shear strength, Vs, and flexural
strength, M,. are the strengths as defined in Section 2722 (c) 2. Where link beam
strength is governed by shear, the flexural and axial capacities within the link shall
be calculated using the beam flanges only.
B. A reduced flexural strength, Mrs• for use in Sections 2722 (h) 7 and 2722 (h)
12 is defined as Z(F,.- Fa). Where.t;, is less than 0.!5F,..fa may be neglected.
3. Link beam rotation. The rotation of the link segment relative to the rest of
570
1988 EDITION 2722
the beam, at a total frame drift of 3(R.J8) times the drift determined for prescribed
seismic forces, shall not exceed the following:
A. 0.060 radians for link segments having clear lengths of 1.6 MJV, or Jess.
B. 0.015 radians for link segments having clear lengths of2.6 M)V, or greater.
C. A value obtained by linear interpolation for clear lengths between the above
limits.
4. Link beam web. The web of the link beam shall be single thickness without
doubler plate reinforcement. No openings shall be placed in the web n{ a Unk.
beam. The web shear shall not exceed 0.8V, under prescribed lateral forces.
5. Beam connection braces. Brace-to-beam connections shall develop the
compression strength of the brace and transfer this force to the beam web. No part
of the brace-to-beam connection shall extend into the web area of a link beam.
6. Link beam stiffeners. Link beams shall have full depth web stiffeners on
both sides of the beam web at the brace end of the link beam. In addition, for link
beams with clear lengths within the limits in Section 2722 (h) 3 C, full-depth
stiffeners shall be placed at a distance hr from each end of the link. The stiffeners
shall have a combined width not less than br- 2tw and a thickness not less than
0.75 tw nor 3fs inch.
7. Intermediate stiffeners. Intermediate full-depth web stiffeners shall be
provided in either of the following conditions:
A. Where the link beam strength is controlled by V,.
B. Where the link beam strength is controlled by flexure and the shear deter-
mined by applying the reduced flexural strength, Mrs• exceeds 0.45 F"dt.
8. Web stiffener spacing. Where intermediate web stiffeners arc required the
spacing shall conform to the requirements given below.
A. For link beams with rotation angle of 0.06 radians the spacing shall not
exceed 38tw- d/5.
B. For link beams with a rotation angle of0.03 radians or less the spacing shall
not exceed 56tw- d/5. Interpolation may be used for rotation angles between 0.03
and 0.06 radians.
9. Web stiffener location. For beams 24 inches in depth and greater, interme-
diate full-depth web stiffeners are required on both sides of the web. Such web
stiffeners are required only on one side of the beam web for beams Jess than 24
inches in depth. The stiffener thickness, tw• of one side stiffeners shall be not less
than 3/s inch and the width shall be not less than ( hr/2)-t.,..
10. Stiffener welds. Fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the beam web
shall develop a stiffener force of A" F v· Fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the
flanges shall develop a stiffener force of A., F"/4, whereAs1 = ht of stiffener and
h = width of stiffener plate. ·
II. Link beam-column connections. A. Where a link beam is connected to
the column flange, the following requirements shall be met:
(i) The beam flanges shall have full-penetration welds to the column.
(ii) Where the link beam strength is controlled by shear in conformance with
571
Section 2722 (h) 7, the web connection shall be welded to develop the full link
beam web shear strength.
B. Where the link beam is connected to the column web, the beam flanges
shall have full-penetration welds to the connection plates and the web connection
shall be welded to develop the link beam web shear strength.
12. Brace strength. Each brace shall have a compressive strength at least 1.5
times the axial force corresponding to the controlling link beam strength. The
controlling link beam strength is either the shear strength, V, or the reduced
flexural strength, Mrs• whichever results in the lesser force in the brace.
13. Column strength. Columns shall be designed to remain elastic at I. 25
times the strength of the EBF bay, as defined in paragraph 12 above.
14. Roof link beam. A link beam is not required in roof beams for EBF over
five stories.
15. Concentric brace in combination. The first story of an EBF bay over five
stories in height may be concentrically braced if this story can be shown to have an
elastic capacity 50 percent greater than the yield capacity of the story frames
above the first story.
16. Axial forces. Axial forces in beams ofEBFframes due to braces and due to
transfer of seismic force to the end of the frames shall be included in the frame
calculations.
17. Beam flanges. Top and bottom flanges of EBF frame beams shall be
laterally braced at the ends of link beams and at intervals not exceeding 76/v'i\.
times the beam flange width. End bracing shall be designed to resist 1.5 percent of
the beam flange strength, defined as Fvbft1. Intermediate bracing shall be de-
signed to resist 1.0 percent of the beam flange force at the brace point using the
link beam strength determined in Section 2722 (h) 12.
18. Beam-column connection. Beam connections to columns may be de-
signed as pins in the plane of the beam web if the link beam is not adjacent to the
column. Such connection shall have the capacity to resist a torsional moment of
o.OlFv brtrd.
(i) Stud Wall Systems. Stud wall systems may be used to resist the specified
seismic forces in buildings not over five stories in height. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3
and 4 these systems shall comply with the following:
I. The llr of the brace may exceed 200 and is unlimited.
2. All boundary members, chords and collectors shall be designed and detailed
to transmit the induced axial forces.
3. Connection of the diagonal bracing member, top chord splices, boundary
members and collectors shall be designed to develop the full tensile strength
of the member or 3(R"/8) times the otherwise prescribed seismic forces.
4. Vertical and diagonal members of the braced bay shall be anchored so the
bottom track is not required to resist uplift forces by bending of the track
web.
5. Both flanges of studs in a bracing panel shall be braced to prevent lateral
572
1988 EDITION 2722-2723
67.
.
~Pr'~:;: : "hl~t:l·l~bitn:~ :ds~:f'.::,:::~:~.:!::~,:ho:y:,::::;::,:.::mvldo ~..·,':·'!,-~
ovtswn s a e rna e or pretenstoning or ot er methods of installation of
....' ·:.,i·'.
.;-
tension only bracing to guard against loose diagonal straps.
(j) Nondestructive Testing. Welded connections between the primary mem-

bers of ductile moment-resisting space frames shall be tested by nondestructive
methods for compliance with U. B.C. Standard No. 27-6 and job specifications.
This testing shall be a part of the special inspection requirements of Section 306.
A program for this testing shall be established by the person responsible for
structural design and as shown on plans and specifications.
As a minimum, this program shall include the following: I. All complete
penetration groove welds contained in joints and splices shall be tested I 00
percent either by ultrasonic testing or by radiography.
EXCEPTION: When approved, the nondestructive testing rate for an individual
welder or welding operator may be reduced to 25 percent, provided the reject rate is
demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or welding
operator. A sampling of at least 40 completed welds for a job shall be made for such
reduction evaluation. Reject rate is defined as the number of welds containing
rejectable defects divided by the number of welds completed. For evaluating the
reject rate of continuous welds over 3 feet in length where the effective throat
thickness is I inch or less, each 12-inch increment or fraction thereof shall be
considered as one weld. For evaluating the reject rate on continuous welds over 3 feet
in length where the effective throat thickness is greater than I inch, each 6 inches of
length or fraction thereof shall be considered one weld.
When approved by the building official and outlined in the project plans and
specifications, this nondestructive ultrasonic testing may be performed in the shop
of an approved fabricator utilizing qualified test techniques in the employment of the
fabricator.
2. Partial penetration groove welds when used in column splices shall be tested
either by ultrasonic testing or radiography when required by the plans and
specifications.
3. Base metal thicker than JI/2 inches, when subjected to through-thickness
weld shrinkage strains, shall be ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities di-
rectly behind such welds after joint completion.
Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected on the basis of the
defect rating in accordance with the (larger reflector) criteria of U. B.C. Standard
No. 27-6.
Load and Resistance Factor Design

Sec. 2723. As an alternative to the allowable stress design provisions of this
chapter, steel structures may be designed in accordance with the provisions of
Load and resistance factor design may be used in the design of seismic-resisting
frames in Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and 4 when approved by the building official
573
and when special detailing is used to provide results equivalent to those obtained
by the use of the allowable stress provisions of Section 2722.
Steel Storage Racks
Sec. 2724. Steel storage racks may be designed in conformance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 27 -II .
Steel Cables
Sec. 2725. Structural use of steel cables shall conform with the provisions of
574
1988 EDITION 27-A
TABLE NO. 27·A-ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR RIVETS AND BOLTS

SHEAR (F.)
FRICTION-TYPE CONNECTIONS• 7 BEARING
TYPE
DESCRIPTION OF FASTENERS TENSION CONNEC·
Stand1nl Overalze•nd Lona·•lotted
(Fr} Size Holes Short-slotted TIONS
olea
I. A502, Grade I, hot-

driven rivets 2o.o• - - - 17.5
2. A502, Grade 2, hot-
driven rivets 27.0 1 - - - 22.0
3. A307, Type A, bolts 2o.o• - - - 10.0 2
4. Threaded parts meeting
the requirements of Sec-
tion 2701 and A449 bolts
when threads are not ex-
eluded from the shear
plane 8 0.33F ~ 3
- - - O.i7Fu
5. Threaded parts meeting
the requirements of Section
2701 and A449 bolts when
threads are excluded from
the shear plane 8 0.33F,} - - - 0.22Fu
6. A325 bolts, when
threading is not excluded
from the shear planes 44.0 4 17.5 15.0 12.5 22.0 6
7. A325 bolts, when
threading is excluded from
the shear planes 44.0 4 17.5 15.0 12.5 30.0 6
8. A490 bolts, when
threading is not excluded
from the shear planes 54.0 4 22.0 19.0 16.0 28.0 6
9. A490 bolts, when
threading is excluded from
the shear planes 54.0 4 22.0 19.0 16.0 40.0 6
1Static loading only .
2Threads permitted in shear planes.

3The tensile capacity on the threaded portion of an upset rod shall be larger than the body area
times 0.6F,..
4 For A325 and A490 bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading. See U.B.C. Standard No. 27-3.
~When specified by the designer the working stress F, for friction-type shear connections may
have the applicable value given in U.B.C. Standard No. 27-7.
6ln bearing-type connections whose length between extreme fasteners measured parallel to the
line of axial force exceeds 50 inches, tabulated values shall be reduced 20 percent.
?See Section 2303 (d).
8 A449 bolts shall be limited to the following applications: Bearing-type high-strength structural
joints requiring diameters greater than l'h inches, or high-strength material for anchor bolts
or threaded rods.
575
TABLE NO. 27·B -ALLOWABLE STRESS
REQUIRED WELD
TYPE OF WELD AND STRESS 1 ALLOWABLE STRESS STRENGTH LEVEL2 3
COMPLETE PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS

I. Tension normal lo the Same as base metal "Matching" weld metal must be used; see
effective area U .B.C. Standard No. 27-6
2. Compression normal to Same as base metal
the effective area
3. Tension or compression Same as base metal Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
parallel to the axis of than "matching" weld metal may be used
the weld
4. Shear on the 0.30 x nominal tensile strength of weld metal (ksi),
effective area except shear stress on base metal shall not exceed
0.40 x yield stress of base metal
PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS4
5. Compression normal to Same as base metal
effective area c:
6. Tension or compression Same as base metal z
parallel to axis of the welds :;;
0
7. Shear parallel to axis 0.30 x nominal tensile strength of weld metal (ks1), Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less ::D
of weld except shear stress on base metal shall not exceed than "matching" weld metal may be used 31:
0.40 x yield stress of base metal m
c:
8. Tension normal to 0.30 X nominal tensile strength of weld metal (ksi), r=c
effective area except tensile stress on base metal shall not exceed
0.60 x yield stress of base metal z
C)
0
0
c
m
-
CD
011
011
m
c
::::j
5z
FillET WElDS
9. Shear on effective area 0.30 x nominal tensile strength of weld metal (ksi),
except shear stress on base metal shall not exceed
0.40 x yield stress of base metal Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less
than "matching" metal may be used
10. Tension or compression Same as base metal
parallel to axis of weJd5
PlUG AND SlOT WElDS
II. Shear parallel to faying 0.30 X nominal tensile strength of weld metal (ksi), Weld metal with a strength level equal to or les,.,
surfaces (on effective except shear stress on base metal shall not exceed than "matching" weld metal may be used
area) 0.40 X yield stress of base metal
1For definition of effective area see Section 2702 (e).

2For "matching" weld metal, see U.B.C. Standard No. 27-6.
3
Weld metal one strength level stronger than "matching" weld metal will be permitted.
4
See Section 2707 (h) for a limitation on use of partial penetration groove-welded joints.
5Fillet welds and partial penetration groove welds joining the component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-web connections, may
be designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.
27-C, 27-D-1 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 27·C-ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SHEAR

LOADS FOR SHEAR CONNECTIONS
ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SHEAR LOAD
(q)(klpa)
(Applicable only to concrete made with
aggregate• conforming to U.B.C. Standard
CONNECTOR 1 No.28·2)2
f'c (I< Ips par aquere Inch)
3.0 3.5 ~4.0
I. Y, • diam. x 2 • hooked or headed stud 5.1 5.5 5.9

2. Y, • diam. x 2Y, • hooked or headed stud 8.0 8.6 9.2
3. X• diam. x 3 • hooked or headed stud 11.5 12.5 13.3
4. Y, • diam. x 3 Y, • hooked or headed stud 15.6 16.8 18.0
5. 3 • channel, 4.1 lb. 4.3w 4.7w 5.0w
6. 4 • channel, 5.41b. 4.6w 5.0w 5.3w
7. s· channel, 6.7lb. 4.9w 5.3w 5.6w
w - length of channel m mches.
•The allowable horizontal loads tabulated may also be used for studs longer than shown.
2For lightweight concrete made with aggregates conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-3,
multiply values above by appropriate reduction coefficient as follows:
Air Dry Unit Weight, pcf. 90 9S 100 lOS 110 liS 120
Coefficient./'c ~ 4.0 ksi. 0.73 0.76 0.78 0.81 0.83 0.86 0.88
Coefficient./' c? S.O ksi. 0.82 0.8S 0.87 0.91 0.93 0.96 0.99
TABLE NO. 27·D·1-MINIMUM DISTANCE, INCHES

(CENTER OF STANDARD HOLE1 TO EDGE OF CONNECTED PART)
NOMINAL AT ROLLED EDGES OF
RIVET OR BOLT PLATES, SHAPES OR BARS
DIAMETER AT SHEARED EDGES OR GAS CUT EDGES2
1f2 7/s 3/4

7/s
5/s Jl/s
3/4 Jl/4 I
7/s llf23 Jl/s
I 13/4 3 Jl/4
Jlis 2 Jl/2
Jl/4 2 1/4 Pis
Over 1114 13/4 x Diameter 1114 x Diameter
'For oversized or slotted holes, see Section 2713 (e) 4.
2AII edge distances in this column may be reduced 1/s inch when the hole is at a point where
stress does not exceed 25 percent of the maximum allowed stress in the element.
!j JThese may be 1114 inch at the ends of beam connection angles.
~<
578
1988 EDITION 27-D-2, 27-D-3, 27-E-1
TABLE NO. 27-D-2-VALUES OF SPACING INCREMENT C1 , IN INCHES

SLOTTED HOLES
NOMINAL Perpendicular Parallel to

DIAMETER OVERSIZED Line of Force
to
OF FASTENER HOLES Line of Force Short Slota LongSiota1
,;;;?is 1is
0 31t6 11izd- 1ito
I 3it6 0 1i4 ]7;,,.,
,;;; 11is 1i4 0 51t6 l 1i2d- 1i1o
'When length of slot is less than maximum allowable, C 1 may be reduced by the difference
between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
TABLE NO. 27-D-3-VALUES OF EDGE DISTANCE INCREMENT C2 , IN INCHES

SLOTTED HOLES
NOMINAL
DIAMETER OF OVERSIZED Perpendicular to Edge PARALLEL TO
FASTENER HOLES Short Slota LongSiots1 EDGE
,;;; 7is 11t6 1is
I 1is 1is 3i4d 0

;;. Jlis 1is 3!t6
1When length of slot is less than maximum allowable, C2 may be reduced by one-half the
difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
TABLE NO. 27-E-1-MINIMUM-SIZE FILLET WELD

MATERIAL THICKNESS MINIMUM SIZE
OF THICKER PART OFWELD1
JOINED (Inches) (Inches)
1is
To 'i4 inclusive
Over 'i4 to 'iz 3it6
1i4
Over '12 to 3i4
Over3/4 5it6
1Leg dimension of fillet welds.
579
27-E-2, 27-F UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 27-E-2-MINIMUM EFFECTIVE THROAT OF PARTIAL

PENETRATION GROOVE WELD
MATERIAL THICKNESS MINIMUM EFFECTIVE!
OF THICKER PART THROAT
JOINED (Inches) (Inches)
To 1/4 inclusive 1/s

Over 1/4 to lf2 3!J6
Over 112 to 3J4 1/4
Over 3J4 to 1112 5!J6
Over l 1/2 to 2 1/4 3jg
Over 2 1/4 to 6 lf2

Over6 Sjg
1See Section 2702 (e).
TABLE NO. 27-F-EFFECTIVE THROATS OF FLARE GROOVE WELDS

FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS I FLARE V GROOVE WELDS
All diameter bars
5il6R
I lf2Rl
NOTE: R = radius of bar.

1Except 3 /sR for GMAW (except short circuiting transfer) process with bar sizes I inch and
over.
580
1988 EDITION 2801
Chapter28
ALUMINUM
Material Standards and Symbols

Sec. 2801. (a) General. The quality, design, fabrication and erection of
aluminum used structurally in buildings and structures shall conform to the
requirements of this chapter, to other applicable requirements of this code and to
(b) Alloys. The use of aluminum alloys and tempers other than those covered
by this chapter shall be permitted for structural members and assemblies, pro-
vided standards of performance not less than those required by this chapter are
substantiated to the satisfaction of the building official. When required by the
building official, certification that the alloys and tempers called for on the plans
have been furnished shall be provided.
(c) Symbols and Notations. The symbols and notations used in these regula-
tions are defined as follows:
A area, inches2.
Aw area of cross section lying within 1.0 inch of a weld, inches2.
a1 shorter dimension of rectangular panel, inches.
a2 longer dimension of rectangular panel, inches.
a, equivalent width of rectangular panel, inches.
B,D,C,
= buckling formula constants, with following subscript:
c - compression in columns
p - compression in flat plates
t - compression in round tubes
tb - bending in round tubes
b - bending in rectangular bars
s - shear in flat plates
b width of sections, inches.
bit width-to-thickness ratio or rectangular element of a cross section.
c = distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber, inches.
D diameter, inches.
d = depth of section or beam, inches.
E = compressive modulus of elasticity, ksi.
f = calculated stress, ksi.
fa average compressive stress on cross section of member produced by
axial compressive load, ksi.
fb maximum bending stress (compressive) caused by transverse loads or
end moments, ksi.
fs shear stress caused by torsion or transverse shear, ksi.
F allowable stress, ksi.
581
Fa allowable compressive stress for member considered as an axially

loaded column, ksi.
Fh allowable compressive stress for member considered as a beam, ksi.
Fbu = bearing ultimate strength, ksi.
Fbuw = bearing ultimate strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
Fby = bearing yield strength, ksi.
F byw bearing yield strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
Fe allowable compressive stress, ksi.
Fey compressive yield strength, ksi.
Feyw compressive yield strength across a butt weld (0.2 percent offset in I 0-
inch gauge length), ksi.
7T2£/[nu(Lir )2], where Llr is slenderness ratio for member considered as
a column tending to fail in the plane of the applied bending moments,
ksi.
allowable stress for cross section I .0 inch or more from weld, ksi.
allowable stress on cross section, part of whose area lies within 1.0 inch
of a weld, ksi.
F,. allowable shear stress for members subjected only to torsion or shear,
ksi.
F,. shear ultimate strength, ksi.
FSIIW shear ultimate strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
F,.v shear yield strength, ksi.
Fsyw shear yield strength within 1.0 inch of a weld, ksi.
F"' tensile ultimate strength, ksi.
Ftuw tensile ultimate strength across a butt weld, ksi.
Fn· tensile yield strength, ksi.
Ftvw tensile yield strength across a butt weld (0.2 percent offset in 10-inch
gauge length), ksi.
either Fry or Fey• whichever is smaller, ksi.
spacing of rivet or bolt holes perpendicular to direction of load, inches.
modulus of elasticity in shear, ksi.
h clear height of shear web, inches.
I moment of inertia, inches4.
moment of inertia of horizontal stiffener, inches4.
moment of inertia of transverse stiffener to resist shear buckling,
inches4.
lx moment of inertia of a beam about axis perpendicular to web, inches4.
lv moment of inertia of a beam about axis parallel to web, inches4.
J torsion constant, inches4.
582
1988 EDITION 2801
k, coefficient for determining slenderness limit s2 for sections for which

the allowable compressive stress is based on crippling strength.
k2 coefficient for determining allowable compressive stress in sections
with slenderness ratio above S2 for which the allowable compressive
stress is based on crippling strength.
kc coefficient for compression members.
k1 coefficient for tension members.
L length of compression member between points of lateral support, or
twice the length of a cantilever column (except where analysis shows
that a shorter length can be used), inches.
Llr slenderness ratio for columns.
Lb length of beam between points at which the compression flange is
supported against lateral movement, or length of cantilever beam from
free end to point at which the compression flange is supported against
lateral movement, inches.
Lh total length of portion of column lying within l.O inch of a weld
(excluding welds at ends of columns that are supported at both ends),
inches.
Lw increased length to be substituted in column formula to determine
allowable stress for welded column, inches.
M bending moment, inch-kips.
Mc bending moment at center of span resulting from applied bending loads,
inch-kips.
Mm maximum bending moment in span resulting from applied bending
loads, inch-kips.
bending moments at two ends of a beam, inch-kips.

factor of safety on appearance of buckling.
factor of safety on ultimate strength.
ny = factor of safety on yield strength.
p = local load concentration on bearing stiffener, kips.
r = least radius of gyration of a column, inches.
radius of gyration of lip or bulb about face of flange from which lip
projects, inches.
radius of gyration of a beam (about axis parallel to web), inches. (For
beams that are unsymmetrical about the horizontal axis, ry should be
calculated as though both flanges were the same as the compression
flange).
R outside radius of round tube or maximum outside radius for an oval
tube, inches.
Rb radius of curvature of tubular members, inches.
583
s - spacing of transverse stiffeners (clear distance between stiffeners for

stiffeners consisting of a pair of members, one on each side of the web,
center-to-center distance between stiffeners consisting of a member on
one side of the web only), inches; spacing of rivet or bolt holes parallel
to direction of load, inches.
section modulus of a beam, compression side, inches3.
section modulus of a beam, tension side, inches3.
slenderness limits.
thickness of flange, plate, web ortube, inches. (For tapered flanges, tis
the average thickness.)
V shear force on web at stiffener location, kips.
a = a factor equal to unity for a stiffener consisting of equal members on
both sides of the web and equal to 3.5 for a stiffener consisting of a
member on one side only.
(d) Identification. Aluminum for structural elements shall at all times be
segregated or otherwise handled in the fabricator's plant so that the separate alloys
and tempers are positively identified and, after completion of fabrication, shall be
marked to identify the alloy and temper. Such markings shall be affixed to
complete members and assemblies or to boxed or bundled shipments of multiple
units prior to shipment from the fabricator's plant.
Allowable Stresses for Members and Fasteners

Sec. 2802. (a) Allowable Unit Stresses. Except as modified by U.B.C.
Standard No. 28-1, allowable unit stresses in aluminum alloy structural members
shall be determined in accordance with the formulas of Table No. 28-C utilizing
the safety factors listed in Table No. 28-D and the constants and coefficients listed
in Tables Nos. 28-E, 28-F and 28-G. Where two formulas are given, the smaller of
the resulting stresses shall be used.
(b) Welded Structural Members. Allowable unit stresses for structural mem-
bers whose entire cross-sectional area lies within 1 inch of the center line of a butt
weld of the heel of a fillet weld shall be determined by means of the formulas of
Table No. 28-C utilizing the applicable minimum expected mechanical properties
for welded aluminum alloys listed in U .8 .C. Standard No. 28-1. The tensile
ultimate strength, F1uw• shall be 90 percent of the ASME weld qualification test
value of ultimate strength. Except as modified by U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1,
buckling constants determined in accordance with the formulas of Tables Nos. 28-
E and 28-G shall be calculated using the non welded mechanical properties of the
respective aluminum alloys.
If less than 15 percent of the area of a given cross section lies within I inch of the
center line of a butt weld or the heel of a fillet weld, the effect of the weld may be
neglected and allowable stresses for non welded structural members may be used.
If the area of a cross section that lies within I inch of a weld is between 15
percent and I00 percent of the total area of the cross section, the allowable stress
shall be calculated by the following formula:
584
1988 EDITION 2802-2804
WHERE:
allowable stress on cross section part of whose area lies within 1.0 inch
of a weld.
F. allowable stress for cross section 1.0 inch or more from weld.
Fw = allowable stress on cross section if entire area were to lie within 1.0 inch
of a weld.
Aw = area of cross section lying within 1.0 inch of a weld.
A = net area of cross section of a tension member or tension flange of a
beam, or gross area of cross section of a compression member or
compression flange of a beam, inches2. (A beam flange is considered to
consist of that portion of the member further than 2c/3 from the neutral
axis, where cis the distance from the neutral axis to the extreme fiber.)
For columns and beams with welds at locations other than at their supported
ends (not farther from the supports than 0.05 L from the ends), and for cantilever
columns and single web beams with transverse welds at or near the supported end,
the effect of welding on allowable stresses shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1.
(c) Rivets and Bolts. Allowable stresses in aluminum rivets and bolts shall be
as set forth in Table No. 28-A.
(d) Fillet Welds. Allowable sheer stresses in fillet welds shall be as set forth in
Table No. 28-B.
Design
Sec. 2803. (a) Combined Stresses. Members subjected to combinations of
compression and bending or shear, compression and bending shall be propor-
tioned in accordance with the provisions of U .B.C. Standard No. 28-1.
(b) Light Gauge Members. Where the design of light gauge structural mem-
bers is involved, the special provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 28-1 shall be
applied.
(c) Structural Roofing and Siding. The live load deflection of structural
roofing and siding made of formed sheet shall not exceed one sixtieth of the span
length.
(d) Connections. The design of mechanical and welded connections shall be in
accordance with this chapter and the provisions of U .B.C. Standard No. 28-1.
Fabrication and Erection

Sec. 2804. (a) Cutting. Oxygen cutting of aluminum alloys shall not be
permitted.
585
(b) Fasteners. Bolts and other fasteners shall be aluminum, stainless steel or
aluminized, hot-dip galvanized or electrogalvanized steel. Double cadmium-
plated AN steel bolts may also be used. Steel rivets shall not be used except where
aluminum is to be joined to steel or where corrosion resistance of the structure is
not a requirement or where the structure is to be protected against corrosion.
(c) Dissimilar Materials. Where aluminum alloy parts are in contact with
dissimilar metals, other than stainless, aluminized or galvanized steel or absorb-
ent building materials likely to be continuously or intermittently wet, the faying
surfaces shall be painted or otherwise separated in accordance with U. B. C.
Standard No. 28-1.
(d) Painting. Except as prescribed in Section 2804 (c), painting or coating of
aluminum alloy parts shall be required only when called for on the plans.
(e) Welding. Aluminum parts shall be welded with an inert gas shielded arc or
resistance welding process. No welding process that requires a welding flux shall
be used. Filler alloys complying with the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No.
28-1 shall be used.
(f) Welder Qualification. All welds of structural members shall be performed
by welders qualified in accordance with the procedures of U .B.C. Standard No.
28-1.
(g) Erection. During erection, structural aluminum shall be adequately braced
and fastened to resist dead, wind and erection loads.
586
1988 EDITION 28-A, 28-B
TABLE NO. 28·A

ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR RIVETS
MINIMUM ALLOWABLE
EXPECTED SHEAR
DESIGNATION DESIGNATION SHEAR STRESS ON
BEFORE DRIVING AFTER STRENGTH EFFECTIVE
DRIVING PROCEDURE DRIVING ksi AREA ksi
ll00-H14 Cold, as received llOO-F 9.5 4

2017-T4 Cold, as received 2017-T3 34 14.5
2117-T4 Cold, as received 2117-T3 29 12
5056-H32 Cold, as received 5056-H321 26 11
6053-T6l Cold, as received 605.3-T61 20 8.5
6061-T4 Hot, 990° to 6061-T43 21 9
l050'F.
6061-T6 Cold, as received 6061-T6 26 ll'
ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR BOLTS
ALLOWABLE 2 SHEAR ALLOWABLE

MINIMUM STRESS ON TENSILE STRESS
ALLOY AND EXPECTED SHEAR EFFECTIVE ON ROOT AREA
TEMPER STRENGTH ksi AREA ksi ksi
2024-T4 37 16 26
606l-T6 27 12 18
7075-T73 40 17 28
1Also applies to 6061-T6 pins.
2Values apply to either turned bolts or unfinished bolts in holes not more than
1ilo inch oversized.
TABLE NO. 28-B

ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESSES IN FILLET WELD5-ksl
(Shear Stress Is Considered to Equal to the Load Divided
by the Throat Area)
5356
FILLER ALLOY 1100 4043 5554 5556
Parent Alloy
1100 3.2 4.8 " "
3003 3.2 5 " "
Aldad 3004 • 5 7 8
5052
5083
"
•
•
5
.. 7
7
" 8.5
8.5
0
5086
5454
5456
6061
•
"
0
5
•"
7
7
. 8.5
8.5
8.5
6063 " 5 6.5 6.5
•Not permitted.
587
N
011
TABLE NO. 28·C-GENERAL FORMULAS FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE STRESSES 0
TYPE Of' S"TIIESs TYPE OF MEMBER OR COMPONENT
SPEC. ALLOWABLE STRESS,
NO. KSI
TENSION, axial,
Any tension member: 1 F,Jn,or F,..I(W
net section
Rectangular tubes, structural

shapes bent about strona axis -I -[}- 'f '\A 2 F,,!n, or F..J(t,n,)
TENSION IN
BEAMS,
extreme fiber,
Round or oval tubes -o-Q-o- 3 1.11F,,Jn, or 1.24F,J(k,n.)
net section Rectangular ban. plates.
shapes bent about weak axis I -~ 4 l.JOF,,Jn, or 1.42F,.J(tl'l.)
BEARING
On rivets and bolts
s F.,Jn, or F"'/(1.2n.)
On ftat surfaces and pins 6 F.,J(l.Sn,) or F..J(l.8n.)
ALLOWABLE
ALLCNtABLE STRESS, KSI ALLOWABLE STRESS,
STRESS, Kst, SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS
SLENDERNESS Kst
SLENDERNESS UMIT, S, UMIT, S, SLENDERNESS ~ S,
<S, BETWEEN S, AND S,
COMPRESSION
IN COLUMNS, B _ n.F~,
rr2£
axial, gross
All columns
7
F,,
!:=~ f.(s,-o/=) ;=Cc c:
Je(:tion
"'"· ' D, • r "• (Lir )2 z
:;;
Outstanding -l•f--i•f--i•j B _n.Fcr rr'E 0
8 F.,
~=~ f.(s,- sw,~) !!.,...0.. ::D
ftanges and legs
I 1-r "'"· I S.ID, ' I I 5.1 n. (5.lb!t)' s::
m
COMPRESSION
Flat plates with f--LI B,-"•Fc1 c:
IN COMPONENTS
~
f.!.. f.(s,- L6D,~) !!.= lt,B, k.v'i;i r=
OF COLUMNS.
gross
section
both edges
supported H -hi--
9
"'"·
!!.=~
I 1.60,
• I I 1.6D,. n,(L6b/l)
!'2
z
Curved plat~ C)
~ocp -~r f.(s,-o,~~)

rr2£
supported on both F.,
R
81
k n ~=C, 0
10 r= 1--v-,-'-' 0
edges, walls of
round or oval tubes "'"· 16n.l-4-)(1 + \~~~ )' 0
m
ALla.NABLE
ALLOWABLE STRESS, KSI ALLOWABLE STRESS,
...
ID
SPEC.
STRESS, KSI,
SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS
SLENDERNESS KSI co
TYP£ Of STRESS TYPE OF MEMBER OR COMPONENT
NO.
SLENDERNESS
<S,
UIIIT, S, BETWEEN S, AND S:z UMIT, S:z SLENDERNESS ~ S:z co
m
Single web beams
c
:::::j
bent about strong
ui.s
-I-T-E- 11 ~
~.
!:! _ I.Z(B,- F,,l
'• D,
?d,a
• r-
D,L.)
I.Z,• ..
!:!-I.ZC,
•.U.
..E:
.Jl.ll-.)1 i5
z
Round or oval
tubes 6&6 12
1.17F,.
n,
!!!. =r.. -1.17F"r ~s,.-v..
t Deb
lf} R,
--
I
(:··-·'
...
)'
-n,.-D,
Same as Specification 10
1
,..•E:
1.17F,,
~ =r·-1.17F.. r ~B,-D,~)
R
O.rved Sections
<:OMPRESSION
IN BEAMS, ~
12
... I Do
-=Cc
I 16n, {~){I+ v:')'
extreme
fiber, gross •-it-
section SoHd rectangular
~ ~.j[i - B, ..2.lD,
I.)F,, .!.( s,- z.Jo.~/i) ~~-£!
_.E
beams
-EE 13 ~. I d "• , d I d 2.] '-29~,(11/1) 1 (£.1~
Rectangular tubes
amd box sections -0- 14 ~
~.
L.S, _
'•
(B,- F.,)'
1.6Dr
;.;,•• - 1.60.#,) 4~·-(~)'
I, 1.6
_.E
Z.:JM,(W,/1,)
OJMPRESSION ~--1 .. --1 ......

OUtstanding •-H- t_v'i;E
IN COMPONENTS
OF BEAMS,
(component
flanges
I [ r.....r 15 ~
n,
~-B,-F.,
I S.ID,
;!:(a,- s.w.~)1
n,
~-.!&
I S.JD, n,(5.Jb/1)
under uniform flat plates with --1•t- -i•t-

compression),
gross section
bnthedges
.. pported Trv- 16 ~
~.
~-
I
B,- F,,
1.60, .!.(•• - 1.60,~)
~, I
~-~
I 1.60,
l,v'i;i
... (1.6b/1)
1\,)
Ul
(Continued) co
011
ID 0
N
co
0
TABLE NO. 28·C-GENERAL FORMULAS FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE STRESSES-(Continued)
ALLOWABLE
STRESS, KSI, ALLOWABLE STRESS, KSI ALLOWABLE STRUS,
SPEC. SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS SLENDERNESS KSI
TYPE OF STRESS TYPE OF MEMBER OR COMPONENT SLENDERNESS UMJT, S 1 UIIIT, S,
NO. ,_s, BETWEEN S1 AND S, SLENDERNESS ' S,
Flat plates with

oompressed edge
COMPRESSION
free tension 17 ~(s.-uo.~) n. (3.5bfl)2
IN COMPONENTS "• I
edge supported
Of BEAMS,
(component
..
Flat plates with
k2 v'fi';E
under bending both edges 18 I.JF,, h B.- I.)F,.,
~(s.- 0.67o,~)
in own
planP),
!llpported
·-~ "• I n, (0.67hll)
gross Flat plates with
section OOrizontal stiffener,
both edges
!llpported
19 ~
.. ~(s.- 0.7!Jo.~)
"•. I
k2 v'fi';E
n, (0.29hll)
IDI
1r2£
Unstiffened F., ~- B,- F.,
SHEAR ftatwebs 20 1.250, n,, (1.25hlt)2 c
IN WEBS,
I
z
gross =n
section Stiffened nat web• [tlTII...fi::::fiJ.. 21
F.,
~(s. - J.25o.~)
0
::u
n, "• I 3:
ot• o./Jt+0.7(a 11a111
Ill
c
'For F bit values greater than 5 2 , the allowable bending shall be determined from the formula for tubes in compression, Specification 10, using the r=
formula that is appropriate forthe particular value of Rblt. Note that in this case Rblt may be either less or greater than the value of S 2 for tubes in
compression.
zc
C)
0
0
c
m
1988 EDITION 28-D, 28-E
TABLE NO. 28-0-FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR USE WITH ALUMINUM

ALLOWABLE STRESS SPECIFICATIONS
Building
And
Similar Type
Structures
I. Tension Members
F.S. on tensile strength, n• . 1.95
F.S. on yield strength, nv .. 1.65
2. Columns
F.S. on buckling strength, n•. ... 1.95
F.S. on crippling strength of thin sections, n•. 1.95
F.S. on yield strength for short columns, nY 1.65
3. Beams
F.S. on tensile strength, n• ... 1.95
F. S. on tensile yield strength, n,. ........... . 1.65
F.S. on compressive yield strength for short beams, n,. . 1.65
F. S. on buckling strength, ny . ........ . 1.65
F.S. on crippling strength of thin sections, ny. 1.65
F.S. on shear buckling of webs, na ............... . 1.20
4. Connections
F.S. on bearing strength ..... .. 1.2 X 1.95 = 2.34
F.S. on bearing yield strength, n,. .. .......... 1.65
F.S. on shearstrengthofrivets and bolts .. . 1.2 X 1.95 = 2.34
F.S. on shear strength of fillet welds ............. . 1.2 X 1.95 = 2.34
F.S. on tensile strength of butt welds, n.. . ........ . 1.95
F. S. on tensile yield strength of butt welds, n,. 1.65
TABLE NO. 28-E-FORMULAS FOR BUCKLING CONSTANTS

For All Products Whose Temper Designation Begins with -0, -H, -T1, -T2, -T3 or -T4
TYPE OF MEMBER
AND STRESS INTERCEPT, KSI SLOPE, KSI INTERSECTION
112
+~) ] =!!s_(~)l/2 C,=3iJ";
I. Compression in Columns 28,
and Beam Flanges B,=F,, [1 D, 20 E
2. Compression in Flat
Plates B,=Fn. I+~
[ l/3](F ) B (
D,=To- T68 (2
c,--~
3D,
3. Compression in Round
Thbes Under Axial End
- [ _<_Sl_
B,-F,y I+ _
8
l/5] D,= :.; (it' c, *
5
Load
4. Compressive Bending [ (F) 1/3] B (68
T r2 28b
Stress in Solid Rectan- Bb= 1.3Fcy I + f Db= 2~ Cb= 3Dh
gular Bars
5. Compressive Bending
Stress in Round Thbes
-
B,b- 1.5FY I+
[ ~1/5]
_
5 8
-~(~)1/3 C,h= (B•b=B,
D,b- 2.7 E D,h D,
r
6. Shear Stress in Flat
Plates
[
B,=F, I +-TI-
(F) 1/3] D,
=8,_(_68~)
20 E
112 28,
C,=JD.
7. Crippling of Flat Plates

in Compression or k, =0.50 k2 =2.04
Bending
•c, can be found from a plot of the curves of allowable stress based on elastic and inelastic buckling or
by a trial-and-error solution.
591
28-F, 28-G UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 28-F

VALUES OF COEFFICIENTS k 1 and k,
NONWELDED OR
REGIONS FARTHER THAN REGIONS WITHIN 1.0
AUOY AND TEMPER 1.0 INCH FROM A WELD INCH OF A WELD
... ... ... kc 1
2014-T6, -T651 1.25 1.12 - -
Alclad 2014-T6, -T651 1.25 1.12 - -
6061-T6, -T651 1.0 1.12 1.0 1.0
6063-T5, -T6, -T83 1.0 1.12 1.0 1.0
All Others Listed in
U.B.C. Standard 1.0 1.10 1.0 1.0
No. 28-1
1
1f the weld yield strength exceeds 0.9 of the parent metal yield strength, the
allowable compressive stress within 1.0 inch of a weld should be taken equal
to the allowable stress for nonwelded material.
TABLE NO. 28-G-FORMULAS FOR BUCKLING CONSTANTS

For All Products Whose Temper Designation Begins with -T5, -T6, -T7, -T8 or -T9
TYPE OF MEMBER
AND STRESS INTERCEPT, KSI SLOPE, KSI INTERSECTION
112
I. Compression in Columns
B,=F,y[ 1 +(2i;o) ] D,
=~(~)1/2
10 E
8,
C,=0.41LJ:"
and Beam Flanges
2. Compression in Flat [ (F ) 1/Jl 8 ( 8 ) l/2 ~

Plates BP=F,, I +"tft DP="itf T -
CP-0.4! D
p
[I+~
115
3. Compression in Round
B =F ] -~~~)In c, *
Thbes Under Axial End ' <'Y 8.7 D,- 4.5 \ E
Load
Stress in Solid Rectan- 8,-l.3f,,.
- I+ [ ~
7
"'] D,=
8
2~
( 68 ) 1/2
T 28,,
C,= 30 ,
1
gular Bars
Stress in Round Thbes
- l.5f, [I+ 22_
B,,- . liS]
87 2~~ (B
D,,= B T r' C,, = ( B,,
D,h
=B, D,
r
6. Shear Stress in Flat -
B, -F,. I+ [ J!d.
. 1/3]
D,
=~(-8'-)
10 E
l/2 C,=0.41~
B,
Plates 93
in Compression kl = 0.35 k, = 2.27

in Bending kl = 0.50 k2 = 2.04
*C, can be found from a plot of the curves of allowable stress based on elastic and inelastic buckling or
by a trial-and-error solution.
592
1988 EDITION 2901-2903
Part VI
DETAILED REGULATIONS
Chapter29
EXCAVATIONS, FOUNDATIONS AND RETAINING WALLS
Scope
Sec. 2901. This chapter sets forth requirements for excavation and fills for any
building or structure and for foundations and retaining structures.
Reference is made to Appendix Chapter 70 for requirements governing excava-
tion, grading and earthwork construction, including fills and embankments.
Quality and Design
Sec. 2902. The quality and design of materials used structurally in excavations,
footings and foundations shall conform to the requirements specified in Chapters
23, 24, 25, 26 and 27 of this code.
Excavations and Fills
Sec. 2903. (a) General. Excavation or fills for buildings or structures shall be
so constructed or protected that they do not endanger life or property.
Slopes for permanent fills shall be not steeper than 2 horizontal to I vertical.
Cut slopes for permanent excavations shall be not steeper than 2 horizontal to 1
vertical unless substantiating data justifying steeper cut slopes are submitted.
Deviation from the foregoing limitations for cut slopes shall be permitted only
upon the presentation of a soil investigation report acceptable to the building
official.
No fill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to any building or
structure unless such building or structure is capable of withstanding the addi-
tional loads caused by the fill or surcharge.
Existing footings or foundations which may be affected by any excavation shall
be underpinned adequately or otherwise protected against settlement and shall be
protected against lateral movement.
Fills to be used to support the foundations of any building or structure shall be
placed in accordance with accepted engineering practice. A soil investigation
report and a report of satisfactory placement of fill, both acceptable to the
building official, shall be submitted.
(b) Protection of Adjoining Property. The requirements for protection of
adjacent property and depth to which protection is required shall be as defined by
prevailing law. Where not defined by law, the following shall apply: Any person
making or causing an excavation to be made to a depth of 12 feet or less below the
grade shall protect the excavation so that the soil of adjoining property will not
cave in or settle, but shall not be liable for the expense of underpinning or
extending the foundation of buildings on adjoining properties where his excava-
tion is not in excess of 12 feet in depth. Before commencing the excavation, the
593
person making or causing the excavation to be made shall notify in writing the
owners of adjoining buildings not less than I 0 days before such excavation is to be
made that the excavation is to be made and that the adjoining buildings should be
protected.
i'ne owners of the adjoining properties shall be given access to ttv~.er-~~«'ltian.
for the purpose of protecting such adjoining buildings.
Any person making or causing an excavation to be made exceeding 12 feet in
depth below the grade shall protect the excavation so that the adjoining soil will
not cave in or settle and shall extend the foundation of any adjoining buildings
below the depth of 12 feet below grade at his own expense. The owner of the
adjoining buildings shall extend the foundation of these buildings to a depth of 12
feet below grade at his own expense, as provided in the preceding paragraph.
Soli Classification-Expansive Soli
Sec. 2904. (a) Soil Classification: General. For the purposes of this chapter,
the definition and classification of soil materials for use in Table No. 29-B shall be
according to U.B.C. Standard No. 29-1.
(b) Expansive Soil. When the expansive characteristics of a soil are to be
determined, the procedures shall be in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 29-
2 and the soil shall be classified according to Table No. 29-C. Foundations for
structures resting on soils with an expansion index greater than 20, as determined
by U.B.C. Standard No. 29-2, shall require special design consideration. In the
event the soil expansion index varies with depth, the weighted index shall be
determined according to Table No. 29-D.
Foundation Investigation
Sec. 2905. (a) General. The classification of the soil at each building site shall
be determined when required by the building official. The building official may
require that this determination be made by an engineer or architect licensed by the
state to practice as such.
(b) Investigation. The classification shall be based on observation and any
necessary tests of the materials disclosed by borings or excavations made in
appropriate locations. Additional studies may be necessary to evaluate soil
strength, the effect of moisture variation on soil-bearing capacity, compressibility
and expansiveness.
(c) Reports. The soil classification and design bearing capacity shall be shown
on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to Table No. 29-A. The building
official may require submission of a written report of the investigation which shall
include, but need not be limited to, the following information:
1. A plot showing the location of all test borings and/or excavations.
2. Descriptions and classifications of the materials encountered.
3. Elevation of the water table, if encountered.
4. Recommendations for foundation type and design criteria including bear-
ing capacity, provisions to minimize the effects of expansive soils and the
effects of adjacent loads.
5. Expected total and differential settlement.
594
1988 EDITION 2905-2907
(d) Expansive Soils. When expansive soils are present, the building official
may require that special provisions be made in the foundation design and con-
struction to safeguard against damage due to this expansiveness. He may require a
special investigation and report to provide this design and construction criteria.
\c) Adjacent Loads. Where footings are placed at varying elevations the effect
of adjacent loads shall be included in the foundation design.
(f) Drainage. Provisions shall be made for the control and drainage of surface
water around buildings. [See also Section 2907 (d) 5.]
Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressures
Sec. 2906. The allowable foundation and lateral pressures shall not exceed the
values set forth in Table No. 29-B unless data to substantiate the usc of higher
values are submitted. Table No. 29-B may be used for design of foundations on
rock or nonexpansive soil for Types II One-hour, 11-N and V buildings which do
not exceed three stories in height or for structures which have continuous footings
having a load of less than 2000 pounds per lineal foot and isolated footings with
loads of less than 50,000 pounds.
Footings
Sec. 2907. (a) General. Footings and foundations, unless otherwise specifi-
cally provided, shall be constructed of masonry, concrete or treated wood in
conformance with U .B.C. Standard No. 29-3 and in all cases shall extend below
the frost line. Footings of concrete and masonry shall be of solid material.
Foundations supporting wood shall extend at least 6 inches above the adjacent
finish grade. Footings shall have a minimum depth as indicated in Table No. 29-A
unless another depth is recommended by a foundation investigation.
(b) Bearing Walls. Bearing walls shall be supported on masonry or concrete
foundations or piles or other approved foundation system whtch shall be of
sufficient size to support all loads. Where a design is not provided, the minimum
foundation requirements for stud bearing walls shall be as set forth in Table No.
29-A.
EXCEPTIONS: I. A one-story wood or metal frame building not used for
human occupancy and not over 400 square feet in floor area may be constructed with
walls supported on a wood foundation plate when approved by the building official.
2. The support of buildings by posts embedded in earth shall be designed as
specified in Section 2907 (g). Wood posts or poles embedded in earth shall be
pressure treated with an approved preservative. Steel posts or poles shall be protected
as specified in Section 2908 (i).
(c) Stepped Foundations. Foundations for all buildings where the surface of
the ground slopes more than I foot in I 0 feet shall be level or shall be stepped so
that both top and bottom of such foundation are level.
(d) Footings on or Adjacent to Slopes. I. Scope. The placement of buildings
and structures on or adjacent to slopes steeper than 3 horizontal to I vertical shall
be in accordance with this section.
2. Building clearance from ascending slopes. In general, buildings below
slopes shall be set a sufficient distance from the slope to provide protection from
595
slope drainage, erosion and shallow failures. Except as provided for in Subsection
6 of this section and Figure No. 29-1, the following criteria will be assumed to
provide this protection. Where the existing slope is steeper than I horizontal to I
vertical, the toe of the slope shall be assumed to be at the intersection of a
horizontal plane drawn from the top of the foundation and a plane drawn tangent to
the slope at an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal. Where a retaining wall is
constructed at the toe of the slope, the height of the slope shall be measured from
the top of the wall to the top of the slope.
3. Footing setback from descending slope surface. Footing on or adjacent to
slope surfaces shall be founded in firm material with an embedment and setback
from the slope surface sufficient to provide vertical and lateral support for the
footing without detrimental settlement. Except as provided for in Subsection 6 of
this section and Figure No. 29-1, the following setback is deemed adequate to
meet the criteria. Where the slope is steeper than I horizontal to I vertical, the
required setback shall be measured from an imaginary plane 45 degrees to the
horizontal, projected upward from the toe of the slope.
4. Pools. The setback between pools regulated by this code and slopes shall be
equal to one half the building footing setback distance required by this section.
That portion of the pool wall within a horizontal distance of 7 feet from the top of
the slope shall be capable of supporting the water in the pool without soil support.
5. Foundation elevation. On graded sites, the top of any exterior foundation
shall extend above the elevation of the street gutter at point of discharge or the inlet
of an approved drainage device a minimum of 12 inches plus 2 percent. The
building official may approve alternate elevations, provided it can be demon-
strated that required drainage to the point of discharge and away from the structure
is provided at all locations on the site.
6. Alternate setback and clearance. The building official may approve
alternate setbacks and clearances. The building official may require an investiga-
tion and recommendation of a qualified engineer to demonstrate that the intent of
this section has been satisfied. Such an investigation shall include consideration
of material, height of slope, slope gradient, load intensity and erosion characteris-
tics of slope material.
(e) Footing Design. Except for special provisions of Section 2909 covering the
design of piles, all portions of footings shall be designed in accordance with the
structural provisions of this code and shall be designed to minimize differential
settlement and the effects of expansive soils when present.
Slab-on-grade and mat-type footings for buildings located on expansive soils
may be designed in accordance with the provisions of U. B.C. Standard No. 29-4
or such other engineering design based upon geotechnical recommendation as
(f) Foundation Plates or Sills. Foundation plates or sills shall be bolted to the
foundation or foundation wall with not less than l/2-inch nominal diameter steel
bolts embedded at least 7 inches into the concrete or masonry and spaced not more
than 6 feet apart. There shall be a minimum of two bolts per piece with one bolt
located within 12 inches of each end of each piece. A properly sized nut and
596
1988 EDITION 2907
washer shall be tightened on each bolt to the plate. Foundation plates and sills shall ~!':
be the kind of wood specified in Section 2516 (c). J
(g) Designs Employing Lateral Bearing. I. General. Construction employ-
ing posts or poles as columns embedded in earth or embedded in concrete footings
in the earth may be used to resist both axial and lateral loads. The depth to resist
lateral loads shall be determined by means of the design criteria established herein
or other methods approved by the building official.
2. Design criteria: A. Nonconstrained. The following formula may be used
in determining the depth of embedment required to resist lateral loads where no
constraint is provided at the ground surface, such as rigid floor or rigid ground
surface pavement.
WHERE:
A = 2.34P
S 1b
P Applied lateral force in pounds.
S1 Allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set forth in Table No. 29-B
based on a depth of one third the depth of embedment.
S3 Allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set forth in Table No. 29-B
based on a depth equal to the depth of embedment.
b Diameter of round post or footing or diagonal dimension of square post or
footing (feet).
h Distance in feet from ground surface to point of application of "P."
d = Depth of embedment in earth in feet but not over 12 feet for purpose of
computing lateral pressure.
B. Constrained. The following formula may be used to determine the depth of
embedment required to resist lateral loads where constraint is provided at the
ground surface, such as a rigid floor or pavement.
d2 = 4.25 Ph
S 1b
C. Vertical load. The resistance to vertical loads is determined by the allowa-
ble soil-bearing pressure set forth in Table No. 29-B.
3. Backfill. The backfill in the annular space around columns not embedded in
poured footings shall be by one of the following methods:
A. Backfill shall be of concrete with an ultimate strength of 2000 pounds per
square inch at 28 days. The hole shall be not less than 4 inches larger than
the diameter of the column at its bottom or 4 inches larger than the diagonal
dimension of a square or rectangular column.
B. Backfill shall be of clean sand. The sand shall be thoroughly compacted by
tamping in layers not more than 8 inches in depth.
597
4. Limitations. The design procedure outlined in this subsection shall be

subject to the following limitations:
The frictional resistance for retaining walls and slabs on silts and clays shall be
limited to one half of the normal force imposed on the soil by the weight of the
footing or slab.
Posts embedded in earth shall not be used to provide lateral support for
structural or non structural materials such as plaster, masonry or concrete unless
bracing is provided that develops the limited deflection required.
(h) Grillage Footings. When grillage footings of structural steel shapes arc
used on soils, they shall be completely embedded in concrete with at least 6 inches
on the bottom and at least 4 inches at all other points.
(i) Bleacher Footings. Footings for open-air seating facilities shall comply
with Chapter 29.
EXCEPTIONS: Temporary open-air portable bleachers as defined in Sections
3323 and 3324 may be supported upon wood sills or steel plates placed directly upon
the ground surface, provided soil pressure does not exceed 1200 pounds per square
foot.
Piles-General Requirements
Sec. 2908. (a) General. Pile foundations shall be designed and installed on the
basis of a foundation investigation as defined in Section 2905 where required by
The investigation and report provisions of Section 2905 shall be expanded to
include but not be limited to the following:
I. Recommended pile types and installed capacities.
2. Driving criteria.
3. Installation and field inspection procedures.
4. Pile load test requirements.
The usc of piles not specifically mentioned in this chapter shall be permitted,
subject to the approval of the building official upon submission of acceptable test
data, calculations or other information relating to the properties and load-carrying
capacities of such piles.
(b) Interconnection. Individual pile caps and caissons of every structure
subjected to seismic forces shall be interconnected by ties. Such ties shall be
capable of resisting, in tension or compression, a minimum horizontal force equal
to 10 percent of the larger column vertical load.
EXCEPTION: Other approved methods may be used where it can be demon-
strated that equivalent restraint can be provided.
(c) Determination of Allowable Loads. The allowable axial and lateral loads
on piles shall be determined by an approved formula, by load tests or by a
foundation investigation.
(d) Static Load Tests. When the allowable axial load of a single pile is
determined by a load test, one of the following methods shall be used:
Method I. It shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield point under test load. The
598
1988 EDITION
yield point shall be defined as that point at which an increase in load produces a
disproportionate increase in settlement.
Method 2. It shall not exceed one half of the load which causes a net settle-
ment, after deducting rebound, of .01 inch per ton of test load which has been
applied for a period of at least 24 hours.
Metb.<ld 3. lt shall not exceed one half of that load under which, during a 40-
t\our period of continuous load application, no additional settlement takes place.
(e) Column Action. All piles standing unbraced in air, water or material not
capable of lateral support, shall conform with the applicable column formula as
specified in this code. Such piles driven into firm ground may be considered fixed
and laterally supported at 5 feet below the ground surface and in soft material at I 0
feet below the ground surface unless otherwise prescribed by the building official
after a foundation investigation by an approved agency.
(f) Group Action. Consideration shall be given to the reduction of allowable
pile load when piles arc placed in groups. Where soil conditions make such load
reductions advisable or necessary, the allowable axial load determined for a single
pile shall be reduced by any rational method or formula approved by the building
official.
(g) Piles in Subsiding Areas. Where piles arc driven through subsiding fills or
other subsiding strata and derive support from underlying firmer materials,
consideration shall be given to the downward frictional forces which may be
imposed on the piles by the subsiding upper strata.
Where the influence of subsiding fills is considered as imposing loads on the
pile, the allowable stresses specified in this chapter may be increased if satisfac-
tory substantiating data arc submitted.
(h) Jetting. Jetting shall not be used except where and as specifically permitted
by the building official. When used, jetting shall be carried out in such a manner
that the carrying capacity of existing piles and structures shall not be impaired.
After withdrawal of the jet. piles shall be driven down until the required resistance
is obtained.
(i) Protection of Pile Materials. Where the boring records of site conditions
indicate possible deleterious action on pile materials because of soil constituents,
changing water levels or other factors, such materials shall be adequately pro-
tected by methods or processes approved by the building official. The effective-
ness of such methods or processes for the particular purpose shall have been
thoroughly established by satisfactory service records or other evidence which
demonstrates the effectiveness of such protective measures.
(j) Allowable Loads. The allowable loads based upon soil conditions shall be
established in accordance with Section 290!1.
EXCEPTION: Any uncased cast-in-place pile may be assumed to develop a
frictional resistance equal to one sixth of the bearing value of the soil material at
minimum depth as set forth in Table No. 29-B but not to exceed 500 pounds per
square foot unless a greater value is allowed by the building official after a soil
investigation as specified in Section 2905 is submitted. Frictional resistance and
599
bearing resistance shall not be assumed to act simultaneously unless recommended

after a foundation investigation as specified in Section 2905.
(k) Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses. Allowable compressive stresses
greater than those specified in Section 2909 shall be permitted when substantiat-
ing data justifying such higher stresses are submitted to and approved by the
building official. Such substantiating data shall include a foundation investiga-
tion including a report in accordance with Section 2908 (a) by a soil engineer
defined as a civil engineer experienced and knowledgeable in the practice of soil
engineering.
Specific Pile Requirements

Sec. 2909. (a) Round Wood Piles. 1. Material. Except where untreated piles
are permitted, wood piles shall be pressure treated in accordance with U .B.C.
Standard No. 25-12. Untreated piles may be used only when it has been estab-
lished that the cutoff will be below lowest groundwater level assumed to exist
during the life of the structure. Every wood pile shall conform to U. B.C. Standard
No. 25-14.
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable unit stresses for round wood piles shaH
not exceed those set forth in Table No. 25-E.
The allowable values listed in Table No. 25-E for compression paraHel to the
grain at extreme fiber in bending are based on load sharing as occurs in a pile
cluster. For piles which support their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25
shaH be applied to compression parallel to the grain values and 1.30 to extreme
fiber in bending values.
(b) Uncased Cast-in-place Concrete Piles. 1. Material. Concrete piles cast in
place against earth in driHed or bored holes shall be made in such a manner as to
ensure the exclusion of any foreign matter and to secure a full-sized shaft. The
length of such pile shall be limited to not more than 30 times the average diameter.
Concrete shall have an ultimate compressive strength f' c of not less than 2500
pounds per square inch.
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable compressive stress in the concrete shall
not exceed 0.33f' c· The allowable compressive stress of reinforcement shall not
exceed 34 percent of the yield strength of the steel nor 25,500 psi.
(c) Metal-cased Concrete Piles. 1. Material. All concrete used in metal-cased
concrete piles shall have an ultimate compressive strength!' c of not less than 2500
2. Installation. Every metal casing for a concrete pile shall have a sealed tip
with a diameter of not less than 8 inches.
Concrete piles cast in place in metal sheHs shall have shells driven for their full
length in contact with the surrounding soil and left permanently in place. The
sheHs shall be sufficiently strong to resist collapse and sufficiently watertight to
exclude water and foreign material during the placing of concrete.
Piles shaH be driven in such order and with such spacing as to ensure against
distortion of or injury to piles already in place. No pile shall be driven within four
600
1988 EDITION 2909
and one-half average pile diameters of a pile filled with concrete less than 24 hours
old unless approved by the building official.
3. Allowable stresses. Allowable stresses shall not exceed the values speci-
fied in Section 2909 (b) 2, except that the allowable concrete stress may be
increased to a maximum value of 0 .40f' c for that portion of the pile meeting the
I. The thickness of the metal casing is not less than No. 14 gauge.
2. The casing is seamless or is provided with seams of equal strength and is of a
configuration which will provide confinement to the cast-in-place concrete.
3. The designf' c shall not exceed 5000 pounds per square inch and the ratio of
metal yield strength shall be not less than 6.
4. The pile diameter is not greater than 16 inches.
(d) Precast Concrete Piles. I. Material. Precast concrete piles prior to driving
and at 28 days after pouring shall develop an ultimate compressive strength f' c of
at least 3000 pounds per square inch.
2. Reinforcement ties. The longitudinal reinforcement in driven precast con-
crete piles shall be laterally tied with steel ties or wire spirals. Ties and spirals shall
be spaced not more than 3 inches apart, center to center, for a distance of 2 feet
from the ends and not more than 8 inches elsewhere. The gauge of ties and spirals
shall be as follows:
For piles having a diameter of 16 inches or less, wire shall be not smaller than
No.5 gauge.
For piles having a diameter of more than 16 inches and less than 20 inches, wire
shall be not smaller than No. 4 gauge.
For piles having a diameter of 20 inches and larger, wire shall be not smaller
than I/4 inch round or No. 3 gauge.
3. Allowable stresses. Precast concrete piling shall be designed to resist
stresses induced by handling and driving as well as by loads. The allowable
stresses shall not exceed the values specified in Section 2909 (b) 2.
(e) Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles (Pretensioned). 1. Material. Precast
prestressed concrete piles shall develop a compressive strength of not less than
4000 pounds per square inch before driving and an ultimate compressive strength
f' c at 28 days after pouring of not less than 5000 pounds per square inch.
2. Reinforcement. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be high-tensile
seven-wire strand conforming to U. B.C. Standard No. 26-7. Longitudinal rein-
forcement shall be laterally tied with steel ties or wire spirals.
Ties or spiral reinforcement shall be spaced not more than 3 inches apart center
to center for a distance of 2 feet from the ends and not more than 8 inches
elsewhere.
At each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be spaced I inch center
to center.
For piles having a diameter of 24 inches or less, wire shall be not smaller than
No. 5 gauge. For piles having a diameter greater than 24 inches but less than 36
601
inches, wire shall be not smaller than No. 4 gauge. For piles having a diameter
greater than 36 inches, wire shall be not smaller than I/4 inch round or No.3 gauge.
3. Allowable stresses. Precast prestressed piling shall be designed to resist
stresses induced by handling and driving as well as by loads. The effective
prestress in the pile shall be not less than 400 pounds per square inch for piles up to
30 feet in length, 550 pounds per square inch for piles up to 50 feet in length, and
700 pounds per square inch for piles greater than 50 feet in length.
The compressive stress in the concrete due to externally applied load shall not
exceed:
fc = 0.33f'c -0.27fpc
WHERE:
fPc is the effective prestress stress on the gross section.
Effective prestress shall be based on an assumed loss of 30,000 pounds per
square inch in the prestressing steel. The allowable stress in the prestressing steel
shall not exceed the values specified in Section 2618.
(f) Structural Steel Piles. I. Material. Structural steel piles, steel pipe piles
and fully welded steel piles fabricated from plates shall conform to U. B. C.
Standard No. 27-1 and be identified in accordance with Section 2701 (b).
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength Fv, provided such yield strength shall not be
assumed greater than 36,000 pounds ·per square inch for computational purposes.
EXCEPTION: When justified in accordance with Section 2908 (k), the allowa-
ble stresses may be increased to 0.50 FY.
Combined stresses shall not exceed those in Chapter 27.
3. Minimum dimensions. Sections of driven H-piles shall comply with the
following:
A. The flange projection shall not exceed 14 times the minimum thickness of
metal in either the flange or the web, and the flange widths shall be not less
than 80 percent of the depth of the section.
B. The nominal depth in the direction of the web shall be not less than 8
inches.
C. Flanges and webs shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 3fs inch.
Sections of driven pipe piles shall have an outside diameter of not less than I 0
inches and a minimum thickness of not less than 1/4 inch.
(g) Concrete-filled Steel Pipe Piles. I . Material. Steel pipe piles shall con-
form to U.B.C. Standard No. 27-1 and shall be identified in accordance with
Section 2701 (b). The concrete-filled steel pipe piles shall have an ultimate
compressive strength/' c of not less than 2500 pounds per square inch.
2. Allowable stresses. The allowable stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength FY on the steel plus 0.33 of the ultimate
compressive strength!' c of the concrete, provided FY shall not be assumed greater
than 36,000 pounds per square inch for computational purposes.
602
1988 EDITION 2909-291 0, 29-A
EXCEPTION: When justified in accordance with Section 2908 (k), the allowa-
ble stresses may be increased to 0.50 Fy.
Combined stresses shall not exceed those in Chapter 27.
3. Minimum dimensions. Driven piles of uniform section shall have a nomi-
nal outside diameter of not less than 8 inches.
Foundation Construction-Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 ·•· ·

Sec. 2910. (a) General. In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4 the further rcqu"•re- i!,.
ments of this section shall apply to the design and construction of foundations, •._•·:.,_:.·•
foundation components and the connection of superstructure elements thereto.
(b) Soil Capacity. The one-third stress increase allowed by Section 2303 (d)
may be exceeded for soils for combinations including earthquake when substanti-
ated by geotechnical data. The foundation shall be capable of transmitting the
design base shear and overturning forces prescribed in Section 2312 (e) from the
structure into the supporting soil. The short-term dynamic nature of the loads may
be taken into account in establishing the soil properties.
(c) Superstructure-to-foundation Connection. The connection of super-
structure elements to the foundation shall be adequate to transmit to the founda-
tion the forces for which the elements were required to be designed.
(d) Foundation-soil Interface. For regular buildings, the force F1 may be
omitted when determining the overturning moment to be resisted at the
foundation-soil interface.
(e) Special Requirements for Piles and Caissons. Piles and caissons shall be
designed for flexure whenever the tops of such members will be displaced by
earthquake motions. The criteria and detailing requirements of Section 2625 (e)
for concrete and Section 2722 (d) for steel shall apply for a length of such
members equal to 120 percent of the flexural length.
TABLE NO. 29-A-FOUNDATIONS FOR STUD BEARING WALLS-MINIMUM

REQUIREMENTS1 2
NUMBER OF THICKNESS OF DEPTH BELOW
FLOORS FOUNDATION WALL WIDTH OF THICKNESS UNDISTURBED
SUPPORTED (Inches) FOOTING OF FOOTING GROUND
BY THE UNIT (Inches) (Inches) SURFACE
FOUNDATION• CONCRETE MASONRY (Inches)
I 6 6 12 6 12
2 8 8 15 7 18
3 10 10 18 8 24
•Where unusual conditions or frost conditions are found, footings and foundations shall be
as required in Section 2907 (a).
2The ground under the floor may be excavated to the elevation of the top of the footing.
3foundations may support a roof in addition to the stipulated number of floors. Foundations
supporting roofs only shall be as required for supporting one floor.
603
TABLE NO. 29-B-ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LATERAL PRESSURE

LATERAL SLIDING1
LATERAL
BEARING
LBS.ISQ./FT.i
ALLOWABLE FT. OF DEPTH
FOUNDATION BELOW
PRESSURE LBS. NATURAL COEF· RESISTANCE
CLASS OF MATERIALS2 !SQ. FT.3 GRADE4 FICIENTS LBS./SQ. FT.&
I. Massive Crystalline Bedrock 4000 1200 .70

2. Sedimentary and Foliated
Rock 2000 400 .35
3. Sandy Gravel and/or Gravel
(GWandGP) 2000 200 .35
4. Sand, Silty Sand, Clayey
Sand, Silty Gravel and
Clayey Gravel (SW, SP, SM,
SC, GM and GC) 1500 150 .25
5. Clay, Sandy Clay, Silty Clay
and Clayey Silt (CL, ML,
MH andCH) 10007 100 130
1 Lateral beanng and lateral slidmg resistance may be combmed.
'For soil classifications OL, OH and PT (i.e., organic clays and peat), a foundation
investigation shall be required.
'All values of allowable foundation pressure are for footings having a minimum width of 12
inches and a minimum depth of 12 inches into natural grade. Except as in Footnote 7
below, increase of 20 percent allowed for each additional foot of width and/or depth to a
maximum value of three times the designated value.
4 May be increased the amount of the designated value for each additional foot of depth to a
maximum of 15 times the designated value. Isolated poles for uses such as flagpoles or
signs and poles used to support buildings which are not adversely affected by a 112-inch
motion at ground surface due to short-term lateral loads may be designed using lateral
bearing values equal to two times the tabulated values.
jCocfficicnt to be multiplied by the dead load.
6 Lateral sliding resistance value to be multiplied by the contact area. In no case shall the
lateral sliding resistance exceed one half the dead load.

7No increase for width is allowed.
604
1988 EDITION 29-C, 29-D, 29-1
TABLE NO. 29-C-CLASSIFICATION OF EXPANSIVE SOIL

EXPANSION INOEX POTENTIAL EXPANSION
0-20 Very low

21-50 Low
51-90 Medium
91-130 High
Above 130 Very high
TABLE NO. 29-D-WEIGHTED EXPANSION INDEX 1

OEPTH INTERVAL• WEIGHT FACTOR
0-1 0.4
1-2 0.3
2-3 0.2
3-4 0.1
Below 4 0
1The weighted expansion index for nonuniform soils is determined by multiplying the
expansion index for each depth interval by the weight factor for that interval and summing
the products.
2Depth in feet below the ground surface.
FIGURE NO. 29-1
605
Chapter30
VENEER
Scope
Sec. 3001. (a) General. All veneer and its application shall conform to the
requirements of this code. Wainscots not exceeding 4 feet in height measured
above the adjacent ground elevation for exterior veneer or the finish floor eleva-
tion for interior veneer may be exempted from the provisions of this chapter if
(b) Limitations. Exterior veneer shall not be attached to wood-frame construc-
tion at a point more than 30 feet in height above the noncombustible foundation,
except the 30-foot limit may be increased when special construction is designed to
provide for differential movement and when approved by the building official.
Definitions
Sec. 3002. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as follows:
BACKING as used in this chapter is the surface or assembly to which veneer is
attached.
VENEER is nonstructural facing of brick, concrete, stone, tile, metal, plastic
or other similar approved material attached to a backing for the purpose of
ornamentation, protection or insulation.
Adhered Veneer is veneer secured and supported through adhesion to an
approved bonding material applied over an approved backing.
Anchored Veneer is veneer secured to and supported by approved mechanical
fasteners attached to an approved backing.
Exterior Veneer is veneer applied to weather-exposed surfaces as defined in
Section 424.
Interior Veneer is veneer applied to surfaces other than weather-exposed
surfaces as defined in Section 424.
Materials
Sec. 3003. Materials used in the application of veneer shall conform to the
applicable requirements for such materials as set forth elsewhere in this code.
For masonry units and mortar, see Chapter 24.
For precast concrete units, see Chapter 26.
For portland cement plaster, see Chapter 4 7.
Anchors, supports and ties shall be noncombustible and corrosion resistant.
When the terms "corrosion resistant" or "noncorrosive" are used in this
chapter they shall mean having a corrosion resistance equal to or greater than a
hot-dipped galvanized coating of 1.5 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface
area. When an element is required to be corrosion resistant or noncorrosive, all of
its parts such as screws, nails, wire, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, shims, anchors,
ties and attachments shall be corrosion resistant.
606
Design
Sec. 3004. (a) General. The design of all veneer shall comply with the
requirements of Chapter 23 and this section.
Veneer shall support no load other than its own weight and the vertical dead
load of veneer above.
Surfaces to which veneer is attached shall be designed to support the additional
vertical and lateral loads imposed by the veneer.
Consideration shall be given for differential movement of supports, including
that caused by temperature changes, shrinkage, creep and deflection.
(b) Adhered Veneer. With the exception of ceramic tile, adhered veneer and its
backing shall be designed to have a bond to the supporting element sufficient to
withstand a shearing stress of 50 pounds per square inch.
(c) Anchored Veneer. Anchored veneer and its attachments shall be designed
to resist a horizontal force equal to twice the weight of the veneer.
Adhered Veneer
Sec. 3005. (a) Permitted Backing. Backing shall be continuous and may be of
any material permitted by this code. It shall have surfaces prepared to secure and
support the imposed loads of veneer.
Exterior veneer, including its backing, shall provide a weatherproof covering.
For additional backing requirements, see Sections 1707 (a) and 510 (b).
(b) Area Limitations. The height and length of veneered areas shall be
unlimited except as required to control expansion and contraction and as limited
by Section 3001 (b).
(c) Unit Size Limitations. Veneer units shall not exceed 36 inches in the
greatest dimension nor more than 720 square inches in total area and shall weigh
not more than 15 pounds per square foot unless approved by the building official.
EXCEPTION: Veneer units weighing less than 3 pounds per square foot shall
not be limited in dimension or area.
(d) Application. In lieu of the design required by Sections 3004 (a) and (b)
adhered veneer may be applied by one of the following application methods:
I. A paste of neat portland cement shall be brushed on the backing and the
back of the veneer unit. Type S mortar then shall be applied to the backing and the
veneer unit. Sufficient mortar shall be used to create a slight excess to be forced
out the edges of the units. The units shall be tapped into place so as to completely
fill the space between the units and the backing. The resulting thickness of mortar
in back ofthe units shall be not less than 112 inch nor more than 11/4 inch.
2. Units of tile, masonry, stone or terra cotta, not over I inch in thickness shall
be restricted to 81 square inches in area unless the back side of each unit is ground
or box screeded to true up any deviations from plane. These units and glass mosaic
units of tile not over 2 inches by 2 inches by 3fg inch in size may be adhered by
means of portland cement. Backing may be of masonry, concrete or portland
cement plaster on metal lath. Metal lath shall be fastened to the supports in
accordance with the requirements of Chapter 4 7. Mortar as described in Table No.
607
30-A shall be applied to the backing as a setting bed. The setting bed shall be a
minimum of 3fs inch thick and a maximum of 3(4 inch thick. A paste of neat
portland cement or half portland cement and half graded sand shall be applied to
the back of the exterior veneer units and to the setting bed and the veneer pressed
ami tapped into place to provide complete coverage between the mortar bed and
veneer unit. A portland cement grout shall be used to point the veneer.
(e) Ceramic Tile. Portland cement mortars for installing ceramic tile on walls,
floors and ceilings shall be as set forth in Table No. 30-A.
Anchored Veneer
Sec. 3006. (a) Permitted Backing. Backing may be of any material permitted
by this code. Exterior veneer including its backing shall provide a weatherproof
covering.
(b) Height and Support Limitations. Anchored veneers shall be supported on
footings, foundations or other noncombustible support except as provided under
Section 2515.
In Seismic Zones Nos. 2, 3 and4 the weight of all anchored veneers installed on
structures more than 30 feet in height above the noncombustible foundation or
support shall be supported by noncombustible, corrosion-resistant structural
framing. The structural framing shall have horizontal supports spaced not more
than 12 feet vertically above the initial 30-foot height. The vertical spacing
between horizontal supports may be increased when special design techniques,
approved by the building official, are used in the construction.
Noncombustible, noncorrosive lintels and noncombustible supports shall be
provided over all openings where the veneer unit is not self spanning. The
deflections of all structural lintels and horizontal supports required by this subsec-
tion shall not exceed I/600 of the span under full load of the veneer.
(c) Area Limitations. The area and length of anchored veneer walls shall be
unlimited. except as required to control expansion and contraction and by Section
3001 (b).
(d) Application. In lieu of the design required by Section 3004 (a) and (c),
anchored veneer may be applied in accordance with the following:
I. Masonry and stone units (5 inches maximum in thickness). Masonry
and stone veneer not exceeding 5 inches in thickness may be anchored directly to
structural masonry, concrete or studs in one of the following manners:
(i) Anchor ties shall be corrosion resistant, and if made of sheet metal, shall
have a minimum size of No. 22 gauge by 1 inch or, if of wire, shall be a minimum
of No. 9 gauge. Anchor ties shall be spaced so as to support not more than 2 square
feet of wall area but not more than 24 inches on center horizontally. In Seismic
Zones No. 3 and No. 4 anchor ties shall be provided to horizontal joint reinforce-
ment wire of No. 9 gauge or equivalent. The joint reinforcement shall be continu-
ous with butt splices between ties permitted.
When applied over stud construction, the studs shall be spaced a maximum of
16 inches on centers and approved paper shall first be applied over the sheathing
608
1988 EDITION 3006
or wires between studs except as otherwise provided in Section 1707, and mortar
shall be slushed into the l-inch space between facing and paper.
As an alternate, an air space of at least I inch may be maintained between the
backing and the veneer in which case temporary spot bedding may be used away
from the ties to align the veneer. Spot bedding at the tics shall be of cement mortar
entirely surrounding the ties.
(ii) Veneer may be applied with l-inch-minimum grouted backing space which
is reinforced by not less than 2-inch by 2-inch No. 16 gauge galvanized wire mesh
placed over waterproof paper backing and anchored directly to stud construction.
The stud spacing shall not exceed 16 inches on center. The galvanized wire
mesh shall be anchored to wood studs by galvanized steel wire furring nails at 4
inches on center or by barbed galvanized nails at 6 inches on center with a I Ifs-
inch minimum penetration. The galvanized wire mesh may be attached to steel
studs by equivalent wire ties. If this method is applied over solid sheathing the
mesh must be furred for embedment in grout. The wire mesh must be attached at
the top and bottom with not less than 8-penny common wire nails. The grout fill
shall be placed to fill the space intimately around the mesh and veneer facing.
2. Stone units (10 inches maximum in thickness). Stone veneer units not
exceeding I 0 inches in thickness may be anchored directly to structural masonry,
concrete or to studs:
(i) With concrete or masonry backing. Anchor tics shall be not Jess than No.
12 gauge galvanized wire, or approved equal. formed as an exposed eye and
extending not Jess than lfz inch beyond the face of the backing. The legs of the
loops shall be not Jess than 6 inches in length bent at right angles and laid in the
masonry mortar joint and spaced so that the eyes or loops are 12 inches maximum
on center in both directions. There shall be provided not Jess than a No. 12 gauge
galvanized wire tic, or approved equal, threaded through the exposed loops for
every 2 square feet of stone veneer. This tie shall be a loop having legs not Jess than
15 inches in length so bent that it will lie in the stone veneer mortar joint. The last 2
inches of each wire leg shall have a right angle bend. One inch of cement grout
shall be placed between the backing and the stone veneer.
(ii) With stud backing. A 2-inch by 2-inch No. 16 gauge galvanized wire mesh
with two layers of waterproof paper backing shall be applied directly to wood
studs spaced a maximum of 16 inches on center. On studs the mesh shall be
attached with 2-inch-long galvanized steel wire furring nails at 4 inches on center
providing a minimum Jl/s-inch penetration into each stud and with 8-penny
common nails at 8 inches on center into top and bottom plates. The galvanized
wire mesh may be attached to steel studs with equivalent wire tics. There shall be
not less than a No. 12 gauge galvanized wire, or approved equal, looped through
the mesh for every 2 square feet of stone veneer. This tie shall be a loop having legs
not Jess than 15 inches in length, so bent that it will lie in the stone veneer mortar
joint.
The last 2 inches of each wire leg shall have a right angle bend. One-inch
minimum thickness of cement grout shall be placed between the backing and the
stone veneer.
609
3. Slab-type units (2 inches maximum in thickness). For veneer units of

marble, travertine, granite or other stone units of slab form, ties of corrosion-
resistant metal shall engage drilled holes of corrosion-resistant metal dowels
located in the middle third of the edge of the units spaced a maximum of 24 inches
apart around the periphery of each unit with not less than four ties per veneer unit.
Units shall not exceed 20 square feet in area.
If the dowels are not tight fitting, the holes may be drilled not more than l/16
inch larger in diameter than the dowel with the hole countersunk to a diameter and
depth equal to twice the diameter of the dowel in order to provide a tight-fitting
key of cement mortar at the dowel locations when the mortar in the joint has set.
All veneer ties shall be corrosion-resistant metal capable of resisting in tension
or compression a force equal to two times the weight of the attached veneer.
If made of sheet metal, veneer ties shall be not smaller in area than No. 22 gauge
by I inch or, if made of wire, not smaller in diameter than No. 9 gauge wire.
4. Thrra cotta or ceramic units. Tied terra cotta or ceramic veneer units shall
be not less than ll/4 inch in thickness with projecting dovetail webs on the back
surface spaced approximately 8 inches on centers. The facing shall be tied to the
backing wall with noncorrosive metal anchors of not less than No. 8 gauge wire
installed at the top of each piece in horizontal bed joints not less than 12 inches nor
more than 18 inches on centers; these anchors shall be secured to 1/4-inch galva-
nized pencil rods which pass through the vertical aligned loop anchors in the
backing wall. The veneer ties shall have sufficient strength to support the full
weight of the veneer in tension. The facing shall be set with not less than a 2-inch
space from the backing wall and the space shall be filled solidly with portland
cement grout and pea gravel. Immediately prior to setting, the backing wall and
the facing shall be drenched with clean water and shall be distinctly damp when
the grout is poured.
Plastic Veneer
Sec. 3007. When used within a building, plastic veneer shall comply with the
interior finish requirements of Chapter 42. Exterior plastic veneer shall be of
approved plastics materials as defined in Chapter 4 and shall comply with the
following:
I. Plastic veneer shall not be attached to any exterior wall to a height greater
than 50 feet above grade.
2. Sections of plastic veneer shall not exceed 300 square feet in area and shall
be separated by a minimum of 4 feet vertically.
EXCEPTION: The area and separation requirements and the smoke-density
limitation are not applicable to plastic veneer applied to '!Ype V-N buildings,
provided the walls are not required to have a fire-resistive rating.
610
1988 EDITION 30-A
TABLE NO. 30-A-CERAMIC TILE SETTING MORTARS
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME U.B.C.

STD. 24-21
MINIMUM
TYPE 1 TYPES SAND MAXIMUM INTERVAL
PORTLAND HYDRATED lri£1CKNESS BETWEEN
COAT CEMENT LIME Dry Damp OF COAT COATS
I. Walls and I 1/2 4 5 3/H" 24 hrs.

Scratch "?>h/1
ceilings I 0 3 4 24 hrs.
over 10 1/2 V4" 24 hrs.
Float or I 4 5
sq. ft. 3f4"
leveling I I 6 7 24 hrs.
2. Walls and Scratch :Ys"
ceilings and float I Vi 21/2 3 3;4" 24 hrs.
10 sq. ft.
or less
Setting I 0 5 6 Iv.'' -
3. Floors Vw Jl/4" -
bed I 5 6
611
Chapter31
NO REQUIREMENTS
Chapter32
ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERING
General
Sec. 3201. Roofs shall be as specified in this code and as otherwise required by
this chapter.
I Roof coverings shall be securely fastened to the supporting roof construction

and shall provide weather protection for the building at the roof.
I
Subject to the requirements of this chapter, combustible roof coverings and roof
insulation may be used in any type of construction.
Skylights shall be constructed as required in Chapter 34.
Penthouses shall be constructed as required in Chapter 36.
II For use of plastics in roofs, see Chapter 52.
For solar energy collectors located above or upon a roof, see Section 1714.
II Definitions
Sec. 3202. For purposes of this chapter certain terms are designated as follows:
I
BASE PLY is one layer of felt secured to the deck over which a built-up roof is
applied.
BASE SHEET is a product used as the base ply in a built-up roofing mem-
brane.
BUILT-UP ROOF COVERING is two or more layers of felt cemented
together and surfaced with cap sheet, mineral aggregate, smooth coating or
similar surfacing material.
CAP SHEET is roofing made of organic or inorganic fibers, saturated and
coated on both sides with a bituminous compound, surfaced with mineral gran-
ules, mica, talc, ilmenite, inorganic fibers or similar materials.
CEMENTING is solidly mopped application of asphalt, cold liquid asphalt
compound, coal tar pitch or other approved cementing material.
COMBINATION SHEET is a glass fiber felt integrally attached to kraft
paper.
CORROSION-RESISTANT is any nonferrous metal or any metal having an
unbroken surfacing of nonferrous metal, or steel with not less than 10 percent
chromium or with not less than 0.20 percent copper.
EQUIVISCOUS TEMPERATURE (EVT) is the temperature determined by
the manufacturer at which the asphalt has a viscosity of 125 centistrokes and is
considered to be the proper temperature for asphalt applications.
612
1988 EDITION 3202
FELT is matted organic or inorganic fibers, saturated or coated with bitumi-

nous compound.
FELT, NONBITUMINOUS SATURATED, is a felt for special purpose j
roofing weighing not less than 12 pounds per 100 square feet, not less than .022 ··!1!1:
.. ;',
inch in thickness, containing a fire- and water-retardant binder, and reinforced

with glass fibers running lengthwise of the sheet not more than If4 inch apart. ··
INTERLAYMENT is a layer of felt or nonbituminous saturated felt not less :m
than 18 inches wide, shingled between each course of roof covering. ·~
INTERLOCKING ROOFING TILES are individual units, typically of clay ~
or concrete, possessing matching ribbed or interlocking vertical side joints that [
have been designed to restrict lateral movement and water penetration. j~
METAL ROOFING is metal shingles or sheets for application on solid roof il !
surfaces, and corrugated or otherwise shaped metal sheets or sections for applica- 1_.:,-.J._,:_
___ ... '.'
·'·
...
tion on roof frameworks or on solid roof surfaces. ·

ROOF-COVERING CLASSIFICATION is the classification assigned to a
roof-covering assembly by Section 3204 or the classification of a covering
established by testing in accordance with U. 8. C. Standard No. 32-7.
ROOFING PLY is a layer of felt in a built-up roofing membrane.
ROOFING SQUARE is I 00 square feet of roofing surface.
ROOFING TILES are units, typically clay or concrete, which comply with
SPOT CEMENTING is discontinuous application of asphalt, cold liquid
asphalt compound, coal tar pitch or other approved cementing material.
UNDERLAYMENT is one or more layers of felt, sheathing paper, nonbitumi-
nous saturated felt, or other approved material over which a roofing system is
I
applied.
VAPOR RETARDER is a layer of material or a laminate used to appreciably
reduce the flow of water vapor into the roofing system.
WOOD SHAKES are tapered or nontapered pieces of approved durable wood
of random widths ranging from 4 inches to 14 inches and of the following four Ill
types:
I. Hand-split and resawn: tapered with one sawed and one split face; semisplit: ~~;
~:;;ei~~~~ fna~~~a~~h.sawn and split faces both sides, 15 inches, 18 inches 1111
2. Taper-split: tapered with both split faces, 24 inches in length.

I
I
3. Straight-split: non tapered with both split faces, either 18 inches or 24 inches
4. ';,~:~::~"'
longer.
"w" both <id", OOg" <>wo"' <ptit. Leogth< 24 ioohe< •od
Preservative-treated wood shakes are taper-sawn pieces of southern pine
I~
wood treated in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-12 of random widths
ranging from 4 inches to 8 inches and lengths of 18 inches.
WOOD SHINGLES are tapered pieces of approved durable wood, sawed both
613
sides, of random widths ranging from 3 inches to 14 inches and in lengths of 16

inches, 18 inches or 24 inches.
J Roof Covering Requirements

Sec. 3203. The roof covering on any structure regulated by this C\)d~ <;,\n'h~~'ffi.·h'>
specified in Table No. 32-A and as classified in Section 3204.
i11e roof-covering assembly includes the roofdeck, underlayment, interlay-
ment, insulation and covering which is assigned a roof-covering classification.
Roof Covering Classification

Sec. 3204. (a) Class A Roof Covering. A Class A roof covering shall be one of
the following roofings:
I . Any Class A roofing assembly.
2. Asbestos-cement shingles or sheets.
3. Exposed concrete slab roof.
4. Sheet ferrous or copper roof covering.
5. Slate shingles.
6. Clay or concrete roof tile.
(b) Class B Roof Covering. Class B roof shall be any Class B roofing
assembly.
(c) Class C Roof Covering. Class C shall be any Class C roofing assembly.
(d) Nonrated Roof Covering. A nonrated roof covering shall be one of the
following roofings:
I. Any mineral aggregate surface built-up roof for application to roofs having
a slope of not more than 3 inches in 12 inches applied as specified in Section
3208 (b) 4, consisting of not less than the following:
Roofing Plies
Three layers of felt, and
Surfacing Material
300 pounds per roofing square of gravel or other approved surfacing
material, or
250 pounds per roofing square of crushed slag.
2. Wood shingles.
3. Wood shakes.
(e) Special Purpose Roofs. I. Wood shakes and shingles with nonbitumi-
nous saturated felt. A. Wood shakes. Special purpose wood shake roofing shall
conform to grading and application requirements of this chapter except that
nonbituminous saturated felt is to be substituted for the asphalt felt specified in
Section 3208 (b) 10. In addition, the deck shall be constructed of 19/32-inch
plywood with exterior glue or l-inch nominal tongue-and-groove boards overlaid
with a layer of approved nonbituminous saturated felt lapped 2 inches on the
horizontal and vertical joints. An 18-inch-wide strip of the same felt shall be
614
1988 EDITION 3204-3206
shingled in between each course of shakes in such manner that no felt is exposed to
the weather.
B. Wood shingles. Special purpose wood shingle roofing shall conform to
grading and application requirements of this chapter. In addition, the deck,
whether of spaced boards or solid, shall be overlaid with a layer of approved
nonbituminous saturated felt lapped 2 inches on the horizontal and vertical joints.
2. Wood shakes or shingles with gypsum board underlayment. Special
purpose wood shake or wood shingle roofing shall conform to the grading and
application requirements of this chapter. In addition, an underlayment of l/2-inch
'fYpe X gypsum board shall be placed under 15/32-inch plywood solid sheathing or
l-inch nominal spaced sheathing.
Attics: Access, Draft Stops and Ventilation

Sec. 3205. (a) Access. An attic access opening shall be provided in the ceiling
of the top floor of buildings with combustible ceiling or roof construction. The
opening shall be located in a corridor or hallway of buildings of three or more
stories in height and readily accessible in buildings of any height.
The opening shall be not less than 22 inches by 30 inches.
Thirty-inch minimum clear head room shall be provided above the access
opening.
Attics with a maximum vertical clear height of less than 30 inches need not be
provided with access openings.
(b) Draft Stops. Attics, mansards, overhangs and other concealed roof spaces
formed of combustible construction shall be draft stopped as specified in Section
2516 (f).
(c) Ventilation. Where determined necessary by the building official due to
atmospheric or climatic conditions, enclosed attics and enclosed rafter spaces
formed where ceilings are applied direct to the underside of roof rafters shall have
cross ventilation for each separate space by ventilating openings protected against
the entrance of rain and snow. The net free ventilating area shall be not less than
1/150 of the area of the space ventilated, except that the area may be 1/300, provided
at least 50 percent of the required ventilating area is provided by ventilators
located in the upper portion of the space to be ventilated at least 3 feet above eave
or cornice vents with the balance of the required ventilation provided by eave or
cornice vents. The openings shall be covered with corrosion-resistant metal mesh
with mesh openings of l/4 inch in dimension.
Smoke and Heat Venting

Sec. 3206. (a) When Required. Smoke and heat vents complying with U. B.C. !~
Standard No. 32-14 or fixed openings shall be installed in accordance with the t
provisions of this section as follows: ~~
l. In single-story Group B, Divisions 2 and 4 Occupancies having over 50,000
square feet in undivided area.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Office buildings and retail sales areas where storage does not ;~
exceed 12 feet in height. ]
615
2. Group B, Division 4 Occupancies used for bulk frozen food storage when the
building is protected by a complete automatic sprinkler system.
2. In Group H, Divisions I, 2, 3, 4or 5 Occupancies over 15,000 square feet in
single floor area.
For requirements on smoke and heat venting in buildings with high-piled
combustible stock, see the Fire Code.
(b) Mixed Occupancies. Venting facilities shall be installed in buildings of
mixed occupancy on the basis of the individual occupancy involved.
(c) '!ypes of Vents. Vents shall be fixed in the open position or vents shall be
!I activated by temperature and shall open automatically in the event of fire.
Fixed openings may consist of skylights, or other openings which provide
venting directly to exterior above the plane of the main roof in which they are
1111
located. Vents shall meet the design criteria of this subsection regarding elevation,
and Subsection (e) regarding venting area, dimensions, spacing and venting
ratios. The building official may require documentation of the design to assure
proper performance of required venting.
Temperature activation of vents shall be at or near the highest elevation of the
ceiling and in no case lower than the upper one third of the smoke curtain. Where
plain glass is used, provisions shall be made to protect the occupants from glass
breakage. In no case shall vents be located closer than 20 feet to an adjacent
property line.
(d) Releasing Devices. Release devices shall be in accordance with U.B.C.
Standard No. 32-14.
(e) Size and Spacing of Vents. I. Effective venting area. The effective
venting area is the minimum cross-sectional area through which the hot gases
must pass en route to atmosphere. The effective venting area shall be not less than
16 square feet with no dimension less than 4 feet, excluding ribs or gutters whose
total width does not exceed 6 inches.
2. Spacing. The maximum center-to-center spacing between vents within the
building shall be:
A. In Group B Occupancies: 120 feet.
B. In Group H Occupancies: 100 feet.
3. Venting ratios. The following ratios of effective area of vent openings to
floor areas shall be:
'A. lnGroupBOccupancies: 1:100.
B. In Group H Occupancies: 1:50.
(f) Curtain Boards. I. General. Curtain boards shall be provided to subdivide
a vented building in accordance with the provisions of this subsection.
2. Construction. Curtain boards shall be sheet metal, asbestos board, lath and
plaster, gypsum wallboard or other approved materials which provide equivalent
performance that will resist the passage of smoke. All joints and connections shall
be smoke tight.
3. Location and depth. Curtain boards shall extend down from the ceiling for
616
1988 EDITION 3206-3208
a minimum depth of 6 feet but need not extend closer than 8 feet to the floor. In
Group H Occupancies, the minimum depth shall be 12 feet except that it need not
be closer than 8 feet to the floor, provided the curtain is not less than 6 feet in
depth.
4. Spacing. The distance between curtain boards shall not exceed 250 feet and
the curtained area shall be limited to 50,000 square feet. In Group H Occupancies,
the distance between curtain boards shall not exceed I 00 feet and the curtained
area shall be limited to 15,000 square feet.
Roof Drainage
Sec. 3207. (a) General. Roof systems shall be sloped a minimum of l/4 inch in
12 inches for drainage. See Section 2305 (f).
(b) Roof Drains. Unless roofs are sloped to drain over roof edges, roof drains
shall be installed at each low point of the roof.
Roof drains shall be sized and discharged in accordance with the Plumbing
Code.
(c) Overflow Drains and Scuppers. Where roof drains are required, overflow
drains having the same size as the roof drains shall be installed with the inlet flow
line located 2 inches above the low point of the roof, or overflow scuppers having
three times the size of the roof drains may be installed in adjacent parapet walls
with the inlet flow line located 2 inches above the low point of the adjacent roof
and having a minimum opening height of 4 inches.
Overflow drains shall be connected to drain lines independent from the roof
drains.
(d) Concealed Piping. Roof drains and overflow drains, when concealed
within the construction of the building, shall be installed in accordance with the
Plumbing Code.
(e) Over Public Property. Roof drainage water from a building shall not be
permitted to flow over public property.
EXCEPTION: Groups R, Division 3, and M Occupancies.
Roof Covering Materials and Application

Sec. 3208. (a) General. Roof coverings shall be as specified in this section,
and shall be provided as follows:
I. Materials. The quality and design of roofing materials and their fastenings
shall conform to the applicable standards listed in Chapter 60.
2. Identification. All material shall be delivered in packages bearing the
manufacturer's label or identifying mark.
Each package of asphalt shingles, mineral surfaced roll roofing, fire-retardant-
treated wood shingles and shakes, and built-up roofing ply materials shall bear the
label of an approved agency having a service for the inspection of material and
finished products during manufacture.
Each bundle of wood shingles, slate shingles and wood shakes shall comply
with U .B.C. Standards Nos. 32-8, 32-10 and 32-11, respectively, and shall bear
617
the label or identification mark of an approved inspection bureau or agency

showing the grade.
Asphalt shall comply with U .B.C. Standard No. 32-2 and shall be delivered in
cartons indicating the name of the manufacturer, the flash point and the type of
product. Bulk shipments shall be accompanied with the same information issued
in the form of a certification or on the bill of lading by the manufacturer. Coa\ tat
.Pitch shall comply with U.B.C. Standards Nos. 32-1 and 32-2 and bear the
manufacturer's name and type. Additional information such as equiviscous tem-
perature (EVT) may be furnished.
(b) Application. Application of roof-covering materials shall be in accordance

with the following provisions:
I. Asbestos-cement roofing. Corrugated asbestos-cement roofing shall be
applied in an approved manner.
2. Asbestos-cement shingles. Asbestos-cement shingles shall comply with
U.B.C. Standard No. 32-9 and shall be installed in an approved manner.
3. Asphalt shingles. Asphalt shingles shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No.
32-3. Asphalt shingles shall be fastened according to manufacturer's instructions
and Table No. 32-B-1.
4. Built-up roofs. Built-up roofing shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and Table Nos. 32-E through G.
5. Clay or concrete tile. Tile of clay or concrete shall comply with U.B.C.
Standard No. 32-12 and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 32-D-2.
6. Metal roofing. Metal roofing exposed to the weather shall be corrosion
resistant.
Corrugated or ribbed steel shall be not less than No. 30 galvanized sheet gauge.
Flat steel sheets shall be not less than No. 30 galvanized sheet gauge. Other
ferrous sections or shapes shall be not less than No. 26 galvanized sheet gauge.
I~·
Flat nonferrous sheets shall be not less than No. 28 B. & S. gauge. Other
nonferrous sections or shapes shall be not less than No. 25 B. & S. gauge.
Corrugated or otherwise shaped sheets or sections shall be designed to support
the required live load between supporting members.
Ferrous sheets or sections shall comply with U .B.C. Standards Nos. 27-9 and
32-4. Nonferrous sheets or sections shall comply with U. B.C. Standard No. 32-4.
7. Metal shingles. Metal shingles shall be applied in an approved manner.
Nonferrous shingles shall be not less than No. 28 B. & S. gauge.
8. Sheet roofing. Sheet roofing shall comply with the provisions of U.B.C.
Standard No. 32-3 and shall be installed in an approved manner.
9. Slate shingles. Slate shingles shall comply with U .B.C. Standard No. 32-10
and shall be installed in an approved manner.
10. Wood shakes. Shakes shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-8 and
shall be installed in accordance with Table No. 32-B-2.
618
1988 EDITION 3208
II. Wood shingles. Shingles shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 32-11
and shall be installed in accordance with Table No. 32-B-2.
(c) Flashing. I. Valleys. Roof valley flashings shall be as in this subsection.

S'u\ng\c application shall be consistent with applicable Table No. 32-B-1, 32-B-'l,
32-D-1 or 32-D-2.
A. Asphalt shingles. The roof valley flashing shall be provided of not less than
No. 28 galvanized sheet gauge corrosion-resistant metal, and shall extend at least
8 inches from the center line each way. Sections of flashing shall have an em) lap o'i
not less than 4 inches. Alternatively, the valley shall consist of woven asphalt
shingles applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
In each case, the roof valley flashing shall have a 36-inch-wide underlayment
directly under it consisting of one layer of Type I5 felt running the full length of
the valley, in addition to the underlayment specified in Table No. 32-B-1. In severe
climates, the metal valley flashing underlayment shall be solid cemented to the
roof underlayment for slopes under 7 inches in I2 inches.
B. Metal shingles. The roof valley flashing shall be provided of not less than
No. 28 galvanized sheet gauge corrosion-resistant metal, which shall extend at
least 8 inches from the center line each way and shall have a splash diverter rib not
less than 3/4 inch high at the flow line formed as part of the flashing. Sections of
flashing shall have an end lap of not less than 4 inches. The metal valley flashing
shall have a 36-inch-wide underlayment directly under it consisting of one layer of
lYpe 15 felt running the full length of the valley, in addition to underlayment
required for metal shingles. In severe climates, the metal valley flashing under-
laymen! shall be solid cemented to the roofing underlayment for roof slopes under
7 inches in 12 inches.
C. Asbestos-cement shingles, slate shingles, and clay and concrete tile. The
roof valley flashing shall be provided of not less than No. 28 galvanized sheet
gauge corrosion-resistant metal, which shall extend at least II inches from the
center line each way and shall have a splash diverter rib not less than I inch high at
the flow line formed as part of the flashing. Sections of flashing shall have an end
lap of not less than 4 inches. For roof slopes of 3 inches in 12 inches and over, the
metal valley flashing shall have a 36-inch-wide underlayment directly under it
consisting of one layer of lYpe 15 felt running the full length of the valley, in
addition to the underlayment specified in Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 32-D-2. In
severe climates, the metal valley flashing underlayment shall be solid cemented to
the roofing underlayment for slopes under 7 inches in I2 inches.
D. Wood shingles and wood shakes. The roof valley flashing shall be pro-
vided of not less than No. 28 galvanized sheet gauge corrosion-resistant metal,
which shall extend at least 8 inches from the center line each way for wood
shingles and II inches from the center line each way for wood shakes. Sections of
flashing shall have an overlap of not less than 4 inches. The metal valley flashing
shall have a 36-inch-wide underlayment directly under it consisting of one layer of
lYpe 15 felt running the full length of the valley, in addition to underlayment
specified in Table No. 32-B-2. In severe climates, the metal valley flashing
619
underlayment shall be solid cemented to the roofing underlayment for roof slopes
under 7 inches in 12 inches.
EXCEPTION: Where local practice indicates satisfactory performance, the
building official may permit valley flashing without underlayment.
2. Other flashing. At the juncture of the roof and vertical surfaces, flashing
and counterflashing shall be provided per roofing manufacturer's instructions,
and when of metal, shall be not less than No. 26 gauge corrosion-resistant metal.
(d) Roof Insulation. Roof insulation shall be of a rigid type suitable as a base
for application of a roof covering. Foam plastic roof insulation shall conform to
the requirements of Section 1712. The use of insulation in fire-resistive construc-
tion shall comply with Section 4305 (a).
The roof insulation, deck material and roof covering shall meet the fire retard-
ancy requirements of Section 3204 and Table No. 32-A.
Insulation for built-up roofs shall be applied in accordance with Table No. 32-
E. For other roofing materials such as shingles or tile, the insulation shall be
covered with a suitable nailing base secured to the structure.
620
TABLE NO. 32-A-MINIMUM ROOF CLASSES
.•: -
CD
co
co
I II Ill IV v m
0
OCCUPANCY F.R. F.R. 1-HR N 1-HR N H.T. 1-HR N =i
A-I B B - - - - - - - i5
z
A) 2-2.1 B B B - B - B B -
A-3 B B B B B' B' B' B' B'

A-4 B B B B B B B B B'
B) 1-2 B B B B BJ BJ B' B' Bl
B) 3-4 B B B B B B B B Bl
E B B B B B B B B BJ
H-1 A A A A B B B B B
H) 2-3-4-5-6-7 A B B *"
I) 1-2 A B
B
B -
B B
B
B
-
B
B
B
B -
I
1-3 A B B' - B' - - B2 - :
M B B B B NR 4 NR4 NR4 NR4 NR4

R-1 B B B B B2l B2l B2l B23 B23
R-3 B B B B NR NR NR NR NR
··:
1See Section 1002 (b) A-Class A roofing
2Nonrated roof coverings may be used on buildings which are not more than two stories in height and B-Class B roofing
have not more than 3000 square feet of projected roof area and there is a minimum of I 0 feet from NR-Nonrated roof coverings :·
the extremity of the roof to the property line on all sides except for street fronts.
N-No requirements for fire resistance
'Buildings which are not more than two stories in height and have not more than 6000 square feet of
projected roof area and there is a minimum of 10 feet from the extremity of the roof to the property F.R.-Fire Re;istive
line or assumed property line on all sides except for street fronts may have Class C roof coverings H.T.-Heavy Timber
(Contmued)
(Continued)
~ which comply with U .B.C. Standard No. 32-7 and roofs of cedar or redwood shakes and No. I
N shingles constructed in accordance with Section 3204 (e), Special Purpose Roofs.
4 Unless otherwise required because of location as specified in Parts IV and V ofthis code, Group M,
Division I roof coverings shall consist of not less than one layer of cap sheet, or built-up roofing
consisting of two layers of felt and a surfacing material as specified in Section 3204 (d) I.
TABLE NO. 32-B-1-ASPHALT SHINGLE APPLICATION
I
ASPHALT SHINGLES
NOT PERMITTED BELOW 2:12
ROOF SLOPE 2:12to less than 4:12 4:12 and over
DECK REQUIREMENT Asphalt shingles shall be fastened to solidly sheathed roofs.

Sheathing shall conform to Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 7.
UNDERLAYMENT Asphalt strip shingles may be installed on slopes as low One layer nonperforated Type 15 felt lapped 2 inches
Temperate climate as 2 inches in 12 inches, provided the shingles are horizontally and 4 inches vertically to shed water.
approved self-sealing or are hand-sealed and are in-
stalled with an underlayment consisting of two layers of
nonperforated Type 15 felt applied shingle fashion.
c
Starting with an 18-inch-wide sheet and a 36-inch-wide z
sheet over it at the eaves, each subsequent sheet shall be
:;;
0
lapped 19 inches horizontally. :D
Severe climate: Same as for temperate climate, and additionally the two Same as for temperate climate, except that one layer No. ==
Ill
In areas subject to layers shall be solid cemented together with approved 40 coated roofing or coated glass base sheet shall be c
wind-driven snow or cementing material between the plies extending from applied from the eaves to a line 12 inches inside the
r=
c
roof ice buildup. the eave up the roof to a line 24 inches inside the exterior exterior wall line with all laps cemented together. z
C)
wall line of the building.
0
0
c
m
....
:
m
c
::::j
0
ATTACHMENT z
'JYpe of fasteners Corrosion-resistant nails, minimum 12-gauge 3/s-inch head, or approved corrosion-resistant staples, minimum 16-
gauge I5ft6-inch crown width.
Fasteners shall comply with the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing 3f4 inch or through the thickness of the sheathing,
whichever is less.
No. of fasteners! 4 per 36-40-inch strip
2 per 9-18-inch shingle
Exposure
Field of roof Per manufacturer's instructions included with packages of shingles.
Hips and ridges Hip and ridge weather exposures shall not exceed those permitted for the field of the roof.
Method Per manufacturer's instructions included with packages of shingles.
FLASHING
Valleys Per Section 3208 (c) I A
Other flashing Per Section 3208 (c) 2
1Figures shown are for normal application. For special conditions such as mansard application and where roofs are in special wind regions, shingles
shall be attached per manufacturer's instructions.
TABLE NO. 32-8-2-WOOD SHINGLE OR SHAKE APPLICATION
WOOD SHINGLES WOOD SHAKES
NOT PERMITTED BELOW 3:12 NOT PERMITTED BELOW 4:121
ROOF SLOPE See Table No. 32-C See Table No. 32-C
DECK REQUIREMENT Shingles and shakes shall be applied to roofs with solid or spaced sheathing.
Spaced sheathing for wood roofs shall be spaced not to exceed 6 inches clear nor more than the nominal width of
the sheathing board. Sheathing boards shall be not less than I inch by 4 inches nominal dimensions.
Sheathing shall conform to Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 7.
UNDERLAYMENT One 18-inch-wide interlayment of Type 30 felt shingled
Temperate climate No Requirements between each course in such a manner that no felt is ·.z
exposed to the weather below the shake butts.
Severe climate: Two layers of non perforated Type 15 felt applied shingle Sheathing shall be solid and the shakes shall be applied
In areas subject to fashion shall be installed and solid cemented together over a layer of nonperforated l)'pe 15 felt applied shin-
wind-driven snow or with approved cementing material between the plies gle fashion. Two layers of nonperforated Type !5 felt
c:
roof ice buildup. extending from the eave up the roof to a line 36 inches applied shingle fashion shall be installed and solid ce- z
inside the exterior wall line of the building. mented together with approved cementing material be- :;;
tween the plies extending from the eave up the roofto a 0
::D
line 36 inches inside the exterior wall line of the build- ~
ing. I ID
c:
;=
0
z
C)
0
0
0
m
ATTACHMENT
Type of fasteners Corrosion-resistant nails, minimum No. 14 112-gauge Corrosion-resistant nails, minimum No. 13-gauge 7132-
< --
iCD
7132-inch head, or corrosion-resistant staples, when ap- m
inch head, or corrosion-resistant staples, when ap- c
proved by the building official. proved by the building official. ::::j
Fasteners shall comply with the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 25-17. 0
z
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing 314 inch or through the thickness of the
sheathing, whichever is less.
No. of fasteners 2 per shingle 2 per shake
Exposure
Field of roof Weather exposures shall not exceed those set forth in Table No. 32-C.
Hips and ridges Hip and ridge weather exposures shall not exceed those permitted for the field of the roof.
Method Shingles shall be laid with a side lap of not less than 1112 Shakes shall be laid with a side lap of not less than 1112
inches between joints in adjacent courses, and not in inches between joints in adjacent courses. Spacing be-
direct alignment in alternate courses. Spacing between tween shakes shall be not less than 31s inch nor more than
shingles shall be approximately 114 inch. Each shingle 51s inch except for preservative-treated wood shakes
shall be fastened with two nails only, positioned approx- which shall have a spacing not less than 114 inch nor
imately 314 inch from each edge and approximately I more than 31s inch.
inch above the exposure line. Starter course at the eaves Shakes shall be fastened to the sheathing with two nails
shall be doubled. only, positioned approximately 1 inch from each edge
and approximately 2 inches above the exposure line.
The starter course at the eaves shall be doubled. The
bottom or first layer may be either shakes or shingles.
Fifteen-inch or 18-inch shakes may be used for the
starter course at the eaves and final course at the ridge.
FLASHING
Valleys Per Section 3208 (c) I D
Other flashing Per Section 3208 (c) 2
'When approved by the building official, wood shakes may be installed on a slope of not less than 3 inches in 12 inches when an underlaymentofnot
less than non pe rforated 1'ype 15 felt in installed.
32-C UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
I TABLE NO. 32-C-MAXIMUM WEATHER EXPOSURE

3" TO LESS THAN 4"1N12"
'
4"1N12" AND STEEPER
GRADE LENGTH Inches Inches
.-:;.
WOOD SHINGLES
No.1 16-inch 3 3/4 5

No. 2 1 16-inch 3 112 4
No. 3 1 16-inch 3 3 112
No. I 18-inch 4 1/4 5 112
No. 2 1 18-inch 4 4 112
No. 3 1 18-inch 3 112 4
No.I 24-inch 5 3/4 7 112
No. 2 1 24-inch 5 1/z 6 112
No. 3 1 24-inch 5 5 112
WOOD SHAKES2
18-inch 7 112 7 112

24-inch 10 10
'To be used only when specifically permitted by the building official.

2Exposure of 24-inch by 3/s-inch resawn handsplit shakes shall not exceed 5 inches regard-
less of the roof slope.
626
TABLE NO. 32·0-1-ROOFING TILE APPLICATION 1
...
CD
C»
FOR ALL TILES C»
m
I
ROOF SLOPE 21/2:12 to less than 3:12 3:12 and over c
:::::j
DECK REQUIREMENTS Solid sheathing per Sections 2516 (i) and 2517 (h) 7
0
UNDERLAYMENT z
In climate areas subject Same as for other climate areas, except that extending
to wind-driven snow,
roof ice damming or
special wind regions as
shown in Figure No. l
of Chapter 23.
Built-up roofing membrane, three plies minimum,
applied per Section 3208 (b) 4. Surfacing
not required.
from the eaves up the roof to a line 24 inches inside the
exterior wall line of the building, two layers of under-
layment shall be applied shingle fashion and solidly
cemented together with an approved cementing mate-
rial.
I~
'
<
-
Other climate areas One layer heavy-duty felt or Type 30 felt side lapped 2
inches and end lapped 6 inches.
'
ATTACHMENT'
Type of fasteners Corrosion-resistant nails not less than No. II gauge, 51!6-inch
head. Fasteners shall comply with the requirements of '
:·.
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing 3/4 inch or through the
thickness of the sheathing, whichever is less. Attaching wire for clay or concrete tile shall not be smaller than No. 14-
No. of fasteners2.3
gauge, and shall comply with U.B.C. Standards Nos. 32-6 and 32-13.
One fastener per tile. Flat tile without vertical laps, two
fasteners pertile.
Two fasteners per tile. Only one fastener on slopes of
7:12 and less for tiles with installed weight exceeding I
I
7.5 pounds per square foot having a width no greater
than 16 inches. 4 .
Tile headlap 3 inches minimum
I~
FLASHING Per Sections 3208 (c) I C and 3208 (c) 2
'In snow areas a minimum of two fasteners pertile are required.
2In areas designated by the building official as being subject to repeated wind velocities to excess of 80 mph or where the roof height exceeds 40 feet
(I) above grade, all tiles shall be attached as follows: ·
N
..... (a) The heads of all tiles shall be nailed. .
(Continued)
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 32-D-1--{Continued)
w
I
Q) (b) The noses of all eave course tiles shall be fastened with approved clips.
~ ~
(c) All rake tiles shall be nailed with two nails.
(d) The noses of all ridge, hip and rake tiles shall be set in a bead of approved roofer's mastic.
lin snow areas a minimum of two fasteners per tile are required, or battens and one fastener.
40n slopes over 24: 12, the nose end of all tiles shall be securely fastened.
-
. 9
w
~
c
,:,
TABLE NO. 32-D-2-CLAY OR CONCRETE ROOFING TILE APPLICATION

INTERLOCKING TILE WITH PROJECTING ANCHOR LUGS I
,.
ROOF SLOPE
DECK REQUIREMENTS
UNDERLAYMENT
4:12and over
Spaced structural sheathing boards or solid roof sheathing. It
~:~
In climate areas subject to Solid sheathing one layer of Type 30 felt lapped 2 inches horizontally and 6 inches vertically, except that
wind-driven snow, roof ice extending from the eaves up the roofto line 24 inches inside the exterior wall line of the building, two layers of the
or special wind regions as underlayment shall be applied shingle fashion and solid cemented together with approved cementing material.
shown in Figure No. I of
Chapter 23.
Other climates For spaced sheathing, approved reinforced membrane. For solid sheathing, one layer heavy-duty felt or Type 30
felt lapped 2 inches horizontally and 6 inches vertically.
c:
ATTACHMENT' z
Type of fasteners Corrosion-resistant nails not less than No. II gauge, 51!6-inchhead.
~
:II
I
Fasteners shall comply with the requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-17.
3:
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the battens 2 or sheathing 3/• inch or through the thickness of the Ill
sheathing, whichever is less. Attaching wire for clay or concrete tile shall not be smaller than 14 gauge and shall c:
comply with U. B.C. Standards Nos. 32-6 and 32-13. Horizontal battens are required on solid sheathing for slopes r=c
7:12 and over. 1
Horizontal battens are required for slopes over 7:12. 2
z
C)
0
0
c
m
....
CD
CXI
CXI
m
,. c
No. of fasteners' Below 5:12, fasteners not required. 5:12 to less than 12:12. one fastener every other row. 12:12 to 24:12, one =i
fastener every tile 4 All perimeter tiles require one fastener5 Solid sheathing without battens, one fastener per tile 0
required. Tiles with installed weight less than 9 pounds per square foot require a minimum of one fastenerpertile. 3 X
z
With battens
Without battens One fastener every tile.
Tile headlap 3-inch minimum
FLASHING Per Section 3208 (c) I C and 3208 (c) 2
lin areas designated by the building official as being subject to repeated wind velocities to excess of 80 mph, or where the roof height exceeds 40 feet.
above grade, all tiles shall be attached as set forth below:
(a) The heads of all tiles shall be nailed.
(b) The noses of all eave course tiles shall be fastened with a special clip.
(c) All rake tiles shall be nailed with two nails.
(d) The noses of all ridge, hip and rake tiles shall be set in a bead of approved roofer's mastic.
2Battens shall be not less than l-inch by 2-inch nominal. Provisions shall be made for drainage beneath battens by a minimum of 1/s-inch risers at each
nail or by 4-foot long battens with at least 112-inch separation between battens. Battens shall be fastened with approved fasteners spaced at not more
than 24 inches on center.
'In snow areas a minimum of two fasteners per tile are required, or battens and one fastener.
'Slopes over 24:12, nose ends of all tiles must be securely fastened.
5Perimeter fastening areas include three tile courses but not less than 36 inches from either side of hips or ridges and edges of eaves and gable rakes.
TABLE NO. 32-E-BUILT-UP ROOF COVERING APPLICATION
I
MECHANICALLY FASTENED SYSTEMS ADHESIVELY FASTENED SYSTEMS
DECK CONDITIONS Decks shall be firm. broom-clean, smooth and dry. Insulated decks shall have wood insulation stops at all edges of
the deck, unless an alternative suitable curbing is provided. Insulated decks with slopes greater than 2:12 shall have
wood insulation stops at not more than 8-feet face-to-face. Wood nailers shall be provided where nailing is required
for roofing plies.
Solid wood sheathing shall conform to Sections 2516 (i) Provide wood nailers where nailing is required for roof-
and 2517 (h) 7. ing plies (see below).
UNDERLAYMENT One layer of sheathing paper, Type 15 felt or other Not required
approved underlayment nailed sufficiently to hold in
place, is required over board decks where openings
between boards would allow bitumen to drip through.
No underlayment requirements for plywood decks. Un-
derlayment on other decks shall be in accordance with
deck manufacturer's recommendations.
BASE PLY Over approved decks, the base ply shall be nailed using Decks shall be primed in accordance with the roofing
REQUIREMENTS not less than one fastener for each 1 113 square feet. manufacturer's instructions. The base ply shall be sol-
Over non-insulated decks idly cemented or spot mopped as required by the type of
deck material using adhesive application rates shown in
Table No. 32-F. c:
z
MECHANICAL Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate 3 /4 inch into When mechanical fasteners are required for attachment :;;
FASTENERS the sheathing or through the thickness of the sheathing, of roofing plies to wood nailers or insulation stops, (see 0
::D
whichever is less. Built-up roofing nails for wood board below), they shall be as required for wood board decks. s::
decks shall be minimum No. 12 gauge 7 iJ6-inch head Ill
driven through tin caps or approved nails with integral c:
caps. For plywood, No. II gauge ring-shank nails
r=
c
driven through tin caps or approved nails with integral z
caps shall be used. For gypsum, insulating concrete,
cementitious wood-fiber and other decks, fasteners rec- "c
0
0
ommended by the manufacturer shall be used.
m
....
;
m
c
VAPOR RETARDER A vapor retarder shall be installed where the average January temperature is below 45°F., or where excessive 3
Over insulated decks moisture conditions are anticipated within the building. It shall be applied as for a base ply. 0
z
INSULATION When no vapor retarder is required, roof insulation shall When no vapor retarder is required, roof insulation shall
be fastened in an approved manner. When a vapor re- be solid mopped to the deck using the adhesive applica-
tarder is required, roof insulation is to be solidly tion rate specified in Table No. 32-F. When a vapor
mopped to the vapor retarder using the adhesive applica- retarder is required, roof insulation is to be solidly
tion rate specified in Table No. 32-F. See manufacturer's mopped to the vapor retarder, using the adhesive appli-
instructions for the attachment of insulation over steel cation rate specified in Table No. 32-F. See manufactur-
decks. er's installation instructions for attachment of insulation
over steel decks.
ROOFING PLIES Successive layers shall be solidly cemented together and to the base ply or the insulation using the adhesive rates
shown in Table No. 32-F. On slopes greater than 1:12 for aggregate-surfaced, or 2:12 for smooth-surfaced or cap
sheet surfaced roofs, mechanical fasteners are required. Roofing plies shall be blind-nailed to the deck, wood nailers
or wood insulation stops in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's recommendations. On slopes exceeding I
I
3:12, plies shall be laid parallel to the slope of the deck (strapping method).
CEMENTING
MATERIALS See Table No. 32-G
CURBS AND WALLS Suitable cant strips shall be used at all vertical intersections. Adequate attachment shall be provided for both base
I
flashing and counterflashing on all vertical surfaces. Reglets shall be provided in wall or parapets receiving metal
counterflashing.
SURFACING Mineral aggregate surfaced roofs shall comply with the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 32-5 and Table No.
32-F. Cap sheets shall be cemented to the roofing plies as set forth in Table No. 32-F.
w
N
.;,
TABLE NO. 32-F-BUILT-UP ROOFING
CEMENTING ADHESIVE AND SURFACING APPLICATION RATES
MINIMUM APPUCATION RATE, MATERIALJ100 FT.2 ROOF AREA
COLD-
HOT ASPHALT HOT COAL·TAR PROCESS CEMENT
(Lbs.) (Lbs.) (Gal.)
MATERIAL TO BE ADHERED
Base Ply or Vapor Retarder
I. Spot mopping 15 15 I
2. Solid cementing 20 20 1'12
Insulation
I. Solid cementing 20 20 1'12
Roofing Plies (and between layers of vapor retarder)
I. Felts 20 20 not permitted
2. Coated felts 20 20 1'12
Cap Sheets
I. Solid cementing 20 not permitted 1'12
c:
Mineral Aggregate' z z
I. Fire-retardant roof coverings
;;
0
(a) Gravel, 400 lb./sq. 50 60 not permitted ::rJ
(b) Slag, 300 lb./sq 50 60 not permitted 3:
Ill
2. Nonrated roof coverings c:
(a) Gravel, 300 lb./sq. 40 50 not permitted r=
0
(b) Slag, 250 lb./sq. 40 50 not permitted
z
C)
'Mineral aggregate shall not be used for built-up roofing membranes at roof slopes greater than 3 inches in 12 inches.
2A minimum of 50 percent of the required aggregate shall be embedded in the pour coat. 0
0
0
m
....
im
c
3
0
z
TABLE NO. 32-G-APPLICATION OF CEMENTING MATERIALS
MAXIMUM SLOPE, INCHES PER 121NCHES
ASPHALT TYPE
COAL·TAR PITCH
APPLICATION TYPE I TYPE II TYPE Ill TYPE IV
Insulation to deck - - All All -

Felt or vapor retarder to deck - 1/z or less 3 or less All 112 or less
Felt to felt - 1/z or less 112-3 All 112 or less
Cap sheet to felt - - 3 or less All -

Gravel to felts 1/z or less 12 or less
1 1/z-3 N.P. 'lz or less
Heating of Cementing Mat' I. , ' 0 F.
Temperature at kettle 2 (maximum) 475 525 525 525 425
Application temperature, J 0 F. 375-425 375-425 375-425 400-450 350-400
N.P. = Not permitted
1Bulk tanker temperatures shall be reduced to 320-350°F. at night or during periods when no roofing will occur.
2Cementing material shall not be heated above a temperature which is 25°F. below its flash point.
JAsphalt which is identified with the equiviscous temperature (EVT) shall be applied at the EVT ± 25°F.
Chapter33
EXITS
General
Sec. 3301. (a) General. Every building or portion thereof shall be provided
with exits as required by this chapter.
follows:
BALCONY, EXTERIOR EXIT, is a landing or porch projecting from the
wall of a building, and which serves as a required exit. The long side shall be at
least 50 percent open, and the open area above the guardrail shall be so distributed
as to prevent the accumulation of smoke or toxic gases.
CONTINENTAL SEATING is the configuration of fixed seating where the
number of seats per row exceeds 14 and required exits from the seating area are
side exits.
EXIT is a continuous and unobstructed means of egress to a public way and
shall include intervening aisles, doors, doorways, corridors, exterior exit balco-
nies, ramps, stairways, smokeproof enclosures, horizontal exits, exit passage-
ways, exit courts and yards.
EXIT COURT is a yard or court providing access to a public way for one or
more required exits.
EXIT PASSAGEWAY is an enclosed exit connecting a required exit or exit
court with a public way.
HORIZONTAL EXIT is an exit from one building into another building on
approximately the same level, or through or around a wall constructed as required
for a two-hour occupancy separation and which completely divides a floor into
two or more separate areas so as to establish an area of refuge affording safety
from fire or smoke coming from the area from which escape is made.
PANIC HARDWARE is a door-latching assembly incorporating an unlatching
device, the activating portion of which extends across at least one half the width of
the door leaf on which it is installed.
PRIVATE STAIRWAY is a stairway serving one tenant only.
PUBLIC WAY is any street, alley or similar parcel of land essentially unob-
structed from the ground to the sky which is deeded, dedicated or otherwise
permanently appropriated to the public for public use and having a clear width of
not less than 10 feet.
SPIRAL STAIRWAY is a stairway having a closed circular form in its plan
view with uniform section shaped treads attached to and radiating about a mini-
mum diameter supporting column. The effective tread is delineated by the nosing
radius line, the exterior arc (center line of railing) and the overlap radius line
(nosing radius line of tread above). Effective tread dimensions are taken along a
line perpendicular to the center line of the tread.
(c) Exit Obstruction. Obstructions shall not be placed in the required width of
an exit except projections permitted by this chapter.
634
1988 EDITION 3301-3302
(d) Changes in Elevation. Within a building, changes in elevation of less than

12 inches along any exit serving an occupant load of I 0 or more shall be by ramps.
EXCEPTION: Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and along aisles adjoining
seating areas.
(c) Building Accessibility. Portions of buildings shall be 'accessible to the
physically handicapped as required by Table No. 33-A, and at least one primary
entrance to a building which is required to be accessible shall be usable by the
physically handicapped and be on a level that would provide accessibility to the
elevators where provided.
Occupant Load
Sec. 3302. (a) Determination of Occupant Load. In determining the occu-
pant load, all portions of a building shall be presumed to be occupied at the same
time.
EXCEPTION: Accessory use areas which ordinarily are used only by persons
who occupy the main areas of an occupancy shall be provided with exits as though
they are completely occupied, but their occupant load need not be included in
computing the total occupant load of the building.
The occupant load for a building shall be determined in accordance with the
following:
I. General. For areas without fixed scats, the occupant load shall be not less
than the number determined by dividing the floor area assigned to that usc by the
occupant load factor set forth in Table No. 33-A. Where an intended usc is not
listed in Table No. 33-A the building official shall establish an occupant load
factor based on a listed usc which most nearly resembles the intended use.
For a building or portion thereof which has more than one usc, the occupant
load shall be determined by the usc which gives the largest number of persons.
The occupant load for buildings or areas containing two or more occupancies
shall be determined by adding the occupant loads of the various usc areas as
computed in accordance with the applicable provisions of this section.
2. Fixed seating. For areas having fixed scat and aisles, the occupant load shall
be determined by the number of fixed seats installed therein. The required width
of aisles serving fixed scats shall not be used for any other purpose.
For areas having fixed benches or pews, the occupant load shall be not less than
the number of scats based on one person for each 18 inches of length of pew or
bench.
Where booths arc used in dining areas, the occupant load shall be based on one
person for each 24 inc he; of booth length or major portion thereof.
3. Reviewing stands, grandstands and bleachers. The occupant load for
reviewing stands, grandstands and bleachers shall be calculated in accordance
with this section and the specific requirements contained in Sections 3323 and
3324.
(b) Maximum Occupant Load. The maximum occupant load for other than an
assembly usc shall not exceed the capacity of exits as determined in accordance
with this chapter.
635
The maximum occupant load for an assembly usc shall not exceed the occupant
load as determined in accordance with Section 3302 (a).
EXCEPTION: The occupant load for an assembly building or portion thereof
may be increased, when approved by the building official, if all the requirements of
this code are met for such increased number of persons. The building official may
require an approved aisle, seating or fixed equipment diagram to substantiate such an
increase, and may require that such diagram be posted.
(c) Posting of Room Capacity. Any room having an occupant load of 50 or
more where fixed seats are not installed, and which is used for classroom,
assembly or similar purpose, shall have the capacity of the room posted in a
conspicuous place on an approved sign ncar the main exit from the room. Such
signs shall be maintained legible by the owner or his authorized agent and shall
indicate the number of occupants permitted for each room usc.
(d) Revised Occupant Load. After a building is occupied, any change in use or
increase in occupant load shall comply with this chapter. See Section 502.
Exits Required
Sec. 3303. (a) Number of Exits. Every building or usable portion thereof shall
have at least one exit, not less than two exits where required by Table No. 33-A and
additional exits as required by this subsection.
For purposes of this section, basements and occupied roofs shall be provided
with exits as required for stories.
EXCEPTIONS: Occupied roofs on Group R, Division 3 Occupancies may have
one exit if such occupied areas are less than 500 square feet and are located no higher
than immediately above the second story.
Floors complying with the provisions for mezzanines as specified in Section
1716 shall be provided with exits as specified therein.
The second story shall be provided with not less than two exits when the
occupant load is ten or more. Occupants on floors above the second story and in
basements shall have access to not less than two separate exits from the floor or
basement.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Two or more dwelling units on the second story or in a
basement may have access to only one common exit when the total occupant load
served by that exit does not exceed ten.
2. Except as provided in Table No. 33-A, only one exit need be provided from the
second floor or a basement within an individual dwelling unit. Refer to Section 1204
for emergency escape or rescue requirements from sleeping rooms.
3. When the third floor within an individual dwelling unit does not exceed 500
square feet, only one exit need be provided from that floor.
4. Floors and basements used exclusively for service of the building may have
one exit. Forthe purposes of this exception, storage rooms, laundry rooms, mainte-
nance offices and similar uses shall not be considered as providing service to the
building.
5. Storage rooms, laundry rooms and maintenance offices not exceeding 300
square feet in floor area may be provided with only one exit.
For special requirements see the following sections: Group A, Sections 3317
636
1988 EDITION 3303
and 3318; GroupE, Section 3319; Group H, Section 3320; Group I, Section 3321;
Rooms Containing Fuel-fired Equipment and Cellulose Nitrate Handling Rooms,
Section 3322; Reviewing Stands, Grandstands and Bleachers, Sections 3323 and
3324; Laboratories, Sections 702 (b) and 802 (d); and Open Parking Garages,
Section 709 (g). For stage exits, see Section 3903 (f).
Every story or portion thereof having an occupant load of 501 to 1000 shall
have not less than three exits.
Every story or portion thereof having an occupant load of 100 I or more shall
have not less than four exits.
The number of exits required from any story of a building shall be determined
by using the occupant load of that story plus the percentages of the occupant loads
of floors which exit into the level under consideration as follows: i
1. Fifty percent of the occupant load in the first adjacent story above and the
first adjacent story below, when a story below exits through the level under
consideration.
2. Twenty-five percent of the occupant load in the story immediately beyond
the first adjacent story.
The maximum number of exits required for any story shall be maintained until
egress is provided from the structure. (See Section 3311.)
(b) Width. The total width of exits in feet shall be not less than the total
occupant load served divided by 50. Such width of exits shall be divided approxi-
mately equally among the separate exits. The total exit width required from any
story of a building shall be determined by using the occupant load of that story
plus the percentages of the occupant loads of floors which exit through the level
under consideration as follows:
I. Fifty percent of the occupant load in the first adjacent story above and the
first adjacent story below, when a story below exits through the level under
consideration.
2. Twenty-five percent of the occupant load in the story immediately beyond
the first adjacent story.
The maximum exit width required from any story of a building shall be
maintained.
(c) Arrangement of Exits. If only two exits are required, they shall be placed a
distance apart equal to not less than one half of the length of the maximum overall
diagonal dimension of the building or area to be served measured in a straight line
between exits.
EXCEPTION: When exit enclosures are provided as a portion of the required
exit and are interconnected by a corridor conforming to the requirements of Section
3305 (g), exit separations may be measured along a direct line of travel within the
exit corridor. Enclosure walls shall be not Jess than 30 feet apart at any point in a
direct line of measurement.
Where three or more exits are required, at least two exits shall be placed a
distance apart equal to not less than one half of the length of the maximum overall
diagonal dimension of the building or area to be served measured in a straight line
637
i between the exits, and the additional exits shall be arranged a reasonable distance
apart so that if one becomes blocked the others will be available.
(d) Distance to Exits. The maximum distance of travel from any point to an
exterior exit door, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway in a
building not equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout shall not
exceed 150 feet, or 200 feet in a building equipped with an automatic sprinkler
system throughout. These distances may be increased 100 feet when the last 150
feet is within a corridor, complying with Section 3305. See Section 3319 for
GroupE Occupancy and Section 3320 for Group H Occupancy travel distances.
In a one-story Group B, Division 4 Occupancy classified as a factory or
warehouse and in one-story airplane hangars, the exit travel distance may be
increased to 400 feet if the building is equipped with an automatic sprinkler
system throughout and provided with smoke and heat ventilation as specified in
Section 3206.
In an open parking garage as defined in Section 709, the exit travel distance
may be increased to 250 feet which may be measured to open stairways which are
permitted in accordance with Section 3309 (a).
(e) Exits Through Adjoining Rooms. Rooms may have one exit through an
adjoining or intervening room which provides a direct, obvious and unobstructed
means of travel to an exit corridor, exit enclosure or until egress is provided from
the building, provided the total distance of travel does not exceed that permitted
by other provisions of this code. In other than dwelling units, exits shall not pass
through kitchens, store rooms, rest rooms, closets or spaces used for similar
purposes.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Rooms within dwelling units may exit through more than
one intervening room.
2. Rooms with a cumulative occupant load of 10 or less may exit through more
than one intervening room.
Foyers, lobbies and reception rooms constructed as required for corridors shall
not be construed as intervening rooms.
Doors
Sec. 3304. (a) General. This section shall apply to every exit door serving an
area having an occupant load of I 0 or more, or serving hazardous rooms or areas,
except that Subsections (c), (i), U) and (k) shall apply to all exit doors regardless of
occupant load. Buildings or structures used for human occupancy shall have at
least one exterior exit door that meets the requirements of Subsection (f).
(b) Swing and Opening Force. Exit doors shall be of the pivoted or side-
hinged swinging type. Exit doors shall swing in the direction of exit travel when
serving any hazardous area or when serving an occupant load of 50 or more. The
door latch shall release when subjected to a 15-pound force, and the door shall be
set in motion when subjected to a 30-pound force. The door shall swing to full-
open position when subjected to 15-pound force. Forces shall be applied to the
latch side. See Section 4507 for doors swinging over public property.
638
1988 EDITION 3304
EXCEPTIONS: I. Group I, Division 3 Occupancy used as a place of detention. :!!i!

2. Doors within or serving an individual dwelling unit. '\\
3. Special door conforming with Subsection (h). ;~
Double-acting doors shall not be used as exits when any of the following
conditions exist:
I. The occupant load served by the door is 100 or more.
2. The door is part of a fire assembly.
3. The door is part of a smoke- and draft-control assembly.
4. Panic hardware is required or provided on the door.
A double-acting door shall be provided with a view panel of not less than 200
square inches.
(c) Type of Lock or Latch. Exit doors shall be openable from the inside
without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group B Occupancies, key-locking hardware may be
used on the main exit when the main exit consists of a single door or pair of doors if
there is a readily visible, durable sign on or adjacent to the door stating THIS DOOR
TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS. The sign shall be in
letters not less than I inch high on a contrasting background. When unlocked, the
single door or both leaves of a pair of doors must be free to swing without operation
of any latching device. The use of this exception may be revoked by the building
official for due cause.
2. Exit doors from individual dwelling units and guest rooms of Group R Occu-
pancies having an occupant load of 10 or less may be provided with a night latch,
dead bolt or security chain, provided such devices are openable from the inside
without the use of a key or tool and mounted at a height not to exceed 48 inches above
the finished floor.
Manually operated edge- or surface-mounted flush bolts and surface bolts are
prohibited. When exit doors are used in pairs and approved automatic flush bolts
are used, the door leaf having the automatic flush bolts shall have no door knob or
surface-mounted hardware. The unlatching of any leaf shall not require more than
one operation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Group R, Division 3 Occupancies.
2. When a pair of doors serving a room not normally occupied are needed for the
movement of equipment, manually operated edge or surface bolts may be used and a
door closer need not be provided on the inactive leaf.
(d) Panic Hardware. Panic hardware, when installed, shall comply with the
requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 33-4. The activating member shall be
mounted at a height of not less than 30 inches nor more than 44 inches above the
floor. The unlatching force shall not exceed 15 pounds when applied in the
direction of exit travel.
When balanced doors are used and panic hardware is required, panic hardware
shall be of the push-pad type and the pad shall not extend across more than one half
of the width of the door measured from the latch side.
(e) Special Egress-control Devices. When approved by the building official,
exit doors in Group B, Division 2 Occupancies may be equipped with approved
639
listed special egress-control devices of the time-delay type, provided the building
is protected throughout by an approved automatic sprinkler system and an ap-
proved automatic smoke-detection system. Such devices shall conform to all of
the following:
I. Automatically deactivate the egress-control device upon activation of either
the sprinkler system or the detection system.
2. Automatically deactivate the egress-control device upon loss of electrical
power to any one of the following:
A. The egress-control device.
B. The smoke-detection system.
C. Exit illumination as required by Section 3313.
3. Be capable of being deactivated by a signal from a switch located in an
approved location.
4. Initiate an irreversible process which will deactivate the egress-control
device whenever a manual force of not more than 15 pounds is applied for
two seconds to the panic bar or other door-latching hardware. The egress-
control device shall deactivate within an approved time period not to exceed
a total of 15 seconds. The time-delay established for each egress-control
device shall not be field adjustable.
5. Actuation of the panic bar or other door-latching hardware shall activate an
audible signal at the door.
6. The unlatching shall not require more than one operation.
A sign shall be provided on the door located above and within 12 inches of the
panic bar or other door-latching hardware reading:
KEEP PUSHING. THIS DOOR WILL OPEN IN _ _ _ __
SECONDS. ALARM WILL SOUND.
Sign Jetter shall be at least I inch in height and shall have a stroke of not less
than lfs inch.
Regardless of the means of deactivation, relocking of the egress-control device
shall be by manual means only at the door.
(f) Width and Height. Every required exit doorway shall be of a size as to
permit the installation of a door not less than 3 feet in width and not less than 6 feet
8 inches in height. When installed, exit doors shall be capable of opening so that
the clear width of the exit is not less than 32 inches. In computing the exit width
required by Section 3303 (b), the net dimension of the exitway shall be used.
(g) Door Leaf Width. A single leaf of an exit door shall not exceed 4 feet in
width.
(h) Special Doors. Revolving, sliding and overhead doors shall not be used as
required exits.
Power-operated doors complying with U .B.C. Standard No. 33-1 may be used
for exit purposes. Such doors when swinging shall have two guide rails installed
on the swing side projecting out from the face of the door jambs for a distance not
less than the widest door leaf. Guide rails shall be not Jess than 30 inches in height
640
1988 EDITION 3304
with solid or mesh panels to prevent penetration into door swing and shall be
capable of resisting a horizontal load at top of rail of not less than 50 pounds per
lineal foot.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Walls or other type separators may be used in lieu of the
above guide rail. provided all the criteria are met.
2. Guide rails in industrial or commercial occupancies not accessible to the
public may conform with Exception 4 to the provision of Section 1711.
3. Doors swinging toward flow of traffic shall not be permitted for use by
untrained pedestrian traffic unless actuating devices start to function at least 8 feet II
inches beyond door in open position and guide rails extend 6 feet 5 inches beyond
door in open position.
Clearances for guide rails shall be as follows:
I. Six inches maximum between rails and leading edge of door at the closest
point in its arc of travel.
2. Six inches maximum between rails and the door in open position.
3. Two inches minimum between rail at hinge side and door in open position.
4. Two inches maximum between freestanding rails and jamb or other adjacent
surface.
(i) Floor Level at Doors. Regardless of the occupant load, there shall be a floor
or landing on each side of a door. When access for the physically handicapped is
required by Section 3301 (e), the floor or landing shall be not more than lfz inch
lower than the threshold of the doorway. When such access is not required, such
dimension shall not exceed I inch. Landings shall be level except for exterior ·~
landings. which may have a slope not to exceed l/4 inch per foot. -~
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Groups R, Division 3, and M Occupancies and within
individual units of Group R, Division I Occupancies:
A. A door may open at the top step of an interior flight of stairs, provided the :~~
door does not swing over the top step.
B. A door may open at a landing that is not more than 71/2 inches lower than the
floor level, provided the door docs not swing over the landing.
C. Screen doors and storm doors may swing over stairs, 'teps or landings.
2. Doors serving building equipment rooms which are not normally occupied.
(j) Landings at Doors. Landings shall have a width not less than the width of
the stairway or the width of the door, whichever is the greater. Doors in the fully
open position shall not reduce a required dimension by more than 7 inches. When
a landing serves an occupant load of 50 or more, doors in any position shall not
reduce the landing dimension to less than one half its required width. Landings
shall have a length measured in the direction of travel of not less than 44 inches.
EXCEPTION: In Groups R, Division 3, and M Occupancies and within individ-
ual units of Group R. Division I Occupancies, such length need not exceed 36
inches.
A landing which has no adjoining door shall comply with Section 3306 (g).
(k) Door Identification. Glass doors shall conform to the requirements speci-
fied in Section 5406.
641
Exit doors shall be so marked that they are readily distinguishable from the
adjacent construction.
(I) Additional Doors. When additional doors are provided for egress purposes,
they shall conform to all provisions of this chapter.
EXCEPTION: Approved revolving doors having leaves which will collapse
under opposing pressures may be used in exit situations, provided:
I. Such doors have a minimum width of 6 feet 6 inches.
2. At least one conforming exit door is located adjacent to each revolving door.
3. The revolving door shall not be considered to provide any exit width.
Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies

Sec. 3305. (a) General. This section shall apply to every corridor serving as a
required exit for an occupant load of 10 or more except that Subsection (b) shall
apply to all corridors. For the purposes of the section, the term "corridor" shall
include "exterior exit balconies" and any covered or enclosed exit passageway,
including walkways, tunnels and malls. Partitions, rails, counters and similar
space dividers not over 5 feet 9 inches in height above the floor shall not be
construed to form corridors.
Exit corridors shall not be interrupted by intervening rooms.
EXCEPTION: Foyers, lobbies or reception rooms constructed as required for
corridors shall not be construed as intervening rooms.
For Group I Occupancies see Section 3321 (c).
(b) Width. Every corridor serving an occupant load of I 0 or more shall be not
less than 44 inches in width. Corridors serving an occupant load of less than I 0
shall not be less than 36 inches in width. For special requirements for Groups E
and I Occupancies, see Sections 3319 and 3321.
(c) Height. Corridors and exterior exit balconies shall have a clear height of not
less than 7 feet measured to the lowest projection from the ceiling.
(d) Projections. The required width of corridors shall be unobstructed.
EXCEPTION: Handrails and doors, when fully opened, shall not reduce the
required width by more than 7 inches. Doors in any position shall not reduce the
required width by more than one half. Other nonstructural projections such as trim
and similar decorative features may project into the required width 11/2 inches on
each side.
(e) Access to Exits. When more than one exit is required, they shall be so
arranged that it is possible to go in either direction from any point in a corridor to a
separate exit, except for dead ends not exceeding 20 feet in length.
(f) Changes in Elevation. When a corridor or exterior exit balcony is accessi-
ble to the handicapped, changes in elevation of the floors hall be made by means of
a ramp, except as provided for doors by Section 3304 (i).
(g) Construction. Walls of corridors serving a Group R, Division I or Group I
Occupancy having an occupant load of I 0 or more and walls of corridors serving
other occupancies having an occupant load of 30 or more shall be of not less than
642
1988 EDITION 3305
one-hour fire-resistive construction and the ceilings shall be not less than that
required for a one-hour fire-resistive floor or roof system.
EXCEPTIONS: I. One-story buildings housing Group B, Division 4 Occupan-
cies.
2. Corridors more than 30 feet in width where occupancies served by such
corridors have at least one exit independent from the corridor. (See Chapter 56 for
covered malls.)
3. Exterior sides of exterior exit balconies.
4. In Group I, Division 3 Occupancies such as jails, prisons, reformatories and
similar buildings with open-barred cells forming corridor walls, the corridors and
cell doors need not be fire resistive.
5. Corridor walls and ceilings need not be of fire-resistive construction within
office spaces having an occupant load of I 00 or less when the entire story in which
the space is located is equipped with an automatic sprinkler system throughout and
smoke detectors are installed within the corridor in accordance with their listing.
6. In other than Type I or II construction, exterior exit balcony roof assemblies
may be of heavy timber construction without concealed spaces.
When the ceiling of the entire story is an element of a one-hour fire-resistive
floor or roof system, the corridor walls may terminate at the ceiling. When the
room-side fire-resistive membrane of the corridor wall is carried through to the
underside of a fire-resistive floor or roof above, the corridor side of the ceiling
may be protected by the use of ceiling materials as required for one-hour floor or
roof system construction or the corridor ceiling may be of the same construction
• as the corridor walls.
Ceilings of noncombustible construction may be suspended below the fire-
resistive ceiling.
For wall and ceiling finish requirements, see Table No. 42-B.
(h) Openings. I. Doors. When corridor walls are required to be of one-hour
fire-resistive construction by Section 3305 (g), every door opening shall be
protected by a tight-fitting smoke- and draft-control assembly having a fire-
protection rating of not less than 20 minutes when tested in accordance with
U .B.C. Standard No. 43-2. Said doors shall not have louvers. The door and frame i
shall bear an approved label or other identification showing the rating thereof, the
name of the manufacturer and the identification of the service conducting the
inspection of materials and workmanship at the factory during fabrication and
assembly. Doors shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic-closing by
actuation of a smoke detector in accordance with Section 4306 (b). Smoke- and
draft-control door assemblies shall be provided with a gasket so installed as to
provide a seal where the door meets the stop on both sides and across the top.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Viewports may be installed if they require a hole not larger
than I inch in diameter through the door, have at least a 1/4-inch-thick glass disc and
the holder is of metal which will not melt out when subject to temperatures of 1700°F.
' 2. Protection of openings in the interior walls of exterior exit balconies is not
required.
In fully sprinklered office buildings, corridors may lead through enclosed ~.
elevator lobbies if all areas of the building have access to at least one required exit ~·
without passing through the elevator lobby. ~
643
2. Openings other than doors. Where corridor walls are required to be of

one-hour fire-resistive construction by Section 3305 (g), interior openings for
other than doors or ducts shall be protected by fixed, approved 1/4-inch-thick
wired glass installed in steel frames. The total area of all openings, other than
doors, in any portion of an interior corridor shall not exceed 25 percent of the area
of the corridor wall of the room which it is separating from the corridor. For duct
openings, see Section 4306.
EXCEPTION: Protection of openings in the interior walls of exterior exit bal-
conies is not required.
~ (i) Location on Property. Exterior exit balconies shall not be located in areas
r.~ :;.·;,:. dwhere o pen~ngs archnot permitted or where openings are required to be protected
uc to 1ocatwn on t e property.
Stairways
Sec. 3306. (a) General. Every stairway having two or more risers serving any
building or portion thereof shall conform to the requirements of this section.
EXCEPTION: Stairs or ladders used only to attend equipment are exempt from
the requirements of this section.
(b) Width. Stairways serving an occupant load of 50 or more shall be not less
than 44 inches in width. Stairways serving an occupant load of 49 or less shall be
not less than 36 inches in width.
Handrails may project into the required width a distance of 3 l/2 inches from
each side of a stairway. Stringers and other projections such as trim and similar
decorative features may project into the required width !l/2 inches on each side.
(c) Rise and Run. The rise of every step in a stairway shall be not less than 4
inches nor greater than 7 inches. Except as permitted in Subsections (d) and (f),
the run shall be not less than II inches as measured horizontally between the
vertical planes of the furthermost projection of adjacent treads. Except as permit-
ted in Subsections (d), (c) and (f), the largest tread run within any flight of stairs
shall not exceed the smallest by more than 3/g inch. The greatest riser height within
any flight of stairs shall not exceed the smallest by more than 3fs inch.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Private stairways serving an occupant load of less than 10
and stairways to unoccupied roofs may be constructed with an 8-inch maximum rise
and 9-inch minimum run.
2. Where the bottom or top riser adjoins a sloping public way, walk or driveway
having an established grade and serving as a landing, the bottom or top riser may be
reduced along the slope to less than 4 inches in height with the variation in height of
the bottom or top riser not to exceed 3 inches in every 3 feet of stairway width.
(d) Winding Stairways. In Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and in private
stairways in Group R, Division 1 Occupancies, winders may be used if the
required width of run is provided at a point not more than 12 inches from the side
of the stairway where the treads are the narrower, but in no case shall any width of
run be less than 6 inches at any point.
(c) Circular Stairways. Circular stairways may be used as an exit, provided
the minimum width of run is not less than I 0 inches and the smaller radius is not
644
1988 EDITION 3306
less than twice the width of the stairway. The largest tread width or riser height
within any flight of stairs shall not exceed the smallest by more than 3fs inch.
(f) Spiral Stairways. In Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and in private
stairways within individual units of Group R, Division I Occupancies, spiral
stairways may be installed. Such stairways may be used for required exits when
the area served is limited to 400 square feet.
The tread must provide a clear walking area measuring at least 26 inches from
the outer edge of the supporting column to the inner edge of the handrail. A run of
at least 7112 inches is to be provided at a point 12 inches from where the tread is the
narrowest. The rise must be sufficient to provide 6-foot 6-inch headroom. The
rise shall not exceed 9112 inches.
(g) Landings. Every landing shall have a dimension measured in the direction
of travel not less than the width of the stairway. Such dimension need not exceed [ii
44 inches when the stair has a straight run. For landings with adjoining doors. sec
Section 3304 U).
EXCEPTION: Stairs serving an unoccupied roof arc exempt from these provi-
sions.
(h) Basement Stairways. When a basement stairway and a stairway to an upper
story terminate in the same exit enclosure, an approved barrier shall be provided
to prevent persons from continuing on into the basement. Directional exit signs
shall be provided as specified in Section 3314.
(i) Distance Between Landings. There shall be not more than 12 feet vertically
between landings.
(j) Handrails. Stairways shall have handrails on each side, and every stairway
required to be more than 88 inches in width shall be provided with not less than
one intermediate handrail for each 88 inches of required width. Intermediate
handrails shall be spaced approximately equally across with the entire width of the
stairway.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Stairways less than 44 inches in width or stairways serving ~.: ~.';.~
one individual dwelling unit in Group R, Division I or 3 Occupancies may have one
handrail.
2. Private stairways 30 inches or less in height may have handrails on one side
only.
3. Stairways having less than four risers and serving one individual dwelling unit
in Group R, Division I or 3, or serving Group M Occupancies need not have
handrails.
The top of handrails shall be placed not Jess than 34 inches nor more than 38
inches above the nosing of treads. They shall be continuous the full length of the
stairs and except for private stairways at least one handrail shall extend not Jess
than 6 inches beyond the top and bottom risers. Ends shall be returned or shall
terminate in newel posts or safety terminals.
The handgrip portion of handrails shall be not less than I l/2 inches nor more it
than 2 inches in cross-sectional dimension or the shape shall provide an equivalent
gripping surface. The hand grip portion of handrails shall have a smooth surface
with no sharp corners.
645
Handrails projecting from a wall shall have a space of not less than 1112 inches
between the wall and the handrail.
(k) Guardrails. Stairways open on one or both sides shall have guardrails as
required by Section 1711.
(I) Exterior Stairway Protection. Except in Group R, Division 3 Occupan-
cies, all openings in the exterior wall below and within 10 feet, measured
horizontally, of an exterior exit stairway serving a building over two stories in
height or a floor level having such openings in two or more floors below shall be
protected by self-closing fire assembly having a three-fourths-hour fire-
protection rating. Exterior stairways enclosed on three or more sides shall comply
with the flame-spread requirements for interior stairways.
EXCEPTION: Openings may be unprotected when two separated exterior stair-
ways serve an exterior exit balcony.
(m) Interior Stairway Construction. Interior stairways shall be constructed
as specified in Part IV of this code.
Except when enclosed usable space under stairs is prohibited by Section 3309
(f), the walls and soffits of the enclosed space shall be protected on the enclosed
side as required for one-hour fire-resistive construction.
All required interior stairways which extend to the top floor in any building four
or more stories in height shall have, at the highest point of the stair shaft, an
approved hatch openable to the exterior not less than 16 square feet in area with a
minimum dimension of 2 feet.
EXCEPTION: The hatch need not be provided on smokeproof enclosures or on
stairways that extend to the roof with an opening onto that roof.
I
(n) Exterior Stairway Construction. Exterior stairways shall be constructed
as specified in Part IV of this code.
Exterior stairways shall not project into yards where openings are not permitted
or protection of openings is required.
Enclosed usable space under stairs shall have the walls and soffits protected on
the enclosed side as required for one-hour fire-resistive construction.
(o) Stairway to Roof. In every building four or more stories in height, one
stairway shall extend to the roof surface, unless the roof has a slope greater than 4
in 12. See Subsection 3306 (m) for roof hatch requirements.
(p) Headroom. Every stairway shall have a headroom clearance of not less
than 6 feet 8 inches. Such clearances shall be measured vertically from a plane
parallel and tangent to the stairway tread nosings to the soffit above at all points.
I~ (q) Stairway Identification. Approved stairway identification signs shall be
p·. located at each floor level in all enclosed stairways in buildings four or more
I stories in height. The sign shall identify the stairway, indicate whether there is roof
F access, the floor level, and the upper and lower terminus of the stairway. The sign
I shall be located approximately 5 feet above the floor landing in a position which is
F
readily visible when the door is in the open or closed position. Signs shall comply
I with requirements ofU.B.C. Standard No. 33-2.
F
646
1988 EDITION 3307-3308
Ramps
Sec. 3307. (a) General. Ramps used as exits shall conform to the provisions of
this section.
(b) Width. The width of ramps shall be as required for stairways.
(c) Slope. The slope of ramps required by Table No. 33-A shall be not steeper
than I vertical to 12 horizontal. The slope of other ramps shall not be steeper than
I vertical to 8 horizontal.
When provided with fixed seating, the main floor of the assembly room of a
Group A, Division 1, 2, 2.1 or 3 Occupancy may have a slope not steeper than 1
vertical to 5 horizontal.
(d) Landings. Ramps having slopes steeper than I vertical to 15 horizontal
shall have landings at the top and bottom, and at least one intermediate landing
shall be provided for each 5 feet of rise. Top landings and intermediate landings
shall have a dimension measured in the direction of ramp run of not less than 5
feet. Landings at the bottom of ramps shall have a dimension in the direction of
ramp run of not less than 6 feet.
Doors in any position shall not reduce the minimum dimension of the landing to
less than 42 inches and shall not reduce the required width by more than 3 112
inches when fully open.
When ramp access is provided in accordance with Table No. 33-A and a door
swings over a landing, the landing shall extend at least 24 inches beyond the latch
edge of the door, measured parallel to the door in the closed position, and shall
have a length parallel to the direction of travel through the doorway of not less than
5 feet.
(e) Handrails. Ramps having slopes steeper than 1 vertical to 15 horizontal
shall have handrails as required for stairways, except that intermediate handrails
shall not be required. Ramped aisles need not have handrails on sides serving
fixed seating.
(f) Construction. Ramps shall be constructed as required for stairways.
(g) Surface. The surface of ramps shall be roughened or shall be of slip-
resistant materials.
(h) Guardrails. See Section 1711 .
Horizontal Exit
Sec. 3308. (a) Used as a Required Exit. A horizontal exit may be considered
as a required exit when conforming to the provisions of this chapter. A horizontal
exit shall not serve as the only exit from a portion of a building, and when two or
more exits are required, not more than one half of the total number of exits or total
exit width may be horizontal exits.
(b) Openings. All openings in the two-hour fire-resistive wall which provide a
horizontal exit shall be protected by a fire assembly having a fire-protection rating
of not less than one and one-half hours.
(c) Discharge Areas. A horizontal exit shall lead into a floor area having
capacity for an occupant load not less than the occupant load served by such exit.
647
The capacity shall be determined by allowing 3 square feet of net clear floor area
for each occupant to be accommodated therein, not including areas of stairs,
elevators and other shafts or courts. In Group I, Division 1 Occupancies the
capacity shall be determined by allowing 15 square feet of net clear floor area per
ambulatory occupant and 30 square feet per nonambulatory occupant. The area
into which a horizontal exit leads shall be provided with exits adequate to meet the
requirements of this chapter but need not include the added capacity imposed by
persons entering it through horizontal exits.
Stairway, Ramp and Escalator Enclosures

Sec. 3309. (a) General. Every interior stairway, ramp or escalator shall be
enclosed as specified in this section.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In other than Groups Hand I Occupancies, an enclosure need
not be provided for a stairway, ramp or escalator serving only one adjacent floor and
not connected with corridors or stairways serving other floors. For enclosure of
escalators serving Group B Occupancies, see Chapter I 7.
2. Stairs in Group R, Division 3 Occupancies and stairs within individual dwell-
ing units in Group R, Division I Occupancies need not be enclosed.
3. Stairs in open parking garages, as defined in Section 709, need not be
enclosed.
(b) Enclosure Construction. Enclosure walls shall be of not less than two-
hour fire-resistive construction in buildings more than four stories in height or of
Types land II fire-resistive construction and shall be of not less than one-hour fire-
resistive construction elsewhere.
EXCEPTION: In sprinkler-protected parking garages restricted to the storage of
private pleasure-type motor vehicles, stairway enclosures may be enclosed with
glazing meeting the requirements of Section 4306 (g), (h) and (i).
(c) Openings into Enclosures. Openings into exit enclosures other than per-
mitted exterior openings shall be limited to those necessary for exiting from a
normally occupied space into the enclosure and exiting from the enclosure. Other
penetrations into and opening through exit enclosure are prohibited except for
ductwork and equipment necessary for independent stair pressurization, sprinkler
piping, standpipes and electrical conduit serving the stairway and terminating in a
listed box not exceeding 16 square inches in area. Penetrations and communicat-
ing openings between adjacent exit enclosures are not permitted regardless of
whether the opening is protected.
All exit doors in an exit enclosure shall be protected by a fire assembly having a
fire-protection rating of not less than one hour where one-hour shaft construction
is permitted and one and one-half hours where two-hour shaft construction is
required. Doors shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic closing by
actuation of a smoke detector as provided for in Section 4306 (b). The maximum
transmitted temperature end point shall not exceed 450°F. above ambient at the
end of 30 minutes of the fire exposure specified in U .B.C. Standard No. 43-2.
(d) Extent of Enclosure. Stairway and ramp enclosures shall include landings
and parts of floors connecting stairway flights and shall also include a corridor on
the ground floor leading from the stairway to the exterior of the building.
648
1988 EDITION 3309-3310
Enclosed corridors or passageways are not required from unenclosed stairways.

Every opening into the corridor shall comply with the requirements of Section
3309 (c).
EXCEPTION: In office buildings classed as a Group B, Division 2 Occupancy,
a maximum of 50 percent of the exits may discharge through a street-floor lobby,
provided the required exit width is free and unobstructed and the entire street floor is
protected with an automatic sprinkler system.
(e) Barrier. A stairway in an exit enclosure shall not continue below the grade
level exit unless an approved barrier is provided at the ground-floor level to
prevent persons from accidentally continuing into the basement.
(f) Use of Space Under Stair and Ramp. There shall be no enclosed usable
space under stairways or ramps in an exit enclosure, nor shall the open space under
such stairways be used for any purpose.
Smokeproof Enclosures
Sec. 3310. (a) General. A smokeproof enclosure shall consist of a vestibule
and continuous stairway enclosed from the highest point to the lowest point by
walls of two-hour fire-resistive construction. There shall be no openings into the
stairway portion of the smokeproof enclosure other than those permitted by the !I\
first paragraph of Section 3309 (c). The supporting frame shall be protected as set t
forth in Table No. 17-A.
In buildings with air-conditioning systems or pressure air supply serving more
than one story, an approved smoke detector shall be placed in the return-air duct or
plenum prior to exhausting from the building or being diluted by outside air. Upon
activation, the detector shall cause the return air to exhaust completely from the
building without any recirculation through the building. Such devices may be
installed in each room or space served by a return-air duct.
(b) When Required. In a building having a floor used for human occupancy
which is located more than 75 feet above the lowest level of fire department
vehicle access, all of the required exits shall be smokeproof enclosures.
EXCEPTIONS: I. For buildings equipped with an automatic sprinkler system
throughout in accordance with Section 1807 (c), smoke-proof enclosures may be
omitted, provided all enclosed exit stairways are equipped with a barometric dam-
pered relief opening at the top and the stairway supplied mechanically with sufficient
air to discharge a minimum of 2500 cubic feet per minute through the relief opening
while maintaining a minimum positive pressure of 0.15-inch water column in the
shaft relative to atmospheric pressure with all doors closed. Activation of the
mechanical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 3310 (g) 6.
2. Enclosures need not be provided in open parking garages as defined in Section
li
709.
(c) Outlet. A smokeproof enclosure shall exit into a public way or into an exit
passageway leading to a public way. The exit passageway shall be without other
openings and shall have walls, floors and ceiling of two-hour fire-resistive
construction.
(d) Barrier. A stairway in a smokeproof enclosure shall not continue below the
649
grade level unless an approved barrier is provided at the ground level to prevent
persons from accidentally continuing into the basement.
(e) Access. Access to stairways in smokeproof enclosures shall be by way of a
vestibule or open exterior exit balcony construction of noncombustible materials.
(f) Smokeproof Enclosure by Natural Ventilation 1. Doors. When a vesti-

bule is provided, the door assembly into the vestibule shall have a one and one-
half-hour fire-protection rating, and the door assembly from the vestibule to the
stairs shall be a smoke- and draft-control assembly having not less than a 20-
minute fire-protection rating. Doors shall be maintained self-closing or shall be
automatic closing by actuation of a smoke detector.
When access to the stairway is by means of an open exterior exit balcony, the
door assembly to the stairway shall have a one and one-half-hour fire-protection
rating and shall be maintained self-closing or shall be automatic closing by
actuation of a smoke detector.
2. Open-air vestibule. The vestibule shall have a minimum dimension of 44
inches in width and 72 inches in direction of exit travel. The vestibule shall have a
minimum of 16 square feet of opening in a wall facing an exterior court, yard or
public way at least 20 feet in width.
(g) SmokeproofEnclosures by Mechanical Ventilation. 1. Doors. The door
assembly from the building into the vestibule shall have a one and one-half-hour
fire-protection rating, and the door assembly from the vestibule to the stairway
shall be a smoke- and draft-control assembly having not less than a 20-minute fire-
protection rating. The door to the stairways shall be provided with a drop sill or
other provision to minimize the air leakage. Doors shall be maintained self-
closing or shall be automatic-closing by activation of a smoke detector or in the
event of a power failure.
2. Vestibule size. Vestibules shall have a minimum dimension of 44 inches in
width and 72 inches in direction of exit travel.
3. Vestibule ventilation. The vestibule shall be provided with not less than
one air change per minute, and the exhaust shall be 150 percent of the supply.
Supply air shall enter and exhaust air shall discharge from the vestibule through
separate tightly constructed ducts used only for that purpose. Supply air shall
enter the vestibule within 6 inches of the floor level. The top of the exhaust
register shall be down from the top of the smoke trap and shall be entirely within
the smoke trap area. Doors, when in the open position, shall not obstruct duct
openings. Duct openings may be provided with controlling dampers if needed to
meet the design requirements but are not otherwise required.
4. Smoke trap. The vestibule ceiling shall be at least 20 inches higher than the
door opening into the vestibule to serve as a smoke and heat trap and to provide an
upward-moving air column. The height may be decreased when justified by
engineering design and field testing.
5. Stair shaft air movement system. The stair shaft shall be provided with a
dampered relief opening at the top and supplied mechanically with sufficient air to
discharge a minimum of 2500 cubic feet per minute through the relief opening
650
1988 EDITION 3310-3311
while maintaining a minimum positive pressure of 0.05 inch of water column in

the shaft relative to atmosphere with all doors closed and a minimum ofO.l 0-inch
water column difference between the stair shaft and the vestibule.
6. Operation of ventilating equipment. The activation of the ventilating
equipment shall be initiated by a smoke detector installed outside the vestibule
door in an approved location. The activation of the closing device on any door
shall activate the closing devices on all doors of the smokeproof enclosure at all
levels. When the closing device for the stair shaft and vestibule doors is activated
by a smoke detector or power failure, the mechanical equipment shall operate at
the levels specified in Items Nos. 3 and 5.
7. Standby power. Standby power for mechanical ventilation equipment shall
be provided by an approved self-contained generator set to operate whenever
there is a loss of power in the normal house current. The generator shall be in a
separate room having a minimum one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation
and shall have a minimum fuel supply adequate to operate the equipment for two
hours. See Section 1807 (i) for standby power requirements for high-rise Group
B, Division 2 offices and Group R, Division I Occupancies.
8. Acceptance testing. Before the mechanical equipment is accepted by the
building official, it shall be tested to confirm that the mechanical equipment is
operating in compliance with these requirements.
9. Emergency lighting. The stair shaft and vestibule shall be provided with
emergency lighting. A standby generator which is installed for the smokeproof
enclosure mechanical ventilation equipment may be used for such stair shaft and
vestibule power supply. See Section 1807 (i) for emergency lighting requirements
for high-rise Group B, Division 2 offices and Group R, Division I Occupancies.
Exit Courts
Sec. 3311. (a) General. Every exit court shall discharge into a public way or
exit passageway.
(b) Width. Exit court minimum widths shall be determined in accordance with
provisions of Section 3303 based on the occupant load and such required width
shall be unobstructed to a height of 7 feet, except for projections permitted in
corridors by Section 3305. The minimum exit court width shall be not less than 44
inches.
When the width is reduced from any cause, the reduction shall be affected
gradually by a guardrail at least 3 feet in height and making an angle of not more
than 30 degrees with the axis of the exit court.
(c) Number of Exits. Every exit court shall be provided with exits as deter-
mined by Section 3303.
(d) Construction and Openings. When an exit court serving a building or
portion thereof having an occupant load of 10 or more is less than 10 feet in width,
the exit court walls shall be a minimum of one-hour fire-resistive construction for
a distance of I 0 feet above the floor of the court, and all openings therein shall be
protected by fire assemblies having a fire-protection rating of not less than three-
fourths hour.
651
Exit Passageways
Sec. 3312. (a) Construction and Openings. The walls of exit passageways
shall be without openings other than required exits and shall have walls, floors and
ceilings of the same period of fire resistance as required for the walls, floors and
ceilings of the building served with a minimum of one-hour fire-resistive con-
struction. Exit openings through the enclosing walls of exit passageways shall be
protected by fire assemblies having a three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating.
(b) Detailed Requirements. Except for construction and opening protection as
specified in Subsection (a) above, exit passageways shall comply with the re-
quirements for corridors as specified in Section 3305.
Exit Illumination
!
Sec. 3313. (a) General. Except within individual dwelling units, guest rooms
and sleeping rooms, exits shall be illuminated at any time the building is occupied
with light having intensity of not less than I footcandle at floor level.
EXCEPTION: In auditoriums, theaters. concert or opera halls and similar as-
sembly uses, the illumination at floor level may be reduced during performances to
not less than 0.2 footcandle.
Fixtures required for exit illumination shall be supplied from separate sources
of power where required by Subsection (b).
(b) Separate sources of power. The power supply for exit illumination shall
normally be provided by the premises' wiring system. In the event of its failure,
illumination shall be automatically provided from an emergency system for
Group I, Division I Occupancies and for all other occupancies where the exiting
system serves an occupant load of 100 or more.
For high-rise buildings, see Section 1807. For smokeproof enclosures, see
Section 3310 (g) 9.
Emergency systems shall be supplied from storage batteries or an on-site
generator set and the system shall be installed in accordance with the requirements
of the Electrical Code.
Exit Signs
Sec. 3314. (a) Where Required. Exit signs shall be installed at required exit
doorways and where otherwise necessary to clearly indicate the direction of
egress when the exit serves an occupant load of 50 or more.
EXCEPTION: Main exterior exit doors which obviously and clearly are identi-
fiable as exits need not be signed when approved by the building official.
(b) Graphics. The color and design of lettering, arrows and other symbols on
exit signs shall be in high contrast with their background. Words on the sign shall
be in block letters 6 inches in height with a stroke of not less than 3/4 inch.
(c) Illumination. Signs shall be internally or externally illuminated by two
electric lamps or shall be of an approved self-luminous type. When the luminance
on the face of an exit sign is from an external source, it shall have an intensity of
not less than 5.0 footcandles from either lamp. Internally illuminated signs shall
provide equivalent luminance.
652
1988 EDITION 3314-3315
(d) Power Supply. Current supply to one of the lamps for exit signs shall be
provided by the premises' wiring system. Power to the other lamp shall be from
storage batteries or an on-site generator set and the system shall be installed in
accordance with the Electrical Code. For high-rise buildings, sec Section 1807.
Aisles
Sec. 3315. (a) General. Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from
all portions of buildings.
(b) Width. Aisle widths shall be provided in accordance with the following:
I. In areas serving employees only, the minimum aisle width may be 24 inches
but not less than the width required by the number of employees served.
2. In public areas of Group B, Division 2 Occupancies, and in assembly
occupancies without fixed seats, the minimum clear aisle width shall be 36
inches where tables, counters, furnishings, merchandise or other similar
obstructions are placed on one side of the aisle only and 44 inches when such
obstructions are placed on both sides of the aisle.
3. In assembly occupancies with fixed seats.
A. With standard seating, every aisle shall be not less than 3 feet when
serving seats on only one side and not less than 42 inches wide when
serving seats on both sides. Such minimum width shall be measured
from the point furthest from the exit, cross aisle or foyer and such
minimum width shall be increased by JI/2 inches for each 5 feet of
length toward the exit, cross aisle or foyer.
B. With continental seating as specified in Section 3316, side aisles shall
be provided and be not Jess than 44 inches in width.
(c) Distances to Nearest Exit. In areas occupied by seats and in Group A
Occupancies without seats, the line oftravel to an exit door by an aisle shall be not
more than 150 feet. Such travel distance may be increased to 200 feet if the
building is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system.
(d) Aisle Spacing. With standard seating, aisles shall be so located that there
will be not more than six intervening seats between any seat and the nearest aisle.
With continental seating, the number of intervening seats may be increased,
provided the seating configuration conforms with the requirements specified in
Section 3316.
When benches or pews are used, the number of seats shall be based on one
person for each 18 inches of length of pew or bench.
(e) Cross Aisles. Aisles shall terminate in a cross aisle, foyer or exit. The width
of the cross aisle shall be not less than the sum of the required width of the widest
aisle plus 50 percent of the total required width of the remaining aisles leading
thereto. In Groups A and E Occupancies, aisles shall not have a dead end greater
than 20 feet in length.
(f) Vomitories. Vomitories connecting the foyer or main exit with the cross
aisles shall have a total width not less than the sum of the required width of the
653
widest aisle leading thereto plus 50 percent of the total required width of the
remaining aisles leading thereto.
(g) Slope. The slope portion of aisles shall be not steeper than I vertical in 8
horizontal, except as permitted in Section 3307 (c).
(h) Steps. Steps shall not be used in an aisle when the change in elevation is less
than I vertical in 8 horizontal. A single step or riser shall not be used in any aisle.
Steps in aisles shall extend across the full width of the aisle and shall be illumi-
nated. Treads and risers in such steps shall comply with Section 3306 (c).
Seat Spacing
I
Sec. 3316. (a) Standard Seating. With standard seating, the spacing of chairs
shall provide a space of not less than 12 inches from the back of one chair to the
front of the most forward projection of the chair immediately behind. The rows of
chairs shall be spaced not less than 33 inches back-to-back. Horizontal measure-
I
ments shall be made between vertical planes. When all chairs in a row have
automatic- or self-rising scats, the measurement may be made with the seats in the
up position. When any chair in the row docs not have an automatic- or self-rising
scat, then the measurement shall be made with the scat in the down position.
(b) Continental Seating. The number of scats per row of seats for continental
seating may be increased subject to all of the following conditions:
I . The spacing of unoccupied seats shall provide a clear width between rows of
scats measured horizontally as follows (automatic- or self-rising scats shall
be measured in the scat-up position, other scats shall be measured in the
scat-down position):
18 inches between rows for I to 18 seats
20 inches between rows for 19 to 35 seats
24 inches between rows for 60 scats or more
2. Exit doors shall be provided along each side aisle of the row of seats at the
rate of one pair of doors for each five rows of seats.
3. Each pair of exit doors shall provide a minimum clear width of 66 inches
discharging into a foyer, lobby, approved stairway, exit passageway leading
to a public way, or the exterior of the building.
4. There shall be not more than five seat rows between pairs of doors.
Group A, Division 1 Occupancies
Sec. 3317. (a) Main Exit. Every Group A, Division I Occupancy shall be
provided with a main exit.
The main exit shall be of sufficient width to accommodate one half of the total
occupant load but shall be not less than the total required width of all aisles, exit
passageways and stairways leading thereto and shall connect to a continuous and
unobstructed means of egress to a public way.
(b) Side Exits. Every auditorium of a Group A, Division I Occupancy shall be
provided with exits on each side. The exits on each side of the auditorium shall be
654
1988 EDITION 3317-3319
of sufficient width to accommodate one third of the total occupant load served.
Side exits shall open directly to a public way or into an exit court, approved
stairway, exterior stairway or exit passageway leading to a public way. Side exits
shall be accessible from a cross aisle.
(c) Balcony Exits. Every balcony having an occupant load of II or more shall
be provided with a minimum of two exits. Balcony exits shall open directly to an
exterior stairway or other approved stairway or ramp. When there is more than one
balcony, exits shall open into an exterior or enclosed stairway or ramp. Balcony
exits shall be accessible from a cross aisle. The number and distribution of exits
shall be as otherwise specified in this chapter.
(d) Panic Hardware. An exit door from a Group A, Division I Occupancy
having an occupant load of 50 or more shall not be provided with a latch or lock
unless it is panic hardware.
Group A, Divisions 2, 2.1, 3 and 4 Occupancies
Sec. 3318. (a) Group A, Divisions 2, 2.1 and 3. Group A, Divisions 2 and 2.1
Occupancies shall have exits as required by Section 3317. In Group A, Division 3
Occupancies having an occupant load of 50 or more, exit doors shall not be
provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hardware.
EXCEPTION: In Group A, Division 3 Occupancies and in all churches, panic
hardware may be omitted from the main exit when the main exit consists of a single
door or pair of doors. A key-locking device may be used in place of the panic
hardware, provided there is a readily visible durable sign adjacent to the doorway
stating THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS
HOURS. The sign shall be in letters not less than I inch high on a contrasting
background. When unlocked, the single door or both leaves of a pair of doors must be
free to swing without operation of any latching device. When a pair of doors is
installed, one leaf shall have no locking devices whatsoever, and the second leaf shall
be arranged to latch or lock into the frame and into the first leaf in such a manner that
a single unlocking action will unlock both leaves simultaneously. Flush, edge or
surface bolts or any other type of device that may be used to close or restrain the door
other than by operation of the locking device are prohibited. The use of this exception
may be revoked by the building official for due cause.
(b) Group A, Division 4. In Group A, Division 4 Occupancies having an
occupant load of 50 or more, exit doors shall not be provided with a latch or lock
unless it is panic hardware.
Panic hardware may be waived on gates surrounding stadiums when the gates
are under constant immediate supervision while the public is present, and pro-
vided safe dispersal areas based on 3 square feet per occupant are located between
the stadium and the fence. The required dispersal area shall be located not less
than 50 feet from the stadium.
Group E Occupancies
Sec. 3319. (a) Definitions. For the purpose of this section, the following
definitions apply:
INTERIOR ROOM is a room whose only exit is through an adjoining or
intervening room which is not an exit corridor.
655
ROOM is a space or area bounded by any obstructions to exit passage which at

any time enclose more than 80 percent of the perimeter of the area. In computing
the unobstructed perimeter, openings less than 3 feet in clear width and less than 6
feet 8 inches high shall not be considered.
SEPARATE EXIT SYSTEM is a path of exit travel separated in such a manner
from other required exits as to provide an atmospheric separation which precludes
contamination of both paths by the same fire.
(b) Separate Exit Systems Required. Every room with an occupant load of
more than 300 shall have one of its exits into a separate exit system. When three or
more exits are required from a room, no more than two required exits shall enter
into the same exit system.
(c) Distance to Exits. I. The distance from any point in a room shall be not
more than 75 feet from an exit corridor, an enclosed stairway or the exterior of the
building.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In buildings not more than two stories in height and protected
throughout with smoke detectors, the distance may be increased to 90 feet.
2. In buildings protected throughout by an automatic sprinkler system. the
distance may be increased to II 0 feet.
2. All portions of unsprinklered building shall be not more than 150 feet from
either an exterior exit door, a horizontal exit, an exit passageway or an enclosed
stairway measured along the line of travel. In a building protected throughout with
an automatic sprinkler system such distance may be increased to 225 feet. In
buildings not more than two stories in height protected throughout with smoke
detectors, the distance may be increased to 175 feet.
(d) Exits Through Adjoining Rooms. Interior rooms may exit through adjoin-
ing or intervening rooms, provided the total distance of travel through such rooms
to an exit corridor does not exceed that specified in Subsection (c) I above and is a
direct, obvious and unobstructed path oftravel. Such paths of exit travel shall not
pass through kitchens, storerooms, rest rooms, closets, laboratories using hazard-
ous materials, industrial shops or other similar places.
Foyers and lobbies constructed as required for exit corridors shall not be
construed as adjoining or intervening rooms.
When the only means of exit from a room is through an adjoining or intervening
room, smoke detectors shall be installed throughout the area of the common
atmosphere through which the exit must pass. The detectors shall actuate alarms
audible in the interior room and shall be connected to the school fire alarm system.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When the aggregate occupant load of the interior room or
rooms is I 0 or less.
2. When the enclosures forming interior rooms are less than two thirds of the
floor-to-ceiling height and do not exceed 8 feet.
3. Rooms used exclusively for mechanical and public utility service to the
buildings.
(e) Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies. Corridor walls and ceilings shall
be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction with openings protected as
required in Section 3305 (h).
656
1988 EDITION 3319-3320
EXCEPTION: When each room used for instruction has at least one exit door
directly to the exterior at ground level and when rooms used for assembly purposes
have at least one half of the required exits directly to the exterior ground level, one-
hour fire-resistive construction of corridor walls and ceilings is not required.
Any change in elevation of less than 2 feet in a corridor or exterior exit balcony
shall be by means of ramps.
The width of a corridor in a Group E, Division I Occupancy shall be the width
required by Section 3303, plus 2 feet, but not less than 6 feet.
EXCEPTION: When the number of occupants served is 100 or less, the corridor
may be 44 inches wide.
(f) Exit Serving Auditoriums in Group E, Division 1 Occupancy. An exit
serving an auditorium and other rooms need provide only for the capacity of
whichever requires the greater width if the auditorium is not to be used simultane-
ously with the other rooms.
(g) Stairs. Each floor above or below the ground floor level shall have not less
than two exit stairs and the required exit width shall be equally divided between
such stairs, provided that stairs serving an occupant load of 100 or more shall be
not less than 5 feet in clear width.
EXCEPTION: This subsection does not apply to rooms used for maintenance,
storage and similar purposes.
(h) Doors. The width of exit doors shall be sufficient to accommodate the
occupant load served.
(i) Basement Rooms. Exit stairways from a basement shall open directly to the
exterior of the building without entering the first floor corridor.
(j) Panic Hardware. Exit doors from rooms having an occupant load of 50 or
more and from corridors shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic
hardware.
(k) Fences and Gates. School grounds may be fenced and gates therein
equipped with locks, provided safe dispersal areas are located not less than 50 feet
from the buildings. Dispersal areas shall be sized to provide an area of not less
than 3 square feet per occupant. Gates shall not be installed across corridors or
passageways leading to such dispersal areas unless they comply with exit require-
ments. See Section 3323 for exits from dispersal areas.
Group H Occupancies
Sec. 3320. Every portion of a Group H Occupancy having a floor area of 200
square feet or more shall be served by at least two separate exits.
I
EXCEPTION: Group H, Division 4 Occupancies having a floor area of less than
1000 square feet may have one exit.
Within Group H, Divisions I, 2 and 3 Occupancies, all portions of any room
shall be within 75 feet of an exit.
Doors leading to a corridor of fire-resistive construction shall have a minimum
three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating; shall have not more than 100 square
inches of wired glass set in steel frames; shall be maintained self-closing or shall
657
be automatic closing as defined in Section 4306 (b); and shall open in the direction
of exit travel.
~! Within Group H, Division 7 and within fabrication areas of Group H, Division
6 Occupancies, the distance of travel to an exterior exit door, exit corridor,
horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway shall not exceed I 00 feet.
Group I Occupancies
Sec. 3321. (a) Exterior Doors. All required exterior exit doors shall open in
the direction of exit travel.
(b) Minimum Size of Exits. The clear width of exits serving areas occupied or
used by bed or litter patients shall be such that it will allow ready passage of such
equipment, but shall not be less than44 inches. Other exits shall have a clear width
of not less than 32 inches. There shall be no projections into the clear width.
(c) Corridors. The minimum clear width of a corridor shall be 44 inches,
except that corridors serving any area housing one or more nonambulatory
persons shall be not less than 8 feet in width. Any change in elevation of the floor
in a corridor serving nonambulatory persons shall be made by means of a ramp.
Corridors shall comply with Section 3305 except that in hospitals and nursing
homes classified as Group I, Division I Occupancies the following exceptions
apply:
I. Nurses' stations including space for doctors' and nurses' charting and
communications constructed as required for corridors need not be separated
from corridors.
2. Waiting areas and similar spaces constructed as required for corridors need
not be separated from corridors, provided:
(i) Each space is located to permit direct visual supervision by the facility
staff, and
(ii) The space and corridors into which the space opens are in the same
smoke compartment and the space is protected by an approved electri-
cally supervised automatic smoke-detection system.
3. Door closers need not be installed on doors to sleeping rooms.
4. Fixed fully-tempered or laminated glass in wood or metal frames may be
used in corridor walls, provided the glazed area does not exceed 25 percent
of the area of the corridor wall of the room.
5. The total area of glass in corridor walls is not limited when the glazing is
fixed I/4-inch-thick wired glass in steel frames and the size of individual
glazed panel does not exceed 1296 square inches.
(d) Basement Exits. One exit accessible to every room below grade shall lead
directly to the exterior at grade level.
(e) Ramps. Group I, Division I Occupancies housing nonambulatory patients
shall have access to a ramp leading from the first story to the exterior of the
building at the ground floor level.
(f) Hardware. Exit doors serving an area having an occupant load of 50 or
658
1988 EDITION 3321-3323
more shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hardware. Patient
room doors shall be readily openable from either side without the use of keys.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In Group I. Division I hospitals and nursing homes. locking ':'
devices, when approved, may be installed on patient sleeping rooms, provided such ?
the facility staff on the other side. When key locks are used on patient room doors,
devices arc readily openable from the patient room side and are readily operable by ,.· ':·.' ·.: ·.'
keys shall be located on the floor involved at a prominent location accessible to the
staff.
2. No requirements of this chapter shall he construed as to prohibit the construc-
tion of cell blocks in jails or prevent the use of any locks or safety devices where it is
necessary to forcibly restrain the inmates.
Special Hazards
Sec. 3322. (a) Rooms Containing Fuel-fired Equipment or Cellulose Ni-
trate. Except in Group R, Division 3 Occupancies, any room containing a boiler,
furnace, incinerator or other fuel-fired equipment shall be provided with two exits
when both of the following conditions exist:
l. The area of the room exceeds 500 square feet, and
2. The largest piece of fuel-fired equipment exceeds 400,000 Btu per hour
input capacity.
If two exits are required, one may be a fixed ladder. Exits shall be separated by a
horizontal distance not less than half the greatest horizontal dimension of the
room. Interior openings between a Group H Occupancy and an incinerator room
arc prohibited.
(b) Cellulose Nitrate Handling. When cellulose nitrate is handled in film
laboratories, projection rooms and film processing rooms, two exits shall be
provided. Doors shall be self-closing and have a fire-protection rating of not less
than one hour.
Reviewing Stands, Grandstands and Bleachers

Sec. 3323. (a) Scope. The provisions of this section apply to reviewing stands,
grandstands and bleachers. (See Section 3324 for folding and telescoping seat-
ing.)
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this section certain terms arc defined as
follows:
BLEACHERS are tiered or stepped seating facilities without backrests in
which an area of 3 square feet or less is assigned per person for computing the
occupant load.
DISPERSAL AREA, SAFE, is an area which will accommodate a number of
persons equal to the total capacity of the stand and building which it serves such
that a person within the area will not be closer than 50 feet from the stand or
building. Dispersal area capacity shall be determined by allowing 3 square feet of
net clear area per person.
FOOTBOARDS are that part of a raised seating facility other than an aisle or
cross aisle upon which the occupant walks to reach a scat.
659
GRANDSTANDS are tiered or stepped seating facilities wherein an area of

more than 3 square feet is provided for each person.
OPEN-AIR GRANDSTANDS AND BLEACHERS are seating facilities
which are located so that the side toward which the audience faces is unroofed and
without an enclosing wall.
PERMANENT STANDS arc those seating facilities which remain at a loca-
tion for more than 90 days.
REVIEWING STANDS arc elevated platforms accommodating not more than
50 persons. Seating facilities, if provided, are normally in the nature of loose
chairs. Reviewing stands accommodating more than 50 persons shall be regulated
as grandstands.
TEMPORARY SEATING FACILITIES are those which are intended for use
at a location for not more than 90 days.
(c) Height of Grandstands and Bleachers. See Section 602 (a).
(d) Design Requirements. Sec Chapter 23 and Section 2907 (i).
(c) General Requirements. I. Row spacing. There shall be a clear space of

not less than 12 inches measured horizontally between the back or backrest of each
seat and the front of the scat immediately behind it. The minimum spacing of rows
of scats measured from back to back shall be:
A. Twenty-two inches for seats without backrests.
B. Thirty inches for scats with backrests.
C. Thirty-three inches for chair seating.
2. Rise between rows. The maximum rise from one row of seats to the next
shall not exceed 16 inches unless the seat spacing from back to back measured
horizontally is 40 inches or more.
EXCEPTION: When automatic- or self-rising seats are installed, the rise be-
tween rows may be increased to 24 inches with the horizontal spacing back to back of
33 inches.
3. Seating capacity determination. When bench-type seating is used, the
number of scats shall be based on one person for each 18 inches of length of the
bench.
4. Aisles. A. Aisles required. Aisles shall be provided in all seating facilities
except that aisles may be omitted when all of the following conditions exist:
(i) Seats are without backrests.
(ii) The rise from row to row docs not exceed 12 inches per row.
(iii) The number of rows does not exceed II in height.
(iv) The top seating board is not over I 0 feet above grade.
(v) The first seating board is not more than 20 inches above grade.
B. Obstructions. No obstruction shall be placed in the required width of any
aisle or exitway.
C. Width. Aisles serving seats on both sides shall have a minimum width of 42
660
1988 EDITION 3323
inches. When serving scats on only one side, the aisle shall have a minimum width
of 36 inches.
5. Cross aisles and vomitories. Cross aisles and vomitories shall be not less
than 54 inches in clear width and shall extend to an exit, enclosed stairway or
exterior perimeter ramp.
6. Stairs and ramps. All stairs and ramps shall have a maximum rise and run
as provided in Section 3306 (c) and Section 3307, except those within the seating
area which serve as aisles at right angles to the rows of seats where the rise shall
not exceed 8 inches. When an aisle terminates at an elevation more than 8 inches
above grade, the aisle shall be provided with a stairway or ramp whose width is not
less than the width of the aisle.
7. Guardrails. Perimeter guardrails or enclosing walls or fencing shall be
provided for all portions of elevated seating facilities which arc more than 30
inches above grade or floor. Construction of guardrails shall comply with Section
1711 and Table No. 23-8. Guardrails shall be 42 inches above the rear of a seat
board or 42 inches above the rear of the steps in an aisle when the guardrail is
parallel and adjacent to the aisle.
EXCEPTION: Guardrails at the front of the front row of seats, which are not
located at the end of an aisle and where there is no cross aisle, may have a height of 26
inches and need not meet the 6-inch maximum spacing specified in Section 1711;
however, a midrail shall be installed.
The open vertical space between footboards and scats shall not exceed 9 inches
when footboards are more than 30 inches above grade.
8. Toeboards. A 4-inch-high vertical barrier shall be installed along the edge
of walking platforms whenever guardrails are required.
EXCEPTION: Toe boards shall not be required at the ends of footboards.
9. Footboards. Footboards shall be provided for all rows of scats above the
third row or beginning at such a point where the seating plank is more than 2 feet
above grade. When the same platform is used for both seating and footrests,
footrests are not required, provided each level or platform is not less than 24
inches wide. Footboards in bleachers at a level below the seat board it serves arc
not to be considered as walking platforms but shall be not less than a structural
grade of 2-inch by 8-inch lumber or equivalent. When aisles are required by
Section 3323 (c) 4, footboards not less than 18 inches in width shall be installed
between each row of scats.
(f) Grandstands and Bleachers Within Buildings. Except as otherwise pro-
vided in this section, grandstands and bleachers within a building shall comply
with the other applicable sections of this chapter.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When seats are without backrests, there may be nine scats
between any seat and an aisle.
2. When seats are without backrests, dead ends in vertical aisles shall not exceed
a depth of 16 rows.
(g) Open-air Grandstands and Bleachers. Except as otherwise provided in
Items Nos. I through 9 below, open-air grandstands and bleachers shall comply
with the other applicable sections of this chapter.
661
I . Number of seats between aisles. The number of scats between any scat and
an aisle shall be not greater than 20 when the scats arc without backrests and nine if
the scats have backrests.
2. Dead ends. Dead ends in vertical aisles shall not exceed a depth of 16 rows
for permanent grandstands and 26 rows for temporary grandstands.
3. Distance to exit. The line of travel from any seat to a safe dispersal area exit
ramp, enclosed stairway or vomitory shall be not more than 200 feet. When the
scats have no backrests, the distance may be a direct line measurement.
4. Safe dispersal area. Each safe dispersal area shall have a minimum of two
exits. If more than 6000 persons are to be accommodated within a dispersal area,
there shall be a minimum of three exits and for more than 9000 persons there shall
be at least four exits. The aggregate clear width of exits from a safe dispersal area
shall be determined on the basis of not less than one exit unit of 22 inches for each
500 persons to be accommodated and no exit shall be less than 44 inches in width.
5. Tho exits required. Two exits shall be provided from every stand which
accommodates more than 300 persons.
6. Three exits required. Three exits shall be required when a grandstand or
section thereof accommodates more than 1000 persons.
7. Four exits required. Four exits shall be required when a grandstand or
section thereof accommodates more than 3000 persons.
8. Determination of exit width. The total width of exits in feet shall be not
less than the total occupant load served divided by 150 when exiting by stairs and
divided by 200 when exiting by ramps, corridors, tunnels or vomitories.
9. Minimum exit width. No exit shall be less than 42 inches in width.
Folding and Telescoping Seating

Sec. 3324. (a) Scope. Folding and telescoping seating facilities shall conform
to the provisions of this section.
(b) Definition. For the purpose of this section:

FOLDING AND TELESCOPING SEATING is a structure that is used for
tiered seating of persons. and whose overall shape and size may be reduced,
without being dismantled, for purposes of moving or storing.
(c) Design Requirements. Sec Chapter 23 and Section 2907 (i).
(d) General Requirements. l. Aisles. Aisles shall be required when any of the
following conditions exist:
A. Backrest-type seating is used.
B. Rise from row to row exceeds 12 inches per row.
C. Exiting from seating is restricted by railings or other obstacles.
D. Row spacing exceeds 28 inches unless seat boards and footboards are at the
same elevation.
662
1988 EDITION 3324
E. Seat boards are of other than continuous flat surfaces.

F. The number of rows exceeds 11 in height.
2. Number of seats between aisles. When aisles are provided, aisles shall be
arranged so that the number of seats between any seat and the nearest aisle shall
not exceed:
A. For seating within a building, the number of seats between any seat and an
aisle shall not exceed nine when seats are without backrests and six if seats have
backrests.
B. For seating not within a building, the number of seats between any seat and
an aisle shall not exceed 20 when seats are without backrests and II if seats have
backrests.
3. Aisle width. Aisles shall be not less than 34 inches in clear width. When an
aisle is divided by a portal, column or other obstruction, a minimum aisle clear
width of 22 inches shall be provided on each side of such obstructions.
4. Aisle steps. Intermediate aisle steps are not required when the rise per row is
12 inches or less. When the rise per row exceeds 12 inches, an intermediate aisle
step shall be provided; this step shall divide the rise into two or more equal parts of
not more than 12 inches each and have a minimum tread width of 10 inches. When
the seat board and footboard are not on the same elevation in a bleacher installa-
tion requiring intermediate aisle steps, the rear corner of each seat board adjacent
to the aisle shall be chamfered to a maximum of 4112 inches by 45 degrees to
provide a minimum of 6 inches of ankle clearance between aisle step and seat
board.
5. Seating. The horizontal distance back to back shall be not less than 22
inches for seats without backrests. There shall be a space of not less than 12 inches
between the back of each seat and the front of each seat immediately behind it. If
seats are of the chair type, the 12-inch dimension shall be measured to the front
edge of the rear seat in its normal unoccupied position. All measurements shall be
taken between plumb lines.
The width of footboards and seat boards shall be not less than 9 inches. When
the same level is not used for both seat boards and footboards, footboards
independent of seats shall be provided.
6. Guardrails. Perimeter guardrails or enclosing walls or fencing shall be
provided for all portions of elevated seating facilities which are more than 30
inches above grade or floor. Construction of guardrails shall comply with Section
1711 and Table No. 23-B. Guardrails shall be 42 inches above the rear of a seat
board or 42 inches above the rear of the steps in an aisle when the guardrail is
parallel and adjacent to the aisle.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Guardrails at the front of the front row of seats, which are not
located at the end of an aisle and where there is no cross aisle, may have a height of 26
inches and need not meet the 6-inch maximum spacing specified in Section 1711;
however, a midrail shall be installed.
2. When seating is adjacent to a wall or fence within 6 inches of the seating and of
sufficient height and strength to afford the intended protection, guardrails may be
omitted.
663
3324, 33-A UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Cross aisles located within the seating area shall be provided with guardrails not
less than 26 inches high along the front edge of the aisle.
EXCEPTION: When the backs of the seats in front of the cross aisle project 24
inches or more above the surface of the cross aisle, guardrails may be omitted.
TABLE NO 33-A-MINIMUM EGRESS AND ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

MINIMUM OF ACCESS BY
TWO EXITS MEANS OFA
OTHER THAN RAMP OR AN
ELEVATORS ARE ELEVATOR MUST
REQUIRED occu- BE PROVIDED
WHERE PANT FOR THE
NUMBER OF LOAD PHYSICALLY
OCCUPANTS IS FACTOR2 HANDICAPPED
USE1 AT LEAST (Sq. Ft.) AS INDICATED3
I . Aircraft Hangars
(no repair) 10 500 Yes
2. Auction Rooms 30 7 Yes
3. Assembly Areas, Concen-
trated Use (without fixed seats) 50 7 Yes 4 5
Auditoriums
Churches and Chapels
Dance Floors
Lobby Accessory to
Assembly Occupancy
Lodge Rooms
Reviewing Stands
Stadiums
Waiting Area 50 3 Yes45
4. Assembly Areas, Less-con-
centrated Use 50 15 Yes4 56
Conference Rooms
Dining Rooms
Drinking Establishments
Exhibit Rooms
Gymnasiums
Lounges
Stages
5. Bowling Alley (assume no
occupant load for bowling lanes) 50 12 Yes
6. Children's Homes and
Homes for the Aged 6 80 Yes 7
7. Classrooms 50 20 Yes 8
8. Courtrooms 50 40 Yes
9. Dormitories 10 50 Yes 7
10. Dwellings 10 300 No
(Continued)
664
1988 EDITION 33-A
MINIMUM OF ACCESS BY
TWO EXITS MEANS OFA
OTHER THAN RAMP OR AN
ELEVATORS ARE ELEVATOR MUST
REQUIRED OCCU· BE PROVIDED
WHERE PANT FOR THE
NUMBER OF LOAD PHYSICALLY
OCCUPANTS IS FACTOR2 HANDICAPPED
USE1 AT LEAST (Sq. Ft.) AS INDICATED3
II . Exercising Rooms 50 50 Yes

12. Garage, Parking 30 200 Yes•
13. Hospitals and Sanitariums-
Nursing Homes 6 80 Yes
14. Hotels and Apartments 10 200 Yes'o
15. Kitchen--Commercial 30 200 No
16. Library Reading Room 50 50 Yes 4
17. Locker Rooms 30 50 Yes
18. Malls (see Chapter 56) - - -
19. Manufacturing Areas 30 200 Yes'
20. Mechanical Equipment Room 30 300 No
21. Nurseries for Children
(Day care) 7 35 Yes
22. Offices 30 100 Yes 7
23. School Shops and Vocational
Rooms 50 50 Yes
24. Skating Rinks 50 50 on Yes 4
the
skating
area;
15 on the
deck
25. Storage and Stock Rooms 30 300 No
26. Stores-Retail Sales Rooms
30 Yes
Basement
Ground Floor
"
50 30 Yes
Upper Floors 10 60 Yes
27. Swimming Pools 50 50 for Yes 4
the pool
area;
15 on the
deck
28. Warehouses 30 500 No
29. All others 50 100
(Footnotes appear on page 666.)
665
FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 33-A

'For additional provisions on number of exits from Group Hand I Occupancies and from
rooms containing fuel-fired equipment or cellulose nitrate, see Sections 3320, 3321 and
3322, respectively.
2This table shall not be used to determine working space requirements per person.
'Elevators shall not be construed as providing a required exit.

'Access to secondary areas on balconies or mezzanines may be by stairs only, except when
such secondary areas contain the only available toilet facilities.
'Reviewing stands, grandstands, bleachers, and folding and telescopic bleachers need not
comply.
•Access requirements for conference rooms, dining rooms, lounges and exhibit rooms that
arc part of an office use shall be the same as required for the office usc.
7 Access to floors other than that closest to grade may be by stairs only, except when the only
available toilet facilities are on other levels.

'When the floor closest to the grade offers the same programs and activities available on
other floors, access to the other floors may be by stairs only, except when the only
available toilet facilities are on other levels.
"Access to floors other than that closest to grade and to garages used in connection with
apartment houses may be by stairs only.
'"See Section 1214 for access to buildings and facilities in hotels and apartments.
11 Sce Section 3303 for basement exit requirements.
12 0ccupant load based upon five persons for each alley, including 15 feet of runway.
666
1988 EDITION 3401-3403
Chapter34
SLOPED GLAZING AND SKYLIGHTS
NOTE: This chapter has been revised In Its entirety.
Scope
Sec. 3401. This chapter applies to the installation of glass or other transparent,
translucent or opaque glazing material installed at a slope of 15 degrees or more
from the vertical plane including glazing materials in skylights, roofs and sloped
walls.
Allowable Glazing Materials
Sec. 3402. Sloped glazing shall be of any of the following materials, subject to
the limitations specified in Section 3403.
For single-layer glazing systems, the glazing material of the single light or layer
shall be laminated glass with a minimum 30 mil polyvinyl butyral (or equivalent)
interlayer, wired glass, approved plastic materials meeting the requirements of
Section 5207, heat-strengthened glass or fully-tempered glass.
For multiple-layer glazing systems, each light or layer shall consist of any of the
glazing materials specified above.
Annealed glass may be used as specified within Exceptions 2 and 3 of Section
3403.
Screening
Sec. 3403. Heat-strengthened glass and fully-tempered glass when used in
single-layer glazing systems shall have screens installed below glazing. The
screens shall be capable of supporting the weight of the glass and shall be
substantially supported below and installed within 4 inches of the glass. They
shall be constructed of a noncombustible material not thinner than 0.08 inch with
a mesh not larger than I inch by I inch. In a corrosive atmosphere, structurally
equivalent noncorrosive screening materials shall be used. Heat-strengthened
glass, fully-tempered glass and wired glass, when used in multiple-layer glazing
systems as the bottom glass layer over the walking surface, shall be equipped with
screening which complies with the requirements for monolithic glazing systems.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Fully-tempered glass may be installed without required pro-
tective screens when located between intervening floors at a slope of 30 degrees or
less from the vertical plane if the highest point ofthe glass is 10 feet or less above the
walking surface.
2. Allowable glazing material, including annealed glass, may be installed with-
out required screens if the walking surface or any other accessible area below the
glazing material is permanently protected from falling glass for a minimum horizon-
tal distance equal to twice the height.
3. Allowable glazing material, including annealed glass, may be installed with-
out screens in the sloped glazing systems of commercial or detached greenhouses
used exclusively for growing plants and not intended for use by the public, provided
the height of the greenhouse at the ridge docs not exceed 20 feet above grade.
667
Framing
Sec. 3404. In Types I and II construction, skylight frames shall be constructed
of noncombustible materials.
EXCEPTION: In foundries or buildings where acid fumes deleterious to metal
are incidental to the use of the buildings, approved pressure-treated woods or other
approved noncorrosive materials may be used for sash and frames.
Skylights set at an angle of less than 45 degrees from the horizontal plane shall
be mounted at least 4 inches above the plane of the roof on a curb constructed of
materials as required for the frame. Skylights may be installed in the plane of the
roof when the roof slope is 45 degrees or greater from horizontal.
Design Loads
Sec. 3405. Sloped glazing and skylights shall be designed to withstand the
tributary loads specified in Section 2305. Sizing limitations specified within
Graph No. 54-1 and Table No. 54-A may be utilized for glazing materials set forth
in Section 3402, provided the design loads are increased by a factor of 2.67.
Floors and Sidewalks
Sec. 3406. Glass used for the transmission of light, if placed in floors or
sidewalks, shall be supported by metal or reinforced concrete frames, and such
glass shall be not less than I/2 inch in thickness. Any such glass over 16 square
inches in area shall have wire mesh embedded in the same or shall be provided a
wire screen underneath, as specified for skylights in this section. All portions of
the floor lights or sidewalk lights shall be of the same strength as is required by this
code for floor or sidewalk construction, except in cases where the floor is
surrounded by a railing not less than 3 feet 6 inches in height, in which case the
construction shall be calculated for not less than roof loads.
Chapter35
SOUND TRANSMISSION CONTROL
For Sound Transmission Control, see Appendix Chapter 35.
668
1988 EDITION 3601-3602
Chapter36
PENTHOUSESANDROOFSTRUCTURES
Penthouses and Roof Structures
Sec. 3601. (a) Height. No penthouse or other projection above the roof in
structures of other than Type I construction shall exceed 28 feet in height above
the roof when used as an enclosure for tanks or for elevators which run to the roof
and in all other cases shall not extend more than 12 feet in height above the roof.
(b) Area. The aggregate area of all penthouses and other roof structures shall
not exceed 331/3 percent of the area of the supporting roof.
(c) Prohibited Uses. No penthouse, bulkhead or any other similar projection
above the roof shall be used for purposes other than shelter of mechanical
equipment or shelter of vertical shaft openings in the roof. Penthouses or bulk-
heads used for purposes other than permitted by this section shall conform to the
requirements of this code for an additional story.
(d) Construction. Roof structures shall be constructed with walls, floors and
roof as required for the main portion of the building.
EXCEPTIONS: I. On Types I and II-F.R. buildings, the exterior walls and roofs
of penthouses which are 5 feet or more from an adjacent property line may be of one-
hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction.
2. On Types III and IV buildings, walls not less than 5 feet from an adjacent
property line may be of one-hour fire-resistive noncombustible construction.
3. Enclosures housing only mechanical equipment and located at least 20 feet
from adjacent property lines may be of unprotected noncombustible construction.
4. On one-story buildings, unroofed mechanical equipment screens, fences or
similar enclosures may be of combustible construction when located at least 20 feet
from adjacent property lines and when not exceeding 4 feet in height above the roof
surface.
The restrictions of this subsection shall not prohibit the placing of wood
flagpoles or similar structures on the roof of any building.
Towers and Spires
Sec. 3602. Towers or spires when enclosed shall have exterior walls as required
for the building to which they are attached. Towers not enclosed and which extend
more than 75 feet above grade shall have their framework constructed of iron,
steel or reinforced concrete. No tower or spire shall occupy more than one fourth
of the street frontage of any building to which it is attached and in no case shall the
base area exceed 1600 square feet unless it conforms entirely to the type of
construction requirements of the building to which it is attached and is limited in
height as a main part of the building. If the area of the tower or spire exceeds 100
square feet at any horizontal cross section, its supporting frame shall extend
directly to the ground. The roof covering of spires shall be as required for the main
roof of the rest of the structure.
Skeleton towers used as radio masts and placed on the roof of any building shall
be constructed entirely of noncombustible materials when more than 25 feet in
height and shall be directly supported on a noncombustible framework to the
ground. They shall be designed to withstand a wind load from any direction as
specified in Section 2311 in addition to any other loads.
669
Chapter37
:\1 CHIMNEYS, FIREPLACES AND BARBECUES
Scope
Sec. 3701. Chimneys, flues, fireplaces and barbecues, and their connections,
carrying products of combustion shall conform to the requirements of this chap-
ter.
Definitions
Sec. 3702. BARBECUE is a stationary open hearth or brazier, either fuel fired
or electric, used for food preparation.
CHIMNEY is a hollow shaft containing one or more passageways, vertical or
nearly so, for conveying products of combustion to the outside atmosphere.
CHIMNEY, FACTORY-BUILT, is a chimney manufactured at a location
other than the building site and composed of listed factory-built components
assembled in accordance with the terms of the listing to form the completed
chimney.
MASONRY CHIMNEY is a chimney of masonry units, bricks, stones or
listed masonry chimney units lined with approved flue liners. For the purpose of
this chapter, masonry chimneys shall include reinforced concrete chimneys.
CHIMNEY CLASSIFICATIONS:
Chimney, Residential Appliance-type, is a factory-built or masonry chimney
suitable for removing products of combustion from residential-type appliances
producing combustion gases not in excess of 1000°F. measured at the appliance
flue outlet.
Chimney, Low-heat Industrial Appliance-type, is a factory-built, masonry
or metal chimney suitable for removing the products of combustion from fuel-
burning low-heat appliances producing combustion gases not in excess of I 000 oF.
under normal operating conditions but capable of producing combustion gases of
1400°F. during intermittent forced firing for periods up to one hour. All tempera-
tures are measured at the appliance flue outlet.
Chimney, Medium-heat Industrial Appliance-type, is a factory-built, ma-
sonry or metal chimney suitable for removing the products of combustion from
fuel-burning medium-heat appliances producing combustion gases not in excess
of 2000°F. measured at the appliance flue outlet.
Chimney, High-heat Industrial Appliance-type, is a factory-built, masonry
or metal chimney suitable for removing the products of combustion from fuel-
burning high-heat appliances producing combustion gases in excess of 2000°F.
measured at the appliance flue outlet.
CHIMNEY CONNECTOR is the pipe or breeching which connects a fuel-
burning appliance to a chimney. (See Chapter 9, Mechanical Code.)
CHIMNEY LINER is a lining material of fireclay or other approved material
that meets the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 37-1.
670
1988 EDITION 3702-3704
FIREBRICK is a refractory brick which meets the requirements of U.B.C.

Standard No. 37-1.
FIREPLACE is a hearth and fire chamber or similar prepared place in which a
fire may be made and which is built in conjunction with a chimney.
Factory-built Fireplace is a listed assembly of a fire chamber, its chimney and
related factory-made parts designed for unit assembly without requiring field
construction. Factory-built fireplaces are not dependent upon mortar-filled joints
for continued safe use.
Masonry Fireplace is a hearth and fire chamber of solid masonry units such as
bricks, stones, masonry units, or reinforced concrete provided with a suitable
chimney.
Chimneys, General
Sec. 3703. (a) Chimney Support. Chimneys shall be designed, anchored,
supported and reinforced as required in this chapter and applicable provisions of
Chapters 23, 24, 26, 27 and 29 of this code. A chimney shall not support any
structural load other than its own weight unless designed as a supporting member.
(b) Construction. Each chimney shall be so constructed as to safely convey
flue gases not exceeding the maximum temperatures for the type of construction
as set forth in Table No. 37-B and shall be capable of producing a draft at the
appliance not less than that required for safe operation.
(c) Clearance. Clearance to combustible material shall be as required by Table
No. 37-B.
(d) Lining. When required by Table No. 37-B, chimneys shall be lined with
fireclay flue tile, firebrick, molded refractory units or other approved lining not
less than 5/s inch thick as set forth in Table No. 37-B. Chimney liners shall be
carefully bedded in approved mortar with close-fitting joints left smooth on the
inside.
(e) Area. Chimney passageways shall be not smaller in area than the vent
connection on the appliance attached thereto nor less than that set forth in Table
No. 37-A, unless engineering methods approved by the building official have
been used to design the system.
(f) Height and Termination. Every chimney shall extend above the roof and
the highest elevation of any part of a building as shown in Table No. 37-B. For
altitudes over 2000 feet, the building official shall be consulted in determining the
height of the chimney.
All incinerator chimneys shall terminate in a substantially constructed spark
arrester having a mesh not exceeding lfz inch.
(g) Cleanouts. Cleanout openings shall be provided at the base of every
masonry chimney.
Masonry Chimneys
Sec. 3704. (a) Design. Masonry chimneys shall be designed and constructed to
comply with Section 3703 (b) and Section 3704 (b).
671
(b) Walls. Walls of masonry chimneys shall be constructed as set forth in Table
No. 37-B.
(c) Reinforcing and Seismic Anchorage. Unless a specific design is pro-
vided, every masonry or concrete chimney in Seismic Zones No.2, No.3 and No.
4 shall be reinforced with not less than four No. 4 steel reinforcing bars conform-
ing to the provisions of Chapter 24 or 26 of this code. The bars shall extend the full
height of the chimney and shall be spliced in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Chapters 24 and 26. The bars shall be tied horizontally at 18-inch
intervals with not less than 1/4-inch-diameter steel ties. Two ties shall also be
placed at each bend in vertical bars. Where the width of the chimney exceeds 40
inches, two additional No. 4 vertical bars shall be provided for each additional
flue incorporated in the chimney or for each additional 40 inches in width or
fraction thereof.
In Seismic Zones No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4, all masonry and concrete chimneys
shall be anchored at each floor or ceiling line more than 6 feet above grade, except
when constructed completely within the exterior walls of the building. Anchorage
shall consist of two 3/16-inch by l-inch steel straps cast at least 12 inches into the
chimney with a 180-degree bend with a 6-inch extension around the vertical
reinforcing bars in the outer face of the chimney.
Each strap shall be fastened to the structural framework of the building with two
liz-inch bolts per strap. Where the joists do not head into the chimney the anchor
straps shall be connected to 2-inch by 4-inch ties crossing a minimum of four
joists. The ties shall be connected to each joist with two 16d nails. Metal chimneys
shall be anchored at each roof and ceiling with two Jl/z-inch by lfs-inch metal
straps looped around the outside of the chimney insulation and nailed with six 8d
nails per strap to the roof or ceiling framing.
(d) Chimney Offset. Masonry chimneys may be offset at a slope of not more
than 4 inches in 24 inches but not more than one third of the dimension of the
chimney in the direction of the offset. Where lined, the lining shall be cut to fit.
(e) Change in Size or Shape. Changes in the size or shape of a masonry
chimney, where the chimney passes through the roof, shall not be made within a
distance of 6 inches above or below the roof joists or rafters.
(f) Separation of Masonry Chimney Passageways. Two or more flues in a
chimney shall be separated by masonry not less than 4 inches thick bonded into the
masonry wall of the ch1mney.
(g) Inlets. Every inlet to any masonry chimney shall enter the side thereof and
shall be of not less than 1/s-inch-thick metal or 5/s-inch-thick refractory material.
Factory-built Chimneys and Fireplaces

Sec. 3705. (a) General. Factory-built chimneys and factory-built fireplaces
shall be listed and shall be installed in accordance with the terms of their listings
and the manufacturer's instructions as specified in the Mechanical Code.
(b) Hearth Extensions. Hearth extensions of listed factory-built fireplaces
shall conform to the conditions of listing and the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
672
1988 EDITION 3705-3707
(c) Multiple Venting in Vertical Shafts. Factory-built chimneys utilized with

listed factory-built fireplaces may be used in a common vertical shaft having the
required fire-resistance rating.
Metal Chimneys
Sec. 3706. Metal chimneys shall be constructed and installed to meet the
requirements of the Mechanical Code.
Masonry and Concrete Fireplaces and Barbecues

Sec. 3707. (a) General. Masonry fireplaces. barbecues, smoke chambers and
fireplace chimneys shall be of masonry or reinforced concrete and shall conform
to the requirements of this section.
(b) Support. Masonry fireplaces shall be supported on foundations designed
as specified in Chapters 23, 24 and 29.
When an approved design is not provided, foundations for masonry and
concrete fireplaces shall be not Jess than 12 inches thick, extend not less than 6
inches outside the fireplace wall and project below the natural ground surface in
accordance with the depth of foundations set forth in Table No. 29-A.
(c) Fireplace Walls. Masonry walls of fireplaces shall be not less than X inches
in thickness. Walls of fireboxes shall be not less than I 0 inches in thickness,
except that where a lining of firebrick is used such walls shall be not less than a
total of8 inches in thickness. The firebox shall be not less than 20 inches in depth.
Joints in firebrick shall not exceed !(4 inch.
(d) Hoods. Metal hoods used as part of a fireplace or barbecue shall be not less
than No. 19 gauge copper, galvanized steel or other equivalent corrosion-resistant
ferrous metal with all scams and connections of smokcproof unsoldered construc-
tions. The hoods shall be sloped at an angle of 45 degrees or less from the vertical
and shall extend horizontally at least 6 inches beyond the limits of the firebox.
Metal hoods shall be kept a minimum of l X inches from combustible materials
unless approved for reduced clearances.
(e) Metal Heat Circulators. Approved metal heat circulators may be installed
in fireplaces.
(f) Smoke Chamber. Front and side walls shall be not less than X inches in
thickness. Smoke chamber back walls shall be not less than 6 inches in thickness.
(g) Chimneys. Chimneys for fireplaces shall be constructed as specified in
Sections 3703, 3704 and 3705 for residential-type appliances.
(h) Clearance to Combustible Material. Combustible materials shall not be
placed within 2 inches of fireplace, smoke chamber or chimney walls. Combusti-
ble material shall not be placed within 6 inches of the fireplace opening. No such
combustible material within 12 inches of the fireplace opening shall project more
than lfs inch for each l-inch clearance from such opening.
No part of metal hoods used as part of a fireplace or barbecue shall be less than
18 inches from combustible material. This clearance may be reduced to the
minimum requirements specified in the Mechanical Code.
673
(i) Areas of Flues, Throats and Dampers. The net cross-sectional area of the
flue and of the throat between the firebox and the smoke chamber of a fireplace
shall be not less than as set forth in Table No. 37-A. Metal dampers equivalent to
not less than No. 12 gauge steel shall be installed. When fully opened, damper
openings shall be not less than 90 percent of the required flue area.
(j) Lintel. Masonry over the fireplace opening shall be supported by a noncom-
bustible lintel.
(k) Hearth. Masonry fireplaces shall be provided with a brick, concrete, stone
or other approved noncombustible hearth slab. This slab shall be not less than 4
inches thick and shall be supported by noncombustible materials or reinforced to
carry its own weight and all imposed loads. Combustible forms and centering
shall be removed.
(I) Hearth Extensions. Hearths shall extend at least 16 inches from the front
of, and at least 8 inches beyond each side of, the fireplace opening. Where the
fireplace opening is 6 square feet or larger, the hearth extension shall extend at
.. least 20 inches in front of, and at least 12 inches beyond each side of, the fireplace
opening .
Except for fireplaces which open to the exterior of the building, the hearth slab
shall be readily distinguishable from the surrounding or adjacent floor.
(m) Firestopping. Firestopping between chimneys and wooden construction
shall meet the requirements specified in Section 2516.
(n) Nonconforming Fireplaces. Imitation and other fireplaces not conforming
to the other requirements of this section shall not exceed 6 inches in depth. Gas-
burning appliances may be installed in such nonconforming fireplaces, provided
that compliance is made in accordance with the requirements of the Mechanical
Code.
674
1988 EDITION 37-A
TABLE NO. 37-A-MINIMUM PASSAGEWAY AREAS

FOR MASONRY CHIMNEYS1
MINIMUM CROSs-SECTIONAL AREA
TILE LINED
LINED WITH
TYPE OF SQUARE OR FIREBRICK OR
MASONRY CHIMNEY ROUND RECTANGLE UNLINED
I. Residential 50 sq. in. 50 sq. in. 85 sq. in.
1/12of 1/wof 1/s of
2. Fireplacel opening opening opening
Minimum Mmimum Minimum
50 sq. in. 64 sq. in. 100 sq. in.
3. Low heat 50sq.in. 57 sq. in. I35sq.in.
4. Incinerator
Apartment type
I opening 196sq. in.
2 to 6 openings 324sq. in.
7to 14
openings 484 sq. in. Not applicable
15 or more
openings 484 sq. in. plus 10 sq. in. for each
additional opening
1Areas for medium- and high-heat chimneys shall be determined using accepted engineering
methods and as approved by the building official.
lWhere fireplaces open on more than one side, the fireplace opening shall be measured along
the greatest dimension.
Note: For altitudes over 2000 feet above sea level, the building official shall be consulted in
determining the area of the passageway.
675
TABLE NO. 37·8-CONSTRUCTION, CLEARANCE AND TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY
AND CONCRETE CHIMNEYS
Clearance to
Height Height Combustible
Above Above any Part Construction
Thickness Roof of Building (Inches)
(Min. Inches) Opening within (Feet) Int. Ext.
Chimneys Serving Walls Lining (Feet) 10 25 50 In st. lnst.
I. RESIDENTIAL-TYPE APPLIANCES 1 2
(Low Btu Input)
43 5/8 fire-
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 43 clay tile 1 or
Reinforced Concrete 48 or 2 fire- 2 2 2 %
Hollow Masonry Units
12 brick gypsun14
Stone
Unburned Clay Units 4% fire-
8 brick
2. BUILDING HEATING AND I
INDUSTRIAL-TYPE LOW-HEAT ' c
APPLIANCES! 2 ( l000°F. operating I z
temp.-1400°F. Maximum) 8 I :;;
.5/8 fire- 3 2 2 2 0
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick clay tile :JJ
Hollow Masonry Units 88
or 2 fire-
s::
Reinforced Concrete 8 , brick ID
Stone 12 5
i I r
c
z
G)
0
0
c
m
.....
ID
co
co
m
c
3. MEDIUM-HEAT INDUSTRIAL- ::::j
TYPE APPLIANCES 1 5 5
(2000°F. Maximum) z
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 8 10 4 4
4~!! Medium 10
Hollow Masonry Units 8
(Grouted Solid) duty fire-
Reinforced Concrete 8 brick
Stone 12
4. HIGH-HEAT INDUSTRIAL-TYPE
APPLIANCES I 2 (Over 2000°F.)
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 16 6 7
16 6 4 1-2 High 20 20 7
Hollow Masonry Units duty fire-
(Grouted Solid) brick
Reinforced Concrete 166
5. RESIDENTIAL TYPE INCINERATORS Same as for Residential-Type Appliances as shown above

6. CHUTE-FED AND FLUE-FED INCIN-
mA TORS WITH COMBINED HEARTH
AND GRATE AREA 7 SQ. IT. OR LESS
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 4 1 2 .\tedium
or Hollow Units duty fire- 3 2 2 2
Portion extending to 10 ft. brick
above combustion chamber roof 4 5/8 fire-
Portion more than 10 ft. above clay tile
combustion chamber roof 8 liner
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 37·8-CONSTRUCTION, CLEARANCE AND TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY
AND CONCRETE CHIMNEYS-(Continued)
Height Clear111ce to
Above any Part Combustible
Height Construction
Thickness Above of Building
(Min. Inches) within (Feet) (Inches)
Root
Opening Int. Ext.
Chimners Serving Walls Lining (Feet) 10 25 50 In st. In st.
7. CHUTE-FED AND FLUE-FED

INCINERATORS- COMBINED
HEARTH AND GRATE AREAS
LARGER THAN 7 SQ. FT.
Clay, Shale or Concrete Brick 4% Medium
or Hollow Units Grouted Solid duty fire-
or Reinforced Concrete brick
Portion extending to 40 ft. 5/8 fire- 2
above combustion chamber roof 4 clay tile 10 2
Portion more than 40 ft. above liner
combustion chamber roof 8 4% ~1edium
Reinforced Concrete 8 duty fire-
brick
laid in medium c:
duty refract z
mortar ;;
0
8. COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL - :XI
TYPE INCINERATORS2
s::
CD
Clay or Shale Solid Brick 8 4% Medium c:
Reinforced Concrete 8 duty fire- ;=
c
brick
laid in medium 10 4 4 z
C)
duty refract 0
mortar 0
cm
...
CD
I
m
0
'See Table No. 9-A of the Mechanical Code for types of appliances to be used with each type of chimney. 3
0
2Lining shall extend from bottom to top of chimney.
z
JChimneys having walls 8 inches or more in thickness may be unlined.
"Chimneys for residential-type appliances installed entirely on the exterior of the building. For fireplace and barbecue chimneys, see Section 3707 (h).
5Lining to extend from 24 inches below connector to 25 feet above.
6Two 8-inch walls with 2-inch air space between walls. Outer and inner walls may be of solid masonry units or reinforced concrete or any combination
thereof.
7Ciearance shall be approved by the building official and shall be such that the temperature of combustible materials will not exceed I60°F.
SEquivalent thickness including grouted cells when grouted solid. The equivalent thickness may also include the grout thickness between the liner and
masonry unit.
Chapter38
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Scope
Sec. 3801. (a) General. All fire-extinguishing systems required in this code
shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of this chapter.
Fire hose threads used in connection with fire-extinguishing systems shall be
National Standard hose thread or as approved by the fire department.
In buildings used for high-piled combustible storage, fire protection shall be in
(b) Approvals. All fire-extinguishing systems including automatic sprinkler
systems. Classes I, II and lll standpipe systems, combined systems, special
automatic extinguishing systems and basement pipe inlets shall be approved and
shall be subject to such periodic tests as may be required. The location of all fire
department hose connections shall be approved by the fire department.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms arc defined as
follows:
AUTOMATIC FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM is an approved system
of devices and equipment which automatically detects a fire and discharges an
approved fire-extinguishing agent onto or in the area of a fire.
F COMBINED SYSTEM is a system of water piping which serves 21/z-inch
I hose outlets for use by the fire department and also supplies water to fire
F
I sprinklers.
·~
FIRE DEPARTMENT INLET CONNECTION is a connection through
which the fire department can pump water into a standpipe system, or sprinkler
\~[~1 system.
I ~:i~ STANDPIPE SYSTEM is a wet or dry system of piping, valves, outlets and
F :::::
~j~~~
related equipment designed to provide water at specified pressures and installed
I exclusively for the fighting of fires, including the following:
F
I iii! Class I is a standpipe system equipped with 21/z-inch outlets.
F Class II is a standpipe system directly connected to a water supply and
I equipped with 11/z-inch outlets and hose.
F i!Ji
Class III is a standpipe system directly connected to a water supply and
I 1tn
~~:::
F ::::: equipped with 21/z-inch outlets or 21/z-inch and Jl/z-inch outlets when a Jl/z-inch
I !!!!! hose is required. Hose connections for Class Ill systems may be made through
F =~~= 2112-inch hose valves with easily removable 21/z-inch by 11/z-inch reducers.
(d) Standards. Fire-extinguishing systems shall comply with U .B.C. Stan-
dards Nos. 38-1 and 38-2.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Automatic fire-extinguishing systems not covered by
U. B.C. Standard No. 38-1 or 38-2 shall be approved and installed in accordance with
the Fire Code.
2. Automatic sprinkler systems may be connected to the domestic water-supply
main when approved by the building official, provided the domestic water supply is
of adequate pressure, capacity and sizing for the combined domestic and sprinkler
680
requirements. In such case, the sprinkler system connection shall be made between
the public water main or meter and the building shutoff valve, and there shall not be
intervening valves or connections. The fire department connection may be omitted
when approved by the fire department.
Automatic Fire-extinguishing Systems

Sec. 3802. (a) Where Required. An automatic fire-extinguishing system shall
be installed in the occupancies and locations as set forth in this section.
For special provisions on hazardous chemicals and magnesium, and calcium
carbide, see the Fire Code.
(b) All Occupancies Except Group R, Division 3 and Group M. Except for
Group R, Division 3 and Group M Occupancies, an automatic sprinkler system
shall be installed:
I. In every story or basement of all buildings when the floor area exceeds I 500
square feet and there is not provided at least 20 square feet of opening
entirely above the adjoining ground level in each 50 lineal feet or fraction
thereof of exterior wall in the story or basement on at least one side of the
building. Openings shall have a minimum dimension of not less than 30
inches. Such openings shall be accessible to the fire department from the
exterior and shall not be obstructed in a manner that fire fighting or rescue
cannot be accomplished from the exterior.
When openings in a story are provided on only one side and the opposite
wall of such story is more than 75 feet from such openings, the story shall be
provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system, or openings as
specified above shall be provided on at least two sides of an exterior wall of
the story.
If any portion of a basement is located more than 75 feet from openings
required in this section, the basement shall be provided with an approved
automatic sprinkler system.
2. At the top of rubbish and linen chutes and in their terminal rooms. Chutes
extending through three or more floors shall have additional sprinkler heads
installed within such chutes at alternate floors. Sprinkler heads shall be
accessible for servicing.
3. In rooms where nitrate film is stored or handled.
4. In protected combustible fiber storage vaults as defined in the Fire Code.
(c) Group A Occupancies. I. Drinking establishments. An automatic sprin-
kler system shall be installed in rooms used by the occupants for the consumption
of alcoholic beverages and unseparated accessory uses where the total area of such
unseparated rooms and assembly uses exceeds 5000 square feet. For uses to be
considered as separated, the separation shall not be less than as required for a one-
hour occupancy separation. The area of other uses shall be included unless
separated by at least a one-hour occupancy separation.
2. Basements. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in basements
classified as a Group A Occupancy when the basement is larger than 1500 square
feet in floor area.
681
3. Exhibition and display rooms. An automatic sprinkler system shall be

installed in Group A Occupancies which have more than 12,000 square feet of
floor area which can be used for exhibition or display purposes.
4. Stairs. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in enclosed usable
space below or over a stairway in Group A, Divisions 2, 2.1, 3 and 4 Occupan-
cies. See Section 3309 (f).
5. Other areas. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed under the
roof and gridiron, in the tie and fly galleries and in all places behind the prosce-
nium wall of stages; over and within permanent platforms in excess of 500 square
feet in area; and in dressing rooms, workshops and storerooms accessory to such
stages or permanent platforms.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Stages or platforms open to the auditorium room on three or
more sides.
2. Altars, pulpits or similar platforms and their accessory rooms.
3. Stage gridirons when side-wall sprinklers with 135°F. rated heads with heat-
baffle plates are installed around the entire perimeter of the stage except for the
proscenium opening at points not more than 30 inches below the gridiron nor more
than 6 inches below the baffle plate.
4. Under stage or under platform areas less than 4 feet in clear height used
exclusively for chair or table storage and lined on the inside with materials approved
for one-hour fire-resistive construction.
(d) Group B, Division 2 Occupancies. An automatic sprinkler system shall be

installed in retail sales rooms classed as Group B, Division 2 Occupancies where
the floor area exceeds 12,000 square feet on any floor or 24,000 square feet on all
floors or in Group B, Division 2 retail sales occupancies more than three stories in
height. The area of mezzanines shall be included in determining the areas where
sprinklers are required.
(e) GroupE Occupancies. I. Basements. An automatic sprinkler system shall
be installed in basements classified as a GroupE Occupancy when the basement is
larger than 1500 square feet in floor area.
2. Stairs. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in enclosed usable
space below or over a stairway in GroupE Occupancies. See Section 3309 (f).
I (f) Group H Occupancies. I. General. An automatic fire-extinguishing

system shall be installed in Group H, Divisions I, 2, 3 and 7 Occupancies.
2. Division 4. An automatic fire-extinguishing system shall be installed in
i Group H, Division 4 Occupancies having a floor area of more than 3000 square
I feet.
3. Division 6. An automatic fire-extinguishing system shall be installed
throughout buildings containing Group H, Division 6 Occupancies. The design of
the sprinkler system shall be not less than that required under U. B.C. Standard
No. 38-1 for the occupancy hazard classifications as follows:
682
1988 EDITION 3802-3804
OCCUPANCY HAZARD
LOCATION CLASSIFICATION
Fabrication areas Ordinary Hazard Group 3

Service corridors Ordinary Hazard Group 3
Storage rooms without dispensing Ordinary Hazard Group 3
Storage rooms with dispensing Extra Hazard Group 2
Exit corridors Ordinary Hazard Group 3 1
'When the design area of the sprinkler system consists of a corridor protected by one row
of sprinklers, the maximum number of sprinklers that need be calculated is 13.
(g) Group I Occupancies. An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed in

Group I Occupancies.
EXCEPTION: In jails, prisons and reformatories, the piping system may be dry.
provided a manually operated valve is installed at a continuously monitored location.
.
Opening of the valve will cause the piping system to be charged. Sprinkler heads in
such systems shall be equipped with fusible elements or the system shall be designed
as required for deluge systems in U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1.
(h) Group R, Division 1 Occupancies. An automatic sprinkler system shall be
installed throughout every apartment house three or more stories in height or
containing more than 15 dwelling units, and every hotel three or more stories in
height or containing 20 or more guest rooms. Residential or quick-response
standard sprinkler heads shall be used in the dwelling unit and guest room portions
of the building.
Sprinkler System Supervision Alarms

Sec. 3803. Automatic sprinkler systems shall be supervised by an approved
central, proprietary or remote station service or a local alarm which will give an
audible signal at a constantly attended location when the number of sprinklers is:
I. 20 or more in Group I, Division I Occupancies.
2. 100 or more in other occupancies.
Permissible Sprinkler Omissions

Sec. 3804. Subject to the approval of the building official and with the
concurrence of the chief of the fire department, sprinklers may be omitted in
rooms or areas as follows:
I. When sprinklers are considered undesirable because of the nature of the
contents or in rooms or areas which are of noncombustible construction with
wholly noncombustible contents and which are not exposed by other areas.
Sprinklers shall not be omitted from any room merely because it is damp or of fire-
resistive construction.
2. Sprinklers shall not be installed when the application of water or tlamc and
water to the contents may constitute a serious life or fire hazard, as in the
manufacture or storage of quantities of aluminum powder, calcium carbide,
calcium phosphide, metallic sodium and potassium, quicklime, magnesium pow-
der and sodium peroxide.
683
3. Safe deposit or other vaults of fire-resistive construction, when used for the
storage of records, files and other documents, when stored in metal cabinets.
4. Communication equipment areas under the exclusive control of a public
communication utility agency, provided:
A. The equipment areas are separated from the remainder of the building by
one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation; and
B. Such areas are used exclusively for such equipment; and
C. An approved automatic smoke detection system is installed in such areas
and is supervised by an approved central, proprietary or remote station
service or a local alarm which will give an audible signal at a constantly
attended location; and
D. Other approved fire-protection equipment such as portable fire extinguish-
ers or Class II standpipes are installed in such areas.
5. Other approved automatic fire-extinguishing systems may be installed to
protect special hazards or occupancies in lieu of automatic sprinklers.
Standpipes
Sec. 3805. (a) General. Standpipes shall comply with the requirements of this
section and U.B.C. Standard No. 38-2.
(b) Where Required. Standpipe systems shall be provided as set forth in Table
No. 38-A.
(c) Location of Class I Standpipes. There shall be a Class I standpipe outlet
connection at every floor-levellanding of every required stairway above or below
grade and on each side of the wall adjacent to the exit opening of a horizontal exit.
Outlets at stairways shall be located within the exit enclosure or, in the case of
smokeproof enclosures, within the vestibule or exterior balcony, giving access to
the stairway.
Risers and laterals of Class I standpipe systems not located within an enclosed
stairway or smokeproof enclosure shall be protected by a degree of fire resistance
equal to that required for vertical enclosures in the building in which they are
located.
EXCEPTION: In buildings equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system, risers and laterals which are not located within an enclosed stairway or
smokeproof enclosure need not be enclosed within fire-resistive construction.
There shall be at least one outlet above the roof line when the roof has a slope of
less than 4 inches in 12 inches.
In buildings where more than one standpipe is provided, the standpipes shall be
interconnected at the bottom.
(d) Location of Class II Standpipes. Class II standpipe outlets shall be
accessible and shall be located so that all portions ofthe building are within 30 feet
of a nozzle attached to I 00 feet of hose.
In Group A, Divisions I, 2 and 2.1 Occupancies, with occupant loads of more
than I 000, outlets shall be located on each side of any stage, on each side of the
rear of the auditorium and on each side of the balcony.
684
1988 EDITION 3805-3807
Fire-resistant protection of risers and laterals of Class II standpipe systems is

not required.
(e) Location of Class III Standpipes. Class III standpipe systems shall have
outlets located as required for Class I standpipes in Section 3805 (c) and shall have
Class II outlets as required in Section 3805 (d).
Risers and laterals of Class III standpipe systems shall be protected as required
for Class I systems.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In buildings equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system. risers and laterals which are not located within an enclosed stairway or
smokcproof enclosure need not be enclosed within fire-resistive construction.
2. Laterals for Class II outlets on Class lli systems need not be protected.
In buildings where more than one Class III standpipe is provided, the stand-
pipes shall be interconnected at the bottom.
Buildings Under Construction

Sec. 3806. (a) General. During the construction of a building and until the
permanent fire-extinguishing system has been installed and is in service, fire
protection shall be provided in accordance with this section.
(b) Where Required. Every building six stories or more in height shall be
provided with not less than one standpipe for use during construction. Such
standpipes shall be installed when the progress of construction is not more than 50
feet in height above grade. Such standpipe shall be provided with fire department
hose connections at accessible locations adjacent to usable stairs and the stand-
pipe outlets shall be located adjacent to such usable stairs. Such standpipe systems
shall be extended as construction progresses to within one floor of the highest
point of construction having secured decking or flooring.
In each floor there shall be provided a 2112-inch valve outlet for fire department
usc. Where construction height requires installation of a Class III standpipe, fire
pumps and water main connections shall be provided to serve the standpipe.
(c) Temporary Standpipes. Temporary standpipes may be provided in place
of permanent systems if they are designed to furnish 75 gallons of water per
minute at 50 pounds per square inch pressure with a standpipe size of not less than
4 inches. All outlets shall be not less than 2112 inches. Pumping equipment
sufficient to provide this pressure and volume shall be available at all times when a
Class III standpipe system is required.
(d) Detailed Requirements. Standpipe systems for buildings under construc-
tion shall be installed as required for permanent standpipe systems.
Basement Pipe Inlets

Sec. 3807. For basement pipe inlet requirements, see Appendix Section 3807.
685
TABLE NO. 38-A-STANDPIPE REQUIREMENTS

NONSPRINKLERED SPRINKLERED
BUILDING1 BUILDING23
Standpipe Hose Standpipe Hose
OCCUPANCY Class Requirement Class Requirement
I. Occupancies exceeding !50 ft.

in height and more than one III Yes I No
story
j
2. Occupancies 4 stories or more [I and II 4 ] I No
but less than !50 ft. in height, Yes
(or III)
except Group R. Div. 3
3. Group A Occupancies with No
II Yes No
occupant load exceeding 10006 requirement
4. Group A, Div. 2.1 Occupancies
over 5000 square feet in area II Yes II Yes
used for exhibition
5. Groups I, H, B, Div. I, 2 or 3
Occupancies less than 4 stories No
II• Yes No
in height but greater than 20,000 requirement
square feet per floor
'Except as otherwise specified in Item No. 4 of this table, Class II standpipes need not be
provided in basements having an automatic fire-extinguishing system throughout.
'Combined systems with their related water supplies may be used in sprinklered buildings.
'Portions of otherwise sprinklered buildings which are not protected by automatic sprinklers
shall have Class II standpipes installed as required for the unsprinklered portions.
4 ln open structures where Class II standpipes may be damaged by freezing, the building
official may authorize the use of Class I standpipes which are located as required for Class
II standpipes.
'Hose is required for Class II standpipes only.
"Class II standpipes need not be provided in assembly areas used solely for worship.
686
1988 EDITION 3901
Chapter 39
STAGES AND PLATFORMS
Scope
Sec. 3901. (a) General. Platforms and stages shall conform with the require-
ments of this chapter.
follows:
BATTEN is a flown metal pipe or shape on which lights or scenery are
fastened.
DROP is a large piece of scenic canvas or cloth which hangs vertically, usually
across the stage area.
FLY is the space over the stage of a theater where scenery and equipment can be
hung out of view. Also called lofts and rigging lofts.
FLY GALLERY is a narrow raised platform at the side of legitimate stage
from which the lines for flying scenery are manipulated.
GRIDIRON is the arrangement of beams over a legitimate stage supporting
the machinery for flying scenery and hanging battens from which lighting is
hung.
eit~!~r ~!~~d~sa;~~~ ~~~r~;~~!: i~r:~~~~i~~~~:~~~;!~!~~~':n~;; ~~~:t~~ ·.i·.'',~.·':

stage by the actors. It is also used to mask the side stage area. They may also be
called "wings."
PINRAIL is a beam at one side of a legitimate stage through which wooden or
metal pins are driven and to which lines from the flies are fastened.
PLATFORM is that raised area within a building used for the presentation of
music, plays or other entertainment; the head table for special guests, the raised
area for lectures and speakers; boxing and wrestling rings; theater in the round;
and similar purposes wherein there are not overhead hanging curtains, drops,
scenery or stage effects other than lighting.
PLATFORM, PERMANENT, is a platform used within an area for more than
30days.
PLATFORM, TEMPORARY, is a platform used within an area for not more
than 30 days.
PROSCENIUM WALL is the wall that separates the stage from the audito-
rium or house.
STAGE is a partially enclosed area within a building used for the purpose of
entertainment and shall be classified as either:
Stage, Legitimate, is a stage wherein curtains, drops, leg drops, scenery,
lighting devices or other stage effects are retractable horizontally or suspended
overhead.
Stage, Regular, is a stage wherein curtains, fixed leg drops, valances, scenery
and other stage effects are hung and are not usually retractable.
687
Stage, Thrust, is a platform extending beyond the proscenium arch and into
the audience.
THEATER-IN-THE-ROUND is an acting area in the middle of a room with
the audience sitting all around it.
(c) Materials and Design. Materials used in the construction of platforms and
stages shall conform to the applicable materials and design requirements as set
forth in this code.
Platforms
Sec. 3902. Temporary platforms may be constructed of any materials. The
space between the floor and the platform above shall not be used for any purpose
other than electrical wiring to platform equipment.
Permanent platforms shall be constructed of materials as required for the type
of construction of the building in which the permanent platform is located. When
the space beneath the permanent platform is used for storage or any purpose other
than equipment wiring or plumbing, the floor construction shall be not less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction. When the space beneath the permanent
platform is not used for any purpose other than equipment wiring or plumbing, the
underside of the permanent platform need not be protected.
Stages
Sec. 3903. (a) Construction. Regular stages and thrust stages shall be con-
structed of materials as required for the type of construction of the building in
which it is located. In all cases the finish floor may be of wood.
Legitimate stages shall be constructed of materials as required for a l)'pe I or II
F.R. building. Legitimate stage floors may be constructed with a wood floor of
not less than 2 inches in nominal thickness on a resilient mounting upon a concrete
or masonry floor.
Openings through stage floors (traps) shall be equipped with tight-fitting trap
doors of wood having a nominal thickness of not less than 2 inches with approved
safety locks.
(b) Accessory Rooms. Dressing rooms, workshops and store rooms accessory
to stages shall be separated from each other and from the stage by not less than
one-hour fire-resistive construction, and openings within such separations shall
be protected as required for corridors.
EXCEPTION: A separation is not required for stages having a floor area not
exceeding 500 square feet.
(c) Vents. Stages exceeding 500 square feet in floor area shall be provided with
one or more vents constructed of noncombustible material. Vents shall be located
near the center and above the highest part of any stage. They shall be raised above
the stage roof and shall have a total vent area equal to at least 5 percent of the floor
area of the stage.
The vents shall open by spring action or force of gravity sufficient to overcome
the effects of neglect, rust, dirt, frost, snow or expansion by heat or warping of the
framework. Glass, if used in vents, must be protected against falling onto the
688
1988 EDITION 3903
stage. A wire screen, if used under the glass, must be so placed that, if clogged, it
cannot reduce the required venting area or interfere with the operating mechanism
or obstruct the distribution of water from an automatic sprinkler. Vents shall be
arranged to open automatically by the use of fusible links. The fusible links and
operating cable shall hold each door closed against the minimum 30-pound
counterforce which may be exerted by springs or counterweights. This minimum
counterforce shall be exerted on each door through its entire arc of travel and for a
minimum of !55 degrees. A manual control shall be provided.
Springs, when employed to actuate vent doors, shall be capable of maintaining
full required tension. Springs shall not be stressed more than 50 percent of their
rated capacity and shall not be located directly in the airstream nor exposed to the
outside.
A fusible link shall be placed in the cable control system on the underside of the
vent at or above the roof line or as approved by the building official and shall be so
located as not to be affected by the operation of an automatic sprinkler system.
Remote, manual or electrical controls shall provide for both opening and closing
of the vent doors for periodic testing and shall be located at a point on the stage
designated by the building official. When remote control vents are electrical,
power failure shall not affect its instant operation in the event of fire. Hand
winches may be employed to facilitate operation of manually controlled vents.
Curbs for vents shall be as required for skylights.
(d) Proscenium Walls. Legitimate stages shall be completely separated from
the seating area by a proscenium wall of not less than two-hour fire-resistive
noncombustible construction. The proscenium wall shall extend at least 4 feet
above the roof of the auditorium.
Proscenium walls may have, in addition to the main proscenium opening, one
opening at the orchestra pit level and not more than two openings into the
auditorium at the stage floor level. Each of the latter two openings shall be not
more than 25 square feet in area.
All openings in the proscenium wall of a legitimate stage shall be protected by a
fire assembly having a one- and one-half-hour fire-resistive rating. Closing
devices on such assemblies shall be located where the vents or ducts pass through
the proscenium walls and shall be operated by fusible links located on both sides
of the proscenium wall and both inside of and outside of the vent or duct. The main
proscenium opening used for viewing performances shall be provided with an
automatic-closing fire-resistive curtain as provided in U. 8. C. Standard No. 6-1 .
In lieu of such fire-resistive curtain, a woven high-temperature coated fiberglass
fabric weighing a minimum of 23/s pounds per square yard with a minimum warp
and fill tensile strength of 400 pounds per inch reinforced with noncorrosive wire
may be used. Such curtain materials shall conform to the following conditions:
I . The construction materials used for the curtain shall be noncombustible and
noncorrosive.
2. The curtain shall be tested in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 17-3.
The time period for testing shall be not less than 30 minutes, and the
unexposed portion of the test sample shall not show any evidence of through
689
penetrations, flaming nor excessive smoking (only the vapors escaping as a

result of baking the sample).
3. The curtain shall be listed by an approved agency with a permanent marking
giving the manufacturer's name, the approved agency's name or insignia,
the rating achieved, and a statement that the curtain shall be installed in
4. Curtain materials shall have a smoke density no greater than 10 when tested
in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
(e) Gridirons, Fly Galleries and Pinrails. Gridirons, fly galleries and pinrails
shall be constructed of noncombustible material.
(f) Special Exiting. Each side of a legitimate stage shall be provided with at
least one well-marked exit providing not less than 32 inches clear width. Such exit
shall open directly to a street, exit court or exit passageway leading to a street.
Fly galleries shall be provided with an exit stair not less than 30 inches in width.
Each tier of dressing rooms shall be provided with two exits meeting the require-
ments of Chapter 33.
Stairways required by this subsection need not be enclosed.
690
1988 EDITION 4001-4005
Chapter40
MOTION PICTURE PROJECTION ROOMS
General
Sec. 4001. (a) Scope. The provisions of this chapter shall apply where ribbon-
type cellulose acetate or other safety film is used in conjunction with electric arc,
Xenon or other light-source projection equipment which develops hazardous
gases, dust or radiation. Where cellulose nitrate film is used, projection rooms
shall comply with the Fire Code.
(b) Projection Room Required. Every motion picture machine projecting
film as mentioned within the scope of this chapter shall be enclosed in a projection
room. Appurtenant electrical equipment, such as rheostats, transformers and
generators, may be within the projection room or in an adjacent room of equiva-
lent construction.
There shall be posted on the outside of each projection room door and within the
projection room itself a conspicuous sign with l-inch block letters stating:
SAFETY FILM ONLY PERMITTED IN THIS ROOM.
Construction
Sec. 4002. Every projection room shall be of permanent construction consist-
ent with the construction requirements for the type of building in which the
projection room is located. Openings need not be protected.
The room shall have a floor area of not less than 80 square feet for a single
machine and at least 40 square feet for each additional machine. Each motion
picture projector, floodlight, spotlight or similar piece of equipment shall not be
used unless approved and shall have a clear working space not less than 30 inches
by 30 inches on each side and at the rear thereof, but only one such space shall be
required between two adjacent projectors.
The projection room and the rooms appurtenant thereto shall have a ceiling
height of not less than 7 feet 6 inches.
Exits
Sec. 4003. Exits shall be provided as required in Chapter 33. Motion picture
projections rooms used for projection of safety film only are required to have only
one exit.
Projection Ports and Openings
Sec. 4004. The aggregate of openings for projection equipment shall not
exceed 25 percent of the area of the wall between the projection room and the
auditorium.
All openings shall be provided with glass or other approved material so as to
completely close the opening.
Ventilation
Sec. 4005. (a) General. Ventilation shall be provided in accordance with the
provisions of this section.
691
(b) Projection Booth. I. Supply air. Each projection room shall be provided
with adequate air-supply inlets so arranged as to provide well-distributed air
throughout the room. Air-inlet ducts shall provide an amount of air equivalent to
I the amount of air being exhausted by projection equipment. Air may be taken
from the outside; from adjacent spaces within the building. provided the volume
and infiltration rate is sufficient; or from the building air-conditioning system.
provided it is so arranged as to provide sufficient air when other systems arc not in
operation.
2. Exhaust air. Projection booths may be exhausted through the lamp exhaust
system. The lamp exhaust system shall be positively interconnected with the lamp
so that the lamp will not operate unless there is the air flow required for the lamp.
Exhaust air ducts shall terminate at the exterior of the building in such a location
that the exhaust air cannot be readily recirculated into any air-supply system. The
projection room ventilation system may also serve appurtenant rooms such as the
generator room and the rewind room.
Each projection machine shall be provided with an exhaust duct that will draw
air from each lamp and exhaust it directly to the outside of the building. The lamp
exhaust may serve to exhaust air from the projection room to provide room air
circulation. Such ducts shall be of rigid materials, except for a flexible connector
approved for the purpose. The projection lamp or projection room exhaust system
or both may be combined but shall not be interconnected with any other exhaust or
return system, or both, within the building.
(c) Projection Equipment Ventilation. Each projection machine shall be
provided with an exhaust duct which will draw air from each lamp and exhaust it
directly to the outside of the building in such a fashion that it will not be picked up
by supply inlets. Such a duct shall be of rigid materials, except for a continuous
flexible connector approved for the purpose. The lamp exhaust system shall not be
interconnected with any other system.
I . Electric arc projection equipment. The exhaust capacity shall be 200
cubic feet per minute for each lamp connected to the lamp exhaust system, or as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Auxiliary air may be introduced
into the system through a screened opening to stabilize the arc.
2. Xenon projection equipment. The lamp exhaust system shall exhaust not
less than 300 cubic feet per minute per lamp nor less than that exhaust volume
required or recommended by the equipment manufacturer, whichever is the
greater. The external temperature of the lamp housing shall not exceed 130°F.
when operating.
Miscellaneous Equipment
Sec. 4006. Each projection room shall be provided with rewind and film
storage facilities.
A maximum of four containers for flammable liquids not greater than 16-ouncc
capacity and of a nonbreakable type may be permitted in each projection booth.
Sanitary Facilities
Sec. 4007. Every projection room shall be provided with a lavatory. Every
692
1988 EDITION 4007
projection room serving an assembly occupancy shall be provided with a water

closet.
EXCEPTION: A water closet shall not be required in a projection room where
completely automated projection equipment is installed which docs not require a
projectionist in attendance for projection or rewinding film.
Chapter41
(SEE UNIFORM BUILDING SECURITY CODETM)
693
Part VII
FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS FOR
FIRE PROTECTION
Chapter42
INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH
General
Sec. 4201. Interior wall and ceiling finish shall mean interior wainscoting,
paneling or other finish applied structurally or for decoration, acoustical correc-
tion, surface insulation or similar purposes. Requirements for finishes in this
chapter shall not apply to trim defined as picture molds, chair rails, baseboards
and handrails; to doors and windows or their frames, nor to materials which are
less than 1/zs inch in thickness cemented to the surface of walls or ceilings, if these
materials have surface-burning characteristics no greater than paper of this thick-
ness cemented to a noncombustible backing.
Foam plastics shall not be used as interior finish except as provided in Section
1712. For foam plastic trim, see Section 1705 (e).
Testing and Classification of Materials
Sec. 4202. (a) Testing. Tests shall be made by an approved testing agency to
establish surface-burning characteristics and to show that materials when ce-
mented or otherwise fastened in place will not readily become detached when
subjected to room temperatures of 300°F. for 25 minutes. Surface-burning charac-
teristics shall be determined by one of the following methods:
I. The surface-burning characteristics as set forth in U .B.C. Standard No. 42-1.
2. Any other recognized method of test procedure for determining the surface-
burning characteristics of finish materials that will give comparable results to
those specified in method No. I above.
(b) Classification. The classes of materials based upon their flame-spread
index shall be as set forth in Table No. 42- A. The smoke density shall be no greater
than 450 when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1 in the way
intended for use.
Application of Controlled Interior Finish
Sec. 4203. Interior finish materials applied to walls and ceilings shall be tested
as specified in Section 4202 and regulated for purposes of limiting surface-
burning by the following provisions:
I. When walls and ceilings are required by any provision in this code to be of
fire-resistive or noncombustible construction, the finish material shall be applied
directly against such fire-resistive or noncombustible construction or to furring
strips not exceeding P/4 inches applied directly against such surfaces. The inter-
vening spaces between such furring strips shall be filled with inorganic or Class I
material or shall be fire-stopped not to exceed 8 feet in any direction.
694
1988 EDITION 4203-4205
2. Where walls and ceilings are required to be of fire-resistive or noncombusti-

ble construction and walls are set out or ceilings are dropped distances greater than
specified in paragraph I of this section, Class I finish materials shall be used
except where the finish materials are protected on both sides by automatic
sprinkler systems or are attached to a noncombustible backing or to furring strips
installed as specified in paragraph I. The hangers and assembly members of such
dropped ceilings that are below the main ceiling line shall be of noncombustible
materials except that in Types III and V construction fire-retardant treated wood
may be used. The construction of each set-out wall shall be of fire-resistive
construction as required elsewhere in this code. See Section 2516 (f) for fire and
draft stops.
3. Wall and ceiling finish materials of all classes as permitted in this chapter
may be installed directly against the wood decking or planking of Type IV heavy-
timber construction or to wood furring strips applied directly to the wood decking
or planking installed and fire-stopped as specified in paragraph I.
4. All interior wall or ceiling finish other than Class I material which is less
than l/4 inch thick shall be applied directly against a noncombustible backing
unless the qualifying tests were made with the material suspended from the
noncombustible backing.
Maximum Allowable Flame Spread

Sec. 4204. (a) General. The maximum flame-spread class of finish materials
used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 42-B.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Except in Group I Occupancies and in enclosed vertical
exitways, Class III may be used in other exitways and rooms as wainscoting
extending not more than 48 inches above the floor and for tack and bulletin boards
covering not more than 5 percent of the gross wall area of the room.
2. Where approved sprinkler system protection is provided, the flame-spread
classification rating may be reduced one classification, but in no case shall materials
having a classification greater than Class III be used.
3. The exposed faces of Type IV-H.T., structural members and Type IV-H.T.,
decking and planking, where otherwise permissible under this code are excluded
from flame-spread requirements.
(b) Carpeting on Ceilings. When used as interior ceiling finish, carpeting and mi
similar materials having a napped, tufted, looped or similar surface shall have a l
Class I flame spread. 11!
Textile Wall Coverings !!.

Sec. 4205. When used as interior wall finish, textile wall coverings, including l\J
materials such as those having a napped, tufted, looped, nonwoven, woven or ~,,,
similar surface shall comply with the following: ~·
I. !;~tt~~~e~~~~ ~~t~%~f~ s~~f~~l~~~.e 0

: Class I flame spread and shall be
2. The textile wall covering shall meet the acceptance criteria of U. 8. C.
'. :,,,j·'·
..
''.:·...
:t··*·,:.:'.".:.,;l:,
~·
.. · ..
· ·'
Standard No. 42-2 when tested using a product mounting system, including
adhesive, representative of actual use.
695
42-A, 42-B UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 42-A-FLAME-SPREAD CLASSIFICATION

MATERIAL QUALIFIED BY:
Claaa Flame-spread Index
I 0-25
II 26-75
III 76-200
TABLE NO. 42-B-MAXIMUM FLAME-SPREAD CLASS 1

ENCLOSED
OCCUPANCY VERTICAL OTHER ROOMS OR
GROUP EXITWAYS EXITWAYS2 AREAS
A I II IJ3
E I II III
I I J7 II•
H I II IIP
B I II III
R-1 I II III
R-3 III III III6
M NO RESTRICTIONS
1Foam plastics shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 1712. Carpeting on
ceilings and textile wall coverings shall comply with the requirements specified in
Sections 4204 (b) and 4205, respectively.
2Finish classification is not applicable to interior walls and ceilings of exterior exit bal-
conies.
'in Group A, Divisions 3 and 4 Occupancies, Class III may be used.
4 ln rooms in which personal liberties of inmates are forcibly restrained, Class I material only
shall be used.
'Over two stories shall be of Class II.
6flame-spread provisions are not applicable to kitchens and bathrooms of Group R, Division
3 Occupancies.
7 ln Group I. Divisions 2 and 3 Occupancies, Class II may be used or Class III when the
Division 2 or 3 is sprinklered.
696
1988 EDITION 4301-4302
Chapter43
FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS
General
Sec. 4301. In addition to all the other requirements of this code, fire-resistive
materials shall meet the requirements for fire-resistive construction given in this
chapter.
Fire-resistive Materials and Systems

Sec. 4302. (a) General. Materials and systems used for fire-resistive purposes
shall be limited to those specified in this chapter unless accepted under the
procedure given in Section 4302 (b) or 4302 (c). For standards referred to in this
chapter, see Chapter 60.
The materials and details of construction for the fire-resistive systems de-
scribed in this chapter shall be in accordance with all other provisions of this code
except as modified herein.
For the purpose of determining the degree of fire resistance afforded, the
materials of construction listed in this chapter shall be assumed to have the fire-
resistance rating indicated in Table No. 43-A, 43-B or 43-C.
As an alternate to Tables Nos. 43-A, B and C, fire-resistive construction may
be approved by the building official on the basis of evidence submitted by the
person responsible for the structural design showing that the construction meets
the required fire-resistive classification.
(b) Qualification by Testing. Material or assembly of materials of construc-
tion tested in accordance with the requirements set forth in U .B.C. Standard No.
43-1 shall be rated for fire resistance in accordance with the results and conditions
of such tests.
EXCEPTION: The acceptance criteriaofU .B.C. Standard No. 43-1 for exterior
bearing walls shall not be required to be greater with respect to heat transmission and
passage of flame or hot gases than would be required of a non bearing wall in the same
building with the same distance to the property line. The fire exposure time period,
water pressure and duration of application for the hose stream test shall be based
upon the fire-resistive rating determined by this exception.
Fire-resistive assemblies tested under U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 shall not be
considered to be restrained unless evidence satisfactory to the building official is
furnished by the person responsible for the structural design showing that the
construction qualifies for a restrained classification in accordance with U. B. C.
Standard No. 43-1. Restrained construction shall be identified on the plans.
(c) Calculating Fire Resistance. The fire-resistive rating of a material or
assembly may be established by calculations. The procedures used for such
calculations shall be in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 43-9.
(d) Concrete.
CARBONATE AGGREGATE CONCRETE is concrete made with aggre-
gates consisting mainly of calcium or magnesium carbonate, e.g., limestone or
dolomite, and containing 40 percent or Jess quartz, chert or flint.
697
~,:.· ;,:·.' LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE is concrete made with ag-

' gregates of expanded clay, shale, slag or slate or sintered fly ash and weighting 85
~'' to 115 pcf.
~ SAND-LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE is concrete made with a combination
:: of expanded clay, shale, slag or slate or sintered fly ash and natural sand. Its unit
,.. weight is generally between 105 and 120 pcf.
~.' :
,.:.' SILICEOUS AGGREGATE CONCRETE is concrete made with normal-
! weight aggregates consisting mainly of silica or compounds other than calcium or
magnesium carbonate, and may contain more than 40 percent quartz, chert or
:i' flint.
(e) Shhotchrete. Shotcrete wdithout coarse aggregate shall be classified in accord-
l,:.':l,i.
:
ance wit t e aggregate use .
Protection of Structural Members
Sec. 4303. (a) General. Structural members having the fire-resistive protec-
tion set forth in Table No. 43-A shall be assumed to have the fire-resistance ratings
set forth therein.
(b) Protective Coverings. I. Thickness of protection. The thickness of fire-
resistive materials required for protection of structural members shall be not less
than set forth in Table No. 43-A, except as modified in this section. The figures
shown shall be the net thickness of the protecting materials and shall not include
any hollow space back of the protection.
2. Unit masonry protection. Where required, metal ties shall be embedded in
transverse joints of unit masonry for protection of steel columns. Such ties shall
be as set forth in Table No. 43-A or be equivalent thereto.
3. Reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete column protection. Cast-in-
place concrete protection for steel columns shall be reinforced at the edges of such
members with wire ties of not less than . 18 inch in diameter wound spirally around
the columns on a pitch of not more than 8 inches or by equivalent reinforcement.
4. Embedment of pipes. Conduits and pipes shall not be embedded in re-
quired fire protection of structural members.
5. Column jacketing. Where the fire-resistive covering on columns is ex-
posed to injury from moving vehicles, the handling of merchandise or other
means, it shall be protected in an approved manner.
6. Ceiling protection. Where a ceiling forms the protective membrane for
fire-resistive assemblies, the constructions and their supporting horizontal struc-
tural members need not be individually fire protected except where such members
support directly applied loads from more than one floor or roof. The required fire
resistance shall be not Jess than that required for individual protection of mem-
bers.
Ceilings shall form continuous fire-resistive membranes but may have open-
ings for copper, sheet steel or ferrous plumbing pipes, ducts and electrical outlet
boxes, provided the areas of such openings through the ceiling aggregate not more
than 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of ceiling area. Regardless of size,
duct openings in such ceilings shall be protected by approved ceiling fire
698
1988 EDITION 4303
dampers. Access doors installed in such ceilings shall be approved horizontal U

access door assemblies listed for such purpose. l,i:
EXCEPTIONS: I. Larger openings than permitted above may be installed
where such openings and the assemblies in which they are utilized are in accordance
with the results of tests pursuant to the provisions of Section 4302 (b).
2. Ceiling fire dampers may be omitted from duct openings where fire-resistive 1::
tests have shown that fire dampers are not necessary to maintain the fire resistance of ·.~ ;,:.1 ,:.
the assembly.
Individual electrical outlet boxes shall be of steel and not greater than 16 square
inches in area.
7. Plaster application. Plaster protective coatings may be applied with the
finish coat omitted when they comply with the design mix and thickness require-
ments of Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and 43-C.
8. Truss protection. Where trusses are used as all or part of the structural frame
and protection is required by Table No. 17-A, such protection may be provided by
fire-resistive materials enclosing the entire truss assembly on all sides for its
entire length and height. The required thickness and construction of fire-resistive
assemblies enclosing trusses shall be based upon the results of full-scale tests or
combinations of tests on truss components or upon approved calculations based
on such tests which satisfactorily demonstrate that the assembly has the required
fire resistance.
(c) Protected Members. I. Attached metal members. The edges of lugs,
brackets, rivets and bolt heads attached to structural members may extend to
within 1 inch of the surface of the fire protection.
2. Reinforcing. Thickness of protection for concrete or masonry reinforce-
ment shall be measured to the outside of the reinforcement except that stirrups and
spiral reinforcement ties may project not more than Ifz inch into the protection.
3. Bonded prestressed concrete tendons. For members having a single ten-
don or more than one tendon installed with equal concrete cover measured from
the nearest surface, the cover shall be not less than that set forth in Table
No. 43-A.
For members having multiple tendons installed with variable concrete cover,
the average tendon cover shall be not less than that set forth in Table No. 43-A,
provided:
A. The clearance from each tendon to the nearest exposed surface is used to
determine the average cover.
B. In no case can the clear cover for individual tendons be less than one half of
that set forth in Table No. 43-A. A minimum cover of 3f4 inch for slabs and
I inch for beams is required for any aggregate concrete.
C. For the purpose of establishing a fire-resistive rating, tendons having a
clear covering less than that set forth in Table No. 43-A shall not contribute
more than 50 percent of the required ultimate moment capacity for mem-
bers less than 350 square inches in cross-sectional area and 65 percent for
larger members. For structural design purposes, however, tendons having a
reduced cover are assumed to be fully effective.
699
(d) Fire Protection Omitted. Fire protection may be omitted from the bottom
flange of lintels spanning not over 6 feet, shelf angles, or plates that are not a part
of the structural frame.
(e) Spray-applied Fireproofing. The density and thickness of spray-applied
fireproofing shall be determined following the procedures set forth in U. 8. C.
Standard No. 43-8.
walls and Partitions
Sec. 4304. (a) General. Fire-resistive walls and partitions shall be assumed to
have the fire-resistance ratings set forth in Table No. 43-8.
(b) Combustible Members. Combustible members framed into a wall shall
be protected at their ends by not less than one half the required fire-resistive
thickness of such wall.
(c) Exterior Walls. In fire-resistive exterior wall construction the fire-
resistive rating shall be maintained for such walls passing through attic areas.
(d) Nonsymmetrical Wall Construction. Walls and partitions of nonsymmet-
rical construction shall be tested with both faces exposed to the furnace, and the
assigned fire-resistive rating will be the shortest duration obtained from the two
tests conducted in conformance with U. 8. C. Standard No. 43-1 . When evidence
is furnished to show that the wall was tested with the least fire-resistive side
exposed to the furnace, the building official may not require that the wall be
subjected to tests from the opposite side.
(c) Penetrations. Penetrations in walls requiring protected openings shall be
fire stopped. Fircstopping shall be of an approved material securely installed and
capable of maintaining its integrity when subjected to test temperatures pre-
scribed in U.8.C. Standard No. 43-1 for the specific wall or partition.
Openings in walls and partitions shall be protected as specified in Section 4306.
Where fire-rated walls and partitions require protected openings, the following
penetrations into or through such construction are permitted:
I. Copper or ferrous pipes or conduits may penetrate the walls or partitions.
provided fires topping is provided in accordance with the first paragraph of this
section.
2. Openings for steel electrical outlet boxes not exceeding 16 square inches in
area, provided the area of such openings does not aggregate more than I 00 square
inches for any I 00 square feet of wall or partition area. Outlet boxes on opposite
sides of walls or partitions shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24 inches.
3. Where walls arc penetrated by other materials or where larger openings are
required than permitted in Item 2 above, they shall be qualified by tests conducted
in accordance with the provisions of Section 4302 (b).
The space between the penetrating materials described in Items I , 2 and 3 and
the wall shall be designed to prevent the movement of hot flame or gases.
Floor-Ceilings or Roof-Ceilings
Sec. 4305. (a) General. Fire-resistive floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling construc-
tion systems shall be assumed to have the fire-resistance ratings set forth in Table
700
1988 EDITION 4305-4306
No. 43-C. Penetrations in floors and ceilings requiring protected openings shall
be fire stopped. Firestopping shall be of an approved material. securely installed
and capable of maintaining its integrity when subjected to the time-temperature
curve of U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1 for the specific floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling
construction.
EXCEPTION: Where penetrations are protected as shaft enclosures as required
in Section 1706.
When materials are incorporated into an otherwise fire-resistive assembly
which may change the capacity for heat dissipation, fire test results or other
substantiating data shall be made available to the building official to show that the
required fire-resistive time period is not reduced.
(b) Floors. Fire-resistive floors shall be continuous and all openings for me-
chanical and electrical equipment shall be enclosed as specified in Section 1706.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Occasional pipes, conduits, sleeves and electrical outlets of
copper, sheet steel or ferrous construction may be installed within or through fire-
resistive floor systems, provided such installations do not unduly impair the required
fire resistance of the assembly. The space between the pipe, conduit and sleeves and
the floor shall be designed to prevent the movement of hot flame or gases.
2. The provisions of this section shall not apply when such openings are in
accordance with the results of tests conducted pursuant to the provisions of Section
4302 (b).
(c) Roofs. Fire-resistive roofs may have the same openings as permitted for
floors and may contain other openings as permitted by this code. See Chapter 34
for skylight construction.
(d) Ceiling Panels. Where the weight of lay-in roof-ceiling panels, used as
part of fire-resistive floor-ceiling assemblies is not adequate to resist an upward
force of one pound per square foot, wire or other approved devices shall be
installed above the panels to prevent vertical displacement under such upward
force.
(e) Wiring in Plenums. Wiring in plenums shall comply with the Mechanical
Code.
Fire-resistive Assemblies for Protection of Openings
Sec. 4306. (a) General. Where required by this code for the fire protection of
openings, fire-resistive assemblies shall meet the requirements of this chapter.
(b) Definitions.
FIRE ASSEMBLY is the assembly of a fire door, fire windows or fire damper,
including all required hardware, anchorage, frames and sills.
FIRE ASSEMBLY, AUTOMATIC-CLOSING, is a fire assembly which
may remain in an open position and which will close automatically when sub-
jected to one or the other of the following:
I . An increase in temperature.
Unless otherwise specified, the closing device shall be one rated at a maximum
temperature of 165°F.
2. Actuation of a smoke detector.
701
The closing device shall operate by the activation of an approved smoke

detector set to operate when smoke reduces the intensity of a 1-foot-long beam of
white light by 4 percent. Smoke detectors shall meet the approval of the building
official as to installation and locations and shall be subject to such periodic tests as
may be required by the building official.
FIRE ASSEMBLY, SELF-CLOSING, is a fire assembly which is kept in a
normally closed position and is equipped with an approved device to ensure
closing and latching after having been opened for use.
(c) Identification of Fire Doors, Fire Windows and Fire Dampers. Fire
doors, fire windows and fire dampers shall have a label or other identification
showing the fire protection rating. Such label shall be approved and shall be
permanently affixed. The label shall be applied at the factory where fabrication
and assembly are done. Inspection shall be made by an approved inspection
agency during fabrication and assembly.
Oversized fire doors may be installed when approved by the building official.
The doors shall be labeled or be furnished with a certificate of inspection from an
approved agency.
(d) Installation of Fire Assemblies. Approved fire door hardware and fire
door frames including the anchorage thereof shall be installed in accordance with
their listing. Fire dampers shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with
(e) Fire-resistive Tests. The fire-protection rating of all types of required fire
assemblies shall be determined in accordance with the requirements specified in
U.B.C. Standards Nos. 43-2,43-3,43-4 and 43-7.
(f) Hardware. 1. Closing devices. Every fire assembly shall be provided with
a closing device as follows:
A. Fire assemblies required to have a three-hour fire-protection rating shall be
automatic-closing fire assemblies. Automatic-closing fire assemblies to be
activated by an increase in temperature shall have one heat-actuating
device installed on each side of the wall at the top of the opening and one on
each side of the wall at the ceiling height where the ceiling is more than 3
feet above the top of the opening.
B. Fire assemblies required to have a one and one-half-hour, one-hour or
three-fourths-hour fire-protection rating shall be either automatic- or self-
closing fire assemblies. Automatic-closing fire assemblies to be activated
by an increase in temperature shall have heat-actuating devices located as
required in Item A or by a single fusible link in the opening incorporated in
the closing device.
C. Swinging fire door assemblies of any fire-protection rating which are
installed across a corridor shall be smoke-detector-activated automatic-
closing fire assemblies. All hold-open devices shall be an approved type
which will release the door in the event of a power failure.
D. Fire assemblies required by provisions of Chapter 33 shall have closing
devices as specified in Chapter 33.
702
Fire doors which are automatic closing by smoke detection shall not have a
closing or reclosing delay of more than I 0 seconds.
2. Hinges. Swinging fire doors shall have not less than two hinges, and when
such door exceeds 60 inches in height an additional hinge shall be installed for
each additional 30 inches of height or fraction thereof. Hinges, except for spring
hinges, shall be of the ball-bearing or antifriction type. When spring hinges are
used for door-closing purposes not less than one half of the hinges shall be spring
hinges.
3. Latch. Unless otherwise specifically permitted, all single doors and both
leaves of pairs of side-hinged swinging doors shall be provided with an automatic
latch which will secure the door when it is closed.
(g) Glazed Openings in Fire Doors. Glazed openings in fire doors shall not
be permitted in a fire assembly required to have a three-hour fire-resistive rating.
The area of glazed openings in a fire door required to have one and one-half
hour or one-hour fire-resistive rating shall be limited to I 00 square inches with a
minimum dimension of 4 inches. When both leaves of a pair of doors have
observation panels, the total area of the glazed openings shall not exceed 100
square inches for each leaf.
Glazed openings shall be limited to 1296 square inches in wood and plastic-
faced composite or hollow metal doors, per light, when fire-resistive assemblies
are required to have a three-fourths-hour fire-resistive rating.
(h) Glazed Openings in Fire Windows. Windows required to have a three-
fourths-hour fire-resistive rating may have an area not greater than 84 square feet
with neither width nor height exceeding 12 feet.
(i) Glazing. Glazing shall be glass not less than l/4 inch thick and shall be
reinforced with wire mesh No. 24 gauge or heavier embedded in the glass with
openings not larger than I inch square. Glass or glass block assemblies not
conforming to these requirements may be used when qualified by tests in accord-
ance with U .B.C. Standard No. 43-2 (for doors) or No. 43-4 (for windows). Glass
shall be held in place by steel glazing angles, except that in casement windows
wire clips may be used.
(j) Fire Dampers. Except where fire tests have shown that fire dampers are
not necessary to maintain the required fire resistance of the construction, fire
dampers complying with the requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 43-7 shall be
installed and be readily accessible for servicing in the following locations:
I. Duct penetrations of area or occupancy separation walls. When the wall is
required to have a rating of more than two hours, a fire door meeting the
requirements of U .B.C. Standard No. 43-2 is required.
2. Ducts passing through horizontal exit walls.
3. Ducts penetrating shafts.
EXCEPTION: Steel exhaust air subducts extending at least 22 inches vertically
in a vented shaft and the airflow is upward.
4. Ducts penetrating the ceiling of a fire-resistive floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling ~j
assembly shall be protected in accordance with Section 4303 (b) 6. ,,
703
5. Ducts penetrating fire-resistive elements of fire-rated corridor walls.
.. EXCEPTION: A minimum of 0.019-inch (No. 26 gauge) steel ducts do not

require dampers when the duct has no openings into the corridor.
(k) Installation. Fire assemblies shall be installed in accordance with their
listing.
(I) Signs. When required by the building official, a sign shall be displayed
permanently near or on each required fire door in letters not less than I inch high
to read as follows:
FIRE DOOR
DO NOT OBSTRUCT
Roof Coverings
Sec. 4307. Fire-retardant roof coverings shall be as specified in Table No. 32-A.
704
~
TABLE NO. 43-A-MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS FOR CD
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS• i
MINIMUM THICKNESS OF INSULATING m
MATERIAL FOR FOLLOWING
c
STRUCTURAL
PARTS TO BE ITEM
FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIOOS (In Inches) 3
0
PROTECTED NUMBER INSULATING MATERIAL USED 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr. z
1-1.1 Carbonate. lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. memocrs 2'1' 2 11/c I
6" by 6" or greater (not including sandstone. granite and siliceous gravel).'
1-1
, Carbonate. hghtweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. members 2 1'1' I I
8" by 8" or greater (not including sandstone. granite and siliceous gravel).'
1-1 .3 Carbonate. lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. members 11/c I I I
12" by 12'' or greater (not including sandstone. granite and siliceous gravel). 1
1-1.4 Silicenu~ aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item No. 1-1 .I. .'\ 2 11/c I
members 6" by 6" or greater. 1
I. Steel Columns
and All 1-1 .5 Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item No. 1-1 .I. 21/:: 2 I I
Members of members 8" by 8" or greater. 1
Primary
1-1.6 Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded In Item No. 1-1. I. 2 I I I
Trusses
members 12" by 12" or greater. 1
1-2. I Clay or shale brick with brick and mortar fill.' J.l./4 2'1•
1-3.1 4" Hollow clay tile in two 2" layers: I;," mortar between tile and column: 'lx" 4
metal mesh ( .046" wire diameter) in horizontal joints: tile fill. 1
2" Hollow clay tile: ·'14' mortar between tile and column: 3/x" metal mesh
1-3.2 ( .046" wire diameter) in horizontal joints: limestone concrete fill:' plastered 3
with -'14' gypsum plaster.
2" Hollow clay tile with outside wire ties ( .08" diameter) at each course of tile
1-33 or ·1/g" metal mesh (.046" diameter wire) in horizontal joints: limestone or 3
trap-rock concrete fill' extending I" outside column on all sides. ~
rConrinuedi
TABLE NO. 43-A-MINIMUM PROTECTION OF STRUCTURAL PARTS BASED ON TIME PERIODS FOR
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS•-(Continued)
MINIMUM THICKNESS OF INSULATING
STRUCTURAL MATERIAL FOR FOLLOWING
PARTS TO BE FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS (In Inches)
ITEM
PROTECTED NUMBER INSULATING MATERIAL USED 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
1-3.4 2" Hollow clay tile with outside wire ties (.08" diameter) at each course of tile 2
with or without concrete fill; 3f4" mortar between tile and column.
Portland cement plaster over metal lath wire tied to 314'' cold-rolled vertical
1-4.1 channels with No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced 3" to 6" on center. Plaster mixed 2 112 2 7J8
I :2 1/2 by volume. cement to sand.

I. Steel Columns Vermiculite concrete, I :4 mix by volume over paperbacked wire fabric lath
and All wrapped directly around column with additional 2" by 2" No. 16116 gauge
Members of 1-5.1 wire fabric placed 3/J' from outer concrete surface. Wire fabric tied with No. 2
Primary 18 gauge wire spaced 6" on center for inner layer and 2" on center for outer
Trusses layer.
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over metal lath wrapped around
1-6.1 column and furred 1'14' from column flanges. Sheets lapped at ends and tied l'/2 I c:
z
at 6" intervals with No. 18 gauge tie wire. Plaster pushed through to flanges. :;;
0
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over self-furring metal lath wrapped :II
1-6.2 directly around column, lapped I" and tied at 6" intervals with No. 18 gauge P/4 P/8 I 3:
wire. IJI
c:
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster on metal lath applied to 3/4" cold-rolled F
c
1-6.3 channels spaced 24 inches apart vertically and wrapped flatwise around 1'12 z
C)
column.
0
0
c
m
...
ID
g:
m
c
::j
0
z
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over 2 layers of 11z" plain full-length

gypsum lath applied tight to column flanges. Lath wrapped with !" hexago-
I. Steel Columns nal mesh of No. 20 gauge wire and tied with doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties
1-6.4 2 112 2
and All spaced 23" on center. For three-coat work the plaster mix for the second coat
Members of shall not exceed I 00 pounds of gypsum to 2 11z cubic feet of aggregate for the
Primary three-hour system.
Trusses
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster over one layer of 'h'' plain full-length
gypsum lath applied tight to column flanges. Lath tied with doubled No. 18
gauge wire ties spaced 23" on center and scratch coat wrapped with I"
1-6.5 2
hexagonal mesh No. 20 gauge wire fabric. For three-coat work the plaster
mix for the second coat shall not exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2 112 cubic
feet of aggregate.
Multiple layers of 112'' gypsum wallboard 3 adhesively 4 secured to column
flanges and successive layers. Wallboard applied without horizontal joints.
1-7.1 Corner edges of each layer staggered. Wallboard layer below outer layer 2 I
secured to column with doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced 15" on center.
Exposed corners taped and treated.
!Continued)
......
0
CIO
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS"-(Continued)
STRUCTURAL
FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS (In Inches)
PARTS TO BE ITEM
Three layers of 5 /s" Type X gypsum wallboard. 3 First and second layer held in
place by 1/s" diameter by 13/s" long ring shank nails with 5fi6" diameter heads
spaced 24" on center at corners. Middle layer also secured with metal straps
1-7.2 J7/s
at mid-height and 18" from each end. and by metal corner bead at each corner
held by the metal straps. Third layer attached to corner bead with I" long
gypsum wallboard screws spaced 12" on center.
I. Steel Columns Three layers of 5 /s" Type X gypsum wallboard.' each layer screw attached to
and All J5/s" steel studs (No. 25 gauge) at each corner of column. Middle layer also
Members of 1-7.3 secured with No. 18 gauge double strand tie wire, 24" on center for inner J7/s
Primary layer, No. 6 by J5/s" spaced 12" on center for middle layer and No. 8 by 2 1/4"
Trusses spaced 12" on center for outer layer.
c:
Wood-fibered gypsum plaster mixed I: I by weight gypsum to sand aggre- z
gate applied over metal lath. Lath lapped I" and tied 6" on center at all ends, ;;
0
edges and spacers with No. 18 gauge tie wire. Lath applied over ih'' spacers JJ
1-8.1 made of 3/4" furring channel with 2" legs bent around each corner. Spacers J5/s s::
located I" from top and bottom of member and a maximum of 40" on center 01
s;;
and wire tied with a single strand of No. 18 gauge wire. Corner bead tied to r
the lath at 6" on center along each corner to provide plaster thickness. c
z
G'>
0
0
c
m
....
CD
co
co
m
c
::::j
0
z
,.
Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete (not includ-
2-1.1 ing sandstone, granite and siliceous gravel) with 3" or finer metal mesh
2 1 1/2 I I
placed I" from the finished surface anchored to the top flange and providing
not less than .025 square inch of steel area per foot in each direction.
::
2. Websor Siliceous aggregate concrete and concrete excluded in Item 2-1.1 with 3" or
Flanges of finer metal mesh placed I" from the finished surface anchored to the top
2-1.2 2 112 2 1'12 1
Steel Beams flange and providing not less than .025 square inch of steel area per foot in
and Girders each direction.
Portland cement plaster on metal lath attached to 3f4' cold-rolled channels
2-2.1 with No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced 3" to 6" on center. Plaster mixed 1:2 112 by 2 112 2 7/R
volume. cement to sand.

Vermiculite gypsum plaster on a metal lath cage, wire tied to No.8 steel wire
2-3.1 hangers wrapped around beam and spaced 16" on center. Metal lath ties 7lg
spaced approximately 5" on center at cage sides and bottom.
!Cominued)
.....
0
co
....
......
0
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS._(Continued)
STRUCTURAL
PARTS TO BE ITEM
Two layers of 5/s" Type X gypsum wallboard' are attached to U-shaped

brackets spaced 24" on center. No. 25 gauge 15/s" deep by I" galvanized steel
runner channels are first installed parallel to and on each side of the top beam
flange to provide a 112'' clearance to the flange. The channel runners are
attached to steel deck or concrete floor construction with approved fasteners
spaced 12" on center. U-shaped brackets are formed from members identical
to the channel runners. At the bent portion of the U -shaped bracket, the webs
of the channel are cut out so that 15/8' deep corner channels can be inserted
without attachment parallel to each side of the lower flange.
2. Websor 2-4.1 As an alternate No. 24 gauge I" by 2" runner and corner angles may be used in 11/4
Flanges of lieu of channels and the web cutouts in the U-shaped brackets may be
Steel Beams omitted. Each angle is attached to the bracket with lf2'' long No. 8 self-
and Girders drilling screws. The vertical legs of the U-shaped bracket are attached to the c:
z
runners with one 112" long No. 8 self-drilling screw. The completed steel :;;
framing provides a 2 1/8' and l 1/2" space between the inner layer of wallboard 0
JJ
and the sides and bottom of the steel beam respectively. The inner layer of 3:
wallboard is attached to the top runners and bottom corner channels or corner m
angles with 11/4' long No.6 self-drilling screws spaced 16" on center. The c:
r=
outer layer of wallboard is applied with 13/4" long No. 6 self-drilling screws c
spaced 8" on center. The bottom corners are reinforced with metal corner z
G')
beads.
0
0
c
m
.....
ID
i
m
c
:::::j
Three layers of 5fs" Type X gypsum wallboardl attached to a steel suspension
system as described immediately above utilizing the No. 25 gauge I" by 2" 0
z
lower comer angles. The framing is located so that a 2 1/s" and 2" space is
2. Webs or provided between the inner layer of wallboard and the sides and bottom of the
Flanges of beam respectively. The first two layers of wallboard are attached as described
Steel Beams immediately above. A layer of No. 20 gauge I" hexagonal galvanized wire
2-4.2 J7/s
and Girders mesh is applied under the soffit of the middle layer and up the sides
approximately 2". The mesh is held in position with the No. 6 J5/s" long
screws installed in the vertical leg of the bottom comer angles. The outer
layer of wallboard is attached with No. 6 2 1/4' long screws spaced 8" on
center. One screw is also installed at the mid-depth of the bracket in each
layer. Bottom comers are finished as described above.
3. Bonded
Pretensioned Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate6 concrete
3-1.1
Reinforcement Beams or girders 4' 3' 2 1/2 7 l'/2
in Prestressed Solid slabs 8 2 1'12 I
Concrete5
4. Bonded or Carbonate, lightweight, sand-lightweight and siliceous aggregate concrete
Unbonded Unrestrained Members:
Posttensioned Solid Slabs 8 2 1112
4-1.1
Tendons in Beams and Girders"
Prestressed 8 in. wide 4 112 2 112 P/4
Concrete 5 10 > 12 in. wide 3 2 112 2 1'12
(Continued)
:::t
.....
VARIOUS NONCOMBUSTIBLE INSULATING MATERIALS&.-(Continued)
STRUCTURAL
PARTS TO BE ITEM
4. Bonded or Carbonate. lightweight. sand-lightweight and siliceous aggregate

Unbonded Restrained Members:'l
Posttensioned Solid Slabs' Jl/4 I 3!4
4-1.2
Tendons in Beams and Girders''
Prestressed 8 in. Wide 2 1/2 2 P/4
Concretes 10 > 12 in. wide 2 P/4 11/2
5. Reinforcing ::·
Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete, members
Steel in 1 112
5-1.1 12" or larger, square or round. (Size limit does not apply to beams and girders JI/2 Jl/2 1'12
Reinforced
monolithic with floors.)
Concrete
Columns,
:~
Beams, 5-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete, members 12" or larger, square or round. (Size 2 }lh 1'12 1'12
Girders and limit does not apply to beams and girders monolithic with floors.) c:
Trusses z
:;;
6. Reinforcing ::: 0
Steel in 6-1.1 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. l'/4 Jl/4 I 3/4 :~ :D
3:
Reinforced m
Concrete 6-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete. }3/4 1'12 I 3f4 ' c:
Joists 9 ' j=
c
7. Reinforcing 7-1.1 Carbonate, lightweight and sand-lightweight aggregate concrete. I I 3!4 3!4 ~ z
C)
and Tie Rods 0
in Floor and 0
RoofSlabs 9 7-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete. 11/4 I I 3/4
c
m
...
!m
'(Jeneric fire-resistance ratings (those not designated by a company code letter) as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Eleventh Edition, dated[
c
October, 1984, as published by the Gypsum Association, may be accepted as if herein listed. [
3
0
'Reentrant parts of protected members to be filled solidly. z
2Two layers of equal thickness with a 3J4-inch air space between.
3For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard described in Table No. 43-A, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size, thickness and core
type may be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard and the joints on the face layer are
reinforced and the entire surface is covered with a minimum of 1;, 6-inch gypsum veneer plaster. The gypsum base for veneer plaster and the veneer
plaster shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-15.
4 An approved adhesive qualified under U .B.C. Standard No. 43-1.
5Where lightweight or sand-lightweight concrete having an oven-dry weight of 110 pounds per cubic foot or less is used, the tabulated minimum cover I
may be reduced 25 percent, except that in no case shall the cover be less than 3J• inch in slabs nor 11/z inches in beams or girders.
6 For siliceous aggregate concrete increase tendon cover 20 percent. M
7Adequate provisions against spalling shall be provided by U-shaped or hooped stirrups spaced not to exceed the depth of the member with a clear
cover of I inch.
8 Prestressed slabs shall have a thickness not less than that required in Table No. 43-C for the respective fire-resistive time period.
9 For use with concrete slabs having a comparable fire endurance where members are framed into the structure in such a manner as to provide equivalent
performance to that of monolithic concrete construction.

1°Fire coverage and end anchorages shall be as follows: Cover to the prestressing steel at the anchor shall be 1/z inch greater than that required away
from the anchor. Minimum cover to steel bearing plate shall be I inch in beams and 3J4 inch in slabs.
"For beam widths between 8 and 12 inches, coverthickness can be determined by interpolation.
12 lnterior spans of continuous slabs, beams and girders may be considered restrained.
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITION& 1
MINIMUM FINISHED THICKNESS
FACE-To.FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
MATERIAL NUMBER CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
1-1.1 Solid units (at least 75 percent solid). 8 63 4

1-1.2 Solid units plastered each side with 5fs" gypsum or portland cement plaster. 43/44
Portland cement plaster mixed 1:2 112 by weight, cement to sand.
1-2.1 Hollow brick units 5 at least 71 percent solid. 8
1-2.2 Hollow brick units5 at least 71 percent solid, plastered each side with 5fs" 8 3/4
gypsum plaster.
1-3.1 Hollow (rowlock 6). 12 8
1-3.2 Hollow (rowlock6 ) plastered each side with 5fs" gypsum or portland cement 9
plaster. Portland cement plaster mixed I :2 112 by weight, cement to sand.
I. Brick of Clay 1-4.1 Hollow cavity wall consisting of two 4" nominal clay brick units with air 10
or Shale space between.
1-4.2 Cavity wall consisting of two 3-inch nominal thick solid clay units with air 8 c
space. z
:;;
1-5.1 Hollow brick units at least 60 percent solid, cells filled with perlite loose fill 8 0
:u
insulation. 31:
Ill
4" nominal thick units at least 75 percent solid backed with a hat-shaped c
metal furring channel 3/4 inch thick formed from 0.021-inch sheet metal r=c
1-6.1 attached to the brick wall on 24-inch centers with approved fasteners; and 112 5•
inch 'JYpe X gypsum wallboard7 attached to the metal furring strips with
z
C)
l-inch-long TypeS screws spaced 8 inches on center. 0
0
c
m
.....
im
c
::::j
0z
2-1.1 One cell in wall thickness, units at least 50 percent solid, plastered each side 4 141
with Sis" gypsum plaster.

2. Hollow Clay 2-1.2 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 45 percent solid. 6
Tile, Non-
2-1.3 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 45 percent solid. Plastered each side 7
load-bearing
with 51s" gypsum plaster.
(End or Side
Construction) 2-1.4 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 60 percent solid. Plastered each side 5
with 518' gypsum plaster.
3-1.1 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 8
3-1.2 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. Plastered one side 8 112
with sis" gypsum plaster.
3-1.3 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 49 percent solid. 8
3. Hollow Clay 3-1.4 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 12
Tile, Load-
3-1.5 Two units and three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. 12
bearing (End
or Side 3-1.6 Two units and four cells in wall thickness, units at least 45 percent solid. 12
Construction) 3-2.1 12 112
Two units and three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid.
Plastered one side with 51s" gypsum plaster.
3-2.2 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 43 percent solid. Plastered one 8112
side with Sis" gypsum plaster.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-B-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1-(Continued)
FACE-To-FACE2
ITEM (In Inches)
3-2.3 Two cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. Plastered each side 9
with 518' gypsum plaster.
3. Hollow Clay 3-2.4 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 43 percent solid. Plastered each 9
Tile, Load- side with 5 1s" gypsum plaster.
bearing (End
3-2.5 Three cells in wall thickness, units at least 40 percent solid. Plastered each 13
or Side
side with 51s" gypsum plaster.
Construction)
Hollow cavity wall consisting of two 4" nominal clay tile units (at least 40
percent solid) with air space between. Plastered one side (exterior) with 314"
3-3.1 10
portland cement plaster and other side with 'Is" gypsum plaster. Portland
cement plaster mixed I :3 by volume, cement to sand.
4. Combination 4-1.1 4" brick and 8" tile. 12
of Clay Brick
and Load-
4-1.2 4" brick and 4" tile. 8 c
bearing z
Hollow Clay
Tile
4-1.3 4" brick and 4" tile plastered on the tile side with 51s" gypsum plaster. 8 112 ~::u
II
5-J.J13 14 Expanded slag or pumice. 4.7 4.0 3.2 2.1
5. Concrete 5-1.213 14 Expanded clay, shale or slate. 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.6
Masonry
5-1.3 13 Limestone. cinders or air-cooled slag. 5.9 5.0 4.0 2.7
Units 8
5-1.413 14 Calcareous or siliceous gravel. 6.2 5.3 4.2 2.8 j:t 0
0
c
m
...
iGl
m
c
=t
0z
Siliceous Aggregate Concrete. 7.0 6.2 5.0 3.5
6. Solid Carbonate Aggregate Concrete. 6.6 5.7 4.6 3.2
15
6-1.1
Concretes ,.
Sand-lightweight Concrete. 5.4 4.6 3.8 2.7
~:
Lightweight Concrete. 5.1 4.4 3.6 2.5 ::
One 2" unit cored 15 percent maximum and one 4" unit cored 25 percent
7-1.1 maximum with 3/4' mortar filled collar joint. Unit positions reversed in 63/g
alternate courses.
7. Glazed or One 2" unit cored 15 percent maximum and one 4" unit cored 40 percent
Unglazed maximum with 3/s" mortar filled collar joint. Plastered one side with '14'
7-1.2 6 3/4
Facing Tile, gypsum plaster. Two wythes tied together every fourth course with No. 22
Nonload- gauge corrugated metal ties.
bearing
7-1.3 One unit with three cells in wall thickness, cored 29 percent maximum. 6
One 2" unit cored 22 percent maximum and one 4" unit cored 41 percent
7-1.4 maximum with IJ4' mortar filled collar joint. Two wythes tied together every 6
third course with No. 22 gauge corrugated metal ties.
7-1.5 One 4" unit cord 25 percent maximum with 3/4' gypsum plaster on one side. 4'1•
7-1.6 One 4" unit with two cells in wall thickness, cored 22 percent maximum. 4
!Continued)
.....
....
.....
FACE·T0-FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
MATERIAL NUMBER CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.
7. Glazed or 7-1.7 One 4" unit cored 30 percent maximum with 314'' vermiculite gypsum plaster 4 112
Unglazed on one side.
Facing Tile,
Nonload- 7-1.8 One 4" unit cored 39 percent maximum with 314'' gypsum plaster on one side. 4 112
bearing
314'' by No. 16 gauge vertical cold-rolled channels, 16" on center with
2.5-pound flat metal lath applied to one face and tied with No. 18 gauge wire 24
8-1.1
at 6" spacing. Gypsum plaster each side mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand
aggregate.
314' by No. 16 gauge cold-rolled channels 16" on center with metal lath
applied to one face and tied with No. 18 gauge wire at 6" spacing. Perlite or
8-1.2 vermiculite gypsum plaster each side. For three-coat work the plaster mix for 21f24 24
8. Solid the second coat shall not exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2112 cubic feet of
Gypsum aggregate for the one-hour system.
Plaster 314' by No. 16 gauge vertical cold-rolled channels, 16" on center, with 31s"
8-1.3 gypsum lath applied to one face and attached with sheet metal clips. Gypsum 24 c:
z
plaster each side mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate. :;;
0
Studless with 112" full-length plain gypsum lath and gypsum plaster each side. ::D
8-2.1 Plaster mixed I: I for scratch coat and 1:2 for brown coat, by weight, gypsum 24 ~
to sand aggregate. Ill
c:
8-2.2 Studless with 112" full-length plain gypsum lath and perlite or vermiculite 21f24 24 ;=
c
gypsum plaster each side. z
C)
Studless partition with 31s" rib metal lath installed vertically, adjacent edges 0
8-2.3 tied 6" on center with No. 18 gauge wire ties, gypsum plaster each side mixed 24 0
1:2 by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate. cm
-
iOil
m
c
3
0
z
9. Solid Perlite Perlite mixed in the ratio of 3 cubic feet to I 00 pounds of portland cement and
and Portland machine applied to stud side of 11iz" mesh by No. 17 gauge paper-backed
9-1.1 3 1/s 4
Cement woven wire fabric lath wire-tied to 4" deep steel trussed wire• studs 16" on
center. Wire ties of 18 gauge galvanized steel wire 6" on center vertically.
10. Solid Neat
Wood 314'' by No. 16 gauge cold-rolled channels, 12" on center with 2.5-pound flat
Fibered 10-1.1 metal lath applied to one face and tied with No. 18 gauge wire at 6" spacing. 2•
Gypsum Neat gypsum plaster applied each side.
Plaster
II. Solid
One full-length layer 1iz" Type X gypsum wallboard 7 laminated to each side
Gypsum
11-l.l of I" full-length V-edge gypsum coreboard with approved laminating 2•
Wallboard
compound. Vertical joints of face layer and coreboard staggered at least 3".
Partition
12. Hollow One full-length layer of5/s" Type X gypsum wallboard? attached to both sides
(Studless) of wood or metal top and bottom runners laminated to each side of I" x 6"
Gypsum full-length gypsum coreboard ribs spaced 24" on center with approved 2lf44
12-1.1
Wallboard laminating compound. Ribs centered at vertical joints offace plies and joints
Partition staggered 24" in opposing faces. Ribs may be recessed 6" from the top and
bottom.
(Continued)
-
......
CCI
FACE·TO-FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
12. Hollow I" regular gypsum V-edge full-length backing board attached to both sides of
(Studless) wood or metal top and bottom runners with nails or l'ls" drywall screws at
Gypsum 12-1.2 24" on center. Minimum width of runners 15 /s". Face layer of 1/z" regular 45fg4
Wallboard full-length gypsum wallboard laminated to outer faces of backing board with
Partition approved laminating compound.
13-1.1 3 114' by No. 18 gauge steel studs spaced 24" on center. 5fs" gypsum plaster on 4 3/44
metal lath each side mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate.
35/s" No. 16 gauge approved nailable 10 studs spaced 24" on center. s;s" neat
13-1.2 gypsum wood fibered plaster each side over 3/s" rib metal lath nailed to studs 55/g
13. Noncombus-
with 6d common nails, 8" on center. Nails driven 1 1/4' and bent over.
tible Studs-
Interior 4" No. 18 gauge channel-shaped steel studs at 16" on center. On each side c:
Partition 13-1.3
approved resilient clips pressed onto stud flange at 16" vertical spacing, 1/4" 75fg4 z
with Plaster
Each Side
pencil rods snapped into or wire-tied onto outer loop of clips, metal lath
wire-tied to pencil rods at 6" intervals, I" perlite gypsum plaster, each side.
~XI
3:
aJ
2 1/z" No. 18 gauge steel studs spaced 16" on center. Wood fibered gypsum c:
plaster mixed I: I by weight gypsum to sand aggregate applied on 3.4 pound
;=
13-1.4 4 1/4 4 c
metal lath wire tied to studs. each side. 3/4' plaster applied over each face,
including finish coat.
z
G)
0
0
c
m
....
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 5/s" gypsum plaster on metal lath. Lath :g
1 C»
14-l.JII 16 attached by 4d common nails bent over or No. 14 gauge by 1 /4" x 3f4" crown 51/g m
width staples spaced 6" on center. Plaster mixed l: 1112 for scratch coat and l :3 c
for brown coat, by weight, gypsum to sand aggregate. 3
0
14. Wood Studs 2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with metal lath and 7/s" neat wood fibered z
Interior 14-1.2 11
gypsum plaster each side. Lath attached by 6d common nails, 7" on center. 51f24
Partition Nails driven 1'14' and bent over.
with Plaster
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 3/s" perforated or piain gypsum lath and
Each Side 19
14-1.311 16 lfz'' gypsum plaster each side. Lath nailed with Jl/s" by No. 13 gauge by /64" 5 1/4
head plasterboard blued nails, 4" on center. Plaster mixed I :2 by weight,
gypsum to sand aggregate.
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 3/s" Type X gypsum lath and 1f2" gypsum
1 19
14-1.411 16 plaster each side. Lath nailed with 1 /s" by No. 13 gauge by /64" head 5 1/4
plasterboard blued nails, 5" on center. Plaster mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum
to sand aggregate.
No. 25 gauge channel-shaped studs 24" on center with one full-length layer of
5/s" Type X gypsum wallboard' applied vertically attached with I" long No. 6
drywall screws to each stud. Screws are 8" on center around the perimeter and
15. Noncombus- 12" on center on the intermediate stud. The wallboard may be applied
tible Studs- 15-1.1 horizontally when attached to 35/8' studs and the horizontal joints are 27fg4
Interior staggered with those Oil the opposite side. Screws for the horizontal
Partition application shall be 8" on center at vertical edges and 12" on center at
with Gypsum intermediate studs.
Wallboard
No. 25 gauge channel-shaped studs 24" on center with two full-length layers
Each Side
of lfz'' Type X gypsum wallboard' applied vertically each side. First layer
attached with I" long, No. 6 drywall screws, 8" on center around the
15-1.2 perimeter and 12" on center on the intermediate stud. Second layer applied 35fg4
with vertical joints offset one stud space from first layer using JSfs" long, No.
6 drywall screws spaced 9" on center along vertical joints, 12" on center at
intermediate studs and 24" on center along top and bottom runners.
!Continued)
.....
N
TABLE NO. 43-B--RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITION& 1-(Contlnued)
N
FACE·TO-FACE2
ITEM
(In Inches)
15. Noncombus-
tible Studs- No. 16 gauge approved nailable metal studs 1o 24" on center with full-length
Interior 5/s" Type X gypsum wallboard' applied vertically and nailed 7" on center with
15-1.3 4 7/s
Partition 6d cement-coated common nails. Approved metal fastener grips used with
with Gypsum nails at vertical butt joints along studs.
Wallboard
Each Side
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with two layers of 3/s" regular gypsum
wallboard' each side, 4d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center first
16-1.1 1116 layer, 5d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center second layer with 5
i
laminating compound between layers. Joints staggered. First layer applied
16. Wood
full length vertically, second layer applied horizontally or vertically.
Studs-
Interior 2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with two layers 112" regular gypsum
Partition 11 16 wallboard' applied vertically or horizontally each side, joints staggered. Nail
16-1.2 5 112
with Gypsum base layer with 5d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 8" on center, face layer with c:
Wallboard 8d cooler12 or wallboard12 nails at 8" on center. z
Each Side :;;
2" x 4" wood studs 24" on center with 5/s" Type X gypsum wallboard' applied 0
16-1.3" 16 vertically or horizontally nailed with 6d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 7" on 4 3/4 :D
31:
center with end joints on nailing members. al
c:
2" x 4" fire-retardant-treated wood studs spaced 24" on center with one layer r=
c
of 5/s" thick Type X gypsum wallboard' applied with face paper grain (long
16-1.4 11 43J44
z
dimension) parallel to studs. Wallboard attached with 6d cooler12 or C)
wallboard 12 nails at 7" on center. 0
0
cm
......
CD
al
al
m
c
::j
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with two layers 5/s" Type X gypsum 0
16. Wood wallboard 7 each side. Base layers applied vertically and nailed with 6d z
Studs- cooler 12 or wallboardl2 nails at 9" on center. Face layer applied vertically or
16-1.511 16 horizontally and nailed with 8d cooler 12 or wallboardl2 nails at 7" on center. 6
Interior
Partition For nail-adhesive application, base layers are nailed 6" on center. Face layers
With applied with coating of approved wallboard adhesive and nailed 12" on
Gypsum center.
Wallboard 2" x 3" fire-retardant-treated wood studs spaced 24" on center with one layer
Each Side of 5/s" thick Type X gypsum wallboard 7 applied with face paper grain (long
16-1.6 11 35fg4
dimension) at right angles to studs. Wallboard attached with 6d
cement-coated box nails spaced 7" on center.
Exterior surface with 3f4' drop siding over If,'' gypsum sheathing on 2" x 4"
wood studs at 16" on center; interior surface treatment as required for
17. Exterior or one-hour-rated exterior or interior 2" x 4" wood stud partitions. Gypsum
17-I.JII 16 sheathing nailed with 13/4' by No. II gauge by 7!J6" head galvanized nails at Varies
Interior
Walls 8" on center. Siding nailed with 7d galvanized smooth box nails.
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with metal lath and 3/4' exterior cement
17-1.211 16 plaster on each side. Lath attached with 6d common nails 7" on center driven 5 3/s
to I" minimum penetration and bent over. Plaster mix I :4 for scratch coat and
I :5 for brown coat, by volume, cement to sand.
!Continued)
FACE·TO-FACE2
ITEM (In Inches)
2" x 4" wood studs 16" on center with 7/s" exterior cement plaster (measured
17-1.311 16 from the face of studs) on the exterior surface with interior surface treatment
as required for interior wood stud partitions in this table. Plaster mix I :4 for
Varies i~
~;!:
scratch coat and I :5 for brown coat, by volume, cement to sand.

35/s" No. 16 gauge noncombustible studs 16" on center with 7/s" exterior
cement plaster (measured from the face of the studs) on the exterior surface
17-1.4 with interior surface treatment as required for interior, nonbearing, Varies 4
17. Exterior or noncombustible stud partitions in this table. Plaster mix I :4 for scratch coat
Interior and I :5 for brown coat, by volume, cement to sand.
Walls 2 1/4' x 33/4' clay face brick with cored holes over 112" gypsum sheathing on
exterior surface of2" x 4" wood studs at 16" on center and two layers 5fs" Type
X gypsum wallboard 7 on interior surface. Sheathing placed horizontally or
vertically with vertical joints over studs nailed 6" on center with 13/4' by No. c
z
II
II gauge by 7/16" head galvanized nails. Inner layer of wallboard placed
horizontally or vertically and nailed 8" on center with 6d cooler 12 or =ii
17-1.5 16 10 0
wallboard 12 nails. Outer layer of wallboard placed horizontally or vertically :a
and nailed 8" on center with 8d cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails. All joints iii:
01
staggered with vertical joints over studs. Outer layer joints taped and c
:
finished with compound. Nailheads covered with joint compound. No. 20 F
gauge corrugated galvanized steel wall ties 3/4' by 65/s" attached to each stud ,. c
with two 8d coolerl2 or wallboard 12 nails every sixth course of bricks.
: zC)
0
0
cm
.....
2" x 6" fire-retardant-treated wood studs 16" on center. Interior face has two CD
ClO
layers of 51s" Type X gypsum wallboard 7 with the base layer placed vertically ClO
m
and attached with 6d box nails 12" on center. The face layer is placed c
horizontally and attached with 8d box nails 8" on center at joints and 12" on ::::j
center elsewhere. The exterior face has a base layer of 51s" Type X gypsum 0z
wallboard placed vertically with 6d box nails 8" on center at joints and 12" on
center elsewhere. An approved building paper is next applied, followed by
f.
17-1.6" 16 self-furred exterior lath attached with 2 112'', No. 12 gauge galvanized roofing 8 114
nails with a 31s" diameter head and spaced 6" on center along each stud.
Exterior cement plaster consisting of a W' brown coat is then applied. The
scratch coat is mixed in the proportion of I :3 by weight, cement to sand with
10 pounds of hydrated lime and 3 pounds of approved additives or
admixtures per sack of cement. The brown coat is mixed in the proportion of
17. Exterior or I :4 by weight, cement to sand with the same amounts of hydrated lime and
approved additives or admixtures used in the scratch coat.
Interior
Walls 2" x 6" wood studs 16" on center. The exterior face has a layer of 5 1s" Type X
gypsum wallboard 7 placed vertically with 6d box nails 8" on center at joints
and 12" on center elsewhere. An approved building paper is next applied,
followed by I" by No. 18 gauge self-furred exterior lath attached with 8d by
2 112" long galvanized roofing nails spaced 6" on center along each stud.
Exterior cement plaster consisting of a 1h" scratch coat, a handing agent and a
112'' brown coat and a finish coat is then applied. The scratch coat is mixed in
the proportion of 1:3 by weight, cement to sand with 10 pounds of hydrated

17-1.71116 lime and 3 pounds of approved additives or admixtures per sack of cement. 8 31s r:
The brown coat is mixed in the proportion of I :4 by weight, cement to sand '
with the same amounts of hydrated lime and approved additives or
admixtures used in the scratch coat. The interior is covered with 31s" gypsum
lath with !"hexagonal mesh of No. 20 gauge woven wire lath furred out 5l16"
and I" perlite or vermiculite gypsum plaster. Lath nailed with l 11s" by No. 13
gauge by 19/64' head plasterboard blued nails spaced 5" on center. Mesh
attached by 1314' by No. 12 gauge by 31s" head nails with 'li' furrings, spaced
8" on center. The plaster mix shall not exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2 112
cubic feet of aggregate.
!Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-8-RATED FIRE-RESISTIVE PERIODS FOR VARIOUS WALLS AND PARTITIONS• 1-(Continued)
FACE·TO-FACE2
(In Inches)
ITEM
2" x 6" wood studs 16" on center. The exterior face has a layer of 5 1s" Type X
gypsum wallboard' placed vertically with 6d box nails 8" on center at joints
and 12" on center elsewhere. An approved building paper is next applied,
followed by llh'' by No. 17 gauge self-furred exterior lath attached with 8d
by 2 112" long galvanized roofing nails spaced 6" on center along each stud.
Exterior cement plaster consisting of a 1l2" scratch coat, and a 112'' brown coat
is then applied. The plaster may be placed by machine. The scratch coat is
17-1.811 16 mixed in the proportion of I :4 by weight, plastic cement to sand. The brown 8318
coat is mixed in the proportion of I :5 by weight, plastic cement to sand. The
interior is covered with 31s" gypsum lath with I" hexagonal mesh of No. 20
gauge woven wire lath furred out '1!6" and !"perlite or vermiculite gypsum
17. Exterior or
plaster. Lath nailed with 1 11s" by No. 13 gauge by 19164 head plasterboard
Interior
blued nails spaced 5" on center. Mesh attached by 1314' by No. 12 gauge by
Walls 318' head nails with 31s" furrings, spaced 8" on center. The plaster mix shall not
exceed 100 pounds of gypsum to 2 1h cubic feet of aggregate.

c:
4" No. 18 gauge, nonload-bearing metal studs, 16" on center, with I" portland z
cement lime plaster (measured from the back side of the 3.4# expanded ::;;
metal lath) on the exterior surface. Interior surface to be covered with I" of 0
:II
gypsum plaster on 3 .4# expanded metal lath proportioned by weight-! :2 611z• 3:
17-1.9 IJI
for scratch coat, I :3 for brown, gypsum to sand. Lath on one side of the
c:
partition fastened to 114" diameter pencil rods supported by No. 20 gauge r=0
metal clips, located 16" on center vertically, on each stud. 3" thick mineral
fiber insulating batts friction fitted between the studs. z
C)
'Generic fire-resistance ratings (those not designated by company code letter) as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Eleventh Edition, dated f, 0
0
October, 1984, as published by the Gypsum Association, may be accepted as if herein listed. l 0
m
'Staples with equivalent holding power and penetration may be used as alternate fasteners to nails for attachment to wood framing.
2'fhickness shown for brick and clay tile are nominal thicknesses unless plastered, in which case thicknesses are net. Thickness shown for concrete ....
masonry is equivalent thickness defined as the average thickness of solid material in the wall and is represented by the formula: iCl:l
m
T£ = __v_._ c
::::j
LXH
WHERE: 0z
T£ = Equivalent thickness, in inches
v. = Net volume (gross volume less volume of voids), in cubic inches
L = Length of block, in inches
H = Height of block, in inches
Thickness includes plaster, lath and gypsum wallboard, where mentioned, and grout when all cells are solid grouted.
3Single-wythe brick.
4 Shall be used for non bearing purposes only.
5Hollow brick units 4-inch by 8-inch by 12-inch nominal with two interior cells having a !112-inch web thickness between cells and PI•- inch-thick face
shells.
6Rowlock design employs clay brick with all or part of bricks laid on edge with the bond broken vertically.
7For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard described in Table No. 43-B, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size, thickness and core
type may be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard and the joints on the face layer are
reinforced and the entire surface is covered with a minimum of 11I6-inch gypsum veneer plaster. The gypsum base for veneer plaster and the veneer
plaster shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-15.
8 See also Footnote 2. The equivalent thickness may include the thickness of portland cement plaster or 1.5 times the thickness of gypsum plaster
applied in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 4 7 of the code.
I
9 Studs are welded truss wire studs with No. 7 gauge flange wire and No. 7 gauge truss wires.
10Nailable metal studs consist of two channel studs spot welded back-to-back with a crimped web forming a nailing groove.
11 Plywood may be installed between the fire protection and the wood studs on either the interior or exterior side of the wood frame assemblies in this
table, provided the length of the fasteners used to attach the fire protection are increased by an amount at least equal to the thickness of the plywood.
12for properties of cooler or wallboard nails, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table No. 25-17-1.
13 The fire-resistive time period for concrete masonry units meeting the equivalent thicknesses required for a two-hour fire-resistive rating in Item 5,
and having a thickness of not less than 7 5/s inches is four hours when cores which are not grouted are filled with silicone-treated perlite loose-fill . ~
~ insulation conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-10; vermiculite loose-fill insulation conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 43-11; or expanded ~
~ clay, shale or slate lightweight aggregate conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 26-3; sand or slag having a maximum particle size of3/s inch.
(Continued)
(Continued)
14
For determining equivalent thickness of concrete masonry units made from unblended aggregates, see Footnote 2. The equivalent thickness of units j
composed of blends of two or more aggregate categories shall be determined by interpolating between the equivalent thickness values specified in 1·
Table No. 43-B in proportion to the percent by volume of each aggregate.

The equivalent thickness required to provide a desired fire-resistive time period for concrete masonry composed of units manufactured with fine :.
aggregates passing a No.4 sieve listed in Item 5-1.4 of Table No. 43-B blended with aggregates listed in Item 5-1.1 or 5-1.2 shall be determined by '
interpolating between the equivalent thickness values specified in Table No. 43-B in proportion to the percent by volume of each aggregate as
follows:
I. ETcequrr.A = ET1. 4 X V1.4 + ET 11 X V 11
2. ETcequrr.A = ET~. 4 X V~. 4 + ET1.2 x VI.Z
The required equivalent thickness of concrete masonry units manufactured with aggregates listed in Items 5-1.1, 5-1.2 and 5-1.4 of Table No.
43-B shall be determined as follows:
3. ETcequrr.A = ET1. 4 X V1.4 + ET1.2 X (V 11 + V1.2)
WHERE:
ET 11 ,ET1.2,ET~. 4 =specified equivalent thickness for Items 5-1.1, 5-1.2
and 5-1.4 of Table No. 43-B.
V11 , V1.2, v, .. = volume of aggregates expressed as a percentage of the
total aggregate volume for Item 5-1.1, 5-1.2 or 5-1.4 of c:
Table No. 43-B.
z
15 Concrete walls shall be reinforced with horizontal and vertical temperature reinforcement as required by Subsections 2614 (d) 2 and 3. ~
::u
16
The design stress of studs shall be reduced to 78 percent of allowable F; with the maximum not greater than 78 percent of the calculated stress with 3:
studs having a slenderness ratio le of 33. aJ
c:
d r=
c
z
C)
(')
0
c
m
....
CD
I
m
0
=i
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINJMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS• 1
0
z
THICKNESS OF FLOOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
OR ROOF SLAB OF CEILING
(In Inches) (In Inches)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
CONSTRUCTION NUMBER CEILING CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr. 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
,.
I. Siliceous Aggregate Concrete 1-1.1 6.2 5.0 3.5
2. Carbonate Aggregate Concrete 2-1.1 Slab (no ceiling required). Mini- 5.7 4.6 3.2 ,.
mum cover over nonprestressed
3. Sand-lightweight Concrete 3-l.l reinforcement shall be not less 4.6 3.8 2.7
than 3/• inch."
4. Lightweight Concrete 4-l.l 4.4 3.6 2.5
~
Slab with suspended ceiling of
vermiculite gypsum plaster over
metal lath attached to 3/4' cold-
5. Reinforced Concrete Joist'> 5-l.l 3 2 I :'\f4
rolled channels spaced 12" on cen-
ter. Ceiling located 6" minimum
below joists.
.....
w
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS• 1-(Continued)
0 THICKNESS OF FLOOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
3fs Type X gypsum wallboardl at-

tached to No. 25 gauge by 7 /s" deep
by 25fs" hat-shaped galvanized
steel channels with l" long No. 6
screws. The channels are spaced
24" on center, span 35" and are
supported along their length at 35"
intervals by No. 21 gauge galva-
nized steel flat strap hangers hav-
ing formed edges which engage
the lips of the channel. The strap
hangers are attached to the side of
5. Reinforced Concrete Joists 5-2.1 the concrete joists with 5/32" by 2If2 5 /s
11/4" long powder-driven fasten-

ers. The wallboard is installed
with the long dimension perpen- c
dicular to the channels. All end
z
:;;
joints occur on channels and sup- 0
plementary channels and supple- JJ
iii:
mentary channels are installed til
parallel to the main channels, 12" c
each side, at end joint occur- r=c
rences. The finish ceiling is lo-
cated approximately 12" below the
z
C)
soffit of the floor slab. 0

0
cm
_.
CD
Cll
Cll
m
c
Gypsum plaster on metal lath at-
3
0
tached to the bottom cord with sin- z
gle No. 16 gauge or doubled No.
18 gauge wire ties spaced 6" on
6-1.1 center. Plaster mixed I: 2 for 2 112 2 1/4 3J4 5jg
scratch coat, I :3 for brown coat,

by weight, gypsum to sand aggre-
gate for two-hour system. For
three-hour system plaster is neat.
6. Steel Joists Constructed with a Vermiculite gypsum plaster on
Poured Reinforced Concrete metal lath attached to the bottom
Slab on Metal Lath Forms or 6-2.1 chord with single No, 16 gauge or 2 5jg
Steel Form Units4 doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties 6"

on center.
Portland cement plaster over
metal lath attached to the bottom
chord of joists with single No. 16
gauge or doubled No. 18 gauge
wire ties spaced 6" on center. Plas- 2 5jg5
6-3.1
ter mixed I :2 for scratch coat, I :3
for brown coat for one-hour sys-
tern and I: I for scratch coat, I: Jl/2
for brown coat for two-hour sys-
tern, by weight, cement to sand.
(Continued)
.....
w TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS• 1-(Continued)
N
{In Inches) {In Inches)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
Ceiling of 5/s" Type X wallboard'

attached to 7 /s" deep by 25/s" by
No. 25 gauge hat-shaped furring
channels 12" on center with I"
6-4.1 long No. 6 wallboard screws at 8"
2 112 5jg
on center. Channels wire tied to
bottom chord of joists with dou-
bled No. 18 gauge wire or sus-
6. Steel Joists Constructed with a pended below joists on wire hang-
Poured Reinforced Concrete ers 9
Slab on Metal Lath Forms or Wood-fibered gypsum plaster
Steel Form Units 4 mixed I: I by weight gypsum to
sand aggregate applied over metal
6-5.1 lath. Lath tied 6" on center to 3!4' 3/4
2 112
channels spaced 13 112" on center. c:
Channels secured to joists at each z
:;;
intersection with two strands of 0
No. 18 gauge galvanized wire. ::u
3:
7. Reinforced Concrete Slab and IJI
Joists with Hollow Clay Tile 7-1.1 5fs" gypsum plaster on bottom of 810 5/s c:
;=
Fillers Laid End to End in Rows floor or roof construction. c
2 '12'' or More Apart; Reinforce- z
C)
ment Placed Between Rows
0
and Concrete Cast Around and 7-1.2 0
None. 5 112 11
Over Tile c
m
8. Steel Joists Constructed with a Vermiculite gypsum plaster on
...
CD
Ill
Reinforced Concrete Slab on metal lath attached to 3f4' cold- 2If212 3/4 Ill
8-1.1 m
Top Poured on a 112" Deep Steel rolled channels with No. 18 gauge c
Deck. wire ties spaced 6" on center. ::::j
Suspended ceiling of vermiculite •oz
gypsum plaster base coat and ver-
miculite acoustical plaster on
metal lath attached at 6" intervals
to 3f•" cold-rolled channels spaced
9. 3" Deep Cellular Steel Deck 12" on center and secured to 1112"
with Concrete Slab on Top. cold-rolled channels spaced 36"
9-1.1 2'12 l'fs13
Slab Thickness Measured to on center with No. 16 gauge wire.
Top of Cells. l '12'' channels supported by No. 8
gauge wire hangers at 36" on cen-
ter. Beams within envelope and
with a 2'12" air space between
beam soffit and lath have a 4-hour
rating.
Ceiling of gypsum plaster on
10. l'i2"DeepSteelRoofDeckon metal lath. Lath attached to 3f4'
Steel Framing. Insulation furring channels with No. 18
Board, 30 lbs. per Cubic Foot gauge wire ties spaced 6" on cen-
Density, Composed of Wood ter. 314' channel saddled-tied to 2"
Fibers with Cement Binders 10-l.l channels with doubled No. 16 3f47 3f47
Pis 1
of Thickness Shown Bonded gauge wire ties. 2" channels
to Deck with Unfilled Asphalt spaced 36" on center suspended 2"
Adhesive. Covered with a below steel framing and saddle-
Fire-retardant Roof Covering tied with No. 8 gauge wire. Plaster
mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to
sand aggregate.
(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
CONSTRUCTION NUMBER CEIUNG CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1Hr. 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
Ceiling of gypsum plaster on

metal lath. Lath attached to 3f4"
furring channels with No. 18
gauge wire ties spaced 6" on cen-
ter. 3f4' channels saddle tied to 2"
II. 1112" Deep Steel Roof Deck on
channels with doubled No. 16
Steel Framing Wood Fiber In-
gauge wire ties. 2" channels
sulation Board, 17.5 lbs. per
spaced 36" on center suspended 2" I 7fg7 3f47
Cubic Foot Density on Top 11-1.1 Jl/2
below steel framing and saddle
Applied Over a 15-lb. Asphalt
tied with No. 8 gauge wire. Plaster
Saturated Felt. Fire-retardant
mixed I :2 for scratch coat and I :3
Roof Covering.
for brown coat, by weight, gyp- c:
z
~:D
sum to sand aggregate for one-
hour system. For two-hour system
plaster mix is 1:2 by weight, gyp- 3:
sum to sand aggregate. al
c:
r=c
z
C)
0
0
cm
...
:i
I»
m
c
3
0
z
12. I '12'' Deep Steel Roof Deck on
Steel Framing Insulation of
Rigid Board Consisting of Ex-
panded Perlite and Fibers Im-
pregnated With Integral As- Gypsum-vermiculite plaster on
phalt Waterproofing; Density metal lath wire tied at 6" intervals
9 to 12 Lbs./Cu. Ft. Secured to 3f4" furring channels spaced 12"
to Metal Roof Deck by lf2'' on center and wire tied to 2" runner
12-1.1 l 7jg
Wide Ribbons of Water- channels spaced 32" on center.
proof, Cold-process Liquid Runners wire tied to bottom chord
Adhesive Spaced 6" Apart. of steel joists.
Steel Joist or Light Steel Con-
struction with Metal Roof
Deck, Insulation, and Built-
up Fire-retardant Roof Cover-
ing.
(Continued)
TABLE NO. 43-C-MINIMUM PROTECTION FOR FLOOR AND ROOF SYSTEMS•1-(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
Gypsum plaster over 3/s" Type X
gypsum lath. Lath initially applied
with not less than four ! lfs'' by No.
13 gauge by 19/64" head plaster- I
board blued nails per bearing.
Continuous stripping over lath
along all joist lines. Stripping con-
sists of 3" wide strips of metal lath
attached by l W' by No. ll gauge
by 1/2' head roofing nails spaced 6"
13. Double Wood Floor Over on center. Alternate stripping con-
Wood Joists Spaced 16" on 13-1.1 sists of 3" wide .049" diameter 1fg
Centerl4 15 wire stripping weighing one
pound per sq. yd. and attached by
No. 16gaugeby Jli2"by3/4"crown
width staples, spaced 4" on center.
Where alternate stripping is used c:
z
the lath nailing may consist of two :;;
nails at each end and one nail at 0
:D
each intermediate bearing. Plaster 3:
mixed I :2 by weight, gypsum to lXI
sand aggregate. c:
rc
Portland cement or gypsum plas-
ter on metal lath. Lath fastened z
C)
with !liz'' by No. 11 gauge by 7116" 0
head barbed shank roofing nails 0
13-1.2
spaced 5" on center. Plaster mixed
5fg cm
I :2 for scratch coat and I :3 for ....
I 13-1.2 brown coat, by weight, cement to ico
sand aggregate. m
c
13. Double Wood Floor Over Perlite or vermiculite gypsum 3
Wood Joists Spaced 16" On plaster on metal lath secured to 0
Center14 15 13-1.3 joists with llfz'' by No. II gauge 5jg
z
by 71! 6" head barbed shank roofing
nails spaced 5" on center.
1f2" Type X gypsum wallboard3
nailed to joists with 5d cooler 12 or ;
13-1.4 wallboard 12 nails at 6" on center. lf2
End joints of wallboard centered
on joists.
lfz'' thick wood fiberboard weigh-
ing 15 to 18 lbs. per cu. ft. in-
14. Plywood Stressed Skin Panels stalled with long dimension para!-
Consisting of 5/s" Thick Inte- lei to stringers or 3/s" C-D (exterior
rior C-D (Exterior Glue) Top glue) plywood glued and/or nailed
Stressed Skin on 2" by 6" to stringers. Nailing to be with 5d
Nominal (Minimum) String- cooler 12 or wallboard 12 nails at 12"
14-1.1 I
ers. Adjacent Pane! Edges on center. Second layer of 112''
Joined with 8d Common Wire Type X gypsum wallboard3 ap-
Nails Spaced 6" on Center. l plied with long dimension perpen-
Stringers Spaced 12" Maxi- dicular to joists and attached with
mum on Center. 8d cooler12 or wallboard 12 nails at
6" on center at end joints and 8" on
centerelsewhere. Wallboard joints
staggered with respect to fiber-
board joints.
!Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
CONSTRUCTION NUMBER CEIUNG CONSTRUCTION 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr. 4Hr. 3Hr. 2Hr. 1 Hr.
15. Vermiculite Concrete Slab
Proportioned I :4 (Portland
Cement to Vermiculite Ag-
gregate) on a IW' Deep Steel
Deck Supported on Individu-
ally Protected Steel Framing.
Maximum span of deck 6' I 0" 15-1.1 None. 312
where deck is less than No. 26
gauge and 8' 0" where deck is
No. 26 gauge or greater. Slab
Reinforced with 4" by 8" No.
12114 gauge Welded Wire
Mesh.
c:
16. Perlite Concrete Slab Propor- z
tioned I :6 (Portland Cement
to Perlite Aggregate) on a
~:JJ
I '14'' Deep Steel Deck Sup- 3:
ported on Individually Pro- 16-1.1 None. tD
3 112 12 c:
tected Steel Framing. Slab r=
c
Reinforced with 4" by 8" No.
12114 gauge Welded Wire z
C)
Mesh. 0
0
c
m
17. Perlite Concrete Slab Propor-
...
to Perlite Aggregate) on a 9fi6"
Perlite gypsum plaster on metal
im
Deep Steel Deck Supported 17-1.1
lath wire tied to 3/4" furring chan-
217 217 7/s 3/4
c
::::j
nels attached with No. 16 gauge
by Steel Joists 4' on Center.
wire ties to lower chord of joists. 0z
Fire-retardant roof covering
on top.
18. Perlite Concrete Slab Propor-
to Perlite Aggregate) on llf4''
Deep Steel Deck Supported
on Individually Protected
Steel Framing. Maximum
span of deck 6' 10" where 21f417
18-1.1 None.
deck is less than No. 26 gauge
and 8' 0" where deck is No. 26
gauge or greater. Slab Rein-
forced with No. 19 Gauge
Hexagonal Wire mesh. Fire-
retardant roof covering on
top.
Suspended envelope ceiling of
19. Floor and Beam Construction perlite gypsum plaster on metal
Consisting of 3" Deep Cellu- lath attached to 3/4" cold-rolled
Jar Steel Floor Units Mounted channels, secured to 11/z" cold-
on Steel Members with I :4 rolled channels spaced 42" on cen- 217
19-1.1 I'
(Proportion of Portland Ce- ter supported by No. 6 wire 36" on
ment to Perlite Aggregate) center. Beams in envelope with 3"
Perlite-concrete floor slab on minimum air space between beam
top. soffit and lath have a 4-hour rat-
ing.
(Continued)
FLOOR OR ROOF ITEM
20. Perlite concrete proportioned
I :6 (portland cement to perlite
aggregate) poured to 1/s-inch
thickness above top of corru-
gations of J5fi6-inch-deep gal-
vanized steel deck maximum
span 8' 0" for No. 24 gauge or
6' 0" for No. 26 gauge with
deck supported by individu-
ally protected steel framing.
Approved polystyrene foam
plastic insulation board hav-
ing a flame spread not exceed-
ing 75 (I" to 4" thickness with
vent holes which approximate
3 percent of the board surface c:
area) placed on top of perlite z
:;;
slurry. A 2' by 4' insulation 20-1.1 None. Varies 0
board contains six 23/4" diam- :::0
s::
eter holes. Board covered IJI
with 2 1/4" minimum perlite c:
concrete slab. Slab reinforced
;=
c
with mesh consisting of No.
19 gauge (0.041" galvanized)
z
C)
steel wire twisted together to 0
0
form 2" hexagons with c
m
straight No. 16 gauge ...
(0.0625" galvanized) steel :i
a:t
wire woven into mesh and m
spaced 3". Alternate slab rein- 0
forcement may consist of 4 by 3
0
8, No. 12/4 SWG, or 2 by 2, z
No. 14/14 SWG welded wire
fabric. Fire-retardant roof
covering on top.
Base layer 5Js" Type X gypsum
wallboard applied at right angles
to joist or truss 24" o.c. with JIJ4'' :
21. Wood joist, floor trusses and Type S or Type W drywall screws
roof trusses spaced 24" o.c. 24" o.c. Face layer 5 /s" Type X
with lf2'' plywood with exte- gypsum wallboard or veneer base :
rior glue applied at right an- applied at right angles to joist or
gles to top of joist or truss with 21-l.l truss through base layer with 17/s" Varies Jl/4
8d nails. The plywood thick- Type S or Type W drywall screws
ness shall not be less than lfz" 12" o.c. at joints and intermediate
nor less than required by joist or truss. Face layer joints off-
Chapter 25. set 24" from base layer joints, )If,''
Type G drywall screws placed 2"
back on either side of face layer
end joints, 12" o.c.
(Footnotes on following page.)

FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE NO. 43-C
:;;! oGeneric fire-resistance ratings (those not designated by company code letter) as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, Eleventh Edition, I,
N dated October, 1984, as published by the Gypsum Association, may be accepted as if herein listed. I
'Staples with equivalent holding power and penetration may be used as alternate fasteners to nails for attachment to wood framing.
'The thickness may be reduced to 3 inches where limestone aggregate is used.
3
For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard described in Table No. 43-C, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size, thickness and
core type may be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is identical to that specified for the wallboard and the joints on the face
layer are reinforced and the entire surface is covered with a minimum of 'ho-inch gypsum veneer plaster. The gypsum base for veneer plaster and
the veneer plaster shall comply with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-15.
•Slab thickness over steel joists measured at the joists for metal lath form and at the top of the form for steel form units.
5Portland cement plaster with 15 pounds of hydrated lime and 3 pounds of approved additives or admixtures per bag of cement.
6Qne-inch by No. 20 gauge hexagonal wire mesh installed below lath and tied to each furring channel at joints between lath.
7 Furring channels spaced 12 inches on center.
'No. 14 gauge wires spaced 11.3 inches on center or 10 inches on center (for channel spacing of 16 inches and 12 inches, respectively) installed
below lath sheets in a diagonal pattern. Wires tied to furring channels or clips at lath edges.
9Gypsum wallboard ceilings attached to steel framing may be suspended with 1112-inch cold-formed carrying channels spaced 48 inches on center
which are suspended with No. 8 SWG galvanized wire hangers spaced 48 inches on center. Cross-furring channels are tied to the carrying
channels with No. 18 SWG galvanized wire (double strand) and spaced as required for direct attachment to the framing. This alternative is also
applicable to those assemblies recognized under Footnote a.
10
Six-inch hollow clay tile with 2-inch concrete slab above.
11 Four-inch hollow clay tile with 1112-inch concrete slab above.
''Thickness measured to bottom of steel form units.

13
Five-eighths inch of vermiculite gypsum plaster plus 'l2 inch of approved vermiculite acoustical plastic. c
14
Double wood floor may be either of the following: z
(a) Subfloor of l-inch nominal boarding, a layer of asbestos paper weighing not less than 14 pounds per I 00 square feet and a layer of l-inch
nominal tongue-and-groove finish flooring; or
~J:J
(b) Subfloorof l-inch nominal tongue-and-groove boarding or 15132-inch interior-type plywood with exterior glue and a layer of l-inch nominal i 3:
tongue-and-groove finish flooring or 19132-inch interior-type plywood finish flooring or a layer of Type I Grade M-1 particleboard not less ] I:D
c
than Sis inch thick. ;=
15 The ceiling may be omitted over unusable space, and flooring may be omitted where unusable space occurs above. c
16
For properties of cooler or wallboard nails, see U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17, Table 25-17-H. ~ zC)
"Thickness measured on top of steel deck unit. 0
"When the slab is in an unrestrained condition, minimum reinforcement cover shall not be less than 111• inches for three-hour; I inch for two-hour t 0
(siliceous aggregate only); and 31• inch for all other restrained or unrestrained conditions. ~ cm
1988 EDITION 4401-4405
Part VIII
REGULATIONS FOR USE OF PUBLIC

STREETS AND PROJECTIONS
OVER PUBLIC PROPERTY
Chapter44
PROTECTION OF PEDESTRIANS
DURING CONSTRUCTION OR DEMOLITION
General
Sec. 4401. No person shall use or occupy a street, alley or public sidewalk for
the performance of work under a building permit except in accordance with the
provisions of this chapter.
No person shall perform any work on any building or structure adjacent to a
public way in general use by the public for pedestrian travel, unless the pedestri-
ans are protected as specified in this chapter.
Any material or structure temporarily occupying public property, including
fences and walkways, shall be adequately lighted between sunset and sunrise.
Temporary Use of Streets and Alleys
Sec. 4402. The use of public property shall meet the requirements of the public
agency having jurisdiction. Whenever requested, plot plans and construction
details shall be submitted for review by the agencies concerned.
Storage on Public Property
Sec. 4403. Material and equipment necessary for work to be done under a
permit shall not be placed or stored on public property so as to obstruct free and
convenient approach to and use of any fire hydrant, fire or police alarm box,
utility box, catch basin or manhole or so as to interfere with the free flow of water
in any street or alley gutter.
Mixing Mortar on Public Property
Sec. 4404. The mixing or handling of mortar, concrete or other material on
public property shall be done in a manner that will not deface public property or
create a nuisance.
Protection of Utilities
Sec. 4405. A substantial protective frame and boarding shall be built around
and over every street lamp, utility box, fire or police alarm box, fire hydrant,
catch basin and manhole that may be damaged by any work being done under the
permit. This protection shall be maintained while such work is being done and
shall not obstruct the normal functioning of the device.
743
Walkway
Sec. 4406. A walkway not less than 4 feet wide shall be maintained on the
sidewalk in front of the building site during construction, alteration or demolition
unless the public agency having jurisdiction authorizes the sidewalk to be fenced
and closed. Adequate signs and railings shall be provided to direct pedestrian
traffic. Railings shall be provided when required by Section 4407.
The walkway shall be capable of supporting a uniform live load of 150 pounds
per square foot. A durable wearing surface shall be provided.
Pedestrian Protection
Sec. 4407. (a) Protection Required. Pedestrian traffic shall be protected by
a railing on the street side when the walkway extends into the roadway, by a railing
adjacent to excavations and by such other protection as set forth in Table No. 44-
A. The construction of such protective devices shall be in accordance with the
provisions of this chapter.
(b) Railings. Railings shall be substantially built and, when of wood, shall be
constructed of new material having a nominal size of at least 2 inches by 4 inches.
Railings shall be at least 3 feet 6 inches in height and when adjacent to excavations
shall be provided with a midrail.
(c) Fences. Fences shall be solid and substantially built, be not less than 8 feet
in height above grade and be placed on the side of the walkway nearest to the
building site. Fences shail extend the entire length of the building site and each
end shall be returned to the building line.
Openings in such fences shall be protected by doors which normally are kept
closed.
All fences shall be provided with 2-inch by 4-inch plate, top and bottom, and
shall be well braced. The fence material shall be a minimum of 3/4-inch boards or
1/4-inch plywood. Plywood fences shall conform to the following requirements:
I. Plywood panels shall be bonded with an adhesive identical to that for
exterior plywood.
2. Plywood l/4 inch or 5/t6 inch in thickness shall have studs spaced not more
than 2 feet on center.
3. Plywood 3/s inch or 112 inch in thickness shall have studs spaced not more
than 4 feet on center, provided a 2-inch by 4-inch stiffener is placed horizontally at
the midheight when the stud spacing exceeds 2 feet on center.
4. Plywood 5fs inch or thicker shall not span over 8 feet.
(d) Canopies. The protective canopy shall have a clear height of 8 feet above
the walkway. The roof shall be tightly sheathed. The sheathing shall be 2-inch
nominal wood planking or equal. Every canopy shall have a solid fence built
along its entire length on the construction side.
If materials are stored or work is done on the roof of the canopy, the street sides
and ends of the canopy roof shall be protected by a tight curb board not less than I
foot high and a railing not less than 3 feet 6 inches high.
744
1988 EDITION 4407-4409
The entire structure shall be designed to carry the loads to be imposed on it,
provided the live load shall be not less than 150 pounds per square foot. In lieu of
such design a protection canopy supporting not more than 150 pounds per square
foot may be constructed as follows:
I. Footings shall be continuous 2-inch by 6-inch members with scabbed joints.
2. Posts not less than 4 inches by 6 inches in size shall be provided on both sides
of the canopy and spaced not more than 12 feet, center to center.
3. Stringers not Jess than 4 inches by 12 inches in size shall be placed on edge
upon the posts.
4. Joists resting upon the stringers shall be at least 2 inches by 8 inches in size
and shall be spaced not more than 2 feet, center to center.
5. The deck shall be of planks at least 2 inches thick nailed to the joists.
6. Each post shall be knee-braced to joists and stringers by members 4 feet
long, not less than 2 inches by 4 inches in size.
7. A curb not less than 2 inches by 12 inches in size shall be set on edge along
the outside edge of the deck.
EXCEPTION: Protection canopies for new, light-frame construction not ex-
ceeding two stories in height may be designed for a live load of75 pounds per square
foot or the loads to be imposed on it, whichever is the greater.
Maintenance and Removal of Protective Devices

Sec. 4408. (a) Maintenance. Such protection shall be maintained in place
and kept in good order for the entire length of time pedestrians may be endan-
gered.
(b) Removal. Every protection fence or canopy shall be removed within 30
days after such protection is no longer required by this chapter for protection of
pedestrians.
Demolition
Sec. 4409. The work of demolishing any building shall not be commenced
until the required pedestrian protection structures are in place.
The building official may require the permittee to submit plans and a complete
schedule for demolition. Where such are required, no work shall be done until
such plans and/or schedule are approved by the building official.
745
TABLE NO. 44·A-TYPE OF PROTECTION REQUIRED FOR PEDESTRIANS

HEIGHT OF DISTANCE FROM CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION
CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED
8 feet Less than 6 feet Railing
or less 6 feet or more None
Fence and
Less than 6 feet canopy
6 feet or more but not more than Fence and
one· fourth the height of construction canopy
More than 6 feet or more, but between one-
8 feet fourth to one-half the height of Fence
construction
6 feet or more hut exceeding one-
half the construction height None
746
1988 EDITION 4501-4504
Chapter45
PERMANENT OCCUPANCY
OF PUBLIC PROPERTY
General
Sec. 4501. No part of any structure or any appendage thereto, except signs,
shall project beyond the property line of the building site, except as specified in
this chapter.
Structures or appendages regulated by this code shall be constructed of materi-
als as specified in Section 1710.
The projection of any structure or appendage shall be the distance measured
horizontally from the property line to the outermost point of the projection.
Nothing in this code shall prohibit the construction and usc of a structure
between buildings and over or under a public way, provided the structure complies
with all requirements of this code.
No provisions of this chapter shall be construed to permit the violation of other
laws or ordinances regulating the use and occupancy of public property.
Projection Into Alleys
Sec. 4502. No part of any structure or any appendage thereto shall project into
any alley.
EXCEPTIONS: I. A curb or buffer block may pt ojcct not more than 9 inches and
not exceed a height of 9 inches above grade.
2. Footings located at least 8 feet below grade may project not more than 12
inches.
Space Below Sidewalk
Sec. 4503. The space adjoining a building below a sidewalk on public property
may be used and occupied in connection with the building for any purpose not
inconsistent with this code or other Jaws or ordinances regulating the use and
occupancy of such spaces on condition that the right so to use and occupy may be
revoked by the city at any time and that the owner of the building will construct the
necessary walls and footings to separate such space from the building and pay all
costs and expenses attendant therewith.
Footings located at least 8 feet below grade may project not more than 12
inches.
Balconies, Sun-control Devices and Appendages
Sec. 4504. Oriel windows, balconies, sun-control devices, unroofed porches,
cornices, belt courses and appendages such as water tables, sills, capitals, bases
and architectural projections may project over the public property of the building
site a distance as determined by the clearance of the lowest point of the projection
above the grade immediately below, as follows:
Clearance above grade Jess than 8 feet-no projection is permitted.
Clearance above grade over 8 feet-! inch of projection is permitted for each
additional inch of clearance, provided that no such projection shall exceed a
distance of 4 feet.
747
Marquees
Sec. 4505. (a) General. For the purpose of this section a marquee shall include
any object or decoration attached to or a part of said marquee.
(b) Projection and Clearance. The horizontal clearance between a marquee
and the curb line shall be not less than 2 feet.
A marquee projecting more than two thirds of the distance from the property
line to the curb line shall be not less than 12 feet above the ground or pavement
below.
A marquee projecting less than two thirds of the distance from the property line
to the curb line shall be not less than 8 feet above the ground or pavement below.
(c) Length. A marquee projecting more than two thirds of the distance from
the property line to the curb line shall not exceed 25 feet in length along the
direction of the street.
(d) Thickness. The maximum height or thickness of a marquee measured
vertically from its lowest to its highest point shall not exceed 3 feet when the
marquee projects more than two thirds of the distance from the property line to the
curb line and shall not exceed 9 feet when the marquee is less than two thirds of the
distance from the property line to the curb line.
(c) Construction. A marquee shall be supported entirely by the building and
constructed of noncombustible material or, when supported by a building of Type
V construction, may be of one-hour fire-resistive construction.
(f) Roof Construction. The roof or any part thereof may be a skylight, pro-
vided glass skylights are of laminated or wired glass complying with Chapter 34.
Plastic skylights shall comply with Section 5207.
Every roof and skylight of a marquee shall be sloped to downspouts which shall
conduct any drainage from the marquee under the sidewalk to the curb.
(g) Location Prohibited. Every marquee shall be so located as not to interfere
with the operation of any exterior standpipe or to obstruct the clear passage of
stairways or exits from the building or the installation or maintenance of electro-
Hers.
Awnings
Sec. 4506. (a) Definition. For the purpose of this section:
AWNING is a temporary shelter supported entirely from the exterior wall of a
building.
(b) Construction. Awnings shall have noncombustible frames but may have
combustible coverings. Every awning shall be collapsible, retractable or capable
of being folded against the face of the supporting building. When collapsed,
retracted or folded, the design shall be such that the awning does not block any
required exit.
EXCEPTION: A fixed awning not more than 10 feet in length may be erected
over a doorway to the building.
(c) Projection. Awnings may extend over public property not more than 7 feet
from the face of a supporting building, but no portion shall extend nearer than 2
feet to the face of the nearest curb line measured horizontally. In no case shall the
748
1988 EDITION 4506-4507
awning extend over public property greater than two thirds of the distance from
the property line to the nearest curb in front of the building site.
(d) Clearances. All portions of any awning shall be at least 8 feet above any
public walkway.
EXCEPTION: Any valance attached to an awning shall not project above the
roof of the awning at the point of attachment and shall not extend more than 12 inches
below the roof of the awning at the point of attachment, but in no case shall any
portion of a valance be less than 7 feet in height above a public way.
Doors
Sec. 4507. Power-operated doors and their guide rails shall not project over
public property. Other doors, either fully opened or when opening, shall not
project more than I foot beyond the property line, except that in alleys no
projection beyond the property line is permitted.
Chapter46
NO REQUIREMENTS
749
Part IX
WALL AND CEILING

COVERINGS
Chapter47
INSTALLATION OF WALL
AND CEILING COVERINGS
Scope
Sec. 4701. (a) General. The installation of lath, plaster and gypsum board
shall be done in a manner and with materials as specified in this chapter and, when
required for fire-resistive construction, also shall conform with the provisions of
Chaptcr43.
Other approved wall or ceiling coverings may be installed in accordance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer and the conditions of approval.
(b) Inspection. No lath or gypsum board or their attachments shall be covered
or finished until it has been inspected and approved by the building official in
accordance with Section 305 (e).
(c) Tests. The building official may require tests to be made in accordance with
approved standards to determine compliance with the provisions of this chapter,
provided the permit holder has been notified 24 hours in advance of the time of
making such tests.
The testing of gypsum and gypsum products shall conform with U. 8. C.
Standard No. 47-17.
(d) Definitions. For purposes of this chapter, certain terms are defined as
follows:
CORNER BEAD is a rigid formed unit or shape used at projecting or external
angles to define and reinforce the corners of interior surfaces.
CORNERITE is a shaped reinforcing unit of expanded metal or wire fabric
used for angle reinforcing and having minimum outstanding legs of not Jess than 2
inches.
CORROSION-RESISTANT MATERIALS are materials that arc inherently
rust resistant or materials to which an approved rust-resistive coating has been
applied either before or after forming or fabrication.
EXTERIOR SURFACES are weather-exposed surfaces as defined in Section
424.
EXTERNAL CORNER REINFORCEMENT is a shaped reinforcing unit
for external corner reinforcement for portland cement plaster formed to ensure
mechanical bond and a solid plaster corner.
750
1988 EDITION 4701-4703
INTERIOR SURFACES are surfaces other than weather-exposed surfaces.

MOIST CURING is any method employed to retain sufficient moisture for
hydration of portland cement plaster.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER is a mixture of portland cement or
portland cement and lime and aggregate and other approved materials as specified
in this code.
STEEL STUDS, LOAD-BEARING AND NONLOAD-BEARING, are pre-
fabricated channel shapes, welded wire or combination wire and steel angle types,
galvanized or coated with rust-resistive material.
STRIPPING is flat reinforcing units of expanded metal or wire fabric or other
materials not less than 3 inches wide to be installed as required over joints of
gypsum lath.
TIE WIRE is wire for securing together metal framing or supports, for tying
metal and wire fabric lath and gypsum lath and wallboard together and for
securing accessories.
WIRE BACKING is horizontal strands of tautened wire attached to surfaces
of vertical wood supports which, when covered with building paper, provide a
backing for portland cement plaster.
(e) Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Systems. Suspended acoustical ceiling
systems shall be installed in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-18.
(f) Gypsum Veneer Plaster Systems. Gypsum veneer base and gypsum
veneer plaster shall be installed in accordance with U. B.C. Standard No. 4 7-19.
Materials
Sec. 4702. Lathing, plastering, wallboard materials, ceiling suspension sys-
tems and plywood paneling shall conform to the applicable standards listed in
Chapter60.
Vertical Assemblies
Sec. 4703. (a) General. In addition to the requirements of this section, verti-
cal assemblies of plaster or gypsum board shall be designed to resist the loads
specified in Chapter 23 of this code. For wood framing, see Chapter 25. For metal
framing, see Chapter 27.
EXCEPTION: Wood-framed assemblies meeting the requirements of Section
2517 need not be designed.
(b) Wood Framing. Wood supports for lath or gypsum board shall be not less
than 2 inches nominal in least dimension. Wood stripping or furring shall be not
less than 2 inches nominal thickness in the least dimension except that furring
strips not less than l-inch by 2-inch nominal dimension may be used over solid
backing.
(c) Studless Partitions. The minimum thickness of vertically erected stud less
solid plaster partitions of 3/s-inch and 3/4-inch rib metal lath or l/2-inch-thick long-
length gypsum lath and gypsum board partitions shall be 2 inches. The installation
of metal lath used in studless partitions shall conform with the provisions of
751
Horizontal Assemblies
Sec. 4704. (a) General. In addition to the requirements of this section, sup-
ports for horizontal assemblies of plaster or gypsum board shall be designed to
support all loads as specified in Chapter 23 of this code.
EXCEPTION: Wood-framed assemblies meeting the requirements of Section
2517 need not be designed.
(b) Wood Framing. Wood stripping or suspended wood systems, where used,
shall be not less than 2 inches nominal thickness in the least dimension, except
that furring strips not less than l-inch by 2-inch nominal dimension may be used
over solid backing.
(c) Hangers. Hangers for suspended ceilings shall be not less than the sizes set
forth in lablc No. 47-A, fastened to or embedded in the structural framing,
masonry or concrete.
Hangers shall be saddle-tied around main runners to develop the full strength of
the hangers. Lower ends of flat hangers shall be bolted with 3fg-inch bolts to
runner channels or bent tightly around runners and bolted to the main part of the
hanger.
(d) Runners and Furring. The main runner and cross-furring shall be not less
than the sizes set forth in Table No. 47-A, except that other steel sections of
equivalent strength may be substituted for those set forth in this table. Cross-
furring shall be securely attached to the main runner by saddle-tying with not less
than one strand of No. 16 or two strands of No. 18 U.S. gauge tic wire or approved
equivalent attachments.
Interior Lath
Sec. 4705. (a) General. Gypsum lath shall not be installed until weather
protection for the installation is provided. Where wood frame walls and partitions
arc covered on the interior with portland cement plaster or tile of similar material
and arc subject to water splash, the framing shall be protected with an approved
moisture barrier.
Showers and public toilet walls shall conform to Section 510 (b).
(b) Application of Gypsum Lath. The thickness, spacing of supports and the
method of attachment of gypsum lath shall be as set forth in Tables No. 4 7 -B and
No. 47-C. Approved wire and sheet metal attachment clips may be used.
Gypsum lath shall be applied with the long dimension perpendicular to sup-
ports and with end joints staggered in successive courses. End joints may occur on
one support when stripping is applied the full length of the joints.
Where electrical radiant heat cables arc installed on ceilings, the stripping, if
conductive. may be omitted a distance not to exceed 12 inches from the walls.
Where lath edges arc not in moderate contact and have joint gaps exceeding 3fs
inch, the joint gaps shall be covered with stripping or corncrite. Stripping or
corncritc may be omitted when the entire surface is reinforced with not less than l-
inch No. 20 U.S. gauge woven wire. When lath is secured to horizontal or vertical
supports not used as structural diaphragms, end joints may occur between sup-
ports when lath ends arc secured together with approved fasteners. Vertical
assemblies also shall conform with Section 2309 (b).
752
1988 EDITION 4705-4706
Cornerite shall be installed sn as to retain position during plastering at all

internal corners. Cornerite may, . vmitted when plaster is not continuous from
one plane to an adjacent plane.
(c) Application of Metal Plaster Bases. The type and weight of metal lath,
and the gauge and spacing of wire in welded or woven lath, the spacing of
supports, and the methods of attachment to wood supports shall be as set forth in
Tables No. 47-B and No. 47-C.
Metal lath shall be attached to metal supports with not less than No. I R U.S.
gauge tie wire spaced not more than 6 inches apart or with approved equivalent
attachments.
Metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be applied with the long dimension of the
sheets perpendicular to supports.
Metal lath shall be lapped not less than 112 inch at sides and I inch at ends. Wire
fabric lath shall be lapped not less than one mesh at sides and ends, but not less
than I inch. Rib metal lath with edge ribs greater than 1/s inch shall be lapped at
sides by nesting outside ribs. When edge ribs are 1/s inch or less, rib metal lath
may be lapped l/2 inch at sides, or outside ribs may be nested. Where end laps of
sheets do not occur over supports, they shall be securely tied together with not less
than No. IR U.S. gauge wire.
Cornerite shall be installed in all internal corners to retain position during
plastering. Cornerite may be omitted when lath is continuous or when plaster is
not continuous from one plane to an adjacent plane.
Exterior Lath
Sec. 4706. (a) General. Exterior surfaces arc weather-exposed surfaces as
defined in Section 424. For eave overhangs required to be fire resistive, sec
Section 1710.
(b) Corrosion Resistance. All lath and lath attachments shall be of corrosion-
resistant material. See Section 4701 (d).
(c) Backing. Backing or a lath shall provide sufficient rigidity to permit
plaster application.
Where lath on vertical surfaces extends between rafters or other similar project-
ing members, solid backing shall be installed to provide support for lath and
attachments.
Gypsum lath or gypsum board shall not be used, except that on horizontal
supports of ceilings or roof soffits it may be used as backing for metal lath or wire
fabric lath and portland cement plaster.
Backing is not required under metal lath or papcrbacked wire fabric lath.
(d) Weather-resistive Barriers. Weather-resistive barriers shall be installed
as required in Section 1707 (a) and, when applied over wood base sheathing, shall
include two layers of Grade D paper.
(e) Application of Metal Plaster Bases. The application of metal lath or wire
fabric lath shall be as specified in Section 4705 (c) and they shall be furred out
from vertical supports or backing not less than l/4 inch except as set forth in
Footnote No.2, Table No. 47-B.
753
Where no external corner reinforcement is used, lath shall be furred out and
carried around corners at least one support on frame construction.
A minimum 0.021-inch (No. 26 gauge) corrosion-resistant weep screed with a
minimum vertical attachment flange of 3112 inches shall be provided at or below
the foundation plate line on all exterior stud walls. The screed shall be placed a
minimum of 4 inches above grade and shall be of a type which will allow trapped
water to drain to the exterior of the building. The weather-resistive barrier and
exterior lath shall cover and terminate on the attachment flange of the screed.
Interior Plaster
Sec. 4707. (a) General. Plastering with gypsum plaster or portland cement
plaster shall be not less than three coats when applied over metal lath or wire fabric
lath and shall be not less than two coats when applied over other bases permitted
by this chapter. Showers and public toilet walls shall conform to Section 510 (b).
Plaster shall not be applied directly to fiber insulation board. Portland cement
plaster shall not be applied directly to gypsum lath, gypsum masonry or gypsum
plaster except as specified in Section 4706 (c).
When installed, grounds shall assure the minimum thickness of plaster as set
forth in Table No. 47-D. Plaster thickness shall be measured from the face of lath
and other bases.
(b) Base Coat Proportions. Proportions of aggregate to cementitious materi-
als shall not exceed the volume set forth in Table No. 47-E for gypsum plaster and
Table No. 47-F for portland cement and portland cement-lime plaster.
(c) Base Coat Application. Base coats shall be applied with sufficient mate-
rial and pressure to form a complete key or bond.
I. Gypsum plaster. For two-coat work, the first coat shall be brought out to
grounds and straightened to a true surface, leaving the surface rough to receive the
finish coat. For three-coat work, the surface of the first coat shall be scored
sufficiently to provide adequate bond for the second coat and shall be permitted to
harden and set before the second coat is applied. The second coat shall be brought
out to grounds and straightened to a true surface, leaving the surface rough to
receive the finish coat.
2. Portland cement plaster. The first two coats shall be as required for the
first coats of exterior plaster, except that the moist -curing time period between the
first and second coats shall be not less than 24 hours and the thickness shall be as
set forth in Table No. 47-D. Moist curing shall not be required where job and
weather conditions are favorable to the retention of moisture in the portland
cement plaster for the required time period.
(d) Finish Coat Application. Finish coats shall be applied with sufficient
material and pressure to form a complete bond. Finish coats shall be proportioned
and mixed in an approved manner. Gypsum and lime and other interior finish
coats shall be applied over gypsum base coats which have hardened and set.
Thicknesses shall be not less than l/16 inch.
Portland cement and lime finish coats may be applied over interior portland
cement base coats which have been in place not less than 48 hours.
754
1988 EDITION 4707-4708
Approved acoustical finish plaster may be applied over any base coat plaster.
over lean masonry or concrete, or other approved surfaces.
(e) Interior Masonry or Concrete. Condition of surfaces shall be as speci-
fied in Section 470X (h). Approved specially prepared gypsum plaster designed
for application to concrete surfaces or approved acoustical plaster may be used.
The total thickness of base coat plaster applied to concrete ceilings shall be as set
forth in'lltblc No. 47-D. Should ceiling surfaces require more than the maximum
thicknes~ permitted in Table No. 47-D, metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be
installed on such surfaces before plastering.
Exterior Plaster
Sec. 4708. (a) General. Plastering with portland cement plaster shall be not
less than three coats when applied over metal lath or wire fabric lath and shall be
not less than two coats when applied over masonry, concrete or gypsum backing
as specified in Scction4706 (c). If plaster surface is completely covered by veneer
or other facing material, or is completely concealed by another wall. plaster
application need be only two coats, provided the total thickness is as set forth in
'Htblc No. 47-F
On wood frame or metal stud construction with an on-grade concrete floor slab
system. exterior plaster shall be applied in such a manner as to cover, but not
extend below, lath and paper. See Section 4706 (e) for the application of paper and
lath. and flashing or drip screeds.
Only approved plasticity agents and approved amounts thereof may be added to
portland cement. When plastic cement is used, no additional lime or plasticizers
shall he added. Hydrated lime or the equivalent amount of lime putty used a~ a
plasticizer may be added to portland cement plaster in an amount not to exceed
that set forth in ·ntble No. 47-F.
Ciypsum plaster shall not be used on exterior surfaces. Sec Section424.
(b) Hase Coat Proportions. The proportion of aggregate to ccmcntitious
materials shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-F.
(c) Hase Coat Application. The first coat shall be applied with sufficient
material and pressure to fill solidly all openings in the lath. The surface shall he
scored horizontally sufficiently rough to provide adequate bond to receive the
second coat.
The second coat shall be brought out to proper thickness, roddcd and floated
sufficiently rough to provide adequate bond for finish coat. The second coat shall
have no variation greater than l/4 inch in any direction under a 5-foot straight edge.
(d) Environmental Conditions. Portland cement based plaster shall not he
applied to frozen base or those containing frost. Plaster mixes shall not contain
fron:n ingredients. Plaster coats shall be protected from freezing for a period of
not less than 24 hour~ after set has occurred.
(c) Curing and Interval. First and second coats of plaster shall be applied and
moist cured as set forth in Table No. 47-F.
When applied over gypsum backing as specified in Section 4706 (c) or directly
to unit masonry surfaces. the second coat may be applied as soon as the first coat
has attained sufficient hardness.
755
(f) Alternate Method of Application. As an alternate method of application,

the second coat may be applied as soon as the first coat has attained sufficient
rigidity to receive the second coat.
When using this method of application, calcium aluminate cement up to 15
percent of the weight of the portland cement may be added to the mix.
Curing of the first coat may be omitted and the second coat shall be cured as set
forth in Table No. 47-F.
(g) Finish Coats. Finish coats shall be proportioned and mixed in an approved
manner and in accordance with Table No. 47-F.
Portland cement and lime finish coats shall be applied over base coats which
have been in place for the time periods set forth in Table No. 47-F. The third or
finish coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to bond to and to
cover the brown coat and shall be of sufficient thickness to conceal the brown
coat.
(h) Preparation of Masonry and Concrete. Surfaces shall be clean, free
from efflorescence, sufficiently damp and rough to assure proper bond. If surface
is insufficiently rough, approved bonding agents or a portland cement dash bond
coat mixed in the proportions of 11/z cubic feet of sand to l cubic foot of portland
cement shall be applied. Approved bonding agents shall conform with the provi-
sions of U .B.C. Standard No. 47-1. Dash bond coat shall be left undisturbed and
shall be moist cured not less than 24 hours. When dash bond is applied, first coat
of base coat plaster may be omitted. See Table No. 47-D for thickness.
Exposed Aggregate Plaster

Sec. 4709. (a) General. Exposed natural or integrally colored aggregate may
be partially embedded in a natural or colored bedding coat of portland cement or
gypsum plaster, subject to the provisions of this section.
(b) Aggregate. The aggregate may be applied manually or mechanically and
shall consist of marble chips, pebbles or similar durable, nonreactive materials,
moderately hard (three or more on the MOH scale).
(c) Bedding Coat Proportions. The exterior bedding coat shall be composed
of one part portland cement, one part TypeS lime and a maximum three parts of
graded white or natural sand by volume. The interior bedding coat shall be
composed of I00 pounds neat gypsum plaster and a maximum 200 pounds of
graded white sand, or exterior or interior may be a factory-prepared bedding coat.
The exterior bedding coat shall have a minimum compressive strength of l 000
(d) Application. The bedding coat may be applied directly over the first
(scratch) coat of plaster, provided the ultimate overall thickness is a minimum of
7fx inch including lath. Over concrete or masonry surfaces the overall thickness
shall be a minimum of lfz inch.
(c) Bases. Exposed aggregate plaster may be applied over concrete, masonry,
portland cement plaster base coats or gypsum plaster base coats.
(f) Preparation of Masonry and Concrete. Masonry and concrete surfaces
shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Section 4708 (h).
756
1988 EDITION 4709-4711
(g) Curing. Portland cement base coats shall be cured in accordance with
Table No. 47-F. Portland cement bedding coat shall retain sufficient moisture for
hydration (hardening) for 24 hours minimum or, where necessary, shall be kept
damp for 24 hours by light water spraying.
Pneumatically Placed Plaster (Gunite)

Sec. 4710. Pneumatically placed portland cement plaster shall be a mixture of
portland cement and sand, mixed dry, conveyed by air through a pipe or flexible
tube, hydrated at the nozzle at the end of the conveyor and deposited by air
pressure in its final position.
Rebound material may be screened and reused as sand in an amount not greater
than 25 percent of the total sand in any batch.
Pneumatically placed portland cement plaster shall consist of a mixture of one
part cement to not more than five parts sand. Plasticity agents may be used as
specified in Section 4708 (a). Except when applied to concrete or masonry, such
plaster shall be applied in not less than two coats to a minimum total thickness of
7/s inch. The first coat shall be rodded as specified in Section 4708 (c) for the
second coat. The curing period and time interval shall be as set forth in Table No.
47-F.
Gypsum Wallboard
Sec. 4711. (a) General. All gypsum wallboard shall conform to U.B.C.
Standard No. 47-11 and shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of this
section. Gypsum wallboard shall not be installed on exterior surfaces. See Sec-
tion 424. For use as backing under stucco, see Section 4706 (c).
Gypsum wallboard shall not be installed until weather protection for the
installation is provided.
(b) Supports. Supports shall be spaced not to exceed the spacing set forth in
Table No. 47-G for single-ply application and Table No. 47-H for two-ply appli-
cation. Vertical assemblies shall conform with Section 4703. Horizontal assem-
blies shall comply with Section 4704.
(c) Single-ply Application. All edges and ends of gypsum wallboard shall
occur on the framing members, except those edges and ends which arc perpendic-
ular to the framing members. All edges and ends of gypsum wallboard shall be in
moderate contact except in concealed spaces where fire-resistive construction or
diaphragm action is not required.
The size and spacing of fasteners shall conform with Table No. 47-G except
where modified by fire-resistive construction meeting the requirements of Sec-
tion 4302 (b). Fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/8 inch from edges and ends
of gypsum wallboard. Fasteners at the top and bottom plates of vertical assem-
blies, or the edges and ends of horizontal assemblies perpendicular to supports,
and at the wall line may be omitted except on shear-resisting elements or fire-
resistive assemblies. Fasteners shall be applied in such a manner as not to fracture
the face paper with the fastener head.
757
Gypsum wallboard may be applied to wood framing members with an approved

adhesive conforming with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-2. A continuous bead of the
adhesive shall be applied to the face of all framing members, except top and
bottom plates, of sufficient size as to spread to an average width of I inch and
thickness of l/16 inch when the gypsum wallboard is applied. Where the edges or
ends of two pieces of gypsum wallboard occur on the same framing member, two
continuous parallel beads of adhesive shall be applied to the framing member.
Fasteners shall be used with adhesive application in accordance with Table
No. 47-G.
(d) Two-ply Application. The base of gypsum wallboard shall be applied with
fasteners of the type and size as required for the nonadhesive application of single-
ply gypsum wallboard. Fastener spacings shall be in accordance with Table
No. 47-H except where modified by fire-resistive construction meeting the re-
quirements of Section 4302 (b).
The face ply of gypsum wallboard may be applied with gypsum wallboard joint
compound or approved adhesive furnishing full coverage between the plies or
with fasteners in accordance with Table No. 47-H. When the face ply is installed
with joint compound or adhesive, the joints of the face ply need not occur on
supports. Temporary nails or shoring shall be used to hold face ply in position
until the joint compound or adhesive develops adequate bond.
(e) Joint Treatment. Gypsum wallboard single-layer fire-rated assemblies
shall have joints treated.
EXCEPTIONS: Joint treatment need not be provided when any of the following
conditions occur:
I. Where the wallboard is to receive a decorative finish such as wood paneling,
battens, acoustical finishes or any similar application which would be equivalent to
joint treatment.
2. Joints occur over wood-framing members.
3. Assemblies tested without joint treatment.
Gypsum wallboard tape and joint compound shall conform with the provisions
ofU.B.C. Standard No. 47-6.
Use of Gypsum in Showers and Water Closets

Sec. 4712. When gypsum is used as a base for tile or wall panels for tub or
shower enclosures or water closet compartment walls, water-resistant gypsum
backing board complying with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-14 shall be used, except
that water-resistant gypsum board shall not be used in the following locations:
I . Over a vapor retarder.
2. In areas subject to continuous high humidity, such as saunas, steam rooms or
gang shower rooms.
3. On ceilings.
Softwood Plywood Paneling

Sec. 4713. All softwood plywood paneling shall conform with the provisions
of Chapters 25 and 42 and shall be installed in accordance with Table No. 47-J.
758
1988 EDITION 4714
Shear-resisting Construction with Wood Frame

Sec. 4714. (a) General. Portland cement plaster, gypsum lath and plaster,
gypsum veneer base, gypsum sheathing board and gypsum wallboard may be used
on wood studs for vertical diaphragms if applied in accordance with this section.
Shear-resisting values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No. 47-l. The
effects of overturning on vertical diaphragms shall be investigated in accordance
with Section 2303 (b) 3.
The shear values tabulated shall not be cumulative with the shear value of other
materials applied to the same wall. The shear values may be additive when the
identical materials applied as specified in this section are applied to both sides of
the wall.
(b) Masonry and Concrete Construction. Portland cement plaster, gypsum
lath and plaster, gypsum veneer base, gypsum sheathing board and gypsum
wallboard shall not be used in vertical diaphragms to resist forces imposed by
masonry or concrete construction.
(c) Wall Framing. Framing for vertical diaphragms shall conform with Sec-
tion 2517 (g) for bearing walls, and studs shall be spaced not farther apart than 16
inches center to center. Sills, plates and marginal studs shall be adequately !i!i
connected to framing elements located above and below to resist all design forces. f
(d) Height-to-Length Ratio. The maximum allowable height-to-length ratio
for the construction in this section shall be 2 to 1. Wall sections having height-to-
length ratios in excess of 1112 to 1 shall be blocked.
(e) Application. End joints of adjacent courses of gypsum lath, gypsum ve-
neer base, gypsum sheathing board or gypsum wallboard sheets shall not occur
over the same stud.
Where required in Table No. 47-1, blocking having the same cross-sectional
dimensions as the studs shall be provided at all joints that are perpendicular to the
studs.
The size and spacing of nails shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-1. Nails shall
be spaced not less than 3/s inch from edges and ends of gypsum lath, gypsum
veneer base, gypsum sheathing board, gypsum wallboard or sides of studs,
blocking and top and bottom plates.
I. Gypsum lath. Gypsum lath shall be applied perpendicular to the studs.
Maximum allowable shear values shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-1.
2. Gypsum sheathing board. Four-foot-wide pieces may be applied parallel
or perpendicular to studs. Two-foot-wide pieces shall be applied perpendicular to
the studs. Maximum allowable shear values shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-1.
3. Gypsum wallboard or veneer base. Gypsum wallboard or veneer base
may be applied parallel or perpendicular to studs. Maximum allowable shear
values shall be as set forth in Table No. 47-l.
759
TABLE NO. 47·A-SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS 1
(For Support of Ceilings Weighing Not More than 10 Pounds per Square Foot)
Minimum Sizes for Wire and Rigid Hangers

MAXIMUM AREA
SUPPORTED
SIZE AND TYPE (In SQuare Feet) SIZE
12.5 No. 9 gauge wire

16 No. 8 gauge wire
Hangers for Suspended Ceilings 18 Yt 6 • diameter, mild steel rod 2
20 "X," diameter, mild steel rod2
22.5 '14 • diameter, mild steel rod 2
25.0 I • x Yt 6 " mild steel flats 3
Single Hangers Between 8 No. 12 gauge wire
Beams 4 12 No. 10 gauge wire
16 No. 8 gauge wire
For Supporting Runners Double Wire Loops at 8 No. 14 gauge wire c:
Beams or Joists 3 12 No. 12 gauge wire z
Hangers for Attaching 16 ['.!Q.. Il_g_all_ge wire ;;
Runners and Furring Di- 0
rectly to Beams and Joists For Supporting Furring Type of Support: No. 14 gauge wire ::u
3:
without Runners 4 (Wire Concrete 8 No. 16gaugewire(2loops) 5 lD
Loops at Supports) Steel No. 16 gauge wire (21oops)5 c:
Wood ;:::
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
Minimum Sizes and Maximum Spans for Main Runners 6 7
...
CQ
(I)
(I)
SIZE AND TYPE MAXIMUM SPACING OF HANGERS MAXIMUM SPACING OF RUNNERS m
OR SUPPORTS (ALONG RUNNERS) (TRANSVERSE) c
*"- .3 pound per foot, cold- or hot-rolled channel 2'0" 3'0" 3
1¥.."- .475pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 4'0" 0
3'0" z
1 ¥.. "- .475 pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 3'6" 3'6"
1 ¥.. "- .475 pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 4'0" 3'0"
1 11.."-1.12 pounds perfoot, hot-rolled channel 4'0" 5'0"
2 "-1.26 pounds per foot, hot-rolled channel 5'0" 5'0"
2 "- .59 pound per foot, cold-rolled channel 5'0" 3'6"
1 ¥.." x 1 ¥.." x -h" angle 5'0" 3'6"
Minimum Sizes and Maximum Spans for Cross Furring 6 7
SIZE AND TYPE OF CROSS FURRING MAXIMUM SPACING OF RUNNERS MAXIMUM SPACING OF CROSS
OR SUPPORTS FURRING MEMBERS (TRANSVERSE)
14 " diameter pencil rods 2'0" 12"

%" diameter pencil rods 2'0" 19"
% " diameter pencil rods 2'6" 12"
3'0" 24"
% "-.3 pound per foot, cold- or hot-rolled channel 3'6" 16"
4'0" 12"
4'0" 24"
1 "-.410 pound per foot, hot-rolled channel 4'6" 19"
5'0'' 12"
1Metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay-in panel ceiling system, weighing not more than 4 pounds per square foot, including light
fixtures and all ceiling-supported equipment and conforming to C.B .C. Standard No. 47-18. are exempt from Table No. 47-A.
For furred and suspended ceilings with metal lath construction. see C.B.C. Standard No. 47-4.
2All rod hangers shall be protected with a zinc or cadmium coating or with a rust-inhibitive paint.
3 All flat hangers shall be protected with a zinc or cadmium coating or with a rust-inhibitive pamt .
...en...... 4 1nserts. special clips or other device' of equal 5trength may be substituted for tho'e specified
5 Two loops of "'o. 18 gauge wire may be substituted for each loop of "'o. 16 gauge wire r·or attaching steel furring to steel or wood JOim.
6 Spans are based on webs of channels being erected vertically
7
0ther sectiom of hot- or cold-rolled members of equivalenr qrength may be substituted for those specified
TABLE NO. 47-81-TYPES OF LATH-MAXIMUM SPACING OF SUPPORTS
VERTICAL
(lnlnc:Ms)
Metal HORIZONTAL
(In Inc'-)
MINIMUM WEIGHT Solid
(Per Square Yard) Plaster Wood or
TYPE OF LA1ll2 GAUGE AND MESH SIZE Wood Partitions Other Concrete Metal
I. Expanded Metal Lath 2.5 I63 163 12 12 12

(Diamond Mesh) 3.4 163 163 I6 I6 16
2. Flat Rib Expanded 2.75 16 16 I6 16 I6
Metal Lath 3.4 19 24 19 19 19
3. Stucco Mesh Expanded 1.8 and 164 - - - -
Metal Lath 3.6
3.4 24 245 24 24 24
4. W' Rib Expanded Metal Lath 4.0 24 245 24 24 24
5. Sheet Lath 4.5 24 5 24 24 24
c:
I. 95 pounds, No. II gauge, 2" x 2" 24 24 24 24 24
z
Welded I.I6 pounds, No. 16 gauge, 2" x 2" 16 16 16 I6 16 ~
:D
1.4 pounds, No. 18 gauge, I" x 1"6 164 - - - -
6. Wrre Fabric Lath 3:
ID
1.1 pounds, No. 18 gauge, 11/z" HexagonaJ6 24 16 16 24 16 c:
Woven4 I.4 pounds, No. I7 gauge, I 'h''HexagonaJ6 24 16 16 24 16 r=
c
1.4 pounds, No. I8 gauge, I" HexagonaJ6 24 I6 I6 24 16
7. W' Gypsum Lath (plain) 16 - 167 16 16
.. z C)
.. 0
8. 112'' Gypsum Lath (plain) 24 - 24 24 24 0
c
m
.....
ID
CD
CD
m
c
1For fire-resistive construction, see Tables No. 43-A, No. 43-B and No. 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-I. Metal lath, wire 3
lath, wire fabric lath and metal accessories shall conform with the provisions ofU .B.C. Standard No. 47-4. Gypsum lath shall conform with the 0
provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 47-8.
z
2Metallath and wire fabric lath used as reinforcement for portland cement plaster shall be furred out away from vertical supports at least 114 inch.
Self-furring lath meets furring requirements. Exception: Furring of expanded metal lath is not required on supports having a bearing surface
width of 1-5/8 inches or less.
3Span may be increased to 24 inches with self-furred metal lath over solid sheathing assemblies approved for this use.
4
Wire backing required on open vertical frame construction except under expanded metal lath and paperbacked wire fabric lath.
5May be used for studless solid partitions.
6Woven wire or welded wire fabric lath, not to be used as base for gypsum plaster without absorbent paperbacking or slot-perforated separator.
7Span may be increased to 24 inches on vertical screw or approved nailable assemblies.

TABLE NO. 47-C-TYPES OF LATH-ATTACHMENT TO WOOD AND METAL1 SUPPORTS
STAPLES34
NAILS23 SCREWS36 Round or Flattened Wire
MAXIMUM SPACINGS MAX. SPACINGS I MAX. SPACINGS 6

TYPE OF LATH TYPE AND SIZE Vertical I Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Wire Gauge Crown Leg7 1 Vertical Horizontal
(In Inches) (In Inches) No. (In Inches)
4d blued smooth box

I. Diamond Mesh Pf2"11 No. 14 gauge
Expanded Metal 1132" head (clinched)B 6 -
Lath and Flat I" No. II gauge 7!J6" 6 - 6 6 16 3/4 7/s
6 6
Rib Metal Lath head, barbed 6 6
JI/2'' No. II gauge 7!J6"
head, barbed
2. 3fs" Rib Metal
I W' No. II gauge V16"
6 6 6 6 16 3/4 At At c:
Lath and Sheet head, barbed
Jl/4
Ribs Ribs z
Lath :;;
0
4d COIIU:lOn II/2'' At ::D
No. 12112 gauge Ribs s:::
3. 3f4"Rib Metal At At At At Ill
Lath
If4" head - Ribs Ribs 16 3/4 J5/s
Ribs Ribs c:
2" No. II gauge At ;:::
Ribs c
7II 6" head, barbed
z
C)
0
0
c
m
.-
4d blued smooth iCll
box (clinched)S 6 - m
I" No. II gauge 6 - c
4. Wire Fabric 7h6" head, barbed 16 3/4 7Js 6 6 ::::j
Lath 9
6 6 i5
I !/z" No. II gauge 1116" 16 71J69 7Js 6 6 z
head, barbed
IY4'No.l2gauge 31s" 6 6
head, furring 6 6
I" No. 12 gauge l!s'' 6
head
S. 3Js" Gypsum Lath 1•/s" No. 13 gauge gJO gw g•o 8 10 16 3/4 7Js gJO glO
19/64" head, blued
1Y4'No. 13 gauge
gw glO giO giO gHl
6. 112" Gypsum Lath 8 16 3/4 Jl/s
l%4' head, blued 611 611 6\\
1Metallath, wire lath, wire fabric lath and metal accessories shall conform with the provisions ofU.B.C. Standard No. 47-4.
2For nailable nonload-bearing metal supports, use annular threaded nails or approved staples.
3 For fire-resistive construction, see Tables No. 43-B and No. 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-1. Approved wire and sheet
metal attachment clips may be used.
4With chisel or divergent points.
5 Maximum spacing of attachments from longitudinal edges shall not exceed 2 inches.
6Screws shall be an approved type long enough to penetrate into wood framing not less than 5/s inch and through metal supports adaptable for
screw attachment not less than V. inch.
7When lath and stripping are stapled simultaneously, increase leg length of staple Vs inch.
BFor interiors only.

9 Attach self-furring wire fabric lath to supports at furring device.
10'fhree attachments per 16-inch-wide lath per bearing. Four attachments per 24-inch-wide lath per bearing.
~
U1
1 1Supports spaced 24 inches o.c. Four attachments per 16-inch-wide lath per bearing. Five attachments per 24-inch-wide lath per bearing. ~
0
.
...,
Q)
Q)
TABLE NO. 47-D--THICKNESS OF PLASTER 1

FINISHED THICKNESS OF PLASTER FROM FACE OF LATH, MASONRY, CONCRETE
PLASTER BASE Gypsum Plaster Portland Cement Plaster
I. Expanded Metal Lath 5fs" minimum 2 5 /s" minimum 2
2. Wire Fabric Lath 5fs" minimum 2 3f4' minimum (interior)3
7fs" minimum (exterior)3
3. Gypsum Lath 1/z" minimum
4. Masonry Walls• 112" minimum '12" minimum
5. Monolithic Concrete Walls 4 5 5fs" maximum8 7 /s" maximum 8
6. Monolithic Concrete Ceilings• 5 3/s" maximum6 7 8 112" maximum 7 8
1For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B and 43-C.
2When measured from back plane of expanded metal lath, exclusive of ribs, or self-furring lath, plaster thickness shall be 3/•-inch minimum.
3When measured from face of support or backing.
4 Because masonry and concrete surfaces may vary in plane, thickness of plaster need not be uniform.
c:
5When applied over a liquid bonding agent, finish coat may be applied directly to concrete surface.
z
~J:J
6 Approved acoustical plaster may be applied directly to concrete, or over base coat plaster, beyond the maximum plaster thickness shown.
70n concrete ceilings, where the base coat plaster thickness exceeds the maximum thickness shown, metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be attached to
the concrete. 3:
til
8 An approved skim-coat plaster 1/to inch thick may be applied directly to concrete.
c:
i=
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
...
CD
g:
m
c
3
TABLE NO. 47·E-GYPSUM PLASTER PROPORTIONS 1 0
z
2 3
MAXIMUM VOLUME AGGREGATE PER 100 POUNDS NEAT PLASTER
PLASTER BASE (Cubic Feet)
NUMBER COAT OR LATH Damp Loose Sand 4 Perlite or Vermiculite 4
Base Coat Gypsum Lath 216 2

I. Two-coat Work
Base Coat Masonry 3 3
First Coat Lath 25 2
Second Coat Lath 35 26
2. Three-coat Work
First and Masonry 3 3
Second Coats
1Wood-fibered gypsum plaster may be mixed in the proportions of 100 pounds of gypsum to not more than 1 cubic foot of sand where applied on
masonry or concrete.
Gypsum plasters shall conform with the provisions of U.B.C. Standard No. 47-9.
2For fire-resistive construction, see Tables No. 43-A, No. 43-B and No. 43-C.
3 When determining the amount of aggregate in set plaster, a tolerance of 10 percent shall be allowed.
4Combinations of sand and lightweight aggregate may be used, provided the volume and weight relationship of the combined aggregate to
gypsum plaster is maintained. Sand and lightweight aggregate shall conform with U.B.C. Standard No. 47-3.
5If used for both first and second coats, the volume of aggregate may be 2\12 cubic feet.
6 Where plaster is I inch or more in total thickness, the proportions for the second coat may be increased to 3 cubic feet.
TABLE NO. 47-F-PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERS1
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
MAXIMUM WEIGHT
(OR VOLUME) LIME MAXIMUM VOLUME
VOLUME PER VOLUME SAND PER VOLUME APPROXIMATE MINIMUM PERIOD MINIMUM INTERVAL
COAT CEMENT CEMENT2 CEMENT3 MINIMUM THICKNESS• MOIST CURING BETWEEN COATS
11
First 1 20 lbs. 4 3jg 5 486 Hours 487 Hours
1st and 2nd Coats
Second 1 20 lbs. 5 48 hours 7 Days 8
total %"
Finish 19 1st, 2nd and Finish 8

1 3 -
Coats Vs''
PORTLAND CEMENT-LIME PLASTER1D
MAXIMUM VOLUME
~~~~~~ J&~::i
SAND PER COMBINED
VOLUME VOLUMES CEMENT APPROXIMATE MINIMUM PERIOD MINIMUM INTERVAL
COAT CEMENT 11 CEMENT AND LIME MINIMUM THICKNESS4 MOIST CURING BETWEEN COATS
First 1 I 4 3jg"5 486 Hours 48 7 Hours
I st and 2nd Coats
Second 1 I 4V, 48 hours 7 Days 8
total V4'
Finish 19 1st, 2nd and Finish 8

I 3 Coats Vi'
-
1Exposed aggregate plaste; shall be applied m accordance With Section 4709. M1mmum overall thickness shall be :y, mch.
2
Up to 20 pounds of dry hydrated lime (or an equivalent amount of lime putty) may be used as a plasticizing agent in proportion to each sack (cubic foot) of c:
Type I and Type II standard portland cement in first and second coats of plaster. See Section 4708 (a) for use of plastic cement.
z
3
=n
When determining the amount of sand in set plaster, a tolerance of I 0 percent may be allowed. 0
'See Table No. 47-D. ll
3:
'Measured from face of support of backing to crest of scored plaster. IJI
6 See Section 4707 (c) 2. c:
7
Twenty-four hours minimum interval between coats of interior portland cement plaster. For alternate method of application. see Section 4708 (e). r=c
8
9
Finish coat plaster may be applied to interior portland cement base coats after a 48-hour period.
For finisi1 coat plaster. up to an equal part of dry hydrated lime by weight (or an equivalent volume of lime putty) may be added to Types I. II and III
z
C)
standard portland cement. 0
10No additions of plasticizing agents shall be made. 0
11 Type I. II or III standard portland cement. See Section 4 708 (a) for use of plastic cement. c
m
TABLE NO. 47-G-APPLICATION OF SINGLE-PLY GYPSUM WALLBOARD ....
co
CXI
MAXIMUM CXI
MAXIMUM SPACING OF
THICKNESS SPACING OF m
OF LONG DIMENSION OF FRAMING FASTENERS1
(Center to Center)
c
GYPSUM
WALL· PLANE OF
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
SHEETS IN RE~ATION
MEMBER1
(Centerto (In Inches)
NAILS2-TO WOOD 3
0
BOARD FRAMING TO DIRECTION OF Center) z
(Inch) SURFACE FRAMING MEMBERS (In Inches) Nails3 Screws4
Vertical Either direction 16 8 16

lf2 No. 13 gauge. Pis" long. I9f64' head; 0.098"
Horizontal Either direction 16 7 12 diameter. 1114" long, annular ringed: 5d, cooler
Horizontal Perpendicular 24 7 12 or wallboard' nail (0.086" dia., 1°/s" long, 15 /64 "
head).
5 /s No. 13 gauge. !'Is" long, 19/64" head: 0.098"
Horizontal Either direction 16 7 12
diameter, Pis" long, annular ringed; 6d, cooler
Horizontal Perpendicular 24 7 12 or wallboard' nail (0.092" dia., 17/s" long, 1/4'
head).
Nail or Screw Fastenln~s With Adhesives
(Maximum Center to enter in Inches)
(Column headings as above) End Edges Field
Either direction 16 16 16 24
'12 Horizontal
or Perpendicular 24 16 24 24 As required for 1/2" and 5;s" gypsum wall-
5/s board, see above.
Vertical Either direction 24 16 24 6
1For fue-resJstive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-B and 43-C. For shear-resJstmg elements. see Table No. 47-1.
2Where the metal framing has a clinching design formed to receive the nails by two edges of metal. the nails shall be not less than 'Is inch longer than the
wallboard thickness, and shall have ringed shanks. Where the metal framing has a nailing groove formed to receive the nails. the nails shall have
barbed shanks or be 5d, No. 13 112 gauge. l'ls inch long. 15/64-inch head for 112-inch gypsum wallboard: 6d. No. 13 gauge, l 71 s-inch long, 15 /64-inch
head for 5/s-inch gypsum wallboard.
3Two nails spaced 2 inches to 2112 inches apart may be used where the pairs are spaced 12 inches on center except around the perimeter of the sheets.
;;;! 4
Screws shall conform with C .B.C. Standard No. 47-5 and be long enough to penetrate into wood framing not less than 5 's inch and through metal
co framing not less than 'i• inch.
5For properties of cooler or wallboard nails. see C.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. Table No. 25-17-H. t
6 Not required.
TABLE NO. 47·H-APPLICATION OF TWO-PLY GYPSUM WALLBOARD 1
FASTENERS ONLY
......
......
0 MAXIMUM
SPACING OF
THICKNESS FRAMING MAXIMUM SPACING OF FASTENERS
OF GYPSUM MEMBERS (Center to Center) (In Inches)
WALLBOARD PLANE OF LONG DIMENSION (Center to
(Each Ply) FRAMING OF GYPSUM Center) Base PIJ Face PIJ
(Inch) SURFACE WALLBOARD SHEETS (In Inches) Nails2 screwsJ Staples4 Nail 52 ScrewsJ
Horizontal Perpendicular only 16 7

%
Vertical Either Direction 16 8
Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 16 24 16 7 12
'h
Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 7
%
Fasteners and Adhesives
% Horizontal Perpendicular only 16 7 5

Base Ply
Vertical Either Direction 24 8 7
Temporary Nailing or
'h Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 7 12 5
Base Ply Shoring to Comply with c:
Vertical Either Direction 24 8 7 z
Section4711 (d)
%
Base Ply
Horizontal Perpendicular only 24 7 5 ~:xJ
Vertical Either Direction 24 8 7 s::
m
1
For fire-resistive construction, see Tables Nos. 43-B and 43-C. For shear-resisting elements, see Table No. 47-I. c:
j=
2
Nails for wood framing shall be long enough to penetrate into wood members not less than 3/4 inch and the sizes shall conform with the .. c
provisions of Table No. 47-G. For nails not included in Table No. 47-G, use the appropriate size cooler or wallboard nails as set forth in ~ z
G')
Table No. 25-17-H ofU.B.C. Standard No. 25-17. Nails for metal framing shall conform with the provisions of Table No. 47-G.
3
0
Screws shall conform with the provisions of Table No. 47-G. 0
•Staples shall be not less than No. 16 gauge by 3/4-inch crown width with leg length of7/s inch, 11/s inch and Pis inch for gypsum wallboard c
m
thicknesses of 3fs inch, 112 inch and 5fs inch, respectively.
TABLE NO. 47-1-ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT
FOR VERTICAL DIAPHRAGMS OF LATH AND PLASTER OR GYPSUM BOARD FRAME WALL ASSEMBLIES 1
...
li
Ql
NAIL
SPACING2 m
0
THICKNESS OF WALL MAXIMUM SHEAR :::::j
TYPE OF MATERIAL MATERIAL CONSTRUCTION (In Inches) VALUE MINIMUM NAIL SIZE3,4
0
I. Expanded metal, or No. II gauge, 1112" long, 71J6" head z
woven wire lath and 7fs" Unblocked 6 180 No. 16 gauge staple, 7/s" legs
portland cement
plaster
2. Gypsum lath 3Js" Lath and Unblocked 5 !00 No. 13 gauge, 1 1/s" long, 19J64" head, plasterboard
112" Plaster blued nail
3. Gypsum sheathing 1/2" X 2' X 8' Unblocked 4 75 No. II gauge, P/4" long, 7J"}' head, diamond-point,
board 1/2''x4' galvanized
Blocked 4 175
112'' x4' Unblocked 7 100
Unblocked 7 100
4 125 5d cooler or wallboard
lfl'' Blocked 7 125
4 !50
4. Gypsum wallboard Unblocked 7 115
or veneer base. 4 145 6d cooler or wallboard
5fs" Blocked 7 145
4 175
Blocked Base ply 9 Base ply-&! cooler or wallboard
250
Two ply Face ply 7 Face ply-8d cooler or wallboard
'These vertical diaphragms shall not be used to resist loads imposed by masonry or concrete construction. See Section 4714 (b). Values are for short
term loading due to wind. Values must be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. The values for gypsum products must be reduced 50 percent for
dynamic loading due to earthquake in Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4.
2Applies to nailing at all studs, top and bottom plates and blocking.
3Altemate nails may be used if their dimensions are not less than the specified dimensions.
4
For properties of cooler or wallboard nails. see U.B .C. Standard No. 25-17, Table No. 25-17-H.
47-J UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 47-J-SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD PANELING

(Meeting Requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 25·9 )
PLYWOOD MAX. SUPPORT NAIL SPACING (Inches)

THICKNESS SPACING NAIL SIZE
(Inch) (Inches) & TYPE Panel Ed1es Intermediate
14 16 1 4d casing or 6 12
finish
% 24 6d casing or 6 12
finish
'Twenty inches if face grain of paneling is across supports.
772
1988 EDITION 4801
Part X
SPECIAL SUBJECTS
Chapter48
CELLULOSE NITRATE
Cellulose Nitrate
Sec. 4801. The handling and storage of cellulose nitrate film shall be in
Chapter49
NO REQUIREMENTS
(See page 861-Appendlx.)
773
Chapter 50
PREFABRICATED CONSTRUCTION
General
Sec. 5001. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to regulate materials
and establish methods of safe construction where any structure or portion thereof
is wholly or partially prefabricated.
(b) Scope. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this chapter, all prefabri-
cated construction and all materials used therein shall conform to all the require-
ments of this code. (See Section 105.)
(c) Definition. PREFABRICATED ASSEMBLY is a structural unit, the
integral parts of which have been built up or assembled prior to incorporation in
the building.
Tests of Materials
Sec. 5002. Every approval of a material not specifically mentioned in this
code shall incorporate as a proviso, the kind and number of tests to be made during
prefabrication.
Tests of Assemblies
Sec. 5003. The building official may require special tests to be made on
assemblies to determine their durability and weather resistance.
Connections
Sec. 5004. Every device designed to connect prefabricated assemblies shall be
capable of developing the strength of the members connected, except in the case
of members forming part of a structural frame designed as specified in Chapter
23. The connection device shall be designed as required by the other chapters in
this code. Connections between roofs and supporting walls shall be capable of
withstanding an uplift force equal to the requirements contained in Chapter 23.
Pipes and Conduits

Sec. 5005. In structural design, due allowance shall be made for any material
to be removed for the installation of pipes, conduits or other equipment.
Certificate and Inspection

Sec. 5006. (a) Materials. Materials and the assembly thereof shall be in-
spected to determine compliance with this code. Every material shall be graded,
marked or labeled where required elsewhere in this code.
(b) Certificate. A certificate of approval shall be furnished with every prefab-
ricated assembly, except where the assembly is readily accessible to inspection at
the site. The certificate of approval shall certify that the assembly in question has
been inspected and meets all the requirements of this code. When mechanical
equipment is installed so that it cannot be inspected at the site, the certificate of
approval shall certify that such equipment complies with the laws applying
thereto.
774
1988 EDITION 5006
(c) Certifying Agency. To be acceptable under this code, every certificate of

approval shall be made by an approved agency.
(d) Field Erection. Placement of prefabricated assemblies at the building site
shall be inspected by the building official to determine compliance with this code.
(e) Continuous Inspection. If continuous inspection is required for certain
materials where construction takes place on the site, it shall also be required where
the same materials are used in prefabricated construction.
EXCEPTION: Continuous inspection will not be required during prefabrication
if the approved agency certifies to the construction and furnishes evidence of
compliance.
775
Chapter 51
ELEVATORS, DUMBWAITERS, ESCALATORS
AND MOVING WALKS
Scope
Sec. 5101. The provisions of this chapter shall apply to the design, construc-
tion, installation, operation, alteration and repair of elevators, dumbwaiters,
escalators and moving walks and their hoistways.
Elevator and Elevator Lobby Enclosures

Sec. 5102. Walls and partitions enclosing elevator and dumbwaiter hoistway
shafts and escalator shafts shall be of not less than the fire-resistive construction
required under JYpes of Construction in Part IV of this code.
Special Provisions
Sec. 5103. (a) Number of Cars in Hoistway. When there are three or fewer
elevator cars in a building, they may be located within the same hoistway
enclosure. When there are four elevator cars, they shall be divided in such a
manner that at least two separate hoistway enclosures are provided. When there
arc more than four elevators, not more than four elevator cars may be located
within a single hoistway enclosure.
(b) Door Operation. Each elevator lobby or entrance area shall be provided
with an approved smoke detector. The sensitivity of such detectors may be set at
the maximum sensitivity.
(c) Standby Power. Standby power when required by Section 1807 shall be
provided to at least one elevator in each bank. Standby power shall be manually
transferable to all elevators in each bank. Standby power shall be provided by an
approved self-contained generator set to operate automatically whenever there is a
loss of electrical power to the building. The generator set shall be located in a
separate room enclosed by at least a one-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation.
The generator shall have a fuel supply adequate to operate the equipment con-
nected to it for a minimum of two hours.
EXCEPTION: I. Where a single elevator serves all floor levels in the building
and is located so that all areas of the building can be reached within a travel distance
of 300 feet from the elevator, then only that elevator need be provided with standby
power.
2. Standby power shall be capable of operating one elevator at a time in any bank
or group of banks having a common lobby.
Note: A bank of elevators is a group of elevators or a single elevator controlled
by a common operating system; that is, all those elevators which respond to a
>ingle call button constitute a bank of elevators. There is no limit on the number of
cars which may be in a bank or group, but there may be not more than four cars
within a common hoistway.
(d) Size of Cab and Control Locations. In buildings three or more stories in
hc1ght served by an elevator or a building served by an elevator required by Table
776
1988 EDITION 5103
No. 33-A, at least one elevator serving all floors shall accommodate a wheelchair,
as follows:
I. Operation and leveling. The elevator shall be automatic and be provided
with a self-leveling feature that will automatically bring the car to the floor
landings within a tolerance of ± lfz inch under normal loading and unloading
conditions. This self-leveling shall, within its zone, be entirely automatic and
independent of the operating device and shall correct the overtravcl or under-
travel. The car shall also be maintained approximately level with the landing,
irrespective of load.
2. Door operation. Power-operated horizontally sliding car and hoistway
doors opened and closed by automatic means shall be provided.
3. Door size. Minimum clear width for elevator doors shall be 36 inches.
EXCEPTION: When approved by the building official, the minimum door
width may be reduced to 32 inches for car with dimensions as permitted by the
exception to Section 5103 (d) 6.
4. Door protective and reopening device. Doors closed by automatic means
shall be provided with a door-reopening device which will function to stop and
reopen a car door and adjacent hoistway door in case the car door is obstructed
while closing. This reopening device shall also be capable of sensing an object or
person in the path of a closing door without requiring contact for activation at a
nominal 5 and 29 inches above the floor.
Door reopening devices shall remain effective for a period of not less than 20
seconds.
5. Door delay (passenger service time). A. Hall call. The minimum accept-
able time from notification that a car is answering a call (lantern and audible
signal) until the doors of that car start to close shall be as indicated in the following
table:
DISTANCE
(In teet) TIME
Oto 5 4 Seconds
10 7 Seconds
15 10 Seconds
20 13 Seconds
The distance shall be established from a point in the center of the corridor or
lobby (maximum 5 feet) directly opposite the farthest hall button to the center line
of the hoistway entrance.
B. Car call. The minimum acceptable time for doors to remain fully open shall
be not less than 3 seconds.
6. Car inside. The car inside shall allow for the turning of a wheelchair. The
minimum clear distance between walls or between wall and door, excluding return
panels, shall be not less than 68 inches by 54 inches. Minimum distance from wall
to return panel shall be not less than 51 inches.
EXCEPTION: When approved by the building official, elevators provided in
schools, institutions or other buildings may have a minimum clear distance between
777
walls or between wall and door, excluding return panels, of not less than 54 inches by
54 inches. Minimum distance from wall to return panel shall be not less than 51
inches.
7. Car controls. Controls shall be readily accessible from a wheelchair upon
entering an elevator.
The center line of the alarm button and emergency stop switch shall be at a
nominal 35 inches, and the highest floor button no higher than 54 inches from the
floor. Floor registration buttons, exclusive of border, shall be a minimum 3f4 inch
in size, raised, flush or recessed. Visual indication shall be provided to show each
call registered and extinguished when call is answered. Depth of flush or recessed
buttons when operated shall not exceed 3fs inch.
Markings shall be adjacent to the controls on a contrasting color background to
the left of the controls. Letters or numbers shall be a minimum of Sfg inch high and
raised or recessed .030 inch.
Applied plates permanently attached shall be acceptable.
Emergency controls shall be grouped together at the bottom of the control
panel.
Controls not essential to the automatic operation of the elevator may be located
as convenient.
8. Car position indicator and signal. A car position indicator shall be
provided above the car operating panel or over the opening of each car to show the
position of the car in the hoistway by illumination of the indication corresponding
to the landing at which the car is stopped or passing.
Indications shall be on a contrasting color background and a minimum of 112
inch in height.
In addition, an audible signal shall sound to tell a passenger that the car is
stopping or passing a floor served by the elevator.
A special button located with emergency controls may be provided. Operation
of the button will activate an audible signal only for the desired trip.
9. Thlephone or intercommunicating system. A means of two-way com-
munication shall be provided between the elevator and a point outside the hoist-
way.
If a telephone is provided, it shall be located a maximum of 54 inches from the
floor with a minimum cord length of 29 inches. Markings or the international
symbol for telephones shall be adjacent to the control on a contrasting color
background. Letters or numbers shall be a minimum of Sfs inch high and raised or
recessed .030 inch.
10. Floor covering. Floor covering shall have a nonslip hard surface which
permits easy movement of wheelchairs.
If carpeting is used, it shall be securely attached, heavy duty, with a tight weave
and low pile, installed without padding.
II. Handrails. A handrail shall be provided on one wall of the car, preferably
778
1988 EDITION 5103
the rear. The rails shall be smooth and the inside surface at least 1'12 inches clear of
the walls at a nominal height of 32 inches from the floor.
Nominal = ± I inch.
Note: Thirty-two inches required to reduce interference with car controls
where lowest button is centered at 35 inches above floor.
12. Minimum illumination. The minimum illumination at the car controls
and the landing when the car and landing doors are open shall be not less than five
footcandles.
13. Hall buttons. The center line of the hall call buttons shall be a nominal42
inches above the floor.
Direction buttons, exclusive of border, shall be a minimum of 3f4 inch in size,
raised, flush or recessed. Visual indication shall be provided to show each call
registered and extinguished when the call is answered. Depth of flush or recessed
button when operated shall not exceed 3/s inch.
14. Hall lantern. A visual and audible signal shall be provided at each
hoistway entrance indicating to the prospective passenger the car answering the
call and its direction of travel.
The visual signal for each direction shall be a minimum of 2112 inches in size
and visible from the proximity of the hall call button.
The audible signal shall sound once for the up direction and twice for the down
direction.
The center line of the fixture shall be located a minimum of 6 feet from the floor.
The use of in-car lanterns conforming to above and located in jamb shall be
acceptable.
15. Door jamb marking. The floor designation shall be provided at each
hoistway entrance on both sides of jamb visible from within the car and the
elevator lobby at a height of 60 inches above the floor. Designations shall be on a
contrasting background 2 inches high and raised .030 inch.
(e) Stretcher Requirements. In all structures four or more stories in height, at
least one elevator shall be provided with a minimum clear distance between walls
or between walls and door excluding return panels, not less than 80 inches by 54
inches, and a minimum distance from wall to return panel not less than 51 inches
with a 42-inch side slide door, unless otherwise designed to accommodate an
ambulance-type stretcher 76 inches by 24 inches in the horizontal position.
In buildings where one elevator does not serve all floors, two or more elevators
may be used. The elevators shall be identified.
(f) Emergency Signs. Except at the main entrance level, an approved pictorial
sign of a standardized design shall be posted adjacent to each elevator call station
which will indicate that, in case of fire, the elevator will not operate and that exit
stairways should be used.
(g) Restricted or Limited-use Elevators. The building official may waive the
779
requirements of this section for any elevator designed for limited or restricted use
serving only specific floors or a specific function.
Holstway Venting
Sec. 5104. Shafts (hoistways) housing elevators extending through more than
two floor levels shall be vented to the outside. The area of the vent shall be not less
than 3 1/2 percent of the area of the elevator shaft, provided a minimum of3 square
feet per elevator is provided.
EXCEPTION: Where energy conservation or hoistway pressurization requires
that the vents be normally closed, automatic venting by actuation of an elevator
lobby detector or power failure may be accepted. A manual override may be
provided.
The venting of each individual hoistway shall be independent from any other
hoistway venting, and the interconnection of separate hoistways for the purpose
of venting is prohibited.
Elevator Machine Room Floors
Sec. 5105. Elevator hoistways shall not be vented through an elevator machine
room unless such venting is accomplished by an approved duct system installed
through the elevator machine room. Cable slots entering the machine room shall
be sleeved beneath the machine room floor and extend to not less than 12 inches
below the shaft vent to inhibit the passage of smoke into the machine room.
Additional Doors
Sec. 5106. Doors other than the hoistway door and the elevator car door shall be
prohibited at the point of access to an elevator car.
EXCEPTION: Doors which are readily openable from the car side without a key,
l tool, or special knowledge or effort.
780
1988 EDITION 5201-5202
Chapter 52
LIGHT-TRANSMITTING PLASTICS
Scope
Sec. 5201. (a) General. The provisions of this chapter shall govern the quality
and methods of application of plastics for use as light-transmitting materials in
buildings and structures. For foam plastics, see Sections 1705 (e) and 1712.
Light-transmitting plastic materials which meet the other code requirements for
walls and roofs may be used in accordance with the other applicable chapters of
the code.
(b) Approval for Use. The building official shall require that sufficient techni-
cal data be submitted to substantiate the proposed use of any light-transmitting
material and, if it is determined that the evidence submitted is satisfactory for the
use intended, he may approve its use subject to the requirements of this chapter.
(c) Identification. Each unit or package of plastic shall be identified with a
mark or decal satisfactory to the building official, which includes identification as
to the material classification in accordance with U. B.C. Standard No. 52-4.
(d) Combination of Glazing and Exterior Wall Panels. Combinations of
plastic glazing and plastic exterior wall panels shall be subject to the area, height,
percentage and separation requirements applicable to the class of plastics as
prescribed for wall panel installation.
(e) Combination of Roof Panels and Skylights. Combinations of plastic roof
panels and plastic skylights shall be subject to the area percentage and separation
requirements applicable to roof panel installation.
Definitions
Sec. 5202. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as follows:
EXTERIOR WALL PANELS are materials which are not classified as plastic
glazing and which are used as light-transmitting media in exterior walls.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC is plastic reinforced with glass
fiber having not less than 20 percent of glass fibers by weight.
GLAZING is material which has all edges set in frame or sash and is not held
by mechanical fasteners which pass through the material.
LIGHT-DIFFUSING SYSTEM is construction consisting in whole or in part
of lenses, panels, grids or baffles made with approved plastics positioned below
independently mounted electrical light sources. Lenses, panels, grids and baffles
which are part of an electrical fixture shall not be considered as a light-diffusing
system.
PLASTIC MATERIALS, APPROVED. See Chapter 4.
ROOF PANELS are structural panels other than skylights which are fastened
to structural members or structural panels or sheathing and which are used as
light-transmitting media in the plane of the roof.
THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL is a plastic material which is capable of
being repeatedly softened by increase of temperature and hardened by decrease of
temperature.
781
THERMOSETTING MATERIAL is a plastic material which is capable of

being changed into a substantially nonreformable product when cured.
Design and Installation
Sec. 5203. (a) Structural Requirements. Plastic materials in their assembly
shall be of adequate strength and durability to withstand the design loads as
prescribed elsewhere in this code. Technical data shall be submitted to establish
stresses, maximum unsupported spans and such other information for the various
thicknesses and forms used as may be deemed necessary by the building official.
(b) Fastening. Fastening shall be adequate to withstand design loads as pre-
scribed elsewhere in this code. Proper allowance shall be made for expansion and
contraction of plastic materials in accordance with accepted data on coefficient of
expansion of the material and other material in conjunction with which it is
employed.
Glazing of Unprotected Openings
Sec. 5204. In Type V-N construction, doors, sash and framed openings not
required to be fire protected may be glazed or equipped with approved plastic
material.
In types of construction other than Type V-N, openings not required to be fire
protected may be glazed or equipped with approved plastic, subject to the follow-
ing requirements:
I . The aggregate area of plastic glazing shall not exceed 25 percent of the area
of any wall face of the story in which it is installed. The area of a single pane of
glazing installed above the first story shall not exceed 16 square feet and the
vertical dimension of a single pane shall not exceed 4 feet.
EXCEPTION: When an approved automatic sprinkler system is provided
throughout, the area of glazing may be increased to a maximum of 50 percent of the
wall face of the story in which it is installed with no limit on the maximum dimension
or area of a single pane of glazing.
2. Approved flame barriers extending 30 inches beyond the exterior wall in the
plane of the floor, or vertical panels not less than 4 feet in height, shall be installed
between glazed units located in adjacent stories.
3. Plastics shall not be installed more than 65 feet above grade level.
Light-transmitting Exterior Wall Panels
Sec. 5205. In Type V-N construction, approved plastics may be installed in
exterior walls provided the walls are not required to have a fire-resistive rating.
In types of construction other than Type V-N, approved plastics may be
installed in exterior walls, provided the walls are not required to have a fire-
resistive rating, subject to the following requirements:
I. Approved exterior wall panels shall not be installed more than 40 feet above
grade level.
2. Approved exterior wall panels shall not be installed in exterior walls located
less than I 0 feet from the property line determined in accordance with Section
504.
3. The area and size shall be limited to that set forth in Table No. 52-A.
782
1988 EDITION 5205-5207
EXCEPTIONS: I. In structures which are provided with approved flame barriers

extending 30 inches beyond the exterior wall in the plane of the floor, there need be
no vertical separation at the floor except that provided by the vertical thickness of the
flame-barrier projection.
2. When an approved automatic sprinkler system is provided throughout the
building, the maximum percentage area of plastic panels in the exterior wall and the
maximum square feet of any individual panel may be increased 50 percent above that
set forth in Table No. 52-A, and the separation requirements, both vertical and
horizontal, as set forth in Table No. 52-A may be reduced by 50 percent.
Roof Panels
Sec. 5206. Approved plastic roof panels may be installed in roofs of buildings
not required to have a fire-resistive rating, subject to the following limitations:
I. Individual roof panels or units shall be separated from each other by
distances of not less than 4 feet measured in a horizontal plane.
2. Roof panels or units shall not be installed within that portion of a roof
located within a distance to property line or public way where openings in exterior
walls are prohibited or required to be protected, whichever is most restrictive.
3. Roof panels of Class CCI plastics shall be limited to a maximum individual
panel area of 150 square feet, and the total maximum aggregate area of all panels
shall not exceed 331/3 percent of the floor area of the room or space sheltered.
Roof panels of Class CC2 plastics shall be limited to a maximum individual panel
area of 100 square feet, and the total maximum aggregate area of all panels shall
not exceed 25 percent of the floor area of the room or space sheltered.
EXCEPTION: Swimming pool shelters are exempt from the area limitations of
Section 5206, provided such shelters do not exceed 5000 square feet in area and are
not closer than 10 feet to the property line or adjacent building.
Skylights
Sec. 5207. (a) General. Skylight assemblies may be glazed with approved
plastic materials in accordance with the following provisions:
I. The plastics shall be mounted at least 4 inches above the plane of the roof by a
curb constructed consistent with the requirements for the type of construction
classification.
EXCEPTION: Curbs may be omitted on roofs of Group R, Division 3 Occupan-
cies with a minimum slope of 3:12 when self-flashing skylights are used.
2. Flat or corrugated plastic skylights shall slope at least 4:12. Dome-shaped
skylights shall rise above the mounting flange a minimum distance equal to I 0
percent of the maximum span of the dome but not less than 5 inches.
EXCEPTION: Skylights which pass the Class B Burning Brand Test specified in
3. The edges of the plastic lights or domes shall be protected by metal or other
noncombustible materials or shall be tested to show that equivalent fire protection
is provided.
EXCEPTION: The metal or noncombustible edge is not required where ordinary
roof coverings are permitted.
783
4. Each skylight unit may have a maximum area within the curb of 100 square
feet for CC2 material and 200 square feet for CCI material.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The maximum area within the curb need not be limited if the
building on which the skylights are located is not more than one story in height, the
building has an exterior separation from other buildings of at least 30 feet, and the
room or space sheltered by the roof is not classified in a Group I, Division I or 3
Occupancy or as a required means of egress.
2. Except for Groups A, Divisions I and 2, I and H. Divisions I and 2 Occupan-
cies, the maximum area within the curb need not be limited where skylights arc:
(i) Serving as a fire venting system complying with this code; or
(ii) Used in a building completely equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system.
5. The aggregate area of skylights installed in the roof shall not exceed 33 l/3
percent of the floor area of the room or space sheltered by the roof when CCI
materials arc used and 25 percent when CC2 materials are used.
6. Skylight units shall be separated from each other by a distance of not less
than 4 feet measured in a horizontal plane.
EXCEPTION: Except for Groups A, Divisions I and 2, I and H, Divisions I and
2 Occupancies, the separation is not required where the skylights are:
(i) Serving as a fire venting system complying with this code; or
(ii) Used in a building completely equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system.
7. Skylights shall not be installed within that portion of a roof located within a
distance to property line or public way where openings in exterior walls arc
prohibited or required to be protected, whichever is most restrictive.
(b) Plastics Over Stair Shafts. Approved plastic materials which will not
automatically vent but which are able to be vented may be used over stairways and
shafts, provided the installation conforms to the requirements of Section 5207 (a).
Light-diffusing Systems
Sec. 5208. (a) General. Plastic diffusers in light-diffusing systems shall be
supported directly or indirectly by the use of noncombustible hangers.
Light-transmitting plastic materials in light-diffusing systems shall comply
with Chapter 42 unless the approved plastic used in the light-diffusing system
meets the following requirements:
I . Diffusers shall fall from their mounting at an ambient temperature of at least
200°F. below the ignition temperature of the plastic material as measured by
2. Diffusers shall remain in place at an ambient room temperature of I 75 oF. for
a period of not less than 15 minutes.
3. The maximum length of any single plastic panel shall not exceed 10 feet, and
the maximum area of any single plastic panel shall not exceed 30 square feet.
4. The area of approved plastic materials when used in required exits as defined
in Chapter 33 shall not exceed 30 percent of the aggregate area of the ceiling in
which they are installed.
784
1988 EDITION 5208-5214
EXCEPTION: The aggregate area need not be limited in a building equipped

with an approved automatic sprinkler system.
(b) Plastic light-diffusing system shall not be installed in the areas to be
equipped with automatic sprinklers unless appropriate tests have shown that the
system does not prevent effective operation of the sprinklers or unless sprinklers
are located both above and below the light-diffusing system to give effective
sprinkler protection.
Diffusers In Electrical Fixtures
Sec. 5209. Use of approved plastics as light-diffuser panels installed in ap-
proved electrical lighting fixtures in or on walls or ceilings shall comply with
Chapter 42 unless the plastic panels meet the requirements of Section 5208 (a).
Partitions
Sec. 5210. Light-transmitting plastics may be used in or as partitions, provided
they meet the requirements of this code.
Awnings and Patio Covers
Sec. 5211. Approved plastics may be used in awnings and patio covers. All
such awnings shall be constructed in accordance with provisions specified in
Section 4506 for projections and appendages. For patio covers, see Appendix
Chapter49.
Greenhouses
Sec. 5212. Approved plastics may be used in lieu of plain glass in greenhouses.
Canopies
Sec. 5213. Approved plastic panels may be installed in canopies erected over
motor vehicle service station pumps, provided the panels are located at least 10
feet from any building on the same property and face yards or streets not less than
40 feet in width on the other sides. The aggregate area of plastics shall not exceed
I000 square feet. The maximum area of any individual panel shall not exceed I00
square feet.
Solar Collectors
Sec. 5214. Solar collectors having noncombustible sides and bottoms may be
equipped with plastic covers on buildings not over three stories in height or 9,000
square feet in total floor area, provided the plastic cover when exceeding a
thickness of 0.010 inch shall be of approved plastic and the total area shall not
exceed 331/3 percent of the roof area for CCI materials or 25 percent of the roof
area for CC2 materials.
EXCEPTION: Plastic covers having a thickness ofO.OIO inch or less may be of
any plastic, provided the total area of the collectors does not exceed 331/3 percent of
the roof area.
785
TABLE NO. 52-A
AREA LIMITATION AND SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERIOR WALL PANELS1
MINIMUM SEPARATION
OF PANELS
MAXIMUM PERCENT AREA MAXIMUM SQUARE FEET MAXIMUM (Feet)
OF EXTERIOR WALLS IN S..GLE INDIVIDUAL PANEL HEIGHT
CLASS OF PLASTIC PLASTIC PANELS PANELS (Feet) Vertical Horizontal
CCI 25 100 16 6 4
CC2 15 75 8 8 4
1The maximum percent area of exterior walls limitation shall be based upon the individual story wall area.
c
z
=n
0
:a
iii:
ID
c
r=
c
z
C)
0
0
c
m
1988 EDITION 5401-5403
Chapter 53
(SEE APPENDIX CHAPTER 53)
Chapter 54
GLASS AND GLAZING
Scope
Sec. 5401. (a) General. The provisions of this chapter apply to:
I . Exterior glass and glazing in all occupancies except Groups R and M not
over three stories in height; and
2. Interior and exterior glass and glazing in all occupancies subject to human
impact as specified in Section 5406.
(b) Standards. Standards for material shall be as specified in this chapter and
Standards for glazing subject to human impact (hazardous location) as speci-
fied in Section 5406 shall be as specified in U .B.C. Standard No. 54-2.
(c) Other Provisions. See Part IV of this code for additional glass requirements
where openings are required to be fire protected and Section 5204 for openings
glazed with plastics.
Identification
Sec. 5402. Each light shall bear the manufacturer's label designating the type
and thickness of glass. When approved by the building official, labels may be
omitted, provided an affidavit is furnished by the glazing contractor certifying
that each light is glazed in accordance with approved plans and specifications.
Identification of glazing in hazardous locations shall be in accordance with
Section 5406.
Area Limitations
Sec. 5403. Glass in windows, curtain and window walls, skylights, doors and
other exterior applications shall be chosen to withstand the loads for cladding as
set forth in Section 2311.
The area of individual lights shall not be more than as set forth in Graph No. 54-
I, as adjusted by Table No. 54-A. Glass sizing for skylight applications shall be
adjusted per Section 3405.
Graph No. 54-I is applicable for rectangular glass firmly supported on all four
edges.
When approved by the building official, alternate means for selecting glass
may be used in place of Graph No. 54-1 and Table No. 54-A.
Glass and glazing subject to ice or snow loads shall be designed in accordance
with Chapter 23.
787
Glazing Support
Sec. 5404. Glass firmly supported on all four edges shall be glazed with
minimum laps and edge clearances set forth in Table No. 54-B. For glass not
firmly supported on all four edges, design shall be submitted to the building
official for approval. Glass supports shall be considered firm when deflection of
the support at design load does not exceed 1/175 of the span.
Louvered Windows
Sec. 5405. Regular plate, sheet or patterned glass in jalousies and louvered
windows shall be no thinner than nominal 7/32 inch and no longer than 48 inches.
When other glass types are used, design shall be submitted to the building official
for approval. Exposed glass edges shall be smooth.
Wired-glass with wire exposed on longitudinal edges shall not be used in
jalousies or louvered windows.
Safety Glazing
Sec. 5406. (a) General. Glazing subject to human impact shall comply with
this section.
EXCEPTION: Louvered windows or jalousies complying with Section 5405
need not comply with Subsection (c) of this section.
(b) Identification. Each light of safety glazing material installed in hazardous
locations as defined in Section 5406 (d) shall be identified by a label which will
specify the labeler, whether the manufacturer or installer, and state that safety
glazing material has been utilized in such installation. For additional identifica-
tion requirements and for limitation on size and use by category classification, see
U.B.C. Standard No. 54-2, Part I.
Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufac-
turer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible
when the unit is glazed. Tempered spandrel glass is exempted from permanent
labeling but such glass shall be identified by the manufacturer with a removable
paper label.
(c) Human Impact Loads. Individual glazed areas in hazardous locations such
as those indicated in Section 5406 (d) shall pass the test requirements of Part I of
U .B.C. Standard No. 54-2 or by comparative tests approved by the building
official which shall be proved to produce at least equivalent performance.
EXCEPTION: Polished wired glass complying with Part II ofU.B.C. Standard
No. 54-2 may be used in fire assemblies and in locations specified in Items Nos. 6
and 7 of Section 5406 (d).
Plastic glazing used in exterior applications also shall comply with the weather-
ing requirements in Part II of U .B.C. Standard No. 54-2.
(d) Hazardous Locations. The following shall be considered specific hazard-
ous locations for the purposes of glazing:
I. Glazing in ingress and egress doors except jalousies.
2. Glazing in fixed panels and sliding or swinging panels of sliding- or
swinging-type doors other than wardrobe doors.
788
1988 EDITION 5406
3. Glazing in storm doors.

4. Glazing in all unframed swinging doors.
5. Glazing in shower and bathtub doors and enclosures.
6. Glazing, operable or inoperable, adjacent to a door in all buildings and
within the same wall plane as the door whose nearest vertical edge is within
I2 inches of the door in a closed position and whose bottom edge is less than
60 inches above the floor or walking surface.
7. Glazing in fixed panels other than those covered by Item 6 which have a
glazed area in excess of 9 square feet and the lowest edge is less than I8
inches above the finished floor level or walking surface within 36 inches of
such glazing. In lieu of safety glazing, such glazed panels may be protected
with a horizontal member not less than I l/2 inches in width when located
between 24 and 36 inches above the walking surface.
EXCEPTION: The following products, materials and uses are exempt from the
above hazardous locations:
I. Openings in doors through which a 3-inch sphere is unable to pass.
2. Assemblies of leaded glass or faceted glass and items of carved glass when
used for decorative purposes in doors or in locations described in Section 5406 (d),
Item 6 or 7, above.
3. Glazing materials used as curved glazed panels in revolving doors.
4. Commercial refrigerated cabinet glazed doors.
8. Glazing in railings regardless of height above a walking surface. Included
are structural baluster panels and nonstructural in-fill panels.
(e) Wardrobe Doors. Glazing in wardrobe doors shall meet the impact test
requirements for safety glazing as set forth in U .B.C. Standard No. 54-2, Part II.
Laminated glass must also meet the boil test requirements of U. B.C. Standard No.
54-2, Part II.
EXCEPTION: The impact test shall be modified so that if no breakage occurs
when the impacting object is dropped from the height of 18 inches, the test shall
progress in height increments of 6 inches until the maximum of 48 inches is reached.
(f) Glass Railings. Glass used as structural balustrade panels in railings shall
be one of the following types:
I. Single fully tempered glass.
2. Laminated fully tempered glass.
3. Laminated heat-strengthened glass.
The panels and their support system shall be designed to withstand the load
specified in Table No. 23-B. A safety factor of 4 shall be used.
Each handrail or guardrail section shall be supported by a minimum of three
glass balusters or otherwise supported so that it remains in place should one
baluster panel fail.
Glass balusters shall not be installed without a handrail or guardrail attached.
Glazing in in-fill panels shall be an approved safety glazing material meeting
the provisions of Section 5406 (c). For all glazing types the minimum nominal
thickness shall be l/4 inch.
789
Glazing materials shall not be installed in railings in parking garages except for
those locations where the railing is not exposed to impact from vehicles.
Hinged Shower Doors
Sec. 5407. Hinged shower doors shall open outward.
Racquetball and Squash Courts
Sec. 5408. (a) Test Method. Each panel of glass (including doors) in an actual
installation or test mockup shall be impacted from the playing side at a point 59
inches from the playing surface and its horizontal midpoint. The impactor and test
procedure shall be as described in U .B.C. Standard No. 54-2, Part I, Category II,
using a drop height of 48 inches. Results from a test mockup shall apply only to
actual installations in which the glass is no greater in either dimension and is at
least as thick. Fittings and attachments for a mockup shall be identical to those
used in actual installations. The conditions of Section 5408 (b) shall be met.
(b) End Point Conditions. The following conditions shall be met when the
glass is impacted as described in Section 5408 (a):
I. The glass shall not break.
2. Deflection at the point of impact shall not exceed JI/z inches.
3. Door hardware shall remain intact and operable.
4. The deflection of the door edges shall be no greater than the following for
the listed drop heights. The impactor and procedures shall be as indicated in
Section 5408 (a).
Drop Height Deflection
24inches Thickness of adjacent glass + Ifs inch
36inches Thickness of adjacent glass + I(4 inch
48inches Thickness of adjacent glass + Ifz inch
790
1988 EDITION 54·1
300
250
200 " " r'"\. !'-!'-' ""'I"'\

~ "r-...
"'\
150
~ ~ !'- """ "" '

"\.
""" ' """ ""'

~ r'-.
~
~
t\."\ ~" "-\, "'\"I"'\ "~%f\.

100
' -~
li:
d 80 r'-."
1/)
lw
~
60
50
~'\. ~ " r\. '\ r\. '~~f-.
~1 "'- '
1/)
~
'r-.."' ~ 'r-.. ~~1 '\ "' "" 'r-..
~ l":r'\.1'\~/'>1"\ '\~ " ""'\ ""'\
40
"2 30
"-" "~ >"

"
:::1
r-...."'\ 0<1' ~1 ~ ~~
;!
'\ "r-..." "\.
25
~
"2 20
15 ""''
"'~~ .~ 1'\ '\~ " 'r-..)'6'.
"""
10
~J~~I"~~~~" "" ~
"- "- 1"- "- "- "-
r-..
8
"\. "\. 1"\.
'\
I' ' "
'"\.'
6 1\.1\. 1\. "'\. " .'I\.
10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200
DESIGN WIND PRESSURE FROM SECTION 2311-POUNDS PER
I
SQUARE FOOT
GRAPH NO. 54-1-MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE AREA OF GLASS 1
1Applicable for ratios of width-to-length of I :I to 5: I. Design Factor = 2.5
791
TABLE NO. 54-A-ADJUSTMENT FACTORs-RELATIVE

RESISTANCE TO WIND LOADS
-
Glasa Type Adjustment Factor1
Laminated' 0.75
Fully Tempered 4.00
Heat Strengthened 2.00
Wired 0.50
Insulating Glass'- 2 panes 1.70
-3 panes 2.55
Patterned 4 1.00
Regular (annealed) 1.00
Sandblasted 0.405
1Loads determined from Section 2311 shall be divided by this adjustment factor for use with
Graph No. 54-1.
'Applies when two plies are identical in thickness and type; use total glass thickness, not
thickness of one ply.
'Applies when each glass panel is the same thickness and type; use thickness of one panel.
•u se minimum glass thickness, i.e., measured at the thinnest part of the pattern; if necessary,
interpolation of curves in Graph No. 54-I may be required.
5Factor varies depending upon depth and severity of sand blasting; value shown is minimum.
792
1988 EDITION 54-B
TABLE NO. 54-B-MINIMUM GLAZING REQUIREMENTS
Fixed Windows and Ope nabla Windows Other Than Horizontal Sliding
UP TO 6 6T014 14TO 32 32TO 50 OVER 50
GLASS AREA SQ. FT. SQ. FT. SQ. FT. SQ. FT. SO. FT.
I. Minimum Frame Lap .. 1;4, 1;4, ?{ l i , Y." 'I~"
2. Minimum Glass Edge
Clearance ........... Y," I2 Y."l2 Y, •" I 14" Y.l"'
3. Continuous Glazing Rab-
bet and Glass Retainer3. Required
4. Resilient Setting NotRe-
Material". ........... qui red Required
Sliding Doors and Horizontal Sliding Windows

UPTO 14 14 TO 32 32TO 50 OVER 50
GLASS AREA SQ. FT. SQ. FT. SQ. FT. SQ. FT.
5. Minimum Glass Frame Lap .... 1;4,

Xt~" Ys" V:o,
6. Minimum Glass Edge Clearance. Y. "2 Xt." 1;4" I!J ,
Re-
qui red
above
7. Continuous Glazing Rabbet third
and Glass RetainerJ .......... story Required
8. Resilient Setting Material 4 ..... Not Required )Required
1Giass edge clearance in fixed openings shall be not less than required to provide for wind
and earthquake drift.
2Glass edge clearance at all sides of pane shall be a minimum of :Y16 inch where height of
glass exceeds 3 feet.
3Giass retainers such as metal, wood or vinyl face stops, glazing beads, gaskels, glazing
clips and glazing channels shall be of sufficient strength and fixation to serve this
purpose.
4Resilient setting material shall include preformed rubber or vinyl plastic gaskets or other
materials which are proved to the satisfaction of the building official to remain resilient.
Chapter 55
(SEE APPENDIX CHAPTER 55)
793
Chapter 56
COVERED MALL BUILDINGS
NOTE: This chapter has been relocated In Its entirety from
Appendix Chapter 7, Division I.
General
Sec. 5601. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this chapter is to establish minimum
standards of safety for the construction and use of covered mall buildings having
not more than three levels.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this chapter shall apply to buildings or structures
defined herein as covered mall buildings.
This chapter does not apply to terminals for transportation facilities and lobbies
of hotel, apartment and office buildings.
Covered mall buildings conforming with all other applicable provisions of this
code are not required to comply with the provisions of this chapter.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as
follows:
ANCHOR STORE is an exterior perimeter department store or major mer-
chandising center having direct access to a covered mall building but having all
required exits independent of a mall.
COVERED MALL BUILDING is a single building enclosing a number of
tenants and occupancies such as retail stores, drinking and dining establishments,
entertainment and amusement facilities, offices and other similar uses wherein
two or more tenants have a main entrance into one or more malls.
GROSS LEASABLE AREA is the total floor area designed for tenant occu-
pancy and exclusive use. The area of tenant occupancy is measured from the
center lines of joint partitions to the outside of the tenant walls. All tenant areas,
including areas used for storage, shall be included in calculating gross leasable
area.
MALL is a roofed or covered common pedestrian area within a covered mall
building which serves as access for two or more tenants and may have three levels
that are open to each other.
(d) Applicability of Other Provisions. Except as specifically required by this
chapter, covered mall buildings shall meet all applicable provisions of this code.
Types of Construction and Required Yards for Unlimited Area
I
Sec. 5602. (a) '!Ype of Construction. One- and two-level covered mall build-
ings may be of any type of construction permitted by this code. Three-level
covered mall buildings shall be at least Type II One-hour construction.
Anchor stores and parking garages shall be limited in height and area in
accordance with Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Required Yards for Unlimited Area. Covered mall buildings may be of
unlimited area, provided the covered mall building, attached anchor stores and
794
1988 EDITION 5602-5603
parking garages are adjoined by public ways, streets or yards not less than 60 feet
in width along all exterior walls.
Special Provisions
Sec. 5603. (a) Automatic Sprinkler Systems. The covered mall building shall
be provided with an automatic sprinkler system conforming to the provisions of
U.B.C. Standard No. 38-1. In addition to these standards, the automatic sprinkler
system shall comply with the following:
I. All automatic sprinkler system control valves shall be electrically super-
vised by an approved central, proprietary or remote station or a local alarm
service which will give an audible signal at a constantly attended location.
2. The automatic sprinkler system shall be complete and operative throughout
all occupied space in the covered mall building prior to occupancy of any of
the tenant spaces. The level of protection provided for unoccupied tenant
space shall be subject to the approval of the building official and fire
department.
3. Sprinkler protection for the mall shall be independent from that provided for
tenant spaces. However, tenant spaces may be supplied by the same system
if they can be independently controlled.
The respective increases for area and height for covered mall buildings, includ-
ing anchor stores, specified in Sections 506 and 507 of this code, shall be
permitted.
(b) Standpipes. There shall be a Class I standpipe outlet connected to a system
sized to deliver 250 gallons per minute at each of the following locations for fire
department use:
I. Within the mall at the entrance to an exit passage or exit corridor.
2. At each floor level landing within enclosed stairways opening directly onto
the mall and adjacent to principal exterior entrances to the mall.
Standpipes shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 38
of this code.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Risers and laterals of Class I standpipe systems not located
within an enclosed stairway need not be protected by a degree of fire resistance equal
to that required for vertical enclosures in the covered mall building.
2. Piping may be hydraulically sized.
Standpipes in covered mall buildings exceeding 50,000 square feet shall be
charged with water. The source of water may be either by interconnection with the
sprinkler system or may be connected with the domestic water supply by a
minimum of l-inch-diameter pipe. The domestic water supply connection shall be
provided with an approved backflow device.
(c) Smoke-control System. I. Required. A mechanically operated air-
handling system shall be installed in covered mall buildings which will restrict the
movement of smoke to the general area of fire origin and maintain the exiting
system in a condition that is safe for exiting.
2. General. The smoke-control system shall be connected to both the sprin-
kler system and the smoke detector system and shall automatically operate when
795
either the sprinkler system or smoke detector system is actuated. The smoke-
control system shall go into operation immediately following actuation of the
il ! smoke detector. The smoke-control system shall also be capable of manual
operation. A smoke detector shall be provided within the return-air portion of
heating and cooling systems exceeding 10,000 cfm. The detector shall be in-
stalled ahead of any fresh-air intake. Smoke detectors shall also be provided on the
tenant side at openings into the mall where open-type security grilles are used.
The smoke-control system shall be as follows:
A. The smoke-control equipment for the mall shall be separate from that
serving tenant spaces.
B. The covered mall building shall be compartmented into smoke-control
zones. Except for openings between the mall and tenant spaces, smoke-control
zones shall be separated from each other by construction having a fire-resistive
time period of not less than one hour. Walls between tenant spaces used to separate
smoke-control zones shall extend from the floor to the underside of the floor or
roof above.
C. A smoke control zone shall coincide with the area of coverage of a single
sprinkler supply. Within that sprinkler zone there may be one or more air-moving
systems but no single smoke-control zone shall be larger than the sprinkler area.
D. When a fire occurs within a tenant sprinkler zone, that zone is to go to 100
percent exhaust and the supply air to that zone is to be shut down. All adjoining
tenant areas are to go into normal operation. The mall itself shall go to I 00 percent
fresh air supply.
E. When a fire occurs within the mall, the mall smoke-control equipment shall
go to I 00 percent exhaust and the adjoining tenant spaces shall go into normal
operation.
F. The mall smoke-control equipment shall be sized to provide a minimum of
six air changes per hour for malls 600,000 cubic feet or less in volume and four air
changes per hour for malls of greater size. The volume of the mall is measured
from the entrance to tenant spaces and to a height of 12 feet above each pedestrian
area.
G. Mall exhaust inlets shall be not less than 6 feet above the walking surface for
each pedestrian level.
H. During those hours when the building air-conditioning systems are not
operating, smoke detector or sprinkler systems shall be designed so the activation
of either will transmit an alarm as required in Subsection (a), Item No. I, of this
section and shall activate the smoke-control system.
3. Acceptance testing. Before the smoke-control system is accepted by the
building official, it shall be tested in his presence to confirm that the system is
operating in compliance with the requirements of this subsection.
(d) Fire Department Access to Equipment. Rooms or areas containing
controls for air-conditioning systems, automatic fire-extinguishing systems or
other detection, suppression or control elements shall be identified for use by the
fire department.
796
1988 EDITION 5603-5604
(c) Tenant Separation. Each tenant space shall be separated from other tenant
spaces by a wall having a fire-resistive rating of not Jess than one hour. The
separation wall shall extend from the floor to the underside of the ceiling above.
Except as required by other provisions of this code, the ceiling need not be a fire-
resistive assembly. A separation is not required between any tenant space and a
mall except for occupancy separations required by Section 5605 or for smoke-
control purposes.
(f) Public Address System. Covered mall buildings exceeding 50,000 square
feet in total floor area shall be provided with a public address system accessible for
use by the fire department. Covered mall buildings of 50,000 square feet or less in
total floor area, when provided with a public address system, shall have such
system accessible for use by the fire department.
(g) Plastic Panels and Plastic Signs. Within every story or level and from
sidewall to sidewall of each tenant space or mall, approved plastic panels and
signs shall be limited as follows:
I. They shall not exceed 20 percent of the wall area facing the mall;
2. They shall not exceed a height of 36 inches except that if the sign is vertical
then the height shall not exceed 96 inches and the width shall not exceed 36
inches;
3. They shall be located a minimum distance of 18 inches from adjacent
tenants;
(h) Lease Plan. Each covered mall building owner shall provide both the
building and fire departments with a lease plan showing the location of each
occupancy and its exits after the Certificate of Occupancy has been issued. Such
plans shall be kept current. No modifications or changes in occupancy or use shall
be made from that shown on the lease plan without prior approval of the building
official.
(i) Mixed 'JYpe of Construction. Openings between an anchor store of'JYpe I,
II-F.R. or II One-hour construction and the mall need not be protected.
(j) Standby Power. Covered mall buildings exceeding 50,000 square feet shall
be provided with standby power systems which are capable of operating the public
address system, the exit signs, emergency lighting, the smoke control activation
system and the smoke control equipment from four adjacent zones acting simulta-
neously.
Exits
Sec. 5604. (a) General. Each tenant space and the covered mall building shall
be provided with exits as required by this section and Chapter 33 of this code.
Where there is a conflict between the requirements of Chapter 33 and the require-
ments of this section, the requirements of this section shall apply.
(b) Determination of Occupant Load. The occupant load permitted in any
individual tenant space in a covered mall building shall be determined as required
by Section 3302 of this code. Exit requirements for individual tenant spaces shall
be based on the occupant load thus determined.
797
The occupant load permitted for the covered mall building, assuming all
portions, including individual tenant spaces and the mall to be occupied at the
same time, shall be determined by dividing the gross leasable area by 30 for
covered mall buildings containing up to 150,000 square feet of gross leasable
area, by 40 for covered mall buildings containing between 150,001 and 350,000
square feet of gross leasable area, and by 50 for covered mall buildings containing
more than 350,000 square feet of gross leasable area. Exit requirements for the
covered mall building shall be based on the occupant load thus determined.
The occupant load of anchor stores opening into the mall shall not be included
in determining exit requirements for the mall.
(c) Number of Exits. When the distance of travel to the mall exceeds 75 feet
within the public area of a tenant space or when the occupant load served by the
exitto the mall exceeds 50, not less than two exits shall be provided. The occupant
load of a public sales area shall be computed at 30 square feet per occupant.
Occupant loads for other areas shall be computed in accordance with Table No.
33-A.
(d) Arrangement of Exits. Group A, Divisions 1, 2 and 2.1 Occupancies,
other than drinking and dining establishments, shall be so located in the covered
mall building that their entrance will be immediately adjacent to a principal
entrance to the mall and shall have not less than one half of their required exits
opening directly to the exterior of the covered mall building.
Required exits for anchor stores shall be provided independently from the mall
exit system.
Malls shall not exit through anchor stores. Malls terminating at an anchor store
where no other means of exit has been provided shall be considered as a dead-end
mall.
(e) Distance to Exits. Within each individual tenant space in a covered mall
building the maximum distance of travel from any point to an exterior exit door,
horizontal exit, exit passageway, enclosed stairway or entrance to the mall shall
not exceed 200 feet.
The maximum distance of travel from any point within a mall to an exterior exit
door, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway shall not exceed
200 feet.
(f) Access to Exits. Exits shall be so arranged that it is possible to go in either
direction from any point in a mall to a separate exit, except for dead ends not
exceeding a length equal to twice the width of the mall measured at the narrowest
location within the dead-end portion of the mall.
The minimum width of exit from a mall shall be 66 inches.
When exit passageways are present to provide a secondary exit from a tenant
space, doors to the exit passageway shall be one-hour fire doors. Such doors shall
be self-closing and be so maintained or shall be automatic closing by smoke
detector actuation.
Storage is prohibited in exit passageways which are also used for service to the
tenants. Such exit passageways shall be posted with conspicuous signs so stating.
798
1988 EDITION 5604-5605
(g) Malls. For the purpose of providing required egress, malls may be consid-
ered as corridors but need not comply with the requirements of Section 3305 (g)
and (h) of this code when the width of mall is as specified in this section.
The minimum width of the mall shall be 20 feet. There shall be a minimum of
I 0 feet clear width to a height of 8 feet between any projection from a tenant space
bordering the mall and the nearest kiosk, vending machine, bench, display or
other obstruction to egress. The mall shall be sufficient to accommodate the
occupant load immediately tributary thereto.
Malls which do not conform to the requirements of this section shall comply
with the requirements of Section 3305 (g) and (h) of this code.
(h) Security Grilles and Doors. Horizontal sliding or vertical security grilles
or doors which are a part of a required means of egress shall conform to the
following:
I . They must remain secured in the full open position during the period of
occupancy by the general public.
2. Doors or grilles shall not be brought to the closed position when there are
more than I 0 persons occupying spaces served by a single exit or 50 persons
occupying spaces served by more than one exit.
3. The doors or grilles shall be openable from within without the use of any
special knowledge or effort when the space is occupied.
4. When two or more exits are required, not more than one half ofthe exits may
be equipped with horizontal sliding or vertical rolling grilles or doors.
Occupancy
Sec. 5605. (a) General. Covered mall buildings shall be classified as Group B,
Division 2 Occupancies and may contain accessory uses consisting of Groups A.
E orR, Division I Occupancies. The area of individual accessory uses within a
covered mall building shall not exceed three times the basic area permitted by
Table No. 5-C of this code for the type of construction and the occupancy
involved. The aggregate area of all accessory uses within a covered mall building
shall not exceed 25 percent of the gross leasable area.
An attached garage for the storage of passenger vehicles having a capacity of
not more than nine persons and open parking garages may be considered as
separate buildings when they are separated from the covered mall building by an
occupancy separation having a fire-endurance time period of at least two hours.
(b) Mixed Occupancy. Individual tenant spaces within a covered mall building
which comprise a distinct "Occupancy," as described in Chapters 5, 6, 7, 8, II
and I2 of this code, shall be separated from any other occupancy as specified in
Section 503 (d) of this code.
EXCEPTION: A main entrance which opens onto a mall need have no separa-
tion.
Chapters 57-59
NO REQUIREMENTS
799
Part XI
Chapter GO
Scope
Sec. 6001. The U.B.C. Standards which arc referred to in variou~ parts of this
code shall he the Uniform Building Code Standards. 1988 Edition. and arc hcrchy
declared to he a part of this code.
U.B.C.
STD. AND TITLE AND SOURCE
SEC. NO.
CHAPTER4
4 I; 415
Noncombustible Material Tests. Standard Method of TestE 136-79 of the
ASTM.*
CHAPTER6
6-1; 608. 3903 (d)
Proscenium Curtains. Installation Standard of the International Confer-
ence of Building Officials.
CHAPTER 17
17-1; 1707 (a)
Kraft Waterproof Building Paper. Federal Specification UU-B-790a. Feb-
ruary 5. 1968.
17-2; 1712(b)7
Test Method to Determine Potential Heat of Building Materials. Test
Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials
17-3; 1712 (a)
Test Method for the Evaluation of Thermal Barriers. Standard of the
International Conference of Building Officials
17-4; 1712 (b) 5
Fire Test Standard for Insulated Roof Deck Construction. Factory Mutual
Standard and UL 1256 (January, 1985) of the Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.
17-5; 1712(c)
Room Fire Test Standard for Interior of Foam Plastic Systems. Test Stan-
dard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
*ANSI refers to American National Standards Institute.
BOO
1988 EDITION 6001
17-6; 1712
Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of
Exterior, Nonload-bearing Wall Panel Assemblies Using Foam Plastic
Insulation. Test Standard of the International Conference of Building
Officials.
CHAPTER 18
I
18-1; 1807 (i), App. 716
Fire Alarm and Standby Power Generating Systems for High-rise Build-
ings. Installation Standard of the International Conference of Building
Officials.
CHAPTER24
24-1; 2402 (b) 4
Building Brick, Facing Brick and Hollow Brick. (Made from Clay or ~l~
~~a~:J. Standard Specifications C62-58, C216-66 and C652-70 of the -~
24-2; 2402 (b) 6
Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-lime Brick). Standard Specification [~
C73-75 of the ASTM. ::
24-3; 2402 (b) 5
Concrete Building Brick. Standard Specification C55-75 (1980) of the
ASTM.
24-4; 2402 (b), Table No. 43-B
Hollow and Solid Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units. Standard Speci-
fication C90-86 of the ASTM.
24-6; 2402 (b) 5
Nonload-bearing Concrete Masonry Units. Standard Specification C 129-
75 (1980) of the ASTM.
24-7; 2405 (c) 1
Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. Standard Methods Cl40-
75 (1980) of the ASTM.
24-8; 2402 (b) 4
Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall Tile and Standard Methods of Sampling
and Testing Structural Clay Tile. Standard Specification C34-70 and Stan-
dard Method C t 12-70 of the ASTM.
24-9; 2402 (b) 4
Structural Clay Nonload-bearing Tile. Standard Specification C56· 70 of
theASTM.
24-13; 2402 (b) 6, 2405 (c) 1
Cast Stone. Specification ACI 704-44 of the American Concrete Institute.
24-14; 2402 (b) 6, 2405 (c) l
Unburned Clay Masonry Units and Standard Methods of Sampling and
801
Testing Unburned Clay Masonry Units. Test Standard of the International

I
24-15; 2402 (b) 10,2404 (i)
Part !-Joint Reinforcement for Masonry. Specification Standard of the
International Conference of Building Officials. Part 11--Cold-drawn Steel
Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. Standard Specification A82-85 of the
ASTM.
24-16; 2402 (b) 2
iii Cement, Masonry. Standard Specification C91-83a of the ASTM.
24-17; 2402 (b) 3
Quicklime for Structural Purposes. Standard Specification C5-79 (1984)
oftheASTM.
24-18; 2402 (b) 3
I Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. Standard Specifications C207 -79

(1984) of the ASTM.
24-20; 2402 (b) 8
Mortar for Unit Masonry and Reinforced Masonry Other Than Gypsum.
Standard Specifications C 161-44T and C270-59T of the ASTM.
24-21 ; 2402 (b) I , 2618 (q)
f Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. Standard Specification C 144-81 of the
ASTM.
24-22; 2405 (c) 3
Field Tests Specimens for Mortar. Test Standard of the International Con-
ference of Building Officials.
24-23; 2402 (b) I
Aggregates for Grout. Standard Specification C404-76 (1981) of the
ASTM.
24-24; 2405 (c) I
~: Sampling and Testing Brick. Standard Methods C67-83 of the ASTM.
24-25; 2402 (b) 4
Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile. Standard Specification C 126-71 of the
ASTM.
24-26; 2405 (c)
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. Standard Test
Method E447-80 of the ASTM.
24-27; 24-3, 24-4 and 24-6
Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block. Standard
Test Method C426-70 (Reapproved 1982) of the ASTM.
24-28; 2402 (b) 9, 2403 (d)
Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. Standard Method C I019-84 of the
ASTM.
802
1988 EDITION 6001
24-29; 2402 (b) 9

Grout for Masonry. Standard Specification C476-83 of the ASTM. J
CHAPTER25
25-1; 2502 (a), Tables Nos. 25-A-1 and 25-A-2
Classification, Definition and Methods of Grading for All Species of
Lumber. Standard Methods D245-70 and D2555-70 of the ASTM, Hand-
book No. 72 of the U.S. Department of Agriculture. American Softwood
Lumber Standard PS20-70 and National Grading Rule for Dimension
Lumber of the National Grading Rule Committee.
25-2; Tables Nos. 25-A-1, 25-A-2 and 25-R-2
Black Cottonwood, Coast Sitka Spruce, Douglas Fir-Larch (North), East-
ern Hemlock-Tamarack (North), Eastern White Pine (North), Hem-Fir
(North), Northern Aspen, Ponderosa Pine, Red Pine, Spruce-Pine-Fir,
Western Cedars (North), and Western White Pine. Standard Grading Rules
for Canadian Lumber, U.S. Edition (September, 1979).
Douglas Fir (Coast Region), West Coast Hemlock, Western Red Cedar,
White Fir and Sitka Spruce. Standard Grading Rules No. 16 (September,
1970) of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
Douglas Fir, Larch, Hem-Fir, Mountain Hemlock, Alpine Fir, Englemann
Spruce, Lodgepole Pine, Ponderosa Pine, Sugar Pine, Idaho White Pine,
Western Cedars, Western Hemlock and Aspen (Bigtooth Quaking). Stan-
dard Grading Rules ( 1981) of the Western Wood Products Association.
25-5; Tables Nos. 25-A-1 and 25-R-2
Eastern Woods, Eastern White Pine, Red Pine, Eastern Spruce, Balsam
Fir, Aspen (Bigtooth Quaking), Eastern Hemlock and Tamarack. Grading
Rules of the Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association,
Inc. (September I, 1970).
Southern Pine. Grading Rules, Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (Septem-
ber I, 1970).
Redwood. Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood
Lumber (November, 1970) of the Redwood Inspection Service.
Eastern Woods, Eastern Spruce, Balsam Fir, Eastern White Pine, Northern
Pine, Eastern Hemlock-Tamarack and Northern White Cedar. Standard
Grading Rules of the Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association,
Inc. (September I, 1970).
25-9; 2501 (e), 2502 (a), 2513 (a), 2513 (c), Tables Nos. 25-B, 25-J-1, 25-K-1,
25-S-2, and47-J
Construction and Industrial Plywood. Product Standard PS 1-83 of the
803
U.S. Department of Commerce, and National Bureau of Standards Calcu-

lation of Diaphragm Action, an Engineering Standard of the International
25-10; 2502 (a), 2511 (b), 2511 (t)
Structural Glued-laminated Timber. ANSI*/ AITC Standard A 190.1, 1983
and Standard Specification D3737-85 of the ASTM.
25-11; 2502 (a), 2511 (d) 5, Table No. 25-C-1.
Structural Glued-laminated Timbers, Softwood and Hardwood Species.
Standard Specifications for Structural Glued-laminated Timber of
Softwood Species ( 1986), American Institute of Timber Construction, and
Standard Specifications for Hardwood Glued-laminated Timber (1985),
American Institute of Timber Construction.
25-12; 2502 (a), 2505, 2516 (c), 2909 (a) I, 3202
Division !-Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes and Quality
Control Standards. Standard Specifications C 1-82, C2-82, C3-81, C4-81,
C9-77, C23-77, C28-79 and M4-80 of the American Wood Preservers
Association. Division 11-Quality Control, CP-79, LP2-80, LP3-78, LP4-
78, LP5-78, LP7-78, LP22-80, LP33-78, LP44-78, LP55-78, LP77-78
and FDN-80 of the American Wood Preservers Bureau.
25-13; 2504 (b)
Wood Poles. Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles. 05.1-1972 of
the ANSI.*
25-14; 2504 (b), 2909 (a) I
Round Timber Piles. Standard Specification D25-73 of the ASTM.
25-15; 2507 (a) 2
Spaced Columns. National Design Specification for Wood Construction
( 1982), including the 1982 Supplement, National Forest Products Associa-
tion.
25-17; 2504 (c) 3, 2510 (a), 2510 (b), 2510 (c), 2510 (d), 2510 (e), 2510 (h), 2513
(b) I and 2, 2516 (j) I, 3203 (c) 4, Tables Nos. 25-F, 25-G, 25-H, 47-G and 47-H
Timber Connector Joints, Bolted Joints, Drift Bolts and Wood Screws, and
Lag Screws; Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Design; and Nails and
Staples. National Design Specification for Wood Construction (1982),
including the 1982 Supplement, National Forest Products Association;
Design Specifications for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss TPI-85, and
Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood
Trusses, PCT-80 of the Truss Plate Institute; and Federal Specification No.
FF-N-105B, March 17, 1971.
25-18; 2512
Structural Glued Built-up Members-Plywood Components. Design and
Fabrication Specifications of American Plywood Association.
*ANSI refers to American National Standards Institute.
804
1988 EDITION 6001
25-19; 2517 (e) 2

Part 1-Dry Use Adhesives with Protein Base, Casein JYpe, Standard
Specification D3024-78 of the ASTM. Part 11-Wet Use Adhesives. Stan-
dard Specification D2559-76 of the ASTM. Part III-Adhesives for Field
Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing, Specification AFG-01 September
1974 of the American Plywood Association.
25-20
Test for Glue Joints in Laminated Wood Product. Standard Test Method
D II 01-81 of the ASTM, and AITC 200-83, American Institute of Timber
Construction referenced in PS 56-73.
25-21; Tables Nos. 25-U-J-1, 25-U-J-6, 25-U-R-1, 25-U-R-2, 25-U-R-7, 25-U-
R-8, 25-U-R-10, 25-U-R-11, 25-U-R-13 and 25-U-R-14
Span Tables for Joists and Rafters. Specification Standard of the Interna-
tional Conference of Building Officials.
25-22
Plank-and-Beam Framing. Wood Construction Data No.4 (1970) of the
National Forest Products Association.
25-23
Tests for Structural Glued-laminated Timber. Inspection Manual, AITC
200-86 of American Institute of Timber Construction, referenced in ANSI/
AITC AI90.1, 1983 of the ANSI [the basis forU.B.C. Standard No. 25-10
and Standard Methods of Testing D 905-49 (R81) of the ASTM.]
25-24; 2502 (a), 2514,2516 (g) 4
Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board (Fiberboard). Voluntary Product Stan-
dard PS 57-73, U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Stan-
dards.
25-25; 2502 (a), 2516 (g) 5, 2517 (f)
Mat-formed Wood Particleboard. American National Standard for Mat-
formed Wood Particleboard, ANSI A208.1-1979.
25-26; 2502 (a), 2516 (g) 6
~;~~~oard Siding. American National Standard ANSI/AHA AI35.6- jji
25-27; 2504 (c) 9
Temperature Effects. National Design Specification for Wood Construc-
tion (I 982), including the 1982 Supplement, National Forest Products
Association.
25-28; 407
Fire-retardant-treated Wood Tests on Durability and Hygroscopic Proper-
ties. Standard Test Methods D2891-81 and D3201-79 of the ASTM and
Standards C20-83 and C27-83 of the American Wood Preservers Associa-
tion.
25-29;407, 2507(c)3
Fire-retardant-treated Wood. National Design Specification for Wood
Construction Policy on Design Values for Fire-retardant-treated Lumber.
805
CHAPTER26
26-1; 2402 (b) 2, 2603 (c), 2604 (e)
Portland Cement and Blended Hydraulic Cements. Standard Specifica-
tions C 150-81 and C595-81 a of the ASTM.
26-2; 2603 (d), Table No. 26-A-4, 2708 (d)
Concrete Aggregates. Standard Specification C33-81 of the ASTM.
26-3; 2602, 2603 (d), 2604 (b), 2708 (d), Table No. 27-C
Lightweight Aggregates for Structural and Insulating Concrete. Standard
Specifications C330-80 and C332-80 of the ASTM.
26-4; 2402 (b), 2603 (t) 2, 2603 (f) 3, 2625 (c) 6
Reinforcing Bars for Concrete. Standard Specifications A615-85, A616-
85, A617-84, A706-84a, A767-M-85 and A775-M-84 of the ASTM.
26-5; 2603 (f) 2
Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats. Standard Specification A 184-84a of
theASTM.
26-6; 2603 (f) 2
Welded Steel Wire Fabric and Deformed Steel Wire. Standard Specifica-
tions Al85-85, A496-85 and A497-79 of the ASTM.
26-7; 2603 (f) 4, 2909 (e) 2
Steel Wire, Strand and Bar for Prestressing. Standard Specifications A416-
80, A421-80 and A722-75 of the ASTM.
26-8; 2603 (f) I, 2603 (i), 2612 (p) 3, 2625 (c) 6
Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced
Concrete Construction. Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel
AWS Dl.4-79 of the American Welding Society Inc.
26-9; 2603 (g)
Admixtures for Concrete. Standard Specifications C260-77, C494-80 and
C618-80 of the ASTM.
26-10; 2604 (d) 3, 2604 (h) 2, 3 and 4
Concrete Tests. Part 1-Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Laboratory. Part 11-Making and Curing Test Specimens in the Field.
Part III--Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Con-
crete. Part IV-Compressive and Flexural Tests. Part V-Capping Cylin-
drical Concrete Specimens. Part VI-Sampling Fresh Concrete. Standard
Methods C31-69 (1980), C39-80, C42-77, C78-75 (1978), CI72-71
(1977), CI92-81 and C617-76 (1979) of the ASTM.
26-12; 2602
Splitting Tensile Strength. Standard Test Method C496-71 (1979) of the
ASTM.
26-13; 305 (e) Item 1, 2605 (b)
Ready-mixed Concrete. Standard Specification C94-8l of the ASTM.
806
1988 EDITION 6001
26-14; 2605 (b)

Concrete Made by Volumetric Hatching and Continuous Mixing. Standard
Specification C685-83 of the ASTM.
26-15; 2627 (a) and (c)
Mill Mixed Gypsum Concrete and Poured Gypsum Roof Diaphragms.
Standard Specification C317-70 of the ASTM. Poured Gypsum Roof
Diaphragms, based on reports of test programs by S. B. Barnes and Associ-
ates dated February, 1955; November, 1956; January, 1958; and February,
1962.
CHAPTER27
27-1; 2603 (0 5, 2721 (b), 2909 (f) I, 2909 (g) 1
Material Specifications for Structural Steel. Standard Specifications A27,
A36, A48, A53, Al48, A242, A252, A283, A307, A325, A336, A441,
A446, A449, A490, A500, A501, A514, A529, A569, A570, A572,
A588, A606, A607, A6ll, A618, A666, A690, A715 and A792 of the
ASTM.
27-2; 2701 (b), 2719,2720,2721 (k)
Erection, Fabrication, Identification and Painting of Structural Steel.
Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (No-
vember I, 1978).
27-3; 2702 (c), 2704, 2707 (a), 2712 (c), Table No. 27-A
Stress Variation or Stress Reversal Design. Specifications of the American
Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (November I, 1978).
27-4; 2701 (b), 2715 (a)
i:f:
Open Web Steel Joists. Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists,
H Series; K Series; Longspan Steel Joists, LH Series; Deep Longs pan Steel
Joists, DLH Series; and Joist Girders, 1978 (including 1986 revisions), of
the Steel Joist Institute.
I
::::
:-:·
27-5; 2713 (a)

Structural Rivet Steel. Standard Specification A502-65 of the ASTM.
27-6; 2702 (e), 2714 (a), 2722 (a) and (f), Table No. 27-B
Structural Welding. Structural Welding Code-Steel ANSU AWS D I. 1-84
of the American Welding Society, Inc.
27-7; 2713 (a), Table No. 27-A
I
High-Strength Bolts. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts. Approved by the Research Council on Structural
Connections of the Engineering Foundation, November 18, 1985, and
endorsed by the American Institute of Steel Construction and by Industrial
Fasteners Institute. fl
27-9; 2701 (b), 3208 (b) 6
Specifications for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members.
Based on Specifications of the American Iron and Steel Institute ( 1986).
807
27-10; 2701 (b)

Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Stainless Steel Structural
Members. Specification Manual, 1974 Edition, American Iron and Steel
Institute.
27-11; 2724
Steel Storage Racks. Interim Specification for the Design, Testing and
Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks, 1972, and Supplement No. I
to the Specification, June 18, 1973, ofthe Rack Manufacturers Institute.
27-12; 2725
Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings. Criteria for Struc-
tural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings, 1973 Edition, and Stan-
dard Specifications A586-68 (1976), A603-70 (1974) and B6-70 of the
ASTM.
27-13; 2714 (a), 2714 (j)
Welding Sheet Steel. Structured Welding Code-Sheet Steel ANSIIAWS
Dl.3-81 of the American Welding Society, Inc.
27-14;2723
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings-1986. Specification of the American Institute of Steel Con-
struction.
CHAPTER28
28-1; 2801 (a), 2802 (a), 2802 (b), 2803 (a), 2803 (b), 2803 (d), 2804 (c), 2804
(e), 2804 (f), Table No. 28-F
Standard for Aluminum Structures. Specifications for Aluminum Struc-
tures, Aluminum Association (November, 1967).
CHAPTER29
29-1; 2904 (a)
Soils Classification. Standard Method D2487-69 of the ASTM.
29-2; 2904 (b)
Expansion Index Test. Recommendation of the Los Angeles Section ASCE
Soil Committee.
29-3; 2907 (a)
Treated Wood Foundation System. National Forest Products Association,
Technical Report No. 7.
29-4; 2907 (e)
Design of Slab-on-grade Foundations to Resist the Effects of Expansive
Soils. Part !-Design of Slab-on-ground Foundations based on design
specification of the Wire Reinforcement Institute (August 1981). Part 11-
Design of Post-tensioned Slabs on Ground based on design specification of
the Post-tensioning Institute.
808
1988 EDITION 6001
CHAPTER32
32-l; 1707 (a), 3208 (a)
Materials for Use in Construction of Built-up Roof Coverings. Standard
Specification 55-A, 1978, of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
32-2; 3208 (a)
Roofing Asphalt and Coal Tar Bitumen. Standard Specifications D312-84
and D450-78 (1984) of the ASTM.
32-3; 3208 (b) 8
Class C Sheet Roofing and Shingles Made from Asphalt Organic Felt.
Standard Specification 55-B, October 5, 1983, of the Underwriters Labo-
ratories Inc.
32-4; 3208 (b) 6
Sheet Metals. Standard Specifications A245-62aT, A361-63T and B209-
63 of the ASTM.
32-5; Tables Nos. 32-E and 32-F
Roofing Aggregates. Material Standard of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
32-6; Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 32-D-2
Corrosion-resistant Metals. Standard Specifications A219-58 and A239-
41 of the ASTM.
32-7; 1712 (b) 5, 3202, Table No. 32-A, 5207 (a) 2
Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof Covering
Materials. Standard Specification 790 (December 15, 1978) of the Under-
writers Laboratories Inc.
32-8; 3208 (b) 10
Wood Shakes. Part !-Wood Shakes (nonpreservative treated). Grading
and Packing Rules for Red Cedar Shakes of the Red Cedar Shingle &
Handsplit Shake Bureau, 1975. Part 11-Wood Shakes (preservative ::':
treated). Based on Grading and Packing Rules for Treated Southern Pine :·._':)_,.:'_,.:' •
Taper-sawn Shakes of the Red Cedar Shingle & Handsplit Shake Bureau, .
1982.
32-9; 3208 (b) 2
Asbestos-cement Shingles. Standard Specification C222-60 of the ASTM.
32-10; 3208 (b) 9
Slate Shingles. Standard Specification C406-57T of the ASTM.
32-11; 3208 (b) II
Wood Shingles. Standards of the Red Cedar Shingle & Handsplit Shake
Bureau and Matetial Standard of the International Conference of Building
Officials.
32-12; 3208 (b) 5
Roofing Tile. Test Standard of the International Conference of Building
Officials.
809
32-13; Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 32-D-2

Wire. Standard Specifications B 134-62. B211-63 and B250-62 of the
ASTM.
32-14; 3206 (a), (d)
Automatic Smoke and Heat Vents. Standard of the International Confer-
CHAPTER33
33-1; 3304 (h)
Power-operated Exit Doors. Test Standard of the International Conference
of Building Officials.
F 33-2; 3306 (q)
~ Stairway Identification. Specification Standard of the International Con-
I ference of Building Officials.
33-3; App. Ill (a)
Exit Ladder Device. Test Standard of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
33-4; 3304 (d)
Panic Hardware. Standard 305, July 30, 1979, ofthe Underwriters Labora-
tories Inc.
CHAPTER35
35-1; App. 3501 (b), App. 3501 (d)
Laboratory Determination of Airborne Sound Transmission Class (STC).
Standard Method E90-83 and Standard Classification E413-73 (1980) of
theASTM.
35-2; App. 3501 (c), App. 3501 (d), App. 3501 (g)
Impact Sound Insulation. Standard Method E492-77 of the ASTM.
35-3; App. 3501 (d), 3501 (f)
Airborne Sound Insulation Field Test. Standard Test Method E336-67T of
theASTM.
CHAPTER37
37-1;3702
Fireclay Refractories. Standard Specification C27 -60 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER38
F 38-1; 1807 (c), 3801 (d), 3802 (g), 5603 (g), App. 1108 (b).
I Design Installation and Acceptance of Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems.
F
I 38-2; 3801 (d), 3805 (a)
F Standpipe Systems. Installation Standard of the International Conference
I of Building Officials.
810
1988 EDITION 6001
CHAPTER42
42-1;407, 415.417, 1712 (a). 1712 (c). 1713 (b). 1713 (c). 4202 (a) I, 4202 (b)
Test Method for Surface-burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
Standard Test Method E84-84 of the ASTM.
42-2; 4205
Standard Test Method for Evaluating Room Fire Growth Contribution of
Textile Wall Covering. Test Method of the International Conference of
Building Officials.
CHAPTER43
43-1; 4302 (b). 4304 (d), 4304 (c), 4305 (a), Table No. 43-A
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Standard Methods
Ell9-83 of the ASTM.
43-2; 802 (b) 2, 3305 (h). 3309 (c), 4306 (c), 4306 (i), 4306 (j)
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Standard IOB-1979 of the Underwriters
Laboratories Inc .. and International Conference of Building Officials' Test
Standard for Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies.
43-3; 4306 (c)
Tinclad Fire Doors. American National Standards Institute/Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. IOA-1979 (R 1985).
43-4; 4306 (e). 4306 (i)
Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. Standard Methods E 163-76 of the
ASTM.
43-7; 503 (c), 1706 (b), 4306 (d), 4306 (c), 4306 (j)
Fire Dampers. Test Standards of the International Conference of Building
Officials.
43-8; 306 (a) 10, 4303 (e)
Thickness and Density Determination for Spray-applied Fireproofing.
Test Standard of the International Conference of Building Officials.
43-9; 4302 (c)
Methods for Calculating Fire Resistance of Steel, Concrete and Wood
Construction. Standard of the International Conference of Building Offi-
cials.
43-10; Table No. 43-B
Perlite Loose-fill Insulation. Standard Specification C549-81 of the
ASTM.
43-11; Table No. 43-B
Vermiculite Loose-fill Insulation. Standard Specification C516-80 of the
ASTM.
CHAPTER47
47-1; 4708 (h)
Plaster Bonding Agents. U.S. Government Military Specification MIL-B-
19235 (Docks) (December 12, 1965), and Standard Specifications of the
811
California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association (1965), and

C631-780 of the ASTM, and Recommendations of the Gypsum Associa-
tion.
47-2; 4711 (c)
Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. Standard
Specification C557 -73 of the ASTM.
47-3; Table No. 47-E
Perlite, Vermiculite and Sand Aggregates for Gypsum Plaster. Standard
Specification C35-70 of the ASTM.
47-4; 4703 (c), Tables Nos. 47-A, 47-B and 47-C
Metal Lath, Wire Lath, Wire Fabric Lath and Metal Accessories. Standard
Specification A42.4-1955 of the American National Standards Institute,
Inc., and Specification 2.6. 73 of the California Lathing and Plastering
Contractors Association.
47-5; Table No. 47-G
Drill Screws. Standard Specification C646-76 of the ASTM.
47-6; 4711 (e)
Gypsum Wallboard Tape and Joint Compound. Standard Specification
C475-70 and Standard Methods of Testing C474-73 of the ASTM.
47-7; 4702
Gypsum Backing Board. Standard Specification C442-72 of the ASTM.
47-8; Table No. 47-B
Gypsum Lath. Standard Specification C37-69 of the ASTM.
47-9; Table No. 47-E
Gypsum Plasters. Standard Specification C28-76a of the ASTM.
47-10; 4702
Gypsum Sheathing Board. Standard Specification C79-82 of the ASTM.
47-11; 4711 (a)
Gypsum Wallboard. Standard Specification C36-76a of the ASTM.
47-12
Keene's Cement. Standard Specification C61-70 of the ASTM.
47-14;4712
Water-resistant Gypsum Backing Board. Standard Specification C630-76
oftheASTM.
47-15; Tables Nos. 43-A, 43-B, 43-C
Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and Gypsum Veneer Plaster. Standard
Specifications C588-68 and C587-73 of the ASTM.
47-16
Lime. Standard Specifications C6-49 (1968) and C206-49 (1968) of the
ASTM.
47-17; 2627 (a), 4701 (c)
Testing Gypsum and Gypsum Products. Standard Specification C22-50
(R74) and Standard Methods C472-73 and C473-76a of the ASTM.
812
1988 EDITION 6001
47-18; 4701 (e), Table No. 47-A

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceil-
ings. Standard Specification C635-69 and Standard Recommended Prac-
tice C636-69 of the ASTM.
47-19; 4701 (f)
Application of Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and Gypsum Veneer
Plaster. Standard Specifications C843-76 and C844-79 of the ASTM.
47-20
Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard, Gypsum Backing Board
and Gypsum Veneer Base. Standard Specification C514-77 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER 52
52-I
Plastic Materials. Based on Technical Data on Plastics. Specifications of
the Manufacturing Chemists Association.
52-2;417
Chamber Method of Test for Measuring the Density of Smoke from the
Burning or Decomposition of Plastic Materials. Based on Standard Test
Method D2843-70 of the ASTM.
52-3;417, 1712(c),5208(a) I
Ignition Properties of Plastics. Based on Standard Test Method D 1929-68
(1975) of the ASTM.
52-4; 417,5201 (c)
Method of Test for Determining Classification of Approved Light-
transmitting Plastics. Standard Test Method D635-74 of the ASTM.
CHAPTER 54
54-I; 5401 (b)
Glass. Federal Specification DD-G-0045lb, U.S. Federal Government
(August 22, 1966).
54-2; 5401 (b), 5406 (b), (c) and (e), 5408 (a)
Safety Glazing. Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials
(16CFR, Part 1201) of the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission
and Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Transparent
Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. ANSI Z97.1-1975 of the
American National Standards Institute, Inc.
CHAPTER 55
55-1; App. 5502 (b)
Flame-retardant Membranes. Test Standard of the International Confer-
CHAPTER 70
70-1; App. 7010 (e)
Moisture-density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures. Stan-
dard Test Method Dl557-78 of the ASTM.
813
70-2; App. 7010 (e)

In Place Density of Soils by the Sand-Cone Method. Standard Test Method
D 1556-82 of the ASTM.
70-3; App. 7010 (e)
In Place Density of Soils by the Rubber-Balloon Method. Standard Test
Method D2167 -66 of the ASTM.
70-4; App. 7010 (e)
In Place Density of Soils by the Drive-Cylinder Method. Standard Test
Method D2937-71 of the ASTM.
70-5; App. 7010 (e)
In Place Moisture Content and Density of Soils by Nuclear Methods.
Standard Test Methods D2922-81 and D30 17-78 of the ASTM.
814
1988 EDITION APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Chapter 1
Division I
LIFE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR
EXISTING BUILDINGS OTHER THAN
HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
General
Sec. 110. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this division is to provide a reasonable
degree of safety to persons occupying existing buildings by providing for altera-
tions to such existing buildings which do not conform with the minimum require-
ments of this code.
EXCEPTION: Group R, Division 3, Group M; and high-rise occupancies.
(b) Effective Date. Within 18 months after the effective date of this division,
plans for compliance shall be submitted and approved, and within 18 months
thereafter the work shall be completed or the building shall be vacated until made
to conform.
Exits
Sec. 111. (a) Number of Exits. Every floor above the first story used for
human occupancy shall have access to at least two separate exits, one of which
may be an exterior fire escape complying with Subsection (d) of this section.
Subject to the approval of the building official, an approved ladder device may be
used in lieu of a fire escape when the construction feature or location of the
building on the property make the installation of a fire escape impracticable.
EXCEPTION: In all occupancies, second stories with an occupant load of 10 or
less may have one exit.
An exit ladder device when used in lieu of a fire escape shall conform with
U.B.C. Standard No. 33-3 and the following:
l. Serves an occupant load of lO or less or a single dwelling unit or guest room.
2. The building does not exceed three stories in height.
3. The access is adjacent to an opening as specified for emergency egress or
rescue or from a balcony.
4. Shall not pass in front of any building opening below the unit being served.
5. The availability of activating the device for the ladder is accessible only
from the opening or balcony served.
6. So installed that it will not cause a person using it to be within 6 feet of
exposed electrical wiring.
(b) Stair Construction. All required stairs shall have a minimum run of 9
inches and a maximum rise of 8 inches and shall have a minimum width of 30
inches exclusive of handrails. Every stairway shall have at least one handrail. A
815
APPENDIX UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
landing having a minimum 30-inch run in the direction of travel shall be provided
at each point of access to the stairway.
EXCEPTION: Fire escapes as provided for in this section.
Exterior stairs shall be of noncombustible construction.
EXCEPTION: On buildings of Types III, IV and V, provided the exterior stairs
arc constructed of wood not less than 2-inch nominal thickness.
(c) Corridors. Corridors of Groups A, B, E, I, Hand R, Division I Occupan-

cies serving as an exit for an occupant load of 30 or more shall have walls and
ceilings of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction as required by this
code. Existing walls surfaced with wood lath and plaster in good condition or 1/2-
inch gypsum wallboard or openings with fixed wired glass set in steel frames are
permitted for corridor walls and ceilings and occupancy separations when ap-
proved. Doors opening into such corridors shall be protected by 20-minute fire
assemblies or solid wood doors not less than J3/4 inches thick. Where the existing
frame will not accommodate the J3/4-inch-thick door, a J3/s-inch-thick solid
bonded wood core door or equivalent insulated steel door shall be permitted.
Doors shall be self-closing or automatic-closing by smoke detection. Transoms
and openings other than doors from corridors to rooms shall comply with Section
3305 (h) of this code or shall be covered with a minimum of 3/4-inch plywood or
l/2-inch gypsum wallboard or equivalent material on the room side.
EXCEPTION: Existing corridor walls, ceilings and opening protection not in
compliance with the above may be continued when such buildings are protected with
an approved automatic sprinkler system throughout. Such sprinkler system may be
supplied from the domestic water system if it is of adequate volume and pressure.
(d) Fire Escapes. I. Existing fire escapes which in the opinion of the building
official comply with the intent of this section may be used as one of the required
exits. The location and anchorage of fire escapes shall be of approved design and
construction.
2. Fire escapes shall comply with the following:
Access from a corridor shall not be through an intervening room.
All openings within 10 feet shall be protected by three-fourths-hour fire
assemblies. When located within a recess or vestibule, adjacent enclosure walls
shall be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.
Egress from the building shall be by a clear opening having a minimum
dimension of not less than 29 inches. Such openings shall be openable from the
inside without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. The sill of an
opening giving access shall be not more than 30 inches above the floor of the
building or balcony.
Fire escape stairways and balconies shall support the dead load plus a live load
of not less than I00 pounds per square foot and shall be provided with a top and
intermediate handrail on each side. The pitch of the stairway shall not exceed 60
degrees with a minimum width of 18 inches. Treads shall be not less than 4 inches
in width and the rise between treads shall not exceed 10 inches. All stair and
816
balcony railings shall support a horizontal force of not less than 50 pounds per
lineal foot of railing.
Balconies shall be not less than 44 inches in width with no floor opening other
than the stairway opening greater than 5fs inch in width. Stairway openings in such
balconies shall be not less than 22 inches by 44 inches. The balustrade of each
balcony shall be not less than 36 inches high with not more than 9 inches between
balusters.
Fire escapes shall extend to the roof or provide an approved gooseneck ladder
between the top floor landing and the roof when serving buildings four or more
stories in height having roofs with less than 4:12 slope. Fire escape ladders shall
be designed and connected to the building to withstand a horizontal force of I 00
pounds per lineal foot; each rung shall support a concentrated load of 500 pounds
placed anywhere on the rung. All ladders shall be at least 15 inches wide, located
within 12 inches of the building and shall be placed flatwise relative to the face of
the building. Ladder rungs shall be 3/4 inch in diameter and shall be located 12
inches on center. Openings for roof access ladders through cornices and similar
projections shall have minimum dimensions of 30 inches by 33 inches.
The lowest balcony shall be not more than 18 feet from the ground. Fire escapes
shall extend to the ground or be provided with counterbalanced stairs reaching to
the ground.
Fire escapes shall not take the place of stairways required by the codes under
which the building was constructed.
Fire escapes shall be kept clear and unobstructed at all times and maintained in
good working order.
(e) Exit and Fire Escape Signs. Exit signs shall be provided as required by this
code.
EXCEPTION: The use of existing exit signs may be continued when approved
by the building official.
All doors or windows providing access to a fire escape shall be provided with
fire escape signs.
Enclosure of Vertical Shafts

Sec. 112. Interior vertical shafts, including but not limited to stairways,
elevator hoistways, service and utility shafts, shall be enclosed by a minimum of
one-hour fire-resistive construction. All openings into such shafts shall be pro-
tected with one-hour fire assemblies which shall be maintained self closing or be
automatic closing by smoke detection. All other openings shall be fire protected
in an approved manner. Existing fusible link-type automatic door closing devices
may be permitted if the fusible link rating does not exceed 135 °F.
EXCEPTIONS: I. In other than Group I Occupancies, an enclosure will not be
required for openings serving only one adjacent floor.
2. Stairways need not be enclosed in a continuous vertical shaft if each story is
separated from other stories by one-hour fire-resistive construction or approved
wired glass set in steel frames. In addition, all exit corridors shall be sprinklered and
the openings between the corridor and occupant space have at least one sprinkler
817
head above the openings on the tenant side. The sprinkler system may be supplied
from the domestic water supply if of adequate volume and pressure.
3. Vertical openings need not be protected if the building is protected by an
approved automatic sprinkler system.
Basement Access or Sprinkler Protection
Sec. 113. An approved automatic sprinkler system shall be provided in base-
ments or stories exceeding 1500 square feet in area and not having a minimum of
20 square feet of opening entirely above the adjoining ground level in each 50
lineal feet or fraction thereof of exterior wall on at least one side of the building.
Openings shall have a minimum clear dimension of 30 inches.
If any portion of a basement is located more than 75 feet from required
openings, the basement shall be provided with an approved automatic sprinkler
system throughout.
Standpipes
Sec. 114. Any buildings over four stories in height shall be provided with an
approved Class I or Class III standpipe system.
Smoke Detectors
Sec. 115. I. General. Dwelling units and hotel or lodging house guest rooms
that are used for sleeping purposes shall be provided with smoke detectors.
Detectors shall be installed in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Power source. Smoke detectors may be battery operated or may receive
their primary power from the building wiring when such wiring is served from a
commercial source. Wiring shall be permanent and without a disconnecting
switch other than those required for overcurrent protection.
3. Location within dwelling units. In dwelling units, detectors shall be
mounted on the ceiling or wall at a point centrally located in the corridor or area
giving access to each separate sleeping area. Where sleeping rooms are on an
upper level, the detector shall be placed at the center of the ceiling directly above
the stairway. Detectors shall also be installed in the basement of dwelling units
having a stairway which opens from the basement into the dwelling. Detectors
shall sound an alarm audible in all sleeping areas of the dwelling unit in which they
are located.
4. Location in efficiency dwelling units and hotels. In efficiency dwelling
units, hotel suites and in hotel sleeping rooms, detectors shall be located on the
ceiling or wall of the main room or hotel sleeping room. When sleeping rooms
within an efficiency dwelling unit or hotel suite are on an upper level, the detector
shall be placed at the center of the ceiling directly above the stairway. When
actuated, the detector shall sound an alarm audible within the sleeping area of the
dwelling unit, hotel suite or sleeping room in which it is located.
Separation of Occupancies
Sec. 116. Occupancy separations shall be provided as specified in Section 503
of this code. When approved by the building official, existing wood lath and
818
plaster in good condition or l/2-inch gypsum wallboard may be acceptable where

one-hour occupancy separations are required.
Division II
EXISTING HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 120. These provisions apply to existing high-rise buildings constructed
prior to the adoption of this division and which house Group B. Division 2 offices
or Group R, Division I Occupancies, each having floors used for human occu-
access.
General
Sec. 121. Existing high-rise buildings as specified in Section 120 shall be
modified to conform with not less than the minimum provisions specified in Table
No. A-l-A and as further enumerated within this division.
The provisions of this division shall not be construed to allow the elimination of
fire protection systems or a reduction in the level of fire safety provided in
buildings constructed in conformance with previously adopted codes.
Compliance Data
Sec. 122. After adoption of this division, the building official shall duly notify
the owners whose buildings are subject to the provisions of this division. Upon
receipt of such notice, the owner shall, subject to the following time limits, take
necessary actions to comply with the provisions of this division.
Plans and specifications for the necessary alterations shall be filed with the
building official within the time period established by the local jurisdiction after
the date of owner notification. Work on the required alterations to the building
shall commence within 30 months of the date of owner notification and such work
shall be completed within five years from the date of owner notification.
The building official shall grant necessary extensions of time when it can be
shown that the specified time periods are not physically practical or pose an undue
hardship. The granting of an extension of time for compliance shall be based upon
the showing of good cause and subject to the filing of an acceptable systematic
progressive plan of correction with the building official.
Authority of the Building Official
Sec. 123. For the purpose of applying the provisions of this division, the
building official shall have the authority to consider alternative approaches and
grant necessary deviations from this division as follows:
A. Allow alternate materials or methods of compliance if such alternate
materials or methods of compliance will provide levels of fire and life
safety equal to or greater than those specifically set forth in this division.
819
plaster in good condition or lf2-inch gypsum wallboard may be acceptable where

one-hour occupancy separations are required.
Division II
EXISTING HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 120. These provisions apply to existing high-rise buildings constructed
prior to the adoption of this division and which house Group B, Division 2 offices
or Group R, Division I Occupancies, each having floors used for human occu-
access.
General
Sec. 121. Existing high-rise buildings as specified in Section 120 shall be
modified to conform with not less than the minimum provisions specified in Table
No. A-l-A and as further enumerated within this division.
The provisions of this division shall not be construed to allow the elimination of
fire protection systems or a reduction in the level of fire safety provided in
buildings constructed in conformance with previously adopted codes.
Compliance Data
Sec. 122. After adoption of this division, the building official shall duly notify
the owners whose buildings arc subject to the provisions of this division. Upon
receipt of such notice, the owner shall, subject to the following time limits. take
necessary actions to comply with the provisions of this division.
Plans and specifications for the necessary alterations shall be filed with the
building official within the time period established by the local jurisdiction after
the date of owner notification. Work on the required alterations to the building
shall commence within 30 months ofthe date of owner notification and such work
shall be completed within five years from the date of owner notification.
The building official shall grant necessary extensions of time when it can be
shown that the specified time periods are not physically practical or pose an undue
hardship. The granting of an extension of time for compliance shall be based upon
the showing of good cause and subject to the filing of an acceptable systematic
progressive plan of correction with the building official.
Authority of the Building Official
Sec. 123. For the purpose of applying the provisions of this division, the
building official shall have the authority to consider alternative approaches and
grant necessary deviations from this division as follows:
A. Allow alternate materials or methods of compliance if such alternate
materials or methods of compliance will provide levels of fire and life
safety equal to or greater than those specifically set forth in this division.
819
B. Waive specific individual requirements if it can be shown that such require-

ments are not physically possible or practical and that a practical alterna-
tive cannot be provided.
Appeals Board
Sec. 124. Appeals of the determinations of the building official in applying the
provisions of this code may be made by an appeal directed to the Board of Appeals
as established by Section 204 of this code.
Specific Provisions and Alternates

Sec. 125. (a) Specific Provisions. The following provisions shall apply when
required by Table No. A-1-A.
I. 1)'pe of construction. Buildings classified as '!Ype 11-N, III-N or V-N
construction shall be equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler system
installed in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 38-1.
EXCEPTION: Installation of meters or backflow preventers for the connection
to the water works system need not be provided unless required by other regulations
of the authority having jurisdiction.
I
2. Automatic sprinklers. All required exit corridors, stairwells, elevator
lobbies, public assembly areas occupied by 100 or more persons and commercial
kitchens shall be protected by an approved automatic sprinkler system meeting the
design criteria ofU .B.C. Standard No. 38-1. A minimum of one sprinkler shall be
I
provided on the room side of every corridor opening.
EXCEPTION: Sprinkler may be omitted in stairwells of noncombustible con-
struction.
3. Fire department communication system. When it is determined by test
that the portable fire department communication equipment is ineffective, a
communication system acceptable to the fire department shall be installed within
..
the existing high-rise building to permit emergency communication between fire-
suppression personnel.
4. Single-station smoke detectors. Single-station smoke detectors shall be
installed within all dwelling units or guest rooms in accordance with the manufac-
turer's installation instructions. In dwelling units, the detector shall be mounted
on the ceiling or wall at a point centrally located in the corridor or area giving
access to each separate sleeping area. When sleeping rooms are located on an
upper level, the detector shall be installed at the center of the ceiling directly above
the stairway within the unit. In efficiency dwelling units, hotel suites and in hotel
guest rooms, detectors shall be located on the ceiling or wall of the main room or
hotel sleeping room. When actuated, the detector shall provide an audible alarm
in the sleeping area of the dwelling unit, hotel suite or guest room in which it is
located.
Such detectors may be battery operated.
5. Manual fire alarm system. An approved manual fire alarm system con-
nected to a central, proprietary or remote station service, or an approved manual
820
fire alarm system which will provide an audible signal at a constantly attended
location, shall be provided.
6. Occupant voice notification system. An approved occupant voice notifi-
cation system shall be provided. Such system shall provide communication from a
location acceptable to the fire department and shall permit voice notification to at
least all normally occupied areas of the building.
The occupant voice notification system may be combined with a fire alarm
system, provided the combined system has been approved and listed for such use.
The sounding of a fire alarm signal in any given area or floor shall not prohibit
voice communication to other areas or floors. Combination systems shall be
designed to permit voice transmission to override the fire alarm signal, but the fire
alarm shall not terminate in less than 3 minutes.
7. Vertical shaft enclosures. Openings through two or more floors except
mezzanine floors, which contain a stairway or elevator, shall be provided with
vertical shaft enclosure protection as specified herein. Such floor openings, when
not enclosed by existing shaft enclosure construction, shall be protected by one-
hour fire-resistive-rated shaft enclosure construction. For floor openings which
are enclosed by existing shaft enclosure construction having fire-resistive capa-
bilities similar to wood lath and plaster in good condition, l/2-inch gypsum
wallboard or approved 1/4-inch-thick wired glass is acceptable. Wired glass set in
a steel frame may be installed in existing shaft enclosure walls but shall be
rendered inoperative and be fixed in a closed position.
Openings through two or more floors for other than stairways or elevators, such
as openings provided for piping, ducts, gas vents, dumbwaiters, and rubbish and
linen chutes, shall be provided with vertical shaft enclosure protection as speci-
fied for stairways and elevators.
EXCEPTION: Openings for piping, ducts, gas vents, dumbwaiters and rubbish
and linen chutes of copper or ferrous construction are permitted without a shaft
enclosure, provided the floor openings are effectively fire-stopped at each floor
level.
8. Shaft enclosure opening protection. Openings other than those provided

for elevator doors in new vertical shaft enclosures constructed of one-hour fire-
resistive construction shall be equipped with approved fire assemblies having a
fire-protection rating of not less than one hour. Openings other than those pro-
vided for elevator doors in existing vertical shaft enclosures shall be equipped
with approved 20-minute-rated fire assemblies, J3/4-inch solid wood doors or the
equivalent thereto. Doors shall be either self-closing or automatic closing and
automatic latching.
All elevators on all floors shall open into elevator lobbies which are separated 1
from the remainder of the building as is required for corridor construction in the _,l',!,'.i,!
Building Code, unless the building is protected throughout by a sprinkler system.

9. Manual shutoff of HVAC systems. Heating, ventilating and air condition-
ing systems shall be equipped with manual shutoff controls installed at an
approved location when required by the fire department.
821
10. Automatic elevator recall system. Elevators shall be equipped with an

approved automatic recall system as required by Section 1807 (h) 2.
II. Unlocked stairway doors. Exit doors into exit stairway enclosures shall
be maintained unlocked from the stairway side on at least every fifth floor level.
All unlocked doors shall bear a sign stating ACCESS ONTO FLOOR THIS
LEVEL.
Stairway doors may be locked, subject to the following conditions:
A. Stairway doors which are to be locked from the stairway side shall have the
capability of being unlocked simultaneously without unlatching upon a
signal from an approved location.
B. A telephone or other two-way communications system connected to an
approved emergency service which operates continuously shall be pro-
vided at not less than every fifth floor in each required stairway.
12. Stair shaft ventilation. Stair shaft enclosures which extend to the roof
shall be provided with an approved manually openable hatch to the exterior
having an area not less than 16 square feet with a minimum dimension of 2 feet.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Stair shaft enclosures complying with the requirements for
smokeproof enclosures.
2. Stair shaft enclosures pressurized as required for mechanically operated
smokeproof enclosures to a minimum ofO.IS- and a maximum of 0.50-inch water
column.
13. Elevator shaft ventilation. Elevator shaft enclosures which extend to the
roof shall be vented to the outside with vents whose area shall be not less than 3 Ifz
percent of the area of the elevator shaft, with a minimum of 3 square feet per
elevator.
EXCEPTION: Where energy conservation or hoistway pressurization requires
that the vents be normally closed, automatic venting by actuation of an elevator
lobby detector or power failure may be accepted.
14. Posting of elevators. A permanent sign shall be installed in each elevator

cab adjacent to the floor status indicator and at each elevator call station on each
floor reading IN FIRE EMERGENCY, DO NOT USE ELEVATOR-USE EXIT
STAIRS, or similar verbiage approved by the building official.
EXCEPTION: Sign may be omitted at the main entrance floor-level call station.
15. Exit Stairways. All high-rise buildings shall have a minimum of two
!II approved exit stairways.
16. Exit corridor construction. Corridors serving as an exit for an occupant
load of 30 or more shall have walls and ceilings of not less than one-hour fire-
resistive construction as required by this code. Existing walls may be surfaced
with wood lath and plaster in good condition or Ifz-inch gypsum wallboard for
corridor walls and ceilings and occupancy separations when approved.
17. Exit corridor openings. Openings in corridor walls and ceilings shall be
protected by not less than J3fs-inch solid-bonded wood-core doors, approved 1/4-
inch-thick wired glass, approved fire dampers conforming to U. B.C. Standard
822
No. 43-7, or by equivalent protection in lieu of any of these items. Transoms shall
be fixed closed and covered with 1/z-inch Type X gypsum wallboard or equivalent
material installed on both sides of the opening.
18. Exit corridor door closers. Exit doors into corridors shall be equipped
with self-closing devices or shall be automatic closing by actuation of a smoke
detector. When spring hinges are used as the closing device, not less than two such
hinges shall be installed on each door leaf.
19. Exit corridor dead ends. The length of dead end corridors serving an
occupant load of more than 30 shall not exceed 20 feet.
20. Interior finish. The interior finish in exit corridors, exit stairways and
extensions thereof shall conform to the provisions of Chapter 42 of this code.
21. Exit stairway illumination. When the building is occupied, exit stair-
ways shall be illuminated with lights having an intensity of not less than 1
footcandle at the floor level. Such lighting shall be equipped with an independent
alternate source of power such as a battery pack or on-site generator.
22. Exit corridor illumination. When the building is occupied, exit corridors
shall be illuminated with lights having an intensity of not less than 1 footcandle at
the floor level. Such lighting shall be equipped with an independent alternate
source of power such as a battery pack or on site generator.
23. Exit stairway exit signs. The location of exit stairways shall be clearly
indicated by illuminated exit signs. Such exit signs shall be equipped with an
independent alternate source of power such as a battery pack or on-site generator
or shall be of an approved self-illuminating type.
24. Exitway exit signs. Illuminated exit signs shall be provided in all exitways
and located in such a manner as to clearly indicate the direction of egress. Such
exit signs shall be equipped with an independent alternate source of power such as
a battery pack or on-site generator or shall be of an approved self-illuminating
type.
25. Emergency plan. The management for all buildings shall establish and
maintain a written fire- and life-safety emergency plan which has been approved
by the chief. The chief shall develop written criteria and guidelines upon which all
plans shall be based.
26. Posting of emergency plan and exit plans. Copies of the emergency plan
and exiting plans (including elevator and stairway placarding) shall be posted in
locations approved by the chief.
27. Fire drills. The management of all buildings shall conduct fire drills for
their staff and employees at least every 120 days. The fire department must be
advised of such drills at least 24 hours in advance. A written record of each drill
shall be maintained in the building management office and made available to the
fire department for review.
(b) Sprinkler Alternatives. The requirements of Table No. A-1-A may be
modified as specified by the following for existing high-rise buildings of Type I,
ll-F.R., II One-hour. III One-hour, IV or V One-hour construction when an
823
approved automatic sprinkler system is installed throughout the building in

accordance with U. B.C. Standard No. 38-l:
Item 5-Manual fire warning system shall not be required.
Item 6-0ccupant voice notification system shall not be required; however, if
the building is equipped with a public address system, the public address
system shall be available for use as an occupant voice notification system.
Item 7-Vertical shaft enclosures may be of nonrated construction for required
exit stairway enclosures. Vertical shaft enclosures of openings in floors pro-
vided for elevators, escalators and supplemental stairways shall not be re-
quired, provided such openings are protected by an approved curtain board and
water curtain system.
Item 8-Protection of openings in vertical shaft enclosures may be nonrated
but shall be not less than a 13/4-inch solid-wood door or the equivalent thereto.
Closing and latching hardware shall be provided.
Item lO-An automatic elevator recall system shall not be required.
Item 12-Stair shaft ventilation shall not be required.
Item 16-Existing corridor construction need not be altered.
Item 17-Door openings into exit corridors may be protected by assemblies
other than those specified in Section 125 (a), provided an effective smoke
barrier is maintained. Closing and latching hardware shall be provided. Protec-
tion of duct penetrations is not required.
Item 19-The length of existing exit corridor dead ends shall not be limited.
Item 20--lnterior finish in exitways may be reduced by one classification but
shall not be less than Class III.
Installation of meters or backflow preventers for the connection to the water
works system need not be provided unless required by other regulations of the
authority having jurisdiction.
824
TABLE NO. A-1-A-OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION AND USE1 ....
ID
GROUP R, DIVISION 1 GROUP 8, DIVISION 2 i
Apartment Hotel Office m
0
Height Zones2 3
ITEM REQUIRED 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 0
z
l. Automatic sprinklers in buildings of Type 11-N,
III-Nor V-N construction. See Section 125 (a) I. R R - R R - R R -
2. Automatic sprinklers in corridors, stairways, i
elevator lobbies, public assembly areas, kitchens
and at doors opening to corridors. See Section
125 (a) 2.
3. Fire department communication system or radios.
See Section 125 (a) 3.
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
4. Single-station smoke detectors. See Section
125 (a) 4. R R R R R R NR NR NR
5. Manual fire warning system. See Section
125 (a) 5. R R R R R R R R R
6. Occupant voice notification system. See Section
125 (a) 6. NR R R NR R R NR NR NR
7. Vertical shaft enclosure walls of one-hour fire
resistance. See Section 125 (a) 7. R R R R R R R R R
8. Protection of openings in vertical shaft enclosures
by 20-minute-rated assemblies. See Section
125 (a) 8. R R R R R R R R R >
"tl
9. Manual shutoff of HVAC systems. See Section "tl
125 (a) 9. R R R m
R R R R R R z
Q) 0
N
Ul
10. Automatic elevator recall system. See Section
125 (a) 10. R R R R R R R R R
x
!Continued)
,..
,,m
TABLE NO. A-1-A-OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION AND USE1-(Contlnued)
GROUP R, DIVISION 1 GROUP B, DIVISION 2
Apartment Hotel Office z
Height Zones2 c
ITEM REQUIRED 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
x
II. Unlocked stairway doors every fifth floor. See
Section 125 (a) 11. R R R R R R NR R R
12. Stair shaft ventilation. See Section 125 (a) 12. R R R R R R R R R
13. Elevator shaft ventilation. See Section 125 (a) 13. R R R R R R R R R
14. Posting of elevators as not intended for exiting
purposes. See Section 125 (a) 14. R R R R R R R R R
15. Minimum of two exit stairways. See Section
125 (a) 15. R R R R R R R R R
16. Exit corridor wall construction. See Section
125 (a) 16. R R R R R R R R R
17. Protected exit corridor openings with
20-minute-rated assemblies or 13/4-inch solid
wooddoor. See Section 125 (a) 17. R R R R R R NR NR NR c:
z
18. Exit corridor doors equipped with self-closing ;;
devices. See Section 125 (a) 18. R R R R R R NR NR NR 0
::D
19. Exit corridor dead ends limited to 20 feet 3:
maximum. See Section 125 (a) 19. R R R R R R NR NR NR IJI
c:
20. Interior finish controlled in exit corridors, exit
;:::
c
stairways and extensions thereof. See Section
R R R R R R R R
z
C)
125 (a) 20. R
0
21. Exit stairway illumination. See Section 0
125 (a) 21. R R R R R R R R R c
m
....
:i
Cll
m
c
~
22. Exit corridor illumination. See Section 0z
125 (a) 22. R R R R R R NR NR NR
23. Exit stairway exit signs. See Section 125 (a) 23. R R R R R R R R R
24. Exitway exit signs. See Section 125 (a) 24. R R R R R R R R R
25. Emergency planning. See Section 125 (a) 25. R R R R R R R R R
26. Posting of emergency instructions. See Section
125 (a) 26. R R R R R R R R R
27. Fire drills. See Section 125 (a) 27. NR NR NR R R R NR NR NR
1R indicates provisions are required.
NR indicates provisions are not required.
2Height zones are established based on a building having a floor as measured to the top of the floor surface used for human occupancy located within
the ranges of heights above the lowest level of the fire department vehicle access in accordance with the following:
Height Zone No. I: More than 75 feet but not in excess of 149 feet.
Height Zone No. 2: More than 149 feet but not in excess of 399 feet.
Height Zone No. 3: More than 399 feet.
~
'tl
'tl
m
z
c
><
Chapter7
AVIATION CONTROL TOWERS
NOTE: The provision for covered mall buildings have been
relocated to Chapter 56.
General
Sec. 711. The provisions of this appendix apply exclusively to aviation control
towers not exceeding I ,500 square feet per floor. Such buildings shall be classi-
fied as Group 8, Division 2 Occupancies and shall be used only for the following
uses:
I. Airport traffic control cab.
2. Electrical and mechanical equipment rooms.
3. Airport terminal radar and electronics rooms.
4. Office spaces incidental to the tower operation.
5. Lounges for employees, including restrooms.

Sec. 712. Buildings or portions of buildings constructed under the provisions
of this chapter shall be either Type 1-F.R., TYpe 11-F.R., TYpe II One-hour, Type li-
11!1. N or Type III One-hour construction. The height of the building or parts thereof
shall not exceed the limitations specified in Table No. A-7-A and the area of such
buildings shall not exceed I ,500 square feet on any floor.
Exit Facilities
Sec. 713. A single stairway may be used for exiting in towers of any height,
provided the occupant load per floor does not exceed 15. Access to the stairway
and the elevator shall be separated from each other a distance apart equal to no less
than one half of the length of the maximum overall diagonal dimension of the area
served measured in a straight line. The exit stairway and elevator hoistway may be
located in a common shaft enclosure, provided they are separated from each other
by a four-hour separation having no openings. Such stairway shall be constructed
to comply with the requirements for smokeproof enclosures as specified in
Section 3310. Stairways, however, need not extend to the roof as specified in
Section 3306 (o). The provisions of Sections 1807 and 1907 do not apply.
Fire Alarms
Sec. 714. Smoke detectors shall be installed in all occupied levels. These
devices shall be part of an approved fire alarm system having audible alarms
mounted in all occupied levels.
Access for Handicapped

Sec. 715. Aviation control towers need not be accessible to the handicapped as
specified in the provisions of Chapters 17 and 33.
828
Standby Power and Emergency Generation Systems

Sec. 716. A standby power generation system conforming to U .B.C. Standard
No. 18-1 shall be installed in aviation control towers over 65 feet in height and
shall provide power to the following equipment:
I. Smokeproof enclosure, mechanical equipment and lighting.
2. Elevator operational power.
3. Smoke-detection systems.
TABLE NO. A-7-A-MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF AVIATION CONTROL TOWERS

(In Feet)
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION ff
1-F.R.
Unlimited
I
I
11-F.R.
240
I
I
II One-hour
100
I
I
Ill One-hour
65
I
I
11-N
85
I
829
Chapter 11
AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS
Scope
Sec. 1107. The provisions of this appendix shall apply exclusively to agricul-
tural buildings. Such buildings shall be classified as a Group M, Division 3
Occupancy and shall include the following uses:
I. Storage, livestock and poultry.
2. Milking barns.
3. Shade structures.
4. Horticultural structures (greenhouse and crop protection).

Sec. 1108. (a) General. Buildings classed as a Group M, Division 3 Occu-
pancy shall be of one of the types of construction specified in this code and shall
not exceed the area or height limits specified in Sections 505, 506 and 507 and
Table No. A-11-A.
(b) Special Provisions. The area of a Group M, Division 3 Occupancy in a
one-story building shall not be limited if the building is entirely surrounded and
adjoined by public ways or yards not less than 60 feet in width, regardless of the
type of construction.
The area of a two-story Group M, Division 3 Occupancy shall not be limited if
the building is entirely surrounded and adjoined by public ways or yards not less
than 60 feet in width and is provided with an approved automatic sprinkler system
throughout, conforming to U .B.C. Standard No. 38-1.
Buildings using plastics shall comply with Type V-N construction. Plastics
shall be approved plastics as defined in Chapter 4 and regulated by Chapter 52.
For foam plastic, see Section 1712.
EXCEPTIONS: I. When used as skylights or roofs, the areas of plastic sky-
lights shall not be limited.
2. Except where designs must consider snow loads, plastics less than 20 mils thick
may be used without regard to structural considerations. The structural frame of the
building, however, shall comply.
Occupancy Separations
Sec. 1109. Occupancy separations shall be as specified in Section 503 and
Table No. A-ll-B.

Sec. 1110. Except where Table No. 17-A requires greater protection, exterior
walls of agricultural buildings shall be not less than one-hour fire-resistive
construction when less than 20 feet from property line.
Openings in exterior walls of agricultural buildings which are less than 20 feet
from property lines shall be protected by fire assemblies having a fire-protection
rating of not less than three-fourths hour.
830
Exit Facilities
Sec. 1111. Exit facilities shall be as specified in Chapter 33.
EXCEPTIONS: I. The maximum distance of travel from any point in the build-
ing to an exterior exit door, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed stairway
shall not exceed 300 feet.
2. One exit is required for each 15,000 square feet of floor area and fraction
thereof.
3. Exit openings shall be not Jess than 2 feet 6 inches by 6 feet 8 inches.
831
Ql
w
N
,,
)>
m
z
0
TABLE NO. A-11-A-BASIC ALLOWABLE AREA FOR A GROUP M, DIVISION 3 OCCUPANCY, ONE STORY IN HEIGHT
x
AND MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF SUCH OCCUPANCY
I II Ill and IV v
F-R One-Hour
One-Hour N N One-Hour N
I I or Type IV I I
ALLOWABLE AREA 1
Unlimited 60,000 I 27,100 I 18,000 27,100

MAXIMUM HEIGHT IN STORIES2
I 18,000 21,100 I 12,000 1
1See
Unlimited 12 I 4 I 2 4 I 2 3 I 2
Section 1108 for unlimited area under certain conditions.
2For maximum height in feet, see Chapter 5, Table No. 5-D.
c:
z
TABLE NO. A-11-B-REQUIRED SEPARATIONS BETWEEN GROUP M, DIVISION 3 AND OTHER OCCUPANCIES
=n
0
(In Hours) JJ
s:::
Occupancy tD
c:
Rating r=0
1See Chapter 9 for Group H, Division I Occupancies. ~! z
C)
0
0
0
m
Chapter 12
Division I
REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP R,
DIVISION 3 OCCUPANCIES
General
Sec. 1221. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this division is to provide minimum
standards for the protection of life, limb, health, property, environment and for
the safety and welfare of the consumer, general public and the owners and
occupants of Group R, Division 3 Occupancies regulated by this code.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this division apply to the construction, prefabrica-
tion, alteration, repair, use, occupancy and maintenance of one- or two-family
dwellings not more than three stories in height and their accessory ~tructurcs.
One and Two Family Dwelling Code Adopted
Sec. 1222. Buildings regulated by this division shall be designed and con-
structed to comply with the requirements of the One and Two Family Dwelling
Code, 1986 edition, promulgated jointly by the International Conference of
Building Officials; the Building Officials and Code Administrators International,
Inc., and the Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
Division II
This is a new division.
General
Sec. 1223. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this division is ' 1 provide minimum
standards nf safety for group care facilities.
(b) Scop~. I. General. The provision' of this division shall apply to buildings
or portions thereof that arc to be used for Group R, Division 4 Occupancies.
2. Applicability of other provisions. Except as specifically required by this
division, Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall meet all applicable provisions of
this code.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this division, certain terms are defined as
follows:
GROUP R, DIVISION 4 OCCUPANCIES shall be residential group care
facilities for ambulatory, n,mrcstrained persons who may have a mental or physi-
cal impairment (each accommodating more than five and not more than 16 clients
or residents, excluding staff).
AMBULATORY PERSONS are those capable of achieving mobility suffi-
cient to exit without the assistance of another person.
833
Chapter 12
Division I
General
Sec. 1221. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this division is to provide minimum
standards for the protection of life, limb, health, property, environment and for
the safety and welfare of the consumer, general public and the owners and
occupants of Group R, Division 3 Occupancies regulated by this code.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this division apply to the construction, prefabrica-
tion, alteration, repair, use, occupancy and maintenance of one- or two-family
dwellings not more than three stories in height and their accessory ~tructures.
One and Two Family Dwelling Code Adopted
Sec. 1222. Buildings regulated by this division shall be designed and con-
structed to comply with the requirements of the One and Two Family Dwelling
Code, 1986 edition, promulgated jointly by the International Conference of
Building Officials; the Building Officials and Code Administrators International,
Inc., and the Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
Division II
This is a new division.
General
Sec. 1223. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this division is' 1 provide minimum
standards nf safety for group care facilities.
(b) Scop~. I. General. The provision" of this division shall apply to buildings
or portions thereof that are to be used for Group R, Division 4 Occupancies.
2. Applicability of other provisions. Except as specifically required by this
division, Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall meet all applicable provisions of
this code.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this division, certain terms are defined as
follows:
GROUP R, DIVISION 4 OCCUPANCIES shall be residential group care
facilities for ambulatory, n,mrestrained persons who may have a mental or physi-
cal impairment (each accommodating more than five and not more than 16 clients
or residents, excluding staff).
AMBULAIDRY PERSONS are those capable of achieving mobility suffi-
cient to exit without the assistance of another person.
833

Sec. 1224. (a) General. Buildings or portions of buildings classified as Group
R, Division 4 may be constructed of any materials allowed by this code, shall not
exceed two stories in height nor be located above the second story in any building,
and shall not exceed 3, 000 square feet in floor area per story except as provided in
Sections 505, 506 and 507.
(b) Special Provisions. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies having more than
3,000 square feet of floor area above the first story shall be of not less than one-
hour fire-resistive construction throughout.
(c) Mixed Occupancies. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall be separated
from Group H Occupancies by a four-hour fire-resistive occupancy separation
and shall be separated from all other occupancies by a one-hour fire-resistive
occupancy separation.
EXCEPTIONS: I. An occupancy separation need not be provided between a
Group R, Division 4 Occupancy and a carport having no enclosed uses above,
provided the carport is entirely open on two or more sides.
2. In the one-hour occupancy separation between a Group R, Division 4 and
Group M, Division I Occupancy, the separation may be limited to the installation of
materials approved for one-hour fire-resistive construction on the garage side and a
self-closing, tight-fitting solid-wood door )3/s inch in thickness will be permitted in
lieu of a one-hour fire assembly. Fire dampers need not be installed in air ducts
passing through the wall, floor or ceiling separating a Group R, Division 4 Occu-
pancy from a Group M, Division I Occupancy, provided such ducts within the Group
M Occupancy are constructed of steel having a thickness not less than 0.019 inch
(No. 26 galvanized sheet gauge) and have no openings into the Group M Occupancy.
Sec. 1225. Exterior walls located less than 3 feet from property lines shall be of
one-hour fire-resistive construction. Openings shall not be permitted in exterior
walls located less than 3 feet from property lines. For other requirements, see
Section 504 and Part IV.
Exits and Emergency Escapes

Sec. 1226. (a) General. Group R, Division 4 Occupancies shall be provided
with exits as required by this section and Chapter 33 of this code.
(b) Exits Required. I . Number of exits. Every story, basement or portion
thereof housing a Group R, Division 4 Occupancy shall have not less than two
exits.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Basements used exclusively for the service of the building
may have one exit. For the purpose of this exception, storage rooms, laundry rooms,
maintenance offices and similar uses shall not be considered as providing service to
the building.
2. Storage rooms, laundry rooms and maintenance offices not exceeding 300
square feet in floor area may be provided with only one exit.
2. Distance to exits. The maximum travel distance specified in Chapter 33
shall be reduced by 50 percent.
834
(c) Corridor Width. Corridors shall be not less than 36 inches in width.
(d) Stairways. Stairways shall be constructed as required by Section 3306 of
this code.
EXCEPTION: In buildings that are converted to a Group R, Division 4 Occu-
pancy, existing stairways may have an 8-inch maximum rise, 9-inch minimum run
and may be 30 inches in width.
(e) Emergency Exit Illumination. In the event of power failure, exit illumina-
tion shall be automatically provided from an emergency system. Emergency
systems shall be supplied from storage batteries or an on site generator set and the
system shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Electrical
Code.
(f) Emergency Escape. Every sleeping room shall be provided with emer-
gency escape or rescue facilities as required by Section 1204 of this code.

Sec. 1227. Light, ventilation and sanitation shall be as specified in Section
1205.
Yards and Courts

Sec. 1228. Yards and courts shall be as specified in Section 1206.
Room Dimensions
Sec. 1229. Room dimensions shall be as specified in Section 1207.
Sec. 1230. No requirements.
Shaft Enclosures
Elevator shafts, vent shafts, dumbwaiter shafts, clothes chutes and other verti-
cal openings shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall be as specified in Section
1706.
Fire-warning Systems
Sec. 1232. Fire-warning Systems. Basements, attached garages and all rooms
in a Group R, Division 4 Occupancy shall be provided with smoke detectors
except that kitchens and mechanical rooms shall be provided with approved heat
detectors in lieu of smoke detectors. All detectors shall be installed in accordance
with approved manufacturer's instructions. Detectors shall be mounted in an
approved central location on the ceiling or wall of each room or space.
EXCEPTION: Detectors may be omitted in bathrooms and closets.
All detectors shall be connected to a sounding device or other detectors to
provide an alarm which will be audible throughout the Group R, Division 4
Occupancy. Required detectors shall receive their primary power from the build-
ing wiring. Wiring shall be permanent and without a disconnecting switch other
than those required for overcurrent protection.
835
Heating
Sec. 1233. All habitable rooms shall be provided with heating facilities capable
of maintaining a room temperature of 70°F. at a point 3 feet above the floor.
Special Hazards
Sec. 1234. (a) Heating Equipment. All heating equipment shall be perma-
nently installed. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the require-
ments of Chapter 37 of this code and the Mechanical Code.
(b) Flammable Liquids. The storage and handling of gasoline, fuel oil or other
flammable liquids shall be in accordance with the Fire Code.
836
Chapter 23
Division I
SNOW LOAD DESIGN
NOTE: This division has been revised in Its entirety.
General
Sec. 2315. Buildings, structures and portions thereof shall be designed and
constructed to sustain all dead loads plus live loads as provided by Table No. 23-C
or snow loads as defined in this division where such snow loads will result in
larger members or connections.
Notations
Sec. 2316.
a = Roof slope expressed in degrees.
B Width of projection measured parallel to ridge, ft. Minimum assumed
width shall be 1 foot.
Ce Snow exposure factor (see Table No. A-23-S).
Cs Slope reduction factor.
C,. Valley design coefficient (see Figure No. A-ll).
D Density of snow, pounds per cubic foot (pcf) (refer to Formula 21-2).
Fs Ice splitter horizontal load, lbs.
F, = Ice splitter snow weight, lbs.
hh = Height of balanced snow load on lower roof or deck, ft.
hd = Maximum height of drift surcharge, ft. (refer to Formula 21-1).
hx = Depth of ground snow (as determined by the building official), ft.
h, = Difference in height between the upper and lower roof or deck, ft.
I = Importance factor (see Table No. A-23-T).
L = Horizontal distance between projection and ridge, ft.
P1 = Minimum roof snow load, pounds per square foot (psf).
Pg Basic ground snow load, pounds per square foot (psf).
Pm = Maximum intensity of the load at the height change, pounds per square
foot (psf).
S Horizontal separation between adjacent structures, ft. (see Figure No.
A-7).
Wb = Horizontal dimension in feet of upper roof normal to the line of change
in roof level, but not less than 50 feet, nor greater than 500 feet.
Wd = Width of drift, base of triangular drift load, ft.
X = Vertical component of roof slope (rise), ft.
Y = Horizontal component of roof slope (run), ft.
837
Ground Snow Loads

Sec. 2317. The ground snow load,~· to be used in the determination of design
snow loads for buildings and other structures shall be as shown in Figures Nos.
A-5-A, A-5-8 and A-5-C. For the hatched areas in Figure No. A-5-A, the basic
ground sncw loads shall be determined by the building official. The ground snow
load, ~ may be adjusted by the building official when a registered engineer or
architect submits data substantiating the adjustments.
Roof Snow Loads

Sec. 2318. The value of roof (or other member) snow load, P1, shall be
determined by the following formula:
P1 = C,l Pg ........................ (18-1)
where C, is given in Table No. A-23-S and I is given in Table No. A-23-T.
The roof snow load shall be assumed to act vertically upon the area projected
upon a horizontal plane. The horizontal projection of inclined walls as defined in
Section 424 need not be considered in snow load design.
Roof snow loads between 20 pounds per square foot and 70 pounds per square
foot may be multiplied by C, given in the formula:
C, = I - (a - 30 l for unobstructed slippery surfaces ...... . ( 18-2A)

40
C, I -(a-
45 > forallothcrsurfaces ............ (18-28)
25
Roof snow loads greater than 70 pounds per square foot may be reduced for
each degree of slope over 20 degrees by R,, as determined by the following
formula:
R = PI - ................. (18-2C)
s
40 2
Where R, = snow reduction in pounds per square foot per degree of roof slope
over 20 degrees.
The following conditions must be met before using Formulas ( 18-2A), ( 18-28)
and ( 18-2C):
I. The height of all caves exceeds hx, and:
2. There arc no obstructions adjacent to the structure for a distance hx mea-
sured from the cave normal to the ridge line.
Where the cave height is less than hx but greater than h/2. and the above
condition is met, the roof snow load may be reduced by 50 percent of the
reductions allowed by the applicable formula ( 18-2A), ( 18-28) or ( 18-2C).
3. If Px is 20 pounds per square foot or less, design roof snow load must not be
838
less than P11 • If Pg exceeds 20pounds per square foot, design roof snow load
must not be less than 20 pounds per square foot.
4. Reduced roof loads where P g exceeds 70 pounds per square foot shall not be
less than those obtained through use of Formula ( 18-2A) for P11 equal to 70
pounds per square foot.
Where the eave height is less than h8 but greater than hgl2 and conditions I and 3
above are met, the roof snow load may be multiplied by C,. determined from the
formula:
C 5 = J_(a- 30) ..................... (18-20)

80
Unbalanced Snow Loads, Gable Roofs

Sec. 2319. (a) General. In addition to the balanced load condition, unbalanced
loading shall be considered for gable roofs in accordance with this section.
(b) Single-gable Roofs. Single-gable roofs with slopes greater than lf2: 12 and
less than 3:12 shall be designed to sustain a uniformly distributed load of 0.5 P1
acting on one slope and 1.0 Pi on the opposite slope. Roofs with slopes greater
than 3:12 shall be designed to sustain a uniformly distributed load equal to 1.25 Pi
applied to one slope only.
(c) Multiple-gable Roofs. I. With parallel ridge lines. For multiple-gable
roofs with parallel ridge lines having slopes exceeding 2:12, the roof snow load
shall be increased from one-half the applicable uniform roof load at the ridge
(0.5Pi) to three times the uniform load at the valley (3.0 Pi).
2. With nonparallel ridge lines. Structural members at roof valleys where the
slope is 3:12 or greater shall be designed for Pi times Cv and the distribution of
loads is as shown in Figures Nos. A-13 and A-14 where Cv shall be determined
from Figure No. A-12.
Special Eave Requirements

Sec. 2320. Eave overhanging roof structures shall be designed to sustain a
uniformly distributed load of2.0 Pi, or as determined by the building official, to
account for ice dams and snow accumulation as shown in Figure No. A-ll . Heat
strips or other exposed heat methods may not be used in lieu of this design
criterion. For shingle or shake roofs, hot or cold underlayment roofing is required
on all roofs from the building edge for a distance of 5 feet or to the ridge,
whichever is less. All building exits under down-slope eaves shall be protected
from sliding snow and ice.
Drift Loads on Lower Roofs, Decks and Roof Projections

Sec. 2321. (a) General. Multilevel roofs, lower roofs and decks of adjacent
structures and roofs adjacent to projections shall be designed in accordance with
this section.
(b) Drift Loads for Lower Roofs. The drift load on lower roofs or decks shall
839
be taken as the triangular loading surcharge superimposed on the minimum roof

snow load, If· (see Figures Nos. A-6, A-7, A-8 and A-10).
The height of the drift hd shall be determined by the following formula:
hd = ~ ........................ (21-1)
8D
except that h"need not exceed (hr-hb) and I( is evaluated on the basis of the upper
roof. ·
For the purpose of evaluating the height of snow drift, ground and roof snow,
the snow density D shall be calculated from the formula:
D = 0.24~ + 9.0~40pcf ................. (21-2)
The width of the drift Wdin feet shall be taken as the smaller of 4hdor4(hr-hh).
Drift loads need only be considered when:
hr- hb > 0.2 ....................... (21-3)

hb
WHERE:
where!} is evaluated on the basis of the lower roof. The maximum intensity, P,. of
the snow load at the high point of the drift shall be determined from the formula:
Pm = D (hd + hb) ...................... (21-4)
except that P m need not exceed Dhr.
(c) Roof of an Adjacent Lower Structure. Drifts may occur on lower roofs of
structures sited within 20 feet of a higher structure as depicted in Figure No. A-7.
The height of the surcharge on the lower structure shall be taken as hd multiplied
by (20-S)/20 to account for the horizontal separation between structures, S, in
feet.
(d) Sliding Snow. Lower roofs which are located below roofs having a slope
greater than 2:12 shall be designed for an increase in drift height of 0.4hd, except
that the total drift surcharge (I .4 hd) shall not exceed the height of the roof above
the uniform snow depth (hr- hb). Sliding snow need not be considered if the lower
roof is separated a distance, S, greater than hr or 20 feet as shown in Figures Nos.
A-7 and A-8.
(e) Roof Projections. Mechanical equipment, penthouses, parapets and other
projections above the roof can produce drifting as depicted in Figure No. A-9.
Such drift loads shall be calculated on all sides of projections having horizontal
dimensions exceeding 15 feet. The value of Wb shall be taken as the maximum
distance from the projection to the edges of the roof, or 50 feet, whichever is less.
840
(f) Intersecting Drifts. When one snow drift intersects another at an angle as
depicted in Figure No. A-10, the maximum unit pressure of the drift shall be taken
as the greater of the two individual drifts, but not the sum of the two. The total load
on the area of intersection is increased, however, simply because of the assumed
geometry of the intersecting drifts.
Rain on Snow
Sec. 2322. In geographic areas where intense rains may add to the roof snow
load, the building official may require the use of an additional rain on snow
surcharge of 5 pounds per square foot. This surcharge may be disregarded where
roof slopes exceed Ifz inch in 12 inches or where the basic ground snow load, ~·
exceeds 50 lbs./ft.2. See Section 2305 (1) for ponding.
Deflections
Sec. 2323. For roof slopes less than Ifz inch in 12 inches, the deflection of any
structural member shall not exceed L/180 evaluated on the basis of roof snow
loads plus K times dead load, where K is defined in Table No. 23-D.
Impact Loads
Sec. 2324. Whenever Pg exceeds 70 pounds per square foot, structures which
could be subjected to impact loads (snow unloading from a higher rool) shall be
designed for impact loading. Drift loads and impact loads need not be considered
cumulatively. Positive connections shall be provided for all members subject to
impact loads.
Vertical Obstructions
Sec. 2325. Whenever P8 exceeds 70 pounds per square foot, roof projections
which could be subjected to sliding ice or snow shall be protected with ice splitters
or crickets, or shall be designed for these forces. These conditions apply when-
ever the roof slope is 3:12 or greater (except those projections within 36 inches of
the ridge). All ice splitters shall be constructed the full width of the projection
base (see Figure No. A-15).
Ice splitters shall be designed for a horizontal force F; and the resultant moment
produced from F; being applied at midheight of the splitter given by
F,. = FVX .................... (25-1)

YX2+Y2
WHERE:
Fv = L (0.5L + B)IJ
The projection width, B, shall not exceed 6 feet where the roof slope is greater
than 2: 12 unless approved by the building official. Chimneys and similar projec-
tions at or near the eave of a roof shall have footings and roof/wall ties designed to
resist the force of the sliding snow. Cross-grain bending of wood ledgers and edge
nailing of plywood shall not be considered to resist such forces. Snow melting
equipment shall not be considered to reduce the required design loads.
841
TABLE NO. A-23-5-SNOW EXPOSURE COEFFICIENT (C.)1 2
I. Roofs located in generally open terrain extending one-half

mile or more from the structure. 0.6
2. Structures located in densely forested or sheltered areas. 0.9
3. All other structures. 0.7
1The building official may determine this coefficient for specific structures with special
local conditions. For Alaska, Arizona and Hawaii, the coefficient shall be determined by
2for roofs at or near grade with slopes less than 3: 12 or decks at or near grade, C,. = 1.0.
TABLE NO. A-23-T-VALUES FOR OCCUPANCY

IMPORTANCE FACTOR I
I
TYPE OF OCCUPANCY
SNOW
I. Essential facilities. 1 1.15

2. Any building where the primary occupancy is for
assembly use for more than 300 persons (in one
room). 1.15
3. Agricultural buildings and other miscellaneous

structures. 0.9
4. All others. 1.0
1See
. .
Section 2312 (k) for definition and additional requirements for essent1al faciht1es.
842
In these areas extreme local variations in snow loads preclude mapping at this
scale; ground snow load, P.· shall be established by the building official.
The zoned value is not appropriate for certain geographic settings, such as high
country, in these areas; ground snow load, P.· shall be established by the building
official.
In these areas ground snow load, P.· shall be established by the building official.
0 Those areas shown as zero, 5 and I 0 are for information only.
FIGURE NO. A-S-A-GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg, FOR 50-YEAR MEAN

RECURRENCE INTERVAL FOR WESTERN UNITED STATES
(Pounds per square foot)
843
D Those areas shown as zero, 5 and 10 are for information only.
scale; ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building official.
country, in these areas; ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building
official.
FIGURE NO. A-5-8-GROUND SNOW LOAD, P9 , FOR 50-YEAR MEAN
RECURRENCE INTERVAL FOR THE CENTRAL UNITED STATES
844
D Those areas shown as zero, 5 and 10 are for information only.
scale; ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building official.
country, in these areas; ground snow load, P,. shall be established by the building
official.
FIGURE NO. A-5-C-GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg, FOR 50-YEAR MEAN

RECURRENCE INTERVAL FOR THE EASTERN UNITED STATES
845
FIGURE NO. A-6-DRIFTING SNOW ON LOW ROOFS AND DECKS
FIGURE NO. A-7-DRIFTING SNOW ONTO ADJACENT

LOW STRUCTURES
~ w..
FIGURE NO. A-8-ADDITIONAL SURCHARGE DUE TO
SLIDING SNOW
846
FIGURE NO. A-9-SNOW DRIFTING AT ROOF PROJECTIONS
FIGURE NO. A-H)-INTERSECTING SNOW DRIFTS
NOTE:
hd! = ywb! ~
8D
h d! = ywb,~
--
8D
If is evaluated on the basis of upper roof
847
··~
AI I I 1 I I I
\
m····· AT OVERHANG
OVERHANG
FIGURE NO. A-11-0VERHANG LOADS
1.9 ,..... I
............
..........
1.75 ........ 9~
·-- ----:
.... ...f.
- t-~
>
0
a: 1.6 ~ o..Q,t-
~ f--~ ,__ ........ r~ 8~,...

0
~
1.45 - - _if_ r-- l!)N...t. lN....
0
c(
0
..J
1.3
!trP - - r--
..:::5- ~~ ~
1.2
I?CP
f-
1.0 10° 0 11!~ I I I I I I I I
...
0
ROOF SNOW LOAD P, (psf) 01
0
0
FIGURE NO. A-12-VALLEY COEFFICIENT, c.

848
,rl.o
t
• .... . ..-:. VAL.U.Y
.."""·: ... ··J· kcv ,ri.O
. 7
1.0 ... . ; .
J··· .. ·· .. / ...
. .. ~f'
~- ~·
I '•/;:
I ··C.v"ii.V ·. ·.
'
i ·.~.-7
.....' .. :
'·: ·~ '·: :
....
I J
I
··~·
lA' ... /.1' •• :
. :.·I
.....,
...
- ._, . . .. :. .
\
·'-
.... , .
r
I
.. 11
\
I. • ~.::0
-~_,:-·
:
"·. .\
. . ·,
'4w,.• .:...:._~ •.
r.o ...l • ..· .• .• , K
........ .
.'\. ~tc~
. ·\..
..... 1.0
--- tsPG£.-
'!-r- ....
DENOTES INCREASED LOAD AREA:

. V.lL.L5Y
..... rf,O
-
I. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted 1.0.
2. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted Cv.
3. Load varies linearly between 1.0 & Cv.
FIGURE NO. A-13-VALLEY DESIGN COEFFICIENTS c.
849
DENOTES INCREASED LOAD AREA:

I. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted 1.0.
2. Load is constant on lines connecting points noted Cv·
3. Load varies linearly between 1.0 & Cv·
FIGURE NO. A-14-VALLEY DESIGN COEFFICIENTS c.
850
.J
ICE SPLITTER
ROOF
PROJECTION B
FIGURE NO. A-15-ICE SPLITTER-PLAN VIEW
851
Division II
EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION
General
Sec. 2326. In Seismic Zones No. 3 and No. 4 every building over six stories in
height with an aggregate floor area of 60,000 square feet or more, and every
building over I 0 stories in height regardless of floor area, shall be provided with
not less than three approved recording accelerographs.
Location
Sec. 2327. The instruments shall be located in the basement, midportion, and
near the top of the building. Each instrument shall be located so that access is
maintained at all times and is unobstructed by room contents. A sign stating
.. Maintain Clear Access to This Instrument" shall be posted in a conspicuous
location.
Maintenance
Sec. 2328. Maintenance and service of the instruments shall be provided by the
owner of the building, subject to the approval of the building official. Data
produced by the instruments shall be made available to the building official upon
his request.
Instrumentation of Existing Buildings
Sec. 2329. All owners of existing structures selected by the jurisdiction author-
ities shall provide accessible space for the installation of appropriate earthquake-
recording instruments. Location of said instruments shall be determined by the
jurisdiction authorities. The jurisdiction authorities shall make arrangements to
provide, maintain and service the instruments. Data shall be the property of the
jurisdiction, but copies of individual records shall be made available to the public
upon request and the payment of an appropriate fee.
SEISMIC ZONE TABULATION

For Areas Outside the United States
Location Seismic Zone Location Seismic Zone
ASIA PACIFIC OCEAN AREA
Turkey Caroline Island
Ankara 2 Koror, Paulau 2
Karamursel 3 Ponape 0
ATLANTIC OCEAN AREA Johnston Island I
Azores 2 Kwajalein l
Bermuda l Mariana Islands
CARIBBEAN SEA Guam 3
Bahama Islands l Saipan 3
Canal Zone 2 Tinian 3
Leeward Islands 3 Marcus Island l
Puerto Rico 3 Okinawa 3
Trinidad Island 2 Philippine Islands 3
NORTH AMERICA Samoa Islands 3
Greenland Wake Island 0
Iceland
Keflavik 3
852
Chapter 26
PROTECTION OF RESIDENTIAL CONCRETE
EXPOSED TO FREEZING AND THAWING
NOTE: New appendix chapter.
General
Sec. 2628. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to provide minimum
standards for the protection of residential concrete exposed to freezing and
thawing conditions.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this appendix apply to concrete used in buildings
of Group R and Group M Occupancies which are three stories or less in height.
(c) Special Provisions. Normal-weight aggregate concrete used in buildings of
Group R and Group M Occupancies three stories or less in height which are
subject to deicer chemicals or freezing and thawing conditions as determined
from Figure No. A-26-1 shall comply with the requirements of Table No. A-26-A.
TABLE NO. A-26-A

MINIMUM SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE1
MINIMUM
SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH2 (f'c)
TYPE OR LOCATION OF
Weathering Potantlal3
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Negligible Moderate Severa
Basement walls and foundations not 2,500 2,500 2,50()4

exposed to the weather
Basement slabs and interior slabs on grade, 2,500 2,500 2,5004
except garage floor slabs
Basement walls, foundation walls, exterior 2,500 3,0005 3,0005
walls and other vertical concrete work
exposed to the weather
Porches, carport slabs and steps exposed to 2,500 3,0005 3,5005
the weather, and garage floor slabs
'Increases in compressive strength above those used in the design shall not cause implemen-
tation of the special inspection provisions of Section 306 (a) I.
2At 28 days psi.
'See Figure No. A-26-1 for weathering potential.

4Concrete in these locations which may be subject to freezing and thawing during construc-
tion shall be air-entrained concrete in accordance with Footnote 5.

'Concrete shall be air entrained. Total air content (percent by volume of concrete) shall be
not less than 5 percent nor more than 7 percent.
853
WEATHERING PROBABILITY MAP FOR CONCRETE
Negligible (Under 100*)

Weathering Regions (Weathering Index)
•Index in day-inches, multiply by 25.4 to convert to day-mm
FIGURE NO. A-26-1

Notes:
I. Lines defining areas are approximate only. Local conditions may be more or less severe
than indicated by the region classification.
2. Data needed to determine the weathering index for any locality may be found or
estimated from the tables of Local Climatological Data, published by the Weather
Bureau, U.S. DepartmentofCommerce.
3. The weathering index for any locality is the product of the average annual number of
freezing-cycle days and the average annual winter rainfall in inches, defined as follows:
A freezing-cycle day is any day during which the air temperature passes either above
or below 32°F. The average number of freezing-cycle days in a year may be taken to equal
the difference between the mean number of days during which the minimum temperature
was 32°F. or below and the mean number of days during which the maximum temperature
was 32oF. or below.
Winter rainfall is the sum, in inches, of the mean monthly corrected precipitation
(rainfall) occurring during the period between and including the normal date of the first
killing frost in the fall and the normal date of the last killing frost in the spring. The winter
rainfall for any period is equal to the total precipitation less one tenth of the total fall of
snow, sleet and hail. Rainfali for a portion of a month is prorated.
The map indicates general areas of the United States in which concrete is subject to
severe, moderate and mild weathering. The severe weathering region has a weathering
index greater than 500. The moderate weathering region has a weathering index of I 00 to
500. The mild weathering region has a weathering index of less than I 00.
854
Chapter32
RE-ROOFING
NOTE: This chapter has been revised In Its entirety.
General
Sec. 3209. All re-roofing shall conform to the applicable provisions of Chapter
32 of this code.
Roofing materials and methods of application shall comply with the U. B.C.
Standards or shall follow manufacturer's installation requirements when ap-
proved by the building official.
Inspections
Sec. 3210. New roof coverings shall not be applied without first obtaining an
inspection by the building official and written approval from the building official.
A final inspection and approval shall be obtained from the building official when
the re-roofing is complete. The pre-roofing inspection shall pay particular atten-
tion to evidence of accumulation of water. Where extensive ponding of water is
apparent, an analysis of the roof structure for compliance with Section 3207 shall
be made and corrective measures, such as relocation of roof drains or scuppers,
resloping of the roof or structural changes, shall be made.
An inspection covering the above-listed topics prepared by a special inspector
may be accepted in lieu of the preinspection by the building official.
Built-up Roofs
Sec. 3211. (a) General. Built-up roof covering shall be completely removed
before applying the new roof covering. New roofing conforming to Section 3203
shall be applied except that when the new roof is to be applied directly to a nailable
deck which has residual bitumen adhering to it, a rosin-sized or other dry sheet
shall be installed prior to the installation of the new roof system.
EXCEPTION: The building official may allow existing roof coverings to re-
main when inspection or other evidence reveals all of the following:
I. That the roof structure is sufficient to sustain the weight of the additional dead
load of the roof covering.
2. There is not more than one existing roof covering on the structure.
3. The existing roof covering is securely attached to the deck.
4. The roof deck is structurally sound.
5. The existing insulation is not water soaked.
(b) Preparation of Roof and Application of New Covering. l. General.
When re-roofing without removal of existing roof coverings is permitted by the
building official and when the conditions specified in the exceptions to Subsec-
tion (a) above have been met, the re-roofing shall be accomplished in accordance
with this section.
2. Over gravel-surfaced roof coverings. Over gravel-surfaced roof cover-
ings, the roof shall be cleaned of all loose gravel and debris. All blisters, buckles
855
and other irregularities shall be cut and made smooth and secure. Minimum 3/s-
inch insulation board shall be nailed or securely cemented to the existing roofing
with hot bitumen over which a new roof complying with Section 3203 shall be
installed. When insulation board is to be attached with hot bitumen, the existing
surface shall be primed.
Alternatively, on nailable decks only, all existing gravel shall be spudded off to
provide a smooth surface. All blisters, buckles and other irregularities shall be cut
and made smooth and secure. A rosin-sized or other dry sheet shall be installed
and a base sheet as defined in the code shall be mechanically fastened in place.
New roofing conforming to Section 3203 shall be applied.
3. Over smooth or cap-sheet surface. Over smooth or cap-sheet surfaced roof
coverings, all blisters, buckles and other irregularities shall be cut and made
smooth and secure. In the case of non-nailable decks, a base sheet shall be spot
cemented to the existing roofing. New roofing conforming to Section 3203 shall
be applied.
In the case of nailable decks, a base sheet shall be nailed in place. In those cases
where residual materials may cause the new base sheet to adhere to the old roof, a
rosin-sized dry or other sheet shall be installed under the base sheet. New roofing
conforming to Section 3203 shall be applied.
(c) Construction Details. l. Flashings and edgings. Vent flashings, metal
edgings, drain outlets, metal counterflashing and collars shall be removed and
cleaned. Rusted metal shall be replaced. Metal shall be primed with cutback
primer prior to installation. Collars and flanges shall be flashed per the roofing
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Intersecting walls. All concrete and masonry walls shall be completely
cleaned and primed to receive new flashing. All vertical walls, other than con-
crete or masonry, shall have the surface finish material removed to a height of
approximately 6 inches above the deck new roof surface to receive new roofing
and flashing. All rotted wood shall be replaced with new materials. Surface finish
material shall be replaced.
3. Parapets. Parapets of area separation walls shall have noncombustible
faces, including counterflashing and coping materials.
EXCEPTION: Combustible roofing may extend 7 inches above the ro0f sur-
face.
4. Cant strips. Where space permits, cant strips shall be installed at all angles.
All angles shall be flashed with at least two more layers than in the new roof with
an exposed finish layer of inorganic felt or mineral surfaced cap sheet.
Shingles and Shakes

Sec. 3212. (a) General. Based on inspection of the existing roofing, the
building official may permit the recovering of existing shingle or shake roofing in
accordance with the provisions of this section.
(b) Asphalt Shingle Application. Not more than two overlays of asphalt
shingles shall be applied over an existing asphalt shingle roof.
856
Not more than two overlays of asphalt shingle roofing shall be applied over
wood shingles. Asphalt shingles applied over wood shingles shall have an overlay
underlayment of not less than 'JYpe 30 non perforated felt.
On structures with a slope of 2: 12 or greater and having no more than one
existing built-up roof, one overlay of asphalt shingles may be applied, provided
(I) If the built-up roof has a gravel surface, the gravel must first be spudded off to
provide a smooth surface. All blisters and irregularities shall be cut and made
smooth and secure and an underlayment of not less than 'JYpe 30 nonperforatea
felt shall be installed. (2) If the built-up roof has a smooth or cap-sheet surface. all
blisters and irregularities shall be cut and made smooth and secure and an
underlayment of not less than 'JYpe 30 nonperforated felt shall be installed.
(c) Wood Shake Application. Not more than one overlay of wood shakes shall
be applied over an existing asphalt shingle or wood shingle roof (with one layer of
18-inch, 'JYpe 30 nonperforated felt interlaced between each layer of shakes).
(d) Wood Shingle Application. Not more than one overlay of wood shingles
shall be applied over existing wood shingles.
(e) Application Over Shakes. New roof covering shall not be applied over an
existing shake roof.
(f) Flashing and Edgings. Rusted or damaged flashing, vent caps and metal
edgings shall be replaced with new materials as necessary.
Tile
Sec. 3213. Tile roofs may be applied over existing roof coverings when
approved by the building official. Such installations shall be substantiated by
structural data indicating that the existing or modified roof framing system is
adequate to support the additional tile roof covering.
Existing tile roofing shall be removed and cleaned. Damaged or rusted flashing
and cracked or broken tile shall be replaced. Tile shall be applied in accordance
with the requirements of Section 3208 (b) 5 (application of clay or concrete tile)
and in conformance with the original manufacturer's specifications.
EXCEPTION: When the original manufacturer's specifications are no longer
available, the tile may be reinstalled to match the prior installation except that clay
and terra-cotta hips and ridge tile shall be reinstalled with portland cement mortar.
Metal Roofing
Sec. 3214. Reroofing with metal roofing shall be in accordance with the
original manufacturer's specifications or when the original manufacturer's speci-
fications are no longer available as required by Section 3208 (b) 6.
Other Roofings
Sec. 3215. Re-roofing with systems not covered elsewhere in Chapter 32 or this
appendix, such as, but not limited to, those that are fluid applied, foamed in place
or applied as nonasphaltic sheets, shall be done with materials and procedures
857
Chapter35
SOUND TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Sound Transmission Control
Sec. 3501. (a) General. In Group R Occupancies, wall and floor-ceiling
assemblies separating dweHing units or guest rooms from each other and from
public space such as interior corridors and service areas shall provide airborne
sound insulation for walls, and both airborne and impact sound insulation for
floor-ceiling assemblies.
(b) Airborne Sound Insulation. All such separating waHs and floor-ceiling
assemblies shaH provide an airborne sound insulation equal to that required to
meet a Sound Transmission Class (STC) of 50 (45 if field tested) as defined in
Penetrations or openings in construction assemblies for piping, electrical de-
vices, recessed cabinets, bathtubs, soffits, or heating, ventilating or exhaust ducts
shal! be sealed, lined, insulated or otherwise treated to maintain the required
ratings.
Entrance doors from interior corridors together with their perimeter seals shall
have a laboratory-tested Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of not less than
26 and such perimeter seals shall be maintained in good operating condition.
(c) Impact Sound Insulation. AI! separating floor-ceiling assemblies between
separate units or guest rooms shal! provide impact sound insulation equal to that
required to meet an Impact Insulation Class (IIC) of 50 (45 if field tested) as
defined in U.B.C. Standard No. 35-2. Floor coverings may be included in the
assembly to obtain the required ratings and must be retained as a permanent part of
the assembly and may be replaced only by other floor covering that provides the
same sound insulation required above.
(d) Tested Assemblies. Field or laboratory tested wall or floor-ceiling designs
having an STC or IIC of 50 or more as determined by U.B.C. Standard No. 35-1,
35-2 or 35-3 may be used without additional field testing when, in the opinion of
the building official, the tested design has not been compromised by flanking
paths. Tests may be required by the building official when evidence of compro-
mised separations is noted.
(e) Field Testing and Certification. Field testing, when required, shall be
done under the supervision of a professional acoustician who shall be experienced
in the field of acoustical testing and engineering and who shall forward certified
test results to the building official that minimum sound insulation requirements
stated above have been met.
(f) Airborne Sound Insulation Field Tests. When required, airborne sound
insulation shaH be determined according to the applicable Field Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss Test procedures of U.B.C. Standard No. 35-3. AH sound
transmitted from the source room to the receiving room shal! be considered to be
transmitted through the test partition.
(g) Impact Sound Insulation Field Test. When required, impact sound insula-
tion shal! be determined in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 35-2.
858
Sound Transmission Control Systems

Sec. 3502. Generic systems as listed in the Fire Resistance Design Manual, f
October, 1984, Eleventh Edition, as published by the Gypsum Association may ;,f.;,;
be accepted where a laboratory test indicates that the requirements of Section ,

3501 are met by the system. ))
859
Chapter38
BASEMENT PIPE INLETS
Basement Pipe Inlets
Sec. 3807. (a) General. All basement pipe inlets shall be installed in accord-
ance with requirements of this section.
(b) Where Required. Basement pipe inlets shall be installed in the first floor of
every store, warehouse or factory having basements.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Where the basement is equipped with an automatic sprinkler
system as specified in Section 3802.
2. Where the basement is used for the storage of permanent archives or valuables
such as safe deposit vaults or similar uses adversely affected by water.
(c) Location. The location of basement pipe inlets shall be as required by the
fire department.
(d) Detailed Requirements. All basement pipe inlets shall be of cast iron,
steel, brass or bronze with lids of cast brass or bronze.
The basement pipe inlet shall consist of a sleeve not less than 8 inches inside
diameter extending through the floor and terminating flush with or through the
basement ceiling and shall have a top flange recessed with an inside shoulder to
receive the lid. The top flange shall be installed flush with finish floor surface.
The lid shall be a solid casting and have a lift recessed in the top. This lid shall be
provided with a cast-in sign reading: "FIRE DEPARTMENT ONLY, DO NOT
COVER." The lid shall be installed in such a manner to permit its easy removal
from the flange shoulder.
860
Chapter49
PATIO COVERS
Patio Covers Defined
Sec. 4901. Patio covers are one-story structures not exceeding 12 feet in
height. Enclosure walls may have any configuration, provided the open area of
the longer wall and one additional wall is equal to at least 65 percent of the area
below a minimum of 6 feet 8 inches of each wall, measured from the floor.
Openings may be enclosed with insect screening or plastic that is readily remov-
able translucent or transparent plastic not more than 0. 125 inch in thickness.
Patio covers may be detached or attached to other buildings as accessories to
Group M, Group R, Division 3, or to single dwelling units in Group R, Division l
Occupancies. Patio covers shall be used only for recreational, outdoor living
purposes and not as carports, garages, storage rooms or habitable rooms.
Design Loads
Sec. 4902. Patio covers shall be designed and constructed to sustain, within the
stress limits of this code, all dead loads plus a minimum vertical live load of lO
pounds per square foot except that snow loads shall be used where such snow
loads exceed this minimum. Such covers shall be designed to resist the minimum
horizontal wind loads set forth in this code, except that where less than 12 feet
high the horizontal wind load shall be as indicated in Table No. 49-A. In addition,
they shall be designed to support a minimum wind uplift equal to the horizontal
wind load acting vertical upward normal to the roof surface, except that for
structures not more than l 0 feet above grade the uplift may be three fourths of the
horizontal wind load. When enclosed with insect screening or plastic that is
readily removable translucent or transparent plastic not more than 0.125 inch in
thickness, wind loads shall be applied to the structure, assuming it is fully
enclosed.
Light and Ventilation
Sec. 4903. Windows required for light and ventilation may open into a patio
structure conforming to Section 4901.
Footings
Sec. 4904. A patio cover may be supported on a concrete slab on grade without
footings, provided the slab is not less than 31/z inches thick and further provided
that the columns do not support live and dead loads in excess of 750 pounds per
column.
TABLE NO. 49-A-DESIGN WIND PRESSURES FOR PATIO COVERS1

WIND SPEED-MAP AREAS (Miles Per Hour)
HEIGHT ZONE
IN FEET 70 I 80 I 90 I 100 I 110 I 120 I 130
Less than 12 10 I 13 I 15 I 19 I 23 I 27 I 32
'Sec Figure No. I in Chapter 23 for Basic Wind Speeds.
861
Chapter 51
ELEVATORS, DUMBWAITERS, ESCALATORS
AND MOVING WALKS
Purpose
Sec. 5107. The purpose of this appendix is to safeguard life, limb, property and
public welfare by establishing minimum requirements regulating the design,
construction, alteration, operation and maintenance of elevators, dumbwaiters,
escalators and moving walks and by establishing procedures by which these
requirements may be enforced.
Scope
Sec. 5108. This appendix shall apply to new and existing installations of
elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators and moving walks, requiring permits there-
fore and providing for the inspection and maintenance of such conveyances.
Definitions
Sec. 5109. For purposes of this appendix, certain terms are defined as follows:
ANSI CODE is the ANSI! ASME A 17. I Code-1984 with Supplements
Al7.1a-1985, Al7.lb-1985, AI7 .lc-1986, Al7.ld-1986 and Al7.1e-1987
Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, an American National Standard pub-
lished by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Permits-Certificates of Inspection
Sec. 5110. (a) Permits Required. It shall be unlawful to hereafter install any
new elevator, moving walk, escalator or dumbwaiter, or to make major alterations
to any existing elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or moving walk as defined in Part
XII of the ANSI code, without having first obtained a permit for such installation
from the building official. Permits shall not be required for maintenance or minor
alterations.
(b) Certificates oflnspection Required. It shall be unlawful to operate any
elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or moving walk without a current Certificate of
Inspection issued by the building official. Such certificate shall be issued upon
payment of prescribed fees and the presentation of a valid inspection report
indicating that the conveyance is safe and that the inspections and tests have been
performed in accordance with Part X of the ANSI Code. Certificates shall not be
issued when the conveyance is posted as unsafe pursuant to Section 5114.
EXCEPTION: Certificates of Inspection shall not be required for conveyances
within a dwelling unit.
(c) Application for Permits. Application for a permit to install shall be made
on forms provided by the building official, and the permit shall be issued to an
owner upon payment of the permit fees specified in this section.
(d) Application for Certificates of Inspection. Application for a Certificate
of Inspection shall be made by the owner of an elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or
moving walk. Applications shall be accompanied by an inspection report as
862
described in Section 5113. Fees for Certificates of Inspection shall be as specified

in this section.
(e) Fees. A fee for each permit or Certificate of Inspection shall be paid to the
building official as follows:
New Installations:
Passenger or freight elevator, escalator, moving walk:
Up to and including $40,000 of valuation-$55 .00
Over $40,000 of valuation-$55.00 plus $1.00 for each $1,000 or fraction
thereof over $40,000
Dumbwaiter or private residence elevator:
Up to and including $10,000 ofvaluation-$15.00
Over $10,000 of valuation-$15.00 plus $1.00 for each $1,000 or fraction
thereof over $1 0, 000
Major Alterations:
Fees for major alterations shall be as set forth in Table No. 3-A.
Installation fees include charges for the first year's annual inspection fee and
charges for electrical equipment on the conveyance side of the disconnect switch.
Annual Certificates of Inspection:
For each elevator $25.00
For each escalator or moving walk $15.00
For each commercial dumbwaiter $10.00
(Each escalator or moving walk unit powered by one motor shall be considered
as a separate escalator or moving walk.)
ANSI Code Adopted

Sec. 5111. All new elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators and moving walks and
major alterations to such conveyances and the installation thereof shall conform to
the requirements of the American National Standard Institute ANSI/ ASME
Al7.1-1984 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, including Supplements :~::
Al7 .la-1985, A 17 .I b-1985, A 17 .lc-1986, Al7 .ld-1986 and A 17. le-1987, ,·.:,;.~:,
published by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Design
Sec. 5112. For detailed design, construction and installation requirements, see
Chapter 23 and the appropriate requirements of the ANSI Code.
In Seismic Zones Nos. 3 and 4. elevators shall conform to Appendix F of the
ANSI Code.
Requirements for Operation and Maintenance

Sec. 5113. (a) General. The owner shall be responsible for the safe operation
and maintenance of each elevator, dumbwaiter, escalator or moving walk installa-
tion and shall cause periodic inspections, tests and maintenance to be made on
such conveyances as required in this section.
863
(b) Periodic Inspections and Tests. Routine and periodic inspections and tests
shall be made as required by Part X of the ANSI Code.
(c) Alterations, Repairs and Maintenance. Alterations, repairs and mainte-
nance shall be made as required by Part XII of the ANSI Code.
(d) Inspection Costs. All costs of such inspections and tests shall be paid by the
owner.
(e) Inspection Reports. After each required inspection, a full and correct
report of such inspection shall be filed with the building official.
Unsafe Conditions
Sec. 5114. When an inspection reveals an unsafe condition, the inspector shall
immediately file with the owner and the building official a full and true report of
such inspection and such unsafe condition. If the building official finds that the
unsafe condition endangers human life, he shall cause to be placed on such
elevator, escalator or moving walk, in a conspicuous place, a notice stating that
such conveyance is unsafe. The owner shall see to it that such notice of unsafe
condition is legibly maintained where placed by the building official. The build-
ing official shall also issue an order in writing to the owner requiring the repairs or
alterations to be made to such conveyance which are necessary to render it safe
and may order the operation thereof discontinued until the repairs or alterations
are made or the unsafe conditions are removed. A posted notice of unsafe
conditions shall be removed only by the building official when he is satisfied that
the unsafe conditions have been corrected.
864
Chapter 53
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN NEW
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
General
Sec. 5301. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to regulate the design
and construction of the exterior envelopes and selection of heating, ventilating
and air-conditioning, service water heating, electrical distribution and illuminat-
ing systems and equipment required for the purpose of effective conservation of
energy within a building or structure governed by this code.
(b) Model Energy Code Adopted. In order to comply with the purpose of this
appendix, buildings shall be designed to comply with the requirements of the
Model Energy Code promulgated jointly by the International Conference of
Building Officials (ICBO); the Southern Building Code Congress International,
Inc. (SBCCI); the Building Officials and Code Administrators International. Inc.
(BOCA); and the National Conference of States on Building Codes and Stan-
dards, Inc. (NCSBCS); dated 1986.
865
Chapter 55
MEMBRANE STRUCTURES
General
Sec. 5501. (a) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to establish minimum
standards of safety for the construction and use of air-supported, air-inflated and
membrane-covered cable or frame structures, collectively known as membrane
structures.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this appendix shall apply to membrane structures
erected for a period of 180 days or longer. Those erected for a shorter period of
time shall comply with applicable provisions of the Uniform Fire Code.
EXCEPTION: Water storage facilities, water clarifiers, water treatment plants,
sewer plants, aquaculture pond covers, residential and agricultural greenhouses and
similar facilities not used for human occupancy need meet only the requirements of
Section 5502 (b) and Section 5505.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this appendix, certain terms arc defined as
follows:
AIR-INFLATED STRUCTURE is a building where the shape of the structure
is maintained by air pressurization of cells or tubes to form a barrel vault over the
usable area. Occupants of such a structure do not occupy the pressurized area used
to support the structure.
AIR-SUPPORTED STRUCTURE is a building wherein the shape of the
structure is attained by air pressure and occupants of the structure are within the
elevated pressure area. Air-supported structures are of two basic types:
I. Single skin-Where there is only the single outer skin and the air pressure
is directly against that skin.
2. Double skin-Similar to a single skin, but with an attached liner which is
separated from the outer skin and provides an air space which serves for
insulation, acoustic. aesthetic or similar purposes.
A cable-restrained air-supported structure is one in which the uplift is resisted
by cables or webbing which are anchored to either foundations or dead men.
Reinforcing cable or webbing may be attached by various methods to the mem-
brane or may be an integral part of the membrane. This is not a cable-supported
structure.
CABLE STRUCTURE is a nonpressurized structure in which a mast and
cable system provides support and tension to the membrane weather barrier and
the membrane imparts structural stability to the structure.
FRAME-COVERED STRUCTURE is a nonpressurized building wherein
the structure is composed of a rigid framework to support tensioned membrane
which provides the weather barrier.
MEMBRANE is a thin, flexible, impervious material capable of being sup-
ported by an air pressure of 1.5 inches of water column.
866
NONCOMBUSTIBLE MEMBRANE STRUCTURE is a membrane struc-

ture in which the membrane and all component parts of the structure are noncom-
bustible as defined by Section 415.
TENT is any structure, enclosure or shelter constructed of canvas or pliable
material supported by any manner except by air or the contents it protects.
Type of Construction and General Requirements

Sec. 5502. (a) General. Membrane structures shall be classified as Type V-N
construction, except that noncombustible membrane structures may be classified
as Type 11-N construction.
EXCEPTION: A noncombustible membrane structure used exclusively as a roof
and located more than 25 feet above any floor, balcony or gallery is deemed to
comply with the roof construction requirements for Type I and Type II fire-resistant
construction, provided that such a structure complies with the requirements of this
section.
(b) Membrane Material. Membranes shall be either noncombustible as de-
fined by Section 415, or flame retardant conforming to U.B.C. Standard No.
55-I.
EXCEPTION: Plastic less than 20-mil thickness used in greenhouses and for
aquaculture pond covers need not be flame retardant.
(c) Applicability of Other Provisions. Except as specifically otherwise re-
quired by this section, membrane structures shall meet all applicable provisions of
this code. Roof coverings shall be fire retardant.
EXCEPTION: Roof coverings for Group M, Division I Occupancies not ex-
ceeding 1000 square feet in area need not be fire retardant.
(d) Allowable Floor Areas. The area of a membrane structure shall not exceed
the limits set forth in Table No. 5-C, except as provided in Section 506.
(e) Maximum Height. Membrane structures shall not exceed one story nor
shall they exceed the height limits in feet set forth in Table No. 5-D.
EXCEPTION: Noncombustible membrane structures serving as roof only.
Inflation Systems
Sec. 5503. (a) General. Air-supported and air-inflated structures shall be
provided with primary and auxiliary inflation systems to meet the minimum
(b) Equipment Requirements. The inflation system shall consist of one or
more blowers and shall include provisions for automatic control to maintain the
required inflation pressures. The system shall be so designed as to prevent
overpressurization of the system.
In addition to the primary inflation system, in buildings exceeding 1500 square
feet in area, there shall be provided an auxiliary inflation system with sufficient
capacity to maintain the inflation of the structure in case of primary system
failure.
The auxiliary inflation system shall operate automatically if there is a loss of
internal pressure or should the primary blower system become inoperative.
867
Blower equipment shall meet the following requirements:

I. Blowers shall be powered by continuous rated motors at the maximum
power required for any flow condition as required by the structural design.
2. Blowers shall be provided with inlet screens, belt guards and other protect-
ive devices as may be required by the building official to provide protection
from injury.
3. Blowers shall be housed within a weather-protecting structure.
4. Blowers shall be equipped with back draft check dampers to minimize air
loss when inoperative.
5. Blower inlets shall be located to provide protection from air contamina-
tion. Location of inlets shall be approved by the building official.
(c) Emergency Power. Whenever an auxiliary inflation system is required, an
approved standby power generating system shall be provided. The system shall be
equipped with a suitable means for automatically starting the generator set upon
failure of the normal electrical service and for automatic transfer and operation of
all the required electrical functions at full power within 60 seconds of such normal
service failure. Standby power shall be capable of operating independently for a
minimum of four hours.
Section Provisions
Sec. 5504. A system capable of supporting the membrane in the event of
deflation shall be provided in all air-supported and air-inflated structures having
an occupant load of more than 50 or when covering a swimming pool regardless of
occupant load. Such system shall maintain the membrane at least 7 feet above the
floor, seating area or surface of the water.
EXCEPTION: Membrane structures used as a roof for Type I or Type II fire-
resistant construction must be maintained not less than 25 feet above floor or seating
areas.
Engineering Design
Sec. 5505. All membrane structures shall be structurally designed in accord-
ance with criteria approved by the building official and developed by an engineer
or architect licensed by the state to practice as such.
868
Chapter 57
REGULATIONS GOVERNING FALLOUT SHELTERS
Purpose
Sec. 5701. The purpose of this appendix is to establish minimum criteria which
must be met before a building or building space can be constructed, occupied,
used or designated a fallout shelter.
Scope
Sec. 5702. The scope of this appendix extends to building spaces designated
for use as fallout shelters including periods of drill and instruction for this
purpose.
Definitions
Sec. 5703. FALLOUT SHELTER is any room, structure or space designated
as such and providing its occupants with protection at a minimum protection
factor of 40 from gamma radiation from fallout from a nuclear explosion as
determined by a qualified fallout shelter analyst certified by the Office of Civil
Defense. Area used for storage of shelter supplies need not have a protection
factor of 40.
DUAL-USE FALLOUT SHELTER is a fallout shelter having a normal,
routine use and occupancy as well as an emergency use as a fallout shelter.
SINGLE-PURPOSE FALLOUT SHELTER is a fallout shelter having no
use or occupancy except as a fallout shelter.
PROTECTION FACTOR is a factor used to express the relation between the
amount of fallout gamma radiation that would be received by an unprotected
person and the amount that would be received by one in a shelter.
UNIT OF EGRESS WIDTH is 22 inches.
Occupancy Requirements
Sec. 5704. (a) General. Nothing in these regulations shall be construed as
preventing the dual use or multiple use of normal occupancy space as fallout
shelter space, providing the minimum requirements for each use arc met.
(b) Mixed Occupancy. The occupancy classification shall be determined by
the normal usc of the building. When a normal-use space is designed to have an
emergency use as a fallout shelter in addition to the normal use, the most
restrictive requirements for all such uses shall be met.
(c) Occupancy Separation. No occupancy separation is required between
that portion designated as a fallout shelter and the remainder of the building.
(d) Space and Ventilation. A minimum of 10 square feet of net floor area shall
be provided per shelter occupant. Partitions, columns and area for storage of
federal shelter supplies also may be included in net area. A minimum of 65 cubic
feet of volume shall be provided per shelter occupant. A minimum of 3 cubic feet
of fresh air per minute per person shall be provided.
In addition, the shelter shall have a ventilating rate sufficient to maintain a daily
869
average effective temperature of not more than 82°F. for at least 90 percent of the
days of the year.
(e) Illumination. No special lighting levels are required.
(t) Hazards. Hazardous utility lines such as steam, gas and oil shall not be
\ocated in or near the shelter unless provision is made to control such lines by
valving or other approved means.
Exits
Sec. 5705. There shall be no fewer than two widely spaced exits from a fallout
shelter, leading directly to other spaces of the building or outdoors. Exits from the
fallout shelter shall aggregate at least one unit of egress width for every 200 shelter
occupants. In no case shall a single exit be Jess than 24 inches wide.
Flame-spread Index of Interior Surfaces
Sec. 5706. Interior surfaces of single-purpose fallout shelters shall have a
flame-spread index not exceeding 200.
Minimum Design Loads
Sec. 5707. (a) Dual-use Fallout Shelters. In the case of dual-use fallout
shelters, design live load required for the normal use shall govern, except that
concentrated loads shall be considered.
(b) Single-purpose Fallout Shelters. Minimum live loads for floor design in
single-purpose fallout shelters shall be 40 pounds per square foot except that
concentrated loads shall be considered.
Sanitation
Sec. 5708. Toilets, either flush-type operating from the normal water supply
system, or chemical or other types, shall be provided on the basis of one toilet per
50 fallout shelter occupants. Fifty percent of the toilets may be provided outside
the fallout shelter area. Empty water containers may be considered as fulfilling
this requirement.
870
Chapter70
EXCAVATION AND GRADING
Purpose
Sec. 7001. The purpose of this appendix is to safeguard life, limb, property and
the public welfare by regulating grading on private property.
Scope
Sec. 7002. This appendix sets forth rules and regulations to control excava-
tion, grading and earthwork construction, including fills and embankments;
establishes the administrative procedure for issuance of permits; and provides for
approval of plans and inspection of grading construction.
Permits Required
Sec. 7003. No person shall do any grading without first having obtained a
grading permit from the building official except for the following:
I . Grading in an isolated, self-contained area if there is no danger apparent to
private or public property.
2. An excavation below finished grade for basements and footings of a build-
ing, retaining wall or other structure authorized by a valid building permit. This
shall not exempt any fill made with the material from such excavation nor exempt
any excavation having an unsupported height greater than 5 feet after the comple-
tion of such structure.
3. Cemetery graves.
4. Refuse disposal sites controlled by other regulations.
5. Excavations for wells or tunnels or utilities.
6. Mining, quarrying, excavating, processing, stockpiling of rock, sand,
gravel, aggregate or clay where established and provided for by law, provided
such operations do not affect the lateral support or increase the stresses in or
pressure upon any adjacent or contiguous property.
7. Exploratory excavations under the direction of soil engineers or engineering
geologists.
8. An excavation which (a) is less than 2 feet in depth, or (b) which does not
create a cut slope greater than 5 feet in height and steeper than one and one-half
horizontal to one vertical.
9. A fill less than I foot in depth and placed on natural terrain with a slope
flatter than five horizontal to one vertical, or less than 3 feet in depth, not intended
to support structures, which does not exceed 50 cubic yards on any one lot and
docs not obstruct a drainage course.
Hazards
Sec. 7004. Whenever the building official determines that any existing exca-
vation or embankment or fill on private property has become a hazard to life and
limb, or endangers property, or adversely affects the safety, use or stability of a
public way or drainage channel, the owner of the property upon which the
excavation or fill is located, or other person or agent in control of said property,
871
upon receipt of notice in writing from the building official, shall within the period
specified therein repair or eliminate such excavation or embankment so as to
eliminate the hazard and be in conformance with the requirements of this code.
Definitions
Sec. 7005. For the purposes of this appendix the definitions listed hereunder
shall be construed as specified in this section.
APPROVAL shall mean the proposed work or completed work conforms to
this chapter in the opinion of the building official.
AS-GRADED is the extent of surface conditions on completion of grading.
BEDROCK is in-place solid rock.
BENCH is a relatively level step excavated into earth material on which fill is
to be placed.
BORROW is earth material acquired from an off-site location for use in
grading on a site.
CIVIL ENGINEER is a professional engineer registered in the state to prac-
tice in the field of civil works.
CIVIL ENGINEERING is the application of the knowledge of the forces of
nature, principles of mechanics and the properties of materials to the evaluation,
design and construction of civil works for the beneficial uses of mankind.
COMPACTION is the densification of a fill by mechanical means.
EARTH MATERIAL is any rock, natural soil or fill and/or any combination
thereof.
ENGINEERING GEOLOGIST is a geologist experienced and knowledge-
able in engineering geology.
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY is the application of geologic knowledge and
principles in the investigation and evaluation of naturally occurring rock and soil
for usc in the design of civil works.
EROSION is the wearing away of the ground surface as a result of the
movement of wind, water and/or ice.
EXCAVATION is the mechanical removal of earth material.
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial means.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. See Soils Engineer.
GRADE is the vertical location of the ground surface.
Existing Grade is the grade prior to grading.
Rough Grade is the stage at which the grade approximately conforms to the
approved plan.
Finish Grade is the final grade of the site which conforms to the approved
plan.
GRADING is any excavating or filling or combination thereof.
KEY is a designed compacted fill placed in a trench excavated in earth material
beneath the toe of a proposed fill slope.
872
SITE is any lot or parcel of land or contiguous combination thereof, under the
same ownership, where grading is performed or permitted.
SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of which is expressed as a
ratio of horizontal distance to vertical distance.
SOIL is naturally occurring superficial deposits overlying bed rock.
SOILS ENGINEER (GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER) is an engineer expe-
rienced and knowledgeable in the practice of soils engineering (geotechnical)
engineering.
SOILS ENGINEERING (GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING) is the ap-
plication of the principles of soils mechanics in the investigation, evaluation and
design of civil works involving the use of earth materials and the inspection and/or
testing of the construction thereof.
TERRACE is a relatively level step constructed in the face of a graded slope
surface for drainage and maintenance purposes.
Grading Permit Requirements

Sec. 7006. (a) Permits Required. Except as exempted in Section 7003 of
this code, no person shall do any grading without first obtaining a grading permit
from the building official. A separate permit shall be required for each site, and
may cover both excavations and fills.
(b) Application. The provisions of Section 302 (a) are applicable to grading
and in addition the application shall state the estimated quantities of work in-
volved.
(c) Plans and Specifications. When required by the building official, each
application for a grading permit shall be accompanied by two sets of plans and
specifications, and supporting data consisting of a soils engineering report and
engineering geology report. The plans and specifications shall be prepared and
signed by a civil engineer when required by the building official.
(d) Information on Plans and in Specifications. Plans shall be drawn to scale
upon substantial paper or cloth and shall be of sufficient clarity to indicate the
nature and extent of the work proposed and show in detail that they will conform
to the provisions of this code and all relevant laws, ordinances, rules and regula-
tions. The first sheet of each set of plans shall give the location of the work and the
name and address of the owner and the person by whom they were prepared.
The plans shall include the following information:
I. General vicinity of the proposed site.
2. Property limits and accurate contours of existing ground and details of
terrain and area drainage.
3. Limiting dimensions, elevations or finish contours to be achieved by the
grading, and proposed drainage channels and related construction.
4. Detailed plans of all surface and subsurface drainage devices, walls, crib-
bing, dams and other protective devices to be constructed with, or as a part of, the
proposed work together with a map showing the drainage area and the estimated
runoff of the area served by any drains.
873
5. Location of any buildings or structures on the property where the work is to

be performed and the location of any buildings or structures on land of adjacent
owners which are within 15 feet of the property or which may be affected by the
proposed grading operations.
Specifications shall contain information covering construction and material
requirements.
(ej Soils Engineering Report. The soils engineering report required by Sub-
section (c) shall include data regarding the nature, distribution and strength of
existing soils, conclusions and recommendations for grading procedures and
design criteria for corrective measures, including buttress fills, when necessary,
and opinions and recommendations covering adequacy of sites to be developed by
the proposed grading, including the stability of slopes.
Recommendations included in the report and approved by the building official
shall be incorporated in the grading plans or specifications.
(f) Engineering Geology Report. The engineering geology report required
by Subsection (c) shall include an adequate description ofthe geology of the site,
conclusions and recommendations regarding the effect of geologic conditions on
the proposed development, and opinions and recommendations covering the
adequacy of sites to be developed by the proposed grading.
Recommendations included in the report and approved by the building official
shall be incorporated in the grading plans or specifications.
(g) Issuance. The provisions of Section 303 are applicable to grading per-
mits. The building official may require that grading operations and project
designs be modified if delays occur which incur weather-generated problems not
considered at the time the permit was issued.
Grading Fees
Sec. 7007. (a) General. Fees shall be assessed in accordance with the provi-
sions of this section or shall be as set forth in the fee schedule adopted by the
jurisdiction.
(b) Plan Review Fees. When a plan or other data are required to be submitted, a
plan review fee shall be paid at the time of submitting plans and specifications for
review. Said plan review fee shall be as set forth in Table No. 70-A. Separate plan
review fees shall apply to retaining walls or major drainage structures as required
elsewhere in this code. For excavation and fill on the same site, the fee shall be
based on the volume of excavation or fill, whichever is greater.
(c) Grading Permit Fees. A fee for each grading permit shall be paid to the
building official as set forth in Table No. 70-B. Separate permits and fees shall
apply to retaining walls or major drainage structures as required elsewhere in this
code. There shall be no separate charge for standard terrace drains and similar
facilities.
874
TABLE NO. 70-A-GRADING PLAN REVIEW FEES1

50 cubic yards or less ................................................ No fee
5 l to 100 cubic yards ................................................ $15.00
JOJ to 1000 cubic yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.50
\001 to 10,000 cubic yards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.00
10,001 to 100,000 cubic yards-$30.00 for the first 10,000 cubic yards, plus $15.00 for
each additional\0,000 yards or fraction thereof.
each additional I 0,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
200,001 cubic yardsormore-$255.00forthe first 200,000cubic yards, plus $4.50 for each
additional I 0,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
Other Fees:
Additional plan review required by changes, additions
or revisions to approved plans ................................. $30.00 per hour*
(minimum charge-{)ne-half hour)
*Or the total hourly cost to the jurisdiction, whichever is the greatest. This cost shall include
supervision, overhead, equipment, hourly wages and fringe benefits of the employees
involved.
TABLE NO. 70-8-GRADING PERMIT FEES1

50 cubic yards or less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $15.00
51 to IOOcubicyards ................................................ 22.50
lO I to l 000 cubic yards-$22. 50 for the first I 00 cubic yards plus$ 10.50 for each additional
I00 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
1001 to 10,000 cubic yards-$117.00 for the first 1,000 cubic yards, plus $9.00 for each
additional I ,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
each additional 10,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
100,001 cubic yards or more-$562.50 for the first 100,000 cubic yards, plus $22.50 for
each additional 10,000 cubic yards or fraction thereof.
Other Inspections and Fees:
I. Inspections outside of normal business hours ................. $30.00 per hour2
(minimum charge-two hours)
2. Reinspection fees assessed under provisions of
Section 305 (g) ........................................ $30.00 per hour2
3. Inspections for which no fee is specifically indicated ........... $30.00 per hour2
(minimum charge-{)ne-half hour)
'The fee for a grading permit authorizing additional work to that under a valid permit shall be the
difference between the fee paid for the original permit and the fee shown for the entire project.
20rthe total hourly cost to the jurisdiction, whichever is the greatest. This cost shall include supervision,
overhead, equipment, hourly wages and fringe benefits of the employees involved.
875
Bonds
Sec. 7008. The building official may require bonds in such form and amounts
as may be deemed necessary to assure that the work, if not completed in accord-
ance with the approved plans and specifications, will be corrected to eliminate
hazardous conditions.
In lieu of a surety bond the applicant may file a cash bond or instrument of credit
with the building official in an amount equal to that which would be required in the
surety bond.
Cuts
Sec. 7009. (a) General. Unless otherwise recommended in the approved
soils engineering and/or engineering geology report, cuts shall conform to the
provisions of this section.
In the absence of an approved soils engineering report, these provisions may be
waived for minor cuts not intended to support structures.
(b) Slope. The slope of cut surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for the
intended use and shall be no steeper than 2 horizontal to I vertical unless the
owner furnishes a soils engineering or an engineering geology report, or both,
stating that the site has been investigated and giving an opinion that a cut at a
steeper slope will be stable and not create a hazard to public or private property.
(c) Drainage and Terracing. Drainage and terracing shall be provided as
required by Section 7012.
Fills
Sec. 7010. (a) General. Unless otherwise recommended in the approved
soils engineering report, fills shall conform to the provisions of this section.
In the absence of an approved soils engineering report these provisions may be
waived for minor fills not intended to support structures.
(b) Fill Location. Fill slopes shall not be constructed on natural slopes steeper
than two to one.
(c) Preparation of Ground. The ground surface shall be prepared to receive
fill by removing vegetation, noncomplying fill, topsoil and other unsuitable
materials scarifying to provide a bond with the new fill and, where slopes arc
steeper than five to one and the height is greater than 5 feet, by benching into
sound bedrock or other competent material as determined by the soils engineer.
The bench under the toe of a fill on a slope steeper than five to one shall be at least
I0 feet wide. The area beyond the toe of fill shall be sloped for sheet overflow or a
paved drain shall be provided. When fill is to be placed over a cut, the bench under
the toe of fill shall be at least I 0 feet wide but the cut shall be made before placing
the fill and acceptance by the soils engineer or engineering geologist or both as a
suitable foundation for fill.
(d) Fill Material. Detrimental amounts of organic material shall not be per-
mitted in fills. Except as permitted by the building official, no rock or similar
876
irreducible material with a maximum dimension greater than I 2 inches shall be

buried or placed in fills.
EXCEPTION: The building official may permit placement of larger rock when
the soils engineer properly devises a method of placement, continuously inspects its
placement and approves the fill stability. The following conditions shall also apply:
A. Prior to issuance of the grading permit, potential rock disposal areas shall be
delineated on the grading plan.
B. Rock sizes greater than 12 inches in maximum dimension shall be 10 feet or
more below grade, measured vertically.
C. Rocks shall be placed so as to assure filling of all voids with fines.
(e) Compaction. All fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 90 percent of

maximum density as determined by U.B.C. Standard No. 70-1. In-place density
shall be determined in accordance with U .B.C. Standard No. 70-2, 70-3, 70-4 or
70-5.
(f) Slope. The slope of fill surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for the
intended use. Fill slopes shall be no steeper than two horizontal to one vertical.
(g) Drainage and Terracing. Drainage and terracing shall be provided and the
area above fill slopes and the surfaces of terraces shall be graded and paved as
required by Section 70 I 2.
Setbacks
Sec. 7011. (a) General. Cut and fill slopes shall be set back from site bounda-
ries in accordance with this section. Setback dimensions shall be horizontal
distances measured perpendicular to the site boundary. Setback dimensions shall
be a shown in Figure No. 70-1.
(b) Thp of Cut Slope. The top of cut slopes shall be made not nearer to a site
boundary line than one fifth of the vertical height of cut with a minimum of 2 feet
and a maximum of I 0 feet. The setback may need to be increased for any required
interceptor drains.
(c) Toe of Fill Slope. The toe of fill slope shall be made not nearer to the site
boundary line than one-half the height of the slope with a minimum of 2 feet and a
maximum of 20 feet. Where a fill slope is to be located near the site boundary and
the adjacent off-site property is developed, special precautions shall be incorpo-
rated in the work as the building official deems necessary to protect the adjoining
property from damage as a result of such grading. These precautions may include
but are not limited to:
I. Additional setbacks.
2. Provision for retaining or slough walls.
3. Mechanical or chemical treatment of the fill slope surface to minimize
erosion.
4. Provisions for the control of surface waters.
(d) Modification of Slope Location. The building official may approve alter-
nate setbacks. The building official may require an investigation and recommen-
dation by a qualified engineer or engineering geologist to demonstrate that the
intent of this section has been satisfied.
877
Drainage and Terracing

Sec. 7012. (a) General. Unless otherwise indicated on the approved grading
plan, drainage facilities and terracing shall conform to the provisions of this
section for cut or fill slopes steeper than 3 horizontal to I vertical.
(b) Terrace. Terraces at least 6 feet in width shall be established at nor more
th:m 30-foot vertical intervals on all cut or fill slopes to control suriace onimage
and debris except that where only one terrace is required, it shall be at midheight.
For cut or fill slopes greater than 60 feet and up to 120 feet in vertical height, one
terrace at approximately midheight shall be 12 feet in width. Terrace widths and
spacing for cut and fill slopes greater than 120 feet in height shall be designed by
the civil engineer and approved by the building official. Suitable access shall be
provided to permit proper cleaning and maintenance.
Swales or ditches on terraces shall have a minimum gradient of 5 percent and
must be paved with reinforced concrete not less than 3 inches in thickness or an
approved equal paving. They shall have a minimum depth at the deepest point of 1
foot and a minimum paved width of 5 feet.
A single run of swale or ditch shall not collect runoff from a tributary area
exceeding 13,500 square feet (projected) without discharging into a down drain.
(c) Subsurface Drainage. Cut and fill slopes shall be provided with subsur-
face drainage as necessary for stability.
(d) Disposal. All drainage facilities shall be designed to carry waters to the
nearest practicable drainage way approved by the building official and/or other
appropriate jurisdiction as a safe place to deposit such waters. Erosion of ground
in the area of discharge shall be prevented by installation of nonerosive
downdrains or other devices.
Building pads shall have a drainage gradient of 2 percent toward approved
drainage facilities, unless waived by the building official.
EXCEPTION: The gradient from the building pad may be I percent if all of the
following conditions exist throughout the permit area:
A. No proposed fills are greater than 10 feet in maximum depth.
B. No proposed finish cut or fill slope faces have a vertical height in excess of I 0
feet.
C. No existing slope faces, which have a slope face steeperthan 10 horizontally to
I vertically, have a vertical height in excess of 10 feet.
(e) Interceptor Drains. Paved interceptor drains shall be installed along the
top of all cut slopes where the tributary drainage area above slopes towards the cut
and has a drainage path greater than 40 feet measured horizontally. Interceptor
drains shall be paved with a minimum of 3 inches of concrete or gunite and
reinforced. They shall have a minimum depth of 12 inches and a minimum paved
width of 30 inches measured horizontally across the drain. The slope of drain shall
be approved by the building official.
Erosion Control
Sec. 7013. (a) Slopes. The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and
maintained to control against erosion. This control may consist of effective
878
planting. The protection for the slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable and
prior to calling for final approval. Where cut slopes are not subject to erosion due
to the erosion-resistant character of the materials, such protection may be omitted.
(b) Other Devices. Where necessary, check dams, cribbing, riprap or other
devices or methods shall be employed to control erosion and provide safety.
Grading Inspection
Sec. 7014. (a) General. All grading operations for which a permit is required
shall be subject to inspection by the building official. When required by the
building official, special inspection of grading operations and special testing shall
be performed in accordance with the provisions of Section 306 and Subsection
7014 (c).
(b) Grading Designation. All grading in excess of 5000 cubic yards shall be
performed in accordance with the approved grading plan prepared by a civil
engineer, and shall be designated as "engineered grading." Grading involving
less than 5000 cubic yards shall be designated "regular grading" unless the
permittee, with the approval of the building official, chooses to have the grading
performed as "engineered grading."
(c) Engineered Grading Requirements. For engineered grading, it shall be
the responsibility of the civil engineer who prepares the approved grading plan to
incorporate all recommendations from the soils engineering and engineering
geology reports into the grading plan. He also shall be responsible for the
professional inspection and approval of the grading within his area of technical
specialty. This responsibility shall include, but need not be limited to, inspection
and approval as to the establishment of line, grade and drainage of the develop-
ment area. The civil engineer shall act as the coordinating agent in the event the
need arises for liaison between the other professionals, the contractor and the
building official. The civil engineer also shall be responsible for the preparation
of revised plans and the submission of as-graded grading plans upon completion
of the work. The grading contractor shall submit in a form prescribed by the
building official a statement of compliance to said as-built plan.
Soils engineering and engineering geology reports shall be required as speci-
fied in Section 7006. During grading all necessary reports, compaction data and
soil engineering and engineering geology recommendations shall be submitted to
the civil engineer and the building official by the soils engineer and the engineer-
ing geologist.
The soils engineer's area of responsibility shall include, but need not be limited
to, the professional inspection and approval concerning the preparation of ground
to receive fills, testing for required compaction, stability of all finish slopes and
the design of buttress fills, where required, incorporating data supplied by the
engineering geologist.
The engineering geologist's area of responsibility shall include, but need not be
limited to, professional inspection and approval of the adequacy of natural ground
for receiving fills and the stability of cut slopes with respect to geological matters
and the need for subdrains or other groundwater drainage devices. He shall report
his findings to the soils engineer and the civil engineer for engineering analysis.
879
The building official shall inspect the project at the various stages of the work
requiring approval to determine that adequate control is being exercised by the
professional consultants.
(d) Regular Grading Requirements. The building official may require in-
spection and testing by an approved testing agency.
The testing agency's responsibility shall include, but need not be limited to,
approval concerning the inspection of cleared areas and benches to receive fill,
and the compaction of fills.
When the building official has cause to believe that geologic factors may be
involved the grading operation will be required to conform to "engineered
grading" requirements.
(e) Notification of Noncompliance. If, in the course of fulfilling his responsi-
bility under this chapter, the civil engineer, the soils engineer, the engineering
geologist or the testing agency finds that the work is not being done in conform-
ance with this chapter or the approved grading plans, the discrepancies shall be
reported immediately in writing to the person in charge of the grading work and to
the building official. Recommendations for corrective measures, if necessary,
shall be submitted.
(f) Transfer of Responsibility for Approval. If the civil engineer, the soils
engineer, the engineering geologist or the testing agency of record is changed
during the course of the work, the work shall be stopped until the replacement has
agreed to accept the responsibility within the area of his technical competence for
approval upon completion of the work.
Completion of Work
Sec. 7015. (a) Final Reports. Upon completion of the rough grading work
and at the final completion of the work the building official may require the
following reports and drawings and supplements thereto:
I . An as-graded grading plan prepared by the civil engineer including original
ground surface elevations, as-graded ground surface elevations, lot drainage
patterns and locations and elevations of all surface and subsurface drainage
facilities. He shall state that to the best of his knowledge the work was done in
accordance with the final approved grading plan.
2. A soils-grading report prepared by the soils engineer, including locations
and elevations of field density tests, summaries of field and laboratory tests and
other substantiating data and comments on any changes made during grading and
their effect on the recommendations made in the soils engineering investigation
report. He shall render a finding as to the adequacy of the site for the intended use.
3. A geologic grading report prepared by the engineering geologist, including
a final description of the geology of the site and any new information disclosed
during the grading and the effect of same on recommendations incorporated in the
approved grading plan. He shall render a finding as to the adequacy of the site for
the intended use as affected by geologic factors.
(b) Notification of Completion. The permittee or his agent shall notify the
building official when the grading operation is ready for final inspection. Final
approval shall not be given until all work, including installation of all drainage
880
facilities and their protective devices, and all erosion-control measures have been
completed in accordance with the final approved grading plan and the required
reports have been submitted.
PA*
I
I
H/2 but2' min.

and 20' max.
To<
Slope
*Permit Area Boundary
Figure No. 70·1
881
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES
Sl SYMBOLS AND PREFIXES

BASE UNITS
Quantity Unit Symbol
Length Meter m
Mass Kilogram kg
Time Second s
Electric current Ampere A
Thermodynamic temperature Kelvin K
Amount of substance Mole mol
Luminous intensity Candela cd
51 SUPPLEMENTARY UNITS
Quantity Unit Symbol
Plane angle Radian rad
Solid angle Steradian sr
51 PREFIXES
Multiplication Factor Prefix Symbol
I 000 000 000 000 000 000 = 101s ex a E
I 000 000 000 000 000 = 10 1' pet a p
I 000 000 000 000 = 1012 tera T
t ooo ooo ooo = to• gig a G
I 000 000 = 1()6 mega M
I 000 = !03 kilo k
100 = 102 hecto h
10 = 101 deka da
0.1 = 10·1 deci d
0.01 = 10·2 centi c
0.001 = 10·3 milli m
0.000 001 = 10·• micro fJ.
0.000000001 = to·• nano n
0.000 000 ()()() 001 = 10·12 pi co p
0. 000 000 000 000 00 I = 10· 1' femto f
0. 000 000 000 000 000 00 I = 10·" alto a
882
1988 EDITION UNIT CONVERSION TABLES
Sl SYMBOLS AND PREFIXE5-(Contlnued)

Sl DERIVED UNIT WITH SPECIAL NAMES
Quantity Unit Symbol Formula
Frequency (of a periodic phenomenon) hertz Hz lis
fotcc newton N kg•mis2
Pressure, stress pascal Pa N/m 2
Energy, work, quantity of heat joule J Nom
Power, radiant flux watt w J/s
Quantity of electricity, electric charge coulomb c A•s
Electric potential, potential difference,
electromotive force volt v WIA
Capacitance farad F C!V
Electric resistance ohm n ViA
Conductance siemens s A!V
Magnetic flux weber Wb Vos
Magnetic flux density testa T Wbfm2
Inductance henry H Wb/A
Luminous flux lumen lm cd•sr
Illuminance lux lx lm/m 2
Activity (of radionuclides) becquerel Bq lis
Absorbed dose gray Gy J/kg
CONVERSION FACTORS
To convert to multiply by
LENGTH
I mile (U.S. statute) km 1.609 344
I yd m 0.9144
I ft m 0.3048
mm 304.8
I in mm 25.4
AREA
I mile2 (U.S. statute) km 2 2.589 99
I acre (U.S. survey) ha 0.404 687
mz 4046.87
I yd 2 m2 0.836 127
I ft 2 m2 0.092 903
I in 2 mm 2 645.16
VOLUME, MODULUS OF SECTION
I acre ft m' 1233.49
I yd 3 m' 0.764 555
100 board ft m' 0.235 974
I ft 3 m' 0.0283168
L(dm 3) 28.3168
I in 3 mm 3 16 387.1
mL(cm 3) 16.3871
I barrel (42 U.S. gallons) m' .158 987
(Continued)
883
UNIT CONVERSION TABLES UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
CONVERSION FACTORS-(Contlnued)
(FLUID) CAPACITY
I gal (U.S. liquid)** L* 3.785 41
I qt(U.S. liquid) mL 946.353
I.ot(U.S.liquid) mL 473.177
I f1 oz (U.S.) mL 29.5735
I gal (U.S. liquid) m' 0.003 785
**I gallon (UK) approx. 1.2 gal (U.S.)
*I liter approx. 0.001 cubic meters
SECOND MOMENT OF AREA
I in 4 mm4 416 231
m• 0.416 231 X )Q-6
PLANE ANGLE
1° (degree) rad 0.017 453 3
mrad 17.4533
I' (minute) urad 290.888
I" (second) urad 4.848 14
VELOCITY, SPEED
I ft/s m/s 0.3048
I mile/h km/h 1.609 344
m/s 0.447 04
VOLUME RATE OF FLOW
l ft'is m 3/s 0.028 316 8
l ft 3/min Lis 0.471 947
l gal/min Lis 0.063 090 2
I gal/min m 3/min 0.0038
l gal/h mL!s 1.051 50
I million galld Lis 43.8126
I acre fils m1/s 1233.49
TEMPERATURE INTERVAL
[of °CorK 0.555 556
5/9°C = 519 K
EQUIVALENTTEMPERATURE(t 00 = Tk-273.15)
tnF 915 t,, + 32

MASS
l ton (short***) metric ton 0.907 185
kg 907.185
llb kg 0.453 592
I oz g 28.3495
***I long ton (2240 lb) kg 1016.05
MASS PER UNIT AREA
I lbift' kg/m 2 4.882 43

l oz/yd 2 g/m 2 33.9057
I oz/ft 2 g/m 2 305.152
884
1988 EDITION UNIT CONVERSION TABLES
CONVERSION FACTOR5-(Contlnued)
DENSITY (MASS PER UNIT VOLUME)
I lbift' kg/m 3 16.0185
llb/yd 3 kg/m 3 0.593 276
I ton/yeP Um 3 1.186 55
FORCE
I tonf (ton-force) kN 8.896 44
I kip ( 1000 lbf) kN 4.448 22
I lbf (pound-force) N 4.448 22
MOMENT OF FORCE, TORQUE
I lbfoft Nom 1.355 82
I lbfoin Nom 0.112985
I tonfoft kNom 2.711 64
I kipoft kNom 1.355 82
FORCE PER UNIT LENGTH
I lbfift N/m 14.5939
I lbfiin N/m 175.127
I tonfift kN/m 29.187 8
PRESSURE, STRESS, MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (FORCE PER UNIT AREA) (1 Pa = 1 N/m2)
I tonf/in2 MPa 13.7895
I tonfift2 kPa 95.7605
I kip/in2 MPa 6.894 76
llbf/in2 kPa 6.894 76
llbfift 2 Pa 47.8803
Atmosphere kPa 101.3250
I inch mercury kPa 3.376 85
I foot (water column at 32°F.) kPa 2.988 98
WORK, ENERGY, HEAT (1J = 1N-m = 1W-s)
I kWh (550 ftolbf/s) Mj 3.6
I Btu (Int. Table) kJ 1.055 06
J 1055.06
I ftolbf J 1.355 82
COEFFICIENT OF HEAT TRANSFER
I Btu/(ft2oho°F) W/(m 2oK) 5.678 26
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
I Btui(ftoho°F) W/(moK) 1.730 73
ILLUMINANCE
I lmfft2 (footcandle) lx (lux) 10.7639
LUMINANCE
I cd/ft2 cdfm2 10.7639
I foot lambert cd/m 2 3.426 26
I lambert kcd/m 2 3.183 01
885
INDEX UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
INDEX
For Index by parts, chapters and sections, see pages vii to xx
A
Section
A-OCCUPANCIES ......... . ChapterS
ACCESS (see also HANDICAPPED)
To attic. .. .. 3205 (a)
To building . . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. ................. 3301 (e)
To residential building .. 1214
To roof.. . ... . .. .. 3306 (o)
To toilet lacilities ..... . . .... 511 (a)
To under·floor areas ... . .. . 2516 (c) 2
ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEMS . 2304 (d), Tables Nos. 23-A and 23-P
ACCESSORY BUILDINGS 1101
ADDITIONS, to buildings. .. 104
ADHERED VENEER .. 3002, 3004 (b), 3005
ADHESIVES, glued construction .. ... 2511,2512,2517(e)
ADJOINING BUILDINGS (see also LOCATION ON PROPERTY)
Foundation to be protected . . . . . . . ........... . .. .. 2903 (b)
Wall protection ... .. ... 504(c)
ADMINISTRATIVE (see Part I) . . . . Chapters 1 , 2 and 3
ADMIXTURE. . ........ 2403 (e), 2602, 2603 (g)
ADOBE CONSTRUCTION . . .. 2407 (i) 6
AGED, HOMES FOR .. . ........... Chapter 10, Table No. 33-A
AGGREGATES
Concrete. . . 2603 (d)
Definition ..... . .. ... 2602
Rre-resistive construction .. . .4302 (d)
Masonry, mortar and grout ..... . . 2402 (b) 1
Proportions in concrete ..... . .. .. 2604 (c)
Storage of. .. 2603 (h)
AGRICULTURAL BUILDINGS
Definition of ......... . .. .. .. ......... 402
General.. . .............. . . Chapter 11, Appendix Chapter 11
AIR-CONDITIONED BUILDINGS ............ . .. ....... 3310(a)
AIRCRAFT HANGARS
Areas allowed 505, 506 (a) 3
Classified ..... . .... 701,901
Exterior walls. .. .... 702,902
Floors. . ... 702 (b), 902 (b)
Height... .. . .. ............ 507
Ventilating equipment ................. . . 705,905
AIRSPACE
Around timber in masonry . ........ 2516(c)
AISLES .. ......... 3315
ALARM VALVE, AUTOMATIC FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS . ... .. 3803
ALLEY
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . . 402
Projection into . . . .. .. . .. .. . . ....... 4502
Temporary use .. .. .. .. ................................. 4402
ALLOWABLE WORKING STRESSES (see WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE)
886
1988 EDITION INDEX
ALTERATION
Definition . . . . . ............ . . .... 402
General .......... . . . 104,502
To historic buildings . .. .. 104(f)
ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
Board of Appeals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................... . .. . 204
May be approved by building official ..................................... . .. .... 105
Suitability of . . . . ............ . ......... . .. .... 204
Tests required . . .............................. . .. ...... 107
ALUMINUM . .. . .. .............................................. Chapter 28
Allowable stresses . ............ . . . . 2802
Alloys .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. 2801 (b)
Bolts .. .. .. .. .. . .. ....................... 2802 (c)
Connections.. . . ........................ . ... 2803 (d)
Design .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 2803
~=······· ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~~~
Fasteners .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . ............. 2802,2804 (b
Identification . . . . . . ............ . ................................... 2801 (d
Materials, dissimilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. 2804 (c
Painting . . . . . ................. 2 8 0 4 ((de)
. ..............................................................
Rivets................................. 280 2 l
Stresses, allowable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... 2802
Structural roofing and siding . . . ............... 2803 (c)
Welding. . . 2802 (b) and (d), 2804 (e)
AMUSEMENT PARK STRUCTURES .......... 601, 602 (c), 604 (b)

ANCHORAGE
Chimneys ............. . . .............. 3704 (c)
Concrete or masonry walls .. 2310,2312 (h) 2 H, 2407 (b) and (e),
2409 (e) 3 and 4, 2614 (c), 2625 (g)
General ....................... .. ........ 2303 (b), 2310
Masonry construction . .... . .. ..... 2407(e)
Nonbearing masonry partitions. .. .................. 2407 (c)
Steel in reinforced concrete . . .. ..................... 2607(b)
ANCHORS
Concrete .... .. ............................... 2624
Foundation sills .. . .. ......... 2907(f)
Masonry construction ... . .. .... 2407 (b) and (e)
Reinforcing in concrete ....... . .. ...... 2607 (b)
Veneer, attachment . . Chapter30
Wood columns. . . . . ....... . .. 2510
Wood framing .................. . .. .......................... 2510(e)
ANTENNAE, radio and television ...................... . . .. 507, Table No. 23-H, 3602
APARTMENT HOUSE
Classed as. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Fire-extinguishing system . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. 3802 (h)
Unit separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 (b)
APPEALS, BOARD OF . . .. .. 204

APPENDIX, REFERENCE TO . 103
APPLIANCES (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Chimneys ................. . 3703
High-heat. . 3702
Low-heat ..... .. ...... 3702
Medium-heat. . . . . .......................... . 3702
APPLICATION
For permit, details required ........................................... 302, Appendix 7006 (b)
Group H Occupancies .. . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. ....... 901 (a)
Of code to buildings or structures .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. 103, 104
To changed use or occupancy . . . . . .................. 307 (b), 502
To existing buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, Appendix Chapter 1
APPROVAL
After called inspection. . .......... . ... 305 (a) and (d)
Final... .. ................ . . ........................... 305 (b) and (d)
Use of streets and alleys . .. .... 4402
For use of plastic materials . ..... 5201 (b)
Of fabricators . . . ..... . ...... 306(g)
Of Federal Aviation Agency . .. .. .. .. .. . . 710(e)
Of fire chief . . . .. 3801 (b)
887
Of new materials ... 105

Of plans for permit. . . ....... 303(a)
Of special inspector .... 306(b)
Required .. . ... 305(d)
APPROVED, definition .. . .. 402
"PP!'IOVED "GENCY
Cert1l1es prefabricated assembly ...... . . ......... 5006 (b) and (c)
Definition . . ............ . ........... . . 402
APPROVED FABRICATOR (see also FABRICATOR)
Definition ...................... . . ...... 402
Special inspection. . .................... . . .. 306(g)
ARCHITECTURAL PROJECTIONS ..... 1710,4504
ARC WELDS (see WELDING)
AREA
Allowable (see also OCCUPANCY and TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) . . . ...... 505
Floor, definition . . . . . . . . . ........... ........... . . . . . . . 407
For plastics used structurally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. 3007. Chapter 52
Increase allowable .. .. . . . . . . .. . .... 506
Limitations of exterior glass.. . ..................... 5403
Separation of..... .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. ................. 505 (e), 702,802, 1102
Separation walls . . . . . .............. .... .... .. . . . .. . ... . 505 (e!
~~~~~t~~mitations.. . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . ...· . . . .. .. . . 3006 (b) ~3~ !g)
ASPHALT
In roof coverings . .... 3208, Tables Nos. 32-F and G
ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS
Areas allowed . ... 505,602
Classified ............. . . 601
Definition . . ......... . .. ... 402
Exils, special requiremenls . . 3317,3318
Exterior walls . . .......... . .. ......... 603
Requirements. . . . . . . . . .............. . .. .. ChapterS
Type of construction . .. ............... . 602 (a) and (b)
ATRIUM
Definition ..... 402
Requirements 1715
ATTIC
Access 3205 (a)
Separation . . ....... 2516(f)
Ventilation .. .. ..... 3205 (c)
AUDITORIUMS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
AUTOMATIC FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (see FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS)
AVIATION CONTROL TOWERS .... ....... Appendix Chapter 7

AWNINGS
Definition .... ....... 4506
Fixed, regulations .. .. .. 4506
Movable, regulations .. ........... 4506
Of plastic materials ..... ... 5211
8
8--0CCUPANCIES .. Chapter?
BALCONY
Assembly, definition .. .. 403
Exits .. . 3317(c)
Exterior exit . ............ . . .. 3301 (b), 3305
For smokeproof enclosures . 3305,3310
May project over public property .. .... 4504
Prolection against decay and termites .... .... 2516(c)
Waterproofing . 1707(c)
BARBECUES. . ......... Chapter37
888
1988 EDITION INDEX
BARRICADES, construction Chapter44

BARS
For concrete reinforcing (see REINFORCED CONCRETE)
Panic (see PANIC HARDWARE)
BASEMENT
Definition .......... . 403
Enclosure .. . 1703
Pipe inlets. . .......... . . Appendix 3807
Protection of ceiling . . . . . . . ... 1703
Smoke detector required, residential. 1210 (a)
Sprinklers, when required ....... . 3802 (b)
BASE PLATE (see FOUNDATION PLATES)
BATHROOM
Required ....... . 1205 (b), 1208
BEAMS
Construction details .... . . 2106 (g)
Reinforced concrete .. . . ........................ 2608. 2609. 2610.2611
Reinforced masonry ... . . 2409
Span, wood .. ........... . ............... 2506 (a)
Steel. ..................... . . ..................... 2702, 2707
T-beams of reinforced concrete .. 2608 (k)
Wood.. .. ................ .. . ..... 2506,2511
Wood in heavy-timber construction .. 2106
BEARING
For wood beams and girders . . 2506 (f). 2517 (c)
For wood joists. . 2517 (d)
BEARING PARTITIONS (see WALLS)

BEARING WALL SYSTEM . ... 2312(a)
BEARING WALLS (see WALLS)
BENDING MOMENTS (see REINFORCED CONCRETE)
BLEACHERS (see also REVIEWING STANDS)
Definition . . . . . . . . ......... . 3323 (b)
Folding and telescoping. 3324
General requirements . . 3323 (e)
Open-air ........ . 3323 (g)
Within buildings .. . 3323 (f)
BLOCKING
For floor joists ..... .. . 2517 (d)
For roof rafters, etc. . 2517 (h)
BLOCKS, CONCRETE (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)

BOARD OF APPEALS
General. ............................ . 204
Limitation of authority .... . . . 204 (b)
BOILER (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Definition .................. . 403
Room lor (see BOILER ROOM)
BOILER ROOM
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 403
Exits, special requirements. . . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 3322
For occupancy groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... "08" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1213
BOLTS
For foundations ... 2907(1)
In aluminum .. .......... 2802 (c)
In masonry .... . ............. 2406 (h), 2407 (i) 4 and (1) 6 B,
2409 (b), Tables Nos. 24-D-1, 24-D-2 and 24-E
In reinforced concrete .... 2624
In steel construction ............ 2712, 2713, 2719
In wood construction .. . 2510
BOND
For concrete ..... . . 2612
For veneer ...... . . 3002,3004
Reinforcements. 2409 (b) 5 B. 2612
889
BRACED FRAME .... . .......................................... 2312 (a), 2721,2722

BRACING
For loundation studs ....... .
For reinlorced concrete lorms ..
For stud walls and partitions
••••••••••••••••••••••••• :•• :••••• ::•••••••••• : ~~6~ !~l
......................... . ............ 2517(g)
BRICK (see MASONRY)
BRICK, SAND-LIME .. . .. 2402 (b)
BRIDGING
R>r concrete joists. . .... 2610(e)
For wood joists . . . 2506 (h), 2517 (d)
For wood walls. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. 2517(g)
BUILDING CODE
Application. 103,104
Enlorced. 202
Purpose. 102
Scope .. 103
Title ...... 101
BUILDING MATERIALS
May be stored .......... . .. .......................................... 4403
BUILDING OFFICIAL
Approvals required. . ................... 303 (a), 305 (d)
Approves special inspector . . . ........ 306
Approves structurallrame.. . . . . .. 305 (e), 4701 (b)
Classilies building occupancy. . ................. . ...... 501
Completion ol work reports . . ............. . .... Appendix 7015
Cooperation ol other ollicials ...................... 202 (g)
Delinition . . . . . ....................................... 403
Deputies .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 202 (bl
Excavation report . . . ....................................... 2903 (a
Rll report . . . . . . . . . . .... ......................... . .............. 2903 (a
Grading operations inspection . . . ...................................... Appendix 7014
Granting modilications. . ............................. 106
Issues permit. ................................................ 303
Liability . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. ......................... 202 (I), 305 (a)
May approve alternate materials and methods ol construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
May enter premises. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. 202 (c)
May order occupancy ol building discontinued ............................................... 202 (e)
May require bonds ............................................................... Appendix 7008
May require plans by licensed engineer or architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 (b)
. .. .:.·. :.·:. : : . . : : . . . .: :.·:. . ~~~: . ~ ~ (~~-.:~8~ lgl

May require special inspector . . ......................................................... 306
~~:~tr!~~~~ir~:~
2 0
Powers and duties.. ........................... 202

Retention ol plans. . . . . . .............................................. 303 (b)
Shall make inspections . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 305
Shall require reports . . . . ......................... 306 (c)
BUILDING OFFICIAL'S AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
Belore changing plans . . . ................. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. 303(a)
For changes ol use or occupancy ..... . .. .................. 104 (c), 307 (b), 502
For structural alterations ................ . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. 303
BUILDING PERMITS
Expiration . 303(d)
Fees ... .. . 304
Issuance. . ................ . . 303(a)
Suspension or revocation .. . 303(e)
Validity ..... . .. ..... 303(c)
When required . .. 301, Appendix 7003
BUILDINGS
Air-conditioned .. ..... 3310(8)
Areas allowable ................ . .. .. .. .. .. 505
ChanQe in use ................... . 104 (c). 307 (b), 502
Class1lied by type ol construction .. .. .. 1701
Classilied by use or occupancy ..... .. .. 501,503
Delinition ..... . .. .. .. . 403
Drainage, around .. . .. 2905 (1), 2907 (d) 5
Ener~y conservation in . . ....... Appendix Chapter 53
Existing ........... . . 104, 403, Appendix Chapter 1
Height, definition. .. .... 409
890
1988 EDITION INDEX
Heights allowable ...................................................... . . ...... 507

Historic............... . 104(1)
Location on same property .. . . .................................... 504(c)
Membrane structures .......................... . . .................... Appendix Chapter 55
Moving.......... . .................... . .. ......... 104 (e), 301 (a)
Nonconforming. . ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, Appendix Chapter 1
Site................ . .......... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .... 2516(b)
Temporary............. . ............... . 104(e)
To be condemned . . . . . . . ......... . .. .. 203
To be occupied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . .. ... 307
To conform to code.. . . . . . . . . . ...................... . 103,104
Two or more on same property ............................................. . . .. 504(c)
Unsafe.................................... . .......... . .. .... 203
Unsafe appendages to. . . . . . . . . . . . .................................... . .. .... 203
c
CANOPIES, CONSTRUCTION ..... . .. 702 (b), 4505,4506,5213
CARPETING (see TEXTILE WALL COVERINGS)
CARPETING ON CEILINGS . ... 4204 (b)
CARPORT
Classification. 1101
Separation .... . . 503(a)
CAISSONS .. .. 2908 (b), 503 (a)
CAST STONE. 404, 2402 (b) 6
CAVITY WALL MASONRY ... 2407 (b) and (e)
CEILING
Corridors. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 3305 (c) and (g)
Design load . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. ............. 2304
Dropped.................. .. .................... 1207,2516 (1), 4203, 4303 (b), 4305 (d), 4704
Rre-resistive required, basements.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 1703
For lire-protection purposes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4303 (b), 4305
Framing .............................................................................. 2517 (h)
Insulation . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 1713
Minimum height of dwelling............................................ .. .............. 1207 (a)
Minimum height of garages........ ........... . 702 (b), 709 (d), 1102 (c)
Minimumheightofmezzanines.... 1716
Minimum height of projection rooms ................ . ....... 4002
Panels.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. 4305 (d)
Suspended, acoustical systems tor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 4701 (e), 4704
CEMENT, PORTLAND (see PORTLAND CEMENT)
CENTRAL HEATING PLANT
Definition ............. . .. 404
For occupancy groups "08" sections of Chapters 6-10, 1213
CERTIFICATE
Of Approval ................... . . .... 5006(b)
Of Inspection ................................... . .. . 2505
Of Occupancy, atria ............................. . 1715(i)
Of Occupancy, tor change of use ................ . 307,502
Of Occupancy, for high-rise buildings .................. . 1807(b)
Cll Occupancy, issued to owner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. . .. ... 307
Of Occupancy, revocation .......................................... . .. ....... 307(1)
Of registration of fabricator ........... . . . 306(g)
Posting of ................... . .. ... 307(e)
Temporary .................. . . . 307(d)
CHANGE OF OCCUPANCY, certificate required ......... . . .. 307,502
CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT
Approval required of fire-extinguishing systems . . . 3801 (b)
Definition ................................. . .. ..... 404
CHILDREN, homes lor ............... . .. Chapter 10
CHIMNEYS (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Anchorage.... . ......... . . ......... 3704 (c)
Classification ....................................... . . .. 3702
891
Definition 3702
Design. . . 3703,3704
Factory-built. . . . . .. . 3705
Rrestopping around. 2516 (f), 3707 (m)
For fireplaces. . . ......... . . .... 3707
General requirements 3703
Height above roof. 3703(f)
Inlets 3704 (g)
Metal. . 3706
Of masonry .. 3704
Reinforcing for masonry ............. . . .. 3704 (c)
Seismic anchorage for masonry . . .. 3704 (c)
Wood frame, spaced from ... 3703 (c)
CHURCHES (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
CHUTES
Clothes .............. . 1209,1706
Refuse. . .. 1706
Automatic fire-extinguishing system , . 3802 (b)
CITY (see JURISDICTION)
CLASSIFICATION
Of buildings, by occupancy ........... . . ..... Chapters
Of buildinQs •. by types of construction .. Chapter 17
Of flre-res1st1ve construction. . ..... . Chapter43
Of occupancies. . . . . . . . ................. . . .. 501,503
Of types of construction .... 1701
CLAY ROOF TILE
Application of. . ..... 3208 (b)
Materials. 3208 (a)
CLEAN OUT
For chimney ..
For masonry.
CLEARANCE (see also CEILING, Minimum height; and HEADROOM)
Around chimneys, combustible materials .. 3703 (c), 3707 (h)
Around fireplaces, combustible materials. 3707 (h)
Around reinforcing in concrete 2607 (h)
Around timber in masonry ..... . .. 2516(c)
Between marquee and curb line .. 4505 (b)
For swelling of heavy-timber floors. . . 2106(e)
Of balconies above grade .. 4504
Of wood above grade ......... . . ...... 2516(c)
Of wood framing from chimneys .. 3703 (c), 3707 (h)
Under first floor joists ......... . 2516 (C)
CLUBS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
COLD STORAGE .... 701
COLUMN CAPITAL
Concrete. 2613(b)
COLUMNS
Composite. 2610(0)
Definition, concrete .. . .... 2602
Are-protection. . 4303
Heavy timber .. . ..... 2106(b)
Masonry. 2408 (b), 2409 (b)
Mill construction ......... . 2106
Reinforced concrete, design. . ... Chapter26
Round, footings supporting . 2615(d)
Steel pipe filled . . 2610(o)
Structural steel, allowable stresses 2702
Wood, allowable stresses . . ......... 2504
Wood, design 2507,2508
COMBINED STRESSES
Aluminum, design .. . . . 2803
Concrete, design .. . 2609
General requirements . . 2303(f)
Masonry, design . . ... 2406 (e)
Steel, design. Chapter27
Wood, design ..... . 2508
COMBUSTIBLE GOODS, sales and storage (see GROUP B, Divisions 1, 2 and 3)
892
1988 EDITION INDEX
COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS
Regulated in types of construction. . ... 1705
COMPLIANCE
Determined by inspection .. 305(a)
With code. 103
COMPOSITION ROOFINGS . . .. 3208

COMPRESSED GASES ... . 512
COMPUTATIONS, required ... . . ...... 302(b)
CONCENTRATED LOADS
Assumed distribution on walls . ... 2406 (c), 2407 (c), 2409 (b), 2614 (c)
Special requirements for 2304 (c)
CONCRETE
Blocks of (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)
Bolts in .......................... . 2624
Bracing offorms ................. . 2606 (a)
Combined with wood ................ . 2515
Compressive strength, definition ......... . 2602
Compressive strength, shown on drawings 2604 (b)
Conduits. .. ......... . 2606 (c)
Construction joints .. 2606 (d)
Conveying . . .. 2605 (c)
Curing. ....... 2605 (e)
Definition .. .... 2602
Depositing .... ..... 2605 (d)
Design, general .. Chapter26
Determining proportions . .. 2604 (c)
Exposed to freezing ...................... . 2605(f)
Rre-resistive classification (see Chapter 43) .. .... 4302 (d), 4303
Footings. .. .. .. .. .. . 2615
Forms .......... . .. ..... 2606
Forroof tile ....... . 3202, 3204 (a), 3208
General ............... . . .. 2601
Inspection .......... . 305,306
Jacking force, defined 2602
Materials .... 2603
Members carrying . .. .. .. .. . 1708
Minimum strength .. .. ............ 2609 (b), (c), (d) and (e)
Mix design . 2604
Mixing. . .. 2605 (b)
Pedestal, definition. .. .. .. .. 2602
Piles .......... . 2909 (b), (c), (d), (e) and (g)
Pipes in. 2606 (c)
Placing ... 2605 (d)
Plain concrete .... 2602,2622
Precast concrete. 2616
Prestressed concrete . .. . 2618
Proportions ................. . 2604 (c)
Quality ................................. . .. .... 2604
Reinforced (see REINFORCED CONCRETE)
Residential concrete exposed to freezing and thawing, protection of. ... Appendix Chapter 26
Shotcrete............... . ......... . . . 2621, 4302 (e)
Slabs on grade, minimum thickness . 2623
Special inspection . ...... . 306
Structural lightweight, definition ..... .. .... 2602
Tests ................. . ........... 2604 (d), 2604 (h)
Transporting and placing ............. . 2605 (b), (c) and (d)
Unreinforced (see CONCRETE, Plain)
Walls .. . .... 2611 (k), 2614, 2622, 2625 (f)
Water·cement ratio .. ........ 2604(e)
Weather requirements . .. .. . .. .. . . . . 2605 (f) and (g)
CONCRETE BLOCKS . . 2402 (b) 5

CONDEMNATION .......... . 203
CONNECTIONS
Bolted.. .. ...... 2510 (b), 2624, 2907 (f)
For prefabricated assemblies .. .. .......... 5004
For structural steel ..... 2712, 2714, 2721 (i)
2510,2516 (j)
~~~~~i~:~~a ~e~d~d. ·a~~mir;um ·.- .· 2802
893
CONSTRUCTION
Rre-resistive substitution. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. 508
For occupancies (see OCCUPANCY)
For types of (see TYPES OF CONSlRUCTION)
lights required ........................................................................... 4401
Temporary use of streets allowed during ...................................................... 4402
CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION ........... . .. ................................. 302 (c)
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
In concrete. . ............. . " " . " " " " " .. 2606 (d)
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
Allowed in streets ............... . " " . " 4402, 4403
CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION .. .................................. . " " " " " " 306(f)
CONTROL AREA
Definition .... " " " 404
CONVENTS .. " " " " 1201
CORBELING
Of masonry walls ....... . . . 2408(e)
CORNICES (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION).............................. 1710,4504
CORRIDORS
As required exits.. .. .. .. . ............................................ 3305
Elevator lobby separation . . . . . . . ..................... . ......... 3305 (h)
In Group E Occupancies . . . . . ..................................................... 3319
In Group H Occupancies. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. 911 (c), 3320
:~~~~~~~~~¥F;~;~ies:: .. :: .. : .. :: .. :::: .. ::::::::: .. ::::::: .. ::::::::::::::::::::::: .. ::::::: . 170353~\
Separation of corridors in Group A, Division 1 Occupancies . . . ........... 1209
CORROSION RESISTANT
Definition ........... . " " " 3003, 3202
Fasteners ............... . . ... Chapter 32 Tables
Roofing/Flashing .. ""'""""" .. 3208
CORROSIVE
Definition ......... . ". 404
COST (see also VALUATION)
Of permits.. .. ........... . " " " " " 304
COURT
Between buildings ....................................................... 504 (c), 1206
Definition ....... . . 404
Minimum width . " " " " " 1206
Used as exit .. . 3301 (b), 3311
COVERED MALLS .......... . . . 5601
COVERINGS
Forexteriorwalls,weatherprotection................................................. .. 1707
For exterior wood stud walls .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...................... 2516 (g)
For fire protection . . .................................. . 4303, 4304, 4305
Forroofs.. ........... ............. .. Chapter32
CURB
Allowed in alley . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... 4502
For skylights .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . .. 3404, 5207
CURTAIN, PROSCENIUM .. . .. ........................... 608, 3903 (d)
CURTAIN BOARDS, smoke venting. " " " .. " " " " " " " " ". " . " " " . " ".". 3206(f)
D
DAMPERS, FIREPLACE ..... .. 3707(i)
DAMPPROOFING FOUNDATION WALLS .. .. 1707(d)
DEAD LOAD
Definition ............ . " " 2302
894
1988 EDITION INDEX
DEFLECTION CRITERIA
General ...... . . ..... 2307
Interior walls .. . . ..... 2309
Steel. .............................. . . .. 2710
DEMOLITION ............. . .. .... 203,4409
DEPARTMENT
Creat1on of ............... . . ............................. M1
DEPTH OF FOUNDATIONS
Affects excavations ............ . .. ... 2903
Governed by frost line ....... . . . 2907 (a)
Governed by soil conditions . 2905
DESIGN
Aluminum ............ . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 2803
Concrete ............ . .. .................................. Chapter26
Footings and foundations ......................................... Chapter29
General .................. .. .. ........................ Chapter23
Load and resistance factor design ............. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............ 2723
Masonry .. .. .. . .. ......... . . .... Chapter24
Must be approved by bu1ld1ng off1c1al. . . . . .. . 303
Plast1c, steel . . . . . . . ... . .. .. .. .. . . 2721
Retaining walls ..................... . .. ........ 2308 (b)
Structural steel ..... . . ...... Chapter27
Walls ........ .. .. ...... 2309,2310
Wood .. . . . Chapter25
DETECTORS (see SMOKE DETECTORS)
DIAPHRAGM, WOOD
Blocked, definition .. . .. ...... 2502
Definition .......... . .. . 2502
Design .................. .. .. 2513
Sub, definition ............. . .. ...... 2502
DIMENSIONS
Unit masonry, defined ..... . 2401 (b)
DISPERSAL AREA, SAFE .. .. ..... 3319 (k), 3323
DISTANCE
Between buildings............. . .. .. 504
To exits ............. . . 3303 (d)
DOORS
Construction for fire-resistive rating .... .. 4306
Corridor.... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ . .. ........ 3305 (h)
Exit .............................................. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. ........... 3304
Are-resistive, classification, design, hanging. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4306
Rre-resistive, when required (see under OCCUPANCY
and TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
For fire separations ....... . .. ......... 503
For high-rise buildings . . . ... .. . 1807 (h) and 0)
For motion picture machine booths . . . . . . .................. . .. .................. 4003
For smokeproof enclosures. .. ............... 3310 (f) and (g)
General requirements . .. .. .. .. . . . .. . . 3304,4306
Glass ............ . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5406
Louvers prohibited .............. .. ................. . ........... 3305 (h)
May not project over public property . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. ....... 4507
Power-operated ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3304 (g)
Shower ........................ . .. ....................... 5406,5407
Special egress-control devices .. . ................. 3304 (e)
DORMITORY
Definition . 405
DOWNSPOUT
For marquees . .. .. 4505(f)
For roofs, general ....... 3207
DRAFT STOPS ...... . 2516 (f), 3205 (b)
DRAINAGE
Around buildings . . . 2905 (f), 2907 (d) 5, 3207
............... Appendix 7012
~~r~d.ed sit~·.·.·. .. .. . . . . . . .. .. .. . . 3207
DRAWINGS (see PLANS)
895
DRESSING ROOMS (Stages)

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . 3903 (b)
Exits. . ................ . 3903 (f)
Location. 3903 (b)
OR/FT. BUILDING .. .. ... 2312 (e) 8
DRINKING FOUNTAIN, REQUIRED ... 511 (c), 605
DROPPED CEILINGS
Des1gn. ... 2304, Tables Nos. 23-8, 23-P
General. . ..... Chapter42
Height. 1207
Installation. 4701 (e), 4704
DRY CLEANING PLANTS (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE). 901
DRYWALL (see GYPSUM WALLBOARD)
DUCTS (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)

For ventilation of motion picture booths ........... . 4005
DUMBWAITER ........ . Chapter 51
Construction of walls. 1706,5102
DUTIES
g: ~~if~~~fo~ftgi~f~(see ~~~o
Of special1nspector. . .
8i.iiLDING 'oi=.FICIAL).
. ......... .
204
202
306(c)
DWELLING
Classified as Group A Occupancy . .. ...... 1201
Definition . 405
Efficiency units. 406, 1208
DWELLING CODE, ONE AND TWO FAMILY . . Appendix Chapter 12
E
E-OCCUPANCIES. .. Chapter 8, 3319
EARTHQUAKES (see also LATERAL FORCE PROVISIONS)
Anchorage of chimneys . .. ... 3704 (c)
Earthquake recording instruments . . . . Appendix 2326
General . ........... . .. .. .. 2312
Seismic considerations for high·rise buildings .. 1807 (c) and (k)
EAVES
Projection 504 (a) and (b)
Construction . 1710
EDUCATIONAL USES . 701,801
EGRESS (see Chapter 33)

ELECTRIC WELDING (see WELDING)
ELEVATORS. . ......... . . ... Chapter 51 and Appendix Chapter 51

Emergency operation and communication . 5103
Enclosures. . ......... . .. .. .. .. .. .. 5102
For high-rise buildings . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1807(h)
Loads. . ..... Tables Nos. 23-8, 23-J
Stretcher requirements .. 5103(e)
Venting .... 5104
ELEVATOR SHAFTS (see VERTICAL OPENINGS)
EMERGENCY EXITS
General. . .... Chapter33
Residential escape or rescue . .. .. 1204
ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS (see also OCCUPANCY,

TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION, STAIRS and EXITS)
Construction requirements 503 (c), 1706
Fire resistance required .......... . ......... 1701, 1706
For atria.. . ............ . .. ........ 1715(c)
For open parking garages . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 709Ul
For stairs and ramps. . .................................................. 3309
Requ1red "06" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1209, 1706, 3309, 4305
896
1988 EDITION INDEX
Smokeproof enclosure ...... . 3310

Through occupancy separations. 503 (c)
ENCLOSURE WALLS (see WALLS)
ENERGY, conservation in buildings. Appendix Chapter 53
ENTRANCE TO BUILDINGS .... . .603, 803. 3301 (e)
ENTRY, right of . 202 (c)
ESCALATORS (see ELEVATORS)

Enclosure .. 1706
EXCAVATIONS (see also GRADING)
Definitions ..... ...... ...... AppendiX 7005
General details. . ... 2901, 2902, 2903, Appendix Chapter 70
Protection ........... . . ....... 2903 (b), 4407, Appendix Chapter 70
Water to be removed .. 2605 (a)
EXHAUST VENTILATION (see VENTILATION)
EXISTING BUILDINGS
Additions, alterations, repairs .. 104(b)
Application of code .. 103,104
Definition .. 403
High rise .. . ... Appendix Chapter 1, Division II
Historic. 104(f)
Load tests ........ 2620
Nonconforming existing buildings .. Appendix Chapter 1
EXISTING OCCUPANCY, continued use ... 104 (c)
EXITS
Definition . 3301 (b)
Court. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . . 3301 (b), 3311
Facilities .............. . "04" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1204, Chapter 33
For amusement structures. 604 (b)
For atna ......... . 1715 (c), (d) and (e)
For covered mall .. 5604
For fallout shelters. . ... Appendix 5705
For helistops . 710
For malls. . .... 5604
For mezzanines. 1716
For open parking garage 709 (g)
General requirements .. Chapter33
Horizontal . 3301 (b), 3308
Illumination for . . .. 3313,3314
Number required, existing buildings. Appendix 111 (a)
Number required, new buildings. 3303
Obstruction prohibited . ...... 3301 (c)
Panic hardware required 3317 (d), 3318 (b), 3319 (j), 3321 (f)
Passageway . . 3301 (b), 3312
Reviewing stands . . ........ . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .... 3323
Special requirements, occupancies . 709 (g), 1715 (d), 3317,3318,3319,3320,
3321' 3322, 3323. 3324
Stage .. 3903(f)
Widtn. 3303 (b)
EXIT LIGHTS. 3313,3314
EXPANSIVE SOILS
Classification ... 2904
Investigation report. 2905 (d)
Slap-on-grade design .. 2907 (e)
EXPIRATION OF PERMIT .. . 303(d)
EXPLOSION VENTING .... 910
EXPLOSIVES, storage, handling, use or sale 901
EXTERIOR EXIT BALCONY . .. 3301 (b), 3305 (a)
EXTERIOR OPENING, PROTECTION REQUIRED

Because of location on property ............................................. . 504(b)
Because of type of construction (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
For boiler rooms ... . 608. 808 and 1 008
When near exits . ... . 3306 (1), 3311 (d)
897
EXTERIOR STAIRWAYS . ... . .................... 3306, Appendix 111 (d)

EXTERIOR WALLS
C6W5.'rliCtion (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY, TYPES
OF CONSTRUCTION, and WALLS)
Delinition ..... . . ......... 424
Coverings..... . ......... . 1707,2516 (g)
F
FABRICATOR, APPROVED. . ..... 306 (g), 402, Chapter 50
FACTORIES
Occupancy classification ........... 701,901
FALLOUT SHELTERS .. Appendix Chapter 57
FAMILY, definition ......................... . . .. 407
FEES
Additional fee required. . ............. 303 (d), 304 (e)
For building permits .... . .................. 304
Plan checking .. . ........... 304 (c), Appendix 7007 (b)
Refund ..... .
Reinspection ... ... ..... .. .. ... .;g54(~!
FENCES
Around school grounds ................ . . 3319 (k)
Classified ... . ... 1101
Design in seismic zones . ..... Table No. 23-P
For construction purposes ... ........................ . ............ 4407(c)
FIBERBOARD .. ... . . ........... 2514,2516 (g), 2517 (g)
FILMS, FLAMMABLE . . . . 3322 (b), 4001, Chapter 48
FINAL APPROVAL . ... . .......... 305(e)
FINAL INSPECTION. ... 305 (e) and 307 (c)
FINISH RATING
Required ....... . ... Chapter42
FIRE ALARMS
For high-rise buildings. 1807 (d), (e) and (f)
Required ..... . . .... 809,909,1009,1211
FIRE ASSEMBLY
Definition ......... . .. 4306 (b)
General requirements . ......... 4306
Occupancy requirements . ................ 503,505
FIREBRICK
Definition ..... . ................................ 3702
For chimney lining ... . . ....................... 3703 (d)
For fireplaces ....... . . .................................. 3707 (c)
FIRE CHIEF (see CHIEF OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT)
FIRE DAMPERS .......... . ................... 4306 0)
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS . .... . 1210,1807
FIRE DEPARTMENT
........... . . . 3807, Appendix 3807
~~~~~ :~r,~r~=~b~ifo~ i_ntets : : : : : : : : : : : : : : . ............ . .. 1807(f)
FIRE ESCAPES (see EXTERIOR STAIRWAYS)

FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Apartment buildings .... ............... 3802 (hl
Areas increased by . . ...... 506(c
Automatic, requirements ..... . . .. 3801 (d
Automatic, where required ...... . . . . ........................ 3802
Basement pipe inlets, where required ... . ....................... Appendix 3807
For alternate to one-hour . ........... . ... 508
For atrium. . ....... ....... .... 1715
. .· .· ..· ::::.:.:. ·:.:::.::: :::: :::.180l ~~
6
For high-rise buildings ..
For mall ..... .
For occupancy groups. ..07" sections of Chapters 6-10; 1210 (b)
898
1988 EDITION INDEX
FIREPLACES, CONSTRUCTION OF. .

:_ . :
~~}~p:::~~~~:~~~;~-: ~::. ~ ~.:: ~.::. ~:.::.:.: ~.::::::::. ~
......................
. . ·_: . . . . . . . :::::;:~ . ..... 3707
FIRE-PROTECTED PASSAGEWAYS
For smokeproof enclosures .. . .. 3310
FIRE PROTECTION (see also TYPES Of CONSTRUCTION)

For buildings under construction ............................................ . . ...... 3806
For spray booths (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) ........................... . . ...... 503(a)
Requirements, detailed ..................................................... . . .. Chapter43
FIRE PUMPS, for standpipe supply ................................ . . ... 3806 (c) and (d)
FIRE RATINGS
For area separations .................................................. . . ... 505(e)
For materials ....................... . Chapter43
For occupancy separations . . .................. . . .. 503(d)
FIRE RESISTANCE (see also FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS)
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................... . .. 407
Of area separation walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................................... . ........ 505
Of buildings.. . . . . . . . . . . ........................................ . . Table No. 17-A
Of exterior walls. . . . . . .. .......................... . . . . . 504
Of materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. Chapter 43
Of occupancy separations . . . . . . . ............................................ 503 (c) and (d)
FIRE-RESISTIVE STANDARDS
Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4305
Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . 4306 fj)
Doors, windows and shutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... . 4306
Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. . . . . . . . . . . . 4305
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... Chapter 43
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4302
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . 4304
Protection of structural members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4303
Roof coverings...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3203 (e), 4307
Walls.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 504 (b), 4304
FIRE-RETARDANT ROOFS
Construction .............. . . . 3203
Required .............. . . .. 3203
FIRE-RETARDANT WOOD ................. 407, 1705 (b) and (d), 1801, 1901, 2003,2103,2504 (c), 4203
FIRE SEPARATION
Required for areas ....................................................... 505(e), 702(b), 1002(b)
Required for occupancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
FIRE STATIONS . ......... . . ... 701
FIRESTOPPING
Between chimneys and wooden construction .............................................. 3707 (m)
Between stories ........................................................................ 2516 (f)
Between wood sleepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804, 1904
Exterior wood veneer walls.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... 1705 (d~
~c;o~~~~:n-.;;cc,r.;.ir~ciiori:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::: ~mH)

Furred interior finishes. . . . . . . ............................................. . ...... 4203
Of attic spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2516 (f)
FIRE WARNING SYSTEM (see also SMOKE DETECTORS and FIRE ALARMS)
In dwelling units ............................................................. . . 1210,1211
:~ ~~~:~~~~~~cc~panc;; .· ::: .· .· .·.· ..... ::::::::::::::::::::::::: ·············
. ... 1210,1211
.... 909
FLAG POLES ON BUILDINGS .... .............................................. 3601 (d)
FLAME, OPEN, prohib~ed ................. . . ...... 908
FLAME SPREAD . . . ................ . . ......................... Chapter42
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
Handling, definition.. . ............... ..................................... . ...... 409
In occupancy ~roups ................................. "'08"' sections of Chapters 6-8; 1008, 1104, 1213
~~:,:;i~~i~~in_g._us~~~-·-~le::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~g1
899
FLASHING 1707 (b), 3208 (c)

FLAT SLAB ...... 2611,2613
FLOOR AREA
Definition ............... . . .. 407
Limited (see OCCUPANCY). 505,506
FLOOR CONSTRUCTION
Concrete. ................. . . Chapter26
Rre-resist1ve .............. 503 (c), 4305
Framing ..... . 2106 (c) and (e), 2516 (e), 2517 (d)
Heavy timber . . . . . . . . ... 2106 (c) and (e)
Insulating matenal, general ......................... 1713
••••••••••••'2ios.(hi. 2si ·S~11716

5
6((1l
Insulating matenal under lloonng
Laminated
Mezzanines . ................ .
Motion picture machine booths .. . ............. 4002
Plank flooring. . ........... 2517 (e)
Plywood ..... . . ....... 2517(e)
Stages. ........... . ....... 3903
Steel joists ......... . ............... . ... 2715
Two-way floor system ............ 2613
Water closet ..... . . . 510(b)
'Mlod joists ........ . . 2506 (h), 2516 (c), 2517 (d)
Wood sleepers ..... . 1804,1904
Wood trusses ..... 2510(f)
FLOOR FILL, required 1804,1904
FLOOR LEVELS
For Group A Occupancies ... . . ............... 602,603
Changes in elevation .... . 3301 (d), 3304 (i), 3305 (~. 3315 (h)
FLOOR LOADS
Assumed live ........... 2303,2304
Definitions . . .. 2302
General ... 2304
FLOOR OPENINGS
Enclosures of, when required (see VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
For atria ............ . .......... . 1715
General... . ... 1703,4305
In stages. construction .. . 3903
FLUES (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Area required ..... . .. 3703 (e), 3707 (i)
Lining for chimneys. . . 3703 (d)
Shafts for gas vents ........ 1706
FLY GALLERIES
Construction . ......... 3903 (e)
Design loads. Table No. 23-Ei
FOAM PLASTICS
General .......... . 1712
Insulation, definition . .. ... 407
Trim. 1705(e)
FOOTING
Bleacher ....... '' 2907(i)
Concrete, design. 2615, 2902, 2907
Definition .. .. ...... 407
Design, general. ... '2907
Grillage. . ..... . 2907 (h)
Minimum requirements for bearing walls . ... . 2907 (b)
Stepped ...... .. 2907(c)
Under sidewalk ....... . .. ......... 4503
FOLDING AND TELESCOPING SEATING . .. 3324
FOLDING PARTITIONS . .. ...... 1705(c)
FORMS
For concrete construction .... 2606
May be removed ..... . ................ 2606 (b)
FOUNDATION
....... 2615
gg~~;~~~ii~~s~H~weci (see TYPEs oF ci::ir\isTRuci"ioN) .
900
19~8 EDITION INDEX
Dampproof walls.. 1707 (d)

Design . . .............. 2902, 2907
Excavations. . . . ............... . ....... 2903
Rloting design. . 2907
Rlrretaining wall.. . . . ........................ ................. . 2308 (b)
Inspection required. ................. ........... . .......... 305
Lateral pressure allowed . ................. ........... . .. 2906
Liability of adjoining property. . ............................ . .......... 2903 (b)
May project beyond property line .......... 4503
Openings in wall for ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 2516 (c)
Owner's liability. . . 2903 (b)
Piles. ............ . ............... 2908, 2909
Plates. ................ . . 2516 (c), 2517,2907 (f)
Sills. ..................... ................... . .... 2516 (c), 2517, 2907 (f)
Stepped in Type V buildings ....... 2907 (c)
Wood.. . . ............ . ............... 2907 (a)
FRAME BUILDINGS ....... . . ... 2201
FRAME INSPECTION, required. . ... 305
FRAMES
Braced.............................. ........... . ....... 2312 (b), 2721
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2312 (b)
Eccentric braced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. 2722
Unbraced . . . . . . . . .............. . ................. 2721
FRAMEWORK OF BUILDINGS (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION). 1702
FRAMING
Around chimneys .................................... 3703 (c)
Of wood construction (see WOOD)
FRONTAGE REQUIRED .. . ..................... 603,803
FRONT OF LOT, definition .... 407
FROST
Depth ol foundation ....................... . . ... 2907 (a)
Protection of concrete . . ... 2605 (f)
FURNACES (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Central heating plant definition ........... . . .. 404
FURRING
For interior finish .............. . . ........... 4203
Rlr plaster or gypsum wallboard . . 4703 (b), 4704 (b)
Of ceiling.... .. 1207
Of stucco reinforcement. .............. . . ........... 4706
Requirements in wood-frame construction .... 2516(f)
FUSIBLE LINKS
Rlr doors, automobile ramp enclosures ....... 906
Rlr lire doors .. . 4306 (b) and (f)
Rlr stage ventilators . . .. . ....... 3903 (c)
Rlr vents supplying air backstage .. . ... 3903 (d)
G
GARAGE, OPEN PARKING. 709
GARAGE, PRIVATE
Carport. 1101
Classified. 1101
Definition ............... . . .......... 408
Floor surface. 1105
GARAGE, PUBLIC
Classified . .. 701
Definition .......... . . .... 408
Open parking garage . . .. 709
Ramps ...... . . .. 906
Repair ................... . . ...... 901
Separations required .. 503
Storage .......... . . .......... 701
Ventilation required 705, 709 (k), 905
GASOLINE SERVICE STATIONS . . .... 701,705
901
GENERATING SYSTEMS FOR HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS 1807(i)

GIRDERS
Construction details ....... . ............... ........................... 2106(g)
Rre protection ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ....... 1708
Loads reduced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2306
Steel ... . ................... .. ............................ 2707
Wood ... . . ......... 2516 (c) and (m). 2517 (c)
GLASS AND GLAZING ..... . ..................... Chapter 54
GLASS BLOCK MASONRY ................. 2402 (a) 6, 2407 (i)
GLASS RAILINGS (see GUARDRAIL, Glass)
GLAZING . ................................................................... 5204, 5404, 5406 (a)
GLAZING, SLOPED ................................................................... Chapter 34
GRADE (see also GRADING)
Ground level, definition ..................................................................... 408
GRADING (earth).. . . . .................... Appendix Chapter 70
Bonds .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. Appendix 7008
g:~~i:~~~~ovisi~·~s .·.· .·. ·.· ·.·.·:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::. :::: .' .':::::.' Appen~rf~08\~ jgg~
Hazardous conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 7004
Permits. . . . . . ....................... . .. Appendix 7003, 7006, 7007, 7008
Plans. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . Appendix 7006
Supervised grading... ................... . ................. Appendix 7014
GRADING (lumber)
By machine .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .............................. 2504 (a)
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . ............................ 2502
Identification . . . ................ . ........................................... 2505
Light framing .............................. 2504
Planks. . ............................................................... . .. 2504
Stress . . . ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2504
GRANDSTANDS ..... . ....................... 602,3323
GREENHOUSE, roofs .. .. ............. 2311 (h), 3403,5212
GRIDIRONS
Construction ................................................. 3903 (e)
GROUT ........... 2402,2403,2404 (c), 2618 (q)
GROUTED MASONRY .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .... 2404(1)
GUARDRAIL
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... . ........ 408
Design.. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . ........................................... Table No. 23-B
For folding and telescoping seating ...................................................... 3324 (d) 6
For grandstands and bleachers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3323 (e) 7
For open parking garages . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 709 (c~
For pedestrian protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................... . 4407 (b
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5406 (
Required, general. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . . 1711
GUEST, definition .... .. .................................................... 408
GUEST ROOM, definition . . . . . . . . ....................... . ... 408
GUNITE (see SHOTCRETE and PNEUMATICALLY PLACED PLASTER)
GUTTERS
~~~~~d~=~~ap,:;.·~~~bsirucii~~s::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~~8~
GYMNASIUMS
General............ ..................... . .................................... 601
Live loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2304
Special construction. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ............. 609, 1804, 1904
GYPSUM
Concrete ...................... . ...... 2627
Plaster for fire-resistive purposes .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 4302
Plaster lath ...... . .. ............. 4701' 4702, 4705
Wallboard . 4711,4714
Working stresses .. ..... 2627
902
1988 EDITION INDEX
GYPSUM, REINFORCED
General requirements .... . . ......... 2627
Special inspection ................. . 306(a)
H
H-OCCUPANCIES ..... . Chapter9
HABITABLE ROOM
Definition ............................ . . .... 409
Minimum requirements for . .......... . 1207
HANDICAPPED, REQUIREMENTS FOR
Access to building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . . 3301 (e), 3304 (i)
Access to building uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214, Table No. 33-A
Access to toiletfacilities ........................................................... 511 (a) and (b~
Changes in floor elevation ....................................... 3301 (d), 3304 (i), 3305 (f), 3315 (h
fj
Handrails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3306
Landings ...................................................................... 3304 fj), 3306 (g
Ramps............................... . ........................................ 3307
Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 511 (d)
Water closet height.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 511 (a)
Water fountains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 511 (c)
HANDLING
Definition .... .... 409
HANDRAIL
Construction . .. ... ...... .. ....... . ......... . . .... ... . . 3306 fj)
Design.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table No 23-B, 2308 (a), 3306 fjl
Forramps.............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3307 (e
Measunng stair clear width . ..... . . . . . 3306 (b
Required for stairways.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 3306 fj)
HANGARS, AIRCRAFT
Allowable area ................................. . 505, 506, 702, 902
Classified ...................................... . . ...... 701,901
Ventilating equipment ...... . .................. 705,905
HANGERS, JOIST ................. . . ..... 2510 (e), 2516 fj)
HARDBOARD .............................................. 2502 (a), 2505, 2516 (g), 2517 (g)
HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS ..................................................... . . ..... 203
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS LISTED

Physical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table No. 9-A
Chemical and health ............................................................... Table No. 9-B
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT REPORT ................ . 901 (f)
HAZARDOUS OCCUPANCIES
Defined........................................................ . .. . .. 901
General ................................................................ . . Chapter9
Moderately hazardous (see Groups B-1, 2, 3) .................................. . . . 701
Nonhazardous (see Group B-4) ................................................ . . . 701
Exits ....................................................................... . 3320
HEADERS
Headroom for stairways .......... . . ......................................... 3306 (f) and (p)
Joist, support required .. ............. ............ . . 2517(d)
Over opening in stud partitions ....... . .................. ............ . . 2517(g)
HEADROOM (see also CEILING)
·.· .· .·. ·io2 (tii."7~~~~i'\ ~~~ ~gl
For stairways ........................... .
In garages ................. .
HEARTH FOR FIREPLACE ... . . .......... 3707 (k) and (I)
HEALTH HAZARD .... . ....... 409, Table No. 9-B
HEATING (see also UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
Required . . . . ................... . ..... 1212
HEAT VENTING
Smoke and heat ............................................................... . ........ 3206
HEAVY-TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
(see TYPE IV BUILDINGS, Chapter 21) ..... . . . 2106
903
HEIGHT
Additional for roof structures 507,3601
Awnmgs .... 4506
Buildings .. .. . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . 507
Ceilings ............... 1207
Defmition . .. . 409
Marquees above sidewalk. 4505
01 buildings ........... . . 409,507
Of masonry walls (see WALLS)
Permanent projections over property line . . ............. 4501
Towers or spires. . . 507,3602
Types I, II. Iff, IV and V. .. ...... 507
Veneered walls. .. ................ 1705 (d), Chapter 30
HELIPORT/HELISTOPS
Classification . . ............... ' 701,901
Definition . .. ...... 409
Destgn ............ . .. .... 2308 (c)
General requirements 710
HIGHLY TOXIC MATERIAL, definition ............ . 409
HIGH-RISE, EXISTING . Appendix Chapter 1, Division 2
HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS. 1807
HISTORIC BUILDINGS . 104(1)
HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK OR TILE (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)

HOLLOW MASONRY
Un1ts. . .... 2401 (b), 2402 (b)
Walls. 2407
HORIZONTAL EXITS
Defmition .. 3301 (b)
General requirements . .. . 3308
Signs for. .. . 3314
HOSE, as equipment for standpipe. . .. 3801 (c) and (d)
HOSE CONNECTIONS
To standptpes 3801 (a), (c) and (d), 3805
HOSPITALS
Ex1ts .. .. .... 3321
General. Chapter 10
L1ve loads. 2304
Spnnklers. . 3802 (g)
HOTELS
Classified. 1201
Defmit1on. .. ....... 409
Exist1ng, nonconforming . Appendix Chapter 1
Fire·exltngutshing system . 3802 (h)
Live loads. 2304
I-OCCUPANCIES . Chapter 10
ILLUMINATION
For exits. ... 3313
INFORMATION ON PLANS 302(d)
INNER COURT WALLS (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
INSPECTION
Construction (Architect/Engineer) .. 302 (c)
Final, required . 305(d)
For change of occupancy. .. 307
General. .. ....... 305
Grading ........... . Appendix 7014
Matenal for prefabncation . 5006
904
1988 EDITION INDEX
Of foundation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 2905

Of prefabricated construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 5006
Of wallboard ................................................................... 305 (e), 4701 (b)
~~~~~i~~;d ·. ·. ·.... . . . . . . . . . ............................................ 305 (e), 4701 (b)
···········································-~
Special .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 306
INSULATION
Floor .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. 1705 (g)
For energy conservation . . ................ . ....................... Appendix Chapter 53
~~rf~~!~P,mitaiic)ns: ::. .. .................. · ·........
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
1
.. · 713 <bl
.. ......... 1713
Roof .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 3208 (d)
INTERIOR FINISH
Application of materials .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . 4203
Classification of materials . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . 4202
Flame spread of.. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . .... 4202, 4204
In atria. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 1715 (h)
Occupancy requirements . . . . . . . . . ................................................. 4204
Of plastic . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . Chapter 52
INTERIOR TRIM .............................................................. 1705 (e), 4201,4203
INTERIOR WALLS (see WALLS)
INTERCONNECTION
Pile ... . ... 2908 (c)
INTERPRETATION OF CODE
By Board of Appeals .... . .. .......... 204
By building official ... . .. ..... 202
J
JAILS...................................... . .. ............................... Chapter 10
JOINTS, CONSTRUCTION, in concrete ..................................................... 2606 (d)
JOIST HANGERS . .... . .. ............ 2510 (e), 2516 0)
JOISTS
Ceiling, dead load . . . . .............. . Table No. 23-B
Concrete . . . . . . . ......... 2608 (I)
Fire protection .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. ................. 4303
Steel .................................................................................... 2715
V\\:Jod............. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... 2506,2517 (d)
JURISDICTION, definition .................................................................... 411
K
KEENE'S CEMENT, specifications ........ . .. Chapter60
L
LABELS
Fire doors ...................... . ... 4306
Roofing ... . .. ..... 3208
Windows .......................... . .. 4306
LACING ... .. .. 2715
LADDERS
Used for exit from equipment .. ...... 3306 (a), 3322 (a)
LAMINATED
Floors.. .. 2106 (h), 2511,2516 (I)
Timber, glued ........ . .............. 2511
LANDING OF STAIRS .. . ... 3306 (g)
LATERAL FORCE PROVISIONS . . .................... 2311,2312,2515
905
LATH
Are-resistive ....... 4302
Gypsum .... . . . 4705,4706
Inspection ... . . .. 305(e)
Metal. . 4705,4706
LAVATORIES
Installation ..................... 511 (b)
Required. . . 605,705,805,1205 (b), 1208
LIABILITY. . ... 202 (f), 305 (a)
LIBRARIES
General ... . ...... 601,801
Live loads. . ..... 2304
LIGHT
For exits ................. . . ................. 3313,3314
For occupancy groups ....... . . ..................... ""05" sections of Chapters 6·1 0, 12
LIGHT-STEEL CONSTRUCTION .... ........... . ... 2701
LIME
For mortar ........... . . ... 2402 (b), Table No. 24-A
Proportions for plaster .. . ................... 4707,4708
Specifications. 2402 (b) 3
LINING
Of chimneys (masonry) ....... . . .. 3703 (d)
Of chimneys (metal) .......... . . ... 3706
Of fireplaces ............................................................. . 3707 (c)
LINTEL
Definition .......... . . .. 413
LIQUIDS (see also FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS)
Definition .... 413
LIQUID STORAGE ROOM
Definition ............. . . ...................................................... ~3
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ . . . 901 (d)
LIQUID STORAGE WAREHOUSE
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................ . . ..... .413
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . .......... . . ...901 (e)
LIVE LOADS
Concentrated ...... . ................... 2304 (c)
Definition ........... . ........... . ........... 2302
Floor ........................... . ................. . ......................... 2304
Reductions allowed .. . ................................. . ... 2306
Required to be posted .. ........................................ . .... 2304 (e)
Roofs ................ . ............. ........................ . ......... 2305
Special considerations ....... . ............... ..................... . .. 2303, 2304, 2305
Unit, for certain occupancies ... . ........... . ....... 2304
LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN ...... 2723
LOADING PLATFORM ...... . . ....... 1705(f)
LOADS (see DEAD, FLOOR, LIVE, ROOF, SEISMIC, WIND)
LOCATION ON PROPERTY
Fills ................................ . ............... . . Appendix 701 0
General requirements ........................ . .................. . ............. 504
Occupancy groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. . . . . . . . . ""03" sections of Chapters 6·12
Open parking garages ............ . . 709(f)
LOCKS ON DOORS, PROHIBITED .... . . .. 3304 (c), 3317,3318,3319, 3321
LODGES (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
LODGING HOUSES
Definition .......................... . ....... 413
Occupancy classification .. . .... 1201
LOT LINES (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY)
LOT SURVEY............ . ............. . ..................................... 305(a)
LUMBER (see WOOD). . ...................... Chapter25
906
1988 EDITION INDEX
M
M-OCCUPANCIES ... Chapter 11, Appendix Chapter 11
MAINTENANCE
Of buildinQS .......... . .. . 104(d)
Of protective devices .. . 4408 (a)
MALLS .... . .................. 5601
MARQUEES
Defined .. . . 414
General requirements ........ 4505
Live load Table No. 23-A
MASONRY
Adobe . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .............................. 2407 (i) 6
Anchorage.. . . . . . . . . . ....... 2310, 2407 (b) and (e), 2409 (e)
Arches and lintels.. . . ................ . ............. 2407 (d) 2
Area of hollow units. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .......... 2401 (b)
Bearing walls ...................... 2407, 2408, 2409, 2411
Bed joints ............ 2401 (b), 2404 (d), 2407 (b) 5 and (d), 2407 (h) 4 H
Bolts. . ... 2406 (h), 2407 (i) 4 and (i) 6 B, Tables Nos. 24-E, I and J
Brick .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . ... 2402 (b)
Cast stone. . . .. 2402 (b) 6
Cavity walls ..... 2407 (b)
Cement. . . .... 2402 (b) 2
Chimneys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 3704
Cold weather protection.. .. .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .... 2404 (c)
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2401 (b), 2407 (b) and (h), 2408 (b), 2409 (b)
Combined with wood . . . . . ... 2515
Composite construction. . ............ . ....... 241 0
Concentrated loads.. . . . . . . . .. 2406 (c), 2407 (c), 2409 (b)
Concrete units . . . . . . . . . . 2402 (b) 5
Construction joint. . . . . . ........... . . 2404 (f)
Construction requirements ............ ........... . 2404
Corbeling .. .. .. .. ............ 2408 (e)
Definition . . ............. . ............ 414
Design...... . ... 2407,2408, 2409,2410, 2411,2412
Dimensions . . . . . . . ................ 2401 (b)
Flexural stresses.. ............ . ..... 2406, 2407 (i), Table No. 24-H
Glass block ........... 2402 (a) 6, 2407 (i)
Glazed units. . . . .. 2402 (b) 4
Grout . . . . ........... 2403, 2404 (c)
Grouted . . .. .. .. . .. ............. 2404 (f)
Grouted, reinforced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 2409
~~Ft~~;;:,;,;.;,; ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ··. ·. ·. ·. ·. · ·. ·.. ·. ·. ·24tci'fZ,
High-lift grout construction ... 2404 (f)
Hollow units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. 2402 (b)
Joint reinforcement . . . ... 2402 (b) 10,2404 (i)
Lime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2402 (b), Table No. 24-A
Low-lift grout construction. . . . . ........... 2404 (f)
Materials ............ . .. 2402
Members carrying.. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. ..................... 1708
Mortar ............... 2403, 2404, 2405 (b), 2407 (h) and Table No. 24-A
Nonbearing walls. . . 2407 (c)
Prism testing . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. ........................... 2405
Pipes embedded. . ... 2407 (g)
Quality control. . . . .... . ....... 2405
Reinforcement... . . .......... . .. 2402 (b) 10, 2404 (e), 2406 (d), 2406 (j)
Shear wall, strength design.... . ................ 2412
Slender wall design .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. 2411
Special inspection.. . ........... . ................. 306 (a), 2406 (c)
Stack bond........ .. ..... 2407 (b), (e) and (h), 2416 (I)
Stone... . . . . . ... . . 2402 (b) 6
Supports must be fire protected . . . . . . . . ............. ...... 1708
Tests .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. 2405, 2406 (i)
Thickness of walls. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . ... 2407
Tile, structural. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. ........ 2402 (b) 4
Unburned clay. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. ................. 2402 (b) 6, 2407 (i) 6
Unreinforced... .... . ...................... 2408 (b) and (c)
~~~;,~ ;:see"~i~n ~ith .' .' .' .................... ·.' .' ·.' · 24o6.' 24o7: 2~1ri8. 2469; ;-~t,i~~ N~:o~j~j~~~
MASONRY VENEER . . ............... 2515 (a), Chapter 30
907
MATERIALS
Alternates ................. . 105
Standards for .. . ................................ Chapter60
MECHANICAL VENTILATION (see VENTILATION)
MENTAL HOSPITALS ..................................... Chapter 10
METAL
As lath (see METAL OR WIRE LATH)
Roof covering ................................ 3208
METAL FRAME BUILDINGS (See TYPE II One-hour
and Type 11-N buildings)
METAL OR WIRE LATH
For exterior and interior plastering . ............................. . ............... 4705,4706
For fire-resistive construction . . ................. 4302
For floors ..... . . ............... 4704
For partitions .. . . .... 4703
METHODS OF CALCULATIONS . . ..... 2303
METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
Alternates .................. . 105
MEZZANINE OR MEZZANINE FLOOR

Definition of ........... . . ........................... ~4
General .. . ...................................... 1716
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
Purpose of code .... 102
MIX
For masonry mortars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2403, Table No. 24-A
For concrete ..................................................... 2604 (c), (d), (e) and (f); 2605 (b)
MIXED OCCUPANCIES ... 503
MIXED TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION . 1701
MONASTERIES. 1201
MORTAR
For masonry construction. .. 2403, 2404, 2405 (b), 2407 (h),
Table No. 24-A
MOTELS (see also HOTELS), definition. .............................. ~4
MOTION PICTURE MACHINE BOOTHS

Construction and design ..... 4002
Exits. . ... . .. 4003
For Groups A, E, and I Occupancies .. . . 608, 808, 1008
Height............ . ................ . ..... 4002
Ports and openings .... . . ..................... 4004
Projection booths ... . . ............... 4005
Regulation of equipment .. . ...... 4006
Sanitary requirements . . 4007
Sprinkler requirements . . . ................ 3802 (b)
Ventilation .... . 4005
MOTION PICTURE THEATERS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
MOVED BUILDINGS .... 104(e)
MOVING OF BUILDINGS
Compliance .. 104(e)
Permit required ... 301
MOVING WALKS. Chapter 51
MUSEUMS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
N
NAILS ..... ..... 2510 (c), Table No. 25-Q
NEW MATERIALS OR METHODS . 105
908
1988 EDITION INDEX
NONBEARING WALLS (see WALLS)

NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL, delinition ............. . . ....... 415
NONCONFORMING BUILDINGS 104, Appendix Chapter 1
NOTICES
For inspections by bUilding official . . ... 305
Of approval required. . ....... 305
Of condemnation .. . ................ 203
Of excavation or fill. . ...... 2903
Of violations . . ................... 202(e)
NURSERIES .. 1001
NURSING HOMES . . ... Chapter 10
0
OBSERVATION, STRUCTURAL . . .... 306(1)
OBSTRUCTIONS PROHIBITED
At exits. . ..................... . . .................... 3301 (c), 4306 (I)
In exit courts .......... . . 3311
In street gutter .. . . 4403
OCCUPANCY
Certificate. . . . . . .................... . . ...... 307
Chan~e in use. . ...................... . . ... 307 (b), 502
Classified. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 501,503
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . .. 416
Existing. . ................................................. . ............. 104 (c)
In occupancy groups . . ....................................... . ''01" sections of Chapters 6-12
Mixed. .. .. 503
Separations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 503, Appendix 116
Temporary, allowed for construction purposes. . 4402
Violation .................. . .. ....... 202 (e), 4501
When not specifically mentioned in code ................... . .................. . .. ~1
OCCUPANT LOAD
Determination of . . .......... 3302 (a)
Posting of .... .. ..... 3302 (c)
OFFICE BUILDINGS
General.. . 701
Live loads. .. . 2304
OIL
Storage (in occupancy) ............................................ 708, 808, 908, 1008, 1104, 1213
OPENINGS
Exterior, to be protected when (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY
In area separation walls ................. . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. . . 505(e)
In atria. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. ...... 1715(cl
In ceilings .......................... . .. ..... 4303 (b
In floors. . 4305 (a) and (b
In occupancy separations . . . 503(c)
In walls ............... . .. ............ 4304
Protection of, fire assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 4306
Vertical, to be protected when (see VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
OPEN PARKING GARAGE . .. .......... 709
ORIEL WINDOW
Definition .......... . .. .......... 416
Projection ............................. . ..... 4504
ORPHANAGES ............... . 1001
OVERCROWDING PROHIBITED ................... . 3302 (b)
OVERTURNING MOMENT
For earthquake calculations . .. ... 2312(e)
For wind calculations .. 2311 (e)
General. ................ . .. ' .. 2303 (b)
OXIDIZERS. .. .... 901
909
p
PAINTING
Of aluminum alloy parts . 2804 (d)
Of structural steel ....................... . . .... 2720
Spray (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) ....... 503(a)
PAINT SHOPS .... 802 (d), 901
PAINT STORAGE .. . 901
PAINT STORES. 701,901
PANEL STRIPS, definition .. . . 2613(c)
PANIC HARDWARE
Definition ..................... . ............ . ... 3301 (b)
In Groups A. E and I Occupancies .. . .......... 3317,3318,3319,3321
PAPER, waterproof, required. 1707, 4706 (d)
PARAPET WALL
Definition ............... 424
Required 1709
PARKING GARAGE, OPEN . . 709
PARTICLEBOARD . ........ . . .............. 2502 (a), 2505, 2513 (d), 2516 (g), 2517 (e), (f) and (g)
PARTITIONS
Bearing, noncombustible ..... . . .... 2408,2409,2411,2614,2618,2622
Are-resistive . . . . . .................... . ........... . .. 4304
Folding, portable or movable .. .
For frame construction .......................... . ············· :m~lg!
General (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Temporary ........ . 1705(c)
Unprotected materials allowed .............. . 1705(b)
PASSAGEWAYS
As discharge for exit courts ................................................................. 3312
As horizontal exits. . . . ............ ................ . .. 3308
As stairway enclosures ............ ......................... 3309 (d)
For smokeproof enclosures. . ... 3310 (c)
To be sprinklered ... 3802
PATIO
Covers. 5211, Appendix 4901
Design ........ 2305, Appendix 4902
PEDESTAL
Concrete, definition .......... 2602
Concrete, design ... . ... 2615,2622
Footings. . . Appendix 4904
PEDESTRIANS, PROTECTION OF . . Chapter44

PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS ... 509
PENTHOUSE
General requirements .... . 3601
PERMIT
Application.. ............................. 302 (a)
Definition .................. ........... . ............. 417
Does not permit violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 303 (c)
Expiration. ............... . .......... 303 (d)
Fees . . . ............ . .. 304
For alteration . . . . . ........... . . . . 301
For change of occupancy. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... . .... 307
~;~~~~i~~:nJ~,;,i>.vaiiersar1ciwa:li<s::: ·.:::: ·.: ·.::::::: ·.: ·.: ·.:: ·:::: ·.: ·.:::::::: ··.:: ·,;.pp.endix·5m
For grading. . ..................... . .............. Appendix 7006
For moving . . . . . . . . . . ......................... ................ . .. 301
For new buildings or structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
For use or occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . 307
Information on plans and specifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 (d)
Plans required.. ............................... . . 302 (b)
Revocation of. . ............ .................... . . . . . 303 (e)
Suspension of . . .... 303 (e)
~-. ·······-~
910
1988 EDITION INDEX
When reqUired. 301

Work without . . .............. 304(e)
PERSON, definition . 417
PETROLEUM STORAGE. 901
PEWS, width 3302 (a), 3315,3316
PILES, general requirements .. ............................. 2908,2909
Interconnection . . .......................... 2908 (c)
PLAN REVIEW
Fee for. 304 (c) and (d), Appendix 7007 (a)
Required. 303(a)
PLANK AND BEAM CONSTRUCTION ............ . . .. 2106,2516 (I) and (m), 2517 (e) 3
PLANS (see also PLAN REVIEWING)
Alteration of ............... . 303(a)
Approved by building official .. 303(a)
For demolishing ........... . . ............... 4409
Hazardous materials management . ........... 901 (f)
Information on ..... . 302 (a) and (d)
Kept on building site . . ............. . . 303(b)
Required for permit, when 302(b)
Retention of .......... . 303 (b)
Shall bear name of whom . 302 (a) and (b)
PLASTER AND PLASTERING
Agwegate ...... . . ......... 4702
Gelling, suspended 4701 (e), 4704
Definitions .... . .. 4701 (d)
Exterior, application .......... . 4708
Exterior, backing .... . ............... 4708
Exterior, corner beads. . ... 4701 (d), 4705 (b), 4706 (e)
Fire-resistive . .... 4303, 4304, 4305
Inspection of ........... . ................ 305 (e), 4701 (b)
Interior .... ................... . ........ 4707
lathing. . 4705,4706
Materials ......................... . 4702
Materials for fire-resistive construction . . .......................... 4303, 4304, 4305
Over masonry . ... 4707 (e), 4708 (h), 4709 (f)
Pneumatically placed. . ............... . . ............... 4710
Portland cement, definition 4701 (d)
To resist horizontal forces .... 4714
PLASTERBOARD, GYPSUM
For fire resistance, ceilings .. ......... 4305
For fire resistance, partitions . . . ....... 4304
Inspection . .. 305 (e), 4701 (b)
PLASTIC DESIGN. ......... 2721

PLASTICS, light-transmitting (also see FOAM PLASTICS)
Approval for use ........... ................ 5201 (b)
Approved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5202
Area limitations. 5204, 5205, 5206, 5207, 5208, 5209
Awnings . 5211
Canopies . . . . ........... . ...... 5213
Classification ............... 5201 (c), 5202
Definitions.. . ............ 416,5202
Design . ........... ............ ........... 5203
Fastenings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. 5203 (b)
Foam. . . . . . . . ............ 1712
Glazing of opemngs . ........... 5204, 5207, 5406
Greenhouses.. . . . ......... 5212
Identification . . . . . . ..... 5201 (c)
Installation . . .. . .......................... 5203
Interior finish and trim.......... 1705 (e), 4201,4203, Chapter 52
Light diffusers in ceilin9s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 5208
Light diffusers in electncal fixtures. 5209
Patio covers. . . . . . 5211
Roof panels . 5206
Skylights. ......... 5207
Structural requirements. . 5203
Trim. .............. 1705 (e), 4201, 4203
Veneer . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 3007
Wall panels, exterior. 5205
Wall panels, interior . . 4203, 4204, 5210
911
PLATE
Foundation . " " 2907(fl
In bearing partitions .. "2517(b
PLATE GIRDERS. ". 2707
PLATFORM, ENCLOSED
Definition ..... " 417,3901
Requirements .... . " 3902
Special provisions ............. . ". 602(b)
PLATFORM, LOADING ... . " " " " 1705(f)
PLYWOOD
Diaphragms ...... . 2513 (a) and (c)
For exterior sheathing. " " . " " ". " . " " " " ". 2516(g)
For roof sheathing .. " ". " " " " . " . " " " " 2516 (i), 2517 (h)
For subflooring .. . ............................................... 2517(e)
PNEUMATICALLY PLACED PLASTER . ". 4710
PORTABLE PARTITIONS . ... 1705(c)
PORTLAND CEMENT
Compressive strength .. 2602, 2604 (d)
For plaster ....... . ................... . 4701
In masonry mortar . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2403 and Table No. 24-A
Specifications ..... . .... 2402 (b) 2, 2603 (c)
POSTING
Certificate of Occupancy ................ 307(e)
Live loads. .. ............ . 2304(e)
Room capacity .. . ... 3302 (c)
Unsafe building . " " 203
POWER PLANTS ............ .. ".". 70t
Generating system for atria ......... . 1715(g)
Generating system for exit illumination ..... . 3313(b)
Generating system for exit si9ns ......... . . . 3314(d)
Generating system for high-nse buildings .. 1807(i)
PREFABRICATED CONSTRUCTION. . ... Chapter 50
PREMISES IDENTIFICATION . . 513
PRESSURE TREATED
Treated wood (see WOOD, Treated)
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE . " " . " " ".". " " " " .. 2618
PRINTING PLANTS .. " " 701
PRISONS .. .. Chapter 10
PRIVATE GARAGE (see GARAGE, PRIVATE)
PROJECTIONS FROM BUILDING (see TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Awnings . . . . . .............. ............ . ........ 4506
Below sidewalk . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 4503
Cornices . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. 171 0, 4504
Eaves.. ............ . .......... 504,1710
In alleys ........... 4502
Marquees. ............ ............. .. .. 4505
Plastic awnin~s. .............. 5211
Plastic canop1es .. .. .. .. .. . 5213
PROSCENIUM
Sprinklers required . . .... 3802 (c)
Wall. 3901' 3903 (d)
Wall openings allowed . 3903 (d)
PROSCENIUM CURTAIN
Required. .. 608, 3903 (d)
PUBLIC GARAGE (see GARAGE, PUBLIC)
PUBLIC PROPERTY
Use during construction ............... Chapter 44
PUBLIC WAY, definition . . .... 3301 (b)
PUMPING PLANTS. .. 701
912
1988 EDITION INDEX
Q
QUALITY AND DESIGN OF THE MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
Alum1num. Chapter28
Masonry ........... . Chapter 24
Reinforced concrete . Chapter26
Steel and iron . . Chapter27
Wood. Chapter25
R
R-OCCUPANCIES . . Chapter t2
RADIO TOWERS. 507. Table No. 23-H, 3602
RAFTERS (see ROOF CONSTRUCTION)
RAIL AROUND OPENINGS. 1711, Table No. 23-B
RAILINGS (see GUARDRAIL and HANDRAIL)
RAILWAY STATIONS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)
RAMPS
Construction . 3307 (I)
Doors in automobile enclosures 906
Enclosure. 3309
For hospitals and sanitariums . 3321 (e)
Gradient 3307 (c)
Landlnf!S. . . . . . . . . . . 3307 (d)
Rev18W1ng stands, for . 3323 (e) 6
Substituted lor stairways . 3307
When required . 3301 (d), 3321 (e), Table No. 33-A
RECORD CARD OF INSPECTIONS. 305(b)
REDUCTIONS
Of live loads. 2306
Of strength lor length of concrete compression members .. . .... 2610(k)and(l)
REFRIGERATION (see UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
REFUSE CHUTES. 1706 (c). 3802 (b)
REINFORCED CONCRETE (see also CONCRETE)
Against ground .. 2607 (h)
Analysis and design . . . . . . . . 2608
Anchorage of reinforcement .. 2612
Bars, bent. 2607 (b). (c) and (d)
Beams, lateral support .. 2610(e)
Bending moments, transfer to columns . 2611 (m)
Bond 2612
Columns ........................ . 2610
Composite design and constructiol"l. 2617
Compression load. . ... . ..... 2609
Computations, flexural . 2608, 2610
Control of crack1ng .. 2607 (m)
Cover of reinforcing .. 2607 (h), 4303
Deflect1on ... 2307, 2609 (I)
Design, methods ...................... . 2608 (b)
Ductne moment -resisting space frames .. 2625
Rre protection of (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION). 4303
Folded plates . 2619
Footings, design 2615,2902,2907
Footings, shear. 2615 (f) and (i)
Footings, thickness. 2615 (h)
Frame analysis . 2608 (d) and (e), 2625
Height and thickness, walls . 2614(c)
Joints and bearing for precast. 2616
Joists ............. . 2608 (I)
Lateral reinforcement . 2607 (k) and (I)
Load tests .. 2620 (d) and (e)
Materials, tests . 2603 (b)
Modulus of elasticity . 2608(1)
Placing of reinforcement ...... . . . 2607(1)
Plain reinforcement, definition . 2602
Precast wall panels. 2616(c)
Prestressed . 2618
913
Reinforcement (see also REINFORCEMENT). . ............. . 2607

Seismic zone designs . . ............ . . ............ 2312,2625
Shear and torsion . . .......... . .............. 2611
Shells.............. . ............. . 2619
Shear walls .. . ............................ 2611 (k)
Slab, opening. . .......... . . ..................... 2611 (1), 2613 (g)
Slab, reinforcement . . ...... 2613 (e) and (f)
Slab, shear ..................... . . . 2611 (d), (e), (f) and (I)
Slab, thickness of. .............. . . ... 2609(1)
Slabs, one-way . . ......... . 2609 (f), 2610 (g)
Slabs, systems . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . 2613
Strength and serviceability requirements . 2609
T-beams .............. . 2608 (k)
Tests...... . .............. . 2604
Torsion.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. . 2611
Transmission of column load. . ..................... . . 2610(n)
Walls. ........... . ............. . . ... 2614, 2616 (c)
Web reinforcement, anchorage . 2607, 2612 (n)
Web reinforcement, des1gn . . . . . . ... 2607,2611
Work1ng stress des1~n ·(alternate method) 2626
Yield strength, def1n111on . . . 2602
REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE

Design 2627 (b)
General. 2406 (a), 2627 (a)
Special inspection . 306(a)
Stresses. . ................... 2627 (c)
REINFORCEMENT
Anchorage. ............. 2612
Bends. ............... 2612
Bond ..... . . .......... 2612
Chimneys. 3704 (c)
Cleaning .. 2607 (e)
Desi~n .. . 2608
Deta1ls ... . . ........... 2607
End regions ............. . . 2618(n)
Fabric ......... . 2603 (I), 2607, 2612 (k), (s) and (I)
Rre protection .......... . . .......... 4303
For columns, reinforced concrete . .... 2607,2610,2612
For masonry . ............ 2402 (b) 10,2404 (e) and (i),
2406 (d), 2407 (e) and (h), 2409 (b) and (e)
For prestressed concrete. 2618
For stucco. . .... .... 4706 (e)
ForT-beams, reinforced concrete. . . 2608 (k)
For two-way slabs, reinforced concrete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . 2613
For web (diagonal tension), concrete. . ............ . 2611
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . ... 2603(1)
Hooks... . ............ . . .. 2607 (b)
Inspection, special . . ................. . 306(a)
Lateral. .. . ..... . ...... 2607 (k) and (I)
Minimum bend diameter, definition. ............ ........... 2607(c)
Minimum in flexural members . . ......... 2610(1)
Modulus of elasticity ....... . . ...... 2608(1)
Placing in reinforced concrete .................... . .... 2607(1)
Prestressing ..... ........................... 2618
Protection, in concrete. . ................ . . .. 2607 (h), 4303
Protection, in masonry. 2407 (f), 2409 (e), 4303
Shrinkage ........... . ................. ....... 2607 (m)
Spacing bars .
(s~ ~:d((t!
6
Splices, in concrete ... . ·. ·26i2.(a): (pj,-(q·): (r·):
Splices, in masonry ... . . ....................................... 2404 (h), 2409 (e)
Stress allowable unit .. ..................... . .... 2609
Temperature .. 2607 (m)
REINSPECTION
Maybe made. 305 (g), 602 (c)
REPAIR
Definition ................... 419
Garages. 901
May be required .. 203
Of existing buildings . ........ 104
Re-roofing ..... . . .......... Appendix Chapter 32
To historic buildings 104(1)
914
1988 EDITION INDEX
REPORTS
Hazardous storage or use. . ............. . ' ....... 901 (f)
Of Board of Appeals ................................................... . . .. 204
Of special inspector... , .. .. . 306 (C)
Of tests of concrete .. . .. .... 2604
Oftests, general ........... . 107
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON OCCUPANCY
Classification of all occupancies ......................................................... 501, 503
For Groups A through M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapters 6-12, Appendix Chapter 11
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
Classification of buildings. . . . . . . . ............... . .. ......... 1701,1702
For Type I through Type V buildings ................ . . ....... Chapters 17-22
RESIDENCES (see DWELLINGS)
RESISTING MOMENT, DEAD LOAD
For earthquake calculations ..... . .. ..... 2312(e)
For wind calculations .. 2311 (e)
General. ..... . . 2303 (b)
RESTAURANTS .. 601,701
RETAIL STORES . . 701
RETAINING WALLS
Definition ... 424
Design .. .. ..... 2308
REVIEWING STANDS
Classification ......... . .. . .. 601
Construction ............... . .. 602 (a) and (c)
General requirements .. .. .. 3323
REVOCATION OF CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY ......................... . . . 307(!)
REVOCATION OF PERMfT ..... . .. 303(e)
RIBBON, in frame construction .... ' 2517(d)
RIGHT OF ENTRY ..... . . . 202(c)
RISERS
For Class I standpipes . . . . . 3805 (c)
For Class II standpipes ........ . 3805 (d)
For Class Ill standpipes ...... . 3805 (e)
For stairways. .. .... 3306
RIVETS
General .. .. ........ . .. 2713
Holes, to be deducted .. .. ........ .. .. .. 2711
In aluminum . . . . . . . . . ............... . .... 2802 (c)
In connections. . . . . . ............................ . " ........ 2712
\/Vorking stresses ............................... . . 2702 (c)
ROOF CONSTRUCTION (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION and ROOF COVERING)

Access to attic spaces .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .... 3205 (a)
Access to roof . .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. . .. ... .. .. ................ 3306(o)
Camber . .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. ....................... 2305 (f)
Decks.. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 2106 (f) and (h)
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2305
Drainage.. . ..... 2305 (f), 3207
Flashing. . . 1707 (b), 3208 (c)
Framing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....... 2106 (d), 2517 (h)
General .. . .. .. .. . .. . 3201
Insulation... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ............ 1713,3208 (d)
Of marquee. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . . ........ 4505 (f)
Panels, of plastic.. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5206
Planking. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. 2517 (h)
Purlins.. . . . . 2517 (h)
Rafters........... .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 2517 (h)
Rafter ties. . ... 2517 (h)
Sheathing................. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. 2516(i), 2517(h)
Spaced sheathing... . . . . . . . 3208 (b)
ROOF COVERING (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
Application .. .. ........... . ..... 3208 (b)
Asbestos-cement shingles . .. ............. 3208
Asphalt shingles ................. . .. ......... 3208
915
~~~~~~~eci•.
. .... 3208
.... 3204
Clay tile ..... . .. .. 3208
Composition ... . .. .. 3208
Concrete tile . . 3208
Definitions .. . .. 3202
Fasteners for ....... . 3208 (d)
Fire-retardant, details ...... . .. .. 3204
Fire-retardant, required ... . . ..... 3203, Table No. 32-A
Flashing ..... . . 3208 (c)
Kind required .. . .. .. 3203
Metal. .... 3208
Nonrated ... .. .. 3204
Repairs. 104 (d), Appendix Chapter 32
Re-roofing . Appendix Chapter 32
Slate shingles .... .. .. 3208
Special purpose . , ................. 3204 (e)
Wires for ..... . .. Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 2
Wood shakes .. . 3208
Wood shingles. 3208
ROOF DESIGN. .. . 2305
ROOF DRAINAGE . . ... 2305 (f), 3207, 4505 (f)
ROOF OVERHANG . . ..... 504 (a) and (b), 1710
ROOF STRUCTURES .. .. . 3601
ROOM
Capacity ....... . . 3302 (c)
Oimens1ons ...... . 1207
Guest, definition .. 408
Habitable .......... . 1207
Habitable, definition . .. .. 409
RUNNING TRACKS (see GYMNASIUMS)
s
SAFEGUARDS, maintenance .. 104(d)
SALES ROOMS
For combustible goods ..... . . 701
For noncombustible goods . 701
SAND
For concrete. 2603 (d)
For mortar.. . 2402 (b)
For plaster . . 4702,4707, 4708
SAND-LIME BRICK (see BRICK, SAND-LIME)

SANITARIUMS. 1001
SANITATION . . ....... 510; "05" sections of Chapters 6-10, 12
SCHOOLS
Colleges .... 701
Exits .. . 3319
General requirements . 801-809
Live loads .. .. 2304
SCUTTLE
Access to roof space . 3205 (a)
Access to roof, when required .. ... 3306 (o)
Access to underfloor areas . . 2516(c)2
SEATING
Continental . ...... 3315,3316
Standard ... .. .... 3315,3316
SEATING CAPACITY (see OCCUPANT LOAD)

SEATS
Number of, to be posted. .......................... 3302 (c)
Spacing. . .......... 3315, 3316, 3323 (e), 3324 (d)
Width. . ...... 3302 (a), 3315, 3316, 3323 (e), 3324 (d)
916
1988 EDITION INDEX
SECURITY PROVISIONS (see also UNIFORM BUILDING SECURITY CODE)

Door latches. . . ............. . 3304 (c)
Door viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . 3305 (h)
Window grilles, bars and grates .. 1204
SEISMIC DESIGN . . ....... 2312
SELF-CLOSING DOOR
Attic partitions ....... . . .. 2516(f) 5
Automobile ramp enclosure .. . ........ 906
Basement stairways 1703, 3306 (h)
Corridors ... . 3305 (h), 4306 (f!
Exit enclosures . . ............ . . ......... 3309 (c
Exterior stairways .. . . .......... 3306 (I
Fire doors ............... . . ........... 4306 (b
Garage .................................. . 503(d)
Smokeproof enclosures. . . .................. . 3310(g)
SEMICONDUCTOR FACILITIES. . ............ 901

SEPARATION
Around buildings ... 506
Occupancy. . ............ . 503
Of areas ..................... . 505
Of areas for suspended ceilings .. . 2516(f)
Of buildings for seismic action . . .... 2312 (h) 2
Tenant 1202 (a), 5603 (e)
SERVICE STATIONS, GASOLINE (see GASOLINE SERVICE STATIONS)

SHAFT
Definition ...... . .. ...... 420
Enclosures . "06" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1209, 1706 (a) and (b)
SHALL, definition of. . .... 420
SHEAR
Horizontal . ............... 2312 (e), 2506 (c) and (d)
Masonry, stresses . . ..... . . ..... 2406 (c), 2407 (i), Table No. 24-H
Reinforced concrete, allowable stresses . . 2609(d)
Reinforced concrete, design .. .. .... . 2611
Structural steel.
Wall, definition ............ .
.... 2702.' 2708 (c) ~nd (d),}; 2d
1
(g!
Wood ........... . 2504
SHEATHING
Diaphragm .. ... 2513
Fiberboard . ..... 2514
Floor .. .... 2516 (h), 2517 (e)
Roof. . .......... 2516 (i), 2517 (h), 3203
Subfloor. . ......... 2517(e)
Wall. ........ 2516 (g), 2517 (g) 3
SHELLS (concrete) . . ...... 2619
SHINGLES AND SHAKES
As roof covering. ... 3204,3208
As siding .. . . 2516(g)
SHORING
Of adjoining foundations . 2903
SHOTCRETE
Rre-resistive standards . 4302 (e)
Requirements . . ...... 2621
SHOW WINDOWS . 1705(d)
SHUTTERS
For motion picture machine booths . 4004
Required for stage vent ducts. 3903
SIDEWALKS
Glass lights ..... . 3406
Live load for design. 2304
Railing required around . 3406
Required to be protected . 4407
Space under, may be occupied. 4503
Walkways. 4406
917
SIGNS (see also UNIFORM SIGN CODE)

For basement pipe inlets ..................... Appendix 3807
For exits. . .. 3314, Appendix 111 (e)
For fire doors. ............... . ..... 4306(1)
For live load .............................. . ........... . . 2304 (e)
For room capacity .............. . ..... 3302 (c)
For stairs ..... . . 3306 (q), 3314
For unsafe building . . ........ 203
Over public property. . .... 4501
SILL (see FOUNDATION, Plates)
SINK, KITCHEN. 1205 (b). 1208
SKYLIGHTS
General requirements (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) . . .. 3401, 3903 (c)
Plastic. .............. . ........... . . . 5207
SLAB
Gypsum ................................ . . . 2627
Minimum thickness, for fire~ resistive purposes ............... 4303,4305
Minimum thickness for floors ......... . 2608, 2609, 2611' 2623
Reinforced concrete (see CONCRETE)
SLATE, for roof covering ............ . . ....... 3208
SLEEPERS, WOOD
On floors. 1804,1904
SMOKE CONTROL
In atria. .. . .... 1715
In high-rise buildings............. . 1807(g)
In malls ............. . . 5603 (c)
SMOKE DAMPERS . . ........ 802 (b) 2, 1002 (b)
SMOKE DETECTORS
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................... . .. . 420
For doors ......................................... . . .... 4306 (b), 4306 (f)
For elevators .. . . ................ 5103
In atria ........ . ............... 1715 (b) and (c)
In dwelling units. ........... 1~0
In guest rooms .... ··············· 1~0
In high-rise buildings ........................... . 1807(d)
SMOKEPROOF ENCLOSURE, REQUIRED

Construction and design . . . ......... . . .. 3310
SMOKE VENTING
In Group H Occupancies . . ..... 3206
In high-rise buildings. 1807(g)
In one-story buildings. . ... 3206
Over stages .............................................. . . ... 3903
SNOW LOAD .................... . ....... 2305 (d), Appendix Chapter 23
SOIL
Bearin~. allowable .. . ....... 2906
Classification ..... .. 2904, 2312 (d)
Excavation and grading . .................... . . ................ Appendix Chapter 70
Investigation required .. . .. 2903, 2905, 2908
Tests required . .. ..... 2904
SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTORS .. . ................ 1714, 5214

SOLID MASONRY (see MASONRY)
SOLID MASONRY WALLS (see WALLS)
SOUND TRANSMISSION CONTROL . ........ Appendix Chapter 35
SPACE FRAME ........... . . ..... 2312,2625,2722
SPECIAL INSPECTOR . . . ....... 306 (b) and (c)
SPECIAL PURPOSE ROOF COVERING .. . 3204 (e)
SPECIFICATIONS, required for permit .. . ............................... 302(b)
SPIRES (see TOWERS)
918
1988 EDITION INDEX
SPLICES
Reinforcing steel. . . 2612
SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
Special inspection ............ .
Structural member protection .......................... .
SPRAY PAINTING
Construction requirements for booths (see UNIFORM FIRE CODE)
location on property. . . . . . . . . . . ......... . . ....... 903
Separation . . . . . . . . . ...................... . . ..... 503(a)
SPRINKLERS, AUTOMATIC (see FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS)
STADIUMS .............................. . . . 601

STAGE
Classification of occupancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 (b), 3903
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . ............................ . ...... 3901
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 39
Sprinklers required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. ............ . .. 3802 (c)
Standpipes required.. . . . ............ . ... 3805 (d)
Ventilation. . . . ........... . 605, 608, 3903
STAIRWAY
Access and arrangement.. . . . 3303 (c), 3305, 3306
Access to roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3306 (o)
Application to building, general (see GROUPS, OCCUPANCY
Basement......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1703.3306 (h)
Circular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3306 (e)
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805, 1905, 2004, 2104, 2204, Appendix 111
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................... 3301 (b)
Design, general. ............................................................ Table No. 23·A, 3306
Doors, leading to .......................................................................... 3304
Enclosures ............................................................................... 3309
Exterior .................................................. 3306 (I) and (n), Appendix 111 (b) and (d)
Firestopping (wood frame construction) .................................................... 2516 (f)
From fly gallery ......................................................................... 3903 (f)
~:~~~:~ i:i.;.;;.;ri.;.; ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. · ·. ·. ·· ·· · ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·. ·.. ·. ·. · . .. · · ·· · ·. ·. · ·. ·. ·. ·.. ·. ·3~~~6<~!
Helistops....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . ......... 710 (d)
Horizontal exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3308
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. 3306 (m), Appendix 111 (b) and 112
Landings, intermediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 3306 (g) and (i)
Lighting....................... ................................... . ... 3313,3314
Live loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2304
Number of exits required . . . . . ... ............... . ...... 3303
Numbering system ..................................................................... 3306 (q!
Obstructions prohibited ......................................................... 3301 (c), 3306 (b
Passageways as enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3309 (d
Protection for . . . . . . . . . .................. ....... 1706
Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ............ 1716, 3306 U) and (k)
Ramps may be substituted . . ................ ........... . .. 3307
Requirements, detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................................................. 3306
Reviewing stands, for ................................................................. 3323 (e) 6
Rise and run.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3306 (c)
Signs required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................ 3306 (q), 3314
Smokeproof enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . 331 0
Space under ........................................................... 3306 (m) and (n!, 3309 (f)
~r:~rooii~g·:::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: .3301·(·b .13Jg7<~!
~~~her~i~~~~ted : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ~~g~ l~!
STANDARDS, UNIFORM BUILDING CODE (U.B.C.) ............ . .... 422, Chapter 60
STANDPIPES
Class I, Class II and Class Ill standpipes, defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... 3801 (c)
Class I, Class II and Class Ill standpipes, design and construction.. . . . . . . ................... 3801 (d)
Class I, Class II and Class Ill standpipes, where required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. 3805
g~~~r~r~~~sgaraiie~ : : : : : : : ....... : : : : ·. : : : : : : : ·. : ·. : : :: : : : : : ·. : : : : : : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s~g~ l~!
STEEL, REINFORCING (see REINFORCEMENT)
919
STEEL, STRUCTURAL
Allowable unit stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2702
Beams and girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2707
Bearing plates and anchorage......................... . ..................... 2712 (h), 2718
Bolts ............................................................ 2702 (c), 2712,2713,2719,2721
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2725
Camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2716
Cast, allowable stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2702 (f)
g~:~~o~~~e~~~ign. ~pecif:cati~~~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: .... ::::: ~;n
Combined stresses........................................................................ 2703
Composite construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2708
Compression.......................................................... 2702, 2703, 2706, 2712 (h)
~~~<;:;~~~;~~;;;.::::::::::::::::::: . :::: . :::: . ::::::::::::::::::::::::: _2711:27.12.. _27~~or~i 1(g
Ductile moment-resisting space frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 2722
Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 2309
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .... 2717
Fabrication ....................................................................... 2720, 2721 (k)
Fire-protection (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION) ........................................ 4303
!~~~~~f~s:: . :·.: : ~ ~ ·~::: ·~ . :~ ~.: ~: ~ ·~ ~::: ~ ·: . ~:: . ~ . ·~ ··: ~ ·~ ~ ·:. ~ ~ ~:.:. ~:.: . :-~~t~
t~~~~ieel"ccirisir~ctio;;:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: m~
Load and resistance factor design . . . . . . . ............................................. 2723
Net sections, in computations ............................................................... 2711
Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2720
Piles. . . . . . . ................................................................... 2908, 2909
~:~~i;C: Ci.i5;9;,· :: · ·· ·· · ·: ::: :::::::::::::::::: :: ::: ::: :: ::::: ::::: :: :::::::: :: :::::::::: . J7~~
271
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2701
Racks ................................................................................... 2724
Reversal of stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2704
Rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ . ....... 2702 (c), 2712, 2713
Rotational restraint . . . . . . . . . ............................................... 2707 (k)
Spans .................................................................................. 2709
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 2707 (h)
Stability and slenderness ratio . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................. 2705
Standards for.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2701
Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................ 2707 (e)
Stresses, allowable unit. ................................................................... 2702
Tendon, definition ......................................................................... 2602
Tension members, net section .............................................................. 2711
Trusses, camber............................ ................... 2716 (b)
Welding.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 2702 (d) and (e), 2712 (i), 0) and (I); 2714
Working stresses, allowable . . ....................... . .. 2702
STIFFENERS, STEEL . .............. . . ........................... 2707(e)
STIRRUPS REQUIRED
Anchorage of. .................... . . 2612(n)
Concrete .... . .. 2611
STONE
Cast ......... . .............................. ........... . ..... 2402(b) 6
Masonry .. . ........................................ 2402 (b) 6
Veneer .. . ................................................................. 3002
STOP ORDERS ... . . 202(d)
STORAGE
Combustibles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 701
Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... . .................. Chapter 48
Flammables ........................................ "'08"' sections of Chapters 6-10; 901, 1104, 1213
s:~ft~~~~a;d goocis : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ~i
In connection with stores ................................................................. 702 (b)
Live loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 2304
Materials in streets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......................................... 4401, 4403
Noncombustibles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 701
~~~~~al-.haza~d good_s. ::::::::.:: ·: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: "2724."i"abies N.os ..23:s:2~~~
STOREROOMs-GROUPS A AND E OCCUPANCIES
Fire protection .............................. . 3903 (b)
Flammable liquids, storage regulated . ... . . 606,606
Location .. 3903 (b)
920
1988 EDITION INDEX
STORES
Live loads .............................................................. . . ....... 2304
Retail and wholesale ................................................... . . 701
STORY, definition ........................................................ . . .. 420
STORY, FIRST, definition ........................................ . . ........ 420
STREET
Center line ............................................................. . . ..... 504(a)
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................... . . ...... 420
Temporary use ..... . . . 4402
STRENGTH DESIGN ............................................................. 2412,2608,2609
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS (see QUALITY AND DESIGN
OF THE MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION)
STRESSED SKIN PANELS ............... . . ........... 2512
STRESSES (see WORKING STRESSES, ALLOW\BLE)
STRUCTURAL FRAME ... ......................... 305 (e); "02" sections of Chapters 17-22; 1703, 2309
STRUCTURE, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 420
STUCCO (see PLASTERING)
STUDS INWOOD CONSTRUCTION............................. . ....... 2516 (d), 2517 (g)
SURVEY REQUIRED . .................................................... . . ... 305(a)
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
Design ..................................................... 4701 (e), 4704, Tables Nos. 23-8, 23-J
Draft stops for ................................... 2516 (1), 4203
In dwellings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
Sprinkler system for... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... . .. 3801 (d), 4203
SUSPENSION OF PERMIT ..... . . ..... 303(e)
T
TANKS
For storage of flammable liquids (see also UNIFORM FIRE CODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 901, 1104
Horizontal forces, design ............................................................. 2311,2312
Roof structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3601
Water.......................................................................... 1101
T-BEAMS IN REINFORCED CONCRETE ..................................... . ... 2608 (k)
TELEPHONES
For handicapped ........ . . 511 (d)
In high-rise buildings .. . 1807(f)
TELESCOPING SEATING ................................................... . . .. 3324
TEMPORARY BUILDINGS . ................................... . . ... 104(e)
TEMPORARY PARTITIONS . ...................................... . 1705(c)
TERMITE PROVISIONS ......... . . . 2516(c)
TERRACING ........................................................... . . .. Appendix 7012
TESTS
Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2604
Concrete aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2603 (d)
Fire-resistive materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 4302
~=r~r~~rs ·preiab;icaii<;~
2405 24
·i,; .· .· .· .· .· .· .· .· .· .· .·::::::::::::: .- .-:: .-: .-: .-::: .- .- .- .- .- .- .- .- .- .- .- _. .- .- .- .- .- _.. · · · ·~gJ~
May be required.............................................................. 107,5002, 5003
New materials and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Piles, safe bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2908
Prefabricated construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... Chapter 50
Soil bearing.. . . . . . . . ................................. . ..... 2905
To classify mortars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2402 (b)
Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................ . ... 2722 0)
TEXTILE WALL COVERINGS . . . . . . ............................... . ....... 4205
921
THEATERS (see ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS)

TILE
Ceramic ................................................................ . . ..... 3005(e)
Of clay (see CLAY ROOF TILE)
Of concrete (see CONCRETE BLOCKS)
TIMBER (see WOOD)
TOILET ROOM . . ..... 5tt
TOWERS (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION)
General requirements ..... . . ............................... 507,3602
Horizontal forces, design .. ... . ................... 23t1, 2312
Setbacks . . ............... . . ............................ ~2~
Wind pressure. . .......................................... 2311
TRAP DOORS, STAGES ........ 3903 (a)
TRAVEL DISTANCE ............ . .................... 3303 (d)
TRIM .. . .......... t705(e)
TRUSSES
Fire protection of (see also TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION).. . . . . . ........................ 4303
Steel frame. . ................................................. . ...... 2716 (b)
TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION (see also TYPE I, II, Ill, IV or V BUILDINGS)
General........... . ................. . . ............ Chapter 17
Wood frame........ . ............... . . ..................... 25t6
TYPE I BUILDINGS ................. . ..... Chapter 18
TYPE II BUILDINGS .... . .. Chapter 19
TYPE Ill BUILDINGS .. . ... Chapter20
TYPE IV BUILDINGS . .. Chapter21
TYPE V BUILDINGS .......................... . ................. Chapter22
u
U.B.C. STANDARDS (see UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARDS)
UNBURNED CLAY MASONRY ................................................. 2402 (b) 6, 2407 (i) 6
UNIFORM ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (see UNIFORM ADMINISTRATIVE CODE)
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARDS .................................... . ... Chapter SO
UNIT STRESSES (see WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE)
UNLAWFUL TO OCCUPY, when .. . ......................... 203,307
UNLIMITED AREA ... .......................... 506(b)
UNSAFE BUILDINGS . . ....... 203
URINALS
Required .. . ........................... 805
Walls around . . . 510(b)
USABLE SPACE UNDER FLOOR .......................... . . .................... 1703
USE OF BUILDING (see also OCCUPANCY)
Chan9e . . . ....................... 307 (b), 502
Classrfied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . ....... "01" sections of Chapters 6-12
Not specifically mentioned ................................................................... 501
Mixed. ............... . ................................ 503
Permitted when . ................ . ......... 307 (a)
UTILITIES
Protected ............................... 4405
v
VALIDITY
Of permits. ........................ 303(c)
922
VALUATION
Definition ................... . " " " . 423
Of buildings by building official . ". 304(b)
VALUE, definition ..... . " " " 423
VENEER
Adhered ........... . " " " . 3005
Anchored ......... . " " " " 3006
Definition ........... . " " " " " " " " " . 3002
Design ........ . " " . " " " " 3004
Of plastic ......... . " " " " " 3007
Supported by wood .... . .. .............. 2515(a)
Walls of (see WALLS)
VENTILATION
Attic ............. . .. ...... 3205 (c)
Automobile repair .. " " " " " " " " " " " . 905
Automobile storage ......... . "" " " " " " . 705,1104
Motion picture machine booths. . .......... " . " " " " " ". " " . " " 4005
Occupancy groups ..... . "05" sections of Chapters 6-10; 1104, 1205 (c)
Open parking garages .. . " " " " " " 709(k)
Over stage ........... .. " " " " " " " " 3903
Under wood floor. .. ........... 2516 (c)
VENTS
For explosion venting ........... . " " " " " " 910
For motion picture machine booths " " . 4005
~~ ~~~~eg:~~~S:ai ·. ·.. ·. ·. ·.. " " .. 705,905
" " " . 3206
For stages ........ . " " 3903
VENTS, HEATING (see UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE)
VENT SHAFTS (see VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF)
VERTICAL OPENINGS, ENCLOSURE OF
Construction requirements . " " " " " " " . 1706
Existing buildings ............ . . .... Appendix Section 112
Fire assemblies for protection of .. " " " " . 4306
For atria............. . . ........................ 1715 (c)
For occupancy groups . . "06" sections of Chapters 6-1 0; 1209
When required .... " " 1706,3309
w
WALLBOARD, GYPSUM. . .......... 4711,4714
WALLS
Anchoring ....... .
Area separation ..... .
. .....••••. 2310: 231.2 (h) 2.H: 240~ (~) ~~g l:!
Basement, enclosure .. . " ... " ... " ........ " " " . " " " . " " " " . " . 1703
Bearing ........ . . •••• 424: 2407, 2408, 2409,.2411' 2517 (.g): 2.6.1.4, ~;~~ l~!
Bracing ........... ..
Concentrated loads .. . ... 2406 (c), 2407 (c), 2409 (b), 2614 (c)
Concrete, plain ....... . " " . " " 2602, 2622
Coverings ............ . " " " . 2516(g)
Cripple ............ .. " " " . 2517(g)
Curtain (see Non bearing, below)
Definition ...... . . " " . " . 424
Design ............ . " " " " " . 2309
Exterior ........... . """ "". . 424
Faced, definition ...... . "". " " " " " " ". 424
Are-resistive .... . 1803, 1903, 2003, 2103, 2203, 4304
Foundation ............. . "" """" " " " " " " . 2907
Framing ............ . " " " " .. 2516(d),2517(g)
Fronting on streets or yards. " " " " " " " " " . 1705 (d)
Height allowed ....... . . . " . " " " " . " 2407, 2614, 2622
::::::: 424: 24o7' ic1: 26·1·4 icf:g~ l~!

Lintels ............. .
~~~~~~~~?o~~;&~: :: : :: : :: : " " " " . 3309

Of roof structures ...... . ... . ... 3601
Of smokeproof enclosures . . . ........... . " " " " " " " " " " . 3310
Openings ............ . . . "03" sections of Chapters 18-22
Parapet ................... . 1709
Partitions (see PARTITIONS)
923
Plain concrete . . . .. .. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. 2622

Protection of openings . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. . ........ 504
Reinforced concrete.. .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . 2614
Retaining (see RETAINING WALLS)
Seismic zone requirements. . . .......... .
Sheathing, when required ........ . ·.·: .·: .·. ·.· .· .· ..·.· .· .· .· ·.· .· .·: '25i:i,'2514·. ·2516 (9i. ~m ~~l
Solid masonry, fire-resistive rating .. .. .... " . " " 4304
Stone .......... .. " ... " " " . " ....... " " " " .... 2402 (b) 6
Thickness of masonry " .. " ... " " .. " " .... 2407
Veneered. . .......... Chapter 30
Water closet. ........................... . . .... 510 (b), 511 (a)
Water splash .... " " " .. 2516(k)
Wood studs .. . .. 2516 (d), 2517 (g)
WAREHOUSE
For storage ........................... . .. 701,901
Live load. " .. 2304
WATER
Accumulation on roof . . . . . . . ................. . " ... ". 2305 (1), 2710
Drainage around buildings .. . ..... 2905 (I), 2907 (d) 5, 3207 (e)
Drainage from roof ... . .. .... 3207
Fountains ..... ..... . . . 511 (c), 605
Heater, definition . ......... . .. 424
Removal from excavations .. .. ... 2605 (a)
Requirements for concrete .......... . .. ... 2603 !e)
Requirements for masonry .......... . .. ... 2402 b)
Retaining walls, design for .......... . .. ... 2308 b)
Supply for automatic sprinkler system . " " " .... 3801 (d)
Supply for standpipes. .. ..... 3801 (d)
WATER-CEMENT RATIO
Consistency required ..... . .. ..... 2604(e)
Control of proportions ... . .. ..... 2604 (e)
WATER CLOSET COMPARTMENTS AND SHOWERS

Fallout shelters .................. .. . ... Appendix 5708
Floors and walls of compartments ... . " .. " " " ". 510(b)
For handicapped. .. .. " ...... " " " " . " " .......... 510,511
For occupancies ... ... "05" sections of Chapters 6·10; 1205 (b), 1208
Separation required .. .. ...... 510(a)
Width of compartment ....... 511 (a)
WATER CLOSET HEIGHT .... 511 (a)
WATER PRESSURE
Retaining walls, design .. 2308 (b)
WEATHERBOARDING .. 2516(g)
WEATHER-EXPOSED SURFACES
Definition .. " ..... ". 424
WEATHER PROTECTION .. 1707, 2605 (f) and (g), 3005 (a), 3006 (a)
Wt:LDING
Allowable stresses. ... 2702; 2802 (a), (b) and (d)
General requirements. .. .... 2712,2714
Special inspection . ............... 306(a)
Standard for . ... 2701 (a), 2804 (e) and (I)
WIDTH
Aisles. ... " " " ....... 3315(b)
Corridors. 3305 (b), 3319 (e), 3321 (c)
Courts. . .. . 1206 (C), 3311 (b)
Entrance doors .. . . " " ... " " " ..... 3304(1)
Exit passageways. .. . " ....... 3312(b)
Rooms .. . . . 1207(cl
Ramps ........... . .. . . . . 3307 !b
.. : ·.: ·.: ·.: ·.::: ·33o6 (c·): (d), ·(~ ~n~ 0
Stairway landings .. 3
Stairway treads .
Stairways .. . . 3306 (b)
Walkway .. " " " 4406
Water closet.. .. ......... . . 511 (a)
Yards ..... . . 1206(b)
WIND
Design. " .... 2311
924
1988 EDITION INDEX
WINDOWS
Area limitations . 5403
Fire-resistive, design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4306 (g), (h) and (i)
For escape or rescue . ................. . .... 1204
For occupancy groups .. "05" sections of Chapters 6-10; 1205, 1206
Glazing support. . ........... 5404
Grilles, bars and grates over. 1204
Identification . . ............. 5402, 5406 (b)
Impact loads . ..... . . . ...... 5406
In Types I to V buildings . 1803, 1903, 2003, 2103, 2203
Louvered. . ....... 5405, 5406 (a)
Plastic. . .. 5204
Shower enclosures . 5406,5407
Skylights. Chapter 34, 5207
WIRE
For stucco reinforcing. . ..... 4706 (e)
For tieing roofing materials.. . . . . . Tables Nos. 32-D-1 and 2
Hangers for suspended ceilings .. . ....... 4704 (c)
Masonry joint reinforcement . .. 2402 (b) 10,2404 (i)
Ties for fire-resistive materials. . ..... 4303, 4305 (d)
Veneer, anchorage. . . 3003,3006
WIRED GLASS
In fire-resistive doors and windows . 4306 (g), (h) and (i)
In skylights ...................................... . 3402, 3403, 3405
Required by location (see LOCATION ON PROPERTY,
DOORS and WINDOWS)
WIRE MESH
For exterior lath . . . 4706
For interior lath . 4705
For skylights .... . .......... 3403
For stage ventilators . 3903 (c)
WIRING IN PLENUMS . .. 4305 (e)

WOOD
Allowable stresses . 2504
Anchors and ties. 2517
Beams and girders. 2506,2517 (c)
Beams and joists .. . ... 2506
Bolted connection . 2510 (b)
Bracing. 2517 (g)
Bridging ....... . 2517(g)
Clearance above grade . . .......... 2516(c)
Clearance from chimneys . . . . . . . . . . . . 3703 (c)
Columns or posts . . .. 2507, 2516 (c)
Combined stresses. 2508
Combined structurally with masonry or concrete. . ..... 2515
Compression at an an91e to grain ..... 2509
Compression perpendicular to gram . . 2506(f)
Concrete, in combination. 2515
Connections . . .............. 2510
Cutting and notching. . .. 2517 (d) and (g)
Deflection criteria . 2307
Diaphragms. 2513
Earth separation . 2516 (c)
Fiberboard, definition. . ..... 2502 (a), 2514
Fire-retardant . 407,1705,1801,1901
Floors, laminated . . 2516(1)
Form factors .. 2504
Foundations ... . .......... 2907 (a)
Foundat1on sills . 2516 (c), 2517 (b), 2907 (f)
Grade, definition . 2502 (a)
Glued built-up members, definition . . . 2502 (a), 2512
Glued construction . 2511
Glued-laminated timber, definition . . ....... 2502 (a)
Heavy-timber construction . .... . .. Chapter21, 2513
Horizontal members, framing details ... . ......... 2506
Horizontal shear. . . 2506 (c) and (d)
Joists .. . . 2517(d)
Joist hangers ... 2516())
Masonry, in combination . 2515
Masonry, supported . 2515(b)
Metal plate connectors . 2510(f)
Moisture service conditions. . ....... 2504
Nails. 2510 (c)
925
~~~~f:;~~~;,~~~~~)~~o~· ::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ~~~ l:l

Partitions, framing details . . . . .............................................. 2517 (g)
Piles...................... .. .................................................... 2909
Plywood................... .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .... 2502 (a), 2513 (c), 2516,2517
Plywood exterior covering.. . . ........................................... 2513 (c), 2516 (g)
Quality and design . . .. .. .. . .. ................................................. 2501
Rafters.. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. ............................................. 2517 (h)
Required sizes, determination .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ............................................. 2503
Roof framing.... . . . ............... . ................... 2506, 2517 (h)
Shear, horizontal . . . ................ . .................. 2506 (c) and (d)
Sheathing. .. ................................ 2513 (b), 2514,2516,2517
Siding . .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. ................................. 2516 (g)
Stressed skin panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................................. 2512
Structural glued-laminated timber. . . . .................................. 2502 (a), 2511
Stud walls, framing details ................................. 2516 (d) and (f), 2517 (g)
Subfloor............... . ............................................. 2516,2517(e)
Temperature effects . . . . . ............................................. 2504 (c) 9
Termite protection. .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. . . .. ................................... 2516 (c)
limber connections...... . ................................................... 2510
Treated .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... 1705,2502 (a), 2504 (c), 2516, 2909
Truss compression chords.. . . . . . . . . ................................. 2508 (d)
Unit stresses, decrease for exposure ........................................................ 2504
Ventilation, under-floor.. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. ........................... 2516 (c)
~~~h~r~~~~~!7~esista~~8-ta Clecay: Cleii~iii~~:: · · · ·::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::: ~~6~ l~l
WOOD-FRAME BUILDINGS (see TYPE V BUILDINGS)
WOODWORKING FACTORIES .. . . 901
WORKING STRESSES, ALLOWABLE
~~~~s~":.il;,;,.;ed i~r earthquake ·or wind i~rces .... : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ~~g~ l~l

Increase allowed, wood . . . . . . . . ................................... , ................. 2504
Masonry. . ... 2406,2407, 2408,2409, Tables Nos. 24-C and 24-H
Piles . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 2908, 2909
Plain concrete .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. ....... 2622 (d)
Reduction, wood.. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 2504
Reinforced concrete. . . .. . .. .. . . .. ................. 2626
Soil.. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. Table No. 29-B
Steel. .................................. 2702
Wood. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... 2504,2509,2511
WORKMANSHIP
Aluminum .. ......................... 2804
Inspection .... .. ............ 305 (e), 306 (a)
Structural steel .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....... 2720
Wood.. . .......... . .............................................. 2501 (b)
WORKSHOPS
Moderately hazardous ..... . . .. . .. .. ..... ... .. .. ........................... 701
Nonhazardous .. .. ........... 701
WRECKING (see DEMOLISHING)
X
NO REQUIREMENTS
y
YARD
Between buildings .. ............................. 504 (c), 1206
Definition . . ................................ 426
Minimum width . . ................................................... 1206
Required ...
To be maintained. ..:::::::::::: .............. :::::::::::: ........ :: ~8!l:l .. . 506
Used for area increases.
z
NO REQUIREMENTS
926

The 1988 Ubc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The 1988 Ubc

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The 1988 Ubc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNIFORM

Publication Date: May 1 , 1988

International Conference of Building Officials

PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.

CHAPTER 2. Organization and Enforcement

CHAPTER 3. Permits and Inspections

Part 11-Definitions and Abbreviations

Part Ill-Requirements Based on Occupancy

509. Pedestrian Walkways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CHAPTER 6. Requirements for Group A Occupancies

CHAPTER 7. Requirements for Group B Occupancies

CHAPTER 8. Requirements for Group E Occupancies

CHAPTER 9. Requirements for Group H Occupancies

CHAPTER 10. Requirements tor Group I Occupancies

CHAPTER 11. Requirements tor Group M Occupancies

CHAPTER 12. Requirements tor Group R Occupancies

CHAPTERS 13-16 (No Requirements)

Part IV-Requirements Based on Types of Construction

CHAPTER 18. Type I Fire-resistive Buildings

CHAPTER 19. Type II Buildings

CHAPTER 20. Type Ill Buildings

CHAPTER 21. Type IV Buildings

CHAPTER 22. Type V Buildings

Part V-Engineering Regulations-Quality and Design of the

CHAPTER 25. Wood

CHAPTER 26. Concrete

2606. Formwork, Embedded Pipes and Construction Joints... . . . 390

CHAPTER 27. Steel

CHAPTER 28. Aluminum

Part VI-Detailed Regulations

CHAPTER 30. Veneer

CHAPTER 31. (No Requirements)

CHAPTER 32. Roof Construction and Covering

CHAPTER 33. Exits

3317. Group A, Division I Occupancies .................... . 654

CHAPTER 34. Sloped Glazing and Skylights

CHAPTER 35. Sound Transmission Control (See Appendix

CHAPTER 36. Penthouses and Roof Structures

CHAPTER 37. Chimneys, Fireplaces and Barbecues

CHAPTER 38. Fire-extinguishing Systems

CHAPTER 39. Stages and Platforms

CHAPTER 40. Motion Picture Projection Rooms

4004. Projection Ports and Openings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

CHAPTER 41. (See Uniform Building Security Code'")

Part VII-Fire-resistive Standards for Fire Protection

CHAPTER 43. Fire-resistive Standards

Part VIII-Regulations for Use of Public Streets and

CHAPTER 45. Permanent Occupancy of Public Property

CHAPTER 46. (No Requirements)

Part IX-Wall and Ceiling Coverings

Part X-Special Subjects

CHAPTER 49. (No Requirements) (See Page 861-Appendlx)

CHAPTER 50. Prefabricated Construction

CHAPTER 51. Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving

CHAPTER 52. Light-transmitting Plastics

5211. Awnings and Patio Covers... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7R'i

C'r\"PTER 53. (See Appendix Chapter 53)

CHAPTER 54. Glass and Glazing

CHAPTER 55. (See Appendix Chapter 55)

CHAPTER 56. Covered Mall Buildings